(Unofficial translation)
CIVIL CODE OF THE REPUBLIC OF BELARUS December 7, 1998 No. 218-Z
(as amended up to Law of the Republic of Belarus No. 135-З of July 17, 2018)
Adopted by the Chamber of Representatives (October 28, 1998) Approved by the Council of Republic (November 19, 1998)
CONTENTS
SECTION I. GENERAL PROVISIONS SUBSECTION 1. BASIC PROVISIONS CHAPTER 1. Civil Legislation CHAPTER 2. Origin of Civil Rights and Duties, and Exercise and Defense of Civil Rights SUBSECTION 2. PERSONS CHAPTER 3. Citizens (Natural Persons) CHAPTER 4. Legal Persons § 1. Basic Provisions § 2. Economic Partnerships and Companies 1. General Provisions 2. General Partnership 3. Special Partnership 4. Limited Liability Company 5. Additional Liability Company 6. Joint-Stock Company 7. Subsidiary and Dependent Companies § 3. Production Cooperatives § 4. Unitary Enterprises § 5. Non-commercial Organizations § 5. State Associations CHAPTER 5. Participation of the Republic of Belarus and its Administrative Territorial Units in Relations Regulated by Civil Legislation SUBSECTION 3. OBJECTS OF CIVIL RIGHTS CHAPTER 6. General Provisions CHAPTER 7. Securities CHAPTER 8. Nonmaterial Benefits and Defense Thereof SUBSECTION 4. TRANSACTIONS AND REPRESENTATION CHAPTER 9. Transactions § 1. Concept, Types, and Forms of Transactions § 2. Invalidity of Transactions CHAPTER 10. Representation. Power of Attorney SUBSECTION 5. TERMS. LIMITATION PERIOD CHAPTER 11. Calculation of Terms CHAPTER 12. Limitation Period
SECTION II. RIGHT OF OWNERSHIP AND OTHER REAL RIGHTS CHAPTER 13. General Provisions CHAPTER 14. Acquisition of Right of Ownership CHAPTER 15. Termination of Right of Ownership CHAPTER 16. Common Ownership CHAPTER 17. Real Rights in Immovable Property CHAPTER 18. Right of Ownership and Other Real Rights in Dwelling Premises CHAPTER 19. Right of Economic Management, Right of Operative Administration CHAPTER 20. Defense of Right of Ownership and Other Real Rights SECTION III. GENERAL PART OF THE LEGISLATION OF OBLIGATIONS SUBSECTION 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS ON OBLIGATIONS CHAPTER 21. Concept of and Parties to Obligation CHAPTER 22. Performance of Obligations CHAPTER 23. Securing Performance of Obligations § 1. General Provisions § 2. Penalty § 3. Pledge § 4. Retention § 5. Suretyship § 6. Guarantee § 7. Deposit CHAPTER 24. Change of Persons in Obligation § 1. Transfer of Rights of Creditor to Another Person §2. Transfer of Debt CHAPTER 25. Liability for Violation of Obligations CHAPTER 26. Termination of Obligations SUBSECTION 2. GENERAL PROVISIONS ON CONTRACT CHAPTER 27. Concept and Conditions of Contract CHAPTER 28. Conclusion of Contract CHAPTER 29. Change and Dissolution of Contract SECTION IV. INDIVIDUAL TYPES OF OBLIGATION CHAPTER 30. Purchase-Sale § 1. General Provisions on Purchase-Sale § 2. Retail Purchase-Sale § 3. Delivery of Goods § 4. Delivery of Goods for State Needs § 5. Agricultural Procurement Contract § 6. Electric Power Supply § 7. Sale of Immovable Property § 8. Sale of Enterprise CHAPTER 31. Barter CHAPTER 32. Gift CHAPTER 33. Rent and Maintenance of Dependent for Life § 1. General Provisions on Rent and Maintenance of Dependent for Life § 2. Permanent Rent § 3. Rent for Life § 4. Maintenance of Dependent for Life CHAPTER 34. Lease § 1. General Provisions on Lease § 2. Rental § 3. Lease of Means of Transport 1. Lease of Means of Transport, With Provision of Services Relating to Driving and Technical Operation (Lease of Means of Transport with Crew)
2. Lease of Means of Transport Without Provision of Services Relating to Driving and Technical Operation (Lease of Means of Transport Without Crew) § 4. Lease of Caputal Constructions (Buildings, Structures), Isolated Premises or Parking Lots § 5. Lease of Enterprise CHAPTER 35. Rental of Dwelling Premise CHAPTER 36. Uncompensated Use CHAPTER 37. Independent Work § 1. General Provisions on Independent Work § 2. Domestic Independent Work § 3. Construction Independent Work § 4. Independent Work Contract for Fulfillment of Design and Survey Work § 5. [Excluded] CHAPTER 38. Fulfillment of Scientific Research, Experimental Design and Technological Work CHAPTER 39. Compensated Rendering of Services CHAPTER 40. Carriage CHAPTER 41. Forwarding CHAPTER 42. Loan and Credit CHAPTER 43. Financing Under Cession of Monetary Demand (Factoring) CHAPTER 44. Bank Deposit CHAPTER 45. Bank Account CHAPTER 46. Settlement of Accounts CHAPTER 47. Storage § 1. General Provisions on Storage § 2. Storage in Warehouse § 3. Special Types of Storage CHAPTER 48. Insurance CHAPTER 49. Commission CHAPTER 50. Actions in Another's Interest Without Commission CHAPTER 51. Commission Body CHAPTER 52. Trust Management of Property CHAPTER 53. Complex Entrepreneurial License (franchise) CHAPTER 54. Simple Partnership CHAPTER 55. Public Promise of Reward CHAPTER 56. Public Competition CHAPTER 57. Conducting Games and Betting CHAPTER 58. Obligations as Consequence of Causing Harm § 1. General Provisions on Compensation of Harm § 2. Compensation of Harm Caused to Life and Health of Citizen § 3. Compensation of Harm Caused as Consequence of Defects of Good, Work, or Service § 4. Compensation of Moral Harm CHAPTER 59. Obligations as Consequence of Unfounded Enrichment SECTION V. EXCLUSIVE RIGHTS FOR RESULTS OF INTELLECTUAL ACTIVITY (INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY) CHAPTER 60. General Provisions CHAPTER 61. Copyright and Neighboring Rights CHAPTER 62. General Provisions on Right of Industrial Property CHAPTER 63. Right to Invention, Utility Model, Industrial Design CHAPTER 64. Rights to New Sorts of Plants and New Breeds of Animals CHAPTER 65. Right to Layout of Integrated Circuit CHAPTER 66. Right to Protection of Undisclosed Information from Illegal Use CHAPTER 67. Means of Individualization of Participants of Civil Turnover, Goods, Works or Services § 1. Firm Name § 2. Trademark and Service Mark § 3. Geographical Indication
CHAPTER 68. Unfair Competition SECTION VI. INHERITANCE LAW CHAPTER 69. General Provisions on Inheriting CHAPTER 70. Inheritance by Will CHAPTER 71. Inheritance by Operation of Law CHAPTER 72. Acquisition of Inheritance CHAPTER 73. Peculiarities of Inheriting of Individual Types of Property SECTION VII. INTERNATIONAL PRIVATE LAW CHAPTER 74. General provisions CHAPTER 75. Collision Norms § 1. Persons § 2. Law Subject to Application to Personal Non-property Rights § 3. Transactions, Representation, Limitation Period § 4. Right of Ownership and Other Real Rights § 5. Contractual Obligations § 6. Noncontractual Obligations § 7. Intellectual Property § 8. Inheritance Law SECTION VIII. FINAL PROVISIONS
SECTION I GENERAL PROVISIONS
SUBSECTION 1 BASIC PROVISIONS
CHAPTER 1 Civil Legislation
Article 1. Relations Regulated by Civil Legislation 1. The civil legislation determines the legal status of participants of civil turnover, the grounds of arising and the procedure of the exercise of right of ownership and other real rights, the rights to the results of intellectual activity, regulates the relations between the persons carrying out the entrepreneurial activity, or the activity with their participation, contractual and other obligations, as well as other property relations and personal non-property relations connected with them. The entrepreneurial activity is an independent activity of legal and natural persons, implemented by them in civil turnover under their personal name, at their risk and under their property liability, directed at systematic obtaining of profit from using of property, selling the things made, processed or gained by the before-mentioned persons for selling, as well as from performing of works or rendering the services, if these works or services are intended for realization to other persons and are not applied for own consumption. The handicraft activity is an activity of natural persons on fabrication and realization of goods, performance of works, rendering of services, applying manual work and tools, including electrical tools, carried out independently without engaging other natural persons on labour and/or civil-law contracts and aimed at satisfying everyday needs of citizens.
The entrepreneurial activity does not comprise:
handicraft activity;
service activities in the field of agroecotourism;
activities of citizens of the Republic of Belarus on maintaining of the family farms, and the production, processing and marketing of agricultural products produced by them;
advocacy activity;
notarial activity of notaries;
activity of arbitrators;
activity of mediators;
activity carried out within the time of research teams;
activity of natural persons on the use of its own securities and bank accounts as means of payment or in order to preserve cash and income generation;
activity performed by the natural persons independently without the involvement of other individuals on the labor and/or civil contracts following types of activities:
realization by foreign citizens and stateless persons, temporarily staying or temporarily residing in the Republic of Belarus, on the trade spots in the markets and/or other places established by local executive and administrative bodies no longer than five days in a calendar month of works of painting, graphic arts, sculptural arts, traditional artistic handicraft articles, produce of crop husbandry and apiculture (hereinafter –one-time sale);
realization by natural persons, with the exception of persons specified in indent twelve of this part, on the trade spots in the markets and/or other places established by local executive and administrative bodies of works of painting, graphic arts, sculptural arts, traditional artistic handicraft articles, created by those natural persons; produce of floriculture, ornamental plants, seeds and seedlings thereof, animals; medicinal plants, berries, mushrooms, nuts, other wild-growing produce; produce specified in indent three of part one of clause 11 of Article 294 of the Tax Code of the Republic of Belarus in the presence of documents provided for by parts two and three of clause 11 of Article 294 of the Tax Code of the Republic of Belarus;
performance of services on agricultural products growing;
services for grain crushing;
grazing;
tutoring (advisory services on specific academic subjects (subjects), academic disciplines (subjects), educational areas, topics, including assistance in preparation for centralized testing);
cleaning and household cleaning;
care for adults and children;
services performed by domestic workers: washing and ironing of linen and other things, paddock of pets and taking care of them, buying food, cooking, washing dishes, making payments from the monetary means of the person served for the use of premises and housing services;
musical and entertaining services for weddings, anniversaries and other special occasions;
activity of actors, dancers, musicians, entertainers, acting individually;
services of a toastmaster;
photography, photoproduction;
activities connected with birthday greetings, New Year and other holidays, regardless of their performance location;
realization of kittens and puppies provided the maintenance of pets (cats, dogs);
services related to the care and training of pets, other than farm animals;
activity on copying, preparation of documents and other specialized office-related activity;
activity on translation and interpretation;
provision of services performed with the help of machines to measure weight, height;
repair of sewing and knitted articles and headwear, except for repair of carpets and carpet articles;
lease (sublease) of dwelling premises, except for provision of places for temporary residence.
Family, labor, land relations, relations on using other natural resources and preservation of the environment, conforming the provisions specified in the first and the second parts of this Clause, are regulated by the civil legislation, unless otherwise is provided by the legislation on marriage and family, on labor and employment of the population, on protection and use of lands, and other special legislation. 2. The relations connected with exercise and defense of non-alienable rights and freedoms of the person and other intangible benefits (personal non-property relations, not connected with the property relations), are regulated by civil legislation, as far as otherwise does not follow from the essence of these relations. 3. The participants of relations, regulated by the civil legislation, are the citizens of the Republic of Belarus (hereinafter referred to as the citizens), legal persons of the Republic of Belarus (hereinafter referred to as the legal persons), the Republic of Belarus, administrative territorial units of the Republic of Belarus (hereinafter referred to as the administrative territorial units). The rules, established by the civil legislation, are applied to the relations with participation of the foreign citizens, stateless persons, foreign and international legal persons (the organizations not being legal persons), foreign states, their administrative and territorial (state-territorial) units, being participants of civil relations in accordance with the legislation of these states , unless otherwise is determined by the Constitution of the Republic of Belarus, other legislative acts, and the treaties of the Republic of Belarus. 4. The civil legislation is not applied to the property relations based on administrative subordination, established by the legislation, of one party to another, including budget and tax relations, unless otherwise is provided by the legislation.
Article 2. Main Principles of Civil Legislation. The main principles of civil legislation include the system of principles, defining and regulating the civil relations. The civil legislation is founded on the following principles: all participants of the civil relations, including the state, its bodies and officials, act within the Constitution of the Republic of Belarus and acts of legislation enacted in conformity with it (the principle of supremacy of law); the direction and co-ordination of state and private economic activity are provided by the state in social purposes (the principle of social orientation of regulation of economic activity);
the implementation of the civil rights shall not contradict the public benefit and safety, cause damage to the environment, historical and cultural values, infringe rights and interests of other persons protected by the law (the principle of priority of the public interests); the subjects of the civil law participate in civil relations as equals, are equal before the law, cannot enjoy any advantages and privileges contradicting the law, and have the right, without any discrimination, to equal protection of the rights and legal interest (the principle of equality of participants of the civil relations); the right of ownership, gained by legal way, is protected by the law and is preserved by the state, its inviolability is guaranteed, condemnation is allowed only on motives of the public necessity, subject to conditions and procedures determined by the law, with timely and full indemnification of cost of alienated property, or in accordance with the decision of the court (the principle of inviolability of the property); the citizens and legal persons are free in conclusion of the contract. Compulsion to conclusion of the contract is not allowed, with the exception of cases when the liability to conclude the contract is provided by the legislation or by voluntary obligation (the principle of freedom of the contract); honesty and reasonableness of participant of civil legal relations is expected, as far as other is not revealed (the principle of honesty and reasonableness of participant of civil legal relations); interference in private affairs is prohibited, with the exception of the cases when such interference is implemented on the grounds of legal norms in the interest of national security, public order, protection of moralities, health of the population, rights and freedoms of the other persons (the principle to inadmissibility of arbitrary interference in private affairs); the citizens and legal persons have the right to implement protection of the civil rights in the court and by other ways provided by the legislation, as well as self-defense of the civil rights, subject to the limits determined in accordance with civil legal norms (the principle of free implementation of the civil rights, ensuring the recovering of the violated rights, judicial protection of rights); other principle specified in the Constitution of the Republic of Belarus, other acts of legislation, as well as the principles following from the contents and sense of civil legal norms. The participants of civil legal relations obtain and implement their own civil rights by their own will and in their own interests. They are free in establishing their rights and duties on the basis of the contract, and in determination of any terms and conditions of the contract not contradicting the legislation.
Article 3. Civil Legislation 1.The civil legislation is a system of the normative legal acts containing civil law norms, including: the legislative acts (the Constitution of the Republic of Belarus, this Code and laws of the Republic of Belarus, decrees and edicts of the President of the Republic of Belarus); the orders of the President of the Republic of Belarus; the resolutions of the Government of the Republics of Belarus, enacted in accordance with the legislative acts; the acts of the Constitutional Court of the Republic of Belarus, Supreme Court of the Republic of Belarus and National Bank of the Republic of Belarus, enacted within competence of these bodies for regulation of the civil relations established by the Constitution of the Republic of Belarus and other legislative acts enacted in accordance with it; the acts of ministries, other Republic's bodies of state administration, local bodies of government and self- government, enacted in cases and within the limits provided by the legislative acts, orders of the President of the Republic of Belarus and resolutions of the Government the Republic of Belarus. 2. In case of discrepancy of the legislative act with the Constitution of the Republic of Belarus, the Constitution prevails.
In case of discrepancy of the decree or edict of the President of the Republic of Belarus with this Code or another law, this Code or another law prevails only in cases when the authorities for enacting the decree or edict were provided by the law. The norms of the civil law, contained in other laws, should conform to this Code. In case of discrepancy of those acts with this Code, the latter prevails. In case of collision (discrepancy) of other acts of civil legislation, the rules established by the legislation of the Republic of Belarus on normative legal acts are applied.
Article 4. Operation of Civil Legislation in Time Unless otherwise is provided by the Constitution and other legislative acts enacted in conformity with it, the acts of the civil legislation do not retroact and are applied to the relations which arose: after putting into force of these acts; before putting into force of these acts, in relation to the rights and duties which arose after putting into force of these acts. The relations of the parties of a contract, concluded before putting into force of the act the civil legislation, are regulated in accordance with Article 392 of this Code.
Article 5. Application of Civil Legislation by Analogy 1. In cases when the relations provided by Article 1 of this Code are not regulated directly by acts of legislation or by agreement of the parties, the norm of the civil legislation regulating the similar relations (analogia legis) is applied to such relations, as far as such application does not contradict the essence of these relations. 2. In case of impossibility of application of analogia legis in the specified cases, the rights and duties of the parties are to be determined on the basis of main principles and the sense of the civil legislation (analogia juris). 3. It is not allowed to apply by analogy the norms limiting civil rights and establishing the liability.
Article 6. Civil Legislation and Norms of International Law The Republic of Belarus recognizes the supremacy of generally recognized principles of international law and provides conformity of the civil legislations of the Republic of Belarus to these principles. Provisions of the civil law, contained in the treaties of the Republic of Belarus, which have came into force, are the part of the civil legislation, which is valid on the territory of the Republic of Belarus, and subject to direct application, except for cases when it follows from the treaty that the enactment of the national legal act is required for application of these provisions. These provisions have the force of the legal act expressing the consent of the Republic of Belarus for the obligatoriness of the appropriate treaty for the Republic of Belarus. Provisions of the civil law, contained in the treaties of the Republic of Belarus, which have not come into force, may be applied by the Republic of Belarus temporarily in accordance with the procedure established by the legislation on the treaties of the Republic of Belarus.
CHAPTER 2 Origin of Civil Rights and Duties, and Exercise and Defense of Civil Rights
Article 7. Grounds for Civil Rights and Duties to Arise
1. Civil rights and duties shall arise from the grounds provided for by the legislation, and also from the actions of citizens and legal persons, which although not provided for by a law or such acts but by virtue of the basic principles and sense of civil legislation give rise to civil rights and duties. In accordance therewith civil rights and duties shall arise: 1) from contracts and other transactions provided for by the legislation, and also from contracts and other transactions which although not provided for by the legislation, are not contrary thereto; 2) from acts of state bodies and bodies of local administration and self-government which have been provided for by the legislation as a ground for civil rights and duties to arise; 3) from a judicial decision which has established civil rights and duties; 4) as a result of creation and acquisition of property on the grounds not prohibited by the legislation; 5) as a result of creation of works of science, literature, art, inventions, and other results of intellectual activity; 6) as a consequence of causing of harm to another person; 7) as a consequence of unfounded enrichment; 8) as a consequence of other actions of citizens and legal persons; 9) as a consequence of events with which the legislation connects the ensuing of civil-law consequences. 2. The rights to property subject to state registration shall arise from the time of registration of the respective rights thereto, unless otherwise established by the legislation.
Article 8. Exercise of Civil Rights 1. Citizens and legal persons shall exercise the civil rights belonging to them at their discretion. 2. The refusal of citizens and legal persons to exercise rights belonging to them shall not entail the termination of those rights except for instances provided for by the legislation.
Article 9. Limits of Exercise of Civil Rights 1. The actions of citizens and legal persons effectuated exclusively with the intention to cause harm to another person, and also abuse of right in other forms, shall not be permitted. The use of civil rights for the purposes of limiting competition, and also abuse of a dominant position in the market, shall not be permitted. 2. In the event of the failure to comply with the requirements provided for by Clause 1 of this Article, the court of general jurisdiction or arbitration court may refuse to defend the right belonging to the person. 3. The person abusing the right must restore the position of the person, suffered as a result of abuse, and compensate damage caused. 4. In instances when a law makes the defense of civil rights dependent upon whether these rights have been exercised reasonably and in good faith, the reasonableness of the actions and the good faith of the participants of civil legal relations shall be presupposed.
Article 10. Judicial Defense of Civil Rights 1. Protection of violated or contested civil rights is effectuated by the court of general jurisdiction, the arbitration court (hereinafter referred to as the court) in accordance with the jurisdiction established by the legislation on the legal procedure, or, in cases provided by the legislation, in accordance with the contract.
2. The legislation or the contract may include provisions stipulating the settlement of the dispute between parties before reference to the court, if such provision does not contradict the legislation. Before reference to the court with a complaint concerning disputes arising between legal persons and/or individual entrepreneurs, it is obligatory to present pre-trial complaint (a written proposal on voluntary settlement of the dispute), unless otherwise established by this Code, other legislative acts or a contract. The procedure for presenting the pre-trial complaint shall be established by the legislation or contract. 3. Protection of the civil rights in administrative procedure is effectuated only in cases provided by the legislation. The decision adopted in the administrative procedure may be appealed in the court.
Article 11. Means of Defense of Civil Rights The defense of civil rights shall be exercised by means of: 1) recognition of the right; 2) restoration of the situation which existed before the violation of the right 3) suppression of actions violating a right or creating a threat to violate it; 4) recognition of a contested transaction to be invalid and the application of the consequences of the invalidity thereof; determination of the fact of nullity of the transaction and the application of the consequences of the invalidity thereof; 5) recognition of an act of a state body or body of local administration or self-government to be invalid; 6) self-defense of right; 7) awarding performance of a duty in kind; 8) compensation of losses; 9) recovery of a penalty; 10) compensation for moral harm; 11) termination or change of legal relation; 12) non-application by court of act of a state body or body of local administration or self-government which is contrary to the legislation; 13) other means provided for by the legislation.
Article 12. Recognizing the Act of State Body or Body of Local Administration or Self-government to be Invalid A non-normative act of a state body or body of local administration or self-government, and in instances provided for by the legislation, also a normative act, not corresponding to the legislations and violating civil rights and interests of a citizen or legal person, protected by the legislative acts, may be recognized by a court to be invalid, subject to the claim of the person, whose rights were violated, or, in cases provided by the legislation, subject to the claim of other persons. In the event that an act is recognized by a court to be invalid, the violated right shall be subject to restoration or to defense by other means provided for by Article 11 of this Code.
Article 13. Self-Defense of Civil Rights Defense of the civil rights by direct actions of the person, whose rights are violated, is permissible, if such actions are not connected with breach of the legislation. Self-defense of the civil rights, effectuated with causing damage in the situation of absolute necessity or necessary defense, is not considered as breach of the legislation, if the actions of the person carrying out
the defense were proportional to the character and danger of the violation and did not exceed beyond the limits of prevention or suppression of the violation.
Article 14. Compensation of Losses 1. A person whose right has been violated may demand full compensation of losses caused to him unless compensation of losses in a lesser amount has been provided for by the legislation or contract. 2. By losses are understood the expenses which the person whose right has been violated made or must make in order lo restore the violated right, loss or damage of his property (real damage), and also revenues not received which this person would have received under ordinary conditions of civil turnover if his right had not been violated (lost advantage). If the person who has violated a right has received revenues as a consequence thereof, the person whose right was violated shall have the right to demand compensation, together with the other losses, for lost advantage in an amount of not less than such revenues.
Article 15. Compensation of Losses Caused by State Bodies and Bodies of Local Administration or Self-government Losses caused to a citizen or legal person as a result of the illegal actions (failure to act) of state bodies, bodies of local administration or self-government, or officials of these bodies, including the issuance of the act of a state body or body of local administration or self-government which does not correspond to the legislation, shall be subject to compensation by the Republic of Belarus or by respective administrative territorial unit in accordance with the procedure provided by the legislation.
SUBSECTION 2 PERSONS
CHAPTER 3 Citizens (Natural Persons)
Article 16. Legal Capacity of Citizens
1. The capacity to have civil rights and to bear duties (civil legal capacity) shall be recognized in equal measure for all citizens.
2. The legal capacity of a citizen shall arise at the time of his birth and be terminated by death.
Article 17. Content of Legal Capacity of Citizens Citizens may, in accordance with the legislation, have property by right of ownership; inherit and bequeath property; to be engaged in entrepreneurial and any other activity not prohibited by the legislation; create legal persons autonomously or jointly with other citizens and legal persons; conclude any transactions which are not contrary to a legislation, and participate in obligations; select the place of residence; have the rights of authors to works of science, literature and art, inventions and other results of intellectual activity protected by the legislation; and have other property rights and personal non-property rights.
Article 18. Name of Citizen
1.A citizen shall acquire and exercise rights and duties under his own name, including surname and own forename, and also patronymic (if any), unless it arises otherwise from the legislation. A citizen may use a pseudonym (fictitious name) in the instances and in accordance with the procedure provided for by the legislation. 2.A citizen shall have the right to change his name in accordance with the procedure established by the legislation. The change of name by a citizen shall not be the ground for the termination or change of his rights and duties acquired under the previous name. A citizen shall be obliged to take necessary measures in order to inform his debtors and creditors about the change of his name and shall bear the risk of the consequences caused by these persons lacking information about the change of his name. A citizen who has changed name shall have the right to demand the making, at his expense, of respective changes in documents formalized in his previous name.
3. The name received by a citizen at birth, and also a change of name, shall be subject to registration in accordance with the procedure established for the registration of acts of civil status.
4. The acquisition of rights and duties under the name of another person shall not be permitted.
5. Harm caused to a citizen as a result of the incorrect use of his name shall be subject to compensation in accordance with this Code. In the event of the distortion or of the use of the name of a citizen by means or in a form affecting his honour, dignity, or business reputation, the rules provided for by Article 152 of this Code shall apply.
Article 19. Place of Residence of Citizen
1.The place of residence of a citizen shall be deemed the location (address) of dwelling, the rights of possession, disposal and/or using of which have been accrued by a citizen on the grounds established by the legislative acts, or a populated locality where a citizen permanently or primarily resides, and if such locality is not established - the place of residence (in the absence thereof - the place of staying) specified in the identification document, or in another document on registration, or the place of location of the property of this person. The place of residence of minors who have not attained fourteen years of age or citizens under trusteeship shall be deemed to be the place of residence of their legal representatives — parents, adoptive parents, or trustees.
Article 20. Active Legal Capacity of Citizens 1. The capacity of a citizen by his own actions to acquire and exercise civil rights, to create civil duties for himself, and to perform them (civil active legal capacity) shall arise in full with the ensuing of majority, that is, upon attaining eighteen years of age. 2. When by the legislation the emancipation (Article 26 of this Code) or entry into marriage is permitted before attaining eighteen years of age, a citizen who has not attained eighteen years of age shall acquire civil active legal capacity in full from the time of adoption of the decision on emancipation or entering into marriage. Active legal capacity acquired as a result of concluding a marriage shall be retained in full also in the event of dissolution of the marriage. When deeming a marriage to be invalid a court may adopt a decision concerning the loss by the minor spouse of full active legal capacity from the time determined by the court. 3. All citizens shall have equal active legal capacity, unless otherwise established by the legislation.
Article 21. Inadmissibility of Deprivation and Limitation of Legal Capacity and Active Legal Capacity of Citizens 1. No one may be limited in legal capacity and active legal capacity other than in the instances and in accordance with the procedure established by the legislation. 2. The full or partial renunciation, by a citizen, of legal capacity or active legal capacity, and other transactions, directed towards a limitation of legal capacity or active legal capacity, shall be void, except for instances when such transactions are permitted by the legislation.
Article 22. Entrepreneurial Activity of Citizen
1. A citizen shall have the right to engage in entrepreneurial activity without the formation of a legal person from the time of state registration as an individual entrepreneur. The number of natural persons being engaged by the individual entrepreneur on the basis of civil-law and/or labour contracts for carrying out entrepreneurial activity and the amount of property, used for those purposes, as well may be restricted by legislative acts.
2. The rules of this Code which regulate the activity of legal persons that are commercial organizations shall apply respectively to the entrepreneurial activity of citizens effectuated without the formation of a legal person unless it arises otherwise from the legislation, or the essence of a legal relation. 3. A citizen carrying out entrepreneurial activity without the formation of a legal person in violation of the requirements of Clause 1 of this Article shall not have the right to refer with respect to transactions concluded by him to the fact that he is not an individual entrepreneur. A court may apply to such transactions the rules of this Code on obligations connected with the effectuation of entrepreneurial activity.
Article 23. Property Liability of Citizen A citizen shall be liable for his obligations with all of the property belonging to him except for property against which execution may not be levied in accordance with the legislation. A list of the property of citizens against which execution may not be levied shall be established by the civil procedure legislation.
Article 24. Economic Insolvency (Bankruptcy) of Individual Entrepreneur
1. An individual entrepreneur who cannot satisfy the demands of creditors connected with the effectuation by him of entrepreneurial activity may be deemed to be insolvent (bankrupt) by decision of a court.
2. When effectuating the procedure for deeming an individual entrepreneur to be bankrupt his creditors with regard to obligations not connected with the effectuation of entrepreneurial activity by him also shall have the right to present their demands. The demands of the said creditors not declared by them in this procedure shall retain force after the completion of the bankruptcy proceeding of an individual entrepreneur.
3. The demands of creditors of an individual entrepreneur in the event of him being deemed bankrupt shall be satisfied at the expense of the property belonging to him against which execution may be levied. 4. After completing the settlement of accounts with creditors, the individual entrepreneur deemed to be bankrupt shall be relieved from the performance of residual obligations connected with his entrepreneurial activity and other demands presented for performance and taken into account when deeming the entrepreneur to be bankrupt.
The demands of citizens to whom the citizen declared to be bankrupt bears liability for causing harm to life or health, and also other demands of a personal character, shall retain force. 5. The grounds and procedure for a court to deem an individual entrepreneur to be bankrupt or the declaration by him of his own bankruptcy, and priority of satisfaction of the creditor’s demands shall be established by the legislation on economic insolvency (bankruptcy).
Article 25. Active Legal Capacity of Minors from Fourteen to Eighteen Years of Age 1. Minors in age from fourteen to eighteen years shall conclude transactions, except those named in Clause 2 of this Article, with the written consent of their legal representatives—parents, adoptive parents, or guardian. A transaction concluded by such a minor shall be valid also in the event of the subsequent written approval thereof by his parents, adoptive parents, or guardian. 2. Minors in age from fourteen to eighteen years shall have the right autonomously, without the consent of the parents, adoptive parents, and guardian, to: 1) dispose of their earnings, scholarships, and other revenues; 2) exercise the rights of an author of a work of science, literature or art, invention, or other result of his intellectual activity protected by the legislation; 3) make deposits in banks and non-bank credit and financial institutions and dispose of them in accordance with the legislation; 4) conclude petty domestic transactions and other transactions provided for by Article 27(2) of this Code. Upon attaining sixteen years of age minors also shall have the right to be members of cooperatives in accordance with the acts of legislation on cooperatives. 3. Minors in age from fourteen to eighteen years shall bear property liability for transactions concluded by them in accordance with Clause 1 of this Article; subsidiary liability is imposed on the citizen who has given a written consent on execution of the before-mentioned transaction. Minors in age from fourteen to eighteen years shall independently bear property liability for transactions concluded by them in accordance with Clause 1 of this Article. For the harm caused by them such minors shall bear liability in accordance with Chapter 58 of this Code. 4. When there are sufficient grounds a court may, upon the petition of parents, adoptive parents, or guardian or the body of trusteeship and guardianship, limit or deprive a minor from fourteen to eighteen years of age of the right to autonomously dispose of his earnings, scholarship, or other revenues, except for instances when this minor acquired active legal capacity in full in accordance with Article 20(2) of this Code.
Article 26. Emancipation 1.A minor who has attained sixteen years of age may be declared to have full active legal capacity if he works under a labor contract or, with the consent of parents, adoptive parents, or guardian, engages in entrepreneurial activity. A minor shall be declared to have full active legal capacity (emancipation) by decision of an body of trusteeship and guardianship with the consent of both parents, adoptive parents, or the guardian, or in the absence of such consent, by decision of a court. 2.Parents, adoptive parents, and a guardian shall not bear liability for obligations of an emancipated minor, in particular, for obligations which arose as a consequence of causing of harm by him.
Article 27. Active Legal Capacity of Minors at Age Below Fourteen Years (Juveniles) 1. Transactions, except for those specified in Clause 2 of this Article, may be concluded for minors who have not attained fourteen years of age (juveniles) only in their names by the parents, adoptive parents, or trustees. The rules provided for by Article 35 (2) and (3) of this Code shall apply to transactions of the legal representatives of a minor with his property, unless otherwise established by the Housing Code of the Republic of Belarus. 2. Juveniles in age from six to fourteen years shall have the right to conclude autonomously: 1) petty domestic transactions; 2) transactions directed towards receiving advantages without compensation which do not require notarial certification or state registration; 3) transactions relating to the disposition of assets granted by a legal representative or with the consent of the last by a third person for a specified purpose or for free disposition. 3. Property liability on the transactions carried out by the minor at the age below fourteen years, including the liability on the transactions made by these non-adults autonomously, is imposed on parents, adoptive parents or the trustee of the minor. Liability for the harm caused by the minor at the age below fourteen years, is determined in accordance with the rules of Chapter 58 of this Code.
Article 28. Right for Disposal of Bank Deposits on the Name of Juvenile The bank deposits made by anyone on the name of the juveniles, are in the disposal of their parents, adoptive parents or guardians, subject to the rules stipulated in Article 35 of this Code, and also of a depositor (in cases provided for in the legislation or in a contract).
Article 29. Deeming of Citizen to Lack Active Legal Capacity
1. A citizen who as a consequence of mental insanity (mental disease or dementia) cannot understand the meaning of his actions or direct these actions, may be deemed by a court to lack active legal capacity in accordance with the procedure established by the civil procedure legislation. A trusteeship shall be established over him.
2. Transactions in the name of a citizen deemed to lack active legal capacity shall be concluded by his trustee. If the grounds by virtue of which a citizen was deemed to lack active legal capacity have disappeared, the court shall deem him to have active legal capacity. The trusteeship established over him shall be vacated on the basis of the decision of a court.
Article 30. Limitation of Active Legal Capacity of Citizens 1. A citizen who as a consequence of abusing alcoholic beverages, narcotics, psychotropic substances, analogues thereof places his family in a grave material position may be limited in active legal capacity by a court in accordance with the procedure established by civil procedure legislation. A guardianship shall be established over him. Such citizen shall have the right autonomously to conclude petty domestic transactions. He may conclude other transactions, and also receive earnings, pension, and other revenues and dispose of them only with the consent of the guardian. However, such citizen shall autonomously bear property liability for transactions concluded by him and for harm caused by him.
2. If the grounds by virtue of which a citizen was limited in active legal capacity have disappeared, a court shall vacate the limitation of his active legal capacity. The guardianship established over the citizen shall be vacated on the basis of the decision of a court.
Article 31. Limitation of Entrepreneurial Activity of Citizen In the cases provided by the legislative acts, entrepreneurial activity of the citizen (the individual entrepreneur, founder, participant, owner of the property, manager of the legal person etc.) can be judicially limited for the period up to three years. The citizen, whose entrepreneurial activity is limited, during the full term of the limitation, can not: implement entrepreneurial activity without establishing the legal person; by the actions thereof, acquire and implement the rights, establish and fulfill the duties of the owner of the property (the founder, participant) of the legal person; hold the positions in the executive bodies of the legal persons; act as the manager of the enterprise and other property used for entrepreneurial activity. The enterprise and other property, being in the ownership of before-mentioned citizen, can be used by such citizen during the period of limitation for the purposes of entrepreneurial activity solely by transferring this property under the trust.
Article 32. Trusteeship Trusteeship shall be established over juveniles, and also over citizens recognized by a court as lacking active legal capacity. Trustees shall be representatives of the wards by virtue of a law (legal representatives) and conclude all necessary transactions in their name and in their interests.
Article 33. Guardianship Guardianship shall be established over minors from fourteen to eighteen years of age, and also over citizens limited in active legal capacity by a court as a consequence of abusing alcoholic beverages, narcotics, psychotropic substances, analogues thereof. Guardians shall give consent to the conclusion of those transactions which citizens under guardianship do not have the right to conclude autonomously. Guardians shall render assistance to wards in the exercise by them of their rights and the performance of duties, and also protect them against abuses on the part of third persons.
Article 34. Guardians and Trustees as Representatives of Wards
1. The guardians and trustees shall be appointed in the order established by the legislation, and act as protectors of the rights and interests of their wards in relations with any persons and organizations, including in the court, without special authorization.
2. If a person in need of trusteeship or guardianship, within a month from the day when the trusteeship and guardianship body became aware of the need to establish trusteeship or guardianship, has not been appointed a trustee or guardian, the fulfillment of duties of a trustee or guardian temporarily (until the appointment of the guardian or trustee) is assigned to the head of the trusteeship and guardianship body.
Article 35. Disposition of Property of Ward 1. Revenues of a citizen under wardship, including revenues due to the ward from the management of his property, except for revenues which the ward has the right to dispose of autonomously, shall be expended exclusively by the trustee or guardian in the interests of the ward and with the prior authorization of the body of trusteeship and guardianship. Without the prior authorization of the body of trusteeship and guardianship the trustee or guardian shall have the right to make expenses necessary to maintain the ward at the expense of amounts which are due to the ward as his revenue. 2. A trustee shall not have the right without the prior authorization of bodies of trusteeship and guardianship to conclude, and a guardian - to give consent to the conclusion of transactions relating to the alienation, including exchange or gift, of the property of the ward, hire (lease) thereof, use free of charge, or pledge, or transactions entailing a waiver of rights which belong to the ward, the separation of his property or an apportionment of a participatory share from it, and also any other transactions entailing a reduction of the property of the ward. The procedure for the management by a trustee or guardian of the property of a ward shall be determined by the legislation. 3. A trustee and guardian, their spouses and close relatives shall not have the right to conclude transactions with a ward except for the transfer of property to the ward as a gift or for use free of charge, and also to represent the ward when concluding transactions or conducting judicial cases between the ward and a spouse of the trustee or guardian and their close relatives.
Article 36. Trust Management of Property of Ward 1. When the permanent management of immovable and valuable movable property of a ward is necessary, the body of trusteeship and guardianship shall conclude with the manager determined by this body a contract concerning trust management of such property (Chapter 52 of this Code). In this event the trustee or guardian shall retain his powers with respect to that property of the ward which is not transferred to trust management. In the event of the effectuation by the manager of powers relating to the management of the property of the ward the operation of the rules provided for by Articles 35(2) and (3) of this Code shall extend to the manager. 2. The trust management of the property of a ward shall be terminated in connection with termination of the property trust management contract on the grounds provided by clause 1 of Article 907 of this Code.
Article 37. Patronage of Citizens Who Has Active Legal Capacity 1. At the request of a citizen who has reached majority and has active legal capacity and who by reason of state of health cannot autonomously effectuate and defend his rights and perform duties, a guardianship in the form of patronage may be established over him. Establishment of patronage does not involve restrictions of the rights of a citizen being under patronage. 2. The assistant (the person carrying out a patronage) of a citizen who has reached majority and who has active legal capacity may be appointed by an body of trusteeship and guardianship only with the consent of this citizen. 3. The disposition of property belonging to a citizen being under patronage shall be carried out by the assistant on the grounds of a contract of agency or trust management, concluded with this citizen. The conclusion of domestic transactions and other transactions directed at maintenance and satisfaction of domestic requirements of a citizen being under patronage shall be effectuated by his assistant with the consent of this citizen.
4. Patronage established in accordance with Clause 1 of this Article shall be terminated at the demand of a citizen being under patronage.
Article 38. Deeming of Citizen to be Missing A citizen may, upon the application of interested persons, be deemed by a court to be missing if within one year there is no information at his place of residence concerning his whereabouts. When it is impossible to determine the date of receipt of the last information concerning the absent person, the commencement of calculation of the Term for deeming a person to be missing shall be considered to be the first date of the month following that in which the last information was received concerning the missing person, and when it is impossible to establish this month, the first of January of the following year.
Article 39. Consequences of Deeming Citizen to be Missing 1. The property of a citizen deemed to be missing shall, when permanent management is necessary, on the basis of the decision of a court be transferred to the person who is determined by the body of trusteeship and guardianship and shall operate on the basis of a contract on trust management concluded with this body. 2. The trustee of the property belonging to the citizen deemed to be missing undertakes performance of this citizen’s obligations, repays the debts of the citizen deemed to be missing at the expense of the property belonging to this citizen, manages this property on behalf of this citizen. Subject to the application of the interested persons, the allowance is paid for the citizens, which are subject to maintenance by the citizen deemed to be missing. 3. An body of trusteeship and guardianship may also before the expiry of a year from the date of receiving information about the whereabouts of the missing citizen appoint a manager of his property. 4. The consequences of deeming a person to be missing which are not provided for by this Article shall be determined by the legislation.
Article 40. Vacating the Decision on Deeming Citizen to be Missing 1. In the event of the appearance or discovery of the whereabouts of a citizen deemed to be missing a court shall vacate the decision deeming him to be missing. The trust management of the property of this citizen shall be vacated on the basis of the decision of the court. 2. If, after three years after the day of appointment of the trustee, the decision on deeming the citizen to be missing was not vacated, and there was no application to the court for declaring the citizen to be deceased, the body of guardianship and trusteeship must apply to the court with the application for declaring the citizen to be deceased.
Article 41. Declaration of Citizen to be Deceased 1. A citizen may be declared by a court to be deceased if there is no information at his place of residence concerning his whereabouts in the course of five years, and if he was missing under circumstances threatening death or giving grounds to suppose he perished from a specific accident, within six months. 2. A military serviceman or other citizen who is missing in connection with military actions may be declared by a court to be deceased not earlier than upon the expiry of two years from the date the military actions end. 3. The date of death of a citizen declared to be deceased shall be considered to be the date of entry into legal force of the decision of the court declaring him to be deceased. In the event a citizen is declared to be deceased who is missing under circumstances threatening death or giving grounds to suppose he
perished in a specific accident, the court may deem the date of death of this citizen to be the date of the presupposed perishing. 4. Declaring the citizen to be deceased implies the same consequences in relation to the rights and duties of such citizen, as death of the citizen.
Article 42. Consequences of Appearance of Citizen Declared to be Deceased 1. In the event of the appearance or discovery of the whereabouts of a citizen declared to be deceased, the court shall vacate the decision declaring him to be deceased. 2. Irrespective of the time of his appearance, a citizen may demand from any person the return of property preserved which passed to this person without compensation after the declaration of the citizen to be deceased, except for instances provided for by Article 283(3) of this Code. Persons to whom property of a citizen declared to be deceased has passed according to transactions for compensation shall be obliged to return this property to him if it is proved that, in acquiring the property, they knew that the citizen declared to be deceased is alive. If it is impossible to return such property in kind, the value thereof shall be compensated. If the property of the citizen, declared to be deceased, has been transferred to the state as escheat and was sold by the state with observance of conditions provided by this Article, then, after vacating of the decision on declaring the citizen to be deceased, the money sum earned as a result of selling of the property, shall be returned to the citizen.
Article 43. Registration of Acts of Civil Status l. The following acts of civil status shall be subject to registration: 1) birth; 2) conclusion of marriage; 3) establishment of maternity and/or paternity; 4) adoption; 5) death; 6) change of surname, proper name, patronymic; 7) dissolution of marriage in cases provided by the legislation on marriage and family.
2. Bodies registering acts of civil status and the order of registration of acts of civil status shall be determined by the legislation.
CHAPTER 4 Legal Persons
§ 1. Basic Provisions
Article 44. Concept of Legal Person
1. A legal person shall be deemed to be an organization which has solitary property in ownership, economic management, or operative administration and is liable for its obligations with such property and may, in its own name, acquire and exercise property rights and personal non-property rights, bear duties, and be a plaintiff or defendant in court, registered in the established order as a legal person or recognized as such by the legislative act.
2. In connection with participation in the formation of the property of a legal person its founders (participants) may have rights of obligations with respect to this legal person or rights to a thing with respect to its property. То legal persons with respect to which the participants thereof have rights of obligations shall be relegated: economic partnerships and companies; production and consumer cooperatives. The participants of such legal persons can have rights to a thing only for the property, which they have transferred to the legal persons for using as contribution to the charter capital. To legal persons with respect to whose property the founders thereof have the right of ownership or other right to in rem shall be relegated unitary enterprises, including subsidiary enterprises, and also state associations and institutions financed by the owner. 3. To legal persons with respect to which the founders (participants) thereof do not have property rights belong: social and religious organizations (associations); charitable and other funds; associations of legal persons and/or of individual entrepreneurs (associations and unions), and other non-commercial organizations unless otherwise established by this Code, other laws or acts of President of the Republic of Belarus. In the instances stipulated by the laws or acts of the President of the Republic of Belarus, the administrative and territorial units may have property rights in relation to commercial organization, including when they are not their founders (participants). 4. Peculiarities of formation (creation), reorganization and termination (liquidation) of state bodies, as well as state legal persons, regulations on which are established by the acts of legislation, may be established by other acts of legislation, determining peculiarities of a legal status of such bodies and legal persons.
Article 45. Legal Capacity of Legal Person l. A legal person may have civil rights corresponding to the purposes of the activity provided for in its constituent documents and subject of activity specified in the constituent documents, and shall bear the duties connected with such activity. A legal person may engage in individual types of activity, a list of which is determined by the legislative acts, only on the basis of a special authorization (license). 2. A legal person may be limited in rights only in the instances and in the procedure provided for by the legislation. A decision concerning limitation of rights may be appealed by a legal person to a court. 3. The legal capacity of a legal person shall arise at the time of its creation (Article 47(2)) and shall terminate at the time of the completion of its liquidation (Article 59(8)). The right of a legal person to carry out activity the engagement in which requires a special permit (license) shall arise from the moment of receipt of such special permit (license) or within the period specified therein and shall terminate upon termination of the effect, annulment (revocation) of that special authorization (license) in the cases provided by legislative acts. The legal capacity of the state body and the state legal person the regulations on which is approved by an act of legislation arises from the entry into force of the act of legislation providing for formation (creation) of such a body or legal person, unless otherwise provided by this act, and shall terminate upon the entry into force of the act of legislation providing for the abolition (liquidation) of such a body or legal person, unless otherwise provided by this act. State bodies and state legal persons the regulations on which are approved by acts of legislation are subject to be included in the Unified State Register of Legal Persons and Individual Entrepreneurs. The procedure for inclusion of such bodies and legal persons in the Unified State Register of Legal Entities and Individual Entrepreneurs having regard to peculiarities of their formation (creation) shall be determined by the Government of the Republic of Belarus.
Article 46. Commercial and Non-commercial Organizations 1. Organizations pursuing the deriving of profit as the principal purpose of their activity (commercial organizations) or not having the deriving of profit as such purpose and not distributing profit received among the participants (non-commercial organizations) may be legal persons. 2. Legal persons which are commercial organizations may be created in the form of economic partnerships and companies, production cooperatives, unitary enterprises, and peasant (farming) households and in other forms stipulated by this Code.
3. Legal persons which are non-commercial organizations may be created in the form of consumer cooperatives, social or religious organizations (associations), institutions financed by the owner, charitable and other funds, and also in other forms provided for by the acts of legislation. The non-commercial organizations can be formed for achievement of social, nature-protective, charitable, cultural, educational, scientific and managing purposes, health care, development of physical culture and sport, satisfaction of spiritual and other non-material needs of the citizens, protection of the rights and legal interests of the citizens and legal persons, solving of disputes and conflicts, rendering legal assistance in accordance with the legislation, and for other purposes, aimed on achievement of the public wealth. The nonprofit organizations can be formed for satisfaction of material (property) needs of the citizens, or citizens and legal persons, in cases provided by this Code and other legislative acts. The nonprofit organizations may effectuate entrepreneurial activity only insofar as this is necessary for their charter purposes for which these organizations were formed, correspond with these purposes and meet the subject of activity of the non-commercial organization, or insofar such activity is necessary for the accomplishment of missions meaningful for the state, stipulated in their constituent documents, corresponds with these missions and meets the subject of activity of these organizations. For some specific forms of non-commercial organizations, the requirements can be stipulated by the legislative acts, providing for the right for engaging in entrepreneurial activity only by means of forming of commercial organization and/or participation in such organization.
4. It is permitted the creation of associations of commercial organizations and/or of individual entrepreneurs, as well as associations of commercial and/or non-commercial organizations in the form of associations and unions and associations of commercial organizations and/or of individual entrepreneurs in the form of state association. In accordance with the legislative acts, the legal persons may form the associations, including those with participation of the foreign legal persons, in the form of economic groups, in accordance with the procedure and subject to conditions determined by the legislation on such groups. In the instances provided for by the legislative acts, the associations of commercial and non-commercial organizations and/or natural persons may be created in other forms.
Article 47. State Registration of Legal Persons 1. A legal person shall be subject to state registration in accordance with the procedure determined by the legislative acts with the exception of state bodies and state legal persons the regulation about which are approved by acts of the legislation.. The data of state registration shall be included in the Unified State Register of Legal Persons and Individual Entrepreneurs, unless otherwise established by the legislative acts. Non-performance or refusal of state registration of a legal person, changes and (or) additions being introduced in the constituent documents of legal persons in any form for reasons not provided by the legislative acts of unpracticality is not allowed. Performance or non-performance of state registration of a legal person by the registering body or refusal of state registration of a legal person, changes and (or) additions being introduced in the constituent
documents of legal persons may be appealed against through court proceedings.
2. A legal person is deemed to be created from the moment of its state registration, unless otherwise established by the President of the Republic of Belarus.
A state body, and also a state legal person the regulations on which is approved by an act of legislation, is deemed to be established (created) from the moment of entry into force of the act of legislation providing for the establishment (creation) of such a body or legal person, unless otherwise established by that act.
3. The legal person shall be subject to re-registration in cases provided by the legislative acts. 4. The natural person or the legal person shall be entitled to obtain the information, being kept in the Unified State Register of Legal Persons and Individual Entrepreneurs, in accordance with the procedure defined by the legislation.
Article 471. Charter Capital of Commercial Organization 1. At the formation of the commercial organization, the charter capital of this organization shall be formed in accordance with the procedure established by the legislation. The commercial organization determines independently the amount of the charter capital with the exception of commercial organizations for which minimal amounts of the charter capital are established by the legislation. 2. The contribution in the charter capital of the commercial organization may include things, including money and securities, other property, including the property rights, or other alienable rights, having the evaluation of their value. The evaluation of the non-monetary contribution in the charter capital of the commercial organization is subject to the expert verification of reliability of such evaluation in cases and in accordance with the procedure provided by the legislation. The property cannot be contributed in the charter capital of the commercial organization, if the right for alienation of this property is limited by the owner, by the legislation or by the contract. The legislative acts may establish other restrictions concerning the property contributed in the charter capital of the commercial organization. 3. If, after expiration of the second and of each following fiscal year, the cost of net assets of the commercial organization is less than the charter capital, such organization shall be obliged to decrease its charter capital to the amount not exceeding the cost of its net assets. In the case of decreasing the cost of net assets of the commercial organization for which a minimum amount of the charter capital is established by the legislation after expiration of the second and every following financial year below the minimum amount of the charter capital, such organization is subject to liquidation in the established order.
Article 48. Constituent Documents of Legal Person 1. A legal person shall operate on the basis of the charter or the constituent contract. The constituent contract of a legal person shall be concluded, and the charter shall be confirmed, by the owner of the property (founders, participants).This Code and other legislative acts may establish other procedure for confirming charters of legal persons. Acts of the President of the Republic of Belarus may provide for the approval of regulations on the basis of which respective legal persons shall operate. 2. The name of the legal person, its location, the purposes of activity, the procedure for the management of the activity of the legal person must be determined in the constituent documents of the legal person, and also they shall contain other information provided for by the law for legal persons of the respective type. In the constituent contract the founders (participants) shall undertake to create a legal person and determine the procedure for joint activity relating to its creation and the conditions for the transfer of their property to it and participation in its activity. Beside the information specified in part one of this clause,
the conditions and procedure for distribution among the participants of profit and losses, withdrawal of participants from the composition thereof and other information provided for by the legislation on legal persons of the respective type shall also be determined by the constituent contract. Other terms and conditions can be included in the constituent contract, subject to the consent of the founders (participants). The object of activity of the legal person must be determined in the constituent documents of non- commercial organizations, and in the instances provided for by the legislation, also in the constituent documents of other commercial organizations. The object of the activity of a commercial organization may be determined by the constituent documents of other commercial organizations also in the instances when according to the legislation this is not obligatory. 3. Changes of constituent documents shall acquire force for third persons from the time of state registration, and in the instances established by the legislation, from the time of informing the body carrying out state registration of such changes. However, legal persons and their founders (participants) shall not have the right to refer to the lack of registration of such changes in relations with third persons who have acted taking these changes into consideration. Changes of constituent documents of Republic's state-social associations shall acquire force for third persons from the time of the entry into force of legal acts which approve such changes.
Article 49. Bodies of Legal Person 1. A legal person shall acquire civil rights and assume civil duties through its bodies operating in accordance with the legislation and the constituent documents. The procedure for the appointment or election of the bodies of a legal person shall be determined by the legislative acts and the constituent documents.
2. In the instances provided for by the legislative acts a legal person may acquire civil rights and assume civil duties through the owner of property (founders, participants).
3. A person who by virtue of a law or constituent documents of a legal person acts in its name must operate in the interests of the legal person represented by him in good faith and reasonably. He shall be obliged at the demand of the the owner of property (founders, participants) of the legal person, unless otherwise provided by the legislative acts or contract, to compensate losses caused by him to the legal person.
Article 50. Name and Location of Legal Person
1. A legal person shall have its own name containing an indication of its organizational legal form. The names of non-commercial organizations and unitary enterprises, and in the instances provided for by the legislative acts, of other commercial organizations, must contain an indication of the character of activity of the legal person. Inclusion of the references to the official full or shortened name of the Republic of Belarus, words "national" and "Belarusian" in the name of the legal person, inclusion of such name or the elements of the national symbols in the requisites of the documents or in the advertising materials of the legal person is allowed in accordance with the procedure determined by the President of the Republic of Belarus.
2. The location of a legal person shall be determined by the location of its permanently acting executive body (an administrative and territorial unit, populated locality, and also a house, an apartment or another dwelling, if any), and in the case of absence of the permanently acting executive body - another body or a person entitled to act on behalf of a legal person without authorization.
3. The name and location of a legal person shall be specified in its constituent documents.
In the case of change of the location of a legal person, such legal person is obliged, in the order established by the legislative acts, to send to the registering body a respective notification, unless otherwise provided by the legislative acts.
Article 51. Representative Offices and Branches 1. A solitary subdivision of a legal person situated outside the location thereof which represents the interests of the legal person and effectuates the defense thereof shall be a representative office.
2. A solitary subdivision of a legal person situated outside the location thereof and carrying out all or part of its functions, including the function of representative office, shall be a branch. 3. Representative offices and branches shall not be legal persons. They shall be endowed with property by the legal person which created them and shall operate on the basis of Regulations confirmed by it. The property of the representative offices or branch of the legal person is considered separately on the balance sheet of the legal person, which has created them (separately in the inventory book of income and expenditure of organizations and individual entrepreneurs, applying the simplified taxation system). The heads of representative offices and branches shall be appointed by the legal person and operate on the basis of the power of attorney thereof. Representative offices and branches must be specified in the constituent documents of the legal person which has created them. 4.The legal status of representative offices and branches of the banks and non-bank credit and financial organizations, organizational structures of public organizations (associations) and republican state and social associations is determined with regard to particularities established by the legislation.
Article 511. Representative Offices of Foreign Organization The representative office of the foreign organization is the solitary subdivision of this organization, located on the territory of the Republic of Belarus, carrying out the defense and representation of interests of the foreign organization and other functions not contradicting the legislation. Forming of the representative offices of the foreign organization, the activity of which is aimed on overthrowing or forcible change of the constitutional system, breach of integrity and safety of the state, propaganda of war or violence, promotion of national, religious and racial hostility, and of the foreign organizations, the activity of which can cause damage for the rights and legal interests of the citizens, is prohibited. 2. The representative office of the foreign organization is considered formed on the territory of the Republic of Belarus since the date of obtaining the permission for its formation in accordance with the procedure established by the legislation. In the legislation, the restrictions on entrepreneurial and other activities of the representative offices of the foreign organizations can be stipulated. 3. The representative office of the foreign organization shall have the name, containing the indication of the foreign organization, which has formed this representative office.
Article 52. Liability of Legal Person
1. Legal persons, except for those being financed by the owner of institutions, shall be liable for their obligations with all of the property belonging to them.
2. A fiscal enterprise and an institution being financed by the owner shall be liable for its obligations in accordance with the procedure and on the conditions established by Article 113(8) and Articles 115 and
120 of this Code.
3. The founder (participant) of a legal person or the owner of its property shall not be liable for obligations of the legal person, and the legal person shall not be liable for the obligations of the founder (participant) or owner, except for the instances provided for by legislative acts or by the constituent documents of the legal person. If the economic insolvency (bankruptcy) of a legal person has been caused by the owner of the property of the legal person, by the founders (participants) or or by other persons, including the head of the legal person, who have the right to give instructions which are binding upon this legal person or have the possibility to determine otherwise its actions, subsidiary liability for its obligations may be placed upon such persons in the event of insufficiency of the property of the legal person.
Article 53. Reorganization of Legal Person
1. The reorganization of a legal person (merging, affiliation, splitting-up, splitting-off, transformation) may be effectuated by decision of the owner of its property (founders, participants) or the body of the legal person authorized therefor by the constituent documents, and in the cases provided for in the legislative acts - by the decision of the authorized state bodies, including courts.
2. If the he owner of property (founders, participants) of a legal person, body authorized by them, or body of the legal person authorized to reorganize it by its constituent documents does not effectuate the reorganization of the legal person within the period specified in the decision of the authorized state body, the court upon the suit of the said state body shall appoint an external administrator of the legal person and charge him with carrying out the reorganization of this legal person. From the time of appointment of the external administrator to him shall pass the powers relating to managing the affairs of the legal person. The external administrator shall act in the name of the legal person in court, draw up the splitting balance sheet or the transfer act and transfer it for consideration of the court together with the constituent documents of the legal persons arising as a result of the reorganization. The confirmation by the court of the said documents shall be the grounds for state registration of the newly arisen legal persons. 3. In the instances established by the legislative acts the reorganization of legal persons may be effectuated only with the consent of authorized state bodies. 4. The legal person shall be considered to be reorganized, except for instances of reorganization in the form of affiliation, from the time of state registration of the legal persons which have arisen anew. In the event of the reorganization of a legal person in the form of affiliation thereto of another legal person, the first of them shall be considered to be reorganized from the time of making an entry in the Unified State Register of Legal Persons and Individual Entrepreneurs concerning the termination of the activity of the affiliated legal person.
Article 54. Legal Succession in Event of Reorganization of Legal Persons
1. In the event of merging of legal persons the rights and duties of each of them shall pass to the legal person which newly arises in accordance with the act of transfer.
2. In the event of affiliation of a legal person to another legal person, to the latter shall pass the rights and duties of the affiliated legal person in accordance with the act of transfer.
3. In the event of splitting-up of a legal person its rights and duties shall pass to the legal persons which newly arise in accordance with the splitting balance sheet.
4. In the event of splitting-off from a legal person of one or several legal persons, to each of them shall pass the rights and duties of the reorganized legal person in accordance with the splitting balance sheet.
5. In the event of transformation of a legal person of one type into a legal person of another type (change of organizational legal form), to the legal person which arises anew shall pass the rights and duties of the reorganized legal person in accordance with the act of transfer.
Article 55. Act of Transfer and Splitting Balance Sheet
1. The act of transfer and splitting balance sheet must contain provisions concerning legal succession regarding all obligations of the reorganized legal person with respect to all creditors and debtors thereof, including obligations being contested by the parties.
2. The act of transfer and splitting balance sheet shall be confirmed by the owner of property (founders, participants) of the legal person or by the body which adopted the decision concerning reorganization of the legal persons, unless otherwise established by the President of the Republic of Belarus. The failure to submit with the constituent documents the act of transfer or splitting balance sheet respectively, and also the absence therein of provisions concerning legal succession with regard to the obligations of the reorganized legal person, shall entail a refusal of state registration of the legal persons which newly arose.
Article 56. Guarantees of Rights of Creditors of Legal Person in the Event of its Reorganization
1. A legal person under reorganization or the body that adopted the decision concerning the reorganization of a legal person is obliged to inform in writing the creditors of the legal person being reorganized thereof. The creditor of the legal person being reorganized shall have the right to demand for the termination or the performаnсе of the obligation before due time, the debtor with regard to which this legal person is, and for compensation of losses. 3. If the splitting balance sheet does not make it possible to determine the legal successor of the reorganized legal person, the legal persons which newly arose shall bear joint and several liability for the obligations of the reorganized legal person to its creditors.
Article 57. Liquidation of Legal Person 1. The liquidation of a legal person shall entail the termination thereof without the transfer of rights and duties by way of legal succession to other persons. 2. A legal person may be liquidated according to the decision of:
1) the owner of property (founders, participants) or the body of the legal person authorized thereto by the constituent documents, including in connection with the expiration of the time period for which that legal person has been created, achievement of the objective for which it has been created, violation by the commercial organization of the order for forming the charter capital established by the legislation, recognition of the state registration of the given legal person invalid by the court;
2) the court in the event of:
failure to take decision on liquidation in accordance with sub-clause 1 of this clause in connection with the expiration of the time period for which that legal person has been created, achievement of the objective for which it is created, violation by the commercial organization of the order for forming the charter capital established by the legislation, recognition of the state registration of the given legal person invalid by the court;
carrying out an activity without a proper special permit (license) or which is prohibited by legislative acts, or with repeated or serious violations of legislative acts;
decreasing the cost of net assets of commercial organizations for which minimum amounts of the charter capital is established by the legislation at the end of the second and every following financial year below the minimum amount of the charter capital established by the legislation:
violation of terms and order of the liquidation established by the legislation;
in other cases provided for by this Code and other legislative acts.
Upon detecting grounds for liquidation of a legal person specified in indents two, three, five and six of part one of this sub-clause, the authorized state bodies, within the limits of their competence, shall apply to the court with a claim on liquidating such legal person, unless otherwise established by the legislative acts.
Upon detecting grounds for liquidation of a legal person specified in indent six of part one of this sub- clause, the creditors of the legal person being liquidated are entitled to apply to the court with a claim on liquidating such legal person;
3) other bodies in the cases provided by legislative acts.
3. The decision of the court on liquidation of the legal person may impose duties on carrying out the liquidation of the legal person on the owners of its property (founders, participants) or a body authorized to liquidate the legal person by its constituent documents. 4. A legal person which is a commercial organization or operating in the form of a consumer cooperative, charitable or other fund shall be liquidated in accordance with Article 61 of this Code as a consequence of its being deemed to be insolvent (bankrupt). If the value of the property of such a legal person is insufficient to satisfy the demands of creditors, it may be liquidated only in accordance with the procedure provided for by Article 61 of this Code. The provisions on the liquidation of legal persons as a consequence of economic insolvency (bankruptcy) shall not extend to fiscal enterprises. 5. In the instances established by the legislation the liquidation of legal persons may be carried out only with consent of authorized state bodies.
Article 58. Duties of Person Which Adopted Decision on Liquidation of the Legal Person 1. The owner of property (founders, participants) of a legal person or the body authorized by the constituent documents which adopted the decision about liquidation of the legal person shall appoint the liquidation commission (liquidator), distribute duties between the chairperson and members of the liquidation commission (in the even of appointment of the liquidation commission), establish the order and time limits of the liquidation, unless otherwise established by legislative acts. Legislative acts may establish maximum (maximum permissible) time limits for the liquidation of a legal person.
2. When the legal person being liquidated has indebtedness before the creditors, the chairperson of the liquidation commission (liquidator) shall be a person that complies with requirements established by the legislation and not being the owner of property (founders, participants), head of this legal person.
3. From the day of the appointment of the liquidation commission (liquidator) the powers relating to the management of the affairs of the legal person shall pass to it. The liquidation commission (liquidator) shall act in the court in the name of the legal person being liquidated.
Article 59. Procedure for Liquidation of Legal Person
l. The chairperson of the liquidation commission (liquidator) is obliged to notify within ten working days after the date of adopting the decision about the liquidation of the legal person, in writing, the registering body for inclusion in the Unified State Register of Legal persons and Individual Entrepreneurs of the data about the fact that the legal person is in the process of being liquidated. In the cases and order established by the legislation, the data about the fact that the legal person is in the process of being liquidated, about the order and time limits for presenting demands by its creditors shall placed in the global computer network Internet with subsequent publication in printed mass media. In this instance the period presenting demands by the creditors of the legal person may not be less than two months from the date of placement of the data about the fact that the legal person is in the process of being liquidated in the global computer network Internet, unless another moment for beginning of the running of this period is established by legislative acts. The liquidation commission (liquidator) shall take all possible measures to elicit creditors and obtain accounts receivable, and also inform creditors in writing about the liquidation of the legal person.
Performance of operations on accounts of the legal person, its executing transactions not connected with the liquidation are prohibited. 2. After expiration of the term for submission of demands by creditors, the liquidation commission (liquidator) shall draw up the intermediate liquidation balance sheet, which shall contain information concerning the composition of the property of the legal person being liquidated, a list of demands submitted by creditors, and also the results of consideration of these demands. The intermediate liquidation balance sheet shall be confirmed by the owner of property (founders, participants) of the legal person or body which adopted the decision concerning the liquidation of the legal person, unless otherwise provided by the legislative acts.
3. If the monetary means of legal person being liquidated (except for institutions) are insufficient to satisfy the demands of creditors, the liquidation commission (liquidator) shall effectuate the sale of the property of the legal person at public sales in accordance with the procedure established by the acts of legislation.
4. The payment of monetary amounts to creditors of a legal person being liquidated shall be by the liquidation commission (liquidator) in the order of priority established by Article 60 of this Code and in accordance with the intermediate liquidation balance sheet, starting from the date of its confirmation, except for creditors of the fourth priority, payment to whom shall be made upon the expiry of a month from the date of confirmation of the intermediate liquidation balance sheet.
5. After completion of the settlement of accounts with creditors, the liquidation commission (liquidator) shall draw up the liquidation balance sheet, which shall be confirmed by the owner of property (founders, participants) of the legal person or by the body which adopted the decision concerning the liquidation of the legal person, unless otherwise provided by the legislative acts. 6. In the event that the property of a fiscal enterprise being liquidated, or the monetary means of the institution being liquidated are insufficient for satisfaction of the demands of creditors, the latter shall have the right to bring suit in a court to satisfy the remaining part of the demands at the expense of the owner of the property of this enterprise or institution.
7. The property of legal person, remaining after the satisfaction of the demands of creditors, shall be transferred to the owner of property (founders, participants) thereof, having rights to a thing in this property or rights of obligations with respect to this legal person, unless otherwise provided by the legislative acts or the constituent documents of the legal person.
8. The liquidation of a legal person shall be considered to be completed and the legal person to be liquidated from the date of adopting the decision about the entry into the Unified State Register of Legal
Persons and Individual Entrepreneurs by the registering body of the record about the exclusion thereof from that register.
Article 60. Satisfaction of Demands of Creditors l. When liquidating a legal person the demands of its creditors shall be satisfied in accordance with the following priority: 1) first, the demands of citizens to whom the legal person being liquidated bears liability for the causing of harm to life or health by means of capitalizing the respective time payments shall be satisfied; 2) second, accounts shall be settled with regard to the payment of severance benefits, the payment of remuneration under authors' contracts, and the payment for labor with persons who work under labor contracts and/or civil-law contracts; 3) third, the indebtedness on payments to the budget and state off-budget funds shall be paid, as well as demands of creditors on obligations secured by the pledge of property of the legal person being liquidated shall be satisfied at the expense and within the limits of funds received from the realization of pledged property; 4) fourth, payments to other creditors of a legal person being liquidated shall be carried out. The priority of satisfaction of demands of creditors in the course of liquidation of banks and non-bank credit and financial institutions and insurance organizations is determined taking in account specific features stipulated by the legislation. Priority of the satisfaction of demands of creditors at liquidation of a legal person due to its economic insolvency (bankruptcy) is determined in the order established by the legislation on economic insolvency (bankruptcy).
2. The demands of each priority shall be satisfied after the full satisfaction of demands of the preceding priority.
3. In the event the property of a legal person being liquidated is insufficient, it shall be distributed among the creditors of the respective priority in proportion to the amounts of demands subject to satisfaction, unless otherwise established by the legislative acts.
4. In the event of the refusal of the liquidation commission (liquidator) to satisfy the demands of a creditor or the evasion of the consideration thereof, a creditor shall have the right before confirmation of the liquidation balance sheet of the legal person to bring suit against the legal person being liquidated in court. By decision of the court the demands of the creditor may be satisfied at the expense of the residual property of the legal person being liquidated.
5. Demands of a creditor submitted after the expiry of the term established by the liquidation commission (liquidator) for the submission thereof shall be satisfied from the property of the legal person being liquidated remaining after the satisfaction of the demands of creditors submitted within the specified term. 6. Demands of creditors not satisfied because of the insufficiency of the property of the legal person being liquidated shall be considered to be paid, except for the case provided for in the Article 62 of this Code. Demands of creditors not recognized by the liquidation commission (liquidator), if the creditor has not brought suit in court, and also demands, the satisfaction of which has been refused to a creditor by decision of a court, also shall be considered to be paid.
Article 61. Economic Insolvency (Bankruptcy) of Legal Person 1. A legal person which is a commercial organization, except for a fiscal enterprise, and also a legal person operating in the form of a consumer cooperative or charitable or other fund, may, by decision of a
court, be deemed to be insolvent (bankrupt) if it cannot satisfy the demands of creditors. The deeming of a legal person to be bankrupt by a court shall entail its sanation, or, in case of impossibility or absence of grounds for continuation of its activity, liquidation. In case of declaring the legal person to be economically insolvent (the bankrupt), the legal person is subject to the sanation, or, in case of impossibility or absence of grounds for continuation of the activity, the legal person is subject to the liquidation.
2. The grounds for deeming a legal person to be bankrupt by a court, or declaring its own bankruptcy, and also the procedure for its sanation or liquidation shall be established by the legislation on economic insolvency (bankruptcy).
Article 62. Levying the Execution upon the Property Belonging to the Legal Person after the Liquidation of this Person If, after liquidation of the legal person, it would be proved that this legal person, with the purposes of avoidance of the liability to the creditors, has transmitted to other person or otherwise has intentionally hidden at least part of the property, the creditors, which have not obtained complete satisfaction of the claims within the limits of liquidation proceedings, have the right to levy execution upon this property for the non-paid part of the debt. In this case, the provisions of Article 284 of this Code are accordingly applied. The person, to which the property was transferred, is considered to be unfair, if this person was informed or should have been informed on the intention of the legal person to hide the property from the creditors.
§ 2. Economic Partnerships and Companies 1. General Provisions
Article 63. Basic Provisions on Economic Partnerships and Companies 1. Commercial organizations with a charter capital divided into participatory shares (stocks) of the founders (participants) shall be deemed to be economic partnerships and companies. The property created at the expense of contributions of the founders (participants), and also produced and acquired by the economic partnership or company in the process of its activity, shall belong to it by right of ownership. Economic company may be founded by one person or may consist of one participant. Specific features of legal status, creation, activity, reorganization and liquidation of the economic company consisting of one participant shall be determined by the legislation on economic companies.
2. Economic partnerships may be created in the form of a general partnership and special partnership.
3. Economic companies may be created in the form of a joint-stock company, limited liability company, or additional liability company.
4. Individual entrepreneurs and/or commercial organizations may be participants of general partnerships and may be general partners in special partnerships. Citizens and/or legal persons may be participants of economic companies and contributors to special partnerships. State bodies and bodies of local administration or self-government shall not have the right to act as participants of economic companies and contributors to special partnerships unless otherwise established by the legislation.
Unitary enterprises, state associations and institutions financed by owners may be participants of economic companies and contributors to special partnerships with the authorization of the owner (body authorized by the owner) unless otherwise established by the legislative acts. The participation of individual categories of citizens in economic partnerships and companies may be prohibited or limited by the legislation.
5. Economic partnerships and companies may be the founders (participants) of other economic partnerships and companies except for instances provided for by this Code and other acts of legislation.
6. Evaluation of the non-monetary contribution of a participant of an economic company shall be made by agreement between the founders (participants) of the company and in the cases provided for in the legislation shall be subject to expert verification of reliability of such evaluation.
7. [Excluded]
Article 64. Rights and Duties of Participants of Economic Partnership or Company 1. The participants of an economic partnership or company shall have the right to: 1) participate in the management of the affairs of the partnership or company, except for instances provided for by Article 83(2) of this Code and by the legislative acts; 2) receive information concerning the activity of the partnership or company and familiarize themselves with its documentation in accordance with the procedure established by the constituent documents; 3) take part in the distribution of profit; 4) receive in the event of the liquidation of the partnership or company the part of the property remaining after the settlement of accounts with creditors or the value thereof. The participants of an economic partnership or company also may have other rights provided for by the legislation on economic partnerships and companies, or constituent documents of a partnership or company. 2. In case of withdrawal or expulsion of the participant from the economic partnership or company (with the exception of the participant of the join-stock company), the cost of the part of net assets of the company, corresponding to the share of this participant in the charter capital (unless otherwise is provided by the constituent documents) and the part of profit received by the economic partnership or company from the moment of withdrawal of that participant to the moment of settlement, corresponding to the share of the participant, shall be paid to the participant. Subject to the agreement of the withdrawing (expulsed) participant with the remained participants of the economic partnership or company, instead of payment of the value of net assets, the property in kind can be delivered for the participant. The part of property of the economic partnership or company, which is due to the withdrawing (expulsed) participant, or the cost of this part is determined on the basis of the balance sheet (the inventory book of income and expenditure of organizations and individual entrepreneurs, applying the simplified taxation system) drawn up at the date of withdrawal (expulsion); the part of profit due to withdrawing (expulsed) participant is determined at the date of settlement. Payment of the cost of property or delivering the property in kind to the withdrawing (expulsed) participant of the limited liability company is carried out after the expiration of the fiscal year and after the approval of the annual report for the year of withdrawal (expulsion) from the company, within twelve months from the date of submitting the application for withdrawal or making the decision on expulsion, unless otherwise is provided by the constituent documents. 3. The participants of an economic partnership or company shall be obliged to: 1) make contributions in accordance with the procedure and amounts, by the means, and within the periods provided for by the legislative acts and constituent documents;
2) not divulge confidential information concerning the activity of the partnership or company; 3) perform another duties provided by the legislative acts. The participants of an economic partnership or company may also bear other duties provided for by its constituent documents.
Article 65. Transformation of Economic Partnerships and Companies
1. Economic partnerships and companies of one form or one type may be transformed into economic companies of another form or another type or into economic partnerships, production cooperatives or unitary enterprises by decision of the general meeting of participants in cases and in accordance with the procedure, established by the legislative acts, with the exception of economic companies consisting of one participant which may be transformed into economic companies of another form or another type or into unitary enterprises. In the event of the transformation of a partnership into a company, each full partner who has become a participant (stockholder) of the company shall for two years bear subsidiary liability with all of its property for obligations which passed to the company from the partnership. The alienation by a former partner of participatory shares (stocks) belonging to it shall not relieve it from such liability. The rules set out in this Clause shall apply respectively when transforming a partnership into a production cooperative or into unitary enterprise.
2. General Partnership
Article 66. Basic Provisions on General Partnership 1. A partnership whose participants (general partners) in accordance with a contract concluded between them engage in entrepreneurial activity in the name of the partnership and, jointly and severally with each other, bear subsidiary liability for its obligations with all of the property belonging to them, shall be deemed to be a general partnership.
2. A person may be a participant of only one general partnership.
3. The firm name of a general partnership must contain either the names of all its participants, and the words "general partnership", or the name of one or several participants with the addition of the words "and company," and the words "general partnership".
Article 67. constituent contract of General Partnership l. A general partnership shall be created and operate on the basis of the constituent contract. The constituent contract shall be signed by all of its participants. 2. The constituent contract of a general partnership must contain, in addition to the information specified in Article 48(2) of this Code, the conditions concerning the amount and composition of the charter capital of the partnership; the amount and procedure for changing the participatory shares of each of the participants in the charter capital; the amount, composition, periods, and procedure for making contributions by them; the liability of the participants for a violation of the duties relating to making contributions.
Article 68. Management in General Partnership
1. The management of the activity of a general partnership shall be effectuated by the common consent of all the participants. Instances when a decision is adopted by a majority vote of the participants may be provided for by the constituent contract of the partnership.
2. Each participant of a general partnership shall have one vote unless another procedure for determining the number of votes of its participants has been provided for by the constituent contract.
3. Each participant of a partnership, irrespective of whether he is authorized to conduct the affairs of the partnership, shall have the right to familiarize himself with all of the documentation relating to conducting the affairs. A waiver of this right or limitation thereof, including those by agreement of the participants of the partnership, shall be void.
Article 69. Conducting the Affairs of General Partnership 1. Each participant of a general partnership shall have the right to operate in the name of the partnership unless it has been established by the constituent contract that all of its participants conduct the affairs jointly, or the conducting of affairs has been entrusted by them to individual participants. In the event of the joint conducting of the affairs of the partnership by its participants, the consent of all participants of the partnership shall be required in order to conclude each transaction. If the conduct of the affairs of the partnership is entrusted by its participants to one or several of them, the remaining participants must, in order to conclude transactions in the name of the partnership, have a power of attorney from the participant(s) to whom the conducting of the affairs of the partnership has been entrusted. In relations with third persons the partnership shall not have the right to refer to provisions of the constituent contract limiting the powers of the participants of the partnership, except for instances when the partnership proves that the third person at the time of concluding the transaction knew or knowingly should have known about the lack of the participant of the partnership's right to operate in the name of the partnership. 2. The powers to conduct the affairs of the partnership granted to one or several participants may be terminated by a court upon the demand of one or several other participants of the partnership when there are serious grounds, in particular, as a consequence of a flagrant violation by an authorized person(s) of his duties or of discovering that he is not capable of reasonably conducting affairs. Necessary changes shall be made in the constituent contract of the partnership on the basis of a judicial decision.
Article 70. Duties of Participant of General Partnership l. The participant of a general partnership shall be obliged to participate in its activity in accordance with the conditions of the constituent contract. 2. [Excluded] 3. The participant of a general partnership shall not have the right without the consent of the remaining participants to conclude in his name and in his interests or in the interests of third persons a transaction of the same nature as that which comprises the subject of activity of the partnership. In the event of a violation of this rule, the partnership shall have the right at its discretion to demand from such participant either compensation for losses caused to the partnership, or the transfer to the partnership of all advantage acquired under such transactions.
Article 71. Distribution of Profit and Losses of General Partnership
1. Profit and losses of a general partnership shall be distributed between the participants thereof in proportion to their participatory shares in the charter capital unless otherwise provided by the constituent contract or other agreement of the participants. An agreement concerning the exclusion of any of the participants of the partnership from participation in the profits or in the losses shall not be permitted.
2. If as a consequence of losses incurred by the partnership, the value of its net assets becomes less than the amount of its charter capital, the profit received by the partnership shall not be distributed among the participants so long as the value of the net assets does not exceed the amount of charter capital.
Article 72. Liability of Participants of General Partnership for its Obligations 1. The participants of a partnership shall jointly and severally bear subsidiary liability with all of their property for the obligations of the partnership. 2. The participant of a general partnership who is not a founder thereof shall be liable equally with the other participants also for obligations which arose before his joining the partnership. A participant who has withdrawn from the partnership shall be liable for the obligations of the partnership which arose before the time of his withdrawal equally with the remaining participants for two years from the date of confirmation of the report on the activity of the partnership for the year in which he withdrew from the partnership. 3. An agreement of the participants of the partnership concerning the limitation or elimination of the liability provided for in this Article shall be void.
Article 73. Change of Composition of Participants of General Partnership 1. Changing the composition of participants of the general partnership does not mean liquidation of the general partnership, unless otherwise is stipulated in the constituent contract of the general partnership. 2. Changing the composition of participants of the general partnership can happen as a result of: 1) withdrawal of the participant; 2) expulsion of the participant; 3) concession of the participant’s share to another person; 4) joining a new participant; 5) deeming the participant to be a bankrupt; 6) death of the participant, declaring the participant deceased, deeming the participant to be missing, deeming lack of active legal capacity or limitation of active legal capacity, or liquidation of the participant being a legal person. 3. In case of leaving of one of the participants from the general partnership, the shares of the remained participants in the charter capital of the general partnership are changed proportionally to the amount of contributions of these participants to the charter capital, unless otherwise is provided by the constituent contract or another agreement of the participants.
Article 74. Withdrawal of Participant from General Partnership 1. The participant of a general partnership, founded without specification of the term of operation, shall have the right to withdraw therefrom, having declared his refusal to participate in the partnership not less than six months before the actual withdrawal from the partnership. The pre-term refusal to participate in the general partnership, founded for a specific term, is allowed in cases specified in the constituent contract, or, if there are no such provisions in the constituent contract,
only subject to justifiable reasons. In case of dispute, the matter on withdrawal is resolved judicially. 2. Any agreement between the participants of a partnership to waive the right to withdraw from the partnership shall be void.
Article 75. Expulsion of Participant from the General Partnership 1. In case of non-fulfilling or improper fulfilling the duties by the participant of the general partnership, the participants of the general partnership have the right to appeal to the court for expulsion of such participant from the general partnership. 2. The expulsion of the participant from the general partnership takes place also in case of levying the execution upon the whole share of the participant in the general partnership. In such a case, the judicial decision on expulsion is not required.
Article 76. Concession of Participatory Share in General Partnership to Another Person 1. The participant of the general partnership has the right, subject to consent of all other participants, to transfer his share in the charter capital or part thereof to another participant of the general partnership participant or to the third party. In such a case, other participants of the general partnership have the right of priority purchase of this share (part thereof) over other persons in accordance with the procedure determined by the constituent contract. 2. In case of transfer of the participatory share (part thereof) to another person, the liabilities of the participant transferring the participatory share (part thereof) are transferred, in full or in appropriate part, to the before-mentioned another person. Transferring the participatory share in full by the participant of the partnership to another person means termination of participation in the partnership.
Article 77. Joining New Participant to General Partnership The person has the right to become the participant of the general partnership, subject to consent of other participants of the general partnership, and subject to making a contribution to the charter capital of the general partnership in accordance with the constituent contract of the general partnership.
Article 78. Changing the Composition of Participants of the General Partnership in Consequence of the Participant’s Death, Declaring the Participant to be Deceased, Deeming the Participant to be Missing, Lack of Active Legal Capacity or Limitation of Active Legal Capacity, or Liquidation of the Participant Being a Legal Person 1. In case of the participant’s death or declaring the participant to be deceased, the heir of the participant has the right (but not obliged) to join the general partnership, subject to consent of other participants. Settlements with the heir, not joined the general partnership, are carried out in accordance with Article 64(2) of this Code. 2. In case of liquidation of the legal person, being the participant of the general partnership, or deeming the participant to be missing or deeming lack of active legal capacity, or limitation of active legal capacity of the participant, the participatory share of such participant in the general partnership is separated in accordance with Article 64(2) of this Code.
Article 79. Levying Execution on Participatory Share of Participant in Charter Capital of General Partnership
Levying execution on the participatory share of a participant in the charter capital of a general partnership regarding the own debts of the participant shall be permitted only when his other property is insufficient to cover the debts. Creditors of such a participant shall have the right to demand of the general partnership the apportionment of the part of the property of the partnership corresponding to the participatory share of the debtor in the charter capital for the purpose of levying execution on this property. The part of the property of the partnership subject to apportionment or the value thereof shall be determined according to the accounting balance sheet (the inventory book of income and expenditure of organizations and individual entrepreneurs, applying the simplified taxation system) drawn up at the time of the creditors submitting the demand concerning the apportionment.
Article 80. Liquidation of General Partnership A general partnership shall be liquidated on the grounds specified in Article 57 of this Code, and also when a sole participant remains in the partnership. Such participant shall have the right within three months from the time when he became the sole participant of the partnership to transform such partnership into a unitary enterprise in accordance with the procedure established by this Code.
3. Special Partnership
Article 81. Basic Provisions on Special Partnership 1. A special partnership shall be deemed to be a partnership in which together with participants carrying out entrepreneurial activity in the name of the partnership and liable for the obligations of the partnership with their property (general partners) there are one or several participants (contributors, special partners) who shall bear the risk of losses connected with the activity of the partnership within the limits of the amounts of the contributions made by them and shall not take part in the effectuation by the partnership of entrepreneurial activity.
2. The status of general partners participating in a special partnership and their liability for the obligations of the partnership shall be determined by the legislation on the participants of a general partnership.
3. A person may be a full partner only in one special partnership. A participant of a general partnership may not be a full partner in a special partnership. A full partner in a special partnership may not be a participant of a general partnership. 4. The firm name of a special partnership must contain either the name(s) of all of the general partners and the words "special partnership", or the name of at least one full partner with the addition of the words "and company" and the words "special partnership". If the name of a contributor is included in the firm name of a special partnership, subject to the consent of this contributor, such contributor becomes a full partner. 5. The rules of this Code on the general partnership shall apply to a special partnership insofar as this is not contrary to the rules of this Code on the special partnership.
Article 82. The constituent contract of Special Partnership
1. A special partnership shall be created and shall operate on the basis of the constituent contract. The constituent contract shall be signed by all of the general partners. The constituent contract of a special partnership must contain, besides the information specified in Article 48(2) of this Code, the conditions concerning the amount and composition of the charter capital of the partnership; the amount and procedure for changing the participatory shares of each of the general
partners in the charter capital; the amount, composition, periods, and procedure for the making of contributions by them, their liability for a violation of the duties relating to the making of contributions; the aggregate amount of the contributions to be made by the contributors.
Article 83. Management in Special Partnership and Conducting its Affairs 1. The management of the activity of a special partnership shall be effectuated by the general partners. The procedure for the management and conducting of the affairs of such partnership by its general partners shall be established by them according to the legislation on the general partnership. 2. The contributors shall not have the right to participate in the management and conducting of the affairs of a special partnership, nor to act in its name, other than under a power of attorney. They shall not have the right to contest the actions of the general partners relating to the management and the conducting of the affairs of the partnership.
Article 84. Rights and Duties of Contributor to Special Partnership 1. The contributor to a special partnership shall be obliged to make a contribution to the charter capital. Making of a contribution shall be certified by a certificate of participation issued to the contributor by the partnership. 2. The contributor to a special partnership shall have the right to: 1) receive part of the profit of the partnership due for his participatory share in the charter capital in accordance with the procedure provided for by the constituent contract; 2) familiarize himself with the annual reports and annual accounting (financial) statements (the inventory book of income and expenditure of organizations and individual entrepreneurs, applying the simplified taxation system) of the partnership; 3) at the end of the financial year withdraw from the partnership and receive his contribution in accordance with the procedure provided for by the constituent contract; 4) transfer his participatory share in the charter capital or part thereof to another contributor or to a third person. The contributors shall enjoy a preferential right of purchase against third persons of the participatory share (part thereof) according to the conditions and procedure provided for by Article 92(2) of this Code. The transfer by the contributor of his entire participatory share to another person shall terminate his participation in the partnership. Other rights of a contributor also may be provided for by the constituent contract of a special partnership.
Article 85. Liquidation of Special Partnership 1. A special partnership shall be liquidated in the event of the withdrawal of all the contributors who participated therein. However, the general partners shall have the right instead of liquidation to transform the special partnership into a general partnership, or into the unitary enterprise, when only one participant remains in the partnership. A special partnership shall be liquidated also on the grounds of liquidation of a general partnership (Article 80). However, a special partnership shall be preserved if at least one full partner and one contributor remain therein. 2. In the event of the liquidation of a special partnership, including in the event of economic insolvency (bankruptcy), contributors shall have the preferential right before the general partners to receive contributions from the property of the partnership remaining after the satisfaction of the demands of its creditors. The property of the partnership remaining thereafter shall be distributed between the general partners and the contributors in proportion to their participatory shares in the charter capital of the partnership unless
another procedure has been established by the constituent contract or by agreement of the general partners and the contributors.
4. Limited Liability Company
Article 86. Basic Provisions on Limited Liability Company 1. A limited liability company shall be deemed to be a company, the charter capital of which is divided into participatory shares of amounts determined by the charter. The participants of a limited liability company shall not be liable for its obligations and shall bear the risk of losses connected with the activity of the company within the limits of the value of the contributions made by them. The participants of a company who have not made contributions in full shall bear joint and several liability for its obligations within the limits of the value of the unpaid portion of the contribution of each of the participants. 2. The firm name of a limited liability company must contain the name of the company, and also the words "limited liability company". 3. The legal status of a limited liability company and the rights and duties of its participants shall be determined by the legislation on limited liability companies.
Article 87. Participants of Limited Liability Company 1. The number of participants of a limited liability company must not exceed the limit established by the legislative acts. Otherwise it shall be subject to reorganization within a year, and upon the expiry of this period, it shall be subject to liquidation in a judicial proceeding if the number of its participants is not reduced to up to the limit established by the legislative acts. 2. A limited liability company may be founded by one person or may consist of one participant, including in case of creation as a result of reorganization of a legal person.
Article 88. Constituent Documents of Limited Liability Company
1. The constituent documents of a limited liability company shall be the charter confirmed by its founders.
2. The charter of a limited liability company must contain, in addition to the information specified in Article 48(2) of this Code, conditions concerning the amount of the charter capital of the company; concerning the amount of the participatory shares of each participant; the amount, composition of contributions of the participants; the composition and competence of the management bodies of the company, and the procedure for the adoption of decisions by them, including on questions with regard to which decisions shall be adopted unanimously or by a qualified majority of votes, and also other information provided for by the legislation on limited liability companies.
Article 89. Charter Capital of Limited Liability Company 1. The charter capital of a limited liability company shall be comprised of the value of the contributions of its participants. The charter capital shall determine the minimum amount of the property of the company guaranteeing the interests of its creditors.
2. The relieving of a participant of a limited liability company from the duty to make a contribution to the charter capital of the company, including by means of setting off demands against the company, shall not
be permitted except for the instances established by the legislative acts.
3. [Excluded]
4. [Excluded] 5. Reduction of the charter capital of a limited liability company shall be permitted after informing all of its creditors. The latter shall have the right in this event to demand the termination or performance, before due time, of the respective obligations of the company and the compensation of losses to them. 6. [Excluded]
Article 90. Management in Limited Liability Company 1. The supreme body of the management of a limited liability company shall be the general meeting of its participants. An executive body (collegial and/or one-man) carrying out the current direction of its activity and accountable to the general meeting of its participants shall be created in a limited liability company. A one-man management body of the company also may be elected not from among its participants. In the limited liability company may be created, by the decision of its founders (participants) in accordance with the charter, board of directors (supervisory board). 2. The competence of the management bodies of the company, and also the procedure for the adoption of decisions by them and acting in the name of the company, shall be determined in accordance with the legislation on limited liability companies and by the charter of the company. 3. There shall be relegated to the exclusive competence of the general meeting of participants of a limited liability company: 1) change of the charter of the company, change of the amount of its charter capital; 2) formation of executive bodies of the company and termination of their powers before time; 3) confirmation of the annual reports and annual accounting (financial) statements (data of the inventory book of income and expenditure of organizations and individual entrepreneurs, applying the simplified taxation system) of the company and distribution of its profits and losses; 4) decision concerning the reorganization or liquidation of the company; 5) election of the audit commission (the auditor) of the company. Deciding of other questions may be relegated also by the legislation on limited liability companies and the statute of the limited liability company to the exclusive competence of the general meeting. Questions relegated to the exclusive competence of the general meeting of participants of the company may not be transferred by it for decision of the executive body of the company. 4. In order to hold audit of the accounting (financial) reports of the limited liability company, to render other auditing services, including in relation to affiliates and representative offices of the limited liability company, it is entitled, in in the instances and in the order established by the legislative act is obliged) to engage an audit organization, auditor carrying out activity as an individual (hereinafter – auditor – individual entrepreneur). The audit of the accounting (financial) statements of the company (data of the inventory book of income and expenditure of organizations and individual entrepreneurs, applying the simplified taxation system) of the company may also be carried out upon a demand of any of its participants. The procedure for conducting the audit of the activity of the company shall be determined by the legislation and by the charter of the company. 5. Publication by the company of annual accounting (financial) statements shall be carried out in the instances provided for by the legislation.
Article 91. Reorganization and Liquidation of Limited Liability Company 1. A limited liability company may be voluntarily reorganized or liquidated by the unanimous decision of its participants. Other grounds for the reorganization and liquidation of the company, and also the procedure for its reorganization and liquidation, shall be determined by the legislative acts. 2. A limited liability company may transform itself into a joint-stock company, additional liability company, economic partnership, production cooperative or unitary enterprise.
Article 92 Transfer of Participatory Share in Charter Capital of Limited Liability Company to Another Person
1. The participant of a limited liability company may sell or otherwise alienate his participatory share (part of the share) in the charter capital of the company to one or several participants of this company or the company itself.
2. The alienation by the participant of a company of his participatory share (part of the share) to third persons shall be permitted unless otherwise provided by the legislative acts or the charter of the company. The participants of the company shall enjoy a preferential right to purchase the participatory share of the participant (part of the share) in proportion to the amounts of their participatory shares unless the charter of the company has provided a different procedure for exercising this right, or unless otherwise provided for in laws and in the acts of the President of the Republic of Belarus. If the participants of the company refuse their preferential right or do not take advantage of their preferential right within a time limit determined by the charter of the company, but not more than thirty days from the day of sending by the participant the notification about its sale, the participatory share (part of the share) of the participant may be alienated to the company itself. If the participants of the company do not take advantage of their preferential right or the company itself does not take advantage of the right to buy the participatory share (part of the share) of the participant, the participatory share (part of the share) of the participant may be alienated to a third person.
3. If in accordance with the charter of a limited liability company the alienation of the participatory share of a participant (part of the share) to third persons is impossible, and the other participants of the company refuse to purchase it, the company shall be obliged to pay the participant its actual value or to issue the property in kind to him which corresponds to such value.
4. The participatory share of the participant of a limited liability company may be alienated until the payment thereof in full only in that part which has been already paid up.
5. In the event of the acquisition of the participatory share of a participant (part of the share) by the limited liability company itself, it shall be obliged either to distribute the participatory share which it bought out for it own funds among other participants in proportion to their shares or to realize it to the other participants or to third persons within periods and in accordance with the procedure provided for by the legislation on limited liability companies and by the charter of the company, or to reduce its charter capital in accordance with Article 89 (5) of this Code. 6. The participatory shares in the charter capital of a limited liability company shall pass to the heirs of citizens and to the legal successors of legal persons who are participants of the company unless the constituent documents of the company have provided that such transfer shall be permitted only with the consent of the other participants of the company. A refusal to consent to the transfer of a participator share shall entail the duty of the company to pay to the heirs (legal successors) of that participant its real value or to issue property in kind to them for such value in accordance with the procedure and on the conditions
provided for by the legislation on limited liability companies and the constituent documents of the company.
Article 93. Withdrawal of Participant of Limited Liability Company from the Company A participant of a limited liability company shall have the right at any time to withdraw from the company irrespective of the consent of its other participants. Withdrawal of participants of the limited liability company from the company as a result of which no participant remains in the company, including withdrawal of the sole participant of the limited liability company from the company, is not allowed.
5. Additional Liability Company
Article 94. Basic Provisions on Additional Liability Company
1. An additional liability company shall be deemed to be a company, whose charter capital has been divided into participatory shares of the amounts determined by the charter. The participants of such a company shall bear subsidiary liability jointly and severally for its obligations with their property within the limits, defined by the constituent documents of the company, but not less than within the amount, established by the legislative acts. In the event of the economic insolvency (bankruptcy) of one of the participants, his liability for the obligations of the company shall be distributed among the remaining participants in proportion to their contributions unless another procedure for the distribution of liability has been provided for by the constituent documents of the company. 2. The firm name of an additional liability company must contain the name of the company and the words "additional liability company". 3. The rules of this Code on the limited liability company shall apply to the additional liability company insofar the legislative acts do not provide otherwise.
Article 95. Change of Amount of Additional Liability The additional liability company has the right, subject to the notification of creditors, to reduce the amount of additional liability of the participants of the company (however, as a result of such reduction, the amount of additional liability of the participants should not become less than the amount established by the legislative acts), or to increase the amount of additional liability of the company participants. The creditors of the additional liability company have the right, in case of reduction of the size of additional liability of participants of the company, to demand for the termination or the performаnсе of the respective obligations of the company before due time, and for the compensation of losses.
6. Joint-Stock Company
Article 96. Basic Provisions on Joint-Stock Company 1. A joint-stock company shall be deemed to be a company whose charter capital has been divided into a determined number of stocks having equal par value. The participants of a joint-stock company (stockholders) shall not be liable for its obligations and shall bear the risk of losses connected with the activity of the company within the limits of the value of the stocks belonging to them. Stockholders who have not fully paid up stocks shall bear joint and several liability for the obligations of the joint-stock company within the limits of the unpaid portion of the value of the stocks belonging to
them.
2. The firm name of a joint-stock company must contain its name and an indication that the company is a joint-stock company.
3. The legal status of a joint-stock company and the rights and duties of the stockholders shall be determined in accordance with the legislation on joint-stock companies.
Article 97. Open and Closed Joint-Stock Companies 1. A joint-stock company the stocks of which may be placed and circulated among a non-limited set of persons is an open joint-stock company. Such a joint-stock company is entitled to conduct an open subscription for stocks issued by it and a free sale of stocks of an additional issue on the conditions established by the legislation on securities, and in cases of placing of stocks of an additional issue at the expense of own capital of that company and/or means of its stockholders, and also in other cases specified in the legislative acts - closed placement of stocks of an additional issue among stockholders. An open joint-stock company is obliged to disclose information about the joint-stock company in the volume and the order determined by the legislation on securities. 2. The joint-stock company the stocks of which are placed and circulated only among stockholders and/or a limited set of persons determined in accordance with the legislation on joint-stock companies is a closed joint- stock company. Closed joint-stock company has the right to carry out only closed (among limited number of persons) placing of stocks of an additional issue. 3. The number of participants of a closed joint-stock company may not exceed the number established by the legislative acts. Otherwise it is to be reorganized within a year, and upon the expiry of this period, be liquidated in a judicial procedure unless the number of participants is reduced to the limit established by the legislative acts. 4. A closed joint-stock company may, and in the instances provided for by the legislation is obliged to, disclose information about the joint-stock company in the volume and the order determined by the legislation on securities. 5. Shareholders of a closed joint-stock company have a preferential right to buy shares being sold by other shareholders of that company. If as a result of the realization by shareholders of the priority right, the shares cannot be purchased in the offered number or none of the shareholders expresses desire to purchase the shares offered for the realization, the company itself is entitled to purchase respectively the shares unclaimed by shareholders or offered for the realization at the price agreed with their holder and/or to propose a third person to purchase those shares at the price not lower than the price offered to the shareholders of the closed joint-stock company.
If the shares offered for the realization cannot be purchased in accordance with part one of this clause in full, an agreement may be reached on the partial sale of the shares offered for the realization to the shareholders and/or to the company, and/or to a third person determined in accordance with part one of this clause. In this instance the shareholder may realize his right to the partial sale of the shares subject to selling the shares offered for the realization to all shareholders and/or the company and/or to a third person determined in accordance with part one of this clause, which expressed the wish of partial purchase of those shares. The shares remaining after the partial sale may be sold to any third person at the price not lower than their selling to the shareholder of the closed joint-stock company.
In the event when the agreement on partial sale of the shares offered for the realization to the shareholders and/or the company and/or a third person determined in accordance with part one of this clause has not been reached, those shares may be sold to any third person at the price not lower than the price offered to the closed joint-stock company shareholders.
The procedure of sale, exchange, donation by stockholder of the closed joint-stock company of their stocks is determined by the legislation on joint-stock companies.
The charter of the closed joint-stock company or a decision of the general meeting of stockholder adopted by a majority of not less than three quarters of votes of the persons that took part in that general meeting may limit the set of third persons to whom the stockholders of that company may sell or alienate otherwise the stocks of that company. 6. In case of pledge of stocks of the closed joint-stock company and subsequent levying execution on these stocks by the pledgee, the rules of Clause 5 of this Article are accordingly applied. However, the pledgee has the right to keep the stocks, instead of alienation of the stocks to the third party. 7. The shares of the closed joint-stock company are transferred to the heirs of the citizen or the to the legal successors of the legal person, which was the stockholder, if there is no provision in the charter of the company specifying that such passing is permitted only subject to the consent of the company. In the latter case, in case of refusal in transferring the stocks, these stocks shall be purchased by other stockholders or by the company itself in accordance with the rules of Clause 5 of this Article. However, the heirs (legal successors) have the right to keep the stocks, instead of alienation of the stocks to the third party.
Article 98. Formation of Joint-Stock Company 1. The founders of a joint-stock company shall conclude between themselves a contract determining the procedure for the effectuation by them of joint activity relating to the creation of the company; the amount of the charter capital of the company; the categories of stocks to be issued and the procedure for placing them, and also other conditions provided for by the legislation on joint-stock companies. The contract concerning the creation of a joint-stock company shall be concluded in writing. 2. The founders of a joint-stock company shall bear joint and several liability for the obligations which arose before the registration of the company. The company shall undertake liability for the obligations of the founders connected with its creation only in the event of subsequent approval of their actions by the general meeting of stockholders. 3. The constituent document of a joint-stock company shall be its charter, confirmed by the founders. The charter of a joint-stock company must, in addition to the information specified in Article 48(2) of this Code, contain conditions concerning the categories of stocks to be issued by the company, their par value and quantity; the amount of the charter capital of the company; the rights of stockholders; the composition and competence of the management bodies of the company and the procedure for the adoption of decisions by them, including questions, the decisions regarding which shall be adopted unanimously or by a qualified majority of votes. The charter of the joint-stock company also must contain other data provided for by the legislation on joint-stock companies.
4. The procedure for the performance of other actions relating to the creation of a joint-stock company, including the competence of the constituent meeting, shall be determined by the legislation on joint-stock companies.
5. The peculiarities of creating joint-stock companies in the event of privatization of state property shall be determined by the legislation on privatization.
6. A joint-stock company may be created by one person or may consist of one person, including as a result of reorganization of a legal person.
Article 99. Charter Capital of Joint-Stock Company
l. The charter capital of a joint-stock company shall comprise the par value of the stocks of the company. The charter capital of the company shall determine the minimum amount of the property of the company, guaranteeing the interests of its creditors. 2. Relieving a stockholder from the duty to pay up the stocks of the company, including relieving it of this duty by means of setting off demands against the company, is not permitted except for the instances established by the legislative acts. 3. An open subscription for the stocks of a joint-stock company shall not be permitted until the charter capital is fully paid up. When a joint-stock company is founded, all of its stocks must be distributed among the founders. 4. [Excluded] 5. The legislative acts or the charter of the company may establish limitations on total par value and the number of common (ordinary) and/or privileged stocks belonging to one stockholder or on the share of stocks belonging to one stockholder in the total amount of the charter capital of the joint-stock company.
Article 100. Increase of Charter Capital of Joint-Stock Company 1. A joint-stock company shall have the right by decision of the general meeting of stockholders to increase the charter capital by means of increasing the par value of the stocks or the issuance of stocks of an additional issue. 2. An increase of the charter capital of a joint-stock company shall be permitted after it is paid up in full. 3. In the instances, provided for by the legislative acts, a preferential right of stockholders, who possess common (ordinary) or other voting stocks, to acquire stocks of an additional issue of that company, may be established by the charter of the company.
Article 101. Reduction of Charter Capital of Joint-Stock Company 1. A joint-stock company shall have the right by decision of the general meeting of stockholders to reduce the charter capital by means of reducing the par value of the stocks, or by means of purchasing a part of the stocks for the purposes of reducing the total number thereof. A reduction of charter capital of a company shall be permitted after informing all of its creditors in accordance with the procedure determined by the legislation on joint-stock companies. In this connection the creditors of the company shall have the right to demand the termination and the performance, before the due time, of the respective obligations of the company and compensation of losses to them. 2. A reduction of the charter capital of a joint-stock company by means of purchasing a part of stocks by this company for the purposes or reducing their total number is permissible if such possibility has been provided for in the charter of the company.
Article 102. Limitations on Issue of Securities and Payment of Dividends of Joint-Stock Company
1. The share of preferred stocks in the overall amount of the charter capital of a joint-stock company must not exceed 25 percent.
2. Limitations for a joint-stock company to issue bonds may be established by the legislative acts.
3. A joint-stock company has no right to adopt decision on declaring and paying dividends, as well as to pay dividends: 1) until all of the charter capital is paid up in full;
2) if the value of net assets of the joint-stock company is less than its charter capital and reserve fund or becomes less than the amount thereof as a result of the payment of dividends; 3) in other instances provided for by the legislative acts.
Article 103. Management in Joint-Stock Company 1. The supreme management body of a joint-stock company shall be the general meeting of its stockholders. There shall be relegated to the exclusive competence of the general meeting of stockholders: 1) change of the charter of the company, including change of the amount of its charter capital; 2) election of members of the board of directors (supervisory board) and inspection commission (inspector) of the company, and termination of their powers before the appointed time; 3) [deleted] 4) confirmation of the annual reports; annual accounting (financial) statements, profits and losses accounts of the company (data of the inventory book of income and expenditure of organizations and individual entrepreneurs, applying the simplified taxation system), and distribution of its profits and losses; 5) decision concerning reorganization or liquidation of the company. The deciding of other questions also may be relegated to the exclusive competence of the general meeting of stockholders by the legislative acts and the charter of the joint-stock company. Questions relegated by the legislative acts and the charter of the joint-stock company to the exclusive competence of the general meeting of stockholders may not be transferred by them for decision of the executive bodies of the company. 2. In a company with more than 50 stockholders a board of directors (supervisory board) shall be created. In the event a board of directors (supervisory board) is created, its exclusive competence must be determined by the charter of the company in accordance with the legislation on joint-stock companies. Questions relegated by the charter to the exclusive competence of the board of directors (supervisory board) may not be transferred by them for decision of executive bodies of the company. 3. The executive body of a company may be collegial (board, directorate) and/or one-man (director, director general). It shall effectuate current direction over the activity of the company and be accountable to the board of directors (supervisory board) and general meeting of stockholders. To the competence of the executive body of the company shall be relegated the deciding of all questions which do not constitute the exclusive competence of other management bodies of the company specified by the legislative acts or by the charter of the company. By decision of the general meeting of stockholders the powers of an executive body of the company may be transferred under a contract to another commercial organization or individual entrepreneur (manager). 4. The competence of the management bodies of a joint-stock company, and also the procedure for the adoption of decisions by them and of acting in the name of the company, shall be determined in accordance with the legislation on joint-stock companies and by the charter of the company. 5. A joint-stock company obliged in accordance with the legislation on securities to disclose information about the joint-stock company must annually conduct an audit of the annual accounting (financial) reports. The audit of the accounting (financial) statements (data of the inventory book of income and expenditure of organizations and individual entrepreneurs, applying the simplified taxation system) of a joint-stock company, including that not obliged to disclose information about the joint-stock company in accordance
with the legislation on securities, must be conducted at any time at the demand of the stockholders which possess in the aggregate ten percent or more of the stocks of this company. The procedure for conducting the audit of the activity of a joint-stock company shall be determined by the legislation and by the charter of the company.
Article 104. Reorganization and Liquidation of Joint-Stock Company 1. A joint-stock company may be voluntarily reorganized or liquidated by decision of the general meeting of stockholders. Other grounds and the procedure for reorganization and liquidation of the joint-stock company shall be determined by the acts of legislation. 2. A joint-stock company shall have the right to be transformed into a limited liability company, additional liability company, economic partnership, production cooperative or unitary enterprise.
7. Subsidiary And Dependent Companies
Article 105. Subsidiary Economic Company
1. An economic company shall be deemed to be a subsidiary if another (principal) economic company or partnership by virtue of predominant participation in its charter capital, or in accordance with a contract concluded between them, or otherwise has the possibility to determine the decisions adopted by that company.
2. A subsidiary company shall not be liable for the debts of its principal company (partnership). The principal company (partnership) which has the right to give to the subsidiary company instructions binding upon it, including those under a contract with it, shall be liable jointly and severally with the subsidiary company with regard to transactions concluded by the latter in performance of such instructions. In the event of the economic insolvency (bankruptcy) of the subsidiary company through the fault of the principal company (partnership) the latter shall bear subsidiary liability for its debts. 3. The participants (stockholders) of a subsidiary company shall have the right to demand compensation by the principal company (partnership) for losses caused through its fault to the subsidiary company unless otherwise established by the legislation on economic companies.
Article 106. Dependent Economic Company l. An economic company is deemed to be dependent if another economic company has the share in the charter capital (stocks) of this company corresponding twenty or more percent of votes of the total number of votes which it can use at the general meeting of the participants of such company.
2.The limits of mutual participation of economic companies in the charter capital of one another and the number of votes which one of such companies may use at the general meeting of participants or stockholders of the other company shall be determined by the legislative acts.
§ 3. Production Cooperatives
Article 107. Concept of Production Cooperative
1. A production cooperative (artel) shall be deemed to be a commercial organization, the participants of which should make the property share contributions, take personal labor participation in its activity and bear subsidiary liability on the obligations of the production cooperative in equal portions, unless otherwise is determined in the charter, within the limits, determined by the charter, but not less than the value of the annual income gained in the production cooperative. 2. The firm name of a cooperative must contain its name and the words "production cooperative" or "artel". 3. The legal status of production cooperatives and the rights and duties of their members shall be determined in accordance with the legislation on the production cooperatives.
Article 108. Formation of Production Cooperatives
1. The constituent document of a cooperative shall be its charter, confirmed by the general meeting of its members.
2. The charter of a cooperative must contain, in addition to the information specified in Article 48(2) of this Code, the conditions concerning the amount of the charter capital, the amount of the share contributions of the members of the cooperative; the composition and procedure for the making of share contributions by members of the cooperative and their liability for a violation of the obligation to make share contributions; the character and procedure of labor participation of its members in the activity of the cooperative and their liability for a violation of the obligation relating to personal labor participation; the procedure for the distribution of profits and losses of the cooperative; the amount and conditions of subsidiary liability of its members for the debts of the cooperative, the composition and competence of the management bodies of the cooperative and the procedure for the adoption of decisions by them, including on questions the decisions regarding which shall be adopted unanimously or by a qualified majority of votes.
3. The number of members of a cooperative must be not less than three.
Article 109. Property of Production Cooperative 1. Property in the ownership of a production cooperative shall be divided into shares of its members in accordance with the charter of the cooperative. It may be established by the charter of the cooperative that a determined part of the property belonging to the cooperative shall comprise the indivisible funds to be used for the purposes determined by the charter. A decision concerning the formation of the indivisible funds shall be adopted by the members of the cooperative unanimously unless otherwise provided by the charter of the cooperative.
2. [Excluded]
3. The profit of a cooperative shall be distributed among its members in accordance with their labor participation unless a different procedure has been provided by the legislation and by the charter of the cooperative. The property remaining after the liquidation of the cooperative and the satisfaction of the demands of its creditors shall be distributed in accordance with the same procedure.
Article 110. Management in Production Cooperative 1. The supreme management body of a cooperative shall be the general meeting of its members.
The executive bodies of a cooperative shall be the board and/or its chairman. They shall effectuate current direction over the activity of the cooperative and shall be accountable to the supervisory board and the general meeting of the members of the cooperative. Only members of the cooperative may be members of the supervisory board and board of the cooperative, and also the chairman of the cooperative. A member of the cooperative may not simultaneously be a member of the supervisory board and a member of the board or the chairman of the cooperative.
2. The competence of the management bodies of a cooperative and the procedure for the adoption of decisions by them shall be determined by the legislation and by the charter of the cooperative.
3. There shall be relegated to the exclusive competence of the general meeting of members of the cooperative: 1) change of the charter of the cooperative; 2) formation of the supervisory board and termination of the powers of its members, and also the formation and termination of powers of the executive bodies of the cooperative unless this right according to the charter of the cooperative has been transferred to the supervisory board; 3) admission and expulsion of members of the cooperative; 4) confirmation of the annual reports and annual accounting (financial) statements of the cooperative (data of the inventory book of income and expenditure of organizations and individual entrepreneurs, applying the simplified taxation system), distribution of its profits and losses; 5) decision concerning reorganization and liquidation of the cooperative; The deciding of other questions also may be relegated to the exclusive competence of the general meeting by the legislation on production cooperatives and by the charter of the cooperative. Questions relegated to the exclusive competence of the general meeting or supervisory board of a cooperative may not be transferred by them for decision of the executive bodies of the cooperative. 4. A member of a cooperative shall have one vote when decisions are adopted by the general meeting.
Article 111. Termination of Membership in Production Cooperative and Transfer of Share l. The member of a cooperative shall have the right at his discretion to withdraw from the cooperative. In this event the value of the share must be paid or the property corresponding to his share issued to him, and also other payments provided for by the charter of the cooperative effectuated. The payment of the value of the share or the issuance of other property to a withdrawing member of a cooperative shall be done at the end of the financial year and after confirmation of the annual accounting (financial) statements of the cooperative unless otherwise provided by the charter of the cooperative. The payment of the value of the share or the issuance of other property to a withdrawing member of a production cooperative, who applies the simplified tax system without bookkeeping, shall be done at the end of the financial year without confirmation of the cooperative's bookkeeping balance sheet. 2. A member of a cooperative may be expelled from the cooperative upon the decision of the general meeting in the event of the failure to perform or the improper performance of the duties placed on him by the charter of the cooperative, and also in other instances provided for by the legislation on production cooperatives and by the charter of the cooperative. A member of the supervisory board or executive body may be expelled from the cooperative by the decision of the general meeting in connection with his membership in the similar cooperative. A member of a cooperative expelled therefrom shall have the right to receive the share and other payments provided for by the charter of the cooperative in accordance with Clause 1 of this Article. 3. The member of a cooperative shall have the right to transfer his share or part thereof to another member of the cooperative unless otherwise provided by the legislation and by the charter of the cooperative.
The transfer of a share (part thereof) to a citizen, who is not a member of the cooperative, shall be permitted only with the consent of the cooperative. In this event the other members of the cooperative shall enjoy the preferential right to purchase such share (part thereof).
4. In the event of the death of a member of a production cooperative his heirs may be admitted as members of the cooperative unless otherwise provided by the charter of the cooperative. Otherwise the cooperative shall pay to the heirs the value of the share of the deceased member of the cooperative.
5. The levying of execution on the share of a member of a production cooperative shall be permitted with regard to the own debts of a member of the cooperative, in accordance with the procedure provided for by the legislation and by the charter of the cooperative, only if his other property is insufficient to cover such debts. Execution may not be levied for debts of a member of a cooperative on the indivisible funds of the cooperative.
Article 112. Reorganization and Liquidation of Production Cooperatives 1. A production cooperative may be voluntarily reorganized or liquidated by decision of the general meeting of its members. Other grounds and the procedure for the reorganization and liquidation of a cooperative shall be determined by the legislation. 2. A production cooperative may, by unanimous decision of its members, be transformed into an economic partnership or company if less than three members remain in the cooperative, or into the unitary enterprise if only one member remains in the cooperative.
§ 4. Unitary Enterprises
Article 113. Unitary Enterprise
1. A commercial organization not endowed with the right of ownership to property consolidated to it by the owner shall be deemed to be a unitary enterprise. The property of a unitary enterprise shall be indivisible and may not be distributed according to contributions (participatory shares, shares), including distribution among the employees of the enterprise.
A unitary enterprise shall be created in accordance with this Code and other acts of legislation via its establishment or a reorganization of legal persons.
2. The constituent document of a unitary enterprise shall be the charter.
The charter of a unitary enterprise must contain, in addition to the information specified in Article 48(2) of this Code, the information concerning the amount of the charter fund of the enterprise and the procedure and sources for forming it.
The state (Republic's or communal) unitary enterprises or private unitary enterprises may be created in the form of unitary enterprises.
The property of the Republic's unitary enterprise shall be in the ownership of the Republic of Belarus and shall belong to such enterprise by right of economic management or operative administration.
The property of the communal unitary enterprise shall be in the ownership of the administrative and territorial unit and shall belong to such enterprise by right of economic management.
The property of the private unitary enterprise shall be in the private ownership of a natural person (joint ownership of the spouses) or of a legal person and shall belong to such enterprise by right of economic management.
The property of the affiliated unitary enterprise shall be in the ownership of the owner of property of the founding enterprise and shall belong to the affiliated enterprise by right of economic management.
3. The firm name of a unitary enterprise must contain an indication of the form of ownership, unless otherwise established by the legislative acts. The firm name of an affiliated unitary enterprise must also contain the word ‘affiliated’.
4. The body of a unitary enterprise shall be the head who shall be appointed by the owner of the property and accountable to it. The owner of the property of a unitary enterprise, a natural person, is entitled to exercise directly the functions of the head.
The powers of the head of a unitary enterprise may be transferred, by decision of the owner of the property, under a contract to another commercial organization (managing organization) or to an individual entrepreneur (manager).
The charters of legal persons that have founded unitary enterprises may establish the procedure for appointing heads of such enterprises.
5. The rights of the owner of the property of a Republic’s unitary enterprise shall be exercised in the name of the Republic of Belarus, unless otherwise specified by the President of the Republic of Belarus, by:
the Government of the Republic of Belarus and also, within the limits established by legislation, republican bodies of state administration, other state bodies and organizations, authorized to manage the property being in the ownership of the Republic of Belarus – with respect to a republican unitary enterprise based on right of economic management;
the Government of the Republic of Belarus and also, within the limits established by legislation, republican bodies of state administration, other state bodies – with respect to a fiscal enterprise.
The rights of the owner of the property of a communal unitary enterprise based on right of economic management shall be exercised in the name of the administrative and territorial unit by respective bodies of local administration and self-government and also, within the limits established by the legislation, by state organizations authorized by them.
The owner of the property of a private unitary enterprise shall exercise his powers directly and/or through persons authorized by him.
6. The owner of the property of a unitary enterprise, unless otherwise specified by the President of the Republic of Belarus, this Code or a decision of the owner taken with respect to the affiliated enterprise:
takes decision about creation of the unitary enterprise;
determines objectives of the activity of the unitary enterprise, gives a written consent to the participation of the unitary enterprise in commercial and non-commercial organizations, including in state associations;
approves the charter of the unitary enterprise and changes and/or additions introduced therein;
forms the charter fund of the unitary enterprise, takes decision about its change;
appoints to the office of the head of the unitary enterprise, concludes, modifies, and terminates a labour contract or a civil-law contract with him in accordance with the legislation, unless otherwise provided for the this Code;
takes decision about withdrawal of the property from the unitary enterprise under the procedure and in the instances provided for by the legislation or the charter;
exercises control over activity of the unitary enterprise, intended use and preservation of the property belonging to the unitary enterprise;
gives a written consent to the creation, reorganization, and liquidation of affiliated enterprises, creation and liquidation of representations and affiliates;
takes decision about reorganization or liquidation of the unitary enterprise in accordance with the legislation;
has other rights and bears other duties in accordance with this Code, other legislative acts and the charter.
7. At the moment of state registration of the unitary enterprise its charter fund must be formed in full by the owner of the enterprise property, unless otherwise provided for by legislative acts.
In the event of taking decision about decreasing the charter fund by the founder of the unitary enterprise, the unitary enterprise is obliged to notify its creditors about it in writing. A creditor of the unitary enterprise is entitled to demand termination or premature performance of the obligation under which the enterprise is the debtor and compensation of losses.
8. A unitary enterprise shall be liable for its obligations with all of the property belonging to it.
A unitary enterprise shall not bear liability for the obligations of the owner of its property, except for the cases provided for by this Code.
9. Shared ownership of the property of a unitary enterprise shall not be permitted.
In the event of division of the property being in joint ownership of spouses and also of a transfer of the ownership to the property of the unitary enterprise by way of inheriting, of legal succession or by other ways, not contradictory to the legislation, to two and more persons:
the unitary enterprise may be reorganized by splitting-up (splitting-off) or transformation into the economic partnership or company in accordance with the procedure established by the legislation and by the agreement of the parties;
the enterprise in whole as a property complex may be sold to a person not being participant in the share ownership to the property of the unitary enterprise;
the property of the unitary enterprise shall be transferred into the ownership of one legal person or natural person with payment of compensation to other persons in proportion to their share in the common property, determined in accordance with the rules established for property for which the shared ownership is permitted;
the unitary enterprise is subject to liquidation in accordance with the procedure established by the legislation, if reorganization or transferring the property into the ownership of one person is contradictory with the legislation or impossible because of other reasons. 10. At the reorganization of state unitary enterprises, provisions on reorganization of legal persons provided by this Code shall apply unless otherwise provided by the legislation on privatization.
Article 114. Unitary Enterprise Based on the Right of Economic Management
1. The unitary enterprise based on the right of economic management shall be founded by the decision of the owner of its property, or of the unitary enterprise based on the right of economic management, or other subjects of the civil law.
2. The charter of the unitary enterprise based on the right of economic management shall be approved by the founder of the unitary enterprise.
3. The unitary enterprise based on the right of economic management may form as a legal person, subject to consent of the owner of its property, another unitary enterprise by transferring to it a part of its property for economic management (the affiliated enterprise) in accordance with existing procedure. An affiliated enterprise is not entitled to create unitary enterprises. Another procedure for creation of an affiliated enterprise may be specified by the President of the Republic of Belarus.
The founder shall approve the charter of the affiliated enterprise, appoint its head, exercise other powers in accordance with the owner of the property.
4. The owner of property of a unitary enterprise based on the right of economic management is not liable for the obligations of the enterprise, with the exception of the cases provided by Article 52(3) of this Code.
Article 115. Unitary Enterprise , Based on Right of Operative Administration (Fiscal Enterprise)
1. A unitary enterprise based on the right of operative administration (fiscal enterprise) may be founded, unless otherwise determined by the President of the Republic of Belarus, upon a decision of the Government of the Republic of Belarus on the base of property being in the ownership of the Republic of Belarus.
2. The charter of a fiscal enterprise shall be approved by the Government of the Republic of Belarus.
3. The firm name of the enterprise based on the right of operative administration must contain an indication that the enterprise is a fiscal enterprise.
4. The rights of a fiscal enterprise to the property consolidated to it shall be determined in accordance with Articles 277 and 278 of this Code.
5. The Republic of Belarus shall bear subsidiary liability for the obligations of a fiscal enterprise if its property is insufficient.
§ 5. Non-commercial Organizations
Article 116. Consumer Cooperative
1. A voluntary association of citizens and legal persons on the basis of membership for the purpose of satisfying material (property) and other requirements of participants to be effectuated by means of combining the property share contributions of the members thereof shall be deemed to be a consumer cooperative.
2. The charter of a consumer cooperative must contain, in addition to the information specified in Article 48(2) of this Code, the conditions and the procedure of admission of members to the cooperative and of termination of membership in the cooperative; the rights and duties of the members of the cooperative; the conditions concerning the amount of share contributions of the members of the cooperative; the composition and procedure for making of share contributions by members of the cooperative and their liability for a violation of the obligation relating to making of the share contributions; the composition and competence of the management bodies of the cooperative and the procedure for the adoption of decisions
by them, including on questions, the decisions regarding which are adopted unanimously or by a qualified majority of votes; and the procedure for the covering by members of the cooperative of losses incurred by it.
3. The name of the consumer cooperative must contain an indication of the principal purpose of its activity, and also either the word "cooperative" or the words "consumer union" or "consumer company".
4. The members of the consumer cooperative shall be obliged within three months after confirmation of the annual accounting (financial) statements (upon making accounting in the inventory book of income and expenditure of organizations and individual entrepreneurs, applying the simplified taxation system – within three months from the day of termination of the financial year) to cover losses, which have formed, by means of additional contributions. In the event of the failure to fulfill this duty, the cooperative may be liquidated in a judicial proceeding at the demand of the creditors. The members of a consumer cooperative shall bear jointly and severally subsidiary liability for its obligations within the limits of the uncontributed portion of the additional contribution of each member of the cooperative.
5. The revenues and income received by the consumer cooperative may not be distributed among its members.
6. The legal status of consumer cooperatives (the consumer companies, or unions of such companies), shall be determined by this Code and other legislation on consumer cooperation. The legal status of other consumer cooperatives (housing cooperatives, housing construction cooperatives, garage cooperatives, etc.) shall be determined by this Code and other legislation.
Article 117. Public and Religious Organizations (Associations) 1. Public and religious organizations (associations) shall be deemed to be voluntary associations of citizens who have combined in accordance with the procedure established by legislation on the basis of their common interests in order to satisfy spiritual and other nonmaterial requirements. Public and religious organizations shall be non-commercial organizations. They shall have the right to effectuate entrepreneurial activity only for the achievement of the purposes for which they were created; the entrepreneurial activity of such organizations shall comply with these purposes.
2. The participants (members) of public and religious organizations shall not retain rights to property transferred in ownership by them to such organizations, including membership dues. They shall not be liable for the obligations of public and religious organizations in which they participate as members, and the said organizations shall not be liable for the obligations of their members.
3. The peculiarities of the legal status of public and religious organizations as participants of civil relations shall be determined by the legislation.
Article 1171. Republic's State-Social Associations
1. Republic's state-social associations shall be deemed non-commercial organization based on the membership the purposes of which are the accomplishment of missions meaningful for the state.
2. Founders of a Republic's state-social association and its members may be natural and legal persons, as well as the Republic of Belarus in the person of authorized state bodies and legal persons acting on its behalf.
3. The charter of a Republic's state-social association is adopted by its founders or the highest body of this association and to be approved by the President of the Republic of Belarus or, under his instructions, by the Government of the Republic of Belarus.
4. The creation of the Republic's state-social association is carried out by the decision of the founders or as the result of the reorganization of a existing non-commercial organization in the form of the public association on the conditions determined by the President of the Republic of Belarus or, under his instructions, by the Government of the Republic of Belarus.
5. The Republic's state-social association may create, in the established order, its organizational divisions, including in the form of legal persons, and create other legal persons or to participate in legal persons in accordance with the charter of the Republic's state-social association or other legislation.
6. The legal status of Republic's state-social associations is determined by this Code and other legislation on Republic's state-social associations.
Article 118. Funds 1. For the purposes of this Code, a fund shall be deemed to be a non-commercial organization not having membership, founded by citizens (a citizen) and/or legal persons (a legal person) on the basis of voluntary property contributions, and pursuing social, charitable, cultural, educational, sport-promoting, scientific and other publicly useful purposes specified in the charter of the fund. The name of a fund shall contain the word “fund” and indication to the nature of activities and type of the fund. The property transferred to the fund by its founder(s) shall belong to the founder(s) on the right of the ownership (right of economic management, operative administration), be necessary and appropriate for the use in the activities of the fund. The sources of the formation of property of a fund are the property being transferred to the fund by its founder(s), proceedings from events held in accordance with the charter of the fund, incomes derived from entrepreneurial activity carried out in accordance with the charter and other proceeding not prohibited by legislation. The property transferred to a fund by its founder(s) is the ownership of the fund. The founder(s) are not liable for the obligations of the fund created, and the fund is not liable for the obligations of its founder(s). The rules effective in relation to creation, activity, reorganization and liquidation of funds, established by this Code, do not cover the funds created or being created according to a decision of the President of the Republic of Belarus, Parliament of the Republic of Belarus, Council of Ministers of the Republic of Belarus unless otherwise stipulated in acts of legislation on creation of such funds. 2. The fund shall use property for the purposes determined in its charter. For carrying out entrepreneurial activity, funds are entitled to create unitary enterprises, economic companies or to participate in them, except for limited liability companies. A fund is obliged to publish annually reports on the use of its property. The procedure for publication and the content of data are established by legislation.
3. The bodies of a fund are the board (council), directorate (director) and trustee council.
The charter of the fund may envisage other bodies necessary for carrying out it activity.
The board (council) of the fund is a highest collegiate body of the fund formed by its founder(s). The main function of the board (council) is to ensure observance by the fund of purposes for attainment of which it is created.
The exclusive competence of the board (council) includes:
making changes and/or additions to the charter of the fund;
formation (nomination) of an executive body of the fund – directorate (director) and premature termination of its powers;
creation and liquidation of representations, affiliates of the fund, determination of their terms of reference;
approval of the annual report and the annual accounting (financial) statements of the fund (data of the inventory book of income and expenditure of organizations and individual entrepreneurs, applying the simplified taxation system);
reorganization of the fund if the possibility of a reorganization is stipulated by its charter.
The directorate (director) of the fund is an executive body of the fund carrying out current management of its activity. The directorate (director) of the fund is accountable in its activity to the board (council) of the fund.
The trustee council of the fund is a body effectuating control over activity of the fund, which is formed by its founder(s) at the moment of establishing the fund, and subsequently, if it is stipulated by the charter of the fund, by the board (council) of the fund.
The exclusive competence of the trustee council of the fund includes:
control over compliance of the activity of fund with legislation and the charter of the fund;
control over fulfillment of resolutions of the highest collegiate body of the fund, the executive body of the fund;
control over the use of monetary funds and other property of the fund in accordance with its charter objectives;
preliminary discussion of and consent to the annual report of the fund.
4. A fund acts on the basis of the charter approved by the founder(s) of the fund.
The charter of the fund must, in addition to the information specified in Article 48(2) of this Code, contain: data about founder(s) of the fund;
tasks and methods of activity of the fund;
composition and procedure for formation of the bodies of the fund;
procedure for the formation, terms of reference and term of powers of the trustee council of the fund;
procedure for the appointment and dismissal of officials of the fund;
procedure for introduction of changes and/or additions to the charter of the fund;
sources and procedure for the formation of fund property;
time period for which the fund is created or the indication to its activity unlimited in time;
data on representations and/or affiliates created by the fund, including the name of representations, affiliated and their location (governing bodies of representations, affiliates);
data on intended use of the property of the fund in the event of its liquidation. At that such property shall be intended for the purposes for the attainment of which the fund was created;
other provisions stipulated by legislation and not contradicting this Code.
5. Other provisions connected with creation, activity, reorganization and liquidation of a fund not stipulated by this Article and Article 119 of this Code are determined by legislative acts.
Article 119. Change of Charter and Liquidation of Fund 1. The charter of a fund may be changed by the board of the fund in the order stipulated by the charter. Respective changes and/or additions to the charter of the fund shall be introduced and presented in the established order for the state registration within a month period in the case of: change of purposes of the fund; change of the name of the fund; change of the type of the fund; change of location of the fund (governing body of the fund); creation or liquidation of representations and/or affiliates of the fund; change of data about bodies of the fund, including the trustee council, procedure for appointment and dismissal of officials of the fund, procedure for formation of the fund property, as well as about other factual circumstances the reference to which shall be contained in the charter of the fund in accordance with legislation; change of legislation in accordance with which the introduction of changes and/or additions to the charter of the fund is required unless other periods are established by that legislation. 2. The reorganization of a fund if its possibility is envisaged by the charter of the fund may be carried out in the form of: merger with another fund; affiliation to another fund; affiliation of another fund; splitting-off from the fund of a legal person of any organizational and legal form; splitting-up in two or more funds. A fund may not be reorganized in the form of transformation. The cost of the remaining property of the fund reorganized in the form of splitting-off may not be less than the minimum amount necessary of the creation and activity of the fund. 3. A fund may be liquidated upon the application of the interested persons by a court decision: in the case of non-presentation to the registering body of documents on the transfer by its founder(s) in the ownership of the fund of the property in the form of non-monetary contributions at the formation of the fund property in the amount not less then the minimum amount required for the creation and activity of the fund in full amount or in part in the form of non-monetary contributions within three months after the state registration of the fund; in the case of non-fulfillment of the obligation on creation, in the established period after the state registration of the fund, of representations and/or affiliates and non-presentation for the state registration of changes and/or additions being introduced to the charter of the fund in connection with the change of its type;
if, at the end of a calendar year, the value of the fund property is less than the minimum amount required for the creation and activity of the fund, and that value has not been increase till the minimum amount required for its creation and activity; if the purposes of the fund cannot be attained, and necessary changes of those purposes cannot be made; in the case the fund evades in its activity from the purposes stipulated by the charter; in the case of carrying out activity prohibited by legislation or activity with repeated or serious violations of legislation and the charter of the fund; n other cases stipulated by the legislation.
4. The property remaining after the liquidation of a fund, including after the satisfaction of claims of creditors is to be used for the purposes for the attainment of which the fund was created. In the case when such use of the property is impossible it shall be transferred in equal parts to funds created for the attainment of similar purposes provided that the funds submitted written applications to the court which has taken the decision to liquidate the fund.
In the absence of such applications, the property remaining after the liquidation of the fund is to be transferred in the ownership of the Republic of Belarus and used for the purposes for the attainment of which the fund was created.
Article 120. Institutions 1. An institution shall be deemed to be an organization created by the owner in order to effectuate management, social and cultural, or other functions of a non-commercial character, and financed by the owner wholly or partially. The rights of an institution to property consolidated to it shall be determined in accordance with Article 279 of this Code.
2. An institution shall be liable for its obligations with the monetary means being at its disposal. The owner of the respective property shall bear subsidiary liability for obligations of the institution in the event of insufficiency of such monetary means.
3. The peculiarities of the legal status of individual types of state and other institutions shall be determined by the legislation.
Article 121. Amalgamations of Legal Persons and/or Individual Entrepreneurs (Associations and Unions) 1. Commercial organizations and/or individual entrepreneurs, as well as commercial and/or non- commercial organizations for the purpose of co-ordination of their activity, representation and protection of their common interests, may, establish the amalgamations in the form of associations or unions, being non-commercial organizations. 2. If by decision of the participants, the conducting of entrepreneurial activity is imposed on an association (union), such association (union) shall be transformed into an economic company or partnership in accordance with the procedure provided for by the legislation, or may carry out entrepreneurial activity only by means of creation of a commercial organization and/or participation in them, unless otherwise established by the legislative acts .
3. Association (union) shall be a legal person. Members of an association (union) retain their autonomy and rights of a legal person or individual entrepreneur.
4. An association (union) shall not be liable for the obligations of its members. Members of an association (union) shall bear subsidiary liability for its obligations in the amount and in accordance with the procedure provided for by the charter of the association (union).
Article 122. Constituent Document of Association (Union)
1. The constituent document of an association (union) shall be the charter approved by its members.
2. The constituent document of an association (union) must contain, in addition to the information specified in Article 48(2) of this Code, the procedure of forming the property of the association (union), the procedure of making changes and/or additions in the charter of the association (union), the conditions concerning the composition and competence of managing bodies of the association (union) and the procedure of adoption of decisions by them, including questions decisions with regard to which shall be adopted unanimously or by a qualified majority of votes of members of the association (union), and also the procedure for the distribution of property remaining after liquidation of the association (union).
Article 123. Rights and Duties of Members of Associations and Unions l. The members of an association (union) shall have the right to use its services free of charge. 2. The member of an association (union) shall have the right at its discretion to withdraw from the association (union) anytime. In this event it shall bear subsidiary liability for obligations of the association (union) in proportion to its contribution for two years from the time of withdrawal, if these obligations arose during its membership in the association.. The member of an association (union) may be expelled therefrom by decision of the remaining participants in the instances and in accordance with the procedure established by the charter of the association (union). Rules relating to withdrawal from an association (union) shall apply with respect to the liability of the expelled member of the association (union). 3. With the consent of the members of the association (union), a new participant may join. The joining of an association (union) by a new member may be conditioned by its subsidiary liability for obligations of the association (union) which arose before its joining.
§ 5. State Associations
Article 1231. Basic Provisions on State Association 1. A state association (concern; industrial, scientific and industrial or other association) shall be deemed an association of state legal persons, state and other legal persons, as well as state and other legal persons and individual entrepreneurs created on the decision of the President of the Republic of Belarus, Government of the Republic of Belarus, and , under their instruction (authorization), by other Republic bodies of state governance or by decisions of bodies of local administration and self-government. 2. A state association shall be created, as a rule, on an industry branch principle for the purposes of carrying out general direction, general management of activities, coordination of activities and representation of interests of legal persons and individual entrepreneurs being part of the association. 3. A state association is subordinated to the Government of the Republic of Belarus, Republic body of state governance, body of local administration and self-government or a state organization which executes certain functions of a Republic body of state governance. 4. State associations are non-commercial organization, except for the cases of adopting, in accordance with the legislation, decision on recognizing them commercial organizations.
5. The owner of the property of a state association is not liable for the obligations of the state association except for cases stipulated by legislative acts. 6. The legal status of state associations, rights and duties of legal persons and individual entrepreneurs being their part shall be determined by this Code and other acts of legislation on such associations, and by their charters.
Article 1232. Participants of a State Association 1. A state association may be joined by state unitary enterprises and/or state institutions, on the decision of the body (official) which took the decision on the creation of the state association or of the body authorized by it, as well as by other organizations, individual entrepreneurs, voluntarily, on the conditions and according to the order determined by the charter of the state association. Legal persons may join the state association in accordance with the legislation. The decision on the possibility of joining a state association by individual entrepreneurs and non-state legal persons is to be taken by the state body (official) which took decision on the creation of the state association or by a body authorized by it. 2. The participants of state associations retain rights of legal persons and individual entrepreneurs, which may be limited or otherwise changed in accordance with the legislation. 3. State unitary enterprises and state institutions being part of a state association on the decision of a state body (official) which took decision on the creation of the state association or by a body authorized by it may be excluded from it on the decision of this body (official). 4. Decisions of state associations on matters provided by charters of state associations and by acts of legislation on such associations are obligatory for their participants. 5. State association are not liable for obligations of their participants, and participants of a state association are not liable for obligations of this state association except for the cases stipulated by the legislation.
Article 1233. Property of State Association 1. The property of a state association in in the state ownership and belongs to it on the right of economic management or on the right of operative administration. The state body (official), which took the decision on the creation of the state association, or the body authorized by it, as well as the charter of the state association, shall determine the right on which the property belongs to the state association. 2. The property of the participants of a state association does not make part of the property of the state association.
Article 1234. Charter of State Association 1. The charter of a state association shall be approved by the state body (official) which took decision on its creation or by a body authorized by it and is a constituent document of this association. 2. The charter of a state association shall determine the order and sources of the generation of the property of the state association. 3. The charter of the state association, which is a commercial organization, along with data specified in Article 48 (2) of this Code shall contain the data on the subject of activities of the state association.
CHAPTER 5 Participation of the Republic of Belarus and its Administrative Territorial Units in Relations
Regulated by Civil Legislation
Article 124. The Republic of Belarus, its Administrative Territorial Units as the Subjects of Civil Legislation l. The Republic of Belarus, its administrative territorial units shall participate in relations regulated by civil legislation on equal principles with other participants of these relations—citizens and legal persons. 2. Unless it arises otherwise from a legislation or the peculiarities of the particular subjects, the norms determining the participation of legal persons in relations regulated by civil legislation shall apply to the subjects of civil legislation specified in Clause 1 of this Article.
Article 125. Procedure of Participation of the Republic of Belarus and its Administrative Territorial Units in Relations Regulated by Civil Legislation 1. The state bodies within the frameworks of their competence established by acts determining the status of these bodies may by their actions acquire and exercise property rights and duties and personal non- property rights and duties and act in court in the name of the Republic of Belarus.
2. Bodies of local administration or self-government within the frameworks of their competence established by acts determining the status of these bodies may by their actions acquire and exercise the rights and duties specified in Clause 1 of this Article in the name of the administrative territorial units.
3. In the instances and in accordance with the procedure provided for by legislation of the Republic of Belarus, other state bodies (not mentioned in this Article), legal persons and citizens may act in the name of the Republic of Belarus and its administrative territorial units, subject to special order of the Republic of Belarus and its administrative territorial units.
Article 126. Liability for Obligations of the Republic of Belarus and its Administrative Territorial Units
1. The Republic of Belarus and its administrative territorial units shall be liable for its obligations with the property belonging to it by right of ownership, except for property which may be only in state or communal ownership.
2. The Republic of Belarus and its administrative territorial units shall not be liable for obligations of legal persons created by them except for instances provided for by the legislation.
3. The Republic of Belarus shall not be liable for obligations of administrative territorial units.
4. Administrative territorial units shall not be liable for obligations of one another, nor for obligations of the Republic of Belarus.
5. The rules of Clauses 2-5 of this Article shall not extend to instances when the Republic of Belarus has assumed a guarantee (suretyship) for the obligations of the administrative territorial unit or legal person, or the said subjects have assumed a guarantee (suretyship) with regard to the obligations of the Republic of Belarus.
Article 127. Peculiarities of the Republic of Belarus and Administrative Territorial Units in Relations Being Regulated by Civil Legislation with Participation of Foreign Legal Persons, Citizens, and States
The peculiarities of the liability of the Republic of Belarus and the administrative territorial units in relations regulated by civil legislation with the participation of foreign legal persons, citizens, and states shall be determined by the legislative acts.
SUBSECTION 3 OBJECTS OF CIVIL RIGHTS
CHAPTER 6 General Provisions
Article 128. Types of Objects of Civil Rights To objects of civil rights shall be relegated things, including money and securities, other property, including property rights; work and services; undisclosed information; exclusive rights to intellectual activity results and means of individualization of participants of civil turnover, goods, works or services; non-material benefits.
Article 129. Turnability of Objects of Civil Rights
1. Objects of civil rights may be freely alienated or be transferred from one person to another by way of universal legal succession (inheritance, reorganization of legal person) or by other means unless they have been withdrawn from turnover or are limited in turnover.
2. Types of objects of civil rights whose being in turnover is not permitted (objects withdrawn from turnover) must be expressly specified in a law. Types of objects of civil rights which may belong only to determined participants of turnover or being of which in turnover is permitted by a special authorization (objects of limited turnability) shall be determined in accordance with the procedure established by the legislation. 3. Land and other natural resources may be alienated or pass from one person to another by other means to the extent that their turnover is permitted by legislation on protection and use of lands and other legislation on protection of the environment and rational use of natural resources.
Article 130. Immovable and Movable Things l. To immovable things (immovable property, immovable) shall be relegated land plots, subsoil plots, surface water objects, and all that is firmly connected with the land, that is, objects whose movement without incommensurate damage to the purpose thereof is impossible, including forests, perennial plantings, permanent constructions (buildings, structures), unfinished permanent constructions prepared for preservation, isolated premises, car parking lots. To immovable things also shall be relegated the enterprise as a whole (as the property complex), the aircrafts and sea vessels subject to the state registration, inland vessels, river-marine vessels, and space objects. Other property also may be relegated by the legislation to immovable things.
2. Things which are not relegated to immovable, including money and securities, shall be deemed to be movable property. The registration of rights to movable things shall not be required except for instances specified in a law.
Article 131. State Registration of Immovable Property, Rights to It and Transactions with It l. The immovable property, rights to it and transactions with it are subject to the state registration in cases, provided by the legislative acts. 2. In the instances provided for by the legislation a special registration or recording of individual types of immovable property may be effectuated together with the state registration. 3. The body carrying out state registration of the immovable property, rights to it and transactions with it shall be obliged to certify the registration made by means of the issuance, for the applicant, of the certificate (certification card) on the state registration, or by execution of the registration record on the original of the document, expressing the content of the registered transaction. 4. The state registration of the immovable property, rights to it and transactions with it shall be public. The bodies, carrying out the state registration of the immovable property, rights to it and transactions with it, shall be obliged to provide necessary information for any person only about the rights and restrictions (burdening) of the rights on the specific object of the immovable property, existing at the date of providing the information. Summary information on the rights on objects of the immovable property is delivered only in cases, provided by the legislative acts.
5. A refusal of state registration of the immovable property, rights to it or transaction with it or the evading of registration by the respective body may be appealed to a court.
6. The procedure for state registration and the grounds for refusal of registration shall be established by the legislation on registration of the rights to immovable property and transactions with it.
Article 132. Enterprise 1. An enterprise as an object of rights shall be deemed to be a property complex used to effectuate entrepreneurial activity. Within an enterprise as a property complex shall be all types of property intended for its activity, including land plots, permanent constructions (buildings, structures), unfinished permanent constructions prepared for preservation, isolated premises, car parking lots, equipment, tools, raw material, products, rights of demand, debts, and also rights to designation which individualize the enterprise, its products, works and services (firm name, trademarks, service marks), and other exclusive rights, unless otherwise provided by the legislation or contract. 2. An enterprise as a whole or part thereof may be the object of a purchase-sale, pledge, lease, and other transactions connected with the establishment, change, and termination of rights to a thing.
Article 133. Indivisible Things A thing, the division of which in kind is impossible without changing the purpose thereof, shall be deemed to be indivisible. The peculiarities of the partition of a share in the right of ownership to an indivisible thing shall be determined by Articles 255 and 261 of this Code.
Article 134. Complex Things
If various thing form a single whole presupposing the use thereof for a common purpose, they shall be considered to be one thing (complex thing). The operation of a transaction concluded with regard to a complex thing shall extend to all of its parts unless otherwise provided by a contract.
Article 135. Principal Thing and Appurtenance A thing intended to serve another, principal thing and connected therewith by a common purpose (appurtenance) shall follow the fate of the principal thing unless otherwise provided by contract.
Article 136. Yield, Products, and Revenues Proceeds received as a result of the use of property (yield, product, revenues) shall belong to the person using this property on legal grounds unless otherwise provided by the legislation, or by the contract concerning the use of this property.
Article 137. Animals To animals shall apply the general rules on property insofar as not otherwise established by the legislation. When exercising rights the cruel treatment of animals contrary to the principles of humaneness shall not be permitted.
Article 138. Individually-Determined Things and Things, Defined by Generic Attributes 1. An individually-determined thing shall be deemed to be a thing, distinguished from the other things on the grounds of the attributes, peculiar to this thing only. Individually-determined things are irreplaceable. 2. Things defined by generic attributes shall be deemed to be the things, having the attributes, peculiar to all thing of the same kind, and defined by the number, weight or measure. The things defined by generic attributes are replaceable.
Article 139. Protected Results of Intellectual Activity In the instances and in accordance with the procedure established by this Code and other legislation an exclusive right (intellectual property) of a citizen or legal person shall be recognized to the protected results of intellectual activity and the means of individualization of the legal person equated to them or the means of individualization of a product or the work fulfilled or services (firm name, trademark, service mark, and others). The use of the results of intellectual activity and means of individualization which are the object of exclusive rights may be exercised by third persons only with the consent of the possessor of the right.
Article 140. Undisclosed Information
1. Information (data about persons, matters, facts, events, occurrences and processes) is protected as undisclosed information if it constitutes official secret or commercial secret.
2. In relation to information the commercial secret regime may be established provided that its data are not well-known or easily available for third persons in those circles that usually deal with this kind of data, have commercial value for their holder be virtue of being unknown for third persons, are not objects of intellectual activity results and are not classified in a prescribed manner as state secrets. The commercial secret regime is deemed to be established after determination of the composition of the data
subject to be protected under the commercial secret regime and after the person that legitimately holds such data takes a set of measures necessary for ensuring their confidentiality.
Data in relation to which the commercial secret regime may not be established are determined by the legislative acts.
3. Terms and procedure for classifying information as official secret are determined by the legislation.
4. Information constituting official secret or commercial secret is protected by means provided for by the legislation. In case of illegally obtaining knowledge or illegal use of, and also of disclosing, the information that constitutes official secret or commercial secret, natural and legal persons, state bodies and their officials are obliged to compensate damages to its holder. The same duty is imposed on employees that have disclosed official secret or commercial secret despite an obligation about non-disclosure of commercial secret, a labour contract and on counterparties that committed this despite a civil-law contract.
Article 141. Money (Currency) 1. The Belarusian Ruble shall be the legal means of payment obligatory for acceptance at nominal value throughout the entire territory of the Republic of Belarus. Payments on the territory of the Republic of Belarus shall be effectuated in the form of cash and cashless settlements. 2. The instances, procedure, and conditions for the use of foreign currency on the territory of the Republic of Belarus shall be determined by the legislation.
Article 142. Currency Valuables The types of property deemed to be currency valuables and the procedure for concluding transactions with them shall be determined by the legislation. The right of ownership in currency valuables shall be defended in the Republic of Belarus on the common grounds.
CHAPTER 7 Securities
Article 143. Security 1. A security shall be a document or a set of certain records, certifying, in compliance with the established form and/or obligatory requisites, property and non-property rights. With the transfer of the security all rights in aggregate which are certified by it are being transferred. 2. In the instances provided for by the legislation or in accordance with the procedure established by it, in order to exercise and transfer the rights certified by a security evidence of its being registered in a special register (ordinary or computerized) shall be sufficient.
Article 144. Types and Forms of Securities There shall be relegated to securities: state bond, bond, bill of exchange, cheque, deposit certificate and savings certificate, bank savings book to the bearer, bill of lading, stock, privatization securities, and other documents which have been relegated to securities by the legislation on securities or in accordance with the procedure established by this legislation.
The securities may be issuing and non-issuing. The issuing securities include bonds, stocks and other securities, relegated to such by the legislation. Securities may be issued (handed out) in a documentary and non-documentary forms. Legislative acts may exclude a possibility of the issuance (handing-out) of securities of a certain type in a documentary or non-documentary form. This Code is applied to the relations connected with promissory notes and bills of exchange to the extent not regulated by norms of the legislative acts on promissory notes and bills of exchange.
Article 145. Requirements for Security l. The types of rights which shall be certified by securities, the obligatory requisites of securities, the requirements for the form of a security, and other necessary requirements shall be determined by the legislation or in accordance with the procedure established by it. 2. The absence of obligatory requisites of a security or the failure of the security to conform to the form established for it shall entail the nullity thereof.
Subjects of Rights Certified by Security 1. Rights certified by a security may belong to: the bearer of the security (bearer security), or the person named on the security (inscribed security), or the person named on the security, who may himself exercise these rights or appoint by his instruction (order) another authorized person (order security). 2. The possibility of the issue (handing-out) of securities of a specified type as inscribed, or (and) as order, or (and) as bearer securities may be excluded by the legislation.
Article 1461. Confirmation of Rights to Security 1. The confirmation of the right to a documentary security shall be the security itself. In the instance of transfer of a documentary security for storage to a professional participant of the securities market which is entitled to carry out such storage in accordance with a special permit (license) granted to it or with legislative acts, the confirmation of rights to that security shall be a statement of account opened by that professional participant of the securities market for record-keeping of that security. In case of discrepancies between the documentary security and the statement of the mentioned account, the statement shall have the priority. 2. The confirmation of the right to a non-documentary security shall be a statement of account opened by that professional participant of the securities market for record-keeping of that security. 3. The order of opening and operation of accounts for record-keeping of securities and also requirements to the content and formalization of statements of such accounts are determined by the legislation. 4. Specific features of confirmation of rights to an equity security are determined by the legislative acts on securities.
Article 1462. Exercising Rights on Security Exercising rights certified by a security is possible upon presentation of the security, and in the instances provided for by the legislation upon presentation of the statement of account opened for record-keeping of that security, unless otherwise established by the legislation.
Article 147. Transfer of Rights Certified by Security
1. In order to transfer to another person the rights certified by a bearer security it shall be sufficient to hand over the security to this person.
2. The rights certified by an inscribed security shall be transferred in the procedure established for the assignment of demands (cession). In accordance with Article 361 of this Code a person who has transferred the rights certified by a security shall bear liability only for the invalidity of the respective demand, but not for the failure to perform it.
3. The rights certified by an order security shall be transferred by means of making an inscription of transfer on this security—an endorsement. The endorser shall bear liability not only for the existence of the right, but also for the effectuation thereof. An endorsement made on a security shall pass all the rights certified by the security to the person to whom or to the order of whom the rights certified by the security are transferred—the endorsee. An endorsement may be in blank (without specifying the person to whom performance must be made) or to order (specifying the person to whom or to the order of whom performance must be made). An endorsement may be limited only to a commission to exercise the rights certified by the security without the transfer of these rights to the endorsee (endorsement of entrustment). In this event the endorsee shall act as a representative. 4. Specific features of transfer of rights on equity securities are determined by the legislative acts on securities.
Article 148. Performance Relating to Security
1. The person who has issued a security and all the persons who have endorsed it shall be liable to the legal possessor thereof jointly and severally. In the event of the satisfaction of the demand of the legal possessor of the security concerning the performance of the obligation certified by it by one or several persons from among those who are obliged before him according to the security, they shall acquire the right of a demand for indemnification (regression) against the other persons who are obliged with regard to the security.
2. A refusal to perform an obligation certified by a security by referring to the absence of grounds of the obligation or to its invalidity shall not be permitted. The possessor of a security who has discovered a forgery or a counterfeit security shall have the right to submit to the person who transferred the security to him a demand for proper performance of the obligation certified by the security and for compensation of losses.
Article 149. Reinstatement of Rights to Security The rights relating to lost bearer securities and order securities shall be reinstated by a court in accordance with the procedure provided for by procedural legislation.
Article 150. Non-Documentary Securities 1. Rights to non-documentary securities shall arise from the moment of entry of records of those securities to the account of acquirer, opened for record-keeping of securities. In the instances determined by the legislative acts or in accordance with the procedure established by them, the account opened for record-keeping of non-documentary securities shall reflect (fix) arising,
transfer (assignment), change and termination of rights to non-documentary securities, and also encumbrances of those rights.
CHAPTER 8 Nonmaterial Benefits and Defense Thereof
Article 151. Nonmaterial Benefits
1. Life and health, the dignity of the person, personal inviolability, honour and good name, business reputation, inviolability of private life, personal and family secrecy, the right of free movement, and choice of place of sojourn and residence, the right to name, copyright, other personal non-property rights and other nonmaterial benefits which belong to a citizen from birth or by virtue of the act of legislation shall be inalienable and not transferable by other means. In the instances and in accordance with the procedure provided for by the legislation, personal non-property rights and other nonmaterial benefits which belonged to a deceased person may be effectuated and defended by other persons, including heirs of the possessor of the right.
2. Nonmaterial benefits shall be defended in accordance with the civil legislation in the instances and procedure provided for by this legislation, and also in those instances and within those limits in which the use of the means of the defense of civil rights (Article 11) arises from the essence of the violated nonmaterial right and the character of the consequences of this violation.
Article 152. Compensation of Moral Harm If moral harm has been caused to a citizen (physical or moral suffering) by actions violating his personal non-property rights or infringing on other nonmaterial benefits belonging to a citizen, and also in other instances provided for by the legislation, the citizen has the right to demand monetary compensation of the said harm from the offender. When determining the amounts of contributory compensation of moral harm the court shall take into account the degree of fault of the offender and other circumstances deserving of attention. The court must also take into account the extent of physical and moral suffering connected with the individual peculiarities of the person to whom harm was caused.
Article 153. Defense of Honour, Dignity, and Business Reputation 1. A citizen shall have the right to demand through a court the refutation of information defaming his honour, dignity, or business reputation, unless the spreader of such information proves that it corresponds to reality. Upon the demand of interested persons the defense of the honour and dignity of a citizen shall also be permitted after his death. 2. If information defaming the honour, dignity, or business reputation of the citizen has been spread in the mass media, it must be refuted in the same mass media. If the said information is contained in a document issued by an organization, the document shall be subject to replacement or recall. The procedure for refutation in other instances shall be established by a court.
3. A citizen with respect to whom the mass media have published information impinging upon his rights or interests protected by the legislation shall have the right to publication of his reply in the same mass media.
If the decision of a court has not been fulfilled, the court shall have the right to impose a fine on the offender to be recovered in the amount and in accordance with the procedure provided for by procedural legislation to the revenue of the Republic of Belarus. The payment of the fine shall not relieve the offender from the duty to fulfill the action provided for by the court decision.
5. A citizen with respect to whom information has been spread which defames his honour, dignity or business reputation shall have the right, together with the refutation of such information, to demand compensation of losses and moral harm caused by the spreading thereof.
6. If it is impossible to establish the person who has spread information defaming the honour, dignity, or business reputation of a citizen, the person with respect to whom such information has been spread shall have the right to apply to a court with a statement concerning recognition that the information being spread does not correspond to reality.
7. The rules of this Article concerning the defense of business reputation of a citizen respectively shall apply to the defense of the business reputation of a legal person, except for compensation of moral harm.
SUBSECTION 4 TRANSACTIONS AND REPRESENTATION
CHAPTER 9 Transactions
§ 1. Concept, Types, and Forms of Transactions
Article 154. Concept of Transaction The actions of citizens and legal persons directed towards the establishment, change, or termination of civil rights and duties shall be deemed to be transactions.
Article 155. Contracts and Unilateral Transactions 1. Transactions may be bilateral or multilateral (contracts), and unilateral. 2. A transaction, for the conclusion of which in accordance with the legislation or by agreement of the parties the expression of the will of one party is necessary and sufficient shall be considered to be unilateral. 3. The expression of the concordant will (actions) of two parties (bilateral transaction), or of three or more parties (multilateral transaction) shall be necessary for the conclusion of a contract.
Article 156. Duties Regarding Unilateral Transaction A unilateral transaction shall create duties for the person who has concluded the transaction. It may create duties for other persons only in the instances established by the legislative acts or by agreement with those persons.
Article 157. Legal Regulation of Unilateral Transactions The general provisions on obligations and on contracts shall apply to unilateral transactions respectively insofar as this is not contrary to a legislation or to the unilateral character and essence of the transaction.
Article 158. Transactions Concluded Under a Condition
1. A transaction shall be considered to be concluded under a condition suspensive if the parties have made the arising of rights and duties dependent upon a circumstance relative to which it is unknown as to whether this will ensue or not.
2. A transaction shall be considered to be concluded under a condition resolutive if the parties have made the termination of rights and duties dependent upon a circumstance relative to which it is unknown whether this will ensue or not.
3. If the ensuing of the condition is obstructed by a party not in good faith for whom the ensuing of the condition is disadvantageous, the condition shall be deemed to have ensued. If the ensuing of the condition is facilitated by a party not in good faith for whom the ensuing of the condition is advantageous, the condition shall be deemed not to have ensued.
Article 159. Form of Transactions
1. Transactions shall be concluded orally or in written form (simple or notarial).
2. A transaction which may be concluded orally shall be considered to be concluded also when from the behaviour of the person his will to conclude the transaction is obvious. 3. Silence shall be deemed to be an expression of will to conclude a transaction in the instances provided for by the legislation or by agreement of the parties.
Article 160. Oral Transactions
1. A transaction for which the written (simple or notarial) form has not been established by the legislation or by agreement of the parties may be concluded orally.
2. Unless otherwise established by agreement of the parties, all transactions to be performed by those who concluded them themselves may be concluded orally, except for transactions for which the notarial form has been established and transactions the failure to comply with the simple written form of which entails their invalidity.
3. Transactions in performance of a contract concluded in written form may, by agreement of the parties, be concluded orally unless this is contrary to the legislation and a contract.
Article 161. Written Form of Transaction
I. 1. A transaction in written form must be concluded by means of drawing up a text document, including a document in electronic form (electronic document) expressing the content thereof which is signed by the person or persons concluding the transaction, or by persons duly authorized by them in own hand or using means of communication and other technical means, computer programs, information systems or information networks, if such a method of signing allows to reliably establish that the corresponding text is signed by the person or persons concluding the transaction, or by persons duly authorized by them (facsimile reproduction of a handwritten signature using mechanical or other copying, electronic digital signature or other analogue of the handwritten signature ensuring identification of the person or persons concerned), and does not contradict the law and agreement of the parties.
In the cases provided for by the legislative acts, only the methods of making transactions in a simple written form, determined by them, are allowed.
Bilateral (multilateral) transactions may be concluded by the means established by Article 404(2) and (3) of this Code. Additional requirements to which the form of the transaction must conform may be established by the legislation, and by agreement of the parties (conclusion on a letterhead of a specified form, etc.), and consequences provided for the failure to comply with these requirements. If such consequences have not been provided, the consequences of the failure to comply with the simple written form of a transaction shall apply (Article 163(1)).
2. [Excluded]
3. If a citizen as a consequence of physical defect, illness, or illiteracy cannot sign in his own hand, then at his request another citizen may sign a document expressing the content of a transaction.
The signature of the citizen who signs a document expressing the content of a transaction must be certified by a notary or by another official having the right to perform such a notarial action, specifying the reasons by virtue of which the person concluding the transaction could not sign a document expressing the content of a transaction in his own hand.
The signature of the individual who signs a document expressing the content of a transaction that need not to be certified by a notary, or of the individual who signs a power of attorney for its conclusion may be certified also by the organization in which the citizen who cannot sign in his own hand works or studies, by the organization which carries out the operation and maintenance of housing facilities and (or) providing housing and utility services in the place of residence or by a healthcare organization that carries out medical assistance in hospitals in which the citizen undergoes treatment. Mentioned organization are not entitled to deny a citizen who cannot sign in his own hand, in his request to certify a signature of the individual who signs the document expressing the content of a transaction that need not to be certified by a notary, or the individual who signs a power of attorney for its conclusion.
Article 162. Transactions Concluded in Simple Written Form There must be concluded in simple written form, except for transactions requiring notarial certification: 1) transactions of legal persons between themselves and with citizens; 2) transactions of citizens between themselves for an amount exceeding not less than ten times the basic value, established by the legislation, unless otherwise provided by the legislation. Compliance with the simple written form shall not be required for transactions which in accordance with Article 160 of this Code may be concluded orally.
Article 163. Consequences of Failure to Comply with Simple Written Form of Transaction 1. The failure to comply with the simple written form of a transaction shall deprive the parties of the right in the event of a dispute to refer in confirmation of the transaction and its conditions to witness testimony, but shall not deprive them of the right also to cite written and other evidence, not being the witness testimony. 2. In the instances expressly specified in a legislation or in the agreement of the parties the failure to comply with the simple written form of a transaction shall entail its invalidity. 3. The failure to comply with the simple written form of a foreign economic transaction shall entail the invalidity of the transaction
Article 164. Notarially Certified Transactions
1. The notarial certification of a transaction shall be effectuated by means of the performing on the document of an endorsement of certification corresponding to the requirements of Article 161 of this Code by a notary or other official having the right to perform such a notarial action. 2. Notarial certification of transactions shall be obligatory: 1) in the instances specified in a legislation; 2) in the instances provided for by agreement of the parties, although according to a legislation for transactions of the particular type this form is not required.
Article 165. State Registration of Transactions 1. Transactions with immovable property shall be subject to state registration in accordance with the procedure provided for by this Code and the legislation on the registration of immovable property, rights to it and transactions with it, unless otherwise established by legislative acts.. 2. State registration of transactions with movable property of determined types may be established by the legislation.
Article 166. Consequences of Failure to Comply with Notarial Form of Transaction and Requirements for Registration Thereof The failure to comply with the notarial form or the requirements concerning state registration of a transaction shall entail its invalidity. Such a transaction shall be considered to be void. If one of the parties wholly or partially has performed a transaction requiring notarial certification, and the other party has evaded such certification of the transaction, the court shall have the right at the demand of the party who performed the transaction to deem the transaction to be valid. In this event subsequent notarial certification of the transaction shall not be required. If a transaction requiring state registration has been concluded in the proper form but one of the parties evades the registration thereof, a court shall have the right at the demand of the other party to render a decision concerning registration of the transaction. In this event the transaction shall be registered in accordance with the decision of the court. In the instances provided for by Clauses 2 and 3 of this Article the party who unjustifiably evades notarial certification or state registration of a transaction must compensate the other party for losses caused by the delay in concluding or registering the transaction.
§ 2. Invalidity of Transactions
Article 167. Contested and Void Transactions
1. A transaction shall be invalid on the grounds established by this Code or other legislative acts by virtue of being deemed such by a court (contested transaction) or irrespective of such deeming (void transaction).
2. A demand to establish the fact of voidness of the transaction and to apply the consequences of the invalidity may be submitted by any interested persons. The court has the right to establish the fact of voidness of the transaction at its own initiative. In this case the court applies the consequences of the invalidity of the void transaction.
3. A demand to invalidate a contested transaction may be brought by the persons specified in this Code or in other legislative act, establishing the contestability of the transaction.
Article 168. General Provisions on Consequences of Invalidity of Transaction
1. An invalid transaction shall not entail legal consequences, except for those which are connected with its invalidity, and shall be invalid from the time of its conclusion. However, If it follows from the content of the transaction that it may be only terminated for a future time, the court deeming the transaction to be invalid shall terminate its operation for a future time.
2. In the event of the invalidity of a transaction, each of the parties shall be obliged to return to the other everything received according to the transaction, and if it is impossible to return that received in kind (including when that received is ex pressed in the use of property, work fulfilled, or service rendered), to compensate its value in money, unless other consequences of the invalidity of the transaction have been provided for by this Code or other legislative acts.
Article 169. Invalidity of Transaction Not Conforming to the Legislation A transaction not corresponding to the requirements of the legislation shall be void unless the legislation establishes that such a transaction is contestable or provides other consequences for the violation.
Article 170. Invalidity of Transaction, Conclusion of Which is Prohibited by the Legislation A transaction conclusion of which is prohibited by the legislation, shall be void. When both parties to such a transaction have intent, in the event of performance of the transaction by both parties, everything received by them under the transaction shall be recovered to the revenue of the Republic of Belarus, and in the event of the performance of the transaction by one party, from the other party, everything received and everything due from it to the first party (in compensation of that received) shall be recovered for the revenue of the Republic of Belarus. When only one party of such a transaction has intent, everything received by it under the transaction must be returned to the other party, and everything received by the latter or due to it in compensation of that performed shall be recovered to the revenue of the Republic of Belarus.
Article 171. Invalidity of Fictitious and Sham Transactions l. A fictitious transaction, that is, a transaction concluded only for form, without the intention to create legal consequences corresponding to it, shall be void. 2. A sham transaction, that is, a transaction which is concluded for the purpose of concealing another transaction, shall be void. To the transaction which the parties actually had in view, taking into account the essence of the transaction, shall apply the rules relevant thereto.
Article 172. Invalidity of Transaction Concluded by Citizen Deemed to Lack Active Legal Capacity 1. A transaction concluded by a citizen deemed to lack active legal capacity as a consequence of mental disorder (disease) shall be void. Each of the parties to such a transaction shall be obliged to return to the other everything received in kind, and if it is impossible to return that received in kind, to compensate its value in money. The party having active legal capacity shall be obliged, in addition, to compensate to the other party the real damage incurred by it if the party having active legal capacity knew or should have known about the lack of active legal capacity of the other party.
2. In the interests of a citizen deemed to lack active legal capacity as a consequence of mental disorder (disease), the transaction concluded by him may, at the demand of his trustee, be deemed by a court to be valid if it was concluded to the advantage of this citizen.
Article 173. Invalidity of Transaction Concluded by Minor Who Has Not Attained Fourteen Years of Age
1. A transaction concluded by a minor who has not attained fourteen years of age (juvenile) shall be void. To such transaction shall apply the rules provided for by Article 172(1), parts two and three, of this Code.
2. In the interests of the juvenile, a transaction concluded by him may at the demand of his parents, adoptive parents, or trustee be deemed by a court to be valid if it was concluded to the advantage of the juvenile.
3. The rules of this Article shall not extend to petty domestic and other transactions of juveniles which they have the right to conclude autonomously in accordance with Article 27 of this Code.
Article 174. Invalidity of Transaction of Legal Person Exceeding the Limits of Its Legal Capacity A transaction concluded by a legal person which is contrary to the purposes of its activity, or by a legal person not having a special permit (license) to engage in the respective activity, may be deemed by a court to be invalid upon the suit of the owner of property (founder, participant) of this legal person, or the state body carrying out control or supervision over the activity of the legal person, if the other party to the transaction knew or was obliged to know, by virtue of the act of legislation, about the illegality of transaction, but has concluded the deal intentionally or by negligence.
Article 175. Consequences of Limitation of Powers to Conclude Transaction If the powers of a person to conclude a transaction have been limited by a contract, or the powers of the body of a legal person have been limited by its constituent documents, in comparison with those as determined in a power of attorney or in a legislation, or which may be considered to be obvious from the situation in which the transaction was concluded, and when concluding it such person or body exceeded these limitations, the transaction may be deemed by a court to be invalid upon the suit of the person in whose interests the limitations were established.
Article 176. Invalidity of Transaction Concluded by Minor from Fourteen to Eighteen Years of Age A transaction concluded by a minor from fourteen to eighteen years of age without the consent of his parents, adoptive parents, or guardian, in the instances when such consent is required in accordance with Article 25 of this Code, may be deemed by a court to be invalid upon the suit of the parents, adoptive parents, or guardian. If such transaction is deemed to be invalid, the rules provided for by Article 172(1), paragraphs two and three, of this Code shall apply respectively.
Article 177. Invalidity of Transaction Concluded by Citizen Not Capable to Understand the Meaning of His Actions or Guide These Actions 1. A transaction concluded by a citizen, although having active legal capacity but being, at the time of concluding, in such a state that this citizen was not capable to understand the meaning of his actions or to guide these actions, may be deemed by a court to be invalid upon the suit of this citizen or other persons whose rights or interests protected by legislation have been violated as a result of the conclusion thereof.
2. A transaction concluded by a citizen who is subsequently deemed to lack active legal capacity may be deemed by a court to be invalid upon the suit of his trustee if it is proved that at the time of concluding the transaction the citizen was not capable to understand the meaning of his actions or guide these actions.
3. If a transaction is deemed to be invalid on the grounds of this Article, the rules provided for by Article 172(1), paragraphs two and three, of this Code shall apply respectively.
Article 178. Invalidity of Transaction Concluded by Citizen Limited by Court in Active Legal Capacity 1. A transaction relating to the disposition of property concluded without the consent of the guardian by a citizen limited by a court in active legal capacity as a consequence of the abusing alcoholic beverages, narcotics, psychotropic substances, analogues thereof may be deemed by a court to be invalid upon the suit of the guardian. If such transaction has been deemed to be invalid, the rules provided for by Article 172(1), paragraphs two and three, of this Code shall apply respectively. 2. The rules of this Article shall not extend to petty domestic transactions which a citizen limited in active legal capacity has the right to conclude autonomously in accordance with Article 30 of this Code.
Article 179. Invalidity of Transaction Concluded Under Influence of Delusion l. A transaction concluded under the influence of delusion having material significance may be deemed to be invalid by a court upon the suit of the party who acted under the influence of delusion. Delusion relative to the essence of the transaction, the identity or such qualities of its subject which significantly reduce the possibility of using it for its purpose shall have material significance. Delusion relative to the motives for the transaction shall not have material significance. 2. If the transaction is deemed to be invalid as concluded under the influence of delusion, the rules provided for by Article 168(2) of this Code shall apply respectively. In addition, the party at whose suit the transaction was deemed to be invalid shall have the right to demand from the other party compensation for real damage caused to it, if it would prove that the delusion arose through the fault of the other party. If this would not be proved, the party at whose suit the transaction was deemed to be invalid shall be obliged to compensate the other party at its demand for real damage caused to it, even if the delusion arose through circumstances not dependent upon the deluded party.
Article 180. Invalidity of Transaction Concluded Under Influence of Fraud, Coercion, Threat, or Ill- intentioned Agreement of Representative of One Party with Other Party or Confluence of Grave Circumstances
1. A transaction concluded under the influence of fraud, coercion, threat, or ill- intentioned agreement of a representative of one party with the other party, and also a transaction which a person was forced to conclude as a consequence of the confluence of grave circumstances on conditions extremely disadvantageous for himself which the other party took advantage of (bondage transaction) may be deemed by a court to be invalid upon the suit of any interested person.
2. If the transaction was deemed invalid on one of the grounds specified in Clause 1 of this Article, then the other party shall return to the victim everything received by it under the transaction, and if it is impossible to return everything received in kind, the value thereof shall be compensated in money. Property received under a transaction by the victim from the other party, and also that due to it in compensation of that transferred to the other party, shall be recovered to the revenue of the Republic of Belarus. If it is impossible to transfer the property to the revenue of the state in kind, the value thereof in
money shall be recovered. In addition, the victim shall be compensated by the other party for real damage caused to it.
Article 181. Consequences of Invalidity of Part of Transaction The invalidity of part of the transaction shall not entail the invalidity of its other parts if it is possible to suppose that the transaction would have been concluded also without including the invalid part thereof.
Article 182. Periods of Limitations Regarding Invalid Transactions
1. A lawsuit concerning recognizing the fact that the transaction is void and the application of the consequences of the invalidity of a void transaction may be brought within ten years from the date when the performance thereof commenced.
Legislative acts may establish other time limits to present lawsuits to establish a fact of voidance of certain types of transactions and on application of consequences of the invalidity of such transactions.
2. A suit to deem a contested transaction to be invalid or concerning the application of the consequences of its invalidity may be brought within three years from the date of the termination of the coercion or threat, under influence of which the transaction was concluded (Article 180(1)), or from the date when the plaintiff knew or should have known about other circumstances which are the grounds for deeming the transaction to be invalid.
CHAPTER 10 Representation. Power of Attorney
Article 183. Representation 1. A transaction concluded by one person (representative) in the name of another person (person represented) by virtue of a power based on a power of attorney, legislation, or act of an authorized state body or body of local administration or self- government shall directly create, change, and terminate civil rights and duties of the person represented. A power also may be obvious from the situation in which the representative acts (seller in retail trade, cashier, and others). 2. Persons acting, although in the interests of another but in their own name (executors in the event of inheritance, and so on), and also persons authorized to enter into negotiations relative to possible future transactions and temporal (anti-crisis) managers within the procedure of bankruptcy are not considered representatives.
3. A representative may not conclude transactions in the name of the person represented with respect to the representative himself personally. He also may not conclude such transactions with respect to another person whose representative he is simultaneously, except for instances of commercial representation.
4. The conclusion through a representative of a transaction which by its character may be concluded only personally, and likewise other transactions specified in a law, shall not be permitted.
Article 184. Conclusion of Transaction by Unauthorized Person
1. In the absence of powers to act in the name of another person or in the event of exceeding such powers, the transaction shall be considered to be concluded in the name of and in the interests of the person who concluded it unless the other person (person represented) subsequently approves expressly the particular transaction.
2. Subsequent approval of a transaction by the person represented shall create, change, and terminate civil rights and duties for him with regard to the particular transaction from the time of its conclusion.
Article 185. Commercial Representation
1. A person who permanently and autonomously is representing in the name of entrepreneurs when they conclude contracts in the sphere of entrepreneurial activity shall be a commercial representative.
2. The simultaneous commercial representation of various parties in a transaction shall be permitted with the consent of these parties and in other instances provided for by the legislation. In so doing, the commercial representative shall be obliged to perform the commissions given to him with the care of an ordinary entrepreneur. A commercial representative shall have the right to demand the payment of stipulated remuneration and compensation for costs incurred by him when performing the commission from the parties to the contract in equal shares unless otherwise provided by agreement between them. 3. A commercial representation shall be effectuated on the basis of a contract concluded in written form and containing an indication of the powers of the representative, and in the absence of such indications, also a power of attorney. A commercial representative shall be obliged to preserve the confidence of the information which became known to him concerning trade transactions also after the performance of the commission given to him. 4. The peculiarities of commercial representation in individual spheres of entrepreneurial activity shall be established by the legislation.
Article 186. Power of Attorney
1. A power of attorney is recognized a written power being issued having regard to requirements of this Article by one person to another person for representation to third persons. A written power to conclude a transaction by a representative may be presented by the person represented directly to the respective third person.
2. A power of attorney to conclude transactions requiring the notarial form must be certified notarially or in accordance with clause 3 of this Article, except for instances provided for by the legislative acts.
3. There shall be equated to notarially certified powers of attorney: 1) powers of attorney of military servicemen and other persons being treated in military hospitals, sanatoriums, and other military medical institutions certified by the head of such institution, his deputy for medical affairs, the senior doctor or doctor on duty; 2) powers of attorney of military servicemen, and, in places of location of military units, formations, institutions, and education institutions performing training of personnel on specializations (areas of specializations, specializations) for Armed Forces of the Republic of Belarus, other troops and military formations of the Republic of Belarus, where there are no notarial offices, notarial bureaus or other bodies which perform notarial actions, also the powers of attorney of civil workers and employees, working in these military units, formations, institutions, members of their families and members of the families of military servicemen, certified by the commander (head) of these units, formations or institutions;
3) powers of attorney of persons held in institutions for the service of punishment in the form of arrest, restriction of freedom, deprivation of freedom, or places of detention, certified by heads of the respective institutions for the service of punishment or chiefs of administrations of the places of detention; 4) [excluded] 5) powers of attorney of citizens being treated in hospitals and other healthcare organizations that provide medical care in hospital, or living in social care institutions providing in-patient social services, certified by chief doctors, their deputies on medicine or on-duty doctors of these clinics, hospitals and other healthcare organizations providing medical care in in-patient premises, as well as heads of hospitals, heads (their deputies) of social care institutions providing in-patient social services, heads (their deputies) of respective bodies on labour, employment and social protection. 4. A power of attorney to receive by citizens earnings and other payment connected with labor relations, to receive the remuneration of authors and inventors, pensions, benefits, and scholarships, deposits of citizens in banks and non-bank credit and financial institutions and to receive mail (including money, send by mail, and parcels), may be certified certified notarially or in accordance with clause 3 of this Article or by the organization in which the principal works or studies, the organization which carries out the operation and maintenance of housing facilities and (or) providing housing and utility services in his place of residence. The powers of attorney for receiving by the citizens payments in banks or non-bank credit and financial organizations, as well as to order monetary funds of citizens, placed on their bank accounts or placed in their bank deposits, may be certified also by the bank or non-bank credit and financial organization in which the bank account is open or the bank deposit is placed. In case if a citizen applies for a certification of the power of attorney referred to in parts one and two of this clause, the organization in which the principal works or studies, organization, carrying out the exploitation of the housing stock and (or) providing housing and utility services, at his place of residence, bank or non-bank credit and financial organization, in which its bank account is opened or his bank deposit is placed are obliged to certify such power of attorney if its content does not contradict the requirements of this Code and other legislative acts. 5. A power of attorney in the name of a legal person shall be issued over the signature of its head or other person authorized by the constituent document of this organization. The head of a legal person operates, within the scope of its competent authority, on behalf thereof without a power of attorney. A power of attorney in the name of a legal person based on the ownership of the Republic of Belarus or its administrative territorial units for the receipt or issuance of money and other property valuables must be signed also by the chief accountant of this organization, head of an organization or individual entrepreneur, providing services on maintaining accounting and drawing up financial statements. 6. The power of attorney enters into force from the day of its execution in a necessary form when the certification of this power of attorney is not needed, or from the day of its certification when it is needed, unless a later time limit for its entry into force provided by the power of attorney.
Article 187. Term of Validity of Power of Attorney 1. The term of validity of a power of attorney may not exceed three years. If the term has not been specified in the power of attorney, it shall retain force for a year from the date of the conclusion thereof. A power of attorney in which the date of its conclusion has not been specified shall be void. 2. A power of attorney certified by a notary and intended for the performance of actions abroad and not containing an indication of the term of its operation shall retain force until the revocation thereof by the person who has issued the power of attorney.
Article 188. Transfer of Power of Attorney
1. A person to whom the power of attorney was issued must personally perform those actions for which he is authorized. This person may transfer the performing of these actions to another person if authorized to do so by the power of attorney or forced to do it by virtue of circumstances in order to protect the interests of the person who issued the power of attorney.
2. A power of attorney issued by way of transfer must be notarially certified, except for instances provided for by Article 186(4) of this Code.
3. A term of validity of a power of attorney issued by way of transfer may not exceed the term of validity of the power of attorney on the basis of which it was issued.
4. The person who transferred the power of attorney to another person must notify the person who issued the power of attorney thereof and communicate to him necessary information about the person to whom the powers have been transferred. The failure to perform this duty shall place on the person who transferred the power liability for the actions of the person to whom he transferred the power as they were his own.
Article 189. Termination of Power of Attorney 1. The operation of a power of attorney shall terminate as a consequence of: 1) expiry of the term of validity of the power of attorney; 2) revocation of the power of attorney by the person who issued it; 3) renunciation by the person to whom the power of attorney was issued; 4) termination of the legal person in whose name the power of attorney was issued; 5) termination of the legal person to whom the power of attorney was issued; 6) death of the citizen who issued the power of attorney, deeming him to lack active legal capacity, limited active legal capacity, or to be missing; 7) death of the citizen to whom the power of attorney was issued, deeming him to lack active legal capacity, limited active legal capacity, or to be missing.
2. A person who issued the power of attorney may at any time revoke the power of attorney or the transfer of the power of attorney, and the person to whom the power of attorney was issued, may renounce it. An agreement concerning the waiver of these rights shall be void.
3. The transfer of a power of attorney shall lose force with the termination of the power of attorney.
Article 190. Consequences of Termination of Power of Attorney
1. A person who has issued a power of attorney and subsequently revoked it shall be obliged to notify the person to whom the power of attorney was issued about the revocation thereof, as well as third persons known to him with respect to whom the power of attorney was issued for representation. The same duty shall be placed on the legal successors of the person who issued a power of attorney in instances of the termination thereof on the grounds provided for in Article 189(1), subclauses (4) and (6), of this Code.
2. The rights and duties which arose as a result of the actions of the person to whom a power of attorney is issued before this person knew or should have known about its termination shall retain force for the person who issued the power of attorney and his legal successors with respect to third persons. This rule shall not apply if the third person knew or should have known that the operation of the power of attorney had terminated.
3. With regard to the termination of a power of attorney the person to whom it was issued or his legal successors shall be obliged immediately to return the power of attorney.
SUBSECTION 5 TERMS. LIMITATION PERIOD
CHAPTER 11 Calculation of Terms
Article 191. Determination of Term A term established by the legislation, a transaction, or designated by a court shall be determined by a calendar date or by the expiry of a period of time which shall be calculated by years, months, weeks, days, or hours. A term may also be determined by specifying an event which must inevitably ensue.
Article 192. Commencement of Term Determined by Period of Time The running of a term determined by a period of time shall commence on the following day after the calendar date or ensuing of the event by which its commencement is determined.
Article 193. Ending of Term Determined by Period of Time 1. A term calculated by years shall expire in the corresponding month and date of the last year of the term. The rules for terms calculated by months shall apply to a term calculated by a half-year. For these purposes, a half-year is considered as equal to six months.
2. To a term calculated by quarters of a year shall apply the rules for terms calculated by months. The quarter shall be considered to be equal to three months, and the quarters shall be calculated from the beginning of the year.
3. A term calculated by months shall expire on the corresponding date of the last month of the term. A term determined as a half-month shall be considered as a term calculated by days and shall be considered to be equal to fifteen days. If the ending of a term calculated by months comes in such month in which there is no corresponding date, the term shall expire on the last day of that month. 4. A term calculated by weeks shall expire on the corresponding day of the last week of the term.
Article 194. Ending of Term on Non-Working Day If the last day of a term comes on a non-working day, the next working day following shall be considered to be the day of ending of the term.
Article 195. Procedure for Performing Actions on Last Day of Term 1. If a term has been established for performing any action whatever, it may be fulfilled up to 24:00 of the last day of the term.
However, if this action had to be performed in an organization, the term shall expire at that hour when in this organization the respective operations terminate according to the established rules. 2. Written applications and notifications handed in to the post office, telegraph or other communication institution before 24:00 of the last day of the term shall be considered to be made within the term.
CHAPTER 12 Limitation Period
Article 196. Concept of Limitation Period The term for the defense of a right upon the suit of a person whose right has been violated shall be deemed to be a Limitation Period.
Article 197. General Limitation Period The general limitation period shall be three years.
Article 198. Special Limitation Periods
1. Special limitation periods may be established for individual types of requirements by this Code and other legislative acts which are reduced or extended in comparison with the general period.
2. The rules of Articles 199-208 of this Code also cover special limitation period unless otherwise established by this Code and other legislative acts.
Article 199. Invalidity of Agreement to Change of Limitation Period Limitation periods and the procedure for their calculation may not be changed by agreement of the parties. The grounds for the suspension and interruption of the running of limitation periods shall be established by the legislative acts.
Article 200. Application of Limitation Period
1. A demand concerning the defense of a violated right shall be accepted for consideration by a court irrespective of the expiry of the limitation period.
2. Limitation period shall be applied by a court only upon the declaration of the party to the dispute to be made before the court renders the decision. The expiry of the limitation period, about the application of which the party to the dispute has made the declaration, shall be the ground for the court to render a decision to reject the suit.
Article 201. Commencement of Limitation Period 1. The limitation period shall commence on the day when the person knew or should have known about the violation of its right. Exceptions from this rule shall be established by the legislative acts. 2. With regard to obligations with a specified period of performance, the limitation period shall commence upon the end of the period of performance.
With regard to obligations the term for the performance of which has not been determined or has been determined by the time of demand, the limitation period shall commence when the right arises for the creditor to submit a demand concerning the performance of the obligation, and if the debtor is granted an exemption term for performance of such demand, the calculation of limitation period shall commence upon the ending of the said term. 3. With regard to regressive obligations the limitation period shall commence on the moment of performance of the principal obligation.
Article 202. Limitation Period in Event of Change of Persons in Obligation The change of persons in an obligation shall not entail a change of the limitation period and the procedure for its calculation.
Article 203. Suspension of Limitation Period 1. The limitation period shall be suspended; 1) if the bringing of suit has been hindered by an extraordinary and unavoidable circumstance under the particular conditions (force majeure); 2) if the plaintiff or defendant is in the Armed Forces of the Republic of Belarus, being under the martial law; 3) by virtue of a deferral for the performance of obligations established on the basis of a legislative act by the Government of the Republic of Belarus (moratorium); 4) by virtue of the suspension of the operation of the act of legislation regulating the respective relation; 5) if a pre trial complaint has been presented; 6) if the agreement on the implementation of mediation is concluded.
2. The limitation period shall be suspended on condition that the circumstances specified in this Article arose or have continued to exist during the last six months of the limitation period, and if this period is equal to six months or less than six months, within the limitation period.
3. The running of the period shall continue from the date of termination of the circumstances being the grounds for suspension of the limitation. The remaining part of the period shall be extended up to six months, and if the limitation period is equal to six months or less than six months, up to the limitation period.
In case of conclusion of the agreement on the implementation of the mediation the limitation period shall be postponed from the day of the conclusion of such an agreement till the day of the termination of the mediation.
When a pre-trial complaint has been presented, the running of the limitation period is suspended from the day of sending of the pre-trial complaint till the receipt of the response to the pre-trial complaint or expiration of the time limit for response established by the legislation or the contract.
Article 204. Interruption of Running of Limitation Period The running of the limitation period shall be interrupted by bringing suit in the established procedure, and also by the performance of actions by the obliged person which testify to recognition of the debt. After the interruption, the running of the limitation period shall commence anew. The time which elapsed before interruption shall not be taken into consideration in the new period.
Article 205. Running of Limitation Period in Event of Leaving Suit Without Consideration If a suit has been left without consideration by a court, then the running of the limitation period which commenced before bringing suit shall continue in the general procedure. If a suit brought in a criminal case has been left by a court without consideration then the running of the limitation period which commenced before bringing suit shall be suspended until the entry into legal force of the judgment by which the suit was left without consideration. The time during which the limitation period was suspended shall not be included in the limitation period. In so doing, if the remaining part of the period is less than six months, it shall be extended up to six months.
Article 206. Restoration of Limitation Period In exceptional instances, when the court deems the reason for the lapsing of the limitation period to be justifiable with regard to circumstances connected with the person of the plaintiff (grave illness, helpless state, illiteracy, and the like), the violated right of the citizen shall be subject to defense. The reasons for the lapse of a limitation period may be deemed to be justifiable if they occurred in the last six months of the limitation period, and if this period is equal to six months or less than six months, during the limitation period.
Article 207. Performance of Duty Upon Expiry of Limitation period A debtor or other obliged person who has performed a duty upon the expiry of the limitation period shall not have the right to demand back that which has been performed, even though at the time of performance the said person did not know about the expiry of the limitation period.
Article 208. Application of Limitation Period to Additional Demands The limitation period regarding additional demands (penalty, pledge, suretyship, and the like) shall expire with the expiry of the limitation period regarding the principal demand.
Article 209. Demands to Which Limitation Period Do Not Extend Limitation period shall hot extend to: 1) demands concerning the defense of personal non-property rights and other nonmaterial benefits, except for instances provided for by the legislation; 2) demands of depositors against a bank or a non-bank credit and financial organization concerning the issuance of deposits; 3) demands concerning compensation of harm caused to the life or health of a citizen. However, demands brought upon the expiry of three years from the time of the arising of the right to compensation for such harm shall be satisfied for not more than three years preceding the bringing of suit; 4) demands of the owner or other possessor concerning the elimination of any violations of his right, even though these violations were not connected with a deprivation of possession (Article 285); 5) other demands in the instances established by the legislative acts.
SECTION II RIGHT OF OWNERSHIP AND OTHER REAL RIGHTS
CHAPTER 13 General Provisions
Article 210. Content of Right of Ownership l. The rights of possession, use, and disposition of his property shall belong to the owner. 2. The owner shall have the right at his discretion to perform with respect to property belonging to him any actions which are not contrary to a legislation, public benefit and security, not causing harm for the environment, historical and cultural valuables, not infringing the rights and the interests, protected by the legislation, of other persons, including the right to alienate his property in ownership to other persons, to transfer to other persons while remaining the owner the rights of possession, use, and disposition of the property, to pledge out property and to encumber it by other means, and to otherwise dispose of it. The right of ownership of the property acquired by a unitary enterprise, state association or institution on contracts or other grounds is acuired by the owner of the property of this unitary enterprise, state association or institution.
3. The possession, use, and disposition of land and other natural resources to the extent that their turnover is permitted by the legislation shall be effectuated by the owner thereof freely unless this causes damage to the environment and violates the rights and legal interests of other persons.
4. The owner may transfer his property in trust management to another person (trustee manager). The transfer of property to trust management shall not entail the transfer of the right of ownership to the trust manager, who shall be obliged to effectuate the management of the property in the interests of the owner or a third person specified by the owner.
5. The right of ownership shall not be limited in time.
Article 211. Burden of Maintenance of Property The owner shall bear the burden of maintenance of the property belonging to him unless otherwise provided by legislation or contract.
Article 212. Risk of Accidental Perishing of Property The risk of accidental perishing or accidental damaging of property shall be borne by the owner thereof unless otherwise provided by legislation or by contract.
Article 213. Forms and Subjects of Right of Ownership
1. The property may be the state property or the private property.
2. The subjects of the right of the state property are the Republic of Belarus and administrative territorial units.
3. The subjects of the right of the private property are the natural persons and non-state legal persons. The peculiarities of the acquisition and termination of the right of ownership to property and the possession, use, and disposition of it depending upon whether the property is in the ownership of a citizen or legal person or in the ownership of the Republic of Belarus or administrative territorial units, may be established by the legislation, or, in cases provided for by the Constitution of the Republic of Belarus, only by the law. 4. The rights of all owners shall be protected equally.
Article 214. Right of Ownership of Citizens and Legal Persons
1. Any property may be in the ownership of citizens and legal persons, except for individual types of property which in accordance with the legislation may not belong to citizens or legal persons.
2. The quantity and value of property in the ownership of citizens and legal persons shall not be limited, except for instances when such limitations have been established by the law for the purposes of national security, public order, protection of moralities, health of the population, rights and freedoms of the other persons. For the legal persons, such limitations can be established by the legislative acts.
3. The property, transferred as contributions (dues) by the founders (the participants, the members) to the commercial and non-commercial organizations (with the exception of the property transferred to the unitary enterprises, state associations or to the institutions, financed by the owner), as well as property, acquired by these legal persons, is in the ownership of these legal persons.
4. The founders (the participants, the members) of the commercial organization, in relation to the property, being in the ownership of this organization, have rights of obligation, defined in the constituent documents of this organization.
5. Public and religious organizations, charitable and other funds shall be the owners of property acquired by them and may use it only in order to achieve the purposes provided for by the constituent documents thereof. The founders (participants, members) of these organizations shall lose the right for property transferred by them to the ownership of the respective organization. In the event of the liquidation of such organization the property thereof remaining after satisfaction of the demands of creditors shall be used for the purposes specified in its constituent documents.
Article 215. Right of State Ownership 1. The state property appears as the Republic's property (the property of the Republic of Belarus) and communal property (the property of administrative territorial units). 2. The Republic's property consists of the treasury of the Republic of Belarus and the property, consolidated to the Republic's legal persons in accordance with the acts of legislation. The funds of the Republic's budget, gold and currency holdings, the other objects, being only in the ownership of the state, and other state property, not consolidated to the Republic's legal persons, form the treasury of the Republic of Belarus. 3. The communal property consists of the treasury of the administrative territorial unit and the property, consolidated to the communal legal persons in accordance with acts of legislation. The funds of the local budget and other communal property, not consolidated to the communal legal persons, form the treasury of the respective administrative territorial unit.
Article 216. The Property of the State Legal Persons The property, being in the state ownership, may be consolidated to the state legal persons by the right of economic management or operative administration.
Article 217. Real Rights of Persons Who Are Not Owners 1. The rights to a thing, in addition to the right of ownership, are, in particular 1) the right of economic management and the right of operative administration (Articles 276 and 277); 2) the right of inheritable possession for life of a land plot;
3) the right of permanent use of a land plot and the right of temporary use of a land plot; 4) servitudes (Article 268).
2. The transfer of the right of ownership in property to another person shall not be grounds for the termination of other rights to a thing in this property.
3. The rights to a thing of a person who is not an owner shall be protected against the violation thereof in accordance with the procedure provided for by Article 286 of this Code.
Article 218. Privatization of State Property Privatization of the property, being in the state ownership, is effectuated in accordance with the procedure, provided by the legislation on privatization. For privatization of the property, being in the Republic's and communal ownership, the provisions, provided for by this Code, regulating the procedure of the acquisition and termination of the right of ownership, shall apply unless the legislation on privatization provide otherwise.
CHAPTER 14 Acquisition of Right of Ownership
Article 219. Grounds for Acquisition of Right of Ownership 1. The right of ownership to a new thing manufactured or created by a person for himself in compliance with the legislation shall be acquired by this person. The right of ownership to yield, products, and revenues received as a result of the use of property shall be acquired on the grounds provided for by Article 136 of this Code. 2. The right of ownership to property having an owner may be acquired by another person on the basis of a contract of purchase-sale, barter, gift, or other transaction concerning the alienation of this property. In the event of the death of a citizen the right of ownership to the property belonging to him shall pass by inheritance to other persons in accordance with the will or a law. In the event of the reorganization of a legal person the right of ownership to the property belonging to it shall pass to the legal persons - legal successors of the reorganized legal person (Article 54). Alienation of property to other person against the will of the owner is not permitted, with the exception of cases, provided by the legislation. 3. In the instances and in accordance with the procedure provided for by the legislation, a person may acquire the right of ownership in property which has no owner, in property whose owner is unknown, or in property which the owner has renounced or to which the owner has lost the right of ownership on other grounds provided for by the legislation.
4. The member of a housing cooperative, housing construction cooperative, country cottage (dacha) cooperative, garage cooperative or other consumer cooperative, other persons having the right to accumulation of share, who have fully made their share contribution to an apartment, country cottage (dacha), garage, or other premise, parking lot, granted to these persons by the cooperative shall acquire the right of ownership to the said property since the time of registration of this right in accordance with existing procedure.
Article 220. Arising of Right of Ownership in Newly Created Immovable Property
1. The right of ownership to a capital construction (building, structure) being contstucted and other newly created immovable property shall arise from the time of the end of creation, unless otherwise established by the legislation. 2. In the instances when newly created immovable property is subject to the state registration, the right of ownership shall arise from the time of such registration, unless otherwise established by the legislation. 3. Before the end of creation of the immovable property, or, in the respective cases, before its state registration, the rules on the right of ownership in the materials and other property, of which the immovable property is created, are applied to the property, unless otherwise established by the legislation.
Article 221. Converting 1. Unless otherwise provided by a contract, the right of ownership to a new movable thing manufactured by the person by means of converting materials which do not belong to him shall be acquired by the owner of the materials. However, if the value of the converting significantly exceeds the value of the materials, the right of ownership to a new thing shall be acquired by the person who, acting in good faith, has effectuated the converting for himself.
2. Unless otherwise provided by a contract, the owner of materials who has acquired the right of ownership in a thing, manufactured from these materials, shall be obliged to compensate the value of the converting to the person who has effectuated it, and in the event of the acquisition of the right of ownership to the new thing by this person, the latter shall be obliged to compensate the owner of the materials for the value thereof.
3. The owner of the materials who has lost them as a result of the actions not in good faith of the person who effectuated the converting shall have the right to demand the transfer of the new thing to his ownership and compensation of losses caused to him.
Article 222. Transferring to Ownership of Things Generally Accessible for Gathering In the instances when in accordance with the legislation, general authorization by a particular owner, or in accordance with local custom the gathering of berries, fishing, and gathering or extraction of other generally accessible things and fauna is permitted in forests, waters, or on other territories, the right of ownership in the respective things shall be acquired by the person carrying out the gathering or extraction thereof.
Article 223. Unauthorized Construction and Its Consequences
1. Unauthorized construction is an activity of a person on creation or change of immovable property via construction, reconstruction (building extension, building addition, and rebuilding) of a capital construction (building, structure) if it is carried out:
1) on a willfully occupied land plot;
2) on a land plot used not for its purpose or allotted by a state body which has no power to take a respective decision, and/or without holding an auction, when the allotment of the land plot is possible only on results of an auction, and/or allotted in violation of the established priority of allotting of land plots, and/or without a prior agreeing of the location of the land plot if it is required in accordance with legislative acts;
3) without obtaining necessary permits for construction, reconstruction or without project documentation where the necessity of its developing is provided by legislation, or with considerable violations of town-
planning and building regulations*, unless otherwise provided by the President of the Republic of Belarus.
Immovable property created as a result of unauthorized construction is an unauthorized structure.
Unauthorized construction must be immediately suspended.
_______________________
* Considerable violations of town-planning and building regulations mean violations which can create a potential threat of violation of rights and legitimate interests of other persons, to life or health of citizens, to property of citizens and legal persons, violate rules for using territories established by approved town planning documentation, and also to cause harm to the environment, decrease service ability of the object.
2. The person who carried out unauthorized construction does not acquire the ownership of the unauthorized structure in accordance with clauses one and 2 of Article 220 of this Code and are not entitled to enjoy and dispose of the unauthorized structure: to sell, donate, lease, and conclude other transactions. 3. In the event of unauthorized construction provided by subclause 1 of part one of this Article, the local executive and administrative body shall take, unless otherwise established by the President of the Republic of Belarus, a decision about the return of the wilfully occupied land plot, demolition of the unauthorized structure and bringing the land plot to a condition making it possible to be used according to the purpose, in the order provided by the legislation on protection and use of lands.
4. In the event of unauthorized construction, including when the person acquired a land plot with an unauthorized structure located on it (later on in this Article – the lawful acquirer), in cases provided by subclause 2 of part one of clause one of this Article, the regional (Minsk City) executive committee shall take a decision in relation to the land plot in the order provided by the legislation on protection and use of lands, and also, unless otherwise established by the President of the Republic of Belarus, one of the following decisions:
1) on demolition of the unauthorized structure and bringing the land plot to a condition making it possible to be used according to its purpose, along with determining in such a decision of terms for making those actions;
2) on bringing the unauthorized structure into the previous condition, existing prior to the unauthorized construction, along with determining in such a decision of terms for making those actions.
The person who carried out unauthorized construction on the land plot allotted into the private ownership or lifelong inheritable possession (including the legal acquirer) may be recognized, in the cases provided by subclause 2 of part one of clause one of this Article, on a court decision, as having the ownership of the unauthorized structure, unless the preservation of the unauthorized structure entails considerable violations of town-planning and building regulations.
The recognition by the court of the ownership of the unauthorized structure constitutes a ground for taking the decision on continuing the construction (on accepting the unauthorized structure into operation and its state registration in the established order) and on allotting the land plot in the order provided by the legislation on protection and use of lands.
Submission of an application on recognizing the ownership of the unauthorized structure to the court within the terms indicated in the decision of a regional (Minsk City) executive committee, or its appealing of such a decision in the established order suspends its implementation.
5. In the event of unauthorized construction, including in relation to a legal acquirer, when the legislation has been violated on the grounds specified in subclause 3 of part one of this Article, the local executive
and administrative body shall take, unless otherwise established by the President of the Republic of Belarus, one of the following decisions:
1) on continuing the construction (on accepting the unauthorized structure into operation and its state registration in the established order), unless the preservation of the unauthorized structure entails considerable violations of town-planning and building regulations;
2) on demolition of the unauthorized structure and bringing the land plot to a condition making it possible to be used according to its purpose, along with determining in such a decision of terms for making those actions, if the preservation of the unauthorized structure entails considerable violations of town-planning and building regulations;
3) on bringing the unauthorized structure into the previous condition, preceding the unauthorized construction, along with determining in such a decision of terms for making those actions, if the preservation of the unauthorized structure entails considerable violations of town-planning and building regulations;
Appealing, in the established order, of the decision of the local executive and administrative body specified in subclauses 2 and 3 of part one of this clause suspends its implementation.
6. Demolition of the unauthorized structure and bringing the land plot to a condition making it possible to be used according to the purpose or bringing the unauthorized structure into the previous condition, preceding the unauthorized construction, on the basis of a decision of the local executive and administrative body, taken in accordance with part one of clause 4, and with subclauses 2 or 3 of part one of clause 5 of this Article, is performed by the person who carried out the unauthorized construction, or by the legal acquirer, or at the cost of such persons.
In the events of violation of the legislation on the grounds specified in subclauses 2 and 3 of part one of this Article, the legal acquirer which met the requirements provided by part one of this clause is entitled to lay a recourse claim for reimbursement of incurred expenses to the person who carried out the alienation of such land plot.
7. In the event of refusal of the person who carried out unauthorized construction or the legal acquirer to execute a decision of the local executive and administrative body, which entered into force, adopted in accordance with part one of clause 4 and with sublclauses 2 or 3 of part one of clause 5 of this Article, or of the failure to execute that decision within the established term or in the event when the court has not recognized the ownership of the unauthorized structure in accordance with part 2 of clause 4 of this Article, the local executive and administrative body performs the demolition of the unauthorized structure and bringing the land plot to a condition making it possible to be used according to the purpose or bringing the unauthorized structure into the previous condition, preceding the unauthorized construction, with the exception of the instances specified in clause 8 of this Article.
8. Refusal of the person who carried out unauthorized construction on a land plot being in the state ownership (with the exception of a land plot allotted into an lifelong inheritable possession) to execute a decision of the regional (Minsk City) executive committee, which entered into force, adopted in accordance with part one of clause 4 of this Article, or the failure to execute that decision within the established term is recognized as the refusal of the ownership of materials from which the unauthorized structure has been erected.
In this case the local executive and administrative body (an organization authorized by it) performs one of the following actions:
performs demolition of the unauthorized structure or brings the unauthorized structure into the previous condition, preceding the unauthorized construction (if the preservation of the unauthorized structure
entails considerable violations of town-planning and building regulations), and also brings the land plot to a condition making it possible to be used according to the purpose;
lodges an application to the court for recognizing the materials from which the unauthorized structure has been built as ownerless and recognizing the communal ownership of them (unless the preservation of the unauthorized structure entails considerable violations of town-planning and building regulations). After the entry of the court decision into force, the local executive and administrative body adapts a decision on subsequent use of the material from which the unauthorized structure has been built, including on continuing the construction (on accepting the unauthorized structure into operation and its state registration in the established order) and on allotting the land plot in the order provided by the legislation on protection and use of lands.
9. Recovery of expenses on performance of the demolition of the unauthorized structure or bringing the unauthorized structure into the previous condition, preceding the unauthorized construction, and bringing the land plot to a condition making it possible to be used according to the purpose, in accordance with clause 7 and indent 2 of part 2 of clause 8 of this Article is made in the court procedure.
10) In the event if the unauthorized construction has been carried out on a land plot allotted by a state body which has no powers to adapt a respective decision, and/or without holding an auction, when the allotment of the land plot is possible only as a result of an auction, and/or allotted with violation of the established priority for allotment of land plots, and/or without prior agreeing of the location of the land plot if it is required in accordance with legislative acts, the harm cause to the person as a result of illegal actions (omission) of state bodies or their officials is recovered in accordance with Article 938 of this Code.
Article 224. Time of Origin of Right of Ownership for Acquirer under Contract l. The right of ownership for the acquirer of a thing under a contract shall arise from the time of the transfer thereof unless otherwise provided by the legislation or by a contract. 2. In instances when the contract on alienation of property is subject to state registration, the right of ownership for the acquirer shall arise from the time of such registration, unless otherwise established by the legislation.
Article 225. Transfer of Thing 1. The handing over of a thing to the acquirer shall be deemed to be the transfer, and likewise the handing over to a carrier for dispatch to the acquirer, or to the handing over a communications office for sending to the acquirer of a thing alienated without the obligation of delivery. A thing shall be considered to be handed over to the acquirer from the time of its actual receipt in the possession of the acquirer or person specified by him. 2. If at the time of concluding a contract on the alienation of a thing it is already in the possession of the acquirer, the thing shall be deemed to be transferred to him from this time. 3. The transfer of a bill of lading or other document of goods disposition therefor shall be equated to the transfer of a thing.
Article 226. Ownerless Things 1. A thing which has no owner, or a thing the owner of which is unknown, or a thing, the right of ownership of which has been renounced by the owner, shall be ownerless. 2. Unless that is excluded by the rules of this Code on the acquisition of the right of ownership to a thing which the owner has renounced (Article 227), on find (Articles 228, 229), on neglected animals (Articles
231, 232), and treasure (Article 234), on antique and historic weapons and ammunition, other weapons or military equipment (Article 2341), on archaeological artefacts (Article 2342), on the right of ownership in ownerless movable things may be acquired by virtue of acquisitive prescription (Article 235). 3. Ownerless immovable things shall be accepted for recording by the bodies carrying out state registration of the immovable property, right to it and transactions with it upon the application of the respective state body, unless otherwise established by the legislative acts. The communal right of ownership on the ownerless immovable property may be recognized by a court. A ownerless immovable property not deemed by decision of a court to have entered into communal ownership may be accepted anew into the possession, use, and disposition of the owner who left it, or acquired in ownership by virtue of acquisitive prescription (Article 235).
4. The materials from which the unauthorized structure has been built are recognized as ownerless on grounds provided by Article 233 of this Code in the order established by the civil procedural legislation.
Article 227. Movable Things Which Owner Has Renounced
1. Movable things abandoned by the owner or otherwise left by him (abandoned things) with a view to renouncing the right of ownership may be transferred by other persons into their ownership in accordance with the procedure provided for by Clause 2 of this Article. 2. The person in whose ownership, possession, or use а land plot, water, or other object is, where the abandoned thing is situated, the value of which is obviously lower than an amount corresponding to five times the basic value, or abandoned scrap metal, defective products, the rejected products, the sunk logs (of wood floating), the dumps and the drains of mining, the production wastes and other kinds of wastes are located, has the right to transfer these things into the ownership thereof by starting to use them, or by performing the other actions, being the evidence of transferring the thing into ownership. Other abandoned things shall enter into the ownership of the person who has entered into possession of them if they have been deemed to be ownerless by a court upon the application of this person.
Article 228. Find l. The finder of a lost thing shall be obliged immediately to inform the person who lost it thereof or the owner of the thing or some other person known to him as having the right to receive it and shall return the found thing to this person. If a thing has been found in a premise or on transport it shall be subject to being handed over to a person representing the possessor of this premise or means of transport. In this event the person to whom the find has been handed over shall acquire the rights and bear the duties of the person who found the thing.
2. If the person having the right to demand the return of a found thing or his whereabouts are unknown, the finder of the thing shall be obliged to declare the find to the body of internal affairs or the body of local administration or self-government.
3. The finder of a thing shall have the right to keep it or to hand it over for storage to the body of internal affairs or the body of local administration or self-government or to a person specified by them. A perishable thing or a thing, the costs for storage of which are incommensurately great in comparison with its value may be realized by the finder of the thing, with receiving written evidence certifying the amount of the receipts. The money obtained from the sale of a found thing shall be subject to return to the person authorized to receive it. 4. The finder of a thing shall be liable for its loss or damage only in the event of intent or gross negligence and within the limits of the value of the thing.
Article 229. Acquisition of Right of Ownership in Find 1. If during six months from the time of declaring the find in the body of internal affairs or the body of local administration or self-government (Article 227(2)) the person authorized to receive the found thing has not been determined or does not himself declare his right to the thing to the person who found it, or to the militia or body of local administration or self-government, the finder of the thing shall acquire the right of ownership in it. 2. If the finder of a thing refuses to acquire the found thing in ownership, it shall enter communal ownership.
Article 230. Compensation for Expenses, Connected with Find, and Remuneration to Finder of Thing 1. The finder and returner of a thing to the person authorized to receive it shall have the right to receive from this person, and in instances of the thing passing into communal ownership, from the respective body of local administration or self-government, compensation of necessary expenses connected with storage, handing over, or realization of the thing, and also expenditures for revealing of the person authorized to receive the thing. 2. The finder of a thing shall have the right to demand, from the person authorized to receive the thing, remuneration for the find in the amount of up to 20 percent of the value of the thing. If a found thing is of value only for the person authorized to receive it, the amount of remuneration shall be determined by agreement with this person, or, if the agreement cannot be reached, by the court. The right to remuneration shall not arise if the finder of the thing has not declared the find or has attempted to conceal it.
Article 231. Neglected Animals
1. A person who has detained neglected or stray livestock or other neglected domestic animals shall be obliged to return them to their owner, and if the owner of the animals or his whereabouts is unknown, not later than within three days from the time of detention to declare the animals found to the body of internal affairs or the body of local administration or self-government, which shall take measures to seek the owner.
2. During the search for the owner of the animals they may be left by the person who detained them with himself for maintenance and for use, or handed over for maintenance and use to another person having the necessary conditions for this. At the request of the person who detained neglected animals, the seeking of a person who has the necessary conditions for their maintenance and use and the transfer of the animals thereto shall be effectuated by the body of internal affairs or the body of local administration or self- government. The person who has detained neglected animals and the person to whom they have been transferred for maintenance and use shall be obliged to maintain the animals properly and, if there is fault, shall be liable for the perishing and harm caused for the animals, within the limits of the value thereof.
Article 232. Acquisition of Right of Ownership to Neglected Animals 1. If within six months from the time of declaring the detention of neglected domestic animals the owner of these animals is not discovered or he himself does not declare his right to the animals, the right of ownership to the animals shall be acquired by the person by whom these animals are kept for maintenance and use.
If this person refuses to acquire in ownership the animals maintained by him, these animals shall enter into communal ownership and be used in accordance with the procedure determined by the body of local administration or self-government. 2. In the event of the appearance of the former owner of the animals after transferring these animals into the ownership of another person, the owner shall have the right, when there are circumstances demonstrating that the animals have preserved the affection for the former owner, or the circumstances, indicating that the new owner treats the animals cruelly or otherwise improperly, to demand their return on the conditions determined by an agreement with the new owner, and in the event of the failure to reach agreement, by a court.
Article 233. Compensation of Expenses for Maintenance of Neglected Animals and Remuneration for These Animals 1. The person who detained animals and the person by whom these animals were kept for maintenance and use, shall, in the event of the return of neglected domestic animals to the owner, have the right to compensation by their owner of necessary expenses connected with the maintenance of the animals, with setting off the advantages derived from the use thereof. 2. The person who has detained neglected domestic animals shall have the right to demand remuneration from the owner in accordance with Article 230(2) of this Code.
Article 234. Treasure 1. Treasure, that is, money or valuable objects buried in the earth or concealed by other means, the owner of which cannot be established or by virtue of a legislation has lost the right to these objects, shall enter into the ownership of the person to whom the property belongs (land plot, building etc.) where the treasure was concealed, and the person who discovered the treasure, in equal shares, unless otherwise established by an agreement between them. When a treasure is discovered by a person who has made diggings or searches for the valuables without the consent of the owner of the land plot or other property where the treasure was concealed, the treasure shall be subject to transfer to the owner of the land plot or other property where the treasure was discovered. Rules of parts one and two of this clause do not apply in relation to treasures consisting of archaeological artefacts. 2. In the event of the discovery of a treasure consisting of material cultural valuables having distinctive spiritual, artistic and/or documentary values and corresponding to one of the criteria for granting them the status of historic and cultural valuable, such material cultural valuables are to be transferred into the state ownership.. In so doing, the owner of the land plot or other property where the treasure was concealed and the person who discovered the treasure shall have the right to receive remuneration in the amount of 50 percent of the value of the treasure. The remuneration shall be distributed between these persons in equal shares unless otherwise established by an agreement between them. In the event of the discovery of such treasure by a person who has made diggings or searches for valuables without the consent of the owner of the property where the treasure was concealed, the remuneration shall not be paid to this person and shall be paid to the owner in full. 3. The rules of this Article shall not apply to persons within whose labor or employment duties are the conducting of diggings and searches directed towards the discovery of treasure.
Article 2341. Acquisition of the Right of Ownership of Ownerless Antique and Historic Weapons and Ammunition, Other Weapons or Military Equipment
Unless otherwise is established by the President of the Republic of Belarus, in the event of discovery of ownerless antique and historic weapons and ammunition, other weapons or military equipment while performing searching works, excavation or otherwise, the said things are subject to be transferred into the state ownership in accordance with the procedure established by the legislation.
Article 2342. Acquisition of the Right of Ownership to Archaeological Artefacts
Unless otherwise established by the legislative acts, archaeological artefacts discovered when holding archaeological research or otherwise are subject to be transferred into the state ownership in the order established by the legislation.
In the event of discovery of archaeological artefacts being a treasure having distinctive spiritual, artistic and/or documentary values and corresponding to one of the criteria for granting them the status of historic and cultural valuable, the rules provided by clauses 2 and 3 of Article 234 of this Code shall be applied.
Article 235. Acquisitive Prescription 1. A person, citizen or legal person, who is not the owner of property but in good faith, openly, and uninterruptedly possesses as his own immovable property for fifteen years or, for other property, for five years, shall acquire the right of ownership in such property (acquisitive prescription). The right of ownership in immovable property and other property subject to state registration shall arise for the person who acquired this property by virtue of acquisitive prescription from the time of such registration. 2. Until the acquisition of the right of ownership in property by virtue of acquisitive prescription, the person possessing the property as his own shall have the right to defend his possession against third persons who are not the owners of the property, and also who do not have the rights to possession thereof by virtue of another ground provided for by the legislation or contract.
3. A person referring to the prescription of possession may join to the time of his possession all of the time during which this property was possessed by that whom this person is the legal successor. 4.The running of the period of acquisitive prescription with respect to things kept by a person from whose possession they may be claimed in accordance with Articles 282-284 and 286 of this Code shall commence from the next day after expiry of the limitation period for the corresponding demands.
CHAPTER 15 Termination of Right of Ownership
Article 236. Grounds for Termination of Right of Ownership
1. The right of ownership shall terminate in the event of the alienation by the owner of his property to other persons, renunciation of the right of ownership by the owner, perishing or destruction of the property, and the loss of the right of ownership to property in other instances provided for by the legislation.
2. The compulsory withdrawal from the owner of property shall not be permitted except for instances when on the grounds provided for by the legislation, or in accordance with the court decision, it shall be carried out by:
1) levying execution on property for obligations (Article 238);
2) alienation of property which by virtue of the act of legislation cannot belong to the particular person (Article 239);
3) alienation of immovable property in connection with the withdrawal of a land plot (Article 240);
4) purchase of carelessly maintained cultural valuables (Article 241) and of domestic animals (Article 242);
5) requisition (Article 243);
6) confiscation (Article 244);
7) alienation of the property in the instances provided by clause 4 of Article 255 and Article 2751;
8) privatization (Article 218);
9) nationalization (Article 245);
10) gratuitous seizure of property in the instances provided for by the legislative acts in the sphere of fight against corruption.
Article 237. Renunciation of Ownership
1. A citizen or a legal person may renounce the ownership of the property belonging to him by announcing it or making other actions which expressly evidence his abandonment of possession, enjoyment, and disposal of the property without intention to keep any rights to that property.
Refusal of the person who carried out unauthorized construction on a land plot being in the state ownership (with the exception of a land plot allotted into an lifelong inheritable possession) to execute a decision of the regional (Minsk City) executive committee, which entered into force, adopted in accordance with part one of clause 4 of this Article, or the failure to execute that decision within the established term is recognized as the renunciation of the ownership of materials from which the unauthorized structure has been erected.
2. Renunciation of the ownership, with the exception of the renunciation of the ownership of the materials from which an unauthorized structure has been erected, provided by part 2 of clause one of this Article, does not entail the termination of rights and duties of the owner in relation to the respective property till the moment of acquisition of the ownership of that property by another person, with the exception of the instances when the property has been subjected to utilization and destruction in accordance with legislation.
Article 238. Levy of Execution on Property for Obligations of Owner
1. The withdrawal of property by means of levying execution on it with regard to obligations of the owner shall be done on the basis of the decision of a court, unless another procedure for levy of execution has been provided for by the legislation or by contract.
2. The right of ownership in property on which execution is levied shall terminate for the owner from the time of arising the right of ownership in the withdrawn property for the person to whom this property is transferred.
Article 239. Termination of Right of Ownership for Person in Property Which Cannot Belong to Him 1. If on the grounds, permitted by a law, the property which by virtue of legislation cannot belong to person, turns out to be in the ownership of a person, this property must be alienated by the owner within a year from the time of arising the right of ownership in the property, unless another term has been established by the legislation.
2. In instances when the property has not been alienated by the owner within the periods specified in Clause 1 of this Article, such property, taking into consideration its character and purpose, shall, by decision of a court rendered upon the application of a state body or body of local administration or self- government, be subject to compulsory sale, with transfer to the former owner of the amounts received, or the transfer to state or communal ownership, with compensation of the value of the property to the former owner, determined by a court. In so doing, the expenditures for alienation (safe custody) of the property shall be deducted.
3. If in the ownership of a citizen or legal person on the grounds permitted by the legislation there turns out to be a thing for acquisition of which a special authorization is necessary, the issuance of which has been refused for the owner, this thing shall be subject to alienation in accordance with the procedure established for property which cannot belong to the particular owner. In such case, alienation of the thing is permitted subject to observance of the procedure for turnover of the corresponding property, established by the legislation; the thing can be alienated only to the person, having the specified permission, or to the state.
Article 240. Alienation of Immovable Property in Connection with Withdrawal of Land Plot on Which It Is Situated 1. When the withdrawal of a land plot for state or communal needs or in view of the improper use of land is impossible without the termination of the right of ownership to a capital construction (building, structure), or other immovable property situated on the land plot, this property may be withdrawn from the owner by means of the purchase by the state or sale at public sales in accordance with the procedure provided for by the legislation. The demand to withdraw immovable property shall not be subject to satisfaction if the state body or body of local administration or self-government which has applied to a court with this demand does not prove that the use of the land plot for the purposes for which it is being withdrawn is impossible without terminating the right of ownership to the particular immovable property. 2. The rules of this Article respectively shall apply in the event of termination of the right of ownership to immovable property in connection with the withdrawal of mining allotments and other plots on which property is situated.
Article 241. Purchase of Carelessly Maintained Cultural Valuables In instances when the owner of cultural valuables relegated in accordance with the legislation to the category of specially valuable and protected by the state carelessly maintains these valuables, which threatens them with their losing their significance, such valuables may by decision of a court be withdrawn from the owner through purchase by the state or sale at public sales. In the event of the purchase of cultural valuables, their value shall be compensated for the owner in the amount established by agreement of the parties, and in the event of a dispute, by a court. In the event of the sale at public sales the amount obtained from the sale shall be transferred to the owner, less the expenses for holding the public sales.
Article 242. Purchase of Domestic Animals in Event of Improper Treatment Thereof When the owner of domestic animals treats them in clear contravention of the requirements of the rules established on the basis of a legislation and the norms accepted in society for the humane attitude towards animals, these animals may be withdrawn from the owner by means of the purchase thereof by the person who has brought the respective demand in court. The price of the purchase shall be determined by agreement of the parties, and in the event of a dispute, by a court.
Article 243. Requisition
1. In instances of natural disasters, accidents, epidemics, epizootics, and other extraordinary circumstances, the property may, in the interests of society by decision of state bodies, be withdrawn from the owner in accordance with the procedure and on the conditions established by the legislation with payment of the value of the property to him (requisition).
2. The valuation according to which the value of the requisitioned property is compensated to the owner may be contested by the owner in a court.
3. The person whose property was requisitioned shall have the right, when the existence of the circumstances, in connection with which the requisition was made, has terminated, to demand in court for the return to him of the property which has been preserved.
Article 244. Confiscation In the instances provided for by the legislation property may be withdrawn without compensation from the owner by decision of a court in the form of a sanction for committing a crime or other violation of legislation (confiscation). However, confiscation of property in the administrative procedure is permitted only subject to observance of the conditions and the procedure, provided by the law. The decision on the confiscation, adopted in the administrative procedure, may be appealed to the court.
Article 245. Nationalization Transferring the property, being in the ownership of the citizens and the legal persons, into the state property by means of its nationalization is permitted only on the grounds of the law on the procedure and conditions of nationalization of this property, and with timely and full compensation of the cost of property and of other losses, caused by the withdrawal, to the person, the property of which was nationalized.
CHAPTER 16 Common Ownership
Article 246. Concept and Grounds of Origin of Common Ownership
1. Property in the ownership of two or several persons shall belong to them by the right of common ownership.
2. Property may be in common ownership with the determination of the share of each of the owners in the right of ownership (share ownership) or without the determination of such shares (joint ownership).
3. Common ownership to property shall be share ownership, except for instances when the formation of joint ownership to this property has been permitted by the legislative acts.
4. Common ownership shall arise when two or several persons enter into the ownership of property which cannot be divided without changing its purpose (indivisible things), or is not subject to division by virtue of a legislation. Common ownership in divisible property shall arise in the instances provided for by the legislation or contract. 5. By agreement of the participants of joint ownership, and, in the event of not achieving consent, by decision of a court, the share ownership of these persons may be established for common property. 6. The legislative acts regulating the matters of dwelling reconstruction may provide for other rules than those specified in this Chapter.
Article 247. Determination of Shares in Right of Share Ownership 1. If the shares of the participants of share ownership cannot be determined on the basis of the act of legislation and was not established by agreement of all of its participants, the shares shall be considered to be equal.
2. The procedure for the determination and change of their shares may be established by agreement of all the participants of share ownership depending upon the contribution of each of them in the formation and growth of the common property.
3. A participant of share ownership who has effectuated at his own expense while complying with the established procedure for the use of common property indivisible improvements of this property shall have the right to a corresponding increase of his share in the right to common property. Divisible improvements of common property, unless otherwise provided by agreement of the participants of the share ownership, shall enter into the ownership of those participants who produced them.
Article 248. Consequences of rising, extension or reconstruction of the dwelling house or other structure, being in common share ownership If the owner, with observance of the established rules, at own expense, has enlarged the area of the house or other structure, being in the share ownership, by means of extension, rising or reconstruction, then, upon the demand of this owner, the shares in the common ownership in the house or construction and the procedure of using the premises in it are subjects to appropriate changes.
Article 249. Disposition of Property in Share Ownership
1. The disposition of property in share ownership shall be effectuated by agreement of all of its participants.
2. A participant of share ownership shall have the right at his discretion to sell, gift, bequeath, or pledge his share or to otherwise dispose of it while complying, in the event of alienation for payment, with the rules provided for by Article 253 of this Code.
Article 250. Possession and Use of Property in Share Ownership 1. The possession and use of property in share ownership shall be effectuated by the agreement of all its participants, and if consent is not achieved, in accordance with the procedure established by a court. 2. The participant of share ownership shall have the right for providing to him, in possession and using, of the part of the common property, proportional to the share of this participant, or, if this is impossible, has
the right to claim for the appropriate compensation from the other participants, possessing and using the property which comprise the share of this participant.
Article 251. Yield, Products, and Revenues from Use of Property in Share Ownership The yield, products, and revenues from the use of property in share ownership shall become part of the common property and be distributed among the participants of participatory ownership commensurately with their shares unless otherwise provided by the agreement between them.
Article 252. Expenses for Maintenance of Property in Share Ownership 1. Each participant of share ownership shall be obliged, in proportion to their shares to participate in the payment of taxes, charges, and other payments relating to the common property, and also the costs for its maintenance and preservation, unless otherwise provided by the legislation or by the agreement. 2. The expenses, which are not necessary and are made by one of the owners without the consent of the others, shall fall on this owner only. Any disputes arising in this respect are subject to the settlement in the judicial procedure.
Article 253. Preferential Right of Purchase of the Share in the Right of Common Ownership 1. In the event of the sale of a share in the right of common ownership to the third person the remaining participants of share ownership shall have the preferential right of purchase of the share being sold at the price for which it is being sold and on other equal conditions, except for sales at a public sale. The public sale for the sale of the share in the right of common ownership may, in the absence of consent thereto of all the participants of share ownership, be held in the instances provided for by Article 258 of this Code, and in the other instances provided for by the legislation.
2. The seller of a share is obliged to notify in written form the remaining participants of share ownership of the intention to sell his share to a third person, specifying the price and other conditions on which he is selling it. The mode of such notification may be established by a written agreement of the participants of shared ownership, adopted with observance of requirements of Article 249 (1) of this Code. Refusal of participants of share ownership to receive a written notification of the seller about the intention to sell his share, stated in the order established by the legislation, is deemed to be a duly notification of those participants of share ownership.
If other participants of share ownership refuse to purchase or do not acquire the share in the right of ownership in immovable property being sold within a month, and in the right of ownership in other property, within ten days from the date of notification, the seller shall be entitled to sell his share to any person.
3. In the event of the sale of a share in violation of the preferential right of purchase, any other participant of share ownership shall have the right within three months to demand in a judicial proceeding the transfer to him of the rights and duties of the buyer.
4. The assignment of a preferential right of purchase of the share shall not be permitted.
5. The rules of this Article shall apply also when alienating a share under a contract of barter.
6. The rules of this Article do not apply when buying a share in the right of common ownership of property constituting a mutual investment fund, certified by an investment share, by other participants in share ownership.
Article 254. Time of Transfer of Share in Right of Common Ownership to Acquirer Under Contract The share in the right of common ownership shall pass to the acquirer under a contract from the time of conclusion of the contract unless otherwise provided by an agreement of the parties. The time of transfer of a share in the right of common ownership under a contract subject to state registration shall be determined in accordance with Article 224(2) of this Code.
Article 255. Division of Property in Share Ownership and Partition of Share Therefrom
1. Property in common share ownership, property constituting a mutual investment fund, may be divided between its participants by an agreement between them.
2. A participant of common share ownership shall have the right to demand the partition of his share from the common property, property constituting a mutual investment fund. 3. If the participants of share ownership do not reach agreement concerning the ways and conditions for the division of common property or partition of the share of one of them, the participant of share ownership shall have the right in a judicial proceeding to demand the partition of his share in kind from the common property. If the partition of a share in kind is not permitted by the legislation or is impossible without incommensurate damage to property in common ownership, the partitioning owner shall have the right to payment to him of the value of his share by the other participants of share ownership. 4. The incommensurateness of property partitionable in kind to a participant of share ownership on the basis of this Article to his share in the right of ownership shall be eliminated by the payment of a corresponding monetary amount or other compensation. The payment to a participant of share ownership by the remaining owners of compensation in place of the partition of his share in kind shall be permitted with his consent. In instances when the share of the respective owner is insignificant and cannot be truly partitioned and he does not have a material interest in the use of the common property, a court may also, in the absence of the consent of this owner, oblige this owner to transfer his share, to the other participants, with payment of the compensation to this owner. 5. With the receipt of the compensation in accordance with this Article the owner shall lose the right to the share in the common property.
Article 256. Possession, Use, and Disposition of Property in Joint Ownership l. The participants of joint ownership, unless otherwise provided by agreement between them, shall possess and use common property in common.
2. The disposition of property in joint ownership shall be effectuated by the consent of all the participants, which shall be presupposed irrespective as to which of the participants has concluded the transaction with regard to disposition of the property. This rule does not cover immovable property for the disposition of which a written consent of all participants of joint ownership is required.
3. Each of the participants of joint ownership shall have the right to conclude transactions relating to the disposition of common property unless it arises otherwise from the agreement of all the participants. A transaction concluded by one of the participants of joint ownership which is connected with the disposition of common property may be deemed to be invalid at the demand of the remaining participants for reasons that the participant who concluded the transaction lacked the necessary powers only if it is proved that the other party to the transaction knew or knowingly should have known about this (Article 175). 4. The rules of this Article shall apply insofar as not otherwise established for individual types of joint ownership by the legislation.
Article 257. Division of Property in Joint Ownership and Partition of Share Therefrom
1. The separation of common property between participants of joint ownership, and also the partition of the share of one of them, may be effectuated after the preliminary determination of the share of each of the participants in the right to common property.
2. In the event of the separation of common property and the partition of a share therefrom, unless otherwise provided by legislation or by agreement of the participants, their shares shall be deemed to be equal.
3. The grounds and procedure for the separation of common property and the partition of the share therefrom shall be determined according to the rules of Article 255 of this Code insofar as otherwise has not been established for individual types of joint ownership by the legislation and does not arise from the essence of the relations of the participants of joint ownership.
Article 258. Levying Execution on Share in Common Property The creditor of a participant of share or joint ownership shall, in the event that the owner's other property is insufficient, have the right to submit a demand concerning partition of the share of the debtor in the common property in order to levy execution on it. If in such instances the apportionment of the share in kind is impossible or the other participants of share or joint ownership raise objections to this, the creditor shall have the right to demand the sale by the debtor of his share to the other participants of common ownership at a price commensurate with the market value of this share, with the assets received from the sale being applied to repayment of the debt. In the event of the refusal of the remaining participants of common ownership to acquire the share of the debtor, the creditor shall have the right to demand in court the levy of execution on the share of the debtor in the right of common ownership by means of the sale of this share at a public sale.
Article 259. Common Ownership of Spouses
1. Property acquired by spouses during marriage shall be in their joint ownership unless another regime for this property has been established by a contract between them.
2. The property which belonged to each of the spouses before marriage, and also received by one of the spouses during marriage as a gift or by way of inheriting, shall be in his ownership. Things of individual use (clothing, footwear, and others), except for jewellery and other articles of embellishment, although acquired during the marriage at the expense of the common assets of the spouses, shall be deemed to be the ownership of that spouse who used them. The property of each spouse may be deemed to be their joint ownership if it is established that during the marriage investments were made at the expense of the common property of the spouses or the personal property of the other spouse which significantly increased the value of this property (capital repair, reconstruction, re-equipping, and others). This rule shall not apply if a contract between the spouses has provided otherwise.
3. Execution may be levied with regard to the obligations of one spouse on property in his ownership, and also on his share in the common property of the spouses which would have been due to him in the event of separation of this property. Levying the execution on the property of the unitary enterprise, belonging to the spouses by the right of joint ownership, shall not be permitted.
31. At the separation of property which is in common ownership of spouses, the spouse of a participant of an economic partnership, limited liability company or additional liability company has the right to demand, in court order, the recognition of his right to the due part of the share of the other spouse in the charter capital of the respective partnership or company.
In the case of recognition by the court of the right of the spouse of a participant of an economic partnership, limited liability company or additional liability company to the part of the share of the latter in the charter capital of the respective partnership or company which due to him, the former has the right, with consent of other participants of this partnership or company, to become its participant or to demand the payment of the value of the part of the share of his spouse in the charter capital or the delivery of the property of such value in kind. At that, the refusal to admit to participants of the respective partnership or company entails the obligation of this partnership or company to pay to the spouse the value of the part of the share of his spouse which is due to him or to deliver the property of such value in kind.
The determination of the value of the part of the share in the charter capital of the partnership or company and its payment or delivery of the property in kind of such value is performed in accordance with Article 64 (2) of this Code in the period stipulated by the constituent documents of this partnership or company, but not later than twelve months from the date of the presentation by the spouse of the corresponding demand.
The rules of parts one and two of this clause extend to the cases of separation of the property which is in joint ownership of spouses one of which is a participant of a productive cooperative. At that the determination of the value of the part of the share of the spouse in the property of the productive cooperative and its payment or delivery of the property of such value in kind are performed in accordance with Article 111 (1) of this Code in the period stipulated by the charter of the productive cooperative, but not later than twelve months from the day of the presentation by the spouse of the corresponding demand.
4. The rules for determining the shares of spouses in common property in the event of the separation thereof and the procedure for such separation shall be established by legislation on marriage and the family.
Article 260. [Excluded]
Article 261. [Excluded]
CHAPTER 17 Real Rights in Immovable Property
Article 262. Real Rights to Land Plots
1. Land plots may be held by land users based on real rights in accordance with legislative acts on protection and use of lands and this Code.
2. The rights to land plots, and also restrictions (encumbrances) of rights to them arise, pass, and terminated in the order established by legislation on protection and using lands and civil legislation.
Article 263. Land Plots of Common Use. Access to Land Plot 1. Citizens shall have the right freely, without any authorizations whatever, to be on land plots not closed off for general access which are in the ownership of the Republic of Belarus, and to use natural objects on
these plots within the limits permitted by the legislation. 2. If a land plot is not fenced off or the land user thereof has not clearly designated by other means that entry to the plot is not permitted without his authorization, any person may walk across this plot on condition that this does not cause damage or disturbance to the land user.
Article 264. [Excluded]
Article 265. [Excluded]
Article 266. [Excluded]
Article 267. Transfer of Right to Land Plot in Event of Alienation of Capital Constructions (Buildings, Structures) Located on It
1. In the event of transfer of rights to capital constructions (buildings, structures), unfinished capital constructions prepared for preservation, the acquirers of those constructions receive rights, restrictions (encumbrances) of rights to land plots in the order established by legislation on protection and use of lands.
2. In the event of transfer of rights to capital constructions (buildings, structures), unfinished capital constructions prepared for preservation, located on leased land plots, the acquirers of those constructions receive rights under respective contracts of lease of the land plot for the remaining term of the lease of the respective land in the order established by legislation on protection and use of lands.
Article 268. Right of Limited Use of Another's Immovable Property (Servitude)
1. The owner of immovable property is entitled to require the owner of neighbouring immovable property, and in necessary instances, the owner of another immovable property, to grant a right of limited use of immovable property (servitude).
2. Encumbrance of immovable property with a servitude does not divest the owner of the immovable property of rights to posses, enjoy, and dispose of that immovable property.
3. Servitude is established on an agreement between the person requiring the establishment of the servitude and the owner of the immovable property and is subject to the state registration in the order established by legislation on state registration of immovable property, rights thereto and transactions therewith. In the event of failure to reach an agreement on establishing or on conditions of a servitude, the dispute is to be settled by the court on the claim of the person requiring to establish the servitude.
4. The owner of immovable property encumbered with a servitude is entitled, unless otherwise provided by legislation, to require other persons in the interests of whom the servitude is established to demand an adequate charge for using the immovable property.
5. Relations connected with the right of limited use of another’s land plot (land servitude) is regulated by legislation on protection and use of lands. The right of limited use of another’s land plot (land servitude) is established and terminated in accordance with legislation on protection and use of lands.
Article 269. Preservation of Servitude in Event of Transfer of Rights to Land Plot
A servitude shall be preserved in the event of the transfer of the rights to a land plot, which is encumbered by this servitude, to another person. A servitude may not be an autonomous subject of purchase-sale or pledge and may not be transferred by any means whatever to persons who are not the owners of the immovable property, to ensure the use of which the servitude was established.
Article 270. Termination of Servitude Upon the demand of the owner of a land plot encumbered by a servitude, the servitude may be terminated in view of the grounds for which the servitude was established having disappeared. In instances when a land plot, belonging to a citizen or legal person, cannot be used in accordance with its intended purpose as a result of being encumbered with a servitude, the owner shall have the right to demand in court the termination of the servitude.
Article 271. [Excluded]
CHAPTER 18 Right of Ownership and Other Real Rights in Dwelling Premises
Article 272. Ownership in Dwelling House and Apartment 1. The owner shall exercise the rights of possession, use, and disposition of a dwelling premise belonging to him in accordance with its intended purpose. 2. Dwelling premises are intended for the residence of citizens. A citizen, being the owner of a dwelling premise, may use it for personal residence and the residence of members of his family. Dwelling premises may be leased on the basis of a contract. 3. The placing of industrial entities in dwelling houses shall not be permitted. The placing of the organizations and their divisions by the owner in a dwelling premise, belonging to him, shall be permitted only after the transfer of such premise to non-residential. The transfer of premises from dwelling to non-residential shall be effectuated in accordance with the procedure determined by housing legislation unless otherwise provided by legislative acts.
Article 273. Apartment as Object of Right of Ownership A share in the right of ownership to the common property of a house (Article 274) also shall belong to the owner of an apartment in an apartment house together with the premises, which belongs to him, occupied by the apartment.
Article 274. Common Property of Owners of Apartments in Apartment House
1. The common premises of the house, constructions of the house, mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and other equipment outside or inside the apartment, servicing more than one apartment, and other property in cases specified in the legislation or in a contract, shall belong by right of common share ownership to the owners of the apartments in the apartment house.
2. The owner of an apartment shall not have the right to alienate his share in the right of ownership to common property of a dwelling house, nor to perform other actions which entail the transfer of this share separately from the right of ownership to the apartment.
3. The owners of apartments have the right, and in cases, specified in the legislation, are obliged, in order to ensure the operation of the apartment house and the use of the apartments and the common property thereof, to form partnerships of the owners. The partnership of owners shall be a non-commercial organization, formed exclusively for the purposes provided for by this Clause and operating in accordance with the legislation on such partnerships.
Article 275. Rights of Members of Family of Owner of Dwelling Premise l. The members of the family of the owner residing in a dwelling premise belonging to him shall have the right to use this premise on the conditions provided for by housing legislation. 2. The transfer of the right of ownership to a dwelling house or apartment to another person shall not be a ground for termination of the right of use of the dwelling premise by members of the family of the former owner, unless otherwise established by the legislation. 3. The members of the family of the owner of the dwelling premise may demand the elimination of the violations of their rights to a dwelling premise from any persons, including the owner of the premise. 4. [Excluded]
Article 2751. Seizure of Dwelling Premise from Owner A dwelling premise may be seized from the owner in the instances and under the procedure provided by the legislative acts.
CHAPTER 19 Right of Economic Management, Right of Operative Administration
Article 276. Right of Economic Management 1. A unitary enterprise or a state association, and in cases specified by the President of the Republic of Belarus, another legal person to which property belongs by right of economic management, shall possess, use, and dispose of this property within the limits determined in accordance with the legislation. 2. The owner of property shall, in accordance with the legislation, decide questions of the creation of the unitary enterprise and determination of the subject and purposes of its activity, its reorganization and liquidation, appoint the head of the unitary enterprise, and shall effectuate control over its use in accordance with the intended purpose and control over preservation of property belonging to the unitary enterprise. The owner of property in economic management effectuates control over its use in accordance with the intended purpose and over preservation of the property, and also has the right to receive a part of income from the use thereof. 3. The legal persons shall not have the right to sell immovable property belonging to them on right of economic management, lease it out, pledge it, contribute it as a contribution to the charter capital of economic companies and partnerships or by other means dispose of this property without the consent of the owner. The legal persons on the right of economic management shall autonomously dispose of the remaining property belonging to them, except for the instances established by the legislation and by the owner of property.
Article 277. Right of Operative Administration 1. A fiscal enterprise, an institution or state association on which the property is settled on the right of operative administration shall effectuate with respect to property, settled on them, the rights of possession, use, and disposition thereof, within the limits, established by the legislation, and in accordance with the purposes of its activity, orders of the owner, and the intended purpose of the property. 2. The owner of the property settled on a fiscal enterprise, institution or state association on the right of operative administration shall have the right to withdraw superfluous or unused property or property used not in accordance with its intended purpose, and to dispose of it according to own discretion. 3. The property of a Republic's state-social association vested on its organizational divisions in the form of legal persons belongs to them on the right of operative administration unless otherwise is stipulated by the charter of the Republic's state-social association. The organizational divisions of a Republic's state-social association in the form of a legal person are covered by the rules stipulated by this Article, Articles 279, 280, 281(2) of this Code.
Article 278. Disposition of Property of fiscal enterprise and State Association on Which the Property Settled on the Right of Operative Administration 1. A fiscal enterprise shall have the right to alienate or by other means to dispose of property settled on it only with the consent of the owner of this property. A fiscal enterprise is entitled to pledge the property being in state ownership in the order established by the legislative acts on the disposal of state property unless otherwise provided by the President of the Republic of Belarus. A fiscal enterprise shall autonomously realize the product produced by it unless otherwise established by the legislation. 2. The procedure for the distribution of revenues of the fiscal enterprise shall be determined by the owner of its property. 3. The rules provided by clauses 1 and 2 of this Article are to be applied to a state association on which the property is setlled on the right of operative administration unless otherwise specified by acts of the President of the Republic of Belarus.
Article 279. Disposition of Property of Institution 1. An institution is non entitled to alienate or by other means to dispose of property consolidated to it or acquired at the expense of means allotted to it, unless otherwise specified by this Code or other legislative acts. An institution is entitled to transfer the property being in state ownership into pledge in the order established by legislative acts on disposal of state property, unless otherwise provided by the President of the Republic of Belarus, and the property being in private property – with the consent of the owner of this property or his authorized representative. 2. If in accordance with the constituent documents the right to effectuate activity which brings revenues has been granted to the institution, the revenues received from such activity and the property acquired at the expense of such revenues shall be at the autonomous disposition of the institution and shall be taken into account on a separate balance sheet (separately in the inventory book of income and expenditure of organizations and individual entrepreneurs, applying the simplified taxation system).
Article 280. Acquisition and Termination of Right of Economic Management and Right of Operative Administration 1. The right of economic management or the right of operative administration of property, with respect to which a decision has been adopted by the owner concerning the consolidation of this property to a unitary
enterprise, institution or state association, shall arise for this enterprise, institution or state association from the time of the transfer of the property, unless otherwise established by the legislation. 2. The yield, products, and revenues from the use of the property in economic management or operative administration, and also the property acquired by a unitary enterprise, institution or state association under contract or other grounds, shall come in the economic management or the operative administration of the enterprise, institution or state association in accordance with the procedure established by the legislation for acquisition of the right of ownership. The right of ownership to those yield, products, revenues and property shall acquire the owner of property of the mentioned legal persons. 3. The right of economic management and the right of operative administration of property shall terminate upon the grounds and in accordance with the procedure provided for by legislative acts for the termination of the right of ownership, and also in instances of the lawful withdrawal of the property from the enterprise, institution or state association by decision of the owner.
Article 281. Retention of Rights to Property in Event of Transfer of Enterprise or Property of Institution to Another Owner 1. In the event of the transfer of the right of ownership in a state or communal enterprise as a property complex to another owner of state or communal property, the legal person to which the enterprise belongs by the right of economic management, unless otherwise established by the President of the Republic of Belarus or the contract, shall retain the right of economic management in the enterprise belonging to it. 2. In the event of the transfer of the right of ownership in the property of an institution to another person, this institution shall retain the right of operative administration to the property belonging to it.
CHAPTER 20 Defense of Right of Ownership and Other Real Rights
Article 282. Demanding and Obtaining Property from Another's Illegal Possession The owner shall have the right to demand and obtain his property from another's illegal possession.
Article 283. Demanding and Obtaining Property from a Good-Faith Acquirer 1. If property has been acquired for compensation from a person who did not have the right to alienate it, of which the acquirer did not know and could not have known (good-faith acquirer), then the owner shall have the right to demand and obtain this property from the acquirer when the property has been lost by the owner or person to whom the property was transferred by the owner in possession, or stolen from one or the other, or left the possession thereof by means other than the will thereof. 2. If property was acquired without compensation from a person who did not have the right to alienate it, the owner shall have the right to demand and obtain the property in all instances. 3. Money, and also bearer securities, may not be demanded and obtained from a good-faith acquirer.
Article 284. Settlement of Accounts in Event of Return of Property from Illegal Possession When demanding and obtaining property from another's illegal possession, the owner also shall have the right to demand and obtain from a person, who knew or should have known that his possession is illegal (possessor not in good faith), the return or compensation of all revenues which this person derived or should have been derived throughout the entire period of possession, and from a good-faith possessor, the return or compensation of all revenues which he derived or should have derived from the time when he knew or should have known about the unlawfulness of the possession or received a writ relating to the suit of the owner for the return of the property.
A possessor (both good-faith possessor and possessor not in good faith), in turn, shall have the right to demand from the owner compensation for necessary expenditures, made by him on the property, for that time from which revenues from the property are due to the owner. A possessor in good faith shall have the right to retain for himself the improvements made by him, if they can be separated without damaging the property. If such a separation of the improvements is impossible, a good-faith possessor shall have the right to demand compensation for expenditures made for the improvement, but not more than the amount of the increase of the value of the property.
Article 285. Defense of Rights of Owner Against Violations Not Connected with Deprivation of Possession The owner may demand the elimination of any violations of his right, even though these violations are not combined with deprivation of possession.
Article 286. Defense of Rights of Possessor Who is Not the Owner The rights provided for by Articles 282-285 of this Code shall belong also to a person who, although not the owner, is the possessor of the property by right of inheritable possession for life, economic management or operative administration or on another grounds provided for by the legislation or contract. This person shall have the right to the defense of his possession against the owner as well.
Article 287. Consequences of Termination of Right of Ownership by Virtue of Act of Legislation In the event of the adoption of the act of legislation, terminating the right of ownership, the losses caused to the owner as a result of the adoption of this act, including the value of the property, shall be compensated by the state. Disputes concerning compensation of losses shall be settled by a court.
SECTION III GENERAL PART OF THE LEGISLATION OF OBLIGATIONS
SUBSECTION 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS ON OBLIGATIONS
CHAPTER 21 Concept of and Parties to Obligation
Article 288. Concept of Obligation and Grounds of its Origin 1. By virtue of an obligation one person (the debtor) shall be obliged to perform to the benefit of another person (the creditor) a determined action, that is, to transfer property, fulfill work, pay money, and the like or to refrain from a determined action, and the creditor shall have the right to demand from the debtor the performance of his duty. 2. Obligations shall arise from a contract, as a consequence of causing of harm, unfounded enrichment, and from other grounds specified in this Code and other acts of legislation.
Article 289. Parties to Obligation 1. One or simultaneously several persons may participate in an obligation as each of its parties, creditor or debtor.
The invalidity of the demands of the creditor with respect to one of the persons participating in the obligation as a debtor, and likewise the expiry of the limitation period with regard to the demand against such person, shall not in itself affect the creditor’s demands against the other such persons. 2. If each of the parties to a contract bears a duty to the benefit of the other party, it shall be considered to be the debtor of the other party in that which the former is obliged to do to the benefit of the latter, and simultaneously the creditor thereof in that which the former has the right to demand from the latter. 3. The obligation shall not create duties for the persons, not participating in it as the parties (for the third persons). In the instances provided for by the legislation or by agreement of the parties, an obligation may create rights for third persons with respect to one or both parties to the obligation.
CHAPTER 22 Performance of Obligations
Article 290. General Provisions Obligations must be performed duly in accordance with the conditions of the obligation and the requirements of the legislation, and in the absence of such conditions and requirements, in accordance with the requirements usually presented.
Article 291. Inadmissibility of Unilateral Refusal to Perform Obligation A unilateral refusal to perform an obligation and a unilateral change of its conditions shall not be permitted unless it follows otherwise from a legislation or from the obligation.
Article 292. Performance of Obligation in Parts A creditor shall have the right not to accept the performance of an obligation in parts unless otherwise provided by the legislation, or by the conditions of the obligation and does not arise from the essence of the obligation.
Article 293. Performance of Obligation to Proper Person Unless otherwise provided by agreement of the parties and does not arise from the essence of the obligation, the debtor shall have the right, when performing the obligation, to demand evidence that performance is accepted by the creditor himself or by a person authorized by the creditor, and shall bear the risk of the consequences of the failure to submit such demand.
Article 294. Performance of Obligation by Third Person 1. Unless the duty of the debtor to perform an obligation personally arises from the legislation, the conditions of the obligation, or the essence thereof, the performance of the obligation may be placed by the debtor on a third person. In this event the creditor shall be obliged to accept the performance offered by a third person for the debtor. 2. A third person, who is subject to the danger of losing his right to the property of the debtor (right of lease, pledge, or others) as a consequence of execution being levied by the creditor on this property, may at his own expense satisfy the demand of the creditor without the consent of the debtor. In such a case the rights of the creditor regarding the obligation shall pass to the third person in accordance with Articles 353-358 of this Code.
Article 295. Period for Performance of Obligation 1. If an obligation provides for or enables to determine the date of its performance or the period of time during which it must be performed, the obligation shall be subject to performance on that day or, respectively, at any time within the limits of that period. 2. When an obligation does not provide for a period for its performance and does not contain conditions enabling to determine this period, it must be performed within a reasonable period after the origin of the obligation. An obligation not performed within a reasonable period, and likewise an obligation, the period of performance of which has been determined by the time of demand, the debtor shall be obliged to perform within a seven-day period from the day of receipt of the written demand of the creditor concerning the performance thereof, unless the duty to perform within another period arises from the act of legislation, the conditions of the obligation or the essence of the obligation.
Article 296. Performance of Obligation Before Time The debtor shall have the right to perform an obligation before time unless otherwise provided by the legislation, or the conditions of the obligation, or does not arise from the essence thereof. However, the performance of an obligation before time connected with the effectuation of entrepreneurial activity by the parties thereof shall be permitted only in instances when the possibility to perform an obligation before time is provided for by the legislation, or by the conditions of the obligation, or arises from the essence of the obligation.
Article 297. Place of Performance of Obligation If the place of performance has not been determined by the legislation, or by contract and is not obvious from the essence of the obligation, performance must be made: 1) with regard to an obligation to transfer a land plot, a capital constructions (building, structure), or other immovable property: at the location of the property; 2) with regard to an obligation to transfer a good or other property providing for the carriage thereof: at the place of handing over the property to the first carrier for delivery to the creditor; 3) with regard to other obligations of the debtor to transfer a good or other property: at the place of manufacture or storage of the property, if this place was known to the creditor at the time of origin of the obligation; 4) with regard to a monetary obligation: at the place of residence of the creditor at the time of origin of the obligation, and, if the creditor is a legal person, at its location at the time of origin of the obligation. If the creditor at the time of performance of the obligation has changed place of residence or location and notified the debtor thereof: at the new place of residence or location of the creditor, with charging the expenses, connected with the change of place of performance, to the account of the creditor; 5) with regard to all other obligations: at the place of residence of the debtor, and, if the debtor is a legal person, at its location.
Article 298. Currency of Monetary Obligations 1. Monetary obligations must be expressed in Belarusian Rubles (Article 141). It may be provided in a monetary obligation that it shall be subject to payment in Belarusian Rubles in an amount equivalent to a determined amount in foreign currency or in conventional monetary units (Special Drawing Rights, and others). In this event the amount subject to payment in Rubles shall be determined according to the official exchange rate of the respective currency or conventional monetary units on the
day of payment, unless other exchange rate or another date for determining it has been established by the legislation or by agreement of the parties. 2. The use of foreign currency and of payment documents in foreign currency shall be permitted when carrying out the settlement of accounts on the territory of the Republic of Belarus with regard to obligations in the instances, in accordance with the procedure and on the conditions determined by the legislation.
Article 299. Increase of Amounts Payable for Maintenance of Citizen An amount payable with regard to a monetary obligation directly for the maintenance of a citizen in compensation of harm caused to life or health, under a contract of maintenance for life, and in other instances, shall be increased in proportion with an increase of the basic value established by the legislation.
Article 300. Priority of Payment of Demands Relating to Monetary Obligation The amount of payment made, which is insufficient for the performance of a monetary obligation in full, shall be used, unless otherwise provided by the President of the Republic of Belarus, for payment of: first, the expenses of the creditor with regard to the receipt of performance; second, the principal amount of the debt and interests for using the monetary means, which are subject to payment upon the monetary obligation (the loan, credit, advance etc.); third, the interests, provided by Article 366 of this Code for non-performance or delayed performance of the monetary obligation, and the penalty.
Article 301. Performance of Alternative Obligation The right of choice, unless it arises otherwise from the legislation or the conditions of the obligation, shall belong to the debtor who is obliged to transfer to the creditor one or another property or to perform for the creditor one of two or several actions.
Article 302. Performance of Obligation in Which Several Creditors or Several Debtors Participate If several creditors or several debtors participate in an obligation, each of the creditors shall have the right to demand performance, and each of the debtors shall be obliged to perform the obligation in equal share with the others insofar as it does not arise otherwise from the legislation or the conditions of the obligation.
Article 303. Joint and Several Obligations A joint and several duty (liability) or a joint and several demand shall arise if the joint-and-several nature of the duty or demand has been provided for by a contract or established by the legislation, in particular, when the subject of the obligation is indivisible. The duties of several debtors relating to an obligation connected with entrepreneurial activity, and likewise the demands of several creditors in such obligation, shall be joint and several unless otherwise provided by the legislation or by the conditions of the obligation.
Article 304. Rights of Creditor in Event of Joint and Several Duty 1. In the event of joint and several duty of debtors, the creditor shall have the right to demand performance both from all of the debtors jointly or from any of them individually, either for the whole
debt or for part of the debt. 2. A creditor who has not received full satisfaction from one of the joint and several debtors shall have the right to demand that which has not been received from the other joint and several debtors. Joint and several debtors shall remain obliged as long as the obligation is not performed in full. Article 305. Objections Against Demands of Creditor in Event of Joint and Several Duty In the event of the joint and several duty a debtor shall not have the right to raise objections against the demand of a creditor based on those relations of other debtors with the creditor in which the said debtor does not participate.
Article 306. Performance of Joint and Several Duty by One of Debtors The performance of a joint and several duty in full by one of the debtors shall relieve the other debtors from performance to the creditor. Unless it arises otherwise from relations between the joint and several debtors: 1) the debtor who has performed the joint and several duty shall have the right of a regressive demand against the other debtors in equal shares, with the deduction of the share falling on this debtor himself; 2) that unpaid by one of the joint and several debtors to the debtor who has performed the joint and several duty shall fall in equal shares on this debtor and on the remaining debtors. The rules of this Article shall apply respectively when terminating the joint and several obligation by setting-off the counter-demand of one of the debtors.
Article 307. Joint and Several Demands In the event of the joint and several nature of a demand, any of the joint and several creditors shall have the right to submit the demand to the debtor in full. Until the demand is submitted by one of the joint and several creditors, the debtor shall have the right to perform the obligation to any of them at his discretion. The debtor shall not have the right to raise objections against the demand of one of the joint and several creditors, based on those relations of the debtor with another joint and several creditor in which the particular creditor did not participate. The performance of the obligation in full to one of the joint and several creditors shall relieve the debtor from performance to the other creditors. A joint and several creditor who has received performance from the debtor shall be obliged to compensate that which is due to the other creditors in the equal shares, unless it arises otherwise from the relations between the creditors.
Article 308. Performance of Obligation by Placing Debt on Deposit 1. A debtor shall have the right to place money or securities, due from him, on the deposit of a notary, a diplomatic agent of the diplomatic representation of the Republic of Belarus or a consular official of the consular office of the Republic of Belarus, and in the instances established by the legislation, on the deposit of a court, if the obligation cannot be performed by the debtor as a consequence of: 1) the absence of the creditor or person authorized by him to accept performance at the place where the obligation must be performed; 2) the lack of active legal capacity of the creditor and absence of his representative;
3) the evident lack of certainty as to who is the creditor with regard to the obligation, in particular, in connection with a dispute in this regard between the creditor and other persons; 4) evading by the creditor of accepting performance or other delay on the part of the creditor. 2. The placing of a monetary amount or securities on deposit of a notary, a diplomatic agent of the diplomatic representation of the Republic of Belarus, a consular official of the consular office of the Republic of Belarus or of a court shall be considered to be performance of the obligation. The notary, a diplomatic agent of the diplomatic representation of the Republic of Belarus, a consular official of the consular office of the Republic of Belarus, or the court to the deposit of which the money or securities have been placed, shall notify the creditor thereof.
Article 309. Counter Performance of Obligations The performance of an obligation by one of the parties which in accordance with a contract is conditioned by the performance by the other party of its obligations shall be deemed to be counter performance. In the event of the failure of an obliged party to provide the performance of an obligation stipulated by the contract or of the existence of circumstances obviously testifying that such performance will not be made within the established period, the party on whom counter performance lies shall have the right to suspend the performance of its obligation or to waive the performance of this obligation and demand compensation of losses. If the performance of an obligation stipulated by a contract was not made in full, the party on whom the counter performance lies shall have the right to suspend the performance of his obligation or to waive performance in that part corresponding to the performance not provided. If counter performance of an obligation has been made regardless of the failure of the other party to provide performance of its obligation stipulated by the contract, this party shall be obliged to provide such performance. The rules provided for by Clauses 2 and 3 of this Article shall apply unless otherwise provided by the contract or by the legislation.
CHAPTER 23 Securing Performance of Obligations
§ 1. General Provisions
Article 310. Means of Securing the Performance of Obligations The performance of obligations may be secured by a penalty, pledge, retention of property from the debtor, suretyship, bank guarantee, deposit, and other means provided for by the legislation or by a contract. The invalidity of an agreement to secure the performance of an obligation shall not entail the invalidity of this obligation (principal obligation). The invalidity of the principal obligation shall entail the invalidity of the obligation securing it unless otherwise established by the legislation. Rules of this Chapter shall apply to the relationships on securing the fulfillment of obligations on securities having regard to peculiarities established by the legislation on securities.
§ 2. Penalty
Article 311. Concept of Penalty 1. A penalty (fine, forfeit) shall be deemed to be a monetary amount determined by the legislation or by the contract, which the debtor shall be obliged to pay to the creditor, unless otherwise is provided by the legislative acts, in the event of the failure to perform or the improper performance of an obligation, in particular in the event of the delay of performance. With regard to a demand concerning payment of a penalty the creditor shall not be obliged to prove causing of losses to him. 2. A creditor shall not have the right to demand payment of a penalty unless the debtor bears liability for the failure to perform or the improper performance of the obligation. 3. Legislative acts may provide for the particularities of payment (collection) of a penalty (fine, forfeit).
Article 312. Form of Agreement on Penalty An agreement concerning a penalty must be concluded in written form irrespective of the form of the principal obligation. The failure to comply with the written form shall entail the invalidity of the agreement concerning the penalty.
Article 313. Legal Penalty 1. The creditor shall have the right to demand the payment of a penalty specified by the legislation (legal penalty) irrespective of whether the duty to pay it has been provided for by agreement of the parties. 2. The amount of a legal penalty may be increased by agreement of the parties, if the legislation does not prohibit so.
Article 314. Reduction of Penalty If a penalty subject to payment is obviously incommensurate to the consequences of the violation of the obligation, a court shall have the right to reduce the penalty. When considering the issue on reduction of penalty, the court may take into consideration actins of the parties aimed at voluntary pre-trial settlement of the dispute. Reduction of penalty after its payment is not allowed. Legislative acts may provide cases when the penalty may not be reduced. The rules of this Article shall not affect the rights of the debtor to the reduction of the amount of his liability on the grounds of Article 375 of this Code and the rights of the creditor to compensation of losses in the instances provided for by Article 365 of this Code.
§ 3. Pledge
Article 315. Concept and Grounds for Arising of Pledge 1. By virtue of a pledge the creditor with regard to an obligation secured by a pledge (pledgeholder) shall have the right, in the event of the failure or improper execution of the debtor to perform this obligation, to receive satisfaction from the value of the pledged property preferentially before other creditors of the person (pledger) to whom this property belongs, with the exception of cases provided for by the legislation. 2. A pledge of land plots, enterprises, capital constructions (buildings, structures), apartments, and other immovable property (mortgage) shall be regulated by the legislation on mortgage. The general rules on
pledge contained in this Code shall apply to mortgage in the instances when other rules have not been established by the legislative acts on mortgage. The rules of this section apply to the pledge of securities, unless otherwise provided by the legislation on securities. 3. A pledge shall arise by virtue of a contract. Pledge also shall arise on the ground of the act of legislation when the circumstances specified therein ensue, if it is provided in the legislation, which property and for securing the performance of which obligation there is deemed to be a pledge. The rules of this Code on pledge arising by virtue of contract shall respectively apply to a pledge arising on the ground of the act of legislation unless otherwise established by the legislation.
Article 316. Pledger 1. Either the debtor himself or a third person may be a pledger. 2. The pledger of a thing may be the owner thereof or a person having the right of economic management or operative administration over it, having regard to provided by parts two and three of this Clause. The person to whom a thing belongs by right of economic management is entitled to pledge it without the consent of the owner only at disposal of property in accordance with Clause 3 of Article 276 of this Code. . Organizations for which the property is fixed on the right of operative administration, are entitled to pledge the property being in state ownership, in accordance with the legislative acts on the disposal of state property, unless otherwise provided by the President of the Republic of Belarus, and the property being in private ownership – with the consent of the owner of the property or his authorized representative. 3. The pledger of a right may be the person to whom the pledged right belongs The pledge of the right of lease or other right to another's thing shall not be permitted without the consent of its owner or the person having the right of economic management or operative administration over it, if the alienation of this right without the consent of the said persons has been prohibited by the legislation or by the contract.
Article 317. Subject of Pledge l. Any property, including things and property rights (demands), may be the subject of a pledge except for property withdrawn from turnover, demands inseparably connected with the person of the creditor, in particular, demands concerning alimony, compensation for harm caused to life or health, and other rights, assignment of which to another person has been prohibited by the legislation. Property acquired at the expense of the external state loan (credit) may not be subject of pledge including mortgage till the complete discharge of obligations on such a loan (credit) is carried out. Legislative acts may establish other restrictions for transfer of the property in pledge. 2. The pledge of individual types of property, in particular the property of citizens against which levy of execution is not permitted, may be prohibited or limited by the legislation.
Article 318. Demand Secured by Pledge Unless otherwise provided by a contract, a pledge shall secure a demand in that amount which it has at the time of satisfaction, in particular, interest, penalty, compensation of losses caused by failure or improper performance, and also compensation of necessary expenses of the pledgeholder for maintenance of the pledged thing and expenses relating to recovery.
Article 319. Pledge With and Without Transfer of Pledged Property to Pledgeholder 1. Pledged property shall remain in the disposal of the pledger unless the contract stipulates the transfer of the pledged property into disposal of a pledgee (pawn). Property on which a mortgage is established, pledged shares, and also pledged goods in turnover may not become an object of pawn. 2. By agreement of parties, the subject of pledge may be left with pledger under the lock with a seal of a pledgee or with imposition of signs indicating the pledge (firm pledge) Rules regulating a pledge shall apply to a firm pledge to the extent that their application does not contradict the essence of the relationship of the pledger with pledgee in such kind of a pledge. 3. The subject of a pledge, transferred by the pledger for a time in possession and use to the third person, shall be considered to be left in the disposal of the pledger. 4. In the event of the pledge of a property right certified by a security, with the exception of an equity security, it shall be transferred to the pledgeholder or to the deposit of a notary, unless otherwise provided by the contract.
Article 320. Contract on Pledge, Its Form and Registration 1. In the contract on pledge, the subject of pledge and its value, the essence, amount, and period for performance of the obligation secured by the pledge, as well as other conditions if the necessity of their inclusion into the contract is provided by this Chapter must be specified. The contract on pledge must also contain an indication of the party in the disposal of which the pledged property is placed. 2. A contract on pledge must be concluded in written form. A contract on the pledge of property and/or property rights (claims) to secure obligations under a contract, which must be notarially certified, is subject to notarial certification. 3. A contract on mortgage must be registered in accordance with the procedure established for the registration of transactions with the respective property. A contract on mortgage, providing for the pledge of the immovable property, which shall be transferred to the pledger in the future and which, at the time of conclusion of the contract, does not considered to be created in accordance with the legislation, shall not be subject to the state registration and shall be considered to be concluded since the time of its drawing-up in written form. 4. The failure to comply with the rules contained in Clauses 2 and 3 of this Article shall entail the invalidity of the contract on pledge.
Article 321. Property to Which Right of Pledgeholder Extends 1. The right of the pledgeholder (right of pledge) to a thing which is the subject of pledge shall extend to its appurtenances unless otherwise provided by contract. The right of pledge shall extend to yield, products, and revenues received as a result of the use of the pledged property in the instances provided for by contract. 2. In the event of the mortgage of an enterprise or other property complex as a whole the right of pledge shall extend to all of its property, movable and immovable, including the rights of demand and exclusive rights, including those acquired during the period of the mortgage, unless otherwise provided by the legislative acts or contract. 3. [Excluded] 4. [Excluded] 5. [Excluded]
6. The pledge of things and property rights, which the pledger will acquire in the future, may be provided for by the contract on pledge, and, with respect to a pledge arising on the ground of the act of legislation, by the legislation.
Article 322. Origin of Right of Pledge 1. The right of pledge shall arise from the time of conclusion of the contract on pledge, and with respect to the pledge of property which is subject to transfer to the pledgeholder, from the time of transfer of this property, unless otherwise provided by the contract on pledge, or, in cases when registration of the contract is required, from the time of registration of the contract. If the subject of pledge is property that will be created or acquired by the pledger in the future, the right of pledge arises for the pledgeholder from the moment the pledger creates or acquires this property, unless the law or the contract on pledge stipulates that it will arise within another time limit. 2. The right of pledge to goods in turnover shall arise in accordance with the rules of Article 338(2) of this Code.
Article 323. Subsequent Pledge. Priority Order of Satisfaction of Demands of Pledgeholders
1. If property under pledge becomes the subject of yet another pledge to secure other demands (subsequent pledge), the demands of the pledgeholders shall be satisfied from the value of this property with observance of the priority order provided by clause 2 of this Article, unless otherwise established by Article 3231 of this Code.
Subsequent pledge shall not be allowed:
if it is prohibited by preceding contracts on pledge;
in other instances provided for by the legislative acts.
The pledger shall be obliged to inform each subsequent pledgeholder about all of the existing pledges of the particular property provided for by Article 320 (1) of this Code and shall be liable for losses caused to pledgeholders by the failure to fulfill this duty.
2. The rights of the pledgeholder to receive satisfaction from the value of the pledged property mainly over other pledgeholders who have the right to receive satisfaction from the value of this property (priority of the pledgeholder) shall be determined depending on the moment the pledge right arises, unless otherwise provided by part two of this clause and other legislative acts.
In the case if information on the rights of pledgeholders to movable property belonging to the pledger, encumbered by the pledge, is to be entered into the register of movable property encumbered by the pledge in accordance with the legislative acts, the priority of the pledgeholder shall be determined according to the order of entering the information on the pledge in the register of movable property encumbered by the pledge. Pledgeholders that have entered complete and accurate information about the relevant rights in the register of movable property encumbered by the pledge in cases where, in accordance with legislative acts, such information is to be entered in the said register, shall have the priority of the pledgeholder over pledgeholders that did not enter such information in this register or entered thereinto information that does not meet the requirements of the legislative acts (with the exception of technical errors), and (or) inaccurate information.
The priority of pledgeholders that have not entered information on the rights of pledgeholders to movable property belonging to the pledger, encumbered by the pledge, in the register of movable property encumbered by the pledge, or entered thereinto information that does not meet the requirements of
legislative acts (with the exception of technical errors), and (or) inaccurate information shall be determined depending on the moment of arising of the right of pledge.
Demands of the pledgeholder that does not have the priority of pledgeholder (subsequent pledgeholder) are satisfied from the value of the pledged property after satisfaction of the demands of the pledgeholder that has the priority of the pledgeholder (preceding pledgeholder).
3. In case of levying execution on the pledged property by the preceding pledgeholder, the subsequent pledgeholder is entitled to demand from the debtor early fulfillment of the obligation secured by the subsequent pledge, with the exception of the obligations secured by guarantees of the Government of the Republic of Belarus, guarantees of local executive and administrative bodies. In case of non-fulfillment of such an obligation, the subsequent pledgeholder is entitled to levy execution on the pledged property simultaneously with the preceding pledgeholder with observance of the priority provided for by clause 2 of this Article.
The contract between the pledger and the subsequent pledgeholder may limit the right of such pledgeholder to demand from the debtor an early fulfillment of the obligation secured by the subsequent pledge.
4. If in case of levying execution on the pledged property by the preceding pledgeholder, the subsequent pledgeholder did not use the right to demand early execution of the obligation from the debtor in accordance with clause 3 of this Article, or such right was limited by the contract or the subsequent pledge secured the obligations also secured by guarantees of the Government of the Republic of Belarus, guarantees of local executive and administrative bodies, the subsequent pledge is terminated in the case where the execution was levied on all the pledged property for satisfaction of demands of the preceding pledgeholder. Otherwise the subsequent pledge remains effective in accordance with clause1 of Article 334 of this Code.
If the preceding pledgeholder used the right provided by part two of clause 4 of Article 331 of this Code, the subsequent pledge shall be terminated.
If the preceding pledgeholder did not use the right provided for by part two of clause 4 of Article 331 of this Code, this right may be used by the subsequent pledgeholder that demanded early execution of the obligation from the debtor, unless such right is limited by the contract.
5. In case of levying execution on the pledged property by the subsequent pledgeholder, the preceding pledgeholder is entitled to demand from the debtor early fulfillment of the obligation secured by the subsequent pledge, with the exception of the obligations secured by guarantees of the Government of the Republic of Belarus, guarantees of local executive and administrative bodies. In case of non-fulfillment of such an obligation, the preceding pledgeholder is entitled to levy execution on the pledged property simultaneously with the subsequent pledgeholder with observance of the priority provided for by clause 2 of this Article. If the preceding pledgeholder did not use this right, the right of pledge shall remain effective in accordance with clause 1 of Article 334 of this Code.
6. The pledger to which one of the pledgeholders has presented a demand to levy execution on the pledged property, is obliged, not later than within seven working days from the date of receipt of the said demand, to send a written notice of its presentation to all other pledgeholders of this property and shall be liable for damages caused to such pledgeholders by the failure to fulfill that duty
If the pledgeholder that received a written notice on presentation of a demand to levy execution on the pledged property, are entitled in accordance with clauses 3 and 5 of this Article to present a demand to the debtor for the early fulfillment of the obligation secured by the pledge, such a demand my be presented within one month from the date of receipt of such notice.
7. The rules established by this Article shall not be applied if the pledgeholder on the preceding and the subsequent pledges is the same person. In that case, demands secured by each of the pledges shall be satisfied according to the priority order corresponding to the time limits of the fulfillment of obligations secured by the pledge, unless otherwise provided by legislative acts or by the contract.
Article 3231. Co-pledgeholders
1. In the cases provided for by the legislation or contract, the subject of pledge may be in pledge of several persons who have with equal priority of pledgeholder (co-pledgeholders) to secure the fulfillment of various obligations for which co-pledgeholders are independent creditors, with the exception of property, information on the rights of pledgeholders to which is subject to entering in accordance with legislative acts into the register of movable property encumbered with pledge.
Each co-pledgeholder shall independently exercise rights and duties of the pledgeholder, unless otherwise provided by the legislation or an agreement between co-pledgeholders.
In case of levying execution on the pledged property by one of the co-pledgeholders, other co- pledgeholders is entitled to demand from the debtor early fulfillment of the obligation secured by the pledge and, in the case of non-fulfillment of such obligation, to levy execution on the pledged property simultaneously with that co-pledgeholder, with the exception of cases when the contract between the pledger and the pledgeholder limits the right of that co-pledgeholder to demand from the debtor early fullfilment of the obligation secured by the pledge. In case of insufficiency of monetary means received from the realization of the pledged property, such monetary means shall be distributed between co- pledgeholders proportionally to the amounts of their demands, unless otherwise provided by the legislative acts or an agreement between the co-pledgeholders.
If in case of levying execution on the pledged property by one of the co-pledgeholders, other pledgeholders did not use the right to demand early execution of the obligation from the debtor in accordance with part three of this clause or such right was limited by the contract, the right of pledge of those co-pledgeholders shall remain effective in accordance with clause 1 of Article 334 of this Code.
The pledger to which one of the co-pledgeholders has presented a demand to levy execution on the pledged property, is obliged, not later than within seven working days from the date of receipt of the said demand, to send a written notice of its presentation to all other co-pledgeholders of this property, unless another procedure of notification is provided by the legislation or the contract, and shall be liable for damages caused to such co-pledgeholders by the failure to fulfill that duty Co-pledgeholders that received a written notice on presentation of a demand to levy execution on the pledged property, are entitled to present a demand to the debtor for the early fulfillment of the obligation secured by the pledge, such a demand my be presented within one month from the date of receipt of such notice.
2. Creditors that have the right to present a demand to the debtor on the principal obligation secured by the pledge in full (joint-and-several creditors) and creditors that have the right to present to the debtor a part of the demand on such an obligation (sharing creditors) are co-pledgeholders on that pledge, unless otherwise provided by the legislation or the contract.
Satisfaction of demands of joint-and-several creditors on the principal obligation secured by the pledge shall be carried out in the order established by Article 307 (4) of this Code.
Satisfaction of demands of sharing creditors on the principal obligation secured by the pledge shall be carried out proportionally to the amounts of their demands secured by the pledge, unless otherwise provided by the contract between them. Article 324. Maintenance and Preservation of Pledged Property l. The pledger or pledgeholder, depending upon in which disposal is the pledged property (Article 338), shall be obliged, unless otherwise provided by legislation or contract, to:
1) insure pledged property at its full value at the expense of the pledger against risks of loss and damage, or, if the full value of the property exceeds the amount of the demand secured by the pledge, for an amount not lower than the amount of the demand; 2) take measures necessary in order to ensure the preservation of the pledged property, including those for defense of property against infringements and demands on the part of third persons; 3) inform immediately the other party concerning the arising of the threat of loss or damage to the pledged property. The pledgeholder and the pledger shall have the right to verify, by documents and actually, the existence, quantity, state, and conditions of storage the pledged property, which is in disposal of the other party. In the event of gross violation by the pledgeholder of the duties specified in Clause 1 of this Article, creating a threat of loss or damage of the pledged property, the pledger shall have the right to demand the termination of the pledge before time.
Article 325. Consequences of Loss of or Damage to Pledged Property 1. The pledger shall bear the risk of accidental perishing or accidental damage to pledged property unless otherwise provided by the contract on pledge. 2. The pledgeholder shall be liable for the full or partial loss of or damage to the subject of pledge transferred to him unless he would prove that he may be relieved of liability in accordance with Article 372 of this Code. The pledgeholder shall be liable for the loss of the subject of pledge in the amount of its value, taking into account the inflation, and for the damaging thereof, in the amount by which the value was reduced irrespective of its value specified in the contract. If as a result of damage to the subject of pledge it has so changed that it cannot be used for its intended purpose, the pledger shall have the right to reject it and to demand compensation for the loss thereof. The duty of the pledgeholder to compensate the pledger for other losses caused by the loss of or damage to the subject of pledge may be provided for by a contract. The pledger who is a debtor with regard to the obligation secured by a pledge shall have the right to set off the demand against the pledgeholder concerning compensation of losses caused by the loss of or damage to the subject of pledge in repaying the obligation secured by the pledge.
Article 326. Substitution and Restoration of Subject of Pledge l. The replacement of the subject of pledge shall be permitted with the consent of the pledgeholder unless otherwise provided by legislation or by contract. If there is a real threat of total or partial loss or damage to the subject of a mortgage not on the fault of the mortgagee, he is entitled to demand replacement of the subject of a mortgage, and in case if the mortgagor denies to fulfill this demand – to demand premature performance of obligations secured by this mortgage. 2. If the subject of pledge is lost or damaged or the right of ownership therein or the right of economic management or operative administration has been terminated on the grounds established by the legislation, the pledger shall have the right within a reasonable period to restore the subject of pledge or substitute other property of equal value unless otherwise provided by the contract.
Article 327. Use and Disposition of Subject of Pledge 1. The pledger shall have the right, unless otherwise provided by contract and unless follows otherwise from the essence of the pledge, to use the subject of pledge in accordance with its intended purpose, including to derive yield and incomes from it.
2. Unless otherwise provided by the legislation or contract and unless follows otherwise from the essence of the pledge, the pledger shall have the right to alienate the subject of pledge, to transfer it on lease or for use without compensation to another person, or otherwise to dispose of it only with the consent of the pledgeholder. An agreement limiting the right of the pledger to bequeath pledged property shall be void. 3. The pledgeholder shall have the right to use the subject of pawn transferred lo him only in the instances provided for by contract, regularly submitting a report on use to the pledger. The duty may be placed under a contract on the pledgeholder to derive yield and incomes from the subject of pledge for the purposes of repaying the principal obligation or in the interests of the pledger.
Article 328. Defense by Pledgeholder of His Rights to Subject of Pledge l. The pledgeholder, in whose disposal the pledged property is or should be, shall have the right to demand and obtain it from another's illegal possession, including from the possession of the pledger (Articles 282, 283 and 286). 2. In instances when, in accordance with the conditions of the contract, the right to use a subject of pledge, transferred to the pledgeholder, has been granted to him, he may demand from other persons, including from the pledger, the elimination of any violations of his right, even though these violations were not connected with deprivation of possession (Articles 285, 286).
Article 329. Grounds for Levying Execution on Pledged Property 1. Execution may be levied on pledged property in order to satisfy the demands of the pledgeholder (creditor) in the event of the failure to perform or the improper performance by the debtor of an obligation, secured by the pledge, for the reasons for which the debtor is liable. 2. Levying execution on pledged property may be refused, if the violation of the obligation, secured by the pledge, which was committed by the debtor, is extremely insignificant, and the amount of the demands of the pledgeholder as a consequence thereof is clearly incommensurate with the value of the pledged property.
Article 330. Procedure for Levying Execution on Pledged Property 1. The demands of the pledgeholder (creditor) shall be satisfied from the value of pledged property by the decision of a court, unless otherwise provided by parts two and three of this clause and part one of Article 339 (5) of this Code. The satisfaction of a demand of the pledgeholder at the expense of pledged property without recourse to a court is permitted on the basis of a notarially certified agreement of the pledgeholder with the pledger concluded before or after the grounds established by the legislation to levy execution on pledged property arise except for the cases provided by clause 3 of this Article. In this instance, such an agreement shall contain a condition on granting the right to the pledger or the pledgeholder, or another person chosen by the parties to perform on behalf of the pledger the sale of pledged property in case of levying execution on the pledged property to satisfy demands of the pledgeholder and may not stipulate the transfer of the ownership to the pledged property to the pledgeholder. Such an agreement may be considered by the court to be invalid upon the lawsuit of the person whose rights were violated by this agreement. The satisfaction of a demand of the pledgeholder at the expense of the pledged property right (demand) to receive monetary means without recourse to a court is permitted on the basis of a contract on pledge (another agreement concluded between the pledgeholder and pledger), with the exception of cases provided for by clause 3 of this Article. In this instance, such a contract (agreement) must stipulate a possibility for the pledgeholder to retain the pledged property right (demand) to receive monetary means
on the conditions determined therein, but not less than the value of such right (demand) specified in the contract on pledge. 2. In cases when for the pledge, in accordance with the legislative acts, it is necessary to receive the consent (decision) of a person or a state body, another state organization, conclusion of the agreement, provided in part two of Clause 1 of this Article, is possible only after the receipt, under the established procedure, of such consent (decision) of this person or a state body, another state organization. 3. Execution may be levied on the subject of pledge only by a decision of the court in case if : 1) the pledger is absent, and it is impossible to establish his location; 2) the subject of pledge is property being historical and cultural value; 3) the subject of pledge is property with limited turnability; 4) the subject of pledge is an enterprise as property complex; 5) the subject of pledge is property being in common ownership and somebody of its owners gives no consent in a written form to satisfy claims of the pledgeholder out of court; 6) for the mortgage of property the consent (decision) of another person or state body, another state organization is needed. 4. The satisfaction of demands of the pledgeholder (creditor) on the repayment of a bank credit at the expense of the pledged property is performed, without recourse to a court and holding a public competition, on the basis of notarially certified contract of the pledgeholder with the pledger concluded after the grounds established by the legislation for the levy of execution upon the subject of pledge. At that, the contract may not stipulate the transfer of the ownership of the pledged property to the pledgeholder. The pledged property recoverable by the decision of a court and related to fixed assets of the pledgeholder may not be subject to the levy of executuon in the order established by part one of this clause.
Article 331. Realization of Pledged Property 1. Realization of the pledged property, on which execution is levied in accordance with part one of Article 330 (1) of this Code, shall be effectuated by means of sale at public sale in accordance with the procedure established by procedural legislation unless a different procedure has been established by this Code and other acts of legislation. 2. At the request of the pledger, the court shall have the right, in decision to levy execution on pledged property, to defer the sale thereof at public sale for period of up to one year. The deferral shall not affect the rights and duties of the parties with regard to an obligation secured by the pledge of this property and shall not relieve the debtor from compensating the losses of the creditor and the penalty that accrued during the period of deferral.
21. Pledged property on which the execution has been levied without application to the court in accordance with part two of Article 330 (1) and Article 330 (2) of this Code, shall be realized: 1) at public trading under the procedure established by acts of legislation: by the pledgeholder, pledger or another person authorized by a notarially certified agreement of the pledgeholder with pledger, with the exception of the case provided in indent three of this sub-clause; by the pledgeholder if the pledge subject is a land plot being in private ownership or the right to lease a land, plot, including with capital constructions (buildings, structures) the located or erected on them, or capital constructions (buildings, structures) with simultaneous pledge of the land plot being in private ownership (the right to lease the land plot), on which these capital constructions (buildings, structures) are located, as well as other property being part of fixes assets of the pledger;
2) according to a contract of sale without holding the public trading, by a bank, pledgeholder, pledger, or another person authorized by a notarized agreement of the bank pledgeholder with the pledger in case of satisfactions of claims for repayment of a bank credit at the expense of pledged property, with the exception of the property specified in indent three of sub-clause 1 of this clause. 3. The initial sale price at which the public sale begins shall be determined by decision of a court in accordance with the procedural legislation, when levying execution on property in a judicial proceeding, or by agreement of the pledgeholder with the pledger, when levying execution on that property without going to court, unless otherwise provided by legislative acts. The pledged property shall be sold to the person who offered the highest price at the public sale. When a public sale, including a repeat one, is declared to be not effectuated due to the fact that the request (application) for participation therein is submitted only by one participant or for participation therein only one participant turned up, in the instances provided by legislative acts, the sale object is to be sold to that participant, upon his consent, at the initial price increased by five percent. 4. When a public sale is declared to be not effectuated and the sole participant that submitted a request (application) for participation in the sale or turned up to participate therein has refused to purchase the pledged property at the initial sale price increased by five percent, if a possibility of such purchase is provided by legislative acts, the pledgeholder shall have the right by agreement with the pledger to acquire the pledged property and to set off against the purchase price his demands secured by the pledge. The rules concerning the contract of purchase-sale shall apply to such an agreement. When a repeat public sale is declared to be not effectuated and the sole participant that submitted a request (application) for participation in the sale or turned up to participate therein has refused to purchase the pledged property at the initial sale price increased by five percent, if a possibility of such purchase is provided by legislative acts, the pledgeholder shall have the right to retain the subject of pledge, valuing it in an amount of not more than 10 percent less that the initial sale price at the repeat public sale. If the pledgeholder does not take advantage of the right to retain the subject of pledge within a month from the date of announcement of the repeat public sale to be not effectuated and the sole participant that submitted a request (application) for participation in the sale or turned up to participate therein has refused to purchase the pledged property at the initial sale price increased by five percent, if a possibility of such purchase is provided by legislative acts, the contract on pledge shall terminate. 5. If the amount received when realizing the pledged property is insufficient to cover the demand of the pledgeholder, he shall have the right, in the absence of any other indication in the legislation or in the contract, to receive the amount in arrears from other property of the debtor, not taking advantage of preference based on pledge. 6. If the amount received at realization of the pledged property exceeds the amount of the demand of the pledgeholder secured by the pledge, the difference shall be returned to the pledger, with the exception of the case provided for by part five of Article 339 (5) of this Code. 7. A debtor and pledger, being a third person, shall have the right at any time before the sale of the subject of pledge to terminate the levying of execution on it and the realization thereof, by performing the obligation secured by the pledge or that part thereof, the performance of which has been delayed. An agreement limiting this right shall be void.
Article 332. Performance of Obligation Secured by Pledge Before Time and Levying Execution on Pledged Property 1. A pledgeholder shall have the right to demand the performance before time of an obligation, secured by pledge, in the following instances: 1) the subject of pledge departed from the possession of the pledger, in which disposal it was left, not in accordance with the conditions of the contract on pledge; 2) a violation, by the pledger, of the rules concerning substitution of the subject of pledge (Article 326);
3) loss of the subject of pledge under circumstances for which the pledgeholder is not liable, if the pledger has not taken advantage of the right provided for by Article 326(2) of this Code. 2. The pledgeholder shall have the right to demand the performance before time of the obligation secured by pledge and, if this demand is not satisfied, to levy execution on the subject of pledge in the following instances: 1) violation by the pledger of the rules on the subsequent pledge or levying the execution on the pledged property by the preceding or subsequent pledgeholder or by one of the co-pledgeholders (Articles 323 and 3231); 2) the failure of the pledger to fulfill the duties provided for by Article 324(1), subclauses (1) and (2), and Article 324(2) of this Code; 3) a violation by the pledger of the rules concerning the disposition of pledged property (Article 327(2)).
Article 333. Termination of Pledge 1. A pledge shall terminate:
1) with the termination of the obligation secured by the pledge;
2) upon the demand of the pledger when there are the grounds provided for by Article 324(3) of this Code;
3) in the event of perishing of the pledged thing or termination of the right of pledge, unless the pledger has taken advantage of the right provided for by Article 326(2) of this Code;
4) in the event of the sale of pledged property at public sale, and also when the realization thereof has proved to be impossible (Article 331(4));
5) with transfer of the debt under the obligation secured by the pledge to another person, if the pledger has not given the consent to the creditor to respond for a new debtor (Article 337);
6) upon levying the execution on the pledged property by the preceding pledgeholder unless the subsequent pledgeholder have not used the right to demand from the debtor or such right was limited by the contract, or the subsequent pledge secured the obligations also secured by guarantees of the Government of the Republic of Belarus, guarantees of local executive and administrative bodies, and for satisfaction of demands of the preceding pledgeholder the execution is levied on all pledged property or if the preceding pledgeholder used the right provided for by part two of Article 331 (4) of this Code.
2. Termination of mortgage shall be registered in accordance with the legislation.
3. In the event of termination of pawn as a consequence of the performance of the obligation secured by the pawn or at the demand of the pledger (Article 324(3)), the pledgeholder, in whose disposal is the pledged property is obliged to return it immediately to the pledger.
Article 334. Preservation of Pledge in Event of Transfer of Right to Pledged Property to Another Person l. In the event of the transfer of the right of ownership to pledged property or the right of economic management from the pledger to another person as a result of the alienation of this property, with or without compensation, or by way of universal legal succession, the right of pledge shall retain force. The legal successor of the pledger shall take the place of the pledger and shall bear all the duties of the pledger, unless otherwise established by an agreement with the pledgeholder.
2. If the property of the pledger, which is the subject of pledge, has passed by way of legal succession to several persons, each of the legal successors (acquirers of the property) shall bear the consequences, arising from the pledge, for the failure to perform the obligation secured by the pledge, commensurate with the part of the said property which has passed to this legal successor (acquirer). However, if the subject of the pledge is indivisible, or it remains in the common joint ownership of the legal successors on other grounds, they shall become joint and several pledgers.
Article 335. Consequences of Compulsory Withdrawal of Pledged Property 1. If the right of ownership of a pledger to property which is the subject of pledge terminates on the grounds and in accordance with the procedure established by the legislation as a consequence of the withdrawal (purchase) for state needs, requisition or nationalization, and other property or respective compensation is granted to the pledger, the right of pledge shall extend to the property granted instead or, respectively, the pledgeholder shall acquire the right of preferential satisfaction of his demand from the amount of compensation due to the pledger. The pledgeholder also shall have the right to demand the performance before time of the obligation secured by the pledge. 2. In the instances when property which is the subject of pledge is withdrawn from the pledger in accordance with the procedure established by the legislation because the owner of this property is really another person (Article 282), or in the form of a sanction for the commission of a crime or another violation of legislation (Article 244), the pledge with respect to this property shall terminate. In these instances the pledgeholder shall have the right to demand performance before time of the obligation secured by the pledge.
Article 336. Cession of Rights Regarding Contract on Pledge A pledgeholder shall have the right to transfer his rights under a contract on pledge to another person while complying with the rules on the transfer of the rights of a creditor by means of cession of a demand (Articles 353-361). The cession by the pledgeholder of his rights under a contract on pledge to another person shall be valid if the rights of demand against the debtor regarding the principal obligation, secured by pledge, have been transferred to the same person. Unless proved otherwise, the cession of rights under a contract on mortgage shall also mean the cession of rights relating to the obligation secured by the mortgage.
Article 337. Transfer of Debt Regarding Obligation Secured by Pledge With the transfer of a debt regarding an obligation secured by a pledge to another person, the pledge shall terminate unless the pledger has given consent to the creditor to be liable for the new debtor.
Article 338. Pledge of Goods in Turnover l. A pledge of goods while leaving them in the disposal of the pledger and granting to the pledger the right to change the composition and natural form of the pledged property (goods inventories, raw material, substances, semi-finished products, finished products, and the like) on condition that their total value shall not become less than that specified in the contract on pledge, shall be deemed to be a pledge of goods in turnover. Transfer into pledge of any movable property defined by generic characteristics may be carried out in the order established by this Code and other legislative acts for the pledge of goods in circulation. A contract on pledge of goods in circulation shall define generic characteristics of pledged goods and the total value of pledged goods.
A reduction of the value of pledged goods in turnover shall be permitted commensurately with the performed part of the obligation secured by pledge unless otherwise provided by the contract.
2. Goods in turnover alienated by a pledger shall cease to be the subject of pledge from the time of their transfer into ownership, economic management or operative administration of the acquirer, and goods acquired by the pledger which are specified in the contract on pledge shall become the subject of pledge from the time the right of the pledger arises to ownership, economic management or operative administration.
3. The pledger of goods in turnover shall be obliged to keep a register book of pledges in which entries are made concerning the conditions of the pledge of goods and all operations entailing change of the composition or natural form of the pledged goods, including the processing thereof, on the day of the last operation. 4. In the event of a violation by the pledger of the conditions of pledge of goods in turnover, the pledgeholder shall have the right, by placing his marks and seals on the pledged goods, to suspend operations with these goods until the violation is eliminated or demand the transfer to him of pledged goods or demand premature performance of the obligation secured by the pledge.
Article 339. Pledge of Things in Pawnshop l. The acceptance from citizens on pledge of movable property intended for personal consumption to secure short-term microloans (loans in the amount not exceeding 15 000 base units per one borrower on the day of the conclusion of the contract) may be effectuated as entrepreneurial activity by specialized organizations, pawnshops. 2. A contract on the pledge of things in a pawnshop shall be formalized by the issuance of a pledge ticket by the pawnshop. 3. The pledged things shall be transferred to the pawnshop. The pawnshop shall be obliged to insure, to the benefit of the pledger, at the expense of the pawnshop, the things accepted on pledge for the value as established in accordance with prices for things of this type and quality commonly established in trade at the time of their acceptance on pledge. The pawnshop shall not have the right to use and dispose of pledged things.
4. The pawnshop shall bear liability for loss of and damage to pledged things unless it would prove that the loss or damage occurred as a consequence of force majeure.
5. The pawnshop is entitled, in the event of the failure to return, within the period established by the contract of microloan the fulfillment of obligation under which is secured by the pledge of movable property intended for personal, family or household use, the sum of valuation of which on the day of concluding the contract of microloan does not exceed 100 base units, upon the expiration of the one- month period after the day of return of the sum of microloan established by the contract of microloan, to levy the execution on such property without the recourse to the court and observance of other requirements provided by part two of Article 330 (1) of this Code and to realized it in accordance with the procedure determined by the rules for granting microloans approved by the pawnshop in accordance with the legislation, unless another procedure is established by the contract of microloan (pawn ticket), with the exception of the case specified in part four of this clause.
Independent levying of the execution on movable property intended for personal, family or household use, which secures the fulfillment of obligations under the contract of microloan the sum of valuation of which on the day of concluding the contract of microloan does not exceed 100 base units, and independent realization of such property shall be carried out by the pawnshop in accordance with the rules determined by the Council of Ministers of the Republic of Belarus and the National Bank of the Republic of Belarus.
In the case of failure to return the sum of microloan within the period established by the contract of microloan the fulfillment of obligations under which is secured by the pledge of movable property intended for personal, family or household use, the sum of valuation of which on the day of concluding the contract of microloan exceeds 100 base units, the levying of execution on such property upon the expiration of the one-month period after the day of return of the sum of microloan established by the contract of microloan, and also realization of such property shall be carried out by the pawnshop in accordance with Article 330 (1-4) and (7) and Article 331 of this Code, acts of the President of the Republic of Belarus, with the exception of the case specified in part four of this clause.
Peculiarities of the pawnshop operations with precious metals and precious stones, including the peculiarities of the realization of precious metals and precious stones not demanded from the pawnshop, are established by the legislation in the sphere of activity with precious metals and precious stones.
After realization of movable property intended for personal, family or household use, transferred by the borrower or another person being the pledger to the pawnshop as security for the fulfillment of obligations of the borrower under the contract of microloan, the demands of the pawnshop toward the borrower are extinguished even if the sum received from the realization of the pledged movable property is insufficient for their complete satisfaction. If the sum received upon realization of that property exceeds the amount of the demand of the pawnshop secured by the pledge, the difference between the sum received from the realization and the amount of the demand without deduction of costs shall be returned to the pledger. The difference not claimed by the pledger within three years from the date of the realization of the pledged movable property is to be included in the local budget income at the location of the pawnshop.
6. The rules for granting microloans to citizens by pawnshops under pledge of things belonging to citizens shall be established in accordance with the legislation.
7. The conditions of a contract on pledge of things in a pawnshop limiting the rights of the pledger in comparison with the rights granted to him by the legislation shall be void. In place of such conditions the respective provisions of the legislation shall be applied.
Article 3391. Pledge of Property Right (Claim)
1. At the pledge of a property right (claim), its value shall be defined by the agreement between parties unless otherwise provided by the nature of the right (claim) itself or established by the legislative acts.
2. Term property right (claim) may be the subject of the pledge only till the end of its validity term.
3. At the pledge of a property right (claim), unless otherwise provided by the contract, the pledger is obliged to:
1) perform all actions necessary to secure the validity of the pledged right (claim);
2) abstain from performance of cession of the pledged right (claim);
3) abstain from actions that can entail the termination of the pledged right (claim) or decrease of its value;
4) take measures necessary to protect the pledged right (claim) from infringements of third parties;
5) inform the pledgeholder about the data on changes occurred in the pledged right (claim); its violations by third persons and about claims of third persons to this right (claim).
4. At the pledge of the property right (claim) unless otherwise provided by a contract, the pledgeholder is entitled regardless of the due date the obligation secured by pledge to require through court to transfer the
pledged right (claim) on him, if the pledger has not fulfilled the obligations provided by sub-clauses 2 - 4 of clause 3 of this Article, provided that the pledged right (claim) is not terminated.
5. Pledge of the property right (claim) evidenced by a security paper shall be performed by means of pledging this security paper.
§ 4. Retention
Article 340. Grounds of Retention 1. A creditor, in whose disposal is a thing, which is subject to transfer to a debtor or to a person specified by the debtor, shall have the right in the event of the failure of the debtor to perform the obligation relating to payment for this thing within the specified period or to compensate the creditor for expenses and other losses connected therewith, to retain it for so long as the respective obligation is not performed. 2. The retention of a thing may also secure demands that, although not connected with the payment for the thing or compensation of expenses therefor and other losses, but arose from an obligation, the parties to which act as entrepreneurs. 3. The creditor may retain a thing, being in his disposal, regardless of the fact that after this thing came into the possession of the creditor, the rights thereto have been acquired by a third person. 4. The rules of this Article shall apply unless otherwise provided by a contract. 5. The demands of a creditor who is retaining a thing shall be satisfied from the value thereof in the amount and in accordance with the procedure provided for the satisfaction of demands secured by a pledge.
§ 5. Suretyship
Article 341. Contract of Suretyship 1. Under a contract of suretyship, the surety shall undertake to the creditor of another person to be liable for the performance by the latter of his obligation in full or in part. 2. A contract of suretyship may be concluded also in order to secure an obligation which shall arise in future. 3. The President of the Republic of Belarus and/or laws may establish a special order for granting and discharging of sureties of local executive and dispositive bodies.
Article 342. Form of Contract of Suretyship A contract of suretyship must be concluded in written form. The failure to comply with the written form shall entail the invalidity of the contract of suretyship.
Article 343. Liability of Surety
1. In the event of the failure to perform or the improper performance by the debtor of an obligation secured by a suretyship, the surety and the debtor shall be liable to a creditor jointly and severally unless subsidiary liability of the surety has been provided for by the legislation or by the contract of suretyship.
2. The surety shall be liable to the creditor in the same amount as the debtor, including the payment of interest, compensation for court costs relating to recovery of the debt, and other losses of the creditor
caused by the failure to perform or the improper performance of the obligation by the debtor unless otherwise provided by the contract of suretyship. 3. Persons who have given a suretyship jointly shall be liable to the creditor jointly and severally unless otherwise provided by the contract of suretyship.
Article 344. Right of Surety to Objections Against Demand of Creditor 1. The surety shall have the right to raise the objections against the demand of the creditor, which the debtor could raise, unless it arises otherwise from the contract of suretyship. The surety shall not lose the right to these objections even if the debtor waived them or has acknowledged his debt. 2. If the suit is submitted against the surety, the latter is obliged to involve the debtor in participation in the case. 3. If the surety has not performed the duty, specified in Clause 2 of this Article, the debtor shall have the right to raise, against the surety’s regressive demand, the objections which he had against the creditor.
Article 345. Rights of Surety Who Has Performed Obligation l. To a surety who has performed an obligation shall pass the rights of the creditor with regard to this obligation and the rights which belonged to the creditor as pledgeholder in that amount in which the surety satisfied the demand of the creditor. The surety also shall have the right to demand from the debtor the payment of interest on the amount paid to the creditor and compensation for other losses incurred in connection with liability for the debtor.
2. Upon performance by the surety of the obligation the creditor shall be obliged to hand over to the surety the documents certifying the demand against the debtor and to transfer the rights which secure this demand.
3. The rules established by this Article shall be applied unless otherwise provided by the legislation, or by the contract of surety with the debtor and does not arise from the relations between them.
Article 346. Notification of Surety about Performance of Obligation by Debtor The debtor who has performed an obligation secured by a suretyship shall be obliged immediately to notify the surely thereof. Otherwise the surety who in turn has performed the obligation shall have the right to recover from the creditor that unjustifiably received or to submit a regressive demand against the debtor. In the last instance the debtor shall have the right to recover from the creditor only that unjustifiably received.
Article 367. Termination of Suretyship 1. A suretyship shall terminate with the termination of the obligation secured by it, and also in the event of a change thereof entailing an increase of liability or other unfavorable consequences for the surety without the consent of the latter.
2. A suretyship shall terminate with the transfer to another person of the debt relating to the obligation secured by the suretyship unless the surety has given consent to the creditor to be liable for the new debtor.
3. A suretyship shall terminate if the creditor has refused to accept proper performance offered by the debtor or the surety.
4. A suretyship shall terminate upon the expiry of the period for which it was given, specified in the contract of suretyship. If such period has not been established, it shall terminate, if the creditor within a year from the date of ensuing the term of performance of the obligation, secured by the suretyship, has not brought a suit against the surety. When the period of performance of the principal obligation has not been specified and cannot be determined or is determined by the time of demand, the suretyship shall terminate if the creditor has not brought a suit against the surety within two years from the date of concluding the contract of suretyship.
§ 6. Guarantee
Article 348. Concept of Guarantee 1. By virtue of guarantee, the guarantor shall undertake to the creditor of other person (debtor) to be liable for the performance of obligation of this person in full or in part. 2. The guarantee obligation may arise on the grounds of a contract. 3. Only valid demands may be secured by the guarantee. 4. The rules of Article 342, Article 343(2)(3), Articles 344-347 of this Code shall extend to the guarantees, unless otherwise provided by the legislation. The President of the Republic of Belarus and/or laws may establish a special order for granting and discharging of guarantees of the Government of the Republic of Belarus, guarantees of local executive and dispositive bodies, other organizations, including companies with a share of the state in charter capitals.
Article 349. Subsidiary Liability of Guarantor 1. In the event of non-performance of the obligation, the guarantor shall be liable to the creditor as a subsidiary (secondary) debtor. 2. After performance of the obligation, the guarantor shall not acquire the right of the regressive demand to the debtor for return of the amount paid.
Article 350. Specific Features of Bank Guarantee Specific features of the bank guarantee and of its individual kinds shall be defined by the legislation.
§ 7. Deposit
Article 351. Concept of Deposit. Form of Agreement on Deposit 1. A deposit shall be deemed to be a monetary amount issued by one of the contracting parties on the account of payment due from this party to the other party under a contract, as evidence of the conclusion of the contract and to secure its performance. 2. An agreement on deposit, irrespective of the amount of the deposit, must be concluded in written form. 3. In the event of doubt as to whether the amount is paid on the account of payments due from a party under the contract as a deposit, in particular as a consequence of the failure to comply with the rule established by Clause 2 of this Article, this amount shall be considered to be paid as an advance unless proved otherwise.
Article 352. Consequences of Termination and Failure to Perform Obligation Secured by Deposit 1. In the event of the termination of the obligation before the commencement of the performance thereof by agreement of the parties or as a consequence of the impossibility of performance (Article 386) the deposit must be returned. 2. If the party, which gave the deposit, is liable for the failure to perform the contract, the deposit shall remain with the other party. If the party, which received the deposit, is liable for the failure to perform the contract, it shall be obliged to pay the other party twice the amount of the deposit. In addition, the party liable for the failure to perform the contract shall be obliged to compensate the other party for losses, setting off the amount of the deposit, unless otherwise provided in the contract.
CHAPTER 24 Change of Persons in Obligation
§ 1. Transfer of Rights of Creditor to Another Person
Article 353. Grounds and Procedure for Transfer of Rights of Creditor to Another Person 1. The right (demand) belonging to creditor on the ground of an obligation may be transferred by him to another person with regard to the transaction (cession of demand) or pass to another person on the ground of the act of legislation. The rules concerning the transfer of the rights of a creditor to another person shall not apply to regressive demands. 2. The consent of the debtor, unless otherwise provided by the legislation or by the contract, shall not be required for the transfer of the rights of the creditor to another person. 3. If the debtor was not informed in writing about the transfer of the rights of the creditor to another person, the new creditor shall bear the risk of the unfavorable consequences caused by this for him. In this event the performance of the obligation to the initial creditor shall be deemed to be performance to a proper creditor.
Article 354. Rights Which May Not Pass to Other Persons The transfer to another person of the rights inseparably connected with the person of the creditor, in particular, demands concerning alimony and compensation of harm caused to life or health, shall not be permitted.
Article 355. Amount of Rights of Creditor Passing to Another Person Unless otherwise provided by the legislation or by contract, the right of the initial creditor shall pass to the new creditor in that amount and on those conditions which existed at the time of transfer of the right. In particular, to the new creditor shall pass the rights securing the performance of the obligation, and also other rights connected with the demand, including the right to unpaid interest.
Article 356. Evidence of Rights of New Creditor 1. The creditor who has assigned a demand to another person shall be obliged to transfer to him the documents certifying the right of demand and to provide information having significance for the effectuation of the demand. 2. The debtor shall have the right not to perform the obligation to a new creditor until the submission to him of evidence of the transfer of the demand to this person.
Article 357. Objections of Debtor Against Demands of New Creditor The debtor shall have the right to raise objections against the demand of a new creditor, which he had against the initial creditor at the time of receipt of notification concerning the transfer of the rights regarding the obligation to the new creditor.
Article 358. Transfer of Rights of Creditor to Another Person on Ground of Act of Legislation The rights of a creditor relating to an obligation shall pass to another person on the ground of the act of legislation and ensuing of the circumstances specified therein: 1) as a result of universal legal succession to the rights of the creditor; 2) by decision of a court concerning the transfer of the rights of the creditor to another person when the possibility of such transfer has been provided for by the legislation; 3) as a consequence of the performance of the obligation of the debtor by his surety or by a pledger who is not the debtor with regard to this obligation; 4) in the event of the subrogation to an insurer of the rights of the creditor against the debtor who is liable for the ensuing of an insured accident; 5) in the other instances provided for by the legislation.
Article 359. Conditions of Cession of Demand 1. The cession of demand by the creditor to another person shall be permitted if this is not contrary to the legislation or the contract. 2. The cession of demand regarding an obligation in which the person of the creditor has material significance for the debtor without the consent of the debtor shall not be permitted.
Article 360. Form of Cession of Demand 1. The cession of demand based on a transaction concluded in simple written or notarial form must be concluded in the respective written form. 2. The cession of demand relating to a transaction requiring state registration must be registered in accordance with the procedure established for registration of such transaction unless otherwise established by the legislation. 3. The cession of demand regarding an order security shall be concluded by means of an endorsement on this security (Article 147(3)).
Article 361. Liability of Creditor Who Has Ceded Demand The initial creditor who has ceded a demand shall be liable to the new creditor for the invalidity of the demand transferred to him but shall not be liable for the failure to perform this demand by the debtor except when the initial creditor assumed a suretyship for the debtor to the new creditor.
§2. Transfer of Debt
Article 362. Condition and Form of Transfer of Debt
1. The transfer by the debtor of his debt to another person shall be permitted only with the consent of the creditor. 2. The rules contained in Article 360(1) and (2) of this Code shall apply respectively to the form of the transfer of the debt.
Article 363. Objections of New Debtor Against Demands of Creditor The new debtor shall have the right to raise objections against the demand of the creditor, based on relations between the creditor and the initial debtor.
CHAPTER 25 Liability for Violation of Obligations
Article 364. Duty of Debtor to Compensate Losses 1. A debtor shall be obliged to compensate the creditor for losses caused by the failure to perform or improper performance of an obligation. 2. Losses shall be determined in accordance with the rules provided for by Article 14 of this Code. 3. Unless otherwise provided by the legislation or by contract, when determining losses, the prices shall be taken into account, which exist in that place, where the obligation shall be performed, on the date of voluntary satisfaction by the debtor of the demand of the creditor, or, if the demand was not voluntarily satisfied, on the date of bringing the suit. Taking into consideration the circumstances, a court may satisfy the demand to compensate losses by taking into account the prices existing on the day of adoption of the decision. 4. When determining lost advantage, the measures undertaken by the creditor to receive it and the preparations made for this purpose shall be taken into account.
Article 365. Losses and Penalty 1. If a penalty has been established for the failure to perform or for improper performance of an obligation, the losses shall be compensated in the part not covered by the penalty. Instances may be provided for by the legislation or by contract: when the recovery of only a penalty is permitted, but not of losses; when losses may be recovered in full above the penalty; when at the choice of the creditor either a penalty or losses may be recovered. 2. When limited liability (Article 371) was established for the failure to perform or improper performance, the losses subject to compensation in the part not covered by the penalty or above or in place of it may be recovered up to the limits established by such limitation.
Article 366. Liability for Failure to Perform Monetary Obligation 1. For the use of another's monetary means as a consequence of unlawful retention, avoidance of the return thereof, other delay in the payment thereof or the unjustified receipt or saving thereof at the expense of another person, interest shall be subject to payment on the amount of these means. The amount of interest shall be determined at the refinance rate of the National Bank of the Republic of Belarus on the day of performance of the monetary obligation or respective part thereof, except for the recovery of a debt in a judicial proceeding, if the court has satisfied the demand of the creditor, using the refinance rate of the National Bank on the date of adoption of the decision. These rules shall apply unless another amount of interest has been established by the legislation or by the contract.
In the case when a monetary obligation, in accordance with the legislation, is subject to payment in Belarusian Rubles in an amount equivalent to a determined amount in foreign currency or in conventional monetary units the interests is to be calculated on the sum in Belarusian Rubles determined at the official exchange rate of the respective currency or conventional monetary unit on the day of performance of the monetary obligation or of its corresponding part and, in the case of recovery of the debt in the court order, on the day of rendering decision by the court.
2. If the damages caused to a creditor by the unlawful use of his monetary means exceed the sum of interest due to him on the basis of clause 1 of this Article, the creditor is entitled to demand from the debtor compensation of damages in the part exceeding this sum.
In cases provided by the legislation or contract, the creditor is entitled to demand from the debtor reimbursement of the sum of debt, increased with account of inflation, in the part exceeding the sum of interest due to him on the basis of clause 1 of this Article. In this instance the amount of debt increased with account of the inflation shall be calculated in the order determined by the contract, unless otherwise established by the legislation.
3. Interest for the use of another's means shall be recovered for the period up to the day of payment of the amount of these means to the creditor unless a shorter period has been established for calculating interest by the legislation or by the contract. 4. If the amount of interest to be paid for the use of other’s monetary funds whose amount is defined in a contract on the base of part two of clause 1 of this Article, is clearly disproportionate to the consequences of the violation of the obligation, the court is entitled to reduce the amount of the interest upon the application of the debtor, but not less than the amount of the interest calculated in accordance with part one of clause 1 of this Article.
Article 367. Liability for Failure to Perform Obligation in Kind 1. The payment of a penalty and compensation of losses in the event of the improper performance of an obligation shall not relieve the debtor from performance of the obligation in kind unless otherwise provided by the legislation or by the contract. 2. The compensation of losses in the event of the failure to perform an obligation and the payment of a penalty for the failure to perform shall relieve the debtor from the performance of the obligation in kind unless otherwise provided by the legislation or by the contract. 3. The refusal of a creditor to accept performance which as a consequence of delay has lost interest for him (Article 376(2)), and also the payment of a penalty established as release-money (Article 380), shall relieve the debtor from performance of the obligation in kind.
Article 368. Performance of Obligation at Expense of Debtor In the event of the failure to perform an obligation by a debtor to manufacture and transfer a thing in ownership, economic management, or operative administration, or to transfer a thing for use to a creditor, or to fulfill specified work or to render a service for the creditor, the creditor shall have the right within a reasonable period to commission the fulfillment of the obligation to the third persons for a reasonable price or to fulfill it by his own efforts unless it follows otherwise from the legislation, the contract, or the essence of the obligation, and to demand from the debtor compensation for necessary expenses and other losses incurred.
Article 369. Consequences of Failure to Perform Obligation to Transfer Individually-Specified Thing
In the event of the failure to perform an obligation to transfer an individually-specified thing in ownership, economic management, operative administration, or use for compensation to a creditor, the latter shall have the right to demand that this thing be taken away from the debtor and the transfer thereof to the creditor on the conditions provided for by the obligation. This right shall disappear if the thing already has been transferred to a third person having the right of ownership, economic management, or operative administration. If the thing has not yet been transferred, those creditors to whose benefit the obligation arose earlier shall have priority, and, if this is impossible to establish, the creditor who has brought suit earlier. The creditor shall have the right to demand compensation of losses instead of a demand to transfer the thing to him which is the subject of the obligation.
Article 370. Subsidiary Liability 1. Before bringing the demand against the person who in accordance with the legislation, or with the conditions of an obligation bears liability additionally to the liability of another person, who is the principal debtor (subsidiary liability), the creditor must submit the demand to the principal debtor. If the principal debtor refused to satisfy the demand of the creditor or the creditor has not received a reply from him within a reasonable period to the demand submitted, this demand may be submitted to the person who bears subsidiary liability. 2. The creditor shall not have the right to demand satisfaction of his demand against the principal debtor from a person bearing subsidiary liability if this demand can be satisfied by means of the set-off of the counter demand against the principal debtor, or by the uncontested recovery of means from the principal debtor. 3. The person who bears subsidiary liability must, before satisfaction of the demand submitted to him by the creditor, warn the principal debtor thereof, and if the suit is brought against such person, to involve the principal debtor in the case. Otherwise the principal debtor shall have the right to raise the objections against the regressive demand of the person bearing subsidiary liability, which he had against the creditor.
Article 371. Limitation of Amount of Liability for Obligations l. The right to full compensation of losses may be limited (limited liability) by the legislation with regard to individual types of obligations and with regard to obligations connected with the determined kind of activity. 2. An agreement concerning the limitation of the amount of liability of a debtor under a contract of adhesion or other contract, in which the citizen acting as a consumer is a creditor, shall be void if the amount of liability for the particular type of obligations or for the particular violation has been determined by the legislation.
Article 372. Grounds of Liability for Violation of Obligation 1. A person who has not performed an obligation or who performed it improperly shall bear liability when there is fault (intent or negligence) except for instances when other grounds of liability have been provided for by the legislation or by the contract. The person shall be deemed to be not at fault if with that degree of concern and attentiveness which is required of this person according to the character of the obligation and conditions of civil turnover the person has taken all measures for proper performance of the obligation. 2. The absence of fault shall be proved by the person who has violated the obligation. 3. Unless otherwise provided by the legislation or by the contract, the person who has not performed or who has improperly performed an obligation shall, when carrying out entrepreneurial activity, bear
liability unless this person would prove that proper performance proved to be impossible as a consequence of force majeure, that is, the circumstances that are extraordinary and unavoidable under the particular conditions. 4. An agreement concluded earlier concerning the elimination or limitation of liability for an intentional violation of an obligation shall be void.
Article 373. Liability of Debtor for His Employees The actions of the employees of a debtor relating to the performance of his obligation shall be considered to be the actions of the debtor. The debtor shall be liable for these actions if they entailed the failure to perform or the improper performance of the obligation.
Article 374. Liability of Debtor for Actions of Third Persons A debtor shall be liable for the failure to perform or the improper performance of the obligation by third persons on whom performance has been placed unless it has been established by the legislation that liability shall be borne by the third person who is the immediate performer.
Article 375. Fault of Creditor 1. If the failure to perform or improper performance of an obligation has occurred through the fault of both parties, a court shall respectively reduce the amount of liability of the debtor. A court also shall have the right to reduce the amount of liability of the debtor if the creditor has intentionally or through negligence facilitated the increase of the amount of losses caused by the failure to perform or improper performance, or has not taken reasonable measures to reduce them. 2. The rules of Clause 1 of this Article shall respectively apply also in instances when the debtor, by virtue of the legislation or the contract, bears liability for the failure to perform or improper performance of an obligation irrespective of the fault.
Article 376. Delay of Debtor 1. A debtor who has delayed performance shall be liable to the creditor for losses caused by the delay and for the consequences of the impossibility of performance, which incidentally ensued during the delay. 2. If, as a consequence of delay of the debtor, the performance has lost interest for the creditor, he may refuse to accept performance and demand compensation of losses. 3. The debtor shall not be considered to be delayed if the obligation cannot be performed as a consequence of delay by the creditor.
Article 377. Delay of Creditor l. The creditor shall be considered to have delayed if he refused to accept proper performance offered by the debtor or did not perform actions provided for by the legislation, or by the contract, or arising from the essence of the obligation, before the performance of which the debtor could not perform his obligation. The creditor shall be considered to have delayed also in the instances specified in Article 379(2) of this Code. 2. The delay of the creditor shall give the debtor the right to compensation of losses caused by the delay if the creditor would not prove that the delay occurred through circumstances, for which neither the creditor himself nor those persons, on whom the acceptance of performance was placed by virtue of the legislation or the commission of the creditor, are liable.
3. With regard to a monetary obligation the debtor shall not be obliged to pay interest for the time of delay by the creditor.
CHAPTER 26 Termination of Obligations
Article 378. Grounds for Termination of Obligations 1. An obligation shall terminate wholly or in part on the grounds provided for by this Code, other acts of legislation or contract. 2. Termination of an obligation at the demand of one of the parties shall be permitted only in the instances provided for by the legislation or by the contract.
Article 379. Termination of Obligation by Performance 1. Proper performance shall terminate an obligation. 2. A creditor accepting performance shall be obliged, at the demand of the debtor, to issue him a receipt or other document of receiving performance fully or in respective part. If a debtor has issued a debt document to a creditor in certification of the obligation, then the creditor, at accepting performance, must return this document, and if it is impossible to return, specify this on the receipt issued by him. A receipt may be replaced by an inscription on the returned debt document. The debt document being with the debtor shall certify, unless proven otherwise, the termination of the obligation. If the creditor refuses to issue the receipt, to return the debt document, or to note on the receipt the impossibility of the return thereof, the debtor shall have the right to withhold performance. In these instances the creditor shall be considered to have delayed.
Article 380. Release-Money By agreement of the parties an obligation may be terminated by granting release-money in place of performance (payment of money, transfer of property, etc.). The amount, periods, and procedure for granting release-money shall be established by the parties.
Article 381. Termination of Obligation by Set-Off. Instances of Inadmissibility of Set-Off 1. An obligation shall be terminated wholly or in part by the set-off of a counter demand of the same type, the period for which has ensued or the period of which has not been specified or is determined by the time of demand. The statement of one party is sufficient for set-off. 2. The set-off shall not be permitted for the following demands: 1) if, according to the statement of the other party, the limitation period is subject to application to the demand, and this period has expired; 2) concerning compensation of harm caused to life or health; 3) concerning the recovery of alimony; 4) concerning maintenance for life; 5) in other instances provided for by the legislation or by a contract.
Article 382. Set-Off in Event of Cession of Demand In the event of cession of demand the debtor shall have the right to set-off, against the demand of the new creditor, his counter demand against the initial creditor. The set-off shall be made if the demand arose on a grounds which existed at the time of receipt by the debtor of notification concerning the cession of demand, and the period of the demand ensued before receiving it or this period was not specified or is determined by the time of demand.
Article 383. Termination of Obligation by Coincidence of Debtor and Creditor in One Person An obligation shall terminate by the coinciding of the debtor and the creditor in one person.
Article 384. Termination of Obligation by Novation 1. An obligation shall be terminated by agreement of the parties concerning the substitution of the initial obligation which existed between them by another obligation between the same persons providing for another subject or means of performance (novation). 2. Novation shall not be permitted with respect to obligations relating to compensation for harm caused to life or health and relating to the payment of alimony. 3. Novation shall terminate additional obligations connected with the initial one unless otherwise provided by agreement of the parties.
Article 385. Forgiveness of Debt An obligation shall be terminated by the release of the debtor by the creditor from the duties laid on him, unless such release violates the rights of other persons with respect to the property of the creditor.
Article 386. Termination of Obligation for Impossibility of Performance 1. If in the bilateral contract the performance became impossible for one of the parties as a consequence of the circumstances, for which neither of the parties is liable, this party shall have no right to demand satisfaction under the contract from the other party, unless there are other provisions in the legislation or in the contract. Each of the parties has the right to demand from the contractor to return all that was performed by this party without receiving the counter satisfaction. 2. If in the bilateral agreements the performance became impossible for one of the parties by virtue of the circumstances, for which this party is liable, the other party has the right to deviate from the contract and to recover the losses caused by the failure to perform, unless there are other provisions in the legislation or in the contract 3. If in the bilateral agreements the performance became impossible for one of the parties by virtue of the circumstances, for which the other party is liable, the former party shall preserve the right for counter satisfaction with offsetting the advantages, saved or acquired by it as a result of relieving from the obligation.
Article 387. Termination of Obligation on Grounds of Act of State Body 1. If as a result of the issuance of an act of a state body the performance of an obligation becomes impossible wholly or partially, the obligation shall terminate wholly or in respective part. The parties which have incurred losses as a result thereof shall have the right to demand compensation thereof in accordance with the legislation.
2. In the instance when the act of the state body, on the basis of which an obligation has terminated, is deemed in accordance with the established procedure to be invalid, the obligation shall be restored unless it arises otherwise from an agreement of the parties or the essence of the obligation, and if performance has not lost interest for the creditor.
Article 388. Termination of Obligation by Death of Citizen 1. An obligation shall be terminated by the death of the debtor if performance cannot be made without the personal participation of the debtor or the obligation is otherwise inseparably connected with the person of the debtor. 2. An obligation shall be terminated by the death of the creditor if the performance was intended personally for the creditor or the obligation was otherwise inseparably connected with the person of the creditor.
Article 389. Termination of Obligation by Liquidation of Legal Person An obligation shall be terminated by the liquidation of a legal person (debtor or creditor) except for instances when by the legislation the performance of an obligation of a liquidated legal person is placed on another person (relating to demands concerning compensation of harm caused to life and health, and in other events).
SUBSECTION 2 GENERAL PROVISIONS ON CONTRACT
CHAPTER 27 Concept and Conditions of Contract
Article 390. Concept of Contract 1. A contract shall be considered to be an agreement of two or several persons concerning the establishment, change, or termination of civil rights and duties. 2. The rules concerning bilateral and multilateral transactions provided for by Chapter 9 of this Code shall apply to contracts. 3. The general provisions on obligations (Articles 288-389) shall apply to obligations which arose from a contract unless otherwise provided by rules of this Chapter and by rules on individual types of contracts contained in the legislation. 4. The general provisions on contract shall apply to contracts concluded by more than two parties unless this is contrary to the multilateral character of such contracts.
Article 391. Freedom of Contract 1. Citizens and legal persons shall be free in concluding a contract. Coercion to conclude a contract shall not be permitted except for instances when the duty to conclude a contract has been provided for by the legislation, or by an obligation voluntarily accepted. 2. Unless otherwise provided by the legislative acts, the parties may conclude a contract which contains elements of various contracts provided for by the legislation (mixed contract). The rules on contracts, the elements of which are contained in a mixed contract, shall apply to the relations of the parties under a
mixed contract, unless it arises otherwise from the agreement of the parties or the essence of the mixed contract. 3. The conditions of a contract shall be determined by discretion of the parties except for instances when the content of the respective condition has been prescribed by the legislation (Article 392). In instances when conditions of a contract has been provided for by a norm which applies insofar as not otherwise established by agreement of the parties (dispositive norm), the parties may by their agreement establish a condition which differs from that provided therein, if this is not contrary to the legislation. In the absence of such agreement, the condition of the contract shall be determined by the dispositive norm.
Article 392. Contract and Legislation 1. A contract must correspond to rules established by the legislation, which are binding upon the parties. 2. If after the conclusion of a contract and before its termination, the act of legislation is adopted which establishes rules binding upon the parties other than those which were in action when concluding the contract, the conditions of the contract concluded shall be brought to conformity with the legislation, unless otherwise provided by the legislation.
Article 393. Contracts For and Without Compensation 1. A contract under which a party must receive payment or other counter-provision for the performance of its duties shall be a contract for compensation. 2. A contract under which one party undertakes to grant something to the other party without receiving payment or other counter-provision from it shall be deemed to be a contract without compensation. 3. A contract shall be presupposed to be a contract for compensation unless it arises otherwise from the legislation, or the content or essence of the contract.
Article 394. Price 1. The performance of a contract shall be paid for at the price established by agreement of the parties. In the instances provided for by the legislation the prices (tariffs, price scales, rates, etc.) established or regulated by duly authorized state bodies shall be applied. 2. A change of the price after the conclusion of a contract shall be permitted in the instances and on the conditions provided for by contract, by the legislation, or in accordance with the procedure established by the legislation. 3. In instances when in a contract for compensation the price has not been provided for and may not be determined on the grounds of the conditions of the contract, the performance of the contract must be paid for at the price which under comparable circumstances usually recovered for similar goods, work, or services.
Article 395. Operation of Contract
1. A contract shall enter into force and become binding for the parties from the time of its conclusion.
2. The parties shall have the right to establish that the conditions of a contract concluded by them shall apply to their relations which arose before the conclusion of the contract.
3. It may be provided by the legislation or by contract that the ending of the period of operation of a contract shall entail the termination of the obligations of the parties under the contract.
A contract in which there is no such a condition shall be deemed to be in force until the time of the ending of performance of the obligation by the parties determined therein. 4. The ending of the period of operation of a contract shall not relieve the parties from liability for the violation thereof.
Article 396. Public Contract 1. A contract concluded by a commercial organization and establishing its duties relating to the sale of goods, fulfillment of work, or rendering of services which this organization by the character of its activity must effectuate with respect to everyone who has recourse to it (retail trade, carriage by common-use transport, communications services, electric power supply, medical, hotel servicing, obligatory insurance, and so forth) shall be deemed to be a public contract. A commercial organization shall not have the right to prefer one person to others with respect to the conclusion of a public contract except for the instances provided by the legislation. 2. The price of goods, work, and services, and also other conditions of a public contract, shall be established identically for all consumers except for instances when the granting of privileges for individual categories of consumers is permitted by the legislation. 3. A refusal of a commercial organization to conclude a public contract when it is possible to grant the respective goods or services to the consumer or to fulfill the respective work for him shall not be permitted. In the event of an unjustified evasion by a commercial organization from the concluding of a public contract the provisions provided for by Article 415(4) of this Code shall apply. 4. In instances provided for by the legislative acts, the Government of the Republic of Belarus may issue rules binding upon the parties when concluding and performing public contracts (standard contracts, statutes, etc.), unless otherwise established by the President of the Republic of Belarus. 5. The conditions of a public contract which do not correspond to the requirements established by Clauses 2 and 4 of this Article shall be void.
Article 397. Model Conditions of Contracts
1. It may be provided in a contract that its individual conditions shall be determined by model conditions worked out for contracts of the respective type and published in the press. 2. Model conditions may be set out in the form of a model contract or other document containing these conditions.
Article 398. Contract of Adhesion
1. A contract of adhesion shall be deemed to be a contract, the conditions of which have been determined by one of the parties in records or other standard forms and which can be accepted by the other party not other than by means of adhering to the contract being offered as a whole.
The contract of adhesion in the insurance sphere shall be deemed a contract the conditions of which have been determined in rules for respective kinds of insurance approved by the insurer or by an association of insurers and agreed with the body carrying out the state supervision of the insurance activity and which can be accepted by the other party not other than by means of adhering to the insurance contract. 2. A party which has adhered to the contract shall have the right to demand dissolution or change of the contract if the contract of adhesion, although not contrary to the legislation, deprives this party of the rights usually granted under contracts of that type, excludes or limits the liability of the other party for a
violation of obligations, or contains other conditions clearly burdensome for the adhering party which it, proceeding from its own reasonably understandable interests, would not accept if it had the opportunity to participate in determining the conditions of the contract. 3. When the circumstances are present provided for in Clause 2 of this Article, the demand concerning dissolution or change of the contract presented by a party which has adhered to a contract in connection with the effectuation of its entrepreneurial activity shall not be subject to satisfaction, if the adhering party knew or should have known on what conditions the contract is concluded.
Article 399. Preliminary Contract
1. Under a preliminary contract the parties shall be obliged to conclude in the future a contract (principal contract) on the conditions provided for by the preliminary contract.
2. The preliminary contract shall be concluded in the form established for the principal contract, and, if the form of the principal contract has not been established, in written form. The failure to comply with the rules concerning the form of the preliminary contract shall entail its nullity.
3. A preliminary contract must contain conditions enabling to determine the subject and the other significant conditions of the principal contract.
4. A preliminary contract shall specify the period in which the parties are obliged to conclude the principal contract. If such period has not been defined in the preliminary contract, the principal contract shall be subject to conclusion within a year from the time of concluding the preliminary contract.
5. In instances when a party, which has concluded a preliminary contract, evades the conclusion of the principal contract, the provisions established for conclusion of contracts in obligatory procedure (Article 415(4)) shall apply.
6. The obligations provided for by a preliminary contract shall terminate if until the ending of the period in which the parties must conclude the principal contract it would not be concluded, and neither of the parties would send to the other party an offer to conclude this contract.
Article 400. Contract to Benefit of Third Person
1. A contract to the benefit of a third person shall be deemed to be a contract in which the parties have established that a debtor is obliged to make performance not to the creditor, but to a third person specified or not specified in the contract and having the right to demand performance of the obligation to its benefit from the debtor.
2. Unless otherwise provided by the legislation or a contract, from the time of the expression by the third person to the debtor of an intention to take advantage of his right under the contract, the parties may not dissolve or change the contract concluded by them without the consent of the third person.
3. The debtor in the contract shall have the right to raise against the demand of the third person objections which he could raise against the creditor.
4. When a third person waives a right granted to him under the contract, the creditor may take advantage of this right unless this is contrary to the legislation and to the contract.
Article 401. Interpretation of Contract
In the event of the interpretation of the conditions of a contract by a court the literal meaning of the words and expressions contained therein shall be taken into account. The literal meaning of the condition of a contract in the event of its ambiguity shall be determined by means of comparing with the other conditions and with the sense of the contract as a whole. If the rules contained in the first part of this Article do not enable to determine the content of the contract, the true common will of the parties must be elicited by taking into account the purpose of the contract. In so doing, all the respective circumstances, including negotiations preceding the contract, correspondence, practice being established in the mutual relations of the parties, and the subsequent conduct of the parties, shall be taken into account.
CHAPTER 28 Conclusion of Contract
Article 402. Basic Provisions on Conclusion of Contract 1. A contract shall be considered to be concluded when agreement regarding all the significant conditions of the contract has been reached in the form required in appropriate instances. Conditions concerning the subject of the contract, conditions which are named in the legislations as significant, necessary or obligatory for contracts of the particular type, and also all those conditions in relation to which an agreement must be reached according to the statement of one of the parties, shall be significant conditions.
2. A contract shall be concluded by means of sending an offer (proposal to conclude a contract) by one party and its acceptance (acceptance of the proposal) by the other party.
Article 403. Time of Conclusion of Contract
1. A contract shall be deemed to be concluded at the time of receipt of acceptance by the person who has sent an offer.
2. If in accordance with the legislation the transfer of property also is necessary in order to conclude a contract, the contract shall be considered to be concluded from the time of the transfer of the respective property (Article 225).
3. A contract subject to state registration shall be considered to be concluded from the time of the registration thereof, or, if the notarial certification and registration is necessary, from the time of registration of the contract, unless otherwise established by the legislative acts.
4. A contract concluded at the exchange shall be deemed concluded from the moment determined by the legislation regulating activities of such exchange or by the rules effective at the exchange.
Article 404. Form of Contract
1. A contract may be concluded in any form provided for in order to conclude transactions unless a determined form has been established by this Code and by other acts of legislation for contracts of the particular type.
If the legislation does not require the notarial form for the particular type of contracts, but the parties have agreed to conclude it in the notarial form, the contract shall be deemed to be concluded from the time of imparting the notarial form to it.
If the legislation does not require a written (simple or notarial) form for the particular type of contracts, but the parties have agreed to conclude it in the simple written form, the contract shall be deemed to be concluded from the time of imparting the notarial form to it.
2. A contract in a written form may be concluded by means of drawing up a text document, including a document in electronic form (electronic document), or by means of exchange of text documents, including documents in electronic form (including electronic documents) signed by the parties by hand or with the use of means of communication and other technical means, computer programs, information systems or information networks, if such a method of signing allows to reliably establish that the corresponding text document is signed by the parties to the contract (facsimile reproduction of a handwritten signature using mechanical or other copying, electronic digital signature or other analogue of the handwritten signature ensuring identification of the party to the contract), and does not contradict the legislation and agreement of the parties.
In the cases provided for by the legislative acts, only the methods of concluding a contract in a simple written form, determined by them, are allowed.
3. The written form of the contract shall be deemed to be complied with if the offer to conclude a contract by means of sending a text document, including a document in electronic form (electronic document as well) has been accepted in accordance with Article 408(3) of this Code.
Article 405. Offer 1. A proposal addressed to one or several specific persons which is sufficiently definite and expresses the intention of the person who has made the proposal to consider himself to have concluded a contract with the addressee who will accept the proposal shall be deemed to be an offer. An offer must contain the significant conditions of the contract. 2. An offer shall bind the person who sent it from the time of its receipt by the addressee. If notice of the revocation of an offer has been received earlier than or simultaneously with the offer itself, the offer shall be considered to be not received.
Article 406. Irrevocability of Offer An offer received by the addressee may not be revoked within the period established for its acceptance unless otherwise stipulated in the offer itself or does not arise from the essence of the proposal or situation in which it was made.
Article 407. Invitation to Make Offers
1. An advertisement and other proposals addressed to an indefinite group of persons shall be regarded as an invitation to make offers unless expressly specified otherwise in the proposal.
2. A proposal, from which the will of the person making the proposal is seen to conclude a contract on the conditions specified in the proposal with anyone who responds, and containing all the significant conditions of a contract, shall be deemed to be a public offer.
Article 408. Acceptance 1. The reply of a person to whom an offer has been addressed concerning the acceptance thereof shall be deemed to be an acceptance.
An acceptance must be full and unconditional.
2. Silence shall not be an acceptance unless it arises otherwise from a legislation or agreement between the parties.
3. The performance by a person who has received an offer, within the period established for its acceptance, of actions relating to the fulfillment of the conditions of the contract specified therein (shipment of goods, rendering of services, fulfillment of work, payment of respective amount etc.) shall be considered to be an acceptance unless otherwise provided by the legislation or specified in the offer.
Article 409. Revocation of Acceptance If notice of the revocation of an acceptance has been received by the person, by whom the offer was sent, earlier than or simultaneously with the acceptance itself, the acceptance shall be considered to be not received.
Article 410. Conclusion of Contract on Basis of Offer Determining Period for Acceptance When a period for acceptance is determined in an offer, a contract shall be considered to be concluded if the acceptance was received by a person who has sent the offer within the limits of the period specified therein.
Article 411. Conclusion of Contract on Basis of Offer Not Determining Period for Acceptance 1. When a written offer does not determine the period for acceptance, the contract shall be considered to be concluded if the acceptance was received by the person who has sent the offer before the end of the period established by the legislation, and if such a period has not been established, during the time normally necessary for this. 2. When an offer has been made orally without specifying the period for acceptance, the contract shall be considered to be concluded if the other party immediately declared its acceptance thereof.
Article 412. Acceptance Received Late 1. In the instances when a notification of acceptance sent in good time has been received late, the acceptance shall not be considered to be late if a party who has sent the offer would immediately inform the other party about the late receipt of the acceptance. 2. If a party who has sent an offer immediately informs the other party about the accepting of its acceptance which has been received late, the contract shall be considered to be concluded.
Article 413. Acceptance on Other Conditions A reply concerning consent to conclude a contract on conditions other than those proposed in the offer shall not be an acceptance. Such a reply shall be deemed to be a refusal to accept and, at the same time, a new offer.
Article 414. Place of Conclusion of Contract Unless the place of conclusion has been specified in the contract, a contract shall be deemed to be concluded at the place of residence of a citizen or location of the legal person which sent the offer.
Article 415. Conclusion of Contract in Obligatory Procedure 1. In instances when in accordance with this Code or other acts of legislation the conclusion of a contract for one of the parties to whom an offer (draft contract) is obligatory, this party must send to the other party a notification concerning acceptance, or rejection of acceptance, or acceptance of the offer (draft contract) on other conditions (protocol of disagreements to draft contract) within 30 days from the date of receipt of the offer. A party who has sent an offer and received from the party, for whom the conclusion of the contract is obligatory, a notification of its acceptance on other conditions (protocol of disagreements to draft contract), shall have the right to transfer disagreements, which have arisen when concluding the contract, for consideration of a court within 30 days from the date of receipt of such notification or the expiry of the period for acceptance. 2. In instances when in accordance with this Code or other legislation the conclusion of a contract is obligatory for the party who has sent an offer (draft contract) and a protocol of disagreements to the draft contract is sent to it within 30 days, this party shall be obliged within 30 days from the date of receipt of the protocol of disagreements to notify the other party about acceptance of the contract in the wording thereof or about rejection of the protocol of disagreements. In the event the protocol of disagreements is rejected, or non-receiving of notice concerning the results of the consideration thereof within the specified period, the party which sent the protocol of disagreements shall have the right to transfer the disagreements which arose when concluding the contract for the consideration of a court.
3. The rules concerning the periods, provided for by Clauses 1 and 2 of this Article, shall apply unless other periods have been established by the legislation, or have not been agreed by the parties. 4. If a party for which in accordance with this Code or other acts of legislation the conclusion of the contract is obligatory evades the conclusion thereof, the other party shall have the right to apply to a court with a demand to compel the contract to be concluded. The party which has unjustifiably evaded the conclusion of the contract must compensate the other party for losses caused by this.
Article 416. Precontractual Disputes In the instances of the transfer of disagreements, which arose when concluding a contract, for the consideration of a court on the basis of Article 415 of this Code or by agreement of the parties, the conditions of the contract with regard to which the parties had disagreements shall be determined in accordance with the decision of the court.
Article 417. Conclusion of Contract at Public Sale
1. A contract may, unless it arises otherwise from the essence thereof, be concluded by means of holding public sales. The contract shall be concluded with the person who has won the public sale.
2. The owner of the thing or the possessor of the property right or a specialized organization may act as the organizer of a public sale. A specialized organization shall operate on the ground of a contract with the owner of the thing or the possessor of the property right and shall act in their name or in its own name.
3. In the instances specified in this Code or in another acts of legislation, contracts concerning the sale of a thing or property right may be concluded only by means of holding public sales.
4. A public sale (tender) shall be held in the form of an auction or a competition. The person who has won the public sale at an auction shall be deemed the person who has proposed the highest price, and at a
competition, the person who in accordance with the opinion of a competition commission, previously appointed by the organizer of the public sale, proposed the best conditions.
5. An auction or competition for participation in which no request (application) has been submitted or a request (application) has been submitted by only one participant or only one participant appeared or no one has appeared, on in other instances established by legislative acts shall be deemed to be not effectuated.
When an auction for sale of property is declared to be not effectuated due to the fact that the request (application) for participation therein is submitted only by one participant or only one participant appeared to participate therein, the sale object is to be sold to that participant, upon his consent, at the initial price increased by five percent, unless otherwise established by the President of the Republic of Belarus.
When only one participant has submitted a request (application) for participation in a competition for sale of property or only one participant appeared to participate therein and his offer complies with the conditions of the competition, the sale of the competition object to that person is effectuated on the conditions offered by him, unless otherwise established by the President of the Republic of Belarus.
6. The rules provided for this Code shall apply to a public sale held by way of execution of the decision of a court unless otherwise provided by procedural legislation, legislation on economic insolvency (bankruptcy).
7. In the cases provided by the legislation, two or more persons are allowed to participate in the auction on the part of one participant.
Article 418. Organization and Procedure for Holding Public Sale 1. Auctions and competitions may be open and closed. Any person may participate in an open auction or open competition. Only persons specially invited for this purpose shall participate in a closed auction or closed competition. 2. Unless otherwise provided by the legislation, a notice concerning the holding of a public sale is subject to obligatory publication in printed mass media in the order established by the legislation and must be made by the organizer not less than thirty days before holding it, and in case of the repeated sale held in accordance with the acts of legislation, – not less than 10 days before therr conduct. The information about announced public and the object of auction (competition) is to be additional placed in the global computer network Internet under the procedure established by legislative acts. The notice must in any event contain information concerning the time, place, and form of the public sale, the subject thereof and the procedure for holding it, including the formalization of participation in the public sale, determination of the person who wins the public sale, and also information concerning the starting price. If the subject of the public sale is only the right to conclude a contract, the period granted for this must be specified in the notice of the forthcoming public sale. 3. Unless otherwise provided in a legislation or in the notice on holding the public sale, the organizer of an open public sale who has given notice shall have the right to refuse to hold an auction at any time, but not later than three days before the date of its holding, and for a competition, not later than thirty days before holding the competition. In instances when the organizer of an open public sale refuses to conduct it in violation of the specified periods, he shall be obliged to compensate participants for real damage incurred. The organizer of a closed auction or closed competition shall be obliged to compensate the invited participants for real damage irrespective of when the refusal to hold the public sale followed the sending of the notice. 4. The participants of a public sale shall make a deposit in the amount, within the periods, and in accordance with the procedure specified in the notice on holding the public sale, in the account of
performance of the obligations under the contract, which can be concluded at the public sale. Within five working days from the day of holding the auction (competition), the deposit shall be returned to participant who has not won the public sale and also in other instances provided by the legislation. Concerning the participant who has won the public sale or persons indicated in part two and three of clause 5 of Article 417 of this Code, the sum of the deposit made is to be accounted against fulfillment of obligations on the contract to be concluded at the public sale. 5. The participant who has won the public sale or persons indicated in part two and three of clause 5 of Article 417 of this Code and the organizer of the public sale shall sign, at the day of holding the auction or competition, a protocol which shall have the force of a contract. If, according to the conditions of the public sale, only the right to conclude a contract is to be won, such a contract shall be signed by the parties not later than twenty days or another deadline indicated in the notice after the completion of the public sale and drawing up of the protocol, unless otherwise provided by legislative acts. If the person who won the public sale or persons indicated in part two and three of clause 5 of Article 417 of this Code refuse or evade the signing of the protocol and/or the contract to be drawn up according to results of the auction (competition) or reimbursement of expenses regarding the organization and holding of the auction) competition, and in other instances provided by the legislation, the deposit made by them is not to be returned. The organizer of a public sale who has evaded the signing of the protocol, is obliged to return the deposit in double amount, and also to compensate the person who won the public sale or persons indicated in part two and three of clause 5 of Article 417 of this Code for losses caused by participation in the public sale in the part exceeding the amount of the deposit. If one of the parties evades the conclusion of the contract, the other party is entitled to apply to a court with a demand to enforce the conclusion of the contract, and also for compensation of losses caused by evading the conclusion thereof. 6. The legislative acts may provide for another order of organization and holding tenders. The rules provided by this Article shall apply to the auctions held by the National Bank of the Republic of Belarus for the purpose of regulation of the current liquidity of banks, unless otherwise provided by the legislation.
Article 419. Consequences of Violation of Rules for Holding Public Sale
1. A public sale held in violation of the rules established by the legislation may be deemed by a court to be invalid upon the suit of an interested person.
2. The deeming of a public sale to be invalid shall entail the invalidity of the contract concluded with the person who won the public sale.
CHAPTER 29 Change and Dissolution of Contract
Article 420. Grounds for Change and Dissolution of Contract
1. Change and dissolution of a contract shall be possible by agreement of the parties unless otherwise provided by this Code, by other acts of legislation, or by the contract.
2. Upon the demand of one of the parties a contract may be changed or dissolved by decision of a court only:
1) in the event of a significant violation of the contract by the other party;
2) in other instances provided for by this Code, by other acts of legislation, or by the contract. A violation of a contract by one of the parties which entails for the other party such damage that this party is deprived in significant degree of that which it had the right to count on when concluding the contract shall be deemed to be significant. 3. In the event of a unilateral refusal to perform a contract wholly or partially, when such refusal is permitted by the legislation or by agreement of the parties, the contract shall be considered to be dissolved or changed respectively.
Article 421. Change and Dissolution of Contract in Connection with Significant Change of Circumstances 1. A significant change of circumstances from which the parties proceeded when concluding a contract shall be a grounds for the change or dissolution thereof unless otherwise provided by the contract or it arises from the essence thereof. A change of circumstances shall be deemed to be significant when they have changed such that if the parties could reasonably foresee this, the contract would not have been concluded at all by them or it would have been concluded on significantly differing conditions. 2. If the parties have not reached agreement concerning the bringing of the contract in conformity with the significantly changed circumstances or the dissolution thereof, the contract may be dissolved, and on the grounds provided for by Clause 4 of this Article, changed by a court at the demand of the interested party when the following conditions simultaneously exist: 1) at the time of concluding the contract the parties proceeded from the fact that such a change of circumstances would not occur; 2) the change of circumstances has been caused by reasons which the interested party could not overcome after they arose with that degree of concern and care which are required for this party by the character of the contract and the conditions of civil turnover; 3) the performance of the contract without a change of its conditions would so violate the relation of property interests of the parties, corresponding to the contract, and entail for the interested party such damage that it would be deprived to a significant degree of that which it had the right to count on when concluding the contract; 4) it does not arise from the essence of the contract that the risk of the change of circumstances is borne by the interested party.
3. In the event of the dissolution of a contract as a consequence of significant change of circumstances the court, upon the demand of any of the parties, shall determine the consequences of the dissolution of the contract by proceeding from the need for a just distribution of the expenses, incurred by the parties in connection with the performance of this contract, between these parties.
4. The change of a contract in connection with a significant change of circumstances shall be permitted by decision of a court in exceptional instances when dissolution of the contract is contrary to the public interests or entails damage for the parties which significantly exceeds the expenditures needed to perform the contract on the conditions changed by the court.
Article 422. Procedure for Change of and Dissolution of Contract l. An agreement concerning change of or dissolution of a contract shall be concluded in the same form as the contract unless it arises otherwise from the legislation or the contract. This Code, other laws and acts of the President of the Republic of Belarus may establish another order of dissolution of a contract.
2. A demand concerning change of or dissolution of a contract may be submitted by a party in the court only after receipt of a refusal of the other party to the proposal to change or dissolve the contract or after non-receiving a reply within the period specified in the proposal or established by the legislation or by the contract, and if this period is not specified, within a thirty-day period.
Article 423. Consequences of Change of and Dissolution of Contract 1. In the event of dissolution of the contract the obligations of the parties shall terminate. 2. In the event of change of a contract, the obligations of the parties shall be preserved in the changed form. 3. In the event of change of or dissolution of a contract, the obligations shall be considered to be changed or terminated from the time of the conclusion of an agreement of the parties concerning the change of or dissolution of the contract unless it follows otherwise from the agreement or the character of the change of the contract, and in the event of change of or dissolution of a contract in a judicial proceeding, from the time of coming the decision of the court on change of or dissolution of the contract into legal force. 4. The parties shall not have the right to demand the return of that which was performed by them under the obligation before the time of change or dissolution of the contract, unless otherwise established by the legislation or by the agreement of the parties. If a significant violation of the contract by one of the parties was the ground for change of or dissolution of a contract, the other party shall have the right to demand compensation of losses caused by change of or dissolution of the contract.
SECTION IV INDIVIDUAL TYPES OF OBLIGATION
CHAPTER 30 Purchase-Sale
§ 1. General Provisions on Purchase-Sale
Article 424. Contract of Purchase-Sale
1. Under a contract of purchase-sale one party (seller) shall undertake to transfer a property (thing, good) to the ownership, economic management or operative administration (hereinafter, for the purposes of this Section, referred as transfer to the ownership, unless it arises otherwise from the essence of the obligation or from the status of the party under the obligation) of the other party (buyer), and the buyer shall undertake to accept this property and to pay for it the determined monetary amount (price).
2. The provisions provided for by the present paragraph shall apply to the sale of securities and currency valuables, unless special rules have been established for the purchase-sale thereof by the legislation.
3. In the instances provided for by this Code or other acts of legislation, the peculiarities of the purchase and sale of goods of individual types shall be determined by the legislation.
4. The provisions provided for by the present paragraph shall apply to the sale of property rights unless it arises otherwise from the content or character of these rights. 5. Unless otherwise provided by rules of this Code and other acts of legislation concerning these types of contracts, the provisions provided for by this paragraph shall apply to individual types of contract of purchase-sale (retail purchase-sale, delivery of goods, delivery of goods for state needs, agricultural procurement contract, electric power supply, sale of immovable property, sale of enterprise).
Article 425. Condition of Contract on Good 1. Any things may be a good under a contract of purchase-sale in compliance with the rules provided for by Article 129 of this Code. 2. A contract may be concluded for the purchase-sale of a good which the seller has in his disposal at the time of concluding the contract, and also a good which will be created or acquired by the seller in the future, unless otherwise established by the legislation or unless it so arises from the character of the good. 3. The condition of a contract of purchase-sale concerning a good shall be considered to be agreed if the contract enables to determine the name and quantity of the good.
Article 426. Duties of Seller Relating to Transfer of Good
1. The seller shall be obliged to transfer to the buyer the good provided for by the contract of purchase- sale.
2. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of purchase-sale, the seller shall be obliged simultaneously with the transfer of the thing to transfer to the buyer the appurtenances thereto, as well as the documents relating thereto (technical passport, certificate of quality, operating instructions etc.) provided for by the legislation or by the contract.
Article 427. Period for Performance of Duty to Transfer Good 1. The period for the performance by the seller of the duty to transfer the good to the buyer shall be determined by the contract of purchase-sale, and if the contract does not enable to determine this period, it shall be determined in accordance with the rules provided for by Article 295 of this Code. 2. A contract of purchase-sale shall be deemed to be concluded with a condition of the performance thereof within a strictly determined period if it clearly arises from the contract that in the event of a violation of the period for the performance thereof the buyer loses interest in the contract. The seller shall have the right to perform such contract before the ensuing or after the expiry of the period determined therein only with the consent of the buyer.
Article 428. Time of Performance of Duty of Seller to Transfer Good 1. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of purchase-sale, the duty of the seller to transfer the good to the buyer shall be considered to be performed at the time of: 1) handing over the good to the buyer or person specified by him if the duty of the seller relating to the delivery of the good has been provided for by the contract; 2) placing the good at the disposition of the buyer if the good must be transferred to the buyer or person specified by him at the location of the good. A good shall be considered to be placed at the disposition of the buyer when within the period provided for by the contract the good is ready for transfer in the proper place and the buyer is informed, in accordance with the conditions of the contract, about the readiness of the good for transfer. A good shall not be deemed to be ready for transfer if it is not identified for the purposes of the contract by means of marking or in other form. 2. In the instances when the duty of the seller relating to delivery of a good or transfer of a good at its location to the buyer does not arise from a contract of purchase-sale, the duty of the seller to transfer the good to the buyer shall be considered to be performed at the time of handing over the good to the carrier or communications organization for delivery to the buyer, unless otherwise provided by the contract.
Article 429. Transfer of Risk of Accidental Perishing of Good
1. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of purchase-sale, the risk of accidental perishing or accidental damage of a good shall pass to the buyer from the time when in accordance with the legislation or the contract the seller is considered to have performed his duty relating to transfer of the good to the buyer.
2. The risk of accidental perishing or accidental damage of a good sold while en route shall pass to the buyer from the time of the conclusion of the contract of purchase-sale unless otherwise provided by such contract. The condition of the contract that the risk of accidental perishing or accidental damage of the good passes to the buyer from the time of handing over the good to the first carrier may, at the demand of the buyer, be deemed by a court to be invalid if at the time of concluding the contract the seller knew or should have known that the good has been lost or damaged and have not informed the buyer about this loss or damage.
Article 430. Duty of Seller to Transfer Good Free of Rights of Third Persons 1. The seller shall be obliged to transfer a good to the buyer free from any rights of third persons, except for the instance when the buyer has agreed to accept the good encumbered by the rights of third persons. The failure of the seller to perform this duty shall give the buyer the right to demand a reduction of the price of the good or dissolution of the contract of purchase-sale unless it is proved that the buyer knew or should have known about the rights of third persons to this good. 2. The rules provided for by Clause 1 of this Article shall apply respectively also when with respect to the good at the time of its transfer to the buyer there are claims of third persons, which were known to the seller, if these claims subsequently were deemed to be lawful in accordance with the established procedure.
Article 431. Liability of Seller in Event of Seizure of Good from Buyer 1. In the event of the seizure of the good from the buyer by third persons on grounds which arose before the performance of the contract of purchase-sale, the seller shall be obliged to compensate the buyer for losses incurred by him except for the instance when the buyer knew or should have known about the existence of these grounds. 2. An agreement of the parties concerning relieving the seller from liability in the event a property acquired is demanded and obtained from the buyer by third persons or a limitation of such liability shall be invalid.
Article 432. Duties of Buyer and Seller in Event of Bringing of Suit Concerning Seizure of Good If a third person on grounds which arose before performance of the contract of purchase-sale brings suit against the buyer concerning seizure of the good, the buyer shall be obliged to involve the seller in the case, and the seller shall be obliged to appear in this case on the side of the buyer. The failure of the buyer to involve the seller in the case shall relieve the seller from liability to the buyer, if the seller would prove that, by participation in the case, he could avert the seizure of the good from the buyer. The seller involved by the buyer in a case but not taken part therein shall be deprived of the right to prove the incorrectness of the conducting of the case by the buyer.
Article 433. Consequences of Refusal of Seller to Transfer Good
1. If the seller refuses to transfer the good sold to the buyer, the buyer shall have the right to refuse to perform the contract of purchase-sale.
2. In the event of the refusal of the seller to transfer an individually-specified thing, the buyer shall have the right to submit the demand to the seller provided for by Article 369 of this Code.
Article 434. Consequences of Failure to Fulfill Duty to Transfer Appurtenances and Documents Relating to Good If the seller does not transfer or refuses to transfer to the buyer appurtenances or documents relating to the good which he should transfer in accordance with the legislation or the contract of purchase-sale (Article 426(2)), the buyer shall have the right to designate a reasonable period for the seller to transfer thereof. When appurtenances or documents relating to a good have not been transferred by the seller within the specified period, the buyer shall have the right to reject the good unless otherwise provided by the contract.
Article 435. Quantity of Good 1. The quantity of a good subject to transfer to a buyer shall be provided for by the contract of purchase- sale in respective units of measurement or in monetary expression. The condition concerning the quantity of a good may be agreed by means of establishing, in the contract, the procedure for determining it. 2. If the contract of purchase-sale does not enable to determine the quantity of the good subject to transfer, the contract shall not be considered to be concluded.
Article 436. Consequences of Violation of Condition Concerning Quantity of Good 1. If the seller, in violation of the contract of purchase-sale, has transferred to the buyer a lesser quantity of the good than that has been determined by the contract, the buyer shall have the right, unless otherwise provided by the contract, either to demand to transfer the short quantity of the good, or to reject the good transferred and refuse to pay for this good, and if the good has been paid for, to demand the return of the monetary amount paid. 2. If the seller has transferred to the buyer a good in a quantity exceeding that specified in the contract of purchase-sale, the buyer shall be obliged to notify the seller thereof in accordance with the procedure provided for by Article 453(1) of this Code. When within a reasonable period after receipt of the notification of the buyer the seller does not dispose of the respective part of the good, the buyer shall have the right, unless otherwise provided by the contract, to accept the whole quantity of good. In the event of the acceptance of the good by the buyer in a quantity exceeding that specified in the contract of purchase-sale (Clause 2 of this Article), the good additionally accepted shall be paid for at the price determined for the good accepted in accordance with the contract unless another price has been determined by agreement of the parties.
Article 437. Assortment of Goods
1. If under the contract of purchase-sale goods are subject to transfer in a specified relation with regard to types, models, dimensions, colours, or other indicia (assortment), the seller shall be obliged to transfer the goods to the buyer in the assortment agreed by the parties.
2. If the assortment is not determined in a contract of purchase-sale, and the procedure for the determination thereof has not been established in the contract but it arises from the essence of the obligation that the goods must be transferred to the buyer in an assortment, the seller shall have the right
to transfer the goods to the buyer in an assortment by proceeding from the requirements of the buyer which were known to the seller at the time of conclusion of the contract, or to refuse to perform the contract.
Article 438. Consequences of Violation of Condition on Assortment of Goods 1. In the event of the transfer by the seller of goods provided for by the contract of purchase-sale in an assortment which does not correspond to the contract, the buyer shall have the right to refuse to accept and to pay for these goods, and if these goods have been paid for, to demand the return of the monetary amount paid. 2. If the seller has transferred to the buyer, together with goods, the assortment of which corresponds to the contract of purchase-sale, goods in violation of the conditions concerning the assortment, the purchase shall have the right, at own discretion, to: 1) accept the goods corresponding to the conditions concerning the assortment and reject the other goods; 2) reject all of the goods transferred; 3) demand the replacement of the goods, which do not correspond to the condition concerning the assortment, with goods in the assortment provided for by the contract; 4) accept all the goods transferred.
3. In the event of the rejection of goods, the assortment of which does not correspond to the condition of the contract of purchase-sale, or of submission of demand concerning replacement of the goods which do not correspond to the condition concerning the assortment, the buyer shall have the right also to refuse to pay for these goods, and if they have been paid for, to demand the return of the monetary amount paid.
4. Goods which do not correspond to the condition of the contract of purchase-sale concerning assortment shall be considered to be accepted if the buyer within a reasonable period after the receipt thereof does not notify the seller concerning rejection of the goods.
5. If the buyer has not rejected goods, the assortment of which does not correspond to the contract of purchase-sale, he shall be obliged to pay for them at the price agreed with the seller. When necessary measures have not been taken by the seller to agree the price within a reasonable period, the buyer shall pay for the goods at the price which at the time of concluding the contract under comparable circumstances were commonly recovered for similar goods.
6. The rules of this Article shall apply unless otherwise provided by the contract.
Article 439. Quality of Good 1. The seller shall be obliged to transfer to the buyer a good, the quality of which corresponds to the contract of purchase-sale. 2. If there are no conditions concerning the quality of a good in a contract of purchase-sale, the seller shall be obliged to transfer to the buyer a good fit for the purposes for which a good of such nature is usually used. If the seller, when concluding the contract, was informed by the buyer about the specific purposes of the acquisition of the good, the seller shall be obliged to transfer to the buyer a good fit for use in accordance with these purposes.
3. In the event of the sale of a good by sample and/or description, the seller shall be obliged to transfer to the buyer a good which corresponds to the sample and/or description.
4. If obligatory requirements for the quality of a good being sold have been provided in accordance with the procedure established by the legislation, then the seller, carrying out entrepreneurial activity, shall be obliged to transfer a good to the buyer, which corresponds to these obligatory requirements. By the agreement between the seller and the buyer a good may be transferred which corresponds to higher quality requirements in comparison with the obligatory requirements, established in accordance with the procedure provided for by the legislation.
Article 440. Guarantee of Quality of Good 1. A good which a seller is obliged to transfer to a buyer must correspond to the requirements provided for by Article 439 of this Code at the time of the transfer to the buyer unless another time of determining the conformity of the good to these requirements has been provided for by the contract of purchase-sale, and within the limits of a reasonable period must be fit for the purposes for which the goods of such nature are usually used. 2. When the legislation or a contract of purchase-sale stipulate that the seller shall provide a guarantee of the quality of a good , the seller is obliged to transfer to the buyer a good which must correspond to the requirements provided for by Article 439 of this Code during a calendar period established in days, months, years, or lifelength established in hours, operation cycles, kilometres of distance or similar parameters (guarantee period). 3. A guarantee of the quality of a good also shall extend to all parts comprising it (components) unless otherwise provided by the contract of purchase-sale.
Article 441. Calculation of Guarantee Period
1. A guarantee period shall begin to run from the time of the transfer of the good to the buyer (Article 428) unless otherwise provided by the legislation or the contract of purchase-sale.
2. If a buyer is deprived of the possibility to use the good, with respect to which a guarantee period has been established by the contract, under circumstances within the control of the seller, the guarantee period shall not run until the elimination of the respective circumstances by the seller. Unless otherwise provided by the contract, a guarantee period shall be extended for the time during which the good could not be used because of defects revealed therein, on condition of the notification of the seller about the defects of the good in accordance with the procedure established by Article 453 of this Code. 3. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of purchase-sale, a guarantee period for components shall be considered to be equal to the guarantee period for the principal good and shall begin to run simultaneously with the guarantee period for the principal good. 4. For a good (component) transferred by the seller in place of a good (component) in which, during the guarantee period, defects were revealed (Article 446), a guarantee period shall be established of the same duration as for replaced good (component), unless otherwise provided by the contract of purchase-sale.
Article 442. Period of Fitness of Good 1. The legislation or other mandatory rules may determine a period upon the expiry of which goods shall be considered to be unfit for use for intended purpose (period of fitness). 2. Goods for which a period of fitness has been established, shall be transferred by the seller to the buyer so that it may be used for its intended purpose before the expiry of the period of fitness.
Article 443. Calculation of Period of Fitness of Good
The period of fitness of a good shall be determined by the period of time, calculated from the date of its manufacture, during which the good is fit for use, or by the date, until which the good is fit for use.
Article 444. Verification of Quality of Good 1. The verification of the quality of a good may be provided for by the legislation, or by the contract of purchase-sale. The procedure for verification of the quality of goods shall be established by the legislation, or by the contract. If the procedure for verification has been established by the legislation, the procedure for verification of the quality of goods determined by the contract must correspond to these requirements.
2. If the procedure for the verification of the quality of a good is not established in accordance with Clause 1 of this Article, the quality of a good shall be verified in accordance with commonly used conditions for the verification of a good, which is subject to transfer under a contract of purchase-sale.
3. If the duty of the seller to verify the quality of a good transferred to the buyer (test, analysis, inspection etc.) has been provided for by the legislation, or by the contract of purchase-sale, the seller must provide to the buyer the evidence of effectuation of verification of quality of the good. 4. The procedure and other conditions for verification of quality of a good, to be effectuated both by the seller and by the buyer, must be the same.
Article 445. Consequences of Transfer of Good of Improper Quality 1. If the defects of a good were not stipulated by the seller, the buyer to whom the good of improper quality was transferred shall have the right, at own discretion, to demand from the seller: 1) commensurate reduction of the purchase price; 2) elimination of the defects of the good within a reasonable period without compensation; 3) compensation of the buyer’s expenses for elimination of defects of the good. 2. In the event of significant violation of the requirements for the quality of a good (reveal of unrepairable defects, defects which cannot be eliminated without disproportionate expenses or expenditures of time or are elicited repeatedly, or appear anew after their elimination, and other similar defects), the buyer shall have the right, at own discretion, to: 1) refuse to perform the contract of purchase-sale and to demand the return of the monetary amount paid for the good; 2) demand the replacement of the good of improper quality by a good corresponding to the contract. 3. Demands concerning the elimination of defects or replacement of a good specified in Clauses 1 and 2 of this Article may be submitted by the buyer unless it arises otherwise from the character of the good or the essence of the obligation. 4. In the event of the improper quality of part of the goods which are part of a set (Article 449), the buyer shall have the right to exercise, with respect to this part of the goods, the rights provided for by Clauses 1 and 2 of this Article. 5. The rules provided for by this Article shall apply unless otherwise established by this Code or another acts of legislation.
Article 446. Defects of Good for Which Seller is Liable
1. The seller shall be liable for the defects of a good if the buyer would prove that the defects of the good arose before the transfer thereof to the buyer or for reasons which arose before this time.
2. With respect to a good for which a guarantee of quality has been granted by the seller, the seller shall be liable for defects of the good, unless the seller would prove that the defects of the good arose after the transfer thereof to the buyer as a consequence of a violation, by the buyer, of the rules for the use of the good or the storage thereof, or the actions of third persons, or force majeure.
Article 447. Periods for Revealing Defects in Transferred Good 1. Unless otherwise established by the legislation or by a contract of purchase-sale, the buyer shall have the right to submit demands connected with the defects of a good, on condition that they were revealed within the periods established by this Article. 2. If a guarantee period or a period of fitness has not been established for a good, demands connected with defects of a good may be presented by the buyer on condition that the defects in the good sold were revealed within a reasonable period, but within the limit of two years from the date of the transfer of the good to the buyer, or a longer period, when such period was established by the legislation or by a contract of purchase-sale. The period for eliciting the defects of a good subject to carriage or to dispatch by post shall be calculated from the date of delivery of the good at the place of its destination. 3. If a guarantee period has been established for a good, the buyer shall have the right to submit demands connected with defects of the good in the event the defects are revealed during the guarantee period. When a guarantee period has been established in a contract of purchase-sale for components, which is less in duration than that for the principal good, the buyer shall have the right to submit demands connected with the defects of the components, if they are revealed during the guarantee period for the principal good. If a guarantee period has been established in a contract for components which is of lesser duration than that for the principal good, the buyer shall have the right to submit demands connected with defects of the components, if they are revealed during the guarantee period for it, irrespective of the expiry of the guarantee period for the principal good.
4. With respect to a good for which a period of fitness has been established, the buyer shall have the right to submit demands connected with defects of the good if they were revealed within the period of fitness of the good.
5. In instances when the guarantee period, provided for by a contract, is less than two years, and the defects of a good are revealed by the buyer after the expiry of the guarantee period but within the limit of two years from the day of transfer of the good to the buyer, the seller shall bear liability if the buyer would prove that the defects of the good arose before the transfer of the good to the buyer or for reasons which arose before this time.
Article 448. Completeness of Good 1. The seller shall be obliged to transfer to the buyer a good which corresponds to the conditions of the contract of purchase-sale concerning completeness. 2. When the completeness of a good has not been determined by a contract of purchase-sale, the seller shall be obliged to transfer to the buyer a good, the completeness of which is determined by commonly presented requirements.
Article 449. Complete Set of Goods
1. If the duty of the seller to transfer to the buyer a determined set of goods in a complete set (complete set of goods) has been provided for by a contract of purchase-sale, the obligation shall be considered to be performed from the time of the transfer of all goods included in the complete set.
2. Unless otherwise provided for by the contract of purchase-sale and does not arise from the essence of the obligation, the seller shall be obliged to transfer to the buyer simultaneously all goods which comprise the complete set.
Article 450. Consequences of Transfer of Incomplete Good 1. In the event of the transfer of an incomplete good (Article 448) the buyer shall have the right, at own discretion, to demand from the seller: 1) commensurate reduction of the purchase price; 2) making the good complete within a reasonable period. 2. If the seller within a reasonable period has not fulfilled the demand of the buyer to make the good complete, the buyer shall have the right, at own discretion, to: 1) demand replacement of the incomplete good by a complete one; 2) refuse to perform the contract of purchase-sale and demand the return of the monetary amount paid. 3. The consequences provided for by Clauses 1 and 2 of this Article shall also apply in the event of a violation by the seller of the duty to transfer a complete set of goods (Article 449) to the buyer unless otherwise provided by the contract of purchase-sale and does not arise from the essence of the obligation.
Article 451. Packaging and Packing 1. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of purchase-sale and does not arise from the essence of the obligation, the seller shall be obliged to transfer the good to the buyer in packaging and/or packing, except for a good which by its character does not require packaging and/or packing. 2. Unless the requirements for packaging and packing have been determined by the contract of purchase- sale, the good must be packaged and/or packed by the means usual for such good, and in the absence of such, by means ensuring the preservation of goods of such nature under the usual conditions for storage and transportation. 3. If in accordance with the procedure, established by the legislation, obligatory requirements for packaging and/or packing have been provided for, the seller, who effectuates entrepreneurial activity, shall be obliged to transfer to the buyer the good in packaging and/or packing, which corresponds to these obligatory requirements.
Article 452. Consequences of Transfer of Good Without Packaging and/or Packing or in Improper Packaging and/or Packing
1. In instances when a good which is subject to packaging and/or packing is transferred to the buyer without packaging and/or packing or in improper packaging and/or packing, the buyer shall have the right to demand of the seller to package and/or to pack the good or to replace the improper packaging and/or packing unless it arises otherwise from the essence of the obligation or the character of the good.
2. In the instances provided for in Clause 1 of this Article, the buyer shall have the right instead of submission of demands to the seller which are specified in this Clause to submit to him demands arising from the transfer of a good of improper quality (Article 445).
Article 453. Notification of Seller About Improper Performance of Contract of Purchase-Sale 1. The buyer shall be obliged to notify the seller about a violation of the conditions of the contract of purchase-sale concerning quantity, assortment, quality, completeness, packaging and/or packing of the
good within the period provided for by the legislation, or the contract, and if such period is not established, within a reasonable period after such violation of the respective condition of the contract should have been revealed, taking into consideration the character and intended purpose of the good. 2. In the event of the failure to fulfill the rules provided for by Clause 1 of this Article, the seller shall have the right to refuse, wholly or partially, to satisfy the demands of the buyer concerning the transfer to him of the short quantity of the good, replacement of the good which does not correspond to the conditions of the contract of purchase-sale concerning quality or assortment, elimination of the defects of a good, to make the good complete or to replace a good which is not complete with a complete (one), the packaging and/or packing of a good or the replacement of improper packaging and/or packing of a good, if the seller would prove that the failure to fulfill these rules by the buyer has entailed the impossibility of satisfying his demands or entails for the seller incommensurate expenses in comparison with those which he would bear if he had been notified in good time about the violation of the contract. 3. If the seller knew or should have known that the goods transferred to the buyer do not correspond to the conditions of the contract of purchase-sale, he shall not have the right to refer to the provisions provided for by Clauses 1 and 1 of this Article.
Article 454. Duty of Buyer to Accept Good
1. The buyer shall be obliged to accept a good transferred to him except for instances when he has the right to demand the replacement of the good or to refuse performance of the contract of purchase-sale. 2. Unless otherwise provided by the legislation, or by the contract of purchase-sale, the buyer shall be obliged to perform actions which, in accordance with requirements usually presented, are necessary on his part in order to ensure the transfer and receipt of the respective good. 3. In instances when the buyer, in violation of the legislation or contract of purchase-sale, does not accept a good or refuses to accept it, the seller shall have the right to demand that the buyer accept the good or to refuse performance of the contract.
Article 455. Price of Good l. The buyer shall be obliged to pay for a good at the price provided for by the contract of purchase-sale or, if it is not provided for by the contract and may not be determined by proceeding from the conditions thereof, at the price determined in accordance with Article 394(3) of this Code, and also to perform, at own expense, actions which in accordance with the legislation, the contract, or requirements usually presented, are necessary in order to effectuate payment.
2. When the price has been established depending on the weight of the good, it shall be determined according to net weight unless otherwise provided by the contract of purchase-sale. 3. If the contract of purchase-sale provides that the price of a good is subject to change depending upon indicators which condition the price of the good (cost of production, expenditures etc.) but does not determine the means for revision of the price, the price shall be determined by proceeding from the relation of these indicators at the time of conclusion of the contract and at the time of transfer of the good. In the event of delay by the seller of performance of the duty to transfer the good, the price shall be determined by proceeding from the relation of these indicators at the time of conclusion of the contract and at the time of transfer of the good provided for by the contract, and if it is not provided for by the contract, at the time determined in accordance with Article 295 of this Code. The rules provided for by this Clause shall apply unless established other-.wise by this Code, another acts of legislation or the contract and does not arise from the essence of the obligation.
Article 456. Payment for Good
l. The buyer shall be obliged to pay for the good directly before or after the transfer of the good to him by the seller unless otherwise provided by this Code, another acts of legislation or by the contract of purchase-sale and does not arise from the essence of the obligation.
2. Unless payment by installment for a good has been provided by the contract of purchase-sale, the buyer shall be obliged to pay to the seller the price of the transferred good in full.
3. If the buyer does not pay in timely way for the good transferred in accordance with the contract of purchase-sale, the seller shall have the right to demand payment for the good and the payment of interest in accordance with Article 366 of this Code.
4. If the buyer, in violation of the contract of purchase-sale, refuses to accept and to pay for the good, the seller shall have the right, at own discretion, to demand payment for the good or to refuse performance of the contract. 5. In instances when the seller, in accordance with the contract of purchase-sale, is obliged to transfer to the buyer not only goods which are not paid for by the buyer, but also other goods, the seller shall have the right to suspend the transfer of these goods until the full payment for all goods previously transferred, unless otherwise provided by the legislation or contract.
Article 457. Preliminary Payment for Good
1. In instances when the duty of the buyer to pay for a good wholly or partially before the transfer of the good by the seller (preliminary payment) has been provided for by the contract of purchase-sale, the buyer must make payment within the period provided for by the contract, and if such period has not been provided by the contract, within the period determined in accordance with Article 295 of this Code.
2. In the event of the failure of the buyer to perform the duty to pay in advance for the good, the rules provided for by Article 309 of this Code shall apply.
3. In an instance when a seller who has received the amount of preliminary payment does not perform the duty to transfer the good within the established period (Article 427), the buyer shall have the right to demand the transfer of the good paid for or the return of the amount of preliminary payment for the good not transferred by the seller. 4. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of purchase-sale, in an instance when the seller does not perform the duty relating to the transfer of the good paid for in advance, the amount of preliminary payment shall be subject to the payment of interest in accordance with Article 366 of this Code from the day when, under the contract, the transfer of the good should have been made, up to the day of the transfer of the good to the buyer or the return to him of the amount paid in advance by him. The duty of the seller to pay interest on the amount of the preliminary payment, commencing from the date of receipt of this amount from the buyer, may be provided for by the contract.
Article 458. Payment for Good Sold on Credit l. In an instance when payment for a good over a determined time after the transfer thereof to the buyer (sale of good on credit) has been provided for by the contract of purchase-sale, unless otherwise provided by the legislative acts, the buyer must make payment within the period provided for by the contract, and if such period is not provided for by the contract or legislation, within the period determined in accordance with Article 295 of this Code.
2. In the event of the failure of the seller to perform the duty to transfer the good, the rules provided for by Article 309 of this Code shall apply.
3. In an instance when the buyer, which received the good, does not perform the duty with regard to payment within the period established by the contract of purchase-sale, the seller shall have the right to demand payment of the good transferred or return of the goods not paid for.
4. Unless otherwise provided by this Code or by the contract of purchase-sale, in an instance when the buyer does not perform the duty with regard to payment for the good transferred within the period established by the contract, interest shall be subject to payment on the delayed amount in accordance with Article 366 of this Code from the day when under the contract the good should have been paid for up to the day of payment for the good by the buyer. The duty of the buyer to pay interest on the amount corresponding to the price of the good, commencing from the day of transfer of the good by the seller, may be provided for by the contract. 5. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of purchase-sale, from the time of transfer of the good to the buyer and up to the payment for it a good sold on credit shall be deemed to be under pledge to the seller in order to secure performance by the buyer of its duty with regard to payment for the good.
Article 459. Payment for Good by Installment 1. Payment for a good by installment may be provided for by a contract concerning the sale of a good on credit. A contract concerning the sale of a good on credit with a condition concerning installment payment shall be considered to be concluded if, together with the other significant conditions of the contract of purchase-sale, the price of the good and the procedure, periods, and amounts of payments have been specified.
2. When a buyer does not make a regular payment within the period established by the contract for a good sold by installment and transferred to him, the seller shall have the right to refuse performance of the contract and to demand the return of the good sold, except for instances when the amount of payments received from the buyer exceeds half of the price of the good.
3. The rules provided for by Article 458 (2), (4) and (5) of this Code shall apply to a contract concerning the sale of a good on credit with a condition concerning installment payment.
Article 460. Insurance of Good The duty of the seller or buyer to insure a good may be provided for by the contract of purchase-sale. In an instance when a party obliged to insure a good does not effectuate insurance in accordance with the conditions of the contract, the other party shall have the right to insure the good and demand from the obliged party compensation of expenses for the insurance or to refuse performance of the contract.
Article 461. Preservation of Right of Ownership for Seller In instances when it is provided by a contract of purchase-sale that the right of ownership in a good transferred to the buyer shall be preserved for the seller until payment for the good or the ensuing of other circumstances, the buyer shall not have the right before transfer of the right of ownership to him to alienate the good or otherwise dispose of it unless otherwise provided by the legislation or contract or does not arise from the intended purpose and properties of the good. In instances when within the period provided for by the contract the transferred good is not paid for and other circumstances do not ensue under which the right of ownership passes to the buyer, the seller shall have the right to demand from the buyer to return the good to him unless otherwise provided by the contract.
§ 2. Retail Purchase-Sale
Article 462. Contract of Retail Purchase-Sale 1. Under a contract of retail purchase-sale the seller carrying out entrepreneurial activity relating to the sale of goods on retail, or a person carrying out handicraft activity or a one-time realization of goods at markets or in other places established by local executive and administrative bodies, including one-time realization, shall be obliged to transfer to the buyer a good intended for personal, family, home, or other use which is not connected with entrepreneurial activity.
2. A contract of retail purchase-sale shall be a public contract (Article 396). 3. The legislation concerning the defense of the rights of consumers shall apply to relations under a contract of retail purchase-sale with the participation of a citizen-buyer, which are not regulated by this Code.
Article 463. Form of Contract of Retail Purchase-Sale Unless otherwise provided by the legislation or a contract of retail purchase-sale, including the conditions of standard contracts or other standard forms to which the buyer adheres (Article 398), a contract of retail purchase-sale shall be considered to be concluded in proper form from the time of the issuance by the seller to the buyer of a cashier or goods cheque or other document confirming payment of the good. The absence of the said documents with the buyer shall not deprive him of the possibility to refer to witness testimony in confirmation of the conclusion of the contract and its conditions.
Article 464. Public Offer of Good
1. The proposal of a good in its advertisement, catalogues, and descriptions of the goods addressed to an indefinite group of persons shall be deemed to be a public offer (Article 407(2)) if it contains all the significant conditions of the contract of retail purchase-sale.
2. Exhibition at the place of sale (on counters, in showcases, and so forth) of goods, the demonstration of models thereof, or the granting of information concerning goods being sold (descriptions, catalogues, photographs, and so forth) at the place of sale thereof shall be deemed to be a public offer irrespective of whether the price and other significant conditions of the contract of retail purchase-sale have been specified, except for an instance when the seller visibly determined that the respective goods are not intended for sale.
Article 465. Granting of Information Concerning Good to Buyer 1. The seller shall be obliged to grant to the buyer necessary and reliable information concerning the good proposed for sale which corresponds to the requirements established by the legislation, and those usually presented in retail trade for the content and means of granting such information.
2. The buyer shall have the right before the conclusion of a contract of retail purchase-sale to inspect the good and demand the conducting in his presence of a verification of the properties or demonstration of the use of the good unless this is precluded in view of the character of the good and is not contrary to the rules accepted in retail trade.
3. If the buyer has not been granted the possibility to receive information immediately at the place of sale, concerning the good, specified in Clauses 1 and 2 of this Article, he shall have the right to demand from the seller the compensation of losses caused by unfounded avoidance of conclusion of the contract of retail purchase-sale (Article 415(4)), and if the contract has been concluded, within a reasonable period to
refuse performance of the contract and to require the return of the amount paid for the good and compensation of other losses.
4. A seller who has not granted the buyer the possibility to receive respective information concerning a good shall bear liability also for defects of the good which arose after its transfer to the buyer with respect to which the buyer would prove that they arose in connection with the absence of such information.
Article 466. Sale of Good with Condition Concerning Acceptance Thereof by Buyer Within Determined Period A contract of retail purchase-sale may be concluded with a condition concerning acceptance by the buyer of the good within a period determined by the contract during which this good may not be sold to another buyer. Unless otherwise provided by the contract, the failure of the buyer to appear or the failure to perform other necessary actions in order to accept the good within the period determined by the contract may be considered by the seller as the refusal of the buyer to perform the contract. Additional expenses of the seller relating to ensuring the transfer of the good to the buyer within the period determined by the contract shall be included in the price of the good unless otherwise provided by the legislation or contract.
Article 467. Sale of Goods by Samples
1. A contract of retail purchase-sale may be concluded on the basis of familiarizing the buyer with a sample of the good (description thereof, catalogue of goods, and so forth) proposed by the seller.
2. Unless otherwise provided by the legislation or the contract, a contract of purchase-sale for a good by a sample shall be considered to be performed from the time of delivery of the good to the place specified in the contract, and if the place of transfer of the good is not determined by the contract, from the time of delivery of the good to the buyer at the place of residence of the citizen or location of the legal person.
3. A buyer before the transfer of the good shall have the right to refuse performance of a contract of retail purchase-sale on condition of compensation to the seller for necessary expenses incurred in connection with the performance of actions relating to fulfillment of the contract.
Article 468. Sale of Goods With Use of Automatic Machines
1. In the instances when goods are sold with the use of automatic machines, the possessor of the automatic machines shall be obliged to bring information to buyers concerning the seller of the goods by means of placing on the automatic machine or granting to the buyers by other means information concerning the name (firm name) of the seller, location, work regime, and also actions which are necessary to be performed by the buyer in order to receive the good.
2. A contract of retail purchase-sale with the use of automatic machines shall be considered to be concluded from the time of the performance of actions by the buyer which are necessary in order to receive the good.
3. If the buyer has not been granted a good paid for, the seller shall be obliged at the demand of the buyer to grant the good at once to the buyer or to return the amount paid by him.
4. In instances when an automatic machine is used to change money, or for the acquisition of banknotes for payment, or for the currency exchange, the rules concerning retail purchase-sale shall apply unless it
arises otherwise from the essence of the obligation.
Article 469. Sale of Good with Condition of Delivery Thereof to Buyer 1. In an instance when a contract of retail purchase-sale has been concluded with a condition concerning delivery of the good to the buyer, the seller shall be obliged within the period established by the contract to deliver the good at the place specified by the buyer, and if the place of delivery is not specified by the buyer, at the place of residence of the citizen or location of the legal person which is the buyer.
2. A contract of retail purchase-sale shall be considered to be performed from the time of handing of the good over to the buyer, and in the event of his absence, to any person submitting the receipt or other document testifying to the conclusion of the contract or formalization of the delivery of the good, unless otherwise provided by the legislation or the contract or does not arise from the essence of the obligation.
3. In an instance when the time for delivery of a good for handing over to its buyer is not determined by the contract, the good must be delivered within a reasonable period after receipt of the demand of the buyer.
Article 470. Price and Payment for Good l. The buyer shall be obliged to pay for a good at the price declared by the seller at the time of concluding the contract of retail purchase-sale unless otherwise provided by the legislation, or does not arise from the essence of the obligation.
2. In an instance when preliminary payment for a good (Article 457) has been provided for by the contract of retail purchase-sale, the failure of the buyer to pay for the good within the period established by the contract shall be deemed to be repudiation of the contract by the buyer unless otherwise provided by agreement of the parties.
3. The rules provided for by Article 458(4) of this Code shall not be subject to application to contracts of retail purchase-sale on credit, including with a condition for payment by the buyer for the goods by installment. The buyer shall have the right to pay up for the good at any time within the limits of the installment period for payment for the good established by the contract.
Article 471. Contract of Hire-Sale It may be provided by a contract that before the transfer of the right of ownership to a good to the buyer (Article 461) the buyer shall be the hirer (lessee) of the good transferred to him (contract of hire-sale). Unless otherwise provided by the contract, the buyer shall become the owner of the good from the time of paying up the good.
Article 472. Exchange of Good l. The buyer shall have the right within fourteen days from the time of the transfer to him of a non- foodstuff good, unless a longer period is declared by the seller, to exchange a good bought at the place of purchase and other places declared by the seller for similar good of another size, form, dimension, style, colour, or complement, making the necessary settlement with the seller in the event of a difference in price. If the seller does not have the good necessary for the exchange, the buyer shall have the right to return the acquired good to the seller and to receive the monetary amount paid for it.
The demand of the buyer concerning an exchange or return of the good shall be subject to satisfaction if the good was not used, has retained its consumer proper ties, and there is evidence of its acquisition from the particular seller. The rules of this clause shall apply to relations under the contract of retail purchase and sale with the participation of the buyer-civil person, unless otherwise provided by the legislation on the consumer protection. 2. A list of goods not subject to exchange or return on the grounds specified in this Article shall be determined in accordance with the procedure established by the legislation.
Article 473. Rights of Buyer in Event of Sale to Him of Good of Improper Quality
1. A buyer to whom a good of improper quality was sold, unless its defects were stipulated by the seller, is entitled, at own discretion, to demand:
1) replacement of the poor-quality good by a good of proper quality;
2) commensurate reduction of the purchase price;
3) immediate elimination of the defects of the good without compensation;
4) compensation of expenses for elimination of the defects of the good.
2. In the event of revealing of defects of a good whose properties do not enable them to be eliminated (foodstuffs, domestic sundries, and so forth) the buyer shall have the right, at own discretion, to demand the replacement of such good by a good of proper quality or commensurate reduction of the purchase price.
3. Instead of presenting the demands provided for by clauses 1 and 2 of this Article, the buyer is entitled to refuse performance of the contract of retail purchase-sale and to demand the return of the monetary sum paid for the good.
In so doing, the buyer must, at the demand of the seller and at his expense, return the good of improper quality received.
In the event of the return to the buyer of the monetary sum paid for the good, the seller is not entitled to retain from it the amount by which the value of the good was lowered because of the full or partial use of the good, loss of goods appearance, or other similar circumstances.
4. In case of detection of deficiencies of a technically complex good, determined by the legislation, or an expensive good, the buyer is entitled to present the demands specified in sub-clause 1 of clause 1 and clause 3 of this Article, within thirty days from the date of transfer of the goods to him. Upon expiration of the specified period, such demands may be presented made by the purchase only in the event of a material violation of requirements to the quality of the good (Article 445 (2)) or violation of the periods for the gratuitous elimination of defects of the goods provided for by the legislation.
Article 474. Compensation of Difference in Price in Event of Replacement of Good, Reduction of Purchase Price, and Return of Good of Improper Quality
1. In the event of the replacement of a poor-quality good not corresponding to the contract of retail purchase-sale with a good of proper quality, the seller shall not have the right to demand compensation of the difference between the price of the good established by the contract and the price of the good existing
at the time of replacement of the good or rendering by a court of a decision concerning replacement of the good.
2. In the event of the replacement of a poor-quality good by the similar good of proper quality, different in dimension, style, quality, or other indicia, the difference between the price of the good being replaced at the time of replacement and the price of the good being transferred in place of the good of improper quality shall be subject to compensation. If the demand of the buyer is not satisfied by the seller, the price of the good being replaced and the price of the good being transferred in place of it shall be determined at the time of rendering of the decision by a court concerning replacement of the good. 3. In the event a demand is presented concerning a commensurate reduction of the purchase price of the good, the price of the good at the time of presenting the demand concerning the price reduction shall be taken into consideration, and if the demand of the buyer is not satisfied voluntarily, at the time of rendering of a decision by a court, concerning the commensurate reduction of the price. 4. In the event of the return to the seller of a good of improper quality the buyer shall have the right to require compensation for the difference between the price of the good established by the contract of retail purchase-sale and the price of the respective good at the time of voluntary satisfaction of his demand, and if the demand is not satisfied voluntarily, at the time of the rendering of a decision by the court.
Article 475. Liability of Seller and Performance of Obligation in Kind In the event of the failure of the seller to perform an obligation under the contract of retail purchase-sale, compensation of losses and the payment of a penalty shall not relieve the seller from performance of the obligation in kind.
§ 3. Delivery of Goods
Article 476. Contract of Delivery Under a contract of delivery the supplier-seller carrying out entrepreneurial activity shall be obliged to transfer goods produced or purchased by him within the stipulated period(s) to the buyer for use in entrepreneurial activity or for other purposes not connected with personal, family, home, and other similar use.
Article 477. Settlement of Disputes When Concluding Contract of Delivery 1. In an instance when in concluding a contract of delivery disputes arose between the parties with regard to individual conditions of the contract, the party proposing to conclude the contract and receiving a proposal from the other party to agree these conditions must within thirty days from the date of receipt of this proposal, unless another period has been established by the legislation or has been agreed by the parties, take measures relating to agreeing the respective conditions of the contract or inform the other party in writing of his refusal to conclude it. 2. The party who received the proposal relating to respective conditions of the contract but did not take measures relating to agreeing the conditions of the contract of delivery and did not inform the other party about the refusal to conclude the contract within the period provided for by Clause 1 of this Article shall be obliged to compensate the losses caused by the avoidance of agreeing the conditions of the contract.
Article 478. Periods for Delivery of Goods
1. In an instance when the delivery of goods has been provided for by the parties within the period of operation of the contract of delivery by individual lots and the periods of delivery of the individual lots (delivery periods) have not been determined therein, the goods must be delivered in lots of equal measure monthly unless it arises otherwise from the legislation or from the essence of the obligation.
2. Together with the determination of the periods of delivery a delivery schedule for the goods (ten-day, twenty-four hour, hour, and so forth) may be established in the contract of delivery.
3. Goods may be delivered before time with the consent of the buyer. Goods delivered before time and accepted by the buyer shall be credited to the quantity of goods subject to delivery within the following period.
Article 479. Procedure for Delivery of Goods 1. The delivery of goods shall be effectuated by the supplier by means of shipment (transfer) of the goods to the buyer who is a party to the contract of delivery or to the person specified in the contract as the recipient. 2. In an instance when the right of the buyer has been provided for by the contract of delivery to give an instruction to the supplier concerning the shipment (transfer) of the goods to the recipients (shipment order), the shipment (transfer) of the goods shall be effectuated by the supplier to the recipients specified in the shipment order. The content of a shipment order and the period for sending it by the buyer to the supplier shall be determined by the contract. If the period for sending the shipment order is not provided for by the contract, it must be sent to the supplier not later than thirty days before the ensuing of the delivery period. 3. The failure of the buyer to submit the shipment order within the established period shall give the supplier the right either to refuse performance of the contract of delivery or to require payment for the goods from the recipient. In addition, the supplier shall have the right to require compensation of losses caused in connection with the failure to submit the shipping order.
Article 480. Delivery of Goods 1. The delivery of goods shall be effectuated by the supplier by means of the shipment thereof by transport provided for by the contract of delivery and on the conditions determined in the contract. In instances when what type of transport or on what conditions the delivery shall be effectuated is not determined in the contract, the right of choice of the type of transport or determination of the conditions of delivery of the goods shall belong to the supplier unless it arises otherwise from the legislation or the essence of the obligation. 2. The receipt of goods by the buyer (recipient) at the location of the supplier (selection of goods) may be provided for by the contract of delivery. If the period of selection is not provided for by the contract, the selection of goods by the buyer (recipient) must be made within a reasonable period after the receipt of the notice of the supplier concerning the readiness of the goods.
Article 481. Augmentation of Short Deliveries of Goods
1. The supplier who has permitted a short delivery of goods in an individual period of delivery shall be obliged to augment the short-delivered quantity of goods within the following period(s) within the limits of the period of operation of the contract of delivery unless otherwise provided by the contract.
2. In an instance when goods have been shipped by the supplier to several recipients specified in the contract of delivery or shipment order of the recipient, the goods delivered to one recipient in excess of the quantity provided for in the contract or shipment order shall not be credited to cover the short delivery to other buyers unless otherwise provided by the contract. 3. The buyer shall have the right, having informed the supplier, to refuse acceptance of the goods which delivery has been delayed unless otherwise provided in the contract. The goods delivered before receipt of the notice by the supplier the buyer shall be obliged to accept and to pay for.
Article 482. Assortment of Goods When Augmenting Short Delivery 1. The assortment of goods whose short delivery is subject to augmentation shrill be determined by agreement of the parties In the absence of such agreement the supplier shall be obliged to augment the short-delivered quantity of the goods in the assortment established for that period in which the short delivery was committed. 2. The delivery of goods of one name in a larger quantity than is provided for the contract of delivery shall not be credited towards covering the short delivery of goods of another name within the same assortment and shall be subject to augmentation except for instances when such delivery was made with the prior written consent of the buyer.
Article 483. Acceptance of Goods by Buyer
1. The buyer (recipient) shall be obliged to perform all necessary actions ensuring the acceptance of goods delivered in accordance with the contract of delivery.
2. Goods accepted by the buyer (recipient) must be inspected by him within the period determined by the legislation or the contract of delivery. The buyer (recipient) shall be obliged within the same period to verify the quantity and quality of the goods accepted in accordance with the procedure established by the legislation or the contract and to inform the supplier about elicited nonconformities or short deliveries of goods immediately in writing. 3. In the event of the receipt of goods delivered from a transport organization, the buyer (recipient) shall be obliged to verify the conformity of the goods to the information specified in the transport and accompanying documents, and also to accept these goods from the transport organization in compliance with the rules provided for by the legislation regulating the activity of transport.
Article 484. Custody of Good Not Accepted by Buyer 1. When the buyer (recipient) in accordance with the legislation, or contract of delivery refuses a good transferred by the supplier, he shall be obliged to ensure the preservation of this good (custody) and immediately notify the supplier. 2. The supplier shall be obliged to remove the good accepted by the buyer (recipient) for custody or to dispose of it within a reasonable period. If the supplier within this period does not dispose of the good, the buyer shall have the right to realize the good or to return it to the supplier. 3. Necessary expenses incurred by the buyer in connection with the acceptance of the good for custody, realization of the good, or the return thereof to the seller shall be subject to compensation by the supplier. In so doing, that received from the realization of the good shall be transferred to the supplier, deducting that due to the buyer. 4. In instances when the buyer does not accept a good from the supplier or refuses acceptance thereof without grounds established by the legislation or the contract, the supplier shall have the right to require
payment for the good from the buyer.
Article 485. Selection of Goods 1. When the selection of goods by the buyer (recipient) has been provided for by the contract of delivery at the location of the supplier (Article 480(2)), the buyer shall be obliged to effectuate the inspection of the goods to be transferred to the place of their transfer unless otherwise provided by the legislation, or it does not arise from the essence of the obligation. 2. The failure of the purchase (recipient) to select goods within the period established by the contract of delivery, and in the absence thereof within a reasonable period after receipt of the notice of the supplier concerning the readiness of the goods shall give the supplier the right to refuse performance of the contract or to require payment for the goods from the recipient.
Article 486. Settlement of Accounts for Goods to be Delivered
1. The buyer shall pay for delivered goods in compliance with the procedure and form for the settlement of accounts provided for by the contract of delivery. If the procedure and form for the settlement of accounts has not been determined by agreement of the parties, the settlement of accounts shall be effectuated by payment orders.
2. If it is provided by a contract of delivery that the payment for goods is effectuated by the recipient (payer) and the latter unfoundedly has refused to pay or did not pay for the goods within the period established by the contract, the supplier shall have the right to require payment for the goods delivered from the buyer.
3. In an instance when the delivery of goods by individual parts within a set is provided for in a contract of delivery, payment for the goods by the buyer shall be made after the shipment (selection) of the last part within the set unless otherwise established by the contract.
Article 487. Packaging and Packing Unless otherwise established by the contract of delivery, the buyer (recipient) shall be obliged to return to the supplier nondisposable packaging and means of packing in which the good arrived in accordance with the procedure and within the periods established by the legislation. Other packaging, and also packing, of the good shall be subject to return to the supplier only in the instances provided for by the contract.
Article 488. Consequences of Delivery of Goods of Improper Quality
1. The buyer (recipient) to whom the goods of improper quality are delivered shall have the right to submit demands to the supplier provided for by Article 445 of this Code except for the instance when the supplier who received the notice of the buyer concerning defects of the delivered goods replaces without delay the goods delivered with goods of the proper quality.
2. The buyer (recipient) carrying out the sale of goods delivered to him at retail shall have the right to demand the replacement of a good of improper quality, returned by a consumer, within a reasonable period, unless otherwise provided by the contract of delivery.
3. The limitation period for the demands presented due to the supply of the improper quality goods shall be one year from the day of acceptance of goods by the buyer (recipient).
If the contract of supply provides that supplier guarantees the quality of goods (Article 440) and application on the defects of goods was made within the established guarantee period, the course of the limitation period established in part one of this clause shall start from the day of the declaration about the defects.
Article 489. Consequences of Delivery of Incomplete Goods
1. The buyer (recipient) to whom goods have been delivered in violation of the conditions of a contract of delivery, the requirements of the legislation, or requirements usually presented for completeness shall have the right to submit the demands to the supplier provided for by Article 450 of this Code, except for the instance when the supplier who has received notice of the buyer concerning the incompleteness of the delivered goods without delay makes the goods complete or replaces them with complete goods. The buyer (recipient) carrying out the sale of goods at retail shall have the right to demand replacement of the incomplete goods, returned by a consumer, within a reasonable period with complete ones, unless otherwise provided by the contract of delivery.
Article 490. Rights of Buyer in Event of Failure to Deliver Goods, Failure to Fulfill Requirements Concerning Elimination of Defects of Goods or Completing Sets of Goods 1. If the supplier does not deliver the quantity of goods provided for by the contract of delivery or did not fulfill the demands of the buyer concerning the replacement of poor-quality goods or concerning the completion of the sets of goods within the established period, the buyer shall have the right to acquire the nondelivered goods from other persons, relegating to the supplier all necessary and reasonable expenses for the acquisition thereof. 2. The calculation of the expenses of the buyer for the acquisition of goods from other persons in instances of the short delivery thereof by the supplier or the failure to fulfill the demands of the buyer concerning elimination of the defects of the goods or concerning the completion of sets of the goods shall be made according to the rules provided for by Article 494(1) of this Code. 3. The buyer (recipient) shall have the right to refuse to pay for goods of improper quality and incomplete goods, and if such goods have been paid for, to require the return of the paid amounts until elimination of the defects and completion of the sets of the goods or the replacement thereof.
Article 491. Penalty for Short Delivery or Delay of Delivery of Goods The penalty established by the legislation or contract of delivery for the short delivery or delay of delivery of goods shall be recovered from the supplier until the actual performance of the obligation within the limits of his duty to augment the short-delivered quantity of goods within subsequent delivery periods unless another procedure for payment of the penalty has been established by the legislation or the contract.
Article 492. Cancellation of Obligations of Same Kind Under Several Contracts of Delivery 1. In instances when the delivery of goods of the same name is effectuated by the supplier to the buyer simultaneously under several contracts of delivery and the quantity of goods delivered is insufficient in order to cancel the obligations of the supplier under all the contracts, the goods delivered must be credited to the performance of the contract specified by the supplier when carrying out delivery or without delay after the delivery. 2. If the buyer paid the supplier for goods of one name received under several contracts of delivery and the amounts of payment are insufficient to cancel the obligations of the buyer under all the contracts, the
amount paid must be credited to performance of the contract specified by the buyer when carrying out payment for the goods or without delay after payment. 3. If the supplier or buyer did not take advantage of the rights granted respectively by Clauses 1 and 2 of this Article, the performance of the obligation shall be credited to cancellation of the obligations under the contract whose period of performance ensued earlier. If the period of performance of obligations under several contracts has ensued simultaneously, the performance granted shall be credited in proportion to the cancellation of obligations under all the contracts.
Article 493. Unilateral Refusal of Performance of Contract of Delivery 1. A unilateral refusal of performance of a contract of delivery (wholly or partially) or a unilateral change thereof shall be permitted in the event of a material violation of the contract by one of the parties (Article 420(2)). 2. A violation of a contract of delivery by the supplier shall be presupposed to be material in instances of: the delivery of goods of improper quality with defects which cannot be eliminated within a period acceptable to the buyer; the repeated violation of the periods for delivery of goods. 3. The violation of a contract of delivery by the buyer shall be presupposed to be material in instances of: the repeated violation of the periods for the payment of goods; the repeated failure to select goods. 4. A contract of delivery shall be considered to be changed or dissolved from the time of receipt by one party of notice by the other party concerning the unilateral refusal of performance of the contract wholly or partially unless another period for dissolution or change of the contract is provided for in the notice or has been determined by agreement of the parties.
Article 494. Calculation of Losses in Event of Dissolution of Contract 1. If within a reasonable period after dissolution of the contract as a consequence of a violation of an obligation by the seller the buyer has bought from another person a good at a higher but reasonable price in place of that provided for by the contract, the buyer may submit a demand to the seller concerning compensation of losses in the form of the difference between the price established in the contract and the price of the transaction concluded in lieu. 2. If within a reasonable period after dissolution of the contract as a consequence of a violation of an obligation by the buyer the seller has sold the good to another person at a lower but reasonable price than that provided for by the contract, the seller may submit a demand to the buyer concerning compensation of losses in the form of the difference between the price established in the contract and the price for the transaction concluded in lieu. 3. If after the dissolution of a contract on the grounds provided for by Clauses 1 and 2 of this Article a transaction has not been concluded in place of the dissolved contract and for the particular good there is a current price, a party may submit a demand concerning compensation of losses in the form of the difference between the price established in the contract and the current price at the time of dissolution of the contract. The current price shall be deemed to be the price usually recovered under comparable circumstances for an similar good at the place where the transfer of the good should have been effectuated. If a current price does not exist at that place, the current price applied in another place may be used which may serve as a reasonable replacement, taking into account the difference in expenses for the transportation of the good.
3. Satisfaction of the demands provided for by Clauses 1, 2, and 3 of this Article shall not relieve the party which did not perform or which improperly performed the obligation from compensation of other losses
caused to the other party on the basis of Article 14 of this Code.
§ 4. Delivery of Goods for State Needs
Article 495. Grounds for Delivery of Goods for State Needs 1. The delivery of goods for state needs shall be effectuated on the basis of contracts on delivery of goods for state needs. The state needs are deemed to be the needs of the Republic of Belarus determined by the Government of the Republic of Belarus, needs of the administrative and territorial units determined by the regional councils of deputies and Minsk city Council of deputies or in the order determined by them, with the exception of needs that are satisfied by means of carrying out state purchases. 2. The rules concerning the contract of delivery (Articles 476-493) shall apply to relations on the delivery of goods for state needs, unless otherwise provided by this Code or other acts of legislation. The legislation on the delivery of goods for state needs shall apply to relations relating to the delivery of goods for state needs in the part not regulated by the present paragraph. 3. The legislative acts may provide for another order of delivery of goods for state needs.
Article 496. [Excluded]
Article 497. [Excluded]
Article 498. [Excluded]
Article 499. [Excluded]
Article 500. [Excluded]
Article 501. [Excluded]
Article 502. [Excluded]
Article 503. [Excluded]
Article 504. [Excluded]
§ 5. Agricultural Procurement Contract
Article 505. Contract of Agricultural Procurement
1. Under a contract of agricultural procurement, the producer of agricultural products is obliged to transfer the agricultural products grown (produced) by him to the person carrying out the purchase of such products for processing or sale (the procurer).
2. The rules concerning the contract of delivery (Articles 476-494) shall apply to relations on delivery of goods for state needs, unless otherwise provided by this Code and other acts of legislation.
Article 506. Duties of Producer of Agricultural Product 1. The producer of an agricultural product shall be obliged to produce and transfer to the procurer the agricultural product in compliance with the requirements of the contract of agricultural procurement concerning period of transfer, quantity, quality and assortment of the agricultural product. 2. The duty of the producer of the agricultural product to organize the agricultural production, providing obtaining of agricultural product of necessary assortment and quality, may be stipulated by the contract of agricultural procurement. 3. The producer of the agricultural product must submit to the procurer, upon the request of the latter, a report on using of financial and material means received.
Article 507. Duties of Procurer 1. The procurer must provide financial and material means, stipulated by the contract of agricultural procurement, to the producer of the agricultural product, and render technical assistance for effectuation of production of agricultural product. 2. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of agricultural procurement, the procurer shall be obliged to accept the agricultural product from the producer at the location thereof and to ensure carriage thereof from the producer. 3. The duty of the procurer to accept from the producer, under the conditions established in the contract, all agricultural products produced by the latter. 4. The duty of the procurer carrying out the processing of agricultural products may be provided for by the contract of agricultural procurement to return to the producer, at his demand, the wastes from the processing of agricultural products with payment at the price determined by the contract of agricultural procurement.
Article 508. Performance of Contract of Agricultural Procurement 1. The period for performance of the contract of agricultural procurement shall be determined by the agreement of the parties, taking into consideration the terms (periods) of production of the agricultural product. 2. If the agricultural product is subject to delivery in packing of packaging, the procurer shall provide for the producer of the agricultural product necessary packing and packaging materials in quantity and within the periods, established by the contract of agricultural procurement. 3. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of agricultural procurement, the procurer shall not have the right to refuse to accept partial performance of the contract. 4. In an instance when the acceptance of an agricultural product is effectuated at the location of the procurer or other place specified by him, the procurer shall not have the right to refuse to accept the agricultural product which corresponds lo the conditions of the contract of agricultural procurement and transferred to the procurer within the period stipulated by the contract.
Article 509. Consequences of Failure to Perform or Improper Performance of Contract of Agricultural Procurement 1. When it becomes certainly known for the procurer, that the agricultural product cannot be produced and transferred in compliance with the requirements of the contract of agricultural procurement concerning quantity, quality and assortment of the agricultural product, the procurer shall have the right to demand dissolution or change of the contract. 2. The producer of an agricultural product who has not performed the obligation or has improperly performed the obligation shall bear liability when his fault exists. 3. If, as the consequence of the circumstances, for which neither of parties is liable, the producer of agricultural product cannot produce the agricultural product and transfer it to the procurer, he must return the deposit received. 4. The producer of agricultural product must inform the procurer about impossibility to supply agricultural product in the consequence of circumstances, for which the producer is not liable. Failure to perform this duty through the fault of the producer shall deprive the latter of the right to refer to these circumstances.
§ 6. Electric Power Supply
Article 510. Contract of Electric Power Supply 1. Under a contract of electric power supply the power supply organization shall be obliged to provide electric power to the subscriber (consumer) through the connected network, and the subscriber shall be obliged to pay for the electric power accepted, and also to comply with the consumption regime provided for by the contract, ensure the safety of operation of the electric power networks within its jurisdiction and the good repair of the instruments and equipment, used by it, connected with the consumption of electric power. 2. The contract of electric power supply shall be concluded with the subscriber when he has an electric power receiving device which meets the established technical requirements and is connected to the networks of the electric power supply organization, and other necessary equipment, and also when the recording of the consumption of electric power is ensured.
Article 511. Conclusion and Extension of Contract of Electric Power Supply 1. In an instance when a citizen who is using electric power for domestic consumption is a subscriber under the contract of electric power supply, the contract shall be considered to be concluded from the time of first actual connection of the subscriber to the connected network in accordance with the established procedure. Unless otherwise provided by agreement of the parties, such a contract shall be considered to be concluded for an indefinite period and may be changed or dissolved on the grounds provided for by Article 517 of this Code. 2. The contract of electric power supply concluded for a determined period shall be considered to be extended for the same period and on the same conditions unless one of the parties declares the termination or change thereof or the conclusion of a new contract before the end of the period of its operation. 3. If one of the parties before the end of the period of operation of the contract has made a proposal to conclude a new contract, the relations of the parties until the conclusion of the new contract shall be regulated by the previously concluded contract.
Article 512. Quantity of Electric Power
l. The electric power supply organization shall be obliged to provide the subscriber with electric power through the connecting network in the quantity provided for by the contract of electric power supply and in compliance with the regime of supply agreed by the parties. The quantity of electric power provided by the electric power supply organization and used by the subscriber shall be determined in accordance with the record data concerning the actual consumption thereof. 2. The right of the subscriber to change the quantity of electric power used by him as determined by the contract may be provided for by the contract of electric power supply on condition of compensation by him of expenses incurred by the electric power supply organization in connection with ensuring the provision of electric power in a quantity not stipulated by the contract. 3. In an instance when a citizen using electric power for domestic consumption is the subscriber under the contract of electric power supply, he shall have the right to use electric power in the quantity necessary for him.
Article 513. Quality of Electric Power l. The quality of electric power provided by the electric power supply organization must correspond to the mandatory requirements of technical normative legal acts in the sphere of rate setting and standardization, requirements established by other acts of Republic's bodies of state administration or provided for by the contract of electric power supply. 2. In the event of a violation by the electric power supply organization of the requirements for quality of electric power, the subscriber shall have the right to refuse payment for such electric power. In so doing, the electric power supply organization shall have the right to demand compensation by the subscriber for the cost of that which the subscriber saved unfoundedly as a consequence of the use of this electric power (Article 974(2)), unless otherwise provided by the legislation.
Article 514. Duties of Subscriber for Maintenance and Operation of Networks, Instruments, and Equipment 1. The subscriber shall be obliged to ensure the proper technical condition and safety of electric power networks, instruments and equipment, being operated, to comply with the established consumption regime for electric power, and also immediately to notify the electric power supply organization about accidents, fires, the disrepair of instruments for recording electric power, and other violations arising when using electric power. 2. In an instance when a citizen is a subscriber under a contract of electric power supply who is using electric power for domestic consumption, the duty to ensure the proper technical state and safety of the electric power networks, and also the instruments for recording the consumption of electric power, shall be placed on the electric power supply organization unless otherwise established by the legislation. At that, the subscriber shall ensure the access of representative of the electric power supply organization to electric power networks, instruments for recording electric power unless otherwise established by legislative acts. 3. The requirements for the technical condition and operation of electric power networks, instruments, and equipment, and also the procedure for carrying out control over compliance therewith, shall be determined by the legislation, and the acts of Republic's bodies of state administration adopted in accordance therewith.
Article 515. Payment for Electric Power
1. Payment for electric power shall be made for the quantity of electric power actually accepted by the subscriber in accordance with the data of recording electric power unless otherwise provided by the legislation or agreement of the parties.
2. The procedure for the settlement of accounts for electric power shall be determined by the legislation or agreement of the parties.
Article 516. Sub-subscriber 1. A subscriber may transfer electric power accepted by him from the electric power supply organization through the connecting network to another person (sub-subscriber) on the basis of a contract only with the consent of the electric power supply organization. 2. The rules of this paragraph shall apply to the contract on the transfer of electric power to a sub- subscriber unless otherwise established by legislative acts. 3. At the transfer of power to the sub-subscriber, the subscriber remains responsible before the electric power supply organization unless otherwise established by legislative acts.
Article 517. Change and Dissolution of Contract of Electric Power Supply 1. In an instance when a citizen is a subscriber under a contract of electric power supply who is using electric power for domestic consumption, he shall have the right to dissolve the contract unilaterally on condition of informing in writing the electric power supply organization thereabout and of payment in full for the electric power used. In an instance when a legal person is a subscriber under the contract of electric power supply, the electric power supply organization shall have the right to refuse performance of the contract unilaterally on the grounds provided for by Article 493(3), subclause 1, of this Code, except for instances established by the legislation.
2. An interruption in provision or the termination or limitation of provision of electric power shall be permitted by agreement of the parties, except for instances when the unsatisfactory state of electric power devices of the subscriber certified by a state electric power supervision body threatens an accident or creates a threat to the life and safety of citizens. The electric power supply organization must warn the subscriber about an interruption in provision or the termination or limitation of provision of electric power.
Article 518. Liability Under Contract of Electric Power Supply
1. In instances of the failure to perform or the improper performance of obligations under a contract of electric power supply, the party who has violated the obligation shall be obliged to compensate the real damage caused by this (Article 14(2)).
2. If as a result of the regulation of the consumption regime for electric power effectuated on the basis of a legislation or other legal acts an interruption in the provision of electric power to the subscriber is committed, the electric power supply organization shall bear liability for the failure to perform or the improper performance of contractual obligations when there is fault thereof.
Article 519. Application of Rules on Electric Power Supply to Other Contracts 1. The rules provided for by Articles 510-518 of this Code shall apply to relations connected with the supply of heating electric power through a connecting network unless otherwise established by the legislation. 2. The rules concerning the contract of electric power supply (Articles 510-518) shall apply to relations connected with supply through a connecting network of gas, oil and oil products, water, and other goods
unless otherwise established by the legislation, or does not arise from the essence of the obligation.
§ 7. Sale of Immovable Property
Article 520. Contract of Sale of Immovable Property 1. Under a contract of purchase-sale immovable property (contract of sale of immovables) the seller shall be obliged to transfer to the ownership of the buyer a land plot, a capital construction (building, structure), apartment, or other immovable property (Article 130(1)). 2. The rules of this paragraph shall apply to the sale of enterprises insofar as not provided otherwise by the rules concerning the contract of sale of an enterprise (Articles 530-537).
Article 521. Form of Contract of Sale of Immovable Property A contract of sale of an immovable property shall be concluded in written form by means of drawing up one document signed by the parties (Article 404(2)). The failure to comply with the form of the contract of sale of an immovable property shall entail its invalidity.
Article 522. State Registration of Transfer of Right of Ownership to Immovable Property
1. The transfer of the right of ownership to an immovable property under a contract of sale of an immovable property to a buyer shall be subject to state registration.
2. The performance of a contract of sale of an immovable property by the parties before state registration of the transfer of the right of ownership shall not be grounds for a change of their relations with third persons.
3. In an instance when one of the parties evades state registration of the transfer of the right of ownership to an immovable property a court shall have the right at the demand of the other party to render a decision concerning state registration of the transfer of the right of ownership. The party which unfoundedly evaded state registration of the transfer of the right of ownership must compensate the other party for losses caused by the delay of registration.
Article 523. [Excluded]
Article 524. [Excluded]
Article 525. Determination of Subject in Contract of Sale of Immovable Property Data must be specified in a contract of sale of an immovable property enabling the immovable property subject to transfer to the buyer under the contract to be established definitely, including data determining the location of the immovable property on the respective land plot or as part of other immovable property. In the absence of such data in the contract, the condition concerning immovable property subject to transfer shall be considered to be not agreed by the parties, and the respective contract shall not be considered to be concluded.
Article 526. Price in Contract of Sale of Immovable Property 1. The contract of sale of an immovable property must provide for the price of this property. In the absence in the contract of a condition concerning the price of the immovable property agreed by the parties in written form, the contract concerning the sale thereof shall be considered to be not concluded, In so doing, the rules for determining the prices provided for by Article 394(3) of this Code shall not apply.
2. Unless otherwise provided by the legislation or contract for the sale of an immovable property, the price established therein of the building, installation, or other immovable property situated on the land plot shall include the price of the immovable property transferred therewith of the respective part of the land plot or rights thereto.
3. In instances when the price of the immovable property in a contract of sale of an immovable property is established per unit of the space thereof or other indicator of its dimension, the total price of such immovable property subject to payment shall be determined on the basis of the actual dimension of the immovable property transferred to the buyer.
Article 527. Transfer of Immovable Property 1. The transfer of an immovable property by the seller and the acceptance thereof by the buyer shall be effectuated under the act of transfer or other document concerning the transfer signed by the parties. Unless otherwise provided by the legislation or contract, the obligation of the seller to transfer the immovable property to the buyer shall be considered to be performed after the handing over of this property to the buyer and signing by the parties of the respective document concerning transfer. The evasion by one of the parties of signing of the document concerning transfer of the immovable property on the conditions provided for by the contract shall be considered to be a refusal respectively of the seller to perform the duty to transfer the property and of the buyer to perform the duty to accept the property. 2. The acceptance by the buyer of an immovable property which does not correspond to the conditions of the contract of sale of an immovable property, including when such nonconformity is stipulated in the document concerning the transfer of the immovable property, shall not be grounds for relieving the seller of liability for improper performance of the contract.
Article 528. Consequences of Transfer of Immovable Property of Improper Quality In the event of the transfer by the seller to the buyer of an immovable property which does not correspond to the conditions of the contract of sale of an immovable property concerning the quality thereof, the rules of Article 445 of this Code shall apply except for the provisions concerning the right of the buyer to demand replacement of the good of improper quality for a good corresponding to the conditions of contract.
Article 529. Peculiarities of Sale of Dwelling Premises
1. A material condition of the contract of sale of a dwelling house, apartment, part of a dwelling house or apartment in which persons reside who retain in accordance with the legislation the right of use of this dwelling premise after its acquisition by the buyer shall be the list of such persons specifying their rights to use the dwelling premise being sold.
2. The contract of sale of a dwelling house, apartment, or part of a dwelling house or apartment shall be subject to state registration and shall be considered to be concluded from the time of such registration.
§ 8. Sale of Enterprise
Article 530. Contract of Sale of Enterprise
1. Under a contract of sale of an enterprise the seller shall be obliged to transfer the enterprise as a whole as a property complex (Article 132) to the ownership of the buyer, except for the rights and duties which the seller does not have the right to transfer to other persons,
2. The rights to a firm name, trademark, service mark, and other means of individualization of the seller and its goods, work, or services, and also the right of use of such means of individualization belonging to it on the basis of a license, shall pass to the buyer unless otherwise provided by the contract.
3.The rights of the seller received by it on the basis of a special permit (license) to engage in the respective activity shall not be subject to transfer to the buyer of the enterprise unless otherwise established by the legislation. The transfer to the buyer as part of the enterprise of obligations whose performance by the buyer is impossible when such authorization (license) is lacking shall not relieve the seller from the respective obligations to creditors.
Article 530. Form and State Registration of Contract of Sale of Enterprise 1. The contract of sale of an enterprise shall be concluded in written form by means of drawing up one document signed by the parties (Article 404(2)) with the obligatory appending thereto of the documents specified in Article 532(2) of this Code. 2. The failure to comply with the form of the contract of sale of an enterprise shall entail its invalidity. 3. The contract of sale of an enterprise shall be subject to state registration and shall be considered to be concluded from the time of such registration.
Article 532. Certification of Composition of Enterprise Being Sold
1. The composition and value of the enterprise being sold shall be determined in the contract of sale of an enterprise on the basis of the full inventorization of the enterprise conducted in accordance with the established rules of such inventorization.
2. Before signing of the contract of sale of an enterprise there must be drawn up and considered by the parties: a document by which results of inventorization are formalized, bookkeeping balance sheet (inventory book of income and expenditure of organizations and individual entrepreneurs, applying the simplified taxation system), auditor's report on the composition and the value of the enterprise as a property complex, and also a list of all the debts (obligations) included within the enterprise, specifying the creditors, the character, amount, and periods of their demands. The property, rights, and duties specified in the named documents shall be subject to transfer by the seller to the buyer unless it follows otherwise from the rules of Article 530 of this Code and is not established by agreement of the parties.
Article 533. Rights of Creditors in Event of Sale of Enterprise
1. The creditors with regard to obligations included within the enterprise being sold must be informed in writing before the transfer thereof about its sale by one of the parties of the contract of sale of the enterprise.
2. The creditor who in writing has not notified the seller or buyer his consent to the transfer of the debt shall have the right within three months from the date of receipt of the notice concerning the sale of the enterprise to require either the termination or performance before time of the obligation and compensation by the seller of the losses caused thereby.
3. The creditor who was not informed about the sale of the enterprise in accordance with the procedure provided for by Clause 1 of this Article may bring suit concerning satisfaction of the demands provided for by Clause 2 of this Article within one year from the date when he knew or should have known about the transfer of the enterprise by the seller to the buyer.
4. After the transfer of the enterprise to the buyer, the seller and the buyer shall bear joint and several liability for debts included within the enterprise being transferred which were transferred to the buyer without the consent of the creditor.
Article 534. Transfer of Enterprise 1. The transfer of an enterprise by the seller to the buyer shall be effectuated under the act of transfer, in which shall be specified data concerning the composition of the enterprise and notice of the creditors concerning the sale of the enterprise, and also information concerning defects elicited in the property being transferred and list of property, the duties with regard to the transfer of which have not been performed by the seller in view of the loss thereof. The preparation of the enterprise for transfer, including the drawing up and submission for signature of the act of transfer, shall be the duty of the seller and shall be effectuated at his expense unless otherwise provided by the contract. 2. An enterprise shall be considered to be transferred to the buyer from the date of signing of the act of transfer by both parties. From this time the risk of accidental perishing or accidental damage of property being transferred within the enterprise shall pass to the buyer.
Article 535. Transfer of Right of Ownership to Enterprise
1. The right of ownership to an enterprise shall pass to the buyer from the time of state registration of this right.
2. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of sale of an enterprise, the right of ownership to an enterprise shall pass to the buyer and shall be subject to state registration directly after the transfer of the enterprise to the buyer (Article 534).
3. In instances when the retention by the seller of the right of ownership to an enterprise transferred to the buyer has been provided for by the contract before payment for the enterprise or before the ensuing of other circumstances, the buyer shall have the right until the transfer of the right of ownership to it to dispose of the property and of the rights which are part of the enterprise being transferred to that extent as is necessary for the purposes for which the enterprise was acquired.
Article 536. Consequences of Transfer and Acceptance of Enterprise with Defects 1. The consequences of the transfer by the seller and acceptance by the buyer under an act of transfer of an enterprise the composition of which does not correspond to that provided for by the contract of sale of the enterprise, including with respect to the quality of the property being transferred, shall be determined on the basis of the rules provided for by Articles 430-432, 436, 439, 445, 449 of this Code unless it arises otherwise from the contract and is not provided for by Clauses 2-4 of this Article.
2. In an instance when an enterprise has been transferred and accepted under the act of transfer in which information concerning elicited defects of the enterprise and lost property have been specified (Article 534 (1)), the buyer shall have the right to demand a corresponding reduction of the purchase price of the enterprise unless the right to submit other demands in such instances has been provided for by the contract of sale of the enterprise.
3. The buyer shall have the right to demand a reduction of the purchase price in the event of the transfer to it within the enterprise of debts (obligations) of the seller which were not specified in the contract of sale of the enterprise or act of transfer unless the seller proves that the buyer knew of such debts (obligations) during the conclusion of the contract and transfer of the enterprise.
4. The seller in the event of receiving notice of the buyer concerning defects of the property being transferred within the enterprise, or the absence of individual types of property in such composition which are subject to transfer, may without delay replace the property of improper quality or grant non-delivered property to the buyer. 5. The buyer shall have the right in a judicial proceeding to demand dissolution or change of the contract of sale of an enterprise and the return of that which was performed by the parties under the contract if it is established that the enterprise in view of the defects for which the seller is liable, is unfit for the purposes named in the contract of sale and these defects have not been eliminated by the seller on the conditions, in accordance with the procedure, and within the periods which have been established in accordance with the legislation or the contract, or the elimination of such defects is impossible.
Article 537. Application to Contract of Sale of Enterprise of Rules Concerning Consequences of Invalidity of Transactions and Concerning Change or Dissolution of Contract The rules of this Code and other acts of legislation concerning the consequences of the invalidity of transactions and a change or dissolution of the contract of purchase-sale providing for the return or recovery in kind of that received under the contract from one party or from both parties shall apply to the contract of sale of an enterprise unless such consequences materially violate the rights and the interests, protected by the legislation, of the creditors of the seller and buyer, of other persons, and are not contrary to public interests.
CHAPTER 31 Barter
Article 538. Contract of Barter
1. Under a contract of batter, each of the parties shall undertake to transfer to the ownership of the other party one good in exchange for another.
2. To the contract of barter shall apply respectively the rules concerning purchase-sale (Chapter 30) if this is not contrary to the rules of this Chapter and the essence of the barter. In so doing, each of the parties shall be deemed to be the seller of the good which this party undertake to transfer and the buyer of the good which this party undertake to accept in exchange.
Article 539. Prices and Expenses Under Contract of Barter 1. Unless it arises otherwise from the contract of barter, goods subject to exchange shall be considered to be of equal value and expenses for the transfer thereof and acceptance shall be effectuated in each instance by that party which bears the respective duties.
2. In an instance when in accordance with the contract of barter the goods to be exchanged are deemed not to be of equal value, the party obliged to transfer a good whose price is lower than the price of the good being granted in exchange must pay for the difference in prices directly before or after the performance of its duty lo transfer the good unless another procedure for payment has been provided for by the contract.
Article 540. Counter Performance of Obligation to Transfer Good Under Contract of Barter In an instance when in accordance with a contract of barter the periods for the transfer of the goods to be exchanged do not coincide, the rules concerning counter performance of obligations (Article 309) shall apply to the performance of the obligation to transfer the good by the party which must transfer the good after the transfer of the good by the other party.
Article 541. Transfer of Right of Ownership in Goods to be Exchanged Unless otherwise provided by the legislation or by the contract of barter, the right of ownership in the goods to be exchanged shall pass to the parties acting under the ton-tract of barter as buyers simultaneously after the performance of the obligations to transfer the respective goods by both parties.
Article 542. Liability for Seizure of Good Acquired Under Contract of Barter The party from whom a good is seized by a third person which was acquired under a contract of barter shall have the right when there are grounds provided for by Article 431 of this Code to require from the other party the return of the good received by the latter in the exchange and/or compensation of losses.
CHAPTER 32 Gift
Article 543. Contract of Gift 1. Under a contract of gift one party (donor) transfers without compensation or undertakes to transfer to the other party (donee) a thing in ownership or a property right (demand) against himself or against a third person, or relieves or undertakes to relieve the other party of a property duty to himself or to a third person. When there exists a counter transfer of a thing or right or a counter obligation the contract shall not be deemed to be a gift. The rules provided for by Article 171(2) of this Code shall apply to such contract. 2. The promise to transfer without compensation any thing or property right whatever or to relieve someone of a property duty (promise of gift) shall be deemed to be a contract of gift and shall bind the promisor if the promise is made in the proper form (Article 545(2)) and contains a clearly expressed intention to perform in the future the transfer of the thing or right without compensation to a specific person or to relieve him from a property duty. The promise to give all of his property or part of his property without specifying the specific subject of gift in the form of a thing, right, or relief from a duty shall be void. 3. A contract providing for the transfer of a gift to the donee after the death of the donor shall be void. The rules of civil legislation concerning inheritance shall apply to such kind of gift. 4. A material condition of the contract of gift of a dwelling house, apartment, part of a dwelling house or apartment in which persons reside who retain in accordance with the legislation the right of use of this dwelling premise after the transfer of its ownership by the buyer shall be the list of such persons specifying their rights to use the dwelling premise being transferred as a gift.
Article 544. Refusal of Donee to Accept Gift
1. The donee shall have the right at any time before the transfer of the gift to him to refuse it. In this event the contract of gift shall be considered to be dissolved.
2. If the contract of gift is concluded in written form, the refusal of the gift must also be concluded in written form. In an instance when the contract of gift has been registered (Article 545(3)), the refusal to accept the gift also shall be subject to state registration.
3. If the contract of gift was concluded in written form, the donor shall have the right to demand from the donee compensation of real damage caused by the refusal to accept the gift.
Article 545. Form of Contract of Gift 1. A gift accompanied by the transfer of the gift to the donee may be concluded orally, except for instances provided for by Clauses 2 and 3 of this Article. The transfer of the gift shall be effectuated by means of handing it over, by symbolic transfer (handing over of keys, and so forth) or by handing over right-establishing documents. 2. A contract of gift of movable property must be concluded in written form in instances when:
1) the donor is a legal person and the value of the gift exceeds five basic values established by the legislation;
2) the contract contains a promise of a gift in the future. In the instances provided for in this Clause a contract of gift concluded orally shall be void. 3.A contract of gift of immovable property shall be subject to state registration.
Article 546. Prohibition of Gift A gift shall not be permitted except for ordinary gifts whose value does not exceed five basic values established by the legislation:
1) in the name of juveniles and citizens deemed to lack active legal capacity, by their legal representatives;
2) to employees of healthcare organizations, education institutions, institution of social service and other similar organizations - by citizens staying in these institutions for treatment, maintenance, receiving there education, by the spouses and relatives of these citizens;
3) excluded;
4) in relations between commercial organizations.
The legislative acts may provide for prohibitions, other than those specified in this Article, on gifts to state officials or to persons with the same status, or to foreign officials in connection with execution of official (labour) duties, with exception of souvenirs presented at the ceremonial and other official events.
Article 547. Limitations of Gift 1. A legal person to whom a thing belongs by right of economic management or operative administration shall have the right to give it with the consent of the owner unless otherwise provided by the legislation. This limitation shall not extend to ordinary gifts of small value (Article 546).
2. The gift of property being in common joint ownership shall be permitted by consent of all the participants of joint ownership in compliance with the rules provided for by Article 256 of this Code. 3. A power of attorney to perform a gift by a representative in which the donee not named and the subject of the gift is not specified shall be void.
Article 548. Refusal of Performance of Contract of Gift
1. The donor shall have the right lo refuse performance of a contract which contains a promise to transfer a thing or right in the future to a donee, if after conclusion of the contract the property or family position or health of the donor has worsened.
2. The donor shall have the right to refuse performance of a contract which contains a promise to transfer a thing or right to the donee in the future on the grounds giving him the right to revoke the gift (Article 549(1)).
3.The refusal of the donor of performance of the contract of gift on the grounds provided for by Clauses 1 and 2 of this Article shall not give a right of demand for compensation of losses to the donee.
Article 549. Revocation of Gift 1. The donor shall have the right to revoke a gift if the donee has committed an attempt on his life, the life of another member of his family or close relatives, or has intentionally caused bodily injuries to the donor. In the event of the intentional deprivation of life of the donor by the donee, the right to demand revocation of the gift in court shall belong to the heirs of the donor.
2. Upon the demand of an interested person a court may revoke a gift made by an individual entrepreneur or legal person in violation of the provisions of the legislation on economic insolvency (bankruptcy) at the expense of means connected with its entrepreneurial activity within six months which preceded the declaration of such person to be insolvent (bankrupt).
3. The right of the donor to revoke the gift in the event he will live longer than the donee may be stipulated in the contract of gift.
4. In the event of revocation of a gift the donee shall be obliged to return the thing given if it has been preserved in kind at the time of revocation of the gift.
Article 550. Instances in Which Refusal of Performance of Contract of Gift and Revocation of Gift are Impossible The rules concerning the refusal of performance of a contract of gift (Article 548) and revocation of a gift (Article 549) shall not apply to ordinary presents of small value (Article 546).
Article 551. Consequences of Causing Harm as Consequence of Defects of Thing Gifted Harm caused to the life, health, of property of a donee citizen as a consequence of defects of the thing given shall be subject to compensation by the donor in accordance with the rules provided for by Chapter 58 of this Code if it is proved that these defects arose before the transfer of the thing to the donee and were not obvious and the donor, although he knew about these defects, did not warn the donee about these defects.
Article 552. Legal Succession in Event of Promise of Gift
1. The rights of a donee to whom a gift was promised under a contract of gift shall not pass to his heirs (legal successors) unless otherwise provided by the contract of gift.
2. The duties of the donor who promised the gift shall pass to his heirs (legal successors) unless otherwise provided by the contract of gift.
Article 553. Donations 1. The gift of a thing or right for generally useful purposes shall be deemed to be a donation. Donations may be made to citizens, healthcare organizations, education institutions, social service institutions and other similar organizations, charitable, scientific organizations, foundations, organizations of culture and other organizations carrying out cultural activity, social, religious and other non-profit organizations, as well as Belarus and its administrative and territorial units . 2. No authorizations or consent whatever shall be required to accept donations. 3. The donation of property to a citizen must be, and to legal persons may be, conditioned by the donor by the use of this property for a determined purpose. In the absence of such a condition the donation of the property to a citizen shall be considered to be an ordinary gift, and in other instances the donated property shall be used by the donee in accordance with the purpose of the property. A legal person which has accepted a donation for use of which a determined purpose has been established must carry out a solitary recording of all operations relating to the use of the donated property. 4. If the use of donated property in accordance with the purpose specified by the donor becomes as a consequence of changed circumstances impossible, it may be used for another intended purpose only with the consent of the donor, and in the event of the death of a donor citizen or the liquidation of a donor legal person, by decision of a court.
5. The use of donated property not in accordance with the purpose specified by the donor or a change of such purpose in violation of the rules provided for by Clause 4 of this Article shall give the right to the donor, his heirs, or other legal successor to demand revocation of the donation. Articles 549 and 552 of this Code shall not apply to donations.
CHAPTER 33 Rent and Maintenance of Dependent for Life
§ 1. General Provisions on Rent and Maintenance of Dependent for Life
Article 554. Contract of Rent
1. Under a contract of rent one party (recipient of the rent) shall transfer property in ownership to the other party (payer of rent), and the payer of rent shall be obliged in exchange for the property received periodically to pay to the recipient of rent in the form of a determined monetary amount or of granting assets for his maintenance in other form.
2. Under a contract of rent the establishment of the duty to pay rent in perpetuity (permanent rent) or for the life of the recipient of the rent (rent for life) shall be permitted. Rent for life may be established on conditions of the main- tenance for life of a dependent citizen.
Article 555. Form of Contract of Rent
The contract of rent shall be subject to notarial certification, and a contract providing for the alienation of immovable property under payment of rent shall also be subject to state registration.
Article 556. Alienation of Property Under Payment of Rent
1. Property which is alienated under payment of rent may be transferred by the recipient of the rent to the ownership of the payer of rent for payment or free of charge. In an instance when the transfer of property for payment is provided for by the contract of rent, the rules concerning purchase-sale (Chapter 30) shall apply to relations of the parties relating to the transfer and payment, and in an instance when such property is transferred free of charge, the rules concerning the contract of gift (this Chapter) and is not contrary to the essence of the contract of rent.
Article 557. Encumbrement of Immovable Property by Rent
1. Rent shall encumber an enterprise, a capital construction (building, structure) or another immovable property located on the land plot and transferred against the payment thereof. In the event of alienation of such property by the payer of the rent, his obligations under the rent contract pass to the acquirer of the property, including with regard of requirements of the legislation on protection and use of lands in relation to the land plot on which that property is located.
2. The person who has transferred immovable property encumbered by rent to the ownership of another person shall bear subsidiary liability with him (Article 370) with regard to the demands of the recipient of the rent which arose in connection with a violation of the contract of rent unless joint and several liability for this obligation has been provided for by this Code, another acts of legislation, or the contract.
Article 558. Securing Payment of Rent
1. In the event of the transfer of immovable property with the exception of a land plot, against the payment of rent, the recipient of the rent shall acquire the right of pledge on this property to secure the obligation of the payer of the rent. In that instance the land plot shall be transferred against the payment of rent in accordance with the legislation on protection and use of lands.
2. The condition establishing the duty of the payer of rent to grant security for the performance of his obligations (Article 310) or to insure to the benefit of the recipient of rent the liability for the failure to perform (Article 824) or the improper performance of these obligations shall be a material condition of a contract providing for the transfer of a monetary amount or other movable property as payment of rent. 3. In the event of the failure of the payer of the rent to fulfill the duties provided for by Clause 2 of this Article, and also in the event of the loss of the security or worsening of the conditions thereof under circumstances for which the recipient of rent is not liable, the recipient of rent shall have the right to dissolve the contract of rent and demand compensation of losses caused by the dissolution of the contract.
Article 559. Liability for Delay of Payment of Rent For a delay of payment of rent the payer of rent shall pay interest to the recipient of rent provided for by Article 366 of this Code unless another amount of interest has been established by the contract of rent.
§ 2. Permanent Rent
Article 560. Recipient of Permanent Rent
1. Only citizens, and also non-commercial organizations, may be recipients of permanent rent unless this is contrary to a legislation and corresponds to the purposes of their activity.
2. The rights of the recipient of rent under a contract of permanent rent may be transferred to the persons specified in Clause 1 of this Article by means of cession of a demand and transfer by inheritance or by way of legal succession in the event of the reorganization of legal persons, unless otherwise provided by the legislation or by a contract.
Article 561. Form and Amount of Permanent Rent 1. Permanent rent shall be paid in money in the amount established by the contract. The payment of rent by means of the granting of things, fulfillment of work, or rendering of services which correspond to the value of the monetary amount of rent may be provided for by the contract of permanent rent. 2. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of permanent rent, the amount of rent to be paid shall be increased in proportion to the increase of the basic value established by the legislation.
Article 562. Periods for Payment of Permanent Rent Unless otherwise provided by the contract of permanent rent, permanent rent shall be paid at the end of each calendar quarter.
Article 563. Right of Payer to Purchase Permanent Rent
1. The payer of permanent rent shall have the right to refuse the further payment of rent by means of purchasing it.
2. Such refusal shall be valid on condition that it is declared by the payer of rent in written form not later than three months before the termination of the payment of rent or longer period provided for by the contract of permanent rent. In so doing, the obligation relating to the payment of rent shall not terminate until the receipt of the entire amount of the purchase by the recipient of the rent unless a different procedure of purchase has been provided for by the contract.
3. The condition of a contract of permanent rent concerning the waiver of the payer of permanent rent to purchase it shall be void. It may be provided by a contract that the right of purchase of permanent rent may not be effectuated during the life of the recipient of rent or during another period not exceeding thirty years from the time of conclusion of the contract.
Article 564. Purchase of Permanent Rent at Demand of Recipient of Rent The recipient of permanent rent shall have the right to demand the purchase of rent by the payer in instances when:
1) the payer of rent delayed the payment thereof by more than one year, unless otherwise provided by the contract of permanent rent;
2) the payer of rent violated his obligations relating to securing the payment of rent (Article 558);
3) the payer of rent is deemed to be economically insolvent (bankrupt) or other obligations have arisen which obviously testify that the rent will not be paid in the amount and within the periods which have been established by the contract;
4) the immovable property transferred under payment of rent has transferred to common ownership or been divided among several persons;
5) and in other instances provided for by the contract.
Article 565. Purchase Price of Permanent Rent
1. The purchase of permanent rent in the instances provided for by Articles 563 and 564 of this Code shall be made at the price determined by the contract of permanent rent.
2. In the absence of a condition concerning the purchase price in a contract of permanent rent under which property has been transferred for payment under payment of permanent rent, the purchase shall be effectuated at the price corresponding to the yearly amount of rent subject to payment.
3. In the absence of a condition concerning the purchase price in a contract of permanent rent under which property has been transferred under payment of rent free of charge, the price of the transferred property determined according to the rules provided for by Article 394(3) of this Code shall be included in the purchase price together with the yearly amount of rent payments.
Article 566. Risk of Accidental Perishing of Property Transferred under Payment of Permanent Rent l. The risk of accidental perishing or accidental damage of property transferred free of charge under payment of permanent rent shall be borne by the payer of rent. 2. In the event of the accidental perishing or accidental damaging of property transferred for payment under payment of permanent rent, the payer shall have the right to demand respectively termination of the obligation relating to the payment of rent or a change of the conditions for the payment thereof.
§ 3. Rent for Life
Article 567. Recipient of Rent for Life
1. Rent for life may be established for the period of life of a citizen transferring property under payment of rent or for the period of life of another citizen specified by him.
2. The establishment of rent for life to the benefit of several citizens whose share in the right to receive rent shall be considered to be equal shall be permitted unless otherwise provided by the contract of rent for life. In the event of the death of one of the recipients of rent his share in the right to receive rent shall pass to the recipients of rent who survive him unless otherwise provided by the contract of rent for life, and in the event of the death of the latter recipient of rent, the obligation to pay the rent shall terminate.
3. The contract establishing rent for life to the benefit of a citizen who is deceased at the time of concluding the contract shall be void.
Article 568. Amount of Rent for Life
1. Rent for life shall be determined in the contract as a monetary amount periodically to be paid to the recipient of rent during his life. If the parties concluded a contract of maintenance of dependent for life, the contract shall specify the value of such maintenance.
2. The amount of rent for life determined in the contract calculated per month must be not less than the basic value established by the legislation, and in the instances provided for by Article 299 of this Code, shall be subject to increase.
Article 569. Period for Payment of Rent for Life Unless otherwise provided by the contract of rent for life, the rent for life shall be paid at the end of each calendar month.
Article 570. Dissolution of Contract of Rent for Life at Demand of Recipient of Rent
1. In the event of a material violation of a contract of rent for life by the payer of rent, the recipient of rent shall have the right to demand from the payer of rent the purchase of rent on the conditions provided for by Article 565 of this Code or dissolution of the contract and compensation of losses.
2. If an apartment, dwelling house, or other property under payment of rent for life has been alienated free of charge, the recipient of the rent shall have the right in the event of a material violation of the contract by the payer of the rent to require the return of this property, setting off the value thereof at the expense of the purchase price of the rent.
Article 571. Risk of Accidental Perishing of Property Transferred Under Payment of Rent for Life The accidental perishing or accidental damaging of property transferred under payment of rent for life shall not relieve the payer of rent from the obligation to pay it on the conditions provided for by the contract of rent for life.
§ 4. Maintenance of Dependent for Life
Article 572. Contract of Maintenance of Dependent for Life 1. Under a contract of maintenance of a dependent for life the recipient of rent, the citizen, shall transfer immovable property, with the exception of the land plot, belonging to him to the ownership of the payer of rent, who shall be obliged to effectuate the maintenance of the citizen dependent for life and/or third person(s) specified by him. In that instance the land plot shall be transferred against the payment of rent in accordance with the legislation on protection and use of lands. 2. The rules concerning rent for life shall apply to the contract of maintenance of a dependent for life unless otherwise provided by the rules of the present paragraph.
Article 573. Duty Relating to Granting of Maintenance of Dependent 1. The duty of the payer of rent relating to granting maintenance of a dependent may include provision of the requirements for housing, nourishment, and clothing, and if the state of health of the citizen so requires, also care for him. The payment for funeral by the payer of rent also may be provided for by the contract for the maintenance of a dependent for life.
2. The value of the entire amount of maintenance of a dependent must be determined in the contract of maintenance of a dependent for life. In so doing, the value of the total amount of maintenance per month may not be less than two basic values established by the legislation. 3. When settling a dispute between the parties concerning the amount of maintenance which is granted or should be granted to a citizen, the court must be guided by the principles of good faith and reasonableness.
Article 574. Replacement of Maintenance for Life by Periodic Payments The possibility of replacing the granting of maintenance of a dependent in kind by the payment during the life of the citizen of periodic payments in money may be provided for by a contract of maintenance of a dependent for life.
Article 575. Alienation and Use of Property Transferred to Secure Maintenance for Life The payer of rent shall have the right to alienate, pledge, or by other means encumber immovable property transferred to him as security for maintenance for life only with the prior consent of the recipient of rent. The payer of rent shall be obliged to take necessary measures so that during the period of granting maintenance of a dependent for life the use of the said property does not lead to a reduction of the value of this property.
Article 576. Termination of Maintenance of Dependent for Life 1. The obligation of maintenance of dependent for life shall terminate with the death of the person (persons) receiving maintenance of dependent for life. 2. In the event of a material violation by the payer of rent of his obligations, the person (persons) receiving maintenance of dependent for life shall have the right to demand the return of immovable property transferred to secure the maintenance for life or the payment to him of the purchase price on the conditions established by Article 565 of this Code. In so doing, the payer of rent shall not have the right to demand compensation of the expenses incurred in connection with the maintenance of the recipient of rent.
CHAPTER 34 Lease
§ 1. General Provisions on Lease
Article 577. Contract of Lease Under a contract of lease (property rental) the lessor (renter) shall be obliged to grant to the lessee (tenant) property for payment in temporary possession and use or temporary use. The yield, products, and revenues received by the lessee as a result of the use of the leased property in accordance with the contract shall be his ownership.
Article 578. Objects of Lease 1. Land plots and other solitary natural objects, enterprises, and other property complexes, capital constructions (buildings, structures), isolated premises, parking lots, parts thereof, defined by the parties to the contract, equipment, means of transport, and other things which do not lose their natural properties in the process of use thereof (nonconsumable things) may be transferred on lease.
Types of property, the leasing out of which is not permitted or is limited, may be established by the legislative acts. 2. The peculiarities of leasing out land plots and other solitary natural objects, and also certain types of other property, may be established by the legislation. 3. Data enabling to definitely establish the property which is subject to transfer to the lessee as the object of a lease must be specified in the contract of lease. In the absence of such data in the contract, the condition concerning the object which is subject to transfer on lease shall be considered to be not agreed by the parties and the respective contract shall not be considered to be concluded.
Article 579. Lessor The right to lease out property shall belong to its owner. Persons authorized by the legislation or by the owner to lease out property also may be lessors.
Article 580. Form and State Registration of Contract of Lease
1. A contract of lease for a period of more than a year, and if one of the parties of the contract is a legal person, irrespective of the period, must be concluded in written form, unless otherwise established by legislative acts.
2. A contract of lease for immovable property shall be subject to state registration unless otherwise established by the legislative acts.
3. A contract of lease for property which provides for the buy-out by the leaseholder of the leased property (Article 595), shall be concluded in the form provided for the contract of purchase-sale of such property.
Article 581. Period of Contract of Lease l. A contract of lease shall be concluded for the period determined by the contract. 2. If the period of the lease has not been determined in the contract, the contract of lease shall be considered to be concluded for an indefinite period. In this event each of the parties shall have the right at any time to repudiate the contract, having warned the other party thereof one month in advance, and in the event of the lease of immovable property, three months. Another period may be established by the legislation or by a contract for notification of the termination of a contract of lease concluded for an indefinite period. 3. Maximum periods for a contract for individual types of lease may be established by the legislation, as well as for the lease of individual types of property. In these instances if the period of the lease is not determined in the contract and neither of the parties has repudiated the contract upon the expiry of the maximum period established by the legislation, the contract shall terminate upon the expiry of the maximum period. A contract of lease concluded for a period exceeding the maximum period established by the legislation shall be considered to be concluded for the period equal to the maximum.
Article 582. Granting Property to Lessee
1. The lessor shall be obliged to grant property to the lessee in a state corresponding to the requirements of legislation and to the conditions of the contract of lease and to the intended purpose of such property.
2. Property shall be leased out together with all of its appurtenances and documents relating thereto (technical passport, certificate of quality, and so forth), unless otherwise provided by the contract. If such appurtenances and documents were not transferred and without them the lessee cannot use the property in accordance with its intended purpose or is to a significant degree deprived of that which he had the right to count upon when concluding the contract, he may demand the granting to him by the lessor of such appurtenances and documents or dissolution of the contract, and also compensation of losses. 3. If the lessor did not grant to the lessee property hired out within the period specified in the contract of lease, or, in an instance when in the contract such period is not specified, within a reasonable period, the lessee shall have the right to demand and obtain this property from him in accordance with Article 369 of this Code and to demand compensation of losses caused by the delay of performance or to demand dissolution of the contract and compensation of losses caused by failure to perform the contract.
Article 583. Liability of Lessor for Defects of Property Leased Out 1. The lessor shall be liable for defects of property leased out which wholly or partially obstruct the use thereof even if during the conclusion of the contract of lease he did not know about these defects. In the event of revealing of such defects the lessee shall have the right at his discretion to:
1) demand of the lessor either the elimination of the defects of the property without compensation or a commensurate reduction of the lease payment, or compensation of his expenses for elimination of the defects of the property;
2) directly retain the amount of expenses incurred by him for elimination of the said defects from the lease payment, having informed the lessor in advance thereof;
3) demand the dissolution of the contract before time. The lessor who is notified about the demands of the lessee or about his intention to eliminate the defects of the property at the expense of the lessor may without delay replace the property granted to the lessee with other similar property in a proper state or eliminate the defects of the property without compensation. If satisfaction of the demands of the lessee or retention of expenses by him for elimination of defects from the lease payment does not fully cover the losses caused to the lessee, he shall have the right to demand compensation of the uncovered part of the losses. 2. The lessor shall not be liable for defects of property leased out which were stipulated by him when concluding the contract of lease or were previously known to the lessee or should have been revealed by the lessee during the inspection of the property or verification of its condition when concluding the contract or transferring the property on lease.
Article 584. Rights of Third Persons to Property Leased Out The transfer of property on lease shall not be grounds for termination or change of the rights of third persons to such property. When concluding a contract of lease the lessor shall be obliged to warn the lessee about all the rights of third persons to the property being leased out (servitude, right of pledge, and so forth). The failure of the lessor to perform this duty shall give the lessee the right to demand a reduction of lease payment or dissolution of the contract and compensation of losses.
Article 585. Lease Payment l. The lessee shall be obliged to make payment in a timely way for the use of property (lease payment).
The procedure, conditions, and periods of making the lease payment shall be determined by the contract of lease. In an instance when they have not been deter-mined by the contract, it shall be considered that the procedure, conditions, and periods have been established which are usually applied when leasing similar property under comparable circumstances. 2. The lease payment shall be established for the entire leased property as a whole or individually for each of the constituent parts in the form of:
1) payments determined in a fixed amount made periodically or one time;
2) the established share of the products, yield, or revenues received as a result of the use of the leased property;
3) the granting of determined services by the lessee;
4) the transfer by the lessee to the lessor of things stipulated by the contract in ownership or on lease;
5) imposing on the lessee expenditures stipulated by the contract for the improvement of the leased property. The parties may provide in the contract of lease for combining the said forms of lease payment or other forms of payment of the lease, unless otherwise established by legislation.. 3. Unless otherwise provided by the contract, the amount of lease payment may be changed by agreement of the parties within the periods provided for by the contract, but not more often than once a year. Other minimum periods for revision of the amount of lease payment for individual types of lease, and also for the lease of individual types of property, may be provided for by the legislation. 4. Unless otherwise provided by the legislation, the lessee shall have the right to require respective reduction of the lease payment if by virtue of circumstances for which he is not liable the conditions of use provided for by the contract of lease or the condition of the property have worsened materially. 5. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of lease, in the event of a material violation by the lessee of the periods for making the lease payment the lessor shall have the right to demand the making of lease payment by him before time within the period established by the lessor. In so doing, the lessor shall not have the right to demand the making of lease payment before time for more than two periods in succession.
Article 586. Use of Leased Property l. The lessee shall be obliged to use leased property in accordance with the conditions of the contract of lease, and if such conditions have not been determined in the contract, in accordance with the purpose of the property. 2. The lessee shall have the right with the consent of the lessor to sublease the leased property (sub-hire) and to transfer his rights and duties under the contract of lease to another person (re-hire), to grant the leased property for use without compensation, and also to pledge lease rights and contribute them as a contribution to the charter capital of economic partnerships and companies or a share contribution to a production cooperative unless otherwise established by the legislation. In the said instances, except for re- hire, the lessee shall remain liable under the contract to the lessor. The contract of sublease may not be concluded for a period exceeding the period of the contract of lease. The rules concerning contracts of lease, unless otherwise established by this Code and other legislative acts, shall apply to contracts of sublease. 3. If a lessee uses property not in accordance with the conditions of the contract of lease or the purpose of the property, the lessor shall have the right to demand dissolution of the contract and compensation of losses.
Article 587. Duties of Parties With Regard to Maintenance of Leased Property l. The lessor shall be obliged to perform at his own expense capital repair to the property transferred on lease unless otherwise provided by the legislation or by the contract of lease. This Code, other laws and acts of the President of the Republic of Belarus may establish, concerning certain kinds of leased property, that duty on performing capital repair of such property, including ensuring availability of duly maintained engineering communications, may be imposed only on the lessee. Capital repair must be performed within the period established by the contract, and if it is not determined by the contract or called for by urgent necessity, within a reasonable period. A violation by the lessor of the duty with regard to the performance of capital repair shall give the lessee the right at his discretion to: 1) perform the capital repair provided for by the contract or caused by urgent necessity and to recover from the lessor the value of the repair or to set it off from the account of the lease payment; 2) demand a corresponding reduction of lease payment; 3) demand dissolution of the contract and compensation of losses. 2. The lessee shall be obliged to maintain the property in a proper state, to perform current repair at his own expense, and to bear expenses for the maintenance of the property unless otherwise established by the legislation or by the contract of lease.
Article 588. Preservation of Contract of Lease in Force in Event of Change of Parties 1. Transfer of the right of ownership (inheritable possession for life) to property leased out to another person shall not be grounds for a change of or dissolution of the contract of lease. 2. In the event of the death of a citizen leasing immovable property, his rights and duties under the contract of lease shall pass to the heir unless otherwise provided by the legislation or by the contract. The lessor shall not have the right to refuse such heir from entering into the contract for the remaining period of its operation except for an instance when the conclusion of the contract was conditioned by the personal qualities of the lessee.
Article 589. Termination of Contract of Sublease in Event of Termination of Contract of Lease Before Time 1. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of lease, the termination of the contract of lease before time shall entail the termination of the contract of sublease concluded in accordance with it. The sublessee shall have the right in this event to conclude a contract of lease with him for property in his use in accordance with the contract of sublease within the limits of the remaining period of sublease on the conditions corresponding to the conditions of the terminated contract of lease. 2. If the contract of lease is void on the grounds provided for by this Code and other acts of legislation, the contracts of sublease concluded in accordance with it also shall be void.
Article 590. Dissolution of Contract Before Time Upon Demand of Lessor Upon the demand of the lessor the contract of lease may be dissolved before time by a court, unless otherwise provided by this Code, other laws and acts of the President of the Republic of Belarus, in instances when the lessee:
1) uses the property with material violation of the conditions of the contract or the purpose of the property or with repeated violations;
2) materially worsens the property;
3) does not make lease payment more than two times in succession upon the expiry of the period established by the contract;
4) does not perform capital repair of the property within the periods established by the contract of lease, and in the absence thereof in the contract within reasonable periods in those instances when in accordance with a legislation or the contract the performance of capital repair is the duty of the lessee. Other grounds for the dissolution of the contract before time upon the demand of the lessor also may be established by the contract of lease in accordance with Article 420(2) of this Code. The lessor shall have the right to demand dissolution of the contract before time only after sending a written warning to the lessee about the necessity to perform the obligation within a reasonable period.
Article 591. Dissolution of Contract Before Time Upon Demand of Lessee Upon the demand of the lessee the contract of lease may be dissolved before time by a court in instances when: 1) the lessor does not grant property for use to the lessee or creates obstacles to the use of the property in accordance with the conditions of the contract or the purpose of the property; 2) the property transferred to the lessee has defects which obstruct its use by him and which were not stipulated by the lessor when concluding the contract, were not known to the lessee in advance, and should not have been revealed by the lessee during the inspection of the property or verification of its good condition when concluding the contract; 3) the lessor does not make capital repair of the property which is his duty within the periods established by the contract of lease, and in the absence thereof in the contract, within reasonable periods; 4) the property by virtue of circumstances for which the lessee is not liable turns out to be in a condition not fit for use. Other grounds of dissolution of the contract before time also may be established by the contract of lease upon the demand of the lessee in accordance with Article 420(2) of this Code.
Article 592. Preferential Right of Lessee to Conclude Contract of Lease for New Period 1. Unless otherwise provided by the legislation or by the contract of lease, the lessee who has properly performed his duties shall have upon the expiry of the period of the contract a preferential right before other persons, under equal other conditions, to conclude a contract of lease for a new period. The lessee shall be obliged to inform the lessor in writing about the wish to conclude such contract within the period specified in the contract of lease, and if such period is not specified in the contract, within a reasonable period before the end of the operation of the contract. When concluding a contract of lease for a new period, the conditions of the contract may be changed by agreement of the parties. If the lessor has refused the lessee to conclude a contract for a new period, but within a year from the date of expiry of the period of the contract with him concluded a contract of lease with another person, the lessee shall have the right at his discretion to demand in court the transfer to himself of the rights and duties under the contract concluded and compensation of losses caused by the refusal to renew the contract of lease with him or only compensation of such losses. 2. If the lessee continues to use the property after the expiry of the period of the contract in the absence of objections on the part of the lessor, the contract shall be considered to be renewed on the same conditions for an indefinite period (Article 581).
Article 593. Return of Leased Property to Lessor In the event of the termination of the contract of lease the lessee shall be obliged to return property to the lessor in that condition in which he received it, taking into account normal wear and tear, or in the state stipulated by the contract. If the lessee has not returned the leased property or returned it not in good time, the lessor shall have the right to demand making of lease payment for the entire time of the delay. In an instance when the said payment does not cover the losses caused to the lessor, he may demand the compensation thereof. In an instance when a penalty has been provided for by the contract for the untimely return of the leased property, losses may be recovered in the full amount above the penalty unless otherwise provided by the contract.
Article 594. Improvement of Leased Property
1. Separable improvements of leased property made by the lessee shall be his ownership unless otherwise provided by the contract of lease.
2. In an instance when a lessee has made improvements of leased property at own expense and with the consent of the lessor which are not separable without harm to the property, the lessee shall have the right after termination of the contract to compensation of the cost of these improvements unless otherwise provided by the contract of lease.
3. The cost of inseparable improvements of leased property made by the lessee without the consent of the lessor shall not be subject to compensation unless otherwise provided by the legislation.
4. Improvements of leased property, both separable and inseparable, made at the expense of depreciation charges from this property shall be the ownership of the lessor.
5. Carrying out by the leaseholder of the inalienable improvements of the leased state property as well as other leased property in cases provided by the legislative acts, may not be considered as a reason to increase rent payments to the leaseholder.
Article 595. Purchase of Leased Property
1. It may be provided in a legislation or contract of lease that leased property may be purchased by the leaseholder upon the expiry of the period of lease or before the expiry thereof on condition of the lessee making the entire purchase price stipulated by the contract.
2. If the condition concerning the purchase of leased property is not provided for in the contract of lease, it may be established by an additional agreement of the parties, who in so doing shall have the right to agree on the set-off of the lease payment, previously paid, against the purchase price.
3. Instances of the prohibition of the purchase of leased property may be established by the legislation.
Article 596. Peculiarities of Individual Types of Lease and Lease of Individual Types of Property The provisions of the present paragraph shall apply to individual types of contract of lease and to contracts of lease of individual types of property (rental, lease of means of transport, lease of capital constructions (buildings, structures), isolated premises, parking lots, their parts, lease of enterprises, finance lease (leasing)) unless otherwise established by the legislation.
§2. Rental
Article 597. Contract of Rental 1. Under a contract of rental the lessor carrying out the lease of property as a permanent entrepreneurial activity shall be obliged to grant movable property to the lessee in temporary possession and use for payment. Property granted under a contract of rental shall be used for consumer’s purposes unless otherwise provided by the contract or does not arise from the essence of the obligation.
2. A contract of rental shall be concluded in written form.
3. A contract of rental shall be a public contract (Article 396).
Article 598. Period of Contract of Rental
1. A contract of rental shall be concluded for a period of up to one year.
2. The rules concerning renewal of a contract of lease for an indefinite period and concerning the preferential right of the lessee to renewal of the contract of lease (Article 591) shall not apply to the contract of rental.
3.The lessee shall have the right to repudiate the contract of rental at any time, having warned the lessor in writing about his intention by not less than ten days.
Article 599. Granting of Property to Lessee A lessor who has concluded a contract of rental shall be obliged in the presence of the lessee to verify the good condition of the property being leased, and also to familiarize the lessee with the rules for the operation of the property or to issue him written instructions concerning the use of this property.
Article 600. Elimination of Defects of Property Leased
1. In the event of revealing by the lessee of defects in the property leased which wholly or partially obstruct the use thereof, the lessor shall be obliged within a ten-day period from the date of the declaration of the lessee concerning the defects, unless a shorter period has been established by the contract of rental, to eliminate the defects of the property without compensation on the site or to replace the particular property with other similar property which is in a proper condition.
2. If the defects of the leased property were a consequence of a violation by the lessee of the rules for operation and maintenance of the property, the lessee shall pay the lessor the cost of the repair and transportation of the property.
Article 601. Lease Payment Under Contract of Rental
1. Lease payment under a contract of rental shall be established in the form of payments determined in a lump sum to be made periodically or at one time.
2. In the event of the return of the property before time by the lessee, the lessor shall return to him the corresponding part of the lease payment received, calculating it from the day following the day of the
actual return of the property. 3. The recovery of indebtedness from the lessee with regard to a lease payment shall be made in an uncontested proceeding on the basis of the executive endorsement made by a notary, a diplomatic agent of the diplomatic representation of the Republic of Belarus, a consular official of the consular office of the Republic of Belarus.
Article 602. Use of Leased Property l. The capital and routine repair of property leased under a contract of rental shall be the duty of the lessor. 2. The sublease of property granted to a lessee under a contract of rental, the transfer by him of his rights and duties under the contract of rental to another person, the granting of this property for uncompensated use, the pledge of lease rights, and the contribution thereof as a property contribution to economic partnerships and companies or as a share contribution to production cooperatives shall not be permitted.
§ 3. Lease of Means of Transport 1. Lease of Means of Transport, With Provision of Services Relating to Driving and Technical
Operation (Lease of Means of Transport with Crew)
Article 603. Contract of Lease of Means of Transport with Crew 1. Under a contract of lease (time-charter) of a means of transport with a crew the lessor shall grant the means of transport to the lessee in temporary possession and use for payment and render services with his own forces with regard to the driving and technical operation thereof. 2. The rules concerning renewal of a contract of lease for an indefinite period and concerning the preferential right of the lessee to conclude a contract of lease for a new period (Article 592) shall not apply to the contract of lease of means of transport with a crew.
Article 604. Form of Contract of Lease of Means of Transport with Crew A contract of lease of means of transport with a crew must be concluded in written form irrespective of the period thereof. The rules concerning the registration of contracts of lease provided for by Article 580(2) of this Code shall not apply to such a contract.
Article 605. Duty of Lessor Relating to Maintenance of Means of Transport The lessor throughout the entire period of the contract of lease of means of transport with a crew shall be obliged to maintain the proper state of the means of transport leased, including the effectuation of routine and capital repair and the granting of necessary appurtenances.
Article 606. Duties of Lessor With Regard to Driving and Technical Operation of Means of Transport
1. Services with regard to driving and technical operation of means of transport granted by the lessor to the lessee must ensure its normal and safe operation in accordance with the purposes of the lease specified in the contract. A more extensive set of services to be granted to the lessee may be provided for by the contract of lease of means of transport with a crew.
2. The composition of the crew of means of transport and the skills thereof must correspond to the rules and conditions of the contract which are binding upon the parties, and if such requirements have not been
established by rules and conditions of the contract which are binding upon the parties, by the requirements of usual practice for the operation of means of transport of the particular type and the conditions of the contract. Members of the crew shall be employees of the lessor. They shall be subordinate to the regulations of the lessor with respect to the driving and technical operation and to the orders of the lessee affecting the commercial operation of the means of transport. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of lease, expenses relating to the payment for services of members of the crew, and also expenses for the maintenance thereof, shall be borne by the lessor.
Article 607. Duty of Lessee Relating to Payment of Expenses Connected with Commercial Operation of Means of Transport Unless otherwise provided by the contract of lease of means of transport with a crew, the lessee shall bear expenses arising in connection with the commercial operation of the means of transport, including expenses for the payment of fuel and other materials expended in the process of operation and for the payment of fees.
Article 608. Insurance of Means of Transport Unless otherwise provided by a contract of lease of means of transport with crew, the duty to insure the means of transport and/or to insure liability for damage which may be caused by it or in connection with its operation shall be placed on the lessor in the instance when such duty arises out of an accepted obligation to conlude the insurance contract.
Article 609. Contracts With Third Persons Concerning Use of Means of Transport
1. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of lease of means of transport with a crew, the lessee shall have the right without the consent of the lessor to sublease the means of transport.
2. The lessee within the framework of carrying out commercial operation of leased means of transport shall have the right without the consent of the lessor to conclude in his own name with third persons contracts of carriage and other contracts unless they are contrary to the purposes of the use of means of transport specified in the contract of lease, and if such purposes have not been established, to the purposes of the means of transport.
Article 610. Liability for Harm Caused to Means of Transport In the event of the perishing or damage of leased means of transport, the lessee shall be obliged to compensate the lessor for losses caused if the latter proves that the perishing or damage of the means of transport occurred with regard to circumstances for which the lessee is liable in accordance with the legislation or the contract of lease.
Article 611. Liability for Harm Caused by Means of Transport Liability for harm caused to third persons by leased means of transport, by mechanisms, devices and equipment thereof, shall be borne by the lessor in accordance with the rules provided for by Chapter 58 of this Code. He shall have the right to submit a regressive demand against the lessee concerning compensation of amounts paid to third persons if he would prove that the harm arose through the fault of the lessee.
Article 612. Peculiarities of Lease of Individual Types of Means of Transport Other peculiarities of the lease of individual types of means of transport with the granting of services relating to driving and technical operation may be established, besides those provided for by the present paragraph, by transport charters, codes and other acts of legislation.
2. Lease of Means of Transport Without Provision of Services Relating to Driving and Technical Operation (Lease of Means of Transport Without Crew)
Article 613. Contract of Lease of Means of Transport Without Crew Under a contract of lease of means of transport without a crew the lessor shall grant means of transport to the lessee in temporary possession and use for payment without rendering services relating to the driving and technical operation thereof. The rules concerning renewal of the contract of lease for an indefinite period and concerning the preferential right of the lessee to conclude a contract of lease for new period (Article 592) shall not apply to the contract of lease of means of transport without a crew.
Article 614. Form of Contract of Lease of Means of Transport Without Crew A contract of lease of means of transport without crew must be concluded in written form irrespective of the period thereof. The rules concerning the registration of contracts of lease provided for by Article 580(2) of this Code shall not apply to such a contract.
Article 615. Duty of Lessee With Regard to Maintenance of Means of Transport The lessee during the entire period of the contract of lease of means of transport without crew shall be obliged to maintain the proper condition of leased means of transport, including the effectuation of routine and capital repair.
Article 616. Duties of Lessee With Regard to Driving of Means of Transport and Its Technical Operation The lessee shall effectuate the driving of the leased means of transport and the operation thereof, both commercial and technical, with his own forces.
Article 617. Duty of Lessee Relating to Payment of Expenses for Maintenance of Means of Transport Unless otherwise provided by the contract of lease of means of transport without crew, the lessee shall bear the expenses for the maintenance of the leased means of transport, the insurance thereof, including insurance of his liability, and also expenses arising in connection with its operation.
Article 618. Contracts with Third Persons Concerning Use of Means of Transport
1. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of lease of means of transport, the lessee shall have the right without the consent of the lessor to sublease the leased means of transport on conditions of the contract of lease of means of transport with or without crew.
2. The lessee shall have the right without the consent of the lessor to conclude in his own name with third persons contracts of carriage and other contracts unless they are contrary to the purposes of the use of the
means of transport specified in the contract of lease, and if such purposes have not been established, to the purpose of the means of transport.
Article 619. Liability for Harm Caused by Means of Transport Liability for harm caused to third persons by a means of transport, its mechanisms, devices, and equipment shall be borne by the lessee in accordance with the rules of Chapter 58 of this Code.
Article 620. Peculiarities of Lease of Individual Types of Means of Transport Other peculiarities of the lease of individual types of means of transport without granting services with regard to driving and technical operation besides those provided for by the present paragraph may be established by transport charters and codes.
§ 4. Lease of Capital Constructions (Buildings, Structures), Isolated Premises or Parking Lots
Article 621. Contract of Lease of a Capital Construction (Building, Structure), Isolated Premises or Parking Lot
1. Under the contract of lease of a capital construction (building, structure), isolated premises or a parking lot the lessor undertakes to transfer a capital construction (building, structure), isolated premises or a parking lot in temporary possession and use or temporary use to the lessee. The rules of the present paragraph shall apply to the lease of part of a capital construction (building, structure), isolated premises or a parking lot unless otherwise provided by the legislation.
2. The rules of the present paragraph shall apply to the lease of enterprises unless otherwise provided by this Code and other acts of legislation concerning the lease of an enterprise.
Article 622. Form of Contract of Lease of Building or Installation 1. A contract of lease of a capital construction (building, structure), isolated premises or a parking lot shall be concluded in written form by means of drawing up one document signed by the parties (Article 404(2)).
The failure to comply with the form of the contract of lease of a building or installation shall entail its invalidity.
Article 623. Rights to Land Plot in Event of Lease of a Capital Construction (Building, Structure) Situated Thereon
1. Under a contract of lease of a capital construction (building, structure), leaseholder simultaneously with the transfer of ownership and use of such property is permitted to use that part of the land, which is occupied by the property and is required for its use.
2. In the instance when the lessor is the owner of the land plot on which the leased capital construction (building, structure) is situated, the lessee may be granted the right of lease to the land plot provided for maintenance of that capital construction (building, structure). Unless the right to the respective land plot to be transferred to the lessee has been determined by the contract, to him shall pass for the period of the lease of the building or installation the right to use that part
of the land plot which is occupied by the building or installation and is necessary for its use in accordance with its purpose. 3.The lease of a building or installation situated on the land plot which does not belong to the lessor by right of ownership shall be permitted without the consent of the owner of this plot unless this is contrary to the conditions of the use of this plot established by the legislation or by contract with the owner of the land plot.
Article 624. Preservation by Leaseholder of Capital Construction (Building, Structure) of Right to Use Land Plot in Event of Sale Thereof In instances when the land plot on which the leased capital construction (building, structure) is situated is sold to another person, the right of use of the part of the land plot which is occupied by the capital construction (building, structure) and is necessary for its use shall be preserved for the lessee of this capital construction (building, structure) on the conditions which existed before the sale of the land plot.
Article 625. Amount of Lease Payment
1. The contract of lease of a capital construction (building, structure), isolated premises or a parking lot, must provide for the amount of lease payment. In the absence of the condition concerning the amount of lease payment agreed by the parties in written form, the contract of lease of a building or installation shall be considered to be not concluded. In so doing, the rules for determining the price provided for by Article 394(3) of this Code shall not apply.
2. The payment established in the contract of lease of a capital construction (building, structure), isolated premises or a parking lot,for the use of the capital construction (building, structure), isolated premises or a parking lot, shall include payment for use of the land plot on which it is situated or the respective part of the plot transferred together with it, unless otherwise provided by the legislation or the contract. 3. In instances when the payment for lease of a capital construction (building, structure), isolated premises or a parking lot,has been established in the contract per unit of space of the capital construction (building, structure), isolated premises or a parking lot,or other indicator of the dimension thereof, the lease payment shall be determined on the basis of the actual dimension of the building or installation transferred to the lessee.
Article 626. Transfer of Capital Construction (Building, Structure), Isolated Premises or Parking Lot 1. The transfer of a capital construction (building, structure), isolated premises or a parking lot,by the lessor and the acceptance thereof by the lessee shall be effectuated under an act of transfer or other document concerning the transfer, to be signed by the parties. Unless otherwise provided by the legislation or the contract of lease of the capital construction (building, structure), isolated premises or a parking lot, the obligation of the lessor to transfer the capital construction (building, structure), isolated premises or a parking lot,to the lessee shall be considered to be performed after the granting thereof to the lessee in possession or use and signing by the parties of the respective document concerning transfer. The evading, by one party, of signing of the document concerning the transfer of the capital construction (building, structure), isolated premises or a parking lot, on the conditions provided for by a contract shall be considered as a refusal respectively of the lessor to perform the duty with regard to the transfer of property and of the lessee to accept the property.
2. In the event of the termination of the contract of lease of a capital construction (building, structure), isolated premises or a parking lot, the leased capital construction (building, structure), isolated premises or a parking lot, must be returned to the lessor in compliance with the rules provided for by Clause 1 of this Article.
§ 5. Lease of Enterprise
Article 627. Contract of Lease of Enterprise 1. Under the contract of lease of an enterprise as a whole as a property complex used in order to effectuate entrepreneurial activity the lessor shall be obliged to grant to the lessee for payment in temporary possession and use land plots, buildings, installations, equipment, and other fixed assets within the composition of the enterprise, transfer in accordance with the procedure, on the conditions, and within the limits determined by the contract the stocks of raw material, fuel, materials, and other circulating assets, the rights of use of the land, water, and other natural resources, buildings, installations, and equipment, and other property rights connected with the enterprise, the rights to designation individualizing the legal person, its goods (works, services), and other exclusive rights, and also to assign to it the rights of demand and transfer debts to it which relate to the enterprise. The transfer of the rights of possession and use of property which is in the ownership of other persons, including land and other natural resources, shall be in accordance with the procedure provided for by the legislation. 2. The rights of the lessor received by him on the basis of a special permit (license) to engage in a respective activity shall not be subject to transfer to the lessee unless otherwise established by the legislation. The inclusion in the composition of the enterprise to be transferred under the contract of obligations, performance of which by the lessee is impossible in the absence of such authorization (license), shall not relieve the lessor from the respective obligations to creditors.
Article 628. Rights of Creditors in Event of Lease of Enterprise
1. Creditors with regard to obligations included as part of the enterprise must be notified before the transfer thereof to the lessee by the lessor in writing concerning the transfer of the enterprise on lease.
2. A creditor who has not notified the lessor in writing on his consent to the transfer of the debt shall have the right within three months from the date of receiving notification concerning the transfer of an enterprise on lease to demand the termination or performance of the obligation before time and compensation of the losses caused by this. 3. A creditor who has not been notified about the transfer of an enterprise on lease in accordance with the procedure provided for by Clause 1 of this Article may bring suit concerning the satisfaction of the demands provided for by Clause 2 of this Article within a year from the date when he knew or should have known about the transfer of the property on lease. 4. After the transfer of an enterprise on lease the lessor and the lessee shall bear joint and several liability for the debts included as part of the transferred enterprise which were transferred to the lessee without the consent of the creditor.
Article 629. Form and State Registration of Contract of Lease of Enterprise
1. The contract of lease of an enterprise shall be concluded in written form by means of drawing up one document signed by the parties (Article 404(2)).
2. The contract of lease of an enterprise shall be subject to state registration and shall be considered to be concluded from the time of such registration.
3. The failure to comply with the form of the contract of lease of an enterprise shall entail its invalidity.
Article 630. Transfer of Leased Enterprise The transfer of an enterprise to the lessee shall be effectuated under an act of transfer. The preparation of the enterprise for transfer, including the drawing up and submission for signing of the act of transfer, shall be the duty of the lessor and shall be effectuated at his expense unless otherwise provided by the contract of lease of the enterprise.
Article 631. Use of Property of Leased Enterprise Unless otherwise provided by the contract of lease of an enterprise, the lessee shall not have the right without the consent of the lessor to sell, exchange, grant for temporary use, or loan material valuables which are part of the property of the leased enterprise, sublease these valuables, and transfer rights and duties under the contract of lease with respect to such valuables to another person. In case of carrying out of such transactions with the consent of the lessee, reduction of the value of the enterprise and violation of other provisions of the contract of lease of the enterprise is not permitted. The said procedure shall not apply with respect to land and other natural resources, nor in other instances provided for by the legislation. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of lease of an enterprise, the lessee shall have the right without the consent of the lessor to make changes in the composition of the leased property complex and carry out the conversion, expansion, or technical re-equipment which increases its value.
Article 632. Duties of Lessee with Regard to Maintenance of Enterprise and Payment of Expenses for Operation Thereof
1. The lessee of an enterprise shall be obliged within the entire period of operation of the contract of lease of the enterprise to maintain the enterprise in a proper technical condition, including carrying out of the routine and capital repair thereof.
2. Expenses connected with the operation of the leased enterprise shall be placed on the lessee unless otherwise provided by the contract. The payments for insurance of the leased property also shall be placed on the lessee.
Article 633. Making of Improvements by Lessee in Leased Enterprise The lessee of an enterprise shall have the right to compensation for the cost of inseparable improvements of the leased property, incurred by him, if these improvements are effectuated with the consent of the lessor, unless otherwise provided by the contract of lease of the enterprise. The lessor may be relieved by a court from the duty to compensate the lessee for the cost of such improvements if it is proved that the costs of the lessee for such improvements exceeds the value of the leased property incommensurately to the improvement of its quality and/or operational properties, or the principles of good faith and reasonableness were violated when effectuating such improvements.
Article 634. Application to Contract of Lease of Enterprise of Rules Concerning Consequences of Invalidity of Transactions, and Rules Concerning Changes and Dissolution of Contract The rules of this Code concerning the consequences of the invalidity of the transactions, changes and dissolution of a contract providing for the return or the recovery in kind of that received under the contract from one or from both parties shall apply to a contract of lease of an enterprise if such consequences do
not violate materially the rights and the interests protected by the legislation of creditors, of the lessor and lessee and other persons and are not contrary to the state and public interests.
Article 635. Return of Leased Enterprise In the event of the termination of a contract of lease of an enterprise, the leased property complex must be returned to the lessor in compliance with the rules provided for by Articles 627, 628, and 630 of this Code. The preparation of the enterprise for transfer to the lessor, including the drawing up and submission for signature of the act of transfer, shall in this event be the duty of the lessee and shall be effectuated at his expense unless otherwise provided by the contract.
§ 6. Finance Lease (Finance Leasing)
Article 636. Contract of Subleasing According to a contract of finance lease (leasing) (hereinafter referred to as the contract of finance lease), the lessor being a legal person or individual entrepreneur undertakes to acquire in ownership the property specified by the lessee from a seller (supplier) determined by him and to grant this property constituting the subject matter of the contract of finance lease in temporary possession and use to the lessee for payment. The lessor in this event shall not bear liability for the choice of the subject matter of the contract of lease and the seller (supplier). The contract of finance lease may provide that the choice of the seller (supplier) of the property to be acquired shall be effectuated by the lessor. The lessee may act as the seller (supplier) of the property being transefered to him as the subject of the contract of finance leasing. The lessor is entitled to carry out control over preservation of the subject of the contract of finance lease and maintenance thereof in a working condition, observance of restrictions for use of the subject of the contract of finance lease, established by him, including the subject transferred to the sublessee in temporary possession under a contract of subleasing.
Article 6361. Contract of Subleasing According to a contract of subleasing, the lessee (sublessor under the contract of subleasing) transfers to a third person (sublessee), within the limits of his rights granted under a contract of finance lease, in possession and use for a definite term for payment the property received from the lessor under a contract of finance lease and constituting the subject of such a contract. Consent of the lessor to transfer of the subject of a contract of finance lease to a third person (sublessee) in temporary possession and use for payment under a contract of subleasing must be expressed in a written form. The lessee (sublessor under the contract of subleasing) is entitled to carry out control over preservation of the subject of the contract of finance lease and maintenance thereof in a working condition, observance of restrictions for use of the subject of the contract of finance lease. Rules on the contracts on sublease apply to a contract of subleasing, unless otherwise established by this Code or other acts of legislation.
Article 637. Subject of Contract of Finance Lease Any non-consumer things, except land plots and other natural objects, may be the subject of a contract of finance lease.
Article 638. [Excluded]
Article 639. Transfer to Lessee of Subject of Contract of Finance Lease 1. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of finance lease, the property which is the subject of this contract shall be transferred by the seller (supplier) directly to the lessee at the location of the latter. 2. In an instance when property which is the subject of a contract of finance lease is not transferred to the lessee within the period specified in this contract, and if such period has not been specified in this contract, within a reasonable period, the lessee shall have the right, if the delay was committed under circumstances for which the lessor is liable, to demand dissolution of the contract and compensation of losses.
Article 640. Transfer to Lessee of Risk of Accidental Perishing or Accidental Spoilage of Property The risk of accidental perishing or accidental spoilage of leased property shall pass to the lessee at the time of the transfer of the leased property to him unless otherwise provided by the contract of finance lease.
Article 641. Liability of Seller (Supplier) 1. The lessee shall have the right to submit demands directly to the seller (supplier) of the property, which is the subject of the contract of finance lease, arising from the contract of purchase-sale concluded between the seller and the lessor, in particular, with respect to the quality and completeness of the property, the periods for the delivery thereof, and in other instances of improper performance of the contract by the seller (supplier). In so doing, the lessee shall have the rights and bear the duties provided for by this Code for a buyer except for the duties to pay for the property acquired as if he would be a party to the contract of purchase-sale of the said property. However, the lessee may not dissolve the contract of purchase-sale (delivery) with the seller (supplier) without the consent of the lessor. In relations with the seller (supplier) the lessee and lessor shall act as joint and several creditors (Article 307). 2. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of finance lease, the lessor shall not be liable to the lessee for the fulfillment by the seller (supplier) of demands arising from the contract of purchase-sale (delivery), except for instances when liability for the choice of the seller (supplier) lies on the lessor. In the latter instance the lessee shall have the right at his discretion to submit demands arising from the contract of purchase-sale (delivery) both directly to the seller (supplier) of the property and to the lessor, who shall bear joint and several liability.
CHAPTER 35 Rental of Dwelling Premise
Article 642. Contract of Rental of Dwelling Premise Relations arising from the contract of rental of dwelling premise shall be regulated by the Housing Code of the republic of Belarus.
CHAPTER 36 Uncompensated Use
Article 643. Contract of Uncompensated Use (Loan of Goods)
1. Under a contract of uncompensated use (contract of loan) one party (the lender) shall undertake to transfer or transfers a thing for temporary uncompensated use to the other party (loan recipient), and the latter shall undertake to return this thing in the same condition in which it was received, taking into consideration normal wear and tear, or in condition stipulated by the contract. 2. The rules provided for by Article 578, clause 1 and part one of clause 2 of Article 581, clauses 1 and 3 of Article 586, clause 2 of Article 592, clauses 1 and 3 of Article 594 of this Code shall apply respectively to the contract of uncompensated use.
Article 644. Lender
1. The right to transfer a thing for uncompensated use shall belong to the owner thereof and to other persons authorized to do so by the legislation or by the owner.
2. A commercial organization shall not have the right to transfer property for uncompensated use to a person who is the owner of property of that organization, founder, participant, director, or member of the management or control bodies thereof.
Article 645. Granting Thing for Uncompensated Use
1. The lender shall be obliged to grant a thing in a condition corresponding to the terms of the contract of uncompensated use and the purpose thereof.
2. A thing shall be granted for uncompensated use with all of its appurtenances and documents relating thereto (instruction manual, technical passport, and so forth) unless otherwise provided by the contract. If such appurtenances and documents were not transferred and without them the thing cannot be used for its purpose or its use to a significant degree loses value for the loan recipient, the latter shall have the right to demand such appurtenances and documents be granted to him or to demand dissolution of the contract and compensation for real damage incurred by him (Article 14(2)).
Article 646. Consequences of Failure to Grant Thing for Uncompensated Use If the lender does not transfer a thing to the loan recipient, the latter shall have the right to demand dissolution of the contract of uncompensated use and compensation for real damage incurred by him.
Article 647. Liability for Defects of Thing Transferred for Uncompensated Use 1. The lender shall be liable for defects of a thing which he intentionally or through gross negligence did not stipulate when concluding the contract of uncompensated use. In the event of revealing of such defects, the loan recipient shall have the right at his discretion to demand of the lender the uncompensated elimination of the defects of the thing or compensation of his expenses for elimination of the defects of the thing or dissolution of the contract before time and compensation for real damage incurred by him.
2.The lender notified about the demands of the loan recipient or of his intention to eliminate the defects of the thing at the expense of the lender may without delay replace the thing in disrepair with another similar thing, which is in a proper condition. The lender shall not be liable for defects of a thing which were stipulated by him when concluding the contract or were known to the loan recipient beforehand or should have been revealed by the loan recipient during the inspection of the thing or verification of its condition when concluding the contract or when transferring the thing.
Article 648. Rights of Third Persons in rem Being Transferred for Uncompensated Use The transfer of a thing for uncompensated use shall not be grounds for the change or termination of the rights of third persons to this thing. When concluding a contract of uncompensated use the lender shall be obliged lo warn the loan recipient about all the rights of third persons to this thing (servitude, right of pledge, and so forth). The failure to perform this duty shall give the loan recipient the right to demand dissolution of the contract and compensation for real damage incurred by him.
Article 649. Duties of Loan Recipient With Regard to Maintenance of Thing The loan recipient shall be obliged to maintain the thing received for uncompensated use in a proper condition, including the effectuation of routine and capital repair, and bear all expenses for maintenance thereof unless otherwise provided by the contract of uncompensated use.
Article 650. Risk of Accidental Perishing or Accidental Damaging of Thing The loan recipient shall bear the risk of accidental perishing or accidental damage of a thing received for uncompensated use if the thing perished or was spoiled in connection with the fact that he used it not in accordance with the contract of uncompensated use or purpose of the thing or transferred it to a third person without the consent of the lender. The loan recipient also shall bear the risk of accidental perishing or accidental damage of the thing if, taking into consideration the actual circumstances, he could prevent the perishing or spoilage thereof by having sacrificed his thing but preferred to preserve his thing.
Article 651. Liability for Harm Caused to Third Person as Result of Use of Thing The lender shall be liable for harm caused to a third person as a result of the use of the thing unless it is proved that the harm was caused as a consequence of the intent or gross negligence of the loan recipient or person who kept this thing with the consent of the lender.
Article 652. Dissolution of Contract of Uncompensated Use Before Time 1. The lender shall have the right to demand dissolution of a contract of uncompensated use before time in instances when the loan recipient: 1) uses the thing not in accordance with the contract or purpose of the thing; 2) does not fulfill duties with regard to maintenance of the thing in a proper condition or the service thereof; 3) materially worsens the condition of the thing; 4) has transferred the thing without the consent of the lender to a third person. 2. The loan recipient shall have the right to demand the dissolution of the contract of uncompensated use before time: 1) in the event of revealing of defects making the normal use of the thing impossible or encumbering, concerning the existence of which he did not know and could not have known at the time of concluding the contract; 2) if the thing by virtue of circumstances for which he is not liable proves to be in a condition not fit for use; 3) if when concluding the contract the lender did not warn him about the rights of third persons to the thing being transferred;
4) in the event of the failure of the lender to perform the duty to transfer the thing or appurtenances thereof and documents relating to it.
Article 653. Repudiation of Contract of Uncompensated Use 1. Each of the parties shall have the right at any time to repudiate the contract of uncompensated use concluded without specification of the period, having notified the other party thereof one month beforehand unless a different period of notice has been provided for by the contract. 2. Unless otherwise provided by the contract, the loan recipient shall have the right at any time to repudiate the contract concluded with specification of the period in accordance with the procedure provided for by Clause 1 of this Article.
Article 654. Change of Parties in Contract of Uncompensated Use l. The lender shall have the right to alienate the thing or transfer it for compensated use to a third person. In so doing, to the new owner or user shall pass the rights relating to the previously concluded contract of uncompensated use, and his rights with respect to the thing shall be encumbered by the rights of the loan recipient. 2. In the event of the death of a citizen, being the lender, or the reorganization or liquidation of a legal person, being the lender, the rights and duties of the lender under the contract of uncompensated use shall pass to the heir (legal successor) or to another person to whom the right of ownership to the thing or other right has passed, on the basis of which the thing was transferred in uncompensated use. In the event of the reorganization of a legal person, being the loan recipient, its rights and duties under the contract shall pass to the legal person which is the legal successor thereof unless otherwise provided by the contract.
Article 655. Termination of Contract of Uncompensated Use A contract of uncompensated use shall terminate in the event of the death of the citizen, being the loan recipient, or liquidation of the legal person, being the loan recipient, unless otherwise provided by the contract.
CHAPTER 37 Independent Work
§ 1. General Provisions on Independent Work
Article 656. Contract of Independent Work 1. Under a contract of independent work one party (the independent work contractor) shall undertake to fulfill the determined work according to the order of the other party (customer) and to hand over the result thereof to the customer, and the customer shall undertake to accept the result of the work and to pay for it. The work shall be fulfilled for the risk of the independent work contractor, unless otherwise established by the legislation or contract of the parties. 2. The provisions of the present paragraph shall apply to individual types of contract of independent work (domestic independent work, construction independent work, independent work for the fulfillment of design and survey work,) unless otherwise established by this Code and other acts of legislation concerning these types of contracts.
Article 657. Work to be Fulfilled Under Contract of Independent Work
1. A contract of independent work shall be concluded for the manufacture or converting (processing) of a thing or for the fulfillment of other work with the transfer of its results to the customer. 2. Under a contract of independent work concluded for the manufacture of a thing the independent work contractor shall pass the rights thereto to the customer. 3. Unless otherwise provided by the contract, the independent work contractor autonomously shall determine the means of fulfillment of the order of the customer.
Article 658. Fulfillment of Work by the Means of Independent Work Contractor 1. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of independent work, the work shall be fulfilled by the means of the independent work contractor, i.e. of his materials and by his forces and means. 2. The independent work contractor shall bear liability for the improper quality of materials and equipment granted by him, and also for granting materials and equipment encumbered by the rights of third persons.
Article 659. Distribution of Risks Among Parties 1. Unless otherwise provided by this Code, other legislation, or by the contract of independent work: 1) the risk of accidental perishing or accidental damage of materials, equipment, things transferred for conversion (processing), or other property used to perform the contract shall be borne by the party granting this property; 2) the risk of accidental perishing or accidental damage of the result of the work fulfilled shall be borne by the independent work contractor until the acceptance thereof by the customer. 2. In the event of the delay of the transfer or acceptance of the result of the work the risks provided for by Clause 1 of this Article shall be borne by the party which has committed the delay.
Article 660. General Independent Work Contractor and Independent Work Subcontractor 1. Unless the duty of the independent work contractor to fulfill the work provided for in the contract personally arises from a legislation or contract of independent work, the independent work contractor shall have the right to involve other persons (independent work subcontractors) to perform his obligations. In this event the independent work contractor shall act as the general independent work contractor. 2. The independent work contractor who has involved an independent work subcontractor to perform the contract of independent work in violation of the provisions of Clause 1 of this Article or the contract shall bear liability to the customer for losses caused by the participation of the independent work subcontractor in performance of the contract. 3. The general independent work contractor shall bear liability to the customer for the consequences of the failure to perform or the improper performance of obligations by the independent work subcontractor in accordance with the rules of Article 294(1) and Article 374 of this Code, and to the independent work subcontractor for the failure to perform or the improper performance by the customer of obligations under the contract of independent work. Unless otherwise provided by the legislation or contract, the customer and the Independent work subcontractor shall not have the right to submit to one another demands connected with a violation of the contracts concluded by each of them with the general independent work contractor. 4. With the consent of the general independent work contractor the customer shall have the right to conclude contracts for the fulfillment of individual works with other persons. In this event the said persons shall bear liability for the failure to perform or the improper performance of work directly to the customer.
Article 661. Participation of Several Persons in Performance of Work l. If two persons or more act on the side of the independent work contractor, in the event of the indivisibility of the subject of the obligation they shall be deemed with respect to the customer to be joint and several debtors and respectively joint and several creditors. 2. In the event of the divisibility of the subject of the obligation, and also in other instances provided for by the legislation, or the contract, each of the persons specified in Clause 1 of this Article shall acquire the rights and bear the duties with respect to the customer within the limits of his share (Article 302).
Article 662. Periods for Fulfillment of Work 1. The periods of beginning and ending of fulfillment of the work shall be specified in the contract of independent work. By agreement between the parties, the periods of beginning and ending of individual stages of work (intermediate periods) also may be provided for in the contract. Unless otherwise established by the legislation, or provided for by the contract, the independent work contractor shall bear liability for a violation of both the beginning and ending, and also the intermediate, periods for the fulfillment of work. 2. The beginning, ending, and intermediate periods for the fulfillment of work specified in the contract of independent work may be changed in the instances and in accordance with the procedure provided for by the contract. 3. The consequences of delay of performance specified in Article 376(2) of this Code shall ensue in the event of a violation of the ending period for the fulfillment of the work.
Article 663. Price of Work 1. In the contract of independent work the price of the work subject to fulfillment or the means of determining it shall be specified. In the absence of such indications in the contract the price shall be determined in accordance with Article 394(3) of this Code on the basis of prices commonly applied for the similar works, taking into consideration the necessary expenses incurred by the parties. 2. The price in the contract of independent work shall include compensation for the costs of the independent work contractor and the remuneration due to it. 3. The price of the work may be determined by means of drawing up an estimate. In instances when work is fulfilled in accordance with the estimate drawn up by the independent work contractor, the estimate shall acquire force and become part of the contract of independent work from the time of the confirmation thereof by the customer. 4. The price of the work (estimate) may be fixed or approximate. In the absence of other indications in the contract of independent work, the price of the work shall be considered to be fixed. 5. If the necessity arises for carrying out additional work and for this reason the price of the work determined approximately materially increases, the independent work contractor shall be obliged to warn the customer thereof in good time. The customer who has not agreed to the increase of the price of the work specified in the contract of independent work shall have the right to repudiate the contract. In this event, the independent work contractor may demand payment from the customer to him of the price for the part of the work fulfilled. An independent work contractor who has not warned the customer in good time about the necessity of increasing the price of the work specified in the contract shall be obliged to fulfill the contract, retaining the right to payment for the work at the price determined in the contract. 6. An independent work contractor shall not have the right to demand an increase of a fixed price, and the customer shall not have the right to demand to reduce it, including an instance when at the time of
concluding the contract of independent work the possibility to determine the full amount of work subject to fulfillment or the expenses necessary for this was excluded. In the event of the material growth, after conclusion of the contract, of the cost of materials and equipment granted by the independent work contractor, and also of services rendered to him by third persons which could not be provided for when concluding the contract, the independent work contractor shall have the right to demand an increase of the established price, and in the event of the refusal of the customer to fulfill this demand, to dissolve the contract in accordance with Article 421 of this Code.
Article 664. Economies of Independent Work Contractor 1. In instances when the actual expenses of the independent work contractor prove to be less than those which were taken into consideration when determining the price of the work, the independent work contractor shall retain the right to payment for the work at the price provided for by the contract of independent work unless the customer proves that the economies received by the independent work contractor affected the quality of the work fulfilled. 2. A distribution of the economies received by the independent work contractor between the parties may be provided for in the contract of independent work.
Article 665. Procedure for Payment of Work 1. Unless payment in advance for work fulfilled or individual stages thereof has been provided for by the contract of independent work, the customer shall be obliged to pay the independent work contractor the stipulated price after the final handing over of the results of the work, if the work is fulfilled properly and within the agreed period, or, with the consent of the customer, before time. 2. The independent work contractor shall have the right to demand the payment to him of an advance or a deposit only in the instances and in the amount specified in a legislation or in the contract of independent work.
Article 666. Right of Independent Work Contractor to Retention In the event of the failure of the customer to perform the duty to pay the established price or other amount due to the independent work contractor in connection with the fulfillment of the contract of independent work, the independent work contractor shall have the right to retention, in accordance with Article 340 of this Code, of the result of the work, and also the equipment belonging to the customer, transferred for converting (processing) the thing, the remains of the material unused, and other property of the customer, which is in the disposal of the independent work contractor, until the payment by the customer of the respective amounts.
Article 667. Fulfillment of Work with Use of Material of Customer l. The independent work contractor shall be obliged: 1) to use the material granted by the customer economically and carefully; 2) after the ending of the work, to submit a report to the customer concerning the expenditure of the material; 3) to return the remains thereof or, with the consent of the customer, to reduce the price of the work by taking into account the cost of the unused material remaining in the disposal of the independent work contractor. 2. If the result of the work was not achieved or the result achieved turned out to have defects which make it unfit for the use provided for in the contract of independent work, or, in the absence of a respective condition of unfitness in the contract, for ordinary use for reasons caused by the defects of the material
granted by the customer, the independent work contractor shall have the right to demand payment for the work fulfilled by him. 3. The independent work contractor may effectuate the right specified in Clause 2 of this Article if it is proved that the defects of the material could not be revealed when the independent work contractor properly received this material.
Article 668. Liability of Independent Work Contractor for Non-Preservation of Property Granted by Customer The independent work contractor shall bear liability for the non-preservation of material, equipment, the thing transferred for conversion (processing), or other property granted by the customer which turned out to be in the possession of the independent work contractor in connection with the performance of the contract of independent work.
Article 669. Rights of Customer During Fulfillment of Work by Independent Work Contractor 1. The customer shall have the right at any time to verify the course and quality of the work to be fulfilled by the independent work contractor without interfering in his activity. 2. If the independent work contractor does not embark upon the timely performance of the contract of independent work or fulfills the work so slowly that the ending thereof, within the period specified, clearly becomes impossible, the customer shall have the right to repudiate performance of the contract and to demand compensation of losses. 3. If during the fulfillment of work it becomes evident that it will not be properly fulfilled, the customer shall have the right to designate a reasonable period to the independent work contractor for elimination of the defects and in the event of the failure to perform this demand by the independent work contractor within the designated period to repudiate the contract of independent work or to commission rectification of the work to another person at the expense of the independent work contractor, and also to demand compensation of losses. 4. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of independent work, subject to availability of valid reasons, the customer may repudiate the contract of independent work at any time before handing over the results of work, subject to payment of the part of price specified for the work, corresponding to the difference between the part of price, paid for the work, and the price specified for the work as a whole.
Article 670. Circumstances of Which Independent Work Contractor is Obliged to Warn Customer 1. The independent work contractor shall be obliged to warn immediately the customer and until receiving instructions from him to suspend the work in the event of revealing: 1) the unfitness or poor quality of the material, equipment, technical documentation, granted by the customer, or thing transferred for conversion (processing) by the customer; 2) possible consequences of the fulfillment of customer’s instructions concerning the means of performance of the work, unfavorable for the customer; 3) other circumstances beyond the control of the independent work contractor, which threaten the fitness or stability of the results of the work to be fulfilled or create the impossibility of completing it within the specified period. 2. An independent work contractor who has not warned the customer about the circumstances specified in Clause 1 of this Article or who has continued the work without awaiting the expiry of the period specified in the contract, or, in the absence thereof, of a reasonable period for a reply to the warning, or, not regarding the timely instruction of the customer concerning termination of the work, shall not have the
right to refer to the said circumstances in the event of the submission of respective demands to him or by him to the customer. 3. If the customer, not regarding a timely and substantiated warning from the part of the independent work contractor concerning the circumstances specified in Clause 1 of this Article, within a reasonable period does not replace unfit or poor-quality material, equipment, technical documentation, or thing transferred for conversion (processing), or does not change instructions concerning the means of fulfilling the work, or does not take other necessary measures in order to eliminate the circumstances threatening the fitness thereof, the independent work contractor shall have the right to refuse performance of the contract of independent work and to demand compensation of losses caused by its termination.
Article 671. Assistance of Customer 1. The customer shall be obliged in the instances, in the amount, and in accordance with the procedure provided for by the contract of independent work to render assistance to the independent work contractor in the fulfillment of the work. In the event of the failure of the customer to perform this duty the independent work contractor shall have the right to demand compensation of losses caused, including additional costs caused by idle time, or to carry over the periods for performance of the work, or to increase the price of the work specified in the contract. 2. In instances when performance of the work under the contract of independent work has become impossible as a consequence of actions or omissions of the customer, the independent work contractor shall retain the right to payment to him of the price specified in the contract taking into account the part of the work fulfilled.
Article 672. Failure of Customer to Perform Counter Duties Under Contract of Independent Work 1. The independent work contractor shall have the right not to embark upon the work, and to suspend work begun, in instances when a violation by the customer of his duties under the contract of independent work, in particular the failure to grant material, equipment, technical documentation, or the thing subject to conversion (processing), or improper quality or unfitness thereof, prevents the performance of the contract by the independent work contractor, and also when there are circumstances obviously testifying to the fact that performance of the said duties will not be made within the established period (Article 309). 2. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of independent work, the independent work contractor shall have the right, when the circumstances specified in Clause 1 of this Article exist, to refuse performance of the contract and to demand compensation of losses.
Article 673. Acceptance by Customer of Work Fulfilled by Independent Work Contractor 1. The customer shall be obliged within the periods and in accordance with the procedure which are provided for by the contract of independent work to inspect and accept, with the participation of the independent work contractor, the work fulfilled (result thereof), and in the event of revealing deviations from the contract which worsen the result of the work or other defects in the work, to immediately declare this to the independent work contractor. 2. The customer who has revealed defects in the work when receiving it, shall have the right to refer to them only in instance when these defects, or the possibility of subsequent submission of a demand concerning elimination thereof, were stipulated in the act or in the other document certifying acceptance. 3. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of independent work, the customer who has accepted work without verification shall be deprived of the right to refer to defects of the work which could have been revealed by ordinary means of the acceptance thereof (obvious defects).
4. The customer who has revealed, after acceptance of the work, deviations therein from the contract of independent work or other defects which could not be revealed by ordinary means of acceptance (latent defects), including those which were intentionally concealed by the independent work contractor, shall be obliged to notify the independent work contractor thereof after the revealing thereof. 5. In the event of a dispute arising between the customer and the independent work contractor, relating to the defects of the work fulfilled or the reasons therefor, an expert examination must be designated at the demand of any of the parties. The expenses with regard to the expert examination shall be borne by the independent work contractor except for instances when the expert examination established the absence of violations by the independent work contractor of the contract of independent work or a causal link between the actions of the independent work contractor and the defects revealed. In the said instances the expenses for the expert examination shall be borne by the party which required the designation of the expert examination, and if it was designated by agreement between the parties, by both parties equally. 6. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of independent work, in the event the customer evades accepting the work fulfilled, the independent work contractor shall have the right upon the expiry of a month from the date when according to the contract the result of the work should have been transferred to the customer, and on condition of a subsequent warning twice of the customer, to sell the result of the work, and to deposit the amount received, less all payments due to the independent work contractor, in the name of the customer in accordance with the procedure provided for by Article 308 of this Code. 7. If the evasion of the customer of acceptance of the work fulfilled entailed delay in handing over the work, the risk of accidental perishing of the work shall be deemed to have passed to the customer at the time when the transfer of the thing should have happened.
Article 674. Quality of Work 1. The quality of work fulfilled by the independent work contractor must correspond to the conditions of the contract of independent work, and in the absence or incompleteness of the conditions of the contract, to the requirements ordinarily presented for work of the respective nature. Unless otherwise provided by the legislation or contract, the result of work fulfilled must, at the time of transfer to the customer, possess the properties specified in the contract or determined requirements usually presented, and within the limits of a reasonable period be fit for the use established by the contract, and if such use is not provided for by the contract, for ordinary use of the result of work of this nature. 2. If obligatory requirements for work to be fulfilled under a contract of independent work have been provided for by the legislation or in accordance with the procedure established by the legislation, the independent work contractor acting as an entrepreneur shall be obliged to fulfill the work while complying with these obligatory requirements.
Article 675. Guarantee of Quality of Work 1. In an instance when a guarantee period is provided for the result of work by the legislation or by the contract of independent work, the independent work contractor must transfer to the customer the result of work, which must correspond to the requirements of Article 674(1) of this Code during the entire guarantee period. 2. The guarantee of quality of the result of work, unless otherwise provided by the contract of independent work, shall extend to everything comprising the result of the work.
Article 676. Liability of Independent Work Contractor for Improper Quality of Work 1. In instances when work is fulfilled by an independent work contractor with deviations from the contract of independent work which worsen the result of the work, or with other defects which make it unfit for the use provided for in the contract or, in the event of the absence in the contract of a corresponding condition
of unfitness, for ordinary use, the customer shall have the right, unless otherwise established by the legislation or the contract, at his discretion, to demand from the independent work contractor: 1) elimination of the defects without compensation within a reasonable period; 2) commensurate reduction of the price established for the work; 3) compensation of his expenses for elimination of the defects when the right of the customer to eliminate the defects has been provided for in the contract of independent work (Article 368). 2. The independent work contractor shall have the right instead of eliminating the defects for which he is liable to fulfill the work without compensation anew with compensation to the customer of losses caused by the delay of performance. In this event the customer shall be obliged to return the result of the work previously transferred to him to the independent work contractor if by the character of the work such return is possible. 3. If deviations in the work from the conditions of the contract of independent work or other defects of the result of the work are not eliminated within a reasonable period established by the customer, or if these deviations are material and ineradicable, the customer shall have the right to refuse performance of the contract and to demand compensation of losses caused. 4. The condition of the contract of independent-work concerning relieving the independent work contractor of liability for determined defects shall not relieve him from liability if it is proved that such defects arose as a consequence of guilty actions or the omission of the independent work contractor. 5. The independent work contractor who has granted material to fulfill work shall be liable for its quality according to the rules concerning liability of the seller for goods of improper quality (Article 445).
Article 677. Periods of Revealing of Improper Quality of Result of Work 1. Unless otherwise established by the legislation or the contract of independent work, the customer shall have the right to submit demands connected with the improper quality of the result of work on condition that it is revealed within the periods established by this Article. 2. In an instance when a guarantee period is not established for the result of the work, demands connected with defects of the result of the work may be submitted by the customer on condition that they were revealed within a reasonable period, but within the limits of two years from the date of transfer of the result of the work, unless other periods have been established by the legislation or the contract. 3. The customer shall have the right to submit demands connected with defects of the result of the work revealed within the guarantee period. 4. In an instance when the guarantee period provided for by the contract constitutes less than two years and the defects of the result of the work are revealed by the customer upon the expiry of the guarantee period but within the limits of two years from the time provided for by Clause 5 of this Article, the independent work contractor shall bear liability if the customer proves that the defects arose before the transfer of the result of the work to the customer or for reasons which arose before that time. 5. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of independent work, the guarantee period (Article 675(1)) shall commence to run from the time when the result of the work fulfilled was accepted or should have been accepted by the customer. 6. The rules contained in Article 441(2) and (4) of this Code respectively shall apply to calculating the guarantee period under the contract of independent work unless otherwise provided by the legislation, agreement of the parties, or does not arise from the peculiarities of the contract of independent work.
Article 678. Limitation period With Regard to Suits Concerning Improper Quality of Work 1. The limitation period for demands submitted in connection with improper quality of work to be fulfilled under the contract of independent work shall be equal to one year, or, with respect to capital constructions
(buildings, structures), unfinished capital constructions prepared for preservation, isolated premises, parking lots, three years. 2. If a guarantee period has been established by the legislation or the contract of independent work, and the declaration with regard to defects of the result of the work was made within the limits of the guarantee period, the running of the limitation period specified in Clause 1 of this Article shall commence from the date of the declaration concerning the defects. 3. If in accordance with the contract of independent work the result of the work was accepted by the customer in parts, the running of the limitation period shall commence from the date of acceptance of the result of the work as a whole.
Article 679. Duty of Independent Work Contractor to Transfer Information to Customer The independent work contractor shall be obliged to transfer to the customer together with the result of the work information affecting the operation or other use of the subject of the contract of independent work, if this is provided for by the contract, or if the character of the information is such that without it the use of the result of the work is impossible for the purposes specified in the contract.
Article 680. Confidentiality of Information Received by Parties If a party, as a result of the performance of his obligation under the contract of independent work, has received information from the other party concerning new solutions and technical knowledge, including those not protected by the legislation, and also information which might be considered as a commercial secret (Article 140), the party who has received such information shall not have the right to disclose it for third persons without the consent of the other party. The procedure and conditions for the use of such information shall be determined by agreement of the parties.
Article 681. Return of Property and Equipment from Independent Work Contractor to Customer In instances when the customer on the basis of Article 669(2) or Article 676(3) of this Code dissolves a contract of independent work, the independent work contractor shall be obliged to return the materials, equipment, thing transferred for conversion (processing), and other property granted by the customer or to transfer this property to the person specified by the customer, and if this proves to be impossible, to compensate the cost of the materials, equipment, and other property.
Article 682. Consequences of Termination of Contract of Independent Work Before Acceptance of Result of Work In the event of the termination of a contract of independent work on the grounds provided for by the legislation or the contract before the acceptance by the customer of the result of the work fulfilled by the independent work contractor (Article 673(l)), the customer shall have the right to demand the transfer to him of the result of the uncompleted work with compensation for the independent work contractor of expenses made.
§ 2. Domestic Independent Work
Article 683. Contract of Domestic Independent Work 1. Under a contract of domestic independent work the independent work contractor carrying out the respective entrepreneurial activity shall be obliged to fulfill according to the order of a citizen (customer) the work determined which is intended to satisfy the personal, domestic or family requirements of the customer, and the customer shall be obliged to accept this work and to pay for it.
2. The contract of domestic independent work shall be a public contract (Article 396). 3. The legislation on defense of the rights of consumers shall apply to relations under the contract of domestic independent work.
Article 684. Guarantees of Rights of Customer l. An independent work contractor shall not have the right to bind the customer to include additional payable work or services in the contract of domestic independent work. The customer shall have the right to refuse payment for work or services not provided for by the contract. 2. The customer shall have the right at any time before the work is handed over to him to refuse performance of the contract of domestic independent work, having paid to the independent work contractor the part of the established price in proportion to the part of the work fulfilled before notifying about the refusal of performance of the contract and having compensated the independent work contractor for expenses made until this time for the purposes of performance of the contract unless they are within the said part of the price of the work. Conditions of a contract depriving the customer of this right shall be void.
Article 685. Form of Contract Unless otherwise provided by the legislation or a contract of domestic independent work, including the conditions of standard contracts or other standard forms joined by the buyer (Article 398), a contract of domestic independent work shall be considered to be concluded in proper form from the time of the issuance by the independent work contractor to the customer of a receipt or other document confirming the conclusion of the contract.
Article 686. Public Offer for Contract of Domestic Independent Work The rules concerning the public offer, provided in Article 407 of this Code, shall respectively apply to the advertisement and other offers of works performed under the contract of domestic independent work.
Article 687. Granting Information to Customer About Offered Work 1. The independent work contractor shall be obliged before conclusion of the contract of domestic independent work to grant to the customer necessary and reliable information concerning the offered work, the types thereof, and peculiarities, the price and form of payment, and also notify the customer, at his request, of other information relating to the contract and respective work. If by the character of the work this has significance, the independent work contractor must notify the customer about the specific person who will fulfill it. 2. The customer shall have the right to demand dissolution of a concluded contract of domestic independent work without payment for the work fulfilled, and also compensation of losses, in instances when as a consequence of the incompleteness or unreliability of information received from the independent work contractor the contract was concluded for the fulfillment of work not possessing the properties which the customer had in view. 3. Information specified in this Article shall be granted to the customer in one of the official languages. Information notified or granted in the foreign language shall be deemed to be not granted, except for the instances when the information was notified or granted in the foreign language in accordance with the desire of the customer.
Article 688. Fulfillment of Work from Material of Independent Work Contractor
1. If work under the contract of domestic independent work is fulfilled from material of the independent work contractor, the material shall be paid for by the customer when concluding the contract in full or in part specified in the contract, with the final settlement of accounts when the work fulfilled by the independent work contractor is received by the customer. In accordance with the contract, the material may be granted by the independent work contractor on credit, including granting under the condition of payment for the material by the customer on installment. 2. A change of price of the material, granted by the independent work contractor, after the conclusion of a contract of domestic independent work, shall not entail a resettlement of accounts.
Article 689. Fulfillment of Work from Material of Customer If work under the contract of domestic independent work is fulfilled from the material of the customer, the exact name, description, and price of the material determined by agreement of the parties must be specified on the receipt or other document issued by the independent work contractor to the customer when concluding the contract. The cost of the material specified in the receipt or other similar document may be contested by the customer in a court.
Article 690. Price and Payment for Work The price of work in a contract of domestic independent work shall be determined by agreement of the parties and may not be higher than that established or regulated by respective state bodies. The work shall be paid for by the customer after the final handing over thereof by the independent work contractor. With the consent of the customer the work may be paid for by him when concluding the contract in full or by means of advance.
Article 691. Warning of Customer About Conditions of Use of Work Fulfilled When handing work over to the customer, the independent work contractor shall be obliged to notify him about the requirements which it is necessary to comply with for the effective and safe use of the result of the work, and also possible consequences for the customer himself and other persons of the failure to comply with the respective requirements.
Article 692. Consequences of Revealing of Defects in Work Fulfilled 1. In the event of revealing of defects during the acceptance of the result of the work or during using thereof within the general periods of limitation period, provided by Article 678 of this Code, or, if the guarantee period is specified, within this period, the customer shall have the right at his discretion to exercise one of the rights provided for in Article 676 of this Code or to demand fulfillment of the work again without compensation, or compensation of expenses incurred by him for rectification of the defects by his own means or by third persons. 2. The demand of elimination, without compensation, of the defects of work under the contract of domestic independent work, that can be dangerous for the life or health of the customer or other persons, may be submitted by he customer or legal successors thereof within ten years after reception of the results of work, unless the longer periods (service periods) are provided in accordance with the procedure established by the legislation. This demand may be submitter irrespective of the time when the defects were revealed, including the case when the defects are revealed after the expiry of the guarantee period. 3. In the event of the failure of the independent work contractor to fulfill the demand specified in Clause 2 of this Article, the customer shall have the right within this same period to demand either the return of part of the price paid for the work or compensation of expenses incurred in connection with the elimination of defects by the customer by his own forces or with the assistance of third persons.
Article 693. Consequences of Failure of Customer to Appear for Receipt of Result of Work 1. In the event of the failure of the customer to appear for the receipt of the result of the work fulfilled or other evasion of the customer from acceptance thereof, the independent work contractor shall have the right, having warned the customer in writing, upon the expiry of two month from the date of such warning to sell the result of the work for a reasonable price and to deposit the amount received, less all payments due to the independent work contractor, in accordance with the procedure provided for by Article 308 of this Code. 2. In cases specified in Clause 1 of this Article, the independent work contractor shall have the right, instead of selling the subject of independent work, to take advantage of the right to retain it (Article 340) or to recover from the customer the losses caused.
Article 694. Consequences of Death of One of the Parties in the Contract of Domestic Independent Work In case of termination of the contract of domestic independent work on the grounds provided by Article 388 of this Code, the consequences of termination of the contract are determined by the agreement between the legal successor of the respective party and its counteragent, or, in case of failure to reach the agreement, by the court, taking into consideration the scale of the work fulfilled and the value thereof, the cost of material used or remained, and other significant circumstances.
Article 695. Rights of Customer in Event of Improper Fulfillment or Failure to Fulfill Work Under Contract of Domestic Independent Work In the event of the improper fulfillment or the failure to fulfill work under a contract of domestic independent work, the customer may take advantage of the rights granted to the buyer in accordance with Articles 473-475 of this Code.
§ 3. Construction Independent Work
Article 696. Contract of Construction Independent Work 1. Under a contract of construction independent work the independent work contractor shall undertake, within the period established by the contract, to build a determined object according to the order of the customer or to fulfill other construction work, and the customer shall undertake to create necessary conditions for the independent work contractor in order to fulfill the work, accept the result thereof, and to pay the stipulated price. 2. The contract of construction independent work shall be concluded for the construction or reconstruction of a capital construction (building, structure), or other object, and also for the fulfillment of construction, and other special mounting works. The rules concerning the contract of construction independent work shall also apply to work relating to the capital repair of buildings, installations and other objects, unless otherwise provided by the contract. In the instances provided for by the contract, the independent work contract shall assume the duty to ensure the operation of the object after its acceptance by the customer during the period specified in the contract. 3. In instances when, under the contract of construction independent work, the work is fulfilled in order to satisfy personal, domestic or family requirements of a citizen (customer), the rules of paragraph 2 of this Chapter concerning the rights of the customer under the contract of domestic independent work shall apply respectively to such contract.
Article 697. Distribution of Risk Between Parties
1. The risk of accidental perishing or accidental damaging of the object of construction comprising the subject of a contract of construction independent work before the acceptance of this object by the customer shall be borne by the independent work contractor. 2. If the object of construction before acceptance by the customer has perished or been damaged as a consequence of the poor quality of the material (parts, or assemblies) or equipment granted by the customer, or as a consequence of the performance of erroneous instructions of the customer, the independent work contractor shall have the right to demand the payment of the entire cost of the work provided for by the estimate on condition that the duties provided for by Article 670(1) of this Code were fulfilled by him.
Article 698. Design and Estimate Documentation 1. The independent work contractor is obliged to effectuate construction and works connected therewith in accordance with the design documentation determining the amount and content of the work and other requirements to this work, including with the estimate documentation (estimate) determining the price of the work. In the absence of other indications in the contract, it shall be presupposed that the independent work contractor is obliged to fulfill all the work specified in the design documentation, including in the estimate documentation (design and estimate documentation). 2. The composition and content of the design and estimate documentation must be determined by the contract of construction independent work; also, it must be provided which of the parties and within what period must grant the respective documentation. 3. An independent work contractor, in case of revealing, in the course of construction work, of works not specified in the design and estimate documentation and, in connection therewith, the need to carry out additional work and increase the estimate cost of the construction, shall be obliged to inform the customer thereof. In case of non-receiving of a reply from the customer to his communication within ten days, unless another period has been provided by the legislation or by the contract of construction independent work, the independent work contractor shall be obliged to suspend the respective work with relegation of the losses, caused by the idling, to the account of the customer. The customer shall be relieved from compensation of such losses if he will prove the absence of the necessity to carry out the additional work. 4. An independent work contractor who has not fulfilled the duties established by Clause 3 of this Article shall be deprived of the right to demand payment from the customer for the additional work fulfilled by him and compensation of losses caused thereby unless he will prove that the immediate actions were necessary in the interests of the customer, in particular in connection with the fact that the suspension of work could lead to the perishing or damaging of the object of construction. 5. In the event of the consent of the customer on carrying out and of the additional work and on payment thereof, the independent work contractor shall have the right to refuse the fulfillment thereof only in instances when such work is not within the sphere of the professional activity of the independent work contractor or may not be fulfilled by the independent work contractor for reasons beyond his control.
Article 699. Making Changes in Design and Estimate Documentation 1. The customer shall have the right to make changes in the design and estimate documentation, not connected with the additional expenses for the customer. 2. Making of changes in the design and estimate documentation, requiring additional expenses for the customer, shall be effectuated at the expense of the customer on the basis of an additional estimate agreed by the parties. 3. The independent work contractor shall have the right to demand, in accordance with Article 420 of this Code, a revision of the estimate, if for reasons beyond his control the cost of the work exceeded the estimate by not less than 10 percent.
4. The independent work contractor shall have the right to demand compensation of reasonable expenses which were incurred by him in connection with the revealing and elimination of defects in the design and estimate documentation.
Article 700. Provision of Construction with Materials and Equipment 1. The duty relating to provision of the construction with materials, including parts and assemblies or equipment, shall be borne by the independent work contractor unless it is provided by the contract of construction independent work that the provision of construction as a whole or in determined part shall be effectuated by the customer. 2. The party, within those duty is the provision of the construction, shall bear liability for the revealed impossibility of using the materials or the equipment granted by it without worsening the quality of the work to be fulfilled, unless this party will prove that the impossibility of the use arose through circumstances for which the other party is liable. 3. In the event of the revealed impossibility of the use of the materials or equipment granted by the customer without worsening the quality of the work to be fulfilled and of the refusal of the customer to replace them, the independent work contractor shall have the right to repudiate the contract of construction independent work and to demand from the customer the payment of the price of the contract in proportion to the work fulfilled, and compensation of the losses not covered by this amount.
Article 701. Payment for Work 1. Payment for the work fulfilled by the independent work contractor shall be made by the customer in the amount provided for by the estimate, within the periods, and in accordance with the procedure which has been established by the legislation or by the contract of construction independent work. In the absence of respective instructions in a legislation or in the contract the payment for work shall be made in accordance with Article 665 of this Code. 2. Payment for work as lump sum and in full after acceptance of the object by the customer may be provided for by the contract of construction independent work.
Article 702. Additional Duties of Customer Under Contract of Construction Independent Work l. The customer shall be obliged in a timely way to grant a land plot for construction. The size and condition of the land plot granted must correspond to the conditions contained in the contract of construction independent work, and in the absence of such conditions, ensure the timely commencement of the work, normal carrying out thereof, and completion within the specified period. 2. The customer shall be obliged in the instances and in accordance with the procedure provided for by the contract of construction independent work to transfer for use to the independent work contractor buildings capital constructions (buildings, structures) or other objects necessary in order to effectuate the work, ensure transportation of goods to the address of the independent work contractor, the temporary laying of the network for electric power, water and gas supply, and to render other services. 3. Payment for services granted by the customer, specified in Clause 2 of this Article, shall be effectuated in the instances and on the conditions provided for by the contract of construction independent work.
Article 703. Control and Supervision of Customer Over Fulfillment of Work under Contract of Construction Independent Work 1. The customer shall have the right to effectuate control and supervision over the course and quality of work being fulfilled, compliance with the periods thereof for the fulfillment (schedule), the quality of materials granted by the independent work contractor, and also the correctness of the use of the materials
of the customer by the independent work contractor without interfering in so doing in the operational economic activity of the independent work contractor. 2. The customer who has revealed, when carrying out control and supervision over the fulfillment of work, deviations from the conditions of the contract of construction independent work which may worsen the quality of work or other defects thereof, shall be obliged immediately to inform the independent work contractor. The customer who has not made such declaration shall lose the right thereafter to refer to the defects revealed by him. 3. The independent work contractor shall be obliged to perform instructions of the customer received in the course of the construction if such instructions are not contrary to the conditions of the contract of construction independent work and are not being the interference in the operational economic activity of the independent work contractor. 4. The independent work contractor who has improperly fulfilled work shall not have the right to refer to the fact that the customer did not effectuate control and supervision over the fulfillment thereof, except for instances when the duty to effectuate such control and supervision is placed on the customer by the legislation.
Article 704. Participation of Engineer (Engineering Organization) in Exercise of Rights and Fulfillment of Duties of Customer The customer for the purpose of carrying out control and supervision over construction and making decisions in his name in mutual relations with the independent work contractor may conclude autonomously, without the consent of the independent work contractor, a contract concerning the rendering of services of such type to the customer with a respective engineer (engineering organization). In this event the functions of such engineer (engineering organization) connected with the consequences of his actions for the independent work contractor shall be determined in the contract of construction independent work.
Article 705. Cooperation of Parties in Contract of Construction Independent Work l. If, when fulfilling construction and work connected therewith, obstacles are revealed for the proper performance of the contract of construction independent work, each of the parties shall be obliged to take all reasonable measures within its control to eliminate such obstacles. The party who does not perform this duty shall lose the right to compensation of losses caused by the fact that the respective obstacles were not eliminated. 2. The expenses of the party connected with the performance of the duties specified in Clause 1 of this Article shall be subject to compensation by the other party in the instances when this is provided for by the contract of construction independent work.
Article 706. Duties of Independent Work Contractor Relating to Protection of Environment and Ensuring Safety of Construction Work 1. The independent work contractor, when carrying out construction and work connected therewith, shall be obliged to comply with the requirements of the legislation concerning protection of the environment and the safety of construction work. The independent work contractor shall bear liability for a violation of these requirements. 2. The independent work contractor shall not have the right to use materials and equipment, provided by the customer, in the course of carrying out work, or to fulfill the customer’s instructions, if this may lead to a violation of requirements for the protection of the environment and safety of construction work which are obligatory for the parties.
Article 707. Consequences of Shutting Down of Construction If for reasons beyond the control of the parties the work under the contract of construction independent work is suspended and the object of construction shut down, the customer shall be obliged to pay the independent work contractor in full for the fulfillment of work up to the time of the shutting down, and also to compensate expenses caused by the necessity to terminate work and shut down the construction, setting off advantages which the independent work contractor received or could receive as a consequence of the termination of the work.
Article 708. Handing Over and Acceptance of Work l. The customer who has received the notification of an independent work contractor concerning the readiness of the result of the work or, if this is provided for by the contract, of stage of work, fulfilled under the contract of construction independent work for handing over, shall be obliged to embark upon the acceptance thereof within three days. 2. The customer shall organize and effectuate the acceptance of the result of work at his own expense unless otherwise provided by the contract of construction independent work. In the instances provided for by the legislation the representatives of state bodies and bodies of local administration or self-government must participate in the acceptance of the result of the work. 3. The customer, having accepted the result of separate stage of work in advance, shall bear the risk of the consequences of the perishing or damaging of the result of the work, which occurred not through the fault of the independent work contractor. 4. The handing over of the result of the work by the independent work contractor and its acceptance by the customer shall be formalized by an act signed by both parties. In the event of the refusal of one of the parties to sign the act, a note shall be made thereon concerning this, including the reasons for such refusal, and the act shall be signed by the other party. A unilateral act of handing over and acceptance of the result of work may be deemed by a court to be invalid only if the reasons for the refusal to sign the act are deemed by it to be substantiated. 5. In instances when this has been provided for by the legislation or contract of construction independent work or arises from the character of the work to be fulfilled under the contract, preliminary tests must precede acceptance of the result of the work. In these instances acceptance may be effectuated only in the event of a positive result of the preliminary tests. 6. The customer shall have the right to refuse acceptance of the result of the work in the event of revealing of defects which exclude the possibility of using it for the purpose specified in the contract of construction independent work and cannot be eliminated by the independent work contractor or by the customer.
Article 709. Liability of Independent Work Contractor for Quality of Work l. The independent work contractor shall bear liability to the customer for committed deviations from the requirements provided for in the design and estimate documentation and construction norms and rules obligatory for the parties, and also for the failure to achieve the specifications of the object of construction specified in the design and estimate documentation, including those such as the productive capacity of the enterprise. 2. The independent work contractor shall not bear liability for insignificant deviations committed by him without the consent of the customer from the design and estimate documentation, if the contractor will prove that they did not affect the quality of the object of construction.
Article 710. Guarantees of Quality in Contract of Construction Independent Work
l. The independent work contractor, unless otherwise provided by the contract of construction independent work, shall guarantee the achievement of the specifications of the object of construction, specified in the design and estimate documentation, and the possibility of operation of the object in accordance with the contract of construction independent work throughout the guarantee period. The guarantee period established by the legislation may be increased by agreement of the parties. 2. The independent work contractor shall bear liability for defects revealed within the limits of the guarantee period unless the contractor will prove that these defects occurred as a consequence of normal wear and tear of the object or parts thereof, the incorrect operation thereof or the incorrectness of the instructions for its operation developed by the customer himself or by third persons involved by the customer, or improper repair of the object made by the customer himself or by the third persons involved by the customer. 3. The running of the guarantee period shall be interrupted for the entire time during the extent of which the object could not be operated as a consequence of the defects for which the independent work contractor is liable. 4. In the event of revealing the defects, specified in Article 709(1) of this Code, during the guarantee period, the customer (owner, possessor, user) of the object must, before the expiry of the specified guarantee period, in accordance with the procedure established by the legislation, to demand from the independent work contractor to eliminate the defects.
Article 711. Periods of Revealing of Improper Quality of Construction Work In the event of the submission of demands connected with the improper quality of the result of work, the rules provided for by Article 677(1-5) of this Code shall be applied. In so doing, the maximum period for the revealing of defects in accordance with Article 677(2) and (4) of this Code shall comprise five years.
Article 712. Elimination of Defects at Expense of Customer 1. The duty of the independent work contractor to eliminate defects, for which the independent work contractor does not bear liability, at the demand of the customer and at his expense, may be provided for by the contract of construction independent work. 2. The independent work contractor shall have the right to refuse fulfillment of the duty specified in Clause 1 of this Article in instances when the elimination of the defects is not connected directly with the subject of the contract or cannot be effectuated by the independent work contractor for reasons beyond his control.
§ 4. Independent Work Contract for Fulfillment of Design and Survey Work
Article 713. Contract of Independent Work for Fulfillment of Design and Survey Work 1. Under a contract of independent work for the fulfillment of design and survey work the independent work contractor (designer, surveyor) shall undertake to work out design and estimate documentation according to the order of the customer and/or to fulfill the survey work, and the customer shall undertake to accept and to pay for the result thereof. 2. Unless otherwise provided by the legislation or a contract, the risk of accidental impossibility to fulfill the contract for the design and survey work shall be borne by the customer.
Article 714. Basic Data for Fulfillment of Design and Survey Work
1. Under a contract of independent work for the fulfillment of design and survey work the customer shall be obliged to transfer to the independent work contractor the specification for the design, and also other basic data necessary for developing of the design and estimate documentation. The specification for the fulfillment of design work may be developed, subject to the order of the customer, by the independent work contractor. In this event the specification shall become obligatory for the parties from the time of its confirmation by the customer. 2. The independent work contractor shall be obliged to comply with the requirements contained in the specification and other basic data for the fulfillment of the design and survey work and shall have the right to deviate from the specification only with the consent of the customer.
Article 715. Duties of Independent work Contractor 1. Under a contract of independent work for the fulfillment of design and survey work the independent work contractor shall be obliged to: 1) fulfill work in accordance with the specification and other basic data for the design and with the contract; 2) coordinate the finished design and estimate documentation with the customer, and, when necessary, together with the customer, with competent state bodies and bodies of local administration or self- government; 3) transfer the finished design and estimate documentation and the results of the survey work to the customer. An independent work contractor shall not have the right to transfer design and estimate documentation to third persons without the consent of the customer. 2. The independent work contractor under a contract of independent work for the fulfillment of design and survey work shall guarantee to the customer the absence of the third person’s right to obstruct the fulfillment of the work or limit the fulfillment thereof on the basis of the design and estimate documentation prepared by the independent work contractor.
Article 716. Liability of Independent Work Contractor for Improper Fulfillment of Design and Survey Work l. The independent work contractor under a contract of independent work for the fulfillment of design and survey work shall bear liability for the improper developing of design and estimate documentation and for the improper fulfillment of survey work, including defects revealed subsequently in the course of construction, and also in the process of the operation of the object created on the basis of design and estimate documentation and the data of survey work. 2. In the event of revealing of defects in the design and estimate documentation or in the survey work the independent work contractor shall be obliged, at the demand of the customer, to re-develop the design and estimate documentation without compensation and respectively perform necessary additional survey work, and also to compensate the customer for losses caused, unless otherwise established by the legislation or by the contract of independent work for the fulfillment of design and survey work.
Article 717. Duties of Customer Under an independent work contract for the fulfillment of design and survey work the customer shall be obliged, unless otherwise provided by the contract, to: 1) pay for the independent work contractor the established price in full after the completion of all work or to pay for it in parts after the completion of individual stages of work;
2) use design and estimate documentation received from the independent work contractor only for the purposes provided for by the contract, not transfer the design and estimate documentation to third persons, and not divulge the data contained therein without the consent of the independent work contractor; 3) render assistance to the independent work contractor in the fulfillment of design and survey work to the extent and on the conditions provided for in the contract; 4) participate together with the independent work contractor in agreeing the finished design and estimate documentation with the respective state bodies and bodies of local administration or self-government; 5) compensate the independent work contractor for additional expenses caused by a change of basic data for the fulfillment of design and survey work as a consequence of the circumstances beyond the control of the independent work contractor; 6) involve the independent work contractor to participate in the case with regard to a suit brought against the customer by a third person in connection with shortcomings in the design and estimate documentation developed or survey work fulfilled.
§ 5. [Excluded]
Article 718. [Excluded]
Article 719. [Excluded]
Article 720. [Excluded]
Article 721. [Excluded]
Article 722. [Excluded] CHAPTER 38
Fulfillment of Scientific research, Experimental Design and Technological Work
Article 723. Contracts for Fulfillment of Scientific Research Work and Experimental Design and Technological Work 1. Under a contract for the fulfillment of scientific research work, one party (the executor) shall undertake to carry out the scientific researches stipulated by the specification of the customer, or, under a contract for the fulfillment of experimental design and technological work, to develop the sample of a new product, design documentation for it, or new technology, and the customer shall undertake to accept the work and to pay for it. 2. A contract with the executor may cover both the entire cycle of carrying out the research, development, and manufacture of the specimen, or individual stages (elements) thereof. 3. Unless otherwise provided by the legislation or contract, the risk of accidental impossibility of performance of contracts for the fulfillment of scientific research work, experimental design and technological work shall be borne by the customer. 4. [Excluded]
Article 724. Fulfillment of Work
1. The executor shall be obliged to conduct scientific research personally. He shall have the right to involve third persons to perform the contract for the fulfillment of scientific research work only with the consent of the customer. 2. In the event of the fulfillment of experimental design or technological work the executor shall have the right, unless otherwise provided by the contract, to involve third persons in the performance thereof. The rules concerning the general independent work contractor and independent work subcontractor (Article 660) shall apply to relations of the executor with third persons.
Article 725. Confidentiality of Information Comprising Subject of Contract 1. Unless otherwise provided by contracts for the fulfillment of scientific research work, experimental design and technological work, the parties shall be obliged to ensure the confidentiality of information concerning the subject of the contract, the course of its performance, and the results obtained. The amount of information deemed to be confidential shall be determined in the contract. 2. Each of the parties shall undertake to publish the information obtained when fulfilling the work, deemed to be confidential, only with the consent of the other party.
Article 726. Rights of Parties to Results of Work 1. The parties to contracts for the fulfillment of scientific research work, experimental design and technological work shall have the right to use the results of the work, including those capable of legal protection, within the limits and on the conditions provided for by the contract. 2. Unless otherwise provided by the contract, the rights on the results of works, including those capable of being legally protected, within the framework of the subject of the contract, belong to the customer, and the executor is entitled to use the results of works obtained by him for his own needs. The use for one’s own needs may not be understood as the activity directed at obtaining systematically the profit from the use of the results of works.
Article 727. Duties of Executor The executor in contracts for the fulfillment of scientific research work, experimental design and technological work shall be obliged to: 1) fulfill work in accordance with the specification agreed with the customer and transfer to the customer the results thereof within the period provided for by the contract; 2) agree with the customer the necessity of using the protected results of intellectual activity which belong to third persons and the acquisition of the rights for the use thereof; 3) eliminate with his own forces and at own expense the defects committed through his own fault in the work fulfilled, which might entail deviations from the technical and economic parameters provided for in the specification or in the contract; 4) immediately inform the customer about the impossibility revealed of receiving the anticipated results or the unreasonableness of continuing the work; 5) guarantee to the customer the transfer of results received under the contract which do not violate the exclusive rights of other persons.
Article 728. Duties of Customer 1. The customer in contracts for the fulfillment of scientific research work, experimental design and technological work shall be obliged to:
1) transfer information to the executor necessary for the fulfillment of work; 2) accept the results of the work fulfilled and pay for these results. 2. The duty of the customer to issue a specification to the executor and to agree a program (technical and economic parameters) or subjects of the work with the executor also may be provided for by the contract.
Article 729. Consequences of Impossibility of Achieving Results of Scientific Research Work If in the course of scientific research work the impossibility is revealed of achieving the results as a consequence of circumstances beyond the control of the executor, the customer shall be obliged to pay for the cost of the work carried out until the impossibility of receiving the results, provided for by the contract for the fulfillment of the scientific research work, was revealed, but not higher than the respective part of the price of the work, specified in the contract.
Article 730. Consequences of Impossibility to Continue Experimental Design and Technological Work If in the course of the fulfillment of experimental design and technological work the impossibility or unreasonableness of continuing the work is revealed which arose not through the fault of the executor, the customer shall be obliged to pay for the expenditures incurred by the executor.
Article 731. Liability of Executor for Violation of Contract 1. The executor shall bear liability to the customer for a violation of contracts for the fulfillment of scientific- research work, experimental design, and technological work unless it is proved that such violation occurred not through the fault of the executor (Article 372(1)). 2. The executor shall be obliged to compensate losses, caused by him to the customer, within the limits of the cost of the work in which the defects were revealed, if it is not provided by the contract that they are subject to compensation within the limits of the total cost of the work under the contract. Lost advantage shall be subject to compensation in the instances provided for by the contract.
Article 732. Legal Regulation of Contracts for Fulfillment of Scientific Research Work, Experimental Design and Technological Work Rules of Articles 662, 663 and 693 of this Code shall apply to the terms of fulfillment and cost of the work, as well as to the consequences of non-appearance of the customer for receipt the results of the works.
CHAPTER 39 Compensated Rendering of Services
Article 733. Contract of Compensated Rendering of Services 1. Under a contract of compensated rendering of services one party (the executor) shall undertake, under the order of the other party (the customer), to render services (perform determined actions or effectuate a determined activity), and the customer shall undertake to pay for these services. 2. The rules of this Chapter shall apply to contracts for rendering of medical, veterinary, audit, consulting, informational, real estate, tourism services, communication services, education and other services, except for services rendered under the contracts specified in Chapters 37, 38, 40, 41, 44-49, 51, and 52 of this Code.
Article 734. Performance of Contract of Compensated Rendering of Services Unless otherwise provided by the contract of compensated rendering of services, the executor shall be obliged to render the services personally.
Article 735. Payment for Services 1. The customer shall he obliged to pay for services rendered to him within the periods and in accordance with the procedure which has been specified in the legislation or in the contract of compensated rendering of services. 2. In the event of the impossibility of performance which arose through the fault of the customer, the services shall be subject to payment in full unless otherwise provided by the legislation or by the contract of compensated rendering of services. 3. In an instance when impossibility of performance arose through circumstances for which neither of the parties is liable, the customer shall compensate the executor for the expenses actually incurred by him unless otherwise provided by the legislation or by the contract of compensated rendering of services.
Article 736. Unilateral Refusal to Perform Contract of Compensated Rendering of Services 1. The customer shall have the right to refuse performance of a contract of compensated rendering of services on condition of payment to the executor of expenses actually incurred by him. 2. The executor shall have the right to refuse performance of obligations under a contract of compensated rendering of services only on condition of the full compensation of losses to the customer.
Article 737. Legal Regulation of Contract of Compensated Rendering of Services The general provisions on independent work contract (Articles 656-682) and the provisions on domestic independent work contract (Articles 683-695) shall apply to the contract of compensated rendering of services unless this is contrary to Articles 733-736 of this Code, and also to the peculiarities of the subject of the contract of compensated rendering of services.
CHAPTER 40 Carriage
Article 738. General Provisions on Carriage The carriage of goods, passengers, and luggage shall be effectuated on the basis of the contract of carriage. The general conditions of carriage shall be determined by this Code, the transport charters and codes, other acts of legislation, and also by an agreement of the parties. The rules of this Chapter are applied to the carriages only so far unless otherwise provided by legislative acts. The conditions for the carriage of goods, passengers, and luggage by individual types of transport, and also liability of the parties for these carriages, shall be determined by agreement of the parties unless otherwise established by this Code, transport charters and codes, other acts of legislation, and rules issued in accordance therewith by the Republic's bodies of the state administration.
Article 739. Contract of Carriage of Goods 1. Under a contract for the carriage of goods the carrier shall undertake to deliver the goods entrusted to him by the consignor to the point of destination and to hand these goods over to the person (consignee) authorized to receive the goods, and the consignor shall be obliged to pay the established payment for the carriage of the goods. 2. The conclusion of the contract of carriage of goods shall be confirmed by drawing up a transport waybill (bill of lading or other document for goods, provided for by the respective transport charter or code, by other acts of legislation).
Article 740. Contract of Carriage of Passenger 1. Under the contract of carriage of a passenger, the carrier shall undertake to carry the passenger to the point of destination, and in the event of the passenger handing over the luggage, also to deliver the luggage to the point of destination and to hand it over to the person authorized to receive the luggage; the passenger shall undertake to pay, unless otherwise determined by legislative acts, the established payment for the travel, and in the event of handing over luggage, also for the carriage of the luggage. 2. Unless otherwise determined by legislation, the conclusion of a contract of carriage of a passenger shall be certified by a ticket; and/or another document specified by legislation, and the handing over of luggage by the passenger shall be certified by a luggage receipt. The forms of ticket and luggage receipt shall be established in accordance with the procedure provided for by transport charters and codes, other acts of legislation. 3. The passenger shall have the right in accordance with the procedure provided for by the respective transport charter or codes, other acts of legislation to: 1) [excluded] 2) carry his hand luggage free of charge with within the limits of established norms; 3) hand over luggage for carriage for payment according to the tariff.
Article 741. Contract of Affreightment Under a contract of affreightment one party (freighter) shall undertake to grant to the other party (affreighter) for payment all or part of the capacity of one or several means of transport for one or several voyages for the carriage of goods, passengers, and luggage. The procedure for the conclusion of the contract of charter, and also the form of the said contract, shall be established by transport charters and codes.
Article 742. Mixed Carriage 1. Mixed carriage means carriage of goods, passengers, and luggage by at least two types of transport. 2. Mixed carriage of goods shall be effectuated or provided by the forwarding agent under the forwarding contract in accordance with the procedure provided for by Chapter 41 of this Code. 3. Mixed carriage of goods, passengers, and luggage under a single transport document is a direct mixed transport. The mutual relations of carriers in various types of transport, and the procedure of the organization of direct mixed carriages, shall be determined by transport charters and codes and by other acts of legislation.
Article 743. Carriage by Transport of Common Use
1. Carriage being effectuated by a carrier shall be deemed to be carriage by transport of common use if from the legislative acts, or the special permit (license) issued to this carrier it arises that this organization is obliged to effectuate the carriage of goods, passengers, and luggage upon the recourse of any citizen or legal person. 2. A list of organizations obliged to effectuate carriage deemed to be carriages by transport of common use shall be published in the established procedure. 3. The contract of carriage by transport of common use shall be a public contract (Article 396).
Article 744. Fare 1. The fare established by agreement of the parties, unless otherwise provided by the legislation, shall be recovered for the carriage of goods, passengers, and luggage. 2. Payment for the carriage of goods, passengers, and luggage by transport of common use shall be determined on the basis of tariffs established in accordance with the legislation. 3. Work and services being fulfilled by the carrier at the demand of the goods possessor and not provided for by the tariffs shall be paid by agreement of the parties. 4. The carrier shall have the right to retain goods and luggage, handed over to him for carriage, to secure the fare due to him and other payments relating to carriage (Article 340) unless otherwise established by the legislation or does not arise from the essence of the obligation. 5. In instances when in accordance with the legislations privileges or preferences have been established with regard to the fare for the carriage of goods, passengers, and luggage, the expenses incurred in connection therewith shall be compensated to the transport organization at the expense of the respective budget.
Article 745. Supply of Means of Transport, Loading, and Unloading of Goods 1. The carrier shall be obliged to supply to the consignor of goods for loading, within the period established by the contract of carriage, means of transport in good condition, fit for carriage of the respective goods. The consignor of goods shall have the right to refuse the means of transport supplied which are not fit for the carriage of the respective goods. ' 2. The loading (unloading) of the goods shall be effectuated by the transport organization or consignor (consignee) in accordance with the procedure provided for by the contract in compliance with the provisions established by the legislation and by the rules issued in accordance therewith by the Republic's bodies of the state administration. 3. The loading (unloading) of goods effectuated by the forces and means of the consignor (consignee) of the goods must be effectuated within the periods provided for by the contract, unless such periods have been established by the legislation and by the rules issued in accordance therewith by the Republic's bodies of the state administration.
Article 746. Periods of Delivery of Goods, Passenger, and Luggage The carrier shall be obliged to deliver goods, passenger, or luggage to the Clause of destination within the periods determined in accordance with the procedure provided for by the transport charters and codes, and in the absence of such periods, within a reasonable period.
Article 747. Liability for Violation of Obligations Relating to Carriage
1. In the event of the failure to perform or the improper performance of obligations relating to carriage, the parties shall bear liability established by this Code and other acts of legislation, and also by agreement of the parties. 2. The agreements of carriers with passengers and goods possessors concerning the limitation or elimination of the liability, established by the legislation, shall be invalid, except for instances when the possibility of such agreements in carriages of goods has been provided for by the legislation.
Article 748. Liability of Carrier for Failure to Provide Means of Transport. Liability of Consignor for Failure to Use Means of Transport Provided 1. The carrier shall bear the liability established by the legislation and by the agreement of the parties, for the failure to supply means of transport for the carriage of goods in accordance with the contract, and the consignor shall bear such liability for the failure to submit the goods or failure to use the means of transport supplied for other reasons. 2. The carrier and the consignor of goods shall be relieved of liability in the event of the failure to supply means of transport or the failure to use the means of transport supplied if this occurred as a consequence of: 1) force majeure, and other phenomena of a natural character (fires, avalanches, floods) and military actions; 2) termination or limitation of the carriage of goods in determined directions established in accordance with the procedure provided for by the legislation; 3) in other instances provided for by transport charters and codes.
Article 749. Liability of Carrier for Delay of Departure of Passenger 1. For a delay of the departure of the means of transport carrying a passenger, or for the late arrival of such means of transport at the point of destination (except for urban and sub-urban automobile carriages in regular traffic, carriages by urban electric transport in regular traffic and metro, carriages by inland public water transport in urban and sub-urban traffic, and also of carriages by public railway transport in trains of urban lines and regional economy-class transport) the carrier shall pay to the passenger a fine in the amount established by the legislation, unless the carrier would prove that the delay or lateness occurred as a consequence of force majeure, elimination of the disrepair of the means of transport threatening the life and health of passengers, or other circumstances beyond the control of the carrier. 2. In the event of the refusal of the passenger of carriage by reason of delay of the departure of the means of transport, the carrier shall be obliged to return the fare to the passenger.
Article 750. Liability of Carrier for Loss, Shortage, and Damage (Spoilage) of Goods or Luggage l. The carrier shall bear liability for the failure to preserve goods or luggage which occurred after the acceptance thereof for carriage and before handing over to the consignee or person authorized to receive the luggage, unless the carrier would prove that the loss, shortage, or damage (spoilage) of the goods or luggage occurred as a consequence of circumstances which the carrier could not prevent and the elimination of which was beyond its control. 2. Damage caused during the carriage of goods or luggage shall be compensated by the carrier: 1) in the event of the loss or shortage of goods or luggage—in the amount of the value of the lost or short goods or luggage; 2) in the event of damage (spoilage) of the goods or luggage—in the amount by which its value was reduced, and if it is impossible to restore the damaged good or luggage—in the amount of its value;
3) in the event of the loss of the goods or luggage handed over to the carrier with a declaration of the value thereof—in the amount of the declared value of the goods or luggage. The value of the goods or luggage shall be determined on the ground of the price thereof specified in the bill of the seller or provided for by the contract, or, in the absence of the bill or specification of the price in the contract, on the ground of the price which under comparable circumstances usually applied for similar goods. 3. The carrier shall, together with compensation of the established damage caused by the loss, shortage, or damage (spoilage) of the goods or luggage, return to the consignor (consignee) the fare recovered for carriage of the lost, shortly delivered, spoiled, or damaged goods or luggage unless this payment is part of the value of the goods. 4. The documents concerning the reasons for the failure to preserve the goods or luggage (commercial act, act of general form, and so forth) drawn up by the carrier unilaterally, in the event of a dispute, shall be subject to valuation by the court together with other documents certifying the circumstances which might serve as grounds for the liability of the carrier, consignor, or consignee of the goods or luggage.
Article 751. Claims and Suits With Regard to Carriages of Goods 1. Before bringing suit against a carrier arising from the carriage of goods, the submission of a claim to the carrier in accordance with the procedure provided for by the legislation shall be obligatory. 2. A suit against the carrier may be brought by the consignor or consignee in the event of the full or partial refusal of the carrier to satisfy the claim or non-receiving a reply from the carrier within a thirty-day period. 3. The limitation period with regard to demands arising from the carriage of goods shall be established at one year from the time determined in accordance with the legislation.
Article 752. Contracts on Organization of Carriages 1. The carrier and goods possessor may, in the event of the necessity to effectuate the regular carriages of goods, conclude contracts concerning the organization of carriages. Under a contract of the organization of carriage of goods the carrier shall undertake, within the established periods, to accept, and the goods possessor shall undertake to submit goods for carriage in the stipulated amount. The amounts, periods, and other conditions for providing means of transport and presenting goods for carriage, the procedure for the settlement of accounts, and also other conditions for the organization of carriage, shall be determined in the contract concerning the organization of the carriage of goods. 2. The carrier may, in the event of the necessity to effectuate the regular carriages of passengers, conclude contracts with citizens or legal persons, concerning the organization of carriages of passengers. A contract of the organization of carriage of passengers shall be concluded in writing. The route, number of trips, periods, and other conditions for providing means of transport for carriage, the procedure for the settlement of accounts, and also other conditions for the organization of carriage, shall be determined in the contract concerning the organization of the carriage of passengers.
Article 753. Contracts Between Carriers Contracts concerning the organization of work relating to organization of the carriage of goods (node agreements, contracts for centralized delivery (removal) of goods and others) may be concluded between organizations of various types of transport. The procedure for the conclusion of such contracts shall be determined by transport charters and codes, and by other acts of legislation.
Article 754. Liability of Carrier for Harm Caused to Life or Health of Passenger The liability of a carrier for harm caused to the life or health of a passenger shall be determined according to the rules of Chapter 58 of this Code unless increased liability of the carrier has been provided for by the legislation or by the contract of carriage.
CHAPTER 41 Forwarding
Article 755. Contract of Forwarding 1. Under a contract of forwarding one party (forwarder) shall undertake, for remuneration and at the expense of the other party (client - consignor or consignee), to fulfill or organize the fulfillment of the services, connected with the carriage of goods, determined by the contract of forwarding. The duties of the forwarder to organize the carriage of goods by transport and according to the route selected by the forwarder or the client, the duty of the forwarder to conclude a contract(s) for the carriage of goods in the name of the client or in his own name, to ensure the sending and receipt of the goods, and also other duties connected with carriage may be provided for by the contract of forwarding. The effectuation of such operations necessary for the delivery of goods as obtaining of documents required for export or import, the fulfillment of customs and other formalities, verification of the quantity and condition of goods, the loading and unloading thereof, the payment of expenses placed on the client, the storage of goods, the receipt thereof at the point of destination, and also the fulfillment of other operations and services provided for by the contract, may be provided for by the contract of forwarding as additional services. 2. The rules of this Chapter shall extend also to instances when in accordance with the contract the duties of forwarder are performed by the carrier. 3. The conditions of the fulfillment of the contract of forwarding shall be determined by agreement of the parties unless otherwise established by the legislation. 4. The contract of forwarding shall be concluded in written form. 5. The client must issue a power of attorney to the forwarder if it is necessary for the fulfillment of his duties.
Article 756. Liability of Forwarder Under Contract of Transport Forwarding For the failure to perform or the improper performance of duties under the contract of forwarding the forwarder shall bear liability on the grounds and in the amount which is determined in accordance with the rules of Chapter 25 of this Code. If the forwarder proves that a violation of the obligation has been caused by the improper performance of the contracts of carriage, the liability of the forwarder to the client shall be determined according to the same rules under which the respective carrier is liable to the forwarder.
Article 757. Documents and Other Information Granted to Forwarder 1. The client shall be obliged to grant to the forwarder documents and other information concerning the properties of the goods, conditions of carriage thereof, and also other information necessary for the performance of the duty by the forwarder provided for by the contract of forwarding. 2. The forwarder shall be obliged to notify the client on the revealed drawbacks of the information received, and in the event of the incompleteness of the information, to request necessary additional data from the client.
3. In the event of the failure of the client to grant the necessary information, the forwarder shall have the right not to embark upon performance of the respective duties until such information is granted. 4. The client shall bear liability for losses caused to the forwarder in connection with the violation of the duty relating to the granting of the information specified in Clause 1 of this Article.
Article 758. Performance of Duties of Forwarder by Third Person Unless it follows from the contract of forwarding that the forwarder must perform his duties personally, the forwarder shall have the right to involve other persons in the performance of his duties. The imposition of the performance of an obligation on a third person shall not relieve the forwarder from liability to the client for the performance of the contract.
Article 759. Unilateral Refusal of Performance of Contract of Forwarding Any of the parties shall have the right to refuse to perform a contract of forwarding, having warned the other party thereof within a reasonable period. In the event of the unilateral refusal to perform the contract, the party which has declared the refusal shall compensate the other party for losses caused by the dissolution of the contract.
CHAPTER 42 Loan and Credit
§ 1. Loan
Article 760. Contract of Loan 1. Under a contract of loan one party (lender) shall transfer to the ownership of the other party (borrower) money or other things defined by generic attributes, and the borrower shall be obliged to return to the lender the same amount of money (amount of loan) or equal quantity of other things received by him of the same kind and quality. Acts of legislation may establish specific features of granting by the legal persons and individual entrepreneurs of loans in the sum not exceeding 15 000 base units for one borrower on the day of conclusion of the contract. 2. The contract of loan shall be considered to be concluded from the time of transfer of the money or other things, unless otherwise provided for in the legislative acts. 3. Foreign currency and currency valuables may be the subject of a contract of loan on the territory of the Republic of Belarus in compliance with the rules of Articles 141, 142, and 298 of this Code.
Article 761. Form of Contract of Loan 1. A contract of loan between citizens must be concluded in written form if the amount thereof is not less than ten times the basic value established by the legislation, and in an instance when the lender is a legal person, irrespective of the amount. 2. In confirmation of a contract of loan and its conditions a receipt of the borrower or other document certifying the transfer to him by the lender of the determined monetary amount or determined quantity of things may be submitted.
Article 762. Interest Under Contract of Loan
1. Unless otherwise provided by the legislation or by the contract of loan, the lender shall have the right to obtain interest from the borrower on the amount of the loan in the amounts and in accordance with the procedure determined by the contract. In the absence of a condition in the contract, concerning the amount of interest, the amount thereof shall be determined as the refinance rate of the National bank of the Republic of Belarus on the date of payment by the borrower of the amount of the debt or corresponding part thereof. 2. In the absence of another agreement, interest shall be paid monthly until the date of return of the amount of the loan. 3. A contract of loan shall be presupposed to be without interest unless expressly provided otherwise therein in instances when: 1) the contract is concluded between citizens for an amount not exceeding fifty times the basic value established by the legislation and is not connected with the effectuation of entrepreneurial activity by either of the parties; 2) under the contract, not money, but other things defined by generic attributes are transferred to the borrower.
Article 763. Duty of Borrower to Return Amount of Loan 1. The borrower shall be obliged to return to the lender the amount of the loan received within the period and in accordance with the procedure provided for by the contract of loan. In instances when the period of return is not established by the contract or is determined by the time of demand, the amount of the loan must be returned by the borrower within thirty days from the date of submission by the lender of the demand therefor, unless otherwise provided by the contract. 2. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of loan, the amount of an interest-free loan may be returned by the borrower before time. The amount of the loan granted under interest may be returned before time with the consent of the lender or if this is provided for by the contract. 3. Unless otherwise provided by a contract of loan, the amount of the loan shall be considered to be returned at the time of the transfer thereof to the lender оr crediting of the respective monetary assets in his bank account.
Article 764. Consequences of Violation by Borrower of Contract of Loan 1. Unless otherwise provided by the legislation or by the contract of loan, in instances when the borrower does not return the amount of the loan within the period, interest shall be subject to payment on this amount in the amount provided for by Article 366(1) of this Code from the day when it should have been returned up to the day of its return to the lender irrespective of the payment of interest provided for by Article 762(1) of this Code. 2. If return of the loan has been provided for by the contract of loan in parts (installment), then in the event of a violation of the period established for return of the regular part of the loan by the borrower, the lender shall have the right to demand the return, before time, of the entire amount remaining, together with the interest due.
Article 765. Contesting Contract of Loan 1. The borrower shall have the right to contest a contract of loan for its impecuniousness, proving that the money or other things really were not obtained by him from the lender or were obtained in a lesser quantity than specified in the contract.
2. If the contract of loan was concluded in written form (Article 761), the contesting thereof for impecuniousness by means of witness testimony shall not be permitted, except for instances when the contract was concluded under the influence of fraud, coercion, threat, or ill-intentioned agreement of a representative of the borrower with the lender, or the confluence of grave circumstances. 3. If in the process of the contesting of a contract of loan by the borrower for impecuniousness it is established that the money or other things were really not obtained from the lender, the contract of loan shall be considered to be not concluded. When money or things were really obtained by the borrower from the lender in a lesser quantity than is specified in the contract, the contract shall be considered to be concluded for this quantity of money or things.
Article 766. Consequences of Loss of Securing of Obligations of Borrower In the event of the failure of the borrower to fulfill the duties provided for by the contract of loan with regard to securing the return of the amount of the loan, and also in the event of the loss of securing or a worsening of its conditions under circumstances for which the lender is not liable, the lender shall have the right to demand from the borrower the repayment of the amount of the loan before time and the payment of interest due unless otherwise provided by the contract.
Article 767. Special-Purpose Loan 1. If a contract of loan was concluded with a condition of the use by the borrower of means received for specified purposes (special-purpose loan), the borrower shall be obliged to ensure the possibility of the effectuation by the lender of control over the use of the amount of the loan for the purpose specified. 2. In the event of the failure to fulfill the conditions of the contract of loan by the borrower concerning the use of the amount of the loan for the specified purpose, and also in the event of a violation of the duties provided for by Clause 1 of this Article, the lender shall have the right to demand from the borrower repayment of the amount of the loan before time and the payment of interest due unless otherwise provided by the contract.
Article 768. Loan Granted Against Bill of Exchange or Bond The rules of this Chapter shall apply to the relations concerning the loan granted against the bill of exchange or the bond, insofar as this is not contrary to the legislation on issuance and turnover of bills of exchange or issue and turnover of bonds.
Article 769. Contract of State Loan The rules of this Chapter shall apply to the relations concerning the loan, in which the Republic of Belarus or its administrative territorial unit acts as the borrower, insofar as this is not contrary to the acts of legislation.
Article 770. Commercial Loan The rules of this Chapter shall extend also to the instances of advance, prepayment, deferral, and installment payment for goods, works and services (commercial loan), unless otherwise provided by the legislation.
Article 771. Credit Contract
1. Under a credit contract a bank or non-bank credit and financial institution (creditor) shall undertake to grant monetary means (credit) to the other party (borrower) in the amount and on the conditions provided for by the contract, and the borrower shall undertake to return the monetary amount received and to pay interest on it. 2. The rules provided for by this Chapter shall apply to relations under the credit contract, taking into consideration the peculiarities established by the legislation.
CHAPTER 43 Financing Under Cession of Monetary Demand (Factoring)
Article 772. Contract of Financing Under Cession of Monetary Demand
1. 1. Under a contract of financing under cession of a monetary demand (factoring), one party (factor) undertakes for the other party (creditor) or the parties (creditor and debtor) to enter into the monetary obligation between the creditor and the debtor by means of payment to the creditor of the sum of the debtor’s monetary obligation for remuneration.
Remuneration to the factor shall be paid by the creditor (debtor) in the form of a discount (difference between the amount of the debtor’s monetary obligation and the sum payable to the creditor) and/or in other forms determined by contract of factoring.
2. The bank or non-bank credit and financial institution may act as the factor. 3. The contract of factoring may be concluded concerning both one monetary obligation or several monetary obligations, including those that can appear in the future, in particular, homogeneous monetary obligations of obtaining payment for the goods delivered. 4. The relations concerning factoring shall be regulated by the legislation.
CHAPTER 44 Bank Deposit
Article 773. Contract of Bank Deposit Under a contract of bank deposit one party (recipient of a deposit) shall accept from the other party (depositor) a monetary amount in Belarusian rubles or in foreign currency - a deposit, and undertake to return the monetary amount to the depositor, to fulfill transfers by the order of the depositor in accordance with the contract, and to pay interests on the deposit on the conditions and in the order provided for by this contract. Precious metals and/or precious stones may be received as a deposit under the contract of a bank deposit. The relations concerning the bank deposit shall be regulated by the legislation and the contract.
CHAPTER 45 Bank Account
Article 774. Contract of Current Bank Account Under a contract of bank account, one party (bank or non-bank credit and financial organization) shall undertake to open for the other party (account holder) the current account for keeping his monetary amounts and/or crediting monetary amounts arriving for benefit of the account holder, and to fulfill
instructions of the account holder concerning the transfer and issuance of respective amounts from the account; the account holder shall grant to the bank or the non-bank credit and financial organization the right to use temporarily free monetary amounts available in the account, with payment of interests, determined by the legislation or by the contract; and also, the account holder shall pay, with exception of cases specified in the legislative acts, the remuneration to the bank or the non-bank credit and financial organization for services rendered thereby. The relations concerning the current bank account shall be regulated by the legislation.
CHAPTER 46 Settlement of Accounts
Article 775. Settlement of Accounts 1. Settlements of accounts with the participation of citizens, not connected with the effectuation by them of entrepreneurial activity, may be performed in cash (Article 141) or as cashless settlements, established by the legislation. 2. Settlements of accounts between legal persons, and also settlement of accounts with the participation of citizens connected with the effectuation by them of entrepreneurial activity, shall be performed as cashless settlements. Settlements of accounts between these persons may be performed also in cash, in cases provided for by the legislation. 3. Cashless settlements of accounts shall be performed through banks or non-bank credit and financial organizations in which respective accounts have been opened, unless it arises otherwise from the act of legislation or is stipulated by the form of settlement of accounts being used. 4. The relations concerning the settlement of accounts shall be regulated by the legislation.
CHAPTER 47 Storage
§ 1. General Provisions on Storage
Article 776. Contract of Storage 1. Under a contract of storage one party (depository) shall undertake to keep a thing transferred to it by the other party (depositor) and to return this thing intact. 2. In a contract of storage in which the depository is a commercial organization or non-commercial organization carrying out storage as one of the purposes of its professional activity (professional depository), the duty of the depository to accept a thing for storage from the depositor within the period provided for by the contract may be provided for.
Article 777. Form of Contract of Storage 1. A contract of storage must be concluded in written form in the instances specified in Article 162 of this Code. In so doing, compliance with the written form shall be required for a contract of storage between citizens (Article 162, part 1, subclause 2) if the value of the thing being transferred for storage exceeds not less than ten times the basic value established by the legislation. A contract of storage providing for the duty of the depository to accept a thing for storage must be concluded in written form irrespective of the composition of the participants of this contract and the value of the thing being transferred for storage.
The transfer of a thing for storage under extraordinary circumstances (fire, natural disaster, sudden illness, threat of attack, and so forth) may be proved by witness testimony. 2. The simple written form of a contract of storage shall be considered to be complied with if the acceptance of the thing for storage is certified by the depository by the issuance to the depositor of: 1) deposit receipt, ticket, certificate, or other document signed by the depository; 2) numbered token (number), or other mark certifying the acceptance of the thing for storage, if such form of confirmation of the acceptance of the thing for storage has been provided for by the legal act or is customary for the particular type of storage. 3. The failure to comply with the simple written form of the contract of storage shall not deprive the party of the right to refer to witness testimony in the event of a dispute concerning the identity of the thing accepted for storage with the thing returned by the depository.
Article 778. Performance of Duty to Accept Thing for Storage 1. A depository who has assumed under a contract of storage the duty to accept a thing for storage (Article 776(2)) shall not have the right to demand the transfer of this thing to him for storage. However, the depositor, who has not transferred a thing for storage within the period provided for by the contract, shall bear liability to the depository for losses caused in connection with the abandoned storage unless otherwise provided by the legislation or the contract of storage. The depositor shall be relieved from this liability if he declares to the depository the refusal of his services within a reasonable period. 2. Unless otherwise provided by the contract, the depository shall be relieved from the duty to accept a thing for storage, if the thing is not transferred to him within the period stipulated by the contract.
Article 779. Period of Storage 1. The depository shall be obliged to keep a thing during the period stipulated by the contract of storage. 2. If the period of storage is not provided for by the contract and cannot be determined from its conditions, the depository shall be obliged to keep the thing until the demand thereof by the depositor. 3. If the period of storage is determined by the time of demand of the thing by the depositor, the depository shall have the right, upon the expiry of the period of storage of the thing usual under the particular circumstances, to demand that the depositor take the thing back, having granted him a reasonable period for this. The failure of the depositor to perform this duty shall entail the consequences provided for by Article 789 of this Code.
Article 780. Storage of Things with Pooling In instances expressly provided for by the contract of storage, things accepted for storage from one depositor may be mixed with the things of the same kind and quality of other depositors (storage with pooling). The equal quantity, or quantity stipulated by the parties, of the same kind and quality, shall be returned to the depositor.
Article 781. Duty of Depository to Ensure Preservation of Thing 1. The depository shall be obliged to take all measures provided for by the contract of storage in order to ensure the preservation of the thing transferred to him for storage. In the absence of conditions in the contract, concerning such measures, or in case of the incompleteness of these conditions, the depository must take measures for the preservation of the thing, which correspond to the essence of the obligation, including the measures for preservation of properties of the thing transferred for storage, unless the necessity for taking such measures is excluded by the contract.
2. The depository in any event must take measures for preservation of a thing transferred for storage, the obligatoriness of which has been provided for by the legislation, or in accordance with the procedure established by the legislation (measures of fire prevention, sanitary, protective etc.). 3. If the storage is effectuated without compensation, the depository shall be obliged to be concerned for the things accepted for storage not less than as for own things.
Article 782. Use of Thing Transferred for Storage The depository shall not have the right without the consent of the depositor to use a thing transferred for storage, nor to grant the possibility of use thereof to third persons, except for an instance when the use of the thing being kept is necessary in order to ensure the preservation thereof and is not contrary to the contract of storage.
Article 783. Change of Conditions of Storage 1. In the event of the necessity of a change of conditions of storage things, provided for by the contract of storage, the depository shall be obliged immediately to inform the depositor thereof and to await the answer. If a change of conditions for storage is necessary in order to eliminate the danger of loss, shortage, or damage of the thing, the depository shall have the right to change the means, place, and other conditions of storage without awaiting the answer of the depositor. 2. If during the storage a real threat of the spoilage of the thing arose, or the thing already has been subjected to spoilage, or circumstances arose which do not enable the preservation thereof to be ensured, and the timely taking of measures by the depositor cannot be expected, the depository shall have the right autonomously to sell the thing or part thereof at the price which has been formed at the place of storage. If the said circumstances arose for reasons for which the depository is not liable, he shall have the right to compensation of his expenses for the sale at the expense of the purchase price.
Article 784. Storage of Things with Dangerous Properties 1. Things which are inflammable, explosive, or in general inherently dangerous may, unless the depositor when handing them over for storage warned the depository about the properties thereof, be at any time rendered harmless or destroyed by the depository without compensation of losses to the depositor. The depositor shall be liable for losses caused in connection with the storage of such things to the depository and to third persons. In the event of the transfer of things with dangerous properties for storage to a professional depository, the rules provided for by paragraph one of this Clause shall apply in an instance when such things were handed over for storage under an incorrect name and the depository when accepting them could not surely determine their dangerous properties by means of visual inspection. In the event of storage for compensation in the instances provided for by this Clause, the remuneration paid for storage the things shall not be returned, and if it was not paid, the depository may recover it in full. 2. If the things, specified in the first part of Clause 1 of this Article, accepted for storage with the knowledge and consent of the depository, become, despite compliance with the conditions for their storage, dangerous for surrounding persons or for the property of the depository or third persons, and circumstances do not permit the depository to demand they be immediately taken back by the depositor, or the depositor does not fulfill this demand, these things may be rendered harmless or destroyed by the depository without compensation of losses to the depositor. In this event, the depositor shall not bear liability to the depository and third persons for losses caused in connection with the storage of these things.
Article 785. Transfer of Thing for Storage to Third Person Unless otherwise provided by a contract of storage, the depository shall not have the right without the consent of the depositor to transfer a thing for storage to a third person, except for instances when the depository was compelled to do so by force of circumstances in the interests of the depositor and had no possibility to receive his consent. The depository shall be obliged immediately to inform the depositor about the transfer of the thing for storage to a third person. In the event of the transfer of a thing for storage to a third person, the conditions of the contract between the depositor and the initial depository shall retain force and the latter shall be liable for the actions of the third person to which he transferred the thing for storage as though for his own.
Article 786. Remuneration for Storage 1. Remuneration for storage must be paid to the depository at the end of the storage, and if the payment for storage has been provided for by periods, it must be paid for by respective parts upon the expiry of each period. 2. In the event of delay of payment of remuneration for storage for more than half of a period for which it should have been paid, the depository shall have the right to refuse to perform the contract and demand that the depositor immediately take back the thing handed over for storage. 3. If the storage is terminated before the expiry of the stipulated period for circumstances for which the depository is not liable, he shall have the right to a commensurate part of the remuneration, and in the event provided for by Article 784(1) of this Code, to the full amount of remuneration. If the storage is terminated before time under circumstances for which the depository is liable, he shall not have the right to demand remuneration for storage, but must return to the depositor the amounts received on the account of this remuneration. 4. If upon the expiry of the period of storage a thing in storage is not taken back by the depositor, he shall be obliged to pay the depository commensurate remuneration for the further storage of the thing. This rule also shall apply in the event when the depositor is obliged to take back the thing before the expiry of the period of storage. 5. The rules of this Article shall apply unless otherwise provided by the contract of storage.
Article 787. Compensation of Expenses for Storage 1. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of storage, the expenses of the depository for the storage of a thing shall be included in the remuneration for storage. 2. In the event of storage without compensation, the depositor shall be obliged to compensate the depository for necessary expenses made by him for the storage of the thing, unless otherwise provided by the legislation or by the contract of storage.
Article 788. Extraordinary Expenses for Storage 1. Expenses for the storage of a thing which exceed ordinary expenses of this nature and which the parties could not foresee at conclusion of a contract of storage (extraordinary expenses), shall be compensated to the depository if the depositor gave consent to these expenses or approved them subsequently, and also in other instances provided for by the legislation or a contract. 2. When it is necessary to make extraordinary expenses, the depository shall be obliged to request the depositor for consent to these expenses. If the depositor does not inform the depository about his
disagreement within the period established by the depository, or within the time normally necessary for a reply, it shall be considered that the depositor has agreed to the extraordinary expenses. In an instance when the depository has made extraordinary expenses for storage, not having received the prior consent from the depositor to these expenses, although under the circumstances of the case this was possible, and the depositor subsequently did not approve these extraordinary expenses, the depository may demand compensation of extraordinary expenses only within the limits of the damage which might be caused to the thing if these expenses were not made. 3. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of storage, extraordinary expenses shall be compensated in addition to the remuneration for storage.
Article 789. Duty of Depositor to Take Thing Back 1. Upon the expiry of the stipulated period of storage or the period granted to the depository for receiving the thing back on the basis of Article 779(3) of this Code, the depositor shall be obliged to take back immediately the thing transferred for storage. 2. In the event of the failure of the depositor to perform his duty to take the thing back which was transferred for storage, including in the event of his evading to receive the thing, the depository shall have the right, unless otherwise provided by the contract of storage, after warning the depositor in writing, to sell the thing autonomously at the price existing in the place of storage, and if this price exceeds one hundred base units established by the legislation, to sell it at the auction in accordance with the procedure provided for by Articles 417-419 of this Code. The amount received from the sale of the thing shall be transferred to the depositor, less the amounts due to the depository, including the expenses for the sale of the thing.
Article 790. Duty of Depository to Return Thing 1. The depository shall be obliged to return to the depositor (to the person specified by the depositor as the recipient) that very thing which was transferred for storage, unless storage with pooling has been provided for by the contract (Article 780). 2. A thing must be returned by the depository in that condition in which it was accepted for storage, taking into account its natural deterioration, natural decrease, or other change as a consequence of its natural properties. 3. Simultaneously with the return of the thing the depository is obliged to transfer the yield and revenues obtained for the time of storage thereof, unless otherwise provided by the contract of storage.
Article 791. Grounds for Liability of Depository l. The depository shall be liable for loss, shortage, or damage of things accepted for storage on the grounds provided for by Article 372 of this Code. A professional depository shall be liable for loss, shortage, or damage of things unless the depository would prove that the loss, shortage, or damage occurred as a consequence of force majeure, or because of the properties of the thing, of which the depository did not know and should not have known at accepting it for storage, or as a result of intent or gross negligence of the depositor. 2. The depository shall be liable for loss, shortage, or damage of things accepted for storage after ensuing the duty of the depositor to take these things back (Article 789(1)) only in case of depository’s intent or gross negligence.
Article 792. Amount of Liability of Depository
1. Losses caused to the depositor by the loss, shortage, or damaging of a thing shall be compensated by the depository in accordance with Article 364 of this Code unless otherwise provided by the legislation or the contract of storage. 2. In the event of storage without payment, the losses caused to the depositor by the loss, shortage, or damaging of the thing shall be compensated: 1) for loss or shortage of the thing: in the amount of the value of the lost or shortly delivered things; 2) for the damaging of things: in the amount by which the value of things was reduced. 3.In an instance when as a result of the damage, for which the depository is liable the quality of the thing has been so changed that it cannot be used for its initial purpose, the depositor shall have the right to refuse it and to demand compensation from the depository for the value of this thing, and also of other losses, unless otherwise provided by the legislation or by the contract of storage.
Article 793. Compensation of Losses Caused to Depository The depositor shall be obliged to compensate the depository for losses caused by the properties of the thing handed over for storage, if the depository, in accepting the thing for storage, did not know and should not have known about these properties.
Article 794. Termination of Storage Upon Demand of Depositor The depository shall be obliged, at the first demand of the depositor, to return the thing accepted for storage, even though the period for the storage thereof provided for by the contract has not yet expired.
Article 795. Application of General Provisions on Storage to Individual Types Thereof The general provisions on storage (Articles 776-794) shall apply to individual types thereof, unless otherwise established by the rules on individual types of storage, contained in Articles 797-816 of this Code and in other acts of legislation.
Article 796. Storage by Virtue of Act of Legislation The rules of this Chapter shall apply to obligations of storage arising by virtue of the act of legislation, unless other rules have been established by the legislation.
§ 2. Storage in Warehouse
Article 797. Contract of Warehouse Storage 1. Under a contract of warehouse storage, a Warehouse (depository) shall undertake, for remuneration, to keep the goods transferred to it by the goods possessor (depositor) and to return these goods intact. A Warehouse shall be deemed to be an organization carrying out the storage of goods and rendering services connected with storage as entrepreneurial activity. 2. The written form of the contract of warehouse storage shall be considered to be complied with, if the conclusion thereof and the acceptance of the goods at the warehouse are certified by a warehouse document (Article 802).
Article 798. Storage of Goods by Warehouse of Common Use
l. The Warehouse shall be deemed to be a warehouse of common use, if it arises from the legislation or from the special permit (license) issued to this commercial organization that it is obliged to accept goods for storage from any goods possessor. 2. A contract of warehouse storage concluded by a Warehouse of common use shall be deemed to be a public contract (Article 396).
Article 799. Verification of Goods During Acceptance Thereof by Warehouse and During Storage 1. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of warehouse storage, a Warehouse shall, when accepting goods for storage, be obliged at its own expense to inspect the goods and determine the quantity thereof (number of units or goods pieces, or measure, weight, volume) and external condition. 2. A Warehouse shall be obliged to grant to the goods possessor the possibility, during the storage, to examine the goods or examples thereof, if the storage is effectuated by pooling, to take samples, and to take measures necessary to ensure the preservation of the goods.
Article 800. Changes of Conditions of Storage and State of Goods 1. In an instance when in order to ensure the preservation of the goods a change of the conditions of their storage is required, a Warehouse shall have the right to take the required measures autonomously. However, it shall be obliged to inform the goods possessor about the measures taken if it was necessary to change significantly the conditions of the storage of the goods provided for by the contract of warehouse storage. 2. In the event of revealing, during storage, the damaging of a good which exceeds the limits agreed in the contract of warehouse storage or ordinary norms of natural spoilage, the Warehouse shall be obliged immediately to draw up an act concerning this and to notify the goods possessor at the same day.
Article 801. Verification of Quantity and State of Good at Return Thereof to Goods Possessor 1. Both the goods possessor and Warehouse shall have the right to demand, at returning a good, to inspect it and verify the quantity thereof. The expenses caused by this shall be borne by the party which demanded inspection of the goods or verification of the quantity thereof. 2. If, when returning the goods from the warehouse to the goods possessor, the goods were not jointly inspected or verified by them, a statement concerning the shortage or damaging of the goods as a consequence of the improper storage thereof must be made for the warehouse in writing when receiving the goods, and with respect to shortage or damage which could not be revealed with the ordinary means of accepting the goods, within three days upon the receipt thereof. In the absence of the statement of the goods possessor, specified in the first part of this Clause, it shall be considered, unless it is proved otherwise, that the good was returned by the warehouse in accordance with the conditions of the contract of warehouse storage.
Article 802. Warehouse Documents
1. A warehouse shall issue in confirmation of the acceptance of goods for storage one of the following warehouse documents: 1) dual warehouse certificate; 2) simple warehouse certificate; 3) warehouse receipt. It is not allowed to issue a dual warehouse certificate or a simple warehouse certificate upon acceptance for the storage of: property that does not belong to the depositor on the right of ownership or on another real right;
securities; property encumbered by the pledge; property that cannot be preserved without loss of quality and quantity characteristics within the total validity period of the contract of storage; property in relation to which proceedings on actions for reclamation from other unlawful possession is not terminated; property on which the execution may not be levied in accordance with the legislation.
2. A dual warehouse certificate shall consist of two parts, the warehouse certificate and the pledge certificate (warrant), which may be separated one from the other.
3. A dual warehouse certificate, each of the two parts thereof, and a simple warehouse certificate shall be securities.
4. A good accepted for storage under simple warehouse certificate may be, during the storage thereof, the subject of pledge by means of separating and transferring the pledge certificate. Upon pledge of the good, a note thereabout shall be made on the warehouse certificate.
Article 803. Dual Warehouse Certificate l. In each part of a dual warehouse certificate there must be identically indicated: 1) the name and location of the Warehouse which accepted the good for storage; 2) the number of the warehouse certificate according to the register of the warehouse; 3) the name of the legal person or the name of the citizen from which the good was accepted for storage, and also the location (place of residence) of the goods possessor; 4) the name and quantity of the good accepted for storage: number of units and/or pieces of the good and/or the measure (weight, volume) of the good; 5) the period for which the good is accepted for storage, if such period is established, or an indication that the good is accepted for storage till called for; 6) the amount of remuneration for storage or the tariffs on the basis of which it is calculated, and the procedure of payment for storage; 7) the date of issuance of the warehouse certificate. Both parts of the dual warehouse certificate must have identical signatures of the authorized person and the seal of the Warehouse. 2. A document which does not correspond to the requirements of this Article shall not be a dual warehouse certificate.
Article 804. Rights of Holders of Warehouse and Pledge Certificates 1. The holder of a warehouse and pledge certificates shall have the right to dispose of the good being kept in the warehouse in full. 2. The holder of the warehouse certificate separated from the pledge certificate shall have the right to dispose of the good, but may not take it from the warehouse until payment by him of the total sum of the debt under the pledge certificate. 3. The holder of a pledge certificate, other than the holder of the warehouse certificate, shall have the right of pledge to the good in the amount of the sum of obligation for securing which the pledge certificate has been transferred.
4. A warehouse is not entitled to act as the holder of a dual warehouse certificate (part thereof) issued by it.
5. The holder of the warehouse certificate who separated the pledge certificate is not entitled to alienate the warehouse certificate until the payment of the total sum of debt under the pledge certificate.
Article 805. Transfer of Warehouse and Pledge Certificates
1. The warehouse certificate and the pledge certificate may be transferred together or separately under transfer inscriptions (endorsements).
2. The endorsement should be simple and unconditional. Any condition limiting it, with the exception of cases provided for by legislative acts, shall be considered null and void. Partial endorsement is invalid.
3. Inclusion of reservations into the text of the endorsement, introduction of changes and additions into the text of previous endorsements, warehouse certificate or pledge certificate when making the next endorsement, as well as commissioning of the blank endorsement are not allowed.
4. Endorsements made in violation of the requirements established by this Article shall be deemed invalid.
Article 806. Issuance of Good Under Dual Warehouse Certificate 1. A Warehouse shall issue the good to the holder of the warehouse and pledge certificates (dual warehouse certificate) only in exchange for both these certificates together. Upon payment of the total sum of the debt on the pledge certificate, the pledge certificate shall be returned to the holder of the warehouse certificate, a note shall be made thereon about the payment of the total sum of the debt and the termination of the pledge. 2. A good shall be issued by the warehouse to the holder of a warehouse certificate who does not have the pledge certificate, but has contributed the amount of the debt with regard to it, only in exchange for the warehouse certificate and subject to condition of the submission, together with it, of a document confirming the payment of the full amount of the debt under the pledge certificate. 3. A Warehouse which, contrary to the requirements of this Article, has issued a good to the holder of a warehouse certificate, who does not have the pledge certificate and has not contributed the amount of the debt with regard to it, shall bear liability to the holder of the pledge certificate for fulfillment of the obligation for securing which the pledge certificate has been transferred. 4. The holder of warehouse and pledge certificates shall have the right to demand the issuance of the good in parts. In so doing, new certificates for the good remaining in the warehouse shall be issued to him in exchange for the original certificates.
Article 807. Simple Warehouse Certificate 1. A simple warehouse certificate shall be issued to the bearer. 2. A simple warehouse certificate must contain the information provided by Article 803(1), subclauses 1, 2, 4-7, of this Code, and also an indication that it was issued to the bearer. 3. A document which does not correspond to the requirements of this Article shall not be a simple warehouse certificate.
Article 808. Storage of Things with Right to Dispose of Them
If it follows from the legislation or the contract that a Warehouse may dispose of goods handed over to it for storage, the rules of Chapter 42 of this Code, concerning loan, shall apply to the relations of the parties; however, the time and place of return of the goods shall be determined by the rules of this Chapter.
§ 3. Special Types of Storage
Article 809. Storage in Pawnshop 1. A contract of storage in a pawnshop of things which belong to a citizen shall be a public contract (Article 396). 2. The conclusion of a contract of storage in a pawnshop shall be certified by the issuance by the pawnshop to the depositor of an inscribed deposit receipt. 3. The cost of a thing handed over for storage to a pawnshop shall be evaluated by agreement of the parties in accordance with the prices for a thing of that type and quality, usually established in trade at the time and at the place of its acceptance for storage. 4. A pawnshop shall be obliged to insure things, accepted for storage, to the benefit of the depositor, at the expense of a pawnshop, at the cost thereof, determined in accordance with Clause 3 of this Article.
Article 810. Things Not Demanded from Pawnshop 1. If a thing handed over for storage to a pawnshop is not demanded by the depositor within the period stipulated by the agreement with the pawnshop, the pawnshop shall be obliged to keep it for two months with recovery of payment for this as provided for by the contract of storage. Upon the expiry of this period, the undemanded thing may be sold by the pawnshop in accordance with the procedure established by Article 339(5) of this Code. 2. From the amount received from the sale of the undemanded thing, payment for the storage thereof and other payments due to the pawnshop shall be paid. The balance of the amount shall be returned by the pawnshop to the depositor.
Article 811. Storage of Valuables in Bank or Non-bank Credit and Financial Institution 1. A bank or a non-bank credit and financial institution may accept securities, precious metals and stones, other precious things, and other valuables, including documents, for storage. 2. The conclusion of a contract of storage for valuables in a bank or non-bank credit and financial institution shall be certified by the issuance, by the bank to the depositor, of an inscribed deposit document, the submission of which shall be grounds for the issuance of the valuables, being kept, to the depositor.
Article 812. Storage of Valuables in Individual Bank Safe 1. A contract for the storage of valuables in a bank or non-bank credit and financial institution may provide for the storage thereof with the use by the depositor (client) or with the granting to him of an individual bank safe (safe box, isolated premise in a bank), which is guarded by the bank or non-bank credit and financial institution. Under a contract for storage of valuables in an individual bank safe, the right shall be granted to the client himself to place the valuables in the safe and to remove them from the safe; for this purpose, a key of the safe, a card enabling to identify the client, or other mark or document certifying the right of the client to access to the safe and that contained therein, must be issued to the client.
The right of the client to work in the bank or non-bank credit and financial institution with the valuables kept in an individual safe may be provided for by the conditions of the contract. 2. Under a contract of storage of valuables in a bank or non-bank credit and financial institution with the use of an individual bank safe by the client, the bank or non-bank credit and financial institution shall accept valuables from the client, which must be kept in the safe, effectuate control over placement thereof by the client in the safe and removal from the safe, and after removal shall return these valuables to the client. 3. Under a contract of storage of valuables in a bank or non-bank credit and financial institution with the granting of an individual bank safe to the client, the bank or non-bank credit and financial institution shall ensure to the client the possibility of placing valuables in a safe and the removal thereof from the safe without any control whatever, including control of the bank or non-bank credit and financial institution. The bank or non-bank credit and financial institution shall be obliged to effectuate control over access to the premise where the safe, granted to the client, is situated. Unless otherwise provided by a contract of storage of valuables in a bank or non-bank credit and financial institution with the granting of an individual bank safe to the client, the bank or non-bank credit and financial institution shall be relieved of liability for the failure to preserve that contained in the safe, if the bank or non-bank credit and financial institution would prove that, under the conditions of storage, the access of anyone to the safe without the knowledge of the client was impossible or it became possible as a consequence of force majeure. 4. The rules of this Code (Chapter 34) and other acts of legislation on the contract of lease shall apply to the contract on the granting of a bank safe for use to another person without liability of the bank or non- bank credit and financial institution for that contained in the safe.
Article 813. Storage in Luggage Storage Rooms of Transport Organizations l. Luggage storage rooms within the jurisdiction of transport organizations of common use shall be obliged to accept for storage the things of passengers and other citizens irrespective of whether they have travel documents. A contract for the storage of things in luggage storage rooms of transport organizations shall be deemed to be a public contract (Article 396). 2. In confirmation of the acceptance of a thing for storage in a luggage storage room (except for automatic rooms) a receipt or numbered token shall be issued to the depositor. In the event of the loss of the receipt or token, the thing handed over to the luggage storage room shall be issued to the depositor upon submission of evidence of the belonging of this thing to him. 3. The period during which the luggage storage room is obliged to keep things shall be determined by the acts of Republic's bodies of state administration in accordance with the second part of Article 738(2) of this Code, unless a longer period is established by agreement of the parties. Things not demanded within the specified periods, must be kept in the luggage storage room for another thirty days. Upon the expiry of this period the things not demanded may be sold in accordance with the procedure provided for by Article 789(2) of this Code. 4. The losses of the depositor as a consequence of the loss, shortage, or damaging of things handed over to the luggage storage room shall, within the limits of their value determined by the depositor when handing these things over for storage, be subject to compensation by the depository within twenty-four hours from the time of submission of the demand concerning compensation thereof.
Article 814. Storage in Check Rooms of Organizations 1. Storage in check rooms of organizations shall be presupposed to be without compensation if remuneration for storage is not stipulated or specified by other obvious means when handing over a thing for storage.
The depository of a thing handed over to a check room, irrespective of whether the storage is effectuated for or without compensation, shall be obliged to take all measures provided for by Article 781(1) and (2) of this Code in order to ensure the preservation of the thing. 2. The rules of this Article also shall apply to the storage of outer clothing, headwear, and other similar things left without handing them over for storage by citizens at places allotted for these purposes in organizations and means of transport.
Article 815. Storage in Hotel 1. A hotel shall be liable as depository, without a special agreement concerning this with a person residing therein (lodger), for loss, shortage, or damaging of his things deposited at the hotel, except for money, other currency valuables, securities, and other precious things. A thing entrusted to employees of the hotel, or a thing placed in the hotel room or other place intended for this purpose shall be considered to be deposited in the hotel. 2. A hotel shall be liable for the loss of money, other currency valuables, securities, and other precious things of a lodger, if they were accepted by the hotel for storage or were placed by the lodger in an individual safe, provided to the lodger by the hotel, irrespective of whether this safe is situated in his room or in another premise of the hotel. A hotel shall be relieved from liability for the failure to preserve that contained in such safe, if it would prove that, under the conditions of storage, access of anyone to the safe without the knowledge of the lodger was impossible or became possible as a consequence of force majeure. 3. The lodger who has revealed a loss, shortage, or damaging of his things, shall be obliged without delay to inform the administration of the hotel. Otherwise, the hotel shall be relieved from liability for the failure to preserve the things. 4. An announcement made by the hotel that it does not assume liability for the failure to preserve things of lodgers shall not relieve it from liability. 5. The hotel shall be relieved from liability for loss, shortage, or damaging of the lodger’s things, if such loss, shortage, or damaging took place through the lodger’s fault. 6. The rules of this Article respectively shall apply with respect to the storage of things of citizens in motels, rest homes, boarding houses, sanatoriums, public baths, and other similar organizations.
Article 816. Storage of Things Which Are Subject of Dispute (Sequestration) 1. Under a contract on sequestration, two or several persons between whom a dispute has arisen concerning the right to a thing, shall transfer this thing to a third person who assumed the duty, upon the settlement of the dispute, to return the thing to that person to whom it would be awarded by decision of a court or by agreement of all the disputing persons (contractual sequestration). 2. A thing which is the subject of a dispute between two or several persons may be transferred for storage by way of sequestration by decision of a court (judicial sequestration). Either a person designated by a court or a person determined by mutual consent of the disputing parties may be the depository under judicial sequestration. In both instances the consent of the depository shall be required, unless otherwise established by the legislation. 3. Both movable and immovable things may be transferred for storage by way of sequestration. 4. The depository, carrying out the storage of a thing by way of sequestration, shall have the right to remuneration at the expense of the disputing parties, unless otherwise provided by contract or decision of the court, by which the sequestration was established.
CHAPTER 48 Insurance
Article 817. Voluntary and Obligatory Insurance 1. Insurance shall be effectuated, on a voluntary basis, on the basis of contracts of insurance being concluded by an insurant with an insurer, unless otherwise provided by the laws or acts of the President of the Republic of Belarus. The insurants are citizens, including foreign citizens, stateless persons, organizations, including foreign and international organizations, and also the Republic of Belarus and its administrative and territorial units, foreign states, which concluded contracts of insurance with insurers or being insurants by virtue of a law or an act of the President of the Republic of Belarus. 2. In instances when the laws or the acts of the President of the Republic of Belarus impose the duty to insure the life, the health or the property, or own civil liability (obligatory insurance, with the exception of obligatory state insurance), the insurance shall be effectuated in accordance with the laws and the acts of the President of the Republic of Belarus . 3. The rules of this Chapter shall be applied to the obligatory insurance insofar as otherwise is not established by the President of the Republic of Belarus .
Article 818. Interests, the Insurance of Which Is Not Permitted 1. The insurance of unlawful interests shall not be permitted. 2. The insurance of losses from participation in games, lotteries, and betting shall not be permitted. 3. The insurance of expenses which a person may be forced to make for the purpose of liberating hostages shall not be permitted. 4. [Excluded] 5. The conditions of contracts of insurance which are contrary to Clauses 1-3 of this Article shall be void.
Article 819. Contract of Insurance 1. Under a contract of insurance one party (insurer) shall undertake, upon the occurrence of an accident provided for by the legislation or the contract (insured accident), to compensate the other party (insurant) or to a third person (insured person, beneficiary), to whose benefit the contract was concluded, for losses caused as a consequence of this accident to the property interests insured under the contract (pay an insurance indemnity in the form of an insurance compensation or an insurance coverage), within the limits of the amount (insured amount, liability limit) determined by the contract, and the other party (insurant) shall undertake to pay the amount stipulated by the contract (insurance contribution, insurance premium). 2. Insurance objects may be legitimate property interests connected with: inflicting harm to the life or health of the insurant or any other citizen named in the contract (personal insurance not related to the life insurance); attainment, by citizens, of a certain age or with the occurrence in course of their life of another insured accident stipulated in the contract (personal insurance related to the life insurance); loss (perishing) or damage of property being in possession, use or disposal of the insurant or another beneficiary named in the contract, with causing damage to their property rights, with arising losses from entrepreneurial activity as a consequence of non-fulfillment (unduly fulfillment) of their obligations by contracting parties of an economic entity* or with changes of conditions of this activity due to circumstances beyond the control of the entrepreneur (insurance of property);
liability for obligations arising as a consequence of causing, by the insurant or another person on which such a liability may be imposed, harm to life, health, or property of other persons, or with liability under a contract (insurance of liability). ____________________ * For the purposes of this Chapter, economic entities mean economic partnerships and societies, unitary enterprises, productive cooperatives, including agricultural productive cooperatives, and peasant's (farmer's) households; state associations; associations (unions) -- associations of commercial and/or non- commercial organizations and/or individual entrepreneurs, productive cooperatives, chambers of commerce and industry, institutions, partnerships of owners; citizens carrying out entrepreneurial activity without forming a legal person.
Article 820. Contract of Personal Insurance 1. Under a contract of personal insurance, the insurer shall undertake, for the payment of insurance contribution (insurance premium), stipulated by the contract and paid by the insurant, to pay, once or periodically, the insurance coverage within the limit of the insured amount (insurance limit), stipulated by the contract, in the event of causing of harm to the life or health of the insurant himself or other insured person, or in the event of the attaining of a determined age by such persons, or the ensuing of another event, provided for by the contract, in their lives (insured accident). 2. A contract of personal insurance shall be considered to be concluded to the benefit of the insured person if another person is not named in the contract as the beneficiary. In the event of the death of the person insured under the contract in which another beneficiary is not named, the heirs of the insured person shall be deemed to be the beneficiaries. A contract of personal insurance to the benefit of a person who is not the insured person, including to the benefit of an insurant who is not the insured person, may be concluded only with the written consent of the insured person. In the absence of such consent, the contract may be deemed to be invalid upon the suit of the insured person, and in the event of the death of this person, upon the suit of heirs of this person.
Article 821. Insurance of Property 1. Property may be insured under a contract of insurance to the benefit of the person (insurant or beneficiary) having an interest, based on the legislation or the contract, in the preservation of this property. 2. A contract of insurance of property concluded in the absence of an interest of the insurant or beneficiary in the preservation of the insured property, shall be invalid. 3. A contract of insurance of property to the benefit of a beneficiary may be concluded without specifying the name of the beneficiary. In the event of concluding such a contract, a bearer insurance policy shall be issued to the insurant. In the event of the exercise, by the insurant or beneficiary, of the rights under such contract, it shall be necessary to submit this policy to the insurer.
Article 822. Insurance of Property Rights and Entrepreneurial Risk 1. Under a contract of insurance of property rights, the property rights of the insurant or another beneficiary named in the contract may be insured. As property rights which may be insured under the contract, the rights of insurants (beneficiaries) connected with their carrying out powers of possession, use and disposal of the property, and also with property claims which arise between the insurants (beneficiaries) and other person related to the determination of the fate of property and property rights related to it (ownership, economic management,
operative administration, obligation rights (contractual and non-contractual), rights to intellectual activity results). 2. The entrepreneurial risk is a risk which arises when the insurant carries out entrepreneurial risk activity. 3. Under a contract of insurance of entrepreneurial risk only the entrepreneurial risk of the insurant himself may be insured, and only to his benefit . The contract of insurance of entrepreneurial risk of a person not being insurant shall be void. A contract of insurance of entrepreneurial risk to the benefit of a person which is not the insurant shall be considered to be concluded to the benefit of the insurant. 4. The rules, provided for by this Chapter, which are to be applied in connection with the insurance of entrepreneurial risk, shall be applied to the contract of insurance of the risk of non-return (non-repayment) and/or of delayed return (repayment) of the credit.
Article 823. Insurance of Liability for Causing Harm 1. Under a contract of insurance of the risk of liability for obligations which arise as a consequence of the causing harm to the life, health, or property of other persons, the liability of the insurant himself, or another person on whom such liability may be placed, may be insured. 2. The person whose liability for causing harm has been insured must be named in the contract of insurance. If this person is not named in the contract, the liability of the insurant himself shall be considered to be insured. 3. The contract of insurance of liability for causing harm shall be considered to be concluded to the benefit of the persons to whom harm may be caused (beneficiary), even if the contract was concluded to the benefit of the insurant or other person liable for causing harm, or it is not specified in the contract to whose benefit it was concluded. 4. In an instance when liability for causing harm was insured by virtue of the fact that the insurance thereof is obligatory, and also in other instances provided for by the legislation or contract of insurance of such liability, the person to whose benefit the contract of insurance is considered to be concluded, shall have the right to submit directly to the insurer a demand concerning compensation of harm within the limits of the insured amount (liability limit).
Article 824. Insurance of Liability under Contract 1. Insurance of the risk of liability for a violation of a contract shall be permitted in the instances provided for by the legislation. 2. Under a contract of insurance of the risk of liability for a violation of a contract, only the liability of the insurant himself may be insured. A contract of insurance not corresponding to this requirement shall be void. 3. The liability for a violation of a contract shall be considered to be insured to the benefit of the party, to which, under the conditions of this contract, the insurant must bear respective liability (the beneficiary), even if the contract of insurance is concluded to the benefit of another person or it is not specified therein to whose benefit it was concluded.
Article 825. Obligatory Insurance 1. By the laws or the acts of the President of the Republic of Belarus, the duty to insure the following may be placed on the persons specified therein: 1) the life, health, or property ;
2) the own civil liability, which may ensue as a consequence of causing harm to the life, health, or property of other persons or violations of contracts with other persons. 2. The duty to insure own life or health may not be placed on a citizen of the Republic of Belarus by the legislation. 3. [Excluded] 4. In instances when the duty of insuring does not arise from a law or an act of the President of the Republic of Belarus, but is based on a contract, including the duty of insuring property, based on a contract with the possessor of the property or constituent documents of a legal person which is the owner of the property, such insurance shall not be obligatory in the sense of this Article and shall not entail the consequences provided for by Article 827 of this Code.
Article 826. Effectuation of Obligatory Insurance 1. Obligatory insurance shall be effectuated by means of the conclusion with the insurer of a contract of insurance by the person, on which the duty of such insurance (insurant) was placed by laws or acts of the President of the Republic of Belarus. 2. Obligatory insurance shall be effectuated at the expense of the insurant, unless otherwise established by the President of the Republic of Belarus. 3. Objects of obligatory insurance, insurance risks and the minimum insured amounts (liability limits) shall be determined by the laws and the acts of the President of the Republic of Belarus. 4. Rules of this Chapter do not cover the state obligatory insurance (Article 859).
Article 827. Consequences of Violation of Rules on Obligatory Insurance 1. The person to whose benefit, in accordance with the laws and the acts of the President of the Republic of Belarus, obligatory insurance must be effectuated shall have the right, if it is known to it that the insurance is not effectuated, to demand in a judicial proceeding the effectuation thereof by the person on whom the duty of insurance has been placed. 2. If the person, on which the duty of insurance has been placed, does not effectuate it or has concluded a contract of insurance on conditions which worsen the status of the beneficiary in comparison with the conditions determined by the laws and the acts of the President of the Republic of Belarus, it shall, in the event of the ensuing of the insured accident, bear liability to the beneficiary on the same conditions on which the insurance compensation (insurance coverage) should have been paid under the proper insurance. 3. The amounts unfoundedly saved by a person on which the duty of insurance has been placed, as a result of the fact that it did not fulfill this duty or fulfilled it improperly, shall be recovered, upon the suit of the body carrying out state supervision of insurance activity, to the revenue of the Republic of Belarus, with accrual of interests on these amounts in accordance with Article 366 of this Code.
Article 828. Insurers 1. Insurers are commercial organizations created for carrying out insurance activity and having special permits (licenses) for carrying out insurance activity. For certain kinds of insurance, the laws or the acts of the President of the Republic of Belarus may provide other types of insurers. 2. The requirements which insurance organizations must meet and the procedure for the licensing of their activity shall be determined by legislation.
Article 829. Fulfillment of Duties Under Contract of Insurance by Insurant and Beneficiary 1. The conclusion of a contract of insurance to the benefit of a beneficiary, including when the beneficiary is the insured person, shall not relieve the insurant from the fulfillment of the duties under this contract, unless otherwise provided by the contract or the duties of the insurant have been fulfilled by the person to whose benefit the contract was concluded. 2. The insurer shall have the right to demand from the beneficiary, including when the insured person is the beneficiary, the fulfillment of the duties under the contract of insurance, including the duties lying on the insurant but not fulfilled by him, in the event of the submission by the beneficiary of a demand concerning payment of the insurance compensation under a contract of property insurance or insured amount under a contract of personal insurance. The risk of the consequences of the failure to fulfill or the untimely fulfillment of the duties which should have been fulfilled earlier shall be borne by the beneficiary.
Article 830. Form of Contract of Insurance l. The contract of insurance must be concluded in written form, unless otherwise provided by the laws or the acts of the President of the Republic of Belarus. The failure to comply with the written form shall entail the invalidity of the contract of insurance, except for a contract of obligatory state insurance (Article 859). 2. A contract of voluntary insurance may be concluded by means of drawing up one document, and also through an exchange of documents vie postal, telegraph, teletype, electronic or other communications which allow to establish credibly that the document is generated by the party of the contract or by means of handing over by the insurer to the insurant, on the basis of his written or oral application, the insurance policy (certificate, receipt) signed by the insurer. The contract of voluntary insurance shall be accompanied by the rules for the respective kind of insurance approved by the insurer or an association of insurers and agreed with the body carrying out state supervision and control over insurance activity. The enclosure of the rules of insurance to the contract of voluntary insurance shall be certified by an entry in that contract.
3. The insurer, when concluding a contract of voluntary insurance, is entitled to use the standard forms of insurance policies (statements, certificates) prepared by it, unless otherwise established by acts of the President of the Republic of Belarus. Obligatory requisites of the insurance policy (statement, certificate), the procedure for filling it in and using it shall be determined by the body that carries out supervision and control over the insurance activity, unless otherwise established by acts of the President of the Republic of Belarus.
4. Conclusion of an insurance contract in the form of electronic document shall be carried out in compliance with the procedure and conditions established by the body that carried out supervision and control over the insurance activity.
Article 831. Insurance Under General Policy 1. The regular insurance of various lots of property of the same kind (goods, cargoes, and the like) on the similar conditions during a determined period may, by agreement of the insurant with the insurer, be effectuated on the basis of one contract of insurance, a general policy. 2. The insurant shall be obliged, with respect to each lot of property falling under the operation of the general policy, to provide to the insurer the information stipulated by such policy within the period provided for by it, and if it is not specified, immediately upon the receipt of such information. The insurant shall not be relieved of this duty even if at the time of receiving such information the possibility of losses, subject to compensation by the insurer, already has disappeared.
3. At the demand of the insurant, the insurer shall be obliged to issue insurance policies for individual lots of property falling under the operation of the general policy. In the event of the non-conformation of the content of the insurance policy and the general policy, preference shall be given to the insurance policy.
Article 832. Significant Conditions of Contract of Insurance 1. When concluding a contract of property insurance, agreement must be reached between the insurant and the insurer concerning: 1) the determined property or other property interest which is the object of insurance; 2) the character of the event, in the instance of the ensuing of which the insurance is effectuated (insured accident); 3) the insured amount (liability limit); 4) the amount of insurance contribution (insurance premium) and periods of payment thereof; 5) the period of operation of the contract. 2. When concluding a contract of personal insurance, agreement must be reached between the insurant and the insurer concerning: 1) the insured person; 2) the character of the event, in the instance of the ensuing of which in the life of the insured person the insurance is effectuated (insured accident); 3) the insured amount (liability limit); 4) the amount of insurance contribution (insurance premium) and periods of payment thereof; 5) the period of operation of the contract. 3. When concluding a contract of insurance between the insurant and the insurer, if the insurant is the citizen, in addition to the significant conditions specified in Clauses 1 and 2 of this Article, agreement must be reached concerning: 1) the grounds for dissolution of the contract before the expiry of the period established; 2) the procedure of return of the insurance contribution to the insurant in case of non-fulfillment of the obligation or dissolution of the contract before the expiry of the period established; 3) the liability for non-fulfillment of the obligation.
Article 833. Determination of Conditions of Contract of Insurance in Rules of Insurance 1. The conditions on which a contract of insurance is concluded may be determined in standard rules of insurance of the respective type approved by the insurer or an association of insurers and agreed with the body carrying out the state supervision and control over insurance activity. 2. The conditions contained in the rules of insurance, even those not included in the text of the contract of insurance or insurance policy (statement, certificate). shall be obligatory for the insurer, the insurant or the beneficiary.
Article 834. Information Granted by Insurant When Concluding Contract of Insurance l. When concluding a contract of insurance, the insurant shall be obliged to inform the insurer about the circumstances known to the insurant, having material significance for determining the probability of the
ensuing of the insured accident and the amount of possible losses from the ensuing thereof (insured risk), if these circumstances are not known and should not be known to the insurer. In any event circumstances stipulated in the contract of insurance or insurance policy (statement, certificate) on the basis of a written or oral declaration of the insurant shall be deemed to be significant. 2. If a contract of insurance was concluded in the absence of the answers of the insurant to any questions of the insurer, the insurer may not subsequently demand dissolution of the contract or the deeming thereof to be invalid on the grounds that the respective circumstances were not given by the insurant. 3. If after the conclusion of the contract of insurance it is established that the insurant presented knowingly false information to the insurer concerning the circumstances specified in Clause 1 of this Article, the insurer shall have the right to demand the contract to be deemed invalid and the application of the consequences provided for by Article 180(2) of this Code. The demand of the insurer on deeming a contract of insurance to be invalid shall not be satisfied, if the circumstances, which were concealed by the insurant, already have disappeared.
Article 835. Right of Insurer to Valuation of Insured Risk 1. When concluding a contract of insurance of property, the insurer shall have the right to make an inspection of the property to be insured and, when necessary, shall appoint an expert examination of reliability of value of such property. 2. When concluding a contract of personal insurance, the insurer shall have the right to investigate the person to be insured in order to evaluate the actual condition of his health. 3. The valuation of insured risk by the insurer on the basis of this Article shall be not obligatory for the insurant, who shall have the right to prove otherwise.
Article 836. Secrecy of Insurance An insurer shall not have the right to divulge information concerning the insurant, insured person, and beneficiary, condition of their health, and also the property status of these persons received by it as a result of its professional activity, except for the instances provided for by the legislation. The insurer, for a violation of the secrecy of insurance, depending upon the nature of the violated rights and the character of the violation, shall bear liability in accordance with the rules provided for by Article 140 or Article 151 of this Code.
Article 837. Insured Amount (Liability Limit) 1. The insured amount (liability limit) is a monetary sum established by the law, the act of the President of the Republic of Belarus or by the contract of insurance within the limits of which the insurer is obliged to pay insurance compensation upon the occurrence of the insured event. 2. When insuring property or entrepreneurial risk, the insured amount (liability limit) may not exceed their insured value. There shall be considered to be such value: 1) for property: its true value at the place of its location on the day of concluding the contract of insurance; 2) for entrepreneurial risk: the losses from entrepreneurial activity which the insurant could incur in case of ensuing of the insured accident. In the events established by the laws or the acts of the President of the Republic of Belarus, the insured amount (liability limit) may be less than the insured value. 3. In contracts of personal insurance and contracts of insurance of civil liability, the insured amount (liability limit) shall be determined by the parties at their discretion, unless otherwise established by the
laws or the acts of the President of the Republic of Belarus.
Article 838. Contesting Insured Value of Property The insured value of property specified in a contract of insurance may not subsequently be contested, except for an instance when the insurer, not taking advantage of his right to valuation of the insured risk before concluding the contract (Article 835(l)), was intentionally deceived with respect to this value.
Article 839. Partial Property Insurance If in a contract of insurance of property or entrepreneurial risk the insured amount has been established lower than the insured value, the insurer shall, in the instance of the ensuing of the insured accident, be obliged to compensate the insurant (beneficiary) for part of the losses incurred by the latter proportionally to the relation of the insured amount (liability limit) to the insured value. If the insurance is effectuated on the ground of the first risk, the insurance compensation shall be paid in the amount of the full value of the lost property or the losses incurred from entrepreneurial activity, but not higher than the insured amount (liability limit).
Article 840. Additional Property Insurance 1. In the event when property or entrepreneurial risk has been insured only in part of the insured value, the insurant (beneficiary) shall have the right to effectuate additional insurance, including that from a different insurer, but so that the total insured amount (liability limit) under all the contracts of insurance does not exceed the insured value. 2. The failure to comply with the provisions of Clause 1 of this Article shall entail the consequences provided for by Article 841(4) of this Code.
Article 841. Consequences of Insurance in Excess of Insured Value 1. If the insured amount (liability limit) specified in the contract of insurance of property or entrepreneurial risk exceeds the insured value, the contract shall be void in that part of the insured amount (liability limit) which exceeds the insured value. The part of the insurance contribution (insurance premium) paid in excess shall not be subject to return in this event. 2. If in accordance with the contract of insurance, the insurance contribution (insurance premium) is contributed by installments and by the time of establishing the circumstances specified in Clause 1 of this Article it was not contributed in full, the balance of the insurance contribution (insurance premium) must be paid in the amount reduced proportionally to the reduction of the amount of the insured amount (liability limit). 3. If an excess of the insured amount (liability limit) in a contract of insurance was a consequence of fraud on the part of the insurant, the insurer shall have the right to demand the contract be deemed to be invalid and compensation of losses caused to him by this in the amount exceeding the amount of insurance contribution (insurance premium) received by him from the insurant. 4. The rules provided for in Clauses 1-3 of this Article respectively shall apply also in an instance when the insured amount (liability limit) exceeded the insured value as a result of the insurance of the same object by two or several insurers (dual insurance). The amount of insurance compensation subject to payment in this event by each of the insurers shall be reduced proportionally by the reduction of the initial insured amount (liability limit) under the respective contract of insurance.
Article 842. Property Insurance Against Various Insured Risks 1. Property and entrepreneurial risk may be insured against various insured risks either under one or under separate contracts of insurance, including insurance under contracts with different insurers. In these instances exceeding the amount of the total insured amount (liability limit) under all contracts over the insured value shall be permitted. 2. If the duty of insurers arises from two or several contracts concluded in accordance with Clause 1 of this Article to pay insurance compensation for one and the same consequences of the ensuing of one and the same insured accident, the rules provided for by Article 841(4) of this Code shall apply to such contract in respective part.
Article 843. Co-Insurance An object of insurance may be insured under one contract of insurance jointly by several insurers (co- insurance). If the rights and duties of each of the insurers have not been determined in such contract, they jointly and severally shall be liable to the insurant (beneficiary) for payment of the insurance compensation or the insurance coverage.
Article 844. Insurance Contribution (Insurance Premium) 1. The insurance contribution (insurance premium) is the sum of monetary funds subject to be paid by the insurant to the insurer for insurance, unless otherwise established by the President of the Republic of Belarus. 2. When determining the amount of insurance contribution (insurance premium) subject to payment under the contract of voluntary insurance, the parties shall apply insurance tariffs established by the insurer, determining the premium rate (insurance premium) from the unit of the sum insured (limit of indemnity), taking into account the object of insurance and the character of the insured risk, unless otherwise established by the legislation.
The insurance tariff for types of the voluntary insurance shall include the basic insurance tariff, the composition of which is determined by the body that carries out the supervision and control over the insurance activity, and the correction factors applied to it. The basic insurance tariff shall be established by the insurer with consent of the body that carries out the supervision and control over the insurance activity.
3. If the payment of the insurance contribution (insurance premium) by installment has been provided for by a contract of insurance, the consequences of the failure to pay the regular installment of the insurance contribution (insurance premium) within the established periods may be determined by the contract. 4. If the insured accident ensued before payment of a regular insurance contribution (insurance premium), the contribution of which has been delayed, the insurer shall have the right, when determining the amount of insurance compensation or insurance coverage, subject to payment, to set off the amount of delayed insurance contribution (insurance premium).
Article 845. Replacement of Insured Person 1. In an instance when under a contract of insurance of the liability for causing harm (Article 823) the liability of a person other than the insurant has been insured, the latter shall have the right, unless otherwise provided by the contract, at any time before the ensuing of the insured accident to replace this person by another, having informed the insurer thereof in writing. 2. The insured person specified in the contract of personal insurance may be replaced by the insurant by another person only with the consent of the insured person himself and of the insurer.
Article 846. Replacement of Beneficiary An insurant shall have the right to replace the beneficiary specified in the contract of insurance by another person, having informed the insurer thereof in writing. The replacement of a beneficiary under a contract of personal insurance designated with the consent of the insured person (Article 820(2)) shall be permitted only with the consent of this person. The beneficiary may not be replaced by another person after fulfillment by him of any of the duties under the contract of insurance or submission of a demand to the insurer concerning the insurance payment.
Article 847. Commencement of Operation of Contract of Insurance 1. A contract of insurance shall enter into force from the day of payment of the insurance contribution (insurance premium) or its first installment, unless otherwise provided in legislative acts or the rules for the respective type of insurance, approved by the insurer or the association of insurers and agreed with the body carrying out state supervision and control over the insurance activity. 2. Insurance stipulated by a contract of insurance shall extend to insured accidents which occurred after the entry of the contract of insurance into force, unless another period for the commencement of the operation of the insurance has been provided for in the contract.
Article 848. Termination of Contract of Insurance Before Time l. A contract of insurance shall be terminated before the ensuing of the period for which it was concluded if after its entry into force the possibility of the ensuing of the insured accident disappeared and the insurance was terminated under circumstances other than the insured accident. There shall be relegated to such circumstances, in particular: 1) the loss (perishing) of the insured property for reasons other than the ensuing of the insured accident; 2) termination, in accordance with the established procedure, of entrepreneurial activity by the person who insured the entrepreneurial risk or other risk connected with such activity. 2. The insurant (beneficiary) shall have the right to repudiate the contract of insurance at any time if at the time of repudiation the possibility of the ensuing of the insured accident had not disappeared under the circumstances specified in Clause 1 of this Article. 3. In the event of termination of a contract of insurance before time under the circumstances specified in Clause 1 of this Article, the insurer shall have the right to part of the insurance contribution (insurance premium) in proportion to the time during which the insurance was in force. In the event of the repudiation by the insurant (beneficiary) of the contract of insurance before time, the insurance premium paid to the insurer shall not be subject to return unless otherwise provided by the contract.
Article 849. Consequences of Increase of Insured Risk in Period of Operation of Contract of Insurance 1. In the period of operation of a contract of property insurance or of insurance of liability, the insurant (beneficiary) shall be obliged immediately to inform the insurer on significant changes in the circumstances, on which the insurer was informed when concluding the contract, which have become known to the insurant (beneficiary), if such changes may significantly influence the increase of the insured risk. Changes shall be deemed to be significant in any event, if these changes are stipulated in the contract of insurance or in the insurance policy (statement, certificate) and in the rules of insurance transferred to the insurant.
2. An insurer who has been notified about circumstances entailing an increase of the insured risk shall have the right to demand a change of the conditions of the contract of insurance or payment of an additional insurance contribution (insurance premium) commensurate to the increase of risk. If the insurant (beneficiary) raises objections against changes of the conditions of the contract of insurance or additional payment of the insurance contribution (insurance premium), the insurer shall have the right to demand dissolution of the contract in accordance with the rules provided for by Chapter 29 of this Code. 3. In the event of the failure of the insurant or beneficiary to perform the duty provided for in Clause 1 of this Article, the insurer shall have the right to demand dissolution of the contract of insurance and compensation of losses caused by dissolution of the contract (Article 423(5)). 4. The insurer shall not have the right to demand dissolution of the contract of insurance if the circumstances entailing an increase of the insured risk have yet disappeared. 5. In the event of personal insurance, the consequences of a change of insured risk in the period of operation of the contract of insurance specified in Clauses 2 and 3 of this Article may ensue only if they are expressly provided for in the contract.
Article 850. Transfer of Rights to Insured Property to Another Person In the event of the transfer of rights to insured property from the person in whose interests the contract of insurance was concluded to another person the rights and duties under this contract shall pass to the person to whom the rights to the property passed, except for instances of compulsory seizure of the property on the grounds specified in Article 236(2) of this Code and renunciation of the right of ownership (Article 237). The person to whom the rights to insured property have passed must immediately inform the insurer thereof in writing.
Article 851. Informing Insurer about Ensuing of Insured Accident 1. An insurant under a contract of property insurance or liability insurance shall, after the ensuing of the insured accident became known to him, be obliged immediately to inform the insurer or his representative about the ensuing thereof. If a period and/or means of informing has been provided for by the contract, it must be made within the stipulated period and by the means specified in the contract. The same duty shall lie on the beneficiary to whom the conclusion of the contract of insurance to his benefit is known, if he intends to take advantage of the right to insurance compensation. 2. The failure to fulfill the duty provided for by Clause 1 of this Article shall give to the insurer the right to refuse to pay the insurance compensation unless it is proved that the insurer knew in good time about the ensuing of the insured accident or that the absence of information about this for the insurer could not affect his duty to pay the insurance compensation. 3. The rules provided for by Clauses 1 and 2 of this Article shall respectively apply to the contract of personal insurance and to the payment of insurance coverage if the insured accident is the death of the insured person or causing harm to his health. In such a case, the period of notice of the insurer established by the contract may not be less than thirty days.
Article 852. Reducing Losses from Insured Accident 1. In the event of ensuing the insured accident, which is provided for by the contract of property insurance or liability insurance, the insurant shall be obliged to take reasonable and available measures under the circumstances which formed in order to reduce possible losses.
In taking such measures, the insurant must follow the instructions of the insurer if they have been communicated to the insurant. 2. Expenses for the purpose of reducing losses which are subject to compensation by the insurer, if such expenses were necessary or were made in order to fulfill instructions of the insurer, must be compensated by the insurer, even if the respective measures proved to be unsuccessful. Such expenses shall be compensated in proportion to the relation of the insured amount (liability limit) to the insured value, irrespective of whether they may exceed the insured amount (liability limit) together with the compensation of the other losses. 3. The insurer shall be relieved from compensation of losses which arose as a consequence of the fact that the insurant intentionally did not take reasonable and available measures in order to reduce possible losses.
Article 853. Consequences of Ensuing of Insured Accident Through Fault of Insurant, Beneficiary, or Insured Person 1. An insurer shall be relieved from the payment of insurance compensation or insured amount if the insured accident ensued as a consequence of the intent of the insurant, beneficiary, or insured person, except for instances provided for by Clauses 2 and 3 of this Article. Instances of the relief of the insurer from the payment of insurance compensation under contracts of property insurance in the event of the ensuing of the insured accident as a consequence of gross negligence of the insurant or beneficiary may be provided for by the legislation. 2. An insurer shall not be relieved from the payment of insurance compensation under a contract of insurance of liability for causing harm to life, health or property, if the harm was caused through the fault of the person liable therefor. 3. An insurer shall not be relieved from the payment of the insured amount which under a contract of personal insurance is subject to payment in the event of the death of the insured person, if his death ensued as a consequence of suicide and the contract of insurance has operated at this time for not less than two years.
Article 854. Grounds for Relief of Insurer from Payment of Insurance Compensation and Insured Amount 1. Unless otherwise provided by the treaties of the Republic of Belarus, act of legislation or contract of insurance, the insurer shall be relieved from the payment of insurance compensation and the insured coverage when the insured accident has ensued as a consequence of: 1) the influence of a nuclear explosion, radiation, or radioactive contamination; 2) military actions; 3) civil war. 2. Unless otherwise provided by a contract of property insurance, the insurer shall be relieved from the payment of insurance compensation for losses which arose as a consequence of the seizure, confiscation, requisition, arrest, or destruction of insured property at the order of state bodies.
Article 855. Transfer to Insurer of Rights of Insurant to Compensation of Damage (Subrogation) 1. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of property insurance, to the insurer, who has paid the insurance compensation, shall pass, within the limits of the amount paid, the right of demand, which the insurant (beneficiary) has against the person liable for the losses compensated as a result of the insurance. A condition of the contract excluding the transfer to the insurer of the right of demand against a person who intentionally caused losses shall be void.
2. The right of demand which has passed to the insurer shall be effectuated by him in compliance with the rules regulating relations between the insurant (beneficiary) and the person liable for the losses. 3. An insurant (beneficiary) shall be obliged to transfer to the insurer all documents and evidences and to submit to him all information necessary for the exercise, by the insurer, of the right of demand which has passed to him. 4. If the insurant (beneficiary) has waived his right of demand against the person liable for losses compensated by the insurer, or the exercise of this right has become impossible through the fault of the insurant (beneficiary), the insurer shall be relieved from the payment of insurance compensation in full or in respective part and shall have the right to demand the return of the amount of insurance compensation paid in excess.
Article 856. Limitations of Action With Regard to Demands Connected with Property Insurance and Insurance of Liability For the demands, following from the contracts of property insurance and insurance of liability, the general limitation period shall be established, calculated from the date of termination of action of contract of insurance.
Article 857. Reinsurance l. The reinsurance it insurance by an insurer (reinsurant) of the risk of fulfillment of a part of its obligations with another insurer (reinsurer), on conditions determined in the contract. 2. The rules provided for by this Chapter shall apply to the contract of reinsurance, unless otherwise provided by the contract of reinsurance. In so doing, the insurer under a contract of insurance (principal contract) which has concluded a contract of reinsurance shall be considered to be the reinsurant in this latter contract. 3. Under reinsurance, the insured under this contract shall remain liable to the insurant under the principal contract of insurance for the payment of insurance compensation or the insurance coverage. 4. The subsequent conclusion of two or several contracts of reinsurance shall be permitted.
Article 858. [Excluded]
Article 859. Obligatory State Insurance 1. For the purpose of ensuring the public interests of citizens and the interests of the state, obligatory state insurance of the life, health, and/or of property of citizens may be established by the legislation. Obligatory state insurance shall be effectuated at the expense of means allotted for these purposes from the respective budget to the state bodies and bodies of local administration and self-government (insurants). 2. Obligatory state insurance shall be effectuated directly on the basis of the legislation concerning such insurance or on the basis of contracts of insurance concluded by the insurers and insurants in accordance with existing procedure. 3. Obligatory state insurance shall be paid for by the insurers in the amount determined by the legislation concerning such insurance. 4. The rules provided for by this Chapter shall apply to obligatory state insurance unless otherwise provided by the legislation concerning such insurance and does not arise from the essence of the respective relations concerning the insurance.
Article 860. Application of General Rules on Insurance to Special Types of Insurance The rules provided for by this Chapter shall apply to relations with regard to the insurance of foreign investments against non-commercial risks, marine insurance, medical insurance, and insurance of pensions, insofar as not otherwise established by legislation on these types of insurance.
CHAPTER 49 Commission
Article 861. Contract of Commission 1. Under a contract of commission one party (the attorney) shall undertake to perform, in the name of and at the expense of another person (the principal), determined legal actions. The rights and duties with regard to the transaction concluded by the attorney shall arise directly for the principal. 2. A contract of commission may be concluded with or without a specification of the period during which the attorney has the right to act in the name of the principal.
Article 862. Remuneration of Attorney 1. The principal shall be obliged to pay remuneration to the attorney if this is provided for by the legislation, or the contract of commission. In instances when a contract of commission is connected with the effectuation of entrepreneurial activity by both parties or one of them, the principal shall be obliged to pay remuneration to the attorney unless otherwise provided by the contract. 2. In the absence, in a contract of commission for compensation, of conditions concerning the amount of remuneration or the procedure for the payment thereof, the remuneration shall be paid after the performance of the commission in the amount determined in accordance with Article 394(3) of this Code. The attorney acting as a commercial representative (Article 185(1)) shall have the right in accordance with Article 340 of this Code to retain things, situated with him, which are subject to transfer to the principal, as security for his demands under the contract of commission.
Article 863. Performance of Commission in Accordance with Instructions of Principal 1. An attorney shall be obliged to perform the commission given to him in accordance with the instructions of the principal. The instructions of the principal must be lawful, practicable, and specific. 2. An attorney shall have the right to deviate from instructions of the principal if under the circumstances of the case this is necessary in the interests of the principal and the attorney could not inquire the principal in advance or did not receive a reply to his enquiry within a reasonable period. An attorney shall be obliged to inform the principal about deviations committed as soon as notice became possible. 3. The right to deviate, in the interests of the principal, from his instructions without a preliminary enquiry concerning such deviations, may be granted to an attorney acting as a commercial representative (Article 185(1)). In this event the commercial representative shall be obliged, within a reasonable period to inform the principal about deviations committed, unless otherwise provided by the contract of commission.
Article 864. Duties of Attorney An attorney shall be obliged to: 1) personally perform the commission given to him, except for instances specified in Article 866 of this Code;
2) give to the principal, at his demand, all information concerning the course of the performance of the commission; 3) transfer to the principal without delay everything received under the transactions concluded in performance of the commission; 4) upon the performance of the commission or in the event of the termination of the contract of commission before the performance thereof, return without delay to the principal the power of attorney, the period of operation of which has not lapsed, and submit a report with documents of justification appended, if this is required according to the conditions of the contract or the character of the commission.
Article 865. Duties of Principal 1. The principal shall be obliged to issue a power(s) of attorney to the attorney for the performance of legal actions provided for by the contract of commission, except for instances provided for by the second part of Article 183(1) of this Code. 2. The principal shall be obliged, unless otherwise provided by the contract, to compensate the attorney for expenses incurred, and provide the attorney with the means necessary for the performance of the commission. 3. The principal shall be obliged without delay to accept from the attorney everything performed by him in accordance with the contract of commission. 4. The principal shall be obliged to pay remuneration to the attorney if in accordance with Article 862 of this Code the contract of commission is to be compensated.
Article 866. Transfer of Performance of Commission l. An attorney shall have the right to transfer the performance of a commission to another person (deputy) only in the instances and on the conditions provided for by Article 187 of this Code. 2. The principal shall have the right to reject the deputy chosen by the attorney. 3. If a possible deputy of the attorney is specified in the contract of commission, the attorney shall not be liable either for choice of the deputy or for the carrying out the affairs by him. If the right of the attorney to transfer performance of a commission to another person has not been provided for in the contract, or has been provided for but the deputy is not specified therein, the attorney shall be liable for the choice of the deputy.
Article 867. Termination of Contract of Commission 1. A contract of commission shall be terminated as a consequence of: 1) revocation of the commission by the principal; 2) refusal of the attorney; 3) death of the principal or attorney, deeming either of them to lack active legal capacity, having limited active legal capacity, or to be missing. 2. The principal shall have the right to revoke a commission, and the attorney shall have the right to renounce it, at any time. An agreement concerning the waiver of this right shall be void. 3. A party who has repudiated a contract of commission providing for the actions of an attorney as a commercial representative must inform the other party about the termination of the contract not later than thirty days in advance unless a longer period has been provided for by the contract. In the event of the reorganization of a legal person which is a commercial representative, the principal shall have the right to revoke the commission without such prior notice.
Article 868. Consequences of Termination of Contract of Commission 1. If a contract of commission is terminated before the commission is performed by the attorney in full, the principal shall be obliged to compensate the attorney for the costs incurred by him when performing the commission, and when remuneration was due to the attorney, also to pay remuneration to him commensurate with the work fulfilled by him. This rule shall not apply to the performance by the attorney of the commission after he knew or should have known about the termination of the commission. 2. The revocation of the commission by the principal shall not be grounds for compensation of losses due to the attorney by the termination of the contract of commission, except for instances of termination of the contract providing for the actions of an attorney as a commercial representative. 3. The refusal of the attorney to perform the commission of the principal shall not be grounds for the compensation of losses caused to the principal by the termination of the contract of commission, except for instances of the refusal of an attorney in conditions when the principal is deprived of the possibility to ensure his interests otherwise, and also of the refusal of the performance of the contract providing for actions of an attorney as a commercial representative.
Article 869. Duties of Heirs of Attorney and Liquidator of Legal Person Which is Attorney In the event of the death of an attorney, his heirs shall be obliged to notify the principal about the termination of the contract of commission and take measures necessary in order to protect the property of the principal, in particular, to preserve his things and documents, and then to transfer this property to the principal. The same duty shall lie on the liquidator of a legal person which is an attorney.
CHAPTER 50 Actions in Another's Interest Without Commission
Article 870. Conditions of Actions in Another's Interest 1. Actions without a commission, other instruction, or consent of the interested person promised in advance for the purpose of preventing harm to his person or property, performance of his obligation or in his other not unlawful interests (actions in another's interest) must be performed on the ground of the obvious advantage or benefit and intentions, actual or probable, of the interested person, and with the necessary concern and circumspection. 2. The rules provided for by this Chapter shall not apply to actions in the interest of other persons, performed by state bodies, bodies of local administration and self-government, for which such actions are one of the purposes of their activity.
Article 871. Notification of Interested Person Concerning Actions in His Interest 1. The person acting in another's interest shall be obliged at the first opportunity to notify the interested person thereof and await his decision within a reasonable period concerning approval or disapproval of the actions undertaken, if such waiting does not entail serious damage for the interested person. 2. It shall not be required to specially notify the interested citizen about actions in his interest if such actions are undertaken in his presence.
Article 872. Consequences of Approval by Interested Person of Actions in His Interest
If a person, in whose interest actions are undertaken without his commission, approves these actions, the rules concerning the contract of commission or other contract, corresponding to the character of the actions undertaken, even if approval was oral, shall apply to relations of the parties thereafter.
Article 873. Consequences of Non-approval by Interested Person of Actions in His Interest 1. Actions in another's interest, performed after it became known to he who performed these actions that they are not approved by the interested person, shall not entail for the latter any duties either with respect to those actions performed or with respect to third persons. 2. Actions for the purpose of preventing danger for the life of a person who has turned out to be in danger shall be permitted also against the will of this person; performance of a duty of maintaining someone shall be permitted against the will of he on whom this duty lies.
Article 874. Compensation of Losses to Person Who Acted in Another's Interest 1. Necessary expenses and other real damage incurred by the person who acted in another's interest in accordance with the rules provided for by this Chapter shall be subject to compensation by the interested person, except for expenses which were caused by the actions specified in Article 873(1) of this Code. The right to compensation of necessary expenses and other real damage shall also be preserved when the actions in another's interest did not lead to the result presupposed. However, in the event of the prevention of damage to the property of another person the amount of compensation must not exceed the value of this property. 2. Expenses and other losses of the person who acted in another's interest, incurred by him in connection with actions, which were undertaken after receiving the approval of the interested person (Article 872), shall be compensated according to the rules on the contract of the corresponding type.
Article 875. Remuneration for Actions in Another's Interest The person whose actions in another's interest led to a positive result for the interested person shall have the right to obtain remuneration if such right is provided for by the legislation or agreement with the interested person.
Article 876. Consequences of Transaction in Another's Interest Duties with regard to a transaction concluded in another's interest shall pass to the person in whose interest it was concluded on condition of the approval by him of this transaction and if the other party does not raise objections to such transfer or, when concluding the transaction, the other party knew or should have known that the transaction was concluded in another's interest. In the event of the transfer of duties under this transaction to the person in whose interests it was concluded, the rights with regard to this transaction must also be transferred to the latter.
Article 877. Unfounded Enrichment as Consequence of Actions in Another's Interest If actions not immediately directed to ensuring the interests of another person, including those in an instance when the person who performed them mistakenly presupposed that he acts in his own interest, led to the unfounded enrichment of the other person, the rules provided for by Chapter 59 of this Code shall apply.
Article 878. Compensation of Harm Caused by Actions in Another's Interest
Relations with regard to compensation of harm caused by actions in another's interest to the interested person or to third persons shall be regulated by the rules provided for by Chapter 58 of this Code.
Article 879. Report of Person Who Acted in Another's Interest The person who acted in another's interest shall be obliged to submit to the person in whose interests such actions were effectuated a report specifying the revenues received, expenses incurred and other losses.
CHAPTER 51 Commission Body
Article 880. Contract of Commission Body 1. Under a contract of commission body, one party (commission agent) shall undertake, on behalf of another party (committent), to conclude for remuneration one or several transactions in his own name, but at the expense of the committent. The commission agent shall acquire the rights and become obliged with regard to a transaction concluded by the commission agent with a third person, even though the committent was named in the transaction or entered into direct relations with the third person in regard to performance of the transaction. 2. A contract of commission body may be concluded for a specified period or without specifying the period of its operation, with or without specifying the territory of the performance thereof, with or without the obligation of the committent not to grant to third persons the right to conclude a transaction in his interests and at his expense, the conclusion of which has been entrusted to the commission agent, and with or without conditions concerning the assortment of goods which are the subject of the commission body. 3. The peculiarities of individual types of commission body contract may be provided for by the legislation.
Article 881. Commission Body Remuneration l. The committent shall be obliged to pay remuneration to the commission agent, and in the event the commission agent has assumed the guaranty for performance of the transaction by a third person (del credere), also additional remuneration in the amount and in accordance with the procedure established in the contract of commission body. If the amount of remuneration or the procedure for the payment thereof has not been provided for by the contract and the amount of remuneration cannot be determined from the conditions of the contract, the remuneration shall be paid after the performance of the contract of commission body in the amount determined in accordance with Article 394(3) of this Code. 2. If the contract of commission body was not performed for reasons dependent upon the committent, the commission agent shall retain the right to the commission body remuneration, and also to compensation for expenses incurred.
Article 882. Performance of Commission Body Commission A commission agent shall be obliged to perform the commission assumed on the conditions most advantageous for the committent in accordance with the instructions of the committent, and in the absence of such instructions in the contract of commission body, in accordance with the requirements commonly presented. In an instance when the commission agent has concluded a transaction on conditions more advantageous than those which were specified by the committent, the additional advantage shall be divided between the
committent and the commission agent equally unless otherwise provided by agreement of the parties.
Article 883. Liability for Failure to Perform Transaction Concluded for Committent 1. The commission agent shall not be liable to the committent for the failure of a third person to perform a transaction concluded with him at the expense of the committent, except for instances when the commission agent did not act with the necessary caution in the choice of this person or assumed the guaranty for performance of the transaction (del credere). 2. In the event of the failure of a third person to perform a transaction concluded with him by the commission agent, the commission agent shall be obliged immediately to inform the committent thereof, to collect the necessary evidences, and also, at the demand of the committent, to transfer rights to him regarding such transaction in compliance with the rules concerning the cession of a demand (Articles 353- 357, 359, 360). 3. The cession of rights to the committent with regard to a transaction on the basis of Clause 2 of this Article shall be permitted irrespective of the agreement of the commission agent with the third person prohibiting or limiting such cession. This shall not relieve the commission agent from liability to the third person in connection with the cession of the right in violation of the agreement on the prohibition or limitation thereof.
Article 884. Sub-Commission Body 1. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of commission body, the commission agent shall have the right for the purpose of performance of this contract to conclude a contract of sub-commission body with another person, while remaining liable for the actions of the sub-commission agent to the committent. Under the contract of sub-commission body, the commission agent shall acquire the rights and duties of the committent with respect to the sub-commission agent. 2. Until the termination of the contract of commission body, the committent shall not have the right without the consent of the commission agent to enter into direct relations with the sub-commission agent, unless otherwise provided by the contract of commission body.
Article 885. Deviation from Instructions of Committent 1. The commission agent shall have the right to deviate from the instructions of the committent if under the circumstances of the case this is necessary in the interests of the committent and the commission agent could not ask the committent in advance and did not receive a reply to his enquiry within a reasonable period. The commission agent shall be obliged to inform the committent about the deviations committed as soon as notification becomes possible. The right to deviate from his instructions without prior enquiry may be granted to the commission agent acting as an entrepreneur. In this event the commission agent shall be obliged within a reasonable period to inform the committent about the deviations committed, unless otherwise provided by the contract of commission body. 2. A commission agent who has sold property at a price lower than agreed with the committent shall be obliged to compensate the latter for the difference unless it is proved that he had no possibility to sell the property at the agreed price and the sale for a lower price prevented more losses. In an instance when the commission agent was obliged to ask the committent in advance, the commission agent also must prove that he had no possibility to receive in advance the consent of the committent for the deviation from his instructions. 3. If the commission agent purchased property at a price higher than agreed with the committent, the committent, not wishing to accept such purchase, shall be obliged to declare this to the commission agent
within a reasonable period upon receipt of notification thereof concerning the conclusion of a transaction with a third person. Otherwise, the purchase shall be deemed to be accepted by the committent. If the commission agent notified that he accepts the difference in price at his own expense, the committent shall not have the right to repudiate the transaction concluded for him.
Article 886. Rights to Things Which Are Subject of Commission Body 1. Things received by the commission agent from the committent or acquired by the commission agent at the expense of the committent shall be the ownership of the latter. 2. The commission agent shall have the right in accordance with Article 340 of this Code to retain things, which are at his disposal and which are subject to transfer to the committent or to the person specified by the committent, to secure his demands under the contract of commission body. In the event the committent is declared to be economically insolvent (bankrupt), the said right of the commission agent shall terminate, and his demands against the committent within the limits of the value of things which he withheld shall be satisfied in accordance with Article 340 of this Code equally with the demands secured by a pledge.
Article 887. Satisfaction of Demands of Commission Agent from Amounts Due to Committent A commission agent shall have the right in accordance with Article 340 of this Code to retain amounts due to him under the contract of commission body from all the amounts received by him on the account of the committent. However, the creditors of the committent who enjoy preference with respect to priority of satisfaction of their demands to the pledgeholders shall not be deprived of the right to satisfaction of these demands from the amounts withheld by the commission agent.
Article 888. Liability of Commission Agent for Loss, Shortage, or Damage to Property of Committent 1. A commission agent shall be liable to the committent for loss, shortage, or damage to the property of the committent being in his disposal. 2. If, at accepting by the commission agent, the property sent by the committent or the property which comes to the commission agent for the committent proves to be damaged, or there is shortage of this property, and this damage or shortage can be revealed by visual inspection, or damage has been caused by someone to the property of the committent, being in disposal of the commission agent, the commission agent shall be obliged to take measures for the protection of the rights of the committent, to gather the necessary evidences, and to inform the committent immediately. 3. A commission agent who has not insured property of the committent being in his disposal, shall be liable therefor to this person only in instances when the committent instructed him to insure the property at the expense of the committent or the insurance of this property by the commission agent has been provided for by the contract of commission body.
Article 889. Report of Commission Agent The commission agent shall be obliged to submit a report to the committent with regard to the performance of a commission and to transfer to him everything obtained under the contract of commission body. The committent who has objections with regard to the report must present these objections to the commission agent within thirty days from the date of receipt of the report, unless another period has been established by agreement of the parties. Otherwise, in the absence of another agreement, the report shall be considered to be accepted.
Article 890. Acceptance by Committent of That Performed Under the Contract of Commission Body The committent shall be obliged to: 1) accept from the commission agent everything obtained under the contract of commission body; 2) inspect the property acquired for him by the commission agent and notify the latter without delay about the defects revealed in this property; 3) relieve the commission agent from obligations assumed by him to a third person with regard to the performance of the commission body commission.
Article 891. Compensation of Expenses for Performance of Commission Body Commission The committent shall be obliged, in addition to payment of the commission body remuneration, and in respective instances also additional remuneration for del credere, to compensate the commission agent for amounts expended by him for performance of the commission body commission. The commission agent shall not have the right to compensation of expenses for the storage of property of the committent being in his disposal, unless otherwise established in a legislation or by the contract of commission body.
Article 892. Termination of Contract of Commission Body A contract of commission body shall terminate as a consequence of: 1) refusal of the committent to perform the contract; 2) refusal of the commission agent to perform the contract in instances provided for by the legislation or the contract; 3) death of the commission agent, deeming him to lack active legal capacity, limited active legal capacity, or to be missing; 4) deeming of an individual entrepreneur who is a commission agent to be insolvent (bankrupt). In the event a commission agent is declared to be insolvent (bankrupt), his rights and duties with regard to transactions concluded by him for the committent in performance of the instructions of the latter shall pass to the committent.
Article 893. Revocation of Commission Body Commission by Committent l. The committent shall have the right at any time to refuse performance of the contract of commission body, having revoked the commission given to the commission agent. The commission agent shall have the right to demand compensation of losses caused by the revocation of the commission. 2. In an instance when the contract of commission body was concluded without an indication of the period of its operation, the committent must inform the commission agent about the termination of the contract not later than thirty days in advance unless a longer period of notification has been provided for by the contract. In this event the committent shall be obliged to pay remuneration to the commission agent for transactions concluded by him before the termination of the contract, and also to compensate the commission agent for expenses incurred by him before the termination of the contract. 3. In the event of the revocation of the commission, the committent shall be obliged within the period established by the contract of commission body, and if such period has not been established, immediately to dispose of his property being within the jurisdiction of the commission agent. If the committent does
not fulfill this duty, the commission agent shall have the right to hand over the property for storage at the expense of the committent or to sell it at the price as advantageous as possible for the committent.
Article 894. Refusal of Commission Agent to Perform Contract of Commission Body 1. A commission agent shall not have the right, unless otherwise provided by the contract of commission body, to refuse the performance thereof, except for an instance when the contract was concluded without an indication of the period of its operation. In this event the commission agent must inform the committent about the termination of the contract not later than thirty days in advance, unless a longer period of notification has been provided for by the contract. A commission agent shall be obliged to take measures necessary in order to ensure the preservation of the property of the committent. 2. The committent must dispose of his property being within the jurisdiction of the commission agent within fifteen days from the date of receipt of the notification about the refusal of the commission agent to perform the commission, unless another period has been established by the contract of commission body. If the committent does not fulfill this duty, the commission agent shall have the right to hand over the property for storage at the expense of the committent or to sell it at the price as advantageous as possible for the committent. 3. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of commission body, the commission agent who has refused to perform a commission shall retain the right to commission body remuneration for the transactions concluded by him before termination of the contract, and also to compensation for expenses incurred by him up to that time.
CHAPTER 52 Trust Management of Property
Article 895. Contract of Trust Management of Property 1. Under a contract of trust management of property one party (founder of management) shall transfer to the other party (trustee manager) property in trust management for a determined period, and the trustee manager shall undertake, for remuneration, to effectuate the management of this property in the interests of the founder of management or person specified therein (beneficiary).
In case of concluding a contract of trust management of property in the interests of a citizen who is unconscious due to a disease, excluding the possibility to understand the significance of his actions or direct them, such a contract may be concluded without payment of the remuneration to the trustee manager.
The transfer of property to trust management shall not entail the transfer of the right of ownership thereto to the trustee manager. 2. In carrying out trust management of property, the trustee manager shall have the right to perform with respect to this property in accordance with the contract of trust management any legal and real actions in the interests of the founder of management or the beneficiary. Limitations with respect to individual actions relating to the trust management of property may be provided for by the legislation or contract. 3. Transactions with property transferred to trust management the trustee manager shall conclude in his own name, indicating in so doing that he acts as such manager. This condition shall be considered to be complied with if when performing actions not requiring written formalization the other party has been informed about the performance thereof by the trustee manager in this capacity, and in written documents by making the mark "Д.У." (trust management) after the name of the trustee manager.
In the absence of an indication concerning the action of the trustee manager in this capacity, the trustee manager shall become obliged to third persons personally and shall be liable to them only with the property belonging to him.
Article 896. Object of Trust Management 1. Enterprises and other property complexes, individual objects relegated to immovable property, securities, rights certified by paperless securities, exclusive rights, and other property may be an object of trust management. 2. Money may not be a separate object of trust management, except for instances provided for by the legislation. 3. Property in economic management or operative administration may not be transferred to trust management. The transfer to trust management of property in economic management or operative administration shall be possible only after the liquidation of the legal person in whose economic management or operative administration the property is situated, or after the termination of the right of economic management or operative administration of property and transferring thereof into the possession of the owner on other grounds provided for by the legislation.
Article 897. Founder of Management The owner of property, and in instances provided for by Article 909 of this Code, another person, shall be the founder of trust management.
Article 898. Trustee Manager 1. An individual entrepreneur or commercial organization, except for a unitary enterprise, may be a trustee manager. In instances when the trust management of property is effectuated on the grounds provided for by the legislation, the trustee manager may be a citizen who is not an entrepreneur or a non-commercial organization, except for an institution. The legislation on privatization may provide that also other persons may bt trustee managers. 2. [Excluded] 3. The trustee manager may not be a beneficiary under the contract of trust management of property.
Article 899. Significant Conditions of Contract of Trust Management of Property 1. There must be specified in the contract of trust management of property: 1) subject of the agreement, including the characteristic of property transferred to the trust management, and value of this property; 2) the limits of using the property by the trustee manager; 3) the name of the legal person or the name of the citizen in whose interests the management of the property shall be effectuated (the founder of the management or the beneficiary); 4) the amount and form of remuneration to the manager, if payment of remuneration has been provided for by the contract; 5) the period of operation of the contract. 2. The contract of trust management of property shall be concluded for a period not exceeding five years. For individual types of property transferred in trust management other maximum periods for which the
contract may be concluded may be established by the legislation. In the absence of the statement by one of the parties concerning the termination of the contract regarding the end of the period of its operation, it shall be considered to be extended for the same period and on the same conditions as were provided for by the contract.
Article 900. Form of Contract of Trust Management of Property 1. A contract of trust management of property must be concluded in written form. 2. A contract of trust management of immovable property must be concluded in the form provided for the contract of sale of immovable property. The transfer of immovable property in trust management shall be subject to state registration. 3. The failure to comply with the form of the contract of trust management of property or the requirement concerning its state registration shall entail the invalidity of the contract.
Article 901. Separation of Property in Trust Management 1. Property transferred in trust management shall be solitary from other property of the founder of the management, and also from property of the trustee manager. This property shall be reflected in a separate balance sheet (separately in the inventory book of income and expenditure of organizations and individual entrepreneurs, applying the simplified taxation system) of the trustee manager and the separate account shall be kept with regard to it. A separate bank account shall be opened in order to settle accounts with regard to activity connected with trust management. 2. Levy of execution for debts of the founder of the management on property transferred by him in trust management shall not be permitted, except for the economic insolvency (bankruptcy) of this person. In the event of bankruptcy of the founder of the management, the trust management of this property shall terminate and it shall be included in the bankruptcy assets.
Article 902. Transfer in Trust Management of Property Encumbered by Pledge 1. The transfer of pledged property to trust management shall not deprive the pledgeholder of the right to levy execution on this property. 2. The trustee manager must be warned that the property transferred to him in trust management is encumbered by a pledge. If the trustee manager did not know and should not have known that the property, which is transferred to him in trust management, is encumbered by a pledge, he shall have the right to demand in court the dissolution of the contract of trust management of property and payment of the remuneration due to him under the contract.
Article 903. Rights and Duties of Trustee Manager 1. The trustee manager shall effectuate, within the limits provided for by the legislation and the contract of trust management of property, the powers of the owner with respect to property transferred in trust management. The disposition of immovable property shall be effectuated by the trustee manager in the instances provided for by the contract of trust management. 2. The rights acquired by the trustee manager as a result of actions relating to the trust management of property shall be included in the property transferred in trust management. The duties which arise as a result of such actions of the trustee manager shall be performed at the expense of this property. 3. In order to defend the rights to property in trust management the trustee manager shall have the right to demand any elimination of a violation of his rights (Articles 282, 283, 285, and 286).
4. The trustee manager shall submit to the founder of the management and beneficiary a report concerning his activity within the periods and in accordance with the procedure established by the contract of trust management of property.
Article 904. Transfer of Trust Management of Property 1. The trustee manager shall effectuate trust management of property personally, except for instances provided for by Clause 2 of this Article. 2. The trustee manager may charge another person to perform actions in the name of the trustee manager which are necessary for the management of the property if he is authorized to do so by the contract of trust management of the property, or has received the consent of the founder to do so in written form, or is forced to do so by virtue of circumstances in order to ensure the interests of the founder of the management or beneficiary and does not have the possibility to receive instructions of the founder of the management within a reasonable period. The trustee manager shall be liable for actions of the entrusted person, chosen by him, as though for his own.
Article 905. Liability of Trustee Manager l. The trustee manager who has effectuated the trust management of property in the interests of the beneficiary or founder of the management without due concern, shall compensate the beneficiary for lost advantage for the period of trust management of the property, and shall compensate the founder of the management for losses caused by the loss of or damage to the property, taking into account its natural wear and tear, and also for lost advantage. The trustee manager shall bear liability for losses caused unless he would prove that these losses occurred as a consequence of force majeure or the actions of the beneficiary or the founder of the management. 2. Obligations relating to a transaction concluded by the trustee manager in excess of the powers granted to him or in violation of the limitations established for him shall be borne by the trustee manager personally. If third persons participating in the transaction did not know and should not have known about the exceeding of powers or the limitations established, the obligations which arose shall be subject to performance in accordance with the procedure established by Clause 3 of this Article. The founder of the management may in this event demand of the trustee manager compensation for losses incurred by him. 3. Debts relating to obligations which arose in connection with trust management of property shall be paid at the expense of this property. In the event this property is insufficient, execution may be levied on the property of the trustee manager, and if his property also is insufficient, on the property of the founder of the management not transferred to trust management. 4. The contract of trust management of property may provide for the granting of a pledge by the trustee manager to secure compensation of losses which may be caused to the founder of the management or to the beneficiary by the improper performance of the contract of trust management.
Article 906. Remuneration of Trustee Manager The trustee manager shall have the right to remuneration provided for by the contract of trust management of property, and also to compensation of necessary expenses made by him in the trust management of property at the expense of revenues from the use of this property.
Article 907. Termination of Contract of Trust Management of Property 1. A contract of trust management of property shall be terminated as a consequence of:
1) the death of a citizen who is a beneficiary, or the liquidation of the legal person being the beneficiary, unless otherwise provided by the contract; 2) the refusal of the beneficiary to receive advantages under the contract, unless otherwise provided by the contract; 3) the death of the citizen who is the trustee manager, his being deemed to lack active legal capacity, to have limited active legal capacity, or to be missing, and also his being deemed to be insolvent (bankrupt), or establishing a prohibition for the trustee manager to be engaged in the entrepreneurial activity in the instances provided by this Code and other acts of legislation; 4) the refusal of the trustee manager or founder of the management to effectuate the trust management in connection with the impossibility of the trustee manager carrying out personally the trust management of the property; 5) the repudiation of the contract by the founder of the management for other reasons than those specified in Clause 4 of this Clause, on condition of the payment of the remuneration, stipulated by the contract, to the trustee manager; 6) the deeming of the citizen, who is the founder of the management, to be insolvent (bankrupt); 7) termination of guardianship and trusteship, if the trust management contract was signed for the property management of the ward in accordance with clause 1 of Article 36 of this Code. 2. In the event of the repudiation by one party of the contract of trust management of property, the other party must be notified about this three months before the termination of the contract unless another period of notification is provided by the contract. 3. In the event of the termination of a contract of trust management the property in trust management shall be transferred to the founder of the management unless otherwise provided by the contract.
Article 908. Transfer of Securities to Trust Management 1. In the event of the transfer of securities to trust management, the combining of securities being transferred to trust management by different persons may be provided for. 2. The powers of the trust manager with regard to the disposition of securities shall be determined in the contract of trust management. Under the contract of trust management of securities, monetary means may be transferred to the trustee manager for acquiring the securities and management thereof. 3. The peculiarities of the trust management of securities shall be determined by the legislation. 4. The rules of this Article shall apply respectively to the rights certified by paperless securities.
Article 909. Trust Management of Property on Grounds Provided for by the Legislation 1. Trust management of property also may be founded: 1) as a consequence of the necessity for permanent management of the property of a ward or a property of a citizen recognized as missing, in the instances provided for by Articles 36 and 39 of this Code; 2) on the basis of a will in which the executor of the will has been appointed; 3) on other grounds provided for by the legislation. 2. The rules provided for by this Chapter shall apply respectively to relations concerning the trust management of property founded on the grounds specified in Clause 1 of this Article unless otherwise provided by the legislation or does not arise from the essence of such relations. In instances when the trust management of property is founded on the grounds specified in Clause 1 of this Article, the rights of the founder of the management provided for by the rules of this Chapter shall
belong respectively to the trusteeship and guardianship body, the executor of the will, or another person specified in a legislation.
CHAPTER 53 Complex Entrepreneurial License (Franchise)
Article 910. Contract of Complex Entrepreneurial License (Franchise) 1. Under a contract of complex entrepreneurial license (franchise) (hereinafter referred to as the contract of franchise), one party (right holder) undertakes to grant to the other party (user), for remuneration, for a period determined in the contract of franchise or without specifying a period, a license complex including the right to use the firm name of the right holder, other intellectual property objects provided by the contract of franchise and also undisclosed information in the entrepreneurial activity of the user. 2. A contract of franchise shall provide for the use of the license complex, specified in Clause 1 of this Article, within the determined amount (with specifying of the minimum and/or maximum amount of use), with or without specifying the territory of using of these rights for the determined kinds of entrepreneurial activity. 3. Commercial organizations and individual entrepreneurs may be parties to a contract of franchise. 4. Remuneration under a contract of franchise may be paid by the user to the right holder in the form of fixed lump sum or periodic payments, deductions from proceeds, or in other form provided for by the contract of franchise.
Article 9101. Form and Registration of Contract of Franchise 1. A contract of franchise must be concluded in written form. 2. A contract of franchise is subject to registration in the patent body in accordance with the procedure established by the legislation.
Article 9102. Complex Entrepreneurial Sublicence 1. The right of the user to authorize other persons to use the license complex, granted to the user, or part of this complex on conditions agreed by the user with the right holder or determined in the contract of franchise (complex entrepreneurial sublicence) may be provided for by the contract of franchise. The duty of the user to grant the specified number of complex entrepreneurial sublicences within a specified period may be provided for by the contract of franchise. 2. A contract of complex entrepreneurial sublicence may not be concluded for a longer period than the contract of franchise on the basis of which it was concluded. 3. Termination of the contract of franchise terminates a contract of complex entrepreneurial sublicence. 4. The user shall bear liability to the right holder for the actions of secondary users unless otherwise provided by the contract of franchise. 5. The rules concerning the contract of franchise provided for by this Chapter shall apply to the contract of complex entrepreneurial sublicence unless otherwise provided by the legislation.
Article 9103. Duties of Right Holder 1. The right holder is obliged to transfer to the user technical, commercial or other information necessary to the user for using a license complex granted to him under the contract of franchise, and also to instruct the user and his employees with regard to questions connected with the use of this complex.
2. Unless otherwise provided by the contract of franchise, the right holder shall be obliged to: render permanent technical and consultative assistance to the user, including assistance in training of the staff; control the quality of goods (work, services) being produced (fulfilled, rendered) by the user on the basis of the contract of franchise.
Article 9104. Duties of User Taking into consideration the character and peculiarities of the activity being effectuated by the user under the contract of franchise, the user shall be obliged to: use, when carrying out the activity provided for by the contract of franchise, the firm name of the right holder by the means specified in the contract; ensure the conformity of the quality of the goods produced, work fulfilled, or services rendered on the basis of the contract of franchise, to the quality of similar goods, work, or services being produced, fulfilled, or rendered by the right holder itself; comply with the instructions and directions of the right holder aimed at ensuring the conformity of the character, means, and conditions of using the license complex to its using by the right holder, including the instructions concerning the external and internal appearance of the commercial premises to be used by the user when fulfilling the contract of franchise; render to buyers (customers) all additional services which they might count upon in acquiring (ordering) the goods (works, services) from the right holder itself; not divulge the non-disclosed information, obtained from the right holder, including the trade secrets (know-how); issue the stipulated quantity of complex entrepreneurial sublicences, if such duty is provided for by the contract; inform the buyers (customers), using the most obvious means for them, that the user is using the firm name, trademark, service mark, or other means of individualization of participants of the civil turnover, goods, works, or services on the grounds of the contract of franchise.
Article 9105. Limitation of Rights of Parties under Contract of Franchise 1. Limitations of the right of the parties may be provided for by the contract of franchise by specifying: the obligation of the right holder not to grant to other persons similar license complexes for the use thereof on the territory allocated for the user or refrain from own similar activity on this territory; the obligation of the user not to compete with the right holder on the territory to which the operation of the contract of franchise extends with respect to entrepreneurial activity effectuated by the user with the use of the exclusive rights and undisclosed information belonging to the right holder; the refusal of the user to obtain, under the contracts of franchise, similar rights and undisclosed information from competitors (potential competitors) of the right holder; the obligation of the user to agree with the right holder the location of the commercial premises to be used when fulfilling the contract of franchise, as well as the external and internal appearance thereof. 2. Limitations of the right of the parties under the contract of franchise may be deemed by the court to be invalid upon the demand of the anti-monopoly body or other interested person, if these limitations, taking into consideration the condition of the goods market and economic status of the parties, contradict to the anti-monopoly legislation.
Article 9106. Liability of Right Holder Relating to Requirements Presented to User 1. The right holder shall bear subsidiary liability for requirements presented to the user concerning the non-compliance of the quality of the goods (works, services) being sold (fulfilled, rendered) by the user under the contract of franchise, to the quality of similar goods (works, services) being sold (fulfilled, rendered) by the right holder itself. 2. The right holder shall be liable jointly and severally with the user with regard to requirements presented to the user as the manufacturer of the products (goods).
Article 9107. Change of Contract of Franchise 1. A contract of franchise may be changed in accordance with the rules provided for by Chapter 29 of this Code. 2. Change of the contract of franchise are subject to registration in accordance with the procedure established for registration of the contracts of franchise. 3. In relations with third persons the parties to a contract of franchise shall have the right to refer to a change of the contract only from the time of registration of this change.
Article 9108. Preservation of Contract of Franchise in Force in Event of Change of Parties 1. The transfer to another person of any exclusive right to an intellectual property object whatever within the license complex granted to the user shall not be grounds for a change or dissolution of the contract of franchise. The new right holder shall become a party to this contract in that part of the rights and duties relating to the exclusive right to an intellectual property object transferred to the new right holder. 2. In the event of the death of the right holder, being the individual entrepreneur, and transferring his rights and duties under the contract of franchise to the heir, the contract of franchise shall terminate, unless the heir is registered within six months from the date of opening the inheritance as an individual entrepreneur in accordance with the procedure established by the legislation. 3. The exercise of the rights and performance of the duties of the deceased right holder before the acceptance of these rights and duties by the heir and before registration of the heir as an individual entrepreneur shall be effectuated by the trustee manager appointed in accordance with Chapter 52 of this Code.
Article 9109. Preservation of Contract of Franchise in Force in Event of Change of Firm Name In the event of a change by the right holder of its firm name, the contract of franchise shall be preserved and operate with respect to the new firm name of the right holder unless the user requires the dissolution of the contract and compensation of losses. In the event of the continuation of the operation of the contract of franchise, the user shall have the right to demand commensurate reduction of the remuneration due to the right holder.
Article 91010. Consequences of Termination of Exclusive Right, Use of Which Has Been Granted Under Contract of Franchise 1. If in the period of operation of a contract of franchise the period of operation of the exclusive right, use of which was granted under this contract, has expired (except for termination of right to the firm name without replacing it by the new firm name), or such right terminated on other grounds, the contract of franchise shall continue to operate, except for provisions relating to the terminated right, and the user, unless otherwise provided by the contract, shall have the right to demand commensurate reduction of the remuneration due to the right holder.
2. In the event of the termination of the rights to the firm name without replacing it by the new firm name, operation of a contract of franchise shall terminate.
Article 91011. Dissolution of Contract of Franchise 1. The contract of franchise concluded with or without specifying the period may be dissolved in accordance with the rules of Chapter 29 of this Code. 2. Each of the parties to the contract of franchise concluded without specifying the period shall have the right at any time to repudiate the contract, having notified the other party thereof six months in advance unless a longer period has been provided for by the contract. 3. The dissolution before time of the contract of franchise concluded with a specifying of the period, and also the dissolution of the contract concluded without specifying the period, shall be subject to registration in accordance with the procedure established for registration of the contracts of franchise.
CHAPTER 54 Simple Partnership
Article 911. Contract of Simple Partnership (Contract on Joint Activity) 1. Under the contract of simple partnership (contract on joint activity), two or several persons (partners) shall undertake to combine their contributions and jointly operate without the formation of a legal person in order to obtain profit or to achieve another purpose which is not contrary to legislation. 2. Only individual entrepreneurs and/or commercial organizations may be the parties to a contract of simple partnership concluded in order to effectuate entrepreneurial activity.
Article 912. Contributions of Partners 1. Everything that is contributed by the partner to the common cause, including money, other property, professional and other knowledge, skills and abilities, and also business reputation and business connections, shall be deemed to be the contribution of the partner. 2. The contributions of partners shall be presupposed to be equal in value unless it follows otherwise from the contract of simple partnership or real circumstances. The valuation of the non-monetary contribution of a partner shall be made by agreement between the partners.
Article 913. Common Property of Partners 1. The property, contributed by partners, which they possessed by right of ownership, and also the product produced as a result of joint activity and the yield and revenues obtained from such activity shall be deemed their common share ownership insofar as not otherwise established by the legislation or the contract of simple partnership or does not arise from the essence of the obligation. The property, contributed by partners, which they possessed on the grounds which are distinct from the right of ownership (by right of economic possession, operative administration, under the contract of lease, under the contract of use of property without compensation etc.) shall be used in the interests of all partners and shall comprise, together with the property in their common ownership, the common property of the partners. 2. The bookkeeping of the common property of the partners may be entrusted by them to one of the persons participating in the contract of simple partnership.
3. The use of common property by the partners shall be effectuated by their common consent, and in the event of the failure to achieve consent, in accordance with the procedure established by a court. 4. The duties of the partners with regard to the maintenance of common property and the procedure for the compensation of expenses connected with the fulfillment of these duties shall be determined by the contract.
Article 914. Carrying out Common Affairs of Partners 1. When carrying out common affairs, each partner shall have the right to act in the name of all the partners unless it is established by the contract of simple partnership that carrying out the affairs shall be effectuated by individual participants or jointly by all the participants of the contract of simple partnership. When carrying out the affairs jointly, the consent of all the partners shall be required for the conclusion of each transaction. 2. In relations with third persons the power of a partner to conclude a transaction in the name of all the partners shall be certified by a power of attorney issued to him by the remaining partners or by the contract of simple partnership concluded in written form. 3. In relations with third persons the partners may not refer to limitation of the rights of the partner, who has concluded the transaction, with regard to carrying out the common affairs of the partners, except for instances when the partners would prove that at the time of concluding the transaction the third person knew or should have known about the existence of such limitations. 4. The partner who has concluded a transaction in the name of all the partners with respect to which his right to conduct the common affairs of the partners was limited, or who has concluded in his own name a transaction in the interests of all the partners, may demand compensation for expenses made by him at his own expense, if there are sufficient grounds to suppose that these transactions were necessary in the interests of all the partners. The partners who incurred losses as a consequence of such transactions shall have the right to demand compensation thereof. 5. Decisions affecting the common affairs of partners shall be adopted by the partners by their common consent.
Article 915. Right of Partner to Information Each partner shall have the right, irrespective of whether he is authorized to carry out the common affairs of the partners, to be familiarized with all of the documentation relating to carrying out the affairs. The waiver of this right or limitation thereof, including by agreement of the partners, shall be void.
Article 916. Common Expenses and Losses of Partners The procedure for covering expenses and losses connected with the joint activity of the partners shall be determined by their agreement. In the absence of such agreement, each partner shall bear expenses and losses in proportion to the value of his contribution to the common cause. An agreement wholly exempting any of the partners from participation in covering the common expenses or losses shall be void.
Article 917. Liability of Partners for Common Obligations 1. Unless the contract of simple partnership is connected with the effectuation of entrepreneurial activity by its participants, each partner shall be liable for common contractual obligations with all of its property in proportion to the value of its contribution to the common cause.
Partners shall be liable jointly and severally for common obligations which arose not from the contract. 2. If the contract of simple partnership is connected with the effectuation of entrepreneurial activity by its participants, the partners shall be liable jointly and severally for all common obligations irrespective of the grounds for the arising thereof.
Article 918. Distribution of Profit The profit obtained by the partners as a result of their joint activity shall be distributed in proportion to the value of the contributions of the partners to the common cause unless otherwise provided by the contract of simple partnership or other agreement of the partners. An agreement on exemption of any of the partners from participation in the profit shall be void.
Article 919. Partition of Share of Partner at Demand of Creditor of This Partner The creditor of a participant of the contract of simple partnership shall have the right to submit a demand concerning the partition of the debtor’s share in the common property in accordance with Article 258 of this Code.
Article 920. Termination of Contract of Simple Partnership l. A contract of simple partnership shall be terminated as a consequence of: 1) deeming of any of the partners to lack active legal capacity, to have limited active legal capacity, or to be missing, unless the contract of simple partnership or subsequent agreement provides for the preservation of the contract in relations between the remaining partners; 2) the declaration of any of the partners to be insolvent (bankrupt), with the exception specified in subclause 1 of this Clause; 3) the death of a partner (declaring to be deceased) or liquidation or reorganization of a legal person participating in the contract of simple partnership, unless the contract or a subsequent agreement provides for the preservation of the contract in relations between the remaining partners or replacement of the deceased partner (reorganized legal person) by his heirs (legal successors); 4) the refusal, by any of the partners, of further participation in a contract of simple partnership without specification of the period, with the exception specified in Subclause 1 of this Clause; 5) the dissolution of the contract of simple partnership concluded with a specification of the period, at the demand of one of the partners in relations between this partner and the remaining partners, with the exception specified in subclause 1 of this Clause; 6) the expiry of the period of the contract of simple partnership; 7) the partition of the share of the partner at the demand of creditor of this partner, with the exception specified in subclause 1 of this clause. 2. In the event of the termination of a contract of simple partnership, the things transferred to the common possession and/or use of the partners shall be returned to the partner who granted these things without remuneration unless otherwise provided by the agreement of the parties. From the time of termination of a contract of simple partnership the participants thereof shall bear joint and several liability for the non-performed common obligations with respect to third persons. The division of property in the common ownership of the partners and the common rights of demand which have arisen shall be effectuated in accordance with the procedure established by Article 255 of this Code. A partner who has contributed an individually-determined thing to the common ownership shall have the right, in the event of the termination of the contract of simple partnership, to demand the return of this
thing in a judicial proceeding, subject to compliance with the interests of the remaining partners and creditors.
Article 921. Repudiation of Contract of Simple Partnership Without Specification of Period Declaration of repudiation by a partner of a contract of simple partnership without specification of period must be made by the partner not later than three months before the assumed withdrawal from the contract. An agreement concerning limitation of the right to repudiate a contract of simple partnership without specification of period shall be void.
Article 922. Dissolution of Contract of Simple Partnership at Demand of Party Together with the grounds specified in Article 420(2) of this Code, the party to a contract of simple partnership concluded with the specification of a period or with the specification of a purpose as a condition resolutive shall have the right to demand dissolution of the contract in relations between himself and the remaining partners for a justifiable reason with compensation to the remaining partners of the real damage caused by dissolution of the contract.
Article 923. Liability of Partner With Respect to Which Contract of Simple Partnership is Dissolved In an instance when a contract of simple partnership was not terminated as a result of the declaration of one of the participants concerning repudiation of further participation therein or dissolution of the contract at the demand of one of the partners, the person whose participation in the contract has terminated shall be liable to third persons for common obligations which arose in the period of its participation in the contract as if it has remained a participant of the contract of simple partnership.
Article 924. Nontransparent Partnership 1. It may be provided by a contract of simple partnership that its existence shall not be divulged to third persons (nontransparent partnership). The rules concerning the contract of simple partnership provided for by this Chapter shall apply to such contract unless otherwise provided by this Article or does not arise from the essence of the nontransparent partnership. 2. In relations with third persons each of the participants of a nontransparent partnership shall be liable with all of its property for transactions which this partner concluded in his name in the common interests of the partners. 3. In relations between partners, the obligations which arose in the process of their joint activity shall be considered to be common.
CHAPTER 55 Public Promise of Reward
Article 925. Duty to Pay Reward 1. The person who has announced publicly the payment of monetary remuneration or the issuance of another reward (the payment of a reward) to whomever performs the lawful action specified in the announcement within the period specified therein shall be obliged to pay the promised reward to anyone who performed the respective action, in particular who found a lost thing or present the necessary information to the person who announced the reward. 2. The duty to pay the reward shall arise on condition that the promise of the reward enables it to determine the person by whom it is promised. A person who has responded to the promise shall have the
right to demand written confirmation of the promise and shall bear the risk of consequences of the failure to submit this demand if it turns out in reality that the announcement concerning the reward was not made by the person specified therein. 3. If the amount was not specified in the public promise of the reward, it shall be determined by agreement with the person who promised the reward, and in the event of a dispute, by a court. 4. The duty to pay a reward shall arise irrespective of whether the respective action was performed in connection with the announcement made or irrespective thereof. 5. In instances when an action specified in an announcement was performed by several persons, the right to receive the reward shall be acquired by the person who performed the respective action first. If the action specified in the announcement was performed by two or more persons and it is impossible to determine which of them performed the respective action first, and also if the action was performed by two or more persons simultaneously, the reward shall be divided between them equally or in another amount provided for by an agreement between them. 6. Unless otherwise provided in the announcement concerning the reward and does not arise from the character of the action specified therein, the conformity of the action fulfilled to the requirements contained in the announcement shall be determined by the person who publicly promised the reward, and in the event of a dispute, by a court
Article 926. Revocation of Public Promise of Reward 1. A person who has announced publicly the payment of a reward shall have the right in the same form to renounce this promise, except for instances when in the announcement itself the inadmissibility of a renunciation has been provided for or arises therefrom, or a determined period has been given for the performance of the action for which the reward is promised, or at the time of the announcement concerning the renunciation one or several persons, who responded, already had fulfilled the action specified in the announcement. 2. The revocation of a public promise of a reward shall not relieve the person who announced the reward from compensation of the expenses of persons who responded, incurred by them in connection with the performance of the action specified in the announcement, within the limits of the reward specified in the announcement.
CHAPTER 56 Public Competition
Article 927. Organization of Public Competition 1. A person who has announced publicly the payment of monetary remuneration or issuance of other reward (the payment of a reward) for the best fulfillment of work or achievement of other results (public competition) must pay (issue) the stipulated reward to whomever in accordance with the conditions for conducting the competition is deemed to be the winner thereof. 2. The public competition must be directed towards the achievement of some publicly useful purposes. 3. A public competition may be open when the proposal of the organizer of the competition to take part therein is addressed to all who wish to do so by means of an announcement in the press or other mass media, or be closed when the proposal to take part in the competition is sent to a specified group of persons at the choice of the organizer of the competition. An open competition may be conditioned by the preliminary qualification of the participants thereof, when a preliminary selection of persons, who wish to take part therein, is carried out by the organizer of the competition.
4. The announcement concerning a public competition must contain at least the conditions specifying the essence of the task, the criteria and procedure for evaluating the results of the work or other achievements, the place, period, and procedure for submitting them, the amount and form of the reward, and also the procedure and periods for the announcement of the results of the competition. 5. To a public competition containing an obligation to conclude a contract with the winner of the competition, the rules provided for by this Chapter shall apply insofar as not provided otherwise by Articles 417-419 of this Code.
Article 928. Change of Conditions and Cancellation of Public Competition 1. A person who has announced a public competition shall have the right to change its conditions or to cancel a competition only during the first half of the period established for the submission of the works. 2. A notice concerning a change of the conditions or cancellation of the competition must be made by the same means as the competition was announced. 3. In the event of a change of the conditions of a competition or the cancellation thereof, the person who has announced the competition must compensate the expenses incurred by any person who fulfilled the work provided for in the announcement until it became known or should have become known to such person that the conditions of the competition changed or of the cancellation thereof. 4. If in the event of the change of the conditions of a competition or in the event of the cancellation thereof the requirements specified in Clauses 1 or 2 of this Article were violated, the person who announced the competition must pay a reward to those who fulfilled the work which satisfies the conditions specified in the announcement.
Article 929. Decision Concerning Payment of Reward l. A decision concerning the payment of a reward must be rendered and communicated to the participants of a public competition in accordance with the procedure and within the periods established in the announcement concerning the competition. 2. If the results specified in the announcement were achieved in a work fulfilled jointly by two or more persons, the reward shall be distributed in accordance with the agreement reached between them. If such agreement is not reached, the procedure for the distribution of the reward shall be determined by a court.
Article 930. Use of Works of Science, Literature, and Art Conferred with Award 1. If the subject of a public competition consists of the creation of a work of science, literature, or art and the conditions of the competition do not provide otherwise, the person who has announced the public competition shall acquire a preferential right to conclude with the author of the work on which an award is conferred a contract concerning the use of the work with the payment to him a respective remuneration for this. 2. The person who has announced a public competition shall be obliged to return to the participants of the competition works not conferred with an award unless otherwise provided by the announcement concerning the competition and does not arise from the character of the work fulfilled.
CHAPTER 57 Conducting Games and Betting
Article 931. Demands Connected with the Organization of Games and Betting and Participation Therein
The demands of citizens and legal persons connected with the organization of games and betting or participation therein shall not be subject to judicial defense, except for the demands of persons who took part in games or betting under the influence of deceit, coercion, threat, or ill-intentioned agreement of their representative with the organizer of the games or betting, and also the demands specified in Article 932(5) of this Code and in other cases established by the legislative acts.
Article 932. Conducting Lotteries, Totalizers, and Other Games by the Republic of Belarus and Administrative Territorial Units or Upon Authorization Thereof 1. The right to establish, organize and hold the lotteries in the Republic of Belarus shall belong to the State, and shall be exercised, in the established order, by the republican state bodies, local executive and administrative bodies, state legal persons. Relations between the organizers of lotteries, totalizers (mutual betting), and other games based on risk and the participants of the games shall be fulfilled in accordance with the legislation and based on a contract. 2. The contract between the organizer and the participant of the games shall be freely concluded and formalized by the issuance of a lottery ticket, receipt, or other document, or in other form established by the rules of the game organization. 3. The proposal concerning the conclusion of a contract provided for by Clause 1 of this Article must include the conditions concerning the period of conducting the games and the procedure for the determination of the winnings and the amount thereof. In the event of a refusal of the organizer of the games to conduct them within the established period, the participants of the games shall have the right to demand compensation from the organizer thereof for real damage sustained because of the cancellation or postponement of the period thereof. 4. For the persons, who in accordance with the conditions of conducting a lottery, totalizer, or other games are deemed to be winners, the winnings must be paid by the organizer of the games in the amount, form (monetary or in kind), and period provided for by the conditions of conducting the games, and if the period is not specified in these conditions, not later than ten days from the time of claiming to pay the winning. 5. In the event of the failure of the organizer of the games to perform the duties specified in Clause 4 of this Article, the participant who won the lottery, totalizer, or other games shall have the right to demand the payment of the winnings from the organizer of the games, and also the compensation of losses caused by a violation of the contract on the part of the organizer.
CHAPTER 58 Obligations as Consequence of Causing Harm
§ 1. General Provisions on Compensation of Harm
Article 933. General Grounds of Liability for Causing Harm 1. Harm caused to the person or property of a citizen, and also harm caused to the property of a legal person, shall be subject to compensation in full by the person who caused the harm. The duty of compensation of harm may be placed by the law on a person who is not the causer of the harm. The duty of the causer of harm to pay compensation to a victim above the compensation of harm may be established by the law or by a contract.
2. A person who has caused harm shall be relieved from compensation of harm if it is proved that the harm was caused not through the fault of this person. Compensation of harm in the absence of the fault of the causer of harm also may be provided for by the law.
3. Harm caused by lawful actions shall be subject to compensation in the instances provided for by the legislation. Compensation of harm may be refused if the harm was caused at the request or with the consent of the victim, and the actions of the causer of the harm do not violate moral principles of society.
Article 934. Preventing of Causing Harm 1. The danger of causing harm in the future may be grounds for a suit concerning the prohibition of the activity creating such a danger. 2. If the harm caused is the consequence of the operation of an enterprise, installation, or other production activity which continues to cause harm or threatens new harm, a court shall have the right to oblige the defendant, in addition to compensation of harm, to suspend or terminate the respective activity. A court may reject a suit concerning the suspension or termination of the respective activity only if the suspension or termination thereof is contrary to the state or public interests. The refusal to suspend or terminate such activity shall not deprive the victim of the right to compensation of harm caused by this activity.
Article 935. Causing Harm in State of Necessary Defense Harm caused in a state of necessary defense, unless the limits thereof were exceeded, shall not be subject to compensation.
Article 936. Causing Harm in State of Extreme Necessity Harm caused in a state of extreme necessity, that is, in order to eliminate a danger threatening the causer of the harm himself or other persons, if this danger under the given circumstances could not be eliminated by other means, must be compensated by the person who caused the harm. Taking into account the circumstances under which such harm was caused, a court may place the duty of compensating it on a third person in whose interests the causer of the harm acted or relieve both this third person and the causer of the harm fully or partially from compensation of the harm.
Article 937. Liability of Legal Person or Citizen for Harm Caused by Employee Thereof 1. A legal person or citizen shall compensate harm caused by an employee thereof when performing labor (employment, official) duties. With regard to the rules provided for by this Chapter, citizens fulfilling work on the basis of a labor contract, and also citizens fulfilling work under a civil legal contract, if in so doing they acted or should have acted under the order of the respective legal person or citizen and under its control for the safe conducting of work, shall be deemed to be employees. 2. Economic partnerships and production cooperatives shall compensate harm caused by their participants (members) when the latter effectuate entrepreneurial, production, or other activity of the partnership or cooperative.
Article 938. Liability for Harm Caused by State Bodies, Bodies of Local Administration or Self- government, and Officials Thereof Harm caused to a citizen or legal person as a result of the illegal actions (omission) of state bodies, bodies of local administration or self-government, or officials of these bodies, including harm caused as a result of the issuance of an act of a state body or body of local administration or self-government which does not
correspond to the legislation, shall be subject to compensation. Harm shall be compensated at the expense, respectively, of the treasury of the Republic of Belarus or treasury of the administrative territorial units.
Article 939. Liability for Harm Caused by Illegal Actions of Bodies of Criminal Prosecution and Court 1. Harm caused to a citizen as a result of the illegal conviction, application of compulsory measures of security and medical treatment, illegal arraignment, detention, imprisonment, house arrest, recognizance not to leave and to duly behave, suspension, provisional placement in a psychiatric (psychoneurologic) facility, illegal imposition of an administrative sanction in the form of arrest or correctional work, shall be compensated at the expense of the treasury of the Republic of Belarus, and in the instances provided for by the legislation, at the expense of the treasury of the administrative territorial units, in full, irrespective of the fault of the officials of the bodies of criminal prosecution and the court in accordance with the procedure provided for by legislative acts. 2. Harm caused to a citizen or legal person as a result of the illegal activity of bodies of criminal prosecution, which does not entail the consequences provided for by Clause 1 of this Article, shall be compensated on the grounds and in accordance with the procedure which has been provided for by Article 938 of this Code. The harm caused when effectuating justice shall be compensated if the fault of the judge has been established by the sentence of a court which has entered into legal force.
Article 940. Bodies and Persons Acting in Name of Treasury When Compensating Harm at its Expense In instances when in accordance with this Code or other legislation the harm caused is subject to compensation at the expense of the treasury of the Republic of Belarus or treasury of administrative territorial units, the respective financial bodies shall act in the name of the treasury unless in accordance with Article 125(3) of this Code this duty is placed on another body, legal person, or citizen.
Article 941. Compensation of Harm by Person Who Has Insured His Liability A legal person or citizen who has insured his liability by way of voluntary or obligatory insurance to the benefit of the victim (Article 823, Article 825(1)), when insurance compensation is insufficient in order to compensate the harm caused in full, shall compensate the difference between the insurance compensation and the actual amount of damage.
Article 942. Liability for Harm Caused by Minors Up to Fourteen Years of Age 1. For harm caused by a minor who has not attained fourteen years of age (juveniles), parents, adoptive parents or trustee shall be liable, unless they would prove that the harm arose not through their fault. 2. If a juvenile who needs trusteeship was situated in an organization which in accordance with the legislation is the trustee (healthcare organization, education institution, social care institution or another organization), this organization must compensate the harm caused by the juvenile unless it proves that the harm did not arise through its fault. 3. If a juvenile has caused harm at the time when he was under the supervision of a healthcare organization, education institution or another organization obliged to effectuate supervision over him, or a person carrying out supervision on the basis of a contract, this organization or person shall be liable for the harm unless they could prove that the harm did not arise through their fault in carrying out the supervision. 4. The duty of the parents, adoptive parents, trustee, healthcare organization, education institution and another organization, relating to compensation of harm, shall not terminate with the attainment of majority by the juvenile or with reception by him of property sufficient to compensate the harm.
If the parents, adoptive parents, trustee, or other citizens specified in Clause 3 of this Article have died or do not have sufficient means in order to compensate the harm caused to the life or health of the victim, and the causer of the harm himself, having full active legal capacity, possesses such means, the court shall have the right, taking into account the property status of the victim and the causer of the harm, and also other circumstances, to adopt a decision concerning compensation of harm fully or partially at the expense of the causer of the harm himself.
Article 943. Liability for Harm Caused by Minors in Age from Fourteen to Eighteen Years 1. A minor from fourteen to eighteen years of age shall bear liability on the common grounds autonomously for harm caused. 2. In an instance when a minor from fourteen to eighteen years of age has no revenues or other property sufficient to compensate harm, the harm must be compensated fully or in the insufficient part by parents, adoptive parents or guardian, unless they would prove that the harm arose not through their fault. If a minor from fourteen to eighteen years of age who needs guardianship is situated in an organization, which in accordance with the legislation is the guardian (healthcare organization, education institution, social care institution or another organization), this organization is obliged to compensate the harm fully or in the insufficient part, unless it would prove that the harm arose not through its fault. 3. The duty of parents, adoptive parents, guardian, and respective organization with regard to the compensation of harm caused by a minor from fourteen to eighteen years of age shall terminate upon the attainment of majority by the causer of the harm or in instances when, before attaining majority, the minor has revenues or other property sufficient to compensate the harm or when the minor has acquired active legal capacity before attaining majority.
Article 944. Liability of Parents Deprived of Parental Rights for Harm Caused by Minors A court may place on a parent, deprived of parental rights, liability for harm caused by the minor children thereof, during three years after the deprivation of the parent of parental rights, if the behavior of the child which entailed causing the harm, was a consequence of the improper effectuation of parental duties.
Article 945. Liability for Harm Caused by Citizen Deemed to Lack Active Legal Capacity 1. Harm caused by a citizen deemed to lack active legal capacity shall be compensated by his trustee or the organization obliged to effectuate supervision over this citizen unless they would prove that the harm arose not through their fault. 2. The duty of a trustee or the organization obliged to effectuate supervision with regard to compensation of harm caused by a citizen deemed to lack active legal capacity shall not terminate in the event of the latter being deemed to have active legal capacity. 3. If the trustee is deceased or does not have sufficient means for the compensation of harm caused to the life or health of a victim, and the causer of harm himself possesses such means, the court shall have the right, taking into account the property status of the victim and the causer of the harm, and also other circumstances, to adopt a decision on compensation of harm fully or partially at the expense of the causer of the harm himself.
Article 946. Liability for Harm Caused by Citizen Deemed to Have Limited Active Legal Capacity Harm caused by a citizen limited in active legal capacity as a consequence of abusing alcoholic beverages, narcotics, psychotropic substances, analogues thereof shall be compensated by the causer of the harm himself.
Article 947. Liability for Harm Caused by Citizen Not Capable to Understand the Meaning of His Actions or Guide These Actions 1. A citizen who has active legal capacity, and also a minor from fourteen to eighteen years of age, who has caused harm in such a state that he could not understand the meaning of his actions or guide these actions shall not be liable for the harm caused by him. If harm is caused to the life or health of the victim, the court may, taking into account the property status of the victim and the causer of the harm, and also other circumstances, place the duty with regard to compensation of harm fully or partially on the causer of the harm. 2. The causer of harm shall not be relieved from liability if he has brought himself into a state in which he could not understand the meaning of his actions or guide these actions by the use of alcoholic beverages, narcotics, psychotropic substances, analogues thereof or other means. 3. If the harm was caused by a person who could not understand the meaning of his actions or guide these actions as a consequence of mental disorder (disease), the duty to compensate the harm may be placed by a court on a spouse, parents, or children who have reached majority and who have labor capacity and reside jointly with this person, and who knew about the mental disorder (disease) of the causer of the harm but did not raise the question of deeming him to lack active legal capacity.
Article 948. Liability for Harm Caused by Activity Creating Increased Danger for Persons Being Around 1. Legal persons and citizens whose activity is connected with an increased danger for persons being around (use of means of transport, mechanisms, high voltage electric power, atomic power, explosive substances, strong poisons, etc; effectuation of construction and other activity connected therewith, and others) shall be obliged to compensate the harm caused by a source of increased danger unless it is proved that the harm arose as a consequence of force majeure or the intent of the victim. The possessor of a source of increased danger may be relieved by a court from liability fully or partially also on the grounds provided for by Article 952(2) and (3) of this Code. The duty of compensation of harm shall be placed on the legal person or citizen who possesses the source of increased danger by right of ownership or other legal basis, including the right of lease (with the exception of lease of means of transport with a crew, Article 611), warrant for the right to drive means of transport, by virtue of the order of a respective body concerning the transfer of the source of increased danger to this legal person or citizen, and the like. 2. The possessors of sources of increased danger shall bear liability jointly and severally for harm caused as a result of the interaction of these sources (collisions of means of transport, and others) to third persons on the grounds provided for by Clause 1 of this Article. The harm caused as a result of the interaction of the sources of increased danger to their possessors shall be compensated on the common grounds (Article 933). 3. The possessor of a source of increased danger shall not be liable for harm caused by this source if the possessor would prove that the source appeared beyond his possession as a result of the unlawful actions of other persons. Liability for harm caused by the source of increased danger in such instances shall be borne by the person who unlawfully took possession of the source. If there is fault of the possessor of a source of increased danger in the unlawful seizure of his source from his possession, liability may be placed both on the possessor and on the person who unlawfully took possession of the source of increased danger.
Article 949. Liability for Harm Caused Jointly Persons who have caused harm jointly shall be liable to the victim jointly and severally.
Upon the application of the victim and in his interests a court shall have the right to place on the persons, who have caused harm jointly, liability in shares determined according to the rules provided for by Article 950(2) of this Code.
Article 950. Right of Regression Against Person Who Caused Harm l. The person who has compensated harm caused by another person (by an employee when performing his employment, official, or other labor duties, by a person driving means of transport, and so forth) shall have the right of counter demand (regression) against this person in the amount of the compensation paid unless another amount has been determined by the legislation or in accordance with the procedure established by the legislation. 2. The causer of harm who has compensated harm jointly caused, shall have the right to demand from each of the other causers of harm a share of the compensation paid to the victim in the amount corresponding to the degree of fault of this causer of harm. If it is impossible to determine the degree of fault, the shares shall be deemed to be equal. 3. The Republic of Belarus and administrative territorial units, in the event of compensation by them of harm caused by the officials of bodies of criminal prosecution and a court (Article 939(1)), shall have the right of regression against these persons if their fault has been established by the sentence of a court which has entered into legal force. 4. The persons who have compensated harm on the grounds specified in Articles 942-945 of this Code shall not have the right of regression against the person who caused the harm.
Article 951. Means of Compensation of Harm In satisfying the demand concerning compensation of harm, the court in accordance with the circumstances of the case shall oblige the person liable for causing the harm to compensate the harm in kind (to provide a thing of the same kind and quality, to repair a damaged thing, and so forth) or to compensate the losses caused (Article 14(2)).
Article 952. Taking Account of Fault of Victim and Property Status of Person Who Caused Harm 1. Harm which arose as a consequence of the intent of the victim shall not be subject to compensation. 2. If the gross negligence of the victim himself furthered the arising or the increasing of the harm, depending on the degree of fault of the victim and the causer of the harm, the amount of compensation must be reduced. In the event of gross negligence of the victim and the absence of fault of the causer of the harm in instances when his liability ensues irrespective of fault, the amount of compensation must be reduced or compensation of harm may be refused unless otherwise provided by the legislation. In the event of causing harm to the life or health of a citizen, refusal of compensation of harm shall not be permitted. The fault of the victim shall not be taken into account when compensating additional expenses (Article 954(l)), when compensating harm in connection the death of a breadwinner (Article 958), and also when compensating expenses for burial (Article 963). 3. A court may reduce the amount of compensation of harm caused by a citizen, taking into account the property status of the causer of harm, except for instances when the harm was caused by actions committed intentionally.
§ 2. Compensation of Harm Caused to Life and Health of Citizen
Article 953. Compensation of Harm Caused to Life or Health of Citizen When Performing Contractual or Other Obligations Harm caused to the life or health of a citizen when performing contractual obligations, and also when performing duties of military service, service in the bodies of internal affairs, and other respective duties shall be compensated according to the rules provided for by this Chapter unless a higher amount of liability has been provided by the legislation or by a contract.
Article 954. Amount and Character of Compensation of Harm Which Caused Impairment of Health l. When mutilation or other impairment of health is caused to a citizen, the earnings (income) lost by the victim which he had or could have certainly, and also additional expenses incurred, caused by the impairment of health, including expenses for treatment, additional nourishment, acquisition of medicines, prosthetics, care effectuated by other persons, sanatorium and resort treatment, the acquisition of technical means of social rehabilitation, and training for another profession shall be subject to compensation if it is established that the victim needs these types of assistance and care and does not have the right to receive them free of charge. 2. When determining lost earnings (income), the pensions (except for disability pension assigned to the victim in connection with the corresponding mutilation or other impairment of health), assigned both before and after causing harm to health, shall not be taken into account and shall not entail a reduction of the amount of compensation of harm (shall not be set-off at the expense of compensation of harm). Earnings (income) received by the victim after the impairment of health also shall not be set-off at the expense of compensation of harm. 3. The extent and amount of compensation of harm due to the victim in accordance with this Article may be increased on the grounds of the legislation or the contract.
Article 955. Determination of Earnings (Income) Lost as Result of Impairment of Health
1. The amount of earnings (income) lost by a victim, which is subject to compensation, shall be determined in percentage points of the victim’s average monthly earnings (income) before the mutilation or other impairment of health or before the loss of labor capacity, corresponding to the degree of the victim's loss of professional labor capacity, and in the absence of professional labor capacity, the degree of the loss of general labor capacity.
2. As lost earnings (income) of the victim, all types of payment for labor under labor and civil legal contracts, taxable with the income tax, shall be taken into account. Payments of an nonrecurrent character, including compensation for unused leave and severance benefit payable in the event of dismissal, shall not be taken into account. The benefit paid for the period of temporary lack of labor capacity or pregnancy and birth leave shall be taken into account. The incomes from entrepreneurial activity, activities specified in indents two, three, twelve – thirty-one, thirty-three – forty-four of part four of Article 1(1) of this Code, and also author's royalty, shall be included in the lost earnings.
All types of earnings (income) shall be taken into account in the sums determined before taxation and withholding of compulsory insurance fees to the budget of the state non-budgetary fund of social protection of the population of the Republic of Belarus.
3. The average monthly earnings (income) of the victim shall be calculated by means of dividing the total amount of the victim’s earnings (income) for twelve months of work, which preceded the mutilation, loss or decreasing the labor capacity as a result of mutilation (at the victim’s option), by twelve.
The average monthly income of the victim carrying out entrepreneurial activity, activities specified in indents two, three, twelve – thirty-one, thirty-three – forty-four of part four of Article 1(1) of this Code,
shall be determined by means of dividing the total sum of his income for the calendar year or four quarters of activity preceding the year (quarter) of the mutilation, loss or decreasing the labor capacity as a result of mutilation (at the victim’s option), by twelve.
In the event of an occupational disease, the average monthly earnings (income) of the victim may also be determined for last twelve months (calendar year, four quarters) of work preceding the termination of work which has caused such disease.
In the instance when the victim at the time of causing the harm worked, carried out entrepreneurial activity, activities specified in indents two, three, twelve – thirty-one, thirty-three – forty-four of part four of Article 1(1) of this Code, less than twelve months, the average monthly earnings (income) shall be calculated by means of dividing the total amount of his earnings (income) for the months actually worked by the number of these months. Months not worked in full shall, at victim’s wish, be substituted by the preceding months fully worked, or excluded from the calculation, when it is impossible to substitute these months.
4. In the instance when the victim at the time of causing harm did not work, carry out entrepreneurial activity, activities specified in indents two, three, twelve – thirty-one, thirty-three – forty-four of part four of Article 1(1) of this Code, the earnings before dismissal or the usual amount of remuneration of an employee of corresponding qualifications in the particular locality shall, at victim’s wish, be taken into account, but not less than five times the base unit established by the legislation.
5. If stable changes improving the property status of the victim (increase of earnings in the job held, or the victim was transferred to work paid higher, or the victim took up the job after receiving full-time education, and in other instances when the stability of change or possibility of change of payment of labor of the victim is proved) occurred in the earnings (income) of the victim before the mutilation or other impairment of health, then, when determining the average monthly earnings (income), only the earnings (income) which were received or should have received after the respective changes, shall be taken into account.
Article 956. Compensation of Harm in Event of Impairment of Health of Person Who Has Not Attained Majority 1. In the event of the mutilation or other impairment of health of a minor who has not attained fourteen years (juveniles) and does not have earnings (income), the person liable for the harm caused shall be obliged to compensate the expenses caused by the impairment of health. 2. Upon the attainment of fourteen years by a juvenile victim, and also in the event of causing harm to a minor of from fourteen to eighteen years age, not having earnings (income), the person liable for the harm caused shall be obliged to compensate the victim for, in addition to the expenses caused by the impairment of health, also the harm connected with the loss of or reduction of labor capacity, on the basis of the basic value, established by the legislation, multiplied by five. 3. If at the time of the impairment of health a minor had earnings, the harm shall be compensated on the basis of the amount of these earnings, but not lower than the basic value established by the legislation, multiplied by five. 4. After the commencement of labor activity a minor, to whose health harm was caused, shall have the right to demand an increase of the amount of compensation of harm on the basis of the earnings received by him, but not less than the amount of remuneration established for the job occupied by him or the earnings of an employee of the same qualifications at his place of work.
Article 957. Compensation of Harm to Persons Who Have Incurred Damage as Result of Death of Breadwinner
1. In the event of the death of the victim (breadwinner), the following persons shall have right to compensation of harm: 1) persons not capable for labor, who were dependent on the deceased or had, on the day of his death, the right to receive maintenance from him; 2) a child of the deceased, born after his death; 3) one of the parents, spouse, or other member of the family, irrespective of his labor capacity, who does not work and engaged in care for the children, grandchildren, brothers and sisters of the deceased, who were dependent on deceased, not attained fourteen years or, although they had attained the said age, but, in accordance with the conclusion of medical bodies, need care of other person by reason of their state of health; 4) persons who were dependent on the deceased and became not capable for labor within five years after his death. One of the parents, spouse, or other member of the family who does not work and engaged in care for children, grandchildren, brothers, and sisters of the deceased and became not capable for labor during the period of carrying out care, shall retain the right to compensation of harm after ending the care for these persons. 2. The harm shall be compensated to: 1) a minor: until attaining eighteen years of age; 2) pupils older than eighteen years – until receiving full-time education, but not more than up to twenty three years of age; 3) persons who attained the generally established pension age: for life; 4) disabled persons: for the period of disability; 5) one of the parents, spouse, or other member of the family engaged in care for children, grandchildren, brothers, and sisters dependent on the deceased: until they attain fourteen years of age or until change of the state of their health.
Article 958. Amount of Compensation of Harm Incurred in Event of Death of Breadwinner l. Harm shall be compensated to persons who have the right to compensation for harm in connection with the death of a breadwinner in the amount of that share of earnings (income) of the deceased, determined according to the rules of Article 955 of this Code, which they have received or had the right to receive for their maintenance while a breadwinner was alive. When determining the compensation for harm to these persons, as the incomes of the deceased, together with earnings (income), a pension, maintenance for life, and other similar payments being received by this person while alive, shall be taken into account. 2. When determining the amount of compensation for harm, pensions (except for corresponding persons in connection with the death of a breadwinner), assigned both before and after the death of a breadwinner, earnings (income) and scholarship, received by these persons, shall not be taken into account as the compensation of harm. 3. The amount of compensation established for each of those having the right to compensation of harm in connection with the death of a breadwinner shall not be subject to further recalculation except for instances of: 1) the birth of a child after the death of a breadwinner; 2) the assignment or termination of the payment of compensation to persons engaged in care for children, grandchildren, brothers, and sisters of a deceased breadwinner; 3) the assignment of the payment of compensation to persons who were dependent on the deceased and became not capable for labor within five years after his death.
The amount of compensation may be increased on the grounds of the legislation or the contract.
Article 959. Subsequent Change of Amount of Compensation of Harm 1. A victim who has partially lost labor capacity shall have the right at any time to demand from the person on whom the duty of compensation of harm has been placed a respective increase of the amount of his compensation if the labor capacity of the victim has decreased thereafter in connection with the causing of impairment of health in comparison with that which remained at the time of awarding compensation for harm to him. 2. A person on whom the duty to compensate harm, which was caused to the health of the victim, has been placed, shall have the right to demand a respective reduction of the amount of compensation, if the labor capacity of the victim increased in comparison with that which was at the time when compensation for harm was awarded. 3. The victim shall have the right to demand an increase of the amount of compensation of harm if the property status of the citizen on whom the duty to compensate harm was placed has improved, and the amount of compensation was reduced in accordance with Article 952(3) of this Code. 4. A court may, at the demand of a citizen who caused harm, reduce the amount of compensation for harm, if his property status, in connection with disability or attainment of the generally established pension age, has worsened in comparison with the status at the time of awarding compensation for harm, except for instances when the harm was caused by actions committed intentionally.
Article 960. Increase of Amount of Compensation of Harm in Connection with Increase of Cost of Living and Increase of Basic Value 1. Amounts to be paid to citizens for compensation of harm caused to the life or health of a victim shall be subject, in the event of an increase of the cost of living, to indexing in accordance with the procedure established by the legislation. 2. In the event of an increase of the basic value, established by the legislation, the amounts of compensation for lost earnings (income) and other payments awarded in connection with impairment of health or the death of a victim, shall be increased in proportion to the increase of the basic value.
Article 961. Payments for Compensation of Harm 1. Compensation of harm caused by a reduction of labor capacity or the death of a victim shall be made by monthly payments. When there are justifiable reasons, the court, taking into account the possibilities of the causer of harm, may, at the demand of the citizen who has the right to compensation of harm, award him the payments due as a lump sum payment, but for not more than three years. 2. Amounts in compensation of additional expenses (Article 954(l)) may be awarded for a future period within the limits of the periods determined on the basis of the conclusion of medical expert examination, and also in the instances of necessity of advance payment of the cost of the respective services and property, including the acquisition of sanatorium vouchers, payment for travel, and payment for technical means of social rehabilitation.
Article 962. Compensation of Harm in Event of Termination of Legal Person 1. In the event of the reorganization of a legal person deemed, in accordance with the established procedure, to be liable for harm caused to life or health, the duty relating to the payment of the respective payments shall be borne by its legal successor. Demands concerning compensation of harm shall also be submitted to it.
2. In the event of the liquidation of a legal person deemed, in accordance with the established procedure, to be liable for harm caused to life or health, the respective payments must be capitalized for the payment thereof to the victim according to the rules established by the legislation. Other instances ,under which the capitalization of payments may be made, also may be established by the legislation.
Article 963. Compensation of Expenses for Burial Persons liable for harm which caused the death of the victim shall be obliged to compensate necessary expenses for the burial to the person who incurred those expenses. The allowance for burial received by citizens who incurred these expenses shall not be set-off at the expense of compensation of harm.
§ 3. Compensation of Harm Caused as Consequence of Defects of Good, Work, or Service
Article 964. Grounds for Compensation of Harm Caused as Consequence of Defects of Good, Work, or Service Harm caused to the life, health, or property of a citizen or the property of a legal person as a consequence of defects of the good, work, or service, related to its design or composition, or other defects, and also as a consequence of unreliable or insufficient information concerning the good, work or service, shall be subject to compensation by the seller or the manufacturer of the good or by the person who fulfilled the work or rendered the service (executor), irrespective of their fault and whether the victim was in contractual relations with them or not. The rules provided for by this Article shall be applied only in the instances of the acquisition of the good (fulfillment of work, rendering of service) for consumption purposes, and not for use in entrepreneurial activity.
Article 965. Persons Liable for Harm Caused as Consequence of Defects of Good, Work, or Service 1. Harm caused as a consequence of the defects of a good shall be subject to compensation, at the choice of the victim, by the seller or the manufacturer of the good. 2. Harm caused as a consequence of the defects of work or service shall be subject to compensation by the person who fulfilled the work or rendered the service (executor). 3. Harm caused as a consequence of the failure to grant full or reliable information concerning the good (work, service) shall be subject to compensation by the persons specified in Clauses 1 and 2 of this Article.
Article 966. Periods for Compensation of Harm Caused as Result of Defects of Good, Work, or Service l. Harm caused as a consequence of defects of a good, work, or service shall be subject to compensation if it arose during the established shelf life or service period of a good (work, service), and if the shelf life or service period is not established in accordance with the legislation, within ten years from the date of production of the good (fulfilling work, rendering service). 2. After expiry of periods, specified in Clause 1 of this Article, harm shall be subject to compensation if: 1) in violation of the requirements of the act of legislation, the period of fitness or service period has not been established;
2) the person to whom the good was sold, for whom work was fulfilled, or to whom a service was rendered, was not warned about necessary actions upon the expiry of the shelf life or service period and possible consequences in the event of the failure to fulfill the said actions.
Article 967. Grounds for Relief from Liability for Harm Caused as Consequence of Defects of Good, Work or Service The seller or manufacturer of a good or executor of work or service shall be relieved from liability, if they would prove that the harm arose as a consequence of force majeure or a violation, by the consumer, of the established rules for the use of the good or the results of the work or service, or storage thereof.
§ 4. Compensation of Moral Harm
Article 968. General Provisions 1. The grounds and amount of compensation of moral harm to a citizen shall be determined by the rules provided for by this Chapter and Article 152 of this Code. 2. Moral harm caused by actions (omission) which violate the property rights of a citizen shall be subject to compensation in the instances provided for by the legislative acts. 3. Compensation of moral harm shall be effectuated irrespective of the property harm subject to compensation.
Article 969. Grounds for Compensation of Moral Harm Compensation of moral harm shall be effectuated irrespective of the fault of the causer of the harm in instances when: 1) the harm is caused to the life or health of a citizen by a source of increased danger; 2) the harm caused to a citizen as a result of the illegal conviction, application of compulsory measures of security and medical treatment, illegal arraignment, detention, imprisonment, house arrest, recognizance not to leave and to duly behave, suspension, provisional placement in a psychiatric (psychoneurologic) facility, illegal imposition of an administrative sanction in the form of arrest or correctional work; 3) the harm was caused by the dissemination of false information defaming honor, dignity, or business reputation of the citizen; 4) in other instances provided for by the legislative acts.
Article 970. Means and Amount of Compensation of Moral Harm 1. Compensation of moral harm shall be effectuated in monetary form. 2. The amount of compensation of moral harm shall be determined by a court depending upon the character of physical and moral suffering caused to the victim, and also the degree of fault of the causer of the harm in the instances when the fault is the grounds for the compensation of harm. When determining the amount of compensation of harm, the requirements of reasonableness and justice must be taken into account. The character of physical and moral sufferings shall be estimated by the court, taking into account the actual circumstances under which the moral harm was caused and the individual peculiarities of the victim.
CHAPTER 59 Obligations as Consequence of Unfounded Enrichment
Article 971. Duty to Return Unfounded Enrichment l. A person who without grounds established by the legislation or transaction acquired or saved property (acquirer) at the expense of another person (victim) shall be obliged to return to the latter property unfoundedly acquired or saved (unfounded enrichment), except for instances provided for by Article 978 of this Code. 2. The rules provided for by this Chapter shall be applied irrespective of whether the unfounded enrichment is a result of the behavior of the acquirer of the property, the victim himself or third persons, or occurred besides their will.
Article 972. Relationship Between Demands Concerning Return of Unfounded Enrichment and Other Demands Concerning Defense of Civil Rights Insofar as not otherwise established by this Code and does not arise from the essence of the respective relations, the rules provided for by this Chapter shall be subject to application also to demands: 1) concerning the return of that performed under an invalid transaction; 2) concerning the vindication of property by the owner from another's illegal possession; 3) by one party in an obligation to another concerning the return of that performed in connection with this obligation; 4) concerning compensation of harm, including that caused by the unfair behavior of the person enriched.
Article 973. Return of Unfounded Enrichment in Kind Property comprising unfounded enrichment of the acquirer must be returned to the victim in kind. The acquirer shall be liable to the victim for any, including also for any accidental, shortage or deterioration of the unfoundedly acquired or saved property which occurred after he knew or should have known that the enrichment is unfounded. Before that time he shall be liable only for intent and gross negligence.
Article 974. Compensation of Value of Unfounded Enrichment 1. If it is impossible to return in kind the property unfoundedly received or saved, the acquirer must compensate the victim for the real value of this property at the time of its acquisition, and also the losses caused by the subsequent change of the value of this property, if the acquirer did not compensate its value immediately after he knew about the unfounded enrichment. 2. A person who unfoundedly used another's property temporarily without the intention to acquire it, or used another's services, must compensate the victim for that which was saved by this person as a consequence of such use at the price which existed at the time when the use ended and in that place where it occurred.
Article 975. Consequences of Unfounded Transfer of Right to Another Person A person who has transferred by means of cession of demand or otherwise a right belonging to him to another person on the basis of a nonexistent or invalid obligation shall have the right to demand the restoration of his previous position, including the return to him of documents certifying the transferred right.
Article 976. Compensation to Victim of Incomes Not Received 1. The person who unfoundedly received or saved property shall be obliged to return or to compensate the victim for all incomes which this person obtained or should have obtained from this property from the time when this person knew or should have known about the unfounded enrichment. 2. Interest shall be subject to being calculated on the amount of unfounded monetary enrichment for the use of means of other person (Article 366) from the time when the acquirer knew or should have known that the reception or savings of monetary means is unfounded.
Article 977. Compensation of Expenditures on Property Subject to Return In the event of the return of property unfoundedly received or saved (Article 973) or compensation of the value thereof (Article 974), the acquirer shall have the right to demand compensation from the victim of necessary expenditures incurred for the maintenance and preservation of property from the time from which he is obliged to return incomes (Article 976), setting off the advantages received by him. The right to compensation of expenditures shall be lost in an instance when the acquirer intentionally withheld property which is subject to return.
Article 978. Unfounded Enrichment Not Subject to Return There shall not be subject to return as unfounded enrichment; 1) property transferred in performance of an obligation before the ensuing of the period of performance, unless otherwise provided by the obligation; 2) property transferred in performance of an obligation upon the expiry of the limitation period; 3) earnings and payments equated thereto, pensions, benefits, scholarships, compensation of harm caused to life or health, alimony and other monetary amounts granted to a citizen as means for existence, in the absence of lack of good faith on his part, and in the absence of error of calculations; 4) monetary amounts and other property granted in performance of a nonexistent obligation, if the acquirer would prove that the person requiring the return of the property knew about the absence of the obligation or granted the property for the purposes of charity.
SECTION V INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY
CHAPTER 60 General Provisions
Article 979. Legislation on intellectual property The legislation on the intellectual property consists of this Code and other acts of legislation.
Article 980. Objects of intellectual property To the object of the intellectual property shall be relegated: 1) the results of intellectual activity: works of science, literature and art;
performances, phonograms and programs of broadcasting organizations; inventions, utility models, industrial designs; selection achievement; layouts of integrated circuits; trade secrets (know-how); 2) means of individualization of participants of the civil turnover, goods, works or services: firm names; trademarks and service marks; geographical indications; 3) other results of the intellectual activity and means of individualization of participants of the civil turnover, goods, works or services in cases, provided by this Code and other legislative acts.
Article 981. Grounds for Arising of Rights to Objects of Intellectual Property The legal protection of the objects of intellectual property shall arise by virtue of creation of these objects or as the consequence of granting the legal protection by the authorized state body in cases and in accordance with the procedure, provided by this Code and other legislative acts. The terms of granting the legal protection to trade secrets (know-how) are defined by this Code and other legislative acts.
Article 982. Personal Non-property and Property Rights to Objects of Intellectual Property 1. Personal non-property rights and property rights belong to the authors of results of intellectual activity in relation to these results. Only property rights belong to the manufacturers of phonograms and broadcasting organizations in relation to these objects. Personal non-property rights belong to the author irrespective of his property rights and are preserved for him in case of passing his property rights to the results of the intellectual activity to another person. 2. Property rights belong to the holders of the right to the means of individualization of participants of the civil turnover, goods, works or services (hereinafter referred to as the means of individualization) in relation to these means. 3. The right of authorship (the right to be deemed as the author of the result of the intellectual activity) is the personal non-property right and may belong only to the person, whose creative labor has created the result of intellectual activity. The right of authorship is non-alienable and non-transferable. If the result is created by the joint creative labor of two or more persons, they shall be deemed to be the co-authors. Concerning individual objects of the intellectual property, a circle of the persons, who are deemed to be the co-authors of the product as a whole, may be limited by the legislation.
Article 983. Exclusive Rights to Objects of Intellectual Property 1. Exclusive right of the legal use of the object of intellectual property at own discretion in any form and any way shall belong to the holder of property rights to the result of intellectual activity (with the exception of trade secrets (know-how)) or to the means of individualization.
Using of the objects of intellectual property, concerning which the exclusive right belong to the right holder thereof, by other persons, shall be permitted only with the consent of the right holder. 2. The holder of the exclusive right to the objects of intellectual property shall have the right to transfer this right to another person in full or in part, to allow another person to use the object of intellectual property and has the right to procedure it in another way, if this does not disagree with this Code or another law. 3. The restrictions of the exclusive rights, including by granting to other persons the possibility to use the objects of intellectual property, deeming these rights to be void, and termination (nullifying) thereof are permitted in cases, within the limits and in accordance with the procedure, established by this Code or another law. The restrictions of the exclusive rights are permitted under the condition that such restrictions do not cause damage to normal using of the object of intellectual property and do not restrict the legal interests of the right holders in the ungrounded manner.
Article 984. Transfer of Exclusive Rights to Another Person 1. The property rights, belonging to the holder of exclusive rights to the object of the intellectual property, unless otherwise provided for by this Code or another law, may be transferred by the right holder in full or in part to another person under the contract, and also shall be transferred by inheriting and in accordance with the procedure of legal succession in case of reorganization of the legal person being the right holder. Transfer of the property rights under the contract or in accordance with the procedure of universal legal succession does not entail transfer or restrictions of the right of authorship and other personal non- property rights. The conditions of contract concerning transfer or restriction of these rights shall be void. 2. The exclusive rights, which are transferred under the contract, shall be determined in it. The rights, which are not specified in the contract as being transferred, shall be deemed to be non-transferable, unless proved otherwise. 3. The rules on the license contract (Article 985) shall apply to the contract, providing for granting the exclusive rights within the period of its validity to another person for a limited period, unless otherwise provided for by the law.
The rules on the contract of the exclusive right assignment (Article 9841) shall apply to the contract stipulating the transfer of the exclusive rights to another person in the full volume for the complete term of validity of the exclusive right.
Article 9841. Contract of assignment of the exclusive right 1. Under the contract of exclusive right assignment, one party (rightholder) transfers exclusive right, belonging to this party, on the results of the intellectual activity or means of individualization of the participants of the civil circulation, goods, works or services in the complete volume to another party. 2. The contract of exclusive right assignment shall contain a condition on the amount of the reward or order of its establishment or direct indication on gratuitousness of this contract. 3. The contract of exclusive right assignment shall be concluded in a written form and is subject to registration in cases provided by the legislative acts. Failure to comply with the written form or registration requirements entails the invalidity of the contract. 4. The exclusive right to the result of intellectual activity or means of individualization of the participants of civil circulation, goods, works or services is transferred from the rightholder to another party from the moment of conclusion of the contract of the exclusive right assignment, unless otherwise provided by this contract. The exclusive right to the result of intellectual activity or means of the individualization of the participants of the civil circulation, goods, works or services under the contract of the exclusive right
assignment subject to registration in accordance with the legislative acts is transferred from the rightholder to another party from the moment of registration of this contract.
Article 985. License Contract 1. Under the license contract the party possessing the exclusive right to use an object of intellectual property (the licensor), shall grant to another party (the licensee) a permit to use the respective object of intellectual property. Gratuitous grant of the right to use an object of intellectual property is not allowed in relations between commercial organizations, unless otherwise established by the legislative acts The license contract and changes in the license contract shall be registered in the patent body in the cases and in the order determined by the legislation. 2. The license contract may provide for granting to the licensee: 1) the right to using of the object of intellectual property with preservation for the licensor of the right to its usage and the right to issue the licenses to other persons (simple, non-exclusive license); 2) the right to using of the object of intellectual property with preservation for the licensor of the right to its usage in a part, not transferred to the licensee, but without the right to issue licenses to other persons (exclusive license); 3) other types of licenses, permitted by the legislative acts. Unless otherwise provided for in the license contract, the license shall be considered to be simple (non- exclusive). 3. The contract of granting, by the licensee, of the right to using of the object of intellectual property to another person within the limits, defined by license contract, shall be deemed to be the sublicense contract. The licensee has the right to conclude the sublicense contract only in cases, provided for by the license contract. The licensee shall bear the liability to the licensor for actions of the sub-licensee, unless otherwise provided for by the license contract.
Article 986. Contract on Creation and Using of Results of Intellectual Activity 1. Under the contract, the author may undertake to create in the future the product, invention or another result of intellectual activity and to grant to the customer, not being his employer, the exclusive rights to use this result. 2. The contract, provided in Clause 1 of this Article, shall define the nature of the result of intellectual activity, being subject to creation, as well as purposes or ways of its use. 3. The contracts, obliging the author to grant to any person the exclusive rights to use the result of intellectual activity, which this author will create in the future, shall be void. 4. The conditions of contract, restricting the author in creation, in the future, of the result of intellectual activity of the certain kind or in the certain area, shall be deemed to be invalid.
Article 987. Exclusive Right and Rights of Ownership The exclusive right to the result of intellectual activity or the means of individualization exists irrespective of the rights of ownership to the material object, in which such result or the means of individualization are expressed.
Article 988. Period of Action of Exclusive Rights
1. The exclusive right to the objects of intellectual property shall act during the period, provided for by this Code or another law. The law may provide for the possibility of extension of such period. 2. The personal non-property rights concerning the objects of intellectual property are protected without limitation of time. 3. In cases, provided by the law, the action of the exclusive right may be terminated in the consequence of its being non-using during the determined period.
Article 989. Ways of Defense of Exclusive Rights 1. Defense of the exclusive rights shall be effectuated by the ways, provided for by Article 11 of this Code. Defense of the exclusive rights may be effectuated also by way of: 1) withdrawal of material objects, with the help of which the exclusive rights are violated, and material objects, created as the result of such breaches; 2) obligatory publication about the violation committed, with inclusion of the information into it about the person, to whom the violated right belongs; 3) by other ways, provided for by the law. 2. In case of violation of the contracts on using of the result of intellectual activity and means of individualization, the general rules on liability for violation of the obligations shall apply (Chapter 25).
CHAPTER 61 Copyright and Neighboring Rights
Article 990. Subject of Regulation This Code and the law on the copyright and the neighboring rights and other acts of legislation, adopted in accordance with this Code, shall regulate the relations, arising in connection with creation and using of the works of science, literature, art (copyright), performances, phonograms, programs of broadcasting organizations for aerial or cable broadcasting (neighboring rights).
Article 991. Scope of Action of Copyright 1. In accordance with this Code and other acts of legislation, the copyright shall extend to the works of science, literature and art, existing in some objective form: 1) on the territory of the Republic of Belarus, regardless of citizenship (nationality) of authors and their legal successors; 2) outside the Republic of Belarus, and is recognized for the authors, being the citizens of the Republic of Belarus and their legal successors; 3) outside the Republic of Belarus, and is recognized for their authors (their legal successors, being the citizens (nationals) of other states) in accordance with treaties of the Republic of Belarus. 2. The work shall be deemed to be published in the Republic of Belarus, if within thirty days following the date of the first publishing outside the Republic of Belarus it was published on the territory of the Republic of Belarus. 3. When granting protection on the territory of the Republic of Belarus for the work in accordance with the treaties of the Republic of Belarus, the holder of copyright to the work shall be defined in accordance with the legislation of the state, on the territory of which the action or case have taken place, which served as the grounds for holding of copyrights.
Article 992. Objects of Copyright 1. The copyright shall extend to the works of science, literature and art, being the results of creative activity, regardless of the purposes and worth of the work, and of the way of its expression. 2. The copyright shall extend to both published and non-published works, existing in some objective form: 1) written (manuscript, typescript, music record etc.); 2) oral (public pronouncing, public performance etc); 3) sound- or video recording (mechanical, magnetic, digital, optical etc.); 4) image (drawing, outline, picture, plan, technical drawing, cinema-, TV-, video- or photo image etc.); 5) three-dimensional (sculpture, model, mock-up, construction etc.); 6) in other forms. 3. A part of work (including its name), which meets the requirements of Clause 1 of this Article and may be applied autonomously, is an object of the copyright. 4. The copyright shall not extend to ideas, methods, processes, systems, methods, concepts, principles, discoveries, facts. 5. The copyright is not connected with the right of ownership to the material object, in which the work is expressed. Transfer of the right of ownership to the material object or the right of possession of the material object itself does not entail transfer of any copyrights to the work, expressed in this object, except for the cases, provided for by the legislation on the copyright and neighboring rights.
Article 993. Works, being Objects of Copyright 1. The object of the copyright are: 1) works of literature (the books, brochures, articles etc.); 2) dramatic and music dramatic works, products of choreography and pantomime and other scenario works; 3) musical compositions with a text and without a text; 4) audio- and visual works (the cinema-, TV-, video films, slide films and other cinema- and TV works); 5) works of sculpture, painting, graphics, lithography and other works of graphic art; 6) works of the applied art; 7) works of the architecture, urban planning and landscape art; 8) photographic works and other works, obtained by the manner, similar to photography; 9) maps, plans, outlines, illustrations and plastic works, related to geography, topography and other sciences; 10) computer programs; 11) other product. 2. Protection of the computer programs shall extend to all types of the computer programs (including operating systems), which may be expressed in any language and in any form, including the source code and the object code. 3. To the object of the copyright shall also be relegated:
1) the secondary works (translations, processed works, annotations, abstracts, summaries, reviews, scenarios, music arrangement and other conversions of the science, literature and art creations); 2) collections (the encyclopedias, anthologies, databases) and other compiled works, being, as per the material selection or arranging, the result of creative labor. The secondary and compiled works are protected by the copyright irrespective of whether the works, on which the secondary and compiled works are based or which are included in the secondary and compiled works, being or not being the objects of the copyright.
Article 994. Objects of Neighboring Rights The neighboring rights shall extend to performances, stagings, phonograms, programs of broadcasting organization for the aerial and cable broadcasting. For arising and exercising of the neighboring rights, no formalities need to be observed.
Article 995. Scope of Action of Neighboring Rights 1. The performer’s rights are recognized for him in accordance with this Code and other acts of legislation on the copyright and neighboring rights, if: 1) the performer is a citizen of the Republic of Belarus; 2) the performance, the staging for the first time took place on the territory of the Republic of Belarus; 3) the performance, the staging are recorded on a phonogram in accordance with Clause 2 of this Article; 4) the performance, the staging, not recorded on a phonogram, are included into program for aerial or cable broadcasting in accordance with Clause 3 of this Article. 2. The rights of the phonogram manufacturer are recognized for him in accordance with this Code and other acts of legislation on the copyright and neighboring rights, if: 1) the phonogram manufacturer is a citizen of the Republic of Belarus or legal person, having official location on the territory of the Republic of Belarus; 2) the phonogram is published for the first time on the territory of the Republic of Belarus. 3. The rights of organization of aerial or cable broadcasting are recognized for it in accordance with this Code and other acts of legislation on the copyright and neighboring rights in cases when the organization has an official location on the territory of the Republic of Belarus and effectuates transmissions using the transmitters, located on the territory of the Republic of Belarus.
CHAPTER 62 General Provisions on Right of Industrial Property
Article 996. Subject of Regulation This Code and the laws, adopted in accordance with it, regulate the relations, arising in connection with creation and using of inventions, utility models, industrial designs, selection achievements and with protection of trade secrets (know-how), means of individualization of participants of civil turnover, goods, works, services (the firm names, trademarks and service marks, geographical indications).
Article 997. Legislation on Right of Industrial Property The legislation on the industrial property right consists of this Code and other acts of legislation.
Article 998. Objects of Right of Industrial Property The industrial property right shall extend to: 1) inventions; 2) utility models; 3) industrial designs; 4) selection achievements; 5) layouts of integrated circuits; 6) trade secrets (know-how); 7) firm names; 8) trademarks and service marks; 9) geographical indications; 10) other objects of industrial property and means of individualization of participants of civil turnover, goods, works or services, in cases, provided by the legislation.
CHAPTER 63 Right to Invention, Utility Model, Industrial Design
Article 999. Legal Protection of Invention, Utility Model, Industrial Design The right to invention, utility model, industrial design shall be protected by the state and certified by a patent.
Article 1000. Conditions of Legal Protection of Inventions, Utility Model, Industrial Design 1. The rights to invention, utility model and industrial design are protected under condition of issuing the patent. 2. Legal protection shall be granted for the invention in any area of technology, if it is related to the product or the method, is new, has an invention level and is industrially applicable. 3. A technical decision, relating to the devices, being new and industrially applicable, shall be deemed to be the utility model, for which the legal protection is granted. 4. The artistic or artistic design decision of the product, defining its appearance and being new and original, shall be deemed to be the industrial design, for which the legal protection is granted. 5. The requirements applied to the invention, utility model, industrial design, under which the right to obtain the patent shall arise, and the procedure of issuing the patent by the patent body, shall be established by the legislation.
Article 1001. Right to Using of Invention, Utility Model, Industrial Design 1. The exclusive right to using of the patented invention, utility model, industrial design shall belong to the patent holder. The exclusive right to using of the invention, utility model, industrial design comprises the right to using of the invention, utility model, industrial design at own discretion, if this does not violate the rights of other persons, and also comprises the right to forbid using of the invention, utility model, industrial design to other persons.
The exclusive right to using of the patented invention, which is by itself the method of obtaining of the product, shall apply also to the product, directly obtained by this method. In so doing, the new product shall be deemed to be obtained by the patented method, until otherwise is proved. 2. Other persons, not being the patent holders, shall have no right to using of the invention, utility model, industrial design without permit of the patent holder, except for the cases when using shall not be deemed to be the violation of the patent holder’s rights in accordance with this Code or another law. 3. The effectuation of the following actions without the consent of the patent holder shall be deemed to be a violation of the patent holder’s exclusive rights: manufacturing, application, import, offer to sale, sale, other bringing into civil turnover or storage for these purposes of the product or article, made with using of patented invention, utility model, industrial design, as well as effectuation of the specified actions concerning the facility, during functioning or operation of which, in accordance with its purpose, the method protected by the patent shall be effectuated; application of the method, protected by the patent for the invention, or bringing the product into civil turnover or storage the product for these purposes, if this product is made directly using the method, protected by the patent for the invention.
Article 1002. Period of Validity of Patent 1. The patent is valid since the date of submission of the application for issuance of the patent for invention, utility model, industrial design into the patent body and preserves validity, under condition of observance of the requirements established by the legislation: 1) the patent for the invention, during twenty years. If more than five years have passed since the date of submission of the application for the patent for the invention referring to a medicine, pesticide or agricultural chemical for using which a permission of an authorized body is required in accordance with the legislation prior to the obtainment of such a permit, the period of validity of the patent for this invention shall be prolonged by the patent body, upon the request of the patent holder. The period of validity shall be prolonged for the time passed from the date of submission of the application for the patent for the invention till the date of obtainment of the first permission to apply the medicine, pesticide or agricultural chemical in which the invention has been used minus five years. In this instance the period of validity may not be prolonged for more than five years. The motion for prolongation of the period of validity of the patent is to be filed within the period of validity of the patent prior to the expiration of six months from the date of obtainment of the first permission to use the medicine, pesticide or agricultural chemical in which the invention has been used or from the date of publication of the data about the patent in the official gazette of the patent body, whichever expires later; 2) the patent for a utility model, during five years with possible extension of this period by the patent body upon the request of the patent holder for the period not exceeding three years. The motion for prolongation of the period of validity of the patent for a utility model is to be filed prior to the expiration of the period of validity of the patent; 3) the patent for an industrial design, during ten years with possible prolongation of this period by the patent body upon the request of the patent holder for the period not exceeding five years. The motion for prolongation of the period of validity of the patent for an industrial design is to be filed prior to the expiration of the period of validity of the patent. 2. Protection of the invention, utility model, industrial design is valid since the date of submission of the application for the issuance of the patent for invention, utility model, industrial design into the patent body. Protection of the rights may be effectuated only after issuing the patent. In case of refusal of issuing the patent, the protection shall be deemed not to have ensued. 3. The priority of the invention, utility model, industrial design shall be determined in accordance with the procedure, provided for by the legislation.
CHAPTER 64 Rights to Varieties of Plants and Breeds of Animals
Article 1003. Conditions for Protection of Rights to Varieties of Plants and Breeds of Animals 1. The rights to new sorts of plants and breeds of animals (selection achievements) are protected under condition of issuing the patent. A selection achievement in plant breeding is recognized to be a variety of plant that is a plant grouping within a single botanical taxon of the lowest known rank, which can be defined by the expression of the characteristics resulting from a given genotype or combination of genotypes, distinguished from any other plant grouping by the expression of at least one of the said characteristics and - considered as a unit with regard to its suitability for being propagated unchanged. A selection achievement in plant breeding is recognized to be the breed, that is an integral numerous group of animals of common origin, created by the man and having a genealogical structure and characteristics, which enable to distinguish it from other breeds of animals of this species, sufficiently numerous for reproduction as one breed, shall be deemed to be the selection achievement in cattle breeding. 2. The requirements, under which the right to obtain the patent for the selection achievement appears, and the procedure of issuing such patent shall be established by the legislation.
Article 1004. Copyright to Define Denomination of Selection Achievement 1. The author of the selection achievement has the right to define its denomination, which shall meet the requirements, established by the legislation on the selection achievements. 2. At production, reproduction, offer to sale, sale and other types of selling the protected selection achievements, using of denominations registered for them is obligatory. Assigning of denomination, different from the registered one, to seeds or breeding material produced and/or being sold, shall be not permitted. 3. Assigning of the registered denomination of selection achievement to seeds or breeding material produced and/or being sold, not relegating to it, is a violation of the rights of the patent holder and the author of selection achievement.
Article 1005. Patent holder’s rights to Selection Achievement The exclusive right to using the selection achievement, within the limits established by the law, shall belong to the holder of the patent for this selection achievement.
Article 1006. Period of Validity of Patent for Selection Achievement The period of validity of the patent for selection achievement begins from the date of registration of the achievement in the state register of protected selection achievements and lasts for twenty years. Longer periods of the patent validity for individual types of selection achievements may be established by the law.
CHAPTER 65 Right to Layout of Integrated Circuit
Article 1007. Concept of Layout of Integrated Circuit
Layout of an integrated circuit is the spatial geometric location of the set of components of the integrated circuit and connections between these components, fixed on material carrier.
Article 1008. Conditions of Legal Protection of Layouts of Integrated Circuits 1. The legal protection shall apply only to the original layout of integrated circuit. The layout of the integrated circuit, created as the result of the author’s creative activity, shall be deemed to be original. The layout shall be deemed to be original until otherwise is proved. 2. Legal protection shall not be granted for the layout, the set of components of which is well-known for the developers and manufacturers of the integrated circuit at the date of its creation. 3. Legal protection shall be granted for the layout, consisting of components, which are well-known for the developers and manufacturers of the integrated circuit at the date of its creation, only if the set of such elements, as a whole, meets the requirements of Clause 1 of this Article.
Article 1009. Regulation of Relations, Concerning Creation and Using of Layouts of Integrated Circuits The relations, concerning creation, protection and using of layout of the integrated circuits, shall be regulated by this Code and other acts of legislation on legal protection of layouts of integrated circuits.
CHAPTER 66 Right to Protection of Trade Secret (Know-How) against Illegal Use
Article 1010. Conditions of Legal Protection of Trade Secret (Know-How)
1. A person that legitimately holds data constituting a trade secret (know-how) has the right to protection of these data against illegal use.
2. Data constituting a trade secret (know-how) are protected in the commercial secret regime in case they comply with the requirements determined by Article 140(2) of this Code. The right to protection of such data arises irrespective of fulfilment of any formalities concerning these data (registration, obtaining of certificates etc.) Article 1011. Liability for Illegal Use of Trade Secret (Know-How)
1. A person that legitimately holds a trade secret (know-how) is entitled to demand from a person illegally using it to terminate immediately such a use, and also is entitled to use other means of protection provided by the legislation.
2. In case of using a trade secret (know-how) by a person which in accordance with the legislation is a bona fide acquirer, the court, taking into account the means spent by such a person for the use of the trade secret (know-how), may permit its further use under conditions of compensation.
4. A person who has obtained autonomously and lawfully the data constituting a trade secret (know-how) is entitled to use these data irrespective of the rights of the holder of the corresponding trade secret (know- how) and is not liable to him for such use. Article 1012. Disposal of Trade Secret (Know-How) A person who holds a trade secret (know-how) may transfer all or a part of the data constituting it to another person under a contract.
CHAPTER 67 Means of Individualization of Participants of Civil Turnover, Goods, Works or Services
§ 1. Firm Name
Article 1013. Right to Firm Name 1. The legal person has an exclusive right to use the firm name on goods, packing of the goods, in advertisement, signboards, booklets, invoices, printed matters, official forms and other documentation, connected with its activity, as well as at demonstration of goods on exhibitions and fairs, which are conducted on the territory of the Republic of Belarus. 2. The firm name of the legal person is defined at approval of its Charter and is subject to registration by inclusion into the Unified State Register of Legal Persons and Individual Entrepreneurs. 3. The firm name of the legal person, which is so similar to another firm name, which is already registered, that this may result in considering the corresponding legal persons to be the same, may not be registered.
Article 1014. Using Firm Name of Legal Person in Trademark The firm name of the legal person may be used in a trademark, belonging to it.
Article 1015. Validity of Right to Firm Name 1. The exclusive right to the name, registered in the Republic of Belarus, as designation of the legal person, is valid on the territory of the Republic of Belarus. For the name, registered or commonly recognized in the foreign state, the exclusive right on the territory of the Republic of Belarus is valid in cases, provided for by the legislation. 2. The validity of the right to a firm name terminates with liquidation of the legal person or with changing its firm name.
Article 1016. Alienation of Right to Firm Name 1. Alienation and transfer of the right to the firm name of the legal person is not permitted, except for the cases of reorganization of the legal person or alienation of the enterprise as a whole. 2. The holder of the right to a firm name may allow using of its name (issue the license) to another person. However, in so doing, the measures shall be stipulated in the license contract, excluding misleading the user.
§ 2. Trademark and Service Mark
Article 1017. Concept of Trademark and Service Mark 1. The trademark and/or service mark (hereinafter referred to as the trademark) shall be deemed to be the designation, promoting to make difference of the goods, works or services of one person from the similar goods or services of another persons. 2. Verbal designations, including personal names, combinations of colors, letters, digital, image-making, three-dimensional designations, including the shape of the goods or packing, as well as combinations of such designations, may be registered as the trademarks. Other designations may be registered as the trademarks in cases, provided by the legislative acts.
3. The trademark may be registered in any color or color combination.
Article 1018. Legal Protection of Trademark 1. The legal protection of the trademark on the territory of the Republic of Belarus shall be effectuated on the grounds of its registration in the patent bodies in accordance with the procedure, established by the legislation on trademarks, or by virtue of the treaties of the Republic of Belarus. 2. The right to a trademark is protected by the state and shall be certified by a certificate. 3. The certificate for the trademark certifies the priority of the trademark, the exclusive right of the holder for trademark in relation to the goods, works and/or services, specified in the certificate, and contains the image of the trademark.
Article 1019. Exclusive Right to Trademark 1. The possessor of the trademark has an exclusive right to use the trademark and to dispose of this exclusive right, and also the right to forbid using of the trademark to other persons. 2. Nobody may use the trademark, protected on the territory of the Republic of Belarus without permit of its possessor.
Article 1020. Period of Validity of Registration 1. The registration of trademark is valid for ten years since the date of receiving the application in the patent body. 2. The period of validity of registration of the trademark may be prolonged unlimited number of times upon application of the possessor, submitted within the last year of its validity, every time for ten years.
Article 1021. Collective Mark 1. An association of persons the creation and activity of which does not contradict the legislation of the state in which it is created is entitled to register in the Republic of Belarus a collective mark intended for designation of goods, produced and/or sold by these persons, performed works and/or rendered services, which have identical qualitative or other common characteristics. 2. The collective mark and the right to its using may not be transferred.
Article 1022. Cession of Exclusive Right to Trademark, Pledge of Property Rights Certified by Certificate on Trademark The exclusive right to the trademark may be ceded by the possessor of the trademark under a contract to other person concerning all or part of goods, works and/or services, for which the trademark is registered. Cession of the exclusive right to the trademark is not permitted, if it may result in misleading the consumer concerning the good, work and/service or the manufacturer of the good, performer of the work and/or service.
Property rights certified by the certificate on trademark may be the subject of pledge.
The contract of cession of the exclusive right to the trademark, the contract of pledge of property rights certified by a certificate on trademark, as well as changes into the mentioned contracts, shall be registered in patent body in the order established by the legislation.
Article 1023. Granting License for Using Trademark The right to use the trademark may be granted by the possessor of the trademark (the licensor) to another person (the licensee) under the license contract concerning all or a part of goods, works and/or services for which the trademark is registered. The license contract shall contain the values of quality parameters of goods, works and/or services of the licensee or a condition about the fact that the quality of goods, works and/or services of the licensee will not be lower than the quality of goods, works and/or services of the licensor, and the condiion that the licensor will exercise control over the quality of goods, works and/or services of the licensee. On demands presented toward the quality of goods, works and/or services of the licensee, on which (concerning which) the trademark of the licensor is applied, the licensor shall bear a subsidiary liability.
§ 3. Geographical Indication
Article 1024. Conditions of Legal Protection of Geographical Indication 1. The geographical indication shall be deemed to be a designation which identifies the goods as originating from the territory of the country or from the region or the location on this territory, where the determined quality, reputation or other characteristics of goods are considerably connected with geographical origin of these goods. The term "geographical indication" includes the terms "name of place of origin of goods" and "indication of origin of goods ". 2. The name of place of origin of goods, which is being provided with the legal protection, is a designation which represents or contains contemporary or historical, formal or informal, full or abbreviated name of the geographical object, as well as the designation, derivative from such a name and became known as a result of its use in relation to the goods, special properties of which are exclusively or mainly determined by the typical for this geographical object natural conditions and/or human factors. The mentioned provisions shall apply to the designation which permits to identify goods as originating in the territory of a determined geographical object and, though does not contain the name of this object, became known as a result of the use of this name in relation to the goods whose particular properties meet the requirements mentioned in he part one of this clause. The designation, although being the name of a geographical object or containing the name of a geographical object but commonly used in the Republic of Belarus as the designation of a good of a certain type not connected with the place of its making shall not be deemed to be the name of place of origin of the good. 3. The indication of origin of goods is deemed to be a designation, directly or indirectly indicating the place of real origin or making of the goods. The indication of origin of goods may be represented in the form of the name of a geographical object or image. 4. The legal protection of the name of place of origin of goods in the Republic of Belarus shall be granted on the grounds of its registration in the patent body or by virtue of the treaties of the Republic of Belarus. On the grounds of the registration, the certificate for the right to use the name of the place of origin of goods shall be issued. The procedure and conditions of registration and issuing a certificate for the right to use the name of the place of origin of goods, deeming such certificate to be void, and termination of validity of the registration and of the certificate shall be defined by the legislation on the names of the place of origin of goods. 5. The legal protection of indication of the origin of goods shall be effectuated on the grounds of using this indication.
The legal protection of the indication of origin of goods consists of non-permission of using the indications of the origin of goods, which are false or mislead the user concerning the real place of the origin of goods. The indication of the origin of goods is not subject to the state registration.
Article 1025. Right to Using of Geographical Indication 1. The person, possessing the right to using of the geographical indication, shall have the right to place it on the goods, packing, in advertisement, booklets, invoices and to use in any other way in connection with bringing the goods into civil turnover. 2. The name of the place of origin of goods may be registered by several persons together for designation of the goods produced by them on the territory of a determined geographical object, if the special characteristics of these goods are determined, solely or mainly, by the natural conditions and/or human factors, typical for this geographical object. The right to using the name of the place of origin of goods belongs to each of these persons. The right to using of the name of the place of origin of goods, registered in accordance with existing procedure, may be granted to any legal person or natural person, residing on the territory of the same geographical object and producing the goods with the same characteristics. 3. The person, who in good faith used the name of the geographical object, identical or similar with the registered name of the place of origin of goods, not less than for six months before the date of its first registration, preserves the right to further using of this name for the period, established by the patent body, but not more than for two years since the date of the specified registration. 4. Cession of the right to using of the geographical indication and granting the right of its using on the grounds of the license shall not be permitted.
Article 1026. Scope of Action of Legal Protection of Geographical Indications 1. In the Republic of Belarus, legal protection shall be granted for the geographical indications, located on the territory of the Republic of Belarus. 2. The legal protection of the name of the place of origin of goods, located in another state, shall be granted in the Republic of Belarus, if this name of the place of origin of goods is registered in the country of origin of goods and in the Republic of Belarus in accordance with this Code and the legislation on the name of the place of origin of goods. 3. The legal protection of indication of origin of goods, located in another state, is granted in the Republic of Belarus, if this indication is used in the country of origin of goods.
Article 1027. Period of Validity of Certificate for Right to Using of Name of Place of Origin of Goods 1. The certificate for the right to using of the name of place of origin of goods is valid for ten years since the date of submission of the application to the patent body. 2. The period of validity of the certificate for the right to using of the name of place of origin of goods may be prolonged upon the possessor’s application, submitted within the last year of validity of the certificate, for a period of ten years, with preservation of the conditions, providing for granting of the right to using of the name of place of origin of goods. Prolongation of validity of the certificate is possible without limitation of number of such prolongations.
Article 1028. Liability for Violation of legislation on Geographical Indications 1. The person, having the right to using of the geographical indication, may demand from anyone who uses this indication illegally, to terminate its use, to remove the illegally used geographical indication or
designation, similar to it up to confusion, from the goods, packing, forms and similar documentation, to destruct manufactured images of geographical indication or designation, similar to it up to confusion, or, if it is impossible, to destruct the goods and/or packing. 2. The person, possessing the right to using of the geographical indication, shall have the right to demand compensation of the incurred losses from the party violating this right.
CHAPTER 68 Unfair Competition
Article 1029. Inadmissibility of Unfair Competition Unfair competition in the Republic of Belarus is not permitted. The following is deemed to be the unfair competition: 1) any actions, capable by any way to cause confusion concerning legal persons, individual entrepreneurs, goods, works, services or entrepreneurial activity of the competitors; 2) making false statements, while carrying out the entrepreneurial activity, capable to discredit a legal person, individual entrepreneur, goods, works, services or entrepreneurial activity of the competitor; 3) indications or statements, using of which, while carrying out the entrepreneurial activity, may mislead concerning the nature, characteristics, fitness for usage or amount of goods, works, services of the competitor; 4) other actions, contrary to the requirements of this Code and other acts of legislation on competition, while carrying out the entrepreneurial activity.
Article 1030. Liability for Effectuation of Unfair Competition 1. The person, effectuating unfair competition, must terminate the illegal actions and publish the disclaimer of the disseminated information and actions, which constitute the contents of unfair competition. 2. The person, suffered from the unfair competition, shall have the right to demand compensation, from the unfair competitor, of the losses caused.
SECTION VI INHERITANCE LAW
CHAPTER 69 General Provisions on Inheriting
Article 1031. Inheriting 1. At inheriting, the property of the deceased (the inheritance, inheritance property) is transferred to other persons in the unchanged form, as a single whole and at the same time (the universal succession), unless it arises otherwise from this Code and any other laws. 2. The right of inheritance is guaranteed. Inheriting is regulated by this Code and other acts of legislation adopted in accordance with it.
Article 1032. Grounds for Inheriting 1. The inheriting shall be effectuated by will and by operation of law.
2. The inheriting under the law shall take place, when the will is absent or determines the fate not for the whole inheritance, and also in other cases, established by this Code and other acts of legislation adopted in accordance with it.
Article 1033. Composition of Inheritance 1. The inheritance shall include all the rights and duties, the existence of which shall not terminate with the death of the testator, and which belonged to the testator at the time of opening the inheritance. 2. The rights and duties, inseparably connected with the personality of the testator, shall not be included in the inheritance: 1) the rights of membership (participation) in commercial and other organizations, being the legal persons, unless otherwise established by the law or the constituent documents; 2) the right to compensation of harm, caused to life or health; 3) the right and duties concerning the alimony obligations; 4) the right to pensions, allowances and other payments on the grounds of the legislation on labor and social security; 5) personal non-property rights, not connected with property rights. 3. The personal non-property rights and other nonmaterial benefits, belonging to the testator, may be effectuated and defended by the heirs, unless otherwise established by the legislation. 4. The inheritance shall include accumulation of share in a housing cooperative, housing construction cooperative, country cottage (dacha) cooperative, garage cooperative or other consumer cooperative, property rights and duties of the testator based on the contract of creation of shared construction object, or apartment, country cottage (dacha), garage or other premises, parking lot, the share for which is paid in full, and this property is registered for the testator on the right of ownership in accordance with the procedure established by the legislation. If the testator’s desire for registration of the specified property on the right of ownership was expressed in a written application, submitted to the competent bodies, but the procedure of registration was not completed in connection with the death of the testator, such property may be deemed, by the court, to be the inheritance property upon the demand of the interested persons.
Article 1034. Inheritance of Property, Being in Common Ownership 1. The death of the participant of the common joint property shall be the reason for determination of share of the deceased person in such property and dividing the common property or apportioning from it the deceased participant’s share in accordance with the procedure, established by Article 255 of this Code. In this case the inheritance is opened concerning the common property, falling to the deceased participant share, or, if it is impossible to divide the property in kind, concerning the value of such share. 2. The participant of the common joint property shall have the right to bequeath his share in the common property, that will be determined after his death in accordance with Clause 1 of this Article.
Article 1035. Opening of Inheritance 1. The inheritance is opened in the consequence of death of the citizen or declaring the citizen to be deceased by the court. 2. The time of inheritance opening is the day of death of the citizen, or, in case of declaring the citizen to be deceased, the day determined in accordance with Article 41(3) of this Code. 3. The persons, deceased at the same day, are considered, for the purposes of hereditary succession, as deceased simultaneously and not inheriting one after another. The inheritance is opened after each of them, and the heirs of each of them are called to inheriting.
Article 1036. Place of Inheritance Opening The place of inheritance opening is the last place of living of the testator determined according to the registration of the testator at the place of residence (if there is no such registration – at the place of staying) on the day of the inheritance opening, or, if this place is unknown, the place of location of immovable property or the main part of this property, or, if there is no immovable property, the place of location of main part of the movable property.
Article 1037. Heirs 1. The citizens, being alive at the time of the inheritance opening, and those conceived during the life of the testator and born alive after opening the inheritance, may be the heirs by will or by operation of law. 2. The legal persons, which were been created at the time of opening the inheritance, the Republic of Belarus and its administrative territorial units may be the heirs by will.
Article 1038. Unworthy Heirs 1. The persons that have intentionally killed the testator or have made the attempt on the testator’s life, shall be debarred from inheriting both by will or by operation of law. The exception are the persons, concerning whom the testator has made the will already after the attempt on his life. 2. The persons, that promoted the calling of themselves or their near relatives to inheriting or the increase of the inheritance share, being due to them, by drawing up the forged will, making the intentional obstacle to effectuation of the testator’s last wish or other intentional illegal actions, shall be debarred from inheriting both by will or by operation of law. 3. At inheritance by operation of law, the parents shall be debarred from the inheritance after their children, concerning which they were deprived of the parental rights and were not restored in these rights at the time of opening the inheritance, and also the citizens, who fraudulently evaded from fulfillment of the duties of testator maintenance, placed on them by virtue of the act of the legislation, if this circumstance is confirmed in the judicial procedure. 4. The unworthy legal successor may be debarred from the inheritance by the court on the grounds of this Article upon the demand of the person, for whom such debarring creates property consequences connected with the inheriting. 5. The rules of this Article shall apply to the heirs, having the right to the mandatory share in the inheritance. 6. The rules provided for in Clauses 1, 2 and 4 of this Article, shall respectively apply to the gift by will (Article 1054).
Article 1039. Escheated Inheritance 1. If there are no heirs either by operation of law, or by will, or nobody from the heirs have the right to inherit (Article 1038), or all of them have refused from the inheritance, the inheritance shall be deemed to be escheated. 2. The escheated inheritance shall be transferred into the ownership of the administrative territorial unit at the place of location of the corresponding property, comprising the inheritance. 3. The inheritance may be deemed to be escheated by the court on the grounds of the applications of the bodies of local administration and self-government at the place of opening the inheritance after expiry of one year since the day of opening the inheritance. The inheritance may be deemed to be escheated before expiry of the specified period, if the expenses, connected with the inheritance protection and control over it, exceed its value.
4. Protection of the escheated inheritance and control over it shall be effectuated in accordance with Articles 1066-1068 of this Code.
CHAPTER 70 Inheritance by Will
Article 1040. General Provisions The expression of the citizen’s wish on disposal of the property, belonging to the citizen, in case of death, shall be deemed to be a will. 2. The will may be made by the person, having full active legal capacity. 3. The will shall be made personally. Making of the will through the representative shall not be permitted. 4. The will may contain the orders, given by only one person. Making the will by two or more persons shall not be permitted. 5. The will is a unilateral deal, validity of which shall be determined at the time of drawing up the will.
Article 1041. Freedom of Will 1. The citizen may bequeath all his property or its part to one or several persons, both being and not being the heirs by operation of law, and also to the Republic of Belarus and its administrative territorial units. 2. The testator shall have the right, without explanation of reasons, to disinherit one, several or all the heirs by operation of law. The disinheritance of the heir by operation of law shall not extend to his descendants, inheriting by the right of presentation, unless otherwise arise from the will. 3. The testator has the right to make the will, containing the orders about any property, including such the property, for which the testator may become the owner at the day of opening the inheritance. 4. The testator has the right to condition the acquisition of inheritance by the specific lawful condition concerning the nature of the heir’s behavior, cancel and change the will after its making at any time and is not obliged herewith to indicate or to report to whomever about the reasons of canceling or change of the will. 5. The freedom of will shall be limited by the rules on the mandatory share in inheritance (Article 1064), on non-permission to place on the persons, appointed to be the heirs in the will, the duty in turn to dispose of the property, bequeathed for them, in some determined way in case of their death, on non-permission of inclusion in the will of illegal conditions or conditions of heir’s behavior for acquisition of inheritance, which are impracticable for the heir because of objective reasons.
Article 1042. Sub-appointing of Heirs 1. The testator may, for the case if the heir, specified in the will, would die before opening the inheritance, or would not accept it or would refuse from it, or would be debarred from the inheriting as an unworthy heir in accordance with the procedure, provided by Article 1038, and also for the case of failure of hair by will to meet the lawful conditions specified by the testator, to appoint another heir (sub-appointing of heir). 2. Any person, who may be the hair in accordance with Article 1037 of this Code, may be the sub- appointed heir. 3. The refusal of the heir by will not for benefit of the sub-appointed heir shall not be permitted.
Article 1043. Shares of Heirs in Property. Inheriting of Part of Property Remained Non-bequeathed
1. The property, which is bequeathed to two or several heirs without specifying of their shares in the inheritance and without specifying of what things or the rights, included in the inheritance, shall be intended to whom from the heirs, is considered to be bequeathed to the heirs in equal shares. 2. An indivisible thing (Article 133), bequeathed to two or several heirs, is considered to be bequeathed in shares, corresponding to the value of parts of this thing, bequeathed to the heirs. 3. The part of property, remained non-bequeathed, shall be distributed between the heirs by operation of law, called to inheriting in accordance with the procedure, provided for by Articles 1056-1065 of this Code. Those heirs by operation of law, to whom another part of the property was bequeathed by will, shall be also relegated to these heirs.
Article 1044. General Rules on Form of Will 1. The will shall be drawn up in writing and certified by a notary. Certification of the will by other persons is permitted in cases, provided by Articles 1045(6), 1047 and 1048(2) of this Code. Non-observance of the rules of this Code on the written form of the will and its certification shall entail invalidity of the will. 2. The will shall be signed by the testator with his own hand. If the testator cannot sign a will with his own hand because of physical disability, disease or illiteracy, then, upon the testator’s request, the will may be signed, in presence of the notary or any other person certifying the will in accordance with the law, by another person, with indication of the reasons, because of which the testator could not sign the will with his own hand. The surname, own forename, patronymic and the place of residence of person signing the will shall be specified in the will. 3. When, in accordance with this Code, the witnesses shall be present at drawing up, signing or certification of the will, the following persons may not be such witnesses, and also may not sign the will instead of the testator: 1) the notary or other person, certifying the will; 2) the person, for benefit of whom the will is drawn up or a gift by will is made, the spouse of such person, his children, parents, grandchildren and great-grandchildren,;
21) heirs by will or by law; 3) the citizen, not having full active legal capacity; 4) illiterate persons; 5) the person, having previous conviction for giving the false evidences; 6) the citizens with such physical disabilities, which prevent them from full understanding of the essence of the events taking place; 7) the persons not knowing the language sufficiently, with the exception of the cases when the closed will is accepted by the notary. 4. Place and the date of certification of the will shall be specified in it, except for the case, provided for by Article 1046 of this Code.
Article 1045. Notarially Certified Will 1. The notarially certified will shall be written by the testator or by the notary from the words of the testator in the presence of witness. When writing the will from the words of the testator by the notary, conventional technical means (the typewriter, personal computer etc.) may be used. 2. The will, written by the notary from the words of the testator, shall be completely read by the testator in the presence of the notary and the witness before signing the will. If the testator is unable to read the will because of the physical disability, disease or illiteracy, the text of will shall be announced for the testator
by the witness in the presence of the notary; in such a case, the appropriate record shall be made in the will, with indication of the reasons, for which the testator was unable to read the will personally. 3. If the notarially certified will is drawn up in the presence of the witness, the surname, own forename, patronymic and the place of residence of the witness shall be specified in the will. 4. The notary must warn the witness and the person, signing the will instead of the testator, about the need to keep secret of the will (Article 1050). 5. At certification of the will, the notary must explain to the testator the contents of Article 1064 of this Code. 6. In the cases when the right of execution of notarial actions is granted by the law to authorized officials of the local executive and dispositive bodies, diplomatic agents of the diplomatic representation of the Republic of Belarus, consular officials of consular offices of the Republic of Belarus and consular institutions of the Republic of Belarus, the will may be certified, instead of the notary, by the respective official, subject to observance of the requirements of this Code on the form of the will and the procedure of its notarial certification.
Article 1046. Closed Will 1. Upon the testator’s wish, the will shall be certified by the notary without familiarizing with its contents (closed will). 2. The closed will shall be written and signed by the testator with his own hand. Non-observance of these rules entails invalidity of the will, about which the notary must warn the testator. 3. The closed will shall be transferred in the presence of two witnesses, which put their own signatures on the envelope. Then the envelope, signed by the witnesses and by the testator, with the note on explanation of the requirements, established by Clause 2 of this Article, for the testator, shall be sealed, in the presence of the testator and the witnesses, into another envelope, on which the notary makes an inscription, containing information about the person, from whom the closed will is accepted by the notary, about the place and the date of its acceptance, about the surname, own forename, patronymic and the place of residence of each witness. While accepting the envelope with the will from the testator, the notary must explain to the testator the contents of Article 1064 of this Code. 4. At arrival of the information about the death of the person, who made a closed will, the notary must check such information through the bodies of registration of the acts of the civil state. At arrival of the copy of act record about the death or at submission of the certificate of death of such person by the interested persons, the notary, not later than within fifteen days, shall open the envelope with the will, in mandatory presence of two witnesses. The interested person shall have the right to present at opening the envelope. 5. The notary shall draw up a protocol of opening the envelope with the will. In this protocol, the following data shall be reflected: the place, date and time of opening the envelope; the surname, own forename, patronymic and the permanent place of residence of the notary, witnesses and the interested persons being present; the place of their permanent residence; state of the envelopes and the contents of the records made on them; the fact of announcement by the notary of the document, contained in the envelope; full text of this document; signatures of the notary and witnesses. 6. Not later than at the day following the day of opening the envelope with the will, the notary must send the messages to the interested persons about their right to inheriting.
Article 1047. Wills Equated to Notarially Certified 1. There shall be equated to notarially certified wills: 1) wills of the citizens, being treated in healthcare organizations, providing medical help in hospitals, military hospitals, other inpatient healthcare organizations, providing medical help in hospitals, or living
in nursery homes for old and disabled persons, certified by the head doctors, their deputies for medical affairs or doctors on duty of these hospitals and other treatment institutions, and by the heads of the military hospitals, directors or head doctors of the nursery homes for old and disabled persons; 2) wills of the citizens, being during voyage on the ships sailing under the state flag of the Republic of Belarus, certified by the captains of these ships; 3) wills of the citizens, residing in exploratory, Arctic or other similar expeditions, certified by the heads of these expeditions; 4) wills of military servicemen in places of location of military units, where there are no notaries, and wills of the civil persons, working in these units, members of their families and members of the families of military servicemen, certified by the commanders of these units; 5) wills of the persons, held in institutions for the service of punishment in the form of arrest, restriction of freedom, deprivation of freedom, or places of detention, certified by heads of the respective institutions for the service of punishment or chiefs of administrations of the places of detention. 2. The wills, provided for in Clause 1 of this Article, shall be signed by the testator in the presence of a witness, who also shall sign the will. In all other respects, the rules of Article 1045 of this Code shall respectively apply to such wills, except for a requirement of notarial certification of the will. 3. The will certified in accordance with this Article shall be sent, as soon as possible, by the person who certified the will, through the body of justice to the notary at the place of residence of the testator. 4. The procedure of certification of wills and execution of other actions, related to such certification, by the persons, to whom the right of certification of the wills is granted in accordance with this Article, shall be determined by the legislation.
Article 1048. Will Disposition by Monetary Means in Banks or Non-Bank Credit and Financial Organizations 1. The rights to monetary means, contributed by a citizen in the bank deposits or being on a bank account of the citizen, may be bequeathed by the citizen on his discretion in accordance with the procedure provided by Articles 1044-1047 of this Code, or by execution of will disposition directly in that bank or the non-bank credit and financial organization, in which the account is opened or the deposit is kept. Concerning the monetary means on the account, such will disposition shall have the power of the notarially certified will. 2. The will disposition for the rights to the monetary means in the bank or the non-bank credit and financial organization shall be written with the own hand and signed by the testator, with indication of date of its drawing up, and shall be certified by the clerk of the bank or the non-bank credit and financial organization, having the right to accept for fulfillment the client’s orders concerning the monetary means on the client’s account in accordance with the procedure determined by the legislation. 3. The rights to the monetary means, concerning which the will disposition is made in the bank or the non- bank credit and financial organization, are included in the inheritance and are inherited on the common grounds in accordance with this Code. These money means shall be handed over to the heirs on the grounds of the certificate of the right to inheritance and in accordance with it. Before submission to the bank or the non-bank credit and financial organization of the certificate of the right to inheritance, the monetary means, not exceeding one hundred times the amount of the base unit, established by the legislation, may be issued from the testator’s account to the heirs, specified in the will disposition.
Article 1049. Cancellation and Changing of Will 1. The testator shall have the right at any time to cancel the will, made by him, as a whole, or to change it by cancellation, change or addition of individual will dispositions, contained in it, or by making a new
will. The will may be cancelled by destruction of all its copies by the testator or, upon the written order of the testator, by the notary. 2. The will, drawn up earlier, is cancelled by the new will completely or in part in which it is contrary to it. 3. The will, made earlier and cancelled completely or partially by the new will, is not restored, if the latter, in turn, is cancelled or changed by the testator.
Article 1050. Secret of Will The notary or another person, certifying the will, the witnesses, and the citizen, signing the will instead of the testator, shall have no right, before opening the inheritance, to divulge the information, concerning contents of the will, its drawing up, cancellation or changing.
Article 1051. Interpretation of Will During interpretation of the will by the notary, by the executor of the will or by the court, the literary sense of the words and expressions, used in it, shall be taken into consideration. If the literary sense of some provisions of the will is unclear, it shall be determined by comparing of this provision with other provisions and the sense of the will as a whole. At so doing, the most full effectuation of the assumed will of the testator shall be provided.
Article 1052. Invalidity of Will 1. The will may be deemed to be invalid by the court upon a suit of the person, whose rights or interests are violated by this will. Contestation of he will before opening the inheritance is not permitted. 2. The will shall be deemed to be invalid in case of violation of the rules on the form of the will or other provisions of this Code, entailing invalidity of the will or invalidity of the transactions (Paragraph 2 of Chapter 9). Slips of pen and other insignificant violations of the procedure of drawing up, signing or certification of the will shall not considered as the grounds for deeming it to be invalid, if it is proved that they cannot affect understanding of the testator’s will expression. 3. Both will as a whole and individual will dispositions, contained in it, can be deemed to be invalid. Invalidity of the individual will dispositions shall not affect the remaining part of the will, if it is possible to assume that it would be included in the will in case of absence of the dispositions, deemed to be invalid. 4. Deeming the will to be invalid shall not deprive the persons, specified in it as heirs or as the gift recipients, the right to inherit by operation of law or on the grounds of another will which is valid.
Article 1053. Execution of Will 1. The testator may entrust the execution of will to the person, specified by him in the will, not being the heir (the executor of the will, the executor). The consent of this person to be an executor shall be expressed by him either by inscription, made with his own hand on the will itself, or in the application, enclosed to the will. If the executor is not nominated by the testator, then, by the agreement between the heirs, they shall have the right to entrust the execution of will to one of them or to another person. If such agreement cannot be reached, the executor may be nominated by the court upon the demand of one or several heirs from the persons, offered by them to the court. The executor shall have the right to refuse from execution of the duties, entrusted to him by the testator, at any time, subject to preliminary notifying of heirs by will. The exemption of he executor from his duties
is possible also by the court decision upon the application of the heirs. 2. Unless otherwise established in the will, the executor shall take measures, necessary for execution of the will, including: 1) provide transfer to the heirs of the property, which is due to them in accordance with the wish of the testator and the law; 2) to take the measures, autonomously or through the notary, for protection of the inheritance and control over it in the interests of the heirs; 3) to obtain the amounts and other property, due to the testator, for transferring thereof to the heirs, if these amounts are not subject to transfer to other persons (Article 1090(1)); 4) to perform the will imposition or to demand from the heir by will to perform the gift by will (Article 1054) or the will imposition (Article 1055). 3. For the purpose of execution of the testator’s wish, the executor has the right in his own name to conduct affairs, connected with the control over inheritance and execution of the will, including those in the court and other state bodies. 4. The executor shall have the right to compensation of the necessary expenses, connected with the execution of will, at the expense of the inheritance, and to reception of the remuneration over the expenses at the expense of the inheritance, if this is provided for by the will.
Article 1054. Gift by Will 1. The testator has the right to entrust to the heir by will to perform, at the expense of the inheritance, some obligations (the gift by will) for benefit of one or several persons (the recipients of gift by will), who shall acquire the right to demand execution of the gift by will. The recipients of gift by will may be the persons, which can be or not be the heirs by operation of law. 2. The subject of the gift by will may comprise transferring the thing, being included into the inheritance, to the recipient of gift by will into ownership or on another real right, or in use, of acquisition and transfer of the property, not included into the inheritance, to the recipient of gift by will, or execution of the determined works or rendering of the determined services for the recipient of gift by will etc. 3. The heir, to whom the gift by will is entrusted by the testator, shall execute it only within the actual value of the inheritance transferred to this heir, minus the part of the testator’s debt falling on this inheritance. If the heir, to whom the gift by will is entrusted, has the right to the mandatory share in the inheritance, his duty to perform the gift by will shall be limited by the cost of the inheritance transferred to this heir, which exceeds the amount of his mandatory share. If the gift by will is entrusted to all or several heirs, the gift by will shall encumber each of them in proportion to the share in the inheritance, insofar as not provided otherwise by the will. 4. To the heir, to whom the dwelling house, apartment or other dwelling premises are transferred, the testator has the right to entrust the duty to grant using of these premises or determined part thereof to the other person for life. In case of the following transfer of the ownership for these dwelling premises, the right of using for life shall preserve power. The right to using for life is non-alienable, non-transferable and shall not subject to transfer to the heirs of the recipient of gift by will. The right to using for life, granted to the recipient of gift by will, shall not be the ground for residence of his family members, unless specified otherwise in the will. 5. In case of death of the heir, to whom the gift by will was entrusted, or in case of rejection of the inheritance by this heir, the execution of the gift by will shall be transferred to other heirs, who have
obtained the share in the inheritance, or to the administrative territorial unit, if the property became the escheated one. The gift by will shall not be executed in case of death of the recipient of gift by will before opening the inheritance or after such opening, but before the time when the heir by will has already accepted it. 6. The recipient of gift by will shall not be liable for the debts of the testator.
Article 1055. Imposition 1. The testator may impose on one or several heirs by will the duty to make some actions of propriety or non-propriety nature, directed at effectuation of some publicly useful aim. Such duty may also be imposed on the executor, subject to allocation of part of the property by the testator for execution of imposition by the executor. The subject of imposition may also comprise maintenance of animals, which belonged to the testator, supervision and care for these animals. 2. The rules contained in Article 1054 of this Code shall apply respectively to the imposition, the subject of which comprise the actions, having a propriety nature. 3. The right to demand execution of the imposition in the court shall belong to the interested persons, to the executor and to any of the heirs, insofar as otherwise not provided for in the will.
CHAPTER 71 Inheritance by Operation of Law
Article 1056. General Provisions 1. The heirs by operation of law shall be called to inheriting in accordance with the order of priority, provided by Articles 1057-1063 of this Code. The heirs of each priority shall inherit in equal shares, with the exception of heirs, inheriting by the right of presentation (Article 1062). 2. At the inheriting by operation of law, the adoptees and descendants thereof, on one side, and the adoptive parent and relatives thereof, on the other side, shall be equated in full amount to the relatives by birth (the relatives by blood). 3. The adoptee and descendants thereof shall not inherit by operation of law after the death of parents and other relatives by birth of the adoptee, and the parents and other relatives by birth of the adoptee shall not inherit by operation of law after the death of the adoptee and descendants thereof, with the exception of the cases, specified in Clause 4 of this Article. 4. In cases when in accordance with the Code on marriage and family of the Republic of Belarus, upon the court decision, the adoptee preserves the rights and duties concerning one of the parents and other relatives by birth, the adoptee and descendants thereof shall inherit by operation of law after the death of these relatives, and the latter shall inherit by operation of law after the death of the adoptee and descendants thereof. 5. The heirs by operation of law of the each following priority obtain the right to the inheriting in case of absence of the heirs of preceding priority, or debarring them from the inheritance, or non-accepting of the inheritance by them, or their refusal from the inheritance. 6. The rules of this Code on priority of calling of heirs by operation of law to inheriting and on the amount of their shares in the inheritance may be changed by the notarially certified contract of the interested heirs, concluded after opening the inheritance. Such contract shall not affect the rights of the heirs, not participating in it, and also of the heirs, having the right to the mandatory share.
Article 1057. Heirs of First Priority 1. The heirs by operation of law of the first priority shall be the children, spouse and parents of the deceased. 2. The grandchildren of the testator and their direct descendants shall inherit by the right of presentation.
Article 1058. Heirs of Second Priority 1. In case of absence of the heirs of first priority of the deceased, the heirs by operation of law of the second priority shall be blood or non-blood brothers and sisters of the testator. 2. The children of brothers and sisters of the testator (the nephews and nieces of the testator) shall inherit by the right of presentation.
Article 1059. Heirs of Third Priority In case of absence of the heirs of first and second priority of the deceased, the heirs by operation of law of the third priority shall be the grandfather and the grandmother of the deceased, both on the part of the father and on the part of the mother.
Article 1060. Heirs of Fourth Priority 1. In case of absence of the heirs of first, second and third priority of the deceased, the heirs by operation of law of the forth priority shall be blood and non-blood brothers and sisters of the testator’s parents (the uncles and aunts of the testator). 2. The cousins of the testator shall inherit by the right of presentation.
Article 1061. Heirs of Following Priorities 1. In case of absence of the heirs of first, second, third and fourth priority of the deceased (Articles 1057- 1060), the testator’s relatives of the third, fourth, fifth and sixth degree of relation, not relegated to the heirs of the preceding priorities, shall obtain the right to inherit by operation of law; in so doing, the relatives of closer degree of relation shall debar the relatives of more distant degree of relation from inheriting. 2. The degree of relation is determined by the number of the births, separating the relatives from one another. The birth of the testator himself shall not be included in this number. 3. In accordance with this Article, the following persons shall be called to inheriting as: 1) relatives of the third degree of relation: the great-grandfathers and great-grandmothers of the testator; 2) relatives of the fourth degree of relation: the children of full nephews and nieces of the testator (the grandnephews and grandnieces) and full brothers and sisters of grandfathers and grandmothers of the testator (the grand-uncles and grand-aunts); 3) relatives of the fifth degree of relation: the children of grandnephews and grandnieces of the testator (the great grandnephews and great grandnieces), the children of first cousins of the testator, and the children of grand-uncles and grand-aunts of the testator; 4) relatives of the sixth degree of relation: the children of relatives of the fifth degree of relation. 4. The heirs of one degree of relation, called to inheriting, shall inherit in equal shares.
Article 1062. Inheritance by Right of Presentation 1. In cases, provided for by Articles 1057(2), 1058(2) and 1060(2) of this Code, the share of the heir by operation of law, deceased before opening the inheritance or simultaneously with the testator, shall be transferred by the right of presentation to his corresponding descendants and shall be divided between them equally. 2. The descendants of the heir by operation of law, disinherited by the testator, if this is specified in the will (Article 1041(2)), shall not inherit by the right of presentation. 3. The descendants of the heir, deceased before opening the inheritance simultaneously with the testator, which could be debarred from the inheritance on the grounds specified in Article 1038 of this Code, may be debarred by the court from the inheritance by the right of presentation, if the court will consider that calling them to inheriting is contradictory to the grounds of moralities.
Article 1063. Dependents of Testator Not Capable for Labor 1. The citizens relegated to the heirs by operation of law, specified in Articles 1058-1061 of this Code, and not capable for labor at the time of opening the inheritance, but not relegated to the heirs of priority which is called to inheriting, shall inherit together with the heirs of this priority, if they were the dependents of testator for at least a year before the death of the testator, regardless of whether or not they lived with the testator. The disabled dependents, called to inheriting on the grounds of this Clause together with the heirs of one of the preceding priorities, shall inherit not more than one fourth of the inheritance; however, if the testator was obliged by the law to maintain them, they shall inherit equally with the heirs of this priority. 2. The citizens which are, though not being the heirs specified in Article 1057-1061 of this Code, but, at the time of opening the inheritance, were not capable for labor and within not less than one year were the dependents of the testator and lived with him. If there are other heirs by operation of law, they shall inherit together with heirs of that priority, which is called to inheriting, but not more than one fourth of the inheritance. In case of absence of other heirs of the deceased, the specified dependents of the testator, not capable for labor, shall inherit autonomously in equal shares.
Article 1064. Right to Mandatory Share in Inheritance 1. The children of the testator, which are minors or not capable for labor, spouse and parents of the testator, which are or not capable for labor, shall inherit, regardless of the will contents, not less than half the share, which should be due to each of them in case of inheriting by operation of law (the mandatory share). 2. For calculation of the mandatory share, there shall be taken into consideration all that the heir, having the right to such share, shall obtain from the inheritance on any grounds, including the value of the property, consisting of usual household goods, and the value of the gift by will, established for benefit of such heir. The mandatory share shall be separated from the residuary estate, but if the latter is insufficient from the demised property. If the exercise of the right to mandatory share in inheritance entails the impossibility to transfer to the testamentary heir the property of which the heir which has the right to mandatory share did not make the use while the testator was alive, and the testamentary heir used as residence (dwelling house, apartment, other dwelling premises, dacha, and so on) or used as the principal source of funds for living (instruments, art studio and so on), the court may, taking into account the property status of heirs which have the right to mandatory share, decrease the size of the mandatory share. 3. Any restrictions and encumberments, established in the will for the heir, having the right to the mandatory share in the inheritance, are valid only concerning the part of the inheritance, transferred to such heir, which exceeds the mandatory share.
Article 1065. Rights of Spouse at Inheriting 1. The right of inheritance, belonging to the spouse by virtue of the will or the law, does not affect spouse’s other property rights, related to marriage with the testator, including the right of ownership to the part of property, jointly acquired while being married. 2. By the decision of the court, the spouse may be debarred from inheriting by operation of law, except for the inheritance on the grounds for Article 1064 of this Code, if it would be proved that marriage with the testator really terminated before opening the inheritance, and the spouses lived separately and did not run the common household during at least five years before opening the inheritance.
Article 1066. Inheritance Protection and Administration 1. To defend the rights of the heirs, the recipients of gift by will and other interested persons, the notary at the place of opening the inheritance shall take the measures, specified in Articles 1067 and 1068 of this Code and other necessary measures for inheritance protection and administration. 2. The measures for inheritance protection and administration shall be taken by the notary upon the application of one or several heirs, the executor, body of local administration and self-government or other persons, acting in the interests of preservation of the inheritance property. The notary has the right to take measures for inheritance protection and administration on own initiative. 3. For the purpose of determining the composition of inheritance and its protection, the notary has the right to request the banks and non-bank credit and financial institutions about the data concerning money (currency), currency values and other values, belonging to the testator, which are available in the deposits or on the accounts, or transferred for safekeeping in these banks or institutions. The notary may report the information obtained only to the executor and to the heirs. 4. The measures for the inheritance protection and administration shall be effectuated from the day of making the inventory in accordance with Article 1067 (1) of this Code for the period, determined by the notary, taking into consideration the nature and value of the inheritance and the time, necessary for the heir, but not more than for one year. 5. The inheritance protection and administration shall be effectuated for compensation (Article 1085), unless otherwise provided for by the legislation. 6. If the inheritance property is located in different places, the notary at the place of opening the inheritance shall, through the bodies of justice, submit the order for protection and administration of this property, mandatory for fulfillment, to the notary or to the official, authorized to effectuate the notarial actions, at the place of location of the corresponding part of the inheritance property.
Article 1067. Measures for Protection of Inheritance 1. For protection of the inheritance, the notary shall make the inventory of inheritance property, at participation of two witnesses, meeting the requirements, established Article 1044(3) of this Code, and the interested persons, wishing to present at making an inventory of the property. 2. The money in cash (currency), included in the inheritance, shall be contributed in the deposit of the notary, a diplomatic agent of the diplomatic representation of the Republic of Belarus, a consular official of the consular office of the Republic of Belarus, and the currency values, articles made of precious stones and metals, securities, not requiring administration, shall be transferred to the bank or non-bank credit and financing institution for storage under the contract in accordance with the procedure, provided for by Article 811 of this Code. 3. The weapons, included in the inheritance, shall be transferred by the notary for storage to the bodies of internal affairs.
4. The property, included into the inheritance, not specified in Clauses 2 and 3 of this Article, if it does not require administration, shall be transferred by the notary under the contract for storage to anybody of the heirs, or, if it is impossible to transfer it to the heirs, to another person, on discretion of the notary. 5. The procedure of making an inventory of the inheritance property by the notary and taking measures by the notary to protect this property, including mandatory and other conditions of the contracts for its storage, as well as the procedure of determining the remuneration for its storage, shall be established by the legislation.
Article 1068. Measures for Inheritance Administration 1. If there is a property in the inheritance, requiring not only protection, but also administration (the enterprise, the share in the charter capital of the economic company or the partnership, securities, the exclusive rights etc.), the notary, in accordance with Article 909 of this Code, as the founder of management, shall conclude the contract of trust management of this property. 2. The mandatory and other conditions of the contract of trust management of the inheritance property, the procedure of its conclusion and determination of the amount of remuneration for the trustee manager are established by the legislation in accordance with the rules of Chapter 52 of this Code, unless otherwise arise from the essence of the relations concerning the trust management of the inheritance.
CHAPTER 72 Acquisition of Inheritance
Article 1069. Acceptance of Inheritance 1. To acquire the inheritance, the heir shall accept it. For acquisition of the escheated inheritance (Article 1039) acceptance of inheritance is not required. Such inheritance is transferred to the ownership of the administrative territorial unit on the grounds of the court decision, by which the inheritance is deemed to be escheated. 2. Acceptance of part of the inheritance by the heir means acceptance of the whole inheritance due to this heir, irrespective of the contents and location of the inheritance. Acceptance of inheritance under the condition or with the proviso shall be not permitted. 3. Acceptance of inheritance by one or several heirs does not mean acceptance of inheritance by the rest of the heirs. 4. The inheritance accepted shall be deemed to be belonging to the heir since the time of opening the inheritance regardless of the time of the state registration of the heir’s right to this property, if this right is subject to registration. 5. Non-acceptance of inheritance by the heir shall entail the same consequences, as the refusal from the inheritance without specifying the person, for whose benefit the heir has refused from the inheritance, insofar as otherwise established by the law.
Article 1070. Ways of Acceptance of Inheritance 1. Acceptance of inheritance shall be effectuated by submission to the notary at the place of opening the inheritance of the application from the heir for the acceptance of inheritance, or for issuing the certificate of the right to inheritance. The acceptance of inheritance through a representative is possible, if the authorization for such acceptance is specifically provided for in the power of attorney.
2. It shall be deemed, unless proved otherwise, that the heir has accepted the inheritance, if the heir actually came into possession or managing over the inheritance property, in particular, when the heir: 1) has taken measures for preservation of the property, for its protection from infringements or claims of the third parties; 2) has effectuated, at own expense, the charges on maintenance of the property; 3) has paid, at own expense, the debts of the testator or has acquired from the third parties the amounts due to the testator.
Article 1071. Period for Acceptance of Inheritance 1. The inheritance may be accepted during six months since the day of opening the inheritance. 2. If the right of inheritance appears for other persons in case of refusal of the heir from the inheritance, they may accept the inheritance during the remained part of the period, specified in Clause 1 of this Article, or, if this part is less than three months, during three months. 3. The persons, for whom the right of inheritance appears only in case of non-acceptance of the inheritance by other heir, may accept the inheritance before the expiry of three months since the day of the expiry of the period, specified in Clause 1 of this Article.
Article 1072. Acceptance of Inheritance After Expiry of Established Period 1. Upon the application of the heir, who has missed the period for acceptance of the inheritance (Article 1071), the court may deem this hair as accepted the inheritance, if the reasons of missing the specified period would be deemed to be reasonable, in particular, if the court would determine that this period was missed because the heir did not know and should not have known about opening the inheritance, and under the condition that the heir, who has missed the period for acceptance of the inheritance, applied to the court within six months after the reasons of missing the period have ceased to exist. After deeming the heir as accepted the inheritance, the court shall resolve the questions of rights of other heirs to the inherited property, resulting thereof, and shall deem to be invalid the certificates for the right to inheritance issued earlier. In this event, issuing of a new certificate of the right to inheritance is not required. 2. The inheritance may be accepted by the heir after expiry of the period, established for its acceptance, without applying to the court, under the condition of consent of all the other heirs, who have accepted the inheritance. The signatures of these heirs under the documents, containing such consent, shall be certified in accordance with the procedure, specified in Article 1083(2) of this Code. Such agreement of the heirs shall be the ground for canceling by the notary of the certificate of the right to inheritance right, issued earlier, and for issuing a new certificate. If on the ground of the certificate of the right to inheritance issued earlier and later annuled by the notary was effectuated the state registration of rights to immovable property, the new certificate issued by the notary shall be the ground for introducing respective changes in the record of the state registration. 3. The heir, who accepted the inheritance in accordance with this Article after expiration of the established period, has the right to reception of the inheritance, due to him in accordance with the rules of Article 973, 974, 976 and 977 of this Code. In the event, specified in part one of Clause 2 of this Article, these rules shall be applied insofar as otherwise is not provided for by the notarially certified agreement between the heirs.
Article 1073. Transfer of Right to Acceptance of Inheritance (Inheritance Transmission) 1. If the heir, called to the inheritance by will or by operation of law, deceased after opening the inheritance, not having accepted it, the right to the acceptance of inheritance, which was due to this heir,
shall pass to his heirs. The right to accept the inheritance by way of hereditary transmission is not included in the content of the inheritance opened after the death of such heir. 2. The right to accept the inheritance, belonging to the deceased heir, may be effectuated by his heirs on the common grounds in accordance with Articles 1069 to 1072 of this Code. If the part of the period for acceptance of inheritance, remained after the death of the heir, is less than three months, it is extended up to three months. After the expiry of the period of acceptance of inheritance, the heirs of the deceased heir may be deemed by the court as accepted the inheritance in accordance with Article 1072 of this Code, if the court would deem the reasons of missing this period by the heirs of the deceased heir to be reasonable. 3. The right of the heir to accept the part of the inheritance as the mandatory share (Article 1064) shall not be transferred to his heirs.
Article 1074. Right to Refuse from Inheritance 1. The heir has the right to refuse from the inheritance within the period, established for acceptance of the inheritance (Article 1071), including in the event when the heir has already accepted the inheritance. If the heir has accepted the inheritance and has actually came into possession or managing over the inheritance property (Article 1070(2)), the court may upon the application of this heir to deem his as refused from the inheritance even after expiry of the specified period, if the reasons for missing the period would be deemed y the court to be reasonable. 2. The refusal from the inheritance may not be subsequently changed or recalled. 3. The refusal from the inheritance shall be effectuated by submission of the heir’s application to the notary at the place of opening the inheritance. If the application is submitted to the notary not by the heir himself, the heir’s signature on such application shall be certified by the notary or by the official authorized to execute notarial actions (Article 1045 (6)). The refusal from the inheritance through a representative is possible, if the authorization for such refusal is specifically provided for in the power of attorney. 4. The refusal from the inheritance in the instances when the heir is the minor or the citizen, deemed to lack active legal capacity or deemed to have limited active legal capacity, is permitted subject to preliminary permission of the bodies of trusteeship and guardianship.
Article 1075. Refusal from Inheritance for Benefit of Another Person, Refusal from Part of Inheritance or Refusal under Condition 1. At refusal from the inheritance, the heir has the right to specify that he has refused from it for benefit of other persons from those who are the heirs by will or by operation of law of any priority, including those who inherit by the right of presentation. A refusal for benefit of another person shall not be permitted: 1) from the property, inherited by will, if all the property of the testator is bequeathed to the heirs appointed by him; 2) from the mandatory share in the inheritance (Article 1064); 3) if the heir is sub-appointed for the heir (Article 1042). 2. The refusal from the inheritance with a proviso or under the condition shall not be permitted. 3. The refusal from part of the inheritance due to the heir is not permitted. However, if the heir is called to the inheritance both by will and by operation of law, he shall have the right to refuse from the inheritance
due to him on one of these grounds or on both grounds.
Article 1076. Right to Refuse from Gift by Will 1. The recipient of gift by will shall have the right to refuse from reception of the gift by will. The refusal from the part of property due to the recipient of gift by will, refusal for benefit of another person, with proviso or under the condition shall not be permitted. 2. If the recipient of gift by will is simultaneously the heir, his right, provided for by this Article, shall not depend on his right to accept the inheritance or to refuse from it. 3. If the recipient of gift by will has refused from the gift by will, the heir, who is obliged to execute the gift by will, shall be relieved from the duty of its execution.
Article 1077. Increase of Inheritance Shares 1. If the heir would not accept the inheritance, refuse the inheritance without specifying another heir, for whose benefit he refuses from the inheritance, would be debarred from the inheritance on the grounds specified in Article 1038 of this Code or in the consequence of deeming the will to be invalid, that part of the inheritance, which should be due to such heir eliminated, shall be transferred to the heirs by operation of law, called to the inheritance, and is distributed between them in proportion to their inheritance shares. If the testator bequeathed all the property to the heirs appointed by him, the part of inheritance, which was due to the heir refused from the inheritance or eliminated on other reasons specified above, shall be transferred to the rest of the heirs by will and shall be distributed between them in proportion to their inheritance shares, insofar otherwise not provided for by the will. 2. The rules provided in Clause 1 of this Article shall not apply if the heir is sub-appointed for the heir who has refused or eliminated on other grounds (Article 1042(2)).
Article 1078. Common Property of Heirs in Inheritance In event of inheriting by operation of law, if the inherited property shall be transferred to two or several heirs, and in event of inheriting by will, if it is bequeathed to two or several heirs without specifying the things and rights, inherited by each of them, the property shall be transferred, since the day of opening the inheritance, to the common share ownership of the heirs. The rules of Chapter 16 of this Code concerning the common share ownership shall apply to the common ownership of the heirs in inherited property, unless otherwise established by the rules of this Code concerning the inheritance.
Article 1079. Dividing of Inheritance Upon Agreement Between Heirs 1. The property, which is included into the inheritance and is being in the common share ownership of two or several heirs, may be divided upon agreement between them. 2. The agreement concerning dividing of the inheritance, including the agreement concerning apportioning of share of one of the heirs, if it is concluded before issuing the certificate of the right to inheritance and is certified notarially, shall be the ground for issuing the certificate of the right to inheritance (Article 1083) to the heirs, with indication of the specific things in the certificate. 3. The agreement of the heirs concerning dividing the inheritance, if it is concluded within six months after issuing the certificate of right to the inheritance and certified notarially, shall be the ground for the state registration, by the heirs, of their right to immovable property in accordance with this agreement. 4. [Excluded]
Article 1080. Dividing of Inheritance by Court In event of failure to achieve the agreement by the heirs concerning dividing the inheritance, including that concerning apportioning the share of one of the heirs from the inheritance, the dividing shall be effectuated in the judicial procedure in accordance with Article 255 of this Code.
Article 1081. Protection of Interests of Child at Dividing Inheritance 1. If the heir’s heir is conceived, but not yet born. 2. For protection of the interests of minors, the representative of the body of trusteeship and guardianship shall be invited for participation in drawing up the agreement concerning dividing the inheritance (Article 1079) and for consideration of the case concerning dividing the inheritance in the court (Article 1080).
Article 1082. Priority Right to Specific Objects from Inheritance upon Its Dividing 1. The heir possessing, together with the testator, the right of common ownership in the indivisible thing (Article 133), the share in ownership in which is included in the inheritance, shall have, upon dividing the inheritance, the priority right to reception of the thing, being in the common ownership, on the account of this heir’s inheritance share. 2. The heir who constantly used an indivisible thing (Article 133), included in the inheritance, together with the testator or autonomously, shall have, upon dividing the inheritance, the priority right to reception of this thing on the account of this heir’s inheritance share. The heirs, for whom the dwelling house, apartment or other dwelling premises, belonged to the testator, was the single place of the permanent residence during a year before opening the inheritance, shall have, upon dividing the inheritance, the priority right to reception of this dwelling premises, as well as home utensils and household goods, on the account of inheritance shares of these heirs. 3. Disproportion of the property, the priority right to reception of which is declared by the heir on the grounds of this Article, to the inheritance share of this hare, shall be eliminated by transfer, to the rest of the heirs, of other property from the inheritance or by other compensation, including payment of the corresponding monetary amounts. Unless otherwise established by the agreement between all the heirs, the effectuation of the priority right by any of them shall be possible after providing the respective compensation to other heirs.
Article 1083. Certificate of Right to Inheritance 1. The certificate of the right to inheritance shall be issued at the place of opening the inheritance by the notary or the official, authorized to effectuate such notarial actions. 2. The certificate of the right to inheritance shall be issued upon the application of the heir, who has already accepted the inheritance or accepting it by submitting this application (Article 1070). If the application for the issuance of the certificate of the right to inheritance is not submit by the heir the signature of the heir is to be certified by the notary or by the official authorized to execute notarial actions (Article 1045 (6)). Upon the desire of heirs, the certificate may be issued to all heirs together, or to each heir individually. 3. If, after issuing the certificate of the right to inheritance, the inheritance property would be revealed, for which the certificate was not issued, an additional certificate of the right to inheritance shall be issued.
Article 1084. Periods of Issuing Certificate of Right to Inheritance 1. The certificate of the right to inheritance shall be issued to the heirs after expiry of six months since the day of opening the inheritance, except for the cases, provided for by this Code.
2. At inheritance, both by operation of law or by will, the certificate of the right to inheritance may be issued before expiration of six months since the day of opening the inheritance, if the reliable data are available confirming that, except for the persons who applied for issuing the certificate, there are no other heirs concerning the inheritance or its respective part. 3. Issuing the certificate of the right to inheritance may be suspended upon the court decision in case of dispute concerning the right of ownership to the inheritance property.
Article 1085. Compensation of Expenses Caused by Death of Testator, Inheritance Protection and Administration 1. The necessary expenses caused by the premortal disease of the testator , the expenses on burial of the testator, as well as expenses, connected with the inheritance property protection and administration, shall be compensated at the account of the inheritance within its value. 2. Before receiving the certificate of the right to inheritance by the heirs, the demand for compensation of the expenses, specified in Clause 1 of this Article, may be submitted to the heir, who accepted the inheritance, or to the executor. In case of absence of these persons, the payment of the necessary amounts, including the payment from the deposit or from the account of the testator, may be made upon the decision of the notary. In case of refusal to satisfy the demands, the dispute shall be settled by the court. 3. After receiving the certificate of the right to inheritance by the heirs, the expenses, specified in Clause 1 of this Article, shall be compensated by the heirs within the cost of the inheritance property, transferred to each of them before repayment of the demands concerning the debts of the testator.
Article 1086. Liability of Heir for Debts of Testator 1. Each of the heirs who accepted the inheritance, shall be liable for the debts of testator within the cost of the inheritance property, which has been transferred to this heir. 2. The heir who has accepted the inheritance, as a result of the inheritance transmission (Article 1073), shall be liable for the debts of the testor to whom this property belonged to, within the value of this inheritance, and does not respond with this property for the debts of the heir from whom he succeed the right to accept the inheritance . The heir who receives the inherited property as a direct result of the opening of the inheritance, as well as a result of inheritance transmission (Article 1073), does not respond for the debts of the heir, from whom he received the right to accept inheritance, and responds for the debts of the testator within the value of the inherited property obtained on both bases. 3. The heirs shall be liable for the debts of the testator jointly and severally (Article 304), but each of them shall be liable within the limits, specified in Clause 1 of this Article. 4. The creditors of the testator shall have the right, within the limitation period, to submit their demands against the heirs who accepted the inheritance. Before acceptance of the inheritance, the demands of creditors may be submitted against the executor or declared to the inheritance property. In the latter event, consideration of the suit shall be suspended until acceptance of the inheritance by the heirs or its transfer, as the escheated inheritance, to the administrative territorial unit.
CHAPTER 73 Peculiarities of Inheriting of Individual Types of Property
Article 1087. Inheriting of Right to Value of Share in Economic Partnership and to Share in Production Cooperative
1. The inheritance of the participant of the general partnership or a general partner of the special partnership shall include the right to the value of share of this participant in the charter capital of partnership, unless otherwise provided for by the constituent contract. In case of acceptance of the heir as the participant of the general partnership (Article 78(1)) or as a general partner into the special partnership, the cost of his share shall not be paid to him. The heirs of a participant of general partnership or of a general partner in the special partnership shall bear liability for the obligations of the partnership to the third parties in accordance with the procedure provided by Article 72 of this Code. 2. The inheritance of member of the production cooperative shall include the right to the value of participatory share of the deceased member of the cooperative. If the heir is admitted as the member of the cooperative (Clause 4 of Article 111), the value of participatory share shall not be paid to him.
Article 1088. Inheriting of Share of Contributors in Special Partnership, of Participant (Shareholder) in Economic Company, and of Member of Consumer Cooperative 1. The inheritance of participant of the special partnership, being the contributor, shall include the share of this contributor in the charter capital of the partnership. 2. The inheritance of participant of the limited liability company or the additional liability company shall include the share of this participant in the charter capital of this company, unless it is provided for by the charter of the company that such transfer of share to the heirs is permitted only with the consent of the rest participants of the company. The refusal of consent on transferring the share shall entails the duty of the company to pay the value of share to the heirs in accordance with the procedure provided by Article 92(6) of this Code and by the constituent documents of the company. 3. The inheritance of participant of the join-stock company (the shareholder) shall include the shares which belonged to him. 4. The inheritance of member of the consumer cooperative shall include the share of the deceased member of the cooperative. 5. The heir of the participant of the special partnership, being the contributor, of the participant of the limited liability company or the additional liability company or of the shareholder of joint-stock company shall become the participant (the shareholder) of the corresponding company or partnership, except for the event when, in accordance with the Charter of the limited liability company or the additional liability company, consent of participants of the company is necessary therefor, but there is a refusal to give such consent. 6. The heir of the member of a consumer cooperative shall possess the right to be admitted as the member of the corresponding cooperative. 7. Such matters as what heirs may be accepted into the economic partnership, into the company or into the consumer cooperative in the event when the rights of testator concerning the corresponding legal person has been transferred to several heirs, as well as the procedure, ways and periods of payments to the heirs, who did not become the participants of the partnership, the company or cooperative, of the amounts due to them or, instead, issuing the property in kind, shall be defined by the legislation on economic partnerships and companies and on consumer cooperatives, and by the constituent documents of the corresponding legal person.
Article 1089. Inheriting of Things Limited in Turnability The things, which belonged to the deceased person by right of ownership, the turnover of which is permitted only upon the special permit (the civil weapon etc.), shall be included in the inheritance and shall be inherited in accordance with this Code, subject to observance of the procedure turnover of the corresponding property, established by the legislation. These things, being included in the inheritance, shall be withdrawn and taken for safe storage by the authorized bodies of the state administration (by the officials) in accordance with the procedure
established by the legislation. No special permission is necessary for acceptance of the inheritance, including the specified things. Herewith, acceptance of the inheritance by the ways, violating the procedure of turnover of the corresponding property, established by the legislation, shall not be permitted. The heir, not having a special permit, may not possess and use things, limited in turnability, and to dispose of these things otherwise than it is provided by Article 239 of this Code. If the heir did not apply for reception of the special permission within the period, provided for by the legislation, or the issuance of such permission has been refused for the heir, his ownership right in the specified things is subject to termination in accordance with Article 239 of this Code.
Article 1090. Inheritance of Non-paid Amounts of Salary, Pension, Allowances and Payments for Compensation of Harm 1. The right on reception of the amounts of salary and payments equated to it, pensions, allowances on social insurance, other allowances and payments for compensation of harm to life or health, which were subject to payment to the person, but were not received obtained by him for some reason while alive, shall belong to the members of family, who lived with the deceased, as well as to his dependent persons, not capable for labor, irrespective of whether they lived with deceased person or not. 2. The demands for the payment of amounts on the grounds specified in Clause 1 of this Article may be submitted to the obliged persons within six months since the day of opening the inheritance. 3. If there are no persons, having the right to reception of the amounts, not paid to the deceased, on the grounds specified in Clause 1 of this Article, or such persons have not submitted the demands for payment of these amounts within the specified period, the corresponding amounts shall be included into the inheritance and shall be inherited on the common grounds established by this Code.
Article 1091. Inheritance of Property Granted by Republic of Belarus or its Administrative Territorial Unit Without Compensation or on Preferential Conditions The means of transport and other property, granted to the person by the Republic of Belarus or its administrative territorial unit without compensation or on preferential conditions in connection with the disability or other similar circumstances, shall be included into the inheritance and inherited on the common grounds established by this Code, except for instances when it follows from the conditions of granting this property, established by the legislation, that it is transferred only for using.
Article 1092. Inheritance of State Awards and Plaques of Honor 1. The state awards, which were granted to the citizen and on which the legislation of the Republic of Belarus on the state awards shall extend, shall not be included into the inheritance. Transfer of these awards after the death of the awarded person to other persons shall be effectuated in accordance with the procedure, established by the legislation of the Republic of Belarus on the state awards. 2. The state awards, belonged to the testator, on which the legislation of the Republic of Belarus on the state awards shall not extend, plaques of honor, commemorative and other plaques, including awards and plaques in the collections, shall be included into the inheritance and inherited on the common grounds, established by this Code.
SECTION VII INTERNATIONAL PRIVATE LAW
CHAPTER 74 General provisions
Article 1093. Determination of Law, Subject to Application in Civil Legal Relations Complicated by Foreign Element 1. The law, being subject to application in civil-legal relations with participation of the foreign citizens or foreign legal persons or complicated by other foreign element, shall be determined on the grounds of the Constitution of the Republic of Belarus, this Code, other legislative acts, treaties of the Republic of Belarus and the international customs, not contrary to the legislation of the Republic of Belarus. 2. The agreement of the parties concerning selection of the law shall be clearly expressed or shall directly follow from the terms and conditions of the contract and the circumstances of the case, considered in aggregate. 3. If it is impossible to determine the law, which is subject to application, in accordance with Clause 1 of this Article, the law shall be applied, most closely connected with the civil legal relations, complicated by foreign element. 4. The rules of this Section on determination of the law for application by the court shall be accordingly applied by other bodies, authorized to make the decisions concerning the law which is subject to application.
Article 1094. Qualification of Legal Concepts 1. At determination of the law subject to application, the court shall be based on interpretation of the legal concept in accordance with the law of the country of the court, unless otherwise provided for by the legislative acts. 2. If the legal concepts, requiring the legal qualification, are not known in the law of the country of the court or are known under another name or with another contents and may not be determined by interpretation by the law of the country of the court, then, for qualification thereof, the law of the foreign state may be applied.
Article 1095. Determination of Content of Norms of Foreign Law 1. At application of the foreign law, the court or another state body shall determine the content of its norms in accordance with official interpretation and practice of application thereof and with the doctrine in the respective foreign state. 2. For the purpose of determination of the content of rates of the foreign law, the court may apply, in accordance with established procedure, for assistance and explanation to the Ministry of Justice, other competent state bodies of the Republic of Belarus, including those located abroad, or to involve experts. 3. The persons, participating in the case, shall have a right to submit the documents, confirming content of norms of the foreign law, to which they refer for grounding their demands or objections, and in any other way to assist the court in determination of content of these norms. 4. If the content of the norms of foreign law, in spite of the measures, undertaken in accordance with this Article, is not established within a reasonable time, the law of the Republic of Belarus shall be applied.
Article 1096. Remission and Reference to Law of Third Country 1. Any reference to foreign law in accordance with the rules of this Section, except for the instances provided by this Article, shall be considered as the reference to the substantive law, not to the collision law, of the corresponding country. 2. The remission to law of the Republics of Belarus and the reference to the law of the third country shall be applied in the events of application of the foreign law in accordance with Article 1103, Article 1104(1), (3),(5), Articles 1106 and 1109 of this Code.
Article 1097. Consequences of Evasion of Act of Legislation Agreements and other actions of participants of the relations, regulated by the civil legislation, aimed, in evasion of the rules of this Section concerning the law subject to application, at subordinating the corresponding relations to another. In this event, the law of the corresponding state, subject to application in accordance with this section, shall be applied.
Article 1098. Reciprocity 1. The court shall apply the foreign law regardless of application of the law of the Republics of Belarus in the corresponding foreign state to similar relations, except for the instances when the application of the foreign law on the grounds of reciprocity is provided for by the legislation of the Republic of Belarus. 2. If the application of the foreign law depends on the reciprocity, it shall be supposed that it exists, insofar as otherwise is not proven.
Article 1099. Clause Concerning Public Procedure The foreign law shall not be applied in instances when its application is contrary to the fundamentals of the law and order (the public procedure) of the Republic of Belarus, as well as in other cases, directly provided for by the legislative acts. In these instances, the law of the Republic of Belarus shall be applied.
Article 1100. Application of Imperative Norms 1. The rules of this section shall not affect the action of the imperative norms of the law of the Republic of Belarus, regulating the corresponding relations regardless of the law subject to application. 2. At application of law of some country (except for the Republic of Belarus), according to the rules of this Section, the court may apply the imperative norms of the law of other country, having close connection with the relation considered, if, in accordance with the law of this country, such norms shall regulate the corresponding relations regardless of the law subject to application. Thereat the court shall take into consideration the purpose and the nature of such norms, as well as the consequences of application thereof.
Article 1101. Application of Law of Country with Plurality of Legal Systems In instances when a law of the country is subject to application, in which several territorial or other legal systems exist, the legal system in accordance with the law of this country shall be applied.
Article 1102. Retorsions The reciprocal restrictions (retorsions) concerning the rights of the citizens and the organizations of the states, in which the special restrictions of the rights of the citizens and the legal persons of the Republic of Belarus exist, may be established by the Government of the Republic of Belarus.
CHAPTER 75 Collision Norms
§ 1. Persons
Article 1103. Personal Law of Natural Person
1. The law of the country the citizenship of which that person has shall be considered to be the personal law of the natural person. If the person has citizenship (allegiance) of two or more states, the law of the country with which this person is most closely bound shall be considered to be the personal law. If a person has, along with the citizenship of the Republic of Belarus, citizenship (allegiance) of two and more foreign states, the law of the Republic of Belarus shall be considered its personal law.
2. The personal law of a natural person who does not have confirmation of his belonging to the citizenship (nationality) of any state shall be deemed the law of the country in which this person permanently resides.
3. The personal law of a natural person to whom the status of refugee or other forms of the protection has been granted in a state not being the state of his citizenship (nationality) shall be the law of the country in which that person permanently resides.
Article 1104. Legal Capacity and Active Legal Capacity of Person 1. Legal capacity and active legal capacity of person shall be determined by the personal law of the person. 2. The foreign citizens and person without citizenship shall take advantage of the civil legal capacity in the Republic of Belarus equally with the citizens of the Republic of Belarus, unless determined otherwise by the Constitution, laws and treaties of the Republic of Belarus. 3. The active civil legal capacity of the natural person concerning the transactions, effectuated in the Republic of Belarus, and the obligations, arising as a consequence of causing harm in the Republic of Belarus, shall be determined by the legislation of the Republic of Belarus. 4. The capacity of a natural person, carrying out entrepreneurial activity, to be an individual entrepreneur and to have the rights and duties, connected with this, shall be determined by the law of the country, where the natural person is registered as an individual entrepreneur. If there is no country of registration, the law of the country of the main place of effectuation of the individual entrepreneurial activity shall be applied. 5. Deeming of natural person to lack active legal capacity or limitation of active legal capacity of natural person shall comply with the law of the country of the court.
Article 1105. Deeming of Natural Person to be Missed and Declaration of Natural Person to be Deceased Deeming of natural person to be missed and declaration of natural person to be deceased shall comply with the law of the country of the court.
Article 1106. Name of Natural Person The rights of the natural person to name, its application and protection shall be determined by the personal law of natural person, insofar as otherwise does not follow from the rules, provided for by the second part of Article 18(2), Article 18(4), Articles 1115 and 1132 of this Code.
Article 1107. [Excluded]
Article 1108. [Excluded]
Article 1109. Trusteeship and Guardianship
1. The trusteeship or guardianship over the minors and over the persons who has reached majority but deemed to lack active legal capacity or limited in active legal capacity shall be established and cancelled in accordance with the personal law of the person, concerning which the trusteeship or guardianship shall be established or cancelled. 2. The duty of the trustee (guardian) to undertake the trusteeship (guardianship) determined in accordance with the personal law of the person appointed as the trustee (guardian). 3. The legal relations between the trustee (guardian) and the person, being under the trusteeship (guardianship), shall be determined in accordance with the law of the country, the institution of which has appointed the trustee (the guardian). However, if the person, being under the trusteeship (guardianship), lives in the Republic of Belarus, the law of the Republic of Belarus shall be applied, if it is more favorable for this person. 4. The trusteeship (guardianship), established over the citizens of the Republic of Belarus, living outside the Republic of Belarus, shall be recognized to be valid in the Republic of Belarus, if there are no objections of the corresponding consular institution of the Republic of Belarus, grounded on the legislation, against establishing or recognition of the trusteeship (guardianship).
Article 1110. Legal Capacity of Foreign Organizations, Not Being Legal Persons In Accordance With Foreign Law The civil legal capacity of the foreign organizations, not being legal persons in accordance with the foreign law, shall be determined in accordance with the law of the country, where the organization is established.
Article 1111. Law of Legal Person The law of the country, where the legal person is established, shall be considered to be the law of this legal person.
Article 1112. Legal Capacity of Foreign Legal Person 1. The civil legal capacity of the foreign legal person shall be determined in accordance with the law of the country, where this legal person is established. 2. The foreign legal person may not refer to restriction of powers of its body or representative concerning effectuation of transaction, if this restriction is not known for the law of the country, in which the body or the representative of the foreign legal person has effectuated the transaction.
Article 1113. National Regime of Activity of Foreign Legal Entities in the Republic of Belarus The foreign legal persons shall effectuate their entrepreneurial and other activity in the Republic of Belarus, regulated by the civil legislation, in accordance with the rules, established by this legislation for such activity of the legal persons of the Republic of Belarus, unless otherwise provided for by the legislation of the Republic of Belarus for the foreign legal persons.
Article 1114. Participation of State in Civil Legal Relations with Foreign Element The rules of this section shall be applied on the common grounds to civil legal relations with a foreign element with the state participation, unless otherwise provided for by the legislative acts of the Republic of Belarus.
§ 2. Law Subject to Application to Personal Non-property Rights
Article 1115. Protection of Personal Non-property Rights The law of the country, where the action or other circumstance has taken place, which served as the ground for demand concerning protection of personal non-property rights, shall be applied to the personal non-property rights.
§ 3. Transactions, Representation, Limitation period
Article 1116. Form of Transaction 1. The form of the transaction shall comply with the law of the place of its conclusion. However, the transaction, concluded abroad, may not be deemed to be invalid as the consequence of non-observance of the form, if the requirements of the law of the Republic of Belarus are observed. 2. The foreign economic transaction, in which at least one participant is the legal person of the Republic of Belarus or the citizen of the Republic of Belarus, shall be concluded in written form, regardless of the place of conclusion. 3. The form of transaction concerning the immovable property shall comply with the law of the country where this property is located. The form of transaction concerning the immovable property, which is registered in the Republic of Belarus, shall comply with the law of the Republics of Belarus.
Article 1117. Power of Attorney The form and period of validity of power of attorney shall be determined in accordance with the law of the country, where the power of attorney is issued. However, the power of attorney may not be deemed to be invalid as the consequence of non-observance of the form, if the form of power of attorney is in conformity with the requirements of the law of the Republic of Belarus.
Article 1118. Limitation period 1. The limitation period shall be determined in accordance with the law of the country, applicable for regulation of the corresponding relation. 2. The requirements, to which the limitation period shall not extend, shall be determined in accordance with the law of the Republics of Belarus, if at least one of the participants of the corresponding relation is the citizen of the Republic of Belarus or the legal person of the Republic of Belarus.
§ 4. Right of Ownership and Other Real Rights
Article 1119. General Provisions on Law Applicable to Right of Ownership and Other Real Rights 1. The right of ownership and other real rights in the immovable and the movable property shall be determined in accordance with the law of the country, where this property is located, unless otherwise provided for by the legislative acts. 2. The relegation of property to immovable or movable things, as well as another legal qualification of the property shall be determined in accordance with the law of the country, where this property is located.
Article 1120. Arising and Termination of Right of Ownership and Other Real Rights
1. Arising and termination of right of ownership and other real rights in the property which is the subject of the transaction shall be determined in accordance with the law of the place of conclusion of transaction, unless otherwise established by the agreement of the parties. 2. Arising and termination of right of ownership and other real rights in the property, not concerning the transaction, shall be determined in accordance with the law of the country, where this property was located at the time, when the action or any other circumstance, served as the reason for arising or termination of right of ownership and other real rights, have taken place, unless otherwise provided for by the legislation of the Republic of Belarus. Arising of right of ownership and other real rights in the property as the consequence of the limitation period is determined by the law of the country, where the property was located at the time of expiry of the limitation period.
Article 1121. Right of Ownership and Other Real Rights in Means of Transport and Other Property Subject to State Registration The right of ownership and other real rights in the means of transport and other property, which is subject to entering into the state registers, shall be determined in accordance with the law of the country, where these means of transport or the property are registered.
Article 1122. Right of Ownership and Other Real Rights in Movable Property in Transit The right of ownership and other real rights to movable property, being in transit in connection with the transaction, shall be determined in accordance with the law of the country, from which this property has been dispatched, unless otherwise established by the agreement of the parties.
Article 1123. Protection of Right of Ownership and Other Real Rights 1. The law of the country, where the property is located, or the law of the country of the court shall be applied to protection of right of ownership and other real rights, at the discretion of the applicant. 2. The law of the country, where the property is located, shall be applied to protection of right of ownership and other real rights in the immovable property. Concerning the property, which is registered in the Republic of Belarus, the law of the Republic of Belarus shall be applied.
§ 5. Contractual Obligations
Article 1124. Choice of Law by Parties Under Contract 1. The parties under the contract, at conclusion of the contract or later, may choose, upon the agreement between them, the law which is subject to application to their rights and duties under this contract, if this is not contrary to the legislation. 2. The agreement between the parties concerning choice of the law which is subject to application shall be clearly expressed or shall directly follow from the conditions of the contract and circumstances of the case, being considered as a whole. 3. The choice, by the parties under the contract, of the law subject to application, made after conclusion of the contract, shall have the retroactive force and shall be considered to be valid from the time of its conclusion without prejudice to the rights of the third parties. 4. The parties under the contract may choose the law subject to application both for contract as a whole and for its individual parts.
Article 1125. Law Applicable to Contract in Event of Absence of Agreement of Parties 1. When there is no agreement of the parties under contract concerning the law subject to application, the law of the country shall be applied to this contract, where the following party has main place of its activity: 1) the seller, for the contract of purchase-sale; 2) the donor, for the contract of gift; 3) the lessor (renter), for the contract of lease (property rentan( � 4) the lender, for the contract of use of property without compensation (loan); 5) the independent work contractor, for the contract of independent work; 6) the carrier, for the contract of carriage; 7) the forwarder, for the contract of forwarding; 8) lender (creditor) - in the contract of loan (credit contract); 9) the attorney, for the contract of commission; 10) the commission agent, for the contract of commission body; 11) the depository, for the contract of storage; 12) the insurer, for the contract of insurance; 13) the surety, for the contract of suretyship; 14) the pledger, for the contract of pledge; 15) the licensor, for the license contract of using exclusive rights. If it is impossible to determine the main place of activity of the party, specified in Subclauses 1-15 of this Clause, the law of the country, where this party is registered or has a place of residence, shall be applied. 2. To the rights and duties under the contract, the subject of which is the immovable property, and also under the contract of trust management of the property, the law of the country, where this property is located, shall be applied. Concerning the property registered in the Republic of Belarus, the legislation of the Republic of Belarus shall be applied. 3. If there is no agreement of the contractual parties concerning the law subject to application, then, regardless of provisions of Clause 1 of this Article, the lay specified below shall be applied: 1) to the contract on joint activity and to the contracts on f fulfillment of construction, mounting and other works for capital construction, the law of the country, where such activity shall be effectuated or the results provided for by the contract shall be created; 2) to the contract, concluded at the auction, the competition or at the exchange, the law of the country, where the auction or the competition is held or the exchange is located. 4. The law of the country, where the party under contract, carrying out the performance having the critical significance for the content of the contract, has its main place of activity, shall be applied to the contracts, not specified in Clauses 1-3 of this Article, when there is no agreement of the contractual parties concerning the law subject to application. If it is impossible to determine the main place of activity of the party, carrying out the performance having the critical significance for the content of the contract, then the law of the country shall be applied, where this party is established or has a permanent residence. If it is impossible to determine the performance having the critical significance for the content of the contract, then the law of the country shall be applied, with which the contract is most closely bound. 5. Concerning acceptance of performance under the contract, the law of the place of such acceptance shall be taken into consideration, insofar as otherwise not agreed between the parties.
6. If the trade terms, commonly used in the international turnover, are used in he contract, then, subject to the absence of any other indications in the contract, it shall be considered that the parties have agreed application of common meanings of the corresponding terms to the relations thereof.
Article 1126. Law Applicable to Contract on Creation of Legal Person With Foreign Participation To the contract on creation of the legal person with foreign participation the law of the country shall be applied, where this legal person is established.
Article 1127. Domain of Applicable Law 1. The law, applicable to the contract by virtue of provisions of this paragraph, shall cover, in particular: 1) interpretation of contract; 2) rights and duties of the parties; 3) performance of contract; 4) consequences of failure to perform or improper performance of the contract; 5) termination of contract; 6) consequences of nullity or invalidity of the contract; 7) cession of demand and transfer of debts in connection with the contract. 2. Concerning the ways and procedure of performance, and the measures which shall be taken in the instance of improper performance, in addition to the applied law, the law of the country in which the performance takes place shall also be taken in consideration.
§ 6. Noncontractual Obligations
Article 1128. Obligations From Unilateral Actions The law of the place of conclusion of the transaction shall be applied to the transactions from unilateral actions (public promise of reward, actions in another's interest without commission etc.). The place of conclusion of the transaction shall be determined in accordance with the law of the Republics of Belarus.
Article 1129. Obligations Arising as a CONSEQUENCe of Causing Harm 1. The rights and duties on the obligations, arising as a consequence of causing harm, shall be determined in accordance with the law of the country, where the actions or other circumstances, served as the reason for demand for compensation of harm, have taken place. 2. The rights and duties on the obligations, arising as a consequence of causing harm abroad, if the parties are the citizens or the legal persons of the same state, shall be determined in accordance with the law of this state. 3. The foreign law shall not be applied, if the action or another circumstance, serving the reason for demand to compensate harm, is not illegal, in accordance with the legislation of the Republic of Belarus.
Article 1130. Liability for Damage Caused to Consumer To the demand of compensation of damage, which arose for the consumer in connection with the purchase of the goods or rendering of services, at the discretion of the consumer, the law of the country shall be applied, where:
1) the consumer’s place of residence is located; 2) the place of residence or place of location of the manufacturer or of the person which have rendered a service is located ; 3) the consumer has purchased the goods, or the service was rendered to the consumer.
Article 1131. Unfounded Enrichment 1. To the obligations, appearing as the consequence of unfounded enrichment, the law of the country, where the enrichment has taken place, shall be applied. 2. If the unfounded enrichment appears as the consequence of disappearing of the ground, on which the property was purchased or saved, the applying law shall be determined in accordance with the law of the country, to which this ground was subordinated. 3. The concept of the unfounded enrichment shall be defined in accordance with the law of the Republics of Belarus.
§ 7. Intellectual Property
Article 1132. Rights to Intellectual Property 1. The law of the country, where protection of these rights is demanded, shall be applied to the rights to intellectual property. 2. The contracts, the subject of which are the rights to the intellectual property, shall be regulated by the law, determined by the provisions of this Section concerning contractual obligations.
§ 8. Inheritance Law
Article 1133. Relations of Inheriting The relations of inheriting shall be determined in accordance with the law of the country, where the testator had the last place of residence, insofar as otherwise is not provided for by Articles 1132 and 1135, unless the law of the country, the citizen of which was the testator, was chosen by the testator in the will.
Article 1134. Inheriting of Immovable Property and Property Subject to Registration The inheriting of the immovable property shall be determined in accordance with the law of the country, where this property is located. Concerning the immovable property, which is registered in the Republic of Belarus, the inheriting shall be determined in accordance with the law of the Republics of Belarus.
Article 1135. Capacity of Persons to Compile and Cancel Will, Form of Will and of Act of Its Canceling The capacity of person to compile and cancel the will, the form of will and the form of act of canceling the will shall be determined in accordance with the law of the country, where the testator had a place of residence at the time of drawing up the act, unless the law of the country, the citizen of which was the testator, was chosen by the testator in the will. However the will or its canceling may not be deemed to be invalid as the consequence of non-observance of the form, if the form meets the requirements of the law of the place of drawing up the act, or the requirements of the law of the Republic of Belarus.
SECTION VIII FINAL PROVISIONS
Article 1136. This Code enters into force since July 1, 1999, except for provisions, for which other terms of the entry into force are established in this Section of the Code. As the norms of this Code enter into force, the corresponding norms of the Civil Code of the Republic of Belarus, approved by the Law of the Republic of Belarus of June 11, 1964 (with corresponding changes and additions) shall be considered as becoming invalid. This Section enters into force since the day of official publishing of this Code.
Article 1137. Until bringing the legislation of the Republic of Belarus in conformity with this Code, the laws and the resolutions of the Government shall be applied in that part in which they do not contradict to the Code. This rule is valid also concerning the acts of the Republic's bodies of the state administration, adopted before the entry into force of the Code, on the matters which, in accordance with the Code, may be regulated accordingly only by the laws of the Republic of Belarus or by the acts of the President of the Republic of Belarus or by the resolutions of the Government of the Republic of Belarus.
Article 1138. This Code shall be applied to the relations, which arose after July 1, 1999. Concerning civil legal relations, which arose before July 1, 1999, the Code shall be applied to those rights and duties, which would arise after coming the Code into force.
Article 1139. Concerning civil legal relations, which arose before July 1, 1999, but were not regulated by the legislation, which was in force at that time, the rules of this Code shall be applied.
Article 1140. [Excluded]
Article 1141. Chapter 4 ("Legal Persons") of this Code shall enter into force since the day of official publishing of the Code. Since this day, the commercial organizations may be created exclusively in those forms which are provided by this Chapter. The legal persons, created before the official publishing of this Code, if their types correspond to those provided by the Code, shall bring their constituent documents in conformity with the Code up to July 1, 1999. The collective enterprises, as well as enterprises, the property of which is in the ownership of other legal persons and/or natural persons, but belongs to these enterprises by right of full economic management, up to July 1, 2000, and the lease enterprises, not later than within a month after expiry of the contracts of leasing, concluded before the day of official publishing of the Code, shall be transformed into other types of the legal persons, provided by the Code, or shall be liquidated. After expiry of the specified period, these legal persons are subject to liquidation in the judicial procedure upon the demand of the body, carrying out the state registration, or a public prosecutor. The legal persons, specified in this Article, shall be relieved from payment of the registration fees at registration of change of their legal status or making changes in their constituent documents in connection with their bringing in conformity with the norms of the Code.
Article 1142. The norms of this Code on the grounds and the consequences of the invalidity of transactions (Articles 163, 166-181) shall be applied to the transactions, the demands for deeming those to be invalid and for the consequences of invalidity of which are considered by the court after July 1, 1999, irrespective of the time of conclusion of the corresponding transactions.
Article 1143. The periods of limitation period, established by this Code, shall be applied to those suits, the periods of submission of which, provided by the legislation which was in force earlier, have not expired up to July 1, 1999. To the suit, provided by Article 182(2) of the Code, concerning deeming of the contestable transaction to be invalid, and application of consequences of its invalidity, the right to submission of which arose before July 1, 1999, the limitation period shall be applied, established for the corresponding suits by the legislation which was in force earlier.
Article 1144. Application of Article 235 of this Code (acquisitive prescription) shall extend to the instances when the possession of property began before July 1, 1999 and continues at the time of coming this Code into force.
Article 1145. The procedure of conclusion of the contracts, established by Chapter 28 of this Code, shall be applied to contracts, the offers for conclusion of which have been sent after July 1, 1999.
Article 1146. To the contracts, the offers for conclusion of which have been sent before July 1, 1999, but which were concluded after July 1, 1999, the norms of this Code shall be applied, concerning the form of the contracts of individual types, and also the norms concerning state registration thereof. The norms of the Code, determining the content of the contracts of individual types, shall be applied to contracts, concluded after coming this Code into force, and also to the contracts, concluded before coming this Code into force, in a part of the rights and duties, which arose after coming this Code into force. The contracts of franchising, concluded before coming the Code into force, and other contracts, the grounds and the procedure of conclusion (dissolution) thereof, and content of these contracts, in accordance with this Code, shall be regulated by other acts of legislation, in the event of absence of such acts on July 1, 1999, shall remain valid up to issuing of such acts, but not longer then one year after coming the Code into force. In case of adoption of the corresponding acts of legislation, such contracts shall be brought in conformity with the norms of these acts in accordance with the procedure, established by these acts. If on expiration of the specified period, the corresponding acts would not be adopted, then the specified contracts shall terminate.
Article 1147. Until coming the act of legislation into force, concerning registration of the rights to immovable property and transactions with it for the contracts, provided for by Articles 522, 531, and Article 545(3) of this Code, the rules on mandatory notarial certification of such contracts, established by the legislation, which was valid before coming this Code into force, shall remain in force.
Article 1148. The provisions of this Code, mandatory for the parties under the contract, concerning the grounds, the procedure and the consequences of dissolution of the contracts of individual types, shall be applied also to the contracts, which continue to be in force after coming this Code into force, irrespective of date of their conclusion. The provisions of this Code, mandatory for the parties under the contract, concerning liability for violation of contractual obligations, shall be applied, if the corresponding violations were committed after
coming this Code into force, with the exception of the cases, when in the contracts, concluded before July 1, 1999, another liability for such violations was provided.
Article 1149. The application of Articles 938 and 939 of this Code shall extend also to the instances when causing damage to the victim has taken place before July 1, 1999, but not earlier than July 1, 1996, and the damage caused remained non-compensated. The application of Articles 954-963 of this Code shall extend also to the instances when causing damage to life and health of the person has taken place before July 1, 1999, but not earlier July 1, 1996 and the damage caused remained non-compensated.
Article 1150. The provisions of this Code in a part, concerning the transactions with the land plots, shall be applied as far as turnover thereof is permitted by the legislation on protection and use of lands.
Article 1151. To establish that the application of Chapter 60 of this Code shall extend to the works, which have not been recognized to be the objects of the copyright in accordance with the legislation which was in force earlier, if these works were published or otherwise issued after July 1, 1999.
Article 1152. The provisions of this Code shall be applied also to inheritances, opened before coming this Code into force, but not accepted by anybody of the heirs and not transferred by the right of inheritance into the ownership of the state up to July 1, 1999.
Article 1153. The Council of Ministers of the Republic of Belarus shall, within the period up to July 1, 1999, take measures for bringing the legislation in conformity with this Code.
President of the Republic of Belarus
A. Lukashenko
*unofficial translation*
© National Legal Internet Portal of the Republic of Belarus, 2003-2019
Национальный правовой Интернет-портал Республики Беларусь Гражданский кодекс Республики Беларусь
7 декабря 1998 г. № 218-З
Принят Палатой представителей 28 октября 1998 года Одобрен Советом Республики 19 ноября 1998 года
Изменения и дополнения:
Закон Республики Беларусь от 14 июля 2000 г. № 415-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2000 г., № 69, 2/190) <H10000415>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 3 мая 2001 г. № 7-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2001 г., № 46, 2/750) <H10100007>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 4 января 2002 г. № 79-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2002 г., № 7, 2/828) <H10200079>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 25 мая 2002 г. № 104-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2002 г., № 62, 2/853) <H10200104>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 24 июня 2002 г. № 113-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2002 г., № 75, 2/862) <H10200113>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 17 июля 2002 г. № 128-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2002 г., № 84, 2/877) <H10200128>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 11 ноября 2002 г. № 148-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2002 г., № 128, 2/897) <H10200148>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 16 декабря 2002 г. № 159-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2003 г., № 1, 2/908) <H10200159>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 4 января 2003 г. № 183-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2003 г., № 8, 2/932) <H10300183>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 26 июня 2003 г. № 211-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2003 г., № 74, 2/960) <H10300211>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 8 января 2004 г. № 267-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2004 г., № 4, 2/1016) <H10400267>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 18 августа 2004 г. № 316-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2004 г., № 137, 2/1065) <H10400316>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 4 мая 2005 г. № 9-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2005 г., № 73, 2/1106) <H10500009>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 19 июля 2005 г. № 44-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2005 г., № 122, 2/1141) <H10500044>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 22 декабря 2005 г. № 76-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2006 г., № 6, 2/1173) <H10500076>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 5 января 2006 г. № 99-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2006 г., № 18, 2/1196) <H10600099> - Закон Республики Беларусь вступает в силу 2 августа 2006 г.;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 16 мая 2006 г. № 115-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2006 г., № 78, 2/1212) <H10600115>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 29 июня 2006 г. № 136-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2006 г., № 106, 2/1234) <H10600136>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 29 июня 2006 г. № 137-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2006 г., № 107, 2/1235) <H10600137>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 19 июля 2006 г. № 150-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2006 г., № 114, 2/1247) <H10600150> - Закон Республики Беларусь вступает в силу 26 сентября 2006 г.;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 20 июля 2006 г. № 160-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2006 г., № 122, 2/1257) <H10600160> - Закон Республики Беларусь вступает в силу 3 ноября 2006 г.;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 20 июля 2006 г. № 162-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2006 г., № 122, 2/1259) <H10600162>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 29 декабря 2006 г. № 193-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2007 г., № 4, 2/1290) <H10600193>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 7 мая 2007 г. № 212-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2007 г., № 118, 2/1309) <H10700212>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 18 мая 2007 г. № 233-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2007 г., № 132, 2/1330) <H10700233>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 14 августа 2007 г. № 278-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2007 г., № 199, 2/1375) <H10700278> - с изменениями и дополнениями, вступившими в силу 1 января 2008 г.;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 26 декабря 2007 г. № 300-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2007 г., № 305, 2/1397) <H10700300> - Закон Республики Беларусь вступает в силу 8 января 2008 г.;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 26 декабря 2007 г. № 301-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2007 г., № 305, 2/1398) <H10700301> - Закон Республики Беларусь вступает в силу 1 января 2008 г.;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 20 июня 2008 г. № 347-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2008 г., № 157, 2/1444) <H10800347>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 8 июля 2008 г. № 366-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2008 г., № 170, 2/1463) <H10800366> - Закон Республики Беларусь вступает в силу 16 января 2009 г.;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 28 декабря 2009 г. № 96-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2010 г., № 6, 2/1648) <H10900096>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 28 декабря 2009 г. № 97-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2010 г., № 6, 2/1650) <H10900097>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 15 июля 2010 г. № 167-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2010 г., № 183, 2/1719) <H11000167> - Закон Республики Беларусь вступает в силу 3 февраля 2011 г.;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 16 июля 2010 г. № 172-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2010 г., № 184, 2/1724) <H11000172>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 10 января 2011 г. № 241-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2011 г., № 8, 2/1793) <H11100241>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 17 мая 2011 г. № 262-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2011 г., № 60, 2/1813) <H11100262> - Закон Республики Беларусь вступает в силу 1 декабря 2011 г.;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 3 июля 2011 г. № 285-З (Национальный реестр правовых актов Республики Беларусь, 2011 г., № 78, 2/1837) <H11100285>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 9 июля 2012 г. № 388-З (Национальный правовой Интернет-портал Республики Беларусь, 17.07.2012, 2/1940) <H11200388> - Закон Республики Беларусь вступает в силу 18 января 2013 г.;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 9 июля 2012 г. № 389-З (Национальный правовой Интернет-портал Республики Беларусь, 14.07.2012, 2/1941) <H11200389> - Закон Республики Беларусь вступает в силу 15 января 2013 г.;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 10 июля 2012 г. № 424-З (Национальный правовой Интернет-портал Республики Беларусь, 26.07.2012, 2/1976) <H11200424> - Закон Республики Беларусь вступает в силу 27 января 2013 г.;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 13 июля 2012 г. № 419-З (Национальный правовой Интернет-портал Республики Беларусь, 21.07.2012, 2/1971) <H11200419> - Закон Республики Беларусь вступает в силу 1 января 2013 г.;
Кодекс Республики Беларусь от 28 августа 2012 г. № 428-З (Национальный правовой Интернет- портал Республики Беларусь, 01.09.2012, 2/1980) <Hk1200428> - Кодекс Республики Беларусь вступает в силу 2 марта 2013 г.;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 5 января 2013 г. № 16-З (Национальный правовой Интернет-портал Республики Беларусь, 10.01.2013, 2/2014) <H11300016> - Закон Республики Беларусь вступает в силу 11 июля 2013 г.;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 12 июля 2013 г. № 59-З (Национальный правовой Интернет-портал Республики Беларусь, 23.07.2013, 2/2057) <H11300059> - Закон Республики Беларусь вступает в
силу 24 января 2014 г.;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 4 ноября 2013 г. № 71-З (Национальный правовой Интернет-портал Республики Беларусь, 19.11.2013, 2/2069) <H11300071> - Закон Республики Беларусь вступает в силу 20 февраля 2014 г.;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 31 декабря 2013 г. № 96-З (Национальный правовой Интернет- портал Республики Беларусь, 02.01.2014, 2/2094) <H11300096>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 4 января 2014 г. № 108-З (Национальный правовой Интернет-портал Республики Беларусь, 11.01.2014, 2/2106) <H11400108>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 8 января 2014 г. № 128-З (Национальный правовой Интернет-портал Республики Беларусь, 21.01.2014, 2/2126) <H11400128>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 11 июля 2014 г. № 191-З (Национальный правовой Интернет-портал Республики Беларусь, 22.07.2014, 2/2189) <H11400191>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 31 декабря 2014 г. № 226-З (Национальный правовой Интернет- портал Республики Беларусь, 09.01.2015, 2/2224) <H11400226>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 5 января 2015 г. № 231-З (Национальный правовой Интернет-портал Республики Беларусь, 10.01.2015, 2/2229) <H11500231> - Закон Республики Беларусь вступает в силу 1 января 2016 г.;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 15 июля 2015 г. № 305-З (Национальный правовой Интернет-портал Республики Беларусь, 23.07.2015, 2/2303) <H11500305> - Закон Республики Беларусь вступает в силу 24 января 2016 г.;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 15 июля 2015 г. № 308-З (Национальный правовой Интернет-портал Республики Беларусь, 25.07.2015, 2/2306) <H11500308> - Закон Республики Беларусь вступает в силу 26 января 2016 г.;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 29 октября 2015 г. № 313-З (Национальный правовой Интернет- портал Республики Беларусь, 03.11.2015, 2/2311) <H11500313>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 30 декабря 2015 г. № 343-З (Национальный правовой Интернет- портал Республики Беларусь, 01.01.2016, 2/2343) <H11500343>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 5 января 2016 г. № 352-З (Национальный правовой Интернет-портал Республики Беларусь, 14.01.2016, 2/2350) <H11600352>;
Кодекс Республики Беларусь от 20 июля 2016 г. № 413-З (Национальный правовой Интернет- портал Республики Беларусь, 02.08.2016, 2/2412) <Hk1600413> - Кодекс Республики Беларусь вступает в силу 3 февраля 2017 г.;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 24 октября 2016 г. № 439-З (Национальный правовой Интернет- портал Республики Беларусь, 15.11.2016, 2/2437) <H11600439> - Закон Республики Беларусь вступает в силу 16 мая 2017 г.;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 9 января 2017 г. № 14-З (Национальный правовой Интернет-портал Республики Беларусь, 12.01.2017, 2/2452) <H11700014>;
Закон Республики Беларусь от 17 июля 2018 г. № 135-З (Национальный правовой Интернет-портал Республики Беларусь, 31.07.2018, 2/2573) <H11800135> - внесены изменения и дополнения,
вступившие в силу 23 июля 2018 г., за исключением изменений и дополнений, которые вступят в силу 1 августа 2018 г., 1 ноября 2018 г., 1 февраля 2019 г. и 1 августа 2020 г.;
СОДЕРЖАНИЕ
РАЗДЕЛ I. ОБЩИЕ ПОЛОЖЕНИЯ
ПОДРАЗДЕЛ 1. ОСНОВНЫЕ ПОЛОЖЕНИЯ
ГЛАВА 1. Гражданское законодательство
ГЛАВА 2. Возникновение гражданских прав и обязанностей, осуществление и защита гражданских прав
ПОДРАЗДЕЛ 2. ЛИЦА
ГЛАВА 3. Граждане (физические лица)
ГЛАВА 4. Юридические лица
§ 1. Основные положения
§ 2. Хозяйственные товарищества и общества
1. Общие положения
2. Полное товарищество
3. Коммандитное товарищество
4. Общество с ограниченной ответственностью
5. Общество с дополнительной ответственностью
6. Акционерное общество
7. Дочерние и зависимые общества
§ 3. Производственные кооперативы
§ 4. Унитарные предприятия
§ 41. Крестьянские (фермерские) хозяйства
§ 5. Некоммерческие организации
§ 6. Государственные объединения
ГЛАВА 5. Участие Республики Беларусь и административно-территориальных единиц в отношениях, регулируемых гражданским законодательством
ПОДРАЗДЕЛ 3. ОБЪЕКТЫ ГРАЖДАНСКИХ ПРАВ
ГЛАВА 6. Общие положения
ГЛАВА 7. Ценные бумаги
ГЛАВА 8. Нематериальные блага и их защита
ПОДРАЗДЕЛ 4. СДЕЛКИ И ПРЕДСТАВИТЕЛЬСТВО
ГЛАВА 9. Сделки
§ 1. Понятие, виды и формы сделок
§ 2. Недействительность сделок
ГЛАВА 10. Представительство. Доверенность
ПОДРАЗДЕЛ 5. СРОКИ. ИСКОВАЯ ДАВНОСТЬ
ГЛАВА 11. Исчисление сроков
ГЛАВА 12. Исковая давность
РАЗДЕЛ II. ПРАВО СОБСТВЕННОСТИ И ДРУГИЕ ВЕЩНЫЕ ПРАВА
ГЛАВА 13. Общие положения
ГЛАВА 14. Приобретение права собственности
ГЛАВА 15. Прекращение права собственности
ГЛАВА 16. Общая собственность
ГЛАВА 17. Вещные права на недвижимое имущество
ГЛАВА 18. Право собственности и другие вещные права на жилые помещения
ГЛАВА 19. Право хозяйственного ведения, право оперативного управления
ГЛАВА 20. Защита права собственности и других вещных прав
РАЗДЕЛ III. ОБЩАЯ ЧАСТЬ ОБЯЗАТЕЛЬСТВЕННОГО ПРАВА
ПОДРАЗДЕЛ 1. ОБЩИЕ ПОЛОЖЕНИЯ ОБ ОБЯЗАТЕЛЬСТВАХ
ГЛАВА 21. Понятие и стороны обязательства
ГЛАВА 22. Исполнение обязательств
ГЛАВА 23. Обеспечение исполнения обязательств
§ 1. Общие положения
§ 2. Неустойка
§ 3. Залог
§ 4. Удержание
§ 5. Поручительство
§ 6. Гарантия
§ 7. Задаток
ГЛАВА 24. Перемена лиц в обязательстве
§ 1. Переход прав кредитора к другому лицу
§ 2. Перевод долга
ГЛАВА 25. Ответственность за нарушение обязательств
ГЛАВА 26. Прекращение обязательств
ПОДРАЗДЕЛ 2. ОБЩИЕ ПОЛОЖЕНИЯ О ДОГОВОРЕ
ГЛАВА 27. Понятие и условия договора
ГЛАВА 28. Заключение договора
ГЛАВА 29. Изменение и расторжение договора
РАЗДЕЛ IV. ОТДЕЛЬНЫЕ ВИДЫ ОБЯЗАТЕЛЬСТВ
ГЛАВА 30. Купля-продажа
§ 1. Общие положения о купле-продаже
§ 2. Розничная купля-продажа
§ 3. Поставка товаров
§ 4. Поставка товаров для государственных нужд
§ 5. Контрактация
§ 6. Энергоснабжение
§ 7. Продажа недвижимости
§ 8. Продажа предприятия
ГЛАВА 31. Мена
ГЛАВА 32. Дарение
ГЛАВА 33. Рента и пожизненное содержание с иждивением
§ 1. Общие положения о ренте и пожизненном содержании с иждивением
§ 2. Постоянная рента
§ 3. Пожизненная рента
§ 4. Пожизненное содержание с иждивением
ГЛАВА 34. Аренда
§ 1. Общие положения об аренде
§ 2. Прокат
§ 3. Аренда транспортных средств
1. Аренда транспортного средства с предоставлением услуг по управлению и технической эксплуатации (аренда транспортного средства с экипажем)
2. Аренда транспортного средства без предоставления услуг по управлению и технической эксплуатации (аренда транспортного средства без экипажа)
§ 4. Аренда капитальных строений (зданий, сооружений), изолированных помещений или машино- мест
§ 5. Аренда предприятия
§ 6. Финансовая аренда (лизинг)
ГЛАВА 35. Наем жилого помещения
ГЛАВА 36. Безвозмездное пользование
ГЛАВА 37. Подряд
§ 1. Общие положения о подряде
§ 2. Бытовой подряд
§ 3. Строительный подряд
§ 4. Подряд на выполнение проектных и изыскательских работ
§ 5. Исключен
ГЛАВА 38. Выполнение научно-исследовательских работ, опытно-конструкторских и технологических работ
ГЛАВА 39. Возмездное оказание услуг
ГЛАВА 40. Перевозка
ГЛАВА 41. Транспортная экспедиция
ГЛАВА 42. Заем и кредит
ГЛАВА 43. Финансирование под уступку денежного требования
(факторинг)
ГЛАВА 44. Банковский вклад (депозит)
ГЛАВА 45. Текущий (расчетный) банковский счет
ГЛАВА 46. Расчеты
ГЛАВА 47. Хранение
§ 1. Общие положения о хранении
§ 2. Хранение на товарном складе
§ 3. Специальные виды хранения
ГЛАВА 48. Страхование
ГЛАВА 49. Поручение
ГЛАВА 50. Действия в чужом интересе без поручения
ГЛАВА 51. Комиссия
ГЛАВА 52. Доверительное управление имуществом
ГЛАВА 53. Комплексная предпринимательская лицензия (франчайзинг)
ГЛАВА 54. Простое товарищество
ГЛАВА 55. Публичное обещание награды
ГЛАВА 56. Публичный конкурс
ГЛАВА 57. Проведение игр и пари
ГЛАВА 58. Обязательства вследствие причинения вреда
§ 1. Общие положения о возмещении вреда
§ 2. Возмещение вреда, причиненного жизни или здоровью гражданина
§ 3. Возмещение вреда, причиненного вследствие недостатков товара, работы или услуги
§ 4. Компенсация морального вреда
ГЛАВА 59. Обязательства вследствие неосновательного обогащения
РАЗДЕЛ V. ИНТЕЛЛЕКТУАЛЬНАЯ СОБСТВЕННОСТЬ
ГЛАВА 60. Общие положения
ГЛАВА 61. Авторское право и смежные права
ГЛАВА 62. Общие положения о праве промышленной собственности
ГЛАВА 63. Право на изобретение, полезную модель, промышленный образец
ГЛАВА 64. Права на сорта растений и породы животных
ГЛАВА 65. Право на топологию интегральной микросхемы
ГЛАВА 66. Право на защиту секрета производства (ноу-хау) от незаконного использования
ГЛАВА 67. Средства индивидуализации участников гражданского оборота, товаров, работ или услуг
§ 1. Фирменное наименование
§ 2. Товарный знак и знак обслуживания
§ 3. Географическое указание
ГЛАВА 68. Недобросовестная конкуренция
РАЗДЕЛ VI. НАСЛЕДСТВЕННОЕ ПРАВО
ГЛАВА 69. Общие положения о наследовании
ГЛАВА 70. Наследование по завещанию
ГЛАВА 71. Наследование по закону
ГЛАВА 72. Приобретение наследства
ГЛАВА 73. Особенности наследования отдельных видов имущества
РАЗДЕЛ VII. МЕЖДУНАРОДНОЕ ЧАСТНОЕ ПРАВО
ГЛАВА 74. Общие положения
ГЛАВА 75. Коллизионные нормы
§ 1. Лица
§ 2. Право, подлежащее применению к личным неимущественным правам
§ 3. Сделки, представительство, исковая давность
§ 4. Право собственности и иные вещные права
§ 5. Договорные обязательства
§ 6. Внедоговорные обязательства
§ 7. Интеллектуальная собственность
§ 8. Наследственное право
РАЗДЕЛ VIII. ЗАКЛЮЧИТЕЛЬНЫЕ ПОЛОЖЕНИЯ
РАЗДЕЛ I ОБЩИЕ ПОЛОЖЕНИЯ
ПОДРАЗДЕЛ 1 ОСНОВНЫЕ ПОЛОЖЕНИЯ
ГЛАВА 1 ГРАЖДАНСКОЕ ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВО
Статья 1. Отношения, регулируемые гражданским законодательством
1. Гражданское законодательство определяет правовое положение участников гражданского оборота, основания возникновения и порядок осуществления права собственности и других вещных прав, прав на результаты интеллектуальной деятельности, регулирует отношения между лицами, осуществляющими предпринимательскую деятельность, или с их участием, договорные и иные обязательства, а также другие имущественные и связанные с ними личные неимущественные отношения.
Предпринимательская деятельность – это самостоятельная деятельность юридических и физических лиц, осуществляемая ими в гражданском обороте от своего имени, на свой риск и под свою имущественную ответственность и направленная на систематическое получение прибыли от пользования имуществом, продажи вещей, произведенных, переработанных или приобретенных указанными лицами для продажи, а также от выполнения работ или оказания услуг, если эти работы или услуги предназначаются для реализации другим лицам и не используются для собственного потребления.
Ремесленная деятельность – это деятельность физических лиц по изготовлению и реализации товаров, выполнению работ, оказанию услуг с применением ручного труда и инструмента, в том числе электрического, осуществляемая самостоятельно, без привлечения иных физических лиц по трудовым и (или) гражданско-правовым договорам и направленная на удовлетворение бытовых потребностей граждан.
К предпринимательской деятельности не относятся:
ремесленная деятельность;
деятельность по оказанию услуг в сфере агроэкотуризма;
деятельность граждан Республики Беларусь, осуществляющих ведение личных подсобных хозяйств, по производству, переработке и реализации произведенной ими сельскохозяйственной продукции;
адвокатская деятельность;
нотариальная деятельность нотариусов;
деятельность третейских судей;
деятельность медиаторов;
деятельность, осуществляемая в рамках временных научных коллективов;
деятельность физических лиц по использованию собственных ценных бумаг и банковских счетов в качестве средства платежа или в целях сохранения денежных средств и получения дохода;
осуществляемые физическими лицами самостоятельно без привлечения иных физических лиц по трудовым и (или) гражданско-правовым договорам следующие виды деятельности:
реализация иностранными гражданами и лицами без гражданства, временно пребывающими и временно проживающими в Республике Беларусь, на торговых местах на рынках и (или) в иных установленных местными исполнительными и распорядительными органами местах не более пяти дней в календарном месяце произведений живописи, графики, скульптуры, изделий народных художественных ремесел, продукции растениеводства и пчеловодства (далее – разовая реализация);
реализация физическими лицами, за исключением лиц, указанных в абзаце двенадцатом настоящей части, на торговых местах на рынках и (или) в иных установленных местными исполнительными и распорядительными органами местах изготовленных этими физическими лицами хлебобулочных и кондитерских изделий, готовой кулинарной продукции, а также созданных ими произведений живописи, графики, скульптуры, изделий народных художественных ремесел; продукции цветоводства, декоративных растений, их семян и рассады, животных (за исключением котят и щенков); лекарственных растений, ягод, грибов, орехов, другой дикорастущей продукции; продукции, указанной в части первой пункта 11 статьи 294 Налогового кодекса Республики Беларусь, при наличии документов, предусмотренных частями второй и третьей пункта 11 статьи 294 Налогового кодекса Республики Беларусь;
оказание услуг по выращиванию сельскохозяйственной продукции;
предоставление услуг по дроблению зерна;
выпас скота;
репетиторство (консультативные услуги по отдельным учебным предметам (предметам), учебным дисциплинам (дисциплинам), образовательным областям, темам, в том числе помощь в подготовке к централизованному тестированию);
чистка и уборка жилых помещений;
уход за взрослыми и детьми, стирка и глаженье постельного белья и других вещей в домашних хозяйствах граждан, выгул домашних животных и уход за ними, закупка продуктов, мытье посуды и приготовление пищи в домашних хозяйствах граждан, внесение платы из средств обслуживаемого лица за пользование жилым помещением и жилищно-коммунальные услуги, кошение травы на газонах, уборка озелененной территории от листьев, скошенной травы и мусора;
майнинг, приобретение, отчуждение цифровых знаков (токенов);
музыкально-развлекательное обслуживание свадеб, юбилеев и прочих торжественных мероприятий;
деятельность актеров, танцоров, музыкантов, исполнителей разговорного жанра, выступающих индивидуально;
предоставление услуг тамадой;
фотосъемка, изготовление фотографий; видеосъемка событий;
деятельность, связанная с поздравлением с днем рождения, Новым годом и иными праздниками независимо от места их проведения;
реализация котят и щенков при условии содержания домашнего животного (кошки, собаки);
услуги по содержанию, уходу и дрессировке домашних животных, кроме сельскохозяйственных животных;
деятельность по копированию, подготовке документов и прочая специализированная офисная деятельность;
деятельность по письменному и устному переводу;
предоставление услуг, оказываемых при помощи автоматов для измерения веса, роста;
ремонт швейных, трикотажных изделий и головных уборов, кроме ремонта ковров и ковровых изделий;
предоставление жилых помещений, садовых домиков, дач (кроме предоставления жилых помещений, садовых домиков, дач для краткосрочного проживания в соответствии с абзацем тридцать третьим настоящей части);
предоставление физическими лицами, за исключением иностранных граждан и лиц без гражданства, временно пребывающих и временно проживающих в Республике Беларусь, принадлежащих им на праве собственности жилых помещений, садовых домиков, дач иным физическим лицам для краткосрочного проживания;
осуществляемые физическими лицами, за исключением иностранных граждан и лиц без гражданства, временно пребывающих и временно проживающих в Республике Беларусь, по заказам граждан, приобретающих или использующих товары (работы, услуги) исключительно для личных, бытовых, семейных и иных нужд, не связанных с осуществлением предпринимательской деятельности:
выполнение работ, оказание услуг по дизайну интерьеров, графическому дизайну, оформлению (украшению) автомобилей, внутреннего пространства капитальных строений (зданий, сооружений), помещений, иных мест, а также моделирование предметов оформления интерьера, текстильных изделий, мебели, одежды и обуви, предметов личного пользования и бытовых изделий;
ремонт часов, обуви;
ремонт и восстановление, включая перетяжку, домашней мебели из материалов заказчика;
сборка мебели;
настройка музыкальных инструментов;
распиловка и колка дров, погрузка и разгрузка грузов;
производство одежды (в том числе головных уборов) и обуви из материалов заказчика;
штукатурные, малярные, стекольные работы, работы по устройству покрытий пола и облицовке стен, оклеивание стен обоями, кладка (ремонт) печей и каминов;
оказание услуг по разработке веб-сайтов, установке (настройке) компьютеров и программного обеспечения, восстановлению компьютеров после сбоя, ремонт, техническое обслуживание компьютеров и периферийного оборудования, обучение работе на персональном компьютере;
парикмахерские и косметические услуги, а также услуги по маникюру и педикюру.
Семейные, трудовые, земельные отношения, отношения по использованию других природных ресурсов и охране окружающей среды, отвечающие признакам, указанным в частях первой и второй настоящего пункта, регулируются гражданским законодательством, если законодательством о браке и семье, о труде и занятости населения, об охране и использовании земель и другим специальным законодательством не предусмотрено иное.
2. Отношения, связанные с осуществлением и защитой неотчуждаемых прав и свобод человека и других нематериальных благ (личные неимущественные отношения, не связанные с имущественными), регулируются гражданским законодательством, поскольку иное не вытекает из существа этих отношений.
3. Участниками регулируемых гражданским законодательством отношений являются граждане Республики Беларусь (далее – граждане), юридические лица Республики Беларусь (далее – юридические лица), Республика Беларусь, административно-территориальные единицы Республики Беларусь (далее – административно-территориальные единицы).
Правила, установленные гражданским законодательством, применяются к отношениям с участием иностранных граждан, лиц без гражданства, иностранных и международных юридических лиц (организаций, не являющихся юридическими лицами), иностранных государств, их административно-территориальных (государственно-территориальных) образований, являющихся в соответствии с законодательством этих государств участниками гражданских отношений, если иное не определено Конституцией Республики Беларусь, иными законодательными актами и международными договорами Республики Беларусь.
4. К имущественным отношениям, основанным на установленном законодательством административном подчинении одной стороны другой, включая налоговые и бюджетные отношения, гражданское законодательство не применяется, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством.
Статья 2. Основные начала гражданского законодательства
Под основными началами гражданского законодательства понимается система принципов, определяющих и регламентирующих гражданские отношения.
Гражданское законодательство основывается на следующих принципах:
все участники гражданских отношений, в том числе государство, его органы и должностные лица, действуют в пределах Конституции Республики Беларусь и принятых в соответствии с ней актов законодательства (принцип верховенства права);
направление и координация государственной и частной экономической деятельности обеспечиваются государством в социальных целях (принцип социальной направленности регулирования экономической деятельности);
осуществление гражданских прав не должно противоречить общественной пользе и безопасности, наносить вред окружающей среде, историко-культурным ценностям, ущемлять права и защищаемые законом интересы других лиц (принцип приоритета общественных интересов);
субъекты гражданского права участвуют в гражданских отношениях на равных, равны перед законом, не могут пользоваться преимуществами и привилегиями, противоречащими закону, и имеют право без всякой дискриминации на равную защиту прав и законных интересов (принцип равенства участников гражданских отношений);
право собственности, приобретенной законным способом, охраняется законом и защищается государством, ее неприкосновенность гарантируется, а принудительное отчуждение допускается
лишь по мотивам общественной необходимости при соблюдении условий и порядка, определенных законом, со своевременным и полным компенсированием стоимости отчужденного имущества либо согласно постановлению суда (принцип неприкосновенности собственности);
граждане и юридические лица свободны в заключении договора. Понуждение к заключению договора не допускается, за исключением случаев, когда обязанность заключить договор предусмотрена законодательством или добровольно принятым обязательством (принцип свободы договора);
добросовестность и разумность участников гражданских правоотношений предполагается, поскольку не установлено иное (принцип добросовестности и разумности участников гражданских правоотношений);
вмешательство в частные дела не допускается, за исключением случаев, когда такое вмешательство осуществляется на основании правовых норм в интересах национальной безопасности, общественного порядка, защиты нравственности, здоровья населения, прав и свобод других лиц (принцип недопустимости произвольного вмешательства в частные дела);
граждане и юридические лица вправе осуществлять защиту гражданских прав в суде и иными способами, предусмотренными законодательством, а также самозащиту гражданских прав с соблюдением пределов, определенных в соответствии с гражданско-правовыми нормами (принцип беспрепятственного осуществления гражданских прав, обеспечения восстановления нарушенных прав, их судебной защиты);
иных принципах, закрепленных в Конституции Республики Беларусь, других актах законодательства, а равно следующих из содержания и смысла гражданско-правовых норм.
Участники гражданских правоотношений приобретают и осуществляют свои гражданские права своей волей и в своих интересах. Они свободны в установлении своих прав и обязанностей на основе договора и в определении любых не противоречащих законодательству условий договора.
Статья 3. Гражданское законодательство
1. Гражданское законодательство – система нормативных правовых актов, которая включает в себя содержащие нормы гражданского права:
законодательные акты (Конституция Республики Беларусь, настоящий Кодекс и законы Республики Беларусь, декреты и указы Президента Республики Беларусю( �
распоряжения Президента Республики Беларусь;
постановления Правительства Республики Беларусь, изданные в соответствии с законодательными актами;
акты Конституционного Суда Республики Беларусь, Верховного Суда Республики Беларусь и Национального банка Республики Беларусь, изданные в пределах их компетенции по регулированию гражданских отношений, установленной Конституцией Республики Беларусь и принятыми в соответствии с ней иными законодательными актами;
акты министерств, иных республиканских органов государственного управления, местных органов управления и самоуправления, изданные в случаях и пределах, предусмотренных законодательными актами, распоряжениями Президента Республики Беларусь и постановлениями Правительства Республики Беларусь.
2. В случае расхождения акта законодательства с Конституцией Республики Беларусь действует Конституция.
В случае расхождения декрета или указа Президента Республики Беларусь с настоящим Кодексом или другим законом настоящий Кодекс или другой закон имеют верховенство лишь тогда, когда полномочия на издание декрета или указа были предоставлены законом.
Нормы гражданского права, содержащиеся в других законах, должны соответствовать настоящему Кодексу. В случае расхождения указанных актов с настоящим Кодексом действует последний.
В случае коллизии (расхождения) иных актов гражданского законодательства применяются правила, установленные законодательством Республики Беларусь о нормативных правовых актах.
Статья 4. Действие гражданского законодательства во времени
Если иное не предусмотрено Конституцией и принятыми в соответствии с ней иными законодательными актами, акты гражданского законодательства не имеют обратной силы и применяются к отношениям, возникшим:
после введения их в действие;
до введения их в действие в части прав и обязанностей, возникших после введения их в действие.
Отношения сторон по договору, заключенному до введения в действие акта гражданского законодательства, регулируются в соответствии со статьей 392 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 5. Применение гражданского законодательства по аналогии
1. В случаях, когда предусмотренные статьей 1 настоящего Кодекса отношения прямо не урегулированы актами законодательства или соглашением сторон, к таким отношениям, поскольку это не противоречит их существу, применяется норма гражданского законодательства, регулирующая сходные отношения (аналогия закона).
2. При невозможности использования в указанных случаях аналогии закона права и обязанности сторон определяются исходя из основных начал и смысла гражданского законодательства (аналогия права).
3. Не допускается применение по аналогии норм, ограничивающих гражданские права и устанавливающих ответственность.
Статья 6. Гражданское законодательство и нормы международного права
Республика Беларусь признает приоритет общепризнанных принципов международного права и обеспечивает соответствие им гражданского законодательства.
Нормы гражданского права, содержащиеся в международных договорах Республики Беларусь, вступивших в силу, являются частью действующего на территории Республики Беларусь гражданского законодательства, подлежат непосредственному применению, кроме случаев, когда из международного договора следует, что для применения таких норм требуется издание внутригосударственного акта, и имеют силу того правового акта, которым выражено согласие Республики Беларусь на обязательность для нее соответствующего международного договора.
Нормы гражданского права, содержащиеся в международных договорах Республики Беларусь, не вступивших в силу, могут применяться Республикой Беларусь временно в порядке, установленном законодательством о международных договорах Республики Беларусь.
ГЛАВА 2 ВОЗНИКНОВЕНИЕ ГРАЖДАНСКИХ ПРАВ И ОБЯЗАННОСТЕЙ, ОСУЩЕСТВЛЕНИЕ И ЗАЩИТА ГРАЖДАНСКИХ ПРАВ
Статья 7. Основания возникновения гражданских прав и обязанностей
1. Гражданские права и обязанности возникают из оснований, предусмотренных законодательством, а также из действий граждан и юридических лиц, которые хотя и не предусмотрены им, но в силу основных начал и смысла гражданского законодательства порождают гражданские права и обязанности.
В соответствии с этим гражданские права и обязанности возникают:
1) из договоров и иных сделок, предусмотренных законодательством, а также из договоров и иных сделок, хотя и не предусмотренных законодательством, но не противоречащих ему;
2) из актов государственных органов и органов местного управления и самоуправления, которые предусмотрены законодательством в качестве основания возникновения гражданских прав и обязанностей;
3) из судебного решения, установившего гражданские права и обязанности;
4) в результате создания и приобретения имущества по основаниям, не запрещенным законодательством;
5) в результате создания произведений науки, литературы, искусства, изобретений и иных результатов интеллектуальной деятельности;
6) вследствие причинения вреда другому лицу;
7) вследствие неосновательного обогащения;
8) вследствие иных действий граждан и юридических лиц;
9) вследствие событий, с которыми законодательство связывает наступление гражданско-правовых последствий.
2. Права на имущество, подлежащее государственной регистрации, возникают с момента регистрации этого имущества или соответствующих прав на него, если иное не установлено законодательством.
Статья 8. Осуществление гражданских прав
1. Граждане и юридические лица по своему усмотрению осуществляют принадлежащие им гражданские права.
2. Отказ граждан и юридических лиц от осуществления принадлежащих им прав не влечет прекращения этих прав, за исключением случаев, предусмотренных законодательными актами.
Статья 9. Пределы осуществления гражданских прав
1. Не допускаются действия граждан и юридических лиц, осуществляемые исключительно с намерением причинить вред другому лицу, а также злоупотребление правом в иных формах.
Не допускается использование гражданских прав в целях ограничения конкуренции, а также злоупотребление своим доминирующим положением на рынке.
2. В случае несоблюдения требований, предусмотренных пунктом 1 настоящей статьи, суд общей юрисдикции или третейский суд могут отказать лицу в защите принадлежащего ему права.
3. Лицо, злоупотребляющее правом, обязано восстановить положение лица, потерпевшего от злоупотребления, возместить причиненный ущерб.
4. В случаях, когда законодательство ставит защиту гражданских прав в зависимость от того, осуществлялись ли эти права добросовестно и разумно, добросовестность и разумность участников гражданских правоотношений предполагается.
Статья 10. Судебная защита гражданских прав
1. Защиту нарушенных или оспоренных гражданских прав осуществляет суд общей юрисдикции, третейский суд (далее – суд) в соответствии с подведомственностью, установленной процессуальным законодательством, а в предусмотренных законодательством случаях – в соответствии с договором.
2. Законодательством или договором (если это не противоречит законодательству) может быть предусмотрено урегулирование спора между сторонами до обращения в суд.
До обращения в суд с иском по спорам, возникающим между юридическими лицами и (или) индивидуальными предпринимателями, обязательным является предъявление претензии (письменного предложения о добровольном урегулировании спора), если иное не установлено настоящим Кодексом, иными законодательными актами или договором. Порядок предъявления претензии устанавливается законодательством или договором.
3. Защита гражданских прав в административном порядке осуществляется лишь в случаях, предусмотренных законодательством. Решение, принятое в административном порядке, может быть обжаловано в суд.
Статья 11. Способы защиты гражданских прав
Защита гражданских прав осуществляется путем:
1) признания права;
2) восстановления положения, существовавшего до нарушения права;
3) пресечения действий, нарушающих право или создающих угрозу его нарушения;
4) признания оспоримой сделки недействительной и применения последствий ее недействительности, установления факта ничтожности сделки и применения последствий ее недействительности;
5) признания недействительным акта государственного органа или органа местного управления и самоуправления;
6) самозащиты права;
7) присуждения к исполнению обязанности в натуре;
8) возмещения убытков;
9) взыскания неустойки;
10) компенсации морального вреда;
11) прекращения или изменения правоотношения;
12) неприменения судом противоречащего законодательству акта государственного органа или органа местного управления и самоуправления;
13) иными способами, предусмотренными законодательством.
Статья 12. Признание недействительным акта государственного органа или органа местного управления и самоуправления
Ненормативный акт государственного органа или органа местного управления и самоуправления, а также акт законодательства, не соответствующий иному законодательному акту и нарушающий гражданские права и охраняемые законодательными актами интересы гражданина и (или) юридического лица, признается судом недействительным по требованию лица, чьи права нарушены, а в случаях, предусмотренных законодательством, – по требованию иных лиц. В случае признания судом акта недействительным нарушенное право подлежит восстановлению либо защите иными способами, предусмотренными статьей 11 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 13. Самозащита гражданских прав
Допускается защита гражданских прав непосредственными действиями лица, права которого нарушаются, если такие действия не сопряжены с нарушением законодательства.
Не является нарушением законодательства самозащита гражданских прав, осуществленная с причинением вреда в состоянии крайней необходимости или необходимой обороны, если действия защищающегося были соразмерны характеру и опасности нарушения и не вышли за пределы его предупреждения или пресечения.
Статья 14. Возмещение убытков
1. Лицо, право которого нарушено, может требовать полного возмещения причиненных ему убытков, если законодательством или соответствующим законодательству договором не предусмотрено иное.
2. Под убытками понимаются расходы, которые лицо, чье право нарушено, произвело или должно будет произвести для восстановления нарушенного права, утрата или повреждение имущества (реальный ущерб), а также неполученные доходы, которые это лицо получило бы при обычных условиях гражданского оборота, если бы его право не было нарушено (упущенная выгода).
Если лицо, нарушившее право, получило вследствие этого доходы, лицо, право которого нарушено, вправе требовать возмещения наряду с другими убытками упущенной выгоды в размере, не меньшем, чем такие доходы.
Статья 15. Возмещение убытков, причиненных государственными органами, органами местного управления и самоуправления
Убытки, причиненные гражданину или юридическому лицу в результате незаконных действий (бездействия) государственных органов или должностных лиц этих органов, органов местного управления и самоуправления или должностных лиц этих органов, в том числе издания не соответствующего законодательству акта государственного органа или органа местного управления и самоуправления, подлежат возмещению Республикой Беларусь или соответствующей административно-территориальной единицей в порядке, предусмотренном законодательством.
ПОДРАЗДЕЛ 2 ЛИЦА
ГЛАВА 3 ГРАЖДАНЕ (ФИЗИЧЕСКИЕ ЛИЦА)
Статья 16. Правоспособность граждан
1. Способность иметь гражданские права и нести обязанности (гражданская правоспособность) признается в равной мере за всеми гражданами.
2. Правоспособность гражданина возникает в момент его рождения и прекращается его смертью.
Статья 17. Содержание правоспособности граждан
Граждане могут в соответствии с законодательством иметь имущество на праве собственности; наследовать и завещать имущество; заниматься предпринимательской и любой иной не запрещенной законодательными актами деятельностью; создавать юридические лица самостоятельно или совместно с другими гражданами и юридическими лицами; совершать не противоречащие законодательству сделки и участвовать в обязательствах; избирать место жительства; иметь права авторов произведений науки, литературы или искусства, изобретений или иных охраняемых законодательством результатов интеллектуальной деятельности; иметь иные имущественные и личные неимущественные права.
Статья 18. Имя гражданина
1. Гражданин приобретает и осуществляет права и обязанности под своим именем, включающим фамилию, собственное имя и отчество (если таковое имеется), если иное не вытекает из законодательства.
В случаях и порядке, предусмотренных законодательством, гражданин может использовать псевдоним (вымышленное имя).
2. Гражданин вправе переменить свое имя в порядке, установленном законодательством. Перемена гражданином имени не является основанием для прекращения или изменения его прав и обязанностей, приобретенных под прежним именем.
Гражданин обязан принимать необходимые меры для уведомления своих должников и кредиторов о перемене его имени и несет риск последствий, вызванных отсутствием у этих лиц сведений о перемене его имени.
Гражданин, переменивший имя, вправе требовать внесения за свой счет соответствующих изменений в документы, оформленные на его прежнее имя.
3. Имя, полученное гражданином при рождении, а также перемена имени подлежат регистрации в порядке, установленном для регистрации актов гражданского состояния.
4. Приобретение прав и обязанностей под именем другого лица не допускается.
5. Вред, причиненный гражданину в результате неправомерного использования его имени, подлежит возмещению в соответствии с законом.
При искажении либо использовании имени гражданина способами или в форме, затрагивающими его честь, достоинство или деловую репутацию, применяются правила, предусмотренные статьей 153 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 19. Место жительства гражданина
1. Местом жительства гражданина признается место нахождения (адрес) жилого помещения, право владения, распоряжения и (или) пользования которым возникло у гражданина по основаниям, установленным законодательными актами, либо населенный пункт, где этот гражданин постоянно или преимущественно проживает, а при невозможности установить такое место – место жительства (при его отсутствии – место пребывания), указанное в документе, удостоверяющем личность, либо другом документе о регистрации, либо место нахождения имущества этого лица.
2. Местом жительства несовершеннолетних в возрасте до четырнадцати лет или граждан, находящихся под опекой, признается место жительства их родителей, усыновителей или опекунов.
Статья 20. Дееспособность граждан
1. Способность гражданина своими действиями приобретать и осуществлять гражданские права, создавать для себя гражданские обязанности и исполнять их (гражданская дееспособность) возникает в полном объеме с наступлением совершеннолетия, то есть по достижении восемнадцатилетнего возраста.
2. В случае, когда законодательством допускается эмансипация (статья 26 настоящего Кодекса) или вступление в брак до достижения восемнадцати лет, гражданин, не достигший восемнадцатилетнего возраста, приобретает дееспособность в полном объеме соответственно с момента принятия решения об эмансипации или со времени вступления в брак.
Приобретенная в результате заключения брака дееспособность сохраняется в полном объеме и в случае расторжения брака.
При признании брака недействительным суд может принять решение об утрате несовершеннолетним супругом полной дееспособности с момента, определяемого судом.
3. Все граждане имеют равную дееспособность, если иное не установлено законодательством.
Статья 21. Недопустимость лишения или ограничения правоспособности и дееспособности граждан
1. Никто не может быть ограничен в правоспособности и дееспособности иначе как в случаях и порядке, установленных законом.
2. Полный или частичный отказ гражданина от правоспособности или дееспособности и другие сделки, направленные на ограничение правоспособности или дееспособности, ничтожны, за исключением случаев, когда такие сделки допускаются законом.
Статья 22. Предпринимательская деятельность гражданина
1. Гражданин вправе заниматься предпринимательской деятельностью без образования юридического лица с момента государственной регистрации в качестве индивидуального предпринимателя. Количество физических лиц, привлекаемых индивидуальным предпринимателем на основании гражданско-правовых и (или) трудовых договоров для осуществления предпринимательской деятельности, а также количество имущества, используемого для этих целей, может быть ограничено законодательными актами.
2. К предпринимательской деятельности граждан, осуществляемой без образования юридического лица, соответственно применяются правила настоящего Кодекса, которые регулируют деятельность юридических лиц, являющихся коммерческими организациями, если иное не вытекает из законодательства или существа правоотношения.
3. Гражданин, осуществляющий предпринимательскую деятельность без образования юридического лица с нарушением требований пункта 1 настоящей статьи, не вправе ссылаться в
отношении заключенных им при этом сделок на то, что он не является индивидуальным предпринимателем. К таким сделкам применяются правила, установленные законодательством для предпринимательской деятельности.
Статья 23. Имущественная ответственность гражданина
Гражданин отвечает по своим обязательствам всем принадлежащим ему имуществом, за исключением имущества, на которое в соответствии с законодательством не может быть обращено взыскание.
Перечень имущества граждан, на которое не может быть обращено взыскание, устанавливается законодательством об исполнительном производстве.
Статья 24. Экономическая несостоятельность (банкротство) индивидуального предпринимателя
1. Индивидуальный предприниматель, который не в состоянии удовлетворить требования кредиторов, связанные с осуществлением им предпринимательской деятельности, может быть признан экономически несостоятельным (банкротом) в судебном порядке.
2. При осуществлении процедуры признания экономически несостоятельным (банкротом) индивидуального предпринимателя его кредиторы по обязательствам, не связанным с осуществлением им предпринимательской деятельности, также вправе предъявить свои требования. Требования указанных кредиторов, не заявленные ими в таком порядке, сохраняют силу после завершения процедуры банкротства индивидуального предпринимателя.
3. Требования кредиторов индивидуального предпринимателя в случае признания его банкротом удовлетворяются за счет принадлежащего ему имущества, на которое может быть обращено взыскание.
4. После завершения расчетов с кредиторами индивидуальный предприниматель, признанный банкротом, освобождается от исполнения оставшихся обязательств, связанных с его предпринимательской деятельностью, и иных требований, предъявленных к исполнению и учтенных при признании предпринимателя банкротом.
Сохраняют силу требования граждан, перед которыми индивидуальный предприниматель, признанный банкротом либо объявивший им о своем банкротстве, несет ответственность за причинение вреда их жизни или здоровью, а также иные требования личного характера.
5. Основания, порядок признания судом индивидуального предпринимателя экономически несостоятельным (банкротом) либо объявления им о своем банкротстве, очередность удовлетворения требований кредиторов устанавливаются настоящим Кодексом и иным законодательством.
Статья 25. Дееспособность несовершеннолетних в возрасте от четырнадцати до восемнадцати лет
1. Несовершеннолетние в возрасте от четырнадцати до восемнадцати лет совершают сделки, за исключением указанных в пункте 2 настоящей статьи, с письменного согласия своих законных представителей – родителей, усыновителей или попечителей.
Сделка, совершенная таким несовершеннолетним, действительна также при последующем письменном одобрении его родителей, усыновителей или попечителя.
2. Несовершеннолетние в возрасте от четырнадцати до восемнадцати лет вправе самостоятельно, без согласия своих законных представителей:
1) распоряжаться своими заработком, стипендией и иными собственными доходами;
2) осуществлять права автора произведения науки, литературы или искусства, изобретения или иного охраняемого законодательством результата своей интеллектуальной деятельности;
3) вносить денежные средства в банки или небанковские кредитно-финансовые организации и распоряжаться ими в соответствии с законодательством;
4) совершать мелкие бытовые сделки и иные сделки, предусмотренные пунктом 2 статьи 27 настоящего Кодекса.
По достижении шестнадцати лет несовершеннолетние также вправе быть членами кооперативов в соответствии с актами законодательства о кооперативах.
3. Имущественную ответственность по сделкам, совершенным в соответствии с пунктом 1 настоящей статьи несовершеннолетними в возрасте от четырнадцати до восемнадцати лет, несет несовершеннолетний, а субсидиарную ответственность – лицо, давшее письменное согласие на совершение соответствующей сделки.
Несовершеннолетние в возрасте от четырнадцати до восемнадцати лет самостоятельно несут имущественную ответственность по сделкам, совершенным ими в соответствии с пунктом 2 настоящей статьи.
За причиненный ими вред такие несовершеннолетние несут ответственность в соответствии с главой 58 настоящего Кодекса.
4. При наличии достаточных оснований суд по ходатайству родителей, усыновителей или попечителя либо органа опеки и попечительства может ограничить или лишить несовершеннолетнего в возрасте от четырнадцати до восемнадцати лет права самостоятельно распоряжаться своими заработком, стипендией или иными доходами, за исключением случаев, когда такой несовершеннолетний приобрел дееспособность в полном объеме в соответствии с пунктом 2 статьи 20 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 26. Эмансипация
1. Несовершеннолетний, достигший шестнадцати лет, может быть объявлен полностью дееспособным, если он работает по трудовому договору (контракту) или с согласия родителей, усыновителей или попечителя занимается предпринимательской деятельностью.
Объявление несовершеннолетнего полностью дееспособным (эмансипация) производится по решению органов опеки и попечительства с согласия обоих родителей, усыновителей или попечителя, а при отсутствии такого согласия – по решению суда.
2. Родители, усыновители и попечитель не несут ответственности по обязательствам эмансипированного несовершеннолетнего, в том числе по обязательствам, возникшим вследствие причинения им вреда.
Статья 27. Дееспособность несовершеннолетних в возрасте до четырнадцати лет (малолетних)
1. За несовершеннолетних в возрасте до четырнадцати лет (малолетних) сделки, за исключением указанных в пункте 2 настоящей статьи, могут совершать от их имени только их законные представители – родители, усыновители или опекуны.
К сделкам законных представителей такого несовершеннолетнего с его имуществом применяются правила, предусмотренные пунктами 2 и 3 статьи 35 настоящего Кодекса, если иное не установлено Жилищным кодексом Республики Беларусь.
2. Несовершеннолетние в возрасте до четырнадцати лет вправе самостоятельно совершать:
1) мелкие бытовые сделки;
2) сделки, направленные на безвозмездное получение выгод, не требующие нотариального удостоверения либо государственной регистрации;
3) сделки по распоряжению средствами, предоставленными законным представителем или с согласия последнего третьим лицом для определенной цели или свободного распоряжения.
3. Имущественную ответственность по сделкам несовершеннолетнего в возрасте до четырнадцати лет, в том числе по сделкам, совершенным им самостоятельно, несут его родители, усыновители или опекун. Ответственность за вред, причиненный несовершеннолетним в возрасте до четырнадцати лет, определяется в соответствии с правилами главы 58 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 28. Право распоряжения банковскими вкладами (депозитами) на имя малолетних
Банковскими вкладами (депозитами), внесенными кем-либо на имя малолетних, распоряжаются их родители, усыновители или опекуны с соблюдением правил, предусмотренных статьей 35 настоящего Кодекса, а также вкладчик (в случаях, предусмотренных законодательством или договором).
Статья 29. Признание гражданина недееспособным
1. Гражданин, который вследствие психического расстройства (душевной болезни или слабоумия) не может понимать значения своих действий или руководить ими, может быть признан судом недееспособным в порядке, установленном гражданским процессуальным законодательством. Над ним устанавливается опека.
2. От имени гражданина, признанного недееспособным, сделки совершает его опекун.
3. Если основания, в силу которых гражданин был признан недееспособным, отпали, суд признает его дееспособным. На основании решения суда отменяется установленная над ним опека.
Статья 30. Ограничение дееспособности граждан
1. Гражданин, который вследствие злоупотребления спиртными напитками, наркотическими средствами, психотропными веществами, их аналогами ставит свою семью в тяжелое материальное положение, может быть ограничен в дееспособности судом в порядке, установленном гражданским процессуальным законодательством. Над ним устанавливается попечительство.
Такой гражданин вправе самостоятельно совершать мелкие бытовые сделки.
Совершать другие сделки, а также получать заработок, пенсию и иные доходы и распоряжаться ими он может лишь с согласия попечителя. Однако он самостоятельно несет имущественную ответственность по совершенным им сделкам и за причиненный им вред.
2. Если основания, в силу которых гражданин был ограничен в дееспособности, отпали, суд отменяет ограничение его дееспособности. На основании решения суда отменяется установленное над гражданином попечительство.
Статья 31. Ограничение предпринимательской деятельности гражданина
В случаях, предусмотренных законодательными актами, предпринимательская деятельность гражданина (индивидуального предпринимателя, учредителя, участника, собственника имущества или руководителя юридического лица и др.) может быть ограничена в судебном порядке на срок до трех лет.
Гражданин, предпринимательская деятельность которого ограничена, в течение всего срока действия ограничения не может:
осуществлять предпринимательскую деятельность без образования юридического лица;
своими действиями приобретать и осуществлять права, создавать для себя и исполнять обязанности собственника имущества (учредителя, участника) юридического лица;
занимать должности в исполнительных органах юридических лиц;
выступать в качестве управляющего предприятиями и иным имуществом, которое используется для предпринимательской деятельности.
Предприятие и иное имущество, находящееся в собственности указанного гражданина, может быть использовано им в период действия ограничения для предпринимательской деятельности исключительно путем передачи этого имущества в доверительное управление.
Статья 32. Опека
1. Опека устанавливается над малолетними, а также над гражданами, признанными судом недееспособными.
2. Опекуны являются представителями подопечных в силу закона (законными представителями) и совершают от их имени и в их интересах все необходимые сделки.
Статья 33. Попечительство
1. Попечительство устанавливается над несовершеннолетними в возрасте от четырнадцати до восемнадцати лет, а также над гражданами, ограниченными судом в дееспособности вследствие злоупотребления спиртными напитками, наркотическими средствами, психотропными веществами, их аналогами.
2. Попечители дают согласие на совершение тех сделок, которые граждане, находящиеся под попечительством, не вправе совершать самостоятельно.
Попечители оказывают подопечным содействие в осуществлении ими своих прав и исполнении обязанностей, а также охраняют их от злоупотреблений со стороны третьих лиц.
Статья 34. Опекуны и попечители как представители подопечных
1. Опекуны и попечители назначаются в порядке, установленном законодательством, и выступают в защиту прав и интересов подопечных в отношениях с любыми лицами и организациями, в том числе в судах, без специального полномочия.
2. Если лицу, нуждающемуся в опеке или попечительстве, в течение месяца со дня, когда органу опеки и попечительства стало известно о необходимости установления опеки или попечительства, не назначен опекун или попечитель, выполнение обязанностей опекуна или попечителя временно (до назначения опекуна или попечителя) возлагается на руководителя органа опеки и попечительства.
Статья 35. Распоряжение имуществом подопечного
1. Доходы подопечного, в том числе причитающиеся ему от управления его имуществом, за исключением доходов, которыми подопечный вправе распоряжаться самостоятельно, расходуются опекуном или попечителем исключительно в интересах подопечного и с предварительного разрешения органа опеки и попечительства.
Без предварительного разрешения органа опеки и попечительства опекун или попечитель вправе производить необходимые для содержания подопечного расходы за счет сумм, причитающихся подопечному в качестве его дохода.
2. Опекун не вправе без предварительного разрешения органа опеки и попечительства совершать, а попечитель – давать согласие на совершение сделок по отчуждению, в том числе по обмену или дарению имущества подопечного, сдаче его в аренду (в наем), безвозмездное пользование или в залог; сделок, влекущих отказ от принадлежащих подопечному прав, раздел его имущества или выдел из него долей, а также любых других сделок, влекущих уменьшение имущества подопечного.
Порядок управления имуществом подопечного определяется законодательством.
3. Опекун, попечитель, их супруги и близкие родственники не вправе совершать сделки с подопечным, за исключением передачи имущества подопечному в качестве дара или в безвозмездное пользование, а также представлять подопечного при заключении сделок или ведении судебных дел между подопечным и супругом опекуна или попечителя и их близкими родственниками.
Статья 36. Доверительное управление имуществом подопечного
1. При необходимости постоянного управления недвижимым и ценным движимым имуществом подопечного орган опеки и попечительства заключает с доверительным управляющим, определенным этим органом, договор о доверительном управлении таким имуществом (глава 52 настоящего Кодекса). В этом случае опекун или попечитель сохраняет свои полномочия в отношении того имущества подопечного, которое не передано в доверительное управление.
При осуществлении управляющим правомочий по управлению имуществом подопечного на управляющего распространяется действие правил, предусмотренных пунктами 2 и 3 статьи 35 настоящего Кодекса.
2. Доверительное управление имуществом подопечного прекращается в связи с прекращением договора доверительного управления имуществом по основаниям, предусмотренным пунктом 1 статьи 907 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 37. Патронаж над дееспособными гражданами
1. По просьбе совершеннолетнего дееспособного гражданина, который по состоянию здоровья не может самостоятельно осуществлять и защищать свои права и исполнять обязанности, над ним может быть установлен патронаж.
Установление патронажа не влечет ограничения прав гражданина, над которым установлен патронаж.
2. Помощник (лицо, осуществляющее патронаж) совершеннолетнего дееспособного гражданина может быть назначен органом опеки и попечительства только с согласия такого гражданина.
3. Распоряжение имуществом, принадлежащим гражданину, над которым установлен патронаж, осуществляется помощником на основании договора поручения или доверительного управления, заключенного с этим гражданином. Совершение бытовых и аналогичных им сделок, направленных на содержание и удовлетворение бытовых потребностей гражданина, над которым установлен патронаж, осуществляется его помощником с согласия этого гражданина.
4. Патронаж, установленный в соответствии с пунктом 1 настоящей статьи, прекращается по требованию гражданина, над которым установлен патронаж.
Статья 38. Признание гражданина безвестно отсутствующим
Гражданин по заявлению заинтересованных лиц может быть признан судом безвестно отсутствующим, если в течение одного года по месту его жительства нет сведений о месте его пребывания. При невозможности установить день получения последних сведений об отсутствующем началом исчисления срока для признания безвестного отсутствия считается первое число месяца, следующего за тем, в котором были получены последние сведения об отсутствующем, а при невозможности установить этот месяц – первое января следующего года.
Статья 39. Последствия признания гражданина безвестно отсутствующим
1. Имущество гражданина, признанного безвестно отсутствующим, при необходимости постоянного управления им передается на основании решения суда лицу, которое определяется органом опеки и попечительства и действует на основании договора о доверительном управлении, заключаемого с этим органом.
2. Доверительный управляющий имуществом гражданина, признанного безвестно отсутствующим, принимает исполнение его обязательств, погашает за счет имущества отсутствующего его долги, управляет этим имуществом в его интересах. По заявлению заинтересованных лиц выдается содержание гражданам, которых безвестно отсутствующий обязан был содержать.
3. Орган опеки и попечительства может и до истечения одного года со дня получения сведений о месте пребывания отсутствующего гражданина назначить управляющего его имуществом.
4. Последствия признания лица безвестно отсутствующим, не предусмотренные настоящей статьей, определяются законодательством.
Статья 40. Отмена решения о признании гражданина безвестно отсутствующим
1. В случае явки или обнаружения места пребывания гражданина, признанного безвестно отсутствующим, суд отменяет решение о признании его безвестно отсутствующим. На основании решения суда отменяется доверительное управление имуществом этого гражданина.
2. Если по истечении трех лет со дня назначения доверительного управляющего решение о признании гражданина безвестно отсутствующим не было отменено и не было обращения в суд об объявлении гражданина умершим, орган опеки и попечительства обязан обратиться в суд с заявлением об объявлении гражданина умершим.
Статья 41. Объявление гражданина умершим
1. Гражданин может быть объявлен судом умершим, если по месту его жительства нет сведений о месте его пребывания в течение трех лет, а если он пропал без вести при обстоятельствах, угрожавших смертью или дающих основание предполагать его гибель от определенного несчастного случая, – в течение шести месяцев.
2. Военнослужащий или иной гражданин, пропавший без вести в связи с военными действиями, может быть объявлен судом умершим не ранее чем по истечении двух лет со дня окончания военных действий.
3. Днем смерти гражданина, объявленного умершим, считается день вступления в законную силу решения суда об объявлении его умершим. В случае объявления умершим гражданина, пропавшего без вести при обстоятельствах, угрожавших смертью или дающих основание предполагать его гибель от определенного несчастного случая, суд может признать днем смерти этого гражданина день его предполагаемой гибели.
4. Объявление гражданина умершим влечет в отношении прав и обязанностей такого гражданина те же последствия, которые повлекла бы его смерть.
Статья 42. Последствия явки гражданина, объявленного умершим
1. В случае явки или обнаружения места пребывания гражданина, объявленного умершим, суд отменяет решение об объявлении его умершим.
2. Независимо от времени своей явки гражданин может потребовать от любого лица возврата сохранившегося имущества, которое безвозмездно перешло к этому лицу после объявления гражданина умершим, за исключением случаев, предусмотренных пунктом 3 статьи 283 настоящего Кодекса.
Лица, к которым имущество гражданина, объявленного умершим, перешло по возмездным сделкам, обязаны возвратить ему это имущество, если доказано, что, приобретая имущество, они знали, что гражданин, объявленный умершим, находится в живых. При невозможности возврата такого имущества в натуре возмещается его стоимость. Если имущество гражданина, объявленного умершим, перешло к государству как выморочное и было реализовано им с соблюдением условий, предусмотренных настоящей статьей, то после отмены решения об объявлении гражданина умершим ему возвращается сумма, вырученная от реализации имущества.
Статья 43. Регистрация актов гражданского состояния
1. Регистрации подлежат следующие акты гражданского состояния:
1) рождение;
2) заключение брака;
3) установление материнства и (или) отцовства;
4) усыновление (удочерение);
5) смерть;
6) перемена фамилии, собственного имени, отчества;
7) расторжение брака в случаях, предусмотренных законодательством о браке и семье.
2. Органы, регистрирующие акты гражданского состояния, и порядок регистрации актов гражданского состояния определяются законодательством.
ГЛАВА 4 ЮРИДИЧЕСКИЕ ЛИЦА
§ 1. Основные положения
Статья 44. Понятие юридического лица
1. Юридическим лицом признается организация, которая имеет в собственности, хозяйственном ведении или оперативном управлении обособленное имущество, несет самостоятельную ответственность по своим обязательствам, может от своего имени приобретать и осуществлять имущественные и личные неимущественные права, исполнять обязанности, быть истцом и ответчиком в суде, прошедшая в установленном порядке государственную регистрацию в качестве юридического лица либо признанная таковым законодательным актом.
2. В связи с участием в образовании имущества юридического лица его учредители (участники) могут иметь обязательственные права в отношении этого юридического лица либо вещные права на его имущество.
К юридическим лицам, в отношении которых их участники имеют обязательственные права, относятся хозяйственные товарищества и общества, производственные и потребительские кооперативы, крестьянские (фермерские) хозяйства. Участники таких юридических лиц могут иметь вещные права только на имущество, которое они передали юридическим лицам в пользование в качестве вклада в уставный фонд.
К юридическим лицам, на имущество которых их учредители имеют право собственности или иное вещное право, относятся унитарные предприятия, в том числе дочерние, а также государственные объединения и финансируемые собственником учреждения.
3. К юридическим лицам, в отношении которых их учредители (участники) не имеют имущественных прав, относятся общественные и религиозные организации (объединения), благотворительные и иные фонды, объединения юридических лиц и (или) индивидуальных предпринимателей (ассоциации и союзы), а также иные некоммерческие организации, если иное не установлено настоящим Кодексом, иными законами или актами Президента Республики Беларусь.
В случаях, предусмотренных законами или актами Президента Республики Беларусь, Республика Беларусь, административно-территориальные единицы могут иметь имущественные права в отношении некоммерческих организаций, в том числе не являясь их учредителями (участниками).
4. Особенности образования (создания), реорганизации и упразднения (ликвидации) государственных органов, а также государственных юридических лиц, положения о которых утверждены актами законодательства, могут устанавливаться иными актами законодательства, определяющими особенности правового статуса таких органов и юридических лиц.
Статья 45. Правоспособность юридического лица
1. Юридическое лицо может иметь гражданские права, соответствующие целям деятельности, предусмотренным в его учредительных документах, а также предмету деятельности, если он указан в учредительных документах, и нести связанные с этой деятельностью обязанности. Отдельными видами деятельности, перечень которых определяется законодательными актами, юридическое лицо может заниматься только на основании специального разрешения (лицензии).
2. Юридическое лицо может быть ограничено в правах лишь в случаях и порядке, предусмотренных законодательными актами. Решение об ограничении прав может быть обжаловано юридическим лицом в суд.
3. Правоспособность юридического лица возникает в момент его создания (пункт 2 статьи 47) и прекращается в момент завершения его ликвидации (пункт 8 статьи 59).
Право юридического лица осуществлять деятельность, на занятие которой необходимо получение специального разрешения (лицензии), возникает с момента получения такого специального разрешения (лицензии) и прекращается при прекращении действия, аннулировании (отзыве) этого специального разрешения (лицензии) в случаях, предусмотренных законодательными актами.
Правоспособность государственного органа, а также государственного юридического лица, положение о котором утверждено актом законодательства, возникает с момента вступления в силу акта законодательства, предусматривающего образование (создание) такого органа или юридического лица, если иное не предусмотрено этим актом, и прекращается с момента вступления в силу акта законодательства, предусматривающего упразднение (ликвидацию) такого органа или юридического лица, если этим актом не предусмотрено иное.
Государственные органы, а также государственные юридические лица, положения о которых утверждены актами законодательства, подлежат включению в Единый государственный регистр юридических лиц и индивидуальных предпринимателей. Порядок включения таких органов и юридических лиц в Единый государственный регистр юридических лиц и индивидуальных предпринимателей с учетом особенностей их образования (создания) определяется Правительством Республики Беларусь.
Статья 46. Коммерческие и некоммерческие организации
1. Юридическими лицами могут быть организации, преследующие извлечение прибыли в качестве основной цели своей деятельности и (или) распределяющие полученную прибыль между участниками (коммерческие организации) либо не имеющие извлечение прибыли в качестве такой цели и не распределяющие полученную прибыль между участниками (некоммерческие организации).
2. Юридические лица, являющиеся коммерческими организациями, могут создаваться в форме хозяйственных товариществ и обществ, производственных кооперативов, унитарных предприятий, крестьянских (фермерских) хозяйств и иных формах, предусмотренных настоящим Кодексом.
3. Юридические лица, являющиеся некоммерческими организациями, могут создаваться в форме потребительских кооперативов, общественных или религиозных организаций (объединений), финансируемых собственником учреждений, благотворительных и иных фондов, а также в других формах, предусмотренных законодательными актами.
Некоммерческие организации могут создаваться для достижения социальных, природоохранных, благотворительных, культурных, образовательных, научных и управленческих целей, охраны здоровья граждан, развития физической культуры и спорта, удовлетворения духовных и иных нематериальных потребностей граждан, защиты прав, законных интересов граждан и юридических лиц, разрешения споров и конфликтов, оказания юридической помощи в соответствии с законодательством, а также в иных целях, направленных на достижение общественных благ.
Некоммерческие организации могут создаваться для удовлетворения материальных (имущественных) потребностей граждан либо граждан и юридических лиц в случаях, предусмотренных настоящим Кодексом и другими законодательными актами.
Некоммерческие организации могут осуществлять предпринимательскую деятельность лишь постольку, поскольку она необходима для их уставных целей, ради которых они созданы, соответствует этим целям и отвечает предмету деятельности некоммерческих организаций, либо поскольку она необходима для выполнения государственно значимых задач, предусмотренных в их учредительных документах, соответствует этим задачам и отвечает предмету деятельности данных организаций. Для отдельных форм некоммерческих организаций законодательными актами могут быть установлены требования, предусматривающие их право на занятие предпринимательской деятельностью только посредством образования коммерческих организаций и (или) участия в них.
4. Допускается создание объединений коммерческих организаций и (или) индивидуальных предпринимателей, а также объединений коммерческих и (или) некоммерческих организаций в форме ассоциаций и союзов, объединений коммерческих, некоммерческих организаций и (или) индивидуальных предпринимателей в форме государственных объединений.
В случаях, предусмотренных законодательными актами, объединения коммерческих, некоммерческих организаций и (или) физических лиц могут создаваться и в иных формах.
Статья 47. Государственная регистрация юридических лиц
1. Юридическое лицо подлежит государственной регистрации в порядке, установленном законодательными актами, за исключением государственных органов, а также государственных юридических лиц, положения о которых утверждены актами законодательства. Данные государственной регистрации включаются в Единый государственный регистр юридических лиц и индивидуальных предпринимателей, если иное не установлено законодательными актами.
Неосуществление либо отказ в какой-либо форме по основаниям, не предусмотренным законодательными актами, в государственной регистрации юридического лица, изменений и (или) дополнений, вносимых в учредительные документы юридических лиц, не допускаются.
Осуществление, неосуществление регистрирующим органом государственной регистрации юридического лица либо отказ в государственной регистрации юридического лица, изменений и (или) дополнений, вносимых в учредительные документы юридических лиц, могут быть обжалованы в судебном порядке.
2. Юридическое лицо считается созданным с момента его государственной регистрации, если иное не установлено Президентом Республики Беларусь.
Государственный орган, а также государственное юридическое лицо, положение о котором утверждено актом законодательства, считаются образованными (созданными) с момента вступления в силу акта законодательства, предусматривающего образование (создание) такого органа или юридического лица, если иное не предусмотрено этим актом.
3. Юридическое лицо подлежит перерегистрации в случаях, предусмотренных законодательными актами.
4. Физическое или юридическое лицо вправе получить информацию, содержащуюся в Едином государственном регистре юридических лиц и индивидуальных предпринимателей, в порядке, определяемом законодательством.
Статья 471. Уставный фонд коммерческой организации
1. При создании коммерческой организации формируется уставный фонд этой организации в порядке, установленном законодательством. Коммерческая организация самостоятельно определяет размер уставного фонда, за исключением коммерческих организаций, для которых законодательством устанавливаются минимальные размеры уставных фондов.
2. Вкладом в уставный фонд коммерческой организации могут быть вещи, включая деньги и ценные бумаги, иное имущество, в том числе имущественные права, либо иные отчуждаемые права, имеющие оценку их стоимости.
Оценка стоимости неденежного вклада в уставный фонд коммерческой организации подлежит экспертизе достоверности такой оценки в случаях и порядке, предусмотренных законодательством.
В уставный фонд коммерческой организации не может быть внесено имущество, если право на отчуждение этого имущества ограничено собственником, законодательством или договором.
Законодательными актами могут быть установлены и иные ограничения в отношении имущества, вносимого в качестве вклада в уставный фонд коммерческой организации.
3. Если по окончании второго и каждого последующего финансового года стоимость чистых активов коммерческой организации окажется менее уставного фонда, такая организация обязана в установленном порядке уменьшить свой уставный фонд до размера, не превышающего стоимости ее чистых активов. В случае уменьшения стоимости чистых активов коммерческой организации, для которой законодательством установлен минимальный размер уставного фонда, по результатам
второго и каждого последующего финансового года ниже минимального размера уставного фонда такая организация подлежит ликвидации в установленном порядке.
Статья 48. Учредительные документы юридического лица
1. Юридическое лицо действует на основании устава или учредительного договора. Учредительный договор юридического лица заключается, а устав утверждается собственником имущества (учредителями, участниками). Настоящим Кодексом и иными законодательными актами может устанавливаться иной порядок утверждения уставов юридических лиц. Актами Президента Республики Беларусь может быть предусмотрено утверждение положений, на основании которых действуют соответствующие юридические лица.
2. В уставе, учредительном договоре юридического лица должны определяться наименование юридического лица, место его нахождения, цели деятельности, порядок управления деятельностью юридического лица, а также содержаться иные сведения, предусмотренные настоящим Кодексом и законодательством о юридических лицах соответствующего вида.
В учредительном договоре учредители (участники) обязуются создать юридическое лицо, определяют порядок совместной деятельности по его созданию, условия передачи ему своего имущества и участия в его деятельности. Кроме сведений, указанных в части первой настоящего пункта, в учредительном договоре должны определяться также условия и порядок распределения между участниками прибыли и убытков, выхода участников из его состава и иные сведения, предусмотренные законодательством о юридических лицах соответствующего вида. По согласию учредителей (участников) в учредительный договор могут быть включены и другие условия.
В учредительных документах некоммерческих организаций, а также в предусмотренных законодательными актами случаях в учредительных документах коммерческих организаций должен быть определен предмет деятельности юридического лица. Учредительными документами коммерческих организаций может быть предусмотрен предмет их деятельности и в случаях, когда в соответствии с законодательными актами это не является обязательным.
3. Изменения учредительных документов приобретают силу для третьих лиц с момента их государственной регистрации, а в случаях, установленных законодательными актами, – с момента уведомления органа, осуществляющего государственную регистрацию, о таких изменениях. Однако юридические лица и их учредители (участники) не вправе ссылаться на отсутствие регистрации таких изменений в отношениях с третьими лицами, действовавшими с учетом этих изменений.
Изменения учредительных документов республиканских государственно-общественных объединений приобретают силу для третьих лиц с момента вступления в силу правовых актов, утверждающих такие изменения.
Статья 49. Органы юридического лица
1. Юридическое лицо приобретает гражданские права и принимает на себя гражданские обязанности через свои органы, действующие в соответствии с законодательством и учредительными документами. Порядок назначения или избрания органов юридического лица определяется законодательными актами и учредительными документами.
2. В предусмотренных законодательными актами случаях юридическое лицо может приобретать гражданские права и принимать на себя гражданские обязанности через собственника имущества (учредителей, участников).
3. Лицо, которое в силу акта законодательства или учредительных документов юридического лица выступает от его имени, должно действовать в интересах представляемого им юридического лица
добросовестно и разумно. Оно обязано по требованию собственника имущества (учредителей, участников) юридического лица, поскольку иное не предусмотрено законодательными актами или договором, возместить убытки, причиненные им юридическому лицу.
Статья 50. Наименование и место нахождения юридического лица
1. Юридическое лицо имеет свое наименование, содержащее указание на его организационно- правовую форму. Наименования некоммерческих организаций и в предусмотренных законодательными актами случаях наименования коммерческих организаций должны содержать указание на характер деятельности юридического лица.
Включение в наименование юридического лица указаний на официальное полное или сокращенное название Республики Беларусь, слов «национальный» и «белорусский», включение такого названия либо элементов государственной символики в реквизиты документов или рекламные материалы юридического лица допускаются в порядке, определяемом Президентом Республики Беларусь.
2. Место нахождения юридического лица определяется местом нахождения его постоянно действующего исполнительного органа (административно-территориальная единица, населенный пункт, а также дом, квартира или иное помещение, если они имеются), а в случае отсутствия постоянно действующего исполнительного органа – иного органа или лица, имеющих право действовать от имени юридического лица без доверенности.
3. Наименование и место нахождения юридического лица указываются в его учредительных документах.
В случае изменения места нахождения юридического лица такое юридическое лицо в порядке, установленном законодательными актами, обязано направить в регистрирующий орган соответствующее уведомление, если иное не установлено законодательными актами.
4. Исключен.
Статья 51. Представительства и филиалы
1. Представительством является обособленное подразделение юридического лица, расположенное вне места его нахождения, осуществляющее защиту и представительство интересов юридического лица, совершающее от его имени сделки и иные юридические действия.
2. Филиалом является обособленное подразделение юридического лица, расположенное вне места его нахождения и осуществляющее все или часть его функций, в том числе функции представительства.
3. Представительства и филиалы не являются юридическими лицами. Они наделяются имуществом создавшим их юридическим лицом и действуют на основании утвержденных им положений.
Имущество представительства и филиала юридического лица учитывается отдельно на балансе создавшего их юридического лица (отдельно в книге учета доходов и расходов организаций и индивидуальных предпринимателей, применяющих упрощенную систему налогообложения).
Руководители представительств и филиалов назначаются юридическим лицом и действуют на основании его доверенности.
Представительства и филиалы должны быть указаны в уставе создавшего их юридического лица.
4. Правовое положение представительств и филиалов банков и небанковских кредитно- финансовых организаций, организационных структур общественных организаций (объединений) и
республиканских государственно-общественных объединений определяется с учетом особенностей, установленных законодательством.
Статья 511. Представительство иностранной организации
1. Представительством иностранной организации является ее обособленное подразделение, расположенное на территории Республики Беларусь, осуществляющее защиту и представительство интересов иностранной организации и иные не противоречащие законодательству функции.
Не допускается создание представительств иностранных организаций, деятельность которых направлена на свержение либо насильственное изменение конституционного строя, нарушение целостности и безопасности государства, пропаганду войны, насилия, разжигание национальной, религиозной и расовой вражды, а также деятельность которых может причинить ущерб правам и законным интересам граждан.
2. Представительство иностранной организации считается созданным на территории Республики Беларусь с момента получения разрешения на его открытие в установленном законодательством порядке.
Законодательством могут устанавливаться ограничения на предпринимательскую и иную деятельность представительств иностранных организаций.
3. Представительство иностранной организации имеет наименование, содержащее указание на иностранную организацию, его создавшую.
Статья 52. Ответственность юридического лица
1. Юридические лица, кроме финансируемых собственником учреждений, отвечают по своим обязательствам всем своим имуществом.
2. Казенное предприятие и финансируемое собственником учреждение отвечают по своим обязательствам в порядке и на условиях, предусмотренных пунктом 8 статьи 113, статьями 115 и 120 настоящего Кодекса.
3. Учредитель (участник) юридического лица или собственник его имущества не отвечают по обязательствам юридического лица, а юридическое лицо не отвечает по обязательствам учредителя (участника) или собственника, за исключением случаев, предусмотренных законодательными актами либо учредительными документами юридического лица.
Собственник имущества юридического лица, признанного экономически несостоятельным (банкротом), его учредители (участники) или иные лица, в том числе руководитель юридического лица, имеющие право давать обязательные для этого юридического лица указания либо возможность иным образом определять его действия, несут субсидиарную ответственность при недостаточности имущества юридического лица только в случае, когда экономическая несостоятельность (банкротство) юридического лица была вызвана виновными (умышленными) действиями таких лиц, если иное не установлено законодательными актами.
Статья 53. Реорганизация юридического лица
1. Реорганизация юридического лица (слияние, присоединение, разделение, выделение, преобразование) может быть осуществлена по решению собственника его имущества (учредителей, участников) либо органа юридического лица, уполномоченного на то учредительными документами, а в случаях, предусмотренных законодательными актами, – по решению уполномоченных государственных органов, в том числе суда.
2. Если собственник имущества (учредители, участники) юридического лица, уполномоченный ими орган юридического лица или орган юридического лица, уполномоченный на реорганизацию его учредительными документами, не осуществят реорганизацию юридического лица в срок, определенный в решении уполномоченного государственного органа, суд по иску указанного государственного органа назначает внешнего управляющего юридическим лицом и поручает ему осуществить реорганизацию этого юридического лица. С момента назначения внешнего управляющего к нему переходят полномочия по управлению делами юридического лица. Внешний управляющий выступает от имени юридического лица в суде, составляет разделительный баланс или передаточный акт и передает их на рассмотрение суда вместе с учредительными документами возникающих в результате реорганизации юридических лиц. Утверждение судом указанных документов является основанием для государственной регистрации вновь возникающих юридических лиц.
3. В случаях, установленных законодательными актами, реорганизация юридических лиц может быть осуществлена лишь с согласия уполномоченных государственных органов.
4. Юридическое лицо считается реорганизованным, за исключением случаев реорганизации в форме присоединения, с момента государственной регистрации вновь возникших юридических лиц.
При реорганизации юридического лица в форме присоединения к нему другого юридического лица первое из них считается реорганизованным с момента внесения в Единый государственный регистр юридических лиц и индивидуальных предпринимателей записи о прекращении деятельности присоединенного юридического лица.
5. Законодательными актами могут устанавливаться особенности реорганизации юридических лиц в определенных сферах деятельности.
Статья 54. Правопреемство при реорганизации юридических лиц
1. При слиянии юридических лиц права и обязанности каждого из них переходят к вновь возникшему юридическому лицу в соответствии с передаточным актом.
2. При присоединении юридического лица к другому юридическому лицу к последнему переходят права и обязанности присоединенного юридического лица в соответствии с передаточным актом.
3. При разделении юридического лица его права и обязанности переходят к вновь возникшим юридическим лицам в соответствии с разделительным балансом.
4. При выделении из состава юридического лица одного или нескольких юридических лиц к каждому из них в соответствии с разделительным балансом переходят права и обязанности реорганизованного юридического лица.
5. При преобразовании юридического лица одного вида в юридическое лицо другого вида (изменение организационно-правовой формы) к вновь возникшему юридическому лицу переходят права и обязанности реорганизованного юридического лица в соответствии с передаточным актом, за исключением прав и обязанностей, которые не могут принадлежать возникшему юридическому лицу.
Статья 55. Передаточный акт и разделительный баланс
1. Передаточный акт и разделительный баланс должны содержать положения о правопреемстве по всем обязательствам реорганизованного юридического лица в отношении всех его кредиторов и должников, включая и обязательства, оспариваемые сторонами.
2. Передаточный акт и разделительный баланс утверждаются собственником имущества (учредителями, участниками) юридического лица или органом, принявшими решение о реорганизации юридического лица, если иное не установлено Президентом Республики Беларусь.
Статья 56. Гарантии прав кредиторов юридического лица при его реорганизации
1. Реорганизуемое юридическое лицо или орган, принявший решение о реорганизации юридического лица, обязаны письменно уведомить об этом кредиторов реорганизуемого юридического лица.
2. Кредитор реорганизуемого юридического лица вправе потребовать прекращения или досрочного исполнения обязательства, должником по которому является это юридическое лицо, и возмещения убытков.
3. Если разделительный баланс не дает возможности определить правопреемника реорганизованного юридического лица, вновь возникшие юридические лица несут солидарную ответственность по обязательствам реорганизованного юридического лица перед его кредиторами.
Статья 57. Ликвидация юридического лица
1. Ликвидация юридического лица влечет прекращение его деятельности без перехода прав и обязанностей в порядке правопреемства к другим лицам, если иное не предусмотрено законодательными актами.
2. Юридическое лицо может быть ликвидировано по решению:
1) собственника имущества (учредителей, участников) либо органа юридического лица, уполномоченного на то учредительными документами, в том числе в связи с истечением срока, на который создано это юридическое лицо, достижением цели, ради которой оно создано, нарушением коммерческой организацией порядка формирования уставного фонда, установленного законодательством, признанием судом государственной регистрации юридического лица недействительной;
2) суда в случае:
непринятия решения о ликвидации в соответствии с подпунктом 1 настоящего пункта в связи с истечением срока, на который создано это юридическое лицо, достижением цели, ради которой оно создано, нарушением коммерческой организацией порядка формирования уставного фонда, установленного законодательством, признанием судом государственной регистрации юридического лица недействительной;
осуществления деятельности без специального разрешения (лицензии), либо запрещенной законодательными актами, либо с иными неоднократными или грубыми нарушениями законодательных актов;
экономической несостоятельности (банкротства) юридического лица;
уменьшения стоимости чистых активов коммерческих организаций, для которых законодательством установлены минимальные размеры уставных фондов, по результатам второго и каждого последующего финансового года ниже минимального размера уставного фонда, определенного законодательством;
нарушения установленных законодательством порядка и сроков ликвидации;
в иных случаях, предусмотренных настоящим Кодексом и иными законодательными актами.
При обнаружении оснований для ликвидации юридического лица, предусмотренных абзацами вторым, третьим, пятым и шестым части первой настоящего подпункта, уполномоченные государственные органы в пределах своей компетенции обращаются в суд с иском о ликвидации такого юридического лица, если иное не установлено законодательными актами.
При обнаружении основания для ликвидации юридического лица, предусмотренного абзацем шестым части первой настоящего подпункта, кредиторы ликвидируемого юридического лица вправе обратиться в суд с иском о ликвидации такого юридического лица;
3) иных органов в случаях, предусмотренных законодательными актами.
3. Решением суда о ликвидации юридического лица на собственника его имущества (учредителей, участников) либо орган, уполномоченный на ликвидацию юридического лица его учредительными документами, могут быть возложены обязанности по осуществлению ликвидации юридического лица.
4. Юридическое лицо, являющееся коммерческой организацией либо действующее в форме потребительского кооператива, благотворительного или иного фонда, ликвидируется в соответствии со статьей 61 настоящего Кодекса вследствие признания его экономически несостоятельным (банкротом).
Если стоимость имущества такого юридического лица недостаточна для удовлетворения требований кредиторов, оно может быть ликвидировано только в порядке, установленном статьей 61 настоящего Кодекса.
Положения о ликвидации юридических лиц вследствие экономической несостоятельности (банкротства) не распространяются на казенные предприятия.
5. В случаях, установленных законодательством, ликвидация юридических лиц может быть осуществлена лишь с согласия уполномоченных государственных органов.
6. Законодательными актами могут устанавливаться особенности ликвидации юридических лиц в определенных сферах деятельности.
Статья 58. Обязанности лица, принявшего решение о ликвидации юридического лица
1. Собственник имущества (учредители, участники) либо орган юридического лица, уполномоченный учредительными документами, принявшие решение о ликвидации юридического лица, назначают ликвидационную комиссию (ликвидатора), распределяют обязанности между председателем и членами ликвидационной комиссии (в случае назначения ликвидационной комиссии), устанавливают порядок и сроки ликвидации, если иное не установлено актами законодательства. Законодательными актами могут устанавливаться максимальные (предельные) сроки ликвидации юридического лица.
2. При наличии у ликвидируемого юридического лица задолженности перед кредиторами председателем ликвидационной комиссии (ликвидатором) назначается лицо, соответствующее установленным законодательством требованиям и не являющееся собственником имущества (учредителем, участником), руководителем этого юридического лица.
3. Со дня назначения ликвидационной комиссии (ликвидатора) к ней переходят полномочия по управлению делами юридического лица. Ликвидационная комиссия (ликвидатор) от имени ликвидируемого юридического лица выступает в суде.
Статья 59. Порядок ликвидации юридического лица
1. Председатель ликвидационной комиссии (ликвидатор) в течение десяти рабочих дней после даты принятия решения о ликвидации юридического лица обязан уведомить в письменной форме об этом регистрирующий орган для включения в Единый государственный регистр юридических лиц и индивидуальных предпринимателей сведений о том, что юридическое лицо находится в процессе ликвидации.
В случаях и порядке, установленных законодательством, сведения о том, что юридическое лицо находится в процессе ликвидации, о порядке и сроке заявления требований его кредиторами размещаются в глобальной компьютерной сети Интернет с последующим опубликованием в печатных средствах массовой информации. При этом срок для заявления требований кредиторами ликвидируемого юридического лица не может быть менее двух месяцев с даты размещения сведений о том, что юридическое лицо находится в процессе ликвидации, в глобальной компьютерной сети Интернет, если иной момент начала течения указанного срока не установлен законодательными актами.
Ликвидационная комиссия (ликвидатор) принимает все возможные меры к выявлению кредиторов и получению дебиторской задолженности, а также письменно уведомляет кредиторов о ликвидации юридического лица.
Ликвидационная комиссия (ликвидатор) устанавливает размер требований кредиторов первой и второй очереди, установленных статьей 60 настоящего Кодекса, на основании данных бухгалтерского учета и отчетности ликвидируемого юридического лица, а также иных документов, подтверждающих наличие задолженности перед указанными кредиторами.
Осуществление операций по счетам юридического лица, совершение им сделок, не связанных с ликвидацией, запрещаются.
2. После окончания срока для предъявления требований кредиторами ликвидационная комиссия (ликвидатор) составляет промежуточный ликвидационный баланс, который содержит сведения о составе имущества ликвидируемого юридического лица, перечне предъявленных кредиторами требований, а также о результатах их рассмотрения.
Промежуточный ликвидационный баланс утверждается собственником имущества (учредителями, участниками) юридического лица или органом, принявшими решение о ликвидации юридического лица, если иное не установлено законодательными актами.
3. Если имеющиеся у ликвидируемого юридического лица (кроме учреждений) денежные средства недостаточны для удовлетворения требований кредиторов, ликвидационная комиссия (ликвидатор) осуществляет продажу имущества юридического лица с публичных торгов в порядке, установленном актами законодательства.
4. Выплата денежных сумм кредиторам ликвидируемого юридического лица производится ликвидационной комиссией (ликвидатором) в порядке очередности, установленной статьей 60 настоящего Кодекса, в соответствии с промежуточным ликвидационным балансом начиная со дня его утверждения, за исключением кредиторов четвертой очереди, выплаты которым производятся по истечении месяца со дня утверждения промежуточного ликвидационного баланса.
5. После завершения расчетов с кредиторами ликвидационная комиссия (ликвидатор) составляет ликвидационный баланс, который утверждается собственником имущества (учредителями, участниками) юридического лица или органом, принявшим решение о ликвидации юридического лица, если иное не установлено законодательными актами.
6. При недостаточности у ликвидируемого казенного предприятия имущества, а у ликвидируемого учреждения – денежных средств для удовлетворения требований кредиторов последние вправе
обратиться в суд с иском об удовлетворении оставшейся части требований за счет собственника имущества этого предприятия или учреждения.
7. Оставшееся после удовлетворения требований кредиторов имущество юридического лица передается собственнику его имущества (учредителям, участникам), имеющему (имеющим) вещные права на это имущество или обязательственные права в отношении этого юридического лица, если иное не предусмотрено законодательными актами или учредительными документами юридического лица.
8. Ликвидация юридического лица считается завершенной, а юридическое лицо – ликвидированным с даты принятия регистрирующим органом решения о внесении записи в Единый государственный регистр юридических лиц и индивидуальных предпринимателей об исключении юридического лица из этого регистра.
Статья 60. Удовлетворение требований кредиторов
1. При ликвидации юридического лица требования его кредиторов удовлетворяются в следующей очередности:
1) в первую очередь удовлетворяются требования граждан, перед которыми ликвидируемое юридическое лицо несет ответственность за причинение вреда жизни или здоровью путем капитализации соответствующих повременных платежей;
2) во вторую очередь производятся расчеты по выплате выходных пособий, вознаграждений по авторским договорам, оплате труда лиц, работающих по трудовым и (или) гражданско-правовым договорам;
3) в третью очередь погашается задолженность по платежам в бюджет и государственные внебюджетные фонды, а также удовлетворяются требования кредиторов по обязательствам, обеспеченным залогом имущества ликвидируемого юридического лица, за счет и в пределах средств, полученных от реализации заложенного имущества;
4) в четвертую очередь производятся расчеты с другими кредиторами ликвидируемого юридического лица.
Очередность удовлетворения требований кредиторов при ликвидации банков, небанковских кредитно-финансовых организаций и страховых организаций определяется с учетом особенностей, предусмотренных законодательством.
Удовлетворение требований кредиторов при ликвидации юридического лица вследствие экономической несостоятельности (банкротства) производится в порядке, установленном законодательством об экономической несостоятельности (банкротстве).
2. Требования каждой следующей очереди удовлетворяются после полного удовлетворения требований предыдущей очереди.
3. При недостаточности имущества ликвидируемого юридического лица это имущество распределяется между кредиторами соответствующей очереди пропорционально суммам требований, подлежащих удовлетворению, если иное не установлено законодательными актами.
4. В случае отказа ликвидационной комиссии (ликвидатора) в удовлетворении требований кредитора либо уклонения от их рассмотрения кредитор вправе до утверждения ликвидационного баланса юридического лица обратиться в суд с иском к ликвидируемому юридическому лицу. По решению суда требования кредитора могут быть удовлетворены за счет оставшегося имущества ликвидированного юридического лица.
5. Требования кредитора, заявленные после истечения срока, установленного ликвидационной комиссией (ликвидатором) для их предъявления, удовлетворяются из имущества должника, оставшегося после удовлетворения требований кредиторов, заявленных в срок.
6. Требования кредиторов, не удовлетворенные из-за недостаточности имущества ликвидируемого юридического лица, считаются погашенными, за исключением случая, предусмотренного статьей 62 настоящего Кодекса. Погашенными считаются также требования кредиторов, не признанные ликвидационной комиссией (ликвидатором), если кредитор не обращался с иском в суд, а также требования, в удовлетворении которых решением суда кредитору отказано.
Статья 61. Экономическая несостоятельность (банкротство) юридического лица
1. Юридическое лицо, являющееся коммерческой организацией, за исключением казенного предприятия, а также юридическое лицо, действующее в форме потребительского кооператива либо благотворительного или иного фонда, в судебном порядке может быть признано экономически несостоятельным (банкротом), если оно не в состоянии удовлетворить требования кредиторов.
Признание юридического лица экономически несостоятельным (банкротом) влечет его санацию, а при невозможности или отсутствии оснований продолжения деятельности – ликвидацию.
2. Основания признания судом юридического лица экономически несостоятельным (банкротом), порядок его санации или ликвидации устанавливаются законодательством об экономической несостоятельности (банкротстве).
Статья 62. Обращение взыскания на имущество, принадлежавшее юридическому лицу, после ликвидации этого лица
В случае, если после ликвидации юридического лица будет доказано, что оно в целях избежания ответственности перед своими кредиторами передало другому лицу или иным образом намеренно скрыло хотя бы часть своего имущества, кредиторы, не получившие полного удовлетворения своих требований в рамках ликвидационного производства, вправе обратить взыскание на это имущество в непогашенной части долга. При этом соответственно применяются правила статьи 284 настоящего Кодекса. Лицо, которому было передано имущество, считается недобросовестным, если оно знало или должно было знать о намерении юридического лица скрыть это имущество от кредиторов.
§ 2. Хозяйственные товарищества и общества
1. Общие положения
Статья 63. Основные положения о хозяйственных товариществах и обществах
1. Хозяйственными товариществами и обществами признаются коммерческие организации с разделенным на доли (акции) учредителей (участников) уставным фондом. Имущество, созданное за счет вкладов учредителей (участников), а также произведенное и приобретенное хозяйственным товариществом или обществом в процессе его деятельности, принадлежит ему на праве собственности.
Хозяйственное общество может быть учреждено одним лицом или может состоять из одного участника. Особенности правового положения, создания, деятельности, реорганизации и ликвидации хозяйственного общества, состоящего из одного участника, определяются законодательством о хозяйственных обществах.
2. Хозяйственные товарищества могут создаваться в форме полного товарищества и коммандитного товарищества.
3. Хозяйственные общества могут создаваться в форме акционерного общества, общества с ограниченной ответственностью или общества с дополнительной ответственностью.
4. Участниками полных товариществ и полными товарищами в коммандитных товариществах могут быть индивидуальные предприниматели и (или) коммерческие организации.
Участниками хозяйственных обществ и вкладчиками в коммандитных товариществах могут быть граждане и (или) юридические лица.
Государственные органы и органы местного управления и самоуправления не вправе выступать участниками хозяйственных обществ и вкладчиками в коммандитных товариществах, если иное не установлено законодательством.
Унитарные предприятия, государственные объединения, а также финансируемые собственниками учреждения могут быть участниками хозяйственных обществ и вкладчиками в коммандитных товариществах с разрешения собственника (уполномоченного собственником органа), если иное не установлено законодательными актами.
Законом может быть запрещено или ограничено участие отдельных категорий граждан в хозяйственных товариществах и обществах.
5. Хозяйственные товарищества и общества могут быть учредителями (участниками) других хозяйственных товариществ и обществ, за исключением случаев, предусмотренных настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства.
6. Оценка стоимости неденежного вклада участника хозяйственного общества производится по соглашению между учредителями (участниками) общества и в случаях, предусмотренных законодательством, подлежит экспертизе достоверности такой оценки.
7. Исключен.
Статья 64. Права и обязанности участников хозяйственного товарищества или общества
1. Участники хозяйственного товарищества или общества вправе:
1) участвовать в управлении делами товарищества или общества, за исключением случаев, предусмотренных пунктом 2 статьи 83 настоящего Кодекса и законодательными актами;
2) получать информацию о деятельности товарищества или общества и знакомиться с его документацией в объеме и порядке, установленных учредительными документами;
3) принимать участие в распределении прибыли;
4) получать в случае ликвидации товарищества или общества часть имущества, оставшегося после расчетов с кредиторами, или его стоимость.
Участники хозяйственного товарищества или общества могут иметь и другие права, предусмотренные законодательством о хозяйственных товариществах и обществах, учредительными документами товарищества или общества.
2. В случае выхода и исключения участника хозяйственного товарищества или общества из состава участников, кроме участника акционерного общества, ему выплачивается стоимость части чистых активов хозяйственного товарищества или общества, соответствующая доле этого участника в
уставном фонде, если иное не предусмотрено учредительными документами, а также приходящаяся на его долю часть прибыли, полученной хозяйственным товариществом или обществом с момента выбытия этого участника до момента расчета. По соглашению выбывающего участника с оставшимися участниками хозяйственного товарищества или общества выплата ему стоимости чистых активов может быть заменена выдачей имущества в натуре.
Причитающаяся выходящему (исключаемому) участнику часть чистых активов хозяйственного товарищества или общества или ее стоимость определяются по бухгалтерскому балансу (книге учета доходов и расходов организаций и индивидуальных предпринимателей, применяющих упрощенную систему налогообложения), составляемому на момент его выбытия, а причитающаяся ему часть прибыли – на момент расчета.
Выплата стоимости доли или выдача другого имущества выходящему (исключаемому) участнику производится по окончании финансового года и после утверждения отчета за год, в котором он вышел или исключен из хозяйственного товарищества или общества, в срок до 12 месяцев со дня подачи заявления о выходе или принятии решения об исключении, если иное не предусмотрено в учредительных документах.
3. Участники хозяйственного товарищества или общества обязаны:
1) вносить вклады в порядке, размерах, способами и в сроки, предусмотренные законодательными актами и учредительными документами;
2) не разглашать конфиденциальную информацию о деятельности товарищества или общества, полученную в связи с участием в хозяйственном товариществе или обществе;
3) выполнять иные обязанности, возложенные на них законодательными актами.
Участники хозяйственного товарищества или общества могут нести и другие обязанности, предусмотренные его учредительными документами.
Статья 65. Преобразование хозяйственных товариществ и обществ
1. Хозяйственные товарищества и общества одной формы или одного вида могут преобразовываться в хозяйственные общества другой формы или другого вида либо в хозяйственные товарищества, производственные кооперативы или унитарные предприятия по решению общего собрания участников в случаях и порядке, установленных законодательными актами, за исключением хозяйственных обществ, состоящих из одного участника, которые могут быть преобразованы в хозяйственные общества другой формы или другого вида либо в унитарные предприятия.
2. При преобразовании товарищества в общество каждый полный товарищ, ставший участником (акционером) общества, в течение двух лет несет субсидиарную ответственность всем своим имуществом по обязательствам, перешедшим к обществу от товарищества. Отчуждение бывшим товарищем принадлежавших ему долей (акций) не освобождает его от такой ответственности. Правила, изложенные в настоящем пункте, соответственно применяются при преобразовании товарищества в производственный кооператив и унитарное предприятие.
2. Полное товарищество
Статья 66. Основные положения о полном товариществе
1. Полным признается товарищество, участники которого (полные товарищи) в соответствии с заключенным между ними договором занимаются предпринимательской деятельностью от имени
товарищества и солидарно друг с другом несут субсидиарную ответственность своим имуществом по обязательствам товарищества.
2. Лицо может быть участником только одного полного товарищества.
3. Фирменное наименование полного товарищества должно содержать имена (наименования) всех его участников, а также слова «полное товарищество» либо имя (наименование) одного или нескольких участников с добавлением слов «и компания» и «полное товарищество».
4. Исключен.
Статья 67. Учредительный договор полного товарищества
1. Полное товарищество создается и действует на основании учредительного договора. Учредительный договор подписывается всеми его участниками.
2. Учредительный договор полного товарищества должен содержать помимо сведений, указанных в пункте 2 статьи 48 настоящего Кодекса, условия о размере и составе уставного фонда товарищества; о размере и порядке изменения долей каждого из участников в уставном фонде; о размере, составе, сроках и порядке внесения ими вкладов; об ответственности участников за нарушение обязанностей по внесению вкладов.
Статья 68. Управление в полном товариществе
1. Управление деятельностью полного товарищества осуществляется по общему согласию всех участников. Учредительным договором товарищества могут быть предусмотрены случаи, когда решение принимается большинством голосов участников.
2. Каждый участник полного товарищества имеет один голос, если учредительным договором не предусмотрен иной порядок определения количества голосов его участников.
3. Каждый участник товарищества независимо от того, уполномочен ли он вести общие дела, вправе лично знакомиться со всей документацией по ведению дел товарищества. Отказ от этого права или его ограничение, в том числе по соглашению участников товарищества, ничтожны.
Статья 69. Ведение дел полного товарищества
1. Каждый участник полного товарищества вправе действовать от имени товарищества, если учредительным договором не установлено, что все его участники ведут дела совместно либо ведение дел поручено отдельным участникам.
При совместном ведении дел товарищества его участниками для совершения каждой сделки требуется согласие всех участников товарищества.
Если ведение дел товарищества поручается его участниками одному или нескольким из них, остальные участники для совершения сделок от имени товарищества должны иметь доверенность от участника (участников), на которого возложено ведение дел товарищества.
В отношении с третьими лицами товарищество не вправе ссылаться на положения учредительного договора, ограничивающие полномочия участников товарищества, за исключением случаев, когда товарищество докажет, что третье лицо в момент совершения сделки знало или заведомо должно было знать об отсутствии у участника товарищества права действовать от имени товарищества.
2. Полномочия на ведение дел товарищества, предоставленные одному или нескольким участникам, могут быть прекращены судом по требованию одного или нескольких других участников товарищества при наличии к тому серьезных оснований, в частности вследствие
грубого нарушения уполномоченным лицом (лицами) своих обязанностей или обнаружившейся неспособности его к разумному ведению дел. На основании судебного решения в учредительный договор товарищества вносятся необходимые изменения.
Статья 70. Обязанности участника полного товарищества
1. Участник полного товарищества обязан участвовать в его деятельности в соответствии с условиями учредительного договора.
2. Исключен.
3. Участник полного товарищества не вправе без согласия остальных участников совершать от своего имени в своих интересах или в интересах третьих лиц сделки, однородные с теми, которые составляют предмет деятельности товарищества.
При нарушении этого правила товарищество вправе по своему выбору потребовать от такого участника возмещения причиненных товариществу убытков либо передачи товариществу всей приобретенной по таким сделкам выгоды.
Статья 71. Распределение прибыли и убытков полного товарищества
1. Прибыль и убытки полного товарищества распределяются между его участниками пропорционально их долям в уставном фонде, если иное не предусмотрено учредительным договором или иным соглашением участников. Не допускается соглашение об устранении кого- либо из участников товарищества от участия в прибыли или убытках.
2. Если вследствие понесенных товариществом убытков стоимость его чистых активов, определяемых в порядке, установленном законодательством, станет меньше размера его уставного фонда, полученная товариществом прибыль не распределяется между участниками до тех пор, пока стоимость чистых активов не превысит размер уставного фонда.
Статья 72. Ответственность участников полного товарищества по его обязательствам
1. Участники полного товарищества солидарно между собой несут субсидиарную ответственность своим имуществом по обязательствам товарищества.
2. Участник полного товарищества, не являющийся его учредителем, отвечает наравне с другими участниками и по обязательствам, возникшим до его вступления в товарищество.
3. Участник, выбывший из товарищества, отвечает по обязательствам товарищества, возникшим до момента его выбытия, наравне с оставшимися участниками в течение двух лет со дня утверждения отчета о деятельности товарищества за год, в котором он выбыл из товарищества.
4. Соглашение участников товарищества об ограничении или устранении ответственности, предусмотренной настоящей статьей, ничтожно.
Статья 73. Изменение состава участников полного товарищества
1. Изменение состава участников полного товарищества не влечет за собой ликвидацию полного товарищества, если иное не установлено учредительным договором полного товарищества.
2. Изменение состава участников полного товарищества может осуществляться вследствие:
1) выхода участника;
2) исключения участника;
3) уступки доли участника иному лицу;
4) принятия нового участника;
5) признания участника банкротом;
6) смерти участника, объявления его умершим либо признания его безвестно отсутствующим, недееспособным или ограниченно дееспособным, а также ликвидации участника – юридического лица.
3. Если один из участников выбыл из полного товарищества, доли оставшихся участников в уставном фонде полного товарищества изменяются пропорционально размерам их вкладов в уставный фонд, если иное не предусмотрено учредительным договором или иным соглашением участников.
Статья 74. Выход участника из полного товарищества
1. Участник полного товарищества, созданного на неопределенный срок, вправе выйти из него, заявив об этом в установленный учредительным договором срок, но не менее чем за шесть месяцев.
Досрочный отказ от участия в полном товариществе, учрежденном на определенный срок, допускается в случаях, указанных в учредительном договоре, а при отсутствии такого указания – лишь по уважительной причине. При наличии спора вопрос о выходе разрешается в судебном порядке.
2. Соглашение между участниками полного товарищества об отказе от права выйти из полного товарищества ничтожно.
Статья 75. Исключение участника полного товарищества
1. В случае неисполнения или ненадлежащего исполнения участником полного товарищества своих обязанностей участники полного товарищества вправе требовать в судебном порядке исключения такого участника из полного товарищества.
2. Исключение участника из полного товарищества происходит также в случае обращения взыскания на всю долю участника полного товарищества. В этом случае судебного решения об исключении не требуется.
Статья 76. Уступка доли участника полного товарищества иному лицу
1. Участник полного товарищества вправе с согласия остальных его участников передать свою долю в уставном фонде или ее часть другому участнику полного товарищества либо третьему лицу.
При этом иные участники полного товарищества в порядке, определяемом учредительным договором, имеют право преимущественной покупки доли (ее части) по сравнению с иными лицами.
2. При передаче доли (части доли) иному лицу к нему переходят полностью (или в соответствующей части) обязательства, принадлежавшие участнику, передавшему долю (часть доли).
Передача всей доли иному лицу участником товарищества прекращает его участие в товариществе.
Статья 77. Принятие нового участника полного товарищества
Лицо вправе стать участником полного товарищества при условии согласия на это иных участников полного товарищества и внесения вклада в уставный фонд полного товарищества в соответствии с учредительным договором полного товарищества.
Статья 78. Изменение состава полного товарищества вследствие смерти участника, объявления его умершим, признания безвестно отсутствующим, недееспособным или ограниченно дееспособным, а также ликвидации участника – юридического лица
1. В случае смерти участника полного товарищества либо объявления его умершим его наследник вправе (но не обязан) вступить в полное товарищество с согласия других участников.
Расчеты с наследником, не вступившим в полное товарищество, производятся в соответствии с пунктом 2 статьи 64 настоящего Кодекса.
2. В случае ликвидации юридического лица – участника полного товарищества, признания участника безвестно отсутствующим, недееспособным или ограниченно дееспособным его доля в полном товариществе выделяется в соответствии с пунктом 2 статьи 64 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 79. Обращение взыскания на долю участника в полном товариществе
Обращение взыскания на долю участника в полном товариществе по собственным долгам участника допускается лишь при недостатке иного его имущества для покрытия долгов. Кредиторы такого участника вправе потребовать от полного товарищества выдела части имущества полного товарищества, соответствующей доле должника в уставном фонде, с целью обращения взыскания на это имущество.
Подлежащая выделу часть имущества полного товарищества или его стоимость определяется по бухгалтерскому балансу (книге учета доходов и расходов организаций и индивидуальных предпринимателей, применяющих упрощенную систему налогообложения), составленному на момент предъявления кредиторами требования о выделе.
Статья 80. Ликвидация полного товарищества
Полное товарищество ликвидируется по основаниям, указанным в статье 57 настоящего Кодекса, а также в случае, когда в товариществе остается единственный участник. Последний вправе в течение трех месяцев со дня, когда он стал единственным участником товарищества, преобразовать такое товарищество в унитарное предприятие в порядке, установленном законодательством.
3. Коммандитное товарищество
Статья 81. Основные положения о коммандитном товариществе
1. Коммандитным товариществом признается товарищество, в котором наряду с участниками, осуществляющими от имени товарищества предпринимательскую деятельность и отвечающими по обязательствам товарищества всем своим имуществом (полными товарищами), имеется один или несколько участников (вкладчиков, коммандитов), которые несут риск убытков, связанных с деятельностью товарищества, в пределах сумм внесенных ими вкладов и не принимают участия в осуществлении товариществом предпринимательской деятельности.
2. Положение полных товарищей, участвующих в коммандитном товариществе, и их ответственность по обязательствам товарищества определяются законодательством об участниках полного товарищества.
3. Лицо может быть полным товарищем только в одном коммандитном товариществе.
Участник полного товарищества не может быть полным товарищем в коммандитном товариществе.
Полный товарищ в коммандитном товариществе не может быть участником полного товарищества.
4. Фирменное наименование коммандитного товарищества должно содержать либо имена (наименования) всех полных товарищей и слова «коммандитное товарищество», либо имя (наименование) не менее чем одного полного товарища с добавлением слов «и компания» и «коммандитное товарищество». Если в фирменное наименование коммандитного товарищества включено с его согласия имя вкладчика, такой вкладчик становится полным товарищем.
5. К коммандитному товариществу применяются правила настоящего Кодекса о полном товариществе, поскольку это не противоречит законодательству о коммандитном товариществе.
Статья 82. Учредительный договор коммандитного товарищества
1. Коммандитное товарищество создается и действует на основании учредительного договора. Учредительный договор подписывается всеми полными товарищами.
2. Учредительный договор коммандитного товарищества должен содержать помимо сведений, указанных в пункте 2 статьи 48 настоящего Кодекса, условия о размере и составе уставного фонда товарищества; о размере и порядке изменения долей каждого из полных товарищей в уставном фонде; о размере, составе, сроках и порядке внесения ими вкладов, их ответственности за нарушение обязанностей по внесению вкладов; о совокупном размере вкладов, вносимых вкладчиками.
Статья 83. Управление в коммандитном товариществе и ведение его дел
1. Управление деятельностью коммандитного товарищества осуществляется полными товарищами. Порядок управления и ведения дел такого товарищества его полными товарищами устанавливается ими в соответствии с законодательством о полном товариществе.
2. Вкладчики не вправе участвовать в управлении делами коммандитного товарищества. Они могут выступать от его имени не иначе как по доверенности. Они не вправе оспаривать действия полных товарищей по управлению и ведению дел товарищества.
Статья 84. Права и обязанности вкладчика коммандитного товарищества
1. Вкладчик коммандитного товарищества обязан внести вклад в уставный фонд. Внесение вклада удостоверяется свидетельством об участии, выдаваемым вкладчику товариществом.
2. Вкладчик коммандитного товарищества имеет право:
1) получать часть прибыли товарищества, причитающуюся на его долю в уставном фонде, в порядке, предусмотренном учредительным договором;
2) знакомиться с годовыми отчетами и годовой бухгалтерской (финансовой) отчетностью товарищества (книгой учета доходов и расходов организаций и индивидуальных предпринимателей, применяющих упрощенную систему налогообложения);
3) по окончании финансового года выйти из товарищества и получить свой вклад в порядке, предусмотренном учредительным договором;
4) передать свою долю в уставном фонде или ее часть другому вкладчику или третьему лицу. Вкладчики пользуются преимущественным перед третьими лицами правом покупки доли (ее части) применительно к условиям и порядку, предусмотренным пунктом 2 статьи 92 настоящего Кодекса. Передача всей доли иному лицу вкладчиком прекращает его участие в товариществе.
Учредительным договором коммандитного товарищества могут предусматриваться и иные права вкладчика.
Статья 85. Ликвидация коммандитного товарищества
1. Коммандитное товарищество ликвидируется при выбытии всех участвовавших в нем вкладчиков. Однако полные товарищи вправе вместо ликвидации преобразовать коммандитное товарищество в полное товарищество, а также в унитарное предприятие в случаях, когда в составе товарищества остался один участник.
Коммандитное товарищество ликвидируется также по основаниям ликвидации полного товарищества (статья 80). Однако коммандитное товарищество сохраняется, если в нем остаются по крайней мере один полный товарищ и один вкладчик.
2. При ликвидации коммандитного товарищества, в том числе в случае экономической несостоятельности (банкротства), вкладчики имеют преимущественное перед полными товарищами право на получение вкладов из имущества товарищества, оставшегося после удовлетворения требований его кредиторов.
Оставшееся после этого имущество товарищества распределяется между полными товарищами и вкладчиками пропорционально их долям в уставном фонде, если иной порядок не установлен учредительным договором или соглашением полных товарищей и вкладчиков.
4. Общество с ограниченной ответственностью
Статья 86. Основные положения об обществе с ограниченной ответственностью
1. Обществом с ограниченной ответственностью признается общество, уставный фонд которого разделен на доли определенных уставом размеров. Участники общества с ограниченной ответственностью не отвечают по его обязательствам и несут риск убытков, связанных с деятельностью общества, в пределах стоимости внесенных ими вкладов.
Участники общества, внесшие вклады не полностью, несут солидарную ответственность по его обязательствам в пределах стоимости неоплаченной части вклада каждого из участников.
2. Фирменное наименование общества с ограниченной ответственностью должно содержать наименование общества и слова «с ограниченной ответственностью».
3. Правовое положение общества с ограниченной ответственностью, права и обязанности его участников определяются законодательством об обществах с ограниченной ответственностью.
Статья 87. Участники общества с ограниченной ответственностью
1. Число участников общества с ограниченной ответственностью не должно превышать предела, установленного законодательными актами. В противном случае общество с ограниченной ответственностью подлежит реорганизации в течение года, а по истечении этого срока – ликвидации в судебном порядке, если число его участников не уменьшится до установленного законодательными актами предела.
2. Общество с ограниченной ответственностью может быть учреждено одним лицом или может состоять из одного участника, в том числе при создании в результате реорганизации юридического лица.
Статья 88. Учредительный документ общества с ограниченной ответственностью
1. Учредительным документом общества с ограниченной ответственностью является устав, утвержденный его учредителями.
2. Устав общества с ограниченной ответственностью должен содержать помимо сведений, указанных в пункте 2 статьи 48 настоящего Кодекса, условия о размере уставного фонда общества; о размере долей каждого из участников; о размере и составе вкладов участников; о составе и компетенции органов управления обществом и порядке принятия ими решений, в том числе по вопросам, решения по которым принимаются единогласно или квалифицированным большинством голосов, а также иные сведения, предусмотренные законодательством об обществах с ограниченной ответственностью.
Статья 89. Уставный фонд общества с ограниченной ответственностью
1. Уставный фонд общества с ограниченной ответственностью составляется из стоимости вкладов его участников.
Уставный фонд определяет минимальный размер имущества общества, гарантирующего интересы его кредиторов.
2. Не допускается освобождение участника общества с ограниченной ответственностью от обязанности внесения вклада в уставный фонд общества, в том числе путем зачета требований к обществу, за исключением случаев, установленных законодательными актами.
3. Исключен.
4. Исключен.
5. Уменьшение уставного фонда общества с ограниченной ответственностью допускается после уведомления всех его кредиторов. Последние вправе в этом случае потребовать досрочного прекращения или исполнения соответствующих обязательств общества и возмещения им убытков.
6. Исключен.
Статья 90. Управление в обществе с ограниченной ответственностью
1. Высшим органом управления обществом с ограниченной ответственностью является общее собрание его участников.
В обществе с ограниченной ответственностью создается исполнительный орган (коллегиальный и (или) единоличный), осуществляющий текущее руководство его деятельностью и подотчетный общему собранию его участников. Единоличный орган управления обществом может быть избран также и не из числа его участников.
В обществе с ограниченной ответственностью по решению его учредителей (участников) в соответствии с уставом может создаваться совет директоров (наблюдательный совет).
2. Компетенция органов управления обществом, а также порядок принятия ими решений и выступления от имени общества определяются в соответствии с законодательством об обществах с ограниченной ответственностью и уставом общества.
3. К исключительной компетенции общего собрания участников общества с ограниченной ответственностью относятся:
1) изменение устава общества и размера его уставного фонда;
2) образование исполнительных органов общества и досрочное прекращение их полномочий;
3) утверждение годовых отчетов и годовой бухгалтерской (финансовой) отчетности общества (данных книги учета доходов и расходов организаций и индивидуальных предпринимателей, применяющих упрощенную систему налогообложения) и распределение его прибыли и убытков;
4) решение о реорганизации или ликвидации общества;
5) избрание ревизионной комиссии (ревизора) общества.
Законодательством об обществах с ограниченной ответственностью и уставом общества с ограниченной ответственностью к исключительной компетенции общего собрания может быть также отнесено решение иных вопросов.
Вопросы, отнесенные к исключительной компетенции общего собрания участников общества, не могут быть переданы им на решение исполнительного органа общества.
4. Для проведения аудита бухгалтерской (финансовой) отчетности общества с ограниченной ответственностью, оказания иных аудиторских услуг, в том числе в отношении филиалов и представительств общества с ограниченной ответственностью, оно вправе, а в случаях и порядке, установленных законодательными актами, обязано привлекать аудиторскую организацию, аудитора, осуществляющего деятельность в качестве индивидуального предпринимателя (далее – аудитор – индивидуальный предприниматель). Аудит бухгалтерской (финансовой) отчетности общества (данных книги учета доходов и расходов организаций и индивидуальных предпринимателей, применяющих упрощенную систему налогообложения) может быть также проведен по требованию любого из его участников.
5. Опубликование обществом годовой бухгалтерской (финансовой) отчетности осуществляется в случаях, предусмотренных законодательством.
Статья 91. Реорганизация и ликвидация общества с ограниченной ответственностью
1. Общество с ограниченной ответственностью может быть реорганизовано или ликвидировано добровольно по единогласному решению его участников.
Иные основания реорганизации и ликвидации общества, а также порядок его реорганизации и ликвидации определяются законодательными актами.
2. Общество с ограниченной ответственностью вправе преобразоваться в акционерное общество, общество с дополнительной ответственностью, хозяйственное товарищество, производственный кооператив или унитарное предприятие.
Статья 92. Переход доли в уставном фонде общества с ограниченной ответственностью к другому лицу
1. Участник общества с ограниченной ответственностью вправе продать или иным образом произвести отчуждение своей доли (части доли) в уставном фонде общества одному или нескольким участникам этого общества или самому обществу.
2. Отчуждение участником общества своей доли (части доли) третьим лицам допускается, если иное не предусмотрено законодательными актами или уставом общества.
Участники общества пользуются преимущественным правом покупки доли (части доли) участника пропорционально размерам своих долей, если уставом общества не предусмотрен иной порядок осуществления этого права либо если иное не установлено законами или актами Президента Республики Беларусь. В случае, если участники общества откажутся от своего преимущественного права либо не воспользуются своим преимущественным правом в срок, определенный уставом общества, но не более тридцати дней со дня направления участником извещения о ее продаже, доля
(часть доли) участника может быть отчуждена самому обществу. В случае, если участники общества не воспользовались преимущественным правом покупки доли (части доли) участника в уставном фонде общества либо само общество не воспользовалось правом покупки доли (части доли) участника в уставном фонде общества, доля (часть доли) участника в уставном фонде общества может быть отчуждена третьему лицу.
3. Если в соответствии с уставом общества с ограниченной ответственностью отчуждение доли (части доли) участника третьим лицам невозможно, а другие участники общества от ее покупки отказываются, общество обязано выплатить участнику ее действительную стоимость либо выдать ему в натуре имущество, соответствующее такой стоимости.
4. Доля участника общества с ограниченной ответственностью может быть отчуждена до полной ее оплаты лишь в той части, в которой она уже оплачена.
5. В случае приобретения доли (части доли) участника самим обществом с ограниченной ответственностью оно обязано либо распределить выкупленную им за счет собственных средств долю (часть доли) участника между другими участниками пропорционально размерам их долей, либо реализовать ее другим участникам или третьим лицам в сроки и порядке, предусмотренные законодательством об обществах с ограниченной ответственностью и уставом общества, либо уменьшить свой уставный фонд в соответствии с пунктом 5 статьи 89 настоящего Кодекса.
6. Доли в уставном фонде общества с ограниченной ответственностью переходят к наследникам граждан и к правопреемникам юридических лиц, являвшихся участниками общества, если уставом общества не предусмотрено, что такой переход допускается только с согласия остальных участников общества. Отказ в согласии на переход доли влечет обязанность общества выплатить наследникам (правопреемникам) участника ее действительную стоимость или выдать им в натуре имущество на такую стоимость в порядке и на условиях, предусмотренных законодательством об обществах с ограниченной ответственностью и уставом общества.
Статья 93. Выход участника общества с ограниченной ответственностью из общества
Участник общества с ограниченной ответственностью вправе в любое время выйти из общества независимо от согласия других его участников.
Выход участников общества с ограниченной ответственностью из общества, в результате которого в обществе не остается ни одного участника, в том числе выход единственного участника общества с ограниченной ответственностью из общества, не допускается.
5. Общество с дополнительной ответственностью
Статья 94. Основные положения об обществе с дополнительной ответственностью
1. Обществом с дополнительной ответственностью признается общество, уставный фонд которого разделен на доли определенных уставом размеров. Участники такого общества солидарно несут субсидиарную ответственность по его обязательствам своим имуществом в пределах, определяемых уставом общества, но не менее размера, установленного законодательными актами. При экономической несостоятельности (банкротстве) одного из участников его ответственность по обязательствам общества распределяется между остальными участниками пропорционально их вкладам, если иной порядок распределения ответственности не предусмотрен уставом общества.
2. Фирменное наименование общества с дополнительной ответственностью должно содержать наименование общества и слова «с дополнительной ответственностью».
3. К обществу с дополнительной ответственностью применяются правила настоящего Кодекса об обществе с ограниченной ответственностью постольку, поскольку иное не предусмотрено
законодательными актами.
Статья 95. Изменение размера дополнительной ответственности
Общество с дополнительной ответственностью вправе после уведомления кредиторов уменьшить, но не менее размера, установленного законодательными актами, или увеличить размер дополнительной ответственности своих участников.
Кредиторы общества с дополнительной ответственностью вправе при уменьшении размера дополнительной ответственности участников общества потребовать досрочного прекращения или исполнения соответствующих обязательств общества и возмещения им убытков.
6. Акционерное общество
Статья 96. Основные положения об акционерном обществе
1. Акционерным обществом признается общество, уставный фонд которого разделен на определенное число акций, имеющих одинаковую номинальную стоимость. Участники акционерного общества (акционеры) не отвечают по его обязательствам и несут риск убытков, связанных с деятельностью общества, в пределах стоимости принадлежащих им акций.
Акционеры, не полностью оплатившие акции, несут солидарную ответственность по обязательствам акционерного общества в пределах неоплаченной части стоимости принадлежащих им акций.
2. Фирменное наименование акционерного общества должно содержать его наименование и указание на то, что общество является акционерным.
3. Правовое положение акционерного общества, права и обязанности акционеров определяются законодательством об акционерных обществах.
Статья 97. Открытые и закрытые акционерные общества
1. Акционерное общество, акции которого могут размещаться и обращаться среди неограниченного круга лиц, является открытым акционерным обществом. Такое акционерное общество вправе проводить открытую подписку на эмитируемые им акции либо открытую продажу акций дополнительного выпуска на условиях, устанавливаемых законодательством о ценных бумагаx, а в случае размещения акций дополнительного выпуска за счет собственного капитала этого общества и (или) средств его акционеров, а также в иных случаях, предусмотренных законодательными актами, – закрытое размещение акций дополнительного выпуска среди акционеров.
Открытое акционерное общество обязано раскрывать информацию об акционерном обществе в объеме и порядке, определенных законодательством о ценных бумагах.
2. Акционерное общество, акции которого размещаются и обращаются только среди акционеров этого общества и (или) определенного в соответствии с законодательством об акционерных обществах ограниченного круга лиц, является закрытым акционерным обществом. Закрытое акционерное общество вправе осуществлять только закрытое (среди ограниченного круга лиц) размещение акций дополнительного выпуска.
3. Число участников закрытого акционерного общества не должно превышать числа, установленного законодательными актами. В противном случае оно подлежит реорганизации в течение года, а по истечении этого срока – ликвидации в судебном порядке, если число участников не уменьшится до установленного законодательными актами предела.
4. Закрытое акционерное общество может, а в случаях, установленных законодательством, обязано раскрывать информацию об акционерном обществе в объеме и порядке, определенных законодательством о ценных бумагах.
5. Акционеры закрытого акционерного общества имеют преимущественное право покупки акций, продаваемых другими акционерами этого общества. Если в результате реализации акционерами преимущественного права акции не могут быть приобретены в предложенном количестве либо никто из акционеров не выразит желания приобрести предложенные к реализации акции, общество вправе само приобрести соответственно невостребованные акционерами акции либо предложенные к реализации акции по согласованной с их владельцем цене и (или) предложить приобрести эти акции третьему лицу по цене не ниже цены, предложенной акционерам закрытого акционерного общества.
Если предложенные к реализации акции не могут быть приобретены в соответствии с частью первой настоящего пункта в полном объеме, с акционером может быть достигнуто соглашение о частичной продаже акционерам, и (или) обществу, и (или) третьему лицу, определенному в соответствии с частью первой настоящего пункта, предложенных к реализации акций. В этом случае акционер может реализовать свое право на частичную продажу акций при условии продажи предложенных к реализации акций всем акционерам, и (или) обществу, и (или) третьему лицу, определенному в соответствии с частью первой настоящего пункта, выразившим желание о частичном приобретении этих акций. Оставшиеся после частичной продажи акции могут быть проданы любому третьему лицу по цене не ниже их продажи акционерам закрытого акционерного общества.
В случае, когда соглашение о частичной продаже акционерам, и (или) обществу, и (или) третьему лицу, определенному в соответствии с частью первой настоящего пункта, предложенных к реализации акций не достигнуто, эти акции могут быть проданы любому третьему лицу по цене не ниже цены, предложенной акционерам закрытого акционерного общества.
Порядок продажи, мены, дарения акционерами закрытого акционерного общества своих акций определяется законодательством об акционерных обществах.
Уставом закрытого акционерного общества либо решением общего собрания акционеров, принятым большинством не менее трех четвертей голосов лиц, принявших участие в этом общем собрании, может быть ограничен круг третьих лиц, которым акционерами этого общества могут быть проданы или отчуждены иным образом, чем продажа, акции этого общества.
6. При залоге акций закрытого акционерного общества и последующем обращении на них взыскания залогодержателем соответственно применяются правила пункта 5 настоящей статьи. Однако залогодержатель вправе вместо отчуждения акций третьему лицу оставить их за собой.
7. Акции закрытого акционерного общества переходят к наследникам гражданина или правопреемникам юридического лица, являвшегося акционером, если уставом общества не предусмотрено, что такой переход допускается только с согласия общества. В последнем случае при отказе в согласии на переход акций они должны быть приобретены другими акционерами или самим обществом в соответствии с правилами пункта 5 настоящей статьи. Однако наследники (правопреемники) вправе вместо отчуждения акций третьим лицам оставить их за собой.
Статья 98. Образование акционерного общества
1. Учредители акционерного общества заключают между собой договор, определяющий порядок осуществления ими совместной деятельности по созданию общества, размер уставного фонда общества, категории эмитируемых акций и порядок размещения, а также иные условия, предусмотренные законодательством об акционерных обществах.
Договор о создании акционерного общества заключается в письменной форме.
2. Учредители акционерного общества несут солидарную ответственность по обязательствам, возникшим до регистрации общества.
Общество принимает на себя ответственность по обязательствам учредителей, связанным с его созданием, в случае последующего одобрения их действий общим собранием акционеров.
3. Учредительным документом акционерного общества является его устав, утвержденный учредителями.
Устав акционерного общества помимо сведений, указанных в пункте 2 статьи 48 настоящего Кодекса, должен содержать сведения о категориях эмитируемых обществом акций, их номинальной стоимости и количестве; о размере уставного фонда общества; о правах акционеров; о составе и компетенции органов управления обществом и порядке принятия решений, в том числе по вопросам, решения по которым принимаются единогласно или квалифицированным большинством голосов. В уставе акционерного общества должны также содержаться иные сведения, если необходимость их включения в устав предусмотрена законодательством об акционерных обществах.
4. Порядок совершения иных действий по созданию акционерного общества, в том числе компетенция учредительного собрания, определяется законодательством об акционерных обществах.
5. Особенности создания акционерных обществ в процессе приватизации государственного имущества определяются законодательством о приватизации.
6. Акционерное общество может быть создано одним лицом или может состоять из одного акционера, в том числе при создании в результате реорганизации юридического лица.
Статья 99. Уставный фонд акционерного общества
1. Уставный фонд акционерного общества составляется из номинальной стоимости акций общества. Уставный фонд общества определяет минимальный размер имущества общества, гарантирующего интересы его кредиторов.
2. Не допускается освобождение акционера от обязанности оплаты акций общества, в том числе освобождение его от этой обязанности путем зачета требований к обществу, за исключением случаев, установленных законодательными актами.
3. Открытая подписка на акции акционерного общества не допускается до полной оплаты уставного фонда. При учреждении акционерного общества все его акции должны быть распределены среди учредителей.
4. Исключен.
5. Законодательными актами или уставом акционерного общества могут быть установлены ограничения суммарной номинальной стоимости или количества простых (обыкновенных) и (или) привилегированных акций, принадлежащих одному акционеру, либо доли принадлежащих ему таких акций в общем объеме уставного фонда акционерного общества.
Статья 100. Увеличение уставного фонда акционерного общества
1. Акционерное общество вправе по решению общего собрания акционеров увеличить уставный фонд путем увеличения номинальной стоимости акций или эмиссии акций дополнительного выпуска.
2. Увеличение уставного фонда акционерного общества допускается после его полной оплаты.
3. В случаях, предусмотренных законодательными актами, уставом общества может быть установлено преимущественное право акционеров, владеющих простыми (обыкновенными) или иными голосующими акциями, на приобретение акций дополнительного выпуска этого общества.
Статья 101. Уменьшение уставного фонда акционерного общества
1. Акционерное общество вправе по решению общего собрания акционеров уменьшить уставный фонд путем уменьшения номинальной стоимости акций либо приобретения части акций в целях сокращения их общего количества.
Уменьшение уставного фонда общества допускается после уведомления всех его кредиторов в порядке, определяемом законодательством об акционерных обществах. При этом кредиторы общества вправе потребовать досрочного прекращения или исполнения соответствующих обязательств общества и возмещения им убытков.
2. Уменьшение уставного фонда акционерного общества путем приобретения этим обществом части акций в целях сокращения их общего количества допускается, если такая возможность предусмотрена уставом этого общества.
Статья 102. Ограничения на эмиссию ценных бумаг и выплату дивидендов акционерного общества
1. Доля привилегированных акций в общем объеме уставного фонда акционерного общества не должна превышать двадцати пяти процентов.
2. Ограничения на эмиссию акционерными обществами облигаций могут быть установлены законодательными актами.
3. Акционерное общество не вправе принимать решения об объявлении и выплате дивидендов, а также выплачивать дивиденды:
1) до полной оплаты всего уставного фонда;
2) если стоимость чистых активов акционерного общества меньше его уставного фонда и резервного фонда либо станет меньше их размера в результате выплаты дивидендов;
3) в иных случаях, предусмотренных законодательными актами.
Статья 103. Управление в акционерном обществе
1. Высшим органом управления в акционерном обществе является общее собрание его акционеров.
К исключительной компетенции общего собрания акционеров относятся:
1) изменение устава общества, в том числе изменение размера его уставного фонда;
2) избрание членов совета директоров (наблюдательного совета) и ревизионной комиссии (ревизора) общества и досрочное прекращение их полномочий;
3) исключен;
4) утверждение годовых отчетов, годовой бухгалтерской (финансовой) отчетности общества (данных книги учета доходов и расходов организаций и индивидуальных предпринимателей, применяющих упрощенную систему налогообложения) и распределение его прибыли и убытков;
5) решение о реорганизации или ликвидации общества.
Законодательными актами и уставом акционерного общества к исключительной компетенции общего собрания акционеров может быть также отнесено решение иных вопросов.
Вопросы, отнесенные законодательными актами и уставом акционерного общества к исключительной компетенции общего собрания акционеров, не могут быть переданы им на решение других органов управления обществом.
2. В обществе с числом акционеров более пятидесяти создается совет директоров (наблюдательный совет).
В случае создания совета директоров (наблюдательного совета) уставом общества в соответствии с законодательством об акционерных обществах должна быть определена его исключительная компетенция. Вопросы, отнесенные уставом к исключительной компетенции совета директоров (наблюдательного совета), не могут быть переданы им на решение исполнительных органов общества.
3. Исполнительный орган общества может быть коллегиальным (правление, дирекция) и (или) единоличным (директор, генеральный директор). Он осуществляет текущее руководство деятельностью общества и подотчетен совету директоров (наблюдательному совету) и общему собранию акционеров.
К компетенции исполнительного органа общества относится решение всех вопросов, не составляющих исключительную компетенцию других органов управления обществом, определенную законодательными актами или уставом общества.
По решению общего собрания акционеров полномочия исполнительного органа общества могут быть переданы по договору другой коммерческой организации или индивидуальному предпринимателю (управляющему).
4. Компетенция органов управления акционерным обществом, а также порядок принятия ими решений и выступления от имени общества определяются в соответствии с законодательством об акционерных обществах и уставом общества.
5. Акционерное общество, обязанное в соответствии с законодательством о ценных бумагах раскрывать информацию об акционерном обществе, должно ежегодно проводить аудит годовой бухгалтерской (финансовой) отчетности.
Аудит бухгалтерской (финансовой) отчетности (данных книги учета доходов и расходов организаций и индивидуальных предпринимателей, применяющих упрощенную систему налогообложения) акционерного общества, в том числе не обязанного раскрывать информацию об акционерном обществе в соответствии с законодательством о ценных бумагах, должен быть проведен в любое время по требованию акционеров, являющихся в совокупности владельцами десяти или более процентов акций этого общества.
Статья 104. Реорганизация и ликвидация акционерного общества
1. Акционерное общество может быть реорганизовано или ликвидировано добровольно по решению общего собрания акционеров.
Иные основания и порядок реорганизации или ликвидации акционерного общества определяются законодательными актами.
2. Акционерное общество вправе преобразоваться в общество с ограниченной ответственностью, общество с дополнительной ответственностью, хозяйственное товарищество, производственный
кооператив или унитарное предприятие.
7. Дочерние и зависимые общества
Статья 105. Дочернее хозяйственное общество
1. Хозяйственное общество признается дочерним, если другое (основное) хозяйственное общество или товарищество в силу преобладающего участия в его уставном фонде, либо в соответствии с заключенным между ними договором, либо иным образом имеет возможность определять решения, принимаемые таким обществом.
2. Дочернее общество не отвечает по долгам основного общества (товарищества).
Основное общество (товарищество), которое имеет право давать дочернему обществу, в том числе по договору с ним, обязательные для него указания, отвечает солидарно с дочерним обществом по сделкам, заключенным последним во исполнение таких указаний.
В случае экономической несостоятельности (банкротства) дочернего общества по вине основного общества (товарищества) последнее несет субсидиарную ответственность по его долгам.
3. Участники (акционеры) дочернего общества вправе требовать возмещения основным обществом (товариществом) убытков, причиненных по его вине дочернему обществу, если иное не установлено законодательством о хозяйственных обществах.
Статья 106. Зависимое хозяйственное общество
1. Хозяйственное общество признается зависимым, если другое хозяйственное общество имеет долю в уставном фонде (акции) этого общества в размере, соответствующем двадцати и более процентам голосов от общего количества голосов, которыми оно может пользоваться на общем собрании участников такого общества.
2. Пределы взаимного участия хозяйственных обществ в уставных фондах друг друга и число голосов, которыми одно из таких обществ может пользоваться на общем собрании участников или акционеров другого общества, определяются законодательными актами.
§ 3. Производственные кооперативы
Статья 107. Понятие производственного кооператива
1. Производственным кооперативом (артелью) признается коммерческая организация, участники которой обязаны внести имущественный паевой взнос, принимать личное трудовое участие в его деятельности и нести субсидиарную ответственность по обязательствам производственного кооператива в равных долях, если иное не определено в уставе, в пределах, установленных уставом, но не меньше величины полученного годового дохода в производственном кооперативе.
2. Фирменное наименование кооператива должно содержать его наименование и слова «производственный кооператив» или слово «артель».
3. Правовое положение производственных кооперативов, права и обязанности их членов определяются в соответствии с законодательством о производственных кооперативах.
Статья 108. Образование производственных кооперативов
1. Учредительным документом производственного кооператива является устав, утверждаемый общим собранием его членов.
2. Устав кооператива должен содержать помимо сведений, указанных в пункте 2 статьи 48 настоящего Кодекса, условия о размере уставного фонда, о размере паевых взносов членов кооператива; о составе и порядке внесения паевых взносов членами кооператива и их ответственности за нарушение обязательства по внесению паевых взносов; о характере и порядке трудового участия его членов в деятельности кооператива и их ответственности за нарушение обязательства по личному трудовому участию; о порядке распределения прибыли и убытков кооператива; о размере и условиях субсидиарной ответственности его членов по долгам кооператива; о составе и компетенции органов управления кооперативом и порядке принятия ими решений, в том числе по вопросам, решения по которым принимаются единогласно или квалифицированным большинством голосов.
3. Число членов кооператива не должно быть менее трех.
Статья 109. Имущество производственного кооператива
1. Имущество, находящееся в собственности производственного кооператива, делится на паи его членов в соответствии с уставом кооператива.
Уставом кооператива может быть установлено, что определенная часть принадлежащего кооперативу имущества составляет неделимые фонды, используемые на цели, определяемые уставом.
Решение об образовании неделимых фондов принимается членами кооператива единогласно, если иное не предусмотрено уставом кооператива.
2. Исключен.
3. Прибыль кооператива распределяется между его членами в соответствии с их трудовым участием, если иной порядок не предусмотрен уставом кооператива.
В таком же порядке распределяется имущество, оставшееся после ликвидации кооператива и удовлетворения требований его кредиторов.
Статья 110. Управление в производственном кооперативе
1. Высшим органом управления кооперативом является общее собрание его членов.
Исполнительными органами кооператива являются правление и (или) его председатель. Они осуществляют текущее руководство деятельностью кооператива и подотчетны наблюдательному совету и общему собранию членов кооператива.
Членами наблюдательного совета и правления кооператива, а также председателем кооператива могут быть только члены кооператива. Член кооператива не может одновременно быть членом наблюдательного совета и членом правления либо председателем кооператива.
2. Компетенция органов управления кооперативом и порядок принятия ими решений определяются законодательством и уставом кооператива.
3. К исключительной компетенции общего собрания членов кооператива относятся:
1) изменение устава кооператива;
2) образование наблюдательного совета и прекращение полномочий его членов, а также образование и прекращение полномочий исполнительных органов кооператива, если это право по уставу кооператива не передано его наблюдательному совету;
3) прием и исключение членов кооператива;
4) утверждение годовых отчетов и годовой бухгалтерской (финансовой) отчетности кооператива (данных книги учета доходов и расходов организаций и индивидуальных предпринимателей, применяющих упрощенную систему налогообложения) и распределение его прибыли и убытков;
5) решение о реорганизации и ликвидации кооператива.
Законодательством о производственных кооперативах и уставом кооператива к исключительной компетенции общего собрания может быть также отнесено решение иных вопросов.
Вопросы, отнесенные к исключительной компетенции общего собрания или наблюдательного совета кооператива, не могут быть переданы ими на решение исполнительных органов кооператива.
4. Член кооператива имеет один голос при принятии решений общим собранием.
Статья 111. Прекращение членства в производственном кооперативе и переход пая
1. Член кооператива вправе по своему усмотрению выйти из кооператива. В этом случае ему должна быть выплачена стоимость пая или выдано имущество, соответствующее его паю, а также осуществлены другие выплаты, предусмотренные уставом кооператива.
Выплата стоимости пая или выдача другого имущества выходящему члену кооператива производится по окончании финансового года и после утверждения годовой бухгалтерской (финансовой) отчетности кооператива, если иное не предусмотрено уставом кооператива. Выплата стоимости пая или выдача другого имущества выходящему из состава члену производственного кооператива, применяющего упрощенную систему налогообложения без ведения бухгалтерского учета, производятся по окончании финансового года без утверждения годовой бухгалтерской (финансовой) отчетности этого кооператива.
2. Член кооператива может быть исключен из кооператива по решению общего собрания в случае неисполнения или ненадлежащего исполнения обязанностей, возложенных на него уставом кооператива, а также в других случаях, предусмотренных законодательством о производственных кооперативах и уставом кооператива.
Член наблюдательного совета или исполнительного органа может быть исключен из кооператива по решению общего собрания в связи с его членством в аналогичном кооперативе.
Член кооператива, исключенный из него, имеет право на получение пая и других выплат, предусмотренных уставом кооператива, в соответствии с пунктом 1 настоящей статьи.
3. Член кооператива вправе передать свой пай или его часть другому члену кооператива, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством и уставом кооператива.
Передача пая (его части) гражданину, не являющемуся членом кооператива, допускается лишь с согласия кооператива. В этом случае другие члены кооператива пользуются преимущественным правом покупки такого пая (его части).
4. В случае смерти члена производственного кооператива его наследники могут быть приняты в члены кооператива, если иное не предусмотрено уставом кооператива. В противном случае кооператив выплачивает наследникам стоимость пая умершего члена кооператива.
5. Обращение взыскания на пай члена производственного кооператива по собственным долгам члена кооператива допускается при недостатке иного его имущества для покрытия таких долгов в
порядке, предусмотренном законодательством и уставом кооператива. Взыскание по долгам члена кооператива не может быть обращено на неделимые фонды кооператива.
Статья 112. Реорганизация и ликвидация производственных кооперативов
1. Производственный кооператив может быть добровольно реорганизован или ликвидирован по решению общего собрания его членов.
Иные основания и порядок реорганизации и ликвидации кооператива определяются законодательством.
2. Производственный кооператив по единогласному решению его членов может преобразоваться в хозяйственное товарищество или общество в случае, когда в составе кооператива осталось менее трех членов, а также в унитарное предприятие в случае, когда в составе кооператива остался один член.
§ 4. Унитарные предприятия
Статья 113. Унитарное предприятие
1. Унитарным предприятием признается коммерческая организация, не наделенная правом собственности на закрепленное за ней собственником имущество. Имущество унитарного предприятия является неделимым и не может быть распределено по вкладам (долям, паям), в том числе между работниками предприятия.
Унитарное предприятие создается в соответствии с настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства путем его учреждения или реорганизации юридических лиц.
2. Учредительным документом унитарного предприятия является устав.
Устав унитарного предприятия должен содержать помимо сведений, указанных в пункте 2 статьи 48 настоящего Кодекса, сведения о размере уставного фонда предприятия, порядке и источниках его формирования.
В форме унитарных предприятий могут быть созданы государственные (республиканские или коммунальные) унитарные предприятия либо частные унитарные предприятия.
Имущество республиканского унитарного предприятия находится в собственности Республики Беларусь и принадлежит такому предприятию на праве хозяйственного ведения или оперативного управления.
Имущество коммунального унитарного предприятия находится в собственности административно- территориальной единицы и принадлежит такому предприятию на праве хозяйственного ведения.
Имущество частного унитарного предприятия находится в частной собственности физического лица (совместной собственности супругов) либо юридического лица и принадлежит такому предприятию на праве хозяйственного ведения.
Имущество дочернего унитарного предприятия находится в собственности собственника имущества предприятия-учредителя и принадлежит дочернему предприятию на праве хозяйственного ведения.
3. Фирменное наименование унитарного предприятия должно содержать указание на форму собственности, если иное не установлено законодательными актами. Фирменное наименование дочернего предприятия также должно содержать слово «дочернее».
4. Органом унитарного предприятия является руководитель, который назначается собственником имущества и ему подотчетен. Собственник имущества унитарного предприятия – физическое лицо вправе непосредственно осуществлять функции руководителя.
Полномочия руководителя унитарного предприятия по решению собственника имущества могут быть переданы по договору другой коммерческой организации (управляющей организации) либо индивидуальному предпринимателю (управляющему).
В уставах юридических лиц, учредивших унитарные предприятия, может быть установлен порядок назначения руководителей таких предприятий.
5. От имени Республики Беларусь права собственника имущества республиканского унитарного предприятия, если иное не определено Президентом Республики Беларусь, осуществляют:
Правительство Республики Беларусь, а также в пределах, установленных законодательством, республиканские органы государственного управления, другие государственные органы и организации, уполномоченные управлять имуществом, находящимся в собственности Республики Беларусь, – в отношении республиканского унитарного предприятия, основанного на праве хозяйственного ведения;
Правительство Республики Беларусь, а также в пределах, установленных законодательством, республиканские органы государственного управления, другие государственные органы – в отношении казенного предприятия.
От имени административно-территориальной единицы права собственника имущества коммунального унитарного предприятия, основанного на праве хозяйственного ведения, осуществляют соответствующие органы местного управления и самоуправления, а также в пределах, установленных законодательством, уполномоченные ими государственные организации.
Собственник имущества частного унитарного предприятия свои полномочия осуществляет непосредственно и (или) через уполномоченных им лиц.
6. Собственник имущества унитарного предприятия, если иное не определено Президентом Республики Беларусь, настоящим Кодексом или решением собственника, принятым в отношении дочернего предприятия:
принимает решение о создании унитарного предприятия;
определяет цели деятельности унитарного предприятия, дает письменное согласие на участие унитарного предприятия в коммерческих и некоммерческих организациях, в том числе государственных объединениях;
утверждает устав унитарного предприятия и изменения и (или) дополнения, вносимые в него;
формирует уставный фонд унитарного предприятия, принимает решение о его изменении;
назначает на должность руководителя унитарного предприятия, заключает, изменяет и прекращает с ним трудовой договор (контракт) или гражданско-правовой договор в соответствии с законодательством, если иное не предусмотрено настоящим Кодексом;
принимает решение об изъятии имущества у унитарного предприятия в порядке и случаях, предусмотренных законодательством либо уставом;
осуществляет контроль за деятельностью унитарного предприятия, использованием по назначению и сохранностью имущества, принадлежащего унитарному предприятию;
дает письменное согласие на создание, реорганизацию и ликвидацию дочерних предприятий, создание и ликвидацию представительств и филиалов;
принимает решение о реорганизации или ликвидации унитарного предприятия в соответствии с законодательством;
имеет другие права и несет другие обязанности в соответствии с настоящим Кодексом, иными законодательными актами и уставом.
7. На момент осуществления государственной регистрации унитарного предприятия его уставный фонд должен быть полностью сформирован собственником имущества предприятия, если иное не предусмотрено законодательными актами.
В случае принятия учредителем унитарного предприятия решения об уменьшении уставного фонда унитарное предприятие обязано письменно уведомить об этом своих кредиторов. Кредитор унитарного предприятия вправе потребовать прекращения или досрочного исполнения обязательства, должником по которому является это предприятие, и возмещения убытков.
8. Унитарное предприятие отвечает по своим обязательствам всем принадлежащим ему имуществом.
Унитарное предприятие не несет ответственности по обязательствам собственника его имущества, за исключением случаев, предусмотренных настоящим Кодексом.
9. Долевая собственность на имущество унитарного предприятия не допускается.
В случае раздела имущества, находящегося в совместной собственности супругов, а также перехода права собственности на имущество унитарного предприятия в порядке наследования, правопреемства либо иными не противоречащими законодательству способами к двум и более лицам:
унитарное предприятие может быть реорганизовано путем разделения (выделения) либо преобразования в хозяйственное товарищество или общество, а также в производственный кооператив в порядке, установленном законодательством и соглашением сторон;
предприятие в целом как имущественный комплекс может быть продано лицу, не являющемуся участником долевой собственности на имущество унитарного предприятия;
имущество унитарного предприятия переходит в собственность одного юридического или физического лица с выплатой другим лицам компенсации соответственно их доле в общей собственности, определенной по правилам, установленным для имущества, в отношении которого долевая собственность допускается;
унитарное предприятие подлежит ликвидации в порядке, установленном законодательством, если реорганизация или переход имущества в собственность одного лица противоречат законодательству либо невозможны по иным причинам.
10. При реорганизации государственных унитарных предприятий предусмотренные настоящим Кодексом положения о реорганизации юридических лиц применяются, если законодательством о приватизации не предусмотрено иное.
Статья 114. Унитарное предприятие, основанное на праве хозяйственного ведения
1. Унитарное предприятие, основанное на праве хозяйственного ведения, учреждается по решению собственника его имущества, унитарного предприятия, основанного на праве хозяйственного ведения, иных субъектов гражданского права.
2. Устав унитарного предприятия, основанного на праве хозяйственного ведения, утверждается учредителем унитарного предприятия.
3. Унитарное предприятие, основанное на праве хозяйственного ведения, может с согласия собственника имущества создать в качестве юридического лица другое унитарное предприятие путем передачи ему в установленном порядке части своего имущества в хозяйственное ведение (дочернее предприятие). Дочернее предприятие не вправе создавать унитарные предприятия. Иной порядок создания дочернего предприятия может быть определен Президентом Республики Беларусь.
Учредитель утверждает устав дочернего предприятия, назначает его руководителя, осуществляет иные полномочия в соответствии с решением собственника имущества.
4. Собственник имущества унитарного предприятия, основанного на праве хозяйственного ведения, не отвечает по обязательствам предприятия, за исключением случаев, предусмотренных пунктом 3 статьи 52 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 115. Унитарное предприятие, основанное на праве оперативного управления (казенное предприятие)
1. Унитарное предприятие, основанное на праве оперативного управления (казенное предприятие), учреждается, если иное не определено Президентом Республики Беларусь, по решению Правительства Республики Беларусь на базе имущества, находящегося в собственности Республики Беларусь.
2. Устав казенного предприятия утверждается Правительством Республики Беларусь.
3. Фирменное наименование предприятия, основанного на праве оперативного управления, должно содержать указание на то, что предприятие является казенным.
4. Права казенного предприятия на закрепленное за ним имущество определяются в соответствии со статьями 277 и 278 настоящего Кодекса.
5. Республика Беларусь несет субсидиарную ответственность по обязательствам казенного предприятия при недостаточности его имущества.
§ 41. Крестьянские (фермерские) хозяйства
Статья 1151. Крестьянское (фермерское) хозяйство
1. Крестьянским (фермерским) хозяйством признается коммерческая организация, созданная одним гражданином (членами одной семьи), внесшим (внесшими) имущественные вклады, для осуществления предпринимательской деятельности по производству сельскохозяйственной продукции, а также по ее переработке, хранению, транспортировке и реализации, основанной на его (их) личном трудовом участии и использовании земельного участка, предоставленного для этих целей в соответствии с законодательством об охране и использовании земель.
Для целей настоящего параграфа членами семьи признаются супруги, их родители (усыновители), дети (в том числе усыновленные), братья и сестры, супруги и дети указанных лиц, а также другие лица, признанные членами семьи в соответствии с законодательством о браке и семье.
2. Крестьянское (фермерское) хозяйство отвечает по своим обязательствам всем принадлежащим ему имуществом.
Члены крестьянского (фермерского) хозяйства не отвечают по обязательствам крестьянского (фермерского) хозяйства, а крестьянское (фермерское) хозяйство не отвечает по обязательствам членов крестьянского (фермерского) хозяйства, за исключением случаев, предусмотренных законодательством.
3. Правовое положение крестьянского (фермерского) хозяйства определяется настоящим Кодексом и законодательством о крестьянском (фермерском) хозяйстве.
Статья 1152. Имущество крестьянского (фермерского) хозяйства
Имущество крестьянского (фермерского) хозяйства принадлежит ему на праве собственности. В состав имущества крестьянского (фермерского) хозяйства входят имущество, переданное в качестве вклада в уставный фонд крестьянского (фермерского) хозяйства его учредителями (членами), а также имущество, произведенное и приобретенное крестьянским (фермерским) хозяйством в процессе его деятельности.
§ 5. Некоммерческие организации
Статья 116. Потребительский кооператив
1. Потребительским кооперативом признается добровольное объединение граждан либо граждан и юридических лиц на основе членства с целью удовлетворения материальных (имущественных) и иных потребностей участников, осуществляемое путем объединения его членами имущественных паевых взносов.
2. Устав потребительского кооператива должен содержать помимо сведений, указанных в пункте 2 статьи 48 настоящего Кодекса, условия и порядок приема в члены кооператива и прекращения членства в нем; права и обязанности членов кооператива; условия о размере паевых взносов членов кооператива; о составе и порядке внесения паевых взносов членами кооператива и об их ответственности за нарушение обязательства по внесению паевых взносов; о составе и компетенции органов управления кооперативом и порядке принятия ими решений, в том числе по вопросам, решения по которым принимаются единогласно или квалифицированным большинством голосов, о порядке покрытия членами кооператива понесенных им убытков.
3. Наименование потребительского кооператива должно содержать указание на основную цель его деятельности, а также слово «кооператив» или слова «потребительский союз» либо «потребительское общество».
4. Члены потребительского кооператива обязаны в течение трех месяцев после утверждения годовой бухгалтерской (финансовой) отчетности (при ведении учета в книге учета доходов и расходов организаций и индивидуальных предпринимателей, применяющих упрощенную систему налогообложения, – в течение трех месяцев со дня окончания финансового года) покрыть образовавшиеся убытки путем дополнительных взносов. В случае невыполнения этой обязанности кооператив может быть ликвидирован в судебном порядке по требованию кредиторов.
Члены потребительского кооператива несут субсидиарную ответственность по его обязательствам в пределах невнесенной части дополнительного взноса каждого из членов кооператива.
5. Доходы и прибыль, полученные потребительским кооперативом, не могут распределяться между его членами.
6. Правовое положение потребительской кооперации (потребительских обществ, их союзов) определяется настоящим Кодексом и другим законодательством о потребительской кооперации.
Правовое положение иных потребительских кооперативов (жилищных, жилищно-строительных кооперативов, гаражных кооперативов и др.) определяется настоящим Кодексом и иным законодательством.
Статья 117. Общественные и религиозные организации (объединения)
1. Общественными и религиозными организациями (объединениями) признаются добровольные объединения граждан, в установленном законодательством порядке объединившихся на основе общности их интересов для удовлетворения духовных или иных нематериальных потребностей.
Общественные и религиозные организации являются некоммерческими организациями. Они вправе осуществлять предпринимательскую деятельность лишь для достижения целей, ради которых они созданы, и соответствующую этим целям.
2. Участники (члены) общественных и религиозных организаций не сохраняют прав на переданное ими этим организациям в собственность имущество, в том числе на членские взносы. Они не отвечают по обязательствам общественных и религиозных организаций, в которых участвуют в качестве их членов, а указанные организации не отвечают по обязательствам своих членов.
3. Особенности правового положения общественных и религиозных организаций как участников гражданских отношений определяются законодательством.
Статья 1171. Республиканские государственно-общественные объединения
1. Республиканскими государственно-общественными объединениями признаются основанные на членстве некоммерческие организации, целью деятельности которых является выполнение возложенных на них государственно значимых задач.
2. Учредителями республиканского государственно-общественного объединения и его членами могут являться физические и юридические лица, а также Республика Беларусь в лице действующих от ее имени уполномоченных государственных органов и юридических лиц.
3. Устав республиканского государственно-общественного объединения принимается его учредителями либо высшим органом этого объединения и утверждается Президентом Республики Беларусь либо по его поручению Правительством Республики Беларусь.
4. Создание республиканского государственно-общественного объединения осуществляется по решению учредителей либо в результате реорганизации существующей некоммерческой организации в форме общественного объединения на условиях, определяемых Президентом Республики Беларусь либо по его поручению Правительством Республики Беларусь.
5. Республиканское государственно-общественное объединение может в установленном порядке создавать свои организационные структуры, в том числе в виде юридических лиц, а также создавать иные юридические лица или участвовать в них в соответствии с уставом республиканского государственно-общественного объединения и иным законодательством.
6. Правовое положение республиканских государственно-общественных объединений определяется настоящим Кодексом и иным законодательством о республиканских государственно- общественных объединениях.
Статья 118. Фонды
1. Под фондом для целей настоящего Кодекса понимается не имеющая членства некоммерческая организация, учрежденная гражданами (гражданином) и (или) юридическими лицами (юридическим лицом) на основе добровольных имущественных взносов, преследующая
социальные, благотворительные, культурные, образовательные, содействующие развитию физкультуры и спорта, научные или иные общественно полезные цели, указанные в уставе фонда.
Наименование фонда должно содержать слово «фонд» и указание на характер деятельности и вид фонда.
Имущество, передаваемое фонду его учредителями (учредителем), должно принадлежать учредителям (учредителю) на праве собственности (праве хозяйственного ведения, оперативного управления), быть необходимым и пригодным для использования в деятельности фонда.
Источниками формирования имущества фонда являются имущество, передаваемое фонду его учредителями (учредителем), поступления от проводимых в соответствии с уставом фонда мероприятий, доходы, получаемые от осуществляемой в соответствии с уставом предпринимательской деятельности, и иные не запрещенные законодательством поступления.
Имущество, переданное фонду его учредителями (учредителем), является собственностью фонда. Учредители (учредитель) фонда не отвечают по обязательствам созданного фонда, а фонд не отвечает по обязательствам своих учредителей (учредителя).
Правила, действующие в отношении создания, деятельности, реорганизации и ликвидации фондов, установленные настоящим Кодексом, не распространяются на фонды, созданные или создаваемые по решению Президента Республики Беларусь, Парламента Республики Беларусь, Совета Министров Республики Беларусь, если в актах законодательства о создании таких фондов не установлено иное.
2. Фонд использует имущество для целей, определенных его уставом.
Для осуществления предпринимательской деятельности фонды вправе создавать унитарные предприятия, хозяйственные общества или участвовать в них, за исключением обществ с дополнительной ответственностью.
Фонд обязан ежегодно публиковать отчеты об использовании своего имущества. Порядок опубликования и состав сведений отчета устанавливаются законодательством.
3. Органами фонда являются правление (совет), дирекция (директор) и попечительский совет.
Устав фонда может предусматривать иные органы, необходимые для осуществления его деятельности.
Правление (совет) фонда является высшим коллегиальным органом фонда, формируемым его учредителями (учредителем). Основная функция правления (совета) фонда – обеспечение соблюдения фондом целей, для достижения которых он создан.
К исключительной компетенции правления (совета) фонда относятся:
изменение и (или) дополнение устава фонда;
образование (назначение) исполнительного органа фонда – дирекции (директора) и досрочное прекращение его полномочий;
создание и ликвидация представительств, филиалов фонда, определение их компетенции;
утверждение годового отчета и годовой бухгалтерской (финансовой) отчетности фонда (данных книги учета доходов и расходов организаций и индивидуальных предпринимателей, применяющих упрощенную систему налогообложения);
реорганизация фонда, если возможность реорганизации предусмотрена его уставом.
Дирекция (директор) фонда является исполнительным органом фонда, осуществляющим текущее руководство его деятельностью. Дирекция (директор) фонда в своей деятельности подотчетна правлению (совету) фонда.
Попечительский совет фонда – орган, осуществляющий контроль за деятельностью фонда, который формируется его учредителями (учредителем) при учреждении фонда, а в дальнейшем, если это предусмотрено уставом фонда, – правлением (советом) фонда.
К исключительной компетенции попечительского совета фонда относятся:
контроль за соответствием деятельности фонда законодательству и уставу фонда;
контроль за выполнением решений высшего коллегиального органа фонда, исполнительного органа фонда;
контроль за использованием денежных средств и иного имущества фонда в соответствии с его уставными целями;
предварительное рассмотрение и согласование годового отчета фонда.
4. Фонд действует на основании устава, утверждаемого учредителями (учредителем) фонда.
Устав фонда помимо сведений, указанных в пункте 2 статьи 48 настоящего Кодекса, должен содержать:
сведения об учредителях (учредителе) фонда;
задачи и методы деятельности фонда;
состав и порядок формирования органов фонда;
порядок формирования, полномочия и сроки полномочий попечительского совета фонда;
порядок назначения и освобождения должностных лиц фонда;
порядок внесения изменений и (или) дополнений в устав фонда;
источники и порядок формирования имущества фонда;
срок, на который создается фонд, или указание на его бессрочную деятельность;
сведения о созданных фондом представительствах и (или) филиалах, включающие наименования представительств, филиалов и место их нахождения (руководящих органов представительств, филиалов);
сведения о судьбе имущества фонда в случае его ликвидации. При этом такое имущество должно направляться на цели, для достижения которых был создан фонд;
иные положения, предусмотренные законодательством и не противоречащие настоящему Кодексу.
5. Иные положения, связанные с созданием, деятельностью, реорганизацией и ликвидацией фонда, не предусмотренные настоящей статьей и статьей 119 настоящего Кодекса, определяются законодательными актами.
Статья 119. Изменение устава, реорганизация и ликвидация фонда
1. Устав фонда может быть изменен правлением (советом) фонда в порядке, предусмотренном уставом фонда.
Соответствующие изменения и (или) дополнения в устав фонда должны быть внесены и представлены в установленном порядке для государственной регистрации в месячный срок в случае:
изменения целей фонда;
изменения наименования фонда;
изменения вида фонда;
изменения места нахождения фонда (руководящего органа фонда);
создания или ликвидации представительств и (или) филиалов фонда;
изменения сведений об органах фонда, в том числе о попечительском совете, порядке назначения и освобождения должностных лиц фонда, порядке формирования имущества фонда, а также о других фактических обстоятельствах, сведения о которых в соответствии с законодательством должны содержаться в уставе фонда;
изменения законодательства, в соответствии с которым требуется внесение изменений и (или) дополнений в устав фонда, если иные сроки не установлены этим законодательством.
2. Реорганизация фонда, если ее возможность предусмотрена уставом фонда, может быть осуществлена в форме:
слияния с другим фондом;
присоединения к другому фонду;
присоединения к нему другого фонда;
выделения из фонда юридического лица любой организационно-правовой формы;
разделения на два и более фонда.
Фонд не может быть реорганизован в форме преобразования.
Стоимость оставшегося имущества реорганизованного в форме выделения фонда должна быть не менее минимального размера, необходимого для создания и деятельности фонда.
3. Фонд может быть ликвидирован по заявлению заинтересованных лиц по решению суда:
в случае непредставления в регистрирующий орган в течение трех месяцев после государственной регистрации фонда документов о передаче учредителями (учредителем) в собственность фонда имущества в виде неденежных взносов при формировании имущества фонда не менее минимального размера, необходимого для создания и деятельности фонда, в полном объеме или в части в виде неденежных взносов;
в случае неисполнения обязанности по созданию в установленный срок после государственной регистрации фонда представительств и (или) филиалов и непредставления для государственной
регистрации изменений и (или) дополнений, вносимых в устав фонда в связи с изменением его вида;
если по окончании календарного года стоимость имущества фонда станет менее минимального размера, необходимого для создания и деятельности фонда, и в указанный регистрирующим органом в письменном предупреждении срок эта стоимость не доведена до минимального размера, необходимого для его создания и деятельности;
если цели фонда не могут быть достигнуты, а необходимые изменения этих целей не могут быть произведены;
в случае уклонения фонда в своей деятельности от целей, предусмотренных уставом;
в случае осуществления деятельности, запрещенной законодательством, либо деятельности с иными неоднократными или грубыми нарушениями законодательства и устава фонда;
в иных случаях, предусмотренных законодательными актами.
4. Имущество, оставшееся после ликвидации фонда, в том числе после удовлетворения требований кредиторов, направляется на цели, для достижения которых был создан фонд. В случае невозможности такого направления имущества оно передается в равных долях фондам, созданным для достижения аналогичных целей, при наличии их письменного обращения в суд, который принял решение о ликвидации фонда.
В случае отсутствия указанных обращений имущество, оставшееся после ликвидации фонда, передается в доход Республики Беларусь и направляется на цели, для достижения которых был создан фонд.
Статья 120. Учреждения
1. Учреждением признается организация, созданная собственником для осуществления управленческих, социально-культурных или иных функций некоммерческого характера и финансируемая им полностью или частично.
Права учреждения на закрепленное за ним имущество определяются в соответствии со статьей 279 настоящего Кодекса.
2. Учреждение отвечает по своим обязательствам находящимися в его распоряжении денежными средствами. При их недостаточности субсидиарную ответственность по его обязательствам несет собственник соответствующего имущества.
3. Особенности правового положения отдельных видов государственных и иных учреждений определяются законодательством.
Статья 121. Объединения юридических лиц и (или) индивидуальных предпринимателей (ассоциации и союзы)
1. Коммерческие организации и (или) индивидуальные предприниматели, а также коммерческие и (или) некоммерческие организации в целях координации их деятельности, представления и защиты общих интересов могут создавать объединения в форме ассоциаций или союзов, являющихся некоммерческими организациями.
2. Если по решению участников на ассоциацию (союз) возлагается ведение предпринимательской деятельности, такая ассоциация (союз) преобразуется в хозяйственное общество или товарищество в порядке, предусмотренном законодательством, либо может заниматься предпринимательской
деятельностью только посредством создания коммерческих организаций и (или) участия в них, если иное не установлено законодательными актами.
3. Ассоциация (союз) является юридическим лицом.
Члены ассоциации (союза) сохраняют свою самостоятельность и права юридического лица, индивидуального предпринимателя.
4. Ассоциация (союз) не отвечает по обязательствам своих членов. Члены ассоциации (союза) несут субсидиарную ответственность по ее обязательствам в размере и порядке, предусмотренных уставом ассоциации (союза).
Статья 122. Учредительный документ ассоциации (союза)
1. Учредительным документом ассоциации (союза) является устав, утвержденный ее членами.
2. Устав ассоциации (союза) должен содержать помимо сведений, указанных в пункте 2 статьи 48 настоящего Кодекса, порядок формирования имущества ассоциации (союза), внесения изменений и (или) дополнений в устав ассоциации (союза), условия о составе и компетенции органов управления ассоциацией (союзом) и порядке принятия ими решений, в том числе по вопросам, решения по которым принимаются единогласно или квалифицированным большинством голосов членов ассоциации (союза), и о порядке распределения имущества, остающегося после ликвидации ассоциации (союза).
Статья 123. Права и обязанности членов ассоциаций и союзов
1. Член ассоциации (союза) вправе безвозмездно пользоваться ее услугами.
2. Член ассоциации (союза) вправе по своему усмотрению выйти из ассоциации (союза) в любое время. В этом случае он несет субсидиарную ответственность по обязательствам ассоциации (союза) пропорционально своему взносу в течение двух лет с момента выхода, если эти обязательства возникли во время его членства в ассоциации.
Член ассоциации (союза) может быть исключен из нее по решению остающихся участников в случаях и порядке, установленных уставом ассоциации (союза). В отношении имущественного взноса и ответственности исключенного члена ассоциации (союза) применяются правила, относящиеся к выходу из ассоциации (союза).
3. С согласия членов ассоциации (союза) в нее может войти новый участник. Вступление в ассоциацию (союз) нового участника может быть обусловлено его субсидиарной ответственностью по обязательствам ассоциации (союза), возникшим до его вступления.
§ 6. Государственные объединения
Статья 1231. Основные положения о государственном объединении
1. Государственным объединением (концерном, производственным, научно-производственным или иным объединением) признается объединение государственных юридических лиц, государственных и иных юридических лиц, а также государственных и иных юридических лиц и индивидуальных предпринимателей, создаваемое по решению Президента Республики Беларусь, Правительства Республики Беларусь, а также по их поручению (разрешению) республиканскими органами государственного управления либо по решению органов местного управления и самоуправления.
2. Государственное объединение создается, как правило, по отраслевому принципу в целях осуществления общего руководства, общего управления деятельностью, координации деятельности и представления интересов юридических лиц и индивидуальных предпринимателей, входящих в состав объединения.
3. Государственное объединение находится в подчинении Правительства Республики Беларусь, республиканского органа государственного управления, органа местного управления и самоуправления или государственной организации, выполняющей отдельные функции республиканского органа государственного управления.
4. Государственные объединения являются некоммерческими организациями, за исключением случаев принятия в соответствии с законодательством решений о признании их коммерческими организациями.
5. Собственник имущества государственного объединения не отвечает по обязательствам государственного объединения, за исключением случаев, предусмотренных законодательными актами.
6. Правовое положение государственных объединений, права и обязанности юридических лиц и индивидуальных предпринимателей, входящих в их состав, определяются настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства о таких объединениях, а также их уставами.
Статья 1232. Участники государственного объединения
1. В состав государственного объединения могут входить государственные унитарные предприятия и (или) государственные учреждения по решению государственного органа (должностного лица), принявшего решение о создании государственного объединения, или уполномоченного им органа, а также иные организации, индивидуальные предприниматели добровольно на условиях и в порядке, определенных уставом государственного объединения. Юридические лица могут входить в состав государственного объединения в соответствии с законодательством.
Решение о возможности вхождения в состав государственного объединения индивидуальных предпринимателей и негосударственных юридических лиц принимается государственным органом (должностным лицом), принявшим решение о создании государственного объединения, или уполномоченным им органом.
2. Участники государственных объединений сохраняют права юридических лиц и индивидуальных предпринимателей, которые могут быть ограничены или иным образом изменены в соответствии с законодательством.
3. Государственные унитарные предприятия и государственные учреждения, входящие в состав государственного объединения по решению государственного органа (должностного лица), принявшего решение о создании государственного объединения, или уполномоченного им органа, могут быть исключены из его состава по решению этого органа (должностного лица).
Иные участники государственного объединения, входящие в его состав добровольно, вправе выйти из состава государственного объединения или могут быть исключены из этого состава в порядке, установленном уставом соответствующего государственного объединения.
4. Решения государственных объединений по вопросам, предусмотренным уставами государственных объединений и актами законодательства о таких объединениях, являются обязательными для их участников.
5. Государственное объединение не отвечает по обязательствам его участников, а участники государственного объединения не отвечают по обязательствам этого государственного
объединения, за исключением случаев, предусмотренных законодательными актами.
Статья 1233. Имущество государственного объединения
1. Имущество государственного объединения находится в государственной собственности и принадлежит ему на праве хозяйственного ведения либо на праве оперативного управления. Государственным органом (должностным лицом), принявшим решение о создании государственного объединения, или уполномоченным им органом, а также уставом государственного объединения должно быть определено, на каком праве принадлежит имущество государственному объединению.
2. Имущество участников государственного объединения не входит в состав имущества государственного объединения.
Статья 1234. Устав государственного объединения
1. Устав государственного объединения утверждается государственным органом (должностным лицом), принявшим решение о его создании, либо уполномоченным им органом и является учредительным документом этого объединения.
2. В уставе государственного объединения должны быть определены порядок и источники формирования имущества государственного объединения.
3. В уставе государственного объединения, являющегося коммерческой организацией, помимо сведений, указанных в пункте 2 статьи 48 настоящего Кодекса и пункте 2 настоящей статьи, должны содержаться сведения о предмете деятельности государственного объединения.
ГЛАВА 5 УЧАСТИЕ РЕСПУБЛИКИ БЕЛАРУСЬ И АДМИНИСТРАТИВНО-ТЕРРИТОРИАЛЬНЫХ ЕДИНИЦ В ОТНОШЕНИЯХ, РЕГУЛИРУЕМЫХ ГРАЖДАНСКИМ ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ
Статья 124. Республика Беларусь, административно-территориальные единицы – субъекты гражданского права
1. Республика Беларусь, административно-территориальные единицы участвуют в отношениях, регулируемых гражданским законодательством, на равных с иными участниками этих отношений – физическими и юридическими лицами.
2. К субъектам гражданского права, указанным в пункте 1 настоящей статьи, применяются нормы, определяющие участие юридических лиц в отношениях, регулируемых гражданским законодательством, если иное не вытекает из законодательства или особенностей данных субъектов.
Статья 125. Порядок участия Республики Беларусь и административно-территориальных единиц в отношениях, регулируемых гражданским законодательством
1. От имени Республики Беларусь могут своими действиями приобретать и осуществлять имущественные и личные неимущественные права и обязанности, выступать в суде государственные органы в рамках их компетенции, установленной актами, определяющими статус этих органов.
2. От имени административно-территориальных единиц могут своими действиями приобретать и осуществлять права и обязанности, указанные в пункте 1 настоящей статьи, органы местного управления и самоуправления в рамках их компетенции, установленной актами, определяющими статус этих органов.
3. В случаях и порядке, предусмотренных законодательством Республики Беларусь, от имени Республики Беларусь и административно-территориальных единиц по их специальному поручению могут выступать иные государственные органы, не упомянутые в настоящей статье, а также юридические лица и граждане.
Статья 126. Ответственность по обязательствам Республики Беларусь и административно- территориальных единиц
1. Республика Беларусь, ее административно-территориальные единицы отвечают по своим обязательствам принадлежащим им на праве собственности имуществом, кроме имущества, которое может находиться только в республиканской или коммунальной собственности.
2. Республика Беларусь, ее административно-территориальные единицы не отвечают по обязательствам созданных ими юридических лиц, кроме случаев, предусмотренных законодательными актами.
3. Республика Беларусь не отвечает по обязательствам административно-территориальных единиц.
4. Административно-территориальные единицы не отвечают по обязательствам друг друга, а также по обязательствам Республики Беларусь.
5. Правила пунктов 2-4 настоящей статьи не распространяются на случаи, когда Республика Беларусь приняла на себя гарантию (поручительство) по обязательствам административно- территориальной единицы или юридического лица либо указанные субъекты приняли на себя гарантию (поручительство) по обязательствам Республики Беларусь.
Статья 127. Особенности ответственности Республики Беларусь и административно- территориальных единиц в отношениях, регулируемых гражданским законодательством, с участием иностранных юридических лиц, граждан и государств
Особенности ответственности Республики Беларусь и административно-территориальных единиц в отношениях, регулируемых гражданским законодательством, с участием иностранных юридических лиц, граждан и государств определяются законодательными актами.
ПОДРАЗДЕЛ 3 ОБЪЕКТЫ ГРАЖДАНСКИХ ПРАВ
ГЛАВА 6 ОБЩИЕ ПОЛОЖЕНИЯ
Статья 128. Виды объектов гражданских прав
К объектам гражданских прав относятся:
вещи, включая деньги и ценные бумаги, иное имущество, в том числе имущественные права;
работы и услуги;
нераскрытая информация;
исключительные права на результаты интеллектуальной деятельности и средства индивидуализации участников гражданского оборота, товаров, работ или услуг;
нематериальные блага.
Статья 129. Оборотоспособность объектов гражданских прав
1. Объекты гражданских прав могут свободно отчуждаться или переходить от одного лица к другому в порядке универсального правопреемства (наследование, реорганизация юридического лица) либо иным способом, если они не изъяты из оборота или не ограничены в обороте.
2. Виды объектов гражданских прав, нахождение которых в обороте не допускается (объекты, изъятые из оборота), должны быть указаны в законе.
Виды объектов гражданских прав, которые могут принадлежать лишь определенным участникам оборота либо нахождение которых в обороте допускается по специальному разрешению (объекты ограниченно оборотоспособные), определяются в порядке, установленном законодательными актами.
3. Земля и другие природные ресурсы могут отчуждаться или переходить от одного лица к другому иными способами в той мере, в какой их оборот допускается законодательством об охране и использовании земель и иным законодательством об охране окружающей среды и рациональном использовании природных ресурсов.
Статья 130. Недвижимые и движимые вещи
1. К недвижимым вещам (недвижимое имущество, недвижимость) относятся земельные участки, участки недр, поверхностные водные объекты и все, что прочно связано с землей, то есть объекты, перемещение которых без несоразмерного ущерба их назначению невозможно, в том числе леса, многолетние насаждения, капитальные строения (здания, сооружения), незавершенные законсервированные капитальные строения, изолированные помещения, машино-места.
К недвижимым вещам также приравниваются предприятие в целом как имущественный комплекс, подлежащие государственной регистрации воздушные и морские суда, суда внутреннего плавания, суда плавания «река-море», космические объекты. Законодательными актами к недвижимым вещам может быть отнесено и иное имущество.
2. Вещи, не относящиеся к недвижимости, включая деньги и ценные бумаги, признаются движимым имуществом. Регистрация прав на движимые вещи не требуется, кроме случаев, указанных в законе.
Статья 131. Государственная регистрация недвижимого имущества, прав на него и сделок с ним
1. Государственной регистрации подлежат недвижимое имущество, права на него и сделки с ним в случаях, предусмотренных законодательными актами.
2. В случаях, предусмотренных законодательством, наряду с государственной регистрацией могут осуществляться специальная регистрация или учет отдельных видов недвижимого имущества.
3. Организации по государственной регистрации недвижимого имущества, прав на него и сделок с ним обязаны удостоверить произведенную регистрацию путем выдачи заявителю свидетельства (удостоверения) о государственной регистрации либо путем совершения регистрационной надписи на оригинале документа, выражающего содержание зарегистрированной сделки.
4. Государственная регистрация недвижимого имущества, прав на него и сделок с ним является публичной. Организации по государственной регистрации недвижимого имущества, прав на него и сделок с ним обязаны предоставлять любому лицу необходимую информацию только о существующих на момент выдачи информации правах и ограничениях (обременениях) прав на конкретный объект недвижимого имущества. Обобщенная информация о принадлежащих
физическому или юридическому лицу правах на объекты недвижимого имущества предоставляется только в случаях, предусмотренных законодательными актами.
5. Отказ либо уклонение от государственной регистрации недвижимого имущества, прав на него и сделок с ним могут быть обжалованы в суд.
6. Порядок государственной регистрации и основания для отказа в регистрации устанавливаются законодательством о государственной регистрации недвижимого имущества, прав на него и сделок с ним.
Статья 132. Предприятие
1. Предприятием как объектом прав признается имущественный комплекс, используемый для осуществления предпринимательской деятельности.
В состав предприятия как имущественного комплекса входят все виды имущества, предназначенные для его деятельности, включая земельные участки, капитальные строения (здания, сооружения), незавершенные законсервированные капитальные строения, изолированные помещения, машино-места, оборудование, инвентарь, сырье, продукцию, права требования, долги, а также права на обозначения, индивидуализирующие предприятие, его продукцию, работы и услуги (фирменное наименование, товарные знаки, знаки обслуживания), и другие исключительные права, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором.
2. Предприятие в целом или его часть могут быть объектом купли-продажи, залога, аренды и других сделок, связанных с установлением, изменением и прекращением вещных прав.
Статья 133. Неделимые вещи
Вещь, раздел которой в натуре невозможен без изменения ее назначения, признается неделимой.
Особенности выдела доли в праве собственности на неделимую вещь определяются правилами статьи 255 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 134. Сложные вещи
Если разнородные вещи образуют единое целое, предполагающее использование их по общему назначению, они рассматриваются как одна вещь (сложная вещь).
Действие сделки, заключенной по поводу сложной вещи, распространяется на все ее составные части, если договором не предусмотрено иное.
Статья 135. Главная вещь и принадлежность
Вещь, предназначенная для обслуживания другой (главной) вещи и связанная с ней общим назначением (принадлежностью), следует судьбе главной вещи, если договором не предусмотрено иное.
Статья 136. Плоды, продукция и доходы
Поступления, полученные в результате использования имущества (плоды, продукция, доходы), принадлежат лицу, использующему это имущество на законном основании, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором об использовании этого имущества.
Статья 137. Животные
К животным применяются правила об имуществе постольку, поскольку иное не установлено законодательством и не вытекает из особенностей этого объекта.
При осуществлении прав не допускается жестокое обращение с животными, противоречащее принципам гуманности.
Статья 138. Индивидуально-определенные вещи и вещи, определяемые родовыми признаками
1. Индивидуально-определенной признается вещь, выделенная из других вещей по присущим только ей признакам. Индивидуально-определенные вещи являются незаменимыми.
2. Вещами, определяемыми родовыми признаками, признаются вещи, обладающие признаками, присущими всем вещам того же рода, и определяющиеся числом, весом, мерой. Вещи, определяемые родовыми признаками, являются заменимыми.
Статья 139. Охраняемые результаты интеллектуальной деятельности
В случаях и порядке, установленных настоящим Кодексом и иным законодательством, признается исключительное право (интеллектуальная собственность) гражданина или юридического лица на охраняемые результаты интеллектуальной деятельности и приравненные к ним средства индивидуализации юридического лица, индивидуализации продукции, выполняемых работ и услуг (фирменное наименование, товарный знак, знак обслуживания и т.п.).
Использование результатов интеллектуальной собственности и средств индивидуализации, которые являются объектом исключительных прав, может осуществляться третьими лицами только с согласия правообладателя.
Статья 140. Нераскрытая информация
1. Информация (сведения о лицах, предметах, фактах, событиях, явлениях и процессах) охраняется в качестве нераскрытой информации, если она составляет служебную тайну или коммерческую тайну.
2. В отношении информации может быть установлен режим коммерческой тайны при условии, что составляющие ее сведения не являются общеизвестными или легкодоступными третьим лицам в тех кругах, которые обычно имеют дело с подобного рода сведениями, имеют коммерческую ценность для их обладателя в силу неизвестности третьим лицам, не являются объектами исключительных прав на результаты интеллектуальной деятельности и не отнесены в установленном порядке к государственным секретам. Режим коммерческой тайны считается установленным после определения состава сведений, подлежащих охране в режиме коммерческой тайны, и принятия лицом, правомерно обладающим такими сведениями, совокупности мер, необходимых для обеспечения их конфиденциальности.
Сведения, в отношении которых не может быть установлен режим коммерческой тайны, определяются законодательными актами.
3. Условия и порядок отнесения информации к служебной тайне определяются законодательством.
4. Информация, составляющая служебную тайну или коммерческую тайну, защищается способами, предусмотренными законодательством.
В случае незаконного ознакомления или незаконного использования, а также разглашения информации, которая составляет служебную тайну или коммерческую тайну, физические и юридические лица, государственные органы и их должностные лица обязаны возместить ее обладателю причиненные убытки. Такая же обязанность возлагается на работников, разгласивших служебную тайну или коммерческую тайну вопреки обязательству о неразглашении коммерческой
тайны, трудовому договору (контракту), и на контрагентов, сделавших это вопреки гражданско- правовому договору.
Статья 141. Деньги (валюта)
1. Белорусский рубль является законным платежным средством, обязательным к приему по нарицательной стоимости на всей территории Республики Беларусь.
Платежи на территории Республики Беларусь осуществляются путем наличных и безналичных расчетов.
2. Случаи, порядок и условия использования иностранной валюты на территории Республики Беларусь определяются законодательством.
Статья 142. Валютные ценности
Виды имущества, признаваемого валютными ценностями, и порядок совершения сделок с ними определяются законодательством.
Право собственности на валютные ценности защищается в Республике Беларусь на общих основаниях.
ГЛАВА 7 ЦЕННЫЕ БУМАГИ
Статья 143. Ценная бумага
Ценной бумагой являются документ либо совокупность определенных записей, удостоверяющие с соблюдением установленной формы и (или) обязательных реквизитов имущественные и неимущественные права. С передачей ценной бумаги переходят все удостоверяемые ею права в совокупности.
Статья 144. Виды и формы ценных бумаг
К ценным бумагам относятся государственная облигация, облигация, вексель, чек, депозитный и сберегательный сертификаты, банковская сберегательная книжка на предъявителя, коносамент, акция, приватизационные ценные бумаги и другие документы, которые законодательством о ценных бумагах или в установленном им порядке отнесены к числу ценных бумаг.
Ценные бумаги могут быть эмиссионными и неэмиссионными.
Эмиссионными ценными бумагами являются облигации, акции и другие ценные бумаги, отнесенные к таковым законодательством.
Ценные бумаги могут эмитироваться (выдаваться) в документарной или бездокументарной формах. Законодательными актами может быть исключена возможность эмиссии (выдачи) ценных бумаг определенного вида в документарной либо бездокументарной форме.
К отношениям, связанным с простыми и переводными векселями, настоящий Кодекс применяется в части, не урегулированной нормами законодательных актов об обращении простых и переводных векселей.
Статья 145. Требования к ценной бумаге
1. Виды прав, которые удостоверяются ценными бумагами, обязательные реквизиты ценных бумаг, требования к форме ценной бумаги и другие необходимые требования определяются
законодательством или в установленном им порядке.
2. Отсутствие обязательных реквизитов ценной бумаги или несоответствие ценной бумаги установленной для нее форме влечет ее ничтожность.
Статья 146. Субъекты прав, удостоверенных ценной бумагой
1. Права, удостоверенные ценной бумагой, могут принадлежать:
1) предъявителю ценной бумаги (ценная бумага на предъявителя);
2) названному в ценной бумаге лицу (именная ценная бумага);
3) названному в ценной бумаге лицу, которое может само осуществить эти права или назначить своим распоряжением (приказом) другое управомоченное лицо (ордерная ценная бумага).
2. Законодательными актами может быть исключена возможность эмиссии (выдачи) ценных бумаг определенного вида в качестве именных, либо (и) в качестве ордерных, либо (и) в качестве бумаг на предъявителя.
Статья 1461. Подтверждение прав на ценную бумагу
1. Подтверждением права на документарную ценную бумагу является сама ценная бумага. В случае передачи документарной ценной бумаги на хранение профессиональному участнику рынка ценных бумаг, который вправе осуществлять такое хранение в соответствии с выданным ему специальным разрешением (лицензией) или законодательными актами, подтверждением права на эту ценную бумагу является выписка о состоянии счета, открытого этим профессиональным участником рынка ценных бумаг для учета этой ценной бумаги. При наличии расхождений между документарной ценной бумагой и выпиской о состоянии указанного счета приоритет имеет выписка.
2. Подтверждением права на бездокументарную ценную бумагу является выписка о состоянии счета, открытого для учета этой ценной бумаги.
3. Порядок открытия и ведения счетов для учета ценных бумаг, а также требования к содержанию и оформлению выписок о состоянии таких счетов определяются законодательством.
4. Особенности подтверждения прав на эмиссионную ценную бумагу определяются законодательными актами о ценных бумагах.
Статья 1462. Осуществление прав по ценной бумаге
Осуществление прав, удостоверяемых ценной бумагой, возможно при предъявлении ценной бумаги, а в случаях, предусмотренных законодательством, при предъявлении выписки о состоянии счета, открытого для учета этой ценной бумаги, если иное не установлено законодательством.
Статья 147. Передача прав, удостоверенных ценной бумагой
1. Для передачи другому лицу прав, удостоверенных ценной бумагой на предъявителя, достаточно вручения ценной бумаги этому лицу.
2. Права, удостоверенные именной ценной бумагой, передаются в порядке, установленном для уступки требований (цессии). В соответствии со статьей 361 настоящего Кодекса лицо, передающее права, удостоверенные ценной бумагой, несет ответственность за недействительность соответствующего требования, но не за его неисполнение.
3. Права, удостоверенные ордерной ценной бумагой, передаются путем совершения на этой бумаге передаточной надписи – индоссамента. Индоссант несет ответственность не только за существование права, но и за его осуществление.
Индоссамент, совершенный на ценной бумаге, переносит все права, удостоверенные ценной бумагой, на лицо, которому или приказу которого передаются права, удостоверенные ценной бумагой, – индоссата. Индоссамент может быть бланковым (без указания лица, которому должно быть произведено исполнение) или ордерным (с указанием лица, которому или по приказу которого должно быть произведено исполнение).
Индоссамент может быть ограничен только поручением осуществлять права, удостоверенные ценной бумагой, без передачи этих прав индоссату (препоручительный индоссамент). В этом случае индоссат выступает в качестве представителя.
4. Особенности передачи прав по эмиссионным ценным бумагам определяются законодательными актами о ценных бумагах.
Статья 148. Исполнение по ценной бумаге
1. Лицо, выдавшее ценную бумагу, и все лица, индоссировавшие ее, отвечают перед ее законным владельцем солидарно. В случае удовлетворения требований законного владельца ценной бумаги об исполнении удостоверенного ею обязательства одним или несколькими лицами из числа обязавшихся до него по ценной бумаге они приобретают право обратного требования (регресса) к остальным лицам, обязавшимся по ценной бумаге.
2. Отказ от исполнения обязательства, удостоверенного ценной бумагой, со ссылкой на отсутствие основания обязательства либо на его недействительность не допускается. Владелец ценной бумаги, обнаруживший подлог или подделку ценной бумаги, вправе предъявить к лицу, передавшему ему бумагу, требование о надлежащем исполнении обязательства, удостоверенного ценной бумагой, и возмещении убытков.
Статья 149. Восстановление прав на ценные бумаги
Восстановление прав по утраченным ценным бумагам на предъявителя и ордерным ценным бумагам производится судом в порядке, предусмотренном процессуальным законодательством.
Статья 150. Бездокументарные ценные бумаги
1. Права на бездокументарные ценные бумаги возникают с момента зачисления этих ценных бумаг на счет приобретателя, открытый для учета ценных бумаг.
2. В случаях, определенных законодательными актами, или в порядке, установленном в соответствии с ними, отражению на счете (фиксации), открытом для учета бездокументарных ценных бумаг, подлежат возникновение, переход (передача), изменение и прекращение прав на бездокументарные ценные бумаги, а также обременение (ограничение) этих прав.
ГЛАВА 8 НЕМАТЕРИАЛЬНЫЕ БЛАГА И ИХ ЗАЩИТА
Статья 151. Нематериальные блага
1. Жизнь и здоровье, достоинство личности, личная неприкосновенность, честь и доброе имя, деловая репутация, неприкосновенность частной жизни, личная и семейная тайна, право свободного передвижения, выбора места пребывания и жительства, право на имя, право авторства, иные личные неимущественные права и другие нематериальные блага, принадлежащие гражданину от рождения или в силу акта законодательства, неотчуждаемы и непередаваемы иным
способом. В случаях и порядке, предусмотренных законодательством, личные неимущественные права и другие нематериальные блага, принадлежавшие умершему, могут осуществляться и защищаться другими лицами, в том числе наследниками правообладателя.
2. Нематериальные блага защищаются в соответствии с гражданским законодательством в случаях и порядке, предусмотренных этим законодательством, а также в тех случаях и пределах, в каких использование способов защиты гражданских прав (статья 11) вытекает из существа нарушенного нематериального права и характера последствий этого нарушения.
Статья 152. Компенсация морального вреда
Если гражданину причинен моральный вред (физические или нравственные страдания) действиями, нарушающими его личные неимущественные права либо посягающими на принадлежащие гражданину другие нематериальные блага, а также в иных случаях, предусмотренных законодательством, гражданин вправе требовать от нарушителя денежную компенсацию указанного вреда.
При определении размеров компенсации морального вреда суд принимает во внимание степень вины нарушителя и иные заслуживающие внимания обстоятельства. Суд должен также учитывать степень физических и нравственных страданий, связанных с индивидуальными особенностями лица, которому причинен вред.
Статья 153. Защита чести, достоинства и деловой репутации
1. Гражданин вправе требовать по суду опровержения порочащих его честь, достоинство или деловую репутацию сведений, если распространивший такие сведения не докажет, что они соответствуют действительности.
По требованию заинтересованных лиц допускается защита чести и достоинства гражданина и после его смерти.
2. Если сведения, порочащие честь, достоинство или деловую репутацию гражданина, распространены в средствах массовой информации, они должны быть опровергнуты в тех же средствах массовой информации.
Если указанные сведения содержатся в документе, исходящем от организации, такой документ подлежит замене или отзыву.
Порядок опровержения в иных случаях устанавливается судом.
3. Гражданин, в отношении которого средствами массовой информации опубликованы сведения, ущемляющие его права или охраняемые законодательством интересы, имеет право на опубликование своего ответа в тех же средствах массовой информации.
4. Исключен.
5. Гражданин, в отношении которого распространены сведения, порочащие его честь, достоинство или деловую репутацию, вправе наряду с опровержением таких сведений требовать возмещения убытков и морального вреда, причиненных их распространением.
6. Если установить лицо, распространившее сведения, порочащие честь, достоинство или деловую репутацию гражданина, невозможно, гражданин, в отношении которого такие сведения распространены, вправе обратиться в суд с заявлением о признании распространенных сведений не соответствующими действительности.
7. Правила настоящей статьи о защите деловой репутации гражданина соответственно применяются к защите деловой репутации юридического лица, кроме возмещения морального вреда.
ПОДРАЗДЕЛ 4 СДЕЛКИ И ПРЕДСТАВИТЕЛЬСТВО
ГЛАВА 9 СДЕЛКИ
§ 1. Понятие, виды и формы сделок
Статья 154. Понятие сделки
Сделками признаются действия граждан и юридических лиц, направленные на установление, изменение или прекращение гражданских прав и обязанностей.
Статья 155. Договоры и односторонние сделки
1. Сделки могут быть дву- или многосторонними (договоры) и односторонними.
2. Односторонней считается сделка, для совершения которой в соответствии с законодательством или соглашением сторон необходимо и достаточно выражения воли (действия) одной стороны.
3. Для заключения договора необходимо выражение согласованной воли (действий) двух сторон (двусторонняя сделка) либо трех или более сторон (многосторонняя сделка).
Статья 156. Обязанности по односторонней сделке
Односторонняя сделка создает обязанности для лица, совершившего сделку. Она может создавать обязанности для других лиц лишь в случаях, установленных законодательными актами либо соглашением с этими лицами.
Статья 157. Правовое регулирование односторонних сделок
К односторонним сделкам соответственно применяются общие положения об обязательствах и о договорах, если это не противоречит законодательству, одностороннему характеру и существу сделки.
Статья 158. Сделки, совершенные под условием
1. Сделка считается совершенной под отлагательным условием, если стороны поставили возникновение прав и обязанностей в зависимость от обстоятельства, относительно которого неизвестно, наступит оно или не наступит.
2. Сделка считается совершенной под отменительным условием, если стороны поставили прекращение прав и обязанностей в зависимость от обстоятельства, относительно которого неизвестно, наступит оно или не наступит.
3. Если наступлению условия недобросовестно воспрепятствовала сторона, которой наступление условия невыгодно, то условие признается наступившим.
Если наступлению условия недобросовестно содействовала сторона, которой наступление условия выгодно, то условие признается ненаступившим.
Статья 159. Форма сделок
1. Сделки совершаются устно или в письменной форме (простой или нотариальной).
2. Сделка, которая может быть совершена устно, считается совершенной и в том случае, когда из поведения лица явствует его воля совершить сделку.
3. Молчание признается выражением воли совершить сделку в случаях, предусмотренных законодательством или соглашением сторон.
Статья 160. Устные сделки
1. Сделка, для которой законодательными актами не установлена письменная (простая или нотариальная) форма, может быть совершена устно.
2. Если иное не установлено соглашением сторон, могут совершаться устно все сделки, исполняемые при самом их совершении, за исключением сделок, для которых установлена нотариальная форма, и сделок, несоблюдение простой письменной формы которых влечет их недействительность.
3. Сделки во исполнение договора, заключенного в письменной форме, по соглашению сторон могут совершаться устно, если это не противоречит законодательству и договору.
Статья 161. Письменная форма сделки
1. Сделка в простой письменной форме должна быть совершена путем составления текстового документа, включая документ в электронном виде (в том числе электронный документ), выражающего ее содержание, который подписан лицом или лицами, совершающими сделку, либо должным образом уполномоченными ими лицами собственноручно либо с использованием средств связи и иных технических средств, компьютерных программ, информационных систем или информационных сетей, если такой способ подписания позволяет достоверно установить, что соответствующий текстовый документ подписан лицом или лицами, совершающими сделку, либо должным образом уполномоченными ими лицами (факсимильное воспроизведение собственноручной подписи с помощью средств механического или другого копирования, электронная цифровая подпись или другой аналог собственноручной подписи, обеспечивающий идентификацию соответствующих лица или лиц), и не противоречит законодательству и соглашению сторон.
Двусторонние (многосторонние) сделки могут совершаться способами, установленными пунктами 2 и 3 статьи 404 настоящего Кодекса.
В случаях, предусмотренных законодательными актами, допускаются только определенные ими способы совершения сделок в простой письменной форме.
Законодательством и соглашением сторон могут устанавливаться дополнительные требования, которым должна соответствовать форма сделки (совершение на бланке определенной формы и др.) и предусматриваться последствия несоблюдения этих требований. Если такие последствия не предусмотрены, применяются последствия несоблюдения простой письменной формы сделки (пункт 1 статьи 163).
2. Исключен.
3. Если гражданин вследствие физического недостатка, болезни или неграмотности не может собственноручно подписаться, то по его просьбе документ, выражающий содержание сделки, может подписать другой гражданин.
Подпись того, кто подписывает документ, выражающий содержание сделки, должна быть засвидетельствована нотариусом либо другим должностным лицом, имеющим право совершать такое нотариальное действие, с указанием причин, в силу которых совершающий сделку не мог подписать документ, выражающий содержание сделки, собственноручно.
Подпись того, кто подписывает документ, выражающий содержание сделки, не требующей нотариальной формы удостоверения, или того, кто подписывает доверенность на ее совершение, может быть удостоверена также организацией, где работает или учится гражданин, который не может собственноручно подписаться, организацией, осуществляющей эксплуатацию жилищного фонда и (или) предоставляющей жилищно-коммунальные услуги, по месту его жительства или организацией здравоохранения, оказывающей медицинскую помощь в стационарных условиях, в которой он находится на излечении. Указанные организации не вправе отказать гражданину, который не может собственноручно подписаться, в просьбе удостоверить подпись того, кто подписывает документ, выражающий содержание сделки, не требующей нотариальной формы удостоверения, или того, кто подписывает доверенность на ее совершение.
Статья 162. Сделки, совершаемые в простой письменной форме
В простой письменной форме должны совершаться сделки (за исключением сделок, требующих нотариального удостоверения):
1) юридических лиц между собой и с гражданами;
2) граждан между собой на сумму, превышающую не менее чем в десять раз установленный законодательством размер базовой величины, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством.
Соблюдение простой письменной формы не требуется для сделок, которые в соответствии со статьей 160 настоящего Кодекса могут быть совершены устно.
Статья 163. Последствия несоблюдения простой письменной формы сделки
1. Несоблюдение простой письменной формы сделки лишает стороны права в случае спора ссылаться в подтверждение сделки и ее условий на свидетельские показания, но не лишает их права приводить письменные и другие доказательства, не являющиеся свидетельскими показаниями.
2. В случаях, прямо указанных законодательными актами или в соглашении сторон, несоблюдение простой письменной формы сделки влечет ее недействительность.
3. Несоблюдение простой письменной формы внешнеэкономической сделки влечет недействительность сделки.
Статья 164. Нотариально удостоверенные сделки
1. Нотариальное удостоверение сделок осуществляется путем совершения на документе, соответствующем требованиям статьи 161 настоящего Кодекса, удостоверительной надписи нотариусом или другим должностным лицом, имеющим право совершать такое нотариальное действие.
2. Нотариальное удостоверение сделок обязательно в случаях:
1) указанных в законодательных актах;
2) предусмотренных соглашением сторон, хотя бы по законодательству для сделок данного вида эта форма не требовалась.
Статья 165. Государственная регистрация сделок
1. Сделки с недвижимым имуществом подлежат государственной регистрации в порядке, предусмотренном настоящим Кодексом и законодательством о государственной регистрации недвижимого имущества, прав на него и сделок с ним, если иное не установлено законодательными актами.
2. Законодательством может быть установлена регистрация сделок с движимым имуществом определенных видов.
Статья 166. Последствия несоблюдения нотариальной формы сделки и требования о ее регистрации
1. Несоблюдение нотариальной формы или требования о государственной регистрации сделки влечет ее недействительность. Такая сделка считается ничтожной.
2. Если одна из сторон полностью или частично выполнила сделку, требующую нотариального удостоверения, а другая сторона уклоняется от такого удостоверения, суд вправе по требованию исполнившей сделку стороны признать сделку действительной. В этом случае последующее нотариальное удостоверение сделки не требуется.
3. Если сделка, требующая государственной регистрации, совершена в надлежащей форме, но одна из сторон уклоняется от ее регистрации, суд вправе по требованию другой стороны вынести решение о регистрации сделки. В этом случае сделка регистрируется в соответствии с решением суда.
4. В случаях, предусмотренных пунктами 2 и 3 настоящей статьи, сторона, необоснованно уклоняющаяся от нотариального удостоверения или государственной регистрации сделки, должна возместить другой стороне убытки, вызванные задержкой в совершении или регистрации сделки.
§ 2. Недействительность сделок
Статья 167. Оспоримые и ничтожные сделки
1. Сделка является недействительной по основаниям, установленным настоящим Кодексом либо иными законодательными актами, в силу признания ее таковой судом (оспоримая сделка) либо независимо от такого признания (ничтожная сделка).
2. Требования об установлении факта ничтожности сделки и о применении последствий ее недействительности могут быть предъявлены любым заинтересованным лицом. Суд вправе установить факт ничтожности сделки и по своей инициативе. В этом случае суд применяет последствия недействительности ничтожной сделки.
3. Требования о признании оспоримой сделки недействительной могут быть предъявлены лицами, указанными в настоящем Кодексе либо в ином законодательном акте, устанавливающем оспоримость сделки.
Статья 168. Общие положения о последствиях недействительности сделок
1. Недействительная сделка не влечет юридических последствий, за исключением тех, которые связаны с ее недействительностью, и недействительна с момента ее совершения. Однако если из содержания сделки вытекает, что она может быть лишь прекращена на будущее время, суд, признавая сделку недействительной, прекращает ее действие на будущее время.
2. При недействительности сделки каждая из сторон обязана возвратить другой все полученное по сделке, а в случае невозможности возвратить полученное в натуре (в том числе тогда, когда
полученное выражается в пользовании имуществом, выполненной работе или предоставленной услуге) – возместить его стоимость в деньгах, если иные последствия недействительности сделки не предусмотрены настоящим Кодексом либо иными законодательными актами.
Статья 169. Недействительность сделки, не соответствующей законодательству
Сделка, не соответствующая требованиям законодательства, ничтожна, если законодательный акт не устанавливает, что такая сделка оспорима, или не предусматривает иных последствий нарушения.
Статья 170. Недействительность сделки, совершение которой запрещено законодательством
Сделка, совершение которой запрещено законодательством, ничтожна.
При наличии умысла у обеих сторон такой сделки – в случае исполнения сделки обеими сторонами – в доход Республики Беларусь взыскивается все полученное ими по сделке, а в случае исполнения сделки одной стороной с другой взыскивается в доход Республики Беларусь все полученное ею и все причитающееся с нее первой стороне (в возмещение полученного).
При наличии умысла лишь у одной из сторон такой сделки все полученное ею по сделке должно быть возвращено другой стороне, а полученное последней либо причитавшееся ей в возмещение исполненного взыскивается в доход Республики Беларусь.
Статья 171. Недействительность мнимой и притворной сделок
1. Мнимая сделка, то есть сделка, совершенная лишь для вида, без намерения создать соответствующие ей юридические последствия, ничтожна.
2. Притворная сделка, то есть сделка, которая совершена с целью прикрыть другую сделку, ничтожна. К сделке, которую стороны действительно имели в виду, с учетом существа сделки применяются относящиеся к ней правила.
Статья 172. Недействительность сделки, совершенной гражданином, признанным недееспособным
1. Сделка, совершенная гражданином, признанным недееспособным вследствие психического расстройства (заболевания), ничтожна.
Каждая из сторон такой сделки обязана возвратить другой все полученное в натуре, а при невозможности возвратить полученное в натуре – возместить его стоимость в деньгах.
Дееспособная сторона обязана, кроме того, возместить другой стороне понесенный ею реальный ущерб, если дееспособная сторона знала или должна была знать о недееспособности другой стороны.
2. В интересах гражданина, признанного недееспособным вследствие психического расстройства (заболевания), совершенная им сделка может быть по требованию его опекуна признана судом действительной, если она совершена к выгоде этого гражданина.
Статья 173. Недействительность сделки, совершенной несовершеннолетним, не достигшим четырнадцати лет
1. Сделка, совершенная несовершеннолетним, не достигшим четырнадцати лет (малолетним), ничтожна. К такой сделке применяются правила, предусмотренные частями второй и третьей пункта 1 статьи 172 настоящего Кодекса.
2. В интересах малолетнего совершенная им сделка может быть по требованию его родителей, усыновителей или опекуна признана судом действительной, если она совершена к выгоде малолетнего.
3. Правила настоящей статьи не распространяются на мелкие бытовые и другие сделки, которые они вправе совершать самостоятельно в соответствии со статьей 27 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 174. Недействительность сделки юридического лица, выходящей за пределы его правоспособности
Сделка, совершенная юридическим лицом в противоречии с целями его деятельности либо юридическим лицом, не имеющим специального разрешения (лицензии) на занятие соответствующей деятельностью, может быть признана судом недействительной по иску собственника имущества (учредителя, участника) этого юридического лица или государственного органа, осуществляющего контроль или надзор за деятельностью юридического лица, если другая сторона в сделке знала или в силу акта законодательства обязана была знать о ее неправомерности, но заключила такую сделку умышленно или по неосторожности.
Статья 175. Последствия ограничения полномочий на совершение сделки
Если полномочия лица на совершение сделки ограничены договором либо полномочия органа юридического лица – его учредительными документами по сравнению с тем, как они определены в доверенности, в законодательстве либо как они могут считаться очевидными из обстановки, в которой совершается сделка, и при ее совершении такое лицо или орган вышли за пределы этих ограничений, сделка может быть признана судом недействительной по иску лица, в интересах которого установлены ограничения.
Статья 176. Недействительность сделки, совершенной несовершеннолетним в возрасте от четырнадцати до восемнадцати лет
Сделка, совершенная несовершеннолетним в возрасте от четырнадцати до восемнадцати лет (кроме полностью дееспособного) без согласия его родителей, усыновителей или попечителя, в случаях, когда такое согласие требуется в соответствии со статьей 25 настоящего Кодекса, может быть признана судом недействительной по иску родителей, усыновителей или попечителя. Если такая сделка признана недействительной, соответственно применяются последствия, предусмотренные частями второй и третьей пункта 1 статьи 172 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 177. Недействительность сделки, совершенной гражданином, не способным понимать значение своих действий и руководить ими
1. Сделка, совершенная гражданином, хотя и дееспособным, но находящимся в момент ее совершения в таком состоянии, когда он не был способен понимать значение своих действий или руководить ими, может быть признана судом недействительной по иску этого гражданина либо иных лиц, чьи права или охраняемые законодательством интересы нарушены в результате ее совершения.
2. Сделка, совершенная гражданином, впоследствии признанным недееспособным, может быть признана судом недействительной по иску его опекуна, если доказано, что в момент совершения сделки гражданин не был способен понимать значение своих действий или руководить ими.
3. Если сделка признана недействительной на основании настоящей статьи, соответственно применяются правила, предусмотренные частями второй и третьей пункта 1 статьи 172 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 178. Недействительность сделки, совершенной гражданином, ограниченным судом в дееспособности
1. Сделка по распоряжению имуществом, совершенная без согласия попечителя гражданином, ограниченным судом в дееспособности вследствие злоупотребления спиртными напитками, наркотическими средствами, психотропными веществами, их аналогами, может быть признана судом недействительной по иску попечителя. Если такая сделка признана недействительной, применяются последствия, предусмотренные частями второй и третьей пункта 1 статьи 172 настоящего Кодекса.
2. Правила настоящей статьи не распространяются на мелкие бытовые сделки, которые гражданин, ограниченный в дееспособности, вправе совершать самостоятельно в соответствии со статьей 30 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 179. Недействительность сделки, совершенной под влиянием заблуждения
1. Сделка, совершенная под влиянием заблуждения, имеющего существенное значение, может быть признана судом недействительной по иску стороны, действовавшей под влиянием заблуждения.
Существенное значение имеет заблуждение относительно природы сделки, тождества или таких качеств ее предмета, которые значительно снижают возможности его использования по назначению. Заблуждение относительно мотивов сделки не имеет существенного значения.
2. Если сделка признана недействительной как совершенная под влиянием заблуждения, соответственно применяются правила, предусмотренные пунктом 2 статьи 168 настоящего Кодекса.
Кроме того, сторона, по иску которой сделка признана недействительной, вправе требовать от другой стороны возмещения причиненного ей реального ущерба, если докажет, что заблуждение возникло по вине другой стороны. Если это не будет доказано, сторона, по иску которой сделка признана недействительной, обязана возместить другой стороне по ее требованию причиненный ей реальный ущерб, даже если заблуждение возникло по обстоятельствам, не зависящим от заблуждавшейся стороны.
Статья 180. Недействительность сделки, совершенной под влиянием обмана, насилия, угрозы, злонамеренного соглашения представителя одной стороны с другой стороной или вследствие стечения тяжелых обстоятельств
1. Сделка, совершенная под влиянием обмана, насилия, угрозы, злонамеренного соглашения представителя одной стороны с другой стороной, а также сделка, которую лицо было вынуждено совершить вследствие стечения тяжелых обстоятельств на крайне не выгодных для себя условиях, чем другая сторона воспользовалась (кабальная сделка), может быть признана судом недействительной по иску любого заинтересованного лица.
2. Если сделка признана недействительной по одному из оснований, указанных в пункте 1 настоящей статьи, то потерпевшему возвращается другой стороной все полученное ею по сделке, а при невозможности возвратить полученное в натуре возмещается стоимость в деньгах. Имущество, полученное по сделке потерпевшим от другой стороны, а также причитавшееся ему в возмещение переданного другой стороне, обращается в доход Республики Беларусь. При невозможности передать имущество в доход Республики Беларусь в натуре взыскивается его стоимость в деньгах. Кроме того, потерпевшему возмещается другой стороной причиненный ему реальный ущерб.
Статья 181. Последствия недействительности части сделки
Недействительность части сделки не влечет за собой недействительности прочих ее частей, если можно предположить, что сделка была бы совершена и без включения недействительной ее части.
Статья 182. Сроки исковой давности по недействительным сделкам
1. Иск об установлении факта ничтожности сделки и о применении последствий ее недействительности может быть предъявлен в течение десяти лет со дня, когда началось ее исполнение.
Законодательными актами могут быть установлены иные сроки предъявления исков об установлении факта ничтожности отдельных видов сделок и о применении последствий недействительности таких сделок.
2. Иск о признании оспоримой сделки недействительной или о применении последствий ее недействительности может быть предъявлен в течение трех лет со дня прекращения насилия или угрозы, под влиянием которых была совершена сделка (пункт 1 статьи 180), либо со дня, когда истец узнал или должен был узнать об иных обстоятельствах, являющихся основанием для признания сделки недействительной.
ГЛАВА 10 ПРЕДСТАВИТЕЛЬСТВО. ДОВЕРЕННОСТЬ
Статья 183. Представительство
1. Сделка, совершенная одним лицом (представителем) от имени другого лица (представляемого) в силу полномочия, основанного на доверенности, законодательстве либо акте уполномоченного на то государственного органа или органа местного управления и самоуправления, непосредственно создает, изменяет и прекращает гражданские права и обязанности представляемого.
Полномочие может также явствовать из обстановки, в которой действует представитель (продавец в розничной торговле, кассир и т.п.).
2. Не являются представителями лица, действующие хотя и в чужих интересах, но от собственного имени (душеприказчики при наследовании и т.п.), лица, уполномоченные на вступление в переговоры относительно возможных в будущем сделок, а также временные (антикризисные) управляющие в процедуре банкротства, действующие от имени должника.
3. Представитель не может совершать сделки от имени представляемого в отношении себя лично. Он не может также совершать сделки в отношении другого лица, представителем которого он одновременно является, за исключением случаев коммерческого представительства.
4. Не допускается совершение через представителя сделки, которая по своему характеру может быть совершена только лично, а равно других сделок, указанных в законе.
Статья 184. Заключение сделки неуполномоченным лицом
1. При отсутствии полномочий действовать от имени другого лица или при превышении таких полномочий сделка считается заключенной от имени и в интересах совершившего ее лица, если только другое лицо (представляемый) впоследствии прямо не одобрит данную сделку.
2. Последующее одобрение сделки представляемым создает, изменяет и прекращает для него гражданские права и обязанности по данной сделке с момента ее совершения.
Статья 185. Коммерческое представительство
1. Коммерческим представителем является лицо, постоянно и самостоятельно представительствующее от имени предпринимателей при заключении ими договоров в сфере предпринимательской деятельности.
2. Одновременно коммерческое представительство разных сторон в сделке допускается с согласия этих сторон и в других случаях, предусмотренных законодательством. При этом коммерческий представитель обязан исполнять данное ему поручение с заботливостью обычного предпринимателя.
Коммерческий представитель вправе требовать уплаты обусловленного вознаграждения и возмещения, понесенных им при исполнении поручения издержек от сторон договора в равных долях, если иное не предусмотрено соглашением между ними.
3. Коммерческое представительство осуществляется на основании договора, заключенного в письменной форме и содержащего указания на полномочия представителя, а при отсутствии таких указаний – также и доверенности.
Коммерческий представитель обязан сохранять в тайне ставшие ему известными сведения о торговых сделках и после исполнения данного ему поручения.
4. Особенности коммерческого представительства в отдельных сферах предпринимательской деятельности устанавливаются законодательством.
Статья 186. Доверенность
1. Доверенностью признается письменное уполномочие, выдаваемое с учетом требований настоящей статьи одним лицом другому для представительства перед третьими лицами. Письменное уполномочие на совершение сделки представителем может быть представлено представляемым непосредственно соответствующему третьему лицу.
2. Доверенность на совершение сделок, требующих нотариальной формы, должна быть удостоверена нотариально либо в соответствии с пунктом 3 настоящей статьи, за исключением случаев, предусмотренных законодательными актами.
3. К нотариально удостоверенным доверенностям приравниваются:
1) доверенности военнослужащих и других лиц, находящихся на излечении в госпиталях, санаториях и других военно-лечебных учреждениях, удостоверенные начальниками таких учреждений, их заместителями по медицинской части, старшими или дежурными врачами;
2) доверенности военнослужащих, а в пунктах дислокации воинских частей, соединений, учреждений и учреждений образования, осуществляющих подготовку кадров по специальностям (направлениям специальностей, специализациям) для Вооруженных Сил Республики Беларусь, других войск и воинских формирований Республики Беларусь, в которых нет нотариальных контор, нотариальных бюро и других органов, совершающих нотариальные действия, также доверенности работающих в этих частях, соединениях, учреждениях гражданских лиц, членов их семей и членов семей военнослужащих, удостоверенные командирами (начальниками) этих частей, соединений или учреждений;
3) доверенности лиц, находящихся в учреждениях, исполняющих наказание в виде ареста, ограничения свободы, лишения свободы, пожизненного заключения, или местах содержания под стражей, удостоверенные начальниками соответствующих учреждений, исполняющих наказание, или руководителями администраций мест содержания под стражей;
4) исключен;
5) доверенности граждан, находящихся на излечении в больницах, госпиталях, других организациях здравоохранения, оказывающих медицинскую помощь в стационарных условиях, или проживающих в учреждениях социального обслуживания, осуществляющих стационарное социальное обслуживание, удостоверенные главными врачами, их заместителями по медицинской части или дежурными врачами этих больниц, госпиталей и других организаций здравоохранения, оказывающих медицинскую помощь в стационарных условиях, а также начальниками госпиталей, руководителями (их заместителями) учреждений социального обслуживания, осуществляющих стационарное социальное обслуживание, руководителями (их заместителями) соответствующих органов по труду, занятости и социальной защите.
4. Доверенности на получение гражданами заработной платы и иных платежей, связанных с трудовыми отношениями, на получение вознаграждения авторов и изобретателей, пенсий, пособий и стипендий, выплат гражданам в банках или небанковских кредитно-финансовых организациях и на получение корреспонденции, в том числе денежной и посылочной, на совершение иных действий, не требующих нотариальной формы удостоверения, по выбору гражданина удостоверяются нотариально или в соответствии с пунктом 3 настоящей статьи либо организацией, в которой доверитель работает или учится, организацией, осуществляющей эксплуатацию жилищного фонда и (или) предоставляющей жилищно-коммунальные услуги, по месту его жительства.
Доверенности на получение гражданами выплат в банках или небанковских кредитно-финансовых организациях, а также на распоряжение денежными средствами граждан, находящимися на их банковских счетах или размещенными в их банковские вклады (депозиты), могут быть удостоверены также банком или небанковской кредитно-финансовой организацией, в которых открыт банковский счет или размещен банковский вклад (депозит).
В случае обращения гражданина за удостоверением доверенности, указанной в частях первой и второй настоящего пункта, организация, в которой доверитель работает или учится, организация, осуществляющая эксплуатацию жилищного фонда и (или) предоставляющая жилищно- коммунальные услуги, по месту его жительства, банк или небанковская кредитно-финансовая организация, в которых открыт его банковский счет либо размещен его банковский вклад (депозит), обязаны удостоверить такую доверенность, если ее содержание не противоречит требованиям настоящего Кодекса и иных законодательных актов.
5. Доверенность от имени юридического лица выдается за подписью его руководителя или иного лица, уполномоченного на это учредительным документом этой организации. Руководитель юридического лица в пределах своей компетенции действует от его имени без доверенности.
Доверенность от имени юридического лица, основанного на собственности Республики Беларусь или собственности административно-территориальной единицы, на получение или выдачу денег и других имущественных ценностей должна быть подписана также главным бухгалтером этой организации, руководителем организации или индивидуальным предпринимателем, оказывающими услуги по ведению бухгалтерского учета и составлению отчетности, если иное не предусмотрено законодательными актами.
6. Доверенность вступает в силу со дня ее совершения в необходимой форме, когда удостоверения этой доверенности не требуется, либо со дня ее удостоверения, когда оно требуется, если более поздний срок вступления в силу не предусмотрен доверенностью.
Статья 187. Срок действия доверенности
1. Срок действия доверенности не может превышать трех лет. Если срок действия в доверенности не указан, она сохраняет силу в течение одного года со дня ее совершения. Доверенность, в которой не указана дата ее совершения, ничтожна.
2. Удостоверенная нотариусом доверенность, предназначенная для совершения действий за границей и не содержащая указания о сроке ее действия, сохраняет силу до ее отмены лицом, выдавшим доверенность.
Статья 188. Передоверие
1. Лицо, которому выдана доверенность, должно лично совершать те действия, на которые оно уполномочено. Оно может передоверить их совершение другому лицу, если уполномочено на это доверенностью либо вынуждено к этому силою обстоятельств для охраны интересов выдавшего доверенность.
2. Доверенность, выдаваемая в порядке передоверия, должна быть нотариально удостоверена, за исключением случаев, предусмотренных пунктом 4 статьи 186 настоящего Кодекса.
3. Срок действия доверенности, выданной в порядке передоверия, не может превышать срока действия доверенности, на основании которой она выдана.
4. Передавший полномочия другому лицу должен известить об этом выдавшего доверенность и сообщить ему необходимые сведения о лице, которому переданы полномочия. Неисполнение этой обязанности возлагает на передавшего полномочия ответственность за действия лица, которому он передал полномочия, как за свои собственные.
Статья 189. Прекращение доверенности
1. Действие доверенности прекращается вследствие:
1) истечения срока действия доверенности;
2) отмены доверенности лицом, выдавшим ее;
3) отказа лица, которому выдана доверенность;
4) прекращения юридического лица, от имени которого выдана доверенность;
5) прекращения юридического лица, которому выдана доверенность;
6) смерти гражданина, выдавшего доверенность, объявления его умершим, признания его недееспособным, ограниченно дееспособным или безвестно отсутствующим;
7) смерти гражданина, которому выдана доверенность, объявления его умершим, признания его недееспособным, ограниченно дееспособным или безвестно отсутствующим.
2. Лицо, выдавшее доверенность, может во всякое время отменить доверенность или передоверие, а лицо, которому доверенность выдана, – отказаться от нее. Соглашение об отказе от этих прав ничтожно.
3. С прекращением доверенности теряет силу передоверие.
Статья 190. Последствия прекращения доверенности
1. Лицо, выдавшее доверенность и впоследствии отменившее ее, обязано известить об ее отмене лицо, которому доверенность выдана, а также известных ему третьих лиц, для представительства перед которыми дана доверенность. Такая же обязанность возлагается на правопреемников лица, выдавшего доверенность, в случаях ее прекращения по основаниям, предусмотренным подпунктами 4 и 6 пункта 1 статьи 189 настоящего Кодекса.
2. Права и обязанности, возникшие в результате действий лица, которому выдана доверенность, до того, как это лицо узнало или должно было узнать о ее прекращении, сохраняют силу для выдавшего доверенность и его правопреемников в отношении третьих лиц. Это правило не применяется, если третье лицо знало или должно было знать, что действие доверенности прекратилось.
3. По прекращении доверенности лицо, которому она выдана, или его правопреемники обязаны немедленно вернуть доверенность.
ПОДРАЗДЕЛ 5 СРОКИ. ИСКОВАЯ ДАВНОСТЬ
ГЛАВА 11 ИСЧИСЛЕНИЕ СРОКОВ
Статья 191. Определение срока
1. Установленный законодательством, сделкой или назначаемый судом срок определяется календарной датой или истечением периода времени, который исчисляется годами, месяцами, неделями, днями или часами.
2. Срок может определяться также указанием на событие, которое должно неизбежно наступить.
Статья 192. Начало срока, определенного периодом времени
Течение срока, определенного периодом времени, начинается на следующий день после календарной даты или наступления события, которыми определено его начало.
Статья 193. Окончание срока, определенного периодом времени
1. Срок, исчисляемый годами, истекает в соответствующие месяц и число последнего года срока.
К сроку, определенному в полгода, применяются правила для сроков, исчисляемых месяцами. При этом полгода считаются равными соответствующим шести месяцам.
2. К сроку, исчисляемому кварталами года, применяются правила для сроков, исчисляемых месяцами. При этом квартал считается равным трем месяцам, а отсчет кварталов ведется с начала года.
3. Срок, исчисляемый месяцами, истекает в соответствующее число последнего месяца срока.
Если окончание срока, исчисляемого месяцами, приходится на такой месяц, в котором нет соответствующего числа, то срок истекает в последний день этого месяца.
Срок, определенный в полмесяца, рассматривается как срок, исчисляемый днями, и считается равным пятнадцати дням.
4. Срок, исчисляемый неделями, истекает в соответствующий день последней недели срока.
Статья 194. Окончание срока в нерабочий день
Если последний день срока приходится на нерабочий день, днем окончания срока считается ближайший следующий за ним рабочий день.
Статья 195. Порядок совершения действий в последний день срока
1. Если срок установлен для совершения какого-либо действия, оно может быть выполнено до двадцати четырех часов последнего дня срока.
Однако если это действие должно быть совершено в организации, то срок истекает в тот час, когда в этой организации по установленным правилам прекращаются соответствующие операции.
2. Письменные заявления и извещения, сданные на почту, телеграф или в иное учреждение связи до двадцати четырех часов последнего дня срока, считаются сделанными в срок.
ГЛАВА 12 ИСКОВАЯ ДАВНОСТЬ
Статья 196. Понятие исковой давности
Исковой давностью признается срок для защиты права по иску лица, право которого нарушено.
Статья 197. Общий срок исковой давности
Общий срок исковой давности устанавливается в три года.
Статья 198. Специальные сроки исковой давности
1. Для отдельных видов требований настоящим Кодексом и иными законодательными актами могут устанавливаться специальные сроки исковой давности, сокращенные или более длительные по сравнению с общим сроком.
2. Правила статей 199-208 настоящего Кодекса распространяются также на специальные сроки давности, если настоящим Кодексом и иными законодательными актами не установлено иное.
Статья 199. Недействительность соглашения об изменении сроков исковой давности
Сроки исковой давности и порядок их исчисления не могут быть изменены соглашением сторон.
Основания приостановления и перерыва течения сроков исковой давности устанавливаются законодательными актами.
Статья 200. Применение исковой давности
1. Требование о защите нарушенного права принимается к рассмотрению судом независимо от истечения срока исковой давности.
2. Исковая давность применяется судом только по заявлению стороны в споре, сделанному до вынесения судом решения.
Истечение срока исковой давности, о применении которой заявлено стороной в споре, является основанием к вынесению судом решения об отказе в иске.
Статья 201. Начало течения срока исковой давности
1. Течение срока исковой давности начинается со дня, когда лицо узнало или должно было узнать о нарушении своего права. Изъятия из этого правила устанавливаются законодательными актами.
2. По обязательствам с определенным сроком исполнения течение исковой давности начинается по окончании срока исполнения.
По обязательствам, срок исполнения которых не определен либо определен моментом востребования, течение срока исковой давности начинается, когда у кредитора возникает право предъявить требование об исполнении обязательства, а если должнику предоставляется льготный срок для исполнения такого требования, исчисление срока исковой давности начинается по окончании указанного срока.
3. По регрессным обязательствам течение срока исковой давности начинается с момента исполнения основного обязательства.
Статья 202. Срок исковой давности при перемене лиц в обязательстве
Перемена лиц в обязательстве не влечет изменения срока исковой давности и порядка его исчисления.
Статья 203. Приостановление течения срока исковой давности
1. Течение срока исковой давности приостанавливается:
1) если предъявлению иска препятствовало чрезвычайное и непредотвратимое при данных условиях обстоятельство (непреодолимая сила);
2) если истец или ответчик находится в составе Вооруженных Сил Республики Беларусь, переведенных на военное положение;
3) в силу установленной на основании законодательного акта Правительством Республики Беларусь отсрочки исполнения обязательств (мораторий);
4) в силу приостановления действия акта законодательства, регулирующего соответствующее отношение;
5) если предъявлена претензия;
6) если заключено соглашение о применении медиации.
2. Течение срока исковой давности приостанавливается при условии, если указанные в настоящей статье обстоятельства возникли или продолжали существовать в последние шесть месяцев срока давности, а если этот срок равен шести месяцам или менее шести месяцев, – в течение срока давности.
3. Со дня прекращения обстоятельства, послужившего основанием приостановления давности, течение ее срока продолжается. Оставшаяся часть срока удлиняется до шести месяцев, а если срок исковой давности равен шести месяцам или менее шести месяцев, – до срока давности.
При предъявлении претензии течение срока исковой давности приостанавливается со дня направления претензии до получения ответа на претензию или истечения срока для ответа, установленного законодательством или договором.
В случае заключения соглашения о применении медиации течение срока исковой давности приостанавливается со дня заключения такого соглашения до дня прекращения медиации.
Статья 204. Перерыв течения срока исковой давности
Течение срока исковой давности прерывается предъявлением иска в установленном порядке, а также совершением обязанным лицом действий, свидетельствующих о признании долга.
После перерыва течение срока исковой давности начинается заново. Время, истекшее до перерыва, не засчитывается в новый срок.
Статья 205. Течение срока исковой давности в случае оставления иска без рассмотрения
Если иск оставлен судом без рассмотрения, то начавшееся до предъявления иска течение срока исковой давности продолжается в общем порядке.
Если судом оставлен без рассмотрения иск, предъявленный в уголовном деле, то начавшееся до предъявления иска течение срока исковой давности приостанавливается до вступления в законную силу приговора, которым иск оставлен без рассмотрения. Время, в течение которого давность была приостановлена, не засчитывается в срок исковой давности. При этом если оставшаяся часть срока менее шести месяцев, она удлиняется до шести месяцев.
Статья 206. Восстановление срока исковой давности
В исключительных случаях, когда суд признает уважительной причину пропуска срока исковой давности по обстоятельствам, связанным с личностью истца (тяжелая болезнь, беспомощное состояние, неграмотность и т.п.), нарушенное право гражданина подлежит защите. Причины пропуска срока исковой давности могут признаваться уважительными, если они имели место в последние шесть месяцев срока давности, а если этот срок равен шести месяцам или менее шести месяцев, – в течение срока давности.
Статья 207. Исполнение обязанности по истечении срока исковой давности
В случае исполнения обязанности должником или иным обязанным лицом по истечении срока исковой давности эти лица не вправе требовать исполненное обратно, хотя бы в момент исполнения они и не знали об истечении срока давности.
Статья 208. Применение исковой давности к дополнительным требованиям
С истечением срока исковой давности по главному требованию истекает срок исковой давности и по дополнительным требованиям (неустойка, залог, поручительство и т.п.).
Статья 209. Требования, на которые исковая давность не распространяется
Исковая давность не распространяется на:
1) требования, вытекающие из нарушения личных неимущественных прав и других нематериальных благ, кроме случаев, предусмотренных законодательными актами;
2) требования вкладчиков к банку или небанковской кредитно-финансовой организации о возврате банковских вкладов (депозитов);
3) требования о возмещении вреда, причиненного жизни или здоровью гражданина. Однако требования, предъявленные по истечении трех лет с момента возникновения права на возмещение вреда, удовлетворяются не более чем за три года, предшествовавшие предъявлению иска;
4) требования собственника или иного законного владельца об устранении всяких нарушений его права, хотя бы эти нарушения и не были соединены с лишением владения (статья 285);
5) другие требования в случаях, установленных законодательными актами.
РАЗДЕЛ II ПРАВО СОБСТВЕННОСТИ И ДРУГИЕ ВЕЩНЫЕ ПРАВА
ГЛАВА 13 ОБЩИЕ ПОЛОЖЕНИЯ
Статья 210. Содержание права собственности
1. Собственнику принадлежат права владения, пользования и распоряжения своим имуществом.
2. Собственник вправе по своему усмотрению совершать в отношении принадлежащего ему имущества любые действия, не противоречащие законодательству, общественной пользе и безопасности, не наносящие вреда окружающей среде, историко-культурным ценностям и не ущемляющие прав и защищаемых законом интересов других лиц, в том числе отчуждать свое имущество в собственность другим лицам, передавать им, оставаясь собственником, права владения, пользования и распоряжения имуществом, отдавать имущество в залог и обременять его другими способами, а также распоряжаться им иным образом.
Право собственности на имущество, приобретенное унитарным предприятием, государственным объединением или учреждением по договорам или иным основаниям, приобретается собственником имущества этого унитарного предприятия, государственного объединения или учреждения.
3. Владение, пользование и распоряжение землей и другими природными ресурсами в той мере, в какой их оборот допускается законодательством, осуществляется их собственником свободно, если это не наносит ущерба окружающей среде и не нарушает права и защищаемые законом интересы других лиц.
4. Собственник может передать свое имущество в доверительное управление другому лицу (доверительному управляющему). Передача имущества в доверительное управление не влечет перехода права собственности к доверительному управляющему, который обязан осуществлять управление имуществом в интересах собственника или указанного им третьего лица.
5. Право собственности бессрочно.
Статья 211. Бремя содержания имущества
Собственник несет бремя содержания принадлежащего ему имущества, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором.
Статья 212. Риск случайной гибели имущества
Риск случайной гибели, случайной порчи или случайного повреждения имущества несет его собственник, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором.
Статья 213. Формы и субъекты права собственности
1. Собственность может быть государственной и частной.
2. Субъектами права государственной собственности являются Республика Беларусь и административно-территориальные единицы.
3. Субъектами права частной собственности являются физические и негосударственные юридические лица.
4. Особенности приобретения и прекращения права собственности на имущество, владения, пользования и распоряжения им в зависимости от того, находится имущество в собственности гражданина или юридического лица, в собственности Республики Беларусь или административно-
территориальных единиц, могут устанавливаться законодательством, а в случаях, предусмотренных Конституцией Республики Беларусь, – только законом.
5. Права всех собственников защищаются равным образом.
Статья 214. Право собственности граждан и юридических лиц
1. В собственности граждан и юридических лиц может находиться любое имущество, за исключением отдельных видов имущества, которое в соответствии с законом не может находиться в собственности граждан или юридических лиц.
2. Количество и стоимость имущества, находящегося в собственности граждан, не ограничиваются, за исключением случаев, когда такие ограничения установлены законом в интересах национальной безопасности, общественного порядка, защиты нравственности, здоровья населения, прав и свобод других лиц. Для юридических лиц такие ограничения могут быть установлены законодательными актами.
3. Имущество, переданное в качестве вкладов (взносов) учредителями (участниками, членами) коммерческим и некоммерческим организациям (кроме переданного унитарным предприятиям, государственным объединениям либо учреждениям, финансируемым собственником), а также имущество, приобретенное этими юридическими лицами, находится в собственности этих юридических лиц.
4. Учредители (участники, члены) коммерческой организации в отношении имущества, находящегося в собственности этой организации, имеют обязательственные права, определяемые в ее учредительных документах.
5. Имущество, приобретенное общественными и религиозными организациями, благотворительными и иными фондами, находится в их собственности и может использоваться лишь для достижения целей, предусмотренных их учредительными документами.
Учредители (участники, члены) этих организаций утрачивают право на имущество, переданное ими в собственность соответствующей организации. В случае ликвидации такой организации ее имущество, оставшееся после удовлетворения требований кредиторов, используется в целях, указанных в ее учредительных документах.
Статья 215. Право государственной собственности
1. Государственная собственность выступает в виде республиканской собственности (собственность Республики Беларусь) и коммунальной собственности (собственность административно-территориальных единиц).
2. Республиканская собственность состоит из казны Республики Беларусь и имущества, закрепленного за республиканскими юридическими лицами в соответствии с актами законодательства.
Средства республиканского бюджета, золотовалютные резервы, другие объекты, находящиеся только в собственности государства, и иное государственное имущество, не закрепленные за республиканскими юридическими лицами, составляют казну Республики Беларусь.
3. Коммунальная собственность состоит из казны административно-территориальной единицы и имущества, закрепленного за коммунальными юридическими лицами в соответствии с актами законодательства. Средства местного бюджета и иное коммунальное имущество, не закрепленное за коммунальными юридическими лицами, составляют казну соответствующей административно- территориальной единицы.
Статья 216. Имущество государственных юридических лиц
Имущество, находящееся в государственной собственности, может закрепляться за государственными юридическими лицами на праве хозяйственного ведения или оперативного управления.
Статья 217. Вещные права лиц, не являющихся собственниками
1. Вещными правами наряду с правом собственности, в частности, являются:
1) право хозяйственного ведения и право оперативного управления (статьи 276 и 277);
2) право пожизненного наследуемого владения земельным участком;
3) право постоянного пользования земельным участком и право временного пользования земельным участком;
4) сервитуты (статья 268).
2. Переход права собственности на имущество к другому лицу не является основанием для прекращения иных вещных прав на это имущество.
3. Вещные права лица, не являющегося собственником, защищаются от их нарушения в порядке, предусмотренном статьей 286 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 218. Приватизация государственного имущества
Приватизация имущества, находящегося в государственной собственности, осуществляется в порядке, предусмотренном законодательством о приватизации.
При приватизации имущества, находящегося в республиканской и коммунальной собственности, предусмотренные настоящим Кодексом положения, регулирующие порядок приобретения и прекращения права собственности, применяются, если законодательством о приватизации не предусмотрено иное.
ГЛАВА 14 ПРИОБРЕТЕНИЕ ПРАВА СОБСТВЕННОСТИ
Статья 219. Основания приобретения права собственности
1. Право собственности на новую вещь, изготовленную или созданную лицом для себя с соблюдением законодательства, приобретается этим лицом.
Право собственности на плоды, продукцию, доходы, полученные в результате использования имущества, приобретается по основаниям, предусмотренным статьей 136 настоящего Кодекса.
2. Право собственности на имущество, которое имеет собственника, может быть приобретено другим лицом на основании договора купли-продажи, мены, дарения или иной сделки об отчуждении этого имущества.
В случае смерти гражданина право собственности на его имущество наследуется в соответствии с завещанием или законом.
В случае реорганизации юридического лица право собственности на принадлежавшее ему имущество переходит к юридическим лицам – правопреемникам реорганизованного юридического лица (статья 54).
Отчуждение имущества другому лицу помимо воли собственника не допускается, кроме случаев, предусмотренных законодательством.
3. В случаях и порядке, предусмотренных законодательством, лицо может приобрести право собственности на имущество, не имеющее собственника, на имущество, собственник которого неизвестен, либо на имущество, от которого собственник отказался или на которое он утратил право собственности по иным основаниям, предусмотренным законодательством.
4. Члены жилищного, жилищно-строительного, дачного, гаражного или иного потребительского кооператива, другие лица, имеющие право на паенакопления, полностью внесшие свой паевой взнос за квартиру, дачу, гараж, иное помещение, машино-место, предоставленные этим лицам кооперативом в пользование, приобретают право собственности на указанное имущество с момента регистрации этого права в установленном порядке.
Статья 220. Возникновение права собственности на вновь создаваемое недвижимое имущество
1. Право собственности на строящиеся капитальные строения (здания, сооружения) и другое вновь создаваемое недвижимое имущество возникает с момента завершения создания этого имущества, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством.
2. В случаях, когда вновь созданное недвижимое имущество подлежит государственной регистрации, право собственности на него возникает с момента такой регистрации, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством.
3. До завершения создания недвижимого имущества, а в соответствующих случаях – до его государственной регистрации, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством, к имуществу применяются правила о праве собственности на материалы и другое имущество, из которого недвижимое имущество создается.
Статья 221. Переработка
1. Поскольку иное не предусмотрено договором, право собственности на новую движимую вещь, изготовленную лицом путем переработки не принадлежащих ему материалов, приобретается собственником материалов. Однако если стоимость переработки существенно превышает стоимость материалов, право собственности на новую вещь приобретает лицо, которое, действуя добросовестно, осуществило переработку для себя.
2. Если иное не предусмотрено договором, собственник материалов, приобретший право собственности на изготовленную из них вещь, обязан возместить стоимость переработки осуществившему ее лицу, а в случае приобретения права собственности на новую вещь этим лицом последнее обязано возместить собственнику материалов их стоимость.
3. Собственник материалов, утративший их в результате недобросовестных действий лица, осуществившего переработку, вправе требовать передачи новой вещи в его собственность и возмещения причиненных ему убытков.
Статья 222. Обращение в собственность общедоступных для сбора вещей
В случаях, когда в соответствии с законодательством, общим разрешением, данным собственником, или в соответствии с местным обычаем в лесах, водоемах или на другой территории допускается сбор ягод, лов рыбы, сбор или добыча других общедоступных вещей и животных, право собственности на соответствующие вещи приобретает лицо, осуществившее их сбор или добычу.
Статья 223. Самовольное строительство и его последствия
1. Самовольное строительство – деятельность лица по созданию или изменению недвижимого имущества путем строительства, реконструкции (пристройки, надстройки, перестройки) капитального строения (здания, сооружения), если она осуществлена:
1) на самовольно занятом земельном участке;
2) на земельном участке, используемом не по целевому назначению либо предоставленном государственным органом, не имеющим полномочий на принятие соответствующего решения, и (или) без проведения аукциона, когда предоставление земельного участка возможно только по результатам аукциона, и (или) предоставленном с нарушением установленной очередности предоставления земельных участков, и (или) без предварительного согласования места размещения земельного участка, если в соответствии с законодательными актами требуется его проведение;
3) без получения необходимых разрешений на строительство, реконструкцию либо без проектной документации в случаях, когда необходимость ее подготовки предусмотрена законодательством, либо с существенными нарушениями градостроительных и строительных норм и правил*, если иное не установлено Президентом Республики Беларусь.
Недвижимое имущество, созданное в результате самовольного строительства, является самовольной постройкой.
Самовольное строительство должно быть незамедлительно приостановлено.
______________________________
*Под существенными нарушениями градостроительных и строительных норм и правил для целей настоящего Кодекса понимаются нарушения, которые могут создать потенциальную угрозу нарушения прав и охраняемых законодательством интересов других лиц, жизни или здоровью граждан, имуществу граждан и юридических лиц, нарушить установленные утвержденной градостроительной документацией регламенты использования территории, а также причинить вред окружающей среде, снизить эксплуатационную пригодность объекта.
2. Лицо, осуществившее самовольное строительство, не приобретает права собственности на самовольную постройку в соответствии с пунктами 1 и 2 статьи 220 настоящего Кодекса и не вправе пользоваться и распоряжаться самовольной постройкой – продавать, дарить, сдавать в аренду, совершать другие сделки.
3. При самовольном строительстве в случае, предусмотренном подпунктом 1 части первой пункта 1 настоящей статьи, местным исполнительным и распорядительным органом принимается, если иное не установлено Президентом Республики Беларусь, решение о возврате самовольно занятого земельного участка, сносе самовольной постройки и приведении земельного участка в пригодное для использования по целевому назначению состояние в порядке, предусмотренном законодательством об охране и использовании земель.
4. При самовольном строительстве, в том числе при приобретении лицом земельного участка с расположенной на нем самовольной постройкой (далее в настоящей статье – законный приобретатель), в случаях, предусмотренных подпунктом 2 части первой пункта 1 настоящей статьи, областным (Минским городским) исполнительным комитетом принимаются в отношении земельного участка решение в порядке, предусмотренном законодательством об охране и использовании земель, а также, если иное не установлено Президентом Республики Беларусь, одно из следующих решений:
1) о сносе самовольной постройки и приведении земельного участка в пригодное для использования по целевому назначению состояние с определением в таком решении сроков выполнения этих действий;
2) о приведении самовольной постройки в прежнее, до осуществления самовольного строительства, состояние с определением в таком решении сроков выполнения этих действий.
За лицом, осуществившим на земельном участке, предоставленном в частную собственность либо пожизненное наследуемое владение, самовольное строительство (в том числе за законным приобретателем) в случаях, предусмотренных подпунктом 2 части первой пункта 1 настоящей статьи, по решению суда может быть признано право собственности на самовольную постройку, если сохранение самовольной постройки не влечет существенных нарушений градостроительных и строительных норм и правил.
Признание судом права собственности на самовольную постройку является основанием для принятия местным исполнительным и распорядительным органом решения о продолжении строительства (принятии самовольной постройки в эксплуатацию и ее государственной регистрации в установленном порядке) и о предоставлении земельного участка в порядке, предусмотренном законодательством об охране и использовании земель.
Подача в суд заявления о признании права собственности на самовольную постройку в течение сроков, указанных в решении областного (Минского городского) исполнительного комитета, либо обжалование в установленном порядке такого решения приостанавливает его исполнение.
5. При самовольном строительстве, в том числе в отношении законного приобретателя, в случаях нарушения законодательства по основаниям, указанным в подпункте 3 части первой пункта 1 настоящей статьи, местным исполнительным и распорядительным органом принимается, если иное не установлено Президентом Республики Беларусь, одно из следующих решений:
1) о продолжении строительства (принятии самовольной постройки в эксплуатацию и ее государственной регистрации в установленном порядке) – если сохранение постройки не влечет существенных нарушений градостроительных и строительных норм и правил;
2) о сносе самовольной постройки и приведении земельного участка в пригодное для использования по целевому назначению состояние с определением в таком решении сроков выполнения этих действий – если сохранение постройки влечет существенные нарушения градостроительных и строительных норм и правил;
3) о приведении самовольной постройки в прежнее, до осуществления самовольного строительства, состояние с определением в таком решении сроков выполнения этих действий – если сохранение постройки влечет существенные нарушения градостроительных и строительных норм и правил.
Обжалование в установленном порядке решения местного исполнительного и распорядительного органа, указанного в подпунктах 2 и 3 части первой настоящего пункта, приостанавливает его исполнение.
6. Снос самовольной постройки, приведение земельного участка в пригодное для использования по целевому назначению состояние или приведение самовольной постройки в прежнее, до осуществления самовольного строительства, состояние на основании вступившего в силу решения местного исполнительного и распорядительного органа, принятого в соответствии с частью первой пункта 4, а также подпунктами 2 или 3 части первой пункта 5 настоящей статьи, выполняется лицом, осуществившим самовольное строительство, либо законным приобретателем, либо за счет таких лиц.
В случаях нарушения законодательства по основаниям, указанным в подпунктах 2 и 3 части первой пункта 1 настоящей статьи, законный приобретатель, выполнивший требования, предусмотренные частью первой настоящего пункта, вправе предъявить регрессное требование к лицу, осуществившему отчуждение такого земельного участка, о возмещении понесенных затрат.
7. В случае отказа лица, осуществившего самовольное строительство, законного приобретателя выполнить вступившее в силу решение местного исполнительного и распорядительного органа, принятое в соответствии с частью первой пункта 4, а также подпунктами 2 или 3 части первой пункта 5 настоящей статьи, или невыполнения этого решения в установленный срок либо в случае непризнания судом права собственности на самовольную постройку в соответствии с частью второй пункта 4 настоящей статьи местным исполнительным и распорядительным органом (уполномоченной им организацией) производятся снос самовольной постройки и приведение земельного участка в пригодное для использования по целевому назначению состояние или приведение постройки в прежнее, до осуществления самовольного строительства, состояние, за исключением случаев, указанных в пункте 8 настоящей статьи.
8. Отказ лица, осуществившего самовольное строительство на земельном участке, находящемся в государственной собственности (за исключением земельного участка, предоставленного в пожизненное наследуемое владение), выполнить вступившее в силу решение областного (Минского городского) исполнительного комитета, принятое в соответствии с частью первой пункта 4 настоящей статьи, или невыполнение этого решения в установленный срок признается отказом от права собственности на материалы, из которых возведена самовольная постройка.
В этом случае местный исполнительный и распорядительный орган (уполномоченная им организация) осуществляет одно из следующих действий:
производит снос самовольной постройки или приводит постройку в прежнее, до осуществления самовольного строительства, состояние (если сохранение постройки влечет существенные нарушения градостроительных и строительных норм и правил), а также приводит земельный участок в пригодное для использования по целевому назначению состояние;
подает в суд заявление о признании материалов, из которых возведена самовольная постройка, бесхозяйными и признании права коммунальной собственности на них (если сохранение постройки не влечет существенных нарушений градостроительных и строительных норм и правил). После вступления в силу решения суда местный исполнительный и распорядительный орган принимает решение о дальнейшем использовании материалов, из которых возведена самовольная постройка, в том числе о продолжении строительства (принятии самовольной постройки в эксплуатацию и ее государственной регистрации в установленном порядке), и о предоставлении земельного участка в порядке, предусмотренном законодательством об охране и использовании земель.
9. Взыскание затрат на осуществление сноса самовольной постройки или приведение постройки в прежнее, до осуществления самовольного строительства, состояние, приведение земельного участка в пригодное для использования по целевому назначению состояние в соответствии с пунктом 7 и абзацем вторым части второй пункта 8 настоящей статьи производится в судебном порядке.
10. В случае, если самовольное строительство осуществлено на земельном участке, предоставленном государственным органом, не имеющим полномочий на принятие соответствующего решения, и (или) без проведения аукциона, когда предоставление земельного участка возможно только по результатам аукциона, и (или) предоставленном с нарушением установленной очередности предоставления земельных участков, и (или) без предварительного согласования места размещения земельного участка, если в соответствии с законодательными актами требуется его проведение, причиненный лицу вред в результате незаконных действий (бездействия) государственных органов либо их должностных лиц возмещается в соответствии со статьей 938 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 224. Момент возникновения права собственности у приобретателя по договору
1. Право собственности у приобретателя вещи по договору возникает с момента ее передачи, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором.
2. Если договор об отчуждении имущества подлежит государственной регистрации, право собственности у приобретателя возникает с момента его регистрации, если иное не установлено законодательством.
Статья 225. Передача вещи
1. Передачей признается вручение вещи приобретателю, а равно сдача перевозчику для отправки приобретателю или сдача в организацию связи для пересылки приобретателю вещей, отчужденных без обязательства доставки.
Вещь считается врученной приобретателю с момента ее фактического поступления во владение приобретателя или указанного им лица.
2. Если к моменту заключения договора об отчуждении вещи она уже находится во владении приобретателя, вещь признается переданной ему с этого момента.
3. К передаче вещи приравнивается передача коносамента или иного товарораспорядительного документа на нее.
Статья 226. Бесхозяйные вещи
1. Бесхозяйной является вещь, которая не имеет собственника или собственник которой неизвестен, либо вещь, от права собственности на которую собственник отказался.
2. Если это не исключается правилами настоящего Кодекса о приобретении права собственности на вещи, от которых собственник отказался (статья 227), о находке (статьи 228 и 229), о безнадзорных животных (статьи 231 и 232), о кладе (статья 234), об антикварном, историческом оружии и боеприпасах, ином вооружении или военной технике (статья 2341), об археологических артефактах (статья 2342), право собственности на бесхозяйные движимые вещи может быть приобретено в силу приобретательной давности (статья 235).
3. Бесхозяйные недвижимые вещи принимаются на учет организациями по государственной регистрации недвижимого имущества, прав на него и сделок с ним по заявлению соответствующего государственного органа, если иное не предусмотрено законодательными актами.
Право коммунальной собственности на бесхозяйную недвижимую вещь может быть признано судом.
Бесхозяйная недвижимая вещь, не признанная по решению суда поступившей в коммунальную собственность, может быть вновь принята во владение, пользование и распоряжение оставившим ее собственником либо приобретена в собственность в силу приобретательной давности (статья 235).
4. Материалы, из которых возведена самовольная постройка, признаются бесхозяйными по основаниям, предусмотренным статьей 223 настоящего Кодекса, в порядке, установленном гражданским процессуальным законодательством.
Статья 227. Движимые вещи, от которых собственник отказался
1. Движимые вещи, брошенные собственником или иным образом оставленные им (брошенные вещи) с целью отказа от права собственности на них (статья 237), могут быть обращены другими
лицами в свою собственность в порядке, установленном пунктом 2 настоящей статьи.
2. Лицо, в собственности, владении или пользовании которого находится земельный участок, водоем или иной объект, где находится брошенная вещь, стоимость которой явно ниже суммы, соответствующей пятикратному размеру базовой величины, либо брошенные лом металлов, бракованная продукция, топляк от сплава, отвалы и сливы, образуемые при добыче полезных ископаемых, отходы производства и другие отходы, имеет право обратить эти вещи в свою собственность, приступив к их использованию или совершив иные действия, свидетельствующие об обращении вещи в собственность.
Другие брошенные вещи поступают в собственность лица, вступившего во владение ими, если по заявлению этого лица они признаны судом бесхозяйными.
Статья 228. Находка
1. Нашедший потерянную вещь обязан немедленно уведомить об этом лицо, потерявшее ее, или собственника вещи, или кого-либо другого из известных ему лиц, имеющих право получить ее, и возвратить найденную вещь этому лицу.
Если вещь найдена в помещении или на транспорте, она подлежит сдаче лицу, представляющему владельца этого помещения или средства транспорта. В этом случае лицо, которому сдана находка, приобретает права и несет обязанности лица, нашедшего вещь.
2. Нашедший вещь обязан заявить о находке в орган внутренних дел или орган местного управления и самоуправления, если лицо, имеющее право потребовать возврата найденной вещи, или место его пребывания неизвестны.
3. Нашедший вещь вправе хранить ее у себя либо сдать на хранение в орган внутренних дел, орган местного управления и самоуправления или указанному ими лицу.
Скоропортящаяся вещь или вещь, издержки по хранению которой несоизмеримо велики по сравнению с ее стоимостью, может быть реализована нашедшими вещь с получением письменных доказательств, удостоверяющих сумму выручки. Деньги, вырученные от продажи найденной вещи, подлежат возврату лицу, управомоченному на ее получение.
4. Нашедший вещь отвечает за ее утрату или повреждение лишь в случае умысла или грубой неосторожности и в пределах стоимости вещи.
Статья 229. Приобретение права собственности на находку
1. Если в течение шести месяцев с момента заявления о находке в орган внутренних дел или орган местного управления и самоуправления (пункт 2 статьи 228) лицо, управомоченное на получение утерянной вещи, не будет установлено и не заявит о своем праве на вещь нашедшему ее лицу, либо в орган внутренних дел, либо орган местного управления и самоуправления, нашедший вещь приобретает право собственности на нее.
2. Если нашедший вещь откажется от приобретения ее в собственность, найденная вещь поступает в коммунальную собственность.
Статья 230. Возмещение расходов, связанных с находкой, и вознаграждение нашедшему вещь
1. Нашедший и возвративший вещь лицу, управомоченному на ее получение, имеет право получить от этого лица, а в случаях перехода вещи в коммунальную собственность – от соответствующего органа местного управления и самоуправления возмещение необходимых расходов, связанных с хранением, сдачей или реализацией вещи, а также затрат на обнаружение лица, управомоченного получить вещь.
2. Нашедший вещь вправе потребовать от лица, управомоченного на получение вещи, вознаграждение за находку в размере до двадцати процентов стоимости вещи. Если найденная вещь представляет ценность только для лица, управомоченного на ее получение, размер вознаграждения определяется по соглашению с этим лицом, а в случае недостижения соглашения – судом.
Право на вознаграждение не возникает, если нашедший вещь не заявил о находке или попытался ее утаить.
Статья 231. Безнадзорные животные
1. Лицо, задержавшее безнадзорный или пригульный скот или других безнадзорных домашних животных, обязано возвратить их собственнику, а если собственник животных или место его пребывания неизвестны, не позднее трех дней с момента задержания заявить об обнаруженных животных в орган внутренних дел или орган местного управления и самоуправления, которые принимают меры к розыску собственника.
2. На время розыска собственника животных они могут быть оставлены лицом, задержавшим их, у себя на содержании и в пользовании либо сданы на содержание и в пользование другому лицу, имеющему необходимые для этого условия. По просьбе лица, задержавшего безнадзорных животных, подыскание лица, имеющего необходимые условия для их содержания, и передачу ему животных осуществляет орган внутренних дел или орган местного управления и самоуправления.
3. Лицо, задержавшее безнадзорных животных, или лицо, которому они переданы на содержание и в пользование, обязаны их надлежаще содержать и при наличии вины отвечают за гибель и порчу животных в пределах их стоимости.
Статья 232. Приобретение права собственности на безнадзорных животных
1. Если в течение шести месяцев с момента заявления о задержании безнадзорных домашних животных их собственник не будет обнаружен или сам не заявит о своем праве на них, лицо, у которого животное находилось на содержании и в пользовании, приобретает право собственности на них.
При отказе этого лица от приобретения в собственность содержавшихся у него животных они поступают в коммунальную собственность и используются в порядке, определяемом органом местного управления и самоуправления.
2. В случае явки прежнего собственника животных после перехода их в собственность другого лица прежний собственник вправе при наличии обстоятельств, свидетельствующих о сохранении к нему привязанности со стороны этих животных или о жестоком либо ином ненадлежащем обращении с ними нового собственника, потребовать их возврата на условиях, определяемых по соглашению с новым собственником, а при недостижении соглашения – судом.
Статья 233. Возмещение расходов на содержание безнадзорных животных и вознаграждение за них
1. В случае возврата безнадзорных домашних животных собственнику лицо, задержавшее животных, и лицо, у которого они находились на содержании и в пользовании, имеют право на возмещение их собственником необходимых расходов, связанных с содержанием животных, с зачетом выгод, извлеченных от пользования ими.
2. Лицо, задержавшее безнадзорных домашних животных, имеет право потребовать от их собственника вознаграждение в соответствии с пунктом 2 статьи 230 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 234. Клад
1. Клад, то есть зарытые в земле или сокрытые иным способом деньги или ценные предметы, собственник которых не может быть установлен либо в силу акта законодательства утратил на них право, поступает в собственность лица, которому принадлежит имущество (земельный участок, строения и т.п.), где клад был сокрыт, и лица, обнаружившего клад, в равных долях, если соглашением между ними не установлено иное.
При обнаружении клада лицом, производившим раскопки или поиски ценностей без согласия на это собственника земельного участка или иного имущества, где клад был сокрыт, клад подлежит передаче собственнику земельного участка или иного имущества, в котором был обнаружен клад.
Правила частей первой и второй настоящего пункта не применяются в отношении кладов, состоящих из археологических артефактов.
2. В случае обнаружения клада, состоящего из материальных культурных ценностей, обладающих отличительными духовными, художественными и (или) документальными достоинствами и соответствующих одному из критериев для придания им статуса историко-культурной ценности, такие материальные культурные ценности подлежат передаче в государственную собственность. При этом собственник земельного участка или иного имущества, где клад был сокрыт, и лицо, обнаружившее клад, имеют право на получение вместе вознаграждения в размере пятидесяти процентов стоимости клада. Вознаграждение распределяется между этими лицами в равных долях, если соглашением между ними не установлено иное.
При обнаружении такого клада лицом, производившим раскопки или поиски ценностей без согласия собственника имущества, где клад был сокрыт, вознаграждение этому лицу не выплачивается и полностью поступает собственнику.
3. Правила настоящей статьи не применяются к лицам, в круг трудовых или служебных обязанностей которых входило проведение раскопок и поиска, направленных на обнаружение клада.
Статья 2341. Приобретение права собственности на бесхозяйные антикварное, историческое оружие и боеприпасы, иное вооружение или военную технику
Если иное не установлено Президентом Республики Беларусь, в случае обнаружения бесхозяйных антикварного, исторического оружия и боеприпасов, иного вооружения или военной техники при проведении поисковых работ, раскопок либо иным образом указанные вещи подлежат передаче в государственную собственность в порядке, установленном законодательством.
Статья 2342. Приобретение права собственности на археологические артефакты
Если иное не установлено законодательными актами, археологические артефакты, обнаруженные при проведении археологических исследований либо иным образом, подлежат передаче в государственную собственность в порядке, установленном законодательством.
В случае обнаружения археологических артефактов, являющихся кладом, обладающих отличительными духовными, художественными и (или) документальными достоинствами и соответствующих одному из критериев для придания им статуса историко-культурной ценности, применяются правила, предусмотренные пунктами 2 и 3 статьи 234 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 235. Приобретательная давность
1. Лицо – гражданин или юридическое лицо, в собственности которого не находится имущество, но которое добросовестно, открыто и непрерывно владеет им как своим собственным недвижимым имуществом в течение пятнадцати лет либо иным имуществом в течение пяти лет, приобретает право собственности на это имущество (приобретательная давность).
Право собственности на недвижимое и иное имущество, подлежащее государственной регистрации, возникает у лица, приобретшего это имущество в силу приобретательной давности, с момента такой регистрации.
2. До приобретения на имущество права собственности в силу приобретательной давности лицо, владеющее имуществом как своим собственным, имеет право на защиту своего владения против третьих лиц, не являющихся собственниками имущества, а также не имеющих прав на владение им в силу иного предусмотренного законодательством или договором основания.
3. Лицо, ссылающееся на давность владения, может присоединить ко времени своего владения все время, в течение которого этим имуществом владел тот, чьим правопреемником это лицо является.
4. Течение срока приобретательной давности в отношении вещей, находящихся у лица, из владения которого они могли быть истребованы в соответствии со статьями 282-284 и 286 настоящего Кодекса, начинается со дня, следующего за днем истечения срока исковой давности по соответствующим требованиям.
ГЛАВА 15 ПРЕКРАЩЕНИЕ ПРАВА СОБСТВЕННОСТИ
Статья 236. Основания прекращения права собственности
1. Право собственности прекращается при отчуждении собственником своего имущества другим лицам, отказе собственника от права собственности, гибели или уничтожении имущества, утрате права собственности на имущество и в иных случаях, предусмотренных законодательством.
2. Принудительное изъятие у собственника имущества не допускается, кроме случаев, когда по основаниям, предусмотренным законом, а также согласно постановлению суда производятся:
1) обращение взыскания на имущество по обязательствам (статья 238);
2) отчуждение имущества, которое в силу акта законодательства не может принадлежать данному лицу (статья 239);
3) отчуждение недвижимого имущества в связи с изъятием земельного участка (статья 240);
4) выкуп бесхозяйственно содержимых культурных ценностей (статья 241), выкуп домашних животных (статья 242);
5) реквизиция (статья 243);
6) конфискация (статья 244);
7) отчуждение имущества в случаях, предусмотренных пунктом 4 статьи 255 и статьей 2751;
8) приватизация (статья 218);
9) национализация (статья 245);
10) безвозмездное изъятие имущества в случаях, предусмотренных законодательными актами в сфере борьбы с коррупцией.
Статья 237. Отказ от права собственности
1. Гражданин или юридическое лицо может отказаться от права собственности на принадлежащее ему имущество, объявив об этом либо совершив другие действия, определенно свидетельствующие
о его устранении от владения, пользования и распоряжения имуществом без намерения сохранить какие-либо права на это имущество.
Признается отказом от права собственности на материалы, из которых возведена самовольная постройка, отказ лица, осуществившего самовольное строительство на земельном участке, находящемся в государственной собственности (за исключением земельного участка, предоставленного в пожизненное наследуемое владение), выполнить вступившее в законную силу решение областного (Минского городского) исполнительного комитета, принятое в соответствии с частью первой пункта 4 статьи 223 настоящего Кодекса, или невыполнение такого решения в установленный срок.
2. Отказ от права собственности, за исключением отказа от права собственности на материалы, из которых возведена самовольная постройка, предусмотренного частью второй пункта 1 настоящей статьи, не влечет прекращения прав и обязанностей собственника в отношении соответствующего имущества до момента приобретения права собственности на данное имущество другим лицом, за исключением случаев, когда имущество в соответствии с законодательством подвергнуто утилизации или уничтожению.
Статья 238. Обращение взыскания на имущество по обязательствам собственника
1. Изъятие имущества путем обращения взыскания на имущество по обязательствам собственника производится на основании решения суда, если иной порядок обращения взыскания не предусмотрен законодательством или договором.
2. Право собственности на имущество, на которое обращается взыскание, прекращается у собственника с момента возникновения права собственности на изъятое имущество у лица, к которому переходит это имущество.
Статья 239. Прекращение права собственности лица на имущество, которое не может ему принадлежать
1. Если по основаниям, допускаемым законодательством, в собственности лица оказалось имущество, которое в силу законодательного акта не может ему принадлежать, это имущество должно быть отчуждено собственником в течение года с момента возникновения права собственности на имущество, если законодательством не установлен иной срок.
2. В случаях, когда имущество не отчуждено собственником в сроки, указанные в пункте 1 настоящей статьи, такое имущество с учетом его характера и назначения по решению суда, вынесенному по заявлению соответствующего государственного органа или органа местного управления и самоуправления, подлежит принудительной продаже с передачей бывшему собственнику вырученной от продажи суммы либо передаче в государственную собственность с возмещением бывшему собственнику стоимости имущества, определенной судом. При этом вычитаются затраты на отчуждение (ответственное хранение) указанного имущества.
3. Если в собственности гражданина или юридического лица по основаниям, допускаемым законодательством, окажется вещь, нахождение которой в обороте допускается по специальному разрешению, а в выдаче такого разрешения собственнику отказано либо он не обратился за получением указанного разрешения в течение срока, предусмотренного законодательством, эта вещь подлежит отчуждению в порядке, установленном для имущества, которое не может принадлежать данному собственнику.
При этом отчуждение вещи допускается с соблюдением порядка оборота соответствующего имущества, установленного законодательством, и только лицу, имеющему указанное разрешение, или государству.
Статья 240. Отчуждение недвижимого имущества в связи с изъятием земельного участка, на котором оно находится
1. В случаях, когда изъятие земельного участка для государственных нужд либо ввиду ненадлежащего использования земли невозможно без прекращения права собственности на капитальные строения (здания, сооружения) или другое недвижимое имущество, находящееся на данном участке, это имущество может быть изъято у собственника путем выкупа государством или продажи с публичных торгов в порядке, предусмотренном законодательством.
Требование об изъятии недвижимого имущества не подлежит удовлетворению, если соответствующий государственный орган или орган местного управления и самоуправления, обратившийся с этим требованием в суд, не докажет, что использование земельного участка в целях, для которых он изымается, невозможно без прекращения права собственности на данное недвижимое имущество.
2. Правила настоящей статьи соответственно применяются при прекращении права собственности на недвижимое имущество в связи с изъятием горных отводов и других участков, на которых находится имущество.
Статья 241. Выкуп бесхозяйственно содержимых культурных ценностей
В случаях, когда собственник культурных ценностей, отнесенных в соответствии с законодательством к особо ценным и охраняемым государством, бесхозяйственно содержит эти ценности, что грозит утратой ими своего значения, такие ценности по решению суда могут быть изъяты у собственника путем выкупа государством или продажи с публичных торгов.
При выкупе культурных ценностей собственнику возмещается их стоимость в размере, установленном соглашением сторон, а в случае спора – судом. При продаже с публичных торгов собственнику передается вырученная от продажи сумма за вычетом расходов на проведение торгов.
Статья 242. Выкуп домашних животных при ненадлежащем обращении с ними
В случаях, когда собственник домашних животных обращается с ними в явном противоречии с установленными законодательством правилами и принятыми в обществе нормами гуманного отношения к животным, эти животные могут быть изъяты у собственника путем их выкупа лицом, предъявившим соответствующее требование в суд. Цена выкупа определяется соглашением сторон, а в случае спора – судом.
Статья 243. Реквизиция
1. В случаях стихийных бедствий, аварий, эпидемий, эпизоотий и при иных обстоятельствах, носящих чрезвычайный характер, имущество в интересах общества по решению государственных органов может быть изъято у собственника в порядке и на условиях, установленных законом, с выплатой ему стоимости имущества (реквизиция).
2. Оценка, по которой собственнику возмещается стоимость реквизированного имущества, может быть оспорена им в суде.
3. Лицо, имущество которого реквизировано, вправе при прекращении действия обстоятельств, в связи с которыми произведена реквизиция, требовать по суду возврата ему сохранившегося имущества.
Статья 244. Конфискация
В случаях, предусмотренных законодательными актами, имущество может быть безвозмездно изъято у собственника в виде санкции за совершение преступления или иного правонарушения (конфискация). При этом конфискация имущества в административном порядке допускается лишь с соблюдением условий и порядка, предусмотренных законом. Решение о конфискации, принятое в административном порядке, может быть обжаловано в суд.
Статья 245. Национализация
Обращение имущества, находящегося в собственности граждан и юридических лиц, в государственную собственность путем его национализации допускается только на основании принятого в соответствии с Конституцией закона о порядке и условиях национализации этого имущества и со своевременной и полной компенсацией лицу, имущество которого национализировано, стоимости этого имущества и других убытков, причиняемых его изъятием.
ГЛАВА 16 ОБЩАЯ СОБСТВЕННОСТЬ
Статья 246. Понятие и основания возникновения общей собственности
1. Имущество, находящееся в собственности двух или нескольких лиц, принадлежит им на праве общей собственности.
2. Имущество может находиться в общей собственности с определением доли каждого из собственников в праве собственности (долевая собственность) или без определения таких долей (совместная собственность).
3. Общая собственность на имущество является долевой, за исключением случаев, когда законодательными актами допускается образование совместной собственности на это имущество.
4. Общая собственность возникает при поступлении в собственность двух или нескольких лиц имущества, которое не может быть разделено без изменения его назначения (неделимые вещи) либо не подлежит разделу в силу законодательства.
Общая собственность на делимое имущество возникает в случаях, предусмотренных законодательством или договором.
5. По соглашению участников совместной собственности, а при недостижении согласия – по решению суда на общее имущество может быть установлена долевая собственность этих лиц.
6. Законодательными актами в области жилищных отношений, а также законодательными актами, регулирующими вопросы реконструкции жилых домов, могут устанавливаться иные правила, чем предусмотренные настоящей главой.
Статья 247. Определение долей в праве долевой собственности
1. Если размер долей участников долевой собственности не может быть определен на основании акта законодательства и не установлен соглашением всех его участников, доли считаются равными.
2. Соглашением всех участников долевой собственности может быть установлен порядок определения и изменения их долей в зависимости от вклада каждого из них в образование и приращение общего имущества.
3. Участник долевой собственности, осуществивший за свой счет с соблюдением установленного порядка использования общего имущества неотделимые улучшения этого имущества, имеет право на соответствующее увеличение своей доли в праве на общее имущество.
Отделимые улучшения общего имущества, если иное не предусмотрено соглашением участников долевой собственности, поступают в собственность того из участников, который их произвел.
Статья 248. Последствия надстройки, пристройки или перестройки жилого дома или иного строения, находящегося в общей долевой собственности
Если собственник с соблюдением установленных правил увеличил за свой счет площадь дома или иного строения, находящегося в долевой собственности, путем пристройки, надстройки или перестройки, то по требованию этого собственника доли в общей собственности на дом или строение и порядок пользования помещениями в нем подлежат соответствующему изменению.
Статья 249. Распоряжение имуществом, находящимся в долевой собственности
1. Распоряжение имуществом, находящимся в долевой собственности, осуществляется по соглашению всех его участников.
2. Участник долевой собственности вправе по своему усмотрению продать, подарить, завещать, сдать в залог свою долю либо распорядиться ею иным образом с соблюдением при ее возмездном отчуждении правил, установленных статьей 253 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 250. Владение и пользование имуществом, находящимся в долевой собственности
1. Владение и пользование имуществом, находящимся в долевой собственности, осуществляется по соглашению всех его участников, а при недостижении согласия – в порядке, устанавливаемом судом.
2. Участник долевой собственности имеет право на предоставление в его владение и пользование части общего имущества, соразмерной его доле, а при невозможности этого вправе требовать от других участников, владеющих и пользующихся имуществом, приходящимся на его долю, соответствующей компенсации.
Статья 251. Плоды, продукция и доходы от использования имущества, находящегося в долевой собственности
Плоды, продукция и доходы от использования имущества, находящегося в долевой собственности, поступают в состав общего имущества и распределяются между участниками долевой собственности соразмерно их долям, если иное не предусмотрено соглашением между ними.
Статья 252. Расходы по содержанию имущества, находящегося в долевой собственности
1. Каждый участник долевой собственности обязан соразмерно со своей долей участвовать в уплате налогов, сборов и иных платежей по общему имуществу, а также издержках по его содержанию и сохранению, если законодательством или договором не установлено иное.
2. Расходы, которые не являются необходимыми и произведены одним из собственников без согласия остальных, падают на него самого. Возникающие при этом споры подлежат разрешению в судебном порядке.
Статья 253. Преимущественное право покупки доли в праве общей собственности
1. При продаже доли в праве общей собственности постороннему лицу остальные участники долевой собственности имеют преимущественное право покупки продаваемой доли по цене, за которую она продается, и на прочих равных условиях, кроме случая продажи с публичных торгов.
Публичные торги для продажи доли в праве общей собственности при отсутствии согласия на это всех участников долевой собственности могут производиться в случаях, предусмотренных статьей
258 настоящего Кодекса, и в иных случаях, предусмотренных законодательством.
2. Продавец доли обязан известить в письменной форме остальных участников долевой собственности о намерении продать свою долю в праве общей собственности постороннему лицу с указанием цены и других условий, на которых продает ее. Письменным соглашением участников долевой собственности, принятым с соблюдением требований пункта 1 статьи 249 настоящего Кодекса, может быть установлен способ такого извещения. Отказ участников долевой собственности от получения письменного извещения продавца о намерении продать свою долю, зафиксированный в установленном законодательством порядке, считается надлежащим извещением этих участников долевой собственности.
Если остальные участники долевой собственности откажутся от покупки или не приобретут продаваемую долю в праве общей собственности на недвижимое имущество в течение месяца, а в отношении прочего имущества – в течение десяти дней со дня извещения, продавец вправе продать свою долю любому лицу.
3. При продаже доли с нарушением преимущественного права покупки любой другой участник долевой собственности имеет право в течение трех месяцев требовать в судебном порядке перевода на него прав и обязанностей покупателя.
4. Уступка преимущественного права покупки доли не допускается.
5. Правила настоящей статьи применяются также при отчуждении доли по договору мены.
6. Правила настоящей статьи не применяются при покупке доли в праве общей собственности на имущество, составляющее паевой инвестиционный фонд, удостоверенной инвестиционным паем, остальными участниками долевой собственности.
Статья 254. Момент перехода доли в праве общей собственности к приобретателю по договору
Доля в праве общей собственности переходит к приобретателю по договору с момента заключения договора, если соглашением сторон не предусмотрено иное.
Момент перехода доли в праве общей собственности по договору, подлежащему государственной регистрации, определяется в соответствии с пунктом 2 статьи 224 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 255. Раздел имущества, находящегося в долевой собственности, и выдел из него доли
1. Имущество, находящееся в долевой собственности, за исключением имущества, составляющего паевой инвестиционный фонд, может быть разделено между ее участниками по соглашению между ними.
2. Участник долевой собственности вправе требовать выдела своей доли из общего имущества, за исключением имущества, составляющего паевой инвестиционный фонд.
3. При недостижении участниками долевой собственности соглашения о способах и условиях раздела общего имущества или выдела доли одного из них участник долевой собственности вправе в судебном порядке требовать выдела в натуре своей доли из общего имущества.
Если выдел доли в натуре не допускается законодательством или невозможен без несоразмерного ущерба имуществу, находящемуся в общей собственности, выделяющийся собственник имеет право на выплату ему стоимости его доли другими участниками долевой собственности.
4. Несоразмерность имущества, выделяемого в натуре участнику долевой собственности на основании настоящей статьи, его доле в праве собственности устраняется выплатой соответствующей денежной суммы или иной компенсацией.
Выплата участнику долевой собственности остальными собственниками компенсации вместо выдела его доли в натуре допускается с его согласия. В случаях, если доля соответствующего собственника незначительна, не может быть реально выделена и он не имеет существенного интереса в использовании общего имущества, суд может и при отсутствии согласия этого собственника обязать его передать свою долю остальным участникам с выплатой ему компенсации.
5. С получением компенсации в соответствии с настоящей статьей собственник утрачивает право на долю в общем имуществе.
Статья 256. Владение, пользование и распоряжение имуществом, находящимся в совместной собственности
1. Участники совместной собственности, если иное не предусмотрено соглашением между ними, сообща владеют и пользуются общим имуществом.
2. Распоряжение имуществом, находящимся в совместной собственности, осуществляется по согласию всех участников, которое предполагается независимо от того, кем из участников совершена сделка по распоряжению имуществом. Это правило не распространяется на недвижимое имущество, для распоряжения которым необходимо письменное согласие всех участников совместной собственности.
3. Каждый из участников совместной собственности вправе совершать сделки по распоряжению общим имуществом, если иное не вытекает из соглашения всех участников. Совершенная одним из участников совместной собственности сделка, связанная с распоряжением общим имуществом, может быть признана недействительной по требованию остальных участников по мотивам отсутствия у участника, совершившего сделку, необходимых полномочий только в случае, если доказано, что другая сторона в сделке знала или заведомо должна была знать об этом (статья 175).
4. Правила настоящей статьи применяются, если для отдельных видов совместной собственности законодательством не установлено иное.
Статья 257. Раздел имущества, находящегося в совместной собственности, и выдел из него доли
1. Раздел общего имущества между участниками совместной собственности, а также выдел доли одного из них может быть осуществлен при условии предварительного определения доли каждого из участников в праве на общее имущество.
2. При разделе общего имущества и выделе из него доли, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или соглашением участников, их доли признаются равными.
3. Основания и порядок раздела общего имущества и выдела из него доли определяются по правилам статьи 255 настоящего Кодекса, поскольку иное для отдельных видов совместной собственности не установлено законодательством и не вытекает из существа отношений участников совместной собственности.
Статья 258. Обращение взыскания на долю в общем имуществе
Кредитор участника долевой или совместной собственности при недостаточности у последнего другого имущества вправе предъявить требование о выделении доли должника в общем имуществе для обращения на нее взыскания.
Если в таких случаях выделение доли в натуре невозможно либо против этого возражают остальные участники долевой или совместной собственности, кредитор вправе требовать продажи должником своей доли остальным участникам общей собственности по цене, соразмерной рыночной стоимости этой доли, с обращением вырученных от продажи средств в погашение долга.
В случае отказа остальных участников общей собственности от приобретения доли должника кредитор вправе требовать по суду обращения взыскания на долю должника в праве общей собственности путем продажи этой доли с публичных торгов.
Статья 259. Общая собственность супругов
1. Имущество, нажитое супругами во время брака, находится в их совместной собственности, если договором между ними не установлен иной режим этого имущества.
2. Имущество, принадлежавшее каждому из супругов до вступления в брак, а также полученное одним из супругов во время брака в дар или в порядке наследования, находится в его собственности.
Вещи индивидуального пользования (одежда, обувь и т.п.), за исключением драгоценностей и других предметов роскоши, хотя и приобретенные во время брака за счет общих средств супругов, признаются собственностью того супруга, который ими пользовался.
Имущество каждого из супругов может быть признано их совместной собственностью, если будет установлено, что в течение брака за счет общего имущества супругов или личного имущества другого супруга были произведены вложения, значительно увеличивающие стоимость этого имущества (капитальный ремонт, реконструкция, переоборудование и т.п.). Настоящее правило не применяется, если договором между супругами предусмотрено иное.
3. По обязательствам одного из супругов взыскание может быть обращено лишь на имущество, находящееся в его собственности, а также на его долю в общем имуществе супругов, которая причиталась бы ему при разделе этого имущества. Обращение взыскания на имущество унитарного предприятия, принадлежащее супругам на праве совместной собственности, не допускается.
31. При разделе имущества, находящегося в совместной собственности супругов, супруг участника хозяйственного товарищества, общества с ограниченной ответственностью или общества с дополнительной ответственностью вправе требовать в судебном порядке признания за ним права на причитающуюся ему часть доли его супруга в уставном фонде соответствующего товарищества или общества.
В случае признания судом за супругом участника хозяйственного товарищества, общества с ограниченной ответственностью или общества с дополнительной ответственностью права на причитающуюся ему часть доли его супруга в уставном фонде соответствующего товарищества или общества с согласия остальных участников этого товарищества или общества он вправе стать его участником либо требовать выплаты стоимости причитающейся ему части доли его супруга в уставном фонде или выдачи в натуре имущества на такую стоимость. При этом отказ во включении в состав участников соответствующего товарищества или общества влечет обязанность этого товарищества или общества выплатить супругу стоимость причитающейся ему части доли его супруга в уставном фонде либо выдать в натуре имущество на такую стоимость.
Определение стоимости части доли в уставном фонде товарищества или общества и ее выплата либо выдача в натуре имущества на такую стоимость осуществляются в соответствии с пунктом 2 статьи 64 настоящего Кодекса в срок, предусмотренный учредительными документами этого товарищества или общества, но не позднее двенадцати месяцев со дня предъявления супругом соответствующего требования.
Правила частей первой и второй настоящего пункта распространяются на случаи раздела имущества, находящегося в совместной собственности супругов, один из которых является членом производственного кооператива. При этом определение стоимости части пая супруга в имуществе производственного кооператива и ее выплата либо выдача в натуре имущества на такую стоимость
осуществляются в соответствии с пунктом 1 статьи 111 настоящего Кодекса в срок, предусмотренный уставом производственного кооператива, но не позднее двенадцати месяцев со дня предъявления супругом соответствующего требования.
4. Правила определения долей супругов в общем имуществе при его разделе и порядок такого раздела устанавливаются законодательством о браке и семье.
Статья 260. Исключена
Статья 261. Исключена
ГЛАВА 17 ВЕЩНЫЕ ПРАВА НА НЕДВИЖИМОЕ ИМУЩЕСТВО
Статья 262. Вещные права на земельные участки
1. Земельные участки могут находиться у землепользователей на вещных правах в соответствии с законодательными актами об охране и использовании земель и настоящим Кодексом.
2. Права на земельные участки, а также ограничения (обременения) прав на них возникают, переходят и прекращаются в порядке, установленном законодательством об охране и использовании земель и гражданским законодательством.
Статья 263. Земельные участки общего пользования. Доступ на земельный участок
1. Граждане имеют право свободно, без каких-либо разрешений находиться на не закрытых для общего доступа земельных участках, находящихся в собственности Республики Беларусь, и использовать имеющиеся на этих участках природные объекты в пределах, допускаемых законодательством.
2. Если земельный участок не огорожен либо его землепользователь иным способом ясно не обозначил, что вход на участок без его разрешения не допускается, любое лицо может пройти через этот участок, если это не причиняет ущерба или беспокойства землепользователю.
Статья 264. Исключена
Статья 265. Исключена
Статья 266. Исключена
Статья 267. Переход прав на земельный участок при отчуждении находящихся на нем капитальных строений (зданий, сооружений)
1. При переходе прав на капитальные строения (здания, сооружения), незавершенные законсервированные капитальные строения к приобретателям этих строений переходят права, ограничения (обременения) прав на земельные участки в порядке, установленном законодательством об охране и использовании земель.
2. При переходе прав на капитальные строения (здания, сооружения), незавершенные законсервированные капитальные строения, расположенные на арендуемых земельных участках, к приобретателям этих строений переходят права и обязанности по соответствующим договорам аренды земельного участка на оставшийся срок аренды соответствующего земельного участка в порядке, установленном законодательством об охране и использовании земель.
Статья 268. Право ограниченного пользования чужим недвижимым имуществом (сервитут)
1. Собственник недвижимого имущества вправе требовать от собственника соседнего недвижимого имущества, а в необходимых случаях – и от собственника другого недвижимого имущества предоставления права ограниченного пользования недвижимым имуществом (сервитута).
2. Обременение недвижимого имущества сервитутом не лишает собственника недвижимого имущества прав владения, пользования и распоряжения этим недвижимым имуществом.
3. Сервитут устанавливается по соглашению между лицом, требующим установления сервитута, и собственником недвижимого имущества и подлежит государственной регистрации в порядке, установленном законодательством о государственной регистрации недвижимого имущества, прав на него и сделок с ним. В случае недостижения соглашения об установлении или условиях сервитута спор разрешается судом по иску лица, требующего установления сервитута.
4. Собственник недвижимого имущества, обремененного сервитутом, вправе, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством, требовать от лиц, в интересах которых установлен сервитут, соразмерную плату за пользование недвижимым имуществом.
5. Отношения, связанные с правом ограниченного пользования чужим земельным участком (земельный сервитут), регулируются законодательством об охране и использовании земель. Право ограниченного пользования чужим земельным участком (земельный сервитут) устанавливается и прекращается в соответствии с законодательством об охране и использовании земель.
Статья 269. Сохранение сервитута при переходе права на недвижимое имущество
1. Сервитут сохраняется в случае перехода прав на недвижимое имущество, которое обременено этим сервитутом, к другому лицу.
2. Сервитут не может быть самостоятельным предметом купли-продажи, залога и не может передаваться каким-либо способом лицам, не являющимся собственниками недвижимого имущества, для обеспечения использования которого сервитут установлен.
Статья 270. Прекращение сервитута
1. По требованию собственника имущества, обремененного сервитутом, этот сервитут может быть прекращен ввиду отпадения оснований, по которым сервитут был установлен.
2. В случаях, когда недвижимое имущество, принадлежащее гражданину или юридическому лицу, в результате обременения сервитутом не может использоваться в соответствии с назначением, собственник вправе требовать по суду прекращения сервитута.
Статья 271. Исключена
ГЛАВА 18 ПРАВО СОБСТВЕННОСТИ И ДРУГИЕ ВЕЩНЫЕ ПРАВА НА ЖИЛЫЕ ПОМЕЩЕНИЯ
Статья 272. Собственность на жилой дом и квартиру
1. Собственник осуществляет права владения, пользования и распоряжения принадлежащим ему жилым помещением в соответствии с его назначением.
2. Жилые помещения предназначены для проживания граждан.
Гражданин – собственник жилого помещения может использовать его для личного проживания и проживания членов его семьи отдельно или вместе с семьей.
Жилые помещения могут сдаваться их собственниками на основании договора.
3. Размещение в жилых домах промышленных производств не допускается.
Размещение собственником в принадлежащем ему жилом помещении организаций и их подразделений допускается только после перевода этих помещений в нежилые, если иное не предусмотрено законодательными актами. Перевод помещений из жилых в нежилые производится в порядке, определяемом жилищным законодательством.
Статья 273. Квартира как объект права собственности
Собственнику квартиры в многоквартирном доме наряду с принадлежащим ему помещением, занимаемым под квартиру, принадлежит также доля в праве собственности на общее имущество дома (статья 274).
Статья 274. Общее имущество собственников в многоквартирном доме
1. Собственникам квартир в многоквартирном доме принадлежат на праве общей долевой собственности общие помещения дома, конструкции дома, механическое, электрическое, санитарно-техническое и иное оборудование за пределами или внутри квартиры, обслуживающие более одной квартиры, а в случаях, установленных законодательством или договором, и иное имущество.
Владение и пользование общим имуществом, находящимся в долевой собственности, осуществляются в порядке, установленном жилищным законодательством в части, не урегулированной настоящим Кодексом.
2. Собственник квартиры не вправе отчуждать свою долю в праве собственности на общее имущество жилого дома, а также совершать иные действия, влекущие передачу этой доли отдельно от права собственности на квартиру. Отчуждение общего имущества, находящегося в долевой собственности, осуществляется по решению общего собрания собственников жилых и (или) нежилых помещений с согласия двух третей от общего количества собственников жилых и (или) нежилых помещений.
3. Собственники квартир для обеспечения эксплуатации многоквартирного дома, пользования квартирами и их общим имуществом вправе, а в установленных законодательством случаях обязаны создавать товарищества собственников. Товарищество собственников является некоммерческой организацией, создаваемой исключительно в целях, предусмотренных настоящим пунктом, и действующей в соответствии с законодательством о таких товариществах.
Статья 275. Права членов семьи собственника жилого помещения
1. Члены семьи собственника, проживающего в принадлежащем ему жилом помещении, имеют право пользования этим помещением на условиях, предусмотренных жилищным законодательством.
2. Переход права собственности на жилой дом или квартиру к другому лицу не является основанием для прекращения права пользования жилым помещением членами семьи прежнего собственника, если иное не предусмотрено жилищным законодательством.
3. Члены семьи собственника жилого помещения могут требовать устранения нарушений их прав на жилое помещение от любых лиц, включая собственника жилого помещения.
Статья 2751. Изъятие жилого помещения у собственника
Жилое помещение может быть изъято у собственника в случаях и порядке, предусмотренных законодательными актами.
ГЛАВА 19 ПРАВО ХОЗЯЙСТВЕННОГО ВЕДЕНИЯ, ПРАВО ОПЕРАТИВНОГО УПРАВЛЕНИЯ
Статья 276. Право хозяйственного ведения
1. Унитарное предприятие или государственное объединение, а в случаях, определяемых Президентом Республики Беларусь, иное юридическое лицо, которым имущество принадлежит на праве хозяйственного ведения, владеют, пользуются и распоряжаются этим имуществом в пределах, определяемых в соответствии с законодательством.
2. Собственник имущества в соответствии с законодательством решает вопросы создания унитарного предприятия, определения предмета и целей его деятельности, его реорганизации и ликвидации, назначает руководителя унитарного предприятия, осуществляет контроль за использованием по назначению и сохранностью принадлежащего унитарному предприятию имущества.
Собственник имущества, находящегося в хозяйственном ведении, осуществляет контроль за использованием по назначению и сохранностью этого имущества, а также имеет право на получение части прибыли от его использования.
3. Юридические лица не вправе продавать принадлежащее им на праве хозяйственного ведения недвижимое имущество, сдавать его в аренду, в залог, вносить в качестве вклада в уставный фонд хозяйственных обществ и товариществ или иным способом распоряжаться этим имуществом без согласия собственника.
Остальным имуществом, принадлежащим юридическим лицам на праве хозяйственного ведения, они распоряжаются самостоятельно, за исключением случаев, установленных законодательством и собственником имущества.
Статья 277. Право оперативного управления
1. Казенное предприятие, учреждение или государственное объединение, за которыми имущество закреплено на праве оперативного управления, в отношении закрепленного за ними имущества осуществляют в пределах, установленных законодательством, в соответствии с целями своей деятельности, заданиями собственника и назначением имущества права владения, пользования и распоряжения им.
2. Собственник имущества, закрепленного за казенным предприятием, учреждением или государственным объединением на праве оперативного управления, вправе изъять излишнее, неиспользуемое либо используемое не по назначению имущество и распорядиться им по своему усмотрению.
3. Имущество республиканского государственно-общественного объединения, закрепленное за его организационными структурами в виде юридического лица, принадлежит им на праве оперативного управления, если иное не предусмотрено уставом республиканского государственно- общественного объединения.
На организационные структуры республиканского государственно-общественного объединения в виде юридического лица, за которыми имущество закреплено на праве оперативного управления, распространяются правила, предусмотренные настоящей статьей, статьями 279, 280 и пунктом 2 статьи 281 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 278. Распоряжение имуществом казенного предприятия и государственного объединения, за которым имущество закреплено на праве оперативного управления
1. Казенное предприятие вправе отчуждать или иным способом распоряжаться закрепленным за ним имуществом лишь с согласия собственника этого имущества. Казенное предприятие вправе передавать в залог имущество, находящееся в государственной собственности, в порядке, установленном законодательными актами о распоряжении государственным имуществом, если иное не предусмотрено Президентом Республики Беларусь.
Казенное предприятие самостоятельно реализует товары (работы, услуги), если иное не установлено законодательством.
2. Порядок распределения доходов казенного предприятия определяется собственником его имущества.
3. Правила, предусмотренные пунктами 1 и 2 настоящей статьи, применяются к государственному объединению, за которым имущество закреплено на праве оперативного управления, если иное не определено актами Президента Республики Беларусь.
Статья 279. Распоряжение имуществом учреждения
1. Учреждение не вправе без согласия собственника отчуждать или иным способом распоряжаться закрепленным за ним имуществом и имуществом, приобретенным за счет выделенных ему средств, если иное не установлено настоящим Кодексом или иными законодательными актами. Учреждение вправе передавать в залог имущество, находящееся в государственной собственности, в порядке, установленном законодательными актами о распоряжении государственным имуществом, если иное не предусмотрено Президентом Республики Беларусь, а имущество, находящееся в частной собственности, – с согласия собственника этого имущества либо уполномоченного им лица.
2. Если в соответствии с учредительными документами учреждению предоставлено право осуществлять приносящую доходы деятельность, то полученные от такой деятельности доходы и приобретенное за счет их имущество поступают в самостоятельное распоряжение учреждения и учитываются на отдельном балансе (отдельно в книге учета доходов и расходов организаций и индивидуальных предпринимателей, применяющих упрощенную систему налогообложения), если иное не предусмотрено законодательством.
Статья 280. Приобретение и прекращение права хозяйственного ведения и права оперативного управления
1. Право хозяйственного ведения или право оперативного управления имуществом, в отношении которого собственником принято решение о закреплении за унитарным предприятием, учреждением или государственным объединением, возникает у этого предприятия, учреждения или государственного объединения с момента передачи имущества, если иное не установлено законодательством.
2. Плоды, продукция и доходы от использования имущества, находящегося в хозяйственном ведении или оперативном управлении, а также имущество, приобретенное унитарным предприятием, учреждением или государственным объединением по договорам или иным основаниям, поступают в хозяйственное ведение или оперативное управление предприятия, учреждения или государственного объединения в порядке, установленном законодательством для приобретения права собственности. Право собственности на эти плоды, продукцию, доходы и имущество приобретает собственник имущества указанных юридических лиц.
3. Право хозяйственного ведения и право оперативного управления имуществом прекращаются по основаниям и в порядке, предусмотренным законодательными актами для прекращения права
собственности, а также в случаях правомерного изъятия имущества у предприятия, учреждения или государственного объединения по решению собственника.
Статья 281. Сохранение права на имущество при переходе предприятия или имущества учреждения к другому собственнику
1. При переходе права собственности на предприятие как имущественный комплекс к другому собственнику юридическое лицо, которому это предприятие принадлежит на праве хозяйственного ведения, если иное не установлено Президентом Республики Беларусь или договором, сохраняет право хозяйственного ведения на принадлежащее ему предприятие.
2. При переходе права собственности на имущество учреждения к другому лицу это учреждение сохраняет право оперативного управления на закрепленное за ним имущество.
ГЛАВА 20 ЗАЩИТА ПРАВА СОБСТВЕННОСТИ И ДРУГИХ ВЕЩНЫХ ПРАВ
Статья 282. Истребование имущества из чужого незаконного владения
Собственник вправе истребовать свое имущество из чужого незаконного владения.
Статья 283. Истребование имущества от добросовестного приобретателя
1. Если имущество возмездно приобретено у лица, которое не имело права его отчуждать, о чем приобретатель не знал и не мог знать (добросовестный приобретатель), то собственник вправе истребовать это имущество от приобретателя в случае, когда имущество утеряно собственником или лицом, которому имущество было передано собственником во владение, либо похищено у того или другого, либо выбыло из их владения иным путем помимо их воли.
2. Если имущество приобретено безвозмездно от лица, которое не имело права его отчуждать, собственник вправе истребовать имущество во всех случаях.
3. Деньги, а также ценные бумаги на предъявителя не могут быть истребованы от добросовестного приобретателя.
Статья 284. Расчеты при возврате имущества из незаконного владения
При истребовании имущества из чужого незаконного владения собственник вправе также потребовать от лица, которое знало или должно было знать, что его владение незаконно (недобросовестный владелец), возврата или возмещения всех доходов, которые это лицо извлекло или должно было извлечь за все время владения, а от добросовестного владельца – возврата или возмещения всех доходов, которые он извлек или должен был извлечь со времени, когда он узнал или должен был узнать о неправомерности владения или получил повестку по иску собственника о возврате имущества.
Владелец, как добросовестный, так и недобросовестный, в свою очередь вправе требовать от собственника возмещения произведенных им необходимых затрат на имущество с того времени, с которого собственнику причитаются доходы от имущества.
Добросовестный владелец вправе оставить за собой произведенные им улучшения, если они могут быть отделены без повреждения имущества. Если такое отделение улучшений невозможно, добросовестный владелец имеет право требовать возмещения произведенных на улучшение затрат, но не свыше размера увеличения стоимости имущества.
Статья 285. Защита прав собственника от нарушений, не связанных с лишением владения
Собственник может требовать устранения всяких нарушений его права, хотя бы эти нарушения и не были соединены с лишением владения.
Статья 286. Защита прав владельца, не являющегося собственником
Права, предусмотренные статьями 282-285 настоящего Кодекса, принадлежат также лицу, хотя и не являющемуся собственником, но владеющему имуществом на праве пожизненного наследуемого владения, хозяйственного ведения, оперативного управления либо по иному основанию, предусмотренному законодательством или договором. Это лицо имеет право на защиту его владения также против собственника.
Статья 287. Последствия прекращения права собственности в силу акта законодательства
В случае принятия акта законодательства, прекращающего право собственности, убытки, причиненные собственнику в результате принятия этого акта, в том числе стоимость имущества, возмещаются государством. Споры о возмещении убытков разрешаются судом.
РАЗДЕЛ III ОБЩАЯ ЧАСТЬ ОБЯЗАТЕЛЬСТВЕННОГО ПРАВА
ПОДРАЗДЕЛ 1 ОБЩИЕ ПОЛОЖЕНИЯ ОБ ОБЯЗАТЕЛЬСТВАХ
ГЛАВА 21 ПОНЯТИЕ И СТОРОНЫ ОБЯЗАТЕЛЬСТВА
Статья 288. Понятие обязательства и основания его возникновения
1. В силу обязательства одно лицо (должник) обязано совершить в пользу другого лица (кредитора) определенное действие, как-то: передать имущество, выполнить работу, уплатить деньги и т.п., либо воздержаться от определенного действия, а кредитор имеет право требовать от должника исполнения его обязанности.
2. Обязательства возникают из договора, вследствие причинения вреда, неосновательного обогащения и из иных оснований, указанных в настоящем Кодексе и других актах законодательства.
Статья 289. Стороны обязательства
1. В обязательстве в качестве каждой из его сторон – кредитора или должника – могут участвовать одно или одновременно несколько лиц.
Недействительность требований кредитора к одному из лиц, участвующих в обязательстве на стороне должника, равно как и истечение срока исковой давности по требованию к такому лицу, сами по себе не затрагивают его требования к остальным этим лицам.
2. Если каждая из сторон по договору несет обязанность в пользу другой стороны, она считается должником другой стороны в том, что обязана сделать в ее пользу, и одновременно ее кредитором в том, что имеет право от нее требовать.
3. Обязательство не создает обязанностей для лиц, не участвующих в нем в качестве сторон (для третьих лиц).
В случаях, предусмотренных законодательством или соглашением сторон, обязательство может создавать для третьих лиц права в отношении одной или обеих сторон обязательства.
ГЛАВА 22 ИСПОЛНЕНИЕ ОБЯЗАТЕЛЬСТВ
Статья 290. Общие положения
Обязательства должны исполняться надлежащим образом в соответствии с условиями обязательства и требованиями законодательства, а при отсутствии таких условий и требований – в соответствии с обычно предъявляемыми требованиями.
Статья 291. Недопустимость одностороннего отказа от исполнения обязательства
Односторонний отказ от исполнения обязательства и одностороннее изменение его условий не допускаются, если иное не вытекает из законодательства или договора.
Статья 292. Исполнение обязательства по частям
Кредитор вправе не принимать исполнения обязательства по частям, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством, условиями обязательства и не вытекает из существа обязательства.
Статья 293. Исполнение обязательства надлежащему лицу
Если иное не предусмотрено соглашением сторон и не вытекает из существа обязательства, должник вправе при исполнении обязательства потребовать доказательств того, что исполнение принимается самим кредитором или управомоченным им на это лицом, и несет риск последствий невыполнения такого требования.
Статья 294. Исполнение обязательства третьим лицом
1. Исполнение обязательства может быть возложено должником на третье лицо, если из законодательства, условий обязательства или его существа не вытекает обязанность должника исполнить обязательство лично. В этом случае кредитор обязан принять исполнение, предложенное за должника третьим лицом.
2. Третье лицо, подвергающееся опасности утратить свое право на имущество должника (право аренды, залога или др.) вследствие обращения кредитором взыскания на это имущество, может за свой счет удовлетворить требование кредитора без согласия должника. В этом случае к третьему лицу переходят права кредитора по обязательству в соответствии со статьями 353-358 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 295. Срок исполнения обязательства
1. Если обязательство предусматривает или позволяет определить день его исполнения или период времени, в течение которого оно должно быть исполнено, обязательство подлежит исполнению в этот день или соответственно в любой момент в пределах такого периода.
2. В случаях, когда обязательство не предусматривает срок его исполнения и не содержит условий, позволяющих определить этот срок, оно должно быть исполнено в разумный срок после возникновения обязательства.
Обязательство, не исполненное в разумный срок, а равно обязательство, срок которого определен моментом востребования, должник обязан исполнить в семидневный срок со дня поступления письменного требования кредитора о его исполнении, если обязанность исполнения в другой срок не вытекает из акта законодательства, условий обязательства или существа обязательства.
Статья 296. Досрочное исполнение обязательства
Должник вправе исполнить обязательство до срока, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или условиями обязательства либо не вытекает из его существа. Однако досрочное исполнение обязательства, связанного с осуществлением его сторонами предпринимательской деятельности, допускается только в случаях, когда возможность исполнить обязательство досрочно предусмотрена законодательством или условиями обязательства либо вытекает из существа обязательства.
Статья 297. Место исполнения обязательства
Если место исполнения обязательства не определено законодательством или договором, не явствует из существа обязательства, исполнение должно быть произведено:
1) по обязательству передать земельный участок, капитальное строение (здание, сооружение) или другое недвижимое имущество – в месте нахождения имущества;
2) по обязательству передать товар или иное имущество, предусматривающему его перевозку, – в месте сдачи имущества первому перевозчику для доставки его кредитору;
3) по другим обязательствам должника передать товар или иное имущество – в месте изготовления или хранения имущества, если это место было известно кредитору в момент возникновения обязательства;
4) по денежному обязательству – в месте жительства кредитора в момент возникновения обязательства, а если кредитором является юридическое лицо, – в месте его нахождения в момент возникновения обязательства. Если кредитор к моменту исполнения обязательства изменил место жительства или место нахождения и известил об этом должника, – в новом месте жительства или месте нахождения кредитора с отнесением на счет кредитора расходов, связанных с переменой места исполнения;
5) по всем другим обязательствам – в месте жительства должника, а если должником является юридическое лицо, – в месте его нахождения.
Статья 298. Валюта денежных обязательств
1. Денежные обязательства должны быть выражены в белорусских рублях (статья 141).
В денежном обязательстве может быть предусмотрено, что оно подлежит оплате в белорусских рублях в сумме, эквивалентной определенной сумме в иностранной валюте или в условных денежных единицах («специальных правах заимствования» и др.). В этом случае подлежащая оплате в рублях сумма определяется по официальному курсу соответствующей валюты или условных денежных единиц на день платежа, если иной курс или иная дата его определения не установлены законодательством или соглашением сторон.
2. Использование иностранной валюты, а также платежных документов в иностранной валюте при осуществлении расчетов на территории Республики Беларусь по обязательствам допускается в случаях, порядке и на условиях, определенных законодательством.
Статья 299. Увеличение сумм, выплачиваемых на содержание гражданина
Сумма, выплачиваемая по денежному обязательству непосредственно на содержание гражданина в возмещение вреда, причиненного его жизни и здоровью, по договору пожизненного содержания и в других случаях, с увеличением установленного законодательством размера базовой величины пропорционально увеличивается.
Статья 300. Очередность погашения требований по денежному обязательству
Сумма произведенного платежа, недостаточная для полного исполнения денежного обязательства, погашает, если иное не предусмотрено Президентом Республики Беларусь:
в первую очередь – издержки кредитора по получению исполнения;
во вторую очередь – основную сумму долга и проценты за пользование денежными средствами, подлежащие уплате по денежному обязательству (займу, кредиту, авансу и т.д.);
в третью очередь – проценты, предусмотренные статьей 366 настоящего Кодекса за неисполнение или просрочку исполнения денежного обязательства, и неустойку.
Статья 301. Исполнение альтернативного обязательства
Должнику, обязанному передать кредитору одно или другое имущество либо совершить одно из двух или нескольких действий, принадлежит право выбора, если из законодательства или условий обязательства не вытекает иное.
Статья 302. Исполнение обязательства, в котором участвуют несколько кредиторов или несколько должников
Если в обязательстве участвуют несколько кредиторов или несколько должников, то каждый из кредиторов имеет право требовать исполнения, а каждый из должников обязан исполнить обязательство в равной доле с другими, поскольку из законодательства или условий обязательства не вытекает иное.
Статья 303. Солидарные обязательства
1. Солидарная обязанность (ответственность) или солидарное требование возникают, если солидарность обязанности или требования предусмотрена договором или установлена законодательством, в частности при неделимости предмета обязательства.
2. Обязанности нескольких должников по обязательству, связанному с предпринимательской деятельностью, равно как и требования нескольких кредиторов в таком обязательстве, являются солидарными, если законодательством или условиями обязательства не предусмотрено иное.
Статья 304. Права кредитора при солидарной обязанности
1. При солидарной обязанности должников кредитор вправе требовать исполнения как от всех должников совместно, так и от любого из них в отдельности, притом как полностью, так и в части долга.
2. Кредитор, не получивший полного удовлетворения от одного из солидарных должников, имеет право требовать недополученное от остальных солидарных должников.
Солидарные должники остаются обязанными до тех пор, пока обязательство не будет исполнено полностью.
Статья 305. Возражения против требований кредитора при солидарной обязанности
В случае солидарной обязанности должник не вправе выдвигать против требования кредитора возражения, основанные на таких отношениях других должников с кредитором, в которых данный должник не участвует.
Статья 306. Исполнение солидарной обязанности одним из должников
1. Исполнение солидарной обязанности полностью одним из должников освобождает остальных должников от исполнения кредитору.
2. Если иное не вытекает из отношений между солидарными должниками:
1) должник, исполнивший солидарную обязанность, имеет право регрессного требования к остальным должникам в равных долях за вычетом доли, падающей на него самого;
2) неуплаченное одним из солидарных должников должнику, исполнившему солидарную обязанность, падает в равной доле на этого должника и на остальных должников.
3. Правила настоящей статьи применяются соответственно при прекращении солидарного обязательства зачетом встречного требования одного из должников.
Статья 307. Солидарные требования
1. При солидарности требования любой из солидарных кредиторов вправе предъявить к должнику требование в полном объеме.
До предъявления требования одним из солидарных кредиторов должник вправе исполнить обязательство любому из них по своему усмотрению.
2. Должник не вправе выдвигать против требования одного из солидарных кредиторов возражения, основанные на таких отношениях должника с другими солидарными кредиторами, в которых данный кредитор не участвует.
3. Исполнение обязательства полностью одному из солидарных кредиторов освобождает должника от исполнения остальным кредиторам.
4. Солидарный кредитор, получивший исполнение от должника, обязан возместить причитающееся другим кредиторам в равных долях, если иное не вытекает из отношений между ними.
Статья 308. Исполнение обязательства внесением долга в депозит
1. Должник вправе внести причитающиеся с него деньги или ценные бумаги в депозит нотариуса, дипломатического агента дипломатического представительства Республики Беларусь и консульского должностного лица консульского учреждения Республики Беларусь, а в случаях, установленных законодательством, – в депозит суда, если обязательство не может быть исполнено должником вследствие:
1) отсутствия кредитора или лица, уполномоченного им принять исполнение, в месте, где обязательство должно быть исполнено;
2) недееспособности кредитора и отсутствия у него представителя;
3) очевидного отсутствия определенности по поводу того, кто является кредитором по обязательству, в частности в связи со спором по этому поводу между кредитором и другими лицами;
4) уклонения кредитора от принятия исполнения или иной просрочки с его стороны.
2. Внесение денежной суммы или ценных бумаг в депозит нотариуса, дипломатического агента дипломатического представительства Республики Беларусь и консульского должностного лица консульского учреждения Республики Беларусь или суда считается исполнением обязательства.
Нотариус, дипломатический агент дипломатического представительства Республики Беларусь и консульское должностное лицо консульского учреждения Республики Беларусь или суд, в депозит которого внесены деньги или ценные бумаги, извещает об этом кредитора.
Статья 309. Встречное исполнение обязательства
1. Встречным признается исполнение обязательства одной из сторон, которое в соответствии с договором обусловлено исполнением своих обязательств другой стороной.
2. В случае непредоставления обязанной стороной обусловленного договором исполнения обязательства либо наличия обстоятельств, очевидно свидетельствующих о том, что такое исполнение не будет произведено в установленный срок, сторона, на которой лежит встречное исполнение, вправе приостановить исполнение своего обязательства либо отказаться от исполнения этого обязательства и потребовать возмещения убытков.
Если обусловленное договором исполнение обязательства произведено не в полном объеме, сторона, на которой лежит встречное исполнение, вправе приостановить исполнение своего обязательства или отказаться от исполнения в части, соответствующей непредоставленному исполнению.
3. Если встречное исполнение обязательства произведено несмотря на непредоставление другой стороной обусловленного договором исполнения своего обязательства, эта сторона обязана предоставить такое исполнение.
4. Правила, предусмотренные пунктами 2 и 3 настоящей статьи, применяются, если договором или законодательством не предусмотрено иное.
ГЛАВА 23 ОБЕСПЕЧЕНИЕ ИСПОЛНЕНИЯ ОБЯЗАТЕЛЬСТВ
§ 1. Общие положения
Статья 310. Способы обеспечения исполнения обязательств
1. Исполнение обязательств может обеспечиваться неустойкой, залогом, удержанием имущества должника, поручительством, гарантией, банковской гарантией, задатком и другими способами, предусмотренными законодательством или договором.
2. Недействительность соглашения об обеспечении исполнения обязательства не влечет недействительности этого обязательства (основного обязательства).
3. Недействительность основного обязательства влечет недействительность обеспечивающего его обязательства, если иное не установлено законодательством.
4. К отношениям по обеспечению исполнения обязательств по ценным бумагам применяются правила настоящей главы с учетом особенностей, установленных законодательством о ценных бумагах.
§ 2. Неустойка
Статья 311. Понятие неустойки
1. Неустойкой (штрафом, пеней) признается определенная законодательством или договором денежная сумма, которую должник обязан уплатить кредитору, если иное не предусмотрено законодательными актами, в случае неисполнения или ненадлежащего исполнения обязательства, в
частности в случае просрочки исполнения. По требованию об уплате неустойки кредитор не обязан доказывать причинение ему убытков.
2. Кредитор не вправе требовать уплаты неустойки в случаях, если должник не несет ответственности за неисполнение или ненадлежащее исполнение обязательства.
3. Законодательными актами могут быть предусмотрены особенности уплаты (взыскания) неустойки (штрафа, пени).
Статья 312. Форма соглашения о неустойке
Соглашение о неустойке должно быть совершено в письменной форме независимо от формы основного обязательства.
Несоблюдение письменной формы влечет недействительность соглашения о неустойке.
Статья 313. Законная неустойка
1. Кредитор вправе требовать уплаты неустойки, определенной законодательством, независимо от того, предусмотрена ли обязанность ее уплаты соглашением сторон.
2. Размер законной неустойки может быть изменен соглашением сторон, если законодательство этого не запрещает.
Статья 314. Уменьшение неустойки
Если подлежащая уплате неустойка явно несоразмерна последствиям нарушения обязательства, суд вправе уменьшить неустойку.
При решении вопроса об уменьшении неустойки судом могут быть учтены действия сторон, направленные на добровольное досудебное урегулирование спора.
Уменьшение неустойки после ее уплаты не допускается. Законодательными актами могут предусматриваться случаи, когда неустойка не подлежит уменьшению.
Правила настоящей статьи не затрагивают права должника на уменьшение размера его ответственности на основании статьи 375 настоящего Кодекса и права кредитора на возмещение убытков в случаях, предусмотренных статьей 365 настоящего Кодекса.
§ 3. Залог
Статья 315. Понятие и основания возникновения залога
1. В силу залога кредитор по обеспеченному залогом обязательству (залогодержатель) имеет право в случае неисполнения или ненадлежащего исполнения должником этого обязательства получить удовлетворение из стоимости заложенного имущества преимущественно перед другими кредиторами лица, которому принадлежит это имущество (залогодателя), за исключением случаев, предусмотренных законодательными актами.
2. Залог земельных участков, предприятий, капитальных строений (зданий, сооружений), квартир и другого недвижимого имущества (ипотека) регулируется законодательными актами об ипотеке. Общие правила о залоге, содержащиеся в настоящем Кодексе, применяются к ипотеке в случаях, когда законодательными актами об ипотеке не установлены иные правила.
К залогу ценных бумаг правила настоящего параграфа применяются, если иное не установлено законодательством о ценных бумагах.
3. Залог возникает в силу договора. Залог возникает также на основании акта законодательства при наступлении указанных в нем обстоятельств, если в законодательстве предусмотрено, какое имущество и для обеспечения исполнения какого обязательства признается находящимся в залоге.
Правила настоящего Кодекса о залоге, возникающем в силу договора, соответственно применяются к залогу, возникающему на основании акта законодательства, если законодательством не установлено иное.
Статья 316. Залогодатель
1. Залогодателем может быть как сам должник, так и третье лицо.
2. Залогодателем вещи может быть ее собственник либо лицо, имеющее на нее право хозяйственного ведения или оперативного управления, с учетом особенностей, предусмотренных частями второй и третьей настоящего пункта.
Лицо, которому вещь принадлежит на праве хозяйственного ведения, вправе заложить ее без согласия собственника только при распоряжении имуществом в соответствии с пунктом 3 статьи 276 настоящего Кодекса.
Организации, за которыми имущество закреплено на праве оперативного управления, вправе передавать в залог имущество, находящееся в государственной собственности, в порядке, установленном законодательными актами о распоряжении государственным имуществом, если иное не предусмотрено Президентом Республики Беларусь, а имущество, находящееся в частной собственности, – с согласия собственника этого имущества либо уполномоченного им лица.
3. Залогодателем права может быть лицо, которому принадлежит закладываемое право.
Залог права аренды или иного права на чужую вещь не допускается без согласия ее собственника или лица, имеющего на нее право хозяйственного ведения или оперативного управления, если законодательством или договором запрещено отчуждение этого права без согласия указанных лиц.
Статья 317. Предмет залога
1. Предметом залога может быть всякое имущество, в том числе вещи и имущественные права (требования), за исключением имущества, изъятого из оборота, требований, неразрывно связанных с личностью кредитора, в частности требований об алиментах, о возмещении вреда, причиненного его жизни или здоровью, и иных прав, уступка которых другому лицу запрещена законом.
Имущество, приобретенное за счет внешнего государственного займа (кредита), не может являться предметом залога, в том числе ипотеки, до полного погашения обязательств по такому займу (кредиту).
Законодательными актами могут быть установлены иные ограничения на передачу имущества в залог.
2. Залог отдельных видов имущества, в частности имущества граждан, на которое не допускается обращение взыскания, может быть законом запрещен или ограничен.
Статья 318. Обеспечиваемое залогом требование
Если иное не предусмотрено договором, залог обеспечивает требование в том объеме, какой оно имеет к моменту удовлетворения, в частности проценты, неустойку, возмещение убытков, причиненных неисполнением или ненадлежащим исполнением, расходов залогодержателя на содержание заложенной вещи и расходов по взысканию.
Статья 319. Залог без передачи и с передачей заложенного имущества залогодержателю
1. Заложенное имущество остается у залогодателя, если договором не предусмотрена передача заложенного имущества во владение залогодержателю (заклад).
Имущество, на которое установлена ипотека, заложенные акции, а также заложенные товары в обороте не могут быть предметом заклада.
2. По соглашению сторон предмет залога может быть оставлен у залогодателя под замком с печатью залогодержателя или с наложением знаков, свидетельствующих о залоге (твердый залог).
Правила, регулирующие заклад, применяются к твердому залогу в той мере, в какой их применение не противоречит существу отношений залогодержателя с залогодателем при таком виде залога.
3. Предмет залога, переданный залогодателем на время во владение или пользование третьему лицу, считается оставленным у залогодателя.
4. При залоге имущественного права, удостоверенного ценной бумагой, за исключением эмиссионной ценной бумаги, она передается залогодержателю либо в депозит нотариуса, дипломатического агента дипломатического представительства Республики Беларусь и консульского должностного лица консульского учреждения Республики Беларусь, если договором не предусмотрено иное.
Статья 320. Договор о залоге, его форма и регистрация
1. В договоре о залоге должны быть указаны предмет залога и его стоимость, существо, размер и срок исполнения обязательства, обеспечиваемого залогом, а также иные условия, если обязательность их включения в договор предусмотрена настоящей главой. В договоре о залоге должно также содержаться указание на то, у какой из сторон находится заложенное имущество.
2. Договор о залоге должен быть заключен в письменной форме.
Договор о залоге имущества и (или) имущественных прав (требований) в обеспечение обязательств по договору, который должен быть нотариально удостоверен, подлежит нотариальному удостоверению.
3. Договор об ипотеке должен быть зарегистрирован в порядке, установленном для регистрации сделок с соответствующим имуществом. Договор об ипотеке, предусматривающий залог недвижимого имущества, которое поступит залогодателю в будущем и которое на момент заключения договора не считается созданным в соответствии с законодательством, не подлежит государственной регистрации и считается заключенным с момента придания ему письменной формы.
4. Несоблюдение правил, содержащихся в пунктах 2 и 3 настоящей статьи, влечет недействительность договора о залоге.
Статья 321. Имущество, на которое распространяется право залогодержателя
1. Право залогодержателя (право залога) на вещь, являющуюся предметом залога, распространяется на ее принадлежности, если иное не предусмотрено договором.
На полученные в результате использования заложенного имущества плоды, продукцию и доходы право залога распространяется в случаях, предусмотренных договором.
2. При ипотеке предприятия или иного имущественного комплекса в целом право залога распространяется на все его имущество – движимое и недвижимое, включая право требования и
исключительные права, в том числе приобретенные в период ипотеки, если иное не предусмотрено законодательными актами или договором.
3. Исключен.
4. Исключен.
5. Исключен.
6. Договором о залоге, а в отношении залога, возникающего на основании акта законодательства, законодательством может быть предусмотрен залог вещей и имущественных прав, которые залогодатель приобретет в будущем.
Статья 322. Возникновение права залога
1. Право залога возникает с момента заключения договора о залоге, в отношении залога имущества, которое подлежит передаче залогодержателю, – с момента передачи этого имущества, если иное не предусмотрено договором о залоге, а в случаях, если необходима регистрация договора, – с момента регистрации договора.
Если предметом залога является имущество, которое будет создано или приобретено залогодателем в будущем, право залога возникает у залогодержателя с момента создания или приобретения залогодателем этого имущества, если законодательством или договором о залоге не предусмотрено, что оно возникает в иной срок.
2. Право залога на товары в обороте возникает в соответствии с правилами пункта 2 статьи 338 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 323. Последующий залог. Очередность удовлетворения требований залогодержателей
1. Если заложенное имущество становится предметом еще одного залога в обеспечение других требований (последующий залог), требования залогодержателей удовлетворяются из стоимости этого имущества с соблюдением очередности, предусмотренной пунктом 2 настоящей статьи, если иное не установлено статьей 3231 настоящего Кодекса.
Последующий залог не допускается:
если он запрещен предшествующими договорами о залоге;
в иных случаях, предусмотренных законодательными актами.
Залогодатель обязан сообщать залогодержателю по каждому последующему залогу сведения обо всех существующих залогах данного имущества, предусмотренные пунктом 1 статьи 320 настоящего Кодекса, и отвечает за убытки, причиненные залогодержателям невыполнением этой обязанности.
2. Право залогодержателя на получение удовлетворения из стоимости заложенного имущества преимущественно перед другими залогодержателями, имеющими право на получение удовлетворения из стоимости этого имущества (приоритет залогодержателя), определяется в зависимости от момента возникновения права залога, если иное не предусмотрено частью второй настоящего пункта и другими законодательными актами.
В случае, если информация о правах залогодержателей на принадлежащее залогодателю движимое имущество, обремененное залогом, в соответствии с законодательными актами подлежит внесению в реестр движимого имущества, обремененного залогом, приоритет залогодержателя определяется по очередности внесения в порядке, установленном законодательством, информации
о залоге этого имущества в реестр движимого имущества, обремененного залогом. Залогодержатели, которые внесли полную и достоверную информацию о соответствующих правах в реестр движимого имущества, обремененного залогом, в случаях, когда в соответствии с законодательными актами такая информация подлежит внесению в названный реестр, обладают приоритетом залогодержателя перед залогодержателями, не внесшими такую информацию в этот реестр либо внесшими в него информацию, не соответствующую требованиям законодательных актов (за исключением технических ошибок), и (или) недостоверную информацию.
Приоритет залогодержателей, которые не внесли информацию о правах залогодержателей на принадлежащее залогодателю движимое имущество, обремененное залогом, в реестр движимого имущества, обремененного залогом, либо внесли в него информацию, не соответствующую требованиям законодательных актов (за исключением технических ошибок), и (или) недостоверную информацию, определяется в зависимости от момента возникновения права залога.
Требования залогодержателя, не обладающего приоритетом залогодержателя (последующий залогодержатель), удовлетворяются из стоимости заложенного имущества после удовлетворения требований залогодержателя, обладающего приоритетом залогодержателя (предшествующий залогодержатель).
3. В случае обращения взыскания на заложенное имущество предшествующим залогодержателем последующий залогодержатель вправе потребовать от должника досрочного исполнения обязательства, обеспеченного последующим залогом, за исключением обязательств, обеспеченных гарантиями Правительства Республики Беларусь, гарантиями местных исполнительных и распорядительных органов. В случае неисполнения такого обязательства последующий залогодержатель вправе обратить взыскание на заложенное имущество одновременно с предшествующим залогодержателем с соблюдением очередности, предусмотренной пунктом 2 настоящей статьи.
Договором между залогодателем и последующим залогодержателем может быть ограничено право такого залогодержателя потребовать от должника досрочного исполнения обязательства, обеспеченного последующим залогом.
4. Если при обращении взыскания на заложенное имущество предшествующим залогодержателем последующий залогодержатель не воспользовался в соответствии с пунктом 3 настоящей статьи правом потребовать от должника досрочного исполнения обязательства или такое право было ограничено договором либо последующим залогом были обеспечены обязательства, обеспеченные также гарантиями Правительства Республики Беларусь, гарантиями местных исполнительных и распорядительных органов, последующий залог прекращается в случае, когда для удовлетворения требований предшествующего залогодержателя обращено взыскание на все заложенное имущество. В ином случае последующий залог сохраняет силу в соответствии с пунктом 1 статьи 334 настоящего Кодекса.
Если предшествующий залогодержатель воспользовался правом, предусмотренным частью второй пункта 4 статьи 331 настоящего Кодекса, последующий залог прекращается.
Если предшествующий залогодержатель не воспользовался правом, предусмотренным частью второй пункта 4 статьи 331 настоящего Кодекса, этим правом может воспользоваться последующий залогодержатель, потребовавший от должника досрочного исполнения обязательства, если такое право не ограничено договором.
5. В случае обращения взыскания на заложенное имущество последующим залогодержателем предшествующий залогодержатель вправе потребовать от должника досрочного исполнения обязательства, обеспеченного предшествующим залогом, за исключением обязательств, обеспеченных гарантиями Правительства Республики Беларусь, гарантиями местных исполнительных и распорядительных органов. В случае неисполнения такого обязательства
предшествующий залогодержатель вправе обратить взыскание на заложенное имущество одновременно с последующим залогодержателем с соблюдением очередности, предусмотренной пунктом 2 настоящей статьи. Если предшествующий залогодержатель не воспользовался этим правом, право залога сохраняет силу в соответствии с пунктом 1 статьи 334 настоящего Кодекса.
6. Залогодатель, к которому одним из залогодержателей предъявлено требование об обращении взыскания на заложенное имущество, обязан не позднее семи рабочих дней с даты получения указанного требования направить письменное уведомление о его предъявлении всем другим залогодержателям этого имущества и несет ответственность за убытки, причиненные таким залогодержателям неисполнением данной обязанности.
Если залогодержатели, получившие письменное уведомление о предъявлении требования об обращении взыскания на заложенное имущество, вправе в соответствии с пунктами 3 и 5 настоящей статьи предъявить к должнику требование о досрочном исполнении обязательства, обеспеченного залогом, указанное требование может быть предъявлено в течение одного месяца с даты получения такого уведомления.
7. Правила, установленные настоящей статьей, не применяются, если залогодержателем по предшествующему и последующему залогам является одно и то же лицо. В этом случае требования, обеспеченные каждым из залогов, удовлетворяются в порядке очередности, соответствующей срокам исполнения обеспеченных залогом обязательств, если иное не предусмотрено законодательными актами или договором.
Статья 3231. Созалогодержатели
1. В случаях, предусмотренных законодательством или договором, предмет залога может находиться в залоге у нескольких лиц, обладающих в отношении него равным приоритетом залогодержателя (созалогодержатели), в обеспечение исполнения разных обязательств, по которым созалогодержатели являются самостоятельными кредиторами, за исключением имущества, информация о правах залогодержателей на которое в соответствии с законодательными актами подлежит внесению в реестр движимого имущества, обремененного залогом.
Каждый созалогодержатель самостоятельно осуществляет права и обязанности залогодержателя, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или соглашением между созалогодержателями.
В случае обращения взыскания на заложенное имущество одним из созалогодержателей другие созалогодержатели вправе потребовать от должника досрочного исполнения обязательства, обеспеченного залогом, и в случае неисполнения такого обязательства обратить взыскание на заложенное имущество одновременно с этим созалогодержателем, за исключением случаев, когда договором между залогодателем и созалогодержателем ограничено право такого созалогодержателя потребовать от должника досрочного исполнения обязательства, обеспеченного залогом. В случае недостаточности денежных средств, вырученных от реализации заложенного имущества, такие денежные средства распределяются между созалогодержателями пропорционально размерам их требований, обеспеченных залогом, если иное не предусмотрено законодательными актами или соглашением между созалогодержателями.
Если при обращении взыскания на заложенное имущество одним из созалогодержателей другие созалогодержатели не воспользовались в соответствии с частью третьей настоящего пункта правом потребовать от должника досрочного исполнения обязательства или такое право было ограничено договором, право залога этих созалогодержателей сохраняет силу в соответствии с пунктом 1 статьи 334 настоящего Кодекса.
Залогодатель, к которому одним из созалогодержателей предъявлено требование об обращении взыскания на заложенное имущество, обязан не позднее семи рабочих дней с даты получения указанного требования направить письменное уведомление о его предъявлении всем другим
созалогодержателям этого имущества, если иной порядок уведомления не предусмотрен законодательством или договором, и несет ответственность за убытки, причиненные таким созалогодержателям неисполнением данной обязанности. Созалогодержатели, получившие письменное уведомление о предъявлении требования об обращении взыскания на заложенное имущество, вправе в течение одного месяца с даты получения такого уведомления предъявить к должнику требование о досрочном исполнении обязательства, обеспеченного залогом.
2. Кредиторы, имеющие право предъявить к должнику требование по основному обязательству, обеспеченному залогом, в полном объеме (солидарные кредиторы), и кредиторы, имеющие право предъявить к должнику часть требования по такому обязательству (долевые кредиторы), являются созалогодержателями по этому залогу, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором.
Удовлетворение требований солидарных кредиторов по основному обязательству, обеспеченному залогом, осуществляется в порядке, установленном пунктом 4 статьи 307 настоящего Кодекса.
Удовлетворение требований долевых кредиторов по основному обязательству, обеспеченному залогом, осуществляется пропорционально размерам их требований, обеспеченных залогом, если иное не предусмотрено договором между ними.
Статья 324. Содержание и сохранность заложенного имущества
1. Залогодатель или залогодержатель в зависимости от того, у кого из них находится заложенное имущество (статья 319), обязан, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором:
1) страховать за счет залогодателя заложенное имущество в полной его стоимости от рисков утраты и повреждения, а если полная стоимость имущества превышает размер обеспеченного залогом требования, – на сумму не ниже размера требования;
2) принимать меры, необходимые для обеспечения сохранности заложенного имущества, в том числе для защиты его от посягательств и требований со стороны третьих лиц;
3) немедленно уведомлять другую сторону о возникновении угрозы утраты или повреждения заложенного имущества.
2. Залогодержатель и залогодатель вправе проверять по документам и фактически наличие, количество, состояние и условия хранения заложенного имущества, находящегося у другой стороны.
3. При грубом нарушении залогодержателем обязанностей, указанных в пункте 1 настоящей статьи, создающем угрозу утраты или повреждения заложенного имущества, залогодатель вправе потребовать досрочного прекращения залога.
Статья 325. Последствия утраты или повреждения заложенного имущества
1. Залогодатель несет риск случайной гибели или случайного повреждения заложенного имущества, если иное не предусмотрено договором о залоге.
2. Залогодержатель отвечает за полную или частичную утрату или повреждение переданного ему предмета залога, если не докажет, что может быть освобожден от ответственности в соответствии со статьей 372 настоящего Кодекса.
Залогодержатель отвечает за утрату предмета залога в размере его стоимости с учетом инфляции, а за его повреждение – в размере суммы, на которую эта стоимость понизилась, независимо от его стоимости, указанной в договоре.
Если в результате повреждения предмета залога он изменился настолько, что не может быть использован по прямому назначению, залогодатель вправе от него отказаться и потребовать возмещения за его утрату.
Договором может быть предусмотрена обязанность залогодержателя возместить залогодателю и иные убытки, причиненные утратой или повреждением предмета залога.
Залогодатель, являющийся должником по обеспеченному залогом обязательству, вправе зачесть требование к залогодержателю о возмещении убытков, причиненных утратой или повреждением предмета залога, в погашение обязательства, обеспеченного залогом.
Статья 326. Замена и восстановление предмета залога
1. Замена предмета залога допускается с согласия залогодержателя, если законодательством или договором не предусмотрено иное.
Если возникает реальная угроза полной или частичной утраты либо повреждения предмета заклада не по вине залогодержателя, он вправе требовать замены предмета заклада, а в случае отказа залогодателя выполнить это требование – требовать досрочного исполнения обеспеченного закладом обязательства.
2. Если предмет залога утрачен или поврежден либо право собственности на него или право хозяйственного ведения или оперативного управления прекращено по основаниям, установленным законодательством, залогодатель вправе в разумный срок восстановить предмет залога или заменить его другим равноценным имуществом, если договором не предусмотрено иное.
Статья 327. Пользование и распоряжение предметом залога
1. Залогодатель вправе, если иное не предусмотрено договором и не вытекает из существа залога, пользоваться предметом залога в соответствии с его назначением, в том числе извлекать из него плоды и доходы.
2. Если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором и не вытекает из существа залога, залогодатель вправе отчуждать предмет залога, передавать его в аренду или безвозмездное пользование другому лицу либо иным образом распоряжаться им только с согласия залогодержателя.
Соглашение, ограничивающее право залогодателя завещать заложенное имущество, ничтожно.
3. Залогодержатель вправе пользоваться переданным ему предметом заклада лишь в случаях, предусмотренных договором, регулярно предоставляя залогодателю отчет о пользовании. По договору на залогодержателя может быть возложена обязанность извлекать из предмета заклада плоды и доходы в целях погашения основного обязательства или в интересах залогодателя.
Статья 328. Защита залогодержателем своих прав на предмет залога
1. Залогодержатель, у которого находилось или должно было находиться заложенное имущество, вправе истребовать его из чужого незаконного владения, в том числе и от залогодателя (статьи 282, 283 и 286).
2. В случаях, когда по условиям договора залогодержателю предоставлено право пользоваться переданным ему предметом залога, он может требовать от других лиц, в том числе и от залогодателя, устранения всех нарушений его прав, хотя бы эти нарушения и не были связаны с лишением владения (статьи 285 и 286).
Статья 329. Основания обращения взыскания на заложенное имущество
1. Взыскание на заложенное имущество для удовлетворения требований залогодержателя (кредитора) может быть обращено в случае неисполнения или ненадлежащего исполнения должником обеспеченного залогом обязательства по обстоятельствам, за которые он отвечает.
2. В обращении взыскания на заложенное имущество может быть отказано, если допущенное должником нарушение обеспеченного залогом обязательства крайне незначительно и размер требований залогодержателя вследствие этого явно несоразмерен стоимости заложенного имущества.
Статья 330. Порядок обращения взыскания на заложенное имущество
1. Требования залогодержателя (кредитора) удовлетворяются из стоимости заложенного имущества по решению суда, если иное не предусмотрено частями второй и третьей настоящего пункта и частью первой пункта 5 статьи 339 настоящего Кодекса.
Удовлетворение требования залогодержателя за счет заложенного имущества без обращения в суд допускается на основании нотариально удостоверенного соглашения залогодержателя с залогодателем, заключенного до либо после возникновения установленных законодательством оснований для обращения взыскания на заложенное имущество, за исключением случаев, предусмотренных пунктом 3 настоящей статьи. При этом в таком соглашении должно содержаться условие о предоставлении права залогодателю, либо залогодержателю, либо иному лицу по выбору сторон осуществить от имени залогодателя продажу заложенного имущества в случае обращения взыскания на заложенное имущество для удовлетворения требования залогодержателя и не может предусматриваться переход права собственности на заложенное имущество к залогодержателю. Такое соглашение может быть признано судом недействительным по иску лица, чьи права нарушены этим соглашением.
Удовлетворение требования залогодержателя за счет заложенного имущественного права (требования) на получение денежных средств без обращения в суд допускается на основании договора о залоге (иного соглашения, заключенного между залогодержателем и залогодателем), за исключением случаев, предусмотренных пунктом 3 настоящей статьи. При этом такой договор (соглашение) должен предусматривать возможность оставления залогодержателем заложенного имущественного права (требования) на получение денежных средств за собой на определенных в нем условиях, но не ниже стоимости такого права (требования), указанной в договоре о залоге.
2. В случаях, когда для залога в соответствии с законодательными актами требуется согласие (решение) лица или государственного органа, иной государственной организации, заключение соглашения, указанного в части второй пункта 1 настоящей статьи, возможно только после получения в установленном порядке такого согласия (решения) этого лица или государственного органа, иной государственной организации.
3. Взыскание на заложенное имущество может быть обращено только по решению суда в случае, когда:
1) залогодатель отсутствует и установить место его нахождения невозможно;
2) предметом залога является имущество, относящееся к историко-культурным ценностям;
3) предметом залога является имущество, ограниченно оборотоспособное;
4) предметом залога является предприятие как имущественный комплекс;
5) предметом ипотеки является имущество, находящееся в совместной собственности, и кто-либо из его собственников не дает в письменной форме согласия на удовлетворение требований залогодержателя во внесудебном порядке;
6) для ипотеки имущества требуется согласие (решение) иного лица или государственного органа, другой государственной организации.
Статья 331. Реализация заложенного имущества
1. Реализация заложенного имущества, на которое в соответствии с частью первой пункта 1 статьи 330 настоящего Кодекса обращено взыскание по решению суда, производится в порядке, установленном законодательством об исполнительном производстве, если настоящим Кодексом и другими актами законодательства не установлен иной порядок.
2. По просьбе залогодателя суд вправе в решении об обращении взыскания на заложенное имущество отсрочить его продажу на срок до одного года.
Отсрочка не затрагивает прав и обязанностей сторон по обязательству, обеспеченному залогом этого имущества, и не освобождает должника от возмещения возросших за время отсрочки убытков кредитора и неустойки.
21. Заложенное имущество, на которое обращено взыскание без обращения в суд в соответствии с частью второй пункта 1 и пунктом 2 статьи 330 настоящего Кодекса, реализуется:
1) на публичных торгах в порядке, установленном актами законодательства:
залогодержателем, залогодателем или иным лицом, уполномоченным нотариально удостоверенным соглашением залогодержателя с залогодателем, за исключением случая, указанного в абзаце третьем настоящего подпункта;
залогодержателем, если предметом залога являются земельный участок, находящийся в частной собственности, или право аренды земельного участка, в том числе с расположенными или возводимыми на них капитальными строениями (зданиями, сооружениями), либо капитальные строения (здания, сооружения) с одновременным залогом земельного участка, находящегося в частной собственности (права аренды земельного участка), на котором расположены эти капитальные строения (здания, сооружения), а также иное имущество, относящееся к основным средствам залогодателя;
2) по договору купли-продажи без проведения публичных торгов банком-залогодержателем, залогодателем или иным лицом, уполномоченным нотариально удостоверенным соглашением банка-залогодержателя с залогодателем, в случае удовлетворения требований о погашении банковского кредита за счет заложенного имущества, за исключением имущества, указанного в абзаце третьем подпункта 1 настоящего пункта.
3. Начальная цена заложенного имущества, с которой начинаются торги, определяется решением суда в соответствии с процессуальным законодательством при обращении взыскания на имущество в судебном порядке или соглашением залогодержателя и залогодателя при обращении взыскания на это имущество без обращения в суд, если законодательными актами не предусмотрено иное.
Заложенное имущество продается лицу, предложившему на торгах наивысшую цену.
Если торги, в том числе повторные, признаны несостоявшимися в силу того, что заявка (заявление) на участие в них подана только одним участником либо для участия в них явился только один участник, в случаях, предусмотренных законодательными актами, предмет торгов продается этому участнику при его согласии по начальной цене, увеличенной на пять процентов.
4. При объявлении торгов несостоявшимися и отказе единственного участника, подавшего заявку (заявление) на участие в торгах либо явившегося для участия в них, от приобретения заложенного имущества по начальной цене, увеличенной на пять процентов, если возможность такого
приобретения предусмотрена законодательными актами, залогодержатель вправе по соглашению с залогодателем приобрести заложенное имущество и зачесть в счет покупной цены свои требования, обеспеченные залогом. К такому соглашению применяются правила о договоре купли- продажи.
При объявлении повторных торгов несостоявшимися и отказе единственного участника, подавшего заявку (заявление) на участие в повторных торгах либо явившегося для участия в них, от приобретения заложенного имущества по начальной цене, увеличенной на пять процентов, если возможность такого приобретения предусмотрена законодательными актами, залогодержатель вправе оставить предмет залога за собой с оценкой его стоимости в сумме не более чем на десять процентов ниже начальной цены на повторных торгах.
Если залогодержатель не воспользуется правом оставить за собой предмет залога в течение месяца со дня объявления повторных торгов несостоявшимися и в случае отказа единственного участника, подавшего заявку (заявление) на участие в повторных торгах либо явившегося для участия в них, от приобретения заложенного имущества по начальной цене, увеличенной на пять процентов, если возможность такого приобретения предусмотрена законодательными актами, договор о залоге прекращается.
Порядок, установленный частями первой и второй настоящего пункта, не распространяется на реализацию имущества в исполнительном производстве.
5. Если сумма, вырученная при реализации заложенного имущества, недостаточна для покрытия требования залогодержателя, он имеет право при отсутствии иного указания в законодательстве или договоре получить недостающую сумму из прочего имущества должника, не пользуясь преимуществом, основанным на залоге.
6. Если сумма, вырученная при реализации заложенного имущества, превышает размер обеспеченного залогом требования залогодержателя, разница за вычетом всех издержек возвращается залогодателю, за исключением случая, предусмотренного частью пятой пункта 5 статьи 339 настоящего Кодекса.
7. Должник и залогодатель, являющийся третьим лицом, вправе в любое время до продажи предмета залога прекратить обращение на него взыскания и реализацию, исполнив обеспеченное залогом обязательство или ту его часть, исполнение по которой просрочено. Соглашение, ограничивающее это право, ничтожно.
Статья 332. Досрочное исполнение обязательства, обеспеченного залогом, и обращение взыскания на заложенное имущество
1. Залогодержатель вправе потребовать досрочного исполнения обеспеченного залогом обязательства в случаях:
1) если предмет залога выбыл из владения залогодателя, у которого он был оставлен, не в соответствии с условиями договора о залоге;
2) нарушения залогодателем правил о замене предмета залога (статья 326);
3) утраты предмета залога по обстоятельствам, за которые залогодержатель не отвечает, если залогодатель не воспользовался правом, предусмотренным пунктом 2 статьи 326 настоящего Кодекса.
2. Залогодержатель вправе потребовать досрочного исполнения обеспеченного залогом обязательства, а если его требование не будет удовлетворено, обратить взыскание на предмет залога в случаях:
1) нарушения залогодателем правил о последующем залоге либо обращения взыскания на заложенное имущество предшествующим или последующим залогодержателем либо одним из созалогодержателей (статьи 323 и 3231);
2) невыполнения залогодателем обязанностей, предусмотренных подпунктами 1 и 2 пункта 1 и пунктом 2 статьи 324 настоящего Кодекса;
3) нарушения залогодателем правил о распоряжении заложенным имуществом (пункт 2 статьи 327).
Статья 333. Прекращение залога
1. Залог прекращается:
1) с прекращением обеспеченного залогом обязательства;
2) по требованию залогодателя при наличии оснований, предусмотренных пунктом 3 статьи 324 настоящего Кодекса;
3) в случаях гибели заложенной вещи или прекращения заложенного права, если залогодатель не воспользовался правом, предусмотренным пунктом 2 статьи 326 настоящего Кодекса;
4) в случае реализации заложенного имущества в порядке, установленном статьей 331 настоящего Кодекса, законодательством об исполнительном производстве, а также в случае, когда его реализация оказалась невозможной;
5) с переводом на другое лицо долга по обязательству, обеспеченному залогом, если залогодатель не дал кредитору согласия отвечать за нового должника (статья 337);
6) при обращении взыскания на заложенное имущество предшествующим залогодержателем, если последующий залогодержатель не воспользовался правом потребовать от должника досрочного исполнения обязательства или такое право было ограничено договором либо последующим залогом были обеспечены обязательства, обеспеченные также гарантиями Правительства Республики Беларусь, гарантиями местных исполнительных и распорядительных органов, и для удовлетворения требований предшествующего залогодержателя обращено взыскание на все заложенное имущество либо если предшествующий залогодержатель воспользовался правом, предусмотренным частью второй пункта 4 статьи 331 настоящего Кодекса.
2. Прекращение ипотеки должно быть зарегистрировано в соответствии с законодательством.
3. При прекращении заклада вследствие исполнения обеспеченного закладом обязательства либо по требованию залогодателя (пункт 3 статьи 324) залогодержатель, у которого находилось заложенное имущество, обязан немедленно возвратить его залогодателю.
Статья 334. Сохранение залога при переходе права на заложенное имущество к другому лицу
1. В случае перехода права собственности на заложенное имущество или права хозяйственного ведения им от залогодателя к другому лицу в результате возмездного или безвозмездного отчуждения этого имущества либо в порядке универсального правопреемства право залога сохраняет силу.
Правопреемник залогодателя становится на место залогодателя и несет все его обязанности, если соглашением с залогодержателем не установлено иное.
2. Если имущество залогодателя, являющееся предметом залога, перешло в порядке правопреемства к нескольким лицам, каждый из правопреемников (приобретателей имущества)
несет вытекающие из залога последствия неисполнения обеспеченного залогом обязательства соразмерно перешедшей к нему части указанного имущества. Однако если предмет залога неделим или по иным основаниям остается в общей собственности правопреемников, они становятся солидарными залогодателями.
Статья 335. Последствия принудительного изъятия заложенного имущества
1. Если право собственности залогодателя на имущество, являющееся предметом залога, прекращается по основаниям и в порядке, которые установлены законом, вследствие изъятия (выкупа) для государственных нужд, реквизиции или национализации и залогодателю предоставляется другое имущество или соответствующее возмещение, право залога распространяется на предоставленное взамен имущество либо соответственно залогодержатель приобретает право преимущественного удовлетворения своего требования из суммы причитающегося залогодателю возмещения. Залогодержатель вправе также потребовать досрочного исполнения обеспеченного залогом обязательства.
2. В случаях, когда имущество, являющееся предметом залога, изымается у залогодателя в установленном законодательными актами порядке на том основании, что в действительности собственником этого имущества является другое лицо (статья 282), либо в виде санкций за совершенное преступление или иное правонарушение (статья 244), залог в отношении этого имущества прекращается. В этих случаях залогодержатель вправе требовать досрочного исполнения обеспеченного залогом обязательства.
Статья 336. Уступка прав по договору залога
Залогодержатель вправе передать свои права по договору о залоге другому лицу с соблюдением правил о передаче прав кредитора путем уступки требования (статьи 353-361).
Уступка залогодержателем своих прав по договору о залоге другому лицу действительна, если тому же лицу уступлено право требования к должнику по основному обязательству, обеспеченному залогом.
Если не доказано иное, уступка прав по договору об ипотеке означает и уступку прав по обеспеченному ипотекой обязательству.
Статья 337. Перевод долга по обязательству, обеспеченному залогом
С переводом на другое лицо долга по обязательству, обеспеченному залогом, залог прекращается, если залогодатель не дал кредитору согласия отвечать за нового должника.
Статья 338. Залог товара в обороте
1. Залогом товара в обороте признается залог товаров с оставлением их у залогодателя и с предоставлением залогодателю права изменять состав и натуральную форму заложенного имущества (товарных запасов, сырья, материалов, полуфабрикатов, готовой продукции и т.п.) при условии, что их общая стоимость не становится меньше указанной в договоре о залоге.
Передача в залог любого движимого имущества, определенного родовыми признаками, может осуществляться в порядке, установленном настоящим Кодексом и иными законодательными актами для залога товаров в обороте.
Договор о залоге товаров в обороте должен определять родовые признаки заложенного товара и общую стоимость заложенного товара.
Уменьшение стоимости заложенных товаров в обороте допускается соразмерно исполненной части обеспеченного залогом обязательства, если иное не предусмотрено договором.
2. Товары в обороте, отчужденные залогодателем, перестают быть предметом залога с момента их перехода в собственность, хозяйственное ведение или оперативное управление приобретателя, а приобретенные залогодателем товары, указанные в договоре о залоге, становятся предметом залога с момента возникновения у залогодателя на них права собственности, хозяйственного ведения или оперативного управления.
3. Залогодатель товаров в обороте обязан вести книгу записи залогов, в которую вносятся записи об условиях залога товаров и обо всех операциях, влекущих изменение состава или натуральной формы заложенных товаров, включая их переработку, на день последней операции.
4. При нарушении залогодателем условий залога товаров в обороте залогодержатель вправе путем наложения на заложенные товары своих знаков и печатей приостановить операции с ними до устранения нарушения или потребовать передачи ему заложенных товаров либо требовать досрочного исполнения обеспеченного залогом обязательства.
Статья 339. Залог вещей в ломбарде
1. Принятие от граждан в залог движимого имущества, предназначенного для личного, семейного или домашнего использования, в обеспечение краткосрочных микрозаймов (займов в сумме, не превышающей 15 000 базовых величин на одного заемщика на день заключения договора) может осуществляться в качестве предпринимательской деятельности специализированными организациями – ломбардами.
2. Договор о залоге вещей в ломбарде оформляется выдачей ломбардом залогового билета.
3. Закладываемые вещи передаются ломбарду.
Ломбард обязан страховать в пользу залогодателя за свой счет принятые в залог вещи по стоимости, устанавливаемой в соответствии с ценами на вещи такого же рода и качества, обычно устанавливаемыми в торговле в момент их принятия в залог.
Ломбард не вправе пользоваться и распоряжаться заложенными вещами.
4. Ломбард несет ответственность за утрату и повреждение заложенных вещей, если не докажет, что утрата или повреждение произошли вследствие непреодолимой силы.
5. Ломбард в случае невозвращения суммы микрозайма в срок, установленный договором микрозайма, исполнение обязательств по которому обеспечено залогом движимого имущества, предназначенного для личного, семейного или домашнего использования, сумма оценки которого на день заключения договора микрозайма не превышает 100 базовых величин, по истечении месячного срока после наступления дня возврата суммы микрозайма, установленного договором микрозайма, вправе самостоятельно обратить взыскание на такое имущество без обращения в суд и соблюдения иных требований, предусмотренных частью второй пункта 1 статьи 330 настоящего Кодекса, и реализовать его в соответствии с порядком, определенным правилами предоставления микрозаймов, утверждаемыми ломбардом в соответствии с законодательством, если иной порядок не установлен договором микрозайма (залоговым билетом), за исключением случая, указанного в части четвертой настоящего пункта.
Самостоятельное обращение взыскания на движимое имущество, предназначенное для личного, семейного или домашнего использования, которым обеспечено исполнение обязательств по договору микрозайма, сумма оценки которого на день заключения договора микрозайма не превышает 100 базовых величин, а также самостоятельная реализация такого имущества осуществляются ломбардом в соответствии с правилами, определяемыми Советом Министров Республики Беларусь и Национальным банком Республики Беларусь.
В случае невозвращения суммы микрозайма в срок, установленный договором микрозайма, исполнение обязательств по которому обеспечено залогом движимого имущества, предназначенного для личного, семейного или домашнего использования, сумма оценки которого на день заключения договора микрозайма превышает 100 базовых величин, обращение взыскания на такое имущество по истечении месячного срока после наступления дня возврата суммы микрозайма, установленного договором микрозайма, а также реализация такого имущества осуществляются ломбардом в соответствии со статьей 330 и пунктами 1–4 и 7 статьи 331 настоящего Кодекса, актами Президента Республики Беларусь, за исключением случая, указанного в части четвертой настоящего пункта.
Особенности осуществления ломбардом операций с драгоценными металлами и драгоценными камнями, в том числе особенности реализации драгоценных металлов и драгоценных камней, не востребованных из ломбарда, устанавливаются законодательством в сфере деятельности с драгоценными металлами и драгоценными камнями.
После реализации движимого имущества, предназначенного для личного, семейного или домашнего использования, переданного заемщиком или иным лицом, являющимся залогодателем, ломбарду в обеспечение исполнения обязательств заемщика по договору микрозайма, требования ломбарда к заемщику погашаются, даже если сумма, вырученная от реализации заложенного движимого имущества, недостаточна для их полного удовлетворения. Если сумма, вырученная при реализации этого имущества, превышает размер обеспеченного залогом требования ломбарда, разница между вырученной от реализации суммой и размером требования без вычета издержек возвращается залогодателю. Не востребованная залогодателем в течение трех лет со дня реализации заложенного движимого имущества разница подлежит внесению в доход местного бюджета по месту нахождения ломбарда.
6. Правила предоставления микрозаймов гражданам ломбардами под залог принадлежащих гражданам вещей устанавливаются в соответствии с законодательством.
7. Условия договора о залоге вещей в ломбарде, ограничивающие права залогодателя, по сравнению с правами, предоставляемыми ему законодательством, ничтожны. Вместо таких условий применяются соответствующие положения законодательства.
Статья 3391. Залог имущественного права (требования)
1. При залоге имущественного права (требования) его стоимость определяется соглашением сторон, если иное не следует из характера самого права (требования) или не установлено законодательными актами.
2. Срочное имущественное право (требование) может быть предметом залога только до окончания срока его действия.
3. При залоге имущественного права (требования), если иное не предусмотрено договором, залогодатель обязан:
1) осуществлять все действия, необходимые для обеспечения действительности заложенного права (требования);
2) не совершать уступки заложенного права (требования);
3) не совершать действий, влекущих прекращение заложенного права (требования) либо уменьшение его стоимости;
4) принимать меры, необходимые для защиты заложенного права (требования) от посягательств со стороны третьих лиц;
5) сообщать залогодержателю сведения об изменениях, произошедших в заложенном праве (требовании), о его нарушениях со стороны третьих лиц и о претензиях третьих лиц на это право (требование).
4. При залоге имущественного права (требования), если иное не предусмотрено договором, залогодержатель вправе независимо от наступления срока исполнения обеспеченного залогом обязательства требовать в судебном порядке перевода на себя заложенного права (требования), если залогодатель не исполнил обязанности, предусмотренные подпунктами 2 – 4 пункта 3 настоящей статьи, при условии, что заложенное право (требование) не прекращено.
5. Залог имущественного права (требования), удостоверенного ценной бумагой, осуществляется путем обременения залогом этой ценной бумаги.
§ 4. Удержание
Статья 340. Удержание
1. Кредитор, у которого находится вещь, подлежащая передаче должнику либо лицу, указанному должником, вправе в случае неисполнения должником в срок обязательства по оплате этой вещи или возмещению кредитору связанных с нею издержек и других убытков удерживать ее до тех пор, пока соответствующее обязательство не будет исполнено.
2. Удержанием вещи могут обеспечиваться также требования, хотя и не связанные с оплатой вещи или возмещением издержек на нее и других убытков, но возникшие из обязательства, стороны которого действуют как предприниматели.
3. Кредитор может удерживать находящуюся у него вещь, несмотря на то, что после того, как эта вещь поступила во владение кредитора, права на нее приобретены третьим лицом.
4. Указанные выше правила настоящей статьи применяются, если договором не предусмотрено иное.
5. Требования кредитора, удерживающего вещь, удовлетворяются из ее стоимости в объеме и порядке, предусмотренных для удовлетворения требований, обеспеченных залогом.
§ 5. Поручительство
Статья 341. Договор поручительства
1. По договору поручительства поручитель обязывается перед кредитором другого лица отвечать за исполнение последним его обязательства полностью или в части.
2. Договор поручительства может быть заключен также для обеспечения обязательства, которое возникнет в будущем.
3. Президентом Республики Беларусь и (или) законами может быть установлен особый порядок предоставления и исполнения поручительств местных исполнительных и распорядительных органов.
Статья 342. Форма договора поручительства
Договор поручительства должен быть совершен в письменной форме. Несоблюдение письменной формы влечет недействительность договора поручительства.
Статья 343. Ответственность поручителя
1. При неисполнении или ненадлежащем исполнении должником обеспеченного поручительством обязательства поручитель и должник отвечают перед кредитором солидарно, если законодательством или договором поручительства не предусмотрена субсидиарная ответственность поручителя.
2. Поручитель отвечает перед кредитором в том же объеме, что и должник, включая уплату процентов, возмещение судебных издержек по взысканию долга и других убытков кредитора, вызванных неисполнением или ненадлежащим исполнением обязательств должником, если иное не предусмотрено договором поручительства.
3. Лица, совместно давшие поручительство, отвечают перед кредитором солидарно, если иное не предусмотрено договором поручительства.
Статья 344. Право поручителя на возражения против требования кредитора
1. Поручитель вправе выдвигать против требования кредитора возражения, которые мог бы представить должник, если иное не вытекает из договора поручительства.
Поручитель не теряет права на эти возражения даже в том случае, если должник от них отказался или признал свой долг.
2. Если к поручителю предъявлен иск, он обязан привлечь должника к участию в деле.
3. Если поручитель не выполнил обязанности, указанной в пункте 2 настоящей статьи, должник имеет право выдвинуть против регрессного требования поручителя возражения, которые он имел против кредитора.
Статья 345. Права поручителя, исполнившего обязательство
1. К поручителю, исполнившему обязательство, переходят права кредитора по этому обязательству и права, принадлежавшие кредитору как залогодержателю, в том объеме, в котором поручитель удовлетворил требование кредитора. Поручитель также вправе требовать от должника уплаты процентов на сумму, выплаченную кредитору, и возмещения иных убытков, понесенных в связи с ответственностью за должника.
2. По исполнении поручителем обязательства кредитор обязан вручить поручителю документы, удостоверяющие требование к должнику, и передать права, обеспечивающие это требование.
3. Правила, установленные настоящей статьей, применяются, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором поручителя с должником и не вытекает из отношений между ними.
Статья 346. Извещение поручителя об исполнении обязательства должником
Должник, исполнивший обязательство, обеспеченное поручительством, обязан немедленно известить об этом поручителя. В противном случае поручитель, в свою очередь исполнивший обязательство, вправе взыскать с кредитора неосновательно полученное либо предъявить регрессное требование к должнику. В последнем случае должник вправе взыскать с кредитора лишь неосновательно полученное.
Статья 347. Прекращение поручительства
1. Поручительство прекращается с прекращением обеспеченного им обязательства, а также в случае изменения этого обязательства, влекущего увеличение ответственности или иные неблагоприятные последствия для поручителя, без согласия последнего.
2. Поручительство прекращается с переводом на другое лицо долга по обеспеченному поручительством обязательству, если поручитель не дал кредитору согласия отвечать за нового должника.
3. Поручительство прекращается, если кредитор отказался принять надлежащее исполнение, предложенное должником или поручителем.
4. Поручительство прекращается по истечении указанного в договоре поручительства срока, на который оно дано. Если такой срок не установлен, оно прекращается, если кредитор в течение одного года со дня наступления срока исполнения обеспеченного поручительством обязательства не предъявит иска к поручителю. Когда срок исполнения основного обязательства не указан и не может быть определен или определен моментом востребования, поручительство прекращается, если кредитор не предъявит иска к поручителю в течение двух лет со дня заключения договора поручительства.
§ 6. Гарантия
Статья 348. Понятие гарантии
1. В силу гарантии гарант обязуется перед кредитором другого лица (должника) отвечать полностью или частично за исполнение обязательства этого лица.
2. Гарантийное обязательство может возникнуть на основании договора.
3. Гарантией может обеспечиваться лишь действительное требование.
4. Правила статьи 342, пунктов 2 и 3 статьи 343, статей 344-347 настоящего Кодекса распространяются на гарантии, если иное не установлено законодательством.
Президентом Республики Беларусь и (или) законами может быть установлен особый порядок предоставления и исполнения гарантий Правительства Республики Беларусь, гарантий местных исполнительных и распорядительных органов, иных организаций, включая хозяйственные общества с долей государства в уставных фондах.
Статья 349. Субсидиарная ответственность гаранта
1. В случае неисполнения обязательства гарант отвечает перед кредитором как субсидиарный (дополнительный) должник.
2. По исполнении обязательства гарант не приобретает права регрессного требования к должнику о возврате уплаченной суммы.
Статья 350. Особенности банковской гарантии
Особенности банковской гарантии и ее отдельных видов определяются законодательством.
§ 7. Задаток
Статья 351. Понятие задатка. Форма соглашения о задатке
1. Задатком признается денежная сумма, выдаваемая одной из договаривающихся сторон в счет причитающихся с нее по договору платежей другой стороне в доказательство заключения договора и в обеспечение его исполнения.
2. Соглашение о задатке независимо от суммы задатка должно быть совершено в письменной форме.
3. В случае сомнения в отношении того, является ли сумма, уплаченная в счет причитающихся со стороны по договору платежей, задатком, в частности вследствие несоблюдения правила, установленного пунктом 2 настоящей статьи, эта сумма считается уплаченной в качестве аванса, если не доказано иное.
Статья 352. Последствия прекращения и неисполнения обязательства, обеспеченного задатком
1. При прекращении обязательства, обеспеченного задатком, до начала его исполнения по соглашению сторон либо вследствие невозможности исполнения (статья 386) задаток должен быть возвращен.
2. Если за неисполнение договора ответственна сторона, давшая задаток, он остается у другой стороны. Если за неисполнение договора ответственна сторона, получившая задаток, она обязана уплатить другой стороне двойную сумму задатка.
Сверх того сторона, ответственная за неисполнение договора, обязана возместить другой стороне убытки с зачетом суммы задатка, если в договоре не предусмотрено иное.
ГЛАВА 24 ПЕРЕМЕНА ЛИЦ В ОБЯЗАТЕЛЬСТВЕ
§ 1. Переход прав кредитора к другому лицу
Статья 353. Основания и порядок перехода прав кредитора к другому лицу
1. Право (требование), принадлежащее кредитору на основании обязательства, может быть передано им другому лицу по сделке (уступка требования) или перейти к другому лицу на основании акта законодательства.
Правила о переходе прав кредитора к другому лицу не применяются к регрессным требованиям.
2. Для перехода к другому лицу прав кредитора не требуется согласия должника, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором.
3. Если должник не был письменно уведомлен о состоявшемся переходе прав кредитора к другому лицу, новый кредитор несет риск вызванных этим неблагоприятных для него последствий. В этом случае исполнение обязательства первоначальному кредитору признается исполнением надлежащему кредитору.
Статья 354. Права кредитора, которые не могут переходить к другим лицам
Переход к другому лицу прав, неразрывно связанных с личностью кредитора, в частности требований об алиментах, о возмещении вреда, причиненного жизни или здоровью, не допускается.
Статья 355. Объем прав кредитора, переходящих к другому лицу
Если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором, право первоначального кредитора переходит к новому кредитору в том объеме и на тех условиях, которые существовали к моменту перехода права. В частности, к новому кредитору переходят права, обеспечивающие исполнение обязательства, а также другие связанные с требованием права, в том числе право на неуплаченные проценты.
Статья 356. Доказательства прав нового кредитора
1. Кредитор, уступивший требование другому лицу, обязан передать ему документы, удостоверяющие право требования, и сообщить сведения, имеющие значение для осуществления требования.
2. Должник вправе не исполнять обязательство новому кредитору до предоставления ему доказательств перехода требования к этому лицу.
Статья 357. Возражения должника против требований нового кредитора
Должник вправе выдвигать против требования нового кредитора возражения, которые он имел против первоначального кредитора к моменту получения уведомления о переходе прав по обязательству к новому кредитору.
Статья 358. Переход прав кредитора к другому лицу на основании акта законодательства
Права кредитора по обязательству переходят к другому лицу на основании акта законодательства и наступления указанных в нем обстоятельств:
1) в результате универсального правопреемства в правах кредитора;
2) по решению суда о переводе прав кредитора на другое лицо, когда возможность такого перевода предусмотрена законодательством;
3) вследствие исполнения обязательства должника его поручителем или залогодателем, не являющимся должником по этому обязательству;
4) при суброгации страховщику прав кредитора к должнику, ответственному за наступление страхового случая;
5) в других случаях, предусмотренных законодательством.
Статья 359. Условия уступки требования
1. Уступка требования кредитором другому лицу допускается, если она не противоречит законодательству или договору.
2. Не допускается без согласия должника уступка требования по обязательству, в котором личность кредитора имеет существенное значение для должника.
Статья 360. Форма уступки требования
1. Уступка требования, основанного на сделке, совершенной в простой письменной или нотариальной форме, должна быть совершена в соответствующей письменной форме.
2. Уступка требования по сделке, требующей государственной регистрации, должна быть зарегистрирована в порядке, установленном для регистрации этой сделки, если иное не установлено законодательством.
3. Уступка требования по ордерной ценной бумаге совершается путем индоссамента на этой ценной бумаге (пункт 3 статьи 147).
Статья 361. Ответственность кредитора, уступившего требование
Первоначальный кредитор, уступивший требование, отвечает перед новым кредитором за недействительность переданного ему требования, но не отвечает за неисполнение этого требования
должником, кроме случая, когда первоначальный кредитор принял на себя поручительство за должника перед новым кредитором.
§ 2. Перевод долга
Статья 362. Условия и форма перевода долга
1. Перевод должником своего долга на другое лицо допускается лишь с согласия кредитора.
2. К форме перевода долга соответственно применяются правила, содержащиеся в пунктах 1 и 2 статьи 360 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 363. Возражения нового должника против требований кредитора
Новый должник вправе выдвигать против требования кредитора возражения, основанные на отношениях между кредитором и первоначальным должником.
ГЛАВА 25 ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТЬ ЗА НАРУШЕНИЕ ОБЯЗАТЕЛЬСТВ
Статья 364. Обязанность должника возместить убытки
1. Должник обязан возместить кредитору убытки, причиненные неисполнением или ненадлежащим исполнением обязательства.
2. Убытки определяются в соответствии с правилами, установленными статьей 14 настоящего Кодекса.
3. Если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором, при определении убытков принимаются во внимание цены, существующие в том месте, где обязательство должно быть исполнено, в день добровольного удовлетворения должником требования кредитора, а если требование добровольно удовлетворено не было, – в день предъявления иска. Исходя из обстоятельств, суд может удовлетворить требование о возмещении убытков, принимая во внимание цены, существующие на день вынесения решения.
4. При определении упущенной выгоды учитываются предпринятые кредитором для ее получения меры и сделанные с этой целью приготовления.
Статья 365. Убытки и неустойка
1. Если за неисполнение или ненадлежащее исполнение обязательства установлена неустойка, то убытки возмещаются в части, не покрытой неустойкой.
Законодательством или договором могут быть предусмотрены случаи, когда допускается взыскание только неустойки, но не убытков, когда убытки могут быть взысканы в полной сумме сверх неустойки, когда по выбору кредитора могут быть взысканы либо неустойка, либо убытки.
2. В случаях, когда за неисполнение или ненадлежащее исполнение обязательства установлена ограниченная ответственность (статья 371), убытки, подлежащие возмещению в части, не покрытой неустойкой, либо сверх нее, либо вместо нее, могут быть взысканы до пределов, установленных таким ограничением.
Статья 366. Ответственность за неисполнение денежного обязательства
1. За пользование чужими денежными средствами вследствие их неправомерного удержания, уклонения от их возврата, иной просрочки в их уплате либо неосновательного получения или
сбережения за счет другого лица подлежат уплате проценты на сумму этих средств. Размер процентов определяется ставкой рефинансирования Национального банка Республики Беларусь на день исполнения денежного обязательства или его соответствующей части, за исключением взыскания долга в судебном порядке, когда суд удовлетворяет требование кредитора исходя из ставки рефинансирования Национального банка на день вынесения решения.
Эти правила применяются, если иной размер процентов не установлен законодательством или договором.
В случае, если денежное обязательство в соответствии с законодательством подлежит оплате в белорусских рублях в размере, эквивалентном определенной сумме в иностранной валюте или в условных денежных единицах, проценты начисляются на подлежащую оплате сумму в белорусских рублях, определенную по официальному курсу соответствующей валюты или условных денежных единиц на день исполнения денежного обязательства либо его соответствующей части, а в случае взыскания долга в судебном порядке – на день вынесения решения судом.
2. Если убытки, причиненные кредитору неправомерным пользованием его денежными средствами, превышают сумму процентов, причитающихся ему на основании пункта 1 настоящей статьи, он вправе требовать от должника возмещения убытков в части, превышающей эту сумму.
В случаях, предусмотренных законодательством или договором, кредитор вправе требовать от должника возмещения суммы долга, увеличенной с учетом инфляции, в части, превышающей сумму процентов, причитающихся ему на основании пункта 1 настоящей статьи. При этом размер долга, увеличенного с учетом инфляции, рассчитывается в порядке, определенном договором, если иное не установлено законодательством.
3. Проценты за пользование чужими денежными средствами взимаются по день уплаты суммы этих средств кредитору, если законодательством или договором для начисления процентов не установлен более короткий срок.
4. Если сумма подлежащих уплате процентов за пользование чужими денежными средствами, размер которых определен договором на основании части второй пункта 1 настоящей статьи, явно несоразмерна последствиям нарушения обязательства, суд вправе уменьшить сумму этих процентов по заявлению должника, но не ниже чем до суммы процентов, исчисленной в соответствии с частью первой пункта 1 настоящей статьи.
Статья 367. Ответственность за неисполнение обязательства в натуре
1. Уплата неустойки и возмещение убытков в случае ненадлежащего исполнения обязательства не освобождают должника от исполнения обязательства в натуре, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором.
2. Возмещение убытков в случае неисполнения обязательства и уплата неустойки за его неисполнение освобождают должника от исполнения обязательства в натуре, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором.
3. Отказ кредитора от принятия исполнения, которое вследствие просрочки утратило для него интерес (пункт 2 статьи 376), а также уплата отступного (статья 380) освобождают должника от исполнения обязательства в натуре.
Статья 368. Исполнение обязательства за счет должника
В случае неисполнения должником обязательства изготовить и передать вещь в собственность, хозяйственное ведение или оперативное управление, либо передать вещь в пользование кредитору,
либо выполнить для него определенную работу или оказать ему услугу кредитор вправе в разумный срок поручить выполнение обязательства третьим лицам за разумную цену либо выполнить его своими силами, если иное не вытекает из акта законодательства, договора или существа обязательства, и потребовать от должника возмещения понесенных необходимых расходов и других убытков.
Статья 369. Последствия неисполнения обязательства передать индивидуально-определенную вещь
В случае неисполнения обязательства передать индивидуально-определенную вещь в собственность, хозяйственное ведение, оперативное управление или возмездное пользование кредитору последний вправе потребовать отобрания этой вещи и передачи ее кредитору на предусмотренных обязательством условиях. Это право отпадает, если вещь уже передана третьему лицу, имеющему право собственности, хозяйственного ведения или оперативного управления. Если вещь еще не передана, преимущество имеет тот из кредиторов, в пользу которого обязательство возникло раньше, а если это невозможно установить, – тот, кто раньше предъявит иск.
Вместо требования передать ему вещь, являющуюся предметом обязательства, кредитор вправе требовать возмещения убытков.
Статья 370. Субсидиарная ответственность
1. До предъявления требования к лицу, которое в соответствии с законодательством или условиями обязательства несет ответственность дополнительно к ответственности другого лица, являющегося основным должником (субсидиарная ответственность), кредитор должен предъявить требование к основному должнику.
Если основной должник отказался удовлетворить требование кредитора или кредитор не получил от него в разумный срок ответа на предъявленное требование, это требование может быть предъявлено лицу, несущему субсидиарную ответственность.
2. Кредитор не вправе требовать удовлетворения своего требования к основному должнику от лица, несущего субсидиарную ответственность, если это требование может быть удовлетворено путем зачета встречного требования к основному должнику либо бесспорного взыскания средств с основного должника.
3. Лицо, несущее субсидиарную ответственность, должно до удовлетворения требования, предъявленного ему кредитором, предупредить об этом основного должника, а если к такому лицу предъявлен иск, – привлечь основного должника к участию в деле. В противном случае основной должник имеет право выдвинуть против регрессного требования лица, отвечающего субсидиарно, возражения, которые он имел против кредитора.
Статья 371. Ограничение размера ответственности по обязательствам
1. По отдельным видам обязательств и по обязательствам, связанным с определенным родом деятельности, законодательством может быть ограничено право на полное возмещение убытков (ограниченная ответственность).
2. Соглашение об ограничении размера ответственности должника по договору присоединения или иному договору, в котором кредитором является гражданин, выступающий в качестве потребителя, ничтожно, если размер ответственности для данного вида обязательств или за данное нарушение определен законом.
Статья 372. Основания ответственности за нарушение обязательства
1. Лицо, не исполнившее обязательство либо исполнившее его ненадлежащим образом, несет ответственность при наличии вины (умысла или неосторожности), кроме случаев, когда законодательством или договором предусмотрены иные основания ответственности.
Лицо признается невиновным, если при той степени заботливости и осмотрительности, какая от него требовалась по характеру обязательства и условиям гражданского оборота, оно приняло все меры для надлежащего исполнения обязательства.
2. Отсутствие вины доказывается лицом, нарушившим обязательство.
3. Если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором, лицо, не исполнившее обязательство либо исполнившее его ненадлежащим образом при осуществлении предпринимательской деятельности, несет ответственность, если не докажет, что надлежащее исполнение обязательства невозможно вследствие непреодолимой силы, то есть чрезвычайных и непредотвратимых при данных условиях обстоятельств.
4. Заключенное ранее соглашение об устранении или ограничении ответственности за умышленное нарушение обязательства ничтожно.
Статья 373. Ответственность должника за своих работников
Действия работников должника по исполнению его обязательства считаются действиями должника. Должник отвечает за эти действия, если они повлекли неисполнение или ненадлежащее исполнение обязательства.
Статья 374. Ответственность должника за действия третьих лиц
Должник отвечает за неисполнение или ненадлежащее исполнение обязательства третьими лицами, на которых было возложено исполнение, если законодательством не установлено, что ответственность несет являющееся непосредственным исполнителем третье лицо.
Статья 375. Вина кредитора
1. Если неисполнение или ненадлежащее исполнение обязательства произошло по вине обеих сторон, суд соответственно уменьшает размер ответственности должника.
Суд также вправе уменьшить размер ответственности должника, если кредитор умышленно или по неосторожности содействовал увеличению размера убытков, причиненных неисполнением или ненадлежащим исполнением обязательства, либо не принял разумных мер к их уменьшению.
2. Правила пункта 1 настоящей статьи соответственно применяются и в случаях, когда должник в силу законодательного акта или договора несет ответственность за неисполнение или ненадлежащее исполнение обязательства независимо от своей вины.
Статья 376. Просрочка должника
1. Должник, просрочивший исполнение, отвечает перед кредитором за убытки, причиненные просрочкой, и за последствия случайно наступившей во время просрочки невозможности исполнения.
2. Если вследствие просрочки должника исполнение утратило интерес для кредитора, он может отказаться от принятия исполнения и требовать возмещения убытков.
3. Должник не считается просрочившим, пока обязательство не может быть исполнено вследствие просрочки кредитора.
Статья 377. Просрочка кредитора
1. Кредитор считается просрочившим, если он отказался принять предложенное должником надлежащее исполнение обязательства или не совершил действий, предусмотренных законодательством или договором либо вытекающих из существа обязательства, до совершения которых должник не мог исполнить своего обязательства.
Кредитор считается просрочившим также в случаях, указанных в пункте 2 статьи 379 настоящего Кодекса.
2. Просрочка кредитора дает должнику право на возмещение причиненных просрочкой убытков, если кредитор не докажет, что просрочка произошла по обстоятельствам, за которые ни он сам, ни те лица, на которых в силу законодательства или поручения кредитора было возложено принятие исполнения, не отвечают.
3. По денежному обязательству должник не обязан платить проценты за время просрочки кредитора.
ГЛАВА 26 ПРЕКРАЩЕНИЕ ОБЯЗАТЕЛЬСТВ
Статья 378. Основания прекращения обязательств
1. Обязательство прекращается полностью или частично по основаниям, предусмотренным настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства или договором.
2. Прекращение обязательства по требованию одной из сторон допускается только в случаях, предусмотренных законодательством или договором.
Статья 379. Прекращение обязательства исполнением
1. Надлежащее исполнение прекращает обязательство.
2. Кредитор, принимая исполнение, обязан по требованию должника выдать ему расписку или другой документ в получении исполнения полностью или в соответствующей части.
Если должник выдал кредитору в удостоверение обязательства долговой документ, то кредитор, принимая исполнение, должен вернуть этот документ, а при невозможности возвращения указать на это в выдаваемой им расписке. Расписка может быть заменена подписью на возвращаемом долговом документе. Нахождение долгового документа у должника удостоверяет, пока не доказано иное, прекращение обязательства.
При отказе кредитора выдать расписку, вернуть долговой документ или отметить в расписке невозможность его возвращения должник вправе задержать исполнение. В этих случаях кредитор считается просрочившим.
Статья 380. Отступное
По соглашению сторон обязательство может быть прекращено предоставлением взамен исполнения отступного (уплатой денег, передачей имущества и т.п.). Размер, сроки и порядок предоставления отступного устанавливаются сторонами.
Статья 381. Прекращение обязательства зачетом. Случаи недопустимости зачета
1. Обязательство прекращается полностью или частично зачетом встречного однородного требования, срок которого наступил либо срок которого не указан или определен моментом
востребования. Для зачета достаточно заявления одной стороны.
2. Не допускается зачет требований:
1) если по заявлению другой стороны к требованию подлежит применению срок исковой давности и этот срок истек;
2) о возмещении вреда, причиненного жизни или здоровью;
3) о взыскании алиментов;
4) о пожизненном содержании;
5) в иных случаях, предусмотренных законодательством или договором.
Статья 382. Зачет при уступке требования
В случае уступки требования должник вправе зачесть против требования нового кредитора свое встречное требование к первоначальному кредитору.
Зачет производится, если требование возникло по основанию, существовавшему к моменту получения должником уведомления об уступке требования, и срок требования наступил до его получения либо этот срок не указан или определен моментом востребования.
Статья 383. Прекращение обязательства совпадением должника и кредитора в одном лице
Обязательство прекращается совпадением должника и кредитора в одном лице.
Статья 384. Прекращение обязательства новацией
1. Обязательство прекращается соглашением сторон о замене первоначального обязательства, существовавшего между ними, другим обязательством между теми же лицами, предусматривающим иной предмет или способ исполнения (новация).
2. Новация не допускается в отношении обязательств по возмещению вреда, причиненного жизни или здоровью, и по уплате алиментов.
3. Новация прекращает дополнительные обязательства, связанные с первоначальным обязательством, если иное не предусмотрено соглашением сторон.
Статья 385. Прощение долга
Обязательство прекращается освобождением кредитором должника от лежащих на нем обязанностей, если это не нарушает прав других лиц в отношении имущества кредитора.
Статья 386. Прекращение обязательства невозможностью исполнения
1. Если в двустороннем договоре исполнение стало невозможным для одной из сторон вследствие обстоятельств, за которые ни одна из сторон не отвечает, она при отсутствии в законодательстве или договоре иных указаний не вправе требовать от другой стороны удовлетворения по договору. Каждая из сторон вправе требовать от контрагента возврата всего, что она исполнила, не получив встречного удовлетворения.
2. Если в двустороннем договоре исполнение стало невозможным для одной стороны в силу обстоятельств, за которые она отвечает, другая сторона при отсутствии в законодательстве или
договоре иных указаний имеет право отступиться от договора и взыскать причиненные неисполнением убытки.
3. Если в двустороннем договоре исполнение стало невозможным для одной из сторон вследствие обстоятельств, за которые отвечает другая сторона, первая сохраняет право на встречное удовлетворение с зачетом выгод, сберегаемых или приобретаемых ею вследствие освобождения от обязательства.
Статья 387. Прекращение обязательства на основании акта государственного органа
1. Если в результате издания акта государственного органа исполнение обязательства становится невозможным полностью или частично, обязательство прекращается полностью или в соответствующей части.
Стороны, понесшие в результате этого убытки, вправе требовать их возмещения в соответствии с законодательством.
2. В случае признания в установленном порядке недействительным акта государственного органа, на основании которого обязательство прекратилось, обязательство восстанавливается, если иное не вытекает из соглашения сторон или существа обязательства и исполнение не утратило интерес для кредитора.
Статья 388. Прекращение обязательства смертью гражданина
1. Обязательство прекращается смертью гражданина, если исполнение не может быть произведено без личного участия должника либо обязательство иным образом неразрывно связано с личностью должника.
2. Обязательство прекращается смертью кредитора, если исполнение предназначено лично для кредитора либо обязательство иным образом неразрывно связано с личностью кредитора.
Статья 389. Прекращение обязательства ликвидацией юридического лица
Обязательство прекращается ликвидацией юридического лица (должника или кредитора), кроме случаев, когда законодательством исполнение обязательства ликвидированного юридического лица возлагается на другое лицо (по требованиям о возмещении вреда, причиненного жизни или здоровью, и в других случаях).
ПОДРАЗДЕЛ 2 ОБЩИЕ ПОЛОЖЕНИЯ О ДОГОВОРЕ
ГЛАВА 27 ПОНЯТИЕ И УСЛОВИЯ ДОГОВОРА
Статья 390. Понятие договора
1. Договором признается соглашение двух или нескольких лиц об установлении, изменении или прекращении гражданских прав и обязанностей.
2. К договорам применяются правила о дву- и многосторонних сделках, предусмотренных главой 9 настоящего Кодекса.
3. К обязательствам, возникшим из договора, применяются общие положения об обязательствах (статьи 288-389), если иное не предусмотрено правилами настоящей главы и правилами об
отдельных видах договоров, содержащимися в законодательстве.
4. К договорам, заключаемым более чем двумя сторонами, общие положения о договоре применяются, если это не противоречит многостороннему характеру таких договоров.
Статья 391. Свобода договора
1. Граждане и юридические лица свободны в заключении договора.
Понуждение к заключению договора не допускается, за исключением случаев, когда обязанность заключить договор предусмотрена законодательством или добровольно принятым обязательством.
2. Если иное не предусмотрено законодательными актами, стороны могут заключать договор, в котором содержатся элементы различных договоров, предусмотренных законодательством (смешанный договор). К отношениям сторон по смешанному договору применяются в соответствующих частях правила о договорах, элементы которых содержатся в смешанном договоре, если иное не вытекает из соглашения сторон или существа смешанного договора.
3. Условия договора определяются по усмотрению сторон в порядке и пределах, предусмотренных законодательством (статья 392).
В случаях, когда условия договора предусмотрены нормой, которая применяется постольку, поскольку соглашением сторон не установлено иное (диспозитивная норма), стороны могут своим соглашением установить условие, отличное от предусмотренного в ней, если это не противоречит законодательству. При отсутствии такого соглашения условие договора определяется диспозитивной нормой.
Статья 392. Договор и законодательство
1. Договор должен соответствовать обязательным для сторон правилам, установленным законодательством.
2. Если после заключения и до прекращения действия договора принят акт законодательства, устанавливающий обязательные для сторон правила, иные, чем те, которые действовали при заключении договора, условия заключенного договора должны быть приведены в соответствие с законодательством, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством.
Статья 393. Возмездный и безвозмездный договор
1. Договор, по которому сторона должна получить плату или иное встречное предоставление за исполнение своих обязанностей, является возмездным.
2. Безвозмездным признается договор, по которому одна сторона обязуется предоставить что-либо другой стороне без получения от нее платы или иного встречного предоставления.
3. Договор предполагается возмездным, если из законодательства, содержания или существа договора не вытекает иное.
Статья 394. Цена
1. Расчеты сторон при исполнении договора осуществляются по цене, установленной соглашением сторон с соблюдением норм законодательства.
В предусмотренных законодательством случаях применяются цены (тарифы, расценки, ставки и т.п.), устанавливаемые или регулируемые уполномоченными на то государственными органами.
2. Изменение цены после заключения договора допускается в случаях и на условиях, предусмотренных договором, законодательством либо в установленном законодательством порядке.
3. В случаях, когда в возмездном договоре цена не предусмотрена и не может быть определена исходя из условий договора, исполнение договора должно быть оплачено по цене, которая при сравнимых обстоятельствах обычно взимается за аналогичные товары, работы или услуги.
Статья 395. Действие договора
1. Договор вступает в силу и становится обязательным для сторон с момента его заключения.
2. Стороны вправе установить, что условия заключенного ими договора применяются к их отношениям, возникшим до заключения договора.
3. Законодательством или договором может быть предусмотрено, что окончание срока действия договора влечет прекращение обязательств сторон по договору.
Договор, в котором отсутствует такое условие, признается действующим до определенного в нем момента окончания исполнения сторонами обязательства.
4. Окончание срока действия договора не освобождает стороны от ответственности за его нарушение.
Статья 396. Публичный договор
1. Публичным признается договор, заключенный коммерческой организацией и устанавливающий ее обязанности по продаже товаров, выполнению работ или оказанию услуг, которые такая организация по характеру своей деятельности должна осуществлять в отношении каждого, кто к ней обратится (розничная торговля, перевозка транспортом общего пользования, услуги связи, энергоснабжение, медицинское, гостиничное обслуживание, обязательное страхование и т.п.).
Коммерческая организация не вправе оказывать предпочтение одному лицу перед другим в отношении заключения публичного договора, кроме случаев, предусмотренных законодательством.
2. Цена товаров, работ и услуг, а также иные условия публичного договора устанавливаются одинаковыми для всех потребителей, за исключением случаев, когда законодательством допускается предоставление льгот для отдельных категорий потребителей.
3. Отказ коммерческой организации от заключения публичного договора при наличии возможности предоставить потребителю соответствующие товары (работы, услуги) не допускается.
При необоснованном уклонении коммерческой организации от заключения публичного договора применяются положения, предусмотренные пунктом 4 статьи 415 настоящего Кодекса.
4. В случаях, предусмотренных законодательными актами, Правительство Республики Беларусь может издавать правила, обязательные для сторон при заключении и исполнении публичных договоров (типовые договоры, положения и т.п.), если иное не установлено Президентом Республики Беларусь.
5. Условия публичного договора, не соответствующие требованиям, установленным пунктами 2 и 4 настоящей статьи, ничтожны.
Статья 397. Примерные условия договоров
1. В договоре может быть предусмотрено, что его отдельные условия определяются примерными условиями, разработанными для договоров соответствующего вида и опубликованными в печати.
2. Примерные условия могут быть изложены в форме примерного договора или иного документа, содержащего эти условия.
Статья 398. Договор присоединения
1. Договором присоединения признается договор, условия которого определены одной из сторон в формулярах или иных стандартных формах и могли быть приняты другой стороной не иначе как путем присоединения к предложенному договору в целом.
Договором присоединения в сфере страхования признается договор, условия которого определены в правилах соответствующих видов страхования, утвержденных страховщиком либо объединением страховщиков и согласованных с органом, осуществляющим государственный надзор за страховой деятельностью, и могут быть приняты другой стороной (страхователем) не иначе как путем присоединения к договору страхования.
2. Присоединившаяся к договору сторона вправе потребовать расторжения или изменения договора, если договор присоединения хотя и не противоречит законодательству, но лишает эту сторону прав, обычно предоставляемых по договорам такого вида, исключает или ограничивает ответственность другой стороны за нарушение обязательств либо содержит другие явно обременительные для присоединившейся стороны условия, которые она, исходя из своих разумно понимаемых интересов, не приняла бы при наличии у нее возможности участвовать в определении условий договора.
3. При наличии обстоятельств, предусмотренных в пункте 2 настоящей статьи, требование о расторжении договора, предъявленное стороной, присоединившейся к договору в связи с осуществлением своей предпринимательской деятельности, не подлежит удовлетворению, если присоединившаяся сторона знала или должна была знать, на каких условиях заключает договор.
Статья 399. Предварительный договор
1. По предварительному договору стороны обязуются заключить в будущем договор (основной договор) на условиях, предусмотренных предварительным договором.
2. Предварительный договор заключается в форме, установленной законодательством для основного договора, а если форма основного договора не установлена, то в письменной форме. Несоблюдение правил о форме предварительного договора влечет его ничтожность.
3. Предварительный договор должен содержать условия, позволяющие установить предмет, а также другие существенные условия основного договора.
4. В предварительном договоре указывается срок, в который стороны обязуются заключить основной договор.
Если такой срок в предварительном договоре не определен, основной договор подлежит заключению в течение года с момента заключения предварительного договора.
5. В случаях, когда сторона, заключившая предварительный договор, уклоняется от заключения основного договора, применяются положения, установленные для заключения договоров в обязательном порядке (пункт 4 статьи 415).
6. Обязательства, предусмотренные предварительным договором, прекращаются, если до окончания срока, в который стороны должны заключить основной договор, он не будет заключен и ни одна из сторон не направит другой стороне предложение заключить этот договор.
Статья 400. Договор в пользу третьего лица
1. Договором в пользу третьего лица признается договор, в котором стороны установили, что должник обязан произвести исполнение не кредитору, а указанному или не указанному в договоре третьему лицу, имеющему право требовать от должника исполнения обязательства в свою пользу.
2. Если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором, с момента выражения третьим лицом должнику намерения воспользоваться своим правом по договору стороны не могут расторгать или изменять заключенный ими договор без согласия третьего лица.
3. Должник в договоре вправе выдвигать против требования третьего лица возражения, которые он мог выдвинуть против кредитора.
4. В случае, когда третье лицо отказалось от права, предоставленного ему по договору, кредитор может воспользоваться этим правом, если это не противоречит законодательству и договору.
Статья 401. Толкование договора
При толковании условий договора судом принимается во внимание буквальное значение содержащихся в нем слов и выражений. Буквальное значение условия договора в случае неясности устанавливается путем сопоставления с другими условиями и смыслом договора в целом.
Если правила, содержащиеся в части первой настоящей статьи, не позволяют определить содержание договора, должна быть выяснена действительная общая воля сторон с учетом цели договора. При этом принимаются во внимание все соответствующие обстоятельства, включая предшествующие договору переговоры и переписку, практику, установившуюся во взаимных отношениях сторон, последующее поведение сторон.
ГЛАВА 28 ЗАКЛЮЧЕНИЕ ДОГОВОРА
Статья 402. Основные положения о заключении договора
1. Договор считается заключенным, если между сторонами в требуемой в подлежащих случаях форме достигнуто соглашение по всем существенным условиям договора.
Существенными являются условия о предмете договора, условия, которые названы в законодательстве как существенные, необходимые или обязательные для договоров данного вида, а также все те условия, относительно которых по заявлению одной из сторон должно быть достигнуто соглашение.
2. Договор заключается посредством направления оферты (предложения заключить договор) одной из сторон и ее акцепта (принятия предложения) другой стороной.
Статья 403. Момент заключения договора
1. Договор признается заключенным в момент получения лицом, направившим оферту, ее акцепта.
2. Если в соответствии с законодательством для заключения договора необходима также передача имущества, договор считается заключенным с момента передачи соответствующего имущества (статья 225).
3. Договор, подлежащий государственной регистрации, считается заключенным с момента его регистрации, а при необходимости нотариального удостоверения и регистрации – с момента регистрации договора, если иное не предусмотрено законодательными актами.
4. Договор, заключаемый на бирже, считается заключенным с момента, определенного законодательством, регулирующим деятельность такой биржи, или правилами, действующими на бирже.
Статья 404. Форма договора
1. Договор может быть заключен в любой форме, предусмотренной для совершения сделок, если настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства для договоров данного вида не установлена определенная форма.
Если законодательством для данного вида договора не требуется нотариальной формы, но стороны договорились заключить его в такой форме, то договор считается заключенным с момента придания ему нотариальной формы.
Если законодательством для данного вида договора не требуется письменной (простой или нотариальной) формы, но стороны договорились заключить его в простой письменной форме, то договор считается заключенным с момента придания ему простой письменной формы.
2. Договор в письменной форме может быть заключен путем составления одного текстового документа, включая документ в электронном виде (в том числе электронный документ), или путем обмена текстовыми документами, включая документы в электронном виде (в том числе электронные документы), которые подписаны сторонами собственноручно либо с использованием средств связи и иных технических средств, компьютерных программ, информационных систем или информационных сетей, если такой способ подписания позволяет достоверно установить, что соответствующий текстовый документ подписан сторонами по договору (факсимильное воспроизведение собственноручной подписи с помощью средств механического или другого копирования, электронная цифровая подпись или другой аналог собственноручной подписи, обеспечивающий идентификацию стороны по договору), и не противоречит законодательству и соглашению сторон.
В случаях, предусмотренных законодательными актами, допускаются только определенные ими способы заключения договора в простой письменной форме.
3. Письменная форма договора считается соблюденной, если письменное предложение заключить договор путем направления текстового документа, включая документ в электронном виде (в том числе электронный документ), принято в соответствии с пунктом 3 статьи 408 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 405. Оферта
1. Офертой признается адресованное одному или нескольким конкретным лицам предложение, которое достаточно определенно и выражает намерение лица, сделавшего предложение, считать себя заключившим договор с адресатом, которым будет принято предложение.
Оферта должна содержать существенные условия договора.
2. Оферта связывает направившее ее лицо с момента получения ее адресатом. Если извещение об отзыве оферты поступило ранее или одновременно с самой офертой, она считается неполученной.
Статья 406. Безотзывность оферты
Полученная адресатом оферта не может быть отозвана в течение срока, установленного для ее акцепта, если иное не оговорено в самой оферте либо не вытекает из существа предложения или обстановки, в которой оно было сделано.
Статья 407. Приглашение делать оферты
1. Реклама и иные предложения, адресованные неопределенному кругу лиц, рассматриваются как приглашение делать оферты, если иное прямо не указано в предложении.
2. Публичной офертой признается содержащее все существенные условия договора предложение, из которого усматривается воля лица, делающего предложение, заключить договор на указанных в предложении условиях с любым, кто отзовется.
Статья 408. Акцепт
1. Акцептом признается ответ лица, которому адресована оферта, о ее принятии.
Акцепт должен быть полным и безоговорочным.
2. Молчание не является акцептом, если иное не вытекает из законодательства или соглашения сторон.
3. Совершение лицом, получившим оферту, в срок, установленный для ее акцепта, действий по выполнению указанных в ней условий договора (отгрузка товаров, предоставление услуг, выполнение работ, уплата соответствующей суммы и т.д.) считается акцептом, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или не указано в оферте.
Статья 409. Отзыв акцепта
Если извещение об отзыве акцепта поступило лицу, направившему оферту, ранее или одновременно с самим акцептом, акцепт считается неполученным.
Статья 410. Заключение договора на основании оферты, содержащей срок для акцепта
Когда в оферте определен срок для акцепта, договор считается заключенным, если акцепт получен лицом, направившим оферту, в пределах указанного в ней срока.
Статья 411. Заключение договора на основании оферты, не содержащей срока для акцепта
1. Когда в письменной оферте не определен срок для акцепта, договор считается заключенным, если акцепт получен лицом, направившим оферту, до окончания срока, установленного законодательством, а если такой срок не установлен, – в течение нормально необходимого для этого времени.
2. Когда оферта сделана устно без указания срока для акцепта, договор считается заключенным, если другая сторона немедленно заявила об ее акцепте.
Статья 412. Акцепт, полученный с опозданием
1. В случаях, когда своевременно направленное извещение об акцепте получено с опозданием, акцепт не считается опоздавшим, если сторона, направившая оферту, немедленно уведомит другую сторону о получении акцепта с опозданием.
2. Если сторона, направившая оферту, немедленно сообщит другой стороне о принятии ее акцепта, полученного с опозданием, договор считается заключенным.
Статья 413. Акцепт на иных условиях
Ответ о согласии заключить договор на иных условиях, чем предложено в оферте, не является акцептом.
Такой ответ признается отказом от акцепта и в то же время новой офертой.
Статья 414. Место заключения договора
Если в договоре не указано место его заключения, договор признается заключенным в месте жительства гражданина или месте нахождения юридического лица, направившего оферту.
Статья 415. Заключение договора в обязательном порядке
1. В случаях, когда в соответствии с настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства для стороны, которой направлена оферта (проект договора), заключение договора обязательно, эта сторона должна направить другой стороне извещение об акцепте, либо об отказе от акцепта, либо об акцепте оферты на иных условиях (протокол разногласий к проекту договора) в течение тридцати дней со дня получения оферты.
Сторона, направившая оферту и получившая от стороны, для которой заключение договора обязательно, извещение об ее акцепте на иных условиях (протокол разногласий к проекту договора), вправе передать разногласия, возникшие при заключении договора, на рассмотрение суда в течение тридцати дней со дня получения такого извещения либо истечения срока для акцепта.
2. В случаях, когда в соответствии с настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства заключение договора обязательно для стороны, направившей оферту (проект договора), и ей в течение тридцати дней будет направлен протокол разногласий к проекту договора, эта сторона обязана в течение тридцати дней со дня получения протокола разногласий известить другую сторону о принятии договора в ее редакции либо об отклонении протокола разногласий.
При отклонении протокола разногласий либо неполучении извещения о результатах его рассмотрения в указанный срок сторона, направившая протокол разногласий, вправе передать разногласия, возникшие при заключении договора, на рассмотрение суда.
3. Правила о сроках, предусмотренные пунктами 1 и 2 настоящей статьи, применяются, если другие сроки не установлены законодательством или не согласованы сторонами.
4. Если сторона, для которой в соответствии с настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства заключение договора обязательно, уклоняется от его заключения, другая сторона вправе обратиться в суд с требованием о понуждении заключить договор.
Сторона, необоснованно уклоняющаяся от заключения договора, должна возместить другой стороне причиненные этим убытки.
Статья 416. Преддоговорные споры
В случаях передачи разногласий, возникших при заключении договора, на рассмотрение суда на основании статьи 415 настоящего Кодекса либо по соглашению сторон условия договора, по которым у сторон имелись разногласия, определяются в соответствии с решением суда.
Статья 417. Заключение договора на торгах
1. Договор, если иное не вытекает из его существа, может быть заключен путем проведения торгов. Договор заключается с лицом, выигравшим торги.
2. В качестве организатора торгов могут выступать собственник вещи или обладатель имущественного права либо специализированная организация. Специализированная организация действует на основании договора с собственником вещи или обладателем имущественного права и выступает от их имени или от своего имени.
3. В случаях, указанных в настоящем Кодексе или иных актах законодательства, договоры о продаже вещи или имущественного права могут быть заключены только путем проведения торгов.
4. Торги (тендер) проводятся в форме аукциона или конкурса. Выигравшим торги на аукционе признается лицо, предложившее наиболее высокую цену, а по конкурсу – лицо, которое по заключению конкурсной комиссии, заранее назначенной организаторами торгов, предложило лучшие условия.
5. Аукцион и конкурс, для участия в которых не было подано ни одной заявки (заявления), либо заявка (заявление) подана только одним участником, либо явился только один участник, либо никто не явился, либо в иных случаях, установленных законодательными актами, признаются несостоявшимися.
Если аукцион по продаже имущества признан несостоявшимся в силу того, что заявка (заявление) на участие в нем подана только одним участником либо для участия в нем явился только один участник, предмет аукциона продается этому участнику при его согласии по начальной цене, увеличенной на пять процентов, если иное не установлено Президентом Республики Беларусь.
При поступлении заявки (заявления) на участие в конкурсе по продаже имущества только от одного участника либо явке для участия в нем только одного участника и соответствии его предложений условиям конкурса продажа предмета конкурса этому лицу производится на предложенных им условиях, если иное не установлено Президентом Республики Беларусь.
6. Правила, предусмотренные настоящим Кодексом, применяются к публичным торгам, проводимым в порядке исполнения решений суда, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством об исполнительном производстве, законодательством об экономической несостоятельности (банкротстве).
7. В случаях, предусмотренных законодательством, допускается участие в аукционе на стороне одного участника двух и более лиц.
Статья 418. Организация и порядок проведения торгов
1. Аукционы и конкурсы могут быть открытыми и закрытыми. В открытом аукционе и открытом конкурсе может участвовать любое лицо. В закрытом аукционе и закрытом конкурсе участвуют только лица, специально приглашенные для этой цели.
2. Если иное не предусмотрено законодательством, извещение о проведении торгов подлежит обязательному опубликованию в печатных средствах массовой информации в порядке, установленном законодательством, и должно быть сделано организатором не менее чем за тридцать дней до их проведения, а в случае повторных торгов, проводимых в соответствии с актами законодательства, – не менее чем за десять дней до их проведения. Информация об объявленных торгах и о предмете торгов дополнительно размещается в глобальной компьютерной сети Интернет в порядке, установленном законодательными актами. Извещение должно содержать в любом случае сведения о времени, месте и форме торгов, их предмете и порядке проведения, в том числе об оформлении участия в торгах, определении лица, выигравшего торги, а также сведения о начальной цене.
В случае, если предметом торгов является только право заключения договора, в извещении о предстоящих торгах должен быть указан предоставляемый для этого срок.
3. Если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или в извещении о проведении торгов, организатор открытых торгов, сделавший извещение, вправе отказаться от аукциона в любое время, но не позднее чем за три дня до наступления даты его проведения, а от конкурса – не позднее чем за тридцать дней до проведения конкурса.
В случаях, когда организатор открытых торгов отказался от их проведения с нарушением указанных сроков, он обязан возместить участникам понесенный ими реальный ущерб. Организатор закрытого аукциона или закрытого конкурса обязан возместить приглашаемым им участникам реальный ущерб независимо от того, в какой именно срок после направления извещения последовал отказ от торгов.
4. Участники торгов вносят задаток в размере, сроки и порядке, которые указаны в извещении, в счет исполнения обязательств по договору, который может быть заключен на торгах.
Участнику, не выигравшему торги, а также в иных случаях, предусмотренных законодательством, задаток должен быть возвращен в течение пяти рабочих дней со дня проведения аукциона (конкурса). Участнику, выигравшему торги, или лицам, указанным в частях второй и третьей пункта 5 статьи 417 настоящего Кодекса, сумма внесенного задатка учитывается в счет исполнения обязательств по договору, заключаемому на торгах.
5. Участник, выигравший торги, или лица, указанные в частях второй и третьей пункта 5 статьи 417 настоящего Кодекса, и организатор торгов подписывают в день проведения аукциона (конкурса) протокол, который имеет силу договора.
Если по условиям торгов разыгрывается только право на заключение договора, такой договор должен быть подписан сторонами не позднее двадцати дней или иного указанного в извещении срока после завершения торгов и оформления протокола, если иное не предусмотрено законодательными актами.
В случае отказа или уклонения участника, выигравшего торги, или лиц, указанных в частях второй и третьей пункта 5 статьи 417 настоящего Кодекса, от подписания протокола и (или) договора, оформляемого по результатам аукциона (конкурса), возмещения затрат на организацию и проведение аукциона (конкурса), а также в иных случаях, предусмотренных законодательством, внесенный ими задаток возврату не подлежит. Организатор торгов, уклонившийся от подписания протокола, обязан возвратить задаток в двойном размере, а также возместить участнику, выигравшему торги, или лицам, указанным в частях второй и третьей пункта 5 статьи 417 настоящего Кодекса, убытки, причиненные участием в торгах, в части, превышающей сумму задатка.
В случае уклонения от заключения договора одной из сторон другая сторона вправе обратиться в суд с требованием о понуждении заключить договор, а также о возмещении убытков, причиненных уклонением от его заключения.
6. Законодательными актами может устанавливаться иной порядок организации и проведения торгов.
К аукционам, проводимым Национальным банком Республики Беларусь в целях регулирования текущей ликвидности банков, предусмотренные настоящей статьей правила применяются, если законодательством не предусмотрено иное.
Статья 419. Последствия нарушения правил проведения торгов
1. Торги, проведенные с нарушением правил, установленных законодательством, могут быть признаны судом недействительными по иску заинтересованного лица.
2. Признание торгов недействительными влечет недействительность договора, заключенного с лицом, выигравшим торги.
ГЛАВА 29 ИЗМЕНЕНИЕ И РАСТОРЖЕНИЕ ДОГОВОРА
Статья 420. Основания изменения и расторжения договора
1. Изменение и расторжение договора возможно по соглашению сторон, если иное не предусмотрено настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства или договором.
2. По требованию одной из сторон договор может быть изменен или расторгнут по решению суда только:
1) при существенном нарушении договора другой стороной;
2) в иных случаях, предусмотренных настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства или договором.
Существенным признается нарушение договора одной из сторон, влекущее для другой стороны такой ущерб, в результате которого она в значительной степени лишается того, на что была вправе рассчитывать при заключении договора.
3. В случае одностороннего отказа от исполнения договора полностью или частично, когда такой отказ допускается законодательством или соглашением сторон, договор считается соответственно расторгнутым или измененным.
Статья 421. Изменение и расторжение договора в связи с существенным изменением обстоятельств
1. Существенное изменение обстоятельств, из которых стороны исходили при заключении договора, является основанием для его изменения или расторжения, если иное не предусмотрено договором или не вытекает из его существа.
Изменение обстоятельств признается существенным, если они изменились настолько, что, если бы стороны могли это разумно предвидеть, договор вообще не был бы ими заключен или был бы заключен на значительно отличающихся условиях.
2. Если стороны не достигли соглашения о приведении договора в соответствие с существенно изменившимися обстоятельствами или о его расторжении, договор может быть расторгнут, а по основаниям, предусмотренным пунктом 4 настоящей статьи, изменен судом по требованию заинтересованной стороны при наличии одновременно следующих условий:
1) в момент заключения договора стороны исходили из того, что такого изменения обстоятельств не произойдет;
2) изменение обстоятельств вызвано причинами, которые заинтересованная сторона не могла преодолеть после их возникновения при той степени добросовестности и осмотрительности, какая от нее требовалась по характеру договора и условиям гражданского оборота;
3) исполнение договора без изменения его условий настолько нарушило бы соответствующее договору соотношение имущественных интересов сторон и повлекло бы для заинтересованной стороны такой ущерб, что она в значительной степени лишилась бы того, на что была вправе рассчитывать при заключении договора;
4) из существа договора не вытекает, что риск изменения обстоятельств несет заинтересованная сторона.
3. При расторжении договора вследствие существенно изменившихся обстоятельств суд по требованию любой из сторон определяет последствия расторжения договора исходя из необходимости справедливого распределения между сторонами расходов, понесенных ими в связи с исполнением этого договора.
4. Изменение договора в связи с существенным изменением обстоятельств допускается по решению суда в исключительных случаях, когда расторжение договора противоречит общественным интересам либо повлечет для сторон ущерб, значительно превышающий затраты, необходимые для исполнения договора на измененных судом условиях.
Статья 422. Порядок изменения и расторжения договора
1. Соглашение об изменении или расторжении договора совершается в той же форме, что и договор, если из законодательства, договора не вытекает иное.
2. Требование об изменении или расторжении договора может быть заявлено стороной в суд только после получения отказа другой стороны на предложение изменить или расторгнуть договор либо неполучения ответа в срок, указанный в предложении или установленный законодательством либо договором, а при его отсутствии – в тридцатидневный срок. Настоящим Кодексом, иными законами и актами Президента Республики Беларусь может быть установлен иной порядок расторжения договора.
Статья 423. Последствия расторжения и изменения договора
1. При расторжении договора обязательства сторон прекращаются.
2. При изменении договора обязательства сторон продолжают действовать в измененном виде.
3. В случаях расторжения или изменения договора обязательства считаются прекращенными или измененными с момента достижения соглашения сторон об изменении или расторжении договора, если иное не вытекает из соглашения сторон или характера изменения договора, а при расторжении или изменении договора в судебном порядке – с момента вступления в законную силу решения суда о расторжении или изменении договора.
4. Стороны не вправе требовать возвращения того, что было исполнено ими по обязательству до момента расторжения или изменения договора, если иное не установлено законодательством или соглашением сторон.
5. Если основанием для расторжения или изменения договора послужило существенное нарушение договора одной из сторон, другая сторона вправе требовать возмещения убытков, причиненных расторжением или изменением договора.
РАЗДЕЛ IV ОТДЕЛЬНЫЕ ВИДЫ ОБЯЗАТЕЛЬСТВ
ГЛАВА 30 КУПЛЯ-ПРОДАЖА
§ 1. Общие положения о купле-продаже
Статья 424. Договор купли-продажи
1. По договору купли-продажи одна сторона (продавец) обязуется передать имущество (вещь, товар) в собственность, хозяйственное ведение, оперативное управление (далее для целей настоящего раздела – в собственность, если из существа обязательства и статуса стороны в обязательстве не вытекает иное) другой стороне (покупателю), а покупатель обязуется принять это имущество и уплатить за него определенную денежную сумму (цену).
2. К купле-продаже ценных бумаг и валютных ценностей положения, предусмотренные настоящим параграфом, применяются, если законодательством не установлены специальные правила их продажи.
3. В случаях, предусмотренных настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства, особенности купли и продажи товаров отдельных видов определяются актами законодательства.
4. Положения, предусмотренные настоящим параграфом, применяются к продаже имущественных прав, если иное не вытекает из содержания или характера этих прав.
5. К отдельным видам договора купли-продажи (розничная купля-продажа, поставка товаров, поставка товаров для государственных нужд, энергоснабжение, контрактация, продажа недвижимости, продажа предприятия) положения, предусмотренные настоящим параграфом, применяются, если иное не предусмотрено настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства об этих видах договоров.
Статья 425. Условие договора о товаре
1. Товаром по договору купли-продажи могут быть любые вещи с соблюдением правил статьи 129 настоящего Кодекса.
2. Договор может быть заключен на куплю-продажу товара, имеющегося в наличии у продавца в момент заключения договора, а также товара, который будет создан или приобретен продавцом в будущем, если иное не установлено законодательством или не вытекает из характера товара.
3. Условие договора купли-продажи о товаре считается согласованным, если договор позволяет определить наименование и количество товара.
Статья 426. Обязанности продавца по передаче товара
1. Продавец обязан передать покупателю товар, предусмотренный договором купли-продажи.
2. Если иное не предусмотрено договором, продавец обязан одновременно с передачей товара передать покупателю его принадлежности, а также относящиеся к нему документы (технический паспорт, сертификат качества, инструкцию по эксплуатации и т.п.), предусмотренные законодательством или договором.
Статья 427. Срок исполнения обязанности передать товар
1. Срок исполнения продавцом обязанности передать товар покупателю определяется договором купли-продажи, а если договор не позволяет определить этот срок, – в соответствии с правилами, предусмотренными статьей 295 настоящего Кодекса.
2. Договор купли-продажи признается заключенным с условием о его исполнении к строго определенному сроку, если из договора ясно вытекает, что при нарушении срока его исполнения покупатель утрачивает интерес к договору.
Продавец вправе исполнять такой договор до наступления или после истечения определенного в нем срока только с согласия покупателя.
Статья 428. Момент исполнения обязанности продавца передать товар
1. Если иное не предусмотрено договором купли-продажи, обязанность продавца передать товар покупателю считается исполненной в момент:
1) вручения товара покупателю или указанному им лицу, если договором предусмотрена обязанность продавца по доставке товара;
2) предоставления товара в распоряжение покупателя, если товар должен быть передан покупателю или указанному им лицу в месте нахождения товара. Товар считается предоставленным в
распоряжение покупателя, когда к сроку, предусмотренному договором, товар готов к передаче в надлежащем месте и покупатель в соответствии с условиями договора осведомлен о готовности товара к передаче. Товар не признается готовым к передаче, если он не идентифицирован для целей договора путем маркировки или иным образом.
2. В случаях, когда из договора не вытекает обязанность продавца по доставке товара или передаче товара в месте его нахождения покупателю, обязанность продавца передать товар покупателю считается исполненной в момент сдачи товара перевозчику или организации связи для доставки покупателю, если договором не предусмотрено иное.
Статья 429. Переход риска случайной гибели товара
1. Если иное не предусмотрено договором купли-продажи, риск случайной гибели или случайного повреждения товара переходит на покупателя с момента, когда в соответствии с законодательством или договором продавец считается исполнившим свою обязанность по передаче товара покупателю.
2. Риск случайной гибели или случайного повреждения товара, проданного во время его нахождения в пути, переходит на покупателя с момента заключения договора, если иное не предусмотрено таким договором.
Условие договора о том, что риск случайной гибели или случайного повреждения товара переходит на покупателя с момента сдачи товара первому перевозчику, по требованию покупателя может быть признано судом недействительным, если в момент заключения договора продавец знал или должен был знать, что товар утрачен или поврежден, и не сообщил об этом покупателю.
Статья 430. Обязанность продавца передать товар свободным от прав третьих лиц
1. Продавец обязан передать покупателю товар свободным от любых прав третьих лиц, за исключением случая, когда покупатель согласился принять товар, обремененный правами третьих лиц.
Неисполнение продавцом этой обязанности дает покупателю право требовать уменьшения цены товара либо расторжения договора купли-продажи, за исключением случая, когда будет доказано, что покупатель знал или должен был знать о правах третьих лиц на этот товар.
2. Правила, предусмотренные пунктом 1 настоящей статьи, соответственно применяются и в том случае, когда в отношении товара к моменту его передачи покупателю имелись притязания третьих лиц, о которых продавцу было известно, если эти притязания впоследствии признаны в установленном порядке правомерными.
Статья 431. Ответственность продавца в случае изъятия товара у покупателя
1. При изъятии товара у покупателя третьими лицами по основаниям, возникшим до исполнения договора купли-продажи, продавец обязан возместить покупателю понесенные им убытки, за исключением случая, когда покупатель знал или должен был знать о наличии этих оснований.
2. Соглашение сторон об освобождении продавца от ответственности или о ее ограничении в случае истребования приобретенного имущества у покупателя третьими лицами недействительно.
Статья 432. Обязанности покупателя и продавца в случае предъявления иска об изъятии товара
Если третье лицо по основанию, возникшему до исполнения договора купли-продажи, предъявит к покупателю иск об изъятии товара, покупатель обязан привлечь продавца к участию в деле, а продавец обязан вступить в это дело на стороне покупателя.
Непривлечение покупателем продавца к участию в деле освобождает продавца от ответственности перед покупателем, если продавец докажет, что, приняв участие в деле, он мог бы предотвратить изъятие проданного товара у покупателя.
Продавец, привлеченный покупателем к участию в деле, но не принявший в нем участия, лишается права доказывать неправильность ведения дела покупателем.
Статья 433. Последствия отказа продавца передать товар
1. Если продавец отказывается передать покупателю проданный товар, покупатель вправе отказаться от исполнения договора купли-продажи.
2. При отказе продавца от передачи индивидуально-определенной вещи покупатель вправе предъявить продавцу требования, предусмотренные статьей 369 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 434. Последствия неисполнения обязанности передать принадлежности и документы, относящиеся к товару
Если продавец не передает или отказывается передать покупателю относящиеся к товару принадлежности или документы, которые он должен передать в соответствии с законодательством или договором купли-продажи (пункт 2 статьи 426), покупатель вправе назначить ему разумный срок для их передачи.
В случае, когда принадлежности или документы, относящиеся к товару, не переданы продавцом в указанный срок, покупатель вправе отказаться от товара, если иное не предусмотрено договором.
Статья 435. Количество товара
1. Количество товара, подлежащего передаче покупателю, предусматривается договором купли- продажи в соответствующих единицах измерения или в денежном выражении. Условие о количестве товара может быть согласовано путем установления в договоре порядка его определения.
2. Если договор не позволяет определить количество подлежащего передаче товара, договор не считается заключенным.
Статья 436. Последствия нарушения условия договора о количестве
1. Если продавец передал в нарушение условий договора покупателю меньшее количество товара, чем определено договором купли-продажи, покупатель вправе, если иное не предусмотрено договором, либо потребовать передать недостающее количество товара, либо отказаться от переданного товара и его оплаты, а если он оплачен, – потребовать возврата уплаченной за него денежной суммы.
2. Если продавец передал покупателю товар в количестве, превышающем указанное в договоре, покупатель обязан известить об этом продавца в порядке, предусмотренном пунктом 1 статьи 453 настоящего Кодекса. В случае, когда в разумный срок после получения сообщения покупателя продавец не распорядится соответствующим товаром, покупатель вправе, поскольку иное не предусмотрено договором, принять все количество товара.
3. В случае принятия покупателем товара в количестве, превышающем указанное в договоре купли-продажи (пункт 2 настоящей статьи), дополнительно принятый товар оплачивается по цене, определенной для товара, принятого в соответствии с договором, если иная цена не определена соглашением сторон.
Статья 437. Ассортимент товаров
1. Если по договору купли-продажи передаче подлежат товары в определенном соотношении по видам, моделям, размерам, цветам и иным признакам (ассортимент), продавец обязан передать покупателю товары в ассортименте, согласованном сторонами.
2. Если ассортимент в договоре купли-продажи не определен и в договоре не установлен порядок его определения, но из существа обязательства вытекает, что товары должны быть переданы покупателю в ассортименте, продавец вправе передать покупателю товары в ассортименте исходя из потребностей покупателя, которые были известны продавцу на момент заключения договора, или отказаться от исполнения договора.
Статья 438. Последствия нарушения условия договора об ассортименте
1. При передаче продавцом предусмотренных договором купли-продажи товаров в ассортименте, не соответствующем договору, покупатель вправе отказаться от их принятия и оплаты, а если они уже оплачены, – потребовать возврата уплаченной денежной суммы.
2. Если продавец передал покупателю наряду с товарами, ассортимент которых соответствует договору купли-продажи, товары с нарушением условия об ассортименте, покупатель вправе по своему выбору:
1) принять товары, соответствующие условиям об ассортименте, и отказаться от остальных товаров;
2) отказаться от всех переданных товаров;
3) потребовать заменить товары, не соответствующие условию об ассортименте, товарами в ассортименте, предусмотренном договором;
4) принять все переданные товары.
3. При отказе от товаров, ассортимент которых не соответствует условию договора купли-продажи, или предъявлении требования о замене товаров, не соответствующих условию об ассортименте, покупатель вправе также отказаться от оплаты этих товаров, а если они оплачены, – потребовать возврата уплаченной суммы.
4. Товары, не соответствующие условию договора купли-продажи об ассортименте, считаются принятыми, если покупатель в разумный срок после их получения не сообщит продавцу о своем отказе от товаров.
5. Если покупатель не отказался от товаров, ассортимент которых не соответствует договору купли- продажи, он обязан их оплатить по цене, согласованной с продавцом. В случае, когда продавцом не приняты необходимые меры к согласованию цены в разумный срок, покупатель оплачивает товары по цене, которая в момент заключения договора при сравнимых обстоятельствах обычно взималась за аналогичные товары.
6. Правила настоящей статьи применяются, если иное не предусмотрено договором.
Статья 439. Качество товара
1. Продавец обязан передать покупателю товар, качество которого соответствует договору купли- продажи.
2. При отсутствии в договоре условий о качестве товара продавец обязан передать покупателю товар, пригодный для целей, для которых товар такого рода обычно используется.
Если продавец при заключении договора был поставлен покупателем в известность о конкретных целях приобретения товара, продавец обязан передать покупателю товар, пригодный для использования в соответствии с этими целями.
3. При продаже товара по образцу и (или) по описанию продавец обязан передать покупателю товар, который соответствует образцу и (или) описанию.
4. Если в соответствии с законодательством или другими обязательными правилами предусмотрены требования к качеству продаваемого товара, то продавец, осуществляющий предпринимательскую деятельность, обязан передать покупателю товар, соответствующий этим требованиям.
По соглашению между продавцом и покупателем может быть передан товар, соответствующий повышенным требованиям к качеству по сравнению с требованиями, предусмотренными законодательством или другими обязательными правилами.
Статья 440. Гарантия качества
1. Товар, который продавец обязан передать покупателю, должен соответствовать требованиям, предусмотренным статьей 439 настоящего Кодекса, в момент передачи покупателю, если иной момент определения соответствия товара этим требованиям не предусмотрен договором купли- продажи, и в пределах разумного срока должен быть пригодным для целей, для которых товар такого рода обычно используется.
2. Если в соответствии с законодательством или другими обязательными правилами либо договором купли-продажи предусмотрено предоставление продавцом гарантии качества товара, продавец обязан передать покупателю товар, который должен соответствовать требованиям, предусмотренным статьей 439 настоящего Кодекса, в течение календарного срока, установленного в днях, месяцах, годах, либо наработки, установленной в часах, циклах срабатываний, километрах пробега или иных аналогичных показателях (гарантийного срока).
3. Гарантия качества товара распространяется и на все составляющие его части (комплектующие изделия), если иное не предусмотрено договором купли-продажи.
Статья 441. Исчисление гарантийного срока
1. Гарантийный срок начинает течь с момента передачи товаров покупателю (статья 428), если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором купли-продажи.
2. Если покупатель лишен возможности использовать товар, в отношении которого договором установлен гарантийный срок, по обстоятельствам, зависящим от продавца, гарантийный срок не течет до устранения соответствующих обстоятельств продавцом.
Если иное не предусмотрено договором, гарантийный срок продлевается на время, в течение которого товар не мог использоваться из-за обнаруженных в нем недостатков, при условии извещения продавца о недостатках товара в порядке, установленном статьей 453 настоящего Кодекса.
3. Если иное не предусмотрено договором, гарантийный срок на комплектующее изделие считается равным гарантийному сроку на основное изделие и начинает течь одновременно с гарантийным сроком на основное изделие.
4. На товар (комплектующее изделие), переданный продавцом взамен товара (комплектующего изделия), в котором в течение гарантийного срока были обнаружены недостатки (статья 446),
устанавливается гарантийный срок той же продолжительности, что и на замененный, если иное не предусмотрено договором купли-продажи.
Статья 442. Срок годности
1. В соответствии с законодательством или другими обязательными правилами может быть определен срок, по истечении которого товар считается не пригодным для использования по назначению (срок годности).
2. Товары, на которые установлен срок годности, продавец обязан передать покупателю с таким расчетом, чтобы он мог быть использован по назначению до истечения срока годности.
Статья 443. Исчисление срока годности
Срок годности определяется периодом времени, исчисляемым со дня (времени) изготовления товара, в течение которого он пригоден к использованию, либо датой, до наступления которой товар пригоден к использованию.
Статья 444. Проверка качества товара
1. Проверка качества товара может быть предусмотрена законодательством или договором купли- продажи. Порядок проверки качества товара устанавливается законодательством или договором. Если порядок проверки установлен законодательством, порядок проверки качества товара, определяемый договором, должен соответствовать требованиям законодательства.
2. Если порядок проверки качества товара не установлен в соответствии с пунктом 1 настоящей статьи, то проверка качества товара производится в соответствии с обычно применяемыми условиями проверки товара, подлежащего передаче по договору купли-продажи.
3. Если законодательством или договором купли-продажи предусмотрена обязанность продавца проверить качество товара, передаваемого покупателю (испытание, анализ, осмотр и т.п.), продавец должен предоставить покупателю доказательства осуществления проверки качества товара.
4. Порядок, а также иные условия проверки качества товара, производимой как продавцом, так и покупателем, должны быть одними и теми же.
Статья 445. Последствия передачи товара ненадлежащего качества
1. Если недостатки товара не были оговорены продавцом, покупатель, которому передан товар ненадлежащего качества, вправе по своему выбору потребовать от продавца:
1) соразмерного уменьшения покупной цены;
2) безвозмездного устранения недостатков товара в разумный срок;
3) возмещения своих расходов на устранение недостатков товара.
2. В случае существенного нарушения требований к качеству товара (обнаружения неустранимых недостатков, недостатков, которые не могут быть устранены без несоразмерных расходов или затрат времени или выявляются неоднократно либо проявляются вновь после их устранения, и других подобных недостатков) покупатель вправе по своему выбору:
1) отказаться от исполнения договора купли-продажи и потребовать возврата уплаченной за товар денежной суммы;
2) потребовать замены товара ненадлежащего качества на товар, соответствующий договору.
3. Требования об устранении недостатков или замене товара, указанные в пунктах 1 и 2 настоящей статьи, могут быть предъявлены покупателем, если иное не вытекает из характера товара или существа обязательства.
4. В случае ненадлежащего качества части товаров, входящих в комплект (статья 449), покупатель вправе в отношении этих товаров осуществить права, предусмотренные пунктами 1 и 2 настоящей статьи.
5. Правила, предусмотренные настоящей статьей, применяются, если настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства не установлено иное.
Статья 446. Недостатки товара, за которые отвечает продавец
1. Продавец отвечает за недостатки товара, если покупатель докажет, что недостатки товара возникли до его передачи покупателю или по причинам, возникшим до этого момента.
2. В отношении товара, на который продавцом предоставлена гарантия качества, продавец отвечает за недостатки товара, если не докажет, что недостатки товара возникли после его передачи покупателю вследствие нарушения покупателем правил пользования товаром или его хранения, либо действий третьих лиц, либо непреодолимой силы.
Статья 447. Сроки обнаружения недостатков в переданном товаре
1. Если иное не установлено законодательством или договором купли-продажи, покупатель вправе предъявить требования, связанные с недостатками товара, при условии, что они обнаружены в сроки, установленные настоящей статьей.
2. Если на товары не установлен гарантийный срок или срок годности, требования, связанные с недостатками товара, могут быть предъявлены покупателем при условии, что недостатки в проданном товаре были обнаружены в разумный срок, но в пределах двух лет со дня передачи товара покупателю либо в пределах более длительного срока, когда такой срок установлен законодательством или договором купли-продажи. Срок для выявления недостатков товара, подлежащего перевозке или отправке по почте, исчисляется со дня доставки товара в место его назначения.
3. Если на товар установлен гарантийный срок, покупатель вправе предъявить требования, связанные с недостатками товара, при обнаружении недостатков в течение гарантийного срока.
В случаях, когда на комплектующее изделие в договоре купли-продажи установлен гарантийный срок меньшей продолжительности, чем на основное изделие, покупатель вправе предъявить требования, связанные с недостатками комплектующего изделия, при их обнаружении в течение гарантийного срока на основное изделие.
Если на комплектующее изделие в договоре установлен гарантийный срок большей продолжительности, чем гарантийный срок на основное изделие, покупатель вправе предъявить требования, связанные с недостатками товара, если недостатки комплектующего изделия обнаружены в течение гарантийного срока на него, независимо от истечения гарантийного срока на основное изделие.
4. В отношении товара, на который установлен срок годности, покупатель вправе предъявить требования, связанные с недостатками товара, если они обнаружены в течение срока годности товара.
5. В случаях, когда предусмотренный договором гарантийный срок составляет менее двух лет и недостатки товара обнаружены покупателем по истечении гарантийного срока, но в пределах двух
лет со дня передачи товара покупателю, продавец несет ответственность, если покупатель докажет, что недостатки товара возникли до передачи товара покупателю или по причинам, возникшим до этого момента.
Статья 448. Комплектность товара
1. Продавец обязан передать покупателю товар, соответствующий условиям договора купли- продажи о комплектности.
2. В случае, когда договором купли-продажи не определена комплектность товара, продавец обязан передать покупателю товар, комплектность которого определяется обычно предъявляемыми требованиями.
Статья 449. Комплект товаров
1. Если договором купли-продажи предусмотрена обязанность продавца передать покупателю определенный набор товаров в комплекте (комплект товаров), обязательство считается исполненным с момента передачи всех товаров, включенных в комплект.
2. Если иное не предусмотрено договором и не вытекает из существа обязательства, продавец обязан передать покупателю все товары, входящие в комплект, одновременно.
Статья 450. Последствия передачи некомплектных товаров
1. В случае передачи некомплектного товара (статья 448) покупатель вправе по своему выбору потребовать от продавца:
1) соразмерного уменьшения покупной цены;
2) доукомплектования товара в разумный срок.
2. Если продавец в разумный срок не выполнил требования покупателя о доукомплектовании товара, покупатель вправе по своему выбору:
1) потребовать замены некомплектного товара на комплектный;
2) отказаться от исполнения договора купли-продажи и потребовать возврата уплаченной денежной суммы.
3. Последствия, предусмотренные пунктами 1 и 2 настоящей статьи, применяются и в случае нарушения продавцом обязанности передать покупателю комплект товаров (статья 449), если иное не предусмотрено договором купли-продажи и не вытекает из существа обязательства.
Статья 451. Тара и упаковка
1. Если иное не предусмотрено договором купли-продажи и не вытекает из существа обязательства, продавец обязан передать покупателю товар в таре и (или) упаковке, за исключением товара, который по своему характеру не требует затаривания и (или) упаковки.
2. Если договором не определены требования к таре и упаковке, то товар должен быть затарен и (или) упакован обычным для такого товара способом, а при отсутствии такового – способом, обеспечивающим сохранность товаров такого рода при обычных условиях хранения и транспортирования.
3. Если в установленном законодательством порядке предусмотрены обязательные требования к таре и (или) упаковке, то продавец, осуществляющий предпринимательскую деятельность, обязан
передать покупателю товар в таре и (или) упаковке, соответствующих этим обязательным требованиям.
Статья 452. Последствия передачи товара без тары и (или) упаковки либо в ненадлежащей таре и (или) упаковке
1. В случаях, когда подлежащий затариванию и (или) упаковке товар передается покупателю без тары и (или) упаковки либо в ненадлежащей таре и (или) упаковке, покупатель вправе потребовать от продавца затарить и (или) упаковать товар либо заменить ненадлежащую тару и (или) упаковку, если иное не вытекает из существа обязательства или характера товара.
2. В случаях, предусмотренных пунктом 1 настоящей статьи, покупатель вправе вместо предъявления продавцу требований, указанных в этом пункте, предъявить к нему требования, вытекающие из передачи товара ненадлежащего качества (статья 445).
Статья 453. Извещение продавца о ненадлежащем исполнении договора
1. Покупатель обязан известить продавца о нарушении условий договора купли-продажи о количестве, об ассортименте, о качестве, комплектности, таре и (или) упаковке товара в срок, предусмотренный законодательством или договором, а если такой срок не установлен, – в разумный срок после того, как нарушение соответствующего условия договора должно было быть обнаружено, исходя из характера и назначения товара.
2. В случае невыполнения правила, предусмотренного пунктом 1 настоящей статьи, продавец вправе отказаться полностью или частично от удовлетворения требований покупателя о передаче ему недостающего количества товара, замене товара, не соответствующего условиям договора купли-продажи о качестве или об ассортименте, об устранении недостатков товара, о доукомплектовании товара или о замене некомплектного товара на комплектный, о затаривании и (или) упаковке товара либо о замене ненадлежащей тары и (или) упаковки товара, если докажет, что невыполнение этого правила покупателем повлекло невозможность удовлетворить его требования или влечет для продавца несоизмеримые расходы по сравнению с теми, которые он понес бы, если бы был своевременно извещен о нарушении условий договора.
3. Если продавец знал или должен был знать о том, что переданные покупателю товары не соответствуют условиям договора купли-продажи, он не вправе ссылаться на положения, предусмотренные пунктами 1 и 2 настоящей статьи.
Статья 454. Обязанность покупателя принять товар
1. Покупатель обязан принять переданный ему товар, за исключением случаев, когда он в силу акта законодательства или договора вправе потребовать замены товара или отказаться от исполнения договора купли-продажи.
2. Если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором купли-продажи, покупатель обязан совершить действия, которые в соответствии с обычно предъявляемыми требованиями необходимы с его стороны для обеспечения передачи и получения соответствующего товара.
3. В случаях, когда покупатель в нарушение законодательства или договора не принимает или отказывается принять товар, продавец вправе отказаться от исполнения договора.
Статья 455. Цена товара
1. Покупатель обязан оплатить товар по цене, предусмотренной договором купли-продажи (если иное не предусмотрено законодательством), либо, если она договором не предусмотрена и не может быть определена исходя из его условий, – по цене, определяемой в соответствии с пунктом
3 статьи 394 настоящего Кодекса, а также совершить за свой счет действия, которые в соответствии с законодательством, договором или обычно предъявляемыми требованиями необходимы для осуществления платежа.
2. Когда цена установлена в зависимости от веса товара, она определяется по весу нетто, если иное не предусмотрено договором купли-продажи.
3. Если договор купли-продажи предусматривает, что цена товара подлежит изменению в зависимости от показателей, обусловливающих цену товара (себестоимость, затраты и т.п.), но при этом не определен способ пересмотра цены, цена определяется исходя из соотношения этих показателей на момент заключения договора и на момент передачи товара. При просрочке продавцом исполнения обязанности передать товар цена определяется исходя из соотношения этих показателей на момент заключения договора и на момент передачи товара, предусмотренный договором, а если он договором не предусмотрен, – на момент, определенный в соответствии со статьей 295 настоящего Кодекса.
Правила, предусмотренные настоящим пунктом, применяются, если иное не установлено настоящим Кодексом, иными актами законодательства или договором либо не вытекает из существа обязательства.
Статья 456. Оплата товара
1. Покупатель обязан оплатить товар непосредственно до или после передачи ему продавцом товара, если иное не предусмотрено настоящим Кодексом, иными актами законодательства или договором купли-продажи либо не вытекает из существа обязательства.
2. Если договором не предусмотрена рассрочка в оплате переданного товара, покупатель обязан уплатить продавцу цену переданного товара полностью.
3. Если покупатель своевременно не оплачивает переданный в соответствии с договором товар, продавец вправе потребовать оплаты товара и уплаты процентов в соответствии со статьей 366 настоящего Кодекса.
4. Если покупатель в нарушение договора отказывается принять и оплатить товар, продавец вправе по своему выбору потребовать оплаты товара либо отказаться от исполнения договора.
5. В случаях, когда продавец в соответствии с договором обязан передать покупателю не только товары, которые покупателем не оплачены, но и другие товары, продавец вправе приостановить передачу этих товаров до полной оплаты всех ранее переданных товаров, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором.
Статья 457. Предварительная оплата товара
1. В случаях, когда договором купли-продажи предусмотрена обязанность покупателя уплатить цену полностью или частично до передачи продавцом товара (предварительная оплата), покупатель должен произвести оплату в срок, предусмотренный договором, а если такой срок договором не предусмотрен, – в срок, определенный в соответствии со статьей 295 настоящего Кодекса.
2. В случае неисполнения покупателем обязанности предварительно оплатить товар применяются правила, предусмотренные статьей 309 настоящего Кодекса.
3. В случаях, когда продавец, получивший сумму предварительной оплаты, не исполняет свои обязанности по передаче товара в установленный срок (статья 427), покупатель вправе потребовать передачи оплаченного товара или возврата суммы предварительной оплаты за товар, не переданный продавцом.
4. В случае, когда продавец не исполняет обязанность по передаче предварительно оплаченного товара и иное не предусмотрено договором купли-продажи, на сумму предварительной оплаты подлежат уплате проценты в соответствии со статьей 366 настоящего Кодекса со дня, когда по договору передача товара должна была быть произведена, по день передачи товара покупателю или возврата ему предварительно уплаченной им суммы. Договором может быть предусмотрена обязанность продавца уплачивать проценты на сумму предварительной оплаты начиная со дня получения этой суммы от покупателя.
Статья 458. Оплата товара, проданного в кредит
1. В случаях, когда договором купли-продажи предусмотрена оплата товара через определенное время после его передачи покупателю (продажа товара в кредит), покупатель должен произвести оплату в срок, предусмотренный договором, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством, а если такой срок договором или законодательством не предусмотрен, – в срок, определенный в соответствии со статьей 295 настоящего Кодекса.
2. В случае неисполнения продавцом обязанности по передаче товара применяются правила, предусмотренные статьей 309 настоящего Кодекса.
3. В случаях, когда покупатель, получивший товар, не исполняет обязанность по его оплате в установленный договором срок, продавец вправе потребовать оплаты переданного товара или возврата неоплаченных товаров.
4. В случаях, когда покупатель не исполняет обязанность по оплате переданного товара в установленный договором срок и иное не предусмотрено настоящим Кодексом, иными актами законодательства или договором купли-продажи, на просроченную сумму подлежат уплате проценты в соответствии со статьей 366 настоящего Кодекса со дня, когда по договору товар должен был быть оплачен, по день оплаты товара покупателем. Договором может быть предусмотрена обязанность покупателя уплачивать проценты на сумму, соответствующую цене товара, начиная со дня передачи товара продавцом.
5. Если иное не предусмотрено договором, с момента передачи товара покупателю и до его оплаты товар, проданный в кредит, признается находящимся в залоге у продавца для обеспечения исполнения покупателем его обязанности по оплате товара.
Статья 459. Оплата товара в рассрочку
1. Договором о продаже товара в кредит может быть предусмотрена оплата товара в рассрочку.
Договор о продаже товара в кредит с условием о рассрочке платежа считается заключенным, если в нем наряду с другими существенными условиями договора купли-продажи указаны цена товара, порядок, сроки и размеры платежей.
2. Когда покупатель не производит в установленный договором срок очередной платеж за проданный в рассрочку и переданный ему товар, продавец вправе отказаться от исполнения договора и потребовать возврата проданного товара, за исключением случаев, когда сумма платежей, полученных от покупателя, превышает половину цены товара.
3. К договору о продаже товара с условием о рассрочке платежа применяются правила, предусмотренные пунктами 2, 4 и 5 статьи 458 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 460. Страхование товара
Договором купли-продажи может быть предусмотрена обязанность продавца или покупателя страховать товар.
В случаях, когда сторона, обязанная страховать товар, не осуществляет страхования в соответствии с условиями договора, другая сторона вправе застраховать товар и потребовать от обязанной стороны возмещения расходов на страхование либо отказаться от исполнения договора.
Статья 461. Сохранение права собственности за продавцом
В случаях, когда договором купли-продажи предусмотрено, что право собственности на переданный покупателю товар сохраняется за продавцом до оплаты товара или наступления иных обстоятельств, покупатель не вправе до перехода к нему права собственности отчуждать товар или распоряжаться им иным образом, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором либо не вытекает из назначения и свойств товара.
В случаях, когда в срок, предусмотренный договором, переданный товар не будет оплачен или не наступят иные обстоятельства, при которых право собственности переходит к покупателю, продавец вправе потребовать от покупателя возвратить ему товар, если иное не предусмотрено договором.
§ 2. Розничная купля-продажа
Статья 462. Договор розничной купли-продажи
1. По договору розничной купли-продажи продавец, осуществляющий предпринимательскую деятельность по продаже товаров в розницу, либо лицо, осуществляющее ремесленную деятельность или реализацию товаров на рынках или в иных установленных местными исполнительными и распорядительными органами местах, в том числе разовую реализацию, обязуется передать покупателю товар, предназначенный для личного, семейного, домашнего или иного использования, не связанного с предпринимательской деятельностью.
2. Договор розничной купли-продажи является публичным договором (статья 396).
3. К отношениям по договору розничной купли-продажи с участием покупателя-гражданина, не урегулированным настоящим Кодексом, применяется законодательство о защите прав потребителей.
Статья 463. Форма договора розничной купли-продажи
Если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором розничной купли-продажи, в том числе условиями формуляров или иных стандартных форм, к которым присоединяется покупатель (статья 398), договор розничной купли-продажи считается заключенным в надлежащей форме с момента выдачи продавцом покупателю кассового или товарного чека либо иного документа, подтверждающего оплату товара. Отсутствие у покупателя указанных документов не лишает его возможности ссылаться на свидетельские показания в подтверждение факта заключения договора и его условий.
Статья 464. Публичная оферта товара
1. Предложение товара в его рекламе, каталогах и описаниях товаров, обращенных к неопределенному кругу лиц, признается публичной офертой (пункт 2 статьи 407), если оно содержит все существенные условия договора розничной купли-продажи.
2. Выставление в месте продажи (на прилавках, в витринах и т.п.) товаров, демонстрация их образцов или предоставление сведений о продаваемых товарах (описаний, каталогов, фотоснимков товаров и т.п.) в месте их продажи признается публичной офертой независимо от того, указаны ли цена и другие существенные условия договора розничной купли-продажи, за исключением случая, когда продавец явно определил, что соответствующие товары не предназначены для продажи.
Статья 465. Предоставление покупателю информации о товаре
1. Продавец обязан предоставить покупателю необходимую и достоверную информацию о предлагаемом к продаже товаре, соответствующую установленным законодательством и обычно предъявляемым в розничной торговле требованиям к содержанию и способам предоставления такой информации.
2. Покупатель вправе до заключения договора розничной купли-продажи осмотреть товар, потребовать проведения в его присутствии проверки свойств или демонстрации использования товара, если это не исключено ввиду характера товара и не противоречит правилам, принятым в розничной торговле.
3. Если покупателю не предоставлена возможность незамедлительно получить в месте продажи информацию о товаре, указанную в пунктах 1 и 2 настоящей статьи, он вправе потребовать от продавца возмещения убытков, вызванных необоснованным уклонением от заключения договора розничной купли-продажи (пункт 4 статьи 415), а если договор заключен, – в разумный срок отказаться от исполнения договора, потребовать возврата уплаченной за товар суммы и возмещения других убытков.
4. Продавец, не предоставивший покупателю возможности получения соответствующей информации о товаре, несет ответственность и за те недостатки товара, возникшие после его передачи покупателю, в отношении которых покупатель докажет, что они возникли в связи с отсутствием у него такой информации.
Статья 466. Договор розничной купли-продажи с условием о принятии покупателем товара в определенный срок
Сторонами может быть заключен договор розничной купли-продажи с условием о принятии покупателем товара в определенный договором срок, в течение которого этот товар не может быть продан другому покупателю.
Если иное не предусмотрено договором, неявка покупателя или несовершение иных необходимых действий для принятия товара в определенный договором срок может рассматриваться продавцом в качестве отказа покупателя от исполнения договора.
Дополнительные расходы продавца по обеспечению передачи товара покупателю в определенный договором срок включаются в цену товара, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором.
Статья 467. Продажа товаров по образцам
1. Договор розничной купли-продажи может быть заключен на основании ознакомления покупателя с образцом товара (его описанием, каталогом товаров и т.п.), предложенным продавцом.
2. Если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором, договор розничной купли- продажи товара по образцу считается исполненным с момента доставки товара в место, указанное в договоре, а если место передачи товара договором не определено, – с момента доставки товара покупателю по месту жительства гражданина или месту нахождения юридического лица.
3. Покупатель вправе отказаться от исполнения договора розничной купли-продажи до передачи товара при условии возмещения продавцу необходимых расходов, понесенных в связи с совершением действий по выполнению договора.
Статья 468. Продажа товаров с использованием автоматов
1. В случаях, когда продажа товаров производится с использованием автоматов, владелец автоматов обязан довести до покупателей информацию о продавце товаров путем помещения ее на автомате или предоставления покупателям иным способом сведений о наименовании (фирменном наименовании) продавца, месте его нахождения, режиме работы, а также о действиях, которые необходимо совершить покупателю для получения товара.
2. Договор розничной купли-продажи с использованием автоматов считается заключенным с момента совершения покупателем действий, необходимых для получения товара.
3. Если покупателю не предоставляется оплаченный товар, продавец обязан по требованию покупателя незамедлительно предоставить покупателю товар или возвратить уплаченную им сумму.
4. В случаях, когда автомат используется для размена денег, приобретения знаков оплаты или обмена валюты, применяются правила о розничной купле-продаже, если иное не вытекает из существа обязательства.
Статья 469. Продажа товара с условием его доставки покупателю
1. В случае, когда договор розничной купли-продажи заключен с условием доставки товара покупателю, продавец обязан в установленный договором срок доставить товар в место, указанное покупателем, а если место доставки товара покупателем не указано, – в место жительства гражданина или место нахождения юридического лица, являющегося покупателем.
2. Договор розничной купли-продажи считается исполненным с момента вручения товара покупателю, а при его отсутствии – любому лицу, предъявившему квитанцию или иной документ, свидетельствующий о заключении договора или об оформлении доставки товара, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором либо не вытекает из существа обязательства.
3. В случаях, когда договором розничной купли-продажи не определено время доставки товара для вручения его покупателю, товар должен быть доставлен в разумный срок после получения требования покупателя.
Статья 470. Цена и оплата товара
1. Покупатель обязан оплатить товар по цене, объявленной продавцом в момент заключения договора розничной купли-продажи, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или не вытекает из существа обязательства.
2. В случае, когда договором розничной купли-продажи предусмотрена предварительная оплата товара (статья 457), неоплата покупателем товара в установленный договором срок признается отказом покупателя от исполнения договора, если иное не предусмотрено соглашением сторон.
3. К договорам розничной купли-продажи товаров в кредит, в том числе с условием оплаты покупателем товаров в рассрочку, не подлежат применению правила, предусмотренные пунктом 4 статьи 458 настоящего Кодекса.
Покупатель вправе оплатить товар в любое время в пределах установленного договором периода рассрочки оплаты товара.
Статья 471. Договор найма-продажи
Договором может быть предусмотрено, что до перехода права собственности на товар к покупателю (статья 461) покупатель является нанимателем (арендатором) переданного ему товара (договор найма-продажи).
Если иное не предусмотрено договором, покупатель становится собственником товара с момента его оплаты.
Статья 472. Обмен товаров надлежащего качества
1. Покупатель вправе в течение четырнадцати дней с момента передачи ему непродовольственного товара, если более длительный срок не объявлен продавцом, обменять купленный товар в месте покупки и иных местах, объявленных продавцом, на аналогичный товар другого размера, формы, габарита, фасона, расцветки или комплектации, произведя в случае разницы в цене необходимый перерасчет с продавцом.
При отсутствии у продавца необходимого для обмена товара покупатель вправе возвратить приобретенный товар продавцу и получить уплаченную за него денежную сумму.
Требование покупателя об обмене либо возврате товара подлежит удовлетворению, если товар не был в употреблении, сохранены его потребительские свойства и имеются доказательства приобретения его у данного продавца.
Правила настоящего пункта применяются к отношениям по договору розничной купли-продажи с участием покупателя-гражданина, если законодательством о защите прав потребителей не установлены иные правила.
2. Перечень товаров, которые не подлежат обмену или возврату по указанным в настоящей статье основаниям, определяется в порядке, установленном законодательством.
Статья 473. Права покупателя в случае продажи ему товара ненадлежащего качества
1. Покупатель, которому продан товар ненадлежащего качества, если его недостатки не были оговорены продавцом, вправе по своему выбору потребовать:
1) замены недоброкачественного товара товаром надлежащего качества;
2) соразмерного уменьшения покупной цены товара;
3) незамедлительного безвозмездного устранения недостатков товара;
4) возмещения расходов по устранению недостатков товара.
2. В случае обнаружения недостатков товара, свойства которого не позволяют устранить эти недостатки (пищевые продукты, товары бытовой химии и т.п.), покупатель вправе по своему выбору потребовать замены такого товара товаром надлежащего качества либо соразмерного уменьшения покупной цены.
3. Вместо предъявления указанных в пунктах 1 и 2 настоящей статьи требований покупатель вправе отказаться от исполнения договора розничной купли-продажи и потребовать возврата уплаченной за товар денежной суммы.
При этом покупатель по требованию продавца и за его счет должен возвратить полученный товар ненадлежащего качества.
При возврате покупателю уплаченной за товар денежной суммы продавец не вправе удерживать из нее сумму, на которую понизилась стоимость товара из-за полного или частичного использования товара, потери им товарного вида или других подобных обстоятельств.
4. В случае обнаружения недостатков технически сложного товара, определяемого законодательством, или дорогостоящего товара покупатель вправе предъявить требования,
указанные в подпункте 1 пункта 1 и пункте 3 настоящей статьи, в течение тридцати дней со дня передачи ему товара. По истечении указанного срока такие требования могут быть предъявлены покупателем только в случае существенного нарушения требований к качеству товара (пункт 2 статьи 445) или нарушения предусмотренных законодательством сроков безвозмездного устранения недостатков товара.
Статья 474. Возмещение разницы в цене при замене товара, уменьшении покупной цены и возврате товара ненадлежащего качества
1. При замене недоброкачественного товара на соответствующий договору розничной купли- продажи товар надлежащего качества продавец не вправе требовать возмещения разницы между ценой товара, установленной договором, и ценой товара, существующей в момент замены товара или вынесения судом решения о замене товара.
2. При замене недоброкачественного товара на аналогичный, но иной по размеру, фасону, сорту или другим признакам товар надлежащего качества подлежит возмещению разница между ценой заменяемого товара в момент замены и ценой товара, передаваемого взамен товара ненадлежащего качества.
Если требование покупателя не удовлетворено продавцом, цена заменяемого товара и цена товара, передаваемого взамен его, определяются на момент вынесения судом решения о замене товара.
3. В случае предъявления требования о соразмерном уменьшении покупной цены товара в расчет принимается цена товара на момент предъявления требования об уценке, а если требование покупателя добровольно не удовлетворено, – на момент вынесения судом решения о соразмерном уменьшении цены.
4. При возврате продавцу товара ненадлежащего качества покупатель вправе потребовать возмещения разницы между ценой товара, установленной договором розничной купли-продажи, и ценой соответствующего товара на момент добровольного удовлетворения его требования, а если требование добровольно не удовлетворено, – на момент вынесения судом решения.
Статья 475. Ответственность продавца и исполнение обязательства в натуре
В случае неисполнения продавцом обязательства по договору розничной купли-продажи возмещение убытков и уплата неустойки не освобождают продавца от исполнения обязательства в натуре.
§ 3. Поставка товаров
Статья 476. Договор поставки
По договору поставки поставщик-продавец, осуществляющий предпринимательскую деятельность, обязуется передать в обусловленный срок или сроки производимые или закупаемые им товары покупателю для использования их в предпринимательской деятельности или в иных целях, не связанных с личным, семейным, домашним и иным подобным использованием.
Статья 477. Урегулирование разногласий при заключении договора поставки
1. В случае, когда при заключении договора поставки между сторонами возникли разногласия по отдельным условиям договора, сторона, предложившая заключить договор и получившая от другой стороны предложения о согласовании этих условий, должна в течение тридцати дней со дня получения этого предложения, если иной срок не установлен законодательством или не согласован сторонами, принять меры по согласованию соответствующих условий договора либо письменно уведомить другую сторону об отказе от его заключения.
2. Сторона, получившая предложение по соответствующим условиям договора поставки, но не принявшая мер по согласованию условий договора и не уведомившая другую сторону об отказе от его заключения в срок, предусмотренный пунктом 1 настоящей статьи, обязана возместить убытки, вызванные уклонением от согласования условий договора.
Статья 478. Периоды поставки товаров
1. В случае, когда сторонами предусмотрена поставка товаров в течение срока действия договора поставки отдельными партиями и сроки поставки отдельных партий (периоды поставки) в нем не определены, товары должны поставляться равномерными партиями помесячно, если иное не вытекает из законодательства или существа обязательства.
2. Наряду с определением периодов поставки в договоре может быть установлен график поставки товаров (декадный, суточный, часовой и т.п.).
3. Досрочная поставка товаров может производиться с согласия покупателя.
Товары, поставленные досрочно и принятые покупателем, засчитываются в счет количества товаров, подлежащих поставке в следующем периоде.
Статья 479. Порядок поставки товаров
1. Поставка товаров осуществляется поставщиком путем отгрузки (передачи) товаров покупателю, являющемуся стороной договора поставки, или лицу, указанному в договоре в качестве получателя.
2. В случае, когда договором поставки предусмотрено право покупателя давать поставщику указания об отгрузке (передаче) товаров получателям (отгрузочные разнарядки), отгрузка (передача) товаров осуществляется поставщиком получателям, указанным в отгрузочной разнарядке.
Содержание отгрузочной разнарядки и срок ее направления покупателем поставщику определяются договором. Если срок направления отгрузочной разнарядки договором не предусмотрен, она должна быть направлена поставщику не позднее чем за тридцать дней до наступления периода поставки.
3. Непредставление покупателем отгрузочной разнарядки в установленный срок дает поставщику право либо отказаться от исполнения договора, либо потребовать от покупателя оплаты товаров. Кроме того, поставщик вправе потребовать возмещения убытков, причиненных в связи с непредставлением отгрузочной разнарядки.
Статья 480. Доставка товаров
1. Доставка товаров осуществляется поставщиком путем отгрузки их транспортом, предусмотренным договором поставки, и на определенных в договоре условиях.
В случаях, когда в договоре не определено, каким видом транспорта или на каких условиях осуществляется доставка, право выбора вида транспорта или определения условий доставки товара принадлежит поставщику, если иное не вытекает из законодательства или существа обязательства.
2. Договором поставки может быть предусмотрено получение товаров покупателем (получателем) в месте нахождения поставщика (выборка).
Если срок выборки не предусмотрен договором, выборка товаров покупателем (получателем) должна производиться в разумный срок после получения уведомления поставщика о готовности товаров.
Статья 481. Восполнение недопоставки товаров
1. Поставщик, допустивший недопоставку товаров в отдельном периоде поставки, обязан восполнить недопоставленное количество товаров в следующем периоде (периодах) в пределах срока действия договора поставки, если иное не предусмотрено договором.
2. В случае, когда товары отгружаются поставщиком нескольким получателям, указанным в договоре поставки или отгрузочной разнарядке покупателя, товары, поставленные одному получателю сверх количества, предусмотренного в договоре или отгрузочной разнарядке, не засчитываются в покрытие недопоставки другим получателям, если иное не предусмотрено в договоре.
3. Покупатель вправе, уведомив поставщика, отказаться от принятия товаров, поставка которых просрочена, если в договоре поставки не предусмотрено иное. Товары, поставленные до получения поставщиком уведомления, покупатель обязан принять и оплатить.
Статья 482. Ассортимент товаров при восполнении недопоставки
1. Ассортимент товаров, недопоставка которых подлежит восполнению, определяется соглашением сторон. При отсутствии такого соглашения поставщик обязан восполнить недопоставленное количество товаров в ассортименте, установленном для того периода, в котором допущена недопоставка.
2. Поставка товаров одного наименования в большем количестве, чем предусмотрено договором поставки, не засчитывается в покрытие недопоставки товаров другого наименования, входящих в тот же ассортимент, и подлежит восполнению, кроме случаев, когда такая поставка произведена с предварительного письменного согласия покупателя.
Статья 483. Принятие товаров покупателем
1. Покупатель (получатель) обязан совершить все необходимые действия, обеспечивающие принятие товаров, поставленных в соответствии с договором поставки.
2. Принятый покупателем (получателем) товар должен быть им осмотрен в срок, определенный законодательством, договором поставки.
Покупатель (получатель) обязан в этот же срок проверить количество и качество принятых товаров в порядке, установленном законодательством или договором поставки, и о выявленных несоответствиях или недостатках товаров незамедлительно письменно уведомить поставщика.
3. В случае получения поставленных товаров от транспортной организации покупатель (получатель) обязан проверить соответствие товаров сведениям, указанным в транспортных и сопроводительных документах, а также принять эти товары от транспортной организации с соблюдением правил, предусмотренных законодательством, регулирующим деятельность транспорта.
Статья 484. Ответственное хранение товара, не принятого покупателем
1. Когда покупатель (получатель) в соответствии с законодательством или договором поставки отказывается от переданного поставщиком товара, он обязан обеспечить сохранность этого товара (ответственное хранение) и незамедлительно уведомить поставщика.
2. Поставщик обязан вывезти товар, принятый покупателем (получателем) на ответственное хранение, или распорядиться им в разумный срок.
Если поставщик в этот срок не распорядится товаром, покупатель вправе реализовать товар или возвратить его поставщику.
3. Необходимые расходы, понесенные покупателем в связи с принятием товара на ответственное хранение, реализацией товара или его возвратом продавцу, подлежат возмещению поставщиком.
При этом вырученное от реализации товара передается поставщику за вычетом причитающегося покупателю.
4. В случаях, когда покупатель без установленных законодательством или договором поставки оснований не принимает товар от поставщика или отказывается от его принятия, поставщик вправе потребовать от покупателя оплаты товара.
Статья 485. Выборка товаров
1. Когда договором поставки предусмотрена выборка товаров покупателем (получателем) в месте нахождения поставщика (пункт 2 статьи 480), покупатель обязан осуществить осмотр передаваемых товаров в месте их передачи, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством, договором поставки или не вытекает из существа обязательства.
2. Невыборка покупателем (получателем) товаров в установленный договором поставки срок, а при его отсутствии – в разумный срок после получения уведомления поставщика о готовности товаров дает поставщику право отказаться от исполнения договора либо потребовать от покупателя оплаты товаров.
Статья 486. Расчеты за поставляемые товары
1. Покупатель оплачивает поставляемые товары с соблюдением порядка и формы расчетов, предусмотренных договором поставки. Если соглашением сторон порядок и форма расчетов не определены, то расчеты осуществляются платежными поручениями.
2. Если договором поставки предусмотрено, что оплата товаров осуществляется получателем (плательщиком), и последний необоснованно отказался от оплаты либо не оплатил товары в установленный договором срок, поставщик вправе потребовать оплаты поставленных товаров от покупателя.
3. В случае, когда в договоре поставки предусмотрена поставка товаров отдельными частями, входящими в комплект, оплата товаров покупателем производится после отгрузки (выборки) последней части, входящей в комплект, если иное не установлено договором.
Статья 487. Тара и упаковка
Если иное не установлено договором поставки, покупатель (получатель) обязан возвратить поставщику многооборотную тару и средства пакетирования, в которых поступил товар, в порядке и сроки, установленные законодательством.
Прочая тара, а также упаковка товара подлежат возврату поставщику лишь в случаях, предусмотренных договором.
Статья 488. Последствия поставки товаров ненадлежащего качества
1. Покупатель (получатель), которому поставлен товар ненадлежащего качества, вправе предъявить поставщику требования, предусмотренные статьей 445 настоящего Кодекса, за исключением случая, когда поставщик, получивший уведомление покупателя о недостатках поставленных товаров, без промедления заменит поставленные товары товарами надлежащего качества.
2. Покупатель (получатель), осуществляющий продажу поставленных ему товаров в розницу, вправе требовать замены в разумный срок товара ненадлежащего качества, возвращенного потребителем, если иное не предусмотрено договором поставки.
3. Срок исковой давности для требований, предъявляемых в связи с поставкой товаров ненадлежащего качества, составляет один год со дня принятия товара покупателем (получателем).
Если договором поставки предусмотрено предоставление поставщиком гарантии качества товара (статья 440) и заявление по поводу недостатков товара сделано в пределах установленного гарантийного срока, течение срока исковой давности, указанного в части первой настоящего пункта, начинается со дня заявления о недостатках.
Статья 489. Последствия поставки некомплектных товаров
1. Покупатель (получатель), которому поставлены товары с нарушением условий договора поставки, требований законодательства либо обычно предъявляемых требований к комплектности, вправе предъявить поставщику требования, предусмотренные статьей 450 настоящего Кодекса, за исключением случая, когда поставщик, получивший уведомление покупателя о некомплектности поставленных товаров, без промедления доукомплектует товары либо заменит их комплектными товарами.
2. Покупатель (получатель), осуществляющий продажу товаров в розницу, вправе требовать замены в разумный срок некомплектных товаров, возвращенных потребителем, комплектными, если иное не предусмотрено договором поставки.
Статья 490. Права покупателя в случае недопоставки товаров, невыполнения требований об устранении недостатков товаров или о доукомплектовании товаров
1. Если поставщик не поставил предусмотренное договором поставки количество товаров либо не выполнил требования покупателя о замене недоброкачественных товаров или о доукомплектовании товаров в установленный срок, покупатель вправе приобрести непоставленные товары у других лиц с отнесением на счет поставщика всех необходимых и разумных расходов на их приобретение.
2. Исчисление расходов получателя на приобретение товаров у других лиц в случаях их недопоставки поставщиком или невыполнения требований покупателя об устранении недостатков товаров либо о доукомплектовании товаров производится по правилам, предусмотренным пунктом 1 статьи 494 настоящего Кодекса.
3. Покупатель (получатель) вправе отказаться от оплаты товаров ненадлежащего качества и некомплектных товаров, а если такие товары оплачены, – потребовать возврата уплаченных сумм впредь до устранения недостатков и доукомплектования товаров либо их замены.
Статья 491. Неустойка за недопоставку и просрочку поставки товаров
Установленная законодательством или договором поставки неустойка за недопоставку или просрочку поставки товаров взыскивается с поставщика до фактического исполнения обязательства в пределах его обязанности восполнить недопоставленное количество товаров в последующих периодах поставки, если иной порядок уплаты неустойки не установлен законодательством или договором.
Статья 492. Погашение однородных обязательств по нескольким договорам поставки
1. В случаях, когда поставка одноименных товаров осуществляется поставщиком покупателю одновременно по нескольким договорам поставки и количество поставленных товаров недостаточно для погашения обязательств поставщика по всем договорам, поставленные товары
должны засчитываться в счет исполнения договора, указанного поставщиком при осуществлении поставки либо без промедления после поставки.
2. Если покупатель оплатил поставщику одноименные товары, полученные по нескольким договорам поставки, и суммы оплаты недостаточно для погашения обязательств покупателя по всем договорам, уплаченная сумма должна засчитываться в счет исполнения договора, указанного покупателем при осуществлении оплаты товаров или без промедления после оплаты.
3. Если поставщик или покупатель не воспользовались правами, предоставленными им соответственно пунктами 1 и 2 настоящей статьи, исполнение обязательств засчитывается в погашение обязательств по договору, срок исполнения которого наступил ранее. Если срок исполнения обязательства по нескольким договорам наступил одновременно, предоставленное исполнение засчитывается пропорционально в погашение обязательств по всем договорам.
Статья 493. Односторонний отказ от исполнения договора поставки
1. Односторонний отказ от исполнения договора поставки (полностью или частично) или одностороннее его изменение допускаются в случае существенного нарушения договора одной из сторон (пункт 2 статьи 420).
2. Нарушение договора поставки поставщиком предполагается существенным в случае:
1) поставки товаров ненадлежащего качества с недостатками, которые не могут быть устранены в приемлемый для покупателя срок;
2) неоднократного нарушения сроков поставки товаров.
3. Нарушение договора поставки покупателем предполагается существенным в случае:
1) неоднократного нарушения сроков оплаты товаров;
2) неоднократной невыборки товаров.
4. Договор поставки считается измененным или расторгнутым с момента получения одной стороной уведомления другой стороны об одностороннем отказе от исполнения договора полностью или частично, если иной срок расторжения или изменения договора не предусмотрен в уведомлении либо не определен соглашением сторон.
Статья 494. Исчисление убытков при расторжении договора поставки
1. Если в разумный срок после расторжения договора поставки вследствие нарушения обязательства продавцом покупатель купил у другого лица по более высокой, но разумной цене товар взамен предусмотренного договором, покупатель может предъявить продавцу требование о возмещении убытков в виде разницы между установленной в договоре ценой и ценой по совершенной взамен сделке.
2. Если в разумный срок после расторжения договора поставки вследствие нарушения обязательства покупателем продавец продал товар другому лицу по более низкой, чем предусмотренная договором, но разумной цене, продавец может предъявить покупателю требование о возмещении убытков в виде разницы между установленной в договоре ценой и ценой по совершенной взамен сделке.
3. Если после расторжения договора поставки по основаниям, предусмотренным пунктами 1 и 2 настоящей статьи, не совершена сделка взамен расторгнутого договора и на данный товар имеется текущая цена, сторона может предъявить требование о возмещении убытков в виде
разницы между ценой, установленной в договоре, и текущей ценой на момент расторжения договора.
Текущей ценой признается цена, обычно взимавшаяся при сравнимых обстоятельствах за аналогичный товар в месте, где должна была быть осуществлена передача товара. Если в этом месте не существует текущей цены, может быть использована цена, применявшаяся в другом месте, которое может служить разумной заменой, с учетом разницы в расходах по транспортировке товара.
4. Удовлетворение требований, предусмотренных пунктами 1, 2 и 3 настоящей статьи, не освобождает сторону, не исполнившую или ненадлежаще исполнившую обязательство, от возмещения иных убытков, причиненных другой стороне, на основании статьи 14 настоящего Кодекса.
§ 4. Поставка товаров для государственных нужд
Статья 495. Основания поставки товаров для государственных нужд
1. Поставка товаров для государственных нужд осуществляется на основе заключаемых договоров поставки товаров для государственных нужд. Государственными нуждами признаются потребности Республики Беларусь, определяемые Правительством Республики Беларусь, потребности административно-территориальных единиц, определяемые областными и Минским городским Советами депутатов либо в порядке, определяемом ими, за исключением потребностей, обеспечиваемых путем осуществления государственных закупок.
2. К отношениям по поставке товаров для государственных нужд применяются правила о договоре поставки (статьи 476–493), если иное не предусмотрено настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства.
Статья 496. Исключена
Статья 497. Исключена
Статья 498. Исключена
Статья 499. Исключена
Статья 500. Исключена
Статья 501. Исключена
Статья 502. Исключена
Статья 503. Исключена
Статья 504. Исключена
§ 5. Контрактация
Статья 505. Договор контрактации
1. По договору контрактации производитель сельскохозяйственной продукции обязуется передать выращенную (произведенную) им сельскохозяйственную продукцию лицу, осуществляющему закупки такой продукции для переработки или продажи (заготовителю).
2. К отношениям по договору контрактации, не урегулированным правилами настоящего параграфа, применяются правила договора поставки товаров (статьи 476-494).
Статья 506. Обязанности производителя сельскохозяйственной продукции
1. Производитель сельскохозяйственной продукции обязан произвести и передать в обусловленные сроки контрактанту определенное договором контрактации количество сельскохозяйственной продукции, соответствующей требованиям договора по ассортименту и качеству.
2. Договором контрактации может быть предусмотрена обязанность производителя сельскохозяйственной продукции организовать сельскохозяйственное производство, обеспечивающее получение сельскохозяйственной продукции необходимого ассортимента и качества.
3. Производитель сельскохозяйственной продукции обязан представить заготовителю по его требованию отчет об использовании полученных финансовых и материальных средств.
Статья 507. Обязанности заготовителя
1. Заготовитель обязан предоставить производителю сельскохозяйственной продукции предусмотренные договором контрактации финансовые и материальные средства, оказать техническое содействие для осуществления производства сельскохозяйственной продукции.
2. Если иное не предусмотрено договором контрактации, заготовитель обязан принять сельскохозяйственную продукцию по месту нахождения производителя сельскохозяйственной продукции и обеспечить ее вывоз.
3. Договором контрактации может быть предусмотрена обязанность заготовителя принять на установленных в договоре условиях всю сельскохозяйственную продукцию, произведенную ее производителем.
4. Договором контрактации может быть предусмотрена обязанность заготовителя, осуществляющего переработку сельскохозяйственной продукции, возвращать производителю сельскохозяйственной продукции отходы от переработки этой продукции с оплатой по цене, определенной договором контрактации.
Статья 508. Исполнение договора контрактации
1. Срок исполнения договора контрактации определяется соглашением сторон с учетом сроков (периода) производства сельскохозяйственной продукции.
2. Если сельскохозяйственная продукция подлежит доставке в таре или упаковке, заготовитель обеспечивает производителя сельскохозяйственной продукции необходимой тарой и упаковочными материалами в количестве и сроки, установленные договором контрактации.
3. Если иное не предусмотрено договором контрактации, заготовитель не вправе отказаться от принятия частичного исполнения по данному договору.
4. В случае, когда передача сельскохозяйственной продукции осуществляется в месте нахождения заготовителя или ином указанном им месте, заготовитель не вправе отказаться от принятия сельскохозяйственной продукции, соответствующей условиям договора контрактации, поставленной заготовителю в установленный договором срок.
Статья 509. Последствия неисполнения или ненадлежащего исполнения договора контрактации
1. В случае, когда заготовителю становится заведомо известно, что сельскохозяйственная продукция не может быть произведена и передана в количестве, ассортименте и качестве, предусмотренных договором контрактации, заготовитель вправе потребовать расторжения или изменения договора.
2. Производитель сельскохозяйственной продукции, не исполнивший либо ненадлежащим образом исполнивший обязательство, несет ответственность при наличии его вины.
3. Если вследствие обстоятельств, за которые ни одна из сторон не отвечает, производитель сельскохозяйственной продукции не может произвести и передать заготовителю сельскохозяйственную продукцию, он обязан возвратить полученный аванс.
4. Производитель сельскохозяйственной продукции обязан сообщить заготовителю о невозможности поставки сельскохозяйственной продукции вследствие обстоятельств, за которые он не отвечает. Неисполнение этой обязанности по вине производителя сельскохозяйственной продукции лишает его права ссылаться на эти обстоятельства.
§ 6. Энергоснабжение
Статья 510. Договор энергоснабжения
1. По договору энергоснабжения энергоснабжающая организация обязуется подавать абоненту (потребителю) через присоединенную сеть энергию, а абонент обязуется оплачивать принятую энергию, а также соблюдать предусмотренный договором режим ее потребления, обеспечивать безопасность эксплуатации находящихся в его ведении энергетических сетей и исправность используемых им приборов и оборудования, связанных с потреблением энергии.
2. Договор энергоснабжения заключается с абонентом при наличии у него отвечающего установленным техническим требованиям энергопринимающего устройства, присоединенного к сетям энергоснабжающей организации, и другого необходимого оборудования, а также при обеспечении учета потребления энергии.
Статья 511. Заключение и продление договора энергоснабжения
1. В случаях, когда абонентом по договору энергоснабжения выступает гражданин, использующий энергию для бытового потребления, договор считается заключенным с момента первого фактического подключения абонента в установленном порядке к присоединенной сети.
Если иное не предусмотрено соглашением сторон, такой договор считается заключенным на неопределенный срок и может быть изменен или расторгнут по основаниям, предусмотренным статьей 517 настоящего Кодекса.
2. Договор энергоснабжения, заключенный на определенный срок, считается продленным на тот же срок и на тех же условиях, если до окончания срока его действия ни одна из сторон не заявит о его прекращении или изменении либо о заключении нового договора.
3. Если одной из сторон до окончания срока действия договора энергоснабжения внесено предложение о заключении нового договора, то отношения сторон до заключения нового договора регулируются ранее заключенным договором.
Статья 512. Количество энергии
1. Энергоснабжающая организация обязана подавать абоненту энергию через присоединенную сеть в количестве, предусмотренном договором энергоснабжения, и с соблюдением режима подачи, согласованного сторонами. Количество поданной энергоснабжающей организацией и
использованной абонентом энергии определяется в соответствии с данными учета о ее фактическом потреблении.
2. Договором энергоснабжения может быть предусмотрено право абонента изменять количество принимаемой им энергии, определенное договором, при условии возмещения им расходов, понесенных энергоснабжающей организацией в связи с обеспечением подачи энергии не в обусловленном договором количестве.
3. В случаях, когда абонентом по договору энергоснабжения выступает гражданин, использующий энергию для бытового потребления, он вправе использовать энергию в необходимом ему количестве.
Статья 513. Качество энергии
1. Качество подаваемой энергоснабжающей организацией энергии должно соответствовать обязательным для соблюдения требованиям технических нормативных правовых актов в области технического нормирования и стандартизации, требованиям, установленным иными актами республиканских органов государственного управления или предусмотренным договором энергоснабжения.
2. В случае нарушения энергоснабжающей организацией требований, предъявляемых к качеству энергии, абонент вправе отказаться от оплаты такой энергии. При этом энергоснабжающая организация вправе требовать возмещения абонентом стоимости того, что абонент неосновательно сберег вследствие использования этой энергии (пункт 2 статьи 974), если иное не предусмотрено законодательством.
Статья 514. Обязанности абонента по содержанию и эксплуатации сетей, приборов и оборудования
1. Абонент обязан обеспечивать надлежащее техническое состояние и безопасность эксплуатируемых энергетических сетей, приборов и оборудования, соблюдать установленный режим потребления энергии, а также немедленно сообщать энергоснабжающей организации об авариях, пожарах, неисправностях приборов учета энергии и об иных нарушениях, возникающих при использовании энергии.
2. В случае, когда абонентом по договору энергоснабжения выступает гражданин, использующий энергию для бытового потребления, обязанность обеспечивать надлежащее техническое состояние и безопасность энергетических сетей, а также приборов учета потребления энергии возлагается на энергоснабжающую организацию, если иное не установлено законодательством. При этом абонент обязан обеспечить доступ представителей энергоснабжающей организации к энергетическим сетям, приборам учета потребления энергии, если иное не установлено законодательными актами.
3. Требования к техническому состоянию и эксплуатации энергетических сетей, приборов и оборудования, а также порядок осуществления контроля за их соблюдением определяются законодательством и принятыми в соответствии с ним актами республиканских органов государственного управления.
Статья 515. Оплата энергии
1. Оплата энергии производится за фактически принятое абонентом количество энергии в соответствии с данными учета энергии, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или соглашением сторон.
2. Порядок расчетов за энергию определяется законодательством или соглашением сторон.
Статья 516. Субабонент
1. Абонент может передавать энергию, принятую им от энергоснабжающей организации через присоединенную сеть, другому лицу (субабоненту) на основании договора только с согласия энергоснабжающей организации.
2. К договору по передаче абонентом энергии субабоненту применяются правила настоящего параграфа, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором.
3. При передаче энергии субабоненту ответственным перед энергоснабжающей организацией остается абонент, если иное не установлено законодательными актами.
Статья 517. Изменение и расторжение договора энергоснабжения
1. В случае, когда абонентом по договору энергоснабжения выступает гражданин, использующий энергию для бытового потребления, он вправе расторгнуть договор в одностороннем порядке при условии письменного уведомления об этом энергоснабжающей организации и полной оплаты использованной энергии.
В случаях, когда абонентом по договору энергоснабжения выступает юридическое лицо, энергоснабжающая организация вправе отказаться от исполнения договора в одностороннем порядке по основаниям, предусмотренным подпунктом 1 пункта 3 статьи 493 настоящего Кодекса, за исключением случаев, установленных законодательством.
2. Перерыв в подаче, прекращение или ограничение подачи энергии допускаются по соглашению сторон, за исключением случаев, когда удостоверенное органом государственного энергетического надзора неудовлетворительное состояние энергетических установок абонента угрожает аварией или создает угрозу жизни и безопасности граждан. О перерыве в подаче, прекращении или ограничении подачи энергии энергоснабжающая организация должна предупредить абонента.
3. Перерыв в подаче, прекращение или ограничение подачи энергии без согласования с абонентом и без соответствующего его предупреждения допускаются в случае необходимости принять неотложные меры по предотвращению или ликвидации аварии в системе энергоснабжающей организации при условии немедленного уведомления об этом абонента.
Статья 518. Ответственность по договору энергоснабжения
1. В случаях неисполнения или ненадлежащего исполнения обязательств по договору энергоснабжения сторона, нарушившая обязательство, обязана возместить причиненный этим реальный ущерб (пункт 2 статьи 14).
2. Если в результате регулирования режима потребления энергии, осуществленного на основании законодательства, допущен перерыв в подаче энергии абоненту, энергоснабжающая организация несет ответственность за неисполнение или ненадлежащее исполнение договорных обязательств при наличии ее вины.
Статья 519. Применение правил об энергоснабжении к иным договорам
1. Правила, предусмотренные статьями 510-518 настоящего Кодекса, применяются к отношениям, связанным со снабжением тепловой энергией через присоединенную сеть, если иное не установлено законодательством.
2. К отношениям, связанным со снабжением через присоединенную сеть газом, нефтью и нефтепродуктами, водой и другими товарами, правила о договоре энергоснабжения (статьи 510- 518) применяются, если иное не установлено законодательством или не вытекает из существа обязательства.
§ 7. Продажа недвижимости
Статья 520. Договор продажи недвижимости
1. По договору купли-продажи недвижимого имущества (договору продажи недвижимости) продавец обязуется передать в собственность покупателя земельный участок, капитальное строение (здание, сооружение), квартиру или другое недвижимое имущество (пункт 1 статьи 130).
2. Правила настоящего параграфа применяются к продаже предприятий постольку, поскольку иное не предусмотрено настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства о договоре продажи предприятия (статьи 530-537).
Статья 521. Форма договора продажи недвижимости
Договор продажи недвижимости заключается в письменной форме путем составления одного документа, подписанного сторонами (пункт 2 статьи 404).
Несоблюдение формы договора продажи недвижимости влечет его недействительность.
Статья 522. Государственная регистрация перехода права собственности на недвижимость
1. Переход права собственности на недвижимость по договору продажи недвижимости к покупателю подлежит государственной регистрации.
2. Исполнение договора продажи недвижимости сторонами до государственной регистрации перехода права собственности не является основанием для изменения их отношений с третьими лицами.
3. В случаях, когда одна из сторон уклоняется от государственной регистрации перехода права собственности на недвижимость, суд вправе по требованию другой стороны вынести решение о государственной регистрации перехода права собственности. Сторона, необоснованно уклоняющаяся от государственной регистрации перехода права собственности, должна возместить другой стороне убытки, вызванные задержкой регистрации.
Статья 523. Исключена
Статья 524. Исключена
Статья 525. Определение предмета в договоре продажи недвижимости
В договоре продажи недвижимости должны быть указаны данные, позволяющие определенно установить недвижимое имущество, подлежащее передаче покупателю по договору, в том числе данные, определяющие расположение недвижимости на соответствующем земельном участке либо в составе другого недвижимого имущества.
При отсутствии этих данных в договоре условие о недвижимом имуществе, подлежащем передаче, считается не согласованным сторонами, а соответствующий договор не считается заключенным.
Статья 526. Цена недвижимости в договоре
1. Договор продажи недвижимости должен предусматривать цену этой недвижимости.
При отсутствии согласованного сторонами в письменной форме условия о цене недвижимости договор о ее продаже считается незаключенным. При этом правила определения цены, предусмотренные пунктом 3 статьи 394 настоящего Кодекса, не применяются.
2. Если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором продажи недвижимости, установленная в нем цена здания, сооружения или другого недвижимого имущества, находящегося
на земельном участке, включает цену передаваемой с этим недвижимым имуществом соответствующей части земельного участка или права на нее.
3. В случаях, когда цена недвижимости установлена в договоре продажи недвижимости на единицу ее площади или иного показателя ее размера, общая цена такого недвижимого имущества, подлежащая уплате, определяется исходя из фактического размера переданного покупателю недвижимого имущества.
Статья 527. Передача недвижимости
1. Передача недвижимости продавцом и принятие ее покупателем осуществляются по подписываемому сторонами передаточному акту или иному документу о передаче.
Если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором, обязательство продавца передать недвижимость покупателю считается исполненным после передачи этого имущества покупателю и подписания сторонами соответствующего документа о передаче.
Уклонение одной из сторон от подписания документа о передаче недвижимости на условиях, предусмотренных договором, считается отказом соответственно продавца от исполнения обязанности передать имущество, а покупателя – от обязанности принять имущество.
2. Принятие покупателем недвижимости, не соответствующей условиям договора продажи недвижимости, в том числе в случае, когда такое несоответствие оговорено в документе о передаче недвижимости, не является основанием для освобождения продавца от ответственности за ненадлежащее исполнение договора.
Статья 528. Последствия передачи недвижимости ненадлежащего качества
В случае передачи продавцом покупателю недвижимости, не соответствующей условиям договора продажи недвижимости о ее качестве, применяются правила статьи 445 настоящего Кодекса, за исключением положений о праве покупателя потребовать замены товара ненадлежащего качества на товар, соответствующий условиям договора.
Статья 529. Особенности продажи жилых помещений
1. Существенным условием договора продажи жилого дома, квартиры, части жилого дома или квартиры, в которых проживают лица, сохраняющие в соответствии с законодательными актами право пользования этим жилым помещением после его приобретения покупателем, является перечень этих лиц с указанием их прав на пользование продаваемым жилым помещением.
2. Договор продажи жилого дома, квартиры, части жилого дома или квартиры подлежит государственной регистрации и считается заключенным с момента такой регистрации.
§ 8. Продажа предприятия
Статья 530. Договор продажи предприятия
1. По договору продажи предприятия продавец обязуется передать в собственность покупателя предприятие в целом как имущественный комплекс (статья 132), за исключением прав и обязанностей, которые продавец не вправе передавать другим лицам.
2. Права на фирменное наименование, товарный знак, знак обслуживания и другие средства индивидуализации продавца и его товаров, работ или услуг, а также принадлежащие ему на основании лицензии права использования таких средств индивидуализации переходят к покупателю, если иное не предусмотрено договором.
3. Права продавца, полученные им на основании специального разрешения (лицензии) на занятие соответствующей деятельностью, не подлежат передаче покупателю предприятия, если иное не установлено законодательством. Передача покупателю в составе предприятия обязательств, исполнение которых покупателем невозможно при отсутствии у него такого специального разрешения (лицензии), не освобождает продавца от соответствующих обязательств перед кредиторами.
Статья 531. Форма и государственная регистрация договора продажи предприятия
1. Договор продажи предприятия заключается в письменной форме путем составления одного документа, подписанного сторонами (пункт 2 статьи 404), с обязательным приложением к нему документов, указанных в пункте 2 статьи 532 настоящего Кодекса.
2. Несоблюдение формы договора продажи предприятия влечет его недействительность.
3. Договор продажи предприятия подлежит государственной регистрации и считается заключенным с момента такой регистрации.
Статья 532. Удостоверение состава продаваемого предприятия
1. Состав и стоимость продаваемого предприятия определяются в договоре продажи предприятия на основе полной инвентаризации предприятия, проводимой в соответствии с установленными правилами такой инвентаризации.
2. До подписания договора продажи предприятия должны быть составлены и рассмотрены сторонами документ, которым оформлены результаты инвентаризации, бухгалтерский баланс (книга учета доходов и расходов организаций и индивидуальных предпринимателей, применяющих упрощенную систему налогообложения), аудиторское заключение о составе и стоимости предприятия как имущественного комплекса, а также перечень всех долгов (обязательств), включаемых в состав предприятия, с указанием кредиторов, характера, размера и сроков их требований.
Имущество, права и обязанности, указанные в названных документах, подлежат передаче продавцом покупателю, если иное не следует из правил статьи 530 настоящего Кодекса и не установлено соглашением сторон.
Статья 533. Права кредиторов при продаже предприятия
1. Кредиторы по обязательствам, включенным в состав продаваемого предприятия, должны быть до его передачи покупателю письменно уведомлены о его продаже одной из сторон договора продажи предприятия.
2. Кредитор, который письменно не сообщил продавцу или покупателю о своем согласии на перевод долга, вправе в течение трех месяцев со дня получения уведомления о продаже предприятия потребовать прекращения или досрочного исполнения обязательства и возмещения продавцом причиненных этим убытков.
3. Кредитор, который не был уведомлен о продаже предприятия в порядке, предусмотренном пунктом 1 настоящей статьи, может предъявить иск об удовлетворении требований, предусмотренных пунктом 2 настоящей статьи, в течение года со дня, когда он узнал или должен был узнать о передаче предприятия продавцом покупателю.
4. После передачи предприятия покупателю продавец и покупатель несут солидарную ответственность по включенным в состав переданного предприятия долгам, которые были переведены на покупателя без согласия кредитора.
Статья 534. Передача предприятия
1. Передача предприятия продавцом покупателю осуществляется по передаточному акту, в котором указываются данные о составе предприятия и об уведомлении кредиторов о продаже предприятия, а также сведения о выявленных недостатках переданного имущества и перечень имущества, обязанности по передаче которого не исполнены продавцом ввиду его утраты.
Подготовка предприятия к передаче, включая составление и представление на подписание передаточного акта, является обязанностью продавца и осуществляется за его счет, если иное не предусмотрено договором.
2. Предприятие считается переданным покупателю со дня подписания передаточного акта обеими сторонами.
С этого момента на покупателя переходит риск случайной гибели или случайного повреждения имущества, переданного в составе предприятия.
Статья 535. Переход права собственности на предприятие
1. Право собственности на предприятие переходит к покупателю с момента государственной регистрации этого права.
2. Если иное не предусмотрено договором продажи предприятия, право собственности на предприятие переходит к покупателю и подлежит государственной регистрации непосредственно после передачи предприятия покупателю (статья 534).
3. В случаях, когда договором предусмотрено сохранение за продавцом права собственности на предприятие, переданное покупателю, до оплаты предприятия или до наступления иных обстоятельств, покупатель вправе до перехода к нему права собственности распоряжаться имуществом и правами, входящими в состав переданного предприятия, в той мере, в какой это необходимо для целей, для которых предприятие было приобретено.
Статья 536. Последствия передачи и принятия предприятия с недостатками
1. Последствия передачи продавцом и принятия покупателем по передаточному акту предприятия, состав которого не соответствует предусмотренному договором продажи предприятия, в том числе в отношении качества переданного имущества, определяются на основании правил, предусмотренных статьями 430-432, 436, 439, 445, 449 настоящего Кодекса, если иное не вытекает из договора и не предусмотрено пунктами 2-4 настоящей статьи.
2. В случае, когда предприятие передано и принято по передаточному акту, в котором указаны сведения о выявленных недостатках предприятия и об утраченном имуществе (пункт 1 статьи 534), покупатель вправе требовать соответствующего уменьшения покупной цены предприятия, если право на предъявление в таких случаях иных требований не предусмотрено договором продажи предприятия.
3. Покупатель вправе требовать уменьшения покупной цены в случае передачи ему в составе предприятия долгов (обязательств) продавца, которые не были указаны в договоре продажи предприятия или передаточном акте, если продавец не докажет, что покупатель знал о таких долгах (обязательствах) во время заключения договора и передачи предприятия.
4. Продавец в случае получения уведомления покупателя о недостатках имущества, переданного в составе предприятия, или отсутствия в этом составе отдельных видов имущества, подлежащих передаче, может без промедления заменить имущество ненадлежащего качества или предоставить покупателю недостающее имущество.
5. Покупатель вправе в судебном порядке требовать расторжения или изменения договора продажи предприятия и возвращения того, что исполнено сторонами по договору, если установлено, что предприятие ввиду недостатков, за которые продавец отвечает, непригодно для целей, названных в договоре продажи, и эти недостатки не устранены продавцом на условиях, в порядке и сроки, которые установлены в соответствии с законодательством или договором, либо устранение таких недостатков невозможно.
Статья 537. Применение к договору продажи предприятия правил о последствиях недействительности сделок и об изменении или расторжении договора
Правила настоящего Кодекса и иных актов законодательства о последствиях недействительности сделок и об изменении или о расторжении договора купли-продажи, предусматривающие возврат или взыскание в натуре полученного по договору с одной стороны или с обеих сторон, применяются к договору продажи предприятия, если такие последствия существенно не нарушают права и охраняемые законодательством интересы кредиторов продавца и покупателя, других лиц и не противоречат государственным и общественным интересам.
ГЛАВА 31 МЕНА
Статья 538. Договор мены
1. По договору мены каждая из сторон обязуется передать в собственность другой стороны один товар в обмен на другой.
2. К договору мены применяются соответственно правила о купле-продаже (глава 30), если это не противоречит правилам настоящей главы и существу мены. При этом каждая из сторон признается продавцом товара, который она обязуется передать, и покупателем товара, который она обязуется принять в обмен.
Статья 539. Цены и расходы по договору мены
1. Если из договора мены не вытекает иное, товары, подлежащие обмену, предполагаются равноценными, а расходы на их передачу и принятие осуществляются в каждом случае той стороной, которая несет соответствующие обязанности.
2. В случае, когда в соответствии с договором мены обмениваемые товары признаются неравноценными, сторона, обязанная передать товар, цена которого ниже цены товара, предоставляемого в обмен, должна оплатить разницу в ценах непосредственно до или после исполнения ее обязанности передать товар, если иной порядок оплаты не предусмотрен законодательством или договором.
Статья 540. Встречное исполнение обязательства передать товар по договору мены
В случае, когда в соответствии с договором мены сроки передачи обмениваемых товаров не совпадают, к исполнению обязательства передать товар стороной, которая должна передать товар после передачи товара другой стороной, применяются правила о встречном исполнении обязательств (статья 309).
Статья 541. Переход права собственности на обмениваемые товары
Если законодательством или договором мены не предусмотрено иное, право собственности на обмениваемые товары переходит к сторонам, выступающим по договору мены в качестве покупателей, одновременно после исполнения обязательств передать соответствующие товары обеими сторонами.
Статья 542. Ответственность за изъятие товара, приобретенного по договору мены
Сторона, у которой третьим лицом изъят товар, приобретенный по договору мены, вправе при наличии оснований, предусмотренных статьей 431 настоящего Кодекса, потребовать от другой стороны возврата товара, полученного последней в обмен, и (или) возмещения убытков.
ГЛАВА 32 ДАРЕНИЕ
Статья 543. Договор дарения
1. По договору дарения одна сторона (даритель) безвозмездно передает или обязуется передать другой стороне (одаряемому) вещь в собственность, либо имущественное право (требование) к себе или к третьему лицу, либо освобождает или обязуется освободить ее от имущественной обязанности перед собой или перед третьим лицом.
При наличии встречной передачи вещи или права либо встречного обязательства договор не признается дарением. К такому договору применяются правила, предусмотренные пунктом 2 статьи 171 настоящего Кодекса.
2. Обещание безвозмездно передать кому-либо вещь или имущественное право либо освободить кого-либо от имущественной обязанности (обещание дарения) признается договором дарения и связывает обещавшего, если обещание сделано в надлежащей форме (пункт 2 статьи 545) и содержит ясно выраженное намерение совершить в будущем безвозмездную передачу вещи или права конкретному лицу либо освободить его от имущественной обязанности.
Обещание подарить все свое имущество или часть своего имущества без указания на конкретный предмет дарения в виде вещи, права или освобождения от обязанности ничтожно.
3. Договор, предусматривающий передачу дара одаряемому после смерти дарителя, ничтожен.
К такого рода дарению применяются правила гражданского законодательства о наследовании.
4. Существенным условием договора дарения жилого дома, квартиры, части жилого дома или квартиры, в которых проживают лица, сохраняющие в соответствии с законодательными актами право пользования этим жилым помещением после перехода права собственности на него, является перечень этих лиц с указанием их прав на пользование передаваемым в дар жилым помещением.
Статья 544. Отказ одаряемого принять дар
1. Одаряемый вправе в любое время до передачи ему дара от него отказаться. В этом случае договор дарения считается расторгнутым.
2. Если договор дарения заключен в письменной форме, отказ от дара должен быть совершен также в письменной форме. В случае, когда договор дарения зарегистрирован (пункт 3 статьи 545), отказ от принятия дара также подлежит государственной регистрации.
3. Если договор дарения был заключен в письменной форме, даритель вправе требовать от одаряемого возмещения реального ущерба, причиненного отказом принять дар.
Статья 545. Форма договора дарения
1. Дарение, сопровождаемое передачей дара одаряемому, может быть совершено устно, за исключением случаев, предусмотренных пунктами 2 и 3 настоящей статьи.
Передача дара осуществляется посредством его вручения, символической передачи (вручение ключей и т.п.) либо вручения правоустанавливающих документов.
2. Договор дарения движимого имущества должен быть совершен в письменной форме в случаях, когда:
1) дарителем является юридическое лицо и стоимость дара превышает более чем в пять раз установленный законодательством размер базовой величины;
2) договор содержит обещание дарения в будущем.
В случаях, предусмотренных в настоящем пункте, договор дарения, совершенный устно, ничтожен.
3. Договор дарения недвижимого имущества подлежит государственной регистрации.
Статья 546. Запрещение дарения
Не допускается дарение, за исключением обычных подарков, стоимость которых не превышает установленного законодательством пятикратного размера базовой величины:
1) от имени малолетних и граждан, признанных недееспособными, – их законными представителями;
2) работникам организаций здравоохранения, учреждений образования, учреждений социального обслуживания, иных аналогичных организаций – гражданами, находящимися в них на лечении, содержании, получающими в них образование, супругами и родственниками этих граждан;
3) исключен;
4) в отношениях между коммерческими организациями.
Законодательными актами могут быть установлены иные запреты дарения государственным должностным или приравненным к ним лицам либо иностранным должностным лицам в связи с исполнением служебных (трудовых) обязанностей, за исключением сувениров, вручаемых при проведении протокольных и иных официальных мероприятий, чем предусмотренные настоящей статьей.
Статья 547. Ограничения дарения
1. Юридическое лицо, которому вещь принадлежит на праве хозяйственного ведения или оперативного управления, вправе подарить ее с согласия собственника, если законодательством не предусмотрено иное. Это ограничение не распространяется на обычные подарки небольшой стоимости (статья 546).
2. Дарение имущества, находящегося в общей совместной собственности, допускается по согласию всех участников совместной собственности с соблюдением правил, предусмотренных статьей 256 настоящего Кодекса.
3. Доверенность на совершение дарения представителем, в которой не назван одаряемый и не указан предмет дарения, ничтожна.
Статья 548. Отказ от исполнения договора дарения
1. Даритель вправе отказаться от исполнения договора, содержащего обещание передать в будущем одаряемому вещь или право, если после заключения договора имущественное или семейное положение либо состояние здоровья дарителя ухудшилось.
2. Даритель вправе отказаться от исполнения договора, содержащего обещание передать в будущем одаряемому вещь или право, по основаниям, дающим ему право отменить дарение (пункт 1 статьи 549).
3. Отказ дарителя от исполнения договора дарения по основаниям, предусмотренным пунктами 1 и 2 настоящей статьи, не дает одаряемому права требовать возмещения убытков.
Статья 549. Отмена дарения
1. Даритель вправе отменить дарение, если одаряемый совершил покушение на его жизнь, жизнь кого-либо из членов его семьи или близких родственников либо умышленно причинил дарителю телесные повреждения.
В случае умышленного лишения жизни дарителя одаряемым право требовать в суде отмены дарения принадлежит наследникам дарителя.
2. По требованию заинтересованного лица суд может отменить дарение, совершенное индивидуальным предпринимателем или юридическим лицом с нарушением положений акта законодательства об экономической несостоятельности (банкротстве) за счет средств, связанных с его предпринимательской деятельностью, в течение шести месяцев, предшествовавших объявлению такого лица экономически несостоятельным (банкротом).
3. В договоре дарения может быть обусловлено право дарителя отменить дарение в случае, если он переживет одаряемого.
4. В случае отмены дарения одаряемый обязан возвратить подаренную вещь, если она сохранилась в натуре к моменту отмены дарения.
Статья 550. Случаи, в которых отказ от исполнения договора дарения и отмена дарения невозможны
Правила об отказе от исполнения договора дарения (статья 548) и об отмене дарения (статья 549) не применяются к обычным подаркам небольшой стоимости (статья 546).
Статья 551. Последствия причинения вреда вследствие недостатков подаренной вещи
Вред, причиненный жизни, здоровью или имуществу одаряемого гражданина вследствие недостатков подаренной вещи, подлежит возмещению дарителем в соответствии с правилами главы 58 настоящего Кодекса, если доказано, что эти недостатки возникли до передачи вещи одаряемому, не относятся к числу явных и даритель, хотя и знал о них, не предупредил о них одаряемого.
Статья 552. Правопреемство при обещании дарения
1. Права одаряемого, которому по договору дарения обещан дар, не переходят к его наследникам (правопреемникам), если иное не предусмотрено договором дарения.
2. Обязанности дарителя, обещавшего дарение, переходят к его наследникам (правопреемникам), если иное не предусмотрено договором дарения.
Статья 553. Пожертвования
1. Пожертвованием признается дарение вещи или права в общеполезных целях.
Пожертвования могут делаться гражданам, организациям здравоохранения, учреждениям образования, учреждениям социального обслуживания, иным аналогичным организациям,
благотворительным, научным организациям, фондам, организациям культуры и иным организациям, осуществляющим культурную деятельность, общественным, религиозным и иным некоммерческим организациям, а также Республике Беларусь и ее административно- территориальным единицам.
2. На принятие пожертвований не требуется чьего-либо разрешения или согласия.
3. Пожертвование имущества гражданину должно быть, а юридическим лицам может быть обусловлено жертвователем использованием этого имущества по определенному назначению. При отсутствии такого условия пожертвование имущества гражданину считается обычным дарением, а в остальных случаях пожертвованное имущество используется одаряемым в соответствии с назначением имущества.
Юридическое лицо, принимающее пожертвование, для использования которого установлено определенное назначение, должно вести обособленный учет всех операций по использованию пожертвованного имущества.
4. Если использование пожертвованного имущества в соответствии с указанным жертвователем назначением становится вследствие изменившихся обстоятельств невозможным, оно может быть использовано по другому назначению лишь с согласия жертвователя, а в случае смерти гражданина-жертвователя или ликвидации юридического лица – жертвователя – по решению суда.
5. Использование пожертвованного имущества не в соответствии с указанным жертвователем назначением или изменение этого назначения с нарушением правил пункта 4 настоящей статьи дает право жертвователю, его наследникам или иному правопреемнику требовать отмены пожертвования.
6. К пожертвованиям не применяются статьи 549 и 552 настоящего Кодекса.
ГЛАВА 33 РЕНТА И ПОЖИЗНЕННОЕ СОДЕРЖАНИЕ С ИЖДИВЕНИЕМ
§ 1. Общие положения о ренте и пожизненном содержании с иждивением
Статья 554. Договор ренты
1. По договору ренты одна сторона (получатель ренты) передает другой стороне (плательщику ренты) в собственность имущество, а плательщик ренты обязуется в обмен на полученное имущество периодически выплачивать получателю ренту в виде определенной денежной суммы либо предоставления средств на его содержание в иной форме.
2. По договору ренты допускается установление обязанности выплачивать ренту бессрочно (постоянная рента) или на срок жизни получателя ренты (пожизненная рента). Пожизненная рента может быть установлена на условиях пожизненного содержания гражданина с иждивением.
Статья 555. Форма договора ренты
Договор ренты подлежит нотариальному удостоверению, а договор, предусматривающий отчуждение недвижимого имущества под выплату ренты, подлежит также государственной регистрации.
Статья 556. Отчуждение имущества под выплату ренты
1. Имущество, которое отчуждается под выплату ренты, может быть передано получателем ренты в собственность плательщика ренты за плату или бесплатно.
2. В случаях, когда договором ренты предусматривается передача имущества за плату, к отношениям сторон по передаче и оплате применяются правила о купле-продаже (глава 30), а в случаях, когда такое имущество передается бесплатно, – правила о договоре дарения (глава 32) постольку, поскольку иное не установлено правилами настоящей главы и не противоречит существу договора ренты.
Статья 557. Обременение рентой недвижимого имущества
1. Рента обременяет предприятие, капитальное строение (здание, сооружение) или другое недвижимое имущество, расположенное на земельном участке и переданное под ее выплату. В случае отчуждения такого имущества плательщиком ренты его обязательства по договору ренты переходят на приобретателя имущества, в том числе с учетом требований законодательства об охране и использовании земель в отношении земельного участка, на котором расположено это имущество.
2. Лицо, передавшее обремененное рентой недвижимое имущество в собственность другого лица, несет субсидиарную с ним ответственность (статья 370) по требованиям получателя ренты, возникшим в связи с нарушением договора ренты, если настоящим Кодексом, иными актами законодательства или договором не предусмотрена солидарная ответственность по этому обязательству.
Статья 558. Обеспечение выплаты ренты
1. При передаче под выплату ренты недвижимого имущества, за исключением земельного участка, получатель ренты в обеспечение обязательства плательщика ренты приобретает право залога на это имущество. При этом земельный участок передается под выплату ренты в соответствии с законодательством об охране и использовании земель.
2. Существенным условием договора, предусматривающего передачу под выплату ренты денежной суммы или иного движимого имущества, является условие, устанавливающее обязанность плательщика ренты предоставить обеспечение исполнения его обязательств (статья 310) либо застраховать в пользу получателя ренты ответственность по договору (статья 824) за неисполнение либо ненадлежащее исполнение этих обязательств.
3. При невыполнении плательщиком ренты обязанностей, предусмотренных пунктом 2 настоящей статьи, а также в случае утраты обеспечения или ухудшения его условий по обстоятельствам, за которые получатель ренты не отвечает, получатель ренты вправе расторгнуть договор ренты и потребовать возмещения убытков, вызванных расторжением договора.
Статья 559. Ответственность за просрочку выплаты ренты
За просрочку выплаты ренты плательщик ренты уплачивает получателю ренты проценты, предусмотренные статьей 366 настоящего Кодекса, если иной размер процентов не установлен договором ренты.
§ 2. Постоянная рента
Статья 560. Получатель постоянной ренты
1. Получателями постоянной ренты могут быть только граждане, а также некоммерческие организации, если это не противоречит законодательству и соответствует целям их деятельности.
2. Права получателя ренты по договору постоянной ренты могут передаваться лицам, указанным в пункте 1 настоящей статьи, путем уступки требования и переходить по наследству либо в порядке
правопреемства при реорганизации юридических лиц, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором.
Статья 561. Форма и размер постоянной ренты
1. Постоянная рента выплачивается в денежной форме в размере, устанавливаемом договором.
Договором постоянной ренты может быть предусмотрена выплата ренты путем предоставления вещей, выполнения работ или оказания услуг, соответствующих по стоимости денежной сумме ренты.
2. Если иное не предусмотрено договором, размер выплачиваемой ренты увеличивается пропорционально увеличению установленного законодательством размера базовой величины.
Статья 562. Сроки выплаты постоянной ренты
Если иное не предусмотрено договором постоянной ренты, постоянная рента выплачивается по окончании каждого календарного квартала.
Статья 563. Право плательщика на выкуп постоянной ренты
1. Плательщик постоянной ренты вправе отказаться от дальнейшей выплаты ренты путем ее выкупа.
2. Такой отказ действителен при условии, что он заявлен плательщиком ренты в письменной форме не позднее чем за три месяца до прекращения выплаты ренты или за более длительный срок, предусмотренный договором постоянной ренты. При этом обязательство по выплате ренты не прекращается до получения всей суммы выкупа получателем ренты, если иной порядок выкупа не предусмотрен договором.
3. Условие договора об отказе плательщика постоянной ренты от права на ее выкуп ничтожно.
Договором может быть предусмотрено, что право на выкуп постоянной ренты не может быть осуществлено при жизни получателя ренты либо в течение иного срока, не превышающего тридцати лет с момента заключения договора.
Статья 564. Выкуп постоянной ренты по требованию получателя ренты
Получатель ренты вправе требовать выкупа ренты плательщиком в случаях, когда:
1) плательщик ренты просрочил ее выплату более чем на один год, если иное не предусмотрено договором постоянной ренты;
2) плательщик ренты нарушил свои обязательства по обеспечению выплаты ренты (статья 558);
3) плательщик ренты признан экономически несостоятельным (банкротом) либо возникли иные обстоятельства, очевидно свидетельствующие, что рента не будет выплачиваться им в размере и сроки, установленные договором;
4) недвижимое имущество, переданное под выплату ренты, поступило в общую собственность или разделено между несколькими лицами;
5) в других случаях, предусмотренных договором.
Статья 565. Выкупная цена постоянной ренты
1. Выкуп постоянной ренты в случаях, предусмотренных статьями 563 и 564 настоящего Кодекса, производится по цене, определенной договором постоянной ренты.
2. При отсутствии условия о выкупной цене в договоре, по которому имущество передано под выплату ренты с оплатой, выкуп осуществляется по цене, соответствующей годовой сумме подлежащей выплате ренты.
3. При отсутствии условия о выкупной цене в договоре, по которому имущество передано под выплату ренты бесплатно, в выкупную цену наряду с годовой суммой рентных платежей включается цена переданного имущества, определяемая по правилам, предусмотренным пунктом 3 статьи 394 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 566. Риск случайной гибели имущества, переданного под выплату постоянной ренты
1. Риск случайной гибели или случайной порчи, повреждения имущества, переданного бесплатно под выплату постоянной ренты, несет плательщик ренты.
2. При случайной гибели или случайном повреждении имущества, переданного за плату под выплату постоянной ренты, плательщик вправе требовать соответственно прекращения обязательства по выплате ренты либо изменения условий ее выплаты.
§ 3. Пожизненная рента
Статья 567. Получатель пожизненной ренты
1. Пожизненная рента может быть установлена на период жизни гражданина, передающего имущество под выплату ренты, либо на период жизни другого указанного им гражданина.
2. Допускается установление пожизненной ренты в пользу нескольких граждан, доли которых в праве на получение ренты считаются равными, если иное не предусмотрено договором пожизненной ренты.
В случае смерти одного из получателей ренты его доля в праве на получение ренты переходит к пережившим его получателям ренты, если договором пожизненной ренты не предусмотрено иное, а в случае смерти последнего получателя ренты обязательство выплаты ренты прекращается.
3. Договор, устанавливающий пожизненную ренту в пользу гражданина, который умер к моменту заключения договора, ничтожен.
Статья 568. Размер пожизненной ренты
1. Пожизненная рента определяется в договоре как денежная сумма, периодически выплачиваемая получателю ренты в течение его жизни. В случаях, когда сторонами заключен договор о пожизненном содержании с иждивением, в договоре должна быть определена стоимость такого содержания.
2. Размер пожизненной ренты, определяемый в договоре, в расчете на месяц должен быть не менее размера базовой величины, установленного законодательством, а в случаях, предусмотренных статьей 299 настоящего Кодекса, подлежит увеличению.
Статья 569. Сроки выплаты пожизненной ренты
Если иное не предусмотрено договором пожизненной ренты, пожизненная рента выплачивается по окончании каждого календарного месяца.
Статья 570. Расторжение договора пожизненной ренты по требованию получателя ренты
1. В случаях существенного нарушения договора пожизненной ренты плательщиком ренты получатель ренты вправе требовать от плательщика ренты выкупа ренты на условиях, предусмотренных статьей 565 настоящего Кодекса, либо расторжения договора и возмещения убытков.
2. Если под выплату пожизненной ренты квартира, жилой дом или иное имущество отчуждено бесплатно, получатель ренты вправе при существенном нарушении договора плательщиком ренты потребовать возврата этого имущества с зачетом его стоимости в счет выкупной цены ренты.
Статья 571. Риск случайной гибели имущества, переданного под выплату ренты
Случайная гибель или случайное повреждение имущества, переданного под выплату пожизненной ренты, не освобождают плательщика ренты от обязательства выплачивать ее на условиях, предусмотренных договором пожизненной ренты.
§ 4. Пожизненное содержание с иждивением
Статья 572. Договор пожизненного содержания с иждивением
1. По договору пожизненного содержания с иждивением получатель ренты – гражданин передает принадлежащее ему недвижимое имущество, за исключением земельного участка, в собственность плательщика ренты, который обязуется осуществлять пожизненное содержание с иждивением гражданина и (или) указанного им третьего лица (лиц). При этом земельный участок передается под выплату ренты в соответствии с законодательством об охране и использовании земель.
2. К договору пожизненного содержания с иждивением применяются правила о пожизненной ренте, если иное не предусмотрено правилами настоящего параграфа.
Статья 573. Обязанность по предоставлению содержания с иждивением
1. Обязанность плательщика ренты по предоставлению содержания с иждивением может включать обеспечение потребностей в жилище, питании и одежде, а если этого требует состояние здоровья гражданина, то и уход за ним. Договором пожизненного содержания с иждивением может быть также предусмотрена оплата плательщиком ренты ритуальных услуг.
2. В договоре пожизненного содержания с иждивением должна быть определена стоимость всего объема содержания с иждивением. При этом стоимость общего объема содержания в месяц не может быть менее двукратного размера базовой величины, установленного законодательством.
3. При разрешении спора между сторонами об объеме содержания, которое предоставляется или должно предоставляться гражданину, суд должен руководствоваться принципами добросовестности и разумности.
Статья 574. Замена пожизненного содержания периодическими платежами
Договором пожизненного содержания с иждивением может быть предусмотрена возможность замены предоставления содержания с иждивением в натуре выплатой в течение жизни гражданина периодических платежей в деньгах.
Статья 575. Отчуждение и использование имущества, переданного для обеспечения пожизненного содержания
Плательщик ренты вправе отчуждать, сдавать в залог или иным способом обременять недвижимое имущество, переданное ему в обеспечение пожизненного содержания, только при наличии предварительного согласия получателя ренты.
Плательщик ренты обязан принимать необходимые меры для того, чтобы в период предоставления пожизненного содержания с иждивением использование указанного имущества не приводило к снижению стоимости этого имущества.
Статья 576. Прекращение пожизненного содержания с иждивением
1. Обязательство пожизненного содержания с иждивением прекращается смертью лица (лиц), получающего пожизненное содержание с иждивением.
2. При существенном нарушении плательщиком ренты своих обязательств получатель ренты вправе потребовать возврата недвижимого имущества, переданного в обеспечение пожизненного содержания, либо выплаты ему выкупной цены на условиях, установленных статьей 565 настоящего Кодекса. При этом плательщик ренты не вправе требовать компенсации расходов, понесенных в связи с содержанием лица (лиц), получающего пожизненное содержание с иждивением.
ГЛАВА 34 АРЕНДА
§ 1. Общие положения об аренде
Статья 577. Договор аренды
По договору аренды (имущественного найма) арендодатель (наймодатель) обязуется предоставить арендатору (нанимателю) имущество за плату во временное владение и пользование или во временное пользование.
Плоды, продукция и доходы, полученные арендатором в результате использования арендованного имущества в соответствии с договором, являются его собственностью.
Статья 578. Объекты аренды
1. В аренду могут быть переданы земельные участки и другие обособленные природные объекты, предприятия и иные имущественные комплексы, капитальные строения (здания, сооружения), изолированные помещения, машино-места, их части, определенные сторонами в договоре, оборудование, транспортные средства и другие вещи, которые не теряют своих натуральных свойств в процессе их использования (непотребляемые вещи).
Законодательными актами могут быть установлены виды имущества, сдача которого в аренду не допускается или ограничивается.
2. Законодательством могут быть установлены особенности сдачи в аренду земельных участков и других обособленных природных объектов, а также отдельных видов иного имущества.
3. В договоре аренды должны быть указаны данные, позволяющие определенно установить имущество, подлежащее передаче арендатору в качестве объекта аренды. При отсутствии этих данных в договоре условие об объекте, подлежащем передаче в аренду, считается несогласованным сторонами, а соответствующий договор не считается заключенным.
Статья 579. Арендодатель
Право сдачи имущества в аренду принадлежит его собственнику. Арендодателями могут быть также лица, управомоченные законодательством или собственником сдавать имущество в аренду.
Статья 580. Форма и государственная регистрация договора аренды
1. Договор аренды на срок более одного года, а если хотя бы одной из сторон договора является юридическое лицо, – независимо от срока должен быть заключен в письменной форме, если иное не установлено законодательными актами.
2. Договор аренды недвижимого имущества подлежит государственной регистрации, если иное не установлено законодательными актами.
3. Договор аренды имущества, предусматривающий выкуп арендатором арендованного имущества (статья 595), заключается в форме, предусмотренной для договора купли-продажи такого имущества.
Статья 581. Срок договора аренды
1. Договор аренды заключается на срок, определенный договором.
2. Если срок аренды в договоре не определен, договор аренды считается заключенным на неопределенный срок.
В этом случае каждая из сторон вправе в любое время отказаться от договора, предупредив об этом другую сторону за один месяц, а при аренде недвижимого имущества – за три месяца. Законодательством или договором может быть установлен иной срок для предупреждения о прекращении договора аренды, заключенного на неопределенный срок.
3. Законодательством могут устанавливаться максимальные (предельные) сроки договора для отдельных видов аренды, а также для аренды отдельных видов имущества. В этих случаях, если срок аренды в договоре не определен и ни одна из сторон не отказалась от договора до истечения предельного срока, установленного законодательством, договор по истечении предельного срока прекращается.
Договор аренды, заключенный на срок, превышающий установленный законодательством предельный срок, считается заключенным на срок, равный предельному.
Статья 582. Предоставление имущества арендатору
1. Арендодатель обязан предоставить арендатору имущество в состоянии, соответствующем требованиям законодательства и условиям договора аренды, а также назначению такого имущества.
2. Имущество сдается в аренду вместе со всеми его принадлежностями и относящимися к нему документами (техническим паспортом, сертификатом качества и т.п.), если иное не предусмотрено договором.
Если такие принадлежности и документы переданы не были, однако без них арендатор не может пользоваться имуществом в соответствии с его назначением либо в значительной степени лишается того, на что был вправе рассчитывать при заключении договора, он может потребовать предоставления ему арендодателем таких принадлежностей и документов или расторжения договора, а также возмещения убытков.
3. Если арендодатель не предоставил арендатору сданное в аренду имущество в указанный в договоре аренды срок, а в случае, когда в договоре такой срок не указан, – в разумный срок, арендатор вправе истребовать от него это имущество в соответствии со статьей 369 настоящего Кодекса и потребовать возмещения убытков, причиненных задержкой исполнения, либо потребовать расторжения договора и возмещения убытков, причиненных его неисполнением.
Статья 583. Ответственность арендодателя за недостатки сданного в аренду имущества
1. Арендодатель отвечает за недостатки сданного в аренду имущества, полностью или частично препятствующие пользованию им, даже если во время заключения договора аренды он не знал об этих недостатках.
При обнаружении таких недостатков арендатор вправе по своему выбору:
1) потребовать от арендодателя либо безвозмездного устранения недостатков имущества, либо соразмерного уменьшения арендной платы, либо возмещения своих расходов на устранение недостатков имущества;
2) непосредственно удержать сумму понесенных им расходов на устранение данных недостатков из арендной платы, предварительно уведомив об этом арендодателя;
3) потребовать досрочного расторжения договора.
Арендодатель, извещенный о требованиях арендатора или о его намерении устранить недостатки имущества за счет арендодателя, может без промедления произвести замену предоставленного арендатору имущества другим аналогичным имуществом, находящимся в надлежащем состоянии, либо безвозмездно устранить недостатки имущества.
Если удовлетворение требований арендатора или удержание им расходов на устранение недостатков из арендной платы не покрывает причиненных арендатору убытков, он вправе потребовать возмещения непокрытой части убытков.
2. Арендодатель не отвечает за недостатки сданного в аренду имущества, которые были им оговорены при заключении договора аренды, либо были заранее известны арендатору, либо должны были быть обнаружены арендатором во время осмотра имущества или проверки его исправности при заключении договора или передаче имущества в аренду.
Статья 584. Права третьих лиц на сдаваемое в аренду имущество
Передача имущества в аренду не является основанием для прекращения или изменения прав третьих лиц на это имущество.
При заключении договора аренды арендодатель обязан предупредить арендатора о всех правах третьих лиц на сдаваемое в аренду имущество (сервитуте, праве залога и т.п.). Неисполнение арендодателем этой обязанности дает арендатору право требовать уменьшения арендной платы либо расторжения договора и возмещения убытков.
Статья 585. Арендная плата
1. Арендатор обязан своевременно вносить плату за пользование имуществом (арендную плату).
Порядок, условия и сроки внесения арендной платы определяются договором аренды. В случаях, когда договором они не определены, считается, что установлены порядок, условия и сроки, обычно применяемые при аренде аналогичного имущества при сравнимых обстоятельствах.
2. Арендная плата устанавливается за все арендуемое имущество в целом или отдельно по каждой из его составных частей в виде:
1) определенных в твердой сумме платежей, вносимых периодически или единовременно;
2) установленной доли полученных в результате использования арендованного имущества продукции, плодов или доходов;
3) предоставления арендатором определенных услуг;
4) передачи арендатором арендодателю обусловленной договором вещи в собственность или в аренду;
5) возложения на арендатора обусловленных договором затрат на улучшение арендованного имущества.
Стороны могут предусматривать в договоре аренды сочетание указанных форм арендной платы или иные формы оплаты аренды, если иное не установлено законодательством.
3. Если иное не предусмотрено договором, размер арендной платы может изменяться по соглашению сторон в сроки, предусмотренные договором, но не чаще одного раза в год. Законодательством могут быть предусмотрены иные минимальные сроки пересмотра размера арендной платы для отдельных видов аренды, а также для аренды отдельных видов имущества.
4. Если законодательством не предусмотрено иное, арендатор вправе потребовать соответственного уменьшения арендной платы, если в силу обстоятельств, за которые он не отвечает, условия пользования, предусмотренные договором аренды, или состояние имущества существенно ухудшились.
5. Если иное не предусмотрено договором аренды, в случае существенного нарушения арендатором сроков внесения арендной платы арендодатель вправе потребовать от него досрочного внесения арендной платы в установленный арендодателем срок. При этом арендодатель не вправе требовать досрочного внесения арендной платы более чем за два срока подряд.
Статья 586. Пользование арендованным имуществом
1. Арендатор обязан пользоваться арендованным имуществом в соответствии с условиями договора аренды, а если такие условия в договоре не определены, – в соответствии с назначением имущества.
2. Арендатор вправе с согласия арендодателя сдавать арендованное имущество в субаренду (поднаем) и передавать свои права и обязанности по договору аренды другому лицу (перенаем), предоставлять арендованное имущество в безвозмездное пользование, а также отдавать арендные права в залог и вносить их в качестве вклада в уставный фонд хозяйственных товариществ и обществ или паевого взноса в производственный кооператив, если иное не установлено законодательством. В указанных случаях, за исключением перенайма, ответственным по договору перед арендодателем остается арендатор.
Договор субаренды не может быть заключен на срок, превышающий срок договора аренды.
К договорам субаренды применяются правила о договорах аренды, если иное не установлено настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства.
3. Если арендатор пользуется имуществом не в соответствии с условиями договора аренды или назначением имущества, арендодатель имеет право потребовать расторжения договора и возмещения убытков.
Статья 587. Обязанности сторон по содержанию арендованного имущества
1. Арендодатель обязан производить за свой счет капитальный ремонт переданного в аренду имущества, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором аренды.
Настоящим Кодексом, иными законами и актами Президента Республики Беларусь могут быть установлены случаи, когда в отношении отдельных видов арендованного имущества обязанность по производству капитального ремонта такого имущества, в том числе обеспечению наличия на
нем в надлежащем состоянии инженерных коммуникаций, может быть возложена только на арендодателя.
Капитальный ремонт должен производиться в срок, установленный договором аренды, а если он не определен договором или вызван неотложной необходимостью, – в разумный срок.
Нарушение арендодателем обязанности по производству капитального ремонта дает арендатору право по своему выбору:
1) произвести капитальный ремонт, предусмотренный договором или вызванный неотложной необходимостью, и взыскать с арендодателя стоимость ремонта или зачесть ее в счет арендной платы;
2) потребовать соответственного уменьшения арендной платы;
3) потребовать расторжения договора и возмещения убытков.
2. Арендатор обязан поддерживать имущество в исправном состоянии, производить за свой счет текущий ремонт и нести расходы на содержание имущества, если иное не установлено законодательством или договором аренды.
Статья 588. Сохранение договора аренды в силе при изменении сторон
1. Переход права собственности (пожизненного наследуемого владения) на сданное в аренду имущество к другому лицу не является основанием для изменения или расторжения договора аренды.
2. В случае смерти гражданина, арендующего недвижимое имущество, его права и обязанности по договору аренды переходят к наследнику, если законодательством или договором не предусмотрено иное.
Арендодатель не вправе отказать такому наследнику во вступлении в договор на оставшийся срок его действия, за исключением случаев, когда заключение договора было обусловлено личными качествами арендатора.
Статья 589. Прекращение договора субаренды при досрочном прекращении договора аренды
1. Если иное не предусмотрено договором аренды, досрочное прекращение договора аренды влечет прекращение заключенного в соответствии с ним договора субаренды. Субарендатор в этом случае имеет право на заключение с ним договора аренды на имущество, находившееся в его пользовании в соответствии с договором субаренды, в пределах оставшегося срока субаренды на условиях, соответствующих условиям прекращенного договора аренды.
2. Если договор аренды по основаниям, предусмотренным настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства, является ничтожным, ничтожным является и заключенный в соответствии с ним договор субаренды.
Статья 590. Досрочное расторжение договора аренды по требованию арендодателя
По требованию арендодателя договор аренды может быть досрочно расторгнут судом, если иное не предусмотрено настоящим Кодексом, иными законами и актами Президента Республики Беларусь, в случаях, когда арендатор:
1) пользуется имуществом с существенным нарушением условий договора или назначения имущества либо с неоднократными нарушениями;
2) существенно ухудшает имущество;
3) более двух раз подряд по истечении установленного договором срока платежа не вносит арендную плату;
4) не производит капитального ремонта имущества в установленные договором аренды сроки, а при отсутствии их в договоре – в разумные сроки в тех случаях, когда в соответствии с законодательством или договором производство капитального ремонта является обязанностью арендатора.
Договором аренды могут быть установлены и другие основания досрочного расторжения договора по требованию арендодателя в соответствии с пунктом 2 статьи 420 настоящего Кодекса.
Арендодатель вправе требовать досрочного расторжения договора только после направления арендатору письменного предупреждения о необходимости исполнения им обязательства в разумный срок, если иной порядок досрочного расторжения договора не предусмотрен настоящим Кодексом, иными законами и актами Президента Республики Беларусь.
Статья 591. Досрочное расторжение договора аренды по требованию арендатора
По требованию арендатора договор аренды может быть досрочно расторгнут судом в случаях, когда:
1) арендодатель не предоставляет имущество в пользование арендатору либо создает препятствия пользованию имуществом в соответствии с условиями договора или назначением имущества;
2) переданное арендатору имущество имеет препятствующие пользованию им недостатки, которые не были оговорены арендодателем при заключении договора, не были заранее известны арендатору и не могли быть обнаружены арендатором во время осмотра имущества или проверки его исправности при заключении договора;
3) арендодатель не производит являющийся его обязанностью капитальный ремонт имущества в установленные договором аренды сроки, а при отсутствии их в договоре – в разумные сроки;
4) имущество в силу обстоятельств, за которые арендатор не отвечает, окажется в состоянии, не пригодном для использования.
Договором аренды могут быть установлены и другие основания досрочного расторжения договора по требованию арендатора в соответствии с пунктом 2 статьи 420 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 592. Преимущественное право арендатора на заключение договора аренды на новый срок
1. Если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором аренды, арендатор, надлежащим образом исполнявший свои обязанности, по истечении срока договора имеет при прочих равных условиях преимущественное перед другими лицами право на заключение договора аренды на новый срок. Арендатор обязан письменно уведомить арендодателя о желании заключить такой договор в срок, указанный в договоре аренды, а если в договоре такой срок не указан, – в разумный срок до окончания действия договора.
При заключении договора аренды на новый срок условия договора могут быть изменены по соглашению сторон.
Если арендодатель отказал арендатору в заключении договора на новый срок, но в течение года со дня истечения срока договора с ним заключил договор аренды с другим лицом, арендатор вправе по своему выбору потребовать в суде перевода на себя прав и обязанностей по заключенному
договору и возмещения убытков, причиненных отказом возобновить с ним договор аренды, либо только возмещения таких убытков.
2. Если арендатор продолжает пользоваться имуществом после истечения срока договора при отсутствии возражений со стороны арендодателя, договор считается возобновленным на тех же условиях на неопределенный срок (статья 581).
Статья 593. Возврат арендованного имущества арендодателю
При прекращении договора аренды арендатор обязан вернуть арендодателю имущество в том состоянии, в котором он его получил, с учетом нормального износа или в состоянии, обусловленном договором.
Если арендатор не возвратил арендованное имущество либо возвратил его несвоевременно, арендодатель вправе потребовать внесения арендной платы за все время просрочки. В случае, когда указанная плата не покрывает причиненных арендодателю убытков, он может потребовать их возмещения.
В случае, когда за несвоевременный возврат арендованного имущества договором предусмотрена неустойка, убытки могут быть взысканы в полной сумме сверх неустойки, если иное не предусмотрено договором.
Статья 594. Улучшение арендованного имущества
1. Произведенные арендатором отделимые улучшения арендованного имущества являются его собственностью, если иное не предусмотрено договором аренды.
2. В случае, когда арендатор произвел за счет собственных средств и с согласия арендодателя улучшения арендованного имущества, неотделимые без вреда для имущества, арендатор имеет право после прекращения договора на возмещение стоимости этих улучшений, если иное не предусмотрено договором аренды.
3. Стоимость неотделимых улучшений арендованного имущества, произведенных арендатором без согласия арендодателя, возмещению не подлежит, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством.
4. Улучшения арендованного имущества, как отделимые, так и неотделимые, произведенные за счет амортизационных отчислений от этого имущества, являются собственностью арендодателя.
5. Осуществление арендатором неотделимых улучшений арендованного государственного имущества, а также иного арендованного имущества в случаях, определенных законодательными актами, не может являться основанием для увеличения арендной платы этому арендатору.
Статья 595. Выкуп арендованного имущества
1. В законодательстве или договоре аренды может быть предусмотрено, что арендованное имущество может быть выкуплено арендатором по истечении срока аренды или до его истечения при условии внесения арендатором всей обусловленной договором выкупной цены.
2. Если условие о выкупе арендованного имущества не предусмотрено в договоре аренды, оно может быть установлено дополнительным соглашением сторон, которые при этом вправе договориться о зачете ранее выплаченной арендной платы в выкупную цену.
3. Законодательством могут быть установлены случаи запрещения выкупа арендованного имущества.
Статья 596. Особенности отдельных видов договора аренды и договоров аренды отдельных видов имущества
К отдельным видам договора аренды и договорам аренды отдельных видов имущества (прокат, аренда транспортных средств, аренда капитальных строений (зданий, сооружений), изолированных помещений, машино-мест, их частей, аренда предприятия, финансовая аренда (лизинг)) положения, предусмотренные настоящим параграфом, применяются, если иное не установлено законодательством.
§ 2. Прокат
Статья 597. Договор проката
1. По договору проката арендодатель, осуществляющий сдачу имущества в аренду в качестве постоянной предпринимательской деятельности, обязуется предоставить арендатору движимое имущество за плату во временное владение и пользование.
Имущество, предоставленное по договору проката, используется для потребительских целей, если иное не предусмотрено договором или не вытекает из существа обязательства.
2. Договор проката заключается в письменной форме.
3. Договор проката является публичным договором (статья 396).
Статья 598. Срок договора проката
1. Договор проката заключается на срок до одного года.
2. Правила о возобновлении договора аренды на неопределенный срок и о преимущественном праве арендатора на возобновление договора аренды (статья 592) к договору проката не применяются.
3. Арендатор вправе отказаться от договора проката в любое время.
Статья 599. Предоставление имущества арендатору
Арендодатель, заключающий договор проката, обязан в присутствии арендатора проверить исправность сдаваемого в аренду имущества, а также ознакомить арендатора с правилами эксплуатации имущества либо выдать ему письменные инструкции о пользовании этим имуществом.
Статья 600. Устранение недостатков сданного в аренду имущества
1. При обнаружении арендатором недостатков сданного в аренду имущества, полностью или частично препятствующих пользованию им, арендодатель обязан в десятидневный срок со дня заявления арендатора о недостатках, если более короткий срок не установлен договором проката, безвозмездно устранить недостатки имущества на месте либо произвести замену данного имущества другим аналогичным имуществом, находящимся в надлежащем состоянии.
2. Если недостатки арендованного имущества явились следствием нарушения арендатором правил эксплуатации и содержания имущества, арендатор оплачивает арендодателю стоимость ремонта и транспортировки имущества.
Статья 601. Арендная плата по договору проката
1. Арендная плата по договору проката устанавливается в виде определенных в твердой сумме платежей, вносимых периодически или единовременно.
2. В случае досрочного возврата имущества арендатором арендодатель возвращает ему соответствующую часть полученной арендной платы, исчисляя ее со дня, следующего за днем фактического возврата имущества.
3. Взыскание с арендатора задолженности по арендной плате производится в бесспорном порядке на основании исполнительной надписи нотариуса, дипломатического агента дипломатического представительства Республики Беларусь и консульского должностного лица консульского учреждения Республики Беларусь.
Статья 602. Пользование арендованным имуществом
1. Капитальный и текущий ремонт имущества, сданного в аренду по договору проката, является обязанностью арендодателя.
В случае невыполнения этой обязанности плата за прокат за время, в течение которого арендатор не мог пользоваться этим имуществом, не взимается.
2. Сдача в субаренду имущества, предоставленного арендатору по договору проката, передача им своих прав и обязанностей по договору проката другому лицу, предоставление этого имущества в безвозмездное пользование, залог арендных прав и внесение их в качестве имущественного вклада в хозяйственные товарищества и общества или паевого взноса в производственные кооперативы не допускаются.
§ 3. Аренда транспортных средств
1. Аренда транспортного средства с предоставлением услуг по управлению и технической эксплуатации (аренда транспортного средства с экипажем)
Статья 603. Договор аренды транспортного средства с экипажем
1. По договору аренды (фрахтования на время) транспортного средства с экипажем арендодатель предоставляет арендатору транспортное средство за плату во временное владение и пользование и оказывает своими силами услуги по управлению им и по его технической эксплуатации.
2. Правила о возобновлении договора аренды на неопределенный срок и о преимущественном праве арендатора на заключение договора аренды на новый срок (статья 592) к договору аренды транспортного средства с экипажем не применяются.
Статья 604. Форма договора аренды транспортного средства с экипажем
Договор аренды транспортного средства с экипажем должен быть заключен в письменной форме независимо от его срока. К такому договору аренды не применяются правила о регистрации договоров аренды, предусмотренные пунктом 2 статьи 580 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 605. Обязанность арендодателя по содержанию транспортного средства
Арендодатель в течение всего срока договора аренды транспортного средства с экипажем обязан поддерживать надлежащее состояние сданного в аренду транспортного средства, включая осуществление текущего и капитального ремонта и предоставление необходимых принадлежностей.
Статья 606. Обязанности арендодателя по управлению и технической эксплуатации транспортного средства
1. Предоставляемые арендатору арендодателем услуги по управлению и технической эксплуатации транспортного средства должны обеспечить его нормальную и безопасную эксплуатацию в соответствии с целями аренды, указанными в договоре. Договором аренды транспортного средства с экипажем может быть предусмотрен более широкий круг услуг, предоставляемых арендатору.
2. Состав экипажа транспортного средства и его квалификация должны отвечать обязательным для сторон правилам и условиям договора, а если обязательными для сторон правилами такие требования не установлены, – требованиям обычной практики эксплуатации транспортного средства данного вида и условиям договора.
Члены экипажа являются работниками арендодателя. Они подчиняются распоряжениям арендодателя, относящимся к управлению и технической эксплуатации, и распоряжениям арендатора, касающимся коммерческой эксплуатации транспортного средства.
Если договором аренды не предусмотрено иное, расходы по оплате услуг членов экипажа, а также расходы на их содержание несет арендодатель.
Статья 607. Обязанность арендатора по оплате расходов, связанных с коммерческой эксплуатацией транспортного средства
Если иное не предусмотрено договором аренды транспортного средства с экипажем, арендатор несет расходы, возникающие в связи с коммерческой эксплуатацией транспортного средства, в том числе расходы на оплату топлива, других расходуемых в процессе эксплуатации материалов и на оплату сборов.
Статья 608. Страхование транспортного средства
Если иное не предусмотрено договором аренды транспортного средства с экипажем, обязанность страховать транспортное средство и (или) страховать ответственность за ущерб, который может быть причинен им или в связи с его эксплуатацией, возлагается на арендодателя в случае, когда такая обязанность вытекает из добровольно принятого обязательства по заключению договора страхования.
Статья 609. Договоры с третьими лицами об использовании транспортного средства
1. Если договором аренды транспортного средства с экипажем не предусмотрено иное, арендатор вправе без согласия арендодателя сдавать транспортное средство в субаренду.
2. Арендатор в рамках осуществления коммерческой эксплуатации арендованного транспортного средства вправе без согласия арендодателя от своего имени заключать с третьими лицами договоры перевозки и иные договоры, если они не противоречат целям использования транспортного средства, указанным в договоре аренды, а если такие цели не установлены, – назначению транспортного средства.
Статья 610. Ответственность за вред, причиненный транспортному средству
В случае гибели или повреждения арендованного транспортного средства арендатор обязан возместить арендодателю причиненные убытки, если последний докажет, что гибель или повреждение транспортного средства произошли по обстоятельствам, за которые арендатор отвечает в соответствии с законодательством или договором аренды.
Статья 611. Ответственность за вред, причиненный транспортным средством
Ответственность за вред, причиненный третьим лицам арендованным транспортным средством, его механизмами, устройствами, оборудованием, несет арендодатель в соответствии с правилами, предусмотренными главой 58 настоящего Кодекса. Он вправе предъявить к арендатору регрессное
требование о возмещении сумм, выплаченных третьим лицам, если докажет, что вред возник по вине арендатора.
Статья 612. Особенности аренды отдельных видов транспортных средств
Транспортными уставами, кодексами и другими актами законодательства могут быть установлены иные, помимо предусмотренных настоящим параграфом, особенности аренды отдельных видов транспортных средств с предоставлением услуг по управлению и технической эксплуатации.
2. Аренда транспортного средства без предоставления услуг по управлению и технической эксплуатации (аренда транспортного средства без экипажа)
Статья 613. Договор аренды транспортного средства без экипажа
По договору аренды транспортного средства без экипажа арендодатель предоставляет арендатору транспортное средство за плату во временное владение и пользование без оказания услуг по управлению им и его технической эксплуатации.
Правила о возобновлении договора аренды на неопределенный срок и о преимущественном праве арендатора на заключение договора аренды на новый срок (статья 592) к договору аренды транспортного средства без экипажа не применяются.
Статья 614. Форма договора аренды транспортного средства без экипажа
Договор аренды транспортного средства без экипажа должен быть заключен в письменной форме независимо от его срока. К такому договору не применяются правила о регистрации договоров аренды, предусмотренные пунктом 2 статьи 580 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 615. Обязанность арендатора по содержанию транспортного средства
Арендатор в течение всего срока договора аренды транспортного средства без экипажа обязан поддерживать надлежащее состояние арендованного транспортного средства, включая осуществление текущего и капитального ремонта.
Статья 616. Обязанности арендатора по управлению транспортным средством и его технической эксплуатации
Арендатор своими силами осуществляет управление арендованным транспортным средством и его эксплуатацию, как коммерческую, так и техническую.
Статья 617. Обязанность арендатора по оплате расходов на содержание транспортного средства
Если иное не предусмотрено договором аренды транспортного средства без экипажа, арендатор несет расходы на содержание арендованного транспортного средства, его страхование, включая страхование своей ответственности, а также расходы, возникающие в связи с его эксплуатацией.
Статья 618. Договоры с третьими лицами об использовании транспортного средства
1. Если договором аренды транспортного средства без экипажа не предусмотрено иное, арендатор вправе без согласия арендодателя сдавать арендованное транспортное средство в субаренду на условиях договора аренды транспортного средства с экипажем или без экипажа.
2. Арендатор вправе без согласия арендодателя от своего имени заключать с третьими лицами договоры перевозки и иные договоры, если они не противоречат целям использования транспортного средства, указанным в договоре аренды, а если такие цели не установлены, – назначению транспортного средства.
Статья 619. Ответственность за вред, причиненный транспортным средством
Ответственность за вред, причиненный третьим лицам транспортным средством, его механизмами, устройствами, оборудованием, несет арендатор в соответствии с правилами главы 58 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 620. Особенности аренды отдельных видов транспортных средств
Транспортными уставами, кодексами и другими актами законодательства могут быть установлены иные, помимо предусмотренных настоящим параграфом, особенности аренды отдельных видов транспортных средств без предоставления услуг по управлению и технической эксплуатации.
§ 4. Аренда капитальных строений (зданий, сооружений), изолированных помещений или машино- мест
Статья 621. Договор аренды капитального строения (здания, сооружения), изолированного помещения или машино-места
1. По договору аренды капитального строения (здания, сооружения), изолированного помещения или машино-места арендодатель обязуется передать во временное владение и пользование или во временное пользование арендатору капитальное строение (здание, сооружение), изолированное помещение или машино-место.
Правила настоящего параграфа применяются к аренде части капитального строения (здания, сооружения), изолированного помещения или машино-места, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством.
2. Правила настоящего параграфа применяются к аренде предприятий, если иное не предусмотрено настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства об аренде предприятия.
Статья 622. Форма договора аренды капитального строения (здания, сооружения), изолированного помещения или машино-места
Договор аренды капитального строения (здания, сооружения), изолированного помещения или машино-места заключается в письменной форме путем составления одного документа, подписанного сторонами (пункт 2 статьи 404).
Несоблюдение формы договора аренды капитального строения (здания, сооружения), изолированного помещения или машино-места влечет его недействительность.
Статья 623. Права на земельный участок при аренде находящегося на нем капитального строения (здания, сооружения)
1. По договору аренды капитального строения (здания, сооружения) арендатору одновременно с передачей прав владения и пользования такой недвижимостью разрешается использование той части земельного участка, которая занята этой недвижимостью и необходима для ее использования.
2. В случае, когда арендодатель является собственником земельного участка, на котором находится сдаваемое в аренду капитальное строение (здание, сооружение), арендатору может предоставляться право аренды на земельный участок, предоставленный для обслуживания этого капитального строения (здания, сооружения).
3. Аренда капитального строения (здания, сооружения), находящегося на земельном участке, не принадлежащем арендодателю на праве собственности, допускается без согласия собственника этого участка, если это не противоречит условиям пользования таким участком, установленным законодательством или договором с собственником земельного участка.
Статья 624. Сохранение за арендатором капитального строения (здания, сооружения) права пользования земельным участком при его продаже
В случаях, когда земельный участок, на котором находится арендованное капитальное строение (здание, сооружение), продается другому лицу, за арендатором этого капитального строения (здания, сооружения) сохраняется право пользования той частью земельного участка, которая занята капитальным строением (зданием, сооружением) и необходима для его использования, на условиях, действовавших до продажи земельного участка.
Статья 625. Размер арендной платы
1. Договор аренды капитального строения (здания, сооружения), изолированного помещения или машино-места должен предусматривать размер арендной платы. При отсутствии согласованного сторонами в письменной форме условия о размере арендной платы договор аренды капитального строения (здания, сооружения), изолированного помещения или машино-места считается незаключенным. При этом правила определения цены, предусмотренные пунктом 3 статьи 394 настоящего Кодекса, не применяются.
2. Установленная в договоре аренды капитального строения (здания, сооружения), изолированного помещения или машино-места плата за пользование капитальным строением (зданием, сооружением), изолированным помещением или машино-местом включает плату за пользование земельным участком, на котором оно расположено, или передаваемой вместе с ним соответствующей частью участка, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором.
3. В случаях, когда плата за аренду капитального строения (здания, сооружения), изолированного помещения или машино-места установлена в договоре на единицу площади капитального строения (здания, сооружения), изолированного помещения или машино-места или иного показателя его размера, арендная плата определяется исходя из фактического размера переданного арендатору капитального строения (здания, сооружения), изолированного помещения или машино-места.
Статья 626. Передача капитального строения (здания, сооружения), изолированного помещения или машино-места
1. Передача капитального строения (здания, сооружения), изолированного помещения или машино- места арендодателем и принятие его арендатором осуществляются по передаточному акту или иному документу о передаче, подписываемому сторонами.
Если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором аренды капитального строения (здания, сооружения), изолированного помещения или машино-места, обязательство арендодателя передать капитальное строение (здание, сооружение), изолированное помещение или машино- место арендатору считается исполненным после предоставления его арендатору во владение или пользование и подписания сторонами соответствующего документа о передаче.
Уклонение одной из сторон от подписания документа о передаче капитального строения (здания, сооружения), изолированного помещения или машино-места на условиях, предусмотренных договором, рассматривается как отказ соответственно арендодателя от исполнения обязанности по передаче имущества, а арендатора – от принятия имущества.
2. При прекращении договора аренды капитального строения (здания, сооружения), изолированного помещения или машино-места арендованное капитальное строение (здание, сооружение), изолированное помещение или машино-место должно быть возвращено арендодателю с соблюдением правил, предусмотренных пунктом 1 настоящей статьи.
§ 5. Аренда предприятия
Статья 627. Договор аренды предприятия
1. По договору аренды предприятия в целом как имущественного комплекса, используемого для осуществления предпринимательской деятельности, арендодатель обязуется предоставить арендатору за плату во временное владение и пользование земельные участки, капитальные строения (здания, сооружения), оборудование и другие входящие в состав предприятия основные средства, передать в порядке, на условиях и в пределах, определяемых договором, запасы сырья, топлива, материалов и иные оборотные средства, права пользования землей, водой и другими природными ресурсами, капитальными строениями (зданиями, сооружениями) и оборудованием, иные имущественные права, связанные с предприятием, права на обозначения, индивидуализирующие юридическое лицо, его товары (работы, услуги), и другие исключительные права, а также уступить ему права требования и перевести на него долги, относящиеся к предприятию. Передача прав владения и пользования находящимся в собственности других лиц имуществом, в том числе землей и иными природными ресурсами, производится в порядке, предусмотренном законодательством.
2. Права арендодателя, полученные им на основании специального разрешения (лицензии) на занятие соответствующей деятельностью, не подлежат передаче арендатору, если иное не установлено законодательством. Включение в состав передаваемого по договору предприятия обязательств, исполнение которых арендатором невозможно при отсутствии у него такого специального разрешения (лицензии), не освобождает арендодателя от соответствующих обязательств перед кредиторами.
Статья 628. Права кредиторов при аренде предприятия
1. Кредиторы по обязательствам, включенным в состав предприятия до его передачи арендатору, должны быть письменно уведомлены арендодателем о передаче предприятия в аренду.
2. Кредитор, который письменно не сообщил арендодателю о своем согласии на перевод долга, вправе в течение трех месяцев со дня получения уведомления о передаче предприятия в аренду потребовать прекращения или досрочного исполнения обязательства и возмещения причиненных этим убытков.
3. Кредитор, который не был уведомлен о передаче предприятия в аренду в порядке, предусмотренном пунктом 1 настоящей статьи, может предъявить иск об удовлетворении требований, предусмотренных пунктом 2 настоящей статьи, в течение года с момента передачи предприятия в аренду.
4. После передачи предприятия в аренду арендодатель и арендатор несут солидарную ответственность по включенным в состав переданного предприятия долгам, которые были переведены на арендатора без согласия кредитора.
Статья 629. Форма и государственная регистрация договора аренды предприятия
1. Договор аренды предприятия заключается в письменной форме путем составления одного документа, подписанного сторонами (пункт 2 статьи 404).
2. Договор аренды предприятия подлежит государственной регистрации и считается заключенным с момента такой регистрации.
3. Несоблюдение формы договора аренды предприятия влечет его недействительность.
Статья 630. Передача арендованного предприятия
Передача предприятия арендатору осуществляется по передаточному акту.
Подготовка предприятия к передаче, включая составление и представление на подписание передаточного акта, является обязанностью арендодателя и осуществляется за его счет, если иное не предусмотрено договором аренды предприятия.
Статья 631. Пользование имуществом арендованного предприятия
Если иное не предусмотрено договором аренды предприятия, арендатор не вправе без согласия арендодателя продавать, обменивать, предоставлять во временное пользование либо взаймы материальные ценности, входящие в состав имущества арендованного предприятия, сдавать их в субаренду и передавать свои права и обязанности по договору аренды в отношении таких ценностей другому лицу. При осуществлении указанных сделок с согласия арендатора не допускаются уменьшение стоимости предприятия и нарушение других положений договора аренды предприятия. Указанный порядок не применяется в отношении земли и других природных ресурсов, а также в иных случаях, предусмотренных законодательством.
Если иное не предусмотрено договором аренды предприятия, арендатор вправе без согласия арендодателя вносить изменения в состав арендованного имущественного комплекса, проводить его реконструкцию, расширение, техническое перевооружение, увеличивающие его стоимость.
Статья 632. Обязанности арендатора по содержанию предприятия и оплате расходов на его эксплуатацию
1. Арендатор предприятия обязан в течение всего срока действия договора аренды предприятия поддерживать предприятие в надлежащем техническом состоянии, в том числе осуществлять его текущий и капитальный ремонт.
2. На арендатора возлагаются расходы, связанные с эксплуатацией арендованного предприятия, если иное не предусмотрено договором, а также с уплатой платежей по страхованию арендованного имущества.
Статья 633. Внесение арендатором улучшений в арендованное предприятие
Арендатор предприятия имеет право на возмещение ему стоимости неотделимых улучшений арендованного имущества, если они произведены с согласия арендодателя и иное не предусмотрено договором аренды предприятия.
Арендодатель может быть освобожден судом от обязанности возмещения арендатору стоимости таких улучшений, если докажет, что издержки арендатора на эти улучшения повышают стоимость арендованного имущества несоразмерно улучшению его качества и (или) эксплуатационных свойств или при осуществлении таких улучшений были нарушены принципы добросовестности и разумности.
Статья 634. Применение к договору аренды предприятия правил о последствиях недействительности сделок, об изменении и расторжении договора
Правила настоящего Кодекса о последствиях недействительности сделок, об изменении и расторжении договора, предусматривающие возврат или взыскание в натуре полученного по договору с одной стороны или с обеих сторон, применяются к договору аренды предприятия, если такие последствия не нарушают существенно права и охраняемые законом интересы кредиторов, арендодателя и арендатора, других лиц и не противоречат государственным и общественным интересам.
Статья 635. Возврат арендованного предприятия
При прекращении договора аренды предприятия арендованный имущественный комплекс должен быть возвращен арендодателю с соблюдением правил, предусмотренных статьями 627, 628 и 630 настоящего Кодекса. Подготовка предприятия к передаче арендодателю, включая составление и представление на подписание передаточного акта, является в этом случае обязанностью арендатора и осуществляется за его счет, если иное не предусмотрено договором.
§ 6. Финансовая аренда (лизинг)
Статья 636. Договор финансовой аренды (лизинга)
По договору финансовой аренды (лизинга) (далее – договор финансовой аренды) арендодатель (лизингодатель), являющийся юридическим лицом или индивидуальным предпринимателем, обязуется приобрести в собственность указанное арендатором (лизингополучателем) имущество у определенного им продавца (поставщика) и предоставить арендатору (лизингополучателю) это имущество, составляющее предмет договора финансовой аренды, за плату во временное владение и пользование. Арендодатель (лизингодатель) в этом случае не несет ответственности за выбор предмета договора финансовой аренды и продавца (поставщика).
Договором финансовой аренды может быть предусмотрено, что выбор продавца (поставщика) и приобретаемого имущества осуществляется арендодателем (лизингодателем).
Арендатор (лизингополучатель) может выступить в качестве продавца (поставщика) имущества, передаваемого ему в качестве предмета договора финансовой аренды.
Арендодатель (лизингодатель) вправе осуществлять контроль за сохранностью предмета договора финансовой аренды и поддержанием его в рабочем состоянии, соблюдением установленных им ограничений на использование предмета договора финансовой аренды, в том числе переданного сублизингополучателю во временное владение и пользование по договору сублизинга.
Статья 6361. Договор сублизинга
По договору сублизинга арендатор (лизингополучатель) (сублизингодатель по договору сублизинга) передает третьему лицу (сублизингополучателю) в пределах своих прав, предоставленных по договору финансовой аренды, во владение и пользование на определенный срок за плату имущество, полученное от арендодателя (лизингодателя) по договору финансовой аренды и составляющее предмет такого договора.
Согласие арендодателя (лизингодателя) на передачу арендатором (лизингополучателем) (сублизингодателем по договору сублизинга) предмета договора финансовой аренды третьему лицу (сублизингополучателю) за плату во временное владение и пользование по договору сублизинга должно быть выражено в письменной форме.
Арендатор (лизингополучатель) (сублизингодатель по договору сублизинга) вправе осуществлять контроль за сохранностью предмета договора финансовой аренды и поддержанием его в рабочем состоянии, соблюдением установленных им ограничений на использование предмета договора финансовой аренды.
К договорам сублизинга применяются правила о договорах субаренды, если иное не установлено настоящим Кодексом или иными актами законодательства.
Статья 637. Предмет договора финансовой аренды
Предметом договора финансовой аренды могут быть любые непотребляемые вещи, кроме земельных участков и других природных объектов.
Статья 638. Исключена
Статья 639. Передача арендатору (лизингополучателю) предмета договора финансовой аренды
1. Если иное не предусмотрено договором финансовой аренды, имущество, являющееся предметом этого договора, передается продавцом (поставщиком) непосредственно арендатору (лизингополучателю) в месте нахождения последнего.
2. В случае, когда имущество, являющееся предметом договора финансовой аренды, не передано арендатору (лизингополучателю) в указанный в этом договоре срок, а если в договоре такой срок не указан, – в разумный срок, арендатор (лизингополучатель) вправе, если просрочка допущена по обстоятельствам, за которые отвечает арендодатель (лизингодатель), потребовать расторжения договора и возмещения убытков.
Статья 640. Переход к арендатору (лизингополучателю) риска случайной гибели или случайной порчи имущества
Риск случайной гибели или случайной порчи арендованного имущества переходит к арендатору (лизингополучателю) в момент передачи ему арендованного имущества, если иное не предусмотрено договором финансовой аренды.
Статья 641. Ответственность продавца (поставщика)
1. Арендатор (лизингополучатель) вправе предъявлять непосредственно продавцу (поставщику) имущества, являющегося предметом договора финансовой аренды, требования, вытекающие из договора купли-продажи (поставки), заключенного между продавцом (поставщиком) и арендодателем (лизингодателем), в частности в отношении качества и комплектности имущества, сроков его поставки и в других случаях ненадлежащего исполнения договора продавцом (поставщиком). При этом арендатор (лизингополучатель) имеет права и несет обязанности, предусмотренные настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства для покупателя, за исключением обязанности оплатить приобретенное имущество, как если бы он был стороной договора купли-продажи (поставки) указанного имущества. Однако арендатор (лизингополучатель) не может расторгнуть договор купли-продажи (поставки) с продавцом (поставщиком) без согласия арендодателя (лизингодателя).
В отношениях с продавцом (поставщиком) арендатор (лизингополучатель) и арендодатель (лизингодатель) выступают как солидарные кредиторы (статья 307).
2. Если иное не предусмотрено договором финансовой аренды, арендодатель (лизингодатель) не отвечает перед арендатором (лизингополучателем) за выполнение продавцом (поставщиком) требований, вытекающих из договора купли-продажи (поставки), кроме случаев, когда ответственность за выбор продавца (поставщика) лежит на арендодателе (лизингодателе). В последнем случае арендатор (лизингополучатель) вправе по своему выбору предъявлять требования, вытекающие из договора купли-продажи (поставки), как непосредственно продавцу (поставщику) имущества, так и арендодателю (лизингодателю), которые несут солидарную ответственность.
ГЛАВА 35 НАЕМ ЖИЛОГО ПОМЕЩЕНИЯ
Статья 642. Договор найма жилого помещения
Отношения, вытекающие из договора найма жилого помещения, регулируются Жилищным кодексом Республики Беларусь.
ГЛАВА 36 БЕЗВОЗМЕЗДНОЕ ПОЛЬЗОВАНИЕ
Статья 643. Договор безвозмездного пользования (ссуда)
1. По договору безвозмездного пользования (договору ссуды) одна сторона (ссудодатель) обязуется передать или передает вещь в безвозмездное временное пользование другой стороне (ссудополучателю), а последняя обязуется вернуть ту же вещь в том состоянии, в каком она ее получила, с учетом нормального износа или в состоянии, обусловленном договором.
2. К договору безвозмездного пользования соответственно применяются правила, предусмотренные статьей 578, пунктом 1 и частью первой пункта 2 статьи 581, пунктами 1 и 3 статьи 586, пунктом 2 статьи 592, пунктами 1 и 3 статьи 594 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 644. Ссудодатель
1. Право передачи вещи в безвозмездное пользование принадлежит ее собственнику и иным лицам, управомоченным на то законодательством или собственником.
2. Коммерческая организация не вправе передавать имущество в безвозмездное пользование лицу, являющемуся собственником имущества этой организации, ее учредителем, участником, руководителем, членом ее органов управления или контроля.
Статья 645. Предоставление вещи в безвозмездное пользование
1. Ссудодатель обязан предоставить вещь в состоянии, соответствующем условиям договора безвозмездного пользования и ее назначению.
2. Вещь предоставляется в безвозмездное пользование со всеми ее принадлежностями и относящимися к ней документами (инструкцией по использованию, техническим паспортом и т.п.), если иное не предусмотрено договором.
Если такие принадлежности и документы переданы не были, однако без них вещь не может быть использована по назначению либо ее использование в значительной степени утрачивает ценность для ссудополучателя, последний вправе потребовать предоставления ему таких принадлежностей и документов либо расторжения договора и возмещения понесенного им реального ущерба (пункт 2 статьи 14).
Статья 646. Последствия непредоставления вещи в безвозмездное пользование
Если ссудодатель не передает вещь ссудополучателю, последний вправе потребовать расторжения договора безвозмездного пользования и возмещения понесенного им реального ущерба.
Статья 647. Ответственность за недостатки вещи, переданной в безвозмездное пользование
1. Ссудодатель отвечает за недостатки вещи, которые он умышленно или по грубой неосторожности не оговорил при заключении договора безвозмездного пользования.
При обнаружении таких недостатков ссудополучатель вправе по своему выбору потребовать от ссудодателя безвозмездного устранения недостатков вещи или возмещения своих расходов на устранение недостатков вещи либо потребовать досрочного расторжения договора и возмещения понесенного им реального ущерба.
2. Ссудодатель, извещенный о требованиях ссудополучателя или о его намерении устранить недостатки вещи за счет ссудодателя, может без промедления произвести замену неисправной вещи другой аналогичной вещью, находящейся в надлежащем состоянии.
3. Ссудодатель не отвечает за недостатки вещи, которые были им оговорены при заключении договора, либо были заранее известны ссудополучателю, либо должны были быть обнаружены ссудополучателем во время осмотра вещи или проверки ее исправности при заключении договора или при передаче вещи.
Статья 648. Права третьих лиц на вещь, передаваемую в безвозмездное пользование
Передача вещи в безвозмездное пользование не является основанием для изменения или прекращения прав третьих лиц на эту вещь.
При заключении договора безвозмездного пользования ссудодатель обязан предупредить ссудополучателя о всех правах третьих лиц на эту вещь (сервитуте, праве залога и т.п.). Неисполнение этой обязанности дает ссудополучателю право требовать расторжения договора и возмещения понесенного им реального ущерба.
Статья 649. Обязанности ссудополучателя по содержанию вещи
Ссудополучатель обязан поддерживать вещь, полученную в безвозмездное пользование, в исправном состоянии, включая осуществление текущего и капитального ремонта, и нести все расходы по ее содержанию, если иное не предусмотрено договором безвозмездного пользования.
Статья 650. Риск случайной гибели или случайного повреждения вещи
Ссудополучатель несет риск случайной гибели или случайного повреждения полученной в безвозмездное пользование вещи, если вещь погибла или была испорчена в связи с тем, что он использовал ее не в соответствии с договором безвозмездного пользования или назначением вещи либо передал ее третьему лицу без согласия ссудодателя. Ссудополучатель несет также риск случайной гибели или случайного повреждения вещи, если с учетом фактических обстоятельств мог предотвратить ее гибель или порчу, пожертвовав своей вещью, но предпочел сохранить свою вещь.
Статья 651. Ответственность за вред, причиненный третьему лицу в результате использования вещи
Ссудодатель отвечает за вред, причиненный третьему лицу в результате использования вещи, если не докажет, что вред причинен вследствие умысла или грубой неосторожности ссудополучателя или лица, у которого эта вещь оказалась с согласия ссудодателя.
Статья 652. Досрочное расторжение договора
1. Ссудодатель вправе требовать досрочного расторжения договора безвозмездного пользования в случаях, когда ссудополучатель:
1) использует вещь не в соответствии с договором или назначением вещи;
2) не выполняет обязанностей по поддержанию вещи в исправном состоянии или ее содержанию;
3) существенно ухудшает состояние вещи;
4) без согласия ссудодателя передал вещь третьему лицу.
2. Ссудополучатель вправе требовать досрочного расторжения договора безвозмездного пользования:
1) при обнаружении недостатков, делающих нормальное использование вещи невозможным или обременительным, о наличии которых он не знал и не мог знать в момент заключения договора;
2) если вещь в силу обстоятельств, за которые он не отвечает, окажется в состоянии, не пригодном для использования;
3) если при заключении договора ссудодатель не предупредил его о правах третьих лиц на передаваемую вещь;
4) при неисполнении ссудодателем обязанности передать вещь либо ее принадлежности и относящиеся к ней документы.
Статья 653. Отказ от договора
1. Каждая из сторон вправе в любое время отказаться от договора безвозмездного пользования, заключенного без указания срока, известив об этом другую сторону за один месяц, если договором не предусмотрен иной срок извещения.
2. Если иное не предусмотрено договором, ссудополучатель вправе во всякое время отказаться от договора, заключенного с указанием срока, в порядке, предусмотренном пунктом 1 настоящей статьи.
Статья 654. Изменение сторон в договоре
1. Ссудодатель вправе произвести отчуждение вещи или передать ее в возмездное пользование третьему лицу. При этом к новому собственнику или пользователю переходят права из ранее заключенного договора безвозмездного пользования, а его права в отношении вещи обременяются правами ссудополучателя.
2. В случае смерти гражданина-ссудодателя либо реорганизации или ликвидации юридического лица – ссудодателя права и обязанности ссудодателя по договору безвозмездного пользования переходят к наследнику (правопреемнику) или к другому лицу, к которому перешло право собственности на вещь или иное право, на основании которого вещь была передана в безвозмездное пользование.
В случае реорганизации юридического лица – ссудополучателя его права и обязанности по договору переходят к юридическому лицу, являющемуся его правопреемником, если иное не предусмотрено договором.
Статья 655. Прекращение договора
Договор безвозмездного пользования прекращается в случае смерти гражданина-ссудополучателя или ликвидации юридического лица – ссудополучателя, если иное не предусмотрено договором.
ГЛАВА 37 ПОДРЯД
§ 1. Общие положения о подряде
Статья 656. Договор подряда
1. По договору подряда одна сторона (подрядчик) обязуется выполнить по заданию другой стороны (заказчика) определенную работу и сдать ее результат заказчику в установленный срок, а заказчик обязуется принять результат работы и оплатить его (уплатить цену работы). Работа выполняется за риск подрядчика, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или соглашением сторон.
2. К отдельным видам договора подряда (бытовой подряд, строительный подряд, подряд на проектные и изыскательские работы) положения, предусмотренные настоящим параграфом,
применяются, если иное не установлено настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства об этих видах договоров.
Статья 657. Работы, выполняемые по договору подряда
1. Договор подряда заключается на изготовление или переработку (обработку) вещи либо на выполнение другой работы с передачей ее результата заказчику.
2. По договору подряда, заключенному на изготовление вещи, подрядчик передает права на нее заказчику.
3. Если иное не предусмотрено договором, подрядчик самостоятельно определяет способы выполнения задания заказчика.
Статья 658. Выполнение работы иждивением подрядчика
1. Если иное не предусмотрено договором, работа выполняется иждивением подрядчика – из его материалов, его силами и средствами.
2. Подрядчик несет ответственность за ненадлежащее качество предоставленных им материалов и оборудования, а также за предоставление материалов и оборудования, обремененных правами третьих лиц.
Статья 659. Распределение рисков между сторонами
1. Если иное не предусмотрено настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства или договором подряда:
1) риск случайной гибели или случайного повреждения материалов, оборудования, переданной для переработки (обработки) вещи или иного используемого для исполнения договора имущества несет предоставившая их сторона;
2) риск случайной гибели или случайного повреждения результата выполненной работы до ее приемки заказчиком несет подрядчик.
2. При просрочке передачи или приемки результата работы риски, предусмотренные пунктом 1 настоящей статьи, несет сторона, допустившая просрочку.
Статья 660. Генеральный подрядчик и субподрядчик
1. Если из акта законодательства или договора подряда не вытекает обязанность подрядчика выполнить предусмотренную в договоре работу лично, подрядчик вправе привлечь к исполнению своих обязательств других лиц (субподрядчиков). В этом случае подрядчик выступает в роли генерального подрядчика.
2. Подрядчик, привлекший к исполнению договора подряда субподрядчика в нарушение положений пункта 1 настоящей статьи или договора, несет перед заказчиком ответственность за убытки, причиненные участием такого субподрядчика в исполнении договора.
3. Генеральный подрядчик несет перед заказчиком ответственность за последствия неисполнения или ненадлежащего исполнения обязательств субподрядчиком в соответствии с правилами пункта 1 статьи 294 и статьи 374 настоящего Кодекса, а перед субподрядчиком – ответственность за неисполнение или ненадлежащее исполнение заказчиком обязательств по договору подряда.
Если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором, заказчик и субподрядчик не вправе предъявлять друг другу требования, связанные с нарушением договоров, заключенных каждым из
них с генеральным подрядчиком.
4. С согласия генерального подрядчика заказчик вправе заключить договор на выполнение отдельных работ с другими лицами. В этом случае указанные лица несут ответственность за неисполнение или ненадлежащее исполнение работы непосредственно перед заказчиком.
Статья 661. Условия участия в исполнении работы нескольких лиц
1. Если на стороне подрядчика выступают одновременно два лица или более, при неделимости предмета обязательства они признаются по отношению к заказчику солидарными должниками и соответственно солидарными кредиторами.
2. При делимости предмета обязательства, а также в других случаях, предусмотренных законодательством или договором, каждое из указанных в пункте 1 настоящей статьи лиц приобретает права и несет обязанности по отношению к заказчику в пределах своей доли (статья 302).
Статья 662. Сроки выполнения работы
1. В договоре подряда указываются начальный и конечный сроки выполнения работы. По согласованию между сторонами в договоре могут быть предусмотрены также сроки начала и завершения отдельных этапов работы (промежуточные сроки).
Если иное не установлено законодательством или не предусмотрено договором, подрядчик несет ответственность за нарушение как начального и конечного, так и промежуточных сроков выполнения работ.
2. Указанные в договоре подряда начальный, конечный и промежуточные сроки выполнения работы могут быть изменены в случаях и порядке, предусмотренных договором.
3. Указанные в пункте 2 статьи 376 настоящего Кодекса последствия просрочки исполнения наступают при нарушении конечного срока исполнения работы.
Статья 663. Цена работы
1. В договоре подряда указываются цена подлежащей выполнению работы или способы ее определения. При отсутствии в договоре таких указаний цена определяется в соответствии с пунктом 3 статьи 394 настоящего Кодекса исходя из обычно применяемых за аналогичные работы цен с учетом необходимых расходов, понесенных сторонами.
2. Цена в договоре подряда включает компенсацию издержек подрядчика и причитающееся ему вознаграждение.
3. Цена работы может быть определена путем составления сметы.
В случае, когда работа выполняется в соответствии со сметой, составленной подрядчиком, смета приобретает силу и становится частью договора подряда с момента подтверждения ее заказчиком.
4. Цена работы (смета) может быть твердой или приблизительной. При отсутствии других указаний в договоре подряда цена работы считается твердой.
5. Если возникла необходимость в проведении дополнительных работ и по этой причине существенно превышается цена работы, определенная приблизительно, подрядчик обязан своевременно предупредить об этом заказчика. Заказчик, не согласившийся на превышение указанной в договоре подряда цены работы, вправе отказаться от договора. В этом случае подрядчик может требовать от заказчика уплаты ему цены за выполненную часть работы.
Подрядчик, своевременно не предупредивший заказчика о необходимости превышения указанной в договоре цены работы, обязан выполнить договор, сохраняя право на оплату работы по цене, определенной в договоре.
6. Подрядчик не вправе требовать увеличения твердой цены (твердой сметы), а заказчик – ее уменьшения, в том числе и в случае, когда в момент заключения договора исключалась возможность предусмотреть полный объем подлежащей выполнению работы или необходимых для этого расходов.
При существенном возрастании после заключения договора стоимости материалов и оборудования, которые должны быть предоставлены подрядчиком, а также оказываемых ему третьими лицами услуг, которые нельзя было предусмотреть при заключении договора, подрядчик имеет право требовать увеличения установленной цены (сметы), а при отказе заказчика выполнить его требование – расторжения договора в соответствии со статьей 421 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 664. Экономия подрядчика
1. В случаях, когда фактические расходы подрядчика оказались меньше тех, которые учитывались при определении цены (составлении сметы), подрядчик сохраняет право на оплату работ по цене, предусмотренной договором (сметой), если заказчик не докажет, что полученная подрядчиком экономия повлияла на качество выполненных работ.
2. В договоре подряда может быть предусмотрено распределение полученной подрядчиком экономии между сторонами.
Статья 665. Порядок оплаты работы
1. Если договором подряда не предусмотрена предварительная оплата выполненной работы или отдельных ее этапов, заказчик обязан уплатить подрядчику обусловленную цену после окончательной сдачи результатов работы при условии, что работа выполнена надлежащим образом и в согласованный срок, либо с согласия заказчика – досрочно.
2. Подрядчик вправе требовать выплаты ему аванса либо задатка только в случаях и размере, указанных в законодательстве или договоре подряда.
Статья 666. Право подрядчика на удержание
При неисполнении заказчиком обязанности уплатить установленную цену либо иную сумму, причитающуюся подрядчику в связи с выполнением договора подряда, подрядчик имеет право на удержание в соответствии со статьей 340 настоящего Кодекса результата работ, а также принадлежащих заказчику оборудования, переданной для переработки (обработки) вещи, остатка неиспользованного материала и другого оказавшегося у него имущества заказчика до уплаты заказчиком соответствующих сумм.
Статья 667. Выполнение работы с использованием материала заказчика
1. При выполнении работы с использованием материала заказчика подрядчик обязан:
1) использовать предоставленный заказчиком материал экономно и расчетливо;
2) после окончания работы представить заказчику отчет об израсходовании материала;
3) возвратить его остаток либо с согласия заказчика уменьшить цену (смету) работы с учетом стоимости остающегося у подрядчика неиспользованного материала.
2. Если результат работы не был достигнут либо достигнутый результат оказался с недостатками, которые делают его непригодным для предусмотренного в договоре подряда использования, а при отсутствии в договоре условия использования – непригодным для обычного использования по причинам, вызванным недостатками предоставленного заказчиком материала, подрядчик вправе потребовать оплаты выполненной им работы.
3. Подрядчик может осуществить права, указанные в пункте 2 настоящей статьи, в случае, если докажет, что недостатки предоставленного заказчиком материала не могли быть обнаружены при надлежащей приемке подрядчиком этого материала.
Статья 668. Ответственность подрядчика за несохранность предоставленного заказчиком имущества
Подрядчик несет ответственность за несохранность предоставленного заказчиком материала, оборудования, переданной для переработки (обработки) вещи или иного имущества, оказавшегося во владении подрядчика в связи с исполнением договора подряда.
Статья 669. Права заказчика во время выполнения работы подрядчиком
1. Заказчик всегда вправе проверять ход и качество работы, выполняемой подрядчиком, не вмешиваясь в его деятельность.
2. Если подрядчик не приступает своевременно к исполнению договора подряда или выполняет работу настолько медленно, что окончание ее к сроку становится явно невозможным, заказчик вправе отказаться от исполнения договора и потребовать возмещения убытков.
3. Если во время выполнения работы станет очевидным, что она не будет выполнена надлежащим образом, заказчик вправе назначить подрядчику разумный срок для устранения недостатков и при неисполнении подрядчиком в назначенный срок этого требования отказаться от договора либо поручить исправление работы другому лицу за счет подрядчика, а также потребовать возмещения убытков.
4. Если иное не предусмотрено договором подряда, при наличии уважительных причин заказчик может в любое время до сдачи ему работы отказаться от договора подряда, уплатив подрядчику часть установленной цены за работу, выполненную до получения уведомления об отказе заказчика от договора. Заказчик также обязан возместить подрядчику убытки, причиненные прекращением договора, в пределах разницы между частью цены, выплаченной за выполненную работу, и ценой, определенной за всю работу.
Статья 670. Обстоятельства, о которых подрядчик обязан предупредить заказчика
1. Подрядчик обязан немедленно предупредить заказчика и до получения от него указаний приостановить работу при обнаружении:
1) непригодности или недоброкачественности предоставленных заказчиком материала, оборудования, технической документации или переданной для переработки (обработки) вещи;
2) возможных неблагоприятных для заказчика и (или) подрядчика последствий выполнения его указаний о способе исполнения работы;
3) иных не зависящих от подрядчика обстоятельств, которые грозят годности или прочности результатов выполняемой работы либо создают невозможность ее завершения в срок.
2. Подрядчик, не предупредивший заказчика об обстоятельствах, перечисленных в пункте 1 настоящей статьи, либо продолживший работу, не дожидаясь истечения установленного в договоре срока, а при его отсутствии – разумного срока для ответа на предупреждение или
несмотря на своевременное указание заказчика о прекращении работ, не вправе при предъявлении к нему или им к заказчику соответствующих требований ссылаться на указанные обстоятельства.
3. Если заказчик, несмотря на своевременное и обоснованное предупреждение со стороны подрядчика об обстоятельствах, указанных в пункте 1 настоящей статьи, в разумный срок не заменит непригодные или недоброкачественные материал, оборудование, техническую документацию или переданную для переработки (обработки) вещь, не изменит указаний о способе выполнения работы или не примет других необходимых мер для устранения обстоятельств, грозящих ее годности, подрядчик вправе отказаться от исполнения договора подряда и потребовать возмещения причиненных его прекращением убытков.
Статья 671. Содействие заказчика
1. Заказчик обязан в случаях, порядке и объеме, предусмотренных договором подряда, оказывать содействие подрядчику в выполнении работы.
При неисполнении заказчиком этой обязанности подрядчик вправе требовать возмещения причиненных убытков, включая дополнительные издержки, вызванные простоем, либо перенесения сроков исполнения работ, либо увеличения указанной в договоре цены работы.
2. В случаях, когда исполнение работы по договору подряда стало невозможным вследствие действий или упущений заказчика, подрядчик сохраняет право на уплату ему указанной в договоре цены с учетом выполненной части работы.
Статья 672. Неисполнение заказчиком встречных обязанностей по договору
1. Подрядчик вправе не приступать к работе, а начатую работу приостановить в случаях, когда нарушение заказчиком своих обязанностей по договору подряда, в частности непредоставление материала, оборудования, технической документации или подлежащей переработке (обработке) вещи, их недоброкачественность и непригодность препятствуют исполнению договора подрядчиком, а также при наличии обстоятельств, очевидно свидетельствующих о том, что исполнение указанных обязанностей не будет произведено в установленный срок (статья 309).
2. Если иное не предусмотрено договором подряда, подрядчик при наличии обстоятельств, указанных в пункте 1 настоящей статьи, вправе отказаться от исполнения договора и потребовать возмещения убытков.
Статья 673. Приемка заказчиком выполненной подрядчиком работы
1. Заказчик обязан в порядке и сроки, предусмотренные договором подряда, с участием подрядчика осмотреть и принять результат выполненной работы, а при обнаружении отступлений от договора, ухудшающих результат работы, или иных недостатков в работе немедленно заявить об этом подрядчику.
2. Заказчик, обнаруживший при приемке недостатки в результате выполненной работы, вправе ссылаться на них только в случае, если в акте либо в ином документе, удостоверяющем приемку, были оговорены эти недостатки либо возможность последующего предъявления требования об их устранении.
3. Если иное не предусмотрено договором подряда, заказчик, принявший результаты работы без проверки, лишается права ссылаться на недостатки работы, которые могли быть установлены при обычном способе ее приемки (явные недостатки).
4. Заказчик, обнаруживший после приемки результата работы отступления от договора подряда или иные недостатки, которые не могли быть установлены при обычном способе приемки
(скрытые недостатки), в том числе умышленно скрытые подрядчиком, обязан известить об этом подрядчика по их обнаружении.
5. При возникновении между заказчиком и подрядчиком спора по поводу недостатков выполненной работы или их причин по требованию любой из сторон должна быть назначена экспертиза. Расходы по проведению экспертизы несет подрядчик, за исключением случаев, когда экспертизой не установлено нарушений договора подряда со стороны подрядчика или причинной связи между действиями подрядчика и обнаруженными недостатками. В этих случаях расходы по проведению экспертизы несет сторона, потребовавшая ее назначения, а если экспертиза назначена по соглашению между сторонами, – обе стороны поровну.
6. Если иное не предусмотрено договором подряда, при уклонении заказчика от принятия результата выполненной работы подрядчик вправе по истечении месяца со дня, когда согласно договору результат работы должен был быть передан заказчику, и при условии последующего двукратного предупреждения заказчика продать результаты работы, а вырученную сумму, за вычетом всех причитающихся подрядчику платежей, внести на имя заказчика в депозит в порядке, предусмотренном статьей 308 настоящего Кодекса.
7. Если уклонение заказчика от принятия выполненной работы повлекло за собой просрочку в сдаче работы, риск случайной гибели ее признается перешедшим к заказчику в момент, когда передача вещи должна была состояться.
Статья 674. Качество работы
1. Качество выполненной подрядчиком работы должно соответствовать условиям договора подряда, а при их отсутствии или неполноте – требованиям, обычно предъявляемым к работам соответствующего рода. Если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором, результат выполненной работы должен в момент передачи заказчику обладать свойствами, указанными в договоре или определенными обычно предъявляемыми требованиями, и в пределах разумного срока быть пригодным для установленного договором использования, а если такое использование договором не предусмотрено, – для обычного использования результата работы такого рода.
2. Если законодательством или в установленном им порядке предусмотрены обязательные требования к работе, выполняемой по договору подряда, подрядчик, действующий в качестве предпринимателя, обязан выполнять работу, соблюдая эти обязательные требования.
Статья 675. Гарантия качества работы
1. Если в соответствии с законодательством, договором подряда предусмотрено предоставление подрядчиком заказчику гарантии качества работы, подрядчик обязан передать заказчику результат работы, который должен соответствовать требованиям пункта 1 статьи 674 настоящего Кодекса в течение всего гарантийного срока.
2. Гарантия качества результата работы, если иное не предусмотрено договором, распространяется на все, составляющее результат работы.
Статья 676. Ответственность подрядчика за ненадлежащее качество работы
1. В случаях, когда работа выполнена подрядчиком с отступлениями от договора подряда, ухудшившими результат работы, или с иными недостатками, которые делают его непригодным для предусмотренного в договоре использования, либо при отсутствии в договоре соответствующего условия – непригодности для обычного использования, заказчик вправе, если иное не установлено законодательством или договором, по своему выбору потребовать от подрядчика:
1) безвозмездного устранения недостатков в разумный срок;
2) соразмерного уменьшения установленной за работу цены;
3) возмещения своих расходов на устранение недостатков, когда право заказчика устранять их предусмотрено в договоре подряда (статья 368).
2. Подрядчик вправе вместо устранения недостатков, за которые он отвечает, безвозмездно выполнить работу заново с возмещением заказчику причиненных просрочкой исполнения убытков. В этом случае заказчик обязан возвратить ранее переданный ему результат работы подрядчику, если по характеру работы такой возврат возможен.
3. Если отступления в работе от условий договора подряда или иные недостатки результата работы в установленный заказчиком разумный срок не были устранены либо являются существенными и неустранимыми, заказчик вправе отказаться от исполнения договора и потребовать возмещения причиненных убытков.
4. Условие договора подряда об освобождении подрядчика от ответственности за определенные недостатки не освобождает его от ответственности, если доказано, что такие недостатки возникли вследствие виновных действий или бездействия подрядчика.
5. Подрядчик, предоставивший материал для выполнения работы, отвечает за его качество по правилам об ответственности продавца за товары ненадлежащего качества (статья 445).
Статья 677. Сроки обнаружения ненадлежащего качества результата работы
1. Если иное не установлено законодательством или договором подряда, заказчик вправе предъявить требования, связанные с ненадлежащим качеством результата работы, при условии, что оно выявлено в сроки, установленные настоящей статьей.
2. В случае, когда на результат работы не установлен гарантийный срок, требования, связанные с недостатками результата работы, могут быть предъявлены заказчиком при условии, что они были обнаружены в разумный срок, но в пределах двух лет со дня передачи результата работы, если иные сроки не установлены законодательством, договором.
3. Заказчик вправе предъявить требования, связанные с недостатками результата работы, обнаруженными в течение гарантийного срока.
4. В случае, когда предусмотренный договором гарантийный срок составляет менее двух лет и недостатки результата работы обнаружены заказчиком по истечении гарантийного срока, но в пределах двух лет с момента, предусмотренного пунктом 5 настоящей статьи, подрядчик несет ответственность, если заказчик докажет, что недостатки возникли до передачи результата работы заказчику или по причинам, возникшим до этого момента.
5. Если иное не предусмотрено договором подряда, гарантийный срок (пункт 1 статьи 675) начинает течь с момента, когда результат выполнения работы был принят или должен был быть принят заказчиком.
6. К истечению гарантийного срока по договору подряда применяются соответственно правила, содержащиеся в пунктах 2 и 4 статьи 441 настоящего Кодекса, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством, соглашением сторон или не вытекает из особенностей договора подряда.
Статья 678. Давность по искам о ненадлежащем качестве работы
1. Срок исковой давности для требований, предъявляемых в связи с ненадлежащим качеством работы, выполненной по договору подряда, составляет один год, а в отношении капитальных строений (зданий, сооружений), незавершенных законсервированных капитальных строений, изолированных помещений, машино-мест – три года.
2. Если законодательством или договором подряда установлен гарантийный срок и заявление по поводу недостатков результата работы сделано в пределах гарантийного срока, течение срока исковой давности, указанного в пункте 1 настоящей статьи, начинается со дня заявления о недостатках.
3. Если в соответствии с договором подряда результат работы принят заказчиком по частям, течение срока исковой давности начинается со дня приемки результата работы в целом.
Статья 679. Обязанность подрядчика передать информацию заказчику
Подрядчик обязан передать заказчику вместе с результатом работы информацию, касающуюся эксплуатации или иного использования предмета договора подряда, если это предусмотрено договором или характер информации таков, что без нее невозможно использование результатов работы для целей, указанных в договоре.
Статья 680. Конфиденциальность полученной сторонами договора подряда информации
Если сторона благодаря исполнению своего обязательства по договору подряда получила от другой стороны информацию о новых решениях и технических знаниях, в том числе и не пользующихся правовой охраной, а также сведения, которые могут рассматриваться как коммерческая тайна (статья 140), она не вправе сообщать их третьим лицам без согласия другой стороны.
Порядок и условия пользования такой информацией определяются соглашением сторон.
Статья 681. Возвращение подрядчиком заказчику материалов и оборудования
В случаях, когда заказчик на основании пункта 2 статьи 669 или пункта 3 статьи 676 настоящего Кодекса расторгает договор подряда, подрядчик обязан возвратить предоставленные заказчиком материалы, оборудование, переданную для переработки (обработки) вещь и иное имущество либо передать их указанному заказчиком лицу, а если это оказалось невозможным, – возместить стоимость материалов, оборудования и иного имущества.
Статья 682. Последствия прекращения договора подряда до приемки результата работы
В случае прекращения договора подряда по основаниям, предусмотренным законодательством или договором, до приемки заказчиком результата работы, выполненной подрядчиком (пункт 1 статьи 673), заказчик вправе требовать передачи ему результата незавершенной работы с компенсацией подрядчику произведенных затрат.
§ 2. Бытовой подряд
Статья 683. Договор бытового подряда
1. По договору бытового подряда подрядчик, осуществляющий предпринимательскую деятельность, обязуется выполнить по заданию гражданина (заказчика) определенную работу, предназначенную для удовлетворения личных, домашних, семейных потребностей заказчика, а заказчик обязуется принять и оплатить работу.
2. Договор бытового подряда является публичным договором (статья 396).
3. К отношениям по договору бытового подряда применяется законодательство о защите прав потребителей.
Статья 684. Гарантии прав заказчика
1. Подрядчик не вправе навязывать заказчику включение в договор бытового подряда дополнительных возмездных работ и услуг. При нарушении этого требования заказчик вправе отказаться от оплаты работ и услуг, не предусмотренных договором.
2. Заказчик вправе в любое время до сдачи ему результата работы отказаться от договора бытового подряда, уплатив подрядчику часть установленной цены пропорционально части работы, выполненной до уведомления об отказе заказчика от договора, и возместив подрядчику расходы, произведенные до этого момента с целью исполнения договора, если они не входят в указанную часть цены работы. Условия договора, лишающие заказчика этого права, ничтожны.
Статья 685. Форма договора
Если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором бытового подряда, в том числе условиями формуляров и иных стандартных форм, к которым присоединяется заказчик (статья 398), договор бытового подряда считается заключенным в надлежащей форме с момента выдачи подрядчиком заказчику квитанции или другого документа, подтверждающего заключение договора.
Статья 686. Публичная оферта по договору бытового подряда
К рекламе и другим предложениям работ, выполняемых по договору бытового подряда, применяются соответственно правила о публичной оферте товаров, содержащиеся в статье 407 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 687. Предоставление заказчику информации о предлагаемой работе
1. Подрядчик обязан до заключения договора бытового подряда предоставить заказчику необходимую и достоверную информацию о предлагаемой работе, ее видах и особенностях, о цене и форме оплаты, а также сообщить заказчику по его просьбе другие относящиеся к договору и соответствующей работе сведения. Если по характеру работы это имеет значение, подрядчик должен указать заказчику конкретное лицо, которое будет ее выполнять.
2. Заказчик вправе требовать расторжения заключенного договора бытового подряда без оплаты выполненной работы, а также возмещения убытков в случаях, когда вследствие неполноты или недостоверности полученной от подрядчика информации был заключен договор на выполнение работы, не обладающей свойствами, которые имел в виду заказчик.
3. Информация, указанная в настоящей статье, должна быть предоставлена заказчику на одном из государственных языков. Сведения, сообщенные или переданные на иностранном языке, считаются непредоставленными, за исключением случаев, когда сведения были сообщены или переданы на иностранном языке по желанию заказчика.
Статья 688. Выполнение работы из материала подрядчика
1. Если работа по договору бытового подряда выполняется из материала подрядчика, материал оплачивается заказчиком при заключении договора полностью или в части, указанной в договоре, с окончательным расчетом при получении заказчиком выполненной подрядчиком работы.
В соответствии с договором бытового подряда материал может быть предоставлен подрядчиком в кредит, в том числе с условием оплаты заказчиком материала в рассрочку.
2. Изменение после заключения договора бытового подряда цены предоставленного подрядчиком материала не влечет перерасчета.
Статья 689. Выполнение работы из материала заказчика
Если работа по договору бытового подряда выполняется из материала заказчика, в квитанции или ином документе, выдаваемом подрядчиком заказчику при заключении договора, должны быть указаны точное наименование, описание и цена материала, определяемая по соглашению сторон. Цена материала, указанная в квитанции или ином аналогичном документе, может быть оспорена заказчиком в судебном порядке.
Статья 690. Цена и оплата работы
Цена работы в договоре бытового подряда определяется соглашением сторон и не может быть выше регулируемой соответствующими государственными органами. Работа оплачивается заказчиком после ее окончательной сдачи подрядчиком. С согласия заказчика работа может быть оплачена им при заключении договора полностью или путем выдачи аванса.
Статья 691. Предупреждение заказчика об условиях использования выполненной работы
При сдаче работы заказчику подрядчик обязан сообщить ему о требованиях, которые необходимо соблюдать для эффективного и безопасного использования результата работы, а также о возможных для самого заказчика и других лиц последствиях несоблюдения соответствующих требований.
Статья 692. Последствия обнаружения недостатков в выполненной работе
1. В случае обнаружения недостатков во время приемки результата работы или во время его использования заказчик может в течение общих сроков давности, предусмотренных статьей 678 настоящего Кодекса, а при наличии гарантийных сроков – в течение этих сроков по своему выбору осуществить одно из предусмотренных в статье 676 настоящего Кодекса прав либо потребовать безвозмездного повторного выполнения работы или возмещения понесенных им расходов на исправление недостатков своими средствами или третьими лицами.
2. Требование о безвозмездном устранении таких недостатков работы, выполненной по договору бытового подряда, которые могут представлять опасность для жизни или здоровья самого заказчика и других лиц, может быть предъявлено заказчиком или его правопреемником в течение десяти лет с момента принятия результата работы, если в установленном законодательством порядке не предусмотрены более длительные сроки (сроки службы). Такое требование может быть предъявлено независимо от того, когда обнаружены эти недостатки, в том числе и при обнаружении их по окончании гарантийного срока.
3. При невыполнении подрядчиком требования, предусмотренного пунктом 2 настоящей статьи, заказчик вправе в течение того же срока потребовать либо возврата части цены, уплаченной за работу, либо возмещения расходов, понесенных в связи с устранением недостатков заказчиком своими силами или с помощью третьих лиц.
Статья 693. Последствия неявки заказчика за получением результата работы
1. В случае неявки заказчика за получением результата выполненной работы или иного уклонения заказчика от его приемки подрядчик вправе, письменно предупредив заказчика, по истечении двух месяцев со дня такого предупреждения продать предмет подряда за разумную цену, а вырученную сумму, за вычетом всех причитающихся подрядчику платежей, внести в депозит в порядке, предусмотренном статьей 308 настоящего Кодекса.
2. В указанных в пункте 1 настоящей статьи случаях подрядчик может вместо продажи предмета подряда воспользоваться правом на его удержание (статья 340) или взыскать с заказчика причиненные убытки.
Статья 694. Последствия смерти одной из сторон в договоре бытового подряда
В случаях прекращения договора бытового подряда по основаниям, предусмотренным статьей 388 настоящего Кодекса, последствия прекращения договора определяются по соглашению между правопреемником соответствующей стороны и ее контрагентом, а при недостижении ими соглашения – судом с учетом размера выполненной работы и ее цены, стоимости истраченного и сохранившегося материала, а также других существенных обстоятельств.
Статья 695. Права заказчика в случае ненадлежащего выполнения или невыполнения работы по договору бытового подряда
В случае ненадлежащего выполнения или невыполнения работы по договору бытового подряда заказчик может воспользоваться правами, предоставленными покупателю в соответствии со статьями 473-475 настоящего Кодекса.
§ 3. Строительный подряд
Статья 696. Договор строительного подряда
1. По договору строительного подряда подрядчик обязуется в установленный договором срок построить по заданию заказчика определенный объект либо выполнить строительные и иные специальные монтажные работы и сдать их заказчику, а заказчик обязуется создать подрядчику необходимые условия для выполнения работ, принять результаты этих работ и уплатить обусловленную цену.
2. Договор строительного подряда заключается на строительство или реконструкцию капитального строения (здания, сооружения) или иного объекта, а также на выполнение строительных и иных специальных монтажных работ. Правила о договоре строительного подряда применяются к работам по капитальному ремонту капитальных строений (зданий, сооружений) и иных объектов, если иное не предусмотрено договором. Если это предусмотрено договором, подрядчик принимает на себя обязанность обеспечить эксплуатацию объекта после принятия заказчиком в течение указанного в договоре срока.
3. В случаях, когда по договору строительного подряда выполняются работы для удовлетворения личных, домашних и семейных потребностей гражданина (заказчика), к такому договору соответственно применяются также правила параграфа 2 настоящей главы о правах заказчика по договору бытового подряда.
Статья 697. Распределение риска между сторонами
1. Риск случайной гибели или случайного повреждения объекта строительства, составляющего предмет договора строительного подряда, до приемки этого объекта заказчиком несет подрядчик.
2. Если объект строительства до его приемки заказчиком погиб или поврежден вследствие недоброкачественности предоставленного заказчиком материала (деталей, конструкций) или оборудования либо исполнения ошибочных указаний заказчика, подрядчик вправе требовать оплаты всей предусмотренной сметой стоимости работы при условии, что им были выполнены обязанности, предусмотренные пунктом 1 статьи 670 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 698. Проектно-сметная документация
1. Подрядчик обязан осуществлять строительство и связанные с ним работы в соответствии с проектной документацией, устанавливающей объем, содержание работ и другие предъявляемые к ним требования, в том числе со сметной документацией (сметой), определяющей цену работы. При отсутствии иных указаний в договоре предполагается, что подрядчик обязан выполнить все работы, указанные в проектной документации, в том числе сметной документации (проектно- сметной документации).
2. Договором строительного подряда должны быть определены состав и содержание проектно- сметной документации, а также должно быть предусмотрено, какая из сторон и в какой срок должна предоставить соответствующую документацию.
3. Подрядчик, обнаруживший в ходе строительства неучтенные в проектно-сметной документации работы и в связи с этим необходимость проведения дополнительных работ и увеличения сметной стоимости строительства, обязан сообщить об этом заказчику. При неполучении от заказчика ответа на свое сообщение в течение десяти дней, если законодательством или договором не предусмотрен иной срок, подрядчик обязан приостановить соответствующие работы с отнесением убытков, вызванных простоем, на счет заказчика. Заказчик освобождается от возмещения этих убытков, если докажет отсутствие необходимости в проведении дополнительных работ.
4. Подрядчик, не выполнивший обязанности, установленной пунктом 3 настоящей статьи, лишается права требовать от заказчика оплаты выполненных им дополнительных работ и возмещения вызванных этим убытков, если не докажет необходимости немедленных действий в интересах заказчика, в частности в связи с тем, что приостановление работ могло привести к гибели или повреждению объекта строительства.
5. При согласии заказчика на проведение и оплату дополнительных работ подрядчик вправе отказаться от их выполнения лишь в случаях, когда они не входят в сферу профессиональной деятельности подрядчика либо не могут быть выполнены подрядчиком по не зависящим от него причинам.
Статья 699. Внесение изменений в проектно-сметную документацию
1. Заказчик вправе требовать внесения в проектно-сметную документацию изменений, не связанных с дополнительными расходами для подрядчика.
2. Изменения проектно-сметной документации, требующие дополнительных расходов для подрядчика, осуществляются за счет заказчика на основе согласованной сторонами дополнительной сметы.
3. Подрядчик вправе требовать в соответствии со статьей 420 настоящего Кодекса пересмотра сметы, если по не зависящим от него причинам стоимость работ превысила смету не менее чем на десять процентов.
4. Подрядчик вправе требовать возмещения разумных расходов, которые понесены им в связи с установлением и устранением дефектов в проектно-сметной документации.
Статья 700. Обеспечение строительства материалами и оборудованием
1. Обязанности по обеспечению строительства материалами, в том числе деталями и конструкциями, или оборудованием несет подрядчик, если договором строительного подряда не предусмотрено, что обеспечение строительства в целом или в определенной части осуществляет заказчик.
2. Сторона, в обязанность которой входит обеспечение строительства, несет ответственность за обнаружившуюся невозможность использования предоставленных ею материалов или оборудования без ухудшения качества выполняемых работ, если не докажет, что невозможность использования возникла по обстоятельствам, за которые отвечает другая сторона.
3. В случаях обнаружившейся невозможности использования без ухудшения качества выполняемых работ предоставленных заказчиком материалов или оборудования подрядчик обязан потребовать замены их заказчиком в разумный срок, а при неисполнении этого требования подрядчик вправе отказаться от договора строительного подряда и потребовать от заказчика
уплаты цены договора пропорционально выполненной работе, а также возмещения убытков, не покрытых этой суммой.
Статья 701. Оплата работ
1. Оплата выполненных подрядчиком работ производится заказчиком в размере, предусмотренном сметой, в сроки и порядке, которые установлены законодательством и договором строительного подряда. При отсутствии соответствующих указаний в законодательстве или договоре оплата работ производится в соответствии со статьей 665 настоящего Кодекса.
2. Договором строительного подряда может быть предусмотрена оплата работ единовременно и в полном объеме после приемки объекта заказчиком.
Статья 702. Дополнительные обязанности заказчика по договору строительного подряда
1. Заказчик обязан своевременно предоставить для строительства земельный участок такой площади и в таком состоянии, какие указаны в договоре строительного подряда. При отсутствии в договоре таких указаний площадь и состояние земельного участка должны обеспечивать своевременное начало работ, нормальное их ведение и завершение в срок.
2. Заказчик обязан в случаях и порядке, предусмотренных договором строительного подряда, передавать подрядчику в пользование необходимые для осуществления работ капитальные строения (здания, сооружения) или иные объекты, обеспечивать транспортировку грузов в его адрес, временную подводку сетей энергоснабжения, водо- и газопровода и оказывать другие услуги.
3. Оплата предоставленных заказчиком услуг, указанных в пункте 2 настоящей статьи, осуществляется в случаях и на условиях, предусмотренных договором строительного подряда.
Статья 703. Контроль и надзор заказчика за выполнением работ по договору строительного подряда
1. Заказчик вправе осуществлять контроль и надзор за ходом и качеством выполняемых работ, соблюдением сроков их выполнения (графика), качеством предоставленных подрядчиком материалов, а также правильностью использования подрядчиком материалов заказчика, не вмешиваясь при этом в оперативно-хозяйственную деятельность подрядчика.
2. Заказчик, обнаруживший при осуществлении контроля и надзора за выполнением работ отступления от условий договора строительного подряда, которые могут ухудшить качество работ, или иные их недостатки, обязан немедленно заявить об этом подрядчику. Заказчик, не сделавший такого заявления, теряет право в дальнейшем ссылаться на обнаруженные им недостатки.
3. Подрядчик обязан исполнять полученные в ходе строительства указания заказчика, если такие указания не противоречат условиям договора строительного подряда и не представляют собой вмешательство в оперативно-хозяйственную деятельность подрядчика.
4. Подрядчик, ненадлежащим образом выполнивший работы, не вправе ссылаться на то, что заказчик не осуществлял контроль и надзор за их выполнением, кроме случаев, когда обязанность осуществлять такой контроль и надзор возложена на заказчика законодательством.
Статья 704. Участие инженера (инженерной организации) в осуществлении прав и выполнении обязанностей заказчика
Заказчик в целях осуществления контроля и надзора за строительством и принятия от его имени решений во взаимоотношениях с подрядчиком может заключить самостоятельно без согласия подрядчика договор об оказании заказчику услуг такого рода с соответствующим инженером
(инженерной организацией). В этом случае в договоре строительного подряда определяются функции такого инженера (инженерной организации), связанные с последствиями его действий для подрядчика.
Статья 705. Сотрудничество сторон в договоре строительного подряда
1. Если при выполнении строительства и связанных с ним работ обнаруживаются препятствия к надлежащему исполнению договора строительного подряда, каждая из сторон обязана принять все зависящие от нее разумные меры по устранению таких препятствий. Сторона, не исполнившая этой обязанности, утрачивает право на возмещение убытков, причиненных тем, что соответствующие препятствия не были устранены.
2. Расходы стороны, связанные с исполнением обязанностей, указанных в пункте 1 настоящей статьи, подлежат возмещению другой стороной в случаях, когда это предусмотрено договором строительного подряда.
Статья 706. Обязанности подрядчика по охране окружающей среды и обеспечению безопасности строительных работ
1. Подрядчик обязан при осуществлении строительства и связанных с ним работ соблюдать требования законодательства об охране окружающей среды и о безопасности строительных работ и несет ответственность за нарушение этих требований.
2. Подрядчик не вправе использовать в ходе осуществления работ материалы и оборудование, предоставленные заказчиком, или выполнять его указания, если это может привести к нарушению обязательных для сторон требований об охране окружающей среды и о безопасности строительных работ.
Статья 707. Последствия консервации строительства
Если по не зависящим от сторон причинам работы по договору строительного подряда приостановлены и объект строительства законсервирован, заказчик обязан оплатить подрядчику в полном объеме выполненные до момента консервации работы, а также возместить расходы, вызванные необходимостью прекращения работ и консервацией строительства с зачетом выгод, которые подрядчик получил или мог получить вследствие прекращения работ.
Статья 708. Сдача и приемка работ
1. Заказчик, получивший сообщение подрядчика о готовности к сдаче результата выполненных работ либо, если это предусмотрено договором, выполненного этапа работы, обязан в течение трех дней приступить к их приемке.
2. Заказчик организует и осуществляет приемку результата работы за свой счет, если иное не предусмотрено договором строительного подряда.
В предусмотренных законодательством случаях в приемке результата работы должны участвовать представители государственных органов, органов местного управления и самоуправления.
3. Заказчик, предварительно принявший результат отдельного этапа работ, несет риск последствий гибели или повреждения результата работ, которые наступили не по вине подрядчика.
4. Сдача результата работы подрядчиком и приемка его заказчиком оформляются актом, подписанным обеими сторонами. При отказе одной из сторон от подписания акта в нем делается отметка об этом с указанием мотивов отказа и акт подписывается другой стороной.
Односторонний акт сдачи или приемки результата работ может быть признан судом недействительным лишь в случае, если мотивы отказа от подписания акта признаны им обоснованными.
5. В случаях, когда это предусмотрено законодательством или договором строительного подряда либо вытекает из характера работ, выполняемых по договору, приемке результата работ должны предшествовать предварительные испытания. В этих случаях приемка может осуществляться только при положительном результате предварительных испытаний.
6. Заказчик вправе отказаться от приемки результата работ в случае обнаружения недостатков, которые исключают возможность его использования для указанной в договоре строительного подряда цели и не могут быть устранены подрядчиком или заказчиком.
Статья 709. Ответственность подрядчика за качество работ
1. Подрядчик несет ответственность перед заказчиком за допущенные отступления от требований, предусмотренных в проектно-сметной документации и обязательных для сторон строительных нормах и правилах, а также за недостижение указанных в проектно-сметной документации показателей объекта строительства, в том числе таких, как производственная мощность предприятия.
2. Подрядчик не несет ответственности за допущенные им без согласия заказчика мелкие отступления от проектно-сметной документации, если докажет, что они не повлияли на качество объекта строительства.
Статья 710. Гарантии качества в договоре строительного подряда
1. Подрядчик, если иное не предусмотрено договором строительного подряда, гарантирует достижение объектом строительства указанных в проектно-сметной документации показателей и возможность эксплуатации объекта в соответствии с договором строительного подряда на протяжении гарантийного срока. Установленный законодательством гарантийный срок может быть увеличен соглашением сторон.
2. Подрядчик несет ответственность за недостатки (дефекты), обнаруженные в пределах гарантийного срока, если не докажет, что они произошли вследствие нормального износа объекта или его частей, неправильной его эксплуатации или неправильности инструкций по его эксплуатации, разработанных самим заказчиком или привлеченными им третьими лицами, ненадлежащего ремонта объекта, произведенного самим заказчиком или привлеченными им третьими лицами.
3. Течение гарантийного срока прерывается на все время, на протяжении которого объект не мог эксплуатироваться вследствие недостатков, за которые отвечает подрядчик.
4. При выявлении в течение гарантийного срока недостатков, указанных в пункте 1 статьи 709 настоящего Кодекса, заказчик (собственник, владелец, пользователь) объекта вправе до истечения указанного срока в установленном законодательством порядке потребовать от подрядчика устранения недостатков.
Статья 711. Сроки обнаружения ненадлежащего качества строительных работ
При предъявлении требований, связанных с ненадлежащим качеством результата работ, применяются правила, предусмотренные пунктами 1-5 статьи 677 настоящего Кодекса.
При этом предельный срок обнаружения недостатков в соответствии с пунктами 2 и 4 статьи 677 настоящего Кодекса составляет пять лет.
Статья 712. Устранение недостатков за счет заказчика
1. Договором строительного подряда может быть предусмотрена обязанность подрядчика устранять по требованию заказчика и за его счет недостатки, за которые подрядчик не несет ответственности.
2. Подрядчик вправе отказаться от выполнения обязанности, указанной в пункте 1 настоящей статьи, в случаях, когда устранение недостатков не связано непосредственно с предметом договора либо не может быть осуществлено подрядчиком по не зависящим от него причинам.
§ 4. Подряд на выполнение проектных и изыскательских работ
Статья 713. Договор подряда на выполнение проектных и изыскательских работ
1. По договору подряда на выполнение проектных и изыскательских работ подрядчик (проектировщик, изыскатель) обязуется по заданию заказчика разработать проектно-сметную документацию и (или) выполнить изыскательские работы, а заказчик обязуется принять и оплатить их результат.
2. Если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором, риск случайной невозможности исполнения договора на выполнение проектных и изыскательских работ лежит на заказчике.
Статья 714. Исходные данные для выполнения проектных и изыскательских работ
1. По договору подряда на выполнение проектных и изыскательских работ заказчик обязан передать подрядчику задание на проектирование, а также иные исходные данные, необходимые для составления проектно-сметной документации. Задание на выполнение проектных работ может быть по поручению заказчика подготовлено подрядчиком. В этом случае задание становится обязательным для сторон с момента его утверждения заказчиком.
2. Подрядчик обязан соблюдать требования, содержащиеся в задании и других исходных данных для выполнения проектных и изыскательских работ, и вправе отступить от них только с согласия заказчика.
Статья 715. Обязанности подрядчика
1. По договору подряда на выполнение проектных и изыскательских работ подрядчик обязан:
1) выполнять работы в соответствии с исходными данными на проектирование и договором;
2) согласовывать готовую проектно-сметную документацию с заказчиком, а при необходимости вместе с заказчиком – с компетентными государственными органами и органами местного управления и самоуправления;
3) передать заказчику готовую проектно-сметную документацию и результаты изыскательских работ.
Подрядчик не вправе передавать проектно-сметную документацию третьим лицам без согласия заказчика.
2. Подрядчик по договору подряда на выполнение проектных и изыскательских работ гарантирует заказчику отсутствие у третьих лиц права воспрепятствовать выполнению работ или ограничивать их выполнение на основе подготовленной подрядчиком проектно-сметной документации.
Статья 716. Ответственность подрядчика за ненадлежащее выполнение проектных и изыскательских работ
1. Подрядчик по договору подряда на выполнение проектных и изыскательских работ несет ответственность за ненадлежащее выполнение проектно-сметной документации и изыскательских работ, включая недостатки, обнаруженные впоследствии в ходе строительства, а также в процессе эксплуатации объекта, созданного на основе выполненной проектно-сметной документации и данных изыскательских работ.
2. При обнаружении недостатков в проектно-сметной документации или в изыскательских работах подрядчик по требованию заказчика обязан безвозмездно переделать проектно-сметную документацию и соответственно произвести необходимые дополнительные изыскательские работы, а также возместить заказчику причиненные убытки, если законодательством или договором не установлено иное.
Статья 717. Обязанности заказчика
По договору подряда на выполнение проектных и изыскательских работ заказчик обязан, если иное не предусмотрено договором:
1) уплатить подрядчику установленную цену полностью после завершения всех работ или уплачивать ее частями после завершения отдельных этапов работ;
2) использовать проектно-сметную документацию, полученную от подрядчика, только на цели, предусмотренные договором, не передавать техническую документацию третьим лицам и не разглашать содержащиеся в ней данные без согласия подрядчика;
3) оказывать содействие подрядчику в выполнении проектных и изыскательских работ в объеме и на условиях, предусмотренных в договоре;
4) участвовать вместе с подрядчиком в согласовании готовой проектно-сметной документации с соответствующими государственными органами и органами местного управления и самоуправления;
5) возместить подрядчику дополнительные расходы, вызванные изменением исходных данных для выполнения проектных и изыскательских работ вследствие обстоятельств, не зависящих от подрядчика;
6) привлечь подрядчика к участию в деле по иску, предъявленному к заказчику третьим лицом в связи с недостатками составленной проектно-сметной документации или выполненных изыскательских работ.
§ 5. Исключен
Статья 718. Исключена
Статья 719. Исключена
Статья 720. Исключена
Статья 721. Исключена
Статья 722. Исключена
ГЛАВА 38 ВЫПОЛНЕНИЕ НАУЧНО-ИССЛЕДОВАТЕЛЬСКИХ РАБОТ, ОПЫТНО-КОНСТРУКТОРСКИХ И ТЕХНОЛОГИЧЕСКИХ РАБОТ
Статья 723. Договоры на выполнение научно-исследовательских работ, опытно-конструкторских и технологических работ
1. По договору на выполнение научно-исследовательских работ одна сторона (исполнитель) обязуется провести обусловленные техническим заданием заказчика научные исследования, а по договору на выполнение опытно-конструкторских и технологических работ – разработать образец нового изделия, конструкторскую документацию на него или новую технологию, а другая сторона (заказчик) обязуется принять работу и оплатить ее.
2. Договор с исполнителем может охватывать как весь цикл проведения исследования, разработки и изготовления образцов, так и отдельные его этапы (элементы).
3. Если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором, риск случайной невозможности исполнения договоров на выполнение научно-исследовательских работ, опытно-конструкторских и технологических работ несет заказчик.
4. Исключен.
Статья 724. Выполнение работ
1. Исполнитель обязан провести научные исследования лично. Он вправе привлекать к исполнению договора на выполнение научно-исследовательских работ третьих лиц только с согласия заказчика.
2. При выполнении опытно-конструкторских или технологических работ исполнитель вправе, если иное не предусмотрено договором, привлекать к его исполнению третьих лиц. К отношениям исполнителя с третьими лицами применяются правила о генеральном подрядчике и субподрядчике (статья 660).
Статья 725. Конфиденциальность сведений, составляющих предмет договора
1. Если иное не предусмотрено договорами на выполнение научно-исследовательских работ, опытно-конструкторских и технологических работ, стороны обязаны обеспечить конфиденциальность сведений, касающихся предмета договора, хода его исполнения и полученных результатов. Объем сведений, признаваемых конфиденциальными, определяется в договоре.
2. Каждая из сторон обязуется публиковать полученные при выполнении работы сведения, признанные конфиденциальными, только с согласия другой стороны.
Статья 726. Права сторон на результаты работ
1. Стороны в договорах на выполнение научно-исследовательских работ, опытно-конструкторских и технологических работ имеют право использовать результаты работ, в том числе способные к правовой охране, в пределах и на условиях, предусмотренных договором.
2. Если иное не предусмотрено договором, права на результаты работ, в том числе способные к правовой охране, в рамках предмета договора принадлежат заказчику, а исполнитель вправе использовать полученные им результаты работ для собственных нужд.
Под использованием для собственных нужд не может пониматься деятельность, направленная на систематическое получение прибыли от использования результатов работ.
Статья 727. Обязанности исполнителя
Исполнитель в договорах на выполнение научно-исследовательских работ, опытно- конструкторских и технологических работ обязан:
1) выполнить работу в соответствии с согласованным с заказчиком техническим заданием и передать заказчику результат в предусмотренный договором срок;
2) согласовать с заказчиком необходимость использования охраняемых результатов интеллектуальной деятельности, принадлежащих третьим лицам, и приобретение прав на их использование;
3) своими силами и за свой счет устранять допущенные по его вине в выполненных работах недостатки, которые могут повлечь отступления от технико-экономических параметров, предусмотренных в техническом задании или в договоре;
4) незамедлительно информировать заказчика об обнаруженной невозможности получить ожидаемые результаты или о нецелесообразности продолжения работы;
5) гарантировать заказчику передачу полученных по договору результатов, не нарушающих исключительных прав других лиц.
Статья 728. Обязанности заказчика
1. Заказчик в договорах на выполнение научно-исследовательских работ, опытно-конструкторских и технологических работ обязан:
1) передавать исполнителю необходимую для выполнения работы информацию;
2) принять результаты выполненных работ и оплатить их.
2. Договором может быть также предусмотрена обязанность заказчика выдать исполнителю техническое задание и согласовать с ним программу (технико-экономические параметры) или тематику работ.
Статья 729. Последствия невозможности достижения результатов научно-исследовательских работ
Если в ходе научно-исследовательских работ обнаруживается невозможность достижения результатов вследствие обстоятельств, не зависящих от исполнителя, заказчик обязан оплатить стоимость работ, проведенных до выявления невозможности получить предусмотренные договором на выполнение научно-исследовательских работ результаты, но не свыше соответствующей части цены работ, указанной в договоре.
Статья 730. Последствия невозможности продолжения опытно-конструкторских и технологических работ
Если в ходе выполнения опытно-конструкторских и технологических работ обнаруживается возникшая не по вине исполнителя невозможность или нецелесообразность продолжения работы, заказчик обязан оплатить понесенные исполнителем затраты.
Статья 731. Ответственность исполнителя за нарушение договора
1. Исполнитель несет ответственность перед заказчиком за нарушение договоров на выполнение научно-исследовательских работ, опытно-конструкторских и технологических работ, если не докажет, что такое нарушение произошло не по вине исполнителя (пункт 1 статьи 372).
2. Исполнитель обязан возместить убытки, причиненные им заказчику, в пределах стоимости работ, в которых выявлены недостатки, если договором не предусмотрено, что они подлежат возмещению в пределах общей стоимости работ по договору. Упущенная выгода подлежит возмещению в случаях, предусмотренных договором.
Статья 732. Правовое регулирование договоров на выполнение научно-исследовательских работ, опытно-конструкторских и технологических работ
К срокам выполнения и цене работы, а также к последствиям неявки заказчика за получением результата работ применяются соответственно правила статей 662, 663 и 693 настоящего Кодекса.
ГЛАВА 39 ВОЗМЕЗДНОЕ ОКАЗАНИЕ УСЛУГ
Статья 733. Договор возмездного оказания услуг
1. По договору возмездного оказания услуг одна сторона (исполнитель) обязуется по заданию другой стороны (заказчика) оказать услуги (совершить определенные действия или осуществить определенную деятельность), а заказчик обязуется оплатить эти услуги.
2. Правила настоящей главы применяются к договорам оказания медицинских, ветеринарных, аудиторских, консультационных, информационных, риэлтерских, туристических услуг, услуг связи, в сфере образования и иных услуг, за исключением услуг, оказываемых по договорам, предусмотренным главами 37, 38, 40, 41, 44 – 49, 51 и 52 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 734. Исполнение договора возмездного оказания услуг
Если иное не предусмотрено договором возмездного оказания услуг, исполнитель обязан оказать услуги лично.
Статья 735. Цена услуг
1. Заказчик обязан оплатить оказанные ему услуги в сроки и в порядке, указанные в законодательстве или договоре возмездного оказания услуг.
2. В случае невозможности исполнения, возникшей по вине заказчика, услуги подлежат оплате в полном объеме, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором возмездного оказания услуг.
3. В случаях, когда невозможность исполнения возникла по обстоятельствам, за которые ни одна из сторон не отвечает, заказчик возмещает исполнителю фактически понесенные им расходы, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором возмездного оказания услуг.
Статья 736. Односторонний отказ от исполнения договора возмездного оказания услуг
1. Заказчик вправе отказаться от договора возмездного оказания услуг при условии оплаты исполнителю фактически понесенных им расходов, если иное не предусмотрено законодательными актами.
2. Исполнитель вправе отказаться от исполнения обязательств по договору возмездного оказания услуг лишь при условии полного возмещения заказчику убытков.
Статья 737. Правовое регулирование договора возмездного оказания услуг
Общие положения о подряде (статьи 656-682) и положения о бытовом подряде (статьи 683-695) применяются к договору возмездного оказания услуг, если это не противоречит статьям 733- 736 настоящего Кодекса, а также особенностям предмета договора возмездного оказания услуг.
ГЛАВА 40 ПЕРЕВОЗКА
Статья 738. Общие положения о перевозке
1. Перевозка грузов, пассажиров и багажа производится по договору перевозки.
2. Условия перевозки определяются настоящим Кодексом, транспортными уставами и кодексами, иными актами законодательства, а также соглашением сторон.
Правила настоящей главы применяются к перевозкам постольку, поскольку иное не предусмотрено законодательными актами.
Статья 739. Договор перевозки груза
1. По договору перевозки груза перевозчик обязуется доставить вверенный ему отправителем груз в пункт назначения и выдать его уполномоченному на получение груза лицу (получателю), а отправитель обязуется уплатить за перевозку груза установленную плату.
2. Заключение договора перевозки груза подтверждается составлением транспортной накладной (коносамента или иного документа на груз, предусмотренного транспортным уставом или кодексом, иными актами законодательства).
Статья 740. Договор перевозки пассажира
1. По договору перевозки пассажира перевозчик обязуется перевезти пассажира в пункт назначения, а в случае сдачи пассажиром багажа также доставить багаж в пункт назначения и выдать его уполномоченному на получение багажа лицу; пассажир обязуется уплатить, если иное не определено законодательными актами, установленную плату за проезд, а при сдаче багажа – и за провоз багажа.
2. Если иное не определено законодательством, заключение договора перевозки пассажира удостоверяется билетом и (или) иным документом, предусмотренным законодательством, а сдача пассажиром багажа – багажной квитанцией.
Формы билета и багажной квитанции устанавливаются в порядке, предусмотренном транспортными уставами и кодексами, иными актами законодательства.
3. Пассажир имеет право в порядке, предусмотренном соответствующим транспортным уставом и кодексом, иными актами законодательства:
1) исключен;
2) провозить с собой бесплатно ручную кладь в пределах установленных норм;
3) сдавать к перевозке багаж за плату по тарифу.
Статья 741. Договор фрахтования
По договору фрахтования одна сторона (фрахтовщик) обязуется предоставить другой стороне (фрахтователю) за плату всю или часть вместимости одного или нескольких транспортных средств на один или несколько рейсов для перевозки грузов, пассажиров и багажа.
Порядок заключения договора фрахтования, а также форма указанного договора устанавливаются транспортными уставами, кодексами и иным законодательством.
Статья 742. Смешанная перевозка
1. Смешанная перевозка означает перевозку грузов, пассажиров и багажа по меньшей мере двумя видами транспорта.
2. Смешанная перевозка грузов осуществляется или обеспечивается экспедитором по договору транспортной экспедиции в порядке, предусмотренном главой 41 настоящего Кодекса.
3. Смешанная перевозка грузов, пассажиров и багажа по единому транспортному документу является прямой смешанной перевозкой. Взаимоотношения перевозчиков в различных видах транспорта, а также порядок организации прямой смешанной перевозки определяются транспортными уставами и кодексами и другими актами законодательства.
Статья 743. Перевозка транспортом общего пользования
1. Перевозка, осуществляемая перевозчиком, признается перевозкой транспортом общего пользования, если из законодательных актов или выданного этому перевозчику специального разрешения (лицензии) вытекает, что этот перевозчик обязан осуществлять перевозки грузов, пассажиров и багажа по обращению любого гражданина или юридического лица.
2. Перечень организаций, обязанных осуществлять перевозки, признаваемые перевозками транспортом общего пользования, публикуется в установленном порядке.
3. Договор перевозки транспортом общего пользования является публичным договором (статья 396).
Статья 744. Провозная плата
1. За перевозку грузов, пассажиров и багажа взимается провозная плата, установленная соглашением сторон, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством.
2. Плата за перевозку грузов, пассажиров и багажа транспортом общего пользования определяется на основании тарифов, устанавливаемых в соответствии с законодательством.
3. Работы и услуги, выполняемые перевозчиком по требованию грузовладельца и не предусмотренные тарифами, оплачиваются по соглашению сторон.
4. Перевозчик имеет право удерживать переданные ему для перевозки грузы в обеспечение причитающейся ему провозной платы и других платежей по перевозке (статья 340), если иное не установлено законодательством или не вытекает из существа обязательства.
5. В случаях, когда в соответствии с законодательством установлены льготы или преимущества по провозной плате за перевозку грузов, пассажиров и багажа, понесенные в связи с этим расходы возмещаются транспортной организации за счет средств соответствующего бюджета.
Статья 745. Подача транспортных средств, погрузка и выгрузка груза
1. Перевозчик обязан подать отправителю груза под погрузку в срок, установленный договором перевозки, исправные транспортные средства в состоянии, пригодном для перевозки соответствующего груза.
Отправитель груза вправе отказаться от поданных транспортных средств, не пригодных для перевозки соответствующего груза.
2. Погрузка (выгрузка) груза осуществляется перевозчиком или отправителем (получателем) в порядке, предусмотренном договором, с соблюдением положений, установленных законодательством и издаваемыми в соответствии с ним актами республиканских органов государственного управления.
3. Погрузка (выгрузка) груза, осуществляемая силами и средствами отправителя (получателя) груза, должна производиться в сроки, предусмотренные договором, если такие сроки не установлены законодательством и издаваемыми в соответствии с ним актами республиканских органов государственного управления.
Статья 746. Срок доставки груза, пассажира и багажа
Перевозчик обязан доставить груз, пассажира или багаж в пункт назначения в сроки, определенные в порядке, предусмотренном законодательством, а при отсутствии таких сроков – в разумный срок.
Статья 747. Ответственность по обязательствам по перевозке
1. В случае неисполнения либо ненадлежащего исполнения обязательств по перевозке стороны несут ответственность, установленную настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства, а также соглашением сторон.
2. Соглашения перевозчиков с пассажирами и грузовладельцами об ограничении или устранении установленной законодательством ответственности недействительны, за исключением случаев, когда возможность таких соглашений при перевозках груза предусмотрена законодательством.
Статья 748. Ответственность перевозчика за неподачу транспортных средств и отправителя за неиспользование поданных транспортных средств
1. Перевозчик за неподачу транспортных средств для перевозки груза в соответствии с договором, а отправитель за непредъявление груза либо неиспользование поданных транспортных средств по иным причинам несут ответственность, установленную законодательством, а также соглашением сторон.
2. Перевозчик и отправитель груза освобождаются от ответственности в случае неподачи транспортных средств либо неиспользования поданных транспортных средств, если это произошло вследствие:
1) непреодолимой силы, а также иных явлений стихийного характера (пожаров, заносов, наводнений) и военных действий;
2) прекращения или ограничения перевозки грузов в определенных направлениях, установленного в порядке, предусмотренном законодательством;
3) в иных случаях, предусмотренных законодательством.
Статья 749. Ответственность перевозчика за задержку отправления пассажира
1. За задержку отправления транспортного средства, перевозящего пассажира, или опоздание прибытия такого транспортного средства в пункт назначения (за исключением городских и пригородных автомобильных перевозок в регулярном сообщении, перевозок городским электрическим транспортом в регулярном сообщении и метрополитеном, перевозок внутренним водным транспортом общего пользования в городском и пригородном сообщении, а также перевозок железнодорожным транспортом общего пользования в поездах городских линий и региональных линий экономкласса) перевозчик уплачивает пассажиру неустойку в размере, установленном законодательством, если не докажет, что задержка или опоздание имели место вследствие непреодолимой силы, устранения неисправности транспортного средства, угрожающих жизни и здоровью пассажира, или иных обстоятельств, не зависящих от перевозчика.
2. В случае отказа пассажира от перевозки по причине задержки отправления транспортного средства перевозчик обязан возвратить пассажиру провозную плату.
Статья 750. Ответственность перевозчика за утрату, недостачу и повреждение (порчу) груза или багажа
1. Перевозчик несет ответственность за несохранность груза или багажа, происшедшую после принятия его к перевозке и до выдачи грузополучателю, уполномоченному им лицу или лицу, уполномоченному на получение багажа, если не докажет, что утрата, недостача или повреждение (порча) груза или багажа произошли вследствие обстоятельств, которые перевозчик не мог предотвратить и устранение которых от него не зависело.
2. Ущерб, причиненный при перевозке груза или багажа, возмещается перевозчиком:
1) в случае утраты или недостачи груза или багажа – в размере стоимости утраченного или недостающего груза или багажа;
2) в случае повреждения (порчи) груза или багажа – в размере суммы, на которую понизилась его стоимость, а при невозможности восстановления поврежденного груза или багажа – в размере его стоимости;
3) в случае утраты груза или багажа, сданного к перевозке с объявлением его ценности, – в размере объявленной стоимости груза или багажа.
Стоимость груза или багажа определяется исходя из его цены, указанной в счете продавца или предусмотренной договором, а при отсутствии счета или указания цены в договоре – исходя из цены, которая при сравнимых обстоятельствах обычно взимается за аналогичные товары.
3. Перевозчик наряду с возмещением установленного ущерба, вызванного утратой, недостачей или повреждением (порчей) груза или багажа, возвращает отправителю (получателю) провозную плату, взысканную за перевозку утраченного, недостающего, испорченного или поврежденного груза или багажа, если эта плата не входит в стоимость груза.
4. Документы о причинах несохранности груза или багажа (коммерческий акт, акт общей формы и т.п.), составленные перевозчиком в одностороннем порядке, в случае спора подлежат оценке судом наряду с другими документами, удостоверяющими обстоятельства, которые могут служить основанием для ответственности перевозчика, отправителя либо получателя груза или багажа.
Статья 751. Претензии и иски по перевозкам грузов
1. До предъявления к перевозчику иска, вытекающего из перевозки груза, обязательно предъявление ему претензии в порядке, предусмотренном законодательством.
2. Иск к перевозчику может быть предъявлен грузоотправителем или грузополучателем в случае полного или частичного отказа перевозчика удовлетворить претензию либо неполучения от перевозчика ответа в тридцатидневный срок.
3. Срок исковой давности по требованиям, вытекающим из перевозки груза, устанавливается в один год с момента, определяемого в соответствии с законодательством.
Статья 752. Договоры об организации перевозок
1. Перевозчик и грузовладелец при необходимости осуществления систематических перевозок грузов могут заключать договоры об организации перевозок.
По договору об организации перевозки грузов перевозчик обязуется в установленные сроки принимать, а грузовладелец предъявлять к перевозке грузы в обусловленном объеме. В договоре об организации перевозки грузов определяются объемы, сроки и другие условия предоставления
транспортных средств и предъявления грузов для перевозки, порядок расчетов, а также иные условия организации перевозки.
2. Перевозчик при необходимости осуществления систематических перевозок пассажиров может заключать с гражданами или юридическими лицами договоры об организации перевозок пассажиров.
Договор об организации перевозок пассажиров заключается в письменной форме.
В договоре об организации перевозок пассажиров определяются маршрут, количество рейсов, сроки и другие условия предоставления транспортных средств для перевозки, порядок расчетов, а также иные условия организации перевозок.
Статья 753. Договоры между перевозчиками
Между перевозчиками различных видов транспорта могут заключаться договоры об организации работы по обеспечению перевозок грузов (узловые соглашения, договоры на централизованный завоз (вывоз) грузов и др.).
Порядок заключения таких договоров определяется транспортными уставами и кодексами, другими актами законодательства.
Статья 754. Ответственность перевозчика за причинение вреда жизни или здоровью пассажира
Ответственность перевозчика за вред, причиненный жизни или здоровью пассажира, определяется по правилам главы 58 настоящего Кодекса, если законодательством или договором перевозки не предусмотрена повышенная ответственность перевозчика.
ГЛАВА 41 ТРАНСПОРТНАЯ ЭКСПЕДИЦИЯ
Статья 755. Договор транспортной экспедиции
1. По договору транспортной экспедиции одна сторона (экспедитор) обязуется за вознаграждение и за счет другой стороны (клиента – грузоотправителя или грузополучателя) выполнить или организовать выполнение определенных договором экспедиции услуг, связанных с перевозкой груза.
Договором транспортной экспедиции могут быть предусмотрены обязанности экспедитора организовать перевозку груза транспортом и маршрутом, избранными экспедитором или клиентом, обязанность экспедитора заключить от имени клиента или от своего имени договор (договоры) перевозки груза, обеспечить отправку и получение груза, а также другие обязанности, связанные с перевозкой.
В качестве дополнительных услуг договором транспортной экспедиции может быть предусмотрено осуществление таких необходимых для доставки груза операций, как получение требующихся для экспорта или импорта документов, выполнение таможенных и иных формальностей, проверка количества и состояния груза, его погрузка и выгрузка, уплата расходов, возлагаемых на клиента, хранение груза, его получение в пункте назначения, а также выполнение иных операций и услуг, предусмотренных договором.
2. Правила настоящей главы распространяются и на случаи, когда в соответствии с договором обязанности экспедитора исполняются перевозчиком.
3. Условия выполнения договора транспортной экспедиции определяются соглашением сторон, если иное не установлено законодательством.
4. Договор транспортной экспедиции заключается в письменной форме.
5. Клиент должен выдать экспедитору доверенность, если она необходима для выполнения его обязанностей.
Статья 756. Ответственность экспедитора по договору транспортной экспедиции
За неисполнение или ненадлежащее исполнение обязанностей по договору экспедиции экспедитор несет ответственность по основаниям и в размере, которые определяются в соответствии с правилами главы 25 настоящего Кодекса.
Если экспедитор докажет, что нарушение обязательства вызвано ненадлежащим исполнением договоров перевозки, ответственность экспедитора перед клиентом определяется по тем же правилам, по которым перед экспедитором отвечает соответствующий перевозчик.
Статья 757. Документы и другая информация, предоставляемая экспедитору
1. Клиент обязан предоставить экспедитору документы и другую информацию о свойствах груза, условиях его перевозки, а также иную информацию, необходимую для исполнения экспедитором обязанности, предусмотренной договором транспортной экспедиции.
2. Экспедитор обязан сообщить клиенту об обнаруженных недостатках полученной информации, а в случае неполноты информации запросить у клиента необходимые дополнительные данные.
3. В случае непредоставления клиентом необходимой информации экспедитор вправе не приступать к исполнению соответствующих обязанностей до предоставления такой информации.
4. Клиент несет ответственность за убытки, причиненные экспедитору в связи с нарушением обязанности по предоставлению информации, указанной в пункте 1 настоящей статьи.
Статья 758. Исполнение обязанностей экспедитора третьим лицом
Если из договора транспортной экспедиции не следует, что экспедитор должен исполнить свои обязанности лично, экспедитор вправе привлечь к исполнению своих обязанностей других лиц.
Возложение исполнения обязанности на третье лицо не освобождает экспедитора от ответственности перед клиентом за исполнение договора.
Статья 759. Одностороннее расторжение договора экспедиции
Любая из сторон вправе отказаться от исполнения договора транспортной экспедиции, предупредив об этом другую сторону в разумный срок.
При одностороннем отказе от исполнения договора сторона, заявившая об отказе, возмещает другой стороне убытки, вызванные расторжением договора.
ГЛАВА 42 ЗАЕМ И КРЕДИТ
Статья 760. Договор займа
1. По договору займа одна сторона (заимодавец) передает в собственность другой стороне (заемщику) деньги или другие вещи, определенные родовыми признаками, а заемщик обязуется возвратить заимодавцу такую же сумму денег (сумму займа) или равное количество других полученных им вещей того же рода и качества.
Актами законодательства могут устанавливаться особенности предоставления юридическими лицами и индивидуальными предпринимателями займов в сумме, не превышающей 15 000 базовых величин на одного заемщика на день заключения договора.
2. Договор займа считается заключенным с момента передачи денег или других вещей, если иное не установлено законодательными актами.
3. Иностранная валюта и валютные ценности могут быть предметом договора займа на территории Республики Беларусь с соблюдением правил статей 141, 142 и 298 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 761. Форма договора займа
1. Договор займа должен быть заключен в письменной форме, если его сумма превышает не менее чем в десять раз установленный законодательством размер базовой величины, а в случаях, когда заимодавцем является юридическое лицо, – независимо от суммы.
2. В подтверждение договора займа и его условий может быть представлена расписка заемщика или иной документ, удостоверяющий передачу ему заимодавцем определенной денежной суммы или определенного количества вещей.
Статья 762. Проценты по договору займа
1. Если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором займа, заимодавец имеет право на получение с заемщика процентов на сумму займа в размерах и порядке, определенных договором. При отсутствии в договоре условия о размере процентов их размер определяется ставкой рефинансирования Национального банка Республики Беларусь на день уплаты заемщиком суммы долга или его соответствующей части.
2. При отсутствии иного соглашения проценты выплачиваются ежемесячно до дня возврата суммы займа.
3. Договор займа предполагается беспроцентным, если в нем прямо не предусмотрено иное, в случаях, когда:
1) договор заключен между гражданами на сумму, не превышающую установленный законодательством пятидесятикратный размер базовой величины, и не связан с осуществлением предпринимательской деятельности хотя бы одной из сторон;
2) по договору заемщику передаются не деньги, а другие вещи, определенные родовыми признаками.
Статья 763. Обязанность заемщика возвратить сумму займа
1. Заемщик обязан возвратить заимодавцу полученную сумму займа в срок и порядке, которые предусмотрены договором займа.
В случаях, когда срок возврата договором не установлен или определен моментом востребования, сумма займа должна быть возвращена заемщиком в течение тридцати дней со дня предъявления заимодавцем требования об этом, если иное не предусмотрено договором.
2. Если иное не предусмотрено договором займа, сумма беспроцентного займа может быть возвращена заемщиком досрочно.
Сумма займа, предоставленного под проценты, может быть возвращена досрочно с согласия заимодавца.
3. Если иное не предусмотрено договором займа, сумма займа считается возвращенной в момент передачи ее заимодавцу или зачисления соответствующих денежных средств на его банковский счет.
Статья 764. Последствия нарушения заемщиком договора займа
1. Если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором займа, в случаях, когда заемщик не возвращает в срок сумму займа, на эту сумму подлежат уплате проценты в размере, предусмотренном пунктом 1 статьи 366 настоящего Кодекса, со дня, когда она должна была быть возвращена, по день ее возврата заимодавцу независимо от уплаты процентов, предусмотренных пунктом 1 статьи 762 настоящего Кодекса.
2. Если договором займа предусмотрено возвращение займа по частям (в рассрочку), то при нарушении заемщиком срока, установленного для возврата очередной части займа, заимодавец вправе потребовать досрочного возврата всей оставшейся суммы займа вместе с причитающимися процентами.
Статья 765. Оспаривание договора займа
1. Заемщик вправе оспаривать договор займа по его безденежности, доказывая, что деньги или другие вещи в действительности не получены им от заимодавца или получены в меньшем количестве, чем указано в договоре.
2. Если договор займа должен быть совершен в письменной форме (статья 761), его оспаривание по безденежности путем свидетельских показаний не допускается, за исключением случаев, когда договор был заключен под влиянием обмана, насилия, угрозы, злонамеренного соглашения представителя заемщика с заимодавцем или стечения тяжелых обстоятельств.
3. Если в процессе оспаривания заемщиком договора займа по его безденежности будет установлено, что деньги или другие вещи в действительности не были получены от заимодавца, договор займа считается незаключенным.
Когда деньги или другие вещи в действительности получены заемщиком от заимодавца в меньшем количестве, договор считается заключенным на это количество денег или вещей.
Статья 766. Последствия утраты обеспечения обязательства заемщика
При невыполнении заемщиком предусмотренных договором займа обязанностей по обеспечению возврата суммы займа, а также при утрате обеспечения или ухудшении его условий по обстоятельствам, за которые заимодавец не отвечает, заимодавец вправе потребовать от заемщика досрочного возврата суммы займа и уплаты причитающихся процентов, если иное не предусмотрено договором.
Статья 767. Целевой заем
1. Если договор займа заключен с условием использования заемщиком полученных средств на определенные цели (целевой заем), заемщик обязан обеспечить возможность осуществления заимодавцем контроля за целевым использованием суммы займа.
2. В случае невыполнения заемщиком условия договора займа о целевом использовании суммы займа, а также при нарушении обязанностей, предусмотренных пунктом 1 настоящей статьи, заимодавец вправе потребовать от заемщика досрочного возврата суммы займа и уплаты причитающихся процентов, если иное не предусмотрено договором.
Статья 768. Заем, оформленный векселем или облигацией
К отношениям займа, оформленного векселем или облигацией, применяются правила настоящей главы постольку, поскольку это не противоречит законодательству о выдаче и обращении векселей или эмиссии и обращении облигаций.
Статья 769. Договор государственного займа
К отношениям по займу, по которому заемщиком выступает Республика Беларусь, или займу, по которому заемщиком выступает административно-территориальная единица, правила настоящей главы применяются постольку, поскольку это не противоречит актам законодательства.
Статья 770. Коммерческий заем
Правила, установленные настоящей главой, распространяются также на случаи аванса, предварительной оплаты, отсрочки и рассрочки оплаты товаров, работ или услуг (коммерческий заем), если иное не предусмотрено законодательством.
Статья 771. Кредитный договор
1. По кредитному договору банк или небанковская кредитно-финансовая организация (кредитодатель) обязуется предоставить денежные средства (кредит) другому лицу (кредитополучателю) в размере и на условиях, предусмотренных договором, а кредитополучатель обязуется возвратить полученную денежную сумму и уплатить проценты на нее.
2. К отношениям по кредитному договору применяются правила настоящей главы с учетом особенностей, установленных законодательством.
ГЛАВА 43 ФИНАНСИРОВАНИЕ ПОД УСТУПКУ ДЕНЕЖНОГО ТРЕБОВАНИЯ (ФАКТОРИНГ)
Статья 772. Договор финансирования под уступку денежного требования (факторинг)
1. По договору финансирования под уступку денежного требования (факторинга) одна сторона (фактор) обязуется другой стороне (кредитору) или сторонам (кредитору и должнику) вступить в денежное обязательство между кредитором и должником путем выплаты кредитору суммы денежного обязательства должника за вознаграждение.
Вознаграждение фактору выплачивается кредитором (должником) в форме дисконта (разница между суммой денежного обязательства должника и суммой, выплачиваемой фактором кредитору) и (или) в иных формах, определенных договором факторинга.
2. В качестве фактора может выступать банк или небанковская кредитно-финансовая организация.
3. Договор факторинга может заключаться по поводу как одного денежного обязательства, так и ряда денежных обязательств, в том числе и тех, которые могут возникнуть в будущем, в частности, однородных денежных обязательств по получению оплаты за поставленный товар.
4. Отношения по факторингу регулируются законодательством.
ГЛАВА 44 БАНКОВСКИЙ ВКЛАД (ДЕПОЗИТ)
Статья 773. Договор банковского вклада (депозита)
По договору банковского вклада (депозита) одна сторона (вкладополучатель) принимает от другой стороны (вкладчика) денежные средства в белорусских рублях или иностранной валюте – вклад
(депозит) и обязуется возвратить вкладчику денежные средства, проводить безналичные расчеты по поручению вкладчика в соответствии с договором, а также выплатить начисленные по вкладу (депозиту) проценты на условиях и в порядке, определенных этим договором.
Во вклад (депозит) по договору банковского вклада (депозита) могут быть внесены также драгоценные металлы и (или) драгоценные камни.
Отношения по банковскому вкладу (депозиту) регулируются законодательством и договором.
ГЛАВА 45 ТЕКУЩИЙ (РАСЧЕТНЫЙ) БАНКОВСКИЙ СЧЕТ
Статья 774. Договор текущего (расчетного) банковского счета
По договору текущего (расчетного) банковского счета одна сторона (банк или небанковская кредитно-финансовая организация) обязуется открыть другой стороне (владельцу счета) текущий (расчетный) банковский счет для хранения денежных средств владельца счета и (или) зачисления на этот счет денежных средств, поступающих в пользу владельца счета, а также выполнять поручения владельца счета о перечислении и выдаче соответствующих денежных средств со счета, а владелец счета предоставляет банку или небанковской кредитно-финансовой организации право использовать временно свободные денежные средства, находящиеся на счете, с уплатой процентов, определенных законодательством или договором, а также, за исключением случаев, установленных законодательными актами, уплачивает банку или небанковской кредитно-финансовой организации вознаграждение (плату) за оказываемые ему услуги.
Отношения по текущему (расчетному) банковскому счету регулируются законодательством.
ГЛАВА 46 РАСЧЕТЫ
Статья 775. Расчеты
1. Расчеты с участием граждан, не связанные с осуществлением ими предпринимательской деятельности, могут проводиться наличными деньгами (статья 141) или в безналичном порядке, установленном законодательством.
2. Расчеты между юридическими лицами, а также расчеты с участием граждан, связанные с осуществлением ими предпринимательской деятельности, проводятся в безналичном порядке. Расчеты между этими лицами могут проводиться также наличными деньгами в случаях, предусмотренных законодательством.
3. Безналичные расчеты проводятся через банки или небанковские кредитно-финансовые организации, в которых открыты соответствующие счета, если иное не вытекает из акта законодательства и не обусловлено используемой формой расчетов.
4. Отношения по расчетам регулируются законодательством.
ГЛАВА 47 ХРАНЕНИЕ
§ 1. Общие положения о хранении
Статья 776. Договор хранения
1. По договору хранения одна сторона (хранитель) обязуется хранить вещь, переданную ей другой стороной (поклажедателем), и возвратить эту вещь в сохранности.
2. В договоре хранения, в котором хранителем является коммерческая организация либо некоммерческая организация, осуществляющая хранение в качестве одной из целей своей профессиональной деятельности (профессиональный хранитель), может быть предусмотрена обязанность хранителя принять на хранение вещь от поклажедателя в предусмотренный договором срок.
Статья 777. Форма договора хранения
1. Договор хранения должен быть заключен в письменной форме в случаях, указанных в статье 162 настоящего Кодекса. При этом для договора хранения между гражданами (подпункт 2 части первой статьи 162) соблюдение письменной формы требуется, если стоимость передаваемой на хранение вещи превышает не менее чем в десять раз установленный законодательством размер базовой величины.
Договор хранения, предусматривающий обязанность хранителя принять вещь на хранение, должен быть заключен в письменной форме независимо от состава участников этого договора и стоимости вещи, передаваемой на хранение.
Передача вещи на хранение при чрезвычайных обстоятельствах (пожар, стихийное бедствие, внезапная болезнь, угроза нападения и т.п.) может быть доказываема свидетельскими показаниями.
2. Простая письменная форма договора хранения считается соблюденной, если принятие вещи на хранение удостоверено хранителем путем выдачи поклажедателю:
1) сохранной расписки, квитанции, свидетельства или иного документа, подписанного хранителем;
2) номерного жетона (номера), иного знака, удостоверяющего прием вещей на хранение, если такая форма подтверждения приема вещей на хранение предусмотрена законодательством либо обычна для данного вида хранения.
3. Несоблюдение простой письменной формы договора хранения не лишает стороны права ссылаться на свидетельские показания в случае спора о тождестве вещи, принятой на хранение, и вещи, возвращенной хранителем.
Статья 778. Исполнение обязанности принять вещь на хранение
1. Хранитель, взявший на себя по договору хранения обязанность принять вещь на хранение (пункт 2 статьи 776), не вправе требовать передачи ему этой вещи на хранение.
Однако поклажедатель, не передавший вещь на хранение в предусмотренный договором срок, несет ответственность перед хранителем за убытки, причиненные в связи с несостоявшимся хранением, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором хранения. Поклажедатель освобождается от этой ответственности, если заявит хранителю об отказе от его услуг в разумный срок.
2. Если иное не предусмотрено договором, хранитель освобождается от обязанности принять вещь на хранение в случаях, когда в обусловленный договором срок вещь не будет передана ему на хранение.
Статья 779. Срок хранения
1. Хранитель обязан хранить вещь в течение обусловленного договором хранения срока.
2. Если срок хранения договором не предусмотрен и не может быть определен исходя из его условий, хранитель обязан хранить вещь до востребования ее поклажедателем.
3. Если срок хранения определен моментом востребования вещи поклажедателем, хранитель вправе по истечении обычного при данных обстоятельствах срока хранения вещи потребовать от поклажедателя взять обратно вещь, предоставив ему для этого разумный срок. Неисполнение поклажедателем этой обязанности влечет последствия, предусмотренные статьей 789 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 780. Хранение вещей с обезличением
В случаях, прямо предусмотренных договором хранения, принятые на хранение вещи одного поклажедателя могут смешиваться с вещами того же рода и качества других поклажедателей (хранение с обезличением). Поклажедателю возвращается равное или обусловленное сторонами количество вещей того же рода и качества.
Статья 781. Обязанность хранителя обеспечить сохранность вещи
1. Хранитель обязан принять все предусмотренные договором меры для того, чтобы обеспечить сохранность переданной на хранение вещи.
При отсутствии в договоре хранения условий о таких мерах или неполноте этих условий хранитель должен принять для сохранения вещи также меры, соответствующие существу обязательства, в том числе свойствам переданной на хранение вещи, если только необходимость принятия этих мер не исключена договором.
2. Хранитель во всяком случае должен принять для сохранения переданной ему вещи меры, обязательность которых предусмотрена законодательством или в установленном им порядке (противопожарные, санитарные, охранные и т.п.).
3. Если хранение осуществляется безвозмездно, хранитель обязан заботиться о принятой на хранение вещи не менее, чем о своих вещах.
Статья 782. Пользование вещью, переданной на хранение
Хранитель не вправе без согласия поклажедателя пользоваться переданной на хранение вещью, а равно предоставлять возможность пользования ею третьим лицам, за исключением случаев, когда пользование хранимой вещью необходимо для обеспечения ее сохранности и не противоречит договору.
Статья 783. Изменение условий хранения
1. При необходимости изменения условий хранения вещи, предусмотренных договором хранения, хранитель обязан незамедлительно уведомить об этом поклажедателя и дождаться его ответа.
Если изменение условий хранения необходимо для устранения опасности утраты, недостачи или повреждения вещи, хранитель вправе изменить способ, место и иные условия хранения, не дожидаясь ответа поклажедателя.
2. Если во время хранения возникла реальная угроза порчи вещи, либо вещь уже подверглась порче, либо возникли обстоятельства, не позволяющие обеспечить ее сохранность, а своевременного принятия мер со стороны поклажедателя ожидать нельзя, хранитель вправе самостоятельно продать вещь или часть ее по цене, сложившейся в месте хранения. Если указанные обстоятельства возникли по причинам, за которые хранитель не отвечает, он имеет право на возмещение своих расходов по продаже за счет покупной цены.
Статья 784. Хранение вещей с опасными свойствами
1. Вещи, легко воспламеняющиеся, взрывоопасные или вообще опасные по своей природе, если поклажедатель при их сдаче на хранение не предупредил хранителя об этих свойствах, могут быть в любое время обезврежены или уничтожены хранителем без возмещения поклажедателю убытков. Поклажедатель отвечает за убытки, причиненные в связи с хранением таких вещей хранителю и третьим лицам.
При передаче вещей с опасными свойствами на хранение профессиональному хранителю правила, изложенные в части первой настоящего пункта, применяются в случае, когда такие вещи были сданы на хранение под неправильным наименованием и хранитель при их принятии не мог путем наружного осмотра удостовериться в их опасных свойствах.
При возмездном хранении в случаях, предусмотренных настоящим пунктом, уплаченное за хранение вещей вознаграждение не возвращается, а если оно не было уплачено, хранитель может взыскать его полностью.
2. Если принятые на хранение с ведома и согласия хранителя вещи, указанные в части первой пункта 1 настоящей статьи, стали, несмотря на соблюдение условий их хранения, опасными для окружающих либо для имущества хранителя или третьих лиц и обстоятельства не позволяют хранителю потребовать от поклажедателя немедленно их забрать либо он не выполняет этого требования, эти вещи могут быть обезврежены или уничтожены хранителем без возмещения поклажедателю убытков. Поклажедатель не несет в таком случае ответственности перед хранителем и третьими лицами за убытки, причиненные в связи с хранением этих вещей.
Статья 785. Передача вещи на хранение третьему лицу
Если договором хранения не предусмотрено иное, хранитель не вправе без согласия поклажедателя передавать вещь на хранение третьему лицу, за исключением случаев, когда он вынужден к этому силою обстоятельств в интересах поклажедателя и лишен возможности получить его согласие.
О передаче вещи на хранение третьему лицу хранитель обязан незамедлительно уведомить поклажедателя.
При передаче вещи на хранение третьему лицу условия договора между поклажедателем и первоначальным хранителем сохраняют силу и последний отвечает за действия третьего лица, которому он передал вещь на хранение, как за свои собственные.
Статья 786. Вознаграждение за хранение
1. Вознаграждение за хранение должно быть уплачено хранителю по окончании хранения, а если оплата хранения предусмотрена по периодам, оно должно выплачиваться соответствующими частями по истечении каждого периода.
2. При просрочке уплаты вознаграждения за хранение более чем на половину периода, за который оно должно быть уплачено, хранитель вправе отказаться от исполнения договора и потребовать от поклажедателя немедленно забрать сданную на хранение вещь.
3. Если хранение прекращается до истечения обусловленного срока по обстоятельствам, за которые хранитель не отвечает, он имеет право на соразмерную часть вознаграждения, а в случае, предусмотренном пунктом 1 статьи 784 настоящего Кодекса, – на всю сумму вознаграждения.
Если хранение прекращается досрочно по обстоятельствам, за которые хранитель отвечает, он не вправе требовать вознаграждения за хранение, а полученную в счет этого вознаграждения сумму должен вернуть поклажедателю.
4. Если по истечении срока хранения находящаяся на хранении вещь не взята обратно поклажедателем, он обязан уплатить хранителю соразмерное вознаграждение за дальнейшее хранение вещи. Это правило применяется и в случае, когда поклажедатель обязан забрать вещь до истечения срока хранения.
5. Правила настоящей статьи применяются, если договором хранения не предусмотрено иное.
Статья 787. Возмещение расходов на хранение
1. Если иное не предусмотрено договором хранения, расходы хранителя на хранение вещи включаются в вознаграждение за хранение.
2. При безвозмездном хранении поклажедатель обязан возместить хранителю произведенные им необходимые расходы на хранение вещи, если законодательством или договором не предусмотрено иное.
Статья 788. Чрезвычайные расходы на хранение
1. Расходы на хранение вещи, которые превышают обычные расходы такого рода и которые стороны не могли предвидеть при заключении договора хранения (чрезвычайные расходы), возмещаются хранителю, если поклажедатель дал согласие на эти расходы или одобрил их впоследствии, а также в других случаях, предусмотренных законодательством или договором.
2. При необходимости произвести чрезвычайные расходы хранитель обязан запросить поклажедателя о согласии на эти расходы. Если поклажедатель не сообщит о своем несогласии в срок, указанный хранителем, или в течение нормально необходимого для ответа времени, считается, что он согласен на чрезвычайные расходы.
В случае, когда хранитель произвел чрезвычайные расходы на хранение, не получив от поклажедателя предварительного согласия на эти расходы, хотя по обстоятельствам дела это было возможно, и поклажедатель впоследствии не одобрил их, хранитель может требовать возмещения чрезвычайных расходов лишь в пределах ущерба, который мог быть причинен вещи, если бы эти расходы не были произведены.
3. Если иное не предусмотрено договором, чрезвычайные расходы возмещаются сверх вознаграждения за хранение.
Статья 789. Обязанность поклажедателя взять вещь обратно
1. По истечении обусловленного срока хранения или срока, предоставленного хранителем для обратного получения вещи на основании пункта 3 статьи 779 настоящего Кодекса, поклажедатель обязан немедленно забрать переданную на хранение вещь.
2. При неисполнении поклажедателем своей обязанности взять обратно вещь, переданную на хранение, в том числе при его уклонении от получения вещи, хранитель вправе, если иное не предусмотрено договором, после письменного предупреждения поклажедателя самостоятельно продать вещь по цене, сложившейся в месте хранения, а если такая цена превышает в сто раз установленный законодательством размер базовой величины, – продать ее с аукциона в порядке, предусмотренном статьями 417-419 настоящего Кодекса.
Сумма, вырученная от продажи вещи, передается поклажедателю за вычетом сумм, причитающихся хранителю, в том числе его расходов на продажу вещи.
Статья 790. Обязанность хранителя возвратить вещь
1. Хранитель обязан возвратить поклажедателю или лицу, указанному им в качестве получателя, ту самую вещь, которая была передана на хранение, если договором не предусмотрено хранение с обезличением (статья 780).
2. Вещь должна быть возвращена хранителем в том состоянии, в каком она была принята на хранение, с учетом ее естественного ухудшения, естественной убыли или иного изменения вследствие ее естественных свойств.
3. Одновременно с возвратом вещи хранитель обязан передать плоды и доходы, полученные за время ее хранения, если иное не предусмотрено договором.
Статья 791. Основания ответственности хранителя
1. Хранитель отвечает за утрату, недостачу или повреждение вещей, принятых на хранение, по основаниям, предусмотренным статьей 372 настоящего Кодекса. Профессиональный хранитель отвечает за утрату, недостачу или повреждение вещей, если не докажет, что утрата, недостача или повреждение произошли вследствие непреодолимой силы, либо из-за свойств вещи, о которых хранитель, принимая ее на хранение, не знал и не должен был знать, либо в результате умысла или грубой неосторожности поклажедателя.
2. За утрату, недостачу или повреждение принятых на хранение вещей после того, как наступила обязанность поклажедателя взять эти вещи обратно (пункт 1 статьи 789), хранитель отвечает лишь при наличии с его стороны умысла или грубой неосторожности.
Статья 792. Размер ответственности хранителя
1. Убытки, причиненные поклажедателю утратой, недостачей или повреждением вещей, возмещаются хранителем в соответствии со статьей 364 настоящего Кодекса, если законодательством или договором не предусмотрено иное.
2. При безвозмездном хранении убытки, причиненные поклажедателю утратой, недостачей или повреждением вещей, возмещаются:
1) за утрату и недостачу вещей – в размере стоимости утраченных или недостающих вещей;
2) за повреждение вещей – в размере суммы, на которую понизилась их стоимость.
3. В случаях, когда в результате повреждения, за которое хранитель отвечает, качество вещи изменилось настолько, что она не может быть использована по первоначальному назначению, поклажедатель вправе от нее отказаться и потребовать от хранителя возмещения стоимости этой вещи, а также других убытков, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством или договором хранения.
Статья 793. Возмещение убытков, причиненных хранителю
Поклажедатель обязан возместить хранителю убытки, причиненные свойствами сданной на хранение вещи, если хранитель, принимая вещь на хранение, не знал и не должен был знать об этих свойствах.
Статья 794. Прекращение обязательства хранения по требованию поклажедателя
Хранитель обязан по первому требованию поклажедателя возвратить принятую на хранение вещь, хотя предусмотренный договором срок ее хранения еще и не окончился.
Статья 795. Применение общих положений о хранении к отдельным его видам
Общие положения о хранении (статьи 776-794) применяются к отдельным его видам, если правилами об отдельных видах хранения, содержащимися в статьях 797-816 настоящего Кодекса и других актах законодательства, не установлено иное.
Статья 796. Хранение в силу акта законодательства
Правила настоящей главы соответственно применяются к обязательствам хранения, возникающим в силу акта законодательства, если законодательством не установлены иные правила.
§ 2. Хранение на товарном складе
Статья 797. Договор складского хранения
1. По договору складского хранения товарный склад (хранитель) обязуется за вознаграждение хранить товары, переданные ему товаровладельцем (поклажедателем), и возвратить эти товары в сохранности.
Товарным складом признается организация, осуществляющая в качестве предпринимательской деятельности хранение товаров и оказывающая связанные с хранением услуги.
2. Письменная форма договора складского хранения считается соблюденной, если его заключение и принятие товара на склад удостоверены складским документом (статья 802).
Статья 798. Хранение товаров складом общего пользования
1. Товарный склад признается складом общего пользования, если из законодательства или выданного этой коммерческой организации специального разрешения (лицензии) вытекает, что она обязана принимать товары на хранение от любого товаровладельца.
2. Договор складского хранения, заключаемый товарным складом общего пользования, признается публичным договором (статья 396).
Статья 799. Проверка товаров при их приеме товарным складом и во время хранения
1. Если иное не предусмотрено договором хранения, товарный склад при приеме товаров на хранение обязан за свой счет произвести осмотр товаров и определить их количество (число единиц или товарных мест либо меру, вес, объем) и внешнее состояние.
2. Товарный склад обязан предоставлять товаровладельцу во время хранения возможность осматривать товары или их образцы, если хранение осуществляется с обезличением, брать пробы и принимать меры, необходимые для обеспечения сохранности товаров.
Статья 800. Изменение условий хранения и состояния товаров
1. В случае, когда для обеспечения сохранности товаров требуется изменить условия их хранения, товарный склад вправе принять требуемые меры самостоятельно. Однако он обязан уведомить товаровладельца о принятых мерах, если требовалось существенно изменить условия хранения товаров, предусмотренные договором складского хранения.
2. При обнаружении во время хранения повреждений товара, выходящих за пределы согласованных в договоре складского хранения или обычных норм естественной порчи, товарный склад обязан незамедлительно составить об этом акт и в тот же день известить товаровладельца.
Статья 801. Проверка количества и состояния товара при возвращении его товаровладельцу
1. Товаровладелец и товарный склад имеют право каждый требовать при возвращении товара его осмотра и проверки его количества. Вызванные этим расходы несет тот, кто потребовал осмотра товара или проверки его количества.
2. Если при возвращении товара складом товаровладельцу товар не был ими совместно осмотрен или проверен, заявление о недостаче или повреждении товара вследствие его ненадлежащего хранения должно быть сделано складу письменно при получении товара, а в отношении недостачи или повреждения, которые не могли быть обнаружены при обычном способе принятия товара, – в течение трех дней по его получении.
При отсутствии заявления товаровладельца, указанного в части первой настоящего пункта, считается, поскольку не доказано иное, что товар возвращен складом в соответствии с условиями договора складского хранения.
Статья 802. Складские документы
1. Товарный склад выдает в подтверждение принятия товаров на хранение один из следующих складских документов:
1) двойное складское свидетельство;
2) простое складское свидетельство;
3) складскую квитанцию.
Не допускается выдача двойного складского свидетельства или простого складского свидетельства при принятии на хранение:
имущества, которое не принадлежит поклажедателю на праве собственности или ином вещном праве;
ценных бумаг;
имущества, обремененного залогом;
имущества, которое не может быть сохранено без потери качественных или количественных характеристик в течение всего срока действия договора хранения;
имущества, в отношении которого не прекращено производство по искам об истребовании из чужого незаконного владения;
имущества, на которое не может быть обращено взыскание в соответствии с законодательством.
2. Двойное складское свидетельство состоит из двух частей – складского свидетельства и залогового свидетельства (варранта), которые могут быть отделены одно от другого.
3. Двойное складское свидетельство, каждая из двух его частей и простое складское свидетельство являются ценными бумагами.
4. Товар, принятый на хранение по двойному складскому свидетельству, может быть в течение его хранения предметом залога путем отделения и передачи залогового свидетельства. При залоге товара об этом делается отметка на складском свидетельстве.
Статья 803. Двойное складское свидетельство
1. В каждой части двойного складского свидетельства должны быть одинаково указаны:
1) наименование и место нахождения товарного склада, принявшего товар на хранение;
2) текущий номер складского свидетельства по реестру склада;
3) наименование юридического лица либо имя гражданина, от которого принят товар на хранение, а также место нахождения (место жительства) товаровладельца;
4) наименование и количество принятого на хранение товара – число единиц и (или) товарных мест и (или) мера (вес, объем) товара;
5) срок, на который товар принят на хранение, если такой срок устанавливается, либо указание, что товар принят на хранение до востребования;
6) размер вознаграждения за хранение либо тарифы, на основании которых он исчисляется, и порядок оплаты хранения;
7) дата выдачи складского свидетельства.
Обе части двойного складского свидетельства должны иметь идентичные подписи уполномоченного лица и печати товарного склада.
2. Документ, не соответствующий требованиям настоящей статьи, не является двойным складским свидетельством.
Статья 804. Права держателей складского и залогового свидетельств
1. Держатель складского и залогового свидетельств имеет право распоряжения хранящимся на складе товаром в полном объеме.
2. Держатель складского свидетельства, отделенного от залогового свидетельства, вправе распоряжаться товаром, но не может взять его со склада до уплаты им всей суммы долга по залоговому свидетельству.
3. Держатель залогового свидетельства, иной, чем держатель складского свидетельства, имеет право залога на товар в размере суммы обязательства, в обеспечение исполнения которого передано залоговое свидетельство.
4. Товарный склад не вправе выступать держателем выданного им двойного складского свидетельства (его части).
5. Держатель складского свидетельства, отделивший залоговое свидетельство, не вправе отчуждать складское свидетельство до уплаты им всей суммы долга по залоговому свидетельству.
Статья 805. Передача складского и залогового свидетельств
1. Складское свидетельство и залоговое свидетельство могут передаваться вместе или порознь по передаточным надписям (индоссаментам).
2. Индоссамент должен быть простым и ничем не обусловленным. Всякое ограничивающее его условие, за исключением случаев, предусмотренных законодательными актами, считается ничтожным. Частичный индоссамент недействителен.
3. Не допускаются включение в текст индоссамента оговорок, при совершении очередного индоссамента внесение изменений и дополнений в текст предыдущих индоссаментов, складского свидетельства или залогового свидетельства, а также совершение бланкового индоссамента.
4. Индоссаменты, совершенные с нарушением требований, установленных настоящей статьей, считаются недействительными.
Статья 806. Выдача товара по двойному складскому свидетельству
1. Товарный склад выдает товар держателю складского и залогового свидетельств (двойного складского свидетельства) не иначе как в обмен на оба эти свидетельства вместе. При уплате всей суммы долга по залоговому свидетельству залоговое свидетельство возвращается держателю складского свидетельства, на нем делается отметка об уплате всей суммы долга и прекращении залога.
2. Держателю складского свидетельства, который не имеет залогового свидетельства, но внес сумму долга по нему, товар выдается складом не иначе как в обмен на складское свидетельство и при условии представления вместе с ним документа, подтверждающего уплату всей суммы долга по залоговому свидетельству.
3. Товарный склад, вопреки требованиям настоящей статьи выдавший товар держателю складского свидетельства, не имеющему залогового свидетельства и не внесшему сумму долга по нему, несет ответственность перед держателем залогового свидетельства за исполнение обязательства, в обеспечение исполнения которого передано залоговое свидетельство.
4. Держатель складского и залогового свидетельств вправе требовать выдачи товара по частям. При этом в обмен на первоначальные свидетельства ему выдаются новые свидетельства на товары, оставшиеся на складе.
Статья 807. Простое складское свидетельство
1. Простое складское свидетельство выдается на предъявителя.
2. Простое складское свидетельство должно содержать сведения, предусмотренные подпунктами 1, 2, 4-7 пункта 1 статьи 803 настоящего Кодекса, а также указание на то, что оно выдано на предъявителя.
3. Документ, не соответствующий требованиям настоящей статьи, не является простым складским свидетельством.
Статья 808. Хранение вещей с правом распоряжения ими
Если из законодательства или договора следует, что товарный склад может распоряжаться сданными ему на хранение товарами, то к отношениям сторон применяются правила главы 42 настоящего Кодекса о займе, однако время и место возврата товаров определяются правилами настоящей главы.
§ 3. Специальные виды хранения
Статья 809. Исключена
Статья 810. Исключена
Статья 811. Хранение ценностей в банке или небанковской кредитно-финансовой организации
1. Банк или небанковская кредитно-финансовая организация могут принимать на хранение ценные бумаги, драгоценные металлы и камни, иные драгоценные вещи и ценности, в том числе документы.
2. Договор хранения ценностей в банке или небанковской кредитно-финансовой организации оформляется выдачей банком или небанковской кредитно-финансовой организацией поклажедателю именного сохранного документа, предъявление которого является основанием для выдачи хранимых ценностей поклажедателю.
Статья 812. Хранение ценностей в индивидуальном банковском сейфе
1. Договором хранения ценностей в банке или небанковской кредитно-финансовой организации может быть предусмотрено их хранение с использованием поклажедателем (клиентом) или с предоставлением ему охраняемого банком или небанковской кредитно-финансовой организацией индивидуального банковского сейфа (ячейки сейфа, изолированного помещения в банке или небанковской кредитно-финансовой организации).
По договору хранения ценностей в индивидуальном банковском сейфе клиенту предоставляется право самому помещать ценности в сейф и изымать их из сейфа, для чего ему должны быть выданы ключ от сейфа, карточка, позволяющая идентифицировать клиента, либо иной знак или документ, удостоверяющий право клиента на доступ к сейфу и его содержимому.
Условиями договора может быть предусмотрено право клиента работать в банке или небанковской кредитно-финансовой организации с ценностями, хранимыми в индивидуальном сейфе.
2. По договору хранения ценностей в банке или небанковской кредитно-финансовой организации с использованием клиентом индивидуального банковского сейфа банк или небанковская кредитно- финансовая организация принимают от клиента ценности, которые должны храниться в сейфе, осуществляют контроль за их помещением клиентом в сейф и изъятием из сейфа и после изъятия возвращают их клиенту.
3. По договору хранения ценностей в банке или небанковской кредитно-финансовой организации с предоставлением клиенту индивидуального банковского сейфа банк или небанковская кредитно- финансовая организация обеспечивают клиенту возможность помещения ценностей в сейф и изъятия их из сейфа вне чьего-либо контроля, в том числе и контроля со стороны банка или небанковской кредитно-финансовой организации.
Банк или небанковская кредитно-финансовая организация обязаны осуществлять контроль за доступом в помещение, где находится предоставленный клиенту сейф.
Если договором хранения ценностей в банке или небанковской кредитно-финансовой организации с предоставлением клиенту индивидуального банковского сейфа не предусмотрено иное, банк или небанковская кредитно-финансовая организация освобождаются от ответственности за несохранность содержимого сейфа, если докажут, что по условиям хранения доступ кого-либо к сейфу без ведома клиента был невозможен либо стал возможным вследствие непреодолимой силы.
4. К договору о предоставлении банковского сейфа в пользование другому лицу без ответственности банка или небанковской кредитно-финансовой организации за содержимое сейфа применяются правила настоящего Кодекса (глава 34) и иных актов законодательства о договоре аренды.
Статья 813. Хранение в камерах хранения транспортных организаций
1. Находящиеся в ведении транспортных организаций общего пользования камеры хранения обязаны принимать на хранение вещи пассажиров и других граждан независимо от наличия у них проездных документов. Договор хранения вещей в камерах хранения транспортных организаций признается публичным договором (статья 396).
2. В подтверждение принятия вещи на хранение в камеру хранения (кроме автоматических камер) поклажедателю выдается квитанция или номерной жетон. В случае утраты квитанции или номерного жетона сданная в камеру хранения вещь выдается поклажедателю по представлении доказательств принадлежности ему этой вещи.
3. Срок, в течение которого камера хранения обязана хранить вещи, определяется актами республиканских органов государственного управления, изданными в соответствии с частью второй пункта 2 статьи 738 настоящего Кодекса, если соглашением сторон не установлен более длительный срок. Вещи, не востребованные в указанные сроки, камера хранения обязана хранить еще в течение тридцати дней. По истечении этого срока невостребованные вещи могут быть проданы в порядке, предусмотренном пунктом 2 статьи 789 настоящего Кодекса.
4. Убытки поклажедателя вследствие утраты, недостачи или повреждения вещей, сданных в камеру хранения, в пределах их стоимости, определяемой поклажедателем при сдаче на хранение, подлежат возмещению хранителем в течение двадцати четырех часов с момента предъявления требования об их возмещении.
Статья 814. Хранение в гардеробах организаций
1. Хранение в гардеробах организаций предполагается безвозмездным, если вознаграждение за хранение не оговорено или иным очевидным способом не обусловлено при сдаче вещи на хранение.
Хранитель вещи, сданной в гардероб, независимо от того, осуществляется хранение возмездно или безвозмездно, обязан принять для обеспечения сохранности вещи все меры, предусмотренные пунктами 1 и 2 статьи 781 настоящего Кодекса.
2. Правила настоящей статьи применяются также к хранению верхней одежды, головных уборов и иных подобных вещей, оставляемых без сдачи их на хранение гражданами в местах, отведенных для этих целей в организациях и средствах транспорта.
Статья 815. Хранение в гостинице
1. Гостиница отвечает как хранитель и без особого о том соглашения с проживающим в ней лицом (постояльцем) за утрату, недостачу или повреждение его вещей, внесенных в гостиницу, за исключением денег, иных валютных ценностей, ценных бумаг и других драгоценных вещей.
Внесенной в гостиницу считается вещь, вверенная работникам гостиницы, либо вещь, помещенная в гостиничном номере или ином предназначенном для этого месте.
2. Гостиница отвечает за утрату денег, иных валютных ценностей, ценных бумаг и других драгоценных вещей постояльца при условии, если они были приняты гостиницей на хранение либо были помещены постояльцем в предоставленный ему гостиницей индивидуальный сейф независимо от того, находится этот сейф в его номере или в ином помещении гостиницы. Гостиница освобождается от ответственности за несохранность содержимого такого сейфа, если докажет, что по условиям хранения доступ кого-либо к сейфу без ведома постояльца был невозможен либо стал возможным вследствие непреодолимой силы.
3. Постоялец, обнаруживший утрату, недостачу или повреждение своих вещей, обязан без промедления заявить об этом гостинице. В противном случае гостиница освобождается от ответственности за несохранность вещей.
4. Сделанное гостиницей объявление о том, что она не принимает на себя ответственности за несохранность вещей постояльцев, не освобождает ее от ответственности.
5. Гостиница освобождается от ответственности за утрату, недостачу или повреждение вещей постояльца, если они произошли по его вине.
6. Правила настоящей статьи соответственно применяются в отношении хранения вещей граждан в мотелях, домах отдыха, пансионатах, санаториях, банях и других подобных организациях.
Статья 816. Хранение вещей, являющихся предметом спора (секвестр)
1. По договору о секвестре двое или несколько лиц, между которыми возник спор о праве на вещь, передают эту вещь третьему лицу, принимающему на себя обязанность по разрешении спора возвратить вещь тому лицу, которому она будет присуждена по решению суда либо по соглашению всех спорящих лиц (договорный секвестр).
2. Вещь, являющаяся предметом спора между двумя или несколькими лицами, может быть передана на хранение в порядке секвестра по решению суда (судебный секвестр).
Хранителем по судебному секвестру может быть как лицо, назначенное судом, так и лицо, определяемое по взаимному согласию спорящих сторон. В обоих случаях требуется согласие хранителя, если законодательством не установлено иное.
3. На хранение в порядке секвестра могут быть переданы как движимые, так и недвижимые вещи.
4. Хранитель, осуществляющий хранение вещи в порядке секвестра, имеет право на вознаграждение за счет спорящих сторон, если договором или решением суда, которым установлен секвестр, не предусмотрено иное.
ГЛАВА 48 СТРАХОВАНИЕ
Статья 817. Добровольное и обязательное страхование
1. Страхование осуществляется в добровольном порядке на основании договоров страхования, заключаемых страхователем со страховщиком, если иное не установлено законами или актами Президента Республики Беларусь.
Страхователи – граждане, в том числе иностранные, лица без гражданства, организации, в том числе иностранные и международные, а также Республика Беларусь и ее административно- территориальные единицы, иностранные государства, заключившие со страховщиками договоры страхования либо являющиеся таковыми в силу закона или акта Президента Республики Беларусь.
2. В случаях, когда законами или актами Президента Республики Беларусь на указанных в них лиц возлагается обязанность по страхованию жизни, здоровья или имущества либо своей гражданской ответственности (обязательное страхование, за исключением обязательного государственного страхования), страхование осуществляется в соответствии с законами и актами Президента Республики Беларусь.
3. Правила настоящей главы применяются к обязательному страхованию, поскольку иное не установлено Президентом Республики Беларусь.
Статья 818. Интересы, страхование которых не допускается
1. Страхование противоправных интересов не допускается.
2. Не допускается страхование убытков от участия в играх, лотереях и пари.
3. Не допускается страхование расходов, к которым лицо может быть принуждено в целях освобождения заложников.
4. Исключен.
5. Условия договоров страхования, противоречащие пунктам 1-3 настоящей статьи, ничтожны.
Статья 819. Договор страхования
1. По договору страхования одна сторона (страховщик) обязуется при наступлении предусмотренного законодательством или договором события (страхового случая) возместить другой стороне (страхователю) или третьему лицу (застрахованному лицу, выгодоприобретателю), в пользу которого заключен договор, причиненный вследствие этого события ущерб застрахованным по договору имущественным интересам (произвести страховую выплату в виде страхового возмещения или страхового обеспечения) в пределах определенной договором суммы (страховой суммы, лимита ответственности), а другая сторона (страхователь) обязуется уплатить обусловленную договором сумму (страховой взнос, страховую премию).
2. Объектами страхования могут быть не противоречащие законодательству имущественные интересы, связанные:
с причинением вреда жизни или здоровью страхователя либо иного названного в договоре физического лица (личное страхование, не относящееся к страхованию жизни);
с достижением гражданами определенного возраста или с наступлением в их жизни иного предусмотренного в договоре страхового случая (личное страхование, относящееся к страхованию жизни);
с утратой (гибелью) или повреждением имущества, находящегося во владении, пользовании, распоряжении страхователя или иного названного в договоре выгодоприобретателя, либо с нанесением ущерба их имущественным правам, в том числе с возникновением убытков от предпринимательской деятельности в связи с невыполнением (выполнением ненадлежащим образом) своих обязательств контрагентами субъекта хозяйствования* или с изменением условий этой деятельности по не зависящим от предпринимателя обстоятельствам (имущественное страхование);
с ответственностью по обязательствам, возникшим в случае причинения страхователем или иным лицом, на которых такая ответственность может быть возложена, вреда жизни, здоровью или имуществу других лиц, либо с ответственностью по договору (страхование ответственности).
______________________________
*Под субъектами хозяйствования для целей настоящей главы понимаются хозяйственные товарищества и общества, унитарные предприятия, производственные кооперативы, в том числе сельскохозяйственные производственные кооперативы, и крестьянские (фермерские) хозяйства; государственные объединения; ассоциации (союзы) – объединения коммерческих и (или) некоммерческих организаций, объединения коммерческих организаций и (или) индивидуальных предпринимателей; потребительские кооперативы, торгово-промышленные палаты, учреждения, товарищества собственников; граждане, осуществляющие предпринимательскую деятельность без образования юридического лица.
Статья 820. Договор личного страхования
1. По договору личного страхования страховщик обязуется за обусловленный договором страховой взнос (страховую премию), уплачиваемый страхователем, выплатить единовременно или
выплачивать периодически страховое обеспечение в пределах обусловленной договором страховой суммы (лимита ответственности) в случае причинения вреда жизни или здоровью самого страхователя или иного застрахованного лица либо достижения ими определенного возраста или наступления в их жизни иного предусмотренного договором события (страхового случая).
2. Договор личного страхования считается заключенным в пользу застрахованного лица, если в договоре не названо в качестве выгодоприобретателя другое лицо. В случае смерти лица, застрахованного по договору, в котором не назван иной выгодоприобретатель, выгодоприобретателями признаются наследники застрахованного лица.
Договор личного страхования в пользу лица, не являющегося застрахованным лицом, в том числе в пользу не являющегося застрахованным лицом страхователя, может быть заключен лишь с письменного согласия застрахованного лица. При отсутствии такого согласия договор может быть признан недействительным по иску застрахованного лица, а в случае смерти этого лица – по иску его наследников.
Статья 821. Страхование имущества
1. Имущество может быть застраховано по договору страхования в пользу лица (страхователя или выгодоприобретателя), имеющего основанный на законодательстве или договоре интерес в сохранении этого имущества.
2. Договор страхования имущества, заключенный при отсутствии у страхователя или выгодоприобретателя интереса в сохранении застрахованного имущества, недействителен.
3. Договор страхования имущества в пользу выгодоприобретателя может быть заключен без указания имени или наименования выгодоприобретателя.
При заключении такого договора страхователю выдается страховой полис на предъявителя. При осуществлении страхователем или выгодоприобретателем прав по такому договору необходимо представление этого полиса страховщику.
Статья 822. Страхование имущественных прав и предпринимательского риска
1. По договору страхования имущественных прав могут быть застрахованы имущественные права страхователя или иного названного в договоре выгодоприобретателя.
В качестве имущественных прав, которые могут быть застрахованы по договору, принимаются права страхователей (выгодоприобретателей), связанные с осуществлением ими правомочий владения, пользования и распоряжения имуществом, а также с имущественными требованиями, которые возникают между страхователями (выгодоприобретателями) и иными лицами по поводу определения судьбы имущества и связанных с ним прав (права собственности, хозяйственного ведения, оперативного управления, обязательственные права (договорные и внедоговорные), права на результаты интеллектуальной деятельности).
2. Предпринимательский риск – риск, возникающий при осуществлении страхователем предпринимательской деятельности.
3. По договору страхования предпринимательского риска может быть застрахован предпринимательский риск только самого страхователя и только в его пользу.
Договор страхования предпринимательского риска лица, не являющегося страхователем, ничтожен.
Договор страхования предпринимательского риска в пользу лица, не являющегося страхователем, считается заключенным в пользу страхователя.
4. К договору страхования риска невозврата (непогашения) и (или) просрочки возврата (погашения) кредита применяются правила, предусмотренные настоящей главой, подлежащие применению в отношении страхования предпринимательского риска.
Статья 823. Страхование ответственности за причинение вреда
1. По договору страхования ответственности по обязательствам, возникающим вследствие причинения вреда жизни, здоровью или имуществу других лиц, может быть застрахована ответственность самого страхователя или иного лица, на которое такая ответственность может быть возложена.
2. Лицо, ответственность которого за причинение вреда застрахована, должно быть названо в договоре страхования, а если лицо не названо, считается застрахованной ответственность самого страхователя.
3. Договор страхования ответственности за причинение вреда считается заключенным в пользу лиц, которым может быть причинен вред (выгодоприобретателей), даже если договор заключен в пользу страхователя или иного лица, ответственного за причинение вреда, либо в договоре не сказано, в чью пользу он заключен.
4. В случае, когда ответственность за причинение вреда застрахована в силу того, что ее страхование обязательно, а также в других случаях, предусмотренных законодательством или договором страхования такой ответственности, лицо, в пользу которого считается заключенным договор страхования, вправе предъявить требование о возмещении вреда в пределах страховой суммы (лимита ответственности).
Статья 824. Страхование ответственности по договору
1. Страхование ответственности за нарушение договора допускается в случаях, предусмотренных законодательством.
2. По договору страхования ответственности за нарушение договора может быть застрахована только ответственность самого страхователя. Договор страхования, не соответствующий этому требованию, ничтожен.
3. Ответственность за нарушение договора считается застрахованной в пользу стороны, перед которой по условиям этого договора страхователь должен нести соответствующую ответственность, – выгодоприобретателя, даже если договор страхования заключен в пользу другого лица либо в нем не сказано, в чью пользу он заключен.
Статья 825. Обязательное страхование
1. Законами или актами Президента Республики Беларусь на указанных в них лиц может быть возложена обязанность страховать:
1) жизнь, здоровье или имущество;
2) свою гражданскую ответственность, которая может наступить вследствие причинения вреда жизни, здоровью или имуществу других лиц либо вследствие нарушения договоров с другими лицами.
2. Обязанность страховать свою жизнь или здоровье не может быть возложена на гражданина Республики Беларусь по законодательству.
3. Исключен.
4. В случаях, когда обязанность страхования не вытекает из закона или акта Президента Республики Беларусь, а основана на договоре, в том числе обязанность страхования имущества – на договоре с владельцем имущества или на учредительных документах юридического лица, являющегося собственником имущества, такое страхование не является обязательным в смысле настоящей статьи и не влечет последствий, предусмотренных статьей 827 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 826. Осуществление обязательного страхования
1. Обязательное страхование осуществляется путем заключения со страховщиком договора страхования лицом, на которое законами или актами Президента Республики Беларусь возложена обязанность такого страхования (страхователем).
2. Обязательное страхование осуществляется за счет страхователя, если иное не установлено Президентом Республики Беларусь.
3. Объекты обязательного страхования, страховые риски и размеры (минимальные размеры) страховых сумм (лимитов ответственности) определяются законами и актами Президента Республики Беларусь.
4. Правила настоящей статьи не распространяются на обязательное государственное страхование (статья 859).
Статья 827. Последствия нарушения законодательства об обязательном страховании
1. Лицо, в пользу которого в соответствии с законами или актами Президента Республики Беларусь должно быть осуществлено обязательное страхование, вправе, если ему известно, что страхование не осуществлено, потребовать в судебном порядке его осуществления лицом, на которое возложена обязанность страхования.
2. Если лицо, на которое возложена обязанность страхования, не осуществило его или заключило договор страхования на условиях, ухудшающих положение выгодоприобретателя по сравнению с условиями, определенными законами и актами Президента Республики Беларусь, оно при наступлении страхового случая несет ответственность перед выгодоприобретателем на тех же условиях, на каких должно было бы быть выплачено страховое возмещение либо страховое обеспечение при надлежащем страховании.
3. Суммы, неосновательно сбереженные лицом, на которое возложена обязанность страхования, в связи с тем, что оно не выполнило эту обязанность либо выполнило ее ненадлежащим образом, взыскиваются по иску органа, осуществляющего надзор и контроль за страховой деятельностью, в доход Республики Беларусь с начислением на эти суммы процентов в соответствии со статьей 366 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 828. Страховщики
1. Страховщики – коммерческие организации, созданные для осуществления страховой деятельности и имеющие специальные разрешения (лицензии) на осуществление страховой деятельности.
Для отдельных видов страхования законами или актами Президента Республики Беларусь может быть предусмотрен иной состав страховщиков.
2. Требования, которым должны отвечать страховщики, и порядок лицензирования их деятельности определяются законодательством.
Статья 829. Выполнение обязанностей по договору страхования страхователем и выгодоприобретателем
1. Заключение договора страхования в пользу выгодоприобретателя, в том числе и тогда, когда им является застрахованное лицо, не освобождает страхователя от выполнения обязанностей по этому договору, если только договором не предусмотрено иное, либо обязанности, лежащие на страхователе, выполнены лицом, в пользу которого заключен договор.
2. Страховщик вправе требовать от выгодоприобретателя, в том числе и тогда, когда выгодоприобретателем является застрахованное лицо, выполнения обязанностей по договору страхования, включая обязанности, лежащие на страхователе, но не выполненные им, при предъявлении выгодоприобретателем требования о выплате страхового возмещения либо страхового обеспечения. Риск последствий невыполнения или несвоевременного выполнения обязанностей, которые должны были быть выполнены ранее, несет выгодоприобретатель.
Статья 830. Форма договора страхования
1. Договор страхования должен быть заключен в письменной форме, если иное не установлено законами или актами Президента Республики Беларусь.
Несоблюдение письменной формы влечет недействительность договора страхования, за исключением договора обязательного государственного страхования (статья 859).
2. Договор добровольного страхования может быть заключен путем составления одного документа, а также путем обмена документами посредством почтовой, телеграфной, телетайпной, электронной или иной связи, позволяющей достоверно установить, что документ исходит от стороны по договору, либо вручения страховщиком страхователю на основании его письменного или устного заявления страхового полиса (свидетельства, сертификата), подписанного ими.
К договору добровольного страхования должны прилагаться правила соответствующего вида страхования, утвержденные страховщиком либо объединением страховщиков и согласованные с органом, осуществляющим надзор и контроль за страховой деятельностью. Приложение к договору добровольного страхования правил страхования должно удостоверяться записью в этом договоре.
3. Страховщик при заключении договора добровольного страхования вправе применять формы страховых полисов (свидетельств, сертификатов), разработанные им, если иное не установлено актами Президента Республики Беларусь. Обязательные реквизиты страхового полиса (свидетельства, сертификата), порядок его заполнения и использования определяет орган, осуществляющий надзор и контроль за страховой деятельностью, если иное не установлено актами Президента Республики Беларусь.
4. Заключение договора страхования в форме электронного документа осуществляется с соблюдением порядка и условий, установленных органом, осуществляющим надзор и контроль за страховой деятельностью.
Статья 831. Страхование по генеральному полису
1. Систематическое страхование разных партий однородного имущества (товаров, грузов и т.п.) на сходных условиях в течение определенного срока может по соглашению страхователя со страховщиком осуществляться на основании одного договора страхования – генерального полиса.
2. Страхователь обязан в отношении каждой партии имущества, подпадающей под действие генерального полиса, сообщать страховщику обусловленные таким полисом сведения в предусмотренный им срок, а если он не предусмотрен, – немедленно по их получении. Страхователь не освобождается от этой обязанности, даже если к моменту получения таких сведений возможность убытков, подлежащих возмещению страховщиком, уже миновала.
3. По требованию страхователя страховщик обязан выдавать страховые полисы по отдельным партиям имущества, подпадающим под действие генерального полиса.
В случае несоответствия содержания страхового полиса генеральному полису предпочтение отдается страховому полису.
Статья 832. Существенные условия договора страхования
1. При заключении договора имущественного страхования или страхования ответственности между страхователем и страховщиком должно быть достигнуто соглашение:
1) об определенном имуществе либо ином имущественном интересе, являющемся объектом страхования;
2) о характере события, на случай наступления которого осуществляется страхование (страхового случая);
3) о размере страховой суммы (лимита ответственности);
4) о сумме страхового взноса (страховой премии) и сроках его уплаты;
5) о сроке действия договора.
2. При заключении договора личного страхования между страхователем и страховщиком должно быть достигнуто соглашение:
1) о застрахованном лице;
2) о характере события, на случай наступления которого в жизни застрахованного лица осуществляется страхование (страхового случая);
3) о размере страховой суммы (лимита ответственности);
4) о сумме страхового взноса (страховой премии) и сроках его уплаты;
5) о сроке действия договора.
3. При заключении договора страхования между страхователем и страховщиком, если страхователем выступает гражданин, кроме существенных условий, предусмотренных пунктами 1 и 2 настоящей статьи, должно быть достигнуто соглашение:
1) об основаниях расторжения договора ранее установленного срока;
2) о порядке возврата страхователю страхового взноса (страховой премии) в случае неисполнения обязательства или расторжения договора ранее установленного срока;
3) об ответственности за неисполнение обязательства.
Статья 833. Определение условий договора страхования в правилах страхования
1. Условия, на которых заключается договор добровольного страхования, определяются в правилах соответствующего вида страхования, утвержденных страховщиком либо объединением страховщиков и согласованных с органом, осуществляющим надзор и контроль за страховой деятельностью.
2. Условия, содержащиеся в правилах страхования, в том числе не включенные в текст договора страхования или страхового полиса (свидетельства, сертификата), обязательны для страховщика и страхователя или выгодоприобретателя.
Статья 834. Сведения, предоставляемые страхователем при заключении договора
1. При заключении договора страхования страхователь обязан сообщить страховщику известные страхователю обстоятельства, имеющие существенное значение для определения вероятности наступления страхового случая и размера возможных убытков от его наступления (страхового риска), если эти обстоятельства не известны и не должны быть известны страховщику.
Существенными признаются во всяком случае обстоятельства, предусмотренные в договоре страхования или страховом полисе (свидетельстве, сертификате) на основании письменного или устного заявления страхователя.
2. Если договор страхования заключен при отсутствии ответов страхователя на какие-либо вопросы страховщика, страховщик не может впоследствии требовать расторжения договора либо признания его недействительным на том основании, что соответствующие обстоятельства не были сообщены страхователем.
3. Если после заключения договора будет установлено, что страхователь сообщил страховщику заведомо ложные сведения об обстоятельствах, указанных в пункте 1 настоящей статьи, страховщик вправе потребовать признания договора недействительным и применения последствий, предусмотренных пунктом 2 статьи 180 настоящего Кодекса.
Требование страховщика о признании договора страхования недействительным не подлежит удовлетворению, если обстоятельства, о которых умолчал страхователь, уже отпали.
Статья 835. Право страховщика на оценку страхового риска
1. При заключении договора страхования имущества страховщик вправе произвести осмотр страхуемого имущества, а при необходимости назначить экспертизу достоверности стоимости такого имущества.
2. При заключении договора личного страхования страховщик вправе произвести обследование страхуемого лица для оценки фактического состояния его здоровья.
3. Оценка страхового риска страховщиком на основании настоящей статьи необязательна для страхователя, который вправе доказывать иное.
Статья 836. Тайна сведений о страховании
Страховщик не вправе разглашать полученные им в результате своей профессиональной деятельности сведения о страхователе, застрахованном лице и выгодоприобретателе, состоянии их здоровья, а также об имущественном положении этих лиц, за исключением случаев, предусмотренных законодательством. За нарушение тайны сведений о страховании страховщик в зависимости от рода нарушенных прав и характера нарушения несет ответственность в соответствии с правилами, предусмотренными статьей 140 или статьей 151 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 837. Страховая сумма (лимит ответственности)
1. Страховой суммой (лимитом ответственности) является установленная законом, актом Президента Республики Беларусь или договором страхования денежная сумма, в пределах которой, если иное не предусмотрено законом, актом Президента Республики Беларусь, страховщик обязан произвести страховую выплату при наступлении страхового случая.
2. При страховании имущества или предпринимательского риска страховая сумма (лимит ответственности) не должна превышать их страховой стоимости. Такой стоимостью считаются:
1) для имущества – его действительная стоимость в месте его нахождения в день заключения договора страхования;
2) для предпринимательского риска – убытки от предпринимательской деятельности, которые страхователь понес бы при наступлении страхового случая.
В случаях, установленных законами или актами Президента Республики Беларусь, страховая сумма (лимит ответственности) может быть меньше страховой стоимости.
3. В договорах личного страхования и договорах страхования гражданской ответственности страховая сумма (лимит ответственности) определяется сторонами по их усмотрению, если иное не установлено законами и актами Президента Республики Беларусь.
Статья 838. Оспаривание страховой стоимости имущества
Страховая стоимость имущества, указанная в договоре страхования, не может быть впоследствии оспорена, за исключением случая, когда страховщик, не воспользовавшийся до заключения договора своим правом на оценку страхового риска (пункт 1 статьи 835), был умышленно введен в заблуждение относительно этой стоимости.
Статья 839. Неполное имущественное страхование
Если в договоре страхования имущества или предпринимательского риска страховая сумма (лимит ответственности) установлена ниже страховой стоимости, страховщик при наступлении страхового случая обязан возместить страхователю (выгодоприобретателю) часть понесенных последним убытков пропорционально отношению страховой суммы (лимита ответственности) к страховой стоимости. Если страхование производится по системе первого риска, то страховое возмещение выплачивается в размере полной стоимости погибшего имущества или причиненных убытков от предпринимательской деятельности, но не более страховой суммы (лимита ответственности).
Статья 840. Дополнительное имущественное страхование
1. В случае, когда имущество или предпринимательский риск застрахованы лишь в части страховой стоимости, страхователь (выгодоприобретатель) вправе осуществить дополнительное страхование, в том числе у другого страховщика, но с тем, чтобы общая страховая сумма (лимит ответственности) по всем договорам страхования не превышала страховой стоимости.
2. Несоблюдение положений пункта 1 настоящей статьи влечет последствия, предусмотренные пунктом 4 статьи 841 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 841. Последствия страхования сверх страховой стоимости
1. Если страховая сумма (лимит ответственности), указанная в договоре страхования имущества или предпринимательского риска, превышает страховую стоимость, договор является ничтожным в той части страховой суммы (лимита ответственности), которая превышает страховую стоимость.
Уплаченная излишне часть страхового взноса (страховой премии) возврату в этом случае не подлежит.
2. Если в соответствии с договором страхования страховой взнос (страховая премия) вносится в рассрочку и к моменту установления обстоятельств, указанных в пункте 1 настоящей статьи, он внесен не полностью, оставшаяся часть страхового взноса (страховой премии) должна быть
уплачена в размере, уменьшенном пропорционально уменьшению размера страховой суммы (лимита ответственности).
3. Если завышение страховой суммы (лимита ответственности) в договоре страхования явилось следствием обмана со стороны страхователя, страховщик вправе требовать признания договора недействительным и возмещения причиненных ему в связи с этим убытков в размере, превышающем сумму полученного им от страхователя страхового взноса (страховой премии).
4. Правила, предусмотренные в пунктах 1-3 настоящей статьи, соответственно применяются и в том случае, когда страховая сумма (лимит ответственности) превысила страховую стоимость в результате страхования одного и того же объекта у двух или нескольких страховщиков (двойное страхование).
Сумма страхового возмещения, подлежащая выплате в этом случае каждым из страховщиков, сокращается пропорционально уменьшению первоначальной страховой суммы (лимита ответственности) по соответствующему договору страхования.
Статья 842. Имущественное страхование от разных страховых рисков
1. Имущество и предпринимательский риск могут быть застрахованы от разных страховых рисков как по одному, так и по отдельным договорам страхования, в том числе по договорам с разными страховщиками.
В этих случаях допускается превышение размера общей страховой суммы (лимита ответственности) по всем договорам над страховой стоимостью.
2. Если из двух или нескольких договоров, заключенных в соответствии с пунктом 1 настоящей статьи, вытекает обязанность страховщиков выплатить страховое возмещение за одни и те же последствия наступления одного и того же страхового случая, к таким договорам в соответствующей части применяются правила, предусмотренные пунктом 4 статьи 841 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 843. Сострахование
Объект страхования может быть застрахован по одному договору совместно несколькими страховщиками (сострахование). Если в таком договоре не определены права и обязанности каждого из страховщиков, они солидарно отвечают перед страхователем (выгодоприобретателем) за выплату страхового возмещения или страхового обеспечения.
Статья 844. Страховой взнос (страховая премия)
1. Страховым взносом (страховой премией) является сумма денежных средств, подлежащая уплате страхователем страховщику за страхование, если иное не установлено Президентом Республики Беларусь.
2. При определении размера страхового взноса (страховой премии), подлежащего уплате по договору добровольного страхования, стороны применяют установленные страховщиком страховые тарифы, определяющие ставку страхового взноса (страховой премии) с единицы страховой суммы (лимита ответственности), с учетом объекта страхования и характера страхового риска, если иное не установлено законодательством.
Страховой тариф по видам добровольного страхования включает базовый страховой тариф, состав которого определяется органом, осуществляющим надзор и контроль за страховой деятельностью, и применяемые к нему корректировочные коэффициенты. Базовый страховой тариф
устанавливается страховщиком по согласованию с органом, осуществляющим надзор и контроль за страховой деятельностью.
3. Если договором страхования предусмотрена рассрочка внесения страхового взноса (страховой премии), в нем могут быть определены последствия неуплаты очередной части страхового взноса (страховой премии) в установленный срок.
4. Если страховой случай наступил до уплаты очередной части страхового взноса (страховой премии), внесение которой просрочено, страховщик вправе при определении размера подлежащего выплате страхового возмещения или страхового обеспечения зачесть сумму просроченной части страхового взноса (страховой премии).
Статья 845. Замена застрахованного лица
1. В случае, когда по договору страхования ответственности за причинение вреда (статья 823) застрахована ответственность лица, иного, чем страхователь, последний вправе, поскольку иное не предусмотрено договором, в любое время до наступления страхового случая заменить это лицо другим, письменно уведомив об этом страховщика.
2. Застрахованное лицо, названное в договоре личного страхования, может быть заменено другим лицом лишь с согласия самого застрахованного лица и страховщика.
Статья 846. Замена выгодоприобретателя
Страхователь вправе заменить выгодоприобретателя, названного в договоре страхования, другим лицом, письменно уведомив об этом страховщика. Замена выгодоприобретателя по договору личного страхования, назначенного с согласия застрахованного лица (пункт 2 статьи 820), допускается лишь с согласия этого лица.
Выгодоприобретатель не может быть заменен другим лицом после того, как он выполнил какую- либо из обязанностей по договору страхования или предъявил страховщику требование о страховой выплате.
Статья 847. Начало действия договора страхования
1. Договор страхования вступает в силу со дня уплаты страхового взноса (страховой премии) или первой его части, если в законодательных актах или правилах соответствующего вида страхования, утвержденных страховщиком либо объединением страховщиков и согласованных с органом, осуществляющим надзор и контроль за страховой деятельностью, не предусмотрено иное.
2. Страхование, обусловленное договором, распространяется на страховые случаи, происшедшие после вступления договора страхования в силу, если в договоре не предусмотрен иной срок начала действия страхования.
Статья 848. Досрочное прекращение договора страхования
1. Договор страхования прекращается до окончания срока, на который он был заключен, если после вступления его в силу возможность наступления страхового случая отпала и страхование прекратилось по обстоятельствам, иным, чем страховой случай. К таким обстоятельствам, в частности, относятся:
1) утрата (гибель) застрахованного имущества по причинам, иным, чем наступление страхового случая;
2) прекращение в установленном порядке предпринимательской деятельности лицом, застраховавшим предпринимательский риск или иной риск, связанный с этой деятельностью.
2. Страхователь (выгодоприобретатель) вправе отказаться от договора страхования в любое время, если к моменту отказа возможность наступления страхового случая не отпала по обстоятельствам, указанным в пункте 1 настоящей статьи.
3. При досрочном прекращении договора страхования по обстоятельствам, указанным в пункте 1 настоящей статьи, страховщик имеет право на часть страхового взноса (страховой премии) пропорционально времени, в течение которого действовало страхование.
При досрочном отказе страхователя (выгодоприобретателя) от договора страхования уплаченный страховщику страховой взнос (страховая премия) не подлежит возврату, если договором не предусмотрено иное.
Статья 849. Последствия увеличения страхового риска в период действия договора страхования
1. В период действия договора имущественного страхования или страхования ответственности страхователь (выгодоприобретатель) обязан незамедлительно сообщать страховщику о ставших ему известными значительных изменениях в обстоятельствах, сообщенных страховщику при заключении договора, если эти изменения могут существенно повлиять на увеличение страхового риска.
Значительными во всяком случае признаются изменения, оговоренные в договоре страхования или страховом полисе (свидетельстве, сертификате) и в переданных страхователю правилах страхования.
2. Страховщик, уведомленный об обстоятельствах, влекущих увеличение страхового риска, вправе потребовать изменения условий договора страхования или уплаты дополнительного страхового взноса (страховой премии) соразмерно увеличению риска.
Если страхователь (выгодоприобретатель) возражает против изменения условий договора страхования или доплаты страхового взноса (страховой премии), страховщик вправе потребовать расторжения договора в соответствии с правилами, предусмотренными главой 29 настоящего Кодекса.
3. При неисполнении страхователем либо выгодоприобретателем обязанности, предусмотренной в пункте 1 настоящей статьи, страховщик вправе потребовать расторжения договора и возмещения убытков, причиненных расторжением договора (пункт 5 статьи 423).
4. Страховщик не вправе требовать расторжения договора, если обстоятельства, влекущие увеличение страхового риска, уже отпали.
5. При личном страховании последствия изменения страхового риска в период действия договора страхования, указанные в пунктах 2 и 3 настоящей статьи, могут наступить, только если они прямо предусмотрены в договоре.
Статья 850. Переход прав на застрахованное имущество к другому лицу
При переходе прав на застрахованное имущество от лица, в интересах которого был заключен договор страхования, к другому лицу права и обязанности по этому договору переходят к лицу, к которому перешли права на имущество, за исключением случаев принудительного изъятия имущества по основаниям, указанным в пункте 2 статьи 236 настоящего Кодекса, и отказа от права собственности (статья 237).
Лицо, к которому перешли права на застрахованное имущество, должно незамедлительно письменно уведомить об этом страховщика.
Статья 851. Уведомление страховщика о наступлении страхового случая
1. Страхователь по договору имущественного страхования или страхования ответственности после того, как ему стало известно о наступлении страхового случая, обязан незамедлительно уведомить о его наступлении страховщика или его представителя. Если договором предусмотрен срок и (или) способ уведомления, уведомление должно быть сделано в условленный срок и указанным в договоре способом.
Такая же обязанность лежит на выгодоприобретателе, которому известно о заключении договора страхования в его пользу, если он намерен воспользоваться правом на страховое возмещение.
2. Неисполнение обязанности, предусмотренной пунктом 1 настоящей статьи, дает страховщику право отказать в выплате страхового возмещения, если не будет доказано, что страховщик своевременно узнал о наступлении страхового случая либо что отсутствие у страховщика сведений об этом не могло сказаться на его обязанности выплатить страховое возмещение.
3. Правила, предусмотренные пунктами 1 и 2 настоящей статьи, соответственно применяются к договору личного страхования и выплате страхового обеспечения, если страховым случаем является смерть застрахованного лица или причинение вреда его здоровью. При этом устанавливаемый договором срок уведомления страховщика не может быть менее тридцати дней.
Статья 852. Уменьшение убытков от страхового случая
1. При наступлении страхового случая, предусмотренного договором имущественного страхования или страхования ответственности, страхователь обязан принять разумные и доступные в сложившихся обстоятельствах меры, чтобы уменьшить возможные убытки.
Принимая такие меры, страхователь должен следовать указаниям страховщика, если они сообщены страхователю.
2. Расходы в целях уменьшения убытков, подлежащих возмещению страховщиком, если такие расходы были необходимы или были произведены для выполнения указаний страховщика, должны быть возмещены страховщиком, даже если соответствующие меры оказались безуспешными.
Такие расходы возмещаются пропорционально отношению страховой суммы (лимита ответственности) к страховой стоимости независимо от того, что вместе с возмещением других убытков они могут превысить страховую сумму (лимит ответственности).
3. Страховщик освобождается от возмещения убытков, возникших вследствие того, что страхователь умышленно не принял разумных и доступных ему мер, чтобы уменьшить возможные убытки.
Статья 853. Последствия наступления страхового случая по вине страхователя, выгодоприобретателя или застрахованного лица
1. Страховщик освобождается от выплаты страхового возмещения или страхового обеспечения, если страховой случай наступил вследствие умысла страхователя, выгодоприобретателя или застрахованного лица, за исключением случаев, предусмотренных пунктами 2 и 3 настоящей статьи.
Законодательством могут быть предусмотрены случаи освобождения страховщика от выплаты страхового возмещения по договорам имущественного страхования при наступлении страхового случая вследствие грубой неосторожности страхователя или выгодоприобретателя.
2. Страховщик не освобождается от выплаты страхового возмещения по договору страхования ответственности за причинение вреда жизни, здоровью или имуществу, если вред причинен по вине ответственного за него лица.
3. Страховщик не освобождается от выплаты страхового обеспечения, которое по договору личного страхования подлежит уплате в случае смерти застрахованного лица, если его смерть наступила вследствие самоубийства и к этому времени договор страхования действовал уже не менее двух лет.
Статья 854. Основания освобождения страховщика от выплаты страхового возмещения и страхового обеспечения
1. Если международными договорами Республики Беларусь, актами законодательства или договором страхования не предусмотрено иное, страховщик освобождается от выплаты страхового возмещения и страхового обеспечения, когда страховой случай наступил вследствие:
1) воздействия ядерного взрыва, радиации или радиоактивного загрязнения;
2) военных действий;
3) гражданской войны.
2. Если договором имущественного страхования не предусмотрено иное, страховщик освобождается от выплаты страхового возмещения за убытки, возникшие вследствие изъятия, конфискации, реквизиции, национализации, ареста или уничтожения застрахованного имущества по распоряжению государственных органов.
Статья 855. Переход к страховщику прав страхователя на возмещение ущерба (суброгация)
1. Если договором имущественного страхования и страхования ответственности не предусмотрено иное, к страховщику, выплатившему страховое возмещение, переходит в пределах выплаченной суммы право требования, которое страхователь (выгодоприобретатель) имеет к лицу, ответственному за убытки, возмещенные в результате страхования. Условие договора, исключающее переход к страховщику права требования к лицу, умышленно причинившему убытки, ничтожно.
2. Перешедшее к страховщику право требования осуществляется им с соблюдением правил, регулирующих отношения между страхователем (выгодоприобретателем) и лицом, ответственным за убытки.
3. Страхователь (выгодоприобретатель) обязан передать страховщику все документы и доказательства и сообщить ему все сведения, необходимые для осуществления страховщиком перешедшего к нему права требования.
4. Если страхователь (выгодоприобретатель) отказался от своего права требования к лицу, ответственному за убытки, возмещенные страховщиком, или осуществление этого права стало невозможным по вине страхователя (выгодоприобретателя), страховщик освобождается от выплаты страхового возмещения полностью или в соответствующей части и вправе потребовать возврата излишне выплаченной суммы страхового возмещения.
Статья 856. Исковая давность по требованиям, связанным с имущественным страхованием и страхованием ответственности
По требованиям, вытекающим из договоров имущественного страхования и страхования ответственности, устанавливается общий срок исковой давности, исчисляемый со дня окончания действия договора страхования.
Статья 857. Перестрахование
1. Перестрахованием является страхование одним страховщиком (перестрахователем) на определенных в договоре условиях риска выполнения части своих обязательств у другого страховщика (перестраховщика).
2. К договору перестрахования применяются правила, предусмотренные настоящей главой, если договором перестрахования не предусмотрено иное. При этом страховщик по договору страхования (основному договору), заключивший договор перестрахования, считается в этом последнем договоре перестрахователем.
3. При перестраховании ответственным перед страхователем по основному договору страхования за выплату страхового возмещения или страхового обеспечения остается страховщик по этому договору.
4. Допускается последовательное заключение двух или нескольких договоров перестрахования.
Статья 858. Исключена.
Статья 859. Обязательное государственное страхование
1. В целях обеспечения социальных интересов граждан и интересов государства законодательством может быть установлено обязательное государственное страхование жизни, здоровья и (или) имущества граждан.
Обязательное государственное страхование осуществляется за счет средств, выделяемых на эти цели из соответствующего бюджета государственным органам и органам местного управления и самоуправления (страхователям).
2. Обязательное государственное страхование осуществляется непосредственно на основании законодательства о таком страховании либо на основании договоров страхования, заключаемых в установленном порядке страховщиками и страхователями.
3. Обязательное государственное страхование оплачивается страховщикам в размере, определяемом в соответствии с законодательством о таком страховании.
4. Правила настоящей главы применяются к обязательному государственному страхованию, поскольку иное не предусмотрено законодательством о таком страховании и не вытекает из существа соответствующих отношений по страхованию.
Статья 860. Применение общих правил о страховании к специальным видам страхования
Правила, предусмотренные настоящей главой, применяются к отношениям по страхованию иностранных инвестиций от некоммерческих рисков, морскому страхованию, медицинскому страхованию и страхованию пенсий постольку, поскольку законодательством об этих видах страхования не установлено иное.
ГЛАВА 49 ПОРУЧЕНИЕ
Статья 861. Договор поручения
1. По договору поручения одна сторона (поверенный) обязуется совершить от имени и за счет другой стороны (доверителя) определенные юридические действия. Права и обязанности по сделке, совершенной поверенным, возникают непосредственно у доверителя.
2. Договор поручения может быть заключен с указанием срока, в течение которого поверенный вправе действовать от имени доверителя, или без такого указания.
Статья 862. Вознаграждение поверенного
1. Доверитель обязан уплатить поверенному вознаграждение, если это предусмотрено законодательством или договором поручения.
В случаях, когда договор поручения связан с осуществлением обеими сторонами или одной из них предпринимательской деятельности, доверитель обязан уплатить поверенному вознаграждение, если договором не предусмотрено иное.
2. При отсутствии в возмездном договоре поручения условия о размере вознаграждения или о порядке его уплаты вознаграждение уплачивается после исполнения поручения в размере, определяемом в соответствии с пунктом 3 статьи 394 настоящего Кодекса.
3. Поверенный, действующий в качестве коммерческого представителя (пункт 1 статьи 185), вправе в соответствии со статьей 340 настоящего Кодекса удерживать находящиеся у него вещи, которые подлежат передаче доверителю, в обеспечение своих требований по договору поручения.
Статья 863. Исполнение поручения в соответствии с указаниями доверителя
1. Поверенный обязан исполнять данное ему поручение в соответствии с указаниями доверителя. Указания доверителя должны быть правомерными, осуществимыми и конкретными.
2. Поверенный вправе отступить от указаний доверителя, если по обстоятельствам дела это необходимо в интересах доверителя и поверенный не мог предварительно запросить доверителя либо не получил в разумный срок ответа на свой запрос. Поверенный обязан уведомить доверителя о допущенных отступлениях, как только уведомление стало возможным.
3. Поверенному, действующему в качестве коммерческого представителя (пункт 1 статьи 185), доверителем может быть предоставлено право отступать в интересах доверителя от его указаний без предварительного запроса об этом. В этом случае коммерческий представитель обязан в разумный срок уведомить доверителя о допущенных отступлениях, если иное не предусмотрено договором поручения.
Статья 864. Обязанности поверенного
Поверенный обязан:
1) лично исполнять данное ему поручение, за исключением случаев, указанных в статье 866 настоящего Кодекса;
2) сообщать доверителю по его требованию все сведения о ходе исполнения поручения;
3) передавать доверителю без промедления все полученное по сделкам, совершенным во исполнение поручения;
4) по исполнении поручения или при прекращении договора поручения до его исполнения без промедления возвратить доверителю доверенность, срок действия которой не истек, и представить отчет с приложением оправдательных документов, если это требуется по условиям договора или характеру поручения.
Статья 865. Обязанности доверителя
1. Доверитель обязан выдать поверенному доверенность (доверенности) на совершение юридических действий, предусмотренных договором поручения, за исключением случаев, предусмотренных частью второй пункта 1 статьи 183 настоящего Кодекса.
2. Доверитель обязан, если иное не предусмотрено договором, возмещать поверенному понесенные издержки, а также обеспечивать поверенного средствами, необходимыми для исполнения поручения.
3. Доверитель обязан без промедления принять от поверенного все исполненное им в соответствии с договором поручения.
4. Доверитель обязан уплатить поверенному вознаграждение, если в соответствии со статьей 862 настоящего Кодекса договор поручения является возмездным.
Статья 866. Передоверие исполнения поручения
1. Поверенный вправе передать исполнение поручения другому лицу (заместителю) лишь в случаях и на условиях, предусмотренных статьей 188 настоящего Кодекса.
2. Доверитель вправе отвести заместителя, избранного поверенным.
3. Если возможный заместитель поверенного поименован в договоре поручения, поверенный не отвечает ни за его выбор, ни за ведение им дел.
Если право поверенного передать исполнение поручения другому лицу в договоре не предусмотрено либо предусмотрено, но заместитель в нем не поименован, поверенный отвечает за выбор заместителя.
Статья 867. Прекращение договора поручения
1. Договор поручения прекращается вследствие:
1) отмены поручения доверителем;
2) отказа поверенного;
3) смерти доверителя или поверенного, объявления кого-либо из них умершим, признания недееспособным, ограниченно дееспособным или безвестно отсутствующим.
2. Доверитель вправе отменить поручение, а поверенный – отказаться от него во всякое время. Соглашение об отказе от этого права ничтожно.
3. Сторона, отказывающаяся от договора поручения, предусматривающего действия поверенного в качестве коммерческого представителя, должна уведомить другую сторону о прекращении договора не позднее чем за тридцать дней, если договором не предусмотрен более длительный срок.
При реорганизации юридического лица, являющегося коммерческим представителем, доверитель вправе отменить поручение без такого предварительного уведомления.
Статья 868. Последствия прекращения договора поручения
1. Если договор поручения прекращен до того, как поручение исполнено поверенным полностью, доверитель обязан возместить поверенному понесенные при исполнении поручения издержки, а когда поверенному причиталось вознаграждение, также уплатить ему вознаграждение соразмерно выполненной им работе. Это правило не применяется к исполнению поверенным поручения после того, как он узнал или должен был узнать о прекращении поручения.
2. Отмена доверителем поручения не является основанием для возмещения убытков, причиненных поверенному прекращением договора, за исключением случаев прекращения договора,
предусматривающего действия поверенного в качестве коммерческого представителя.
3. Отказ поверенного от исполнения поручения доверителя не является основанием для возмещения убытков, причиненных доверителю прекращением договора поручения, за исключением случаев отказа поверенного в условиях, когда доверитель лишен возможности иначе обеспечить свои интересы, а также отказа от исполнения договора, предусматривающего действия поверенного в качестве коммерческого представителя.
Статья 869. Обязанности наследников поверенного и ликвидатора юридического лица, являющегося поверенным
В случае смерти поверенного его наследники обязаны известить доверителя о прекращении договора поручения и принять меры, необходимые для охраны имущества доверителя, в частности сохранить его вещи и документы и затем передать их доверителю.
Такая же обязанность лежит на ликвидаторе юридического лица, являющегося поверенным.
ГЛАВА 50 ДЕЙСТВИЯ В ЧУЖОМ ИНТЕРЕСЕ БЕЗ ПОРУЧЕНИЯ
Статья 870. Условия действий в чужом интересе
1. Действия без поручения, иного указания или заранее обещанного согласия заинтересованного лица в целях предотвращения вреда его личности или имуществу, исполнения его обязательства или в его иных непротивоправных интересах (действия в чужом интересе) должны совершаться исходя из очевидной выгоды или пользы и действительных или вероятных намерений заинтересованного лица и с необходимой по обстоятельствам дела заботливостью и осмотрительностью.
2. Правила, предусмотренные настоящей главой, не применяются к действиям в интересе других лиц, совершаемым государственными органами и органами местного управления и самоуправления, для которых такие действия являются одной из целей их деятельности.
Статья 871. Уведомление заинтересованного лица о действиях в его интересе
1. Лицо, действующее в чужом интересе, обязано при первой возможности сообщить об этом заинтересованному лицу и выждать в течение разумного срока его решения об одобрении или неодобрении предпринятых действий, если только такое ожидание не повлечет серьезного ущерба для заинтересованного лица.
2. Не требуется специально сообщать заинтересованному гражданину о действиях в его интересе, если эти действия предпринимаются в его присутствии.
Статья 872. Последствия одобрения заинтересованным лицом действий в его интересе
Если лицо, в интересе которого предпринимаются действия без его поручения, одобрит эти действия, к отношениям сторон в дальнейшем применяются правила о договоре поручения или ином договоре, соответствующем характеру предпринятых действий, даже если одобрение было устным.
Статья 873. Последствия неодобрения заинтересованным лицом действий в его интересе
1. Действия в чужом интересе, совершенные после того, как тому, кто их совершает, стало известно, что они не одобряются заинтересованным лицом, не влекут для последнего обязанностей ни в отношении совершившего эти действия, ни в отношении третьих лиц.
2. Действия с целью предотвращения опасности для жизни лица, оказавшегося в опасности, допускаются и против воли этого лица, а исполнение обязанности по содержанию кого-либо – против воли того, на ком лежит эта обязанность.
Статья 874. Возмещение убытков лицу, действовавшему в чужом интересе
1. Необходимые расходы и иной реальный ущерб, понесенные лицом, действовавшим в чужом интересе в соответствии с правилами, предусмотренными настоящей главой, подлежат возмещению заинтересованным лицом, за исключением расходов, которые вызваны действиями, указанными в пункте 1 статьи 873 настоящего Кодекса.
Право на возмещение необходимых расходов и иного реального ущерба сохраняется и в том случае, когда действия в чужом интересе не привели к предполагаемому результату. Однако в случае предотвращения ущерба имуществу другого лица размер возмещения не должен превышать стоимости этого имущества.
2. Расходы и иные убытки лица, действовавшего в чужом интересе, понесенные им в связи с действиями, которые предприняты после получения одобрения от заинтересованного лица (статья 872), возмещаются по правилам о договоре соответствующего вида.
Статья 875. Вознаграждение за действия в чужом интересе
Лицо, действия которого в чужом интересе привели к положительному для заинтересованного лица результату, имеет право на получение вознаграждения, если такое право предусмотрено законодательством, соглашением с заинтересованным лицом.
Статья 876. Последствия сделки в чужом интересе
Обязанности по сделке, заключенной в чужом интересе, переходят к лицу, в интересах которого она совершена, при условии одобрения им этой сделки и если другая сторона не возражает против такого перехода либо при заключении сделки знала или должна была знать о том, что сделка заключена в чужом интересе.
При переходе обязанностей по такой сделке к лицу, в интересах которого она была заключена, последнему должны быть переданы и права по этой сделке.
Статья 877. Неосновательное обогащение вследствие действий в чужом интересе
Если действия, непосредственно не направленные на обеспечение интересов другого лица, в том числе в случае, когда совершившее их лицо ошибочно предполагало, что действует в своем интересе, привели к неосновательному обогащению другого лица, применяются правила, предусмотренные главой 59 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 878. Возмещение вреда, причиненного действиями в чужом интересе
Отношения по возмещению вреда, причиненного действиями в чужом интересе заинтересованному лицу или третьим лицам, регулируются правилами, предусмотренными главой 58 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 879. Отчет лица, действовавшего в чужом интересе
Лицо, действовавшее в чужом интересе, обязано представить лицу, в интересах которого осуществлялись такие действия, отчет с указанием полученных доходов, понесенных расходов и иных убытков.
ГЛАВА 51 КОМИССИЯ
Статья 880. Договор комиссии
1. По договору комиссии одна сторона (комиссионер) обязуется по поручению другой стороны (комитента) за вознаграждение совершить одну или несколько сделок от своего имени, но за счет комитента.
По сделке, совершенной комиссионером с третьим лицом, приобретает права и становится обязанным комиссионер, хотя бы комитент и был назван в сделке или вступил с третьим лицом в непосредственные отношения по исполнению сделки.
2. Договор комиссии может быть заключен на определенный срок или без указания срока его действия, с указанием или без указания территории его исполнения, с обязательством комитента не предоставлять третьим лицам право совершать в его интересах и за его счет сделки, совершение которых поручено комиссионеру, или без такого обязательства, с условиями или без условий относительно ассортимента товаров, являющихся предметом комиссии.
3. Законодательством могут быть предусмотрены особенности отдельных видов договора комиссии.
Статья 881. Комиссионное вознаграждение
1. Комитент обязан уплатить комиссионеру вознаграждение, а в случае, если комиссионер принял на себя ручательство за исполнение сделки третьим лицом (делькредере), – также дополнительное вознаграждение в размере и порядке, установленных в договоре комиссии.
Если договором размер вознаграждения или порядок его уплаты не предусмотрен и размер вознаграждения не может быть определен исходя из условий договора, вознаграждение уплачивается после исполнения договора комиссии в размере, определяемом в соответствии с пунктом 3 статьи 394 настоящего Кодекса.
2. Если договор комиссии не был исполнен по причинам, зависящим от комитента, комиссионер сохраняет право на комиссионное вознаграждение, а также на возмещение понесенных расходов.
Статья 882. Исполнение комиссионного поручения
Принятое на себя поручение комиссионер обязан исполнить на наиболее выгодных для комитента условиях в соответствии с указаниями комитента, а при отсутствии в договоре комиссии таких указаний – в соответствии с обычно предъявляемыми требованиями.
В случае, когда комиссионер совершил сделку на условиях, более выгодных, чем те, которые были указаны комитентом, дополнительная выгода делится между комитентом и комиссионером поровну, если иное не предусмотрено соглашением сторон.
Статья 883. Ответственность за неисполнение сделки, заключенной для комитента
1. Комиссионер не отвечает перед комитентом за неисполнение третьим лицом сделки, заключенной с ним за счет комитента, кроме случаев, когда комиссионер не проявил необходимой осмотрительности в выборе этого лица либо принял на себя ручательство за исполнение сделки (делькредере).
2. В случае неисполнения третьим лицом сделки, заключенной с ним комиссионером, комиссионер обязан немедленно сообщить об этом комитенту, собрать необходимые доказательства, а также по
требованию комитента передать ему права по такой сделке с соблюдением правил об уступке требования (статьи 353-357, 359, 360).
3. Уступка прав комитенту по сделке на основании пункта 2 настоящей статьи допускается независимо от соглашения комиссионера с третьим лицом, запрещающего или ограничивающего такую уступку. Это не освобождает комиссионера от ответственности перед третьим лицом в связи с уступкой права в нарушение соглашения о ее защите или об ограничении.
Статья 884. Субкомиссия
1. Если иное не предусмотрено договором комиссии, комиссионер вправе в целях исполнения договора заключить договор субкомиссии с другим лицом, оставаясь ответственным за действия субкомиссионера перед комитентом.
По договору субкомиссии комиссионер приобретает в отношении субкомиссионера права и обязанности комитента.
2. До прекращения договора комиссии комитент не вправе без согласия комиссионера вступать в непосредственные отношения с субкомиссионером, если иное не предусмотрено договором комиссии.
Статья 885. Отступление от указаний комитента
1. Комиссионер вправе отступить от указаний комитента, если по обстоятельствам дела это необходимо в интересах комитента и комиссионер не мог предварительно запросить комитента либо не получил в разумный срок ответа на свой запрос. Комиссионер обязан уведомить комитента о допущенных отступлениях, как только уведомление стало возможным.
Комиссионеру, действующему в качестве предпринимателя, может быть предоставлено комитентом право отступать от его указаний без предварительного запроса. В этом случае комиссионер обязан в разумный срок уведомить комитента о допущенных отступлениях, если иное не предусмотрено договором.
2. Комиссионер, продавший имущество по цене ниже цены, согласованной с комитентом, обязан возместить последнему разницу, если не докажет, что у него не было возможности продать имущество по согласованной цене и продажа по более низкой цене предупредила еще большие убытки. В случаях, когда комиссионер был обязан предварительно запросить комитента, комиссионер должен также доказать, что он не имел возможности получить предварительно согласие комитента на отступление от его указаний.
3. Если комиссионер купил имущество по цене выше цены, согласованной с комитентом, комитент, не желающий принять такую покупку, обязан заявить об этом комиссионеру в разумный срок по получении от него извещения о заключении сделки с третьим лицом. В противном случае покупка признается принятой комитентом.
Если комиссионер сообщил, что принимает разницу в цене на свой счет, комитент не вправе отказаться от заключенной для него сделки.
Статья 886. Права на вещи, являющиеся предметом комиссии
1. Вещи, поступившие к комиссионеру от комитента либо приобретенные комиссионером за счет комитента, являются собственностью последнего.
2. Комиссионер вправе в соответствии со статьей 340 настоящего Кодекса удерживать находящиеся у него вещи, которые подлежат передаче комитенту либо лицу, указанному комитентом, в обеспечение своих требований по договору комиссии.
В случае объявления комитента экономически несостоятельным (банкротом) указанное право комиссионера прекращается, а его требования к комитенту в пределах стоимости вещей, которые он удерживал, удовлетворяются в соответствии со статьей 340 настоящего Кодекса наравне с требованиями, обеспеченными залогом.
Статья 887. Удовлетворение требований комиссионера из причитающихся комитенту сумм
Комиссионер вправе в соответствии со статьей 340 настоящего Кодекса удержать причитающиеся ему по договору комиссии суммы из всех сумм, поступивших к нему за счет комитента. Однако кредиторы комитента, пользующиеся в отношении очередности удовлетворения их требований преимуществом перед залогодержателями, не лишаются права на удовлетворение этих требований из удержанных комиссионером сумм.
Статья 888. Ответственность комиссионера за утрату, недостачу или повреждение имущества комитента
1. Комиссионер отвечает перед комитентом за утрату, недостачу или повреждение находящегося у него имущества комитента.
2. Если при приеме комиссионером имущества, присланного комитентом либо поступившего к комиссионеру для комитента, в этом имуществе окажутся повреждения или недостача, которые могут быть замечены при наружном осмотре, а также в случае причинения кем-либо ущерба имуществу комитента, находящемуся у комиссионера, комиссионер обязан принять меры к охране прав комитента, собрать необходимые доказательства и обо всем без промедления сообщить комитенту.
3. Комиссионер, не застраховавший находящееся у него имущество комитента, отвечает за это лишь в случаях, когда комитент предписал ему застраховать имущество за счет комитента либо страхование этого имущества комиссионером предусмотрено договором комиссии.
Статья 889. Отчет комиссионера
По исполнении поручения комиссионер обязан представить комитенту отчет и передать ему все полученное по договору комиссии. Комитент, имеющий возражения по отчету, должен сообщить о них комиссионеру в течение тридцати дней со дня получения отчета, если соглашением сторон не установлен иной срок. В противном случае отчет при отсутствии иного соглашения считается принятым.
Статья 890. Принятие комитентом исполненного по договору
Комитент обязан:
1) принять от комиссионера все исполненное по договору комиссии;
2) осмотреть имущество, приобретенное для него комиссионером, и известить последнего без промедления об обнаруженных в этом имуществе недостатках;
3) освободить комиссионера от обязательств по исполнению комиссионного поручения, принятых им на себя перед третьим лицом.
Статья 891. Возмещение расходов по исполнению комиссионного поручения
Комитент обязан помимо уплаты комиссионного вознаграждения, а в соответствующих случаях – и дополнительного вознаграждения за делькредере возместить комиссионеру израсходованные им на исполнение поручения суммы.
Комиссионер не имеет права на возмещение расходов по хранению находящегося у него имущества комитента, если в законодательстве или договоре комиссии не установлено иное.
Статья 892. Прекращение договора комиссии
Договор комиссии прекращается вследствие:
1) отказа комитента от исполнения договора;
2) отказа комиссионера от исполнения договора в случаях, предусмотренных законодательством или договором;
3) смерти комиссионера, объявления его умершим, признания недееспособным, ограниченно дееспособным или безвестно отсутствующим;
4) признания индивидуального предпринимателя, являющегося комиссионером, экономически несостоятельным (банкротом).
В случае объявления комиссионера экономически несостоятельным (банкротом) его права и обязанности по сделкам, заключенным им для комитента во исполнение указания последнего, переходят к комитенту.
Статья 893. Отмена комиссионного поручения комитентом
1. Комитент вправе в любое время отказаться от исполнения договора комиссии, отменив данное комиссионеру поручение. Комиссионер вправе требовать возмещения убытков, вызванных отменой поручения.
2. В случае, когда договор комиссии заключен без указания срока его действия, комитент должен уведомить комиссионера о прекращении договора не позднее чем за тридцать дней, если более продолжительный срок уведомления не предусмотрен договором.
При этом комитент обязан выплатить комиссионеру вознаграждение за сделки, совершенные им до прекращения договора, а также возместить комиссионеру понесенные им до прекращения договора расходы.
3. В случае отмены поручения комитент обязан в срок, установленный договором, а если такой срок не установлен, незамедлительно распорядиться своим находящимся в ведении комиссионера имуществом. Если комитент не выполнит эту обязанность, комиссионер вправе сдать имущество на хранение за счет комитента либо продать его по возможно более выгодной для комитента цене.
Статья 894. Отказ комиссионера от исполнения договора комиссии
1. Комиссионер не вправе, если иное не предусмотрено договором комиссии, отказаться от его исполнения, за исключением случая, когда договор комиссии заключен без указания срока его действия. В этом случае комиссионер должен уведомить комитента о прекращении договора не позднее чем за тридцать дней, если более продолжительный срок уведомления не предусмотрен договором.
Комиссионер обязан принять меры, необходимые для обеспечения сохранности имущества комитента.
2. Комитент должен распорядиться своим находящимся в ведении комиссионера имуществом в течение пятнадцати дней со дня получения уведомления об отказе комиссионера исполнить поручение, если договором не установлен иной срок. Если он не выполнит эту обязанность,
комиссионер вправе сдать имущество на хранение за счет комитента либо продать его по возможно более выгодной для комитента цене.
3. Если договором не предусмотрено иное, комиссионер, отказавшийся от исполнения поручения, сохраняет право на комиссионное вознаграждение за сделки, совершенные им до прекращения договора, а также на возмещение понесенных до этого момента расходов.
ГЛАВА 52 ДОВЕРИТЕЛЬНОЕ УПРАВЛЕНИЕ ИМУЩЕСТВОМ
Статья 895. Договор доверительного управления имуществом
1. По договору доверительного управления имуществом одна сторона (вверитель) передает другой стороне (доверительному управляющему) на определенный срок имущество в доверительное управление, а доверительный управляющий обязуется за вознаграждение осуществлять управление этим имуществом в интересах вверителя или указанного им лица (выгодоприобретателя).
В случае заключения договора доверительного управления имуществом в интересах гражданина, который в связи с заболеванием находится в бессознательном состоянии, исключающем возможность понимать значение своих действий или руководить ими, такой договор может быть заключен без выплаты вознаграждения доверительному управляющему.
Передача имущества в доверительное управление не влечет перехода права собственности на него к доверительному управляющему.
2. Осуществляя доверительное управление имуществом, доверительный управляющий вправе совершать в отношении этого имущества в соответствии с договором доверительного управления любые юридические и фактические действия в интересах вверителя или выгодоприобретателя.
Законодательством или договором могут быть предусмотрены ограничения в отношении отдельных действий по доверительному управлению имуществом.
3. Сделки с переданным в доверительное управление имуществом доверительный управляющий совершает от своего имени, указывая при этом, что он действует в качестве такого управляющего. Это условие считается соблюденным, если при совершении действий, не требующих письменного оформления, другая сторона информирована об их совершении доверительным управляющим в этом качестве, а в письменных документах после имени или наименования доверительного управляющего помещен знак «Д.У.».
При отсутствии указания о действии доверительного управляющего в этом качестве доверительный управляющий обязывается перед третьими лицами лично и отвечает перед ними только принадлежащим ему имуществом.
Статья 896. Предмет доверительного управления
1. Объектом доверительного управления могут быть предприятия и другие имущественные комплексы, отдельные объекты, относящиеся к недвижимому имуществу, ценные бумаги, права, удостоверенные бездокументарными ценными бумагами, исключительные права и другое имущество.
2. Не могут быть самостоятельным предметом доверительного управления деньги, за исключением случаев, предусмотренных законодательством.
3. Имущество, находящееся в хозяйственном ведении или в оперативном управлении, не может быть передано в доверительное управление. Передача в доверительное управление имущества,
находившегося в хозяйственном ведении или в оперативном управлении, возможна только после ликвидации юридического лица, в хозяйственном ведении или оперативном управлении которого имущество находилось, либо прекращения права хозяйственного ведения или оперативного управления имуществом и поступления его во владение собственника по иным предусмотренным законодательством основаниям.
Статья 897. Вверитель
Вверителем имущества, передаваемого в доверительное управление, является собственник, а в случаях, предусмотренных статьей 909 настоящего Кодекса, – другое лицо.
Статья 898. Доверительный управляющий
1. Доверительным управляющим может быть индивидуальный предприниматель или коммерческая организация, за исключением унитарного предприятия.
В случаях, когда доверительное управление имуществом осуществляется по основаниям, предусмотренным законодательством, доверительным управляющим может быть гражданин, не являющийся предпринимателем, или некоммерческая организация, за исключением учреждения.
Законодательством о приватизации может быть предусмотрено, что доверительными управляющими могут быть и иные лица.
2. Исключен.
3. Доверительный управляющий не может быть выгодоприобретателем по договору доверительного управления имуществом.
Статья 899. Существенные условия договора доверительного управления имуществом
1. В договоре доверительного управления имуществом должны быть указаны:
1) предмет договора, в том числе характеристика имущества, передаваемого в доверительное управление, и его стоимость;
2) пределы использования имущества доверительным управляющим;
3) наименование юридического лица или имя гражданина, в интересах которого осуществляется управление имуществом (вверителя или выгодоприобретателя);
4) размер и форма вознаграждения доверительному управляющему, если выплата вознаграждения предусмотрена договором;
5) срок действия договора.
2. Договор доверительного управления заключается на срок, не превышающий пяти лет. Для отдельных видов имущества, передаваемого в доверительное управление, законодательством могут быть установлены иные предельные сроки, на которые может быть заключен договор.
При отсутствии заявления одной из сторон о прекращении договора по окончании срока его действия он считается продленным на тот же срок и на тех же условиях, какие были предусмотрены договором.
Статья 900. Форма договора доверительного управления имуществом
1. Договор доверительного управления имуществом должен быть заключен в письменной форме.
2. Договор доверительного управления недвижимым имуществом должен быть заключен в форме, предусмотренной для договора продажи недвижимого имущества, и подлежит государственной регистрации.
3. Несоблюдение формы договора доверительного управления или требования о его государственной регистрации влечет за собой недействительность договора.
Статья 901. Обособление имущества, находящегося в доверительном управлении
1. Имущество, переданное в доверительное управление, обособляется от другого имущества вверителя, а также от имущества доверительного управляющего. Это имущество отражается у доверительного управляющего на отдельном балансе (отдельно в книге учета доходов и расходов организаций и индивидуальных предпринимателей, применяющих упрощенную систему налогообложения), и по нему ведется самостоятельный учет. Для расчетов по деятельности, связанной с доверительным управлением, открывается отдельный банковский счет.
2. Обращение взыскания по долгам вверителя на имущество, переданное им в доверительное управление, не допускается, за исключением экономической несостоятельности (банкротства) этого лица. При экономической несостоятельности (банкротстве) вверителя доверительное управление этим имуществом прекращается, и оно включается в конкурсную массу.
Статья 902. Передача в доверительное управление имущества, обремененного залогом
1. Передача заложенного имущества в доверительное управление не лишает залогодержателя права обратить взыскание на это имущество.
2. Доверительный управляющий должен быть предупрежден о том, что передаваемое ему в доверительное управление имущество обременено залогом. Если доверительный управляющий не знал и не должен был знать об обременении залогом имущества, переданного ему в доверительное управление, он вправе потребовать в суде расторжения договора доверительного управления имуществом и уплаты причитающегося ему по договору вознаграждения.
Статья 903. Права и обязанности доверительного управляющего
1. Доверительный управляющий осуществляет в пределах, предусмотренных законодательством или договором доверительного управления, правомочия собственника в отношении имущества, переданного в доверительное управление. Распоряжение недвижимым имуществом доверительный управляющий осуществляет в случаях, предусмотренных договором доверительного управления.
2. Права, приобретенные доверительным управляющим в результате действий по доверительному управлению имуществом, включаются в состав переданного в доверительное управление имущества. Обязанности, возникшие в результате таких действий доверительного управляющего, исполняются за счет этого имущества.
3. Для защиты прав на имущество, находящееся в доверительном управлении, доверительный управляющий вправе требовать всякого устранения нарушения его прав (статьи 282, 283, 285 и 286).
4. Доверительный управляющий представляет вверителю и выгодоприобретателю отчет о своей деятельности в порядке и сроки, установленные договором доверительного управления имуществом.
Статья 904. Передача доверительного управления имуществом
1. Доверительный управляющий осуществляет доверительное управление имуществом лично, кроме случаев, предусмотренных пунктом 2 настоящей статьи.
2. Доверительный управляющий может поручить другому лицу (заместителю) совершать от имени доверительного управляющего действия, необходимые для управления имуществом, если он уполномочен на это договором доверительного управления, либо получил на это согласие вверителя в письменной форме, либо вынужден к этому в силу обстоятельств для обеспечения интересов вверителя или выгодоприобретателя и не имеет при этом возможности получить указания вверителя в разумный срок.
Доверительный управляющий отвечает за действия избранного им заместителя как за собственные.
Статья 905. Ответственность доверительного управляющего
1. Доверительный управляющий, не проявивший при доверительном управлении имуществом должной заботливости об интересах выгодоприобретателя или вверителя, возмещает выгодоприобретателю упущенную выгоду за время доверительного управления имуществом, а вверителю – убытки, причиненные утратой или повреждением имущества, с учетом его естественного износа, в том числе упущенную выгоду.
Доверительный управляющий несет ответственность за причиненные убытки, если не докажет, что эти убытки произошли вследствие непреодолимой силы либо действий выгодоприобретателя или вверителя.
2. Обязательства по сделке, совершенной доверительным управляющим с превышением предоставленных ему полномочий или с нарушением установленных для него ограничений, несет доверительный управляющий лично. Если участвующие в сделке третьи лица не знали и не должны были знать о превышении полномочий или об установленных ограничениях, возникшие обязательства подлежат исполнению в порядке, установленном пунктом 3 настоящей статьи. Вверитель может в этом случае потребовать от доверительного управляющего возмещения понесенных им убытков.
3. Долги по обязательствам, возникшим в связи с доверительным управлением имуществом, погашаются за счет этого имущества. В случае недостаточности этого имущества взыскание может быть обращено на имущество доверительного управляющего, а при недостаточности и его имущества – на имущество вверителя, не переданное в доверительное управление.
4. Договор доверительного управления имуществом может предусматривать предоставление доверительным управляющим залога в обеспечение возмещения убытков, которые могут быть причинены вверителю или выгодоприобретателю ненадлежащим исполнением договора доверительного управления.
Статья 906. Вознаграждение доверительному управляющему
Доверительный управляющий имеет право на вознаграждение, предусмотренное договором доверительного управления имуществом, а также на возмещение необходимых расходов, произведенных им при доверительном управлении имуществом, за счет доходов от использования этого имущества.
Статья 907. Прекращение договора доверительного управления имуществом
1. Договор доверительного управления имуществом прекращается вследствие:
1) смерти гражданина, являющегося выгодоприобретателем, либо объявления его умершим или ликвидации юридического лица – выгодоприобретателя, если договором не предусмотрено иное;
2) отказа выгодоприобретателя от получения выгод по договору, если договором не предусмотрено иное;
3) смерти гражданина, являющегося доверительным управляющим, объявления его умершим, признания недееспособным, ограниченно дееспособным или безвестно отсутствующим, признания индивидуального предпринимателя экономически несостоятельным (банкротом), а также установления запрета доверительному управляющему осуществлять предпринимательскую деятельность в случаях, предусмотренных настоящим Кодексом и иными законодательными актами;
4) отказа доверительного управляющего или вверителя от осуществления доверительного управления в связи с невозможностью для доверительного управляющего лично осуществлять доверительное управление имуществом;
5) отказа вверителя от договора по иным причинам, чем та, которая указана в подпункте 4 настоящего пункта, при условии выплаты доверительному управляющему обусловленного договором вознаграждения;
6) признания лица, являющегося вверителем, экономически несостоятельным (банкротоо( �
7) прекращения опеки и попечительства, если договор доверительного управления был заключен для управления имуществом подопечного в соответствии с пунктом 1 статьи 36 настоящего Кодекса.
2. При отказе одной стороны от договора доверительного управления имуществом другая сторона должна быть уведомлена об этом за три месяца до прекращения договора, если договором не предусмотрен иной срок уведомления.
3. При прекращении доверительного управления имущество, находящееся в доверительном управлении, передается вверителю, если договором не предусмотрено иное.
Статья 908. Доверительное управление ценными бумагами
1. При передаче ценных бумаг в доверительное управление может быть предусмотрено объединение ценных бумаг, передаваемых в доверительное управление разными лицами.
2. Правомочия доверительного управляющего ценными бумагами определяются в договоре доверительного управления.
По договору доверительного управления ценными бумагами доверительному управляющему могут быть переданы денежные средства для приобретения ценных бумаг и управления ими.
3. Особенности доверительного управления ценными бумагами определяются законодательством.
4. Правила настоящей статьи соответственно применяются к правам, удостоверенным бездокументарными ценными бумагами.
Статья 909. Доверительное управление имуществом по основаниям, предусмотренным законодательством
1. Доверительное управление имуществом может быть также учреждено:
1) вследствие необходимости постоянного управления имуществом подопечного или имуществом гражданина, признанного безвестно отсутствующим, в случаях, предусмотренных статьями 36 и 39 настоящего Кодекса;
2) на основании завещания, в котором назначен исполнитель завещания (душеприказчик);
3) по иным основаниям, предусмотренным настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства.
2. Правила, предусмотренные настоящей главой, соответственно применяются к отношениям по доверительному управлению имуществом, возникшему по основаниям, указанным в пункте 1 настоящей статьи, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством и не вытекает из существа таких отношений.
В случаях, когда доверительное управление имуществом возникает по основаниям, указанным в пункте 1 настоящей статьи, права вверителя, предусмотренные правилами настоящей главы, принадлежат соответственно органу опеки и попечительства, исполнителю завещания (душеприказчику) или иному лицу, указанному в законе.
ГЛАВА 53 КОМПЛЕКСНАЯ ПРЕДПРИНИМАТЕЛЬСКАЯ ЛИЦЕНЗИЯ (ФРАНЧАЙЗИНГ)
Статья 910. Договор комплексной предпринимательской лицензии (франчайзинга)
1. По договору комплексной предпринимательской лицензии (франчайзинга) (далее – договор франчайзинга) одна сторона (правообладатель) обязуется предоставить другой стороне (пользователю) за вознаграждение на определенный в договоре франчайзинга срок либо без указания срока лицензионный комплекс, включающий право использования фирменного наименования правообладателя, других объектов интеллектуальной собственности, предусмотренных договором франчайзинга, а также нераскрытой информации в предпринимательской деятельности пользователя.
2. Договор франчайзинга предусматривает использование лицензионного комплекса, указанного в пункте 1 настоящей статьи, в определенном объеме (с установлением минимального и (или) максимального объема использования) с указанием или без указания территории его использования применительно к определенным видам предпринимательской деятельности.
3. Сторонами по договору франчайзинга могут быть коммерческие организации и индивидуальные предприниматели.
4. Вознаграждение по договору франчайзинга может выплачиваться пользователем правообладателю в форме фиксированных разовых или периодических платежей, отчислений от выручки или в иной форме, предусмотренной договором франчайзинга.
Статья 9101. Форма и регистрация договора франчайзинга
1. Договор франчайзинга заключается в письменной форме.
2. Договор франчайзинга подлежит регистрации в патентном органе в порядке, установленном законодательством.
Статья 9102. Комплексная предпринимательская сублицензия
1. Договором франчайзинга может быть предусмотрено право пользователя разрешать другим лицам использование предоставленного ему лицензионного комплекса или части этого комплекса на условиях, согласованных им с правообладателем либо определенных в договоре франчайзинга (комплексная предпринимательская сублицензия). Договором франчайзинга может быть предусмотрена обязанность пользователя предоставить в течение определенного срока определенное количество комплексных предпринимательских сублицензий.
2. Договор комплексной предпринимательской сублицензии не может быть заключен на более длительный срок, чем договор франчайзинга, на основании которого он заключался.
3. Прекращение договора франчайзинга прекращает договор комплексной предпринимательской сублицензии.
4. Ответственность перед правообладателем за действия вторичных пользователей несет пользователь, если иное не предусмотрено договором франчайзинга.
5. К договору комплексной предпринимательской сублицензии применяются предусмотренные настоящей главой правила о договоре франчайзинга, если иное не установлено законодательством.
Статья 9103. Обязанности правообладателя
1. Правообладатель обязан передать пользователю техническую, коммерческую или иную информацию, необходимую пользователю для использования предоставленного ему по договору франчайзинга лицензионного комплекса, а также проинструктировать пользователя и его работников по вопросам, связанным с использованием этого комплекса.
2. Если договором франчайзинга не предусмотрено иное, правообладатель обязан:
оказывать пользователю постоянное техническое и консультативное содействие, включая содействие в обучении работников;
контролировать качество товаров (работ, услуг), производимых (выполняемых, оказываемых) пользователем на основании договора франчайзинга.
Статья 9104. Обязанности пользователя
С учетом характера и особенностей деятельности, осуществляемой пользователем по договору франчайзинга, пользователь обязан:
использовать при осуществлении предусмотренной договором франчайзинга деятельности фирменное наименование правообладателя указанным в этом договоре образом;
обеспечивать соответствие качества товаров (работ, услуг), производимых (выполняемых, оказываемых) пользователем на основе договора франчайзинга, качеству аналогичных товаров (работ, услуг), производимых (выполняемых, оказываемых) непосредственно правообладателем;
соблюдать инструкции и выполнять указания правообладателя, направленные на обеспечение соответствия характера, способов и условий использования лицензионного комплекса тому, как он используется правообладателем, в том числе выполнять указания, касающиеся внешнего и внутреннего оформления помещений, используемых пользователем при исполнении договора франчайзинга;
оказывать покупателям (заказчикам) все дополнительные услуги, на которые они могли бы рассчитывать, приобретая товар, заказывая выполнение работ, оказание услуг непосредственно у правообладателя;
не разглашать полученную от правообладателя нераскрытую информацию, в том числе секреты производства (ноу-хау);
выдавать оговоренное количество комплексных предпринимательских сублицензий, если такая обязанность предусмотрена договором франчайзинга;
информировать покупателей (заказчиков) наиболее очевидным для них способом о том, что он использует фирменное наименование, товарный знак, знак обслуживания или иное средство индивидуализации участников гражданского оборота, товаров, работ или услуг на основании договора франчайзинга.
Статья 9105. Ограничения прав сторон по договору франчайзинга
1. Договором франчайзинга могут быть предусмотрены ограничения прав сторон посредством указания на:
обязательство правообладателя не предоставлять другим лицам аналогичные лицензионные комплексы для их использования на закрепленной за пользователем территории либо воздерживаться от собственной аналогичной деятельности на этой территории;
обязательство пользователя не конкурировать с правообладателем на территории, на которую распространяется действие договора франчайзинга в отношении предпринимательской деятельности, осуществляемой пользователем с использованием принадлежащих правообладателю исключительных прав и нераскрытой информации;
отказ пользователя от получения по договорам франчайзинга аналогичных исключительных прав и нераскрытой информации у конкурентов (потенциальных конкурентов) правообладателя;
обязательство пользователя согласовывать с правообладателем место расположения помещений, используемых при исполнении договора франчайзинга, а также их внешнее и внутреннее оформление.
2. Ограничения прав сторон по договору франчайзинга могут быть признаны судом недействительными по требованию антимонопольного органа или иного заинтересованного лица, если эти ограничения с учетом состояния соответствующего товарного рынка и экономического положения сторон противоречат антимонопольному законодательству.
Статья 9106. Ответственность правообладателя по требованиям, предъявляемым к пользователю
1. Правообладатель несет субсидиарную ответственность по предъявляемым к пользователю требованиям о несоответствии качества товаров (работ, услуг), продаваемых (выполняемых, оказываемых) пользователем по договору франчайзинга, качеству аналогичных товаров (работ, услуг), продаваемых (выполняемых, оказываемых) непосредственно правообладателем.
2. По требованиям, предъявляемым к пользователю как изготовителю продукции (товаров) правообладателя, правообладатель отвечает солидарно с пользователем.
Статья 9107. Изменение договора франчайзинга
1. Договор франчайзинга может быть изменен в соответствии с правилами главы 29 настоящего Кодекса.
2. Изменение договора франчайзинга подлежит регистрации в порядке, установленном для регистрации договоров франчайзинга.
3. В отношениях с третьими лицами стороны договора франчайзинга вправе ссылаться на изменение договора с момента регистрации этого изменения.
Статья 9108. Сохранение договора франчайзинга в силе при перемене сторон
1. Переход от правообладателя к другому лицу какого-либо исключительного права на объект интеллектуальной собственности, входящего в предоставленный пользователю лицензионный комплекс, не является основанием для изменения или расторжения договора франчайзинга. Новый правообладатель становится стороной этого договора в части прав и обязанностей, относящихся к перешедшему к нему исключительному праву на объект интеллектуальной собственности.
2. В случае смерти правообладателя – индивидуального предпринимателя и перехода в установленном законодательством порядке его прав и обязанностей по договору франчайзинга к наследнику договор франчайзинга прекращается, если наследник не зарегистрирован в течение шести месяцев со дня открытия наследства в установленном законодательством порядке в качестве индивидуального предпринимателя.
3. Осуществление прав и исполнение обязанностей умершего правообладателя до принятия наследником этих прав и обязанностей и регистрации его в качестве индивидуального предпринимателя осуществляются доверительным управляющим в соответствии с главой 52 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 9109. Сохранение договора франчайзинга в силе при изменении фирменного наименования
В случае изменения правообладателем своего фирменного наименования договор франчайзинга сохраняется и действует в отношении нового фирменного наименования правообладателя, если пользователь не потребует расторжения договора и возмещения убытков. В случае продолжения действия договора франчайзинга пользователь вправе потребовать соразмерного уменьшения причитающегося правообладателю вознаграждения.
Статья 91010. Последствия прекращения исключительного права, пользование которым предоставлено по договору франчайзинга
1. Если в период действия договора франчайзинга истек срок действия исключительного права, пользование которым предоставлено по этому договору, за исключением прекращения права на фирменное наименование без замены его новым фирменным наименованием, либо такое право прекратилось по иному основанию, договор франчайзинга продолжает действовать, за исключением положений, относящихся к прекратившемуся праву, а пользователь, если иное не предусмотрено договором франчайзинга, вправе потребовать соразмерного уменьшения причитающегося правообладателю вознаграждения.
2. Действие договора франчайзинга прекращается в случае прекращения права на фирменное наименование без замены его новым фирменным наименованием.
Статья 91011. Расторжение договора франчайзинга
1. Договор франчайзинга, заключенный с указанием срока либо без указания срока, может быть расторгнут в соответствии с правилами главы 29 настоящего Кодекса.
2. Каждая из сторон договора франчайзинга, заключенного без указания срока, вправе в любое время полностью отказаться от исполнения договора, уведомив об этом другую сторону за шесть месяцев, если договором не предусмотрен более продолжительный срок.
3. Досрочное расторжение договора франчайзинга, заключенного с указанием срока, а также расторжение договора, заключенного без указания срока, подлежат регистрации в порядке, установленном для регистрации договоров франчайзинга.
ГЛАВА 54 ПРОСТОЕ ТОВАРИЩЕСТВО
Статья 911. Договор простого товарищества (договор о совместной деятельности)
1. По договору простого товарищества (договору о совместной деятельности) двое или несколько лиц (товарищей) обязуются соединить свои вклады и совместно действовать без образования юридического лица для извлечения прибыли или достижения иной не противоречащей законодательству цели.
2. Сторонами договора простого товарищества, заключаемого для осуществления предпринимательской деятельности, могут быть только индивидуальные предприниматели и (или) коммерческие организации.
Статья 912. Вклады товарищей
1. Вкладом товарища признается все то, что он вносит в общее дело, в том числе деньги, иное имущество, профессиональные и иные знания, навыки и умения, а также деловая репутация и деловые связи.
2. Вклады товарищей предполагаются равными по стоимости, если иное не следует из договора простого товарищества или фактических обстоятельств. Оценка стоимости неденежного вклада товарища производится по соглашению между товарищами.
Статья 913. Общее имущество товарищей
1. Внесенное товарищами имущество, которым они обладали на праве собственности, а также произведенная в результате совместной деятельности продукция и полученные от такой деятельности плоды и доходы признаются их общей долевой собственностью, поскольку иное не установлено законодательством или договором простого товарищества либо не вытекает из существа обязательства.
Внесенное товарищами имущество, которым они обладали по основаниям, отличным от права собственности (на праве хозяйственного владения, оперативного управления, по договору аренды, по договору безвозмездного пользования имуществом и т.п.), используется в интересах всех товарищей и составляет наряду с имуществом, находящимся в их общей собственности, общее имущество товарищей.
2. Ведение бухгалтерского учета общего имущества товарищей может быть поручено ими одному из участвующих в договоре лиц.
3. Пользование общим имуществом товарищей осуществляется по их общему согласию, а при недостижении согласия – в порядке, устанавливаемом судом.
4. Обязанности товарищей по содержанию общего имущества и порядок возмещения расходов, связанных с выполнением этих обязанностей, предусматриваются договором.
Статья 914. Ведение общих дел товарищей
1. При ведении общих дел каждый товарищ вправе действовать от имени всех товарищей, если договором простого товарищества не установлено, что ведение дел осуществляется отдельными участниками либо совместно всеми участниками договора простого товарищества.
При совместном ведении дел для совершения каждой сделки требуется согласие всех товарищей.
2. В отношениях с третьими лицами полномочие товарища совершать сделки от имени всех товарищей удостоверяется доверенностью, выданной ему остальными товарищами, или договором товарищества, совершенным в письменной форме.
3. В отношениях с третьими лицами товарищи не могут ссылаться на ограничения прав по ведению общих дел товарища, совершившего сделку, за исключением случаев, когда они докажут, что в момент заключения сделки третье лицо знало или заведомо должно было знать о наличии таких ограничений.
4. Товарищ, совершивший от имени всех товарищей сделки, в отношении которых его право на ведение общих дел товарищей было ограничено, либо заключивший в интересах всех товарищей сделки от своего имени, может требовать возмещения произведенных им за свой счет расходов, если имелись достаточные основания полагать, что эти сделки были необходимыми в интересах всех товарищей. Товарищи, понесшие вследствие таких сделок убытки, вправе требовать их возмещения.
5. Решения, касающиеся общих дел товарищей, принимаются товарищами по общему согласию.
Статья 915. Право товарища на информацию
Каждый товарищ независимо от того, уполномочен ли он вести общие дела товарищей, вправе знакомиться со всей документацией по ведению дел. Отказ от этого права или его ограничение, в том числе по соглашению товарищей, ничтожны.
Статья 916. Общие расходы и убытки товарищей
Порядок покрытия расходов и убытков, связанных с совместной деятельностью товарищей, определяется их соглашением. При отсутствии такого соглашения каждый товарищ несет расходы и убытки пропорционально стоимости его вклада в общее дело.
Соглашение, полностью освобождающее кого-либо из товарищей от участия в покрытии общих расходов или убытков, ничтожно.
Статья 917. Ответственность товарищей по общим обязательствам
1. Если договор простого товарищества не связан с осуществлением его участниками предпринимательской деятельности, каждый товарищ отвечает по общим договорным обязательствам всем своим имуществом пропорционально стоимости его вклада в общее дело.
По общим обязательствам, возникшим не из договора, товарищи отвечают солидарно.
2. Если договор простого товарищества связан с осуществлением его участниками предпринимательской деятельности, товарищи отвечают солидарно по всем общим обязательствам независимо от оснований их возникновения.
Статья 918. Распределение прибыли
Прибыль, полученная товарищами в результате их совместной деятельности, распределяется пропорционально стоимости вкладов товарищей в общее дело, если иное не предусмотрено договором простого товарищества или иным соглашением товарищей. Соглашение об устранении кого-либо из товарищей от участия в прибыли ничтожно.
Статья 919. Выдел доли товарища по требованию его кредитора
Кредитор участника договора простого товарищества вправе предъявить требование о выделе доли должника в общем имуществе в соответствии со статьей 258 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 920. Прекращение договора простого товарищества
1. Договор простого товарищества прекращается вследствие:
1) признания кого-либо из товарищей безвестно отсутствующим, недееспособным или ограниченно дееспособным, если договором простого товарищества или последующим соглашением не предусмотрено сохранение договора в отношениях между остальными товарищами;
2) объявления кого-либо из товарищей экономически несостоятельным (банкротом), за изъятием, указанным в подпункте 1 настоящего пункта;
3) смерти товарища (объявления его умершим) или ликвидации либо реорганизации участвующего в договоре простого товарищества юридического лица, если договором простого товарищества или последующим соглашением не предусмотрено сохранение договора в отношениях между остальными товарищами либо замещение умершего товарища (реорганизованного юридического лица) его наследниками (правопреемниками);
4) отказа кого-либо из товарищей от дальнейшего участия в бессрочном договоре простого товарищества, за изъятием, указанным в подпункте 1 настоящего пункта;
5) расторжения договора простого товарищества, заключенного с указанием срока, по требованию одного из товарищей в отношениях между ним и остальными товарищами, за изъятием, указанным в подпункте 1 настоящего пункта;
6) истечения срока договора простого товарищества;
7) выдела доли товарища по требованию его кредитора, за изъятием, указанным в подпункте 1 настоящего пункта.
2. При прекращении договора простого товарищества вещи, переданные в общее владение и (или) пользование товарищей, возвращаются предоставившим их товарищам без вознаграждения, если иное не предусмотрено соглашением сторон.
С момента прекращения договора простого товарищества его участники несут солидарную ответственность по неисполненным общим обязательствам в отношении третьих лиц.
Раздел имущества, находившегося в общей собственности товарищей, и возникших у них общих прав требования осуществляется в порядке, установленном статьей 255 настоящего Кодекса.
Товарищ, внесший в общую собственность индивидуально-определенную вещь, вправе при прекращении договора простого товарищества требовать в судебном порядке возврата ему этой вещи при условии соблюдения интересов остальных товарищей и кредиторов.
Статья 921. Отказ от бессрочного договора простого товарищества
Заявление об отказе товарища от бессрочного договора простого товарищества должно быть сделано им не позднее чем за три месяца до предполагаемого выхода из договора.
Соглашение об ограничении права на отказ от бессрочного договора простого товарищества является ничтожным.
Статья 922. Расторжение договора простого товарищества по требованию стороны
Наряду с основаниями, указанными в пункте 2 статьи 420 настоящего Кодекса, сторона договора простого товарищества, заключенного с указанием срока или с указанием цели в качестве отменительного условия, вправе требовать расторжения договора в отношениях между собой и остальными товарищами по уважительной причине с возмещением остальным товарищам реального ущерба, причиненного расторжением договора.
Статья 923. Ответственность товарища, в отношении которого договор простого товарищества расторгнут
В случае, если договор простого товарищества не был прекращен в результате заявления кем-либо из участников об отказе от дальнейшего в нем участия либо расторжения договора по требованию одного из товарищей, лицо, участие которого в договоре прекратилось, отвечает перед третьими лицами по общим обязательствам, возникшим в период его участия в договоре, так, как если бы оно осталось участником договора простого товарищества.
Статья 924. Негласное товарищество
1. Договором простого товарищества может быть предусмотрено, что его существование не раскрывается для третьих лиц (негласное товарищество). К такому договору применяются предусмотренные настоящей главой правила о договоре простого товарищества, если иное не предусмотрено настоящей статьей или не вытекает из существа негласного товарищества.
2. В отношениях с третьими лицами каждый из участников негласного товарищества отвечает всем своим имуществом по сделкам, которые он заключил от своего имени в общих интересах товарищей.
3. В отношениях между товарищами обязательства, возникшие в процессе их совместной деятельности, считаются общими.
ГЛАВА 55 ПУБЛИЧНОЕ ОБЕЩАНИЕ НАГРАДЫ
Статья 925. Обязанность выплаты награды
1. Лицо, объявившее публично о выплате денежного вознаграждения или о выдаче иной награды (о выплате награды) тому, кто совершит указанное в объявлении действие в указанный в нем срок, обязано выплатить обещанную награду любому, кто совершил соответствующее действие, в частности отыскал утраченную вещь или сообщил лицу, объявившему о награде, необходимые сведения.
2. Обязанность выплатить награду возникает при условии, что обещание награды позволяет установить, кем она обещана. Лицо, отозвавшееся на обещание, вправе потребовать письменного подтверждения обещания и несет риск последствий непредъявления этого требования, если окажется, что в действительности объявление о награде не было сделано указанным в нем лицом.
3. Если в публичном обещании награды не указан ее размер, он определяется по соглашению с лицом, обещавшим награду, а в случае спора – судом.
4. Обязанность выплаты награды возникает независимо от того, совершено ли соответствующее действие в связи со сделанным объявлением или независимо от него.
5. В случаях, если действие, указанное в объявлении, совершили несколько лиц, право на получение награды приобретает то из них, которое совершило соответствующее действие первым.
Если действие, указанное в объявлении, совершено двумя или более лицами и невозможно определить, кто из них совершил соответствующее действие первым, а также в случае, если действие совершено двумя или более лицами одновременно, награда между ними делится поровну или в ином размере, предусмотренном соглашением между ними.
6. Если иное не предусмотрено в объявлении о награде и не вытекает из характера указанного в нем действия, соответствие выполненного действия содержащимся в объявлении требованиям определяется лицом, публично обещавшим награду, а в случае спора – судом.
Статья 926. Отмена публичного обещания награды
1. Лицо, объявившее публично о выплате награды, вправе в такой же форме отказаться от данного обещания, кроме случаев, когда в самом объявлении предусмотрена или из него вытекает недопустимость отказа или дан определенный срок для совершения действия, за которое обещана награда, либо к моменту объявления об отказе одно или несколько отозвавшихся лиц уже выполнили указанное в объявлении действие.
2. Отмена публичного обещания награды не освобождает того, кто объявил о награде, от возмещения лицу, отозвавшемуся до отмены публичного обещания награды, расходов, понесенных им в связи с совершением указанного в объявлении действия, в пределах указанной в объявлении награды.
ГЛАВА 56 ПУБЛИЧНЫЙ КОНКУРС
Статья 927. Организация публичного конкурса
1. Лицо, объявившее публично о выплате денежного вознаграждения или выдаче иной награды (о выплате награды) за лучшее выполнение работы или достижение иных результатов (публичный конкурс), должно выплатить (выдать) обусловленную награду тому, кто в соответствии с условиями проведения конкурса признан его победителем.
2. Публичный конкурс должен быть направлен на достижение каких-либо общественно полезных целей.
3. Публичный конкурс может быть открытым, если предложение организатора конкурса принять в нем участие обращено ко всем желающим путем объявления в печати или иных средствах массовой информации, либо закрытым, если предложение принять участие в конкурсе направляется определенному кругу лиц по выбору организатора конкурса.
Открытый конкурс может быть обусловлен предварительной квалификацией его участников, когда организатором конкурса проводится предварительный отбор лиц, пожелавших принять в нем участие.
4. Объявление о публичном конкурсе должно содержать, по крайней мере, условия, предусматривающие существо задания, критерии и порядок оценки результатов работы или иных достижений, место, срок и порядок их представления, размер и форму награды, а также порядок и сроки объявления результатов конкурса.
5. К публичному конкурсу, содержащему обязательство заключить с победителем конкурса договор, правила, предусмотренные настоящей главой, применяются постольку, поскольку статьями 417-419 настоящего Кодекса не предусмотрено иное.
Статья 928. Изменение условий и отмена публичного конкурса
1. Лицо, объявившее публичный конкурс, вправе изменить его условия или отменить конкурс только в течение первой половины установленного для представления работ срока.
2. Извещение об изменении условий или отмене конкурса должно быть сделано тем же способом, каким конкурс был объявлен.
3. В случае изменения условий конкурса или его отмены лицо, объявившее о конкурсе, должно возместить расходы, понесенные любым лицом, которое выполнило предусмотренную в объявлении работу до того, как ему стало или должно было стать известно об изменении условий конкурса или о его отмене.
4. Если при изменении условий конкурса или его отмене были нарушены требования, указанные в пунктах 1 или 2 настоящей статьи, лицо, объявившее конкурс, должно выплатить награду тем, кто выполнил работу, соответствующую указанным в объявлении условиям.
Статья 929. Решение о выплате награды
1. Решение о выплате награды должно быть вынесено и сообщено участникам публичного конкурса в порядке и сроки, установленные в объявлении о конкурсе.
2. Если указанные в объявлении результаты достигнуты в работе, выполненной совместно двумя или более лицами, награда распределяется в соответствии с достигнутым между ними соглашением. Если такое соглашение не достигнуто, порядок распределения награды определяется судом.
Статья 930. Использование произведений науки, литературы и искусства, удостоенных награды
1. Если предмет публичного конкурса составляет создание произведения науки, литературы или искусства и условиями конкурса не предусмотрено иное, лицо, объявившее публичный конкурс, приобретает преимущественное право на заключение с автором произведения, удостоенного обусловленной награды, договора об использовании произведения с выплатой ему за это соответствующего вознаграждения.
2. Лицо, объявившее публичный конкурс, обязано возвратить участникам конкурса работы, не удостоенные награды, если иное не предусмотрено объявлением о конкурсе и не вытекает из характера выполненной работы.
ГЛАВА 57 ПРОВЕДЕНИЕ ИГР И ПАРИ
Статья 931. Требования, связанные с организацией игр и пари и участием в них
Требования граждан и юридических лиц, связанные с организацией игр и пари или с участием в них, не подлежат судебной защите, за исключением требований лиц, принявших участие в играх или пари под влиянием обмана, насилия, угрозы либо злонамеренного соглашения их представителя с организатором игр или пари, а также требований, указанных в пункте 5 статьи 932 настоящего Кодекса, и иных случаев, установленных законодательными актами.
Статья 932. Проведение лотерей, тотализаторов и иных игр Республикой Беларусь и административно-территориальными единицами или по их разрешению
1. Право на деятельность по учреждению, организации и проведению лотерей в Республике Беларусь принадлежит государству и в установленном порядке осуществляется республиканскими органами государственного управления, местными исполнительными и распорядительными органами, государственными юридическими лицами. Отношения между организаторами лотерей, тотализаторов (взаимных пари), других основанных на риске игр и участниками игр осуществляются в соответствии с законодательством и основаны на договоре.
2. Договор между организатором и участником игр заключается на добровольной основе и оформляется выдачей лотерейного билета, квитанции, другого документа или иным предусмотренным правилами организации игры способом.
3. Предложение о заключении договора, предусмотренного пунктом 1 настоящей статьи, должно включать условия о сроке проведения игр, порядке определения выигрыша и его размере.
В случае отказа организатора игр от их проведения в установленный срок участники игр вправе требовать от их организатора возмещения понесенного реального ущерба из-за отмены игр или
переноса их срока.
4. Лицам, которые в соответствии с условиями проведения лотереи, тотализатора или иных игр признаются выигравшими, должен быть выплачен организатором игр выигрыш в предусмотренных условиями проведения игр размере, форме (денежной или натуральной) и в срок, а если срок в этих условиях не указан, – не позднее десяти дней с момента предъявления требования о выплате выигрыша.
5. В случае неисполнения организатором игр обязанности, указанной в пункте 4 настоящей статьи, участник, выигравший в лотерее, тотализаторе или иных играх, вправе требовать от организатора игр выплаты выигрыша, а также возмещения убытков, причиненных нарушением договора со стороны организатора.
ГЛАВА 58 ОБЯЗАТЕЛЬСТВА ВСЛЕДСТВИЕ ПРИЧИНЕНИЯ ВРЕДА
§ 1. Общие положения о возмещении вреда
Статья 933. Общие основания ответственности за причинение вреда
1. Вред, причиненный личности или имуществу гражданина, а также вред, причиненный имуществу юридического лица, подлежит возмещению в полном объеме лицом, причинившим вред.
Законом может быть возложена обязанность возмещения вреда на лицо, не являющееся причинителем вреда.
Законом или договором может быть установлена обязанность причинителя вреда выплатить потерпевшим компенсацию сверх возмещения вреда.
2. Лицо, причинившее вред, освобождается от возмещения вреда, если докажет, что вред причинен не по его вине. Законом может быть предусмотрено возмещение вреда и при отсутствии вины причинителя.
3. Вред, причиненный правомерными действиями, подлежит возмещению в случаях, предусмотренных законодательством.
В возмещении вреда может быть отказано, если вред причинен по просьбе или с согласия потерпевшего, а действия причинителя не нарушают нравственных принципов общества.
Статья 934. Предупреждение причинения вреда
1. Опасность причинения вреда в будущем может явиться основанием к иску о запрещении деятельности, создающей такую опасность.
2. Если причиненный вред является последствием эксплуатации предприятия, сооружения либо иной производственной деятельности, которая продолжает причинять вред или угрожает новым вредом, суд вправе обязать ответчика, помимо возмещения вреда, приостановить или прекратить соответствующую деятельность.
Суд может отказать в иске о приостановлении либо прекращении соответствующей деятельности лишь в случае, если ее приостановление или прекращение противоречит государственным и общественным интересам. Отказ в приостановлении или прекращении такой деятельности не лишает потерпевших права на возмещение вреда, причиненного этой деятельностью.
Статья 935. Причинение вреда в состоянии необходимой обороны
Не подлежит возмещению вред, причиненный в состоянии необходимой обороны, если при этом не были превышены ее пределы.
Статья 936. Причинение вреда в состоянии крайней необходимости
Вред, причиненный в состоянии крайней необходимости, то есть для устранения опасности, угрожающей самому причинителю или другим лицам, если эта опасность при данных обстоятельствах не могла быть устранена иными средствами, должен быть возмещен лицом, причинившим вред.
Учитывая обстоятельства, при которых был причинен такой вред, суд может возложить обязанность его возмещения на третье лицо, в интересах которого действовал причинивший вред, либо освободить от возмещения вреда полностью или частично как это третье лицо, так и лицо, причинившее вред.
Статья 937. Ответственность юридического лица или гражданина за вред, причиненный его работником
1. Юридическое лицо либо гражданин возмещает вред, причиненный его работником при исполнении своих трудовых (служебных, должностных) обязанностей.
Применительно к правилам, предусмотренным настоящей главой, работниками признаются граждане, выполняющие работу на основании трудового договора (контракта), а также граждане, выполняющие работу по гражданско-правовому договору, если при этом они действовали или должны были действовать по заданию соответствующего юридического лица или гражданина и под его контролем за безопасным ведением работ.
2. Хозяйственные товарищества и производственные кооперативы возмещают вред, причиненный их участниками (членами) при осуществлении последними предпринимательской, производственной или иной деятельности товарищества или кооператива.
Статья 938. Ответственность за вред, причиненный государственными органами, органами местного управления и самоуправления, а также их должностными лицами
Вред, причиненный гражданину или юридическому лицу в результате незаконных действий (бездействия) государственных органов, органов местного управления и самоуправления либо должностных лиц этих органов, в том числе в результате издания не соответствующего законодательству акта государственного органа или органа местного управления и самоуправления, подлежит возмещению. Вред возмещается соответственно за счет казны Республики Беларусь или казны административно-территориальной единицы.
Статья 939. Ответственность за вред, причиненный незаконными действиями органов уголовного преследования и суда
1. Вред, причиненный гражданину в результате незаконного осуждения, применения принудительных мер безопасности и лечения, привлечения в качестве обвиняемого, задержания, содержания под стражей, домашнего ареста, применения подписки о невыезде и надлежащем поведении, временного отстранения от должности, помещения в психиатрическое (психоневрологическое) учреждение, незаконного наложения административного взыскания в виде административного ареста, исправительных работ, возмещается за счет казны Республики Беларусь, а в случаях, предусмотренных законодательством, – за счет казны административно- территориальной единицы в полном объеме независимо от вины должностных лиц органов уголовного преследования и суда в порядке, установленном законодательными актами.
2. Вред, причиненный гражданину или юридическому лицу в результате незаконной деятельности органов уголовного преследования, не повлекшей последствий, предусмотренных пунктом 1 настоящей статьи, возмещается по основаниям и в порядке, предусмотренным статьей 938 настоящего Кодекса. Вред, причиненный при осуществлении правосудия, возмещается в случае, если вина судьи установлена приговором суда, вступившим в законную силу.
Статья 940. Органы и лица, выступающие от имени казны при возмещении вреда за ее счет
В случаях, когда в соответствии с настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства причиненный вред подлежит возмещению за счет казны Республики Беларусь, казны административно-территориальной единицы, от имени казны выступают соответствующие финансовые органы, если в соответствии с пунктом 3 статьи 125 настоящего Кодекса эта обязанность не возложена на другой орган, юридическое лицо или гражданина.
Статья 941. Возмещение вреда лицом, застраховавшим свою ответственность
Юридическое лицо или гражданин, застраховавшие свою ответственность в порядке добровольного или обязательного страхования в пользу потерпевшего (статья 823, пункт 1 статьи 825), в случае, когда страхового возмещения недостаточно для того, чтобы полностью возместить причиненный вред, возмещают разницу между страховым возмещением и фактическим размером ущерба.
Статья 942. Ответственность за вред, причиненный несовершеннолетним в возрасте до четырнадцати лет
1. За вред, причиненный несовершеннолетним, не достигшим четырнадцати лет (малолетним), отвечают его родители, усыновители или опекун, если не докажут, что вред возник не по их вине.
2. Если малолетний, нуждающийся в опеке, находился в организации, которая в соответствии с законодательством является его опекуном (организации здравоохранения, учреждении образования, учреждении социального обслуживания, иной организации), эта организация обязана возместить вред, причиненный малолетним, если не докажет, что вред возник не по ее вине.
3. Если малолетний причинил вред в то время, когда находился под надзором организации здравоохранения, учреждения образования или иной организации, обязанных осуществлять за ним надзор, либо лица, осуществляющего надзор на основании договора, эта организация либо лицо отвечают за вред, если не докажут, что вред возник не из-за недостатков при осуществлении надзора.
4. Обязанность родителей, усыновителей, опекуна, организации здравоохранения, учреждения образования и иной организации по возмещению вреда не прекращается с достижением малолетним совершеннолетия или получением им имущества, достаточного для возмещения вреда.
Если родители, усыновители, опекун либо другие граждане, указанные в пункте 3 настоящей статьи, умерли или не имеют достаточных средств для возмещения вреда, причиненного жизни или здоровью потерпевшего, а сам причинитель, ставший полностью дееспособным, обладает такими средствами, суд с учетом имущественного положения потерпевшего и причинителя вреда, а также других обстоятельств вправе принять решение о возмещении вреда полностью или частично за счет самого причинителя вреда.
Статья 943. Ответственность за вред, причиненный несовершеннолетним в возрасте от четырнадцати до восемнадцати лет
1. Несовершеннолетний в возрасте от четырнадцати до восемнадцати лет самостоятельно несет ответственность за причиненный вред на общих основаниях.
2. В случае, когда у несовершеннолетнего в возрасте от четырнадцати до восемнадцати лет нет доходов или иного имущества, достаточных для возмещения вреда, вред должен быть возмещен полностью или в недостающей части его родителями, усыновителями или попечителем, если они не докажут, что вред возник не по их вине.
Если несовершеннолетний в возрасте от четырнадцати до восемнадцати лет, нуждающийся в попечении, находился в организации, которая в соответствии с законодательством является его попечителем (организации здравоохранения, учреждении образования, учреждении социального обслуживания, иной организации), эта организация обязана возместить вред полностью или в недостающей части, если не докажет, что вред возник не по ее вине.
3. Обязанность родителей, усыновителей, попечителя и соответствующей организации по возмещению вреда, причиненного несовершеннолетним в возрасте от четырнадцати до восемнадцати лет, прекращается по достижении причинившим вред совершеннолетия, либо в случае, когда у него до достижения совершеннолетия появились доходы или иное имущество, достаточные для возмещения вреда, либо когда он до достижения совершеннолетия приобрел дееспособность.
Статья 944. Ответственность родителей, лишенных родительских прав, за вред, причиненный несовершеннолетним
На родителя, лишенного родительских прав, суд может возложить ответственность за вред, причиненный его несовершеннолетним ребенком, в течение трех лет после лишения родительских прав, если поведение ребенка, повлекшее причинение вреда, явилось следствием ненадлежащего осуществления родительских обязанностей.
Статья 945. Ответственность за вред, причиненный гражданином, признанным недееспособным
1. Вред, причиненный гражданином, признанным недееспособным, возмещают его опекун или организация, обязанная осуществлять за ним надзор, если не докажут, что вред возник не по их вине.
2. Обязанность опекуна или организации, обязанной осуществлять надзор, по возмещению вреда, причиненного гражданином, признанным недееспособным, не прекращается в случае последующего признания его дееспособным.
3. Если опекун умер либо не имеет достаточных средств для возмещения вреда, причиненного жизни или здоровью потерпевшего, а сам причинитель обладает такими средствами, суд с учетом имущественного положения потерпевшего и причинителя, а также других обстоятельств вправе принять решение о возмещении вреда полностью или частично за счет самого причинителя вреда.
Статья 946. Ответственность за вред, причиненный гражданином, признанным ограниченно дееспособным
Вред, причиненный гражданином, ограниченным в дееспособности вследствие злоупотребления спиртными напитками, наркотическими средствами, психотропными веществами, их аналогами, возмещается самим причинителем вреда.
Статья 947. Ответственность за вред, причиненный гражданином, не способным понимать значение своих действий
1. Дееспособный гражданин, а также несовершеннолетний в возрасте от четырнадцати до восемнадцати лет, причинивший вред в таком состоянии, когда он не мог понимать значение своих действий или руководить ими, не отвечает за причиненный им вред.
Если вред причинен жизни или здоровью потерпевшего, суд может с учетом имущественного положения потерпевшего и причинителя вреда, а также других обстоятельств возложить обязанность по возмещению вреда полностью или частично на причинителя вреда.
2. Причинитель вреда не освобождается от ответственности, если сам привел себя употреблением спиртных напитков, наркотических средств, психотропных веществ, их аналогов или иным способом в такое состояние, в котором не мог понимать значение своих действий и руководить ими.
3. Если вред причинен лицом, которое не могло понимать значение своих действий или руководить ими вследствие психического расстройства (заболевания), обязанность возместить вред может быть возложена судом на проживающих совместно с этим лицом его трудоспособных супруга, родителей, совершеннолетних детей, которые знали о психическом расстройстве (заболевании) причинителя вреда, но не ставили вопрос о признании его недееспособным.
Статья 948. Ответственность за вред, причиненный деятельностью, создающей повышенную опасность для окружающих
1. Юридические лица и граждане, деятельность которых связана с повышенной опасностью для окружающих (использование транспортных средств, механизмов, электрической энергии высокого напряжения, атомной энергии, взрывчатых веществ, сильнодействующих ядов и т.п.; осуществление строительной и иной, связанной с нею деятельности и др.), обязаны возместить вред, причиненный источником повышенной опасности, если не докажут, что вред возник вследствие непреодолимой силы или умысла потерпевшего. Владелец источника повышенной опасности может быть освобожден судом от ответственности полностью или частично также по основаниям, предусмотренным пунктами 2 и 3 статьи 952 настоящего Кодекса.
Обязанность возмещения вреда возлагается на юридическое лицо или гражданина, которые владеют источником повышенной опасности на праве собственности либо на ином законном основании, в том числе на праве аренды (за исключением аренды транспортного средства с экипажем (статья 611), по доверенности на право управления транспортным средством, в силу распоряжения соответствующего органа о передаче ему источника повышенной опасности и т.п.
2. Владельцы источников повышенной опасности солидарно несут ответственность за вред, причиненный в результате взаимодействия этих источников (столкновения транспортных средств и т.п.) третьим лицам, по основаниям, предусмотренным пунктом 1 настоящей статьи.
Вред, причиненный в результате взаимодействия источников повышенной опасности их владельцам, возмещается на общих основаниях (статья 933).
3. Владелец источника повышенной опасности не отвечает за вред, причиненный этим источником, если докажет, что источник выбыл из его обладания в результате противоправных действий других лиц. Ответственность за вред, причиненный источником повышенной опасности, в таких случаях несут лица, противоправно завладевшие источником. При наличии вины владельца в противоправном изъятии этого источника из его обладания ответственность может быть возложена как на владельца, так и на лицо, противоправно завладевшее источником повышенной опасности.
Статья 949. Ответственность за совместно причиненный вред
Лица, совместно причинившие вред, отвечают перед потерпевшим солидарно.
По заявлению потерпевшего и в его интересах суд вправе возложить на лиц, совместно причинивших вред, ответственность в долях, определив их применительно к правилам, предусмотренным пунктом 2 статьи 950 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 950. Право регресса к лицу, причинившему вред
1. Лицо, возместившее вред, причиненный другим лицом (работником при исполнении им служебных, должностных или иных трудовых обязанностей, лицом, управляющим транспортным средством и т.п.), имеет право обратного требования (регресса) к этому лицу в размере выплаченного возмещения, если иной размер не определен законодательством, или в порядке, им устанавливаемом.
2. Причинитель вреда, возместивший совместно причиненный вред, вправе требовать с каждого из причинителей вреда долю выплаченного потерпевшему возмещения в размере, соответствующем степени вины этого причинителя вреда. При невозможности определения степени вины доли признаются равными.
3. Республика Беларусь, административно-территориальные единицы, возместившие вред, причиненный должностными лицами органов уголовного преследования и суда (пункт 1 статьи 939), имеют право регресса к этим лицам, если вина таких лиц установлена приговором суда, вступившим в законную силу.
4. Лица, возместившие вред по основаниям, указанным в статьях 942-945 настоящего Кодекса, не имеют права регресса к лицу, причинившему вред.
Статья 951. Способы возмещения вреда
Удовлетворяя требование о возмещении вреда, суд в соответствии с обстоятельствами дела обязывает лицо, ответственное за причинение вреда, возместить вред в натуре (предоставить вещь того же рода и качества, исправить поврежденную вещь и т.п.) или возместить причиненные убытки (пункт 2 статьи 14).
Статья 952. Учет вины потерпевшего и имущественного положения лица, причинившего вред
1. Вред, возникший вследствие умысла потерпевшего, возмещению не подлежит.
2. Если грубая неосторожность самого потерпевшего содействовала возникновению вреда или его увеличению, в зависимости от степени вины потерпевшего и причинителя вреда размер возмещения должен быть уменьшен.
При грубой неосторожности потерпевшего и отсутствии вины причинителя вреда в случаях, когда его ответственность наступает независимо от вины, размер возмещения должен быть уменьшен или в возмещении вреда может быть отказано, если законодательством не предусмотрено иное. При причинении вреда жизни или здоровью гражданина отказ в возмещении вреда не допускается.
Вина потерпевшего не учитывается при возмещении дополнительных расходов (пункт 1 статьи 954), при возмещении вреда в связи со смертью кормильца (статья 958), а также при возмещении расходов на погребение (статья 963).
3. Суд может уменьшить размер возмещения вреда, причиненного гражданином, с учетом его имущественного положения, за исключением случаев, когда вред причинен действиями, совершенными умышленно.
§ 2. Возмещение вреда, причиненного жизни или здоровью гражданина
Статья 953. Возмещение вреда, причиненного жизни или здоровью гражданина при исполнении договорных либо иных обязательств
Вред, причиненный жизни или здоровью гражданина при исполнении договорных обязательств, а также при исполнении обязанностей военной службы, службы в органах внутренних дел и других соответствующих обязанностей, возмещается по правилам, предусмотренным настоящей главой, если законодательством или договором не предусмотрен более высокий размер ответственности.
Статья 954. Объем и характер возмещения вреда, причиненного повреждением здоровья
1. При причинении гражданину увечья или иного повреждения здоровья возмещению подлежат утраченный потерпевшим заработок (доход), который он имел либо определенно мог иметь, а также дополнительно понесенные расходы, вызванные повреждением здоровья, в том числе расходы на лечение, дополнительное питание, приобретение лекарственных средств, протезирование, посторонний уход, санаторно-курортное лечение, приобретение технических средств социальной реабилитации, подготовку к другой профессии, если установлено, что потерпевший нуждается в этих видах помощи и ухода и не имеет прав на их бесплатное получение.
2. При определении утраченного заработка (дохода) пенсии (кроме пенсии по инвалидности, назначенной потерпевшему в связи с соответствующим увечьем или иным повреждением здоровья), назначенные как до, так и после причинения вреда здоровью, не принимаются во внимание и не влекут уменьшения размера вреда (не засчитываются в счет возмещения вреда). В счет возмещения вреда не засчитывается также заработок (доход), получаемый потерпевшим после повреждения здоровья.
3. Объем и размер возмещения вреда, причитающегося потерпевшему в соответствии с настоящей статьей, могут быть увеличены на основании законодательства или договора.
Статья 955. Определение заработка (дохода), утраченного в результате повреждения здоровья
1. Размер подлежащего возмещению утраченного потерпевшим заработка (дохода) определяется в процентах к его откорректированному в установленном порядке с учетом инфляции среднему месячному заработку (доходу) до увечья или иного повреждения здоровья либо до утраты им трудоспособности, соответствующих степени утраты потерпевшим профессиональной трудоспособности, а при отсутствии профессиональной трудоспособности – степени утраты общей трудоспособности.
2. В состав утраченного потерпевшим заработка (дохода) включаются все виды оплаты его труда по трудовым и гражданско-правовым договорам, облагаемые подоходным налогом с физических лиц. Не учитываются выплаты единовременного характера, в том числе выплачиваемые при увольнении компенсация за неиспользованный трудовой отпуск и выходное пособие. Пособие, выплаченное за период временной нетрудоспособности и отпуска по беременности и родам, учитывается. Доходы от предпринимательской деятельности, деятельности, указанной в абзацах втором, третьем, двенадцатом – тридцать первом, тридцать третьем – сорок четвертом части четвертой пункта 1 статьи 1 настоящего Кодекса, а также авторское вознаграждение включаются в состав утраченного потерпевшим заработка (дохода).
Все виды заработка (дохода) учитываются в суммах, определенных до налогообложения и удержания обязательных страховых взносов в бюджет государственного внебюджетного фонда социальной защиты населения Республики Беларусь.
3. Среднемесячный заработок (доход) потерпевшего определяется путем деления общей суммы его заработка (дохода) за двенадцать месяцев работы, предшествующих причинению увечья, утрате либо снижению трудоспособности в связи с увечьем (по выбору потерпевшего), на двенадцать.
Среднемесячный доход потерпевшего, осуществляющего предпринимательскую деятельность, деятельность, указанную в абзацах втором, третьем, двенадцатом – тридцать первом, тридцать третьем – сорок четвертом части четвертой пункта 1 статьи 1 настоящего Кодекса, определяется
путем деления общей суммы его дохода за календарный год либо четыре квартала деятельности, предшествующие году (кварталу) причинения увечья, утраты либо снижения трудоспособности в связи с увечьем (по выбору потерпевшего), на двенадцать.
В случае профессионального заболевания среднемесячный заработок (доход) потерпевшего может определяться также за двенадцать последних месяцев (календарный год, четыре квартала) работы, предшествующих прекращению работы, повлекшей такое заболевание.
В случае, когда потерпевший ко времени причинения вреда работал, осуществлял предпринимательскую деятельность, деятельность, указанную в абзацах втором, третьем, двенадцатом – тридцать первом, тридцать третьем – сорок четвертом части четвертой пункта 1 статьи 1 настоящего Кодекса, менее двенадцати месяцев, среднемесячный заработок (доход) определяется путем деления общей суммы его заработка (дохода) за фактически проработанное число месяцев на число этих месяцев. Не полностью проработанные потерпевшим месяцы по его желанию заменяются предшествующими полностью проработанными месяцами либо исключаются из подсчета при невозможности их замены.
4. В случае, когда потерпевший на момент причинения вреда не работал, не осуществлял предпринимательскую деятельность, деятельность, указанную в абзацах втором, третьем, двенадцатом – тридцать первом, тридцать третьем – сорок четвертом части четвертой пункта 1 статьи 1 настоящего Кодекса, учитываются по его желанию заработок (доход) до увольнения (прекращения деятельности) либо обычный размер вознаграждения работника его квалификации в данной местности, но не менее установленного законодательством пятикратного размера базовой величины.
5. Если в заработке (доходе) потерпевшего до причинения ему увечья или иного повреждения здоровья произошли устойчивые изменения, улучшающие его имущественное положение (повышена заработная плата по занимаемой должности, он переведен на более высокооплачиваемую работу, принят на работу после получения образования в очной форме получения образования и в других случаях, когда доказаны устойчивость изменения или возможность изменения заработка (дохода) потерпевшего), при определении его среднемесячного заработка (дохода) учитывается только заработок (доход), который он получил или должен был получить после соответствующего изменения.
Статья 956. Возмещение вреда при повреждении здоровья лица, не достигшего совершеннолетия
1. В случае увечья или иного повреждения здоровья несовершеннолетнего, не достигшего четырнадцати лет (малолетнего) и не имеющего заработка (дохода), лицо, ответственное за причиненный вред, обязано возместить расходы, вызванные повреждением здоровья.
2. По достижении малолетним четырнадцати лет, а также в случае причинения вреда несовершеннолетнему в возрасте от четырнадцати до восемнадцати лет, не имеющему заработка (доходов), лицо, ответственное за причиненный вред, обязано возместить потерпевшему помимо расходов, вызванных повреждением здоровья, также вред, связанный с утратой или уменьшением его трудоспособности, исходя из установленного законодательством пятикратного размера базовой величины.
3. Если ко времени повреждения его здоровья несовершеннолетний имел заработок, то вред возмещается исходя из размера этого заработка, но не ниже установленного законодательством пятикратного размера базовой величины.
4. После начала трудовой деятельности несовершеннолетний, здоровью которого был ранее причинен вред, вправе требовать увеличения размера возмещения вреда исходя из получаемого им заработка, но не ниже размера вознаграждения, установленного по занимаемой им должности, или заработка работника той же квалификации по месту его работы.
Статья 957. Возмещение вреда лицам, понесшим ущерб в результате смерти кормильца
1. В случае смерти потерпевшего (кормильца) право на возмещение вреда имеют:
1) нетрудоспособные лица, состоявшие на иждивении умершего или имевшие ко дню его смерти право на получение от него содержания;
2) ребенок умершего, родившийся после его смерти;
3) один из родителей, супруг либо другой член семьи независимо от его трудоспособности, который не работает и занят уходом за находившимися на иждивении умершего его детьми, внуками, братьями и сестрами, не достигшими четырнадцати лет, либо, хотя и достигшими указанного возраста, но по заключению медицинских органов нуждающимися по состоянию здоровья в постороннем уходе;
4) лица, состоявшие на иждивении и ставшие нетрудоспособными в течение пяти лет после его смерти.
Один из родителей, супруг либо другой член семьи, не работающий и занятый уходом за детьми, внуками, братьями и сестрами умершего и ставший нетрудоспособным в период осуществления ухода, сохраняет право на возмещение вреда после окончания ухода за этими лицами.
2. Вред возмещается:
1) несовершеннолетним – до достижения восемнадцати лет;
2) обучающимся старше восемнадцати лет – до получения образования в очной форме получения образования, но не более чем до двадцати трех лет;
3) лицам, достигшим общеустановленного пенсионного возраста, – пожизненно;
4) инвалидам – на срок инвалидности;
5) одному из родителей, супругу либо другому члену семьи, занятому уходом за находившимися на иждивении умершего его детьми, внуками, братьями и сестрами, – до достижения ими четырнадцати лет либо до изменения состояния их здоровья.
Статья 958. Размер возмещения вреда, понесенного в случае смерти кормильца
1. Лицам, имеющим право на возмещение вреда в связи со смертью кормильца, вред возмещается в размере той доли заработка (дохода) умершего, определенного по правилам статьи 955 настоящего Кодекса, которую они получали или имели право получать на свое содержание при его жизни. При определении возмещения вреда этим лицам в состав доходов умершего наряду с заработком (доходом) включаются получаемые им при жизни пенсия, пожизненное содержание и другие подобные выплаты.
2. При определении размера возмещения вреда пенсии (кроме соответствующих пенсий, назначенных в связи со смертью кормильца), назначенные как до, так и после смерти кормильца, а также заработок (доход) и стипендия, получаемые этими лицами, в счет возмещения им вреда не засчитываются.
3. Установленный каждому из имеющих право на возмещение вреда в связи со смертью кормильца размер возмещения не подлежит дальнейшему перерасчету, кроме случаев:
1) рождения ребенка после смерти кормильца;
2) назначения или прекращения выплаты возмещения лицам, занятым уходом за детьми, внуками, братьями и сестрами умершего кормильца;
3) назначения выплаты возмещения вреда лицам, состоявшим на иждивении и ставшим нетрудоспособными в течение пяти лет после его смерти.
Размер возмещения может быть увеличен на основании законодательства или договора.
Статья 959. Последующее изменение размера возмещения вреда
1. Потерпевший, частично утративший трудоспособность, вправе в любое время потребовать от лица, на которое возложена обязанность возмещения вреда, соответствующего увеличения размера его возмещения, если трудоспособность потерпевшего в дальнейшем уменьшилась в связи с причиненным повреждением здоровья по сравнению с той, которая была у него к моменту присуждения ему возмещения вреда.
2. Лицо, на которое возложена обязанность возмещения вреда, причиненного здоровью потерпевшего, вправе потребовать соответствующего уменьшения размера возмещения, если трудоспособность потерпевшего возросла по сравнению с той, которая была у него к моменту присуждения ему возмещения вреда.
3. Потерпевший вправе требовать увеличения размера возмещения вреда, если имущественное положение гражданина, на которого возложена обязанность возмещения вреда, улучшилось, а размер возмещения был уменьшен в соответствии с пунктом 3 статьи 952 настоящего Кодекса.
4. Суд может по требованию гражданина, причинившего вред, уменьшить размер возмещения вреда, если его имущественное положение в связи с инвалидностью либо достижением общеустановленного пенсионного возраста ухудшилось по сравнению с положением на момент присуждения возмещения вреда, за исключением случаев, когда вред был причинен действиями, совершенными умышленно.
Статья 960. Увеличение возмещения вреда в связи с повышением стоимости жизни и увеличением базовой величины
1. Суммы выплачиваемого гражданам возмещения вреда, причиненного жизни или здоровью потерпевшего, при повышении стоимости жизни подлежат индексации в установленном законодательством порядке.
2. При повышении установленного законодательством размера базовой величины суммы возмещения утраченного заработка (дохода), иных платежей, присужденных в связи с повреждением здоровья или смертью потерпевшего, увеличиваются пропорционально указанному повышению.
Статья 961. Платежи по возмещению вреда
1. Возмещение вреда, вызванного снижением трудоспособности или смертью потерпевшего, производится ежемесячными платежами.
При наличии уважительных причин суд с учетом возможностей причинителя вреда может по требованию гражданина, имеющего право на возмещение вреда, присудить ему причитающиеся платежи единовременно, но не более чем за три года.
2. Суммы в возмещение дополнительных расходов (пункт 1 статьи 954) могут быть присуждены на будущее время в пределах сроков, определяемых на основе заключения медицинской экспертизы, а также при необходимости предварительной оплаты стоимости соответствующих услуг и
имущества, в том числе приобретения путевки, оплаты проезда, оплаты технических средств социальной реабилитации.
Статья 962. Возмещение вреда в случае прекращения юридического лица
1. В случае реорганизации юридического лица, признанного в установленном порядке ответственным за вред, причиненный жизни или здоровью, обязанность по выплате соответствующих платежей несет его правопреемник. К нему же предъявляются требования о возмещении вреда.
2. В случае ликвидации юридического лица, признанного в установленном порядке ответственным за вред, причиненный жизни или здоровью, соответствующие платежи должны быть капитализированы для выплаты их потерпевшему по правилам, установленным законодательством.
Законодательством могут быть установлены и другие случаи, при которых может быть произведена капитализация платежей.
Статья 963. Возмещение расходов на погребение
Лица, ответственные за вред, вызванный смертью потерпевшего, обязаны возместить необходимые расходы на погребение лицу, понесшему эти расходы.
Пособие на погребение, полученное гражданами, понесшими эти расходы, в счет возмещения вреда не засчитывается.
§ 3. Возмещение вреда, причиненного вследствие недостатков товара, работы или услуги
Статья 964. Основания возмещения вреда, причиненного вследствие недостатков товара, работы или услуги
Вред, причиненный жизни, здоровью или имуществу гражданина либо имуществу юридического лица вследствие конструктивных, рецептурных или иных недостатков товара, работы или услуги, а также вследствие недостоверной или недостаточной информации о товаре, работе или услуге, подлежит возмещению продавцом или изготовителем товара, лицом, выполнившим работу или оказавшим услугу (исполнителем), независимо от их вины и от того, состоял потерпевший с ними в договорных отношениях или нет.
Правила, предусмотренные настоящей статьей, применяются лишь в случаях приобретения товара, выполнения работы или оказания услуги в потребительских целях, а не для использования в предпринимательской деятельности.
Статья 965. Лица, ответственные за вред, причиненный вследствие недостатков товара, работы или услуги
1. Вред, причиненный вследствие недостатков товара, подлежит возмещению по выбору потерпевшего продавцом или изготовителем товара.
2. Вред, причиненный вследствие недостатков работы или услуги, подлежит возмещению лицом, выполнившим работу или оказавшим услугу (исполнителем).
3. Вред, причиненный вследствие непредоставления полной или достоверной информации о товаре, работе или услуге, подлежит возмещению лицами, указанными в пунктах 1 и 2 настоящей статьи.
Статья 966. Сроки возмещения вреда, причиненного в результате недостатков товара, работы или услуги
1. Вред, причиненный вследствие недостатков товара, работы или услуги, подлежит возмещению, если он возник в течение установленных сроков годности товара, работы или услуги, а если срок годности в соответствии с законодательством или другими обязательными правилами не устанавливается, – в течение десяти лет со дня производства товара, выполнения работы или оказания услуги.
2. За пределами сроков, указанных в пункте 1 настоящей статьи, вред подлежит возмещению, если:
1) в нарушение требований акта законодательства или других обязательных правил срок годности не установлен;
2) лицо, которому продан товар, для которого выполнена работа или оказана услуга, не было предупреждено о необходимых действиях по истечении срока годности и возможных последствиях при невыполнении указанных действий.
Статья 967. Основания освобождения от ответственности за вред, причиненный вследствие недостатков товара, работы или услуги
Продавец или изготовитель товара, исполнитель работы или услуги освобождаются от ответственности в случае, если докажут, что вред возник вследствие непреодолимой силы или нарушения потребителем установленных правил пользования товаром, результатами работы, услуги или их хранения.
§ 4. Компенсация морального вреда
Статья 968. Общие положения
1. Основания и размер компенсации гражданину морального вреда определяются правилами, предусмотренными настоящей главой и статьей 152 настоящего Кодекса.
2. Моральный вред, причиненный действиями (бездействием), нарушающими имущественные права гражданина, подлежит компенсации в случаях, предусмотренных законодательными актами.
3. Компенсация морального вреда осуществляется независимо от подлежащего возмещению имущественного вреда.
Статья 969. Основания компенсации морального вреда
Компенсация морального вреда осуществляется независимо от вины причинителя вреда в случаях, когда:
1) вред причинен жизни или здоровью гражданина источником повышенной опасности;
2) вред причинен гражданину в результате незаконного осуждения, применения принудительных мер безопасности и лечения, привлечения в качестве обвиняемого, задержания, содержания под стражей, домашнего ареста, применения подписки о невыезде и надлежащем поведении, временного отстранения от должности, помещения в психиатрическое (психоневрологическое) учреждение, незаконного наложения административного взыскания в виде административного ареста, исправительных работ;
3) вред причинен распространением сведений, не соответствующих действительности и порочащих честь, достоинство или деловую репутацию гражданина;
4) в иных случаях, предусмотренных законодательными актами.
Статья 970. Способ и размер компенсации морального вреда
1. Компенсация морального вреда осуществляется в денежной форме.
2. Размер компенсации морального вреда определяется судом в зависимости от характера причиненных потерпевшему физических и нравственных страданий, а также степени вины причинителя вреда в случаях, когда вина является основанием возмещения вреда. При определении размера компенсации вреда должны учитываться требования разумности и справедливости.
Характер физических и нравственных страданий оценивается судом с учетом фактических обстоятельств, при которых был причинен моральный вред, и индивидуальных особенностей потерпевшего.
ГЛАВА 59 ОБЯЗАТЕЛЬСТВА ВСЛЕДСТВИЕ НЕОСНОВАТЕЛЬНОГО ОБОГАЩЕНИЯ
Статья 971. Обязанность возвратить неосновательное обогащение
1. Лицо, которое без установленных законодательством или сделкой оснований приобрело или сберегло имущество (приобретатель) за счет другого лица (потерпевшего), обязано возвратить последнему неосновательно приобретенное или сбереженное имущество (неосновательное обогащение), за исключением случаев, предусмотренных статьей 978 настоящего Кодекса.
2. Правила, предусмотренные настоящей главой, применяются независимо от того, явилось ли неосновательное обогащение результатом поведения приобретателя имущества, самого потерпевшего, третьих лиц или произошло помимо их воли.
Статья 972. Соотношение требований о возврате неосновательного обогащения с другими требованиями о защите гражданских прав
Поскольку иное не установлено законодательством и не вытекает из существа соответствующих отношений, правила, предусмотренные настоящей главой, подлежат применению также к требованиям:
1) о возврате исполненного по недействительной сделке;
2) об истребовании имущества собственником из чужого незаконного владения;
3) одной стороны в обязательстве к другой о возврате исполненного в связи с этим обязательством;
4) о возмещении вреда, в том числе причиненного недобросовестным поведением обогатившегося лица.
Статья 973. Возвращение неосновательного обогащения в натуре
1. Имущество, составляющее неосновательное обогащение приобретателя, должно быть возвращено потерпевшему в натуре.
2. Приобретатель отвечает перед потерпевшим за всякие, в том числе и за всякие случайные, недостачу или ухудшение неосновательно приобретенного или сбереженного имущества, происшедшие после того, как он узнал или должен был узнать о неосновательности обогащения. До этого момента он отвечает лишь за умысел и грубую неосторожность.
Статья 974. Возмещение стоимости неосновательного обогащения
1. В случае невозможности возвратить в натуре неосновательно полученное или сбереженное имущество приобретатель должен возместить потерпевшему действительную стоимость этого
имущества на момент его приобретения, а также убытки, вызванные последующим изменением стоимости имущества, если приобретатель не возместил его стоимость немедленно после того, как узнал о неосновательности обогащения.
2. Лицо, неосновательно временно пользовавшееся чужим имуществом без намерения его приобрести либо чужими услугами, должно возместить потерпевшему то, что сберегло вследствие такого пользования, по цене, существовавшей во время, когда закончилось пользование, и в том месте, где оно происходило.
Статья 975. Последствия неосновательной передачи права другому лицу
Лицо, передавшее путем уступки требования или иным образом принадлежащее ему право другому лицу на основании несуществующего или недействительного обязательства, вправе требовать восстановления прежнего положения, в том числе возвращения ему документов, удостоверяющих переданное право.
Статья 976. Возмещение потерпевшему неполученных доходов
1. Лицо, которое неосновательно получило или сберегло имущество, обязано возвратить или возместить потерпевшему все доходы, которые оно извлекло или должно было извлечь из этого имущества с того времени, когда узнало или должно было узнать о неосновательности обогащения.
2. На сумму неосновательного денежного обогащения подлежат начислению проценты за пользование чужими средствами (статья 366) с того времени, когда приобретатель узнал или должен был узнать о неосновательности получения или сбережения денежных средств.
Статья 977. Возмещение затрат на имущество, подлежащее возврату
При возврате неосновательно полученного или сбереженного имущества (статья 973) либо при возмещении его стоимости (статья 974) приобретатель вправе требовать от потерпевшего возмещения понесенных необходимых затрат на содержание и сохранение имущества с того времени, с которого он обязан возвратить доходы (статья 976), с зачетом полученных им выгод. Право на возмещение затрат утрачивается в случаях, когда приобретатель умышленно удерживал имущество, подлежавшее возврату.
Статья 978. Неосновательное обогащение, не подлежащее возврату
Не подлежат возврату в качестве неосновательного обогащения:
1) имущество, переданное во исполнение обязательства до наступления срока исполнения, если обязательством не предусмотрено иное;
2) имущество, переданное во исполнение обязательства по истечении срока исковой давности;
3) заработная плата и приравненные к ней платежи, пенсии, пособия, стипендии, суммы по возмещению вреда, причиненного жизни или здоровью, алименты и иные денежные суммы, предоставленные гражданину в качестве средства к существованию, при отсутствии недобросовестности с его стороны и счетной ошибки;
4) денежные суммы и иное имущество, предоставленные во исполнение несуществующего обязательства, если приобретатель докажет, что лицо, требующее возврата имущества, знало об отсутствии обязательства либо предоставило имущество в целях благотворительности.
РАЗДЕЛ V ИНТЕЛЛЕКТУАЛЬНАЯ СОБСТВЕННОСТЬ
ГЛАВА 60 ОБЩИЕ ПОЛОЖЕНИЯ
Статья 979. Законодательство об интеллектуальной собственности
Законодательство об интеллектуальной собственности состоит из настоящего Кодекса и других актов законодательства.
Статья 980. Объекты интеллектуальной собственности
К объектам интеллектуальной собственности относятся:
1) результаты интеллектуальной деятельности:
произведения науки, литературы и искусства;
исполнения, фонограммы и передачи организаций вещания;
изобретения, полезные модели, промышленные образцы;
селекционные достижения;
топологии интегральных микросхем;
секреты производства (ноу-хау);
2) средства индивидуализации участников гражданского оборота, товаров, работ или услуг:
фирменные наименования;
товарные знаки и знаки обслуживания;
географические указания;
3) другие результаты интеллектуальной деятельности и средства индивидуализации участников гражданского оборота, товаров, работ или услуг в случаях, предусмотренных настоящим Кодексом и иными законодательными актами.
Статья 981. Основания возникновения прав на объекты интеллектуальной собственности
Правовая охрана объектов интеллектуальной собственности возникает в силу факта их создания либо вследствие предоставления правовой охраны уполномоченным государственным органом в случаях и в порядке, предусмотренных настоящим Кодексом и иными законодательными актами.
Условия предоставления правовой охраны секретам производства (ноу-хау) определяются настоящим Кодексом и иными законодательными актами.
Статья 982. Личные неимущественные и имущественные права на объекты интеллектуальной собственности
1. Авторам результатов интеллектуальной деятельности принадлежат в отношении этих результатов личные неимущественные и имущественные права.
Производителям фонограмм и организациям вещания принадлежат в отношении этих объектов только имущественные права.
Личные неимущественные права принадлежат автору независимо от его имущественных прав и сохраняются за ним в случае перехода его имущественных прав на результаты интеллектуальной деятельности к другому лицу.
2. Обладателям права на средства индивидуализации участников гражданского оборота, товаров, работ или услуг (далее – средства индивидуализации) принадлежат в отношении этих средств имущественные права.
3. Право авторства (право признаваться автором результата интеллектуальной деятельности) является личным неимущественным правом и может принадлежать только лицу, творческим трудом которого создан результат интеллектуальной деятельности.
Право авторства неотчуждаемо и непередаваемо.
Если результат создан совместным творческим трудом двух или более лиц, они признаются соавторами. В отношении отдельных объектов интеллектуальной собственности законодательством может быть ограничен круг лиц, которые признаются соавторами произведения в целом.
Статья 983. Исключительные права на объекты интеллектуальной собственности
1. Обладателю имущественных прав на результат интеллектуальной деятельности (за исключением секретов производства (ноу-хау)) или средство индивидуализации принадлежит исключительное право правомерного использования этого объекта интеллектуальной собственности по своему усмотрению в любой форме и любым способом.
Использование другими лицами объектов интеллектуальной собственности, в отношении которых их правообладателю принадлежит исключительное право, допускается только с согласия правообладателя.
2. Обладатель исключительного права на объект интеллектуальной собственности вправе передать это право другому лицу полностью или частично, разрешить другому лицу использовать объект интеллектуальной собственности и вправе распорядиться им иным образом, если это не противоречит настоящему Кодексу или иному закону.
3. Ограничения исключительных прав, в том числе путем предоставления возможности использования объекта интеллектуальной собственности другим лицам, признание этих прав недействительными и их прекращение (аннулирование) допускаются в случаях, пределах и порядке, установленных настоящим Кодексом или иным законом.
Ограничения исключительных прав допускаются при условии, что такие ограничения не наносят ущерба нормальному использованию объекта интеллектуальной собственности и не ущемляют необоснованным образом законных интересов правообладателей.
Статья 984. Переход исключительных прав к другому лицу
1. Имущественные права, принадлежащие обладателю исключительных прав на объект интеллектуальной собственности, если иное не предусмотрено настоящим Кодексом или иным законом, могут быть переданы правообладателем полностью или частично другому лицу по договору, а также переходят по наследству и в порядке правопреемства при реорганизации юридического лица – правообладателя.
Передача имущественных прав по договору либо их переход в порядке универсального правопреемства не влечет передачи или ограничения права авторства и других личных неимущественных прав. Условия договора о передаче или ограничении таких прав ничтожны.
2. Исключительные права, которые передаются по договору, должны быть в нем определены. Права, которые не указаны в договоре в качестве передаваемых, предполагаются непереданными, поскольку не доказано иное.
3. К договору, предусматривающему предоставление исключительных прав в период его действия другому лицу на ограниченное время, применяются правила о лицензионном договоре (статья 985), если иное не предусмотрено законом.
К договору, предусматривающему передачу исключительных прав другому лицу в полном объеме на весь срок действия исключительного права, применяются правила о договоре уступки исключительного права (статья 9841).
Статья 9841. Договор уступки исключительного права
1. По договору уступки исключительного права одна сторона (правообладатель) передает принадлежащее ей исключительное право на результат интеллектуальной деятельности или средство индивидуализации участников гражданского оборота, товаров, работ или услуг в полном объеме другой стороне.
2. Договор уступки исключительного права должен содержать условие о размере вознаграждения или порядке его определения либо прямое указание на безвозмездность этого договора.
3. Договор уступки исключительного права заключается в письменной форме и подлежит регистрации в случаях, предусмотренных законодательными актами. Несоблюдение письменной формы или требования о регистрации влечет недействительность договора.
4. Исключительное право на результат интеллектуальной деятельности или средство индивидуализации участников гражданского оборота, товаров, работ или услуг переходит от правообладателя к другой стороне с момента заключения договора уступки исключительного права, если этим договором не предусмотрено иное. Исключительное право на результат интеллектуальной деятельности или средство индивидуализации участников гражданского оборота, товаров, работ или услуг по договору уступки исключительного права, подлежащему регистрации в соответствии с законодательными актами, переходит от правообладателя к другой стороне с момента регистрации этого договора.
Статья 985. Лицензионный договор
1. По лицензионному договору сторона, обладающая исключительным правом использования объекта интеллектуальной собственности (лицензиар), предоставляет другой стороне (лицензиату) разрешение использовать соответствующий объект интеллектуальной собственности.
Не допускается безвозмездное предоставление права использования объекта интеллектуальной собственности в отношениях между коммерческими организациями, если иное не установлено законодательными актами.
Лицензионный договор и изменения в лицензионный договор регистрируются в патентном органе в случаях и порядке, определяемых законодательством.
2. Лицензионный договор может предусматривать предоставление лицензиату:
1) права использования объекта интеллектуальной собственности с сохранением за лицензиаром права его использования и права выдачи лицензии другим лицам (простая, неисключительная лицензия);
2) права использования объекта интеллектуальной собственности с сохранением за лицензиаром права его использования в части, не передаваемой лицензиату, но без права выдачи лицензии другим лицам (исключительная лицензия);
3) других видов лицензий, допускаемых законодательными актами.
Если в лицензионном договоре не предусмотрено иное, лицензия предполагается простой (неисключительной).
3. Договор о предоставлении лицензиатом права использования объекта интеллектуальной собственности другому лицу в пределах, определяемых лицензионным договором, признается сублицензионным договором. Лицензиат вправе заключить сублицензионный договор лишь в случаях, предусмотренных лицензионным договором.
Ответственность перед лицензиаром за действия сублицензиата несет лицензиат, если лицензионным договором не предусмотрено иное.
Статья 986. Договор о создании и использовании результатов интеллектуальной деятельности
1. Автор может принять на себя по договору обязательство создать в будущем произведение, изобретение или иной результат интеллектуальной деятельности и предоставить заказчику, не являющемуся его работодателем, исключительные права на использование этого результата.
2. Договор, предусмотренный в пункте 1 настоящей статьи, должен определять характер подлежащего созданию результата интеллектуальной деятельности, а также цели либо способы его использования.
3. Договоры, обязывающие автора предоставлять какому-либо лицу исключительные права на использование любых результатов интеллектуальной деятельности, которые этот автор создаст в будущем, ничтожны.
4. Условия договора, ограничивающие автора в создании в будущем результатов интеллектуальной деятельности определенного рода либо в определенной области, признаются недействительными.
Статья 987. Исключительное право и право собственности
Исключительное право на результат интеллектуальной деятельности или средство индивидуализации существует независимо от права собственности на материальный объект, в котором такой результат или средство индивидуализации выражены.
Статья 988. Срок действия исключительных прав
1. Исключительное право на объекты интеллектуальной собственности действует в течение срока, предусмотренного настоящим Кодексом или иным законом.
Закон может предусматривать возможность продления такого срока.
2. Личные неимущественные права в отношении объектов интеллектуальной собственности охраняются бессрочно.
3. В случаях, предусмотренных законом, действие исключительного права может прекращаться вследствие его неиспользования в течение определенного времени.
Статья 989. Способы защиты исключительных прав
1. Защита исключительных прав осуществляется способами, предусмотренными статьей 11 настоящего Кодекса. Защита исключительных прав может осуществляться также путем:
1) изъятия материальных объектов, с помощью которых нарушены исключительные права, и материальных объектов, созданных в результате такого нарушения;
2) обязательной публикации о допущенном нарушении с включением в нее сведений о том, кому принадлежит нарушенное право;
3) иными способами, предусмотренными законом.
2. При нарушении договоров об использовании результатов интеллектуальной деятельности и средств индивидуализации применяются общие правила об ответственности за нарушение обязательств (глава 25).
ГЛАВА 61 АВТОРСКОЕ ПРАВО И СМЕЖНЫЕ ПРАВА
Статья 990. Предмет регулирования
Настоящий Кодекс и принятые в соответствии с ним закон об авторском праве и смежных правах и другие акты законодательства регулируют отношения, возникающие в связи с созданием и использованием произведений науки, литературы, искусства (авторское право), исполнений, фонограмм, передач организаций эфирного или кабельного вещания (смежные права).
Статья 991. Сфера действия авторского права
1. В соответствии с настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства авторское право распространяется на произведения науки, литературы и искусства, существующие в какой-либо объективной форме:
1) на территории Республики Беларусь независимо от гражданства (подданства) авторов и их правопреемников;
2) за пределами Республики Беларусь, и признается за авторами – гражданами Республики Беларусь и их правопреемниками;
3) за пределами Республики Беларусь, и признается за авторами – гражданами (подданными) других государств и их правопреемниками в соответствии с международными договорами Республики Беларусь.
2. Произведение считается опубликованным в Республике Беларусь, если в течение тридцати дней после даты первого опубликования за пределами Республики Беларусь оно было опубликовано на территории Республики Беларусь.
3. При предоставлении на территории Республики Беларусь охраны произведению в соответствии с международными договорами Республики Беларусь обладатель авторских прав произведения определяется по законодательству государства, на территории которого имело место действие или событие, послужившее основанием для обладания авторским правом.
Статья 992. Объекты авторского права
1. Авторское право распространяется на произведения науки, литературы и искусства, являющиеся результатом творческой деятельности, независимо от назначения и достоинства произведения, а также от способа его выражения.
2. Авторское право распространяется как на обнародованные, так и на необнародованные произведения, существующие в какой-либо объективной форме:
1) письменной (рукопись, машинопись, нотная запись и т.д.);
2) устной (публичное произнесение, публичное исполнение и т.д.);
3) звуко- или видеозаписи (механической, магнитной, цифровой, оптической и т.д.);
4) изображения (рисунок, эскиз, картина, карта, план, чертеж, кино-, теле-, видео-, фотокадр и т.д.);
5) объемно-пространственной (скульптура, модель, макет, сооружение и т.д.);
6) в других формах.
3. Часть произведения (включая его название), которая удовлетворяет требованиям пункта 1 настоящей статьи и может использоваться самостоятельно, является объектом авторского права.
4. Авторское право не распространяется на собственно идеи, методы, процессы, системы, способы, концепции, принципы, открытия, факты.
5. Авторское право на произведение не связано с правом собственности на материальный объект, в котором произведение выражено.
Передача права собственности на материальный объект или права владения материальным объектом сама по себе не влечет передачи каких-либо авторских прав на произведение, выраженное в этом объекте, за исключением случаев, предусмотренных законодательством об авторских и смежных правах.
Статья 993. Произведения, являющиеся объектами авторского права
1. Объектами авторского права являются:
1) литературные произведения (книги, брошюры, статьи и др.);
2) драматические и музыкально-драматические произведения, произведения хореографии и пантомимы и другие сценарные произведения;
3) музыкальные произведения с текстом и без текста;
4) аудиовизуальные произведения (кино-, теле-, видеофильмы, диафильмы и другие кино- и телепроизведения);
5) произведения скульптуры, живописи, графики, литографии и другие произведения изобразительного искусства;
6) произведения прикладного искусства и дизайна;
7) произведения архитектуры, градостроительства и садово-паркового искусства;
8) фотографические произведения, в том числе произведения, полученные способами, аналогичными фотографии;
9) карты, планы, эскизы, иллюстрации и пластические произведения, относящиеся к географии, картографии и другим наукам;
10) компьютерные программы;
101) монографии, статьи, отчеты, научные лекции и доклады, диссертации, конструкторская документация и другие произведения науки;
11) иные произведения.
2. Охрана компьютерных программ распространяется на все виды компьютерных программ (в том числе операционные системы), которые могут быть выражены на любом языке и в любой форме, включая исходный текст и объектный код.
3. К объектам авторского права также относятся:
1) производные произведения (переводы, обработки, аннотации, рефераты, резюме, обзоры, инсценировки, музыкальные аранжировки и другие переработки произведений науки, литературы и искусства);
2) сборники (энциклопедии, антологии, базы данных) и другие составные произведения, представляющие собой по подбору или расположению материалов результат творческого труда.
Производные и составные произведения охраняются авторским правом независимо от того, являются ли объектом авторского права произведения, на которых они основаны или которые они включают.
Статья 994. Объекты смежных прав
Смежные права распространяются на исполнения, фонограммы, передачи организаций эфирного и кабельного вещания.
Для возникновения и осуществления смежных прав не требуется соблюдения каких-либо формальностей.
Статья 995. Сфера действия смежных прав
1. Права исполнителя признаются за ним в соответствии с настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства об авторских и смежных правах, если:
1) исполнитель является гражданином Республики Беларусь;
2) исполнение впервые имело место на территории Республики Беларусь;
3) исполнение записано на фонограмму в соответствии с пунктом 2 настоящей статьи;
4) исполнение, не записанное на фонограмму, включено в передачу в эфир или по кабелю в соответствии с пунктом 3 настоящей статьи;
5) в иных случаях, предусмотренных международными договорами Республики Беларусь.
2. Права производителя фонограммы признаются за ним в соответствии с настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства об авторских и смежных правах, если:
1) производитель фонограммы является гражданином Республики Беларусь или юридическим лицом, имеющим официальное местонахождение на территории Республики Беларусь;
2) фонограмма впервые опубликована на территории Республики Беларусь;
3) в иных случаях, предусмотренных международными договорами Республики Беларусь.
3. Права организации эфирного или кабельного вещания признаются за ней в соответствии с настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства об авторских и смежных правах в случае, если организация имеет официальное местонахождение на территории Республики Беларусь и осуществляет передачи с передатчиков, расположенных на территории Республики Беларусь, а также в иных случаях, предусмотренных международными договорами Республики Беларусь.
ГЛАВА 62 ОБЩИЕ ПОЛОЖЕНИЯ О ПРАВЕ ПРОМЫШЛЕННОЙ СОБСТВЕННОСТИ
Статья 996. Предмет регулирования
Настоящий Кодекс и принятые в соответствии с ним законы регулируют отношения, возникающие в связи с созданием и использованием изобретений, полезных моделей, промышленных образцов, селекционных достижений и с охраной секретов производства (ноу-хау), средств индивидуализации участников гражданского оборота, товаров, работ, услуг (фирменных наименований, товарных знаков и знаков обслуживания, географических указаний).
Статья 997. Законодательство о праве промышленной собственности
Законодательство о праве промышленной собственности состоит из настоящего Кодекса и иных актов законодательства.
Статья 998. Объекты права промышленной собственности
Право промышленной собственности распространяется на:
1) изобретения;
2) полезные модели;
3) промышленные образцы;
4) селекционные достижения;
5) топологии интегральных микросхем;
6) секреты производства (ноу-хау);
7) фирменные наименования;
8) товарные знаки и знаки обслуживания;
9) географические указания;
10) другие объекты промышленной собственности и средства индивидуализации участников гражданского оборота, товаров, работ или услуг в случаях, предусмотренных законодательством.
ГЛАВА 63 ПРАВО НА ИЗОБРЕТЕНИЕ, ПОЛЕЗНУЮ МОДЕЛЬ, ПРОМЫШЛЕННЫЙ ОБРАЗЕЦ
Статья 999. Правовая охрана изобретения, полезной модели, промышленного образца
Право на изобретение, полезную модель, промышленный образец охраняется государством и удостоверяется патентом.
Статья 1000. Условия правовой охраны изобретения, полезной модели, промышленного образца
1. Права на изобретение, полезную модель и промышленный образец охраняются при условии выдачи патента.
2. Изобретением, которому предоставляется правовая охрана, признается техническое решение в любой области, относящееся к продукту или способу, а также к применению продукта или способа по определенному назначению, которое является новым, имеет изобретательский уровень и промышленно применимо.
3. Полезной моделью, которой предоставляется правовая охрана, признается техническое решение, относящееся к устройствам, являющееся новым и промышленно применимым.
4. Промышленным образцом, которому предоставляется правовая охрана, признается художественное или художественно-конструкторское решение изделия, определяющее его внешний вид и являющееся новым и оригинальным.
5. Требования, предъявляемые к изобретению, полезной модели, промышленному образцу, при которых возникает право на получение патента, и порядок его выдачи патентным органом устанавливаются законодательством.
Статья 1001. Исключительное право на изобретение, полезную модель, промышленный образец
1. Патентообладателю принадлежит исключительное право на изобретение, полезную модель, промышленный образец.
Исключительное право на изобретение, полезную модель, промышленный образец включает право использовать их по своему усмотрению, если это не нарушает прав других лиц, разрешать или запрещать их использование другим лицам.
2. Иные лица не вправе использовать изобретение, полезную модель, промышленный образец без разрешения патентообладателя, за исключением случаев, когда использование в соответствии с настоящим Кодексом или иным законом не признается нарушением исключительного права патентообладателя.
3. Нарушением исключительного права патентообладателя признаются осуществленные без его согласия:
изготовление, применение, ввоз, предложение к продаже, продажа, иное введение в гражданский оборот или хранение для этих целей продукта, в котором применено изобретение, устройства, в котором применена полезная модель, изделия, содержащего промышленный образец, а также совершение названных действий в отношении устройства, при функционировании или эксплуатации которого в соответствии с его назначением автоматически осуществляется способ, охраняемый патентом на изобретение;
применение способа, охраняемого патентом на изобретение, или введение в гражданский оборот либо хранение для этих целей продукта, изготовленного непосредственно способом, охраняемым патентом на изобретение. При этом, если этот продукт является новым, любой идентичный продукт считается полученным запатентованным способом, пока не доказано обратное.
Статья 1002. Срок действия патента
1. Срок действия патента исчисляется с даты подачи заявки на выдачу патента на изобретение, полезную модель, промышленный образец в патентный орган и при условии соблюдения требований, установленных законодательством, составляет:
1) на изобретение – двадцать лет. Если с даты подачи заявки на выдачу патента на изобретение, относящееся к лекарственному средству, пестициду или агрохимикату, для применения которых в соответствии с законодательством требуется их государственная регистрация, до даты первоначальной государственной регистрации прошло более пяти лет, срок действия патента на это изобретение продлевается патентным органом по ходатайству патентообладателя. Срок действия патента продлевается на время, прошедшее с даты подачи заявки на выдачу патента на изобретение до даты первоначальной государственной регистрации лекарственного средства, пестицида или агрохимиката, в которых использовано изобретение, за вычетом пяти лет. При этом срок действия патента не может быть продлен более чем на пять лет. Ходатайство о продлении срока действия патента подается в период действия патента до истечения шести месяцев с даты первоначальной государственной регистрации лекарственного средства, пестицида или агрохимиката, в которых использовано изобретение, или даты публикации сведений о патенте в официальном бюллетене патентного органа в зависимости от того, какой из этих сроков истекает позднее;
2) на полезную модель – пять лет с возможным продлением этого срока патентным органом по ходатайству патентообладателя, но не более чем на пять лет. Ходатайство о продлении срока действия патента на полезную модель подается в патентный орган до истечения срока действия патента;
3) на промышленный образец – десять лет с возможным продлением этого срока патентным органом по ходатайству патентообладателя, но не более чем на пять лет. Ходатайство о продлении срока действия патента на промышленный образец подается в патентный орган до истечения срока действия патента.
2. Охрана изобретения, полезной модели, промышленного образца действует с даты подачи заявки на выдачу патента на изобретение, полезную модель, промышленный образец в патентный орган. Защита прав может быть осуществлена лишь после выдачи патента. В случае отказа в выдаче патента охрана считается ненаступившей.
3. Приоритет изобретения, полезной модели, промышленного образца определяется в порядке, предусмотренном законодательством.
ГЛАВА 64 ПРАВА НА СОРТА РАСТЕНИЙ И ПОРОДЫ ЖИВОТНЫХ
Статья 1003. Условия охраны прав на сорта растений и породы животных
1. Права на сорта растений и породы животных (селекционные достижения) охраняются при условии выдачи патента.
Селекционным достижением в растениеводстве признается сорт растения, то есть группа растений в рамках низшего из известных ботанических таксонов, которая может быть определена степенью проявления признаков, являющейся результатом реализации данного генотипа или комбинации генотипов, отличима от любой другой группы растений степенью выраженности по крайней мере одного из этих признаков и может рассматриваться как единое целое с точки зрения ее пригодности для воспроизводства в неизменном виде целых растений этой группы.
Селекционным достижением в животноводстве признается порода, то есть целостная многочисленная группа животных общего происхождения, созданная человеком и имеющая генеалогическую структуру и свойства, которые позволяют отличить ее от иных пород животных этого же вида, и количественно достаточная для размножения в качестве одной породы.
2. Требования, при которых возникает право на получение патента на селекционное достижение, и порядок выдачи такого патента устанавливаются законодательством.
Статья 1004. Право автора определять наименование селекционного достижения
1. Автор селекционного достижения вправе определить его наименование, которое должно отвечать требованиям, установленным законодательством о селекционных достижениях.
2. При производстве, воспроизводстве, предложении к продаже, продаже и иных видах сбыта охраняемых селекционных достижений применение зарегистрированных для них наименований обязательно. Присвоение произведенным и (или) продаваемым семенам, племенному материалу наименования, отличающегося от зарегистрированного, не допускается.
3. Присвоение наименования зарегистрированного селекционного достижения не относящимся к нему произведенным и (или) продаваемым семенам и племенному материалу является нарушением прав патентообладателя и автора селекционного достижения.
Статья 1005. Права обладателя патента на селекционное достижение
Обладателю патента на селекционное достижение принадлежит исключительное право на это достижение в пределах, установленных законом.
Статья 1006. Срок действия патента на селекционное достижение
Действие патента на селекционное достижение начинается с даты регистрации достижения в государственном реестре охраняемых селекционных достижений и продолжается в течение двадцати лет.
Законом могут быть установлены более длительные сроки действия патента для отдельных видов селекционных достижений.
ГЛАВА 65 ПРАВО НА ТОПОЛОГИЮ ИНТЕГРАЛЬНОЙ МИКРОСХЕМЫ
Статья 1007. Понятие топологии интегральной микросхемы
Топологией интегральной микросхемы является зафиксированное на материальном носителе пространственно-геометрическое расположение совокупности элементов интегральной схемы и связей между ними.
Статья 1008. Условия правовой охраны топологий интегральных микросхем
1. Правовая охрана распространяется только на оригинальную топологию интегральной микросхемы.
Оригинальной признается топология интегральной микросхемы, созданная в результате творческой деятельности автора. Топология признается оригинальной до тех пор, пока не доказано обратное.
2. Топологии, совокупность элементов которой общеизвестна разработчикам и изготовителям интегральной микросхемы на дату ее создания, правовая охрана не предоставляется.
3. Топологии, состоящей из элементов, которые являются общеизвестными разработчикам и изготовителям интегральной микросхемы на дату создания, предоставляется правовая охрана только в том случае, если совокупность таких элементов в целом удовлетворяет требованиям пункта 1 настоящей статьи.
Статья 1009. Регулирование отношений, связанных с созданием и использованием топологий интегральных микросхем
Отношения, связанные с созданием, охраной и использованием топологий интегральных микросхем, регулируются настоящим Кодексом и иными актами законодательства о правовой охране топологий интегральных микросхем.
ГЛАВА 66 ПРАВО НА ЗАЩИТУ СЕКРЕТА ПРОИЗВОДСТВА (НОУ-ХАУ) ОТ НЕЗАКОННОГО ИСПОЛЬЗОВАНИЯ
Статья 1010. Условия правовой охраны секрета производства (ноу-хау)
1. Лицо, правомерно обладающее сведениями, составляющими секрет производства (ноу-хау), имеет право на защиту этих сведений от незаконного использования.
2. Сведения, составляющие секрет производства (ноу-хау), охраняются в режиме коммерческой тайны в случае, если они соответствуют требованиям, определенным пунктом 2 статьи 140 настоящего Кодекса. Право на защиту таких сведений возникает независимо от выполнения в отношении этих сведений каких-либо формальностей (регистрации, получения свидетельства и т.п.).
Статья 1011. Ответственность за незаконное использование секрета производства (ноу-хау)
1. Лицо, правомерно обладающее секретом производства (ноу-хау), вправе потребовать от лица, незаконно его использующего, немедленного прекращения такого использования, а также вправе использовать иные способы защиты, предусмотренные законодательством.
2. В случае использования секрета производства (ноу-хау) лицом, которое в соответствии с законодательством является добросовестным приобретателем, суд с учетом средств, израсходованных таким лицом на использование секрета производства (ноу-хау), может разрешить его дальнейшее использование на условиях возмездности.
3. Лицо, самостоятельно и правомерно получившее сведения, составляющие секрет производства (ноу-хау), вправе использовать эти сведения независимо от прав обладателя соответствующего секрета производства (ноу-хау) и не отвечает перед ним за такое использование.
Статья 1012. Распоряжение секретом производства (ноу-хау)
Лицо, обладающее секретом производства (ноу-хау), может передать все или часть составляющих его сведений другому лицу по договору.
ГЛАВА 67 СРЕДСТВА ИНДИВИДУАЛИЗАЦИИ УЧАСТНИКОВ ГРАЖДАНСКОГО ОБОРОТА, ТОВАРОВ, РАБОТ ИЛИ УСЛУГ
§ 1. Фирменное наименование
Статья 1013. Право на фирменное наименование
1. Юридическое лицо имеет исключительное право использовать фирменное наименование на товарах, их упаковке, в рекламе, вывесках, проспектах, счетах, печатных изданиях, официальных бланках и иной документации, связанной с его деятельностью, а также при демонстрации товаров на выставках и ярмарках, которые проводятся на территории Республики Беларусь.
2. Фирменное наименование юридического лица определяется при утверждении его устава и подлежит регистрации путем включения в Единый государственный регистр юридических лиц и индивидуальных предпринимателей.
3. Не может быть зарегистрировано фирменное наименование юридического лица, похожее на уже зарегистрированное настолько, что это может привести к отождествлению соответствующих юридических лиц.
Статья 1014. Использование фирменного наименования юридического лица в товарном знаке
Фирменное наименование юридического лица может быть использовано в принадлежащем ему товарном знаке.
Статья 1015. Действие права на фирменное наименование
1. На территории Республики Беларусь действует исключительное право на наименование, зарегистрированное в Республике Беларусь в качестве обозначения юридического лица.
На наименование, зарегистрированное или общепризнанное в иностранном государстве, исключительное право на территории Республики Беларусь действует в случаях, предусмотренных законодательством.
2. Действие права на фирменное наименование прекращается с ликвидацией юридического лица или с изменением его фирменного наименования.
Статья 1016. Отчуждение права на фирменное наименование
1. Отчуждение и переход права на фирменное наименование юридического лица не допускается, кроме случаев реорганизации юридического лица или отчуждения предприятия в целом.
2. Обладатель права на фирменное наименование может разрешить другому лицу использование своего наименования (выдать лицензию). Однако при этом в лицензионном договоре должны быть обусловлены меры, исключающие введение потребителя в заблуждение.
§ 2. Товарный знак и знак обслуживания
Статья 1017. Понятие товарного знака и знака обслуживания
1. Товарным знаком и знаком обслуживания (далее – товарный знак) признается обозначение, способствующее отличию товаров, работ и (или) услуг одного лица от однородных товаров, работ и (или) услуг других лиц.
2. В качестве товарных знаков могут быть зарегистрированы словесные обозначения, включая имена собственные, сочетания цветов, буквенные, цифровые, изобразительные, объемные обозначения, включая форму товара или его упаковку, а также комбинации таких обозначений. Иные обозначения могут быть зарегистрированы в качестве товарных знаков в случаях, предусмотренных законодательными актами.
3. Товарный знак может быть зарегистрирован в любом цвете или цветовом сочетании.
Статья 1018. Правовая охрана товарного знака
1. Правовая охрана товарного знака на территории Республики Беларусь осуществляется на основании его регистрации в патентном органе в порядке, установленном законодательством о товарных знаках, или в силу международных договоров Республики Беларусь.
2. Право на товарный знак охраняется государством и удостоверяется свидетельством.
3. Свидетельство на товарный знак удостоверяет приоритет товарного знака, исключительное право владельца на товарный знак в отношении товаров, работ и (или) услуг, указанных в свидетельстве, и содержит изображение товарного знака.
Статья 1019. Исключительное право на товарный знак
1. Владелец товарного знака имеет исключительное право использовать товарный знак и распоряжаться этим исключительным правом, а также право запрещать использование товарного знака другим лицам.
2. Никто не может использовать охраняемый на территории Республики Беларусь товарный знак без разрешения его владельца.
Статья 1020. Срок действия регистрации
1. Регистрация товарного знака действует в течение десяти лет с даты поступления заявки в патентный орган.
2. Срок действия регистрации товарного знака может быть продлен неограниченное число раз по заявлению владельца, поданному в течение последнего года ее действия, каждый раз на десять лет.
Статья 1021. Коллективный знак
1. Объединение лиц, создание и деятельность которого не противоречат законодательству государства, в котором оно создано, вправе зарегистрировать в Республике Беларусь коллективный знак, предназначенный для обозначения производимых и (или) реализуемых этими лицами товаров, выполняемых работ и (или) оказываемых услуг, обладающих едиными качественными или иными общими характеристиками.
2. Коллективный знак и право его использования не могут быть переданы.
Статья 1022. Уступка исключительного права на товарный знак, залог имущественных прав, удостоверяемых свидетельством на товарный знак
Исключительное право на товарный знак может быть уступлено владельцем товарного знака по договору другому лицу в отношении всех или части товаров, работ и (или) услуг, для которых зарегистрирован товарный знак.
Уступка исключительного права на товарный знак не допускается, если она может явиться причиной введения в заблуждение потребителя относительно товара, работы и (или) услуги или производителя товара, исполнителя работы и (или) услуги.
Имущественные права, удостоверяемые свидетельством на товарный знак, могут быть предметом залога.
Договор уступки исключительного права на товарный знак, договор о залоге имущественных прав, удостоверяемых свидетельством на товарный знак, а также изменения в указанные договоры регистрируются в патентном органе в порядке, установленном законодательством.
Статья 1023. Предоставление лицензии на использование товарного знака
Право на использование товарного знака может быть предоставлено владельцем товарного знака (лицензиаром) другому лицу (лицензиату) по лицензионному договору в отношении всех или части товаров, работ и (или) услуг, для которых зарегистрирован товарный знак.
Лицензионный договор должен содержать значения показателей качества товаров, работ и (или) услуг лицензиата или условие о том, что качество товаров, работ и (или) услуг лицензиата будет не ниже качества товаров, работ и (или) услуг лицензиара, а также условие об осуществлении лицензиаром контроля качества товаров, работ и (или) услуг лицензиата.
По требованиям, предъявляемым к качеству товаров, работ и (или) услуг лицензиата, на которых (в отношении которых) применяется товарный знак лицензиара, лицензиар несет субсидиарную ответственность.
§ 3. Географическое указание
Статья 1024. Условия правовой охраны географического указания
1. Географическим указанием признается обозначение, которое идентифицирует товар как происходящий с территории страны либо из региона или местности на этой территории, где определенные качество, репутация или другие характеристики товара в значительной степени связываются с его географическим происхождением.
Понятие «географическое указание» включает в себя понятия «наименование места происхождения товара» и «указание происхождения товара».
2. Наименованием места происхождения товара, которому предоставляется правовая охрана, являются обозначение, представляющее собой либо содержащее современное или историческое, официальное или неофициальное, полное или сокращенное наименование географического объекта, а также обозначение, производное от такого наименования и ставшее известным в результате его использования в отношении товара, особые свойства которого исключительно или главным образом определяются характерными для данного географического объекта природными условиями и (или) людскими факторами.
Указанные положения применяются к обозначению, которое позволяет идентифицировать товар как происходящий с территории определенного географического объекта и, хотя не содержит наименования этого объекта, стало известным в результате использования данного обозначения в отношении товара, особые свойства которого отвечают требованиям, указанным в части первой настоящего пункта.
Не признается наименованием места происхождения товара обозначение, хотя и представляющее собой наименование географического объекта или содержащее наименование географического объекта, но вошедшее в Республике Беларусь во всеобщее употребление как обозначение товара определенного вида, не связанное с местом его изготовления.
3. Указанием происхождения товара признается обозначение, прямо или косвенно указывающее на место действительного происхождения или изготовления товара.
Указание происхождения товара может быть представлено в виде наименования географического объекта или изображения.
4. Правовая охрана наименования места происхождения товара в Республике Беларусь предоставляется на основании его регистрации в патентном органе или в силу международных договоров Республики Беларусь.
На основании регистрации выдается свидетельство на право пользования наименованием места происхождения товара.
Порядок и условия регистрации и выдачи свидетельства на право пользования наименованием места происхождения товара, признания недействительными и прекращения действия регистрации
и свидетельства определяются законодательством о наименованиях мест происхождения товаров.
5. Правовая охрана указания происхождения товара осуществляется на основании использования этого указания.
Правовая охрана указания происхождения товара состоит в недопущении использования ложных (фальшивых) указаний происхождения товара, а также вводящих потребителя в заблуждение в отношении действительного места происхождения товара. Указание происхождения товара не подлежит государственной регистрации.
Статья 1025. Право пользования географическим указанием
1. Лицо, обладающее правом пользования географическим указанием, вправе помещать его на товаре, упаковке, в рекламе, проспектах, счетах и использовать иным образом в связи с введением товара в гражданский оборот.
2. Наименование места происхождения товара может быть зарегистрировано несколькими лицами совместно для обозначения производимого ими на территории определенного географического объекта товара, особые свойства которого исключительно или главным образом определяются характерными для данного географического объекта природными условиями и (или) людскими факторами. Право пользования наименованием места происхождения товара принадлежит каждому из этих лиц.
Право пользования наименованием места происхождения товара, зарегистрированным в установленном порядке, может быть предоставлено любому юридическому или физическому лицу, находящемуся на территории того же географического объекта и производящему товар с теми же свойствами.
3. Лицо, добросовестно использовавшее наименование географического объекта, тождественное или сходное с зарегистрированным наименованием места происхождения товара, не менее чем за шесть месяцев до даты его первой регистрации, сохраняет право на его дальнейшее использование в течение срока, установленного патентным органом, но не более двух лет считая с даты указанной регистрации.
4. Уступка права пользования географическим указанием и предоставление права пользования им на основании лицензии не допускаются.
Статья 1026. Сфера действия правовой охраны географических указаний
1. В Республике Беларусь предоставляется правовая охрана географическому указанию, находящемуся на территории Республики Беларусь.
2. Правовая охрана наименования места происхождения товара, находящегося в другом государстве, предоставляется в Республике Беларусь, если это наименование места происхождения товара зарегистрировано в стране происхождения товара и в Республике Беларусь в соответствии с настоящим Кодексом и законодательством о наименованиях мест происхождения товаров.
3. Правовая охрана указания происхождения товара, находящегося в другом государстве, предоставляется в Республике Беларусь, если это указание используется в стране происхождения товара.
Статья 1027. Срок действия свидетельства на право пользования наименованием места происхождения товара
1. Свидетельство на право пользования наименованием места происхождения товара действует в течение десяти лет считая с даты подачи заявки в патентный орган.
2. Срок действия свидетельства на право пользования наименованием места происхождения товара может быть продлен по заявлению его владельца, поданному в течение последнего года действия свидетельства, на десять лет при сохранении условий, дающих право на пользование наименованием места происхождения товара. Продление срока действия свидетельства возможно неограниченное число раз.
Статья 1028. Ответственность за нарушение законодательства о географических указаниях
1. Лицо, имеющее право пользования географическим указанием, может потребовать от того, кто незаконно использует это указание, прекращения его использования, удаления с товара, его упаковки, бланков и тому подобной документации незаконно используемого географического указания или обозначения, сходного с ним до степени смешения, уничтожения изготовленных изображений географического указания или обозначения, сходного с ним до степени смешения, а если это невозможно, – изъятия и уничтожения товара и (или) упаковки.
2. Лицо, обладающее правом пользования географическим указанием, вправе потребовать от нарушителя этого права возмещения понесенных убытков.
ГЛАВА 68 НЕДОБРОСОВЕСТНАЯ КОНКУРЕНЦИЯ
Статья 1029. Недопущение недобросовестной конкуренции
Недобросовестная конкуренция в Республике Беларусь не допускается.
Недобросовестной конкуренцией признаются:
1) все действия, способные каким бы то ни было способом вызвать смешение в отношении юридических лиц, индивидуальных предпринимателей, товаров, работ, услуг или предпринимательской деятельности конкурентов;
2) ложные утверждения при осуществлении предпринимательской деятельности, способные дискредитировать юридическое лицо, индивидуального предпринимателя, товары, работы, услуги или предпринимательскую деятельность конкурента;
3) указания или утверждения, использование которых при осуществлении предпринимательской деятельности может ввести в заблуждение относительно характера, свойств, пригодности к применению или количества товаров, работ, услуг конкурента;
4) другие действия, противоречащие требованиям настоящего Кодекса и иных актов законодательства о конкуренции, при осуществлении предпринимательской деятельности.
Статья 1030. Ответственность за осуществление недобросовестной конкуренции
1. Лицо, осуществляющее недобросовестную конкуренцию, обязано прекратить противоправные действия и опубликовать опровержение распространенных сведений и действий, составляющих содержание недобросовестной конкуренции.
2. Лицо, потерпевшее от недобросовестной конкуренции, вправе требовать от недобросовестного конкурента возмещения причиненных убытков.
РАЗДЕЛ VI НАСЛЕДСТВЕННОЕ ПРАВО
ГЛАВА 69 ОБЩИЕ ПОЛОЖЕНИЯ О НАСЛЕДОВАНИИ
Статья 1031. Наследование
1. При наследовании имущество умершего (наследство, наследственное имущество) переходит к другим лицам в неизмененном виде как единое целое и в один и тот же момент (универсальное правопреемство), если из настоящего Кодекса и иных законов не вытекает иное.
2. Право наследования гарантируется. Наследование регулируется настоящим Кодексом и принятыми в соответствии с ним иными актами законодательства.
Статья 1032. Основания наследования
1. Наследование осуществляется по завещанию и закону.
2. Наследование по закону имеет место, когда завещание отсутствует либо определяет судьбу не всего наследства, а также в иных случаях, установленных настоящим Кодексом и принятыми в соответствии с ним иными актами законодательства.
Статья 1033. Состав наследства
1. В состав наследства входят все права и обязанности, принадлежавшие наследодателю на момент открытия наследства, существование которых не прекращается его смертью.
2. Не входят в состав наследства права и обязанности, неразрывно связанные с личностью наследодателя:
1) права членства (участия) в коммерческих и других организациях, являющихся юридическими лицами, если иное не установлено законом или учредительными документами;
2) право на возмещение вреда, причиненного жизни или здоровью;
3) права и обязанности по алиментным обязательствам;
4) права на пенсии, пособия и другие выплаты на основании законодательства о труде и социальном обеспечении;
5) личные неимущественные права, не связанные с имущественными.
3. Личные неимущественные права и другие нематериальные блага, принадлежавшие наследодателю, могут осуществляться и защищаться наследниками, если иное не установлено законодательством.
4. В состав наследства входят паенакопления в жилищном, жилищно-строительном, дачном, гаражном или ином потребительском кооперативе, имущественные права и обязанности наследодателя, основанные на договоре создания объекта долевого строительства, либо квартира, дача, гараж, иное помещение, машино-место, пай за которые полностью выплачен и данное имущество оформлено за наследодателем на праве собственности в установленном законодательством порядке. Если воля наследодателя на оформление указанного имущества на праве собственности была выражена в письменном заявлении, направленном в компетентные органы, но процедура оформления не была завершена в связи с его смертью, такое имущество может быть судом признано наследственным по требованию заинтересованных лиц.
Статья 1034. Наследование имущества, являющегося общей совместной собственностью
1. Смерть участника общей совместной собственности является основанием для определения его доли в такой собственности и раздела общего имущества либо выдела из него доли умершего участника в порядке, установленном статьей 255 настоящего Кодекса. В этом случае наследство
открывается в отношении общего имущества, приходящегося на долю умершего участника, а при невозможности раздела имущества в натуре – в отношении стоимости такой доли.
2. Участник общей совместной собственности вправе завещать свою долю в общем имуществе, которая будет определена после его смерти в соответствии с пунктом 1 настоящей статьи.
Статья 1035. Открытие наследства
1. Наследство открывается вследствие смерти гражданина или объявления его судом умершим.
2. Временем открытия наследства является день смерти гражданина, а при объявлении его умершим – день, установленный в соответствии с пунктом 3 статьи 41 настоящего Кодекса.
3. Лица, умершие в один и тот же день, считаются в целях наследственного правопреемства умершими одновременно и не наследуют друг после друга. Наследование открывается после каждого из них, и к наследованию призываются наследники каждого из них.
Статья 1036. Место открытия наследства
Местом открытия наследства является последнее место жительства наследодателя, определяемое по регистрации наследодателя по месту жительства (при ее отсутствии – месту пребывания) на день открытия наследства, а если оно неизвестно, – место нахождения недвижимого имущества или основной его части, а при отсутствии недвижимого имущества – место нахождения основной части движимого имущества.
Статья 1037. Наследники
1. Наследниками по завещанию и закону могут быть граждане, находящиеся в живых в момент открытия наследства, а также зачатые при жизни наследодателя и родившиеся живыми после открытия наследства.
2. Наследниками по завещанию могут быть также юридические лица, которые являлись созданными в момент открытия наследства, Республика Беларусь и административно- территориальные единицы.
Статья 1038. Недостойные наследники
1. Отстраняются от наследования как по завещанию, так и по закону лица, которые умышленно лишили жизни наследодателя или совершили покушение на его жизнь. Исключение составляют лица, в отношении которых завещатель совершил завещание уже после покушения на его жизнь.
2. Отстраняются от наследования как по завещанию, так и по закону лица, которые путем составления подложного завещания, созданием умышленного препятствия осуществлению наследодателем последней воли или иными умышленными противозаконными действиями способствовали призванию их самих или близких им лиц к наследованию либо увеличению причитающейся им доли наследства.
3. При наследовании по закону отстраняются от наследования родители после детей, в отношении которых они были лишены родительских прав и не восстановлены в этих правах ко времени открытия наследства, а также граждане, злостно уклонявшиеся от выполнения лежавших на них в силу акта законодательства обязанностей по содержанию наследодателя, если это обстоятельство подтверждено в судебном порядке.
4. Недостойный наследник может быть на основании настоящей статьи отстранен от наследования судом по требованию лица, для которого такое отстранение порождает связанные с наследованием имущественные последствия.
5. Правила настоящей статьи распространяются на наследников, имеющих право на обязательную долю в наследстве.
6. Правила, содержащиеся в пунктах 1, 2 и 4 настоящей статьи, соответственно применяются к завещательному отказу (статья 1054).
Статья 1039. Выморочное наследство
1. Если нет наследников ни по закону, ни по завещанию, либо никто из наследников не имеет права наследовать (статья 1038), либо все они отказались от наследства, наследство признается выморочным.
2. Выморочное наследство переходит в собственность административно-территориальной единицы по месту нахождения соответствующего имущества, входящего в состав наследства.
3. Наследство может быть признано выморочным судом на основании заявления органа местного управления и самоуправления по месту открытия наследства по истечении одного года со дня открытия наследства. Наследство может быть признано выморочным до истечения указанного срока, если расходы, связанные с охраной наследства и управлением им, превышают его стоимость.
4. Охрана выморочного наследства и управление им осуществляются в соответствии со статьями 1066-1068 настоящего Кодекса.
ГЛАВА 70 НАСЛЕДОВАНИЕ ПО ЗАВЕЩАНИЮ
Статья 1040. Общие положения
1. Завещанием признается волеизъявление гражданина по распоряжению принадлежащим ему имуществом на случай смерти.
2. Завещание может быть совершено гражданином, обладающим дееспособностью в полном объеме.
3. Завещание должно быть совершено лично. Совершение завещания через представителя не допускается.
4. В завещании могут содержаться распоряжения только одного лица. Совершение завещания двумя или более лицами не допускается.
5. Завещание является односторонней сделкой, действительность которой определяется на момент составления завещания.
Статья 1041. Свобода завещания
1. Гражданин может завещать все свое имущество или часть его одному либо нескольким лицам, как входящим, так и не входящим в круг наследников по закону, а также Республике Беларусь и ее административно-территориальным единицам.
2. Завещатель вправе без объяснения причин лишить наследства одного, нескольких или всех наследников по закону. Лишение наследства наследника по закону не распространяется на его потомков, наследующих по праву представления, если из завещания не вытекает иное.
3. Наследодатель вправе совершить завещание, содержащее распоряжение о любом имуществе, в том числе об имуществе, собственником которого он может стать на день открытия наследства.
4. Завещатель вправе обусловить получение наследства определенным правомерным условием относительно характера поведения наследника, отменить и изменить составленное завещание в любой момент после его совершения и не обязан при этом указывать или сообщать кому-либо о причинах отмены или изменения им завещания.
5. Свобода завещания ограничивается правилами об обязательной доле в наследстве (статья 1064), о недопущении возложения на лиц, назначенных наследниками в завещании, обязанности в свою очередь распорядиться определенным образом завещанным им имуществом на случай их смерти, включения в завещание противоправных или невыполнимых для наследника в силу объективных причин условий его поведения для получения наследства.
Статья 1042. Подназначение наследников
1. Завещатель может на случай, если указанный в завещании наследник умрет до открытия наследства, не примет его либо откажется от него или будет устранен от наследования как недостойный наследник в порядке, предусмотренном статьей 1038, а также на случай невыполнения наследником по завещанию правомерных условий наследодателя назначить другого наследника (подназначение наследника).
2. Подназначенным наследником может быть любое лицо, которое в соответствии со статьей 1037 настоящего Кодекса может быть наследником.
3. Отказ наследника по завещанию не в пользу подназначенного наследника не допускается.
Статья 1043. Доли наследников в имуществе. Наследование части имущества, оставшейся незавещанной
1. Имущество, завещанное двум или нескольким наследникам без указания их долей в наследстве и без указания того, какие входящие в состав наследства вещи или права кому из наследников предназначаются, считается завещанным наследникам в равных долях.
2. Неделимая вещь (статья 133), завещанная двум или нескольким наследникам, считается завещанной в долях, соответствующих стоимости завещанных им частей этой вещи.
3. Часть имущества, оставшаяся незавещанной, распределяется между наследниками по закону, призываемыми к наследованию в порядке, предусмотренном статьями 1056-1065 настоящего Кодекса. В число этих наследников входят и те наследники по закону, которым другая часть имущества была оставлена по завещанию.
Статья 1044. Общие правила о форме завещания
1. Завещание должно быть составлено в письменной форме и удостоверено нотариусом. Удостоверение завещания другими лицами допускается в случаях, предусмотренных пунктом 6 статьи 1045, статьей 1047 и пунктом 2 статьи 1048 настоящего Кодекса. Несоблюдение правил настоящего Кодекса о письменной форме завещания и его удостоверении влечет недействительность завещания.
2. Завещание должно быть собственноручно подписано завещателем. Если завещатель в силу физических недостатков, болезни или неграмотности не может собственноручно подписать завещание, оно по его просьбе может быть подписано в присутствии нотариуса или иного лица, удостоверяющего завещание в соответствии с законом, другим гражданином с указанием причин, в силу которых завещатель не мог подписать завещание собственноручно. В завещании должны быть указаны фамилия, имя, отчество и место жительства этого гражданина.
3. В случаях, когда в соответствии с настоящим Кодексом при составлении, подписании или удостоверении завещания должны присутствовать свидетели, не могут быть такими свидетелями, а также не могут подписывать завещание вместо завещателя:
1) нотариус или иное лицо, удостоверяющее завещание;
2) лицо, в пользу которого составлено завещание или сделан завещательный отказ, супруг такого лица, его дети, родители, внуки и правнуки;
21) наследники по завещанию или по закону;
3) граждане, не обладающие полной дееспособностью;
4) неграмотные;
5) лица, имеющие судимость за дачу ложных показаний;
6) граждане с такими физическими недостатками, которые не позволяют им в полной мере осознавать существо происходящего;
7) лица, не владеющие в достаточной степени языком, за исключением случаев, когда нотариусом принимается закрытое завещание.
4. В завещании должны быть указаны место и дата его удостоверения, за исключением случая, предусмотренного статьей 1046 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 1045. Нотариально удостоверенное завещание
1. Нотариально удостоверенное завещание должно быть написано завещателем либо записано с его слов в присутствии свидетеля нотариусом. При записи завещания со слов завещателя нотариусом могут быть использованы общепринятые технические средства (пишущая машинка, персональный компьютер и т.п.).
2. Завещание, записанное нотариусом со слов завещателя, должно быть полностью прочитано завещателем в присутствии нотариуса и свидетеля до подписания завещания. Если завещатель в силу физических недостатков, болезни или неграмотности не в состоянии лично прочитать завещание, его текст оглашается для него свидетелем в присутствии нотариуса, о чем в завещании делается соответствующая запись с указанием причин, по которым завещатель не смог лично прочитать завещание.
3. Если нотариально удостоверенное завещание составляется в присутствии свидетеля, в завещании должны быть указаны фамилия, имя, отчество и место жительства свидетеля.
4. Нотариус обязан предупредить свидетеля и лицо, подписывающее завещание вместо завещателя, о необходимости соблюдать тайну завещания (статья 1050).
5. При удостоверении завещания нотариус обязан разъяснить завещателю содержание статьи 1064 настоящего Кодекса.
6. В случаях, когда право совершения нотариальных действий предоставлено законом уполномоченным должностным лицам местных исполнительных и распорядительных органов, дипломатическим агентам дипломатических представительств Республики Беларусь и консульским должностным лицам консульских учреждений Республики Беларусь, завещание может быть удостоверено вместо нотариуса соответствующим должностным лицом с соблюдением требований настоящего Кодекса о форме завещания и порядке его нотариального удостоверения.
Статья 1046. Закрытое завещание
1. По желанию завещателя завещание удостоверяется нотариусом без ознакомления с его содержанием (закрытое завещание).
2. Закрытое завещание должно быть собственноручно написано и подписано завещателем. Несоблюдение этих правил влечет недействительность завещания, о чем нотариус обязан предупредить завещателя.
3. Закрытое завещание передается в присутствии двух свидетелей, которые ставят на конверте свои подписи. Затем конверт, подписанный свидетелями и завещателем с указанием о разъяснении завещателю требований, установленных пунктом 2 настоящей статьи, запечатывается в присутствии завещателя и свидетелей в другой конверт, на котором нотариус учиняет надпись, содержащую сведения о лице, от которого им принято закрытое завещание, о месте и дате его принятия, о фамилии, имени, отчестве и месте жительства каждого свидетеля. Принимая от завещателя конверт с завещанием, нотариус обязан разъяснить завещателю содержание статьи 1064 настоящего Кодекса.
4. При поступлении сведений о смерти лица, совершившего закрытое завещание, нотариус обязан проверить такие сведения через органы, регистрирующие акты гражданского состояния. При поступлении копии актовой записи о смерти или представлении свидетельства о смерти такого лица заинтересованными лицами нотариус не позднее пятнадцати дней производит вскрытие конверта с завещанием с обязательным присутствием двух свидетелей. При вскрытии конверта вправе присутствовать и заинтересованные лица.
5. О вскрытии конверта с завещанием нотариусом составляется протокол, в котором должны быть отражены место, дата и время вскрытия конверта, фамилия, имя, отчество нотариуса, свидетелей и присутствующих заинтересованных лиц, место их постоянного проживания, состояние конвертов и содержание учиненных на них записей, факт оглашения нотариусом содержащегося в конверте документа, полный текст этого документа, подписи нотариуса и свидетелей.
6. Не позднее следующего дня после вскрытия конверта с завещанием нотариус обязан направить сообщения заинтересованным лицам об их праве наследования.
Статья 1047. Завещания, приравниваемые к нотариально удостоверенным
1. Приравниваются к нотариально удостоверенным завещаниям:
1) завещания граждан, находящихся на излечении в больницах, госпиталях, других организациях здравоохранения, оказывающих медицинскую помощь в стационарных условиях, или проживающих в домах-интернатах для престарелых и инвалидов, удостоверенные главными врачами, их заместителями по медицинской части или дежурными врачами этих больниц, госпиталей и других организаций здравоохранения, оказывающих медицинскую помощь в стационарных условиях, а также начальниками госпиталей, руководителями домов-интернатов для престарелых и инвалидов;
2) завещания граждан, находящихся во время плавания на судах, ходящих под Государственным флагом Республики Беларусь, удостоверенные капитанами этих судов;
3) завещания граждан, находящихся в разведочных, арктических или других подобных экспедициях, удостоверенные начальниками этих экспедиций;
4) завещания военнослужащих в пунктах дислокации воинских частей, где нет нотариусов, а также завещания работающих в этих частях гражданских лиц, членов их семей и членов семей военнослужащих, удостоверенные командирами этих частей;
5) завещания лиц, находящихся в учреждениях, исполняющих наказание в виде ареста, ограничения свободы, лишения свободы, пожизненного заключения, или местах содержания под стражей, удостоверенные начальниками соответствующих учреждений, исполняющих наказание, или руководителями администраций мест содержания под стражей.
2. Завещания, предусмотренные в пункте 1 настоящей статьи, должны быть подписаны завещателем в присутствии свидетеля, который также подписывает завещание.
В остальном к таким завещаниям соответственно применяются правила статьи 1045 настоящего Кодекса, за исключением требования о нотариальном удостоверении завещания.
3. Завещание, удостоверенное в соответствии с настоящей статьей, должно быть, как только для этого представится возможность, направлено лицом, удостоверившим завещание, через орган юстиции нотариусу по месту жительства завещателя.
4. Порядок удостоверения завещаний и совершения связанных с этим других действий лицами, которым право удостоверения завещаний предоставляется в соответствии с настоящей статьей, устанавливается законодательством.
Статья 1048. Завещательные распоряжения денежными средствами в банках или небанковских кредитно-финансовых организациях
1. Права на денежные средства, внесенные гражданином в банковский вклад (депозит) или находящиеся на банковском счете гражданина, могут быть им завещаны по его усмотрению, либо в порядке, предусмотренном статьями 1044-1047 настоящего Кодекса, либо путем совершения завещательного распоряжения непосредственно в том банке или небанковской кредитно- финансовой организации, в которых открыт банковский счет либо размещен банковский вклад (депозит). В отношении средств на счете такое завещательное распоряжение имеет силу нотариально удостоверенного завещания.
2. Завещательное распоряжение правами на средства в банке или небанковской кредитно- финансовой организации должно быть собственноручно написано и подписано завещателем с указанием даты его составления и должно быть удостоверено служащим банка или небанковской кредитно-финансовой организации, имеющим право принимать к исполнению распоряжение клиента в отношении средств на его счете в порядке, определяемом законодательством.
3. Права на денежные средства, в отношении которых в банке или небанковской кредитно- финансовой организации совершено завещательное распоряжение, входят в состав наследства и наследуются на общих основаниях в соответствии с настоящим Кодексом. Эти средства выдаются наследникам на основании свидетельства о праве на наследство и в соответствии с ним. До представления банку или небанковской кредитно-финансовой организации свидетельства о праве на наследство наследникам, указанным в завещательном распоряжении, могут быть выданы со счета наследодателя средства, не превышающие в сто раз установленный законодательством размер базовой величины.
Статья 1049. Отмена и изменение завещания
1. Завещатель вправе в любое время отменить сделанное им завещание в целом либо изменить его путем отмены, изменения или дополнения отдельных содержащихся в нем завещательных распоряжений, сделав новое завещание.
Завещание может быть отменено путем уничтожения всех его экземпляров завещателем или по письменному распоряжению завещателя – нотариусом.
2. Завещание, составленное ранее, отменяется последующим завещанием полностью или в части, в которой оно ему противоречит.
3. Ранее сделанное завещание, отмененное полностью или частично последующим завещанием, не восстанавливается, если последнее будет в свою очередь отменено или изменено завещателем.
Статья 1050. Тайна завещания
Нотариус, другое лицо, удостоверяющее завещание, свидетели, а также гражданин, подписывающий завещание вместо завещателя, не вправе до открытия наследства разглашать сведения, касающиеся содержания завещания, его составления, отмены или изменения.
Статья 1051. Толкование завещания
При толковании завещания нотариусом, исполнителем завещания или судом принимается во внимание буквальное значение содержащихся в нем слов и выражений. При неясности буквального смысла какого-либо положения завещания он устанавливается путем сопоставления этого положения с другими положениями и смыслом завещания в целом. При этом должно быть обеспечено наиболее полное осуществление предполагаемой воли завещателя.
Статья 1052. Недействительность завещания
1. Завещание может быть признано судом недействительным по иску лица, права или интересы которого нарушены этим завещанием. Оспаривание завещания до открытия наследства не допускается.
2. Завещание признается недействительным при нарушении правил о форме завещания, других положений настоящего Кодекса, влекущих недействительность завещания или недействительность сделок (параграф 2 главы 9). Не могут служить основанием признания завещания недействительным описки и другие незначительные нарушения порядка его составления, подписания или удостоверения, если доказано, что они не могут влиять на понимание волеизъявления завещателя.
3. Недействительным могут быть признаны как завещание в целом, так и отдельные содержащиеся в нем завещательные распоряжения.
Недействительность отдельных завещательных распоряжений не затрагивает остальной части завещания, если можно предположить, что она была бы включена в завещание и при отсутствии распоряжений, признаваемых недействительными.
4. Признание завещания недействительным не лишает лиц, указанных в нем в качестве наследников или отказополучателей, права наследовать по закону или на основании другого, действительного завещания.
Статья 1053. Исполнение завещания
1. Завещатель может поручить исполнение завещания указанному им в завещании лицу, не являющемуся наследником (исполнителю завещания, душеприказчику). Согласие этого лица быть исполнителем завещания должно быть выражено им либо в его собственноручной надписи на самом завещании, либо в заявлении, приложенном к завещанию. Если исполнитель завещания завещателем не назначен, то по соглашению между собой наследники вправе поручить исполнение завещания одному из наследников либо другому лицу. При недостижении такого соглашения исполнитель завещания может быть назначен судом по требованию одного или нескольких наследников из предложенных ими суду лиц.
Исполнитель завещания имеет право в любое время отказаться от исполнения возложенных на него завещателем обязанностей, заранее известив об этом наследников по завещанию. Освобождение исполнителя завещания от его обязанностей возможно также по решению суда согласно заявлению наследников.
2. Поскольку в завещании не установлено иное, исполнитель завещания должен принять меры, необходимые для исполнения завещания, в том числе:
1) обеспечить переход к наследникам причитающегося им имущества в соответствии с волей наследодателя и законом;
2) принять самостоятельно или через нотариуса меры по охране наследства и управлению им в интересах наследников;
3) получить причитавшиеся наследодателю суммы и иное имущество для передачи их наследникам, если эти суммы не подлежат передаче другим лицам (пункт 1 статьи 1090);
4) исполнить завещательное возложение либо требовать от наследников по завещанию исполнения завещательного отказа (статья 1054) или завещательного возложения (статья 1055).
3. В целях исполнения воли наследодателя исполнитель завещания вправе от своего имени вести дела, связанные с управлением наследством и исполнением завещания, в том числе в суде, других государственных органах.
4. Исполнитель завещания имеет право на возмещение за счет наследства необходимых расходов, связанных с исполнением завещания, а также на получение сверх расходов вознаграждения за счет наследства, если это предусмотрено завещанием.
Статья 1054. Завещательный отказ
1. Завещатель вправе возложить на наследника по завещанию исполнение за счет наследства какого-либо обязательства (завещательный отказ) в пользу одного или нескольких лиц (отказополучателей), которые приобретают право требовать исполнения завещательного отказа.
Отказополучателями могут быть лица, как входящие, так и не входящие в число наследников по закону.
2. Предметом завещательного отказа может быть передача отказополучателю в собственность или на ином вещном праве, а также в пользование вещи, входящей в состав наследства, приобретение и передача ему имущества, не входящего в состав наследства, выполнение для него определенной работы, оказание ему определенной услуги и т.п.
3. Наследник, на которого завещателем возложен завещательный отказ, должен исполнить его лишь в пределах действительной стоимости перешедшего к нему наследства за вычетом падающей на него части долгов наследодателя.
Если наследник, на которого возложен завещательный отказ, имеет право на обязательную долю в наследстве, его обязанность исполнить отказ ограничивается пределами стоимости перешедшего к нему наследства, которая превышает размер его обязательной доли.
Если завещательный отказ возложен на всех или нескольких наследников, отказ обременяет каждого из них соразмерно его доле в наследстве, поскольку завещанием не предусмотрено иное.
4. На наследника, к которому переходят жилой дом, квартира или иное жилое помещение, завещатель вправе возложить обязанность предоставить другому лицу пожизненное пользование
этим помещением или определенной его частью. При последующем переходе права собственности на жилое помещение право пожизненного пользования сохраняет силу.
Право пожизненного пользования неотчуждаемо, непередаваемо и не переходит к наследникам отказополучателя.
Право пожизненного пользования, предоставленное отказополучателю, не является основанием для проживания членов его семьи, если в завещании не указано иное.
5. В случае смерти наследника, на которого был возложен завещательный отказ, или в случае непринятия им наследства исполнение завещательного отказа переходит на других наследников, получивших его долю, либо к административно-территориальной единице, если имущество стало выморочным.
Завещательный отказ не исполняется в случае смерти отказополучателя до открытия наследства или после открытия, но до того момента, когда наследник по завещанию успел принять его.
6. Отказополучатель не отвечает по долгам наследодателя.
Статья 1055. Возложение
1. Завещатель может возложить на одного или нескольких наследников по завещанию обязанность совершить какое-либо действие имущественного либо неимущественного характера, направленное на осуществление общеполезной цели. Такая же обязанность может быть возложена на исполнителя завещания при выделении наследодателем части имущества для исполнения им возложения.
Предметом возложения может быть также содержание принадлежавших наследодателю животных, надзор и уход за ними.
2. К возложению, предметом которого являются действия, имеющие имущественный характер, соответственно применяются правила, содержащиеся в статье 1054 настоящего Кодекса.
3. Исполнения возложения вправе требовать в суде заинтересованные лица, а также исполнитель завещания и любой из наследников, поскольку в завещании не предусмотрено иное.
ГЛАВА 71 НАСЛЕДОВАНИЕ ПО ЗАКОНУ
Статья 1056. Общие положения
1. Наследники по закону призываются к наследованию в порядке очередности, предусмотренной статьями 1057-1063 настоящего Кодекса.
Наследники одной очереди наследуют в равных долях, за исключением наследников, наследующих по праву представления (статья 1062).
2. При наследовании по закону усыновленный и его потомство, с одной стороны, и усыновитель и его родственники – с другой, в полной мере приравниваются к родственникам по происхождению (кровным родственникам).
3. Усыновленный и его потомство не наследуют по закону после смерти родителей усыновленного и других его родственников по происхождению, а родители усыновленного и другие его родственники по происхождению не наследуют по закону после смерти усыновленного и его потомства, за исключением случаев, указанных в пункте 4 настоящей статьи.
4. В случаях, когда в соответствии с Кодексом о браке и семье Республики Беларусь усыновленный по решению суда сохраняет права и обязанности по отношению к одному из родителей и другим родственникам по происхождению, усыновленный и его потомство наследуют по закону после смерти этих родственников, а последние наследуют по закону после смерти усыновленного и его потомства.
5. Наследники по закону каждой последующей очереди получают право на наследование в случае отсутствия наследников предыдущей очереди, устранения их от наследства, непринятия ими наследства либо отказа от него.
6. Правила настоящего Кодекса об очередности призвания наследников по закону к наследованию и о размере их долей в наследстве могут быть изменены нотариально удостоверенным соглашением заинтересованных наследников, заключенным после открытия наследства. Такое соглашение не должно затрагивать прав не участвующих в нем наследников, а также наследников, имеющих право на обязательную долю.
Статья 1057. Наследники первой очереди
1. Наследниками по закону первой очереди являются дети, супруг и родители умершего.
2. Внуки наследодателя и их прямые потомки наследуют по праву представления.
Статья 1058. Наследники второй очереди
1. При отсутствии у умершего наследников первой очереди наследниками по закону второй очереди являются полнородные и неполнородные братья и сестры наследодателя.
2. Дети братьев и сестер наследодателя – его племянники и племянницы наследуют по праву представления.
Статья 1059. Наследники третьей очереди
При отсутствии у умершего наследников первой и второй очереди наследниками по закону третьей очереди являются дед и бабка умершего как со стороны отца, так и со стороны матери.
Статья 1060. Наследники четвертой очереди
1. При отсутствии у умершего наследников первой, второй и третьей очереди наследниками по закону четвертой очереди являются полнородные и неполнородные братья и сестры родителей наследодателя (дяди и тети наследодателя).
2. Двоюродные братья и сестры наследодателя наследуют по праву представления.
Статья 1061. Наследники последующих очередей
1. При отсутствии у умершего наследников первой, второй, третьей и четвертой очереди (статьи 1057-1060) право наследовать по закону получают родственники наследодателя третьей, четвертой, пятой и шестой степени родства, не относящиеся к наследникам предшествующих очередей, причем родственники более близкой степени родства устраняют от наследования родственников более далекой степени родства.
2. Степень родства определяется числом рождений, отделяющих родственников друг от друга. Рождение самого наследодателя в это число не входит.
3. В соответствии с настоящей статьей призываются к наследованию в качестве:
1) родственников третьей степени родства – прадеды и прабабки наследодателя;
2) родственников четвертой степени родства – дети родных племянников и племянниц наследодателя (двоюродные внуки и внучки) и родные братья и сестры его дедов и бабок (двоюродные деды и бабки);
3) родственников пятой степени родства – дети его двоюродных внуков и внучек (двоюродные правнуки и правнучки), дети его двоюродных братьев и сестер (двоюродные племянники и племянницы) и дети его двоюродных дедов и бабок (двоюродные дяди и тети);
4) родственников шестой степени родства – дети его двоюродных правнуков и правнучек (двоюродные праправнуки и праправнучки), дети его двоюродных племянников и племянниц (троюродные внуки и внучки) и дети его двоюродных дядей и тетей (троюродные братья и сестры).
4. Призываемые к наследованию наследники одной степени родства наследуют в равных долях.
Статья 1062. Наследование по праву представления
1. В случаях, предусмотренных пунктом 2 статьи 1057, пунктом 2 статьи 1058 и пунктом 2 статьи 1060 настоящего Кодекса, доля наследника по закону, умершего до открытия наследства или одновременно с наследодателем, переходит по праву представления к его соответствующим потомкам и делится между ними поровну.
2. Не наследуют по праву представления потомки наследника по закону, лишенного наследодателем наследства, если об этом указано в завещании (пункт 2 статьи 1041).
3. Потомки умершего до открытия наследства или одновременно с наследодателем наследника, который мог быть отстранен от наследования по основаниям, указанным в статье 1038 настоящего Кодекса, могут быть отстранены судом от наследования по праву представления, если суд сочтет призвание их к наследованию противным основам нравственности.
Статья 1063. Нетрудоспособные иждивенцы наследодателя
1. Граждане, относящиеся к числу наследников по закону, указанных в статьях 1058- 1061 настоящего Кодекса, и нетрудоспособные к моменту открытия наследства, но не входящие в круг наследников той очереди, которая призывается к наследованию, наследуют вместе с наследниками этой очереди, если не менее года до смерти наследодателя находились на его иждивении независимо от того, проживали ли они совместно с наследодателем. Нетрудоспособные иждивенцы, призываемые к наследованию на основании настоящего пункта вместе с наследниками одной из предшествующих очередей, наследуют не более одной четвертой части наследства, однако, если наследодатель был обязан по закону их содержать, они наследуют наравне с наследниками этой очереди.
2. К числу наследников по закону относятся граждане, которые не входят в круг наследников, указанных в статьях 1057-1061 настоящего Кодекса, но к моменту открытия наследства являлись нетрудоспособными и не менее одного года находились на иждивении наследодателя и проживали совместно с ним. При наличии других наследников по закону они наследуют вместе с наследниками той очереди, которая призывается к наследованию, однако не более одной четвертой части наследства. При отсутствии у умершего других наследников указанные нетрудоспособные иждивенцы наследодателя наследуют самостоятельно в равных долях.
Статья 1064. Право на обязательную долю в наследстве
1. Несовершеннолетние или нетрудоспособные дети наследодателя, а также его нетрудоспособные супруг и родители наследуют независимо от содержания завещания не менее половины доли,
которая причиталась бы каждому из них при наследовании по закону (обязательная доля).
2. В обязательную долю засчитывается все, что наследник, имеющий право на такую долю, получает из наследства по какому-либо основанию, в том числе стоимость имущества, состоящего из предметов обычной домашней обстановки и обихода, и стоимость установленного в пользу такого наследника завещательного отказа.
Обязательная доля выделяется из незавещанной части имущества, а если его недостаточно, то и за счет завещанного имущества.
Если осуществление права на обязательную долю в наследстве повлечет за собой невозможность передать наследнику по завещанию имущество, которым наследник, имеющий право на обязательную долю, при жизни наследодателя не пользовался, а наследник по завещанию пользовался для проживания (жилой дом, квартира, иное жилое помещение, дача и т.п.) или использовал в качестве основного источника получения средств к существованию (орудия труда, творческая мастерская и т.п.), суд может с учетом имущественного положения наследников, имеющих право на обязательную долю, уменьшить размер обязательной доли.
3. Любые ограничения и обременения, установленные в завещании для наследника, имеющего право на обязательную долю в наследстве, действительны лишь в отношении той части переходящего к нему наследства, которая превышает обязательную долю.
Статья 1065. Права супруга при наследовании
1. Принадлежащее супругу в силу завещания или закона право наследования не затрагивает других его имущественных прав, связанных с состоянием в браке с наследодателем, в том числе права собственности на часть имущества, совместно нажитого в браке.
2. По решению суда супруг может быть устранен от наследования по закону, за исключением наследования на основании статьи 1064 настоящего Кодекса, если будет доказано, что брак с наследодателем фактически прекратился до открытия наследства и супруги в течение не менее пяти лет до открытия наследства проживали раздельно и не вели общее хозяйство.
Статья 1066. Охрана наследства и управление им
1. Для защиты прав наследников, отказополучателей и других заинтересованных лиц нотариус по месту открытия наследства принимает указанные в статьях 1067 и 1068 настоящего Кодекса и другие необходимые меры по охране наследства и управлению им.
2. Меры по охране наследства или управлению им принимаются нотариусом по заявлению одного или нескольких наследников, исполнителя завещания, органа местного управления и самоуправления или других лиц, действующих в интересах сохранения наследственного имущества. Нотариус вправе по собственной инициативе принять меры по охране наследства или управлению им.
3. В целях выявления состава наследства и его охраны нотариус вправе запрашивать у банков и небанковских кредитно-финансовых организаций сведения об имеющихся у них во вкладах (депозитах), на счетах или переданных им на хранение деньгах (валюте), валютных и иных ценностях, принадлежащих наследодателю. Полученные сведения нотариус может сообщать лишь исполнителю завещания и наследникам.
4. Меры по охране наследства и управлению им осуществляются со дня составления описи в соответствии с пунктом 1 статьи 1067 настоящего Кодекса в течение срока, определяемого нотариусом с учетом характера и ценности наследства и времени, необходимого наследникам, но не более чем в течение одного года.
5. Охрана наследства и управление им осуществляются возмездно (статья 1085), если законодательством не установлено иное.
6. В случае, когда наследственное имущество находится в разных местах, нотариус по месту открытия наследства направляет через органы юстиции нотариусу или должностному лицу, уполномоченному совершать нотариальные действия, по месту нахождения соответствующей части наследственного имущества обязательное для исполнения поручение об охране этого имущества или управлении им.
Статья 1067. Меры по охране наследства
1. Для охраны наследства нотариус производит опись наследственного имущества при участии двух свидетелей, отвечающих требованиям, установленным пунктом 3 статьи 1044 настоящего Кодекса, а также заинтересованных лиц, пожелавших присутствовать при описи имущества.
2. Входящие в состав наследства наличные деньги (валюта) вносятся в депозит нотариуса, дипломатического агента дипломатического представительства Республики Беларусь и консульского должностного лица консульского учреждения Республики Беларусь, а валютные ценности, изделия из драгоценных камней и металлов и ценные бумаги, не требующие управления ими, передаются банку или небанковской кредитно-финансовой организации для хранения по договору в порядке, предусмотренном статьей 811 настоящего Кодекса.
3. Входящее в состав наследства оружие передается нотариусом на хранение органам внутренних дел.
4. Входящее в состав наследства имущество, не указанное в пунктах 2 и 3 настоящей статьи, если оно не требует управления, передается нотариусом по договору на хранение кому-либо из наследников, а при невозможности передать его наследникам – другому лицу по усмотрению нотариуса.
5. Порядок описи нотариусом наследственного имущества и принятия им мер к охране этого имущества, в том числе обязательные и другие условия договоров его хранения, а также порядок определения вознаграждения за его хранение устанавливаются законодательством.
Статья 1068. Меры по управлению наследством
1. Если в составе наследства имеется имущество, требующее не только охраны, но и управления (предприятие, доля в уставном фонде хозяйственного общества или товарищества, ценные бумаги, исключительные права и т.п.), нотариус в соответствии со статьей 909 настоящего Кодекса в качестве вверителя заключает договор доверительного управления этим имуществом.
2. Обязательные и другие условия договора доверительного управления наследственным имуществом, порядок его заключения и определения размера вознаграждения доверительному управляющему устанавливаются законодательством в соответствии с правилами главы 52 настоящего Кодекса, если иное не вытекает из существа отношений по доверительному управлению наследством.
ГЛАВА 72 ПРИОБРЕТЕНИЕ НАСЛЕДСТВА
Статья 1069. Принятие наследства
1. Для приобретения наследства наследник должен его принять.
Для приобретения выморочного наследства (статья 1039) принятие наследства не требуется. Такое наследство переходит в собственность административно-территориальной единицы на основании
решения суда, которым наследство признается выморочным.
2. Принятие наследником части наследства означает принятие всего причитающегося ему наследства, в чем бы оно ни заключалось и где бы ни находилось.
Не допускается принятие наследства под условием или с оговорками.
3. Принятие наследства одним или несколькими наследниками не означает принятия наследства остальными наследниками.
4. Принятое наследство признается принадлежащим наследнику со времени открытия наследства независимо от момента государственной регистрации права наследника на это имущество, если право подлежит регистрации.
5. Непринятие наследником наследства влечет те же последствия, что и его отказ от наследства без указания лица, в пользу которого он отказался от наследства, поскольку иное не установлено законом.
Статья 1070. Способы принятия наследства
1. Принятие наследства осуществляется подачей нотариусу по месту открытия наследства заявления наследника о принятии наследства либо его заявления о выдаче свидетельства о праве на наследство.
Принятие наследства через представителя возможно, если в доверенности специально предусмотрено полномочие на его принятие.
2. Признается, если не доказано иное, что наследник принял наследство, когда он фактически вступил во владение или управление наследственным имуществом, в частности, когда наследник:
1) принял меры к сохранению имущества, к защите его от посягательств или притязаний третьих лиц;
2) произвел за свой счет расходы на содержание имущества;
3) оплатил за свой счет долги наследодателя или получил от третьих лиц причитавшиеся ему суммы.
Статья 1071. Срок для принятия наследства
1. Наследство может быть принято в течение шести месяцев со дня открытия наследства.
2. Если право наследования возникает для других лиц в случае отказа наследника от наследства, они могут принять наследство в течение оставшейся части срока, указанного в пункте 1 настоящей статьи, а если она менее трех месяцев, то в течение трех месяцев.
3. Лица, для которых право наследования возникает лишь в случае непринятия наследства другим наследником, могут принять наследство до истечения трех месяцев со дня окончания срока, указанного в пункте 1 настоящей статьи.
Статья 1072. Принятие наследства по истечении установленного срока
1. По заявлению наследника, пропустившего срок для принятия наследства (статья 1071), суд может признать его принявшим наследство, если найдет причины пропуска срока уважительными, в частности, если установит, что этот срок был пропущен потому, что наследник не знал и не должен был знать об открытии наследства, и при условии, что наследник, пропустивший срок для
принятия наследства, обратился в суд в течение шести месяцев после того, как причины пропуска этого срока отпали.
Признав наследника принявшим наследство, суд решает вытекающие из этого вопросы прав других наследников на наследственное имущество, а также признает недействительными выданные ранее свидетельства о праве на наследство. В этом случае выдача нового свидетельства о праве на наследство не требуется.
2. Наследство может быть принято наследником по истечении срока, установленного для его принятия, без обращения в суд при условии согласия на это всех остальных наследников, принявших наследство. Подписи этих наследников под документами, содержащими такое согласие, должны быть засвидетельствованы в порядке, указанном в пункте 2 статьи 1083 настоящего Кодекса. Такое соглашение наследников является основанием для аннулирования нотариусом выданного ранее свидетельства о праве на наследство и выдачи нового свидетельства.
Если на основании ранее выданного свидетельства о праве на наследство, впоследствии аннулированного нотариусом, была осуществлена государственная регистрация прав на недвижимое имущество, то выданное нотариусом новое свидетельство является основанием для внесения соответствующих изменений в запись о государственной регистрации.
3. Наследник, принявший наследство в соответствии с настоящей статьей после истечения установленного для этого срока, имеет право на получение причитающегося ему наследства в соответствии с правилами статей 973, 974, 976 и 977 настоящего Кодекса.
В случае, указанном в части первой пункта 2 настоящей статьи, эти правила применяются постольку, поскольку нотариально удостоверенным соглашением между наследниками не предусмотрено иное.
Статья 1073. Переход права на принятие наследства (наследственная трансмиссия)
1. Если наследник, призванный к наследованию по завещанию или по закону, умер после открытия наследства, не успев его принять, право на принятие причитавшегося ему наследства переходит к его наследникам. Право на принятие наследства в порядке наследственной трансмиссии не входит в состав наследства, открывшегося после смерти такого наследника.
2. Право принять наследство, принадлежащее умершему наследнику, может быть осуществлено его наследниками на общих основаниях в соответствии со статьями 1069-1072 настоящего Кодекса.
Если оставшаяся после смерти наследника часть срока для принятия наследства составляет менее трех месяцев, она удлиняется до трех месяцев.
По истечении срока для принятия наследства наследники умершего наследника могут быть признаны судом принявшими наследство в соответствии со статьей 1072 настоящего Кодекса, если суд найдет уважительными причины пропуска этого срока наследниками умершего.
3. Право наследника принять часть наследства в качестве обязательной доли (статья 1064) не переходит к его наследникам.
Статья 1074. Право отказаться от наследства
1. Наследник вправе отказаться от наследства в течение срока, установленного для принятия наследства (статья 1071), в том числе и в случае, когда он уже принял наследство.
Если наследник принял наследство, фактически вступил во владение или управление наследственным имуществом (пункт 2 статьи 1070), суд может по заявлению этого наследника
признать его отказавшимся от наследства и по истечении установленного срока, если найдет причины его пропуска уважительными.
2. Отказ от наследства не может быть впоследствии изменен или взят обратно.
3. Отказ от наследства совершается подачей заявления наследника нотариусу по месту открытия наследства.
В случае, когда заявление подается нотариусу не самим наследником, подпись наследника на таком заявлении должна быть засвидетельствована нотариусом или должностным лицом, уполномоченным совершать нотариальные действия (пункт 6 статьи 1045).
Отказ от наследства через представителя возможен, если в доверенности специально предусмотрено полномочие на такой отказ.
4. Отказ от наследства в случаях, когда наследником является несовершеннолетний либо гражданин, признанный недееспособным или ограниченно дееспособным, допускается с предварительного разрешения органа опеки и попечительства.
Статья 1075. Отказ от наследства в пользу другого лица, отказ от части наследства или под условием
1. При отказе от наследства наследник вправе указать, что он отказался от него в пользу других лиц из числа наследников по завещанию или наследников по закону любой очереди, в том числе тех, которые наследуют по праву представления.
Не допускается отказ в пользу другого лица:
1) от имущества, наследуемого по завещанию, если все имущество наследодателя завещано назначенным им наследникам;
2) от обязательной доли в наследстве (статья 1064);
3) если наследнику подназначен наследник (статья 1042).
2. Отказ от наследства с оговорками или под условием не допускается.
3. Отказ от части причитающегося наследнику наследства не допускается. Но если наследник призывается к наследованию и по завещанию, и по закону, он вправе отказаться от наследства, причитающегося ему по одному из этих оснований либо по обоим основаниям.
Статья 1076. Право отказаться от получения завещательного отказа
1. Отказополучатель вправе отказаться от получения завещательного отказа.
Отказ от части причитающегося отказополучателю имущества, отказ в пользу другого лица, с оговорками или под условием не допускается.
2. В случае, когда отказополучатель является одновременно наследником, его право, предусмотренное настоящей статьей, не зависит от его права принять наследство или отказаться от него.
3. Если отказополучатель отказался от завещательного отказа, наследник, обязанный исполнить завещательный отказ, освобождается от обязанности его исполнения.
Статья 1077. Приращение наследственных долей
1. Если наследник не примет наследство, откажется от наследства без указания другого наследника, в пользу которого он отказывается, будет отстранен от наследования по основаниям, указанным в статье 1038 настоящего Кодекса, либо вследствие признания завещания недействительным, то часть наследства, которая причиталась бы такому отпавшему наследнику, поступает к наследникам по закону, призванным к наследованию, и распределяется между ними пропорционально их наследственным долям.
Если наследодатель завещал все имущество назначенным им наследникам, часть наследства, причитавшаяся наследнику, отказавшемуся от наследства или отпавшему по иным указанным выше причинам, поступает к остальным наследникам по завещанию и распределяется между ними пропорционально их наследственным долям, поскольку иное не предусмотрено завещанием.
2. Правила, содержащиеся в пункте 1 настоящей статьи, не применяются, если отказавшемуся или отпавшему по иным причинам наследнику подназначен наследник (пункт 2 статьи 1042).
Статья 1078. Общая собственность наследников на наследство
При наследовании по закону, если наследственное имущество переходит к двум или нескольким наследникам, и при наследовании по завещанию, если оно завещано двум или нескольким наследникам без указания конкретных вещей и прав, наследуемых каждым из них, имущество поступает со дня открытия наследства в общую долевую собственность наследников. К общей собственности наследников на наследственное имущество применяются правила главы 16 настоящего Кодекса об общей долевой собственности, если иное не установлено правилами настоящего Кодекса о наследовании.
Статья 1079. Раздел наследства по соглашению между наследниками
1. Имущество, которое входит в состав наследства и находится в общей долевой собственности двух или нескольких наследников, может быть разделено по соглашению между ними.
2. Соглашение о разделе наследства, в том числе о выделе из него доли одного из наследников, если оно заключено до выдачи свидетельства о праве на наследство и нотариально удостоверено, является основанием для выдачи наследникам свидетельства о праве на наследство (статья 1083) с указанием в свидетельстве конкретных вещей.
3. Соглашение наследников о разделе наследства, если оно заключено в течение шести месяцев после выдачи свидетельства о праве на наследство и нотариально удостоверено, является основанием для государственной регистрации наследниками их права на недвижимое имущество в соответствии с этим соглашением.
4. Исключен.
Статья 1080. Раздел наследства судом
При недостижении наследниками соглашения о разделе наследства, в том числе о выделе из него доли одного из наследников, раздел производится в судебном порядке в соответствии со статьей 255 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 1081. Охрана интересов ребенка при разделе наследства
1. При наличии зачатого, но еще не родившегося наследника раздел наследства может быть произведен лишь после рождения такого наследника.
2. Для охраны интересов несовершеннолетних к участию в составлении соглашения о разделе наследства (статья 1079) и к рассмотрению в суде дела о разделе наследства (статья 1080) должен быть приглашен представитель органа опеки и попечительства.
Статья 1082. Преимущественное право на определенные объекты из состава наследства при его разделе
1. Наследник, обладающий совместно с наследодателем правом общей собственности на неделимую вещь (статья 133), доля в праве на которую входит в состав наследства, имеет при разделе наследства преимущественное право на получение в счет своей наследственной доли вещи, находящейся в общей собственности.
2. Наследник, постоянно пользовавшийся совместно с наследодателем или самостоятельно неделимой вещью (статья 133), входящей в состав наследства, имеет при разделе наследства преимущественное право на получение в счет своей наследственной доли этой вещи. Наследники, для которых принадлежавшие наследодателю жилой дом, квартира или иное жилое помещение в течение года до открытия наследства являлись единственным местом постоянного проживания, имеют при разделе наследства преимущественное право на получение в счет их наследственных долей этого жилого помещения, а также находящихся в этом помещении домашней утвари и предметов домашнего обихода.
3. Несоразмерность имущества, о преимущественном праве на получение которого заявляет наследник на основании настоящей статьи, его наследственной доле устраняется передачей остальным наследникам другого имущества из состава наследства либо иной компенсацией, в том числе выплатой соответствующей денежной суммы. Если соглашением между всеми наследниками не установлено иное, осуществление кем-либо из них преимущественного права возможно после предоставления соответствующей компенсации другим наследникам.
Статья 1083. Свидетельство о праве на наследство
1. Свидетельство о праве на наследство выдается по месту открытия наследства нотариусом или должностным лицом, которому предоставлено право совершения такого нотариального действия.
2. Свидетельство о праве на наследство выдается по заявлению наследника, принявшего наследство или принимающего его, подачей этого заявления (статья 1070). В случае, если заявление о выдаче свидетельства о праве на наследство подано нотариусу не самим наследником, подпись наследника на заявлении должна быть засвидетельствована нотариусом или должностным лицом, уполномоченным совершать нотариальные действия (пункт 6 статьи 1045). По желанию наследников свидетельство может быть выдано всем наследникам вместе или каждому наследнику в отдельности.
3. В случае выявления после выдачи свидетельства о праве на наследство наследственного имущества, на которое свидетельство не было выдано, выдается дополнительное свидетельство о праве на наследство.
Статья 1084. Сроки выдачи свидетельства о праве на наследство
1. Свидетельство о праве на наследство выдается наследникам по истечении шести месяцев со дня открытия наследства, за исключением случаев, предусмотренных настоящим Кодексом.
2. При наследовании как по закону, так и по завещанию свидетельство о праве на наследство может быть выдано ранее истечения шести месяцев со дня открытия наследства, если имеются достоверные данные о том, что кроме лиц, обратившихся за выдачей свидетельства, иных наследников в отношении наследства или его соответствующей части не имеется.
3. Выдача свидетельства о праве на наследство может быть приостановлена по постановлению суда в случае спора о праве собственности на наследственное имущество.
Статья 1085. Возмещение расходов, вызванных смертью наследодателя, охраной наследства и управлением им
1. Необходимые расходы, вызванные предсмертной болезнью наследодателя, расходы на похороны наследодателя, а также расходы, связанные с охраной или управлением наследственным имуществом, возмещаются за счет наследства в пределах его стоимости.
2. До получения наследниками свидетельства о праве на наследство требования о возмещении расходов, указанных в пункте 1 настоящей статьи, могут быть предъявлены к наследнику, принявшему наследство, или к исполнителю завещания. При отсутствии указанных лиц выплата необходимых сумм, в том числе из вклада (депозита) или со счета наследодателя, может быть произведена по решению нотариуса. В случае отказа в удовлетворении требований спор разрешается судом.
3. После получения наследниками свидетельства о праве на наследство расходы, указанные в пункте 1 настоящей статьи, возмещаются наследниками в пределах стоимости перешедшего к каждому из них наследственного имущества до погашения требований по долгам наследодателя.
Статья 1086. Ответственность наследников по долгам наследодателя
1. Каждый из наследников, принявших наследство, отвечает по долгам наследодателя в пределах стоимости перешедшего к нему наследственного имущества.
2. Наследник, принявший наследство в результате наследственной трансмиссии (статья 1073), отвечает в пределах стоимости этого наследственного имущества по долгам наследодателя, которому это имущество принадлежало, и не отвечает этим имуществом по долгам наследника, от которого к нему перешло право на принятие наследства.
Наследник, получивший наследственное имущество как непосредственно в результате открытия наследства, так и в результате наследственной трансмиссии (статья 1073), не отвечает по долгам наследника, от которого к нему перешло право на принятие наследства, а по долгам наследодателя отвечает в пределах стоимости наследственного имущества, полученного по обоим основаниям.
3. Наследники отвечают по долгам наследодателя солидарно (статья 304), но каждый из них отвечает в пределах, указанных в пункте 1 настоящей статьи.
4. Кредиторы наследодателя вправе в течение срока исковой давности предъявить свои требования принявшим наследство наследникам. До принятия наследства требования кредиторов могут быть предъявлены к исполнителю завещания или заявлены к наследственному имуществу. В последнем случае рассмотрение иска приостанавливается до принятия наследства наследниками или перехода его как выморочного к административно-территориальной единице.
ГЛАВА 73 ОСОБЕННОСТИ НАСЛЕДОВАНИЯ ОТДЕЛЬНЫХ ВИДОВ ИМУЩЕСТВА
Статья 1087. Наследование права на стоимость доли в хозяйственном товариществе и на стоимость пая в производственном кооперативе
1. В состав наследства участника полного товарищества или полного товарища в коммандитном товариществе входит право на стоимость доли этого участника в уставном фонде товарищества, если иное не предусмотрено учредительным договором. В случае принятия наследника в число участников полного товарищества (пункт 1 статьи 78) либо в качестве полного товарища в коммандитное товарищество стоимость доли ему не выплачивается. Наследники участника полного товарищества или полного товарища в коммандитном товариществе несут
ответственность по обязательствам товарищества перед третьими лицами в порядке, предусмотренном статьей 72 настоящего Кодекса.
2. В состав наследства члена производственного кооператива входит право на стоимость пая умершего члена кооператива. В случае принятия наследника в члены кооператива (пункт 4 статьи 111) стоимость пая ему не выплачивается.
Статья 1088. Наследование доли (пая) вкладчика в коммандитном товариществе, участника (акционера) хозяйственного общества и члена потребительского кооператива
1. В состав наследства участника коммандитного товарищества, являвшегося вкладчиком, входит доля этого вкладчика в уставном фонде товарищества.
2. В состав наследства участника общества с ограниченной ответственностью или общества с дополнительной ответственностью входит доля этого участника в уставном фонде общества, если уставом общества не предусмотрено, что такой переход доли к наследникам допускается только с согласия остальных участников общества. Отказ в согласии на переход доли влечет обязанность общества выплатить наследникам ее стоимость в порядке, предусмотренном пунктом 6 статьи 92 настоящего Кодекса и уставом общества.
3. В состав наследства участника акционерного общества (акционера) входят принадлежавшие ему акции.
4. В состав наследства члена потребительского кооператива входит пай умершего члена кооператива.
5. Наследник участника коммандитного товарищества, являвшегося вкладчиком, участника общества с ограниченной ответственностью или общества с дополнительной ответственностью либо акционера в акционерном обществе становится участником (акционером) соответствующего товарищества или общества, за исключением случая, когда по уставу общества с ограниченной ответственностью или общества с дополнительной ответственностью для этого требуется согласие участников общества и в таком согласии отказано.
6. Наследник члена потребительского кооператива обладает правом быть принятым в члены соответствующего кооператива.
7. Решение вопроса о том, кто из наследников может быть принят в хозяйственное товарищество или общество либо в потребительский кооператив в случае, когда права наследодателя к соответствующему юридическому лицу перешли к нескольким наследникам, а также порядок, способы и сроки выплаты наследникам, не ставшим участниками товарищества, общества или кооператива, причитающихся им сумм или выдачи вместо них имущества в натуре определяются законодательством о хозяйственных товариществах и обществах, о потребительских кооперативах и учредительными документами соответствующего юридического лица.
Статья 1089. Наследование вещей, ограниченно оборотоспособных
Принадлежавшие на праве собственности умершему вещи, нахождение которых в обороте допускается по специальному разрешению (гражданское оружие и др.), входят в состав наследства и наследуются в соответствии с настоящим Кодексом с соблюдением установленного законодательством порядка оборота соответствующего имущества.
Указанные вещи, входящие в состав наследства, изымаются и берутся на ответственное хранение уполномоченными органами государственного управления (должностными лицами) в порядке, установленном законодательством.
На принятие наследства, в состав которого входят указанные вещи, не требуется специального разрешения. При этом не допускается принятие наследства способами, нарушающими установленный законодательством порядок оборота соответствующего имущества.
Наследник, не имеющий специального разрешения, не может владеть и пользоваться ограниченно оборотоспособными вещами, а равно распоряжаться ими иначе, чем это предусмотрено статьей 239 настоящего Кодекса.
Если наследник не обратился за получением специального разрешения в течение срока, предусмотренного законодательством, либо ему отказано в выдаче такого разрешения, его право собственности на указанные вещи подлежит прекращению в соответствии со статьей 239 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 1090. Наследование невыплаченных сумм заработной платы, пенсий, пособий и платежей в возмещение вреда
1. Право на получение подлежавших выплате гражданину, но не полученных им при жизни по какой-либо причине сумм заработной платы и приравненных к ней платежей, пенсий, пособий по социальному страхованию, иных пособий и платежей в возмещение вреда жизни или здоровью принадлежит проживавшим совместно с умершим членам семьи, а также его нетрудоспособным иждивенцам независимо от того, проживали ли они совместно с умершим.
2. Требования о выплате сумм на основании пункта 1 настоящей статьи могут быть предъявлены к обязанным лицам в течение шести месяцев со дня открытия наследства.
3. Если лиц, которые имели бы на основании пункта 1 настоящей статьи право на получение сумм, не выплаченных умершему, нет либо они не предъявили требований о выплате этих сумм в установленный срок, соответствующие суммы включаются в состав наследства и наследуются на общих основаниях, установленных настоящим Кодексом.
Статья 1091. Наследование имущества, предоставленного Республикой Беларусь или административно-территориальной единицей безвозмездно или на льготных условиях
Средства транспорта и другое имущество, предоставленные гражданину Республикой Беларусь или административно-территориальной единицей безвозмездно или на льготных условиях в связи с его инвалидностью или другими подобными обстоятельствами, входят в состав наследства и наследуются на общих основаниях, установленных настоящим Кодексом, за исключением случаев, когда из установленных законодательством условий предоставления этого имущества следует, что оно передается лишь в пользование.
Статья 1092. Наследование государственных наград и почетных знаков
1. Государственные награды, которых был удостоен гражданин и на которые распространяется законодательство о государственных наградах Республики Беларусь, не входят в состав наследства. Передача этих наград после смерти награжденного другим лицам осуществляется в порядке, установленном законодательством о государственных наградах Республики Беларусь.
2. Принадлежавшие наследодателю государственные награды, на которые не распространяется законодательство о государственных наградах Республики Беларусь, почетные, памятные и иные знаки, в том числе награды и знаки в составе коллекций, входят в состав наследства и наследуются на общих основаниях, установленных настоящим Кодексом.
РАЗДЕЛ VII МЕЖДУНАРОДНОЕ ЧАСТНОЕ ПРАВО
ГЛАВА 74 ОБЩИЕ ПОЛОЖЕНИЯ
Статья 1093. Определение права, подлежащего применению к гражданско-правовым отношениям, осложненным иностранным элементом
1. Право, подлежащее применению к гражданско-правовым отношениям с участием иностранных граждан или иностранных юридических лиц либо осложненным иным иностранным элементом, определяется на основании Конституции Республики Беларусь, настоящего Кодекса, иных законодательных актов, международных договоров Республики Беларусь и не противоречащих законодательству Республики Беларусь международных обычаев.
2. Соглашение сторон о выборе права должно быть явно выражено или прямо вытекать из условий договора и обстоятельств дела, рассматриваемых в их совокупности.
3. Если в соответствии с пунктом 1 настоящей статьи невозможно определить право, подлежащее применению, применяется право, наиболее тесно связанное с гражданско-правовыми отношениями, осложненными иностранным элементом.
4. Правила настоящего раздела об определении права, подлежащего применению судом, соответственно применяются другими органами, наделенными правомочиями решать вопрос о подлежащем применению праве.
Статья 1094. Квалификация юридических понятий
1. При определении права, подлежащего применению, суд основывается на толковании юридических понятий в соответствии с правом страны суда, если иное не предусмотрено законодательными актами.
2. Если юридические понятия, требующие правовой квалификации, не известны праву страны суда или известны под другим названием или с другим содержанием и не могут быть определены путем толкования по праву страны суда, то при их квалификации может применяться право иностранного государства.
Статья 1095. Установление содержания норм иностранного права
1. При применении иностранного права суд или иной государственный орган устанавливает содержание его норм в соответствии с их официальным толкованием, практикой применения и доктриной в соответствующем иностранном государстве.
2. В целях установления содержания норм иностранного права суд может обратиться в установленном порядке за содействием и разъяснением к Министерству юстиции, иным компетентным государственным органам Республики Беларусь, в том числе находящимся за границей, либо привлечь экспертов.
3. Лица, участвующие в деле, вправе представлять документы, подтверждающие содержание норм иностранного права, на которые они ссылаются в обоснование своих требований или возражений, и иным образом содействовать суду в установлении содержания этих норм.
4. Если содержание норм иностранного права, несмотря на предпринятые в соответствии с настоящей статьей меры в разумные сроки, не установлено, применяется право Республики Беларусь.
Статья 1096. Обратная отсылка и отсылка к праву третьей страны
1. Любая отсылка к иностранному праву в соответствии с правилами настоящего раздела, кроме случаев, предусмотренных настоящей статьей, должна рассматриваться как отсылка к материальному, а не коллизионному праву соответствующей страны.
2. Обратная отсылка к праву Республики Беларусь и отсылка к праву третьей страны применяются в случаях применения иностранного права согласно статье 1103, пунктам 1, 3, 5 статьи 1104, статьям 1106 и 1109 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 1097. Последствия обхода акта законодательства
Недействительны соглашения и иные действия участников отношений, регулируемых гражданским законодательством, направленные на то, чтобы в обход правил настоящего раздела о подлежащем применению праве подчинить соответствующие отношения иному праву. В этом случае применяется право соответствующего государства, подлежащее применению в соответствии с настоящим разделом.
Статья 1098. Взаимность
1. Суд применяет иностранное право независимо от того, применяется ли в соответствующем иностранном государстве к аналогичным отношениям право Республики Беларусь, за исключением случаев, когда применение иностранного права на началах взаимности предусмотрено законодательством Республики Беларусь.
2. Если применение иностранного права зависит от взаимности, предполагается, что она существует, поскольку не доказано иное.
Статья 1099. Оговорка о публичном порядке
Иностранное право не применяется в случаях, когда его применение противоречило бы основам правопорядка (публичному порядку) Республики Беларусь, а также в иных случаях, прямо предусмотренных законодательными актами. В этих случаях применяется право Республики Беларусь.
Статья 1100. Применение императивных норм
1. Правила настоящего раздела не затрагивают действия императивных норм права Республики Беларусь, регулирующих соответствующие отношения независимо от подлежащего применению права.
2. При применении права какой-либо страны (кроме Республики Беларусь), согласно правилам настоящего раздела, суд может применить императивные нормы права другой страны, имеющие тесную связь с рассматриваемым отношением, если, согласно праву этой страны, такие нормы должны регулировать соответствующие отношения независимо от подлежащего применению права. При этом суд должен принимать во внимание назначение и характер таких норм, а также последствия их применения.
Статья 1101. Применение права страны с множественностью правовых систем
В случаях, когда подлежит применению право страны, в которой действуют несколько территориальных или иных правовых систем, применяется правовая система в соответствии с правом этой страны.
Статья 1102. Реторсии
Правительством Республики Беларусь могут быть установлены ответные ограничения (реторсии) в отношении прав граждан и организаций тех государств, в которых имеются специальные
ограничения прав граждан и организаций Республики Беларусь.
ГЛАВА 75 КОЛЛИЗИОННЫЕ НОРМЫ
§ 1. Лица
Статья 1103. Личный закон физического лица
1. Личным законом физического лица считается право страны, гражданство (подданство) которой это лицо имеет. При наличии у лица гражданства (подданства) двух или более государств личным законом считается право страны, с которой лицо наиболее тесно связано. Если лицо наряду с гражданством Республики Беларусь имеет гражданство (подданство) двух или более иностранных государств, его личным законом считается право Республики Беларусь.
2. Личным законом физического лица, не имеющего доказательств своей принадлежности к гражданству (подданству) какого-либо государства, считается право страны, в которой это лицо постоянно проживает.
3. Личным законом физического лица, которому предоставлены статус беженца или иные формы защиты, в государстве, не являющемся государством его гражданства (подданства), является право страны, в которой это лицо постоянно проживает.
Статья 1104. Правоспособность и дееспособность физического лица
1. Правоспособность и дееспособность физического лица определяются его личным законом.
2. Иностранные граждане и лица без гражданства пользуются в Республике Беларусь гражданской правоспособностью наравне с гражданами Республики Беларусь, если иное не определено Конституцией, законами и международными договорами Республики Беларусь.
3. Гражданская дееспособность физического лица в отношении сделок, совершаемых в Республике Беларусь, и обязательств, возникающих вследствие причинения вреда в Республике Беларусь, определяется по законодательству Республики Беларусь.
4. Способность физического лица, осуществляющего предпринимательскую деятельность, быть индивидуальным предпринимателем и иметь связанные с этим права и обязанности определяется по праву страны, где физическое лицо зарегистрировано в качестве индивидуального предпринимателя. При отсутствии страны регистрации применяется право страны основного места осуществления индивидуальной предпринимательской деятельности.
5. Признание физического лица недееспособным или ограниченно дееспособным подчиняется праву страны суда.
Статья 1105. Признание физического лица безвестно отсутствующим и объявление его умершим
Признание физического лица безвестно отсутствующим и объявление его умершим подчиняется праву страны суда.
Статья 1106. Имя физического лица
Права физического лица на имя, его использование и защиту определяются его личным законом, поскольку иное не вытекает из правил, предусмотренных частью второй пункта 2 и пунктом 4 статьи 18, статьями 1115 и 1132 настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 1107. Исключена
Статья 1108. Исключена
Статья 1109. Опека и попечительство
1. Опека или попечительство над несовершеннолетними, недееспособными или ограниченными в дееспособности совершеннолетними лицами устанавливается и отменяется по личному закону лица, в отношении которого устанавливается или отменяется опека или попечительство.
2. Обязанность опекуна (попечителя) принять опекунство (попечительство) определяется по личному закону лица, назначаемого опекуном (попечителем).
3. Правоотношения между опекуном (попечителем) и лицом, находящимся под опекой (попечительством), определяются по праву страны, учреждение которой назначило опекуна (попечителя). Однако если лицо, находящееся под опекой (попечительством), проживает в Республике Беларусь, применяется право Республики Беларусь, если оно более благоприятно для этого лица.
4. Опека (попечительство), установленная над гражданами Республики Беларусь, проживающими за пределами Республики Беларусь, признается действительной в Республике Беларусь, если против установления опеки (попечительства) или против ее признания нет основанных на законодательстве возражений соответствующего консульского учреждения Республики Беларусь.
Статья 1110. Правоспособность иностранных организаций, не являющихся юридическими лицами по иностранному праву
Гражданская правоспособность иностранных организаций, не являющихся юридическими лицами по иностранному праву, определяется по праву страны, где организация учреждена.
Статья 1111. Закон юридического лица
Законом юридического лица считается право страны, где это юридическое лицо учреждено.
Статья 1112. Правоспособность иностранного юридического лица
1. Гражданская правоспособность иностранного юридического лица определяется по праву страны, где учреждено юридическое лицо.
2. Иностранное юридическое лицо не может ссылаться на ограничение полномочий его органа или представителя на совершение сделки, не известное праву страны, в которой орган или представитель иностранного юридического лица совершил сделку.
Статья 1113. Национальный режим деятельности иностранных юридических лиц в Республике Беларусь
Иностранные юридические лица осуществляют в Республике Беларусь предпринимательскую и иную деятельность, регулируемую гражданским законодательством, в соответствии с правилами, установленными этим законодательством для такой деятельности юридических лиц Республики Беларусь, если законодательством Республики Беларусь для иностранных юридических лиц не предусмотрено иное.
Статья 1114. Участие государства в гражданско-правовых отношениях с иностранным элементом
К гражданско-правовым отношениям с иностранным элементом с участием государства правила настоящего раздела применяются на общих основаниях, если иное не предусмотрено законодательными актами Республики Беларусь.
§ 2. Право, подлежащее применению к личным неимущественным правам
Статья 1115. Защита личных неимущественных прав
К личным неимущественным правам применяется право страны, где имело место действие или иное обстоятельство, послужившее основанием для требования о защите таких прав.
§ 3. Сделки, представительство, исковая давность
Статья 1116. Форма сделки
1. Форма сделки подчиняется праву места ее совершения. Однако сделка, совершенная за границей, не может быть признана недействительной вследствие несоблюдения формы, если соблюдены требования права Республики Беларусь.
2. Внешнеэкономическая сделка, хотя бы одним из участников которой является юридическое лицо Республики Беларусь или гражданин Республики Беларусь, совершается независимо от места заключения сделки в письменной форме.
3. Форма сделки в отношении недвижимого имущества подчиняется праву страны, где находится это имущество, а в отношении недвижимого имущества, которое зарегистрировано в Республике Беларусь, – праву Республики Беларусь.
Статья 1117. Доверенность
Форма и срок действия доверенности определяются по праву страны, где выдана доверенность. Однако доверенность не может быть признана недействительной вследствие несоблюдения формы, если последняя удовлетворяет требованиям права Республики Беларусь.
Статья 1118. Исковая давность
1. Исковая давность определяется по праву страны, применяемому для регулирования соответствующего отношения.
2. Требования, на которые исковая давность не распространяется, определяются по праву Республики Беларусь, если хотя бы один из участников соответствующего отношения является гражданином Республики Беларусь или юридическим лицом Республики Беларусь.
§ 4. Право собственности и иные вещные права
Статья 1119. Общие положения о праве, применимом к праву собственности и иным вещным правам
1. Право собственности и другие вещные права на недвижимое и движимое имущество определяются по праву страны, где это имущество находится, если иное не предусмотрено законодательными актами.
2. Принадлежность имущества к недвижимым или движимым вещам, а также иная юридическая квалификация имущества определяются по праву страны, где это имущество находится.
Статья 1120. Возникновение и прекращение права собственности и иных вещных прав
1. Возникновение и прекращение права собственности и иных вещных прав на имущество, являющееся предметом сделки, определяются по праву места совершения сделки, если иное не установлено соглашением сторон.
2. Возникновение и прекращение права собственности и иных вещных прав на имущество не по сделке определяются по праву страны, где это имущество находилось в момент, когда имело место действие или иное обстоятельство, послужившее основанием для возникновения либо прекращения права собственности и иных вещных прав, если иное не предусмотрено законодательством Республики Беларусь.
Возникновение права собственности и иных вещных прав на имущество вследствие приобретательной давности определяется правом страны, где имущество находилось в момент окончания срока приобретательной давности.
Статья 1121. Право собственности и иные вещные права на транспортные средства и иное имущество, подлежащие государственной регистрации
Право собственности и иные вещные права на транспортные средства и иное имущество, подлежащие внесению в государственные реестры, определяются по праву страны, где эти транспортные средства или имущество зарегистрированы.
Статья 1122. Право собственности и иные вещные права на движимое имущество в пути
Право собственности и другие вещные права на движимое имущество, находящееся в пути по сделке, определяются по праву страны, из которой это имущество отправлено, если иное не установлено соглашением сторон.
Статья 1123. Защита права собственности и иных вещных прав
1. К защите права собственности и иных вещных прав применяется по выбору заявителя право страны, где находится имущество, или право страны суда.
2. К защите права собственности и иных вещных прав на недвижимое имущество применяется право страны, в которой это имущество находится. В отношении имущества, которое зарегистрировано в Республике Беларусь, применяется право Республики Беларусь.
§ 5. Договорные обязательства
Статья 1124. Выбор права сторонами договора
1. Стороны договора могут при заключении договора или в последующем избрать по соглашению между собой право, которое подлежит применению к их правам и обязанностям по этому договору, если это не противоречит законодательству.
2. Соглашение сторон о выборе подлежащего применению права должно быть явно выражено или должно прямо вытекать из условий договора и обстоятельств дела, рассматриваемых в их совокупности.
3. Выбор сторонами по договору подлежащего применению права, сделанный после заключения договора, имеет обратную силу и считается действительным с момента его заключения без ущерба для прав третьих лиц.
4. Стороны договора могут избрать подлежащее применению право как для договора в целом, так и для отдельных его частей.
Статья 1125. Право, применяемое к договору при отсутствии соглашения сторон
1. При отсутствии соглашения сторон договора о подлежащем применению праве к этому договору применяется право страны, где имеет основное место деятельности сторона, являющаяся:
1) продавцом – в договоре купли-продажи;
2) дарителем – в договоре дарения;
3) арендодателем (наймодателем) – в договоре аренды (имущественного найма);
4) ссудодателем – в договоре безвозмездного пользования имуществом (ссуды);
5) подрядчиком – в договоре подряда;
6) перевозчиком – в договоре перевозки;
7) экспедитором – в договоре транспортной экспедиции;
8) заимодавцем (кредитодателем) – в договоре займа (кредитном договоре);
9) поверенным – в договоре поручения;
10) комиссионером – в договоре комиссии;
11) хранителем – в договоре хранения;
12) страховщиком – в договоре страхования;
13) поручителем – в договоре поручительства;
14) залогодателем – в договоре залога;
15) лицензиаром – в лицензионном договоре о пользовании исключительными правами.
При невозможности определить основное место деятельности стороны, указанной в подпунктах 1- 15 настоящего пункта, применяется право страны, где она учреждена, имеет место постоянного жительства.
2. К правам и обязанностям по договору, предметом которого является недвижимость, а также по договору о доверительном управлении имуществом применяется право страны, где это имущество находится, а в отношении имущества, которое зарегистрировано в Республике Беларусь, – законодательство Республики Беларусь.
3. При отсутствии соглашения сторон договора о подлежащем применению праве применяется независимо от положений пункта 1 настоящей статьи:
1) к договорам о совместной деятельности и к договорам о выполнении строительных, монтажных и других работ по капитальному строительству – право страны, где такая деятельность осуществляется или создаются предусмотренные договором результаты;
2) к договору, заключенному на аукционе, по конкурсу или на бирже, – право страны, где проводится аукцион, конкурс или находится биржа.
4. К договорам, не перечисленным в пунктах 1-3 настоящей статьи, при отсутствии соглашения сторон о подлежащем применению праве применяется право страны, где имеет основное место деятельности сторона, которая осуществляет исполнение, имеющее решающее значение для содержания такого договора. При невозможности определить основное место деятельности стороны, которая осуществляет исполнение, имеющее решающее значение для содержания такого договора, применяется право страны, где данная сторона учреждена, имеет место постоянного
жительства. При невозможности определить исполнение, имеющее решающее значение для содержания договора, применяется право страны, с которой договор наиболее тесно связан.
5. В отношении приемки исполнения по договору принимается во внимание право места проведения такой приемки, поскольку сторонами не согласовано иное.
6. Если в договоре использованы принятые в международном обороте торговые термины, то при отсутствии в договоре иных указаний считается, что сторонами согласовано применение к их отношениям обычных значений соответствующих терминов.
Статья 1126. Право, применяемое к договору о создании юридического лица с иностранным участием
К договору о создании юридического лица с иностранным участием применяется право страны, где учреждено юридическое лицо.
Статья 1127. Сфера действия применимого права
1. Право, применяемое к договору в силу положений настоящего параграфа, охватывает, в частности:
1) толкование договора;
2) права и обязанности сторон;
3) исполнение договора;
4) последствия неисполнения или ненадлежащего исполнения договора;
5) прекращение договора;
6) последствия ничтожности или недействительности договора;
7) уступку требований и перевод долга в связи с договором.
2. В отношении способов и процедуры исполнения, а также мер, которые должны быть приняты в случае ненадлежащего исполнения, кроме применимого права принимается во внимание и право страны, в которой происходит исполнение.
§ 6. Внедоговорные обязательства
Статья 1128. Обязательства из односторонних действий
К сделкам из односторонних действий (публичное обещание награды, деятельность в чужом интересе без поручения и др.) применяется право места совершения сделки. Место совершения сделки определяется по праву Республики Беларусь.
Статья 1129. Обязательства вследствие причинения вреда
1. Права и обязанности по обязательствам, возникающим вследствие причинения вреда, определяются по праву страны, где имело место действие или иное обстоятельство, послужившее основанием для требования о возмещении вреда.
2. Права и обязанности по обязательствам, возникающим вследствие причинения вреда за границей, если стороны являются гражданами или юридическими лицами одного и того же государства, определяются по праву этого государства.
3. Иностранное право не применяется, если действие или иное обстоятельство, служащее основанием для требования о возмещении вреда, по законодательству Республики Беларусь не является противоправным.
Статья 1130. Ответственность за ущерб, причиненный потребителю
К требованию о возмещении ущерба, возникшего у потребителя в связи с покупкой товара или оказанием услуги, по выбору потребителя применяется право страны, где:
1) находится место жительства потребителя;
2) находится место жительства или место нахождения производителя или лица, оказавшего услугу;
3) потребитель приобрел товар или ему была оказана услуга.
Статья 1131. Неосновательное обогащение
1. К обязательствам, возникающим вследствие неосновательного обогащения, применяется право страны, где обогащение имело место.
2. Если неосновательное обогащение возникает вследствие отпадения основания, по которому приобретено или сбережено имущество, применимое право определяется по праву страны, которому было подчинено это основание.
3. Понятие неосновательного обогащения определяется по праву Республики Беларусь.
§ 7. Интеллектуальная собственность
Статья 1132. Права на интеллектуальную собственность
1. К правам на интеллектуальную собственность применяется право страны, где испрашивается защита этих прав.
2. Договоры, имеющие своим предметом права на интеллектуальную собственность, регулируются правом, определяемым положениями настоящего раздела о договорных обязательствах.
§ 8. Наследственное право
Статья 1133. Отношения по наследованию
Отношения по наследованию определяются по праву страны, где наследодатель имеет последнее место жительства, поскольку иное не предусмотрено статьями 1134 и 1135, если наследодателем не избрано в завещании право страны, гражданином которой он является.
Статья 1134. Наследование недвижимого имущества и имущества, подлежащего регистрации
Наследование недвижимого имущества определяется по праву страны, где находится это имущество, а имущества, которое зарегистрировано в Республике Беларусь, – по праву Республики Беларусь.
Статья 1135. Способность лиц к составлению и отмене завещания, форма завещания и акта его отмены
Способность лица к составлению и отмене завещания, а также форма завещания и акта его отмены определяются по праву страны, где наследодатель имел место жительства в момент составления акта, если наследодателем не избрано в завещании право страны, гражданином которой он
является. Однако завещание или его отмена не могут быть признаны недействительными вследствие несоблюдения формы, если последняя удовлетворяет требованиям права места составления акта или требованиям права Республики Беларусь.
РАЗДЕЛ VIII ЗАКЛЮЧИТЕЛЬНЫЕ ПОЛОЖЕНИЯ
Статья 1136. Настоящий Кодекс вступает в силу с 1 июля 1999 года, за исключением положений, для которых в настоящем разделе Кодекса установлены иные сроки вступления их в силу. По мере вступления в силу норм настоящего Кодекса считаются утратившими силу соответствующие нормы Гражданского кодекса Республики Беларусь, утвержденного Законом Республики Беларусь от 11 июня 1964 года (с соответствующими изменениями и дополнениями).
Настоящий раздел вступает в силу со дня официального опубликования настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 1137. Впредь до приведения законодательства Республики Беларусь в соответствие с настоящим Кодексом законы и постановления Правительства применяются в той части, в которой они не противоречат Кодексу.
Указанное правило действует и в отношении принятых до вступления в силу Кодекса актов республиканских органов государственного управления по вопросам, которые, согласно Кодексу, могут регулироваться соответственно только законами Республики Беларусь либо актами Президента Республики Беларусь или постановлениями Правительства Республики Беларусь.
Статья 1138. Настоящий Кодекс применяется к отношениям, возникшим после 1 июля 1999 года.
По гражданским правоотношениям, возникшим до 1 июля 1999 года, Кодекс применяется к тем правам и обязанностям, которые возникнут после вступления его в силу.
Статья 1139. По гражданским правоотношениям, возникшим до 1 июля 1999 года, но не урегулированным действовавшим в тот момент законодательством, применяются правила настоящего Кодекса.
Статья 1140. Исключена Статья 1141. Глава 4 («Юридические лица») настоящего Кодекса вступает в силу со дня
официального опубликования Кодекса. С этого дня коммерческие организации могут создаваться исключительно в тех формах, которые предусмотрены указанной главой.
Юридические лица, созданные до официального опубликования настоящего Кодекса, если их виды соответствуют предусмотренным Кодексом, до 1 июля 1999 года обязаны привести свои учредительные документы в соответствие с Кодексом.
Коллективные предприятия, а также предприятия, имущество которых является собственностью иных юридических и (или) физических лиц, а указанным предприятиям принадлежит на праве полного хозяйственного ведения, до 1 июля 2000 года, а арендные предприятия – не позднее месяца по истечении договоров аренды, заключенных до дня официального опубликования Кодекса, должны быть преобразованы в иные предусмотренные Кодексом виды юридических лиц либо ликвидированы. По истечении указанного срока эти юридические лица подлежат ликвидации в судебном порядке по требованию органа, осуществляющего государственную регистрацию, либо прокурора.
Юридические лица, указанные в настоящей статье, освобождаются от уплаты регистрационного сбора при регистрации изменений их правового статуса либо внесении изменений в их учредительные документы в связи с их приведением в соответствие с нормами Кодекса.
Статья 1142. Нормы настоящего Кодекса об основаниях и последствиях недействительности сделок (статьи 163, 166-181) применяются к сделкам, требования о признании недействительными и последствиях недействительности которых рассматриваются судом после 1 июля 1999 года независимо от времени совершения соответствующих сделок.
Статья 1143. Установленные настоящим Кодексом сроки исковой давности применяются к тем искам, сроки предъявления которых, предусмотренные ранее действовавшим законодательством, не истекли до 1 июля 1999 года.
К предусмотренному пунктом 2 статьи 182 Кодекса иску о признании оспоримой сделки недействительной и о применении последствий ее недействительности, право на предъявление которого возникло до 1 июля 1999 года, применяется срок исковой давности, установленный для соответствующих исков ранее действовавшим законодательством.
Статья 1144. Действие статьи 235 настоящего Кодекса (приобретательная давность) распространяется и на случаи, когда владение имуществом началось до 1 июля 1999 года и продолжается в момент вступления в силу Кодекса.
Статья 1145. Порядок заключения договоров, установленный главой 28 настоящего Кодекса, применяется к договорам, предложения заключить которые направлены после 1 июля 1999 года.
Статья 1146. К договорам, предложения заключить которые направлены до 1 июля 1999 года, но которые заключены после 1 июля 1999 года, применяются нормы настоящего Кодекса о форме договоров отдельных видов, а также об их государственной регистрации.
Нормы Кодекса, определяющие содержание договоров отдельных видов, применяются к договорам, заключенным после вступления его в силу, а также к договорам, заключенным до вступления в силу настоящего Кодекса, в части прав и обязанностей, возникших после введения его в действие.
Заключенные до вступления в силу настоящего Кодекса договоры франчайзинга, а также иные договоры, основания, порядок заключения (расторжения) и содержание которых в соответствии с настоящим Кодексом должны регулироваться другими актами законодательства, при отсутствии таких актов на 1 июля 1999 года действуют до их издания, но не более одного года после вступления в силу настоящего Кодекса. В случае принятия соответствующих актов законодательства такие договоры должны быть приведены в соответствие с нормами этих актов в порядке, установленном этими актами. Если по истечении указанного срока соответствующие акты не будут приняты, то действие указанных договоров прекращается.
Статья 1147. Впредь до вступления в силу акта законодательства о регистрации прав на недвижимое имущество и сделок с ним для договоров, предусмотренных статьями 522, 531 и пунктом 3 статьи 545 настоящего Кодекса, сохраняют силу правила об обязательном нотариальном удостоверении таких договоров, установленные законодательством, действовавшим до вступления в силу Кодекса.
Статья 1148. Обязательные для сторон договора нормы настоящего Кодекса об основаниях, о порядке и последствиях расторжения договоров отдельных видов применяются также к договорам, которые продолжают действовать после вступления в силу Кодекса независимо от даты их заключения.
Обязательные для сторон договора нормы Кодекса об ответственности за нарушение договорных обязательств применяются, если соответствующие нарушения были допущены после вступления в силу Кодекса, за исключением случаев, когда в договорах, заключенных до 1 июля 1999 года, предусматривалась иная ответственность за такие нарушения.
Статья 1149. Действие статей 938 и 939 настоящего Кодекса распространяется также на случаи, когда причинение вреда потерпевшему имело место до 1 июля 1999 года, но не ранее 1 июля 1996 года и причиненный вред остался невозмещенным.
Действие статей 954-963 Кодекса распространяется также на случаи, когда причинение вреда жизни и здоровью гражданина имело место до 1 июля 1999 года, но не ранее 1 июля 1996 года и причиненный вред остался невозмещенным.
Статья 1150. Нормы настоящего Кодекса в части, касающейся сделок с земельными участками, применяются в той мере, в какой их оборот допускается законодательством об охране и использовании земель.
Статья 1151. Установить, что на произведения, которые ранее действовавшим законодательством не признавались объектами авторского права, действие главы 60 настоящего Кодекса распространяется, если произведение выпущено в свет после 1 июля 1999 года.
Статья 1152. Нормы настоящего Кодекса применяются также к наследствам, открывшимся до вступления в силу указанного Кодекса, но не принятым никем из наследников и не перешедшим по праву наследования в собственность государства до 1 июля 1999 года.
Статья 1153. Совету Министров Республики Беларусь в срок до 1 июля 1999 года принять меры по приведению законодательства в соответствие с настоящим Кодексом.
Президент Республики Беларусь А.Лукашенко
© Национальный центр правовой информации Республики Беларусь, 2003-2019